86% found this document useful (7 votes)

4K views

Basic Instrumentation

This course enables participants to learn the terminologies of Instrumentation, measurement techniques and concepts of control system. This course is designed to provide participants an overall understanding of Fieldbus technology and the Asset Management tool. Participants will also be introduced to the latest developments in process instrumentation including the recent advances in process control.

Uploaded by

chandruhbkk

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

86% found this document useful (7 votes)

4K views

Basic Instrumentation

Uploaded by

chandruhbkk

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1788

SPiCE

School of Process instrumentation & Control Education

From Indias leading Process Control Enterprise

Yokogawa

GRADUATE TRAINING PROGRAM

PROCESS MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL APPLICATION

INTRODUCTION TO YOKOGAWA PCI PRODUCTS FIELDBUS ENGINEERING

YIL TRAINING CENTER

PRM INSTALLATION PRM FEATURES & OPERATION

PROCESS MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL APPLICATION

o INTRODUCTION o CALIBRATION TECHNIQUE o LEVEL MEASUREMENT o FLOW MEASUREMENT o PRESSURE MEASUREMENT o TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT o CONTROL LOOPS AND TUNING o ALARM ANNUNCIATORS

INTRODUCTION TO INSTRUMENTATION
AUTOMATION: You are well aware that the different Industrial sectors like Information technology, Telecom, Automobiles, Textiles all play a major role in our life. Likewise, Automation is another important core sector, which is virtually controlling our life. Today, automation solutions are required right from agriculture to space technology and Plant Automation has become absolute necessity for the manufacturing / process industries to survive in todays global market. Automation is simply the delegation of human control function to process equipments for increasing productivity, Quality, Cost reduction, Plant equipment safety A CONTROL SYSTEM, which takes cares the various operations involved in a process, in an automated way with minimal human intervention, is generally known as AUTOMATION. CONTROL SYSTEM: A Control system is a combination of various devices that are integrated as a system used to sense, measure, indicate and control the process variables, which in turn controls the process to achieve the desired results. PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION As part of a control system various measurements and controls are generally involved in a process, to achieve the desired process conditions. PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION

MEASUREMENT When we want to quantify something, Measurement is required. Examples: At what SPEED the train is going?. What is the TEMPERATURE in the furnace? What is the PRESSURE exerted by the System? What is the WEIGHT of the parcel? What is the water LEVEL in the tank? How much water is FLOW ing through the pipe?

CONTROL

Now, these parameters like Pressure, Tempeature, Flow, Level which are measured are called PROCESS VARIABLES

Page 1 of 11

PROCESS VARIABLES: The most commonly used measurements (Process variables) are: Pressure Temperature Flow Level Speed Weight Humidity Density Vibration Conductivity Ph Current Voltage Power Torque Position

MEASUREMENT

INDICATION What is INDICATION? When the measured value is presented in a readable form, we call that the value of the parameter is INDICATED. As the value changes the indication changes and the earlier readings are lost.

RECORDING What is RECORDING? When the measured value is RECORDED in a readable form, we call that the value of the parameter is RECORDED. As the value changes since the earlier readings are recorded we can refer the previous readings.

MEASUREMENTS: Measurements are made available either in Local OR in Remote

LOCAL

Examples:

PI 18

When it is required to know the Pressure in the pipeline or level in the tank, one has to go to that place of installation (local) to know the values. These types of measurement are known as LOCAL MEASUREMENT.

LI 24 24

Page 2 of 11

REMOTE: The Parameter to be measured is sensed in the field area and the signal is transmitted to a remote place. (Central Control Room) for readable & control purpose and this type of measurement is known as REMOTE MEASUREMENT. Sitting in Control room, one can know the values. Fig 1 & 2 represents Remote measurement. Examples: FIELD AREA CONTROL ROOM

PS H

FIG. 1
Receiver
FT 13
FIC 13

Transmitter Primary (sensing) element

FE 13

FIG. 2

Two types of Signals: DIGITAL & ANALOG DIGITAL: ANALOG: The output represents anyone of the two states, that is 0 or 1, ON/OFF, OPEN / CLOSE (FIG. 1) The output is continuous, representing 0 to 100% value of the Measurement (FIG. 2).

Page 3 of 11

The Plant Instrumentation can be divided as FIELD IINSTRUMENTATION and Control room INSTRUMENTATIION. PLANT INSTRUMENTATION

FIELD

CONTROL ROOM DCS PLC SCADA Industrial PCs Marshalling Racks UPS Control Panel

INSTRUMENTS
Sensors Pressure Instruments Temperature Instruments Flow Instruments Level Instruments Speed Instruments Density Instruments Weight Instruments Analytical Instruments Control Valves Actuators

OTHER ITEMS
Local Panels Junction Boxes Cable trays Cable duct Cables Impulse Lines SS / Copper tubes

BASICS ON MEASUREMENT
UNITS:
The measurements made to quantify any thing has to be expressed in UNITS. Example: The The The The The The The SPEED of the train : kilometers per hour. TEMPERATURE in the furnace: Deg. C PRESSURE : psi WEIGHT of the parcel: kgs. LEVEL in the tank: meters AREA of the plot: Sq. Feet FLOW of water in the pipeline: lts/hr.(LPH)

Page 4 of 11

INDICATION / READING: Examples : Measurements are generally expressed in Percentage (%) Example: The pressure in a chamber is between 0 and 200 psi. psi 0% 10 % 20 % 0 20 40

100%

200 TRANSMITTER

PNEUMATIC Output 3 to 15 psi 0.2 to 1 kg/cm2 XR Output 3 psi 6 psi 9 psi 12 psi 15 psi % 0 25 50 75 100
L PH

ELECTRONIC Output 4 to 20 mA XR Output 4 mA 8mA 12 mA 16 mA 20 mA % 0 25 50 75 100 Kg/cm2 0 100 200 300 400

0 50 100 150 200

LINEAR AND SQUARE ROOT SCALES: Recorder charts for Pressure, Temperature, Level, Specific Gravity, etc. generally have a linear scale whereas flow charts have a square root scale. This is because the rate of flow is proportional to the sq. Root of the differential head. Whereas linear charts have a uniform calibration, Sq.root charts have a sq. root calibration as shown in the figure below. It will be noted that 50% of the flow is actually marked on 25% of the linear chart, 70% of the flow near the 50% of linear scale and 90% of the flow very near 80% of the linear scale.

LINEAR SCALE

SQ. ROOT SCALE

10 Page 5 of 11

Consequently flow scales are cramped at the bottom (near zero) and expanded near maximum. Accuracy of flow meter reading against such a scale can be had only above 25% of the linear scale. LINEAR AND SQUARE ROOT CALIBRATION TABLE: TRANSMITTER OUTPUT mA psi Kg/ cm2 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 READING LINEAR SCALE SQUARE ROOT SCALE 0% 50% 70.71% 86.60% 100% MEASURED VALUE FLOW (m3 / Hr.)

4 8 12 16 20

3 6 9 12 15

0% 25% 50% 75% 100%

0 100 200 300 400

BASIC DELINITIONS

ELEVATED ZERO: A range where the zero value of the measured signal is greater than the lower range value. Zero lies between LRV and URV Range: (-) 25 to 100

(-)25 LRV
SUPPRESSED ZERO:

100 URV

A range where the zero value of the measured signal is less than the lower range value. Zero does not appear in the scale. Page 6 of 11

Example: 20 to 100

20
Typical Ranges Name Range Lower Range Value

100
Upper range Value +100 +100 Span

ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE USE OF RANGE AND SPAN TERMINOLOGY:

0 20

+100 +100

Suppressed Zero Range

0 to 100 0 20 to 100 20

100 80

-25

+100 Elevated Zero -25 to Range +100 0

-25

+100

125

-100

Elevated Zero -100 to 0 -100 Range

100

ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE USE OF TERMS MEASURED VARIABLE & MEASURED SIGNAL: TYPICAL RANGES THERMOCOUPLE 0 2000 F TYPE K T/C -0.68 +44.91mV TYPE OF RANGE RANGE Measured 0 to Variable 2000F Measured -0.68 to Signal +44.91mV LOWER RANGE VALUE 0 F -0.68mV UPPER RANGE VALUE 2000 F SPAN

2000 F

+44.91mV 45.59mV 10,000Ib/h 100in H2O 500 rpm 5V 10,000 Ib/h 100in H2O 500 rpm 5V

FLOWMETER 0 10,000Ib/h 0 100in H2O

Measured 0 to 0 Ib/h Variable 10,000Ib/h Measured 0 to 100 0in H2O Signal in H2O Measured 0 to Variable rpm Measured 0 Signal 500 0 rpm 0V

TACHOMETER 0 500 rpm 0 5V

to 5V

is defined as the closeness with which the reading approaches an ACCURACY accepted standard value or true value. Accuracy is often quoted as a percentage of the full scale value. Ex : accuracy : +/- 1 % fsd ERROR - The algebraic difference between the indicated and the true value of the measured signal.

Page 7 of 11

ERROR = Indicated (measured) value True value. LAG : When the quantity being measured changes, a certain time might have elapsed before the measuring instrument responds to the change. It is said to show LAG.

DEAD SPACE / THRESHOLD: When the quantity being measured is gradually increased from zero, a certain minimum level might have reached before the instrument responds and gives a detectable reading. This is called the threshold. It is just a dead space that happens to occur when the Instrument is used from a zero value. For example, a pressure gauge might not respond until the pressure has risen to some value. This may be due to friction and other factors of the gauge. . REPEATABILITY: The repeatability of an instrument is its ability to display the same reading for repeated applications of the same value of the quantity being measured. OR The closeness of agreement among a number of consecutive measurements of the output for the same value of the input under the same operating approaching from the same direction, for full range traverses. SENSITIVITY: The ratio of a change in output magnitude to the change of input which causes it after the steady state has been reached. RESOLUTION : The least interval between two adjacent discrete details, which can be distinguished one from the other.

Page 8 of 11

BASIS ON CONTROL
MANUAL PERCEPTION & CONTROL

MANUAL FEEDBACK CONTROL WITH SENSOR & INDICATOR

Page 9 of 11

SKETCH FOR AUTOMATIC CLOSED LOOP FEEDBACK CONTROL

MEASUREMENTS & CONTROLS:

A control loop can broadly be divided into four functional categories: to sense or detect the variable to be measured transforms the detected ( sensed )signal to an interpretable stage where it can either be read or used for further control applications . to compare the measured signal with the desired conditions and perform the necessary. Carries out the corrections required so that the variable is controlled within the specified limits.

1 2

Primary Element

Secondary Element Manipulating Element gPrimary Final Control

Page 10 of 11

CONTROLLER: What is Control? The Process of achieving the actual measurement at a predetermined DESIRED VALUE is known as the CONTROL of that variable. Example: The flow of water through a pipe line has to be controlled at a particular flow, say - 40 litres / hr; We know that we want to control the flow at a specific value. (SET POINT) We have to know how much water is flowing. So, we have to measure the flow (MEASUREMENT). The difference is known as Error. Based on the error, a suitable OUTPUT from the controller goes to the valve to regulate in such a way to get the desired flow.

CONTROLLER BLOCK DIAGRAM: SET POINT OUTPUT

FEED FORWARD CONTROL & FEEDBACK CONTROL Feed forward control involves making an estimate of the quantity of action necessary to accomplish a desired objective. Its basis is in prediction. There is NO feedback. Eg : Washing Machine In Feedback control, measurement (MV) of the variable to be controlled is compared with a reference point (SP). If the difference or error exits between the actual measurement and the set point, the automatic controller takes the necessary action by sending the Increased / decreased output (O/P) to the final control element to achieve the desired control.

Page 11 of 11

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES FOR CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION

CALIBRATION Calibration refers to the process of determining the relation between the output (or response) of a measuring instrument and the value of the input quantity or attribute, a measurement standard. Calibration is often regarded as the process of adjusting the output or indication on a measurement instrument to agree with value of the applied standard, within a specified accuracy GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR CALIBRATION Before calibrating the instrument, o Check for any Physical Damage to the Instrument o Check whether the Instrument is working or not in the following manner For Digital Instruments, switch on the power. For Analog Instruments, see the pointer deflection. o Clean the switch contacts, Potentiometers, if any, by cleaning agent. o Give at least half an hour warm-up time for all Power-On Instruments and for Regulated Power Supply before starting Calibration. o For Analog Instruments ensure Mechanical zero before starting the Calibration. o Parallax error is to be avoided. o Instruments used, as masters for Calibration must be calibrated from Govt. approved Laboratory. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE HUMIDITY

For Mechanical Instruments For Electrical Instruments CALIBRATION POINTS o o o o

20 +/- 2.5C 25 +/- 2.5C

35 to 65 % 35 to 65 %

Calibration area should be adequately free from dust, shocks and vibrations

The instruments should be Calibrated for all ranges. Ranges which cannot be Calibrated or for which accuracy of the instrument is not as per requirement must be indicated on the instrument itself as well in records. For Analog Instruments, Calibration of an Instrument should be performed at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of the range being calibrated, Readings should be recorded at same point while increasing and decreasing. For Digital Instruments, Calibration should be performed at 25%, 50%, 75%, 90% of the range being calibrated.

TABLE FOR SELECTION OF MASTER (REFERENCE STANDARD) FOR CALIBRATION BASED ON ACCURACY DESIRED
DESIRED % ACCURACY OF THE INSTRUMENT RANGE TO BE CALIBRATED MIN. RECOMMENDED ACCURACY OF REFERENCE STANDARD

0.05% 0.01% 0.1% 0.02% 0.2% 0.04% 0.5% 0.1% 1.0% 0.2% 2.5% 0.3% Accuracy of Master Instrument required for Calibrating Mechanical Instruments is recommended to be 10 times higher than the accuracy desired Accuracy. Page 1 of 9

TRACEABLITY CHAIN
NPL NPL National Physical Laboratory DGSTQC Directorate General of Standardization, Testing and Quality Certification

DGSTQC

GOVT. APPROVED

INDUSTRY /USER

TECHNICAL INFORMATION 1. DESCRIPTION OF THE MEASUREMENT PROCESS Standards used along with traceability information. Brief Description of measurement method (could include measurement scheme, measurement time frame etc.) State the number of measurement made. Explain how the data were analyzed to obtain measured values Include an explanation of equations, algorithms or formula used. Definition of acronyms used in report. 2. REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULTS Report the measured values for the measurement. Where item is found to be out of tolerance, both the incoming and outgoing data should be reported. Measurement uncertainties Influence quantities - Quantities which are not the subject of measurement but which influences the measured values Example 1.Frequency of AC Voltage 2. Temperature & Resistance 3. Temperature & length

3. TEST CONDITIONS LABORATORY ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Temperature Humidity Pressure ABNORMAL CONDITIONS Stability Erratic readings Excessive wear Noticeable physical change Repairs performed on the calibrated item

4. PRESENTING THE DATA Units of measurement should be stated along with associated measured values Units of Uncertainty Uncertainty stated in the same units as the measured value 0.1% * 1000 PPM USE % 0.01% * 100 PPM USE% 0.001% * 10 PPM USE PPM 0.0001% * 1 PPM USE PPM Tables Graphs

Page 2 of 9

5. TRACEABILITY CONTENTS OF CERTIFICATE OF CALIBRATION 1. Calibration Organization. 2. Certificate Title 3. Item Identification 4. Requester 5. Calibration Due 6. Due Date 7. Certificate Number 8. Signature 6. MAINTAINING RECORDS FOR THE EQUIPMENTS Make Type Serial Number or other ID Measurement Capability Calibration Certificates Date of Calibration Calibration Results After and, if necessary, before Recalibration Date Identification of Calibration Procedure Limits of permissible error Source of Calibration Traceability Environmental conditions during Calibration Uncertainties Details of servicing, Adjustment, repairs or modifications Any limitations in use Persons performing Calibration Persons responsible for ensuring correctness Unique ID of Calibration Report / certificate Retain Records

7. NON CONFORMING MEASURING Suffered Damage. Mishandled or Overloaded. Shows Malfunction. Calibration Overdue. Such Equipment shall not returned to service until reasons for nonconformity have been eliminated and again calibrated Calibration Level Intervals of Calibration

8. SEALING FOR INTEGRITY Access to Adjustable Devices on Measuring Equipment whose setting affects the performance shall be sealed to prevent tampering by unauthorized personnel. Sub-Contracting or use of outside products and services Storage and Handling

Page 3 of 9

9. CALIBRATION LAB EVALUATION MAJOR POINTS Adequate Records Adequate Recall system Proper Cal. Intervals Proper Labeling Proper Procedures Traceability Adequacy of Standards Cal. Quantity Adequate Environmental Control 10. LABELLING Label shall include Date or Usage time due for Recal ID of the Person who performed the cal ID of the Agency Visibility Cal labels 11. CERTIFICATE OF CALIBRATION Identifies the item being Calibrated and the specification used for Calibration, includes a Traceability statement, and certifies that the calibration was performed. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS LIKE PRESSURE & DP TRANSMITTERS, PRESSURE GAUGES, TRANSMITTERS, ETC. VISUAL INSPECTION For any type of Physical Damage LEAK TEST Apply full-scale pressure and check the leakage if any in the external lines and fittings. EXERCISE MOVEMENT Three pressure cycles should be applied to the uuc to exercise the movement DATA RECORDING Appropriate pressure will be applied to the UUC and readings will be recorded. Calibrate by starting at zero and continue applying appropriate pressure increments to full range and back to zero. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR RTD/ T/ C Read the temp. Range and select the set temp. at 10%, 50% & 90% of FS. Adjust the temp. Control in the oil bath at the temp. Corresponding to 10% of FS Allow the oil bath to stabilize for 30 minutes. Dip the RTD Thermocouple into the oil bath and connect it to the multimeter. Record the corresponding temp. The measured value as indicated value and set temp. In the oil bath as true value. Repeat the steps no.2 to no.5 for other set temp. LEVEL

Page 4 of 9

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR TEMP. INDICATORS & TRANSDUCERS Feed 0 mV to the UUC (IUC) and observe the display. Find out the corresponding mV from IPTS chart for the observed temperature (RT) Select the temperature at 10%, 50% and 90% of FS and take the corresponding mV. Subtract the mV as taken in step 2 from the mV taken from step 3 Feed the mV (obtained from step 4) and observe the temp. In the indicator. Record the display in the temp. Indicator as indicated value and the selected temperature as the true value. UUC IUC IPTS UNIT UNDER CALIBRATION INSTRUMENT UNDER CALIBRATION INTERNATIONAL PRACTICAL TEMP. SCALE.

NOTE:

Page 5 of 9

CALIBRATION
CONVERSION : (GENERAL ENGG. UNITS)

Refer and use the conversion table Examples: 1) Convert 1000 mm into inches Ans: 1000 x 0.03937 = 39.37 inches 2) Convert 500 litres into gallons (UK) Ans: 500 x 0.22009 = 110.045 gallons (UK) 3) Convert 75 pounds into kilograms Ans: 75 x .4536 = 34.02 kgs 4) Convert 150 kgs into lbs Ans: 150 x 2.20462 = 330.693 lbs 5) Convert 175 Cubicfeet into Cubic mtrs. Ans: 175 x 0.02832 = 4.956 Cubic mtrs. 6) Convert 150 Cubic inches into Cubic centimeters Ans: 150 x 16.3871 = 2458.065 Cubic cm 7) Convert 45 Kg/cm2 into psi Ans: 45 x 14.22 = 639.9 psi 8)Convert 220 inches of water column into mmHg Ans: 220 x 1.867 = 410.74 mmHg 9) Convert 175 m3/Hr into l/Hr. Ans: 175 x 1000 = 175000l/Hr. 10) Convert 120 l/Hr. into m3/min. Ans: 120 x 16.67 x 10 - 6 = 0.0020004 m3/min

Page 6 of 9

PROBLEM 1 :

Arrange the following in order from Highest to the lowest FLOW: a) 10 gpm b) 10 l/min c) 10 l/Hr d) 10 Cfh e) 10 Cfm f) 10 m3 / min g) 10 m3 / Hr.
PROBLEM 2 :

Arrange the following in order from lowest to the highest PRESSURE: a) 2 Kg/cm2 b) 2 Bar c) 14.7 psig d) 500 mmHg e) 1000 in H2O f) 2000 mmH20 g) 300 in Hg ANSWERS: PROBLEM 1 : ( ANSWER ) f , e , g , a , b , d , c

Arrange the following in order from Highest to the lowest FLOW: a) 10 gpm b) 10 l/min c) 10 l/Hr d) 10 Cfh e) 10 Cfm f) 10 m3 / min g) 10 m3 / Hr 10 gpm 10 x 0.264 = 2.64 gpm 10 x 0.0044 = 0.044 gpm 10 x 0.1247 = 1.247 gpm 10 x 7.481 = 74.81 gpm 10 x 264.2 = 2642 gpm 10 x 4.403 = 44.03 gpm

PROBLEM 2 : ( ANSWER ) f , d , c , a , b , e , g Arrange the following in order from lowest to the highest PRESSURE: a) 2 Kg/cm2 2 kg / cm2 b) 2 Bar 2 x 1.02 = 2.04 kg/cm2 c) 14.7 psig 14.7 x 0.07031 = 1.033 kg/cm2 d) 500 mmHg 500 x 1.36 x 10-3 = 0.68 kg/cm2 e) 1000 in H2O 1000 x 2.538 x 10-3 = 2.538 kg/cm2 f) 2000 mmH20 2 x 0.0999 = 0.1998 kg/cm2 g) 300 in Hg 300 x 25.39998 x 1.36 x 10-3 = 10.363 kg/cm2

Page 7 of 9

Refer and use the conversion table:

Temperature conversion Fahrenheit AND Centigrade

C = ( F 32 ) x 5/9 F = ( C x 9/5 ) + 32 Examples: Convert 176 deg F into deg C C = ( 149 32 ) x 5/9 = 117x 5/9 = 65 Convert 46 deg C into deg F F = ( 46 x 9/5 ) +32 = ( 9.2 x 9 ) + 32 = 82.8 + 32 = 114.8

Refer and use the conversion table: PAGE 5 OF 33 F 338 * C 640.4 170.44

Temperature Conversion

( Thermocouple )

T / C - TYPE K ( Ni Cr / Ni Al ) ( Chromel Alumel ) Consider the room temp as 32 0 C Use the table For 320C . 1.285 mV Assume you are measuring the temp. of the bath and the indicator shows 100 0 C. But when you measure directly the mV across the T / C head, you will get 2.810 mV Use the table For 1000 C. 4.095 2.810 + 1.285 4.095

Page 8 of 9

TEMPERATURE CONVERSION ( THERMOCOUPLE ) T / C - TYPE K ( Ni Cr / Ni Al ) ( Chromel Alumel )

Consider the room temp as 32

Assume you are measuring the temp. of the bath and the indicator shows 150 0 C. But when you measure directly the mV across the T / C head, How much it will show ? Ans : 6.137 1.285 4.852 TEMPERATURE CONVERSION ( R T D ) Pt 100 .. The Resistance is 100 OHMS for 0 Use the table Find out the resistance value for 65 Ans : 125.15 or 125.16 Find out the temperature if the resistance value is 112.735 Ans : 33
0 0 0

Page 9 of 9

LEVEL MEASUREMENT
INDUSTRIAL LEVEL MEASUREMENT
The Vast amount of water used by industry, let alone all the solvents, chemicals, and other liquids that are necessary for material processing, make the measurement of liquid level essential to modern manufacturing. There are two ways of measuring level: directly by using the varying level of the liquid as a means of obtaining the measurement; and indirectly, by using a variable, which change with the liquid level, to actuate the measuring mechanism.
INDUSTRIAL LEVEL MEASUREMENTS

MEASUREMENT METHODS

DIRECT METHOD

INDIRECT METHOD

VISUAL LEVEL SENSOR

FLOAT TYPE LEVEL SENSOR

BUOYANT FORCE LEVEL MEASUREMENT

HEAD PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

ELECTRICAL LEVEL MEASUREMENT

DIP STICK SIGHT GLASS GAUGE GLASS

DISPLACEMENT TYPE LEVEL SENSOR

1. GUAGE PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 2. AIR BUBBLE PURGE SYSTEM 3. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

1. CAPACITANCE 2. CONDUCTIVITY 3. SONIC/ ULTRASONIC 4. RADAR

DIRECT LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT

FIG -1 A bob weight and measuring tape provide measurement The most simple and direct method of measuring liquid level

Dip stick level

BOB AND TAPE The simplest of the direct devices for liquid level measurement is the bob and tape (fig.1). All you need is a bob (or weight) suspended from a tape marked in feet and inches. The bob is lowered to the bottom of the vessel containing the liquid, and the level is determined by noting the point on the tape reached by the liquid. The actual reading is made after the tape is removed from the vessel. Obviously this method isnt suited to continuous measurement.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 1 of 24

HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE GLASS (REFLEX GLASS)

SIGHT GLASS Another direct means of liquid level measurement is the sight glass (Fig 2). This consists of a graduated glass Tube mounted on the side of the vessel. As the level of the liquid in the vessel changes, so does the level of the liquid in the glass tube. Measurement is a simple matter of reading the position of liquid level on the scale of the sight glass tube.

FIG -2 As the level of the liquid in the vessel rises or falls, so does the level of the liquid in the sight glass.
GROOVES

REFLUX GLASS

FLOATS There are many kinds of float-operated mechanisms for continuous direct liquid level measurement. The Primary device is a float that by reason of its buoyancy will follow the changing level of the liquid, and a mechanism that will transfer the float action to a pointer (Fig 3). The float most familiar to you is the hollow metal sphere; but cylinder-shaped ceramic floats and disc-shaped floats of synthetic materials are also used. The float is usually attached to a cable, which around a pulley or drum to which the indicating pointer is attached. The movement of the float is thus transferred to the pointer, which indicates the liquid level on an appropriate scale.

FIG -3 The buoyancy of the float permits it to be immersed in the liquid, and its movement is transmitted to the indicator as it follows the changing liquid level.

In another kind of float-operated instrument, the float is attached to a shaft, which transfers the motion of the float to an indicator (Fig. 4). This type doesnt permit a wide range of level measurement, but it does have mechanical advantages that make it excellent for control and transmitter application.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 2 of 24

FIG -4 When the level of the liquid is low, the ball float will be at position A. As the tank fills, the flow rises with the level of the liquid to position B and its movement rotates the shaft which operates the pointer.

FIG- 5 Float cable weight level indicator arrangement

Another variation uses the float to move a magnet (Fig. 6). As this magnet moves, it attracts a following magnet connected to the indicator, thus providing a reading of liquid level measurement.
FIG 6 The doughnut-shaped float with magnets in it rises and falls with the level of liquid. The follower magnet, suspended by cable in the guide tube, rises and falls to maintain a corresponding position with the float, and thus moves the cable to the indicator.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 3 of 24

FIG- 7 Magnetic float devices The magnetic float sensor may be used to determine the level of single material in the vessel or to determine the position of an interface between two materials of different densities. For example oil will float on top of water. If oil and water were both in this vessel the float could be constructed so that it would sink in oil and float on the water.

FIG 8 Magnetic type float Devices

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 4 of 24

The displacer (Fig. 9) is similar in action to the buoyant float described above, with the exception that its movement is more restricted. With changes in liquid level, more or less of the displacer is covered by the liquid. The more the displacer is submerged, the greater is the force created by the displacer because of its buoyancy. This force transferred through a twisting or bending shaft to a pneumatic or Electronic system. For every new liquid level position, there is a new force on the shaft, causing it to assume a new position. The pneumatic or Electronic system is so arranged that for each new shaft position there is a new signal or indication. The displacer float has the advantage of being more sensitive to small level changes than the buoyant float and less subject to mechanical friction.

FIG 9 In The lower drawing the displacer, which weighs 5 lbs., weighs only 2 lbs. When the water level is at 7 inches, the changes in weight are converted into Torque (See upper illustration). Which operates the pneumatic system to provide readings on the indicator. (Mason- Neilan Div of Worthington Corp.)

FIG- 10 Displacement Level Sensor

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 5 of 24

UNDERSTANDING OF BUOYANCY AND DISPLACER FOR INDIRECT LEVEL MEASUREMENT

DISPLACEMENT DEVICES The displacement type level devices are commonly used for continuous level measurement. It works on the buoyancy principle of Archimedes, which states that a body immersed in a liquid will be buoyed up a force equal to the weight of the liquid displaced. The displacer body has a cylindrical shape. As a result for each equal increment of submersion depth, an equal increment of buoyancy change will result. This gives a linear, proportional relationship, which is desirable. The effects of buoyancy are illustrated in the fig 11. Although the vessels shown are open in the atmosphere the principle desired applies to the closed tank as well. The displacer is suspended from a scale that indicates its weight at various depths of immersion. In the first figure 11 A the displacer is completely out of the liquid and the scale supports its full weight. As the scale indicates, it weighs 10 kg when suspended in air. When the level of the tank has risen to immerse about half the displacer, the weight of the displacer is approximately 6 kg. The displacers loss in weight is equal to the weight of the volume of the liquid displaced. As the water increases to fully immerse the displacer. The weight of the displacer decreases, the displacer now weighs approximately 2 kg. So, when the water level changes from 0 to 100%, the weight of the displacer also changes proportionally. BOUYANCY EFFECT ON THE DISPLACER Two important points to be considered here are: 1. When the liquid level is lowered to completely uncover the displacer, the displacer can no longer measure level. Any changes in level below the lower end of the displacer will not be measured. 2. The same is true when the liquid level rises to the top of the displacer. Then, any changes in liquid level above the top of the displacer will not be detected. The main difference between a displacer and the float operated device are: The displacer movement is very little compared to the float which rises or falls as per the level. Therefore the displacer loses weight and the float gains in height as the level rises in the tank. The displacer can also be used for interface level measurement whereas float can only be used for measuring the level of liquids. When the displacer is attached to a torque tube by linkage the equivalent torque variations due to the buoyancy effect on the displacer operates a pneumatic or Electronic Transducer / Transmitter. This is the normal transmission of level in closed process vessels, distillation columns, intermediate storage tanks etc.

FIG- 11

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 6 of 24

INDIRECT LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT

There are several types of indirect level measuring devices that are operated by Pressure. Any rise in the level causes an increase of pressure, which can be measure by the gauge. The gauge scale is marked in units of level measurement (feet or inches).
FIG- 12 B Liquid naturally increases. This

FIG- 12 A As the tank fills, the pressure of the

Hydrostatic level measurement in Increase of pressure can be read on the Gauge in feet and inches of level.

an open tank

FIG- 12 C Closed tank level measurement

FIG- 12 D The pressure of air in the air trap is Expressed on the scale in units of level

If the nature of the liquid prevents its being allowed to enter the pressure gauge, a transmitting fluid (such as air, which is the cheapest and handiest) must be used between the liquid and the gauge. The air trap and the diaphragm box provide a means of accomplishing this. The air trap consists of a box, which is lowered into the liquid (Fig.12 D). As the liquid rises, the pressure on the air trapped in the box increases. This air pressure is piped through tubing to the pressure gauge, which has a scale on which the level can be read.The diaphragm box (Fig 13), like the air trap, transmits air pressure to a gauge, but in this case the air is trapped inside it by a flexible diaphragm covering the bottom of then box. As the level of the liquid rises, the pressure on the diaphragm increases. This pressure acts on the air in the closed system and is piped to the pressure gauge where a reading can be taken.
FIG- 13: Deflection of the flexible diaphragm by compression, as the liquid level rises, causes the gauge to respond.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 7 of 24

AIR BUBBLER SYSTEM

FIG- 14 Air Bubbler System of Level Measurement

The Air bubbler system is a system of indirect level measurement especially suitable for liquids that are corrosive, viscous, or contain suspended solids. BUBBLER TYPE LEVEL MEASUREMENT

FIG- 15 The air pressure to the bubbler pipe is minutely in excess of the liquid pressure in the vessel, so that the air pressure indicated is a measure of the level in the tank

The pressure caused by the liquid column is used in the bubbler method of level measurement (Fig.15). A pipe is installed vertically in the vessel with its open end at the zero level. The other end of the pipe is connected to a regulated air supply and to a pressure gauge. To make a level measurement the air supply is adjusted so that the pressure is slightly higher than the pressure due to the height of the liquid. This is accomplished by regulating the air pressure until bubbles can be seen slowly leaving the open end of the pipe. The gauge then measures the air pressure needed to overcome the pressure of the liquid. The gauge is calibrated in feet or inches of level. The methods described above can only be used when the vessel containing the liquid is open to the atmosphere. When the liquid is in a pressure vessel, the liquid column pressure cant be used unless the vessel pressure is balanced out. This is done through the use of differential pressure meters (Fig. 16). Connections are made to the vessel at top and bottom, and to the two column of the differential pressure meter. The top connection is made to the low made to the low pressure column of the meter, and the bottom connection to the high pressure column. In this way the pressure in the vessel is balanced out, since it is fed both column of the meter. The difference in pressure detected by the meter will be due then only to the changing level of the liquid.
FIG- 16 When the liquid is in a closed vessel, level can be measured using a differential pressure manometer.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 8 of 24

Liquid level can be measured using radioactivity or ultrasonic. For continuous level measurement by radioactivity, one or more radioactive source are placed on one side of a vessel with a pick-up on other side (Fig. 17). As the level of the liquid changes, it absorbs more or less of the radioactive energy received by the pick-up, which is a special electronic amplifier designed to produce enough electrical meter. The meter scale is marked in level units-inches or feet.

FIG- 17 Radioactive system Measurement

Level

The ultrasonic method operates on the sonar principle (Fig. 18). Sound waves are sent to the surface of the liquid and are reflected back to the receiving unit. Changes in level are accurately measured by detecting the time it takes for the waves to travel to the surface and back to the receiver. The longer the time required the further away is the liquid surface, providing a measurement of how much the level has changed. These systems have been described very simply here. Actually they are highly complicated in both design and installation. These systems have been described very simply here. Actually they are highly complicated in both design and installation.

FIG- 18 Sound waves reflected back from the surface of the liquid to the receiving unit can provide an accurate measurement of liquid level.

Another method of determining the level of liquid materials is to weigh the entire vessel, since the weight changes as the level of the material varies. The vessel may be weighed on mechanical scale (Fig.19); or it may be weighed electrically using load cells (Fig.20). Load Cells are Specially constructed mechanical units containing strain gauges, which provide a measurable electrical output proportional to the stress applied by the weight of the vessel on the load Cells. As the pressure on the cell due to the weight of the vessel changes, the electrical resistance of the strain gauge changes. The strain gauge is connected into a bridge circuit containing an electrical meter graduated in unit of level measurement. It should be noted that the weighing method is accurate only if the density and particle size of the substance being weighed are uniform and the moisture content remains constant. The change in weight must be due entirely to the change in level.

FIG- 19 Scale on which the vessel and its Liquid content weighed mechanically

FIG- 20 Vessel weighed electrically using load cells

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 9 of 24

LEVEL MEASUREMENT BY D.P. TRANSMITTERS

To determine the level of a liquid in an open tank, connect the high side of the Transmitter to a tap at the bottom of the tank. Vent the low side of the transmitter to the atmosphere. The pressure represents the height of the liquid in the tank multiplied by the specific gravity of the liquid; therefore, the output of the transmitter will be proportional to the liquid level above the transmitter. If the tank is located above the transmitter, the zero must be readjusted to elevate the range. To determine the liquid level in a closed tank, steps must be taken to compensate for tank pressure generated above the top of the liquid and the top of the tank. This is accomplished by placing a tap at the top of the tank and connecting it to the low side of the transmitter. When this has been done, the differential pressure measured by the Transmitter is proportional to the height of the liquid in the tank multiplied by the specific gravity of the liquid. If the liquid has a vapor that could condense in the piping connected to the top of the tank, the piping should be filled with the measured liquid. This will exert a head pressure on the low side of the transmitter and must be zeroed out. D.P. Transmitter with process connection for clean liquids

FIG- 21 DP Transmitters

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 10 of 24

THREE APPLICATIONS OF LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT WITH DP TRANSMITTER

APPLICATION 1 LIQUID LEVEL IN OPEN TANK
SPAN = H1x G1, in inches w.g. if H1 is in inches G1= specific gravity of the process liquid Lower Range Value = (H2 x G1), in inches w.g. if H2 is in inches Upper Range Value = Lower Range Value + Span

FIG -22 APPLICATION 2 LIQUID LEVEL IN CLOSED TANK WITHOUT CONDENSABLE VAPOURS
SPAN = H1x G1, in inches w.g. if H1 is in inches G1= specific gravity of the process liquid Lower Range Value = (H2 x G1), in inches w.g. if H2 is in inches Upper Range Value = Lower Range Value + Span

FIG -23 APPLICATION 3 LIQUID LEVEL IN CLOSED TANK WITH CONDENSABLE VAPOURS

SPAN = H1x G1, in inches w.g. if H1 is in inches Lower Range Value = (H2 x G1) (H4 x Gw), in inches w.g. if H2 & H4 is in inches Upper Range Value = Lower Range Value + Span G1= specific gravity of the process liquid Gw= specific gravity of liquid in wet leg

FIG -24

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 11 of 24

ZERO SUPPRESSION/ ZERO ELEVATION TECHNIQUES FOR D.P. TYPE LEVEL MEASUREMENTS
1. ZERO SUPPRESSION Adjusting the Zero Output Signal to produce to desired measurement. Usually used in Level Measurement to Counteract the Zero Elevation caused by a Wet leg. 2. ZERO ELEVATION Adjusting the Zero Output Signal to raise the Zero to a higher starting point. Usually used in Level Measurement for starting measurement above the Vessel Connection Point.

CALIBRATION POINTS TO BE NOTED FOR LEVEL MEASUREMENT

A- VENTED / OPEN TANK B- PRESSURISED CLOSE TANK

CALIBRATION POINTS TO BE NOTED FOR LEVEL MEASUREMENT WITH DIAPHRAGM & REMOTE SEAL TYPE TRANSMITTER
A- VENTED / OPEN TANK B- VENTED / OPEN TANK

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 12 of 24

CALIBRATION POINTS TO BE NOTED FOR LEVEL MEASUREMENT WITH DIAPHRAGM & REMOTE SEAL TYPE TRANSMITTER
A- PRESSURISED CLOSE TANK B- PRESSURISED CLOSE TANK

FIG- 31

FIG- 32

CALIBRATION POINTS TO BE NOTED FOR LEVEL MEASUREMENT WITH DIAPHRAGM & REMOTE SEAL TYPE TRANSMITTER

FIG- 33

ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC METHODS OF LEVEL MEASUREMENT

A) CONTINUOUS LEVEL MEASUREMENT With continuous measurement the level is detected and converted into an Electronic / Pneumatic Signal. Continuous measurements can be carried for all liquid and solids. Capacitance, hydrostatic, pulse-echo (Ultrasonic Type), pulse-radar and electromechanical principles as well as pressure measuring sensors can be used. B) LEVEL DETECTION FOR LEVEL SWITCHING & OVERFILL PROTECTION. Level can be detected at fixed points and converted into switched outputs Level detection can be done for all liquids and solids. This type of level switches work on capacitance, microwave, radioactive, vibration and conductive principles. The switched output can either be used for stopping and starting filling systems (Conveyor belts, pumps, pneumatic conveyors) or for overfill protection. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 13 of 24

SUMMARY OF BASIC ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC / LEVEL MEASURING PRINCIPLES 1) Capacitance Type Level Measurement. 2) Pulse-Echo or Ultrasonic Type Measurement 3) Antenna or Radar Type Level Measurement. 4) Microwave Type Detection. 5) Electro-mechanical Type Level Detection. 6) Vibration Level Switch. 7) Conductive Level Switch. 1. CAPACITANCE TYPE LEVEL MEASUREMENT # MEASURING PRINCIPLE The metal vessel wall & the measuring electrode forms a capacitor. The product acts as the dielectric and changes the capacitance as the level changes. An oscillator in the housing of the electrode converts the capacitance value into a level proportional DC current or a switched output .This universal measuring principle is used for continuous level Measurement and solids- even under arduous conditions.

A FIG- 34

# APPLICATIONS OF CAPACITANCE LEVEL MEASUREMENT 1. Capacitance type level measurement can be used for continuous level measurement or Hi Lo level switching for all products including solids. 2. One of the unique capabilities is to indicate the interface between two immiscible liquids, each having a different dielectric const. Oil/water interface is a common application. # LIMITATIONS 1. Calibration may be time consuming. 2. Affected by change in dielectric constant and temperature of the material and thus requires temperature compensation. 3. Conductive residue coating will affect performance. 2. PULSE-ECHO OR ULTRASONIC TYPE MEASUREMENT # MEASURING PRINCIPLE Sonic and ultrasonic sensors consist of a transmitter that converts electrical energy into acoustical energy and a receiver that converts acoustical energy into electrical energy. The transmitted and return time of sonic pulse is relayed electronically and converted to level indication. These devices are non-contacting, reliable and accurate, no moving parts, unaffected by changes in density, conductivity and composition. # LIMITATIONS 1. Cannot be used for foam as the signal may be absorbed by foam. 2. Will not work in vacuum. 3. Various factors like instrument accuracy, vapor concentration, pressure, temperature, relative humidity, and pressure of other gases/vapors may affect the performance --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 14 of 24

FIG- 35 C ULTRASONIC LEVEL MEASUREMENT IN OPEN CHANNEL FLOW MEASURING APPLICATIONS

3. ANTENNA / GUIDED WAVE RADAR TYPE LEVEL MEASUREMENT

# TECHNOLOGY/ MEASURING PRINCIPLE Guided Wave Radar is based upon the technology of TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry). TDR utilizes pulses of electromagnetic energy, which are transmitted down a probe. When a pulse reaches a liquid surface that has a higher dielectric than air/vapor in which it is traveling, the pulse is reflected. An Ultra high-speed timing circuit precisely measures the transit time and provides an accurate measure of the liquid level. The measurement requires complete mapping of the inner surfaces of the vessel in empty conditions. The information is stored in the memory and reflections form protrusions, shafts, agitators etc. are compensated. Thus true level is measured. This technology is fairly new and costly. # APPLICATIONS This measuring principle provides non-contact continuous level measurement for liquids, solids and slurries with high pressures and temperatures, vacuum, dust, vapour and aggressive and toxic products

A B

DIELECTRIC ANTENNA

FIG- 36

HORN ANTENNA

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 15 of 24

4. MICROWAVE SWITCHING

TYPE

NON-CONTACT

LEVEL

DETECTION

LEVEL

# MEASURING PRINCIPLE The operation of the microwave barrier is similar to a light filter. A transmitter emits microwaves with a frequency of 5.8 GHz to a receiver. If product is between transmitter and receiver, the microwaves are absorbed and a damped signal is received. The receiver signals this by a switching command. The detection principle functions with all liquids and solids, which reflect or absorb microwaves.

FIG- 37 A

# APPLICATIONS Non-Contact type level switching/detection in products like oil, coal, stones and foodstuffs. 5A. ELECTRO-MECHANICAL TYPE LEVEL DETECTION/ LEVEL SWITCHING # MEASURING PRINCIPLE The electromechanical measuring principle is ideal for many applications with its rugged construction. A weight is wound off electro-mechanically on a cable. When the weight touches the measured product, the weight is rewound to the initial position. The measured cable length is a measure of the level. # USER ADVANTAGES 1. Vessel heights up to 40 m 2. Accuracy better than 0.1% 3. Adapts to product types by choice of sensing weights. 4. Full operation even with dust formation. 5. Complete separation between cable pulley and control mechanism. 6. Easy installation.

FIG- 38

# APPLICATIONS It is suitable for level measurement of fine and coarse solids as well as liquids, but also for the measurement of solids in water. Main applications are in large vessels where solutions with other techniques are expensive or physically not possible. # TYPICAL PRODUCTS Ore, coal, stones, sinter, plastic powder, lime, cement, raw flour, cereals, sludge and sewage water. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 16 of 24

5B. MAGNETIC TILT LEVEL SWITCH # WORKING PRINCIPLE Float mounted at one end of rigid rod moves with change in level. Magnetic capsule at other end of rod moves accordingly within fixed limits. Hermitically sealed switch contacts across the stainless steel case change accordingly.
FIG- 39 Nomenclature 1. Float Assy. 2. Magnet Assy. 3. Mounting flange. 4. Housing 5. Switch Assy. 6. Terminal Assy. 7. Cable Gland 8. Cover.

# APPLICATIONS HI-LO Level signals for Alarm Annunciation, Safety Interlock circuits, Automatic Pump Control, Solenoid Valve control, Prevention of tank overflows, Pump safeguard against dry running 5C. ROTATING PADDLE LEVEL SWITCH # WORKING PRINCIPLE Operation centers around a low torque, slow speed synchronous motor. Absence of dry materials allows the motor to turn the paddle. Presence of dry material tends to stall the paddle and the motor. The resultant torque actuates a snap-action switch (es) which in turn controls audible and visual signals and/or starts and stops machinery such as conveyers, elevators, feeders, etc. Mounts on top or side of bin.

FIG- 40 Rotating paddle level switch

# APPLICATIONS

1. Eliminates bin overflow, empty bins, clogged conveyors, choked elevators and resultant damage and waste. 2. For Chemical, food, mining, plastics, ceramics and other industries.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 17 of 24

5D. TILT TYPE LEVEL SWITCH

# WORKING PRINCIPLE Tilt switches are either of mercury or micro-switch type, mounted so as to hang from the top of the storage bin. When the tilt switch hangs freely, there is no contact between the tilt switch and control relay. As soon as the level reaches the tilt switch, the vertical angle changes, causing the contact to close. This creates a closed circuit with the control relay, which activates a solenoid valve, an alarm relay, or a motor control start/stop command.

FIG- 41 Tilt Type switches level

6A. VIBRATION TYPE LEVEL SWITCHES

# MEASURING PRINCIPLE Vibration probes for solids operate with piezoelectrically generated vibration which is damped when the rod is covered by the product. The integral electronics detects this damping and triggers a switching command.

FIG- 42 Vibrating different versions. probes in mounting

# APPLICATIONS Powders and granules above a density of 0, 03 g / cm can be detected, e.g. styropore, cement, cereals, flour, plastic Granules etc.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 18 of 24

6B. TUNING FORK LEVEL DETECTION / LEVEL SWITCHING

# MEASURING PRINCIPLE The tuning fork is energized by a piezoelectric element and vibrates at its resonant frequency of approx. 380 Hz. A second piezoelectric element detects this frequency which is than passed to the integral electronics. If the fork is covered by the product, the frequency changes, and a switching command is triggered.

FIG- 43 Installation options

7. CONDUCTIVITY TYPE LEVEL SWITCHES

# MEASURING PRINCIPLE When the electrode is covered by a conductive product, a measuring circuit is closed and a switching signal is triggered. The metallic vessel itself is the reference electrode. In plastic vessels a version with integral reference electrode is used. The position of the switch point is simply determined by the electrode length. Rod and multiple rod electrodes as well as cable and multiple cable electrodes are available.

FIG- 44 Working Principle & Multiple rod electrode for Min./Max. Control

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 19 of 24

A BRIEF COMPARISON OF VARIOUS LEVEL SENSORS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 20 of 24

GLOSSARY OF TERMS TO BE UNDERSTOOD FOR INDUSTRIAL LEVEL MEASUREMENT

ACCURACY The closeness of an Indication of reading of a measurement device to the actual value of the quantity being measured usually expressed as percent of full scale output or reading. ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE The barometric reading of pressure exerted by the atmosphere. At sea level 14.7 lb per sq. in. or 29.92 in. of mercury. BUBBLE TUBE A length of pipe or tubing placed in a vessel at a specified depth. To transport a gas injected into a liquid to measure level from a hydrostatic Head. BUOYANCY The tendency of the fluid to lift any object submerged in the body of the fluid; the amount of force applied to the body equals the product of fluid density and volume of fluid displaced. DENSITY 1. The mass of a unit volume of a liquid at a specified temperature. Units shall be stated as kg / m. 2. A physical property of materials measured as mass per unit volume. DIELECTRIC CONSTANT A material characteristic expressed as the capacitance between two plates when the intervening space is filled with a given insulating material divided by the capacitance of the same plate arrangement when the space is filled with air or evacuated. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TYPE LEVEL METER/ TRANSMITTER Any of several devices designed to measure the head of the liquid in a tank above some minimum level and produce an indication proportional to this value; alternately, the head below some maximum level can be measured and similarly displayed. DISPLACER TYPE LIQUID LEVEL DETECTOR A device for determining a liquid level by means of force measurements on cylindrical element partly submerged in the liquid in a vessel; as the level in the vessel rises and falls, the displacement (buoyant) force on the cylinder varies and is measured by the lever system, torque tube or other force measurement device. FLOAT Any component having positive buoyancy for example, a Hollow watertight body that rests on the surface of the liquid, partly or completely supported by buoyant forces. FLOAT CHAMBER A vessel in which a float regulates the liquid level. FOAMING Any of various methods of introducing air or gas into a liquid or solid material to produce foam. The continuous formation of bubbles which have sufficiently high surface tension to remain as bubbles beyond the disengaging surface.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 21 of 24

GAUGE GLASS A glass or plastic tubes for measuring liquid level in a tank or pressure vessel, usually by direct sight; it is usually connected directly to the vessel through suitable fitting and shut off valve. GAUGE PRESSURE 1. Pressure measured relative to ambient pressure. 2. The difference between the local absolute pressure of the system and the atmospheric pressure at the place of measurement. 3. Static pressure is indicated on a gauge. HYDROSTATIC HEAD The pressure created by a height of a liquid above a given point. MAGNETIC FLOAT GAUGE Any of several designs of liquid level indicator that use a magnetic float to position a pointer. PURGE 1. Increasing the sample flow above normal for the purpose of replacing current sample-line fluid or removing deposited or trapped materials. 2. To cause a liquid or gas to flow from an independent source into the impulse pipe. TORQUE A rotary force, such as that applied by a rotating shaft at any point on its axis of rotation. WET LEG The liquid-filled low-pressure side of the impulse line in a differential pressure level measuring system. ZERO ELEVATION Adjusting the zero output signals to raise the zero to a higher starting point. Usually used in level measurement for starting measurement above the vessel connection point. ZERO SUPPRESSION Adjusting the zero output signals to produce the desired Measurement. Usually used in level measurement to counteract the zero elevation caused by a wet leg.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 22 of 24

CALCULATION PROCEEDURES
A) OPEN VESSEL BOTTOM MOUNTED TRANSMITTER & CLOSED TANK DRY LEG METHOD
20

ZERO SUPPRESSION

Y HP

LT LP
4 90 540 WC

X- VERTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN THE MINIMUM & MAXIMUM MEASURABLE LEVEL

= 500 mmH2O = 100 mmH2O = 0.9

Y- VERTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN TRANSMITTER DATUM LINE & MINIMUM MEASURABLE LEVEL SG - SPECIFIC GRAVIY OF THE FLUID H MAXIMUM HEAD PRESSURE TO BE MEASURED IN mmH2O E HEAD PRESSURE PRODUCED BY Y EXPRESSED IN mmH2O RANGE = E TO E+H H = X x SG = 500 x 0.9 E = Y x SG = 100 x 0.9 = 450 mmH2O = 90 mmH2O

RANGE = E TO E+H = 90 TO (90 + 450) = 90 TO 540 mmH2O NOTE IN CLOSED TANK DRY LEG METHOD, IF THE GAS ABOVE THE LIQUID DOES NOT CONDENSE & THE PIPING FOR THE LOW SIDE OF THE TRANSMITTER WILL REMAIN EMPTY. CALCULATIONS FOR DETERMINING THE RANGE WILL BE THE SAME AS SHOWN FOR OPEN VESSEL BOTTOM MOUNTED TRANSMITTER. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 23 of 24

CALCULATION PROCEEDURES
B) CLOSED TANK WET LEG METHOD
20 ZERO ELEVATION

X Z Y HP LT LP
- 610 WC 90 -110 4

X- VERTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN THE MINIMUM & MAXIMUM MEASURABLE LEVEL Y- VERTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN TRANSMITTER DATUM LINE & MINIMUM MEASURABLE LEVEL Z- VERTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN TOP OF LIQUID IN WETLEG & TRANSMITTER DATUM LINE SG1 - SPECIFIC GRAVIY OF THE FLUID SG2 - SPECIFIC GRAVIY OF THE FLUID IN THE WET LEG H MAXIMUM HEAD PRESSURE TO BE MEASURED IN mmH2O E HEAD PRESSURE PRODUCED BY Y EXPRESSED IN mmH2O S HEAD PRESSURE PRODUCED BY Z EXPRESSED IN mmH2O RANGE = (E-S) TO (H+ (E-S)) H = X x SG1 E = Y x SG1 = = 500 x 1 50 x 1 600 x 1.1 = 500 mmH2O = 50 mmH2O = 660 mmH2O

= 500 mmH2O

= 50 mmH2O

= 600 mmH2O = 1.0 = 1.1

S = Z x SG21 =

RANGE = (E-S) TO (H+ (E-S)) = [(50-660) TO 500 + (50-660)] = [(-610) TO 500 + (-610)] = -610 TO -110 mmH2O

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 24 of 24

FLOW MEASUREMENT
FLOW MEASURMENT BASICS

Flow is another very important process variable that has to be measured and controlled. To understand the basic principles of flow measurement one should be familiar with the relationship between fluid flow and Pressure, Temperature, Viscosity, Density The two basic properties - DENSITY & VISCOSITY play an important role in flow measurement. Density applies to fluids in static phase. Viscosity applies to fluids in motion.
DENSITY: In simple terms, Density is a measure of closeness of molecules in a substance.

Density is defined as Mass per unit Volume. d=m/v where d = density, m = mass, v = volume
SPECIFIC GRAVITY

d=lbs/ft3

Another term commonly used to express density of fluid is SPECIFIC GRAVITY (SG) SG of a liquid=density of liquid / density of water at standard conditions. SG of a gas = density of gas / density of air at standard conditions.
VISCOSITY

Viscosity is the property that determines how freely fluids flow. The viscosity of a fluid refers to its physical resistance to flow. Fluids have various degrees of viscosity. Such variations results from internal friction between particles of the substance. A substance with a higher viscosity has a resistance to flow. For example, two substances with different viscosities are oil and water. Water pours freely while oil pours more slowly. Molasses is more viscous than water, and water much more viscous than gas. Viscosity contributes to laminar or turbulent flow characteristics. Laminar flow is highly effected by viscosity than turbulent flow. Viscosity reduces with the increase of temperature. For example, when molasses is heated its viscosity will decrease. There are several viscosity units, the most widely used being the centipoise. The Viscosity of water at 68F is 1.0 centipoise. The viscosity of kerosene at 68F is 2.0 centipoises. Viscosity () can be expressed as : -1 -1
= lb . ft .s

Also one should know and be able to define the following general flow measurement terms :Laminar flow Incompressible flow Mass flow Static pressure Working pressure Turbulent flow Transitional flow Compressible flow Steady flow Unsteady flow Pulsating flow Dynamic pressure Stagnation pressure Differential pressure Pressure loss

Page 1 of 43

VARIOUS FLOW MEASUREMENT TERMS

LAMINAR FLOW :

Laminar flow is a flow characterized by the tendency of the fluid to remain in thin parallel layers. Laminar flow occurs when the average velocity is slow. The layers are fast moving in the center and become slower on the outer edges of the stream. In laminar flow fluid particles move along in parallel paths. The laminar flow appears as several streams of liquid flowing smoothly alongside each other.
TURBULENT FLOW

Turbulent flow is a flow characterized by random motions of the fluid particles in the transverse as well as axial directions. Turbulent flow occurs when the average velocity is fast. The layers disappear and the velocity is more uniform across the stream.
TRANSITIONAL FLOW

Transitional flow is the flow between laminar and turbulent. Transitional flow exhibits the characteristic of both laminar and turbulent patterns. In some cases transitional flow will oscillate between laminar and turbulent flow.
Incompressible flow is fluid flow under conditions of constant density. Compressible flow is fluid flow under conditions that cause significant changes in density. Mass flow is the amount of fluid, measured in mass units, that passes a given location per unit time. Steady flow is a flow in which the flow rate in a measuring section does not vary significantly with time. Unsteady flow is a flow in which the flow rate fluctuates randomly with time and for which the mean value is not constant. Pulsating flow is a flow rate characterized by irregular or repeating variations. Static pressure is the pressure of a fluid that is independent of its kinetic energy. Stagnation pressure is a theoretical pressure that could be developed if a flowing fluid could be brought to rest without loss of energy.

Page 2 of 43

Dynamic pressure is the increase in pressure above the static pressure that results from complete transformation of the kinetic energy of the fluid into potential energy. Working pressure is the maximum allowable operating pressure for an internally pressurized vessel, tank, or piping system. Differential pressure with respect to flow, is the pressure drop across a restriction Pressure loss is the decrease in pressure of a fluid as it passes through a restriction

FLUID FLOW RELATIONSHIPS

One should know the physical laws that apply to the flow of fluids and their measurement. 1. Pressure across a particular point (such as an orifice) causes a flow through the point ; the higher the pressure drop, the higher the flow. 2. Temperature can affect flow ; higher temperatures decrease viscosity. 3. Viscosity affects flow; a more viscous fluid flows less easily 4. Density affects flow. The Flow decreases as the density increases. 5. Friction affects flow ; more friction reduces flow. 6. Specific gravity affects flow in the same way as density. 7. Flow and flow rate refer to the volume of fluid that passes a given point in a pipe per unit time, as defined by the following equations : Q = AV Where : Q = flow rate A = cross-sectional area of pipe V = average fluid velocity The principle of the continuity of flow is expressed by the equation: Q= Q= A1, V1, A1V1 = A2V2 = A3V3 where flow rate A2, A3 = cross-sectional areas of pipe at different locations 1,2,3 V2, V3 = average fluid velocity at locations 1,2,3

VELOCITY

The Velocity of a flowing fluid is its speed in the direction of flow. It is an important factor in flow metering because it determines the behavior of the fluid. When the average velocity is slow, the flow is said to be laminar. This means that the fluid flows in layers with the fastest moving layers toward the center and the slowest moving layers on the outer edges of the stream. As the velocity increases, the flow becomes turbulent, with layers disappearing and the velocity across the stream being more uniform. In this discussion, the flow is assumed to be turbulent and the term velocity refers to the average velocity of a particular cross section of the stream. Rate of flow (Cubic ft. per sec) Velocity = ----------------------------------------------- = V = ft / sec Area of pipe (Sq. feet)

Page 3 of 43

BERNOULLI'S THEOREM
Bernoulli's theorem relates the velocity of a fluid at a point and the pressure of the fluid at that point. It is just the application of work-energy theorem. According to work energy theorem, the work done by a force acting on a system is equal to the change in kinetic energy of the system. Consider the streamlined flow of a.liquid through a pipe as shown in the figure. As the liquid flows through the pipe, depending upon the position of the liquid, there are three types of energy possessed by the liquid during its flow.
KINETIC ENERGY

Let m be the mass of liquid that-flows through the pipe with a velocity v. Kinetic energy of the liquid = 1/2 mv 2 Kinetic energy per unit mass of the liquid= 1/2V2
POTENTIAL ENERGY

If h is the height from the ground, then the potential energy is given by mgh. Potential energy per unit mass = gh
PRESSURE ENERGY

If p is the pressure exerted on the liquid of cross sectional area a, then the force acting on the liquid surface is given by F = pa (pressure = force / area)

Under the influence of this force, the liquid is driven through a small displacement x. The work done is given by w = Fx = p.a.x w = pV ( volume V = a x ) this work done is stored as the pressure energy. pressure energy = pV = p m/ ( density p = mass / volume ) pressure energy per unit mass = p/

Page 4 of 43

The three types of energy possessed by the liquid at two different points in the pipe are as follows: at A : potential energy per unit mass = gh1 kinetic energy per unit mass = 1/2V12 pressure energy per unit mass = p1/ Total energy at A = p1/ + gh1 + 1/2V12 at B : potential energy per unit mass = gh2 kinetic energy per unit mass = 1/2V22 pressure energy per unit mass = p2/ Total energy at B = p2/ + gh2 + 1/2V22 Bernoulli's theorem states that the sum of the energies possessed by a flowing liquid at any point is constant provided the flow of liquid is steady. Total energy at A = total energy at B p1/ + gh1 + 1/2V12 = p2/ + gh2 + 1/2V22 (ie) p/ + gh + 1/2 V2 = constant This is known as Bernoullis equation. From the above, it is understood that when a fluid is in motion, the pressure within the fluid varies with the velocity of the fluid if the flow is streamlined. The pressure within a fast moving fluid is lower than that in a similar fluid moving slowly. This is known as Bernoullis principle.

REYNOLDS NUMBER
In flow metering, the nature of flow can be described by a number-the Reynolds Number, which is the average velocity x density x internal diameter of pipe divided by viscosity. In equation form, this is expressed as vD R = -------- Where, v = velocity D = inside diameter of pipe = fluid density = viscosity The Reynolds Number has no dimensions of its own. From the Reynolds Number, it can be determined whether the flow is laminar or turbulent. Reynolds Number < 2000, the flow is laminar Reynolds Number > 4000, the flow is turbulent. Between these two values, the nature of the flow is unpredictable. In most Industrial applications, the flow is turbulent. Although measurement can be made without consideration of the Reynolds Number, greater accuracy is possible when a correction based upon it is made.

Page 5 of 43

METHODS OF FLOW MEASUREMENT

Many different methods are used to measure flow in a wide variety of industrial applications. These can be divided into three broad categories as follows: 1. Inferential type flow meters 2. Quantity flow meters 3. Mass flow meters
INFERENTIAL FLOW MEASUREMENTS

In the inferential type of flow measuring methods, the flow rate is inferred from a characteristic effect of a related phenomenon The following are the inferential type of flow measuring methods 1. Variable head or differential flow meters 2. Variable area meters 3. Magnetic flow meters 4. Turbine meters 5. Target meters 6. Thermal flow meters 7. Vortex flow meters, 8. Ultrasonic flow meters VARIABLE HEAD OR DIFFERENTIAL FLOW METERS This is one of the oldest and most widely used methods of industrial flow measurements. The variable head flow meters operate on the principle that when a restriction (or) obstruction in the line / pipe of a flowing fluid is made ,it produces a differential pressure across the restriction element which is proportional to the flow rate. The proportionality is not a linear one but has a square root relationship because the flow rate is proportional to the square root of the differential pressure. It is simply expressed as Qh Q=Kh where h = diff .pr (or ) P h = HP LP K =constant DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE METERS A differential flow meter basically consists of two parts : Primary Elements and Secondary Elements. The parts of the meter used to restrict the fluid flow in the pipe line in order to produce a differential pressure are known as primary elements They are : Orifice Plate Dall tubes Elbow Taps Venturi Tube Pitot tubes Weir Flow nozzles Annubar tubes Flume

Secondary elements are those which measure the differential pressure produced by the primary elements and convert them to signals. Various secondary elements are: Manometer, Bellow/ Diaphragm Meter/ Transmitters (Mechanical/ Electrical/ Electronic/ Pneumatic).

Page 6 of 43

PRIMARY ELEMENTS
Orifice Plate : The simplest and the most common pipeline restriction used in DP method of flow measurement is the Orifice Plate, which is a thin, circular metal plate with a hole in it. It is held in the pipeline between two flanges called orifice flanges . It is the easiest to install and to replace. Concentric Orifice Plate : It is most widely used. It is usually made of stainless steel and its thickness varies from 3.175 to 12.70mm (1/8 to 1 /2 inch.) depending on pipe line size and flow velocity. It has a circular hole (orifice) in the middle, and is installed in the pipe line with the hole concentric to the pipe. Eccentric Orifice Plate : It is similar to the concentric plate except for the offset. It is useful for measuring fluids containing solids, oils containing water and wet steam. The eccentric orifice plate is used where liquid fluid contains a relatively high percentage of dissolved gases. Segmental Orifice Plate : This orifice plate is used for the same type of services as the eccentric orifice plate. It has a hole which is a segment of a circle. Quadrant Edge Orifice Plate : This type of orifice plate is used for flows such as heavy crudes, syrups and slurries, and viscous flows. It is constructed in such a way that the edge is rounded to form a quarter-circle. Depending on the application, it is often necessary to drill a small drain hole usually called a weep hole. This hole is located at the bottom when gases are measured to allow the condensate to pass in order to prevent its building up at the orifice plate. When the fluid is a liquid, this hole is located at the top so that gases can pass and gas pockets cannot build up.
MAXIMUM FORCE IN THE ORIFICE PLATE INSTALLATION IS AT A. MINIMUM PRESSURE IS AT B. BECAUSE OF LOSS OF PRESSURE , ACROSS THE PLATE, DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE RISES ONLY AS HIGH AS POINT

Page 7 of 43

Figure gives a cross-section of a typical orifice plate installation showing the variation in pressure that occurs across the plate. Notice that the main flow stream takes the shape of the venturi tube with the narrowest path slightly downstream from the plate. This point is called the vena contracta. At this point, the pressure is at its minimum. From this point on, the fluid again begins to fill the pipe and the pressure rises. The pressure, however, does not recover completely. There is a loss of pressure across the plate. The principal consideration in selecting an orifice plate is the ratio of its opening (d) to the internal diameter of the pipe (D). This is often called the beta ratio. If the d/D ratio is too small, the loss of pressure becomes too great. If he ratio is too great the loss of pressure becomes too small to detect and too unstable. Ratios from 0.2 to 0.6 generally provide best accuracy. Several procedures have been developed for calculating the correct size of an orifice to make it suitable for measuring a particular rate of flow. The fundamental equation for all these procedures are based as Q=EA0 2gh where, Q = flow rate (volume per unit of time) E = Efficiency factor Ao = Area of orifice in square feet g = acceleration due to gravity 32 feet/sec/sec h = differential pressure across orifice in feet The efficiency factor E is required since the actual flow through an orifice is not the same as the calculated flow. Values of E have been determined by tests and are found in tables. It is different for each combination of d/D radio and Reynolds Number. The letters K or C are used to express this factor in some other equations. It may be called as flow coefficient. This factor or coefficient has no units since it is a ratio of the actual to the theoretical. As stated above, values of E are found in table or on graphs. Example : for Reynolds No. of 10,000 ratio of .6 The value of E is .678 The orifice plate, flow nozzle, and venturi tube operate on the same principle, and the same equation is used for the three. In addition to the difference in flow coefficient (E), there are other factors for each that determine which element should be used.
GIVEN REYNOLDS NO. OF 10,000 AND SELECTION0.6, THE GRAPH PLATES OF ORIFICE INDICATES RATIO OF THE VALUE OF E AS .678

Page 8 of 43

Precision Standard Orifices are used where accounting or plant efficiency tests are involved as per B.S. 1042 Code for Flow Measurement. Concentric sharp edged orifice plates should be used for, all normal applications. Eccentric or segmental orifice plates should be used for liquids containing solids. Beveled or rounded-edge orifice plates should be used for viscous fluids. Plate material for industrial fluids normally should be stainless steel or such superior material as demanded by the process conditions. Note : Orifice plates are not generally recommended for applications where :1.Wide variations in Flow-rate occurs. 2.Tolerance less than 3% is required. 3.Highly viscous fluids and slurries are to be measured 4.Piping layouts do not permit adequate straight lengths to be used. 5.System allowable pressure drop is very small. There must be a long continuous run of straight pipe leading up to any of these primary elements. Considerable information is available concerning the length of straight pipe required between such devices as elbows and valves and the primary elements. When insufficient straight pipe is not possible, the disturbances can be reduced or eliminated by the installation of straightening vanes.
LENGTHS OF STRAIGHT PIPE REQUIREMENT

When the beta ratio=0.6, upstream distance A must be at least 13 pipe diameters after the elbow, tee or cross. After globe or a regulating valve upstream distance A must be at least 31 pipe diameters. In both cases downstream distance B is 5 pipe diameters. Straight run requirements become less as Beta ratio decreases. For example, when the beta ratio is 0.4, the distance A becomes 9D after elbows and 19D after valves. (not drawn to scale.)

STRAIGHTENING VANES ARE INSTALLED ABOVE THE ORIFICE TO REDUCE TURBULENCE AND MAKE ACCURATE MEASUREMENT POSSIBLE (ROBERTSON MFG. CO.)

TURBULENT FLOW OCCURS WHEN THE AVERAGE VELOCITY IS FAST. THE LAYERS DISAPPEAR AND THE VELOCITY IS MORE UNIFORM ACROSS THE STREAM.

Page 9 of 43

Advantages of Orifice Plates (i) low cost (ii) can be used in a wide range of pipe sizes (3.175 to 1828.8 mm.) (iii) can be used with differential pressure devices (iv) well-known and predictable characteristics (v) available in many materials Disadvantages and Limitations of Orifice Plates (i) cause relatively high permanent pressure loss, (ii) tend to clog, thus reducing use in slurry services (iii) have a square root characteristics (iv) accuracy dependant on care during installation (v) changing characteristics because of erosion, corrosion and scaling. VENTURI TUBE Another pipeline restriction for flow metering is the venturi tube, which is a specially shaped length of pipe resembling two funnels joined at their smaller openings. The venturi tube is used for large pipelines. It is more accurate than the orifice plate, but considerably more expensive, and more difficult to install. The Venturi tube is the most expensive but it is the most accurate primary element. High beta ratios (above 0.75) can be used with good results. The pressure recovery of the venturi tube is excellent, which means that there is little pressure drop through it. Functionally, the venturi tube is good since it does not obstruct abrasive sediment; in fact, because of its shape it resists wear effectively. A Venturi tube is used where permanent pressure loss is of prime importance, and where maximum accuracy is desired in the measurement of high viscous fluids. The pressure taps are located one-quarter to one-half pipe diameter up-stream of the inlet cone and at the middle of the throat section. The venturi tube can be used to handle a fluid which is handled by an orifice plate and fluids that contain some solids, because these venturi tubes contain no sharp corners and do not project into the fluid stream. It can be also used to handle slurries and dirty liquids. Advantages (i) causes low permanent pressure loss (ii) widely used for high flow rates (iii) available in very large pipe sizes (iv) has well known characteristics (v) more accurate over wide flow ranges than orifice plates or nozzles (vi) can be used at low and high beta ratios Disadvantages (i) high cost, (ii) generally not useful below 76.2 mm pipe size (iii) more difficult to inspect due to its construction (iv) limitation of a lower Reynolds number of 150,000, (Some data is however available down to a Reynolds number of 50,000 in some sizes)

Page 10 of 43

FLOW NOZZLE : compromise between the orifice plate and the Venturi tube is the flow nozzle, which resembles the entering half of the venturi tube .The flow nozzle is almost as accurate as the Venturi tube, and is not so expensive to buy or as difficult to install.

The flow nozzle is simpler and cheaper than the venturi tube. It is slightly less accurate and does not provide as good pressure recovery. The flow nozzle can be used with higher beta ratios (above .75), but is not quite so wear resistant as the venturi. Advantages (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Disadvantages (i) (ii) permanent pressure loss lower than that for an orifice plate available in numerous materials for fluids containing solids that settle widely accepted for high-pressure and temperature steam flow cost is higher than orifice plate & limited to moderate pipe sizes requires more maintenance (it is necessary to remove a section of pipe to inspect or install it).

TAPPING POINTS
To obtain the pressures upstream and downstream of the primary elements requires taps on both sides of the restriction. The location of these pressure taps varies with the orifice Plate. The following methods of tappings are generally used. FLANGE TAPS, CORNER TAPS, PIPE TAPS and VENA CONTRACTA TAPS
FLANGE TAPPINGS CORNER TAPPINGS

Flange taps are located on the flanges that hold the orifice plate in position
FLANGE TAPPING

The tapping holes are in the corners of the flange. The tappings will be in 45o angle to the flow direction. This type of tapping is used for pipe lines with diameter less than 2.

Page 11 of 43

PIPE TAPS

Pipe taps are located at fixed distances upstream and down-stream of the orifice plate - the upstream pipe tap is located 2 1/2 pipe diameters from the plate & the downstream pipe tap 8 pipe diameters, from the orifice plate. NOTE : Pipe tap is also called as FULL FLOW TAPS
VENA CONTRACTA TAPS ( D & D / 2 TAPS )

At Vena contracta point, the velocity will be max. and the pressure will be min. The distance of vena contracta taps on the downstream side must be calculated from application data. On the upstream side it is located at one pipe diameter from the plate (1 D). Approx. the downstream point (Vena Contracta) is at a distance of 1/2 D. Hence it is also known as D & D/2 taps. The pressure taps used with the Venturi tube are located at the points of maximum and minimum pipe diameter. The pressure taps used with the flow nozzle are located at distances upstream and downstream of the nozzle as designated by the manufacturer. This location is critical and the manufacturers recommendations must be followed. Any of the differential pressure instruments can be used for rate of flow measurement with these primary flow elements. Since the desired measurement is rate of flow and not differential pressure, a conversion from differential pressure to rate of flow must be made.
FIVE WAY VALVE MANIFOLD

T1, T2 1A 1B 2A 2B 3 4A 4B 5A 5B 6

TAPPING POINTS PRIMARY ISOLATION VALVE (HP) PRIMARY ISOLATION VALVE (LP) SECONDARY ISOLATION VALVE (HP) SECONDARY ISOLATION VALVE (LP) EQUALISING VALVE ISOLATION VALVE TO TX (HP) ISOLATION VALVE TO TX (LP) DRAIN VALVE (HP) DRAIN VALVE (LP) TRANSMITTER

Page 12 of 43

DALL TUBES (LO-LOSS FLOW TUBE A MODIFIED FORM OF VENTURI TUBE) The Dall Tube is a modified form of venturi tube, a cross-section of which is shown. It consists of two truncated cones, each with a relatively large cone angle. The throat is formed by a circumferential slot located between the two smaller diameters of the truncated cones. The differential pressure produced by a dall tube is much higher (about double) than that of venturi tube or nozzle having the same upstream and throat diameters with the same net head loss. Advantages i.low head loss ii.short lying length iii.available in numerous materials of construction iv.no upper line-size limit Disadvantages I.pressure difference is sensitive to up-stream disturbances II.more straight pipe required in the approach pipe length III.not considered for measuring flow of hot feed water
OVERALL PRESSURE LOSS THROUGH OVERALL PRESSURE LOSS THROUGH VARIOUS PRIMARY ELEMENTS VARIOUS PRIMARY ELEMENTS
100 PRESSURE LOSS IN % OF ACTUAL DIFFERENTIAL 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
VENTURI TUBE WITH 15 % RECOVERY CONE (SHORT) HERCHEL TYPE VENTURI TUBE WITH LONG CONE LOW LOSS FLOW TUBE (DALL TUBE) FLOW NOZZLE ORIFICE

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

BETA RATIO =d/D

PITOT TUBE
Another Primary flow element used to produce a differential pressure is the pitot tube. In its simplest form, the pitot tube consists of a tube with a small opening at the measuring end. This small hole faces the flowing fluid (Fig). When the fluid contacts the pitot tube, the fluid velocity is zero and the pressure is at a maximum. This small hole, or impact opening as it is called, provides the higher pressure for differential pressure measurement. While the pitot tube provides the higher pressure for differential pressure measurement, an ordinary pressure tap provides the lower pressure reading.
Page 13 of 43

The Pitot tube is an economical device for providing a differential pressure reading
P IT O T T U B E A S S E M B L Y IM P A C T P R E S S U R E

HO LES FO R S T A T IC P R E S S U R E

S T A T IC P R E S S U R E C O M P R E S S IO N R IN G A N D G L A N D F O R L IN E C E N T E R IN G

The pitot tube actually measures the velocity of fluid flow and not rate of flow. However, the flow rate can be determined from the velocity using the is formula : Q = KAV1 Where, Q = flow rate (cubic ft. per Sec.) A = Area of flow cross section in feet. V1 = Velocity of flowing fluid (ft.per.sec) K = flow coefficient of pitot tube (normally about 8) There is no standardization of pitot tubes as there is for orifice plates, venturi tubes and flow nozzles. Each pitot tube must be calibrated for each installation. Pitot tubes may be used where the flowing fluid is not enclosed in a pipe or duct. For instance, a pitot tube may be used to measure the flow of river water, or it may be suspended from an airplane to measure the air flow. Any of the differential pressure type instruments previously described may be used with the pitot tube. Advantages : i. no process loss ii. economical to install iii. some types can be easily removed from the pipe line Disadvantages i. Have poor accuracy ii. unsuitability for dirty or sticky fluids iii. sensitivity to upstream disturbances

ANNUBAR
The Annubar is a Multiple-Ported Pitot tube that Spans the Pipe. Pressure Ports are located at mathematically defined positions based on Published axis symmetric Pipeline velocity profile. These are claimed to average the differential, thereby eliminating the need to locate average velocity point as is necessary for pitot tubes.

Page 14 of 43

Ease of installation, low cost, very low permanent pressure loss, and insertability into existing piping make these devices convenient for ducts and large line size measurements.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Delta Tubes are averaging pitots designed to produce a differential pressure output having a classical square root relationship with flow rate. The multiported Delta Tube's strategically located sensing ports continually sample the impact and static pressures produced by the Delta Tube's obstruction of the flow stream profile. Within the probe, the impact and static pressures sensed by the upstream and downstream ports are continually averaged in separate plenum chamber. Secondary instruments like Switzer Differential Pressure Indicator/ Switches (or Differential Pressure Transmitter) can be used for switching monitoring or for direct measurement of the differential pressure generated by the Delta Tube.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Annubar : Advantages i. It is available for a wide range of pipe sizes ii. It is simple and economical to install iii. It provides negligible pressure drop iv. It can be placed in service under pressure v. It can be rotated while in service, for cleaning action vi. It provides long-term measurement stability. Disadvantages i. unsuitability for operating dirty or sticky fluids ii. limited operating data

Page 15 of 43

Page 16 of 43

ELBOW TAPS

The flow measurement using elbow taps as a primary element, depends on a measurement of the differential pressure between the two points (the inside and outside curves of the elbow) developed by centrifugal force, as the direction of fluid flow is changed in a pipe line elbow. The taps are located at opposite ends of diameter in the plan of the elbow, and the diameter which passes through the tap is at either 45 or 22.5 from the inlet face of the elbow as shown. Elbow taps are rarely used. Its accuracy is poor, varying from 5 to 10%. Advantages i. Easy to add to existing installation where elbows exists ii. Comparitively low cost. iii. No additional pressure loss iv. No obstructions in the line v. Good repeatability Disadvantages i.Poor accuracy ii.Differential pressure developed is relatively small
WEIRS, FLUMES AND OPEN NOZZLES

The Primary element used for measuring rate of flow in open channels are weirs, flumes and open nozzles. A weir is a flat bulkhead with a specially shaped notch along its upper edge. It is placed across the open fluid stream, forcing the fluid to rise up to the notch as the flow rate increases. The Weir Forces The Fluid Up the Notch as Flow Rate increases Advantages: (i) Low cost (ii) Can be constructed on location where being used (iii) Not easily damaged Disadvantages: (i) Applicable only to open channel measurements (ii) Field calibration required (iii) Poor accuracy (generally not over 2 to 3%)

Page 17 of 43

FLUMES :

The flume is a formed structure that is placed in the open fluid stream, forcing the fluid to rise within it as the flow rate increases. It is considered more practical than weirs because its loss of head is about 1/4th that of a weir. Advantages (i) Handles greater flow than weir (ii) Can be constructed on location (iii) Easy to construct as all its sections are plane surface (iv) Dimensions not easily altered to causing incorrect measurements Disadvantages (i) More expensive than weir (ii) Requires calibration on location (iii) accuracy not over 2 to 3%
OPEN NOZZLE

The open nozzle is shaped so that the level of the fluid in the nozzle rises uniformly as the flow rate increases. The measurement of flow rate using these primary elements is accomplished by a float actuated device located in a well adjoining the channel. The level in the well changes with each new rate of flow, due to the restriction caused by the primary element.

IN THE OPEN NOZZLE, THE LEVEL OF FLUID RISES UNIFORMLY AS FLOW RATE INCREASES. (PENN MALER CO.)

Page 18 of 43

ULTRASONIC LEVEL MEASUREMENT IN OPEN CHANNEL FLOW MEASURING APPLICATIONS

LINEAR & SQUARE ROOT SCALES

Recorder charts for pressure, Temperature, Level, Specific Gravity, etc., generally have a linear scale whereas flow charts have a square root scale. This is because the rate of flow is proportional to the sq. Root of the differential head. Whereas linear charts have a uniform calibration, sq. root charts have a sq. root calibration as shown in the figure. It will be noted that 50% of the flow is actually marked on 25% of the liner chart, 70% of the flow near the 50% of linear scale and 90% of the flow very near 80 % of the linear scale. Consequently flow scale are cramped at the bottom (near zero) and expanded near maximum. Accuracy of flowmeter readings against such a scale can be had only above 25% of the liner scale.
LINEAR SCALE

0 2 3

8
SQ. ROOT SCALE

LINEAR / SQUARE ROOT CALIBRATION

INPUT ma 4 8 12 16 20 psi 3 6 9 12 15 Kg/cm2 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 LINEAR SCALE 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% OUTPUT SQUARE ROOT SCALE 0% 50% 70.71% 86.60% 100%

Page 19 of 43

VARIABLE AREA FLOW METERS In the differential head flow meters, the flow restriction is of fixed size and the pressure differential across it changes with the flow rate, whereas in the Variable Area flow meters the differential pressure is made constant and the size of the restriction varies. Therefore the flow rate is a function of the area of the opening through which the flow is passing. Basically there are two types of variable area flow meters Rotameters and Cylinder & Piston type flow meters.
ROTAMETERS GLASS TUBE ROTAMETERS METAL TUBE ROTAMETERS BYE PASS ROTAMETERS PURGE ROTAMETERS

GLASS TUBE ROTAMETER : It works on the principle of variable area. The float moves freely up and down in the tapered borosilicate glass tube with fluid flow from bottom to top. The float takes up a position where the buoyancy forces and the float weight are balanced in proportion to flow rate. The vertical position of the float as indicated by scale is a measure of the instantaneous flow rate. Rotameter is always mounted vertically in the pipe line. The inlet of the rotameter is at bottom and outlet at top. The same fundamental equation used for the orifice meter also applies to the variable area meter. Q = A2gh

In the working eqn. for the rotameter, the diff.pressure is replaced by a factor which causes it to remain constant. This factor involves the volume of the float and the area of the float as well as the density of the float and the density of the fluid .
The area of the float must be applicable to the taper of the tube; the actual metering area occurs at the bottom of the float as shown in fig. Thus, the working equation becomes:

Using this eqn., the rate of flow thro the rotameter can be calculated for any position of the float. Page 20 of 43

The rotameter is subject to error due to changes in the density or the viscosity of the flowing fluid. To overcome small changes in fluid density, the float should be of material twice as dense as the flowing fluid. To overcome the effect of small changes in the viscosity of the flowing fluid, the float shape should be made so that it as insensitive to these changes as possible. The float of the rotameter adjusts the size of the area by rising and falling in the tapered tube. Depending on the rate of flow, the float takes a position in the tube that increases or decreases the size of the area, and thus keeps the differential pressure constant. In the valve-type meter, a specially shaped plug or piston moves to a new position to keep the differential pressure constant for each rate of flow.
METAL TUBE ROTAMETER

The float moves freely up and down in the tapered measuring tube with fluid flow from bottom to top. The float takes up a position where the buoyancy forces and the float weight are balanced in proportion to flow rate. The vertical position of the float is a measure of the instantaneous flow rate. The scales can be calibrated in mass or volume flow units. The coupling magnet fitted into float, transmits float position from the measuring tube to the follow up magnet which is attached to the indicating assembly in the indicator box. Thus the pointer moves with the position of the float.

METAL TUBE ROTAMETER TRANSMITTER

This metal tube Rotameter can be extended as a Transmitter and this works on the principle of R to I converter using special servo Potentiometer. Linearisation is achieved by electronics circuitry

Page 21 of 43

BYE PASS ROTAMETER

Bye Pass Rotameters are suitable for flow rate measurements in 2 NB or higher size pipelines. The complete assembly consists of carrier rings, bye pass line and a Rotameter as indicator. This is basically a inline Rotameter either glass tube or metal tube placed in a bye pass piping. The only difference is the range orifice placed in Rotameter at the inlet. This range orifice is designed in such a way that the differential pressure through the bye pass piping is equivalent to differential pressure across the mainline orifice.

PURGE ROTAMETER

Purge Rotameters are used in applications where small flows of liquids and gases (Transparent), such as in purge applications for level measurement has to be measured and controlled. Rotometers are working under variable area principle. Float is free to travel up or down within a tappered Borosilicate glass. When it travels up the area is increased. When the fluids flows through the Rotameter the float raises to the point of dynamic balance which is the true indication of flow. The differential pressure Regulator is an Automatic Flow controller which controls the flow set by the needle valve even while the inlet or outlet pressure change. This automatic flow control is very essential for the purging applications, otherwise the set flow widely vary with changes in inlet and outlet pressure.

Page 22 of 43

MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS Magnetic Flowmeter is based upon Faraday's law of induction which states that the voltage induced across any conductor as it moves at right angles thru a magnetic field is proportional to the velocity of that conductor. This principle finds common application in direct and alternating current generators. The basic operating principle is illustrated graphically in Figure . Consider magnetic field, "B", being generated in a plane which is perpendicular to the axis of the meter pipe. Further, consider a disc of the metered fluid as a conductor; the transverse length, "D", being equal to the meter pipe diameter. As the velocity, "V", of the fluid disc is directed along the axis of the meter pipe, a voltage, "Es", will be induced within this fluid which is mutually perpendicular to the direction of the fluid velocity and the flux linkages of the magnetic field; i.e., in the axial direction of the meter electrodes.

SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF MAGNETIC FLOW METER

This electrode voltage is the summation of all incremental voltages developed within each fluid particle that passes under the influence of the magnetic field. This may be expressed mathematically as (Equation #1) E = 1 . BDV C where: E = induced electrode voltage B = magnetic field strength (magnetic flux density) D = pipe diameter C = dimensionless constant Thus, the metered fluid constitutes a continuous series of conductive fluid discs moving thru a magnetic field. The more rapid the rate of fluid flow, the greater the instantaneous value of signal voltage as monitored at the meter electrodes.

Page 23 of 43

The magnetic flowmeter is a volumetric flow rate measuring instrument. This can be shown by substituting the physical equivalent of fluid velocity into equation#1, proceeding as follows :
Q = VA Q = 4Q V= A D2 We know E = 1 . BDV C E=1 C

. BD .B

4Q D2 Q D

E=41 C

and solving for Q Q= CD .E

4 B
CUTAWAY VIEW OF THE MAGNETIC FLOWMETER

Since C and D are constant, Equation # 2

K E
B

Where Q = volumetric flow rate A = Cross-sectional area, K = dimensional constant V = fluid velocity Therefore, volumetric flow rate is directly proportional to the induced signal voltage. ADVANTAGES 1. No moving components 2. Can handle slurries and greasy materials 3. Can handle corrosive fluids 4. totally obstructionless & hence no pressure loss 5. Available in several construction materials 6. Available in large pipe sizes and capacities 7. Capable of handling extremely low flows (with minimum size, less than 3.175 mm inside diameter) and very high volume flow rate (with sizes as large as 3.04 meter offered) 8. Can be used as bi-directional meter 9. Measurements unaffected by viscosity, density, temperature and pressure 10. Linear analog output DISADVANTAGES 1. Relatively expensive 2. Works only with fluids which are adequate electrical conductors 3. Relatively heavy, especially in larger sizes 4. Must be full at all times 5. Must be explosion proof when installed in hazardous electrical areas

Page 24 of 43

TURBINE FLOWMETER
BASIC PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Turbine Flowmeter is an electromechanical, volumetric flow measurement instrument. The flow causes the bladed rotor to turn at an angular velocity directly proportional to the velocity of the liquid measured. Because the cross sectional area of the meter is fixed, the angular velocity of the rotor is directly proportional to volume flowrate. As the blades on the rotor pass beneath a magnetic pickup coil, an AC signal is generated. Each AC pulse is equivalent to a discrete volume of fluid. Since AC frequency is directly proportional to the angular velocity of the rotor, the frequency is directly proportional to flowrate. The AC wave form generated is sinusoidal in nature and is readily transmitted to local or remote electronic instrumentation. A full line of electronic analog and digital instruments are available for indicating, totalizing, recording and controlling flowrate and total throughput
OPERATING PRINCIPLES

A Turbine meter consists of a multibladed rotor suspended in the fluid stream on a free running bearing (See Fig.). The axis of rotation of the rotor is perpendicular to the flow direction and the rotor blades sweep out virtually to the full bore of the meter. The fluid impinging on the rotor blades causes the rotor to revolve. Within the linear flow range of the meter, the angular speed of rotation is directly proportional to the volumetric flow rate. The speed of rotation is monitored by an electromagnetic pickup coil, which is fitted to the outside of the meter housing. Two types of pickup coil are primary used: reluctance and inductance. Both operate on the principle of a magnetic field moving through a coil. In the reluctance pickup coil system, the permanent magnet is the coil. The field produced is concentrated to a small point by the cone (see fig.). The turbine rotor blades are made of a paramagnetic material, i.e, a material that is attracted by a magnet. As a blade approaches the cone point, its magnetix properties deflect the magnetic filed. This deflection causes a voltage to be generated in the coil. As the blade passes under the cone point, the voltage decays, only to be built back up in the opposite polarity as the departing blade deflects the magnetic field in the opposite direction. Thus, each blade produces a separate and distinct voltage pulse as it passes the cone Since each blade sweeps a discrete volume of fluid.

Page 25 of 43

With the inductance pickup coil system (See Fig), the permanent magnet is embedded in the rotor. As the magnet rotates past the pick the pickup coil position, it generates a voltage pulse for every complete revolution of the rotor. The typical operating temperature ranges for standard pickup coils is 58 to +300F (-50 to 150C).Specially modified pickup coil are available, however, to cover operation at temperatures ranging from -328 to +840F (-200 to + 450C). if the meter is located in a hazardous area, the pickup coil can be mounted in a flameproof or explosionproof conduit box, or alternatively an intrinsically safe pickup coil can be used in conjunction with zener barrier to provide an inherently safe system.
TURBINE METERS FOR LIQUIDS
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CURVES

Turbine meters are available for liquid and gases, very low flow rates and as insertion designs. The liquid turbine meter is one of the most accurate meters available for low-to mediumviscosity products Liquid Turbine Meters cover a diverse variety of liquid measurement needs. The following are examples of liquids which can be metered over a wide range of conditions: Ammonia (liquid) Butane (liquid) Cryogenics Crude Oil Fuels and Fuel Oils Liquid Natural Gas Liquid Petroleum Gas Motor Oils Naphtha Solvents Tetra Ethyl Lead Waters (all types)

The following are examples of industries which can be served: Aerospace Power Plants Fossil Fuel Atomic Power Petroleum Products Air Conditioning Pipeline & Heating Steel Production Chemical Textiles Dock Loading Transport & Truck Loading Facilities Ocean Tanker, Ship & Barge Oil Production Loading and Unloading Oil Refining

Page 26 of 43

TURBINE METERS FOR GASES

Gas turbine meters cover a wide range of gas measurement needs. Examples of gases which can be metered over a wide range of conditions : Oxygen Nitrogen Argon Natural gas Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Hydrogen Butane Examples of Industries served : Natural Gas production Gas transmission Steel production
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CURVES FOR GAS METERS

Turbine meters offer good flow range capability (10:1) and are suitable for virtually unlimited pressure and extremes of high and low Temperature. They are easy to install and have a small size and weight relative to the pipeline diameter. The meter has a very fast response and can be made hygienic. The principal limitations are incompatibility with high viscosity liquids, possible damage due to over speeding during a liquid/gas phase, and the necessity for secondary readout equipment. Filtration is also recommended. Turbine meters are widely for high accuracy product sale, blending, test rig duty and general measurement. TARGET (OR IMPACT) METERS In this system, deflection of a plate supported in the fluid flow is measured and an electronic or pneumatic analog output provided. The target meter is more expensive than a comparable orifice installation but since there are no tappings to block up, the target meter is more suited to fluid with suspended solids or sticky types of liquid. There are no moving parts.

Page 27 of 43

The target meter measures flow by measuring the force on a target (or disc), centred in the pipe at right angles to the direction of fluid flow. The fluid flow develops a force on the target which is proportional to the square of the flow. A target meter consists of a target (or disc) which is mounted on a force bar (or beam) passing through a flexible seal, and is positioned in the centre of and perpendicular to the flowing stream, as shown in Fig. The device may be installed directly in the flow line, thus eliminating the need for pressure-tap connections. The flowing fluid while passing through the pipe, develops a force on the target which is proportional to velocity head (the square of the flow). The force bar transmits this force to a force transducer (either electronic or pneumatic) to measure the force which is proportional to the square of the flow. The relationship between the flow rate and force is expressed by the equation. Q = KF where, Q = flow rate, K = a known coefficient, F = force The target meters are available in sizes from 12.5 to 203mm pipe diameter, and an accuracy of about +/- % with proper calibration. The targets (or discs) are available with diameters of 0.6 to 0.8 times pipe diameter. Advantages 1. useful for difficult measurements such as slurries, polymer-bearing and sediment-bearing materials; corrosive mixtures etc 2. good accuracy when calibrated for specific streams 3. repeatability is good 4. good for relatively high temperatures and pressures Disadvantages 1. in-line mounting required 2. a limited calibration data 3. no-flow conditions must exist for zeroing the scale

Page 28 of 43

THERMAL FLOW METERS :

In a thermal flow meter, flow rate is measured either by monitoring the cooling action of the flow on a heated element placed in the flow or by the transfer of heat energy between two points along the flow path. Hot wire anemometers and calorimetric flow meters are the two common types of thermal flow meters and both types can be used to measure mass flow rate making both types especially suitable for gas applications.
HOT WIRE ANEMOMETERS:

Hot wire anemometers have probes inserted into the process flow. These probes are usually connected in a typical bridge circuit. One of two probes is heated to a specific temperature. The second probe measures the temperature of the fluid. As the flow increases, it causes a heat loss in the heated probe. Consequently, more current is required to maintain the probe at the correct temperature. The increase in current flow can be measured and used to calculate mass flow rate. Proper operation requires that thermal conductivity (the ability of the heat to be conducted from the probe to the fluid) and heat capacity (the quantity of heat that a given mass requires to raise its temperature a specified amount) be assumed to be constant.
CALORIMETRIC FLOW METERS :

Calorimetric flow meters work on the principle of heat transfer by the flow of fluid. Typically, calorimetric flow meters are situated along the direction of the flow. A heating element is placed in the flow. A sensor is positioned to measure the temperature upstream of the device; a second measuring device reads the temperature of the flow downstream from the heater. The rate of flow is determined by the difference in the two temperatures. With a constant power input, this difference in temperature is a linear function of the mass flow and the heat capacity. The flow meter can then be calibrated to indicate directly in mass flow units Applications of thermal flow meters are limited to use with fluids that have known heat capacities. Usually, these are clean gases or clean mixtures of pure gases of known composition where heat capacity is known and is constant during flow meter operating. Liquid applications are less common because liquids generally contain more impurities than gases. Thermal flow meter designs can measure fluid flow at temperatures as high as 450 Celsius, although most have a temperature rating between 100 and 150 degrees Celsius. The pressure rating of the flange or connection normally limits pressure ratings. Conductive surfaces of a thermal flow meter can become contaminated and should be routinely cleaned to maintain the performance levels. These devices are generally not applied to abrasive fluid services.

Page 29 of 43

VORTEX FLOWMETERS Three types of vortex flowmeters are commercially available.

swirlmeter SWIRLMETER

vortex shedding meter

fluidic meter

The swirlmeter operates on the principle of vortex precession. It is a digital volumetric device which has no moving parts. It gives an output in the form of pulses whose frequency is proportional to fluid flow rate. Figure shows the construction of a swirlmeter. It consists of a fixed set of swirl blades, usually made of stainless steel, which introduce a spinning or swirling motion to the fluid at the inlet. At the downstream of the swirl blades there is a venturi-like contraction and expansion of the flow passage. A temperature sensor (e.g. thermistor) is placed at the downstream of the blades which is heated by a constant electric current. At the exit of the meter-deswirl blades are fixed to straighten out the flow leaving the meter, as shown in Figure. Its purpose is to isolate the meter from downstream piping effects. As the fluid passes through the fixed set of swirl blades at the inlet, a swirling (or spinning} motion is imparted to it. In the area where expansion occurs, the swirling flow precesses or oscillates at a frequency proportional to fluid flow rate. This precession of the fluid causes variations in temperature and resistance of the thermistor (sensor). The amount of heat extracted from the thermistor by passing fluid is dependent upon the fluid velocity. Consequently, each high velocity vortex passed the thermistor, changes the resistance and, since a constant current is applied, the resistance changes is converted into voltage pulses which are amplified, filtered and transformed into constant amplitude high level pulses of square waveform. The frequency of the pulses are measured by an electronic counter which gives the flow rate of fluid. The swirlmeter has an accuracy of 0.75% within its linear operating range of 1%. Its repeatability is 0.25% and rangeability is 100:1. It is currently available in meter sizes from 25.4 to 152.4 mm. It is primarily used in gaseous applications, where a very much lower density results in a significantly lower pressure loss.

Page 30 of 43

VORTEX SHEDDING FLOWMETERS

Vortex Flowmeters operate on the Karman vortex shedding street principle to measure the volumetric flowrate of gases, vapours/steam. The vortex flowmeter is used for measuring the flow velocity average in pipelines. The measuring principle is based on the development of a Karman vortex shedding street in the wake of a body built into the pipeline.The periodic shedding of eddies occurs first from one side and then from the other side of a bluff body (vortex-shedding body) installed perpendicular to the pipe axis ("Karman vortex street"). The frequency f of the vortex shedding is proportiional to the flow velocity v The non-dimensional Strouhal number s describes the relationship between vortex shedding frequency f width b of the body, and mean flow velocity v f = S.v b

The operation of the vortex shedding flowmeter is based on a phenomenon known as vortex shedding which occurs when a gas or liquid flows around a non-stream lined (or blunt) object known as sluff body. When a fluid flows past an obstacle, boundary layers of slow moving fluid are formed along the outer surfaces of the obstacle and the flow is unable to follow contours of the
Vortex shedding from a bluff body causes velocity and pressure adjacent to the body to change Page 31 of 43

obstacle on its downstream side. Thus the flow layers are separated from the surface of the object, and a low pressure area is formed behind the object which causes the separated layers to get detached from the main stream of the fluid and roll them selves into eddies or vortices in the low pressure area, as shown in Figure. Each eddy on vortex first grows and gets detached or shed from alternate sides of the object. The frequency at which the vortices are formed is directly proportional to the fluid velocity. The flexural vibration of the vortex-shedding body is picked up in the primary head via sensors and analysed in the signal converter. As a vortex is shed from one side of the sluff body the fluid velocity on that side increases and the pressure decreases, and at the same time the velocity on the opposite side decreases pressure increases, thus causing a net pressure change across the sluff body. As the next vortex is shed from the opposite side of the sluff body, the entire effect is reversed. Therefore, the velocity and pressure distribution in the fluid around the sluff body change at the same frequency as the vortex shedding frequency. The changes in pressure of velocity is sensed by a flow-sensitive detector which can be either a heated thermistor element or a spherical magnetic shuttle. The vortex shedding flowmeters are available in the sizes from 50.8 to 152.4 mm. Its linearity is within 1/2% and rangeability is 100 : 1. This meter has also no moving parts. Advantages / Special Features : 1. has an excellent rangeability 2. handles a wide variety of chemicals, including slurries, liquids with entrained particles, and viscous materials 3. has no moving parts 4. relatively immune to density, temperature, pressure and viscosity variations within the linear range 5. very low pressure drop 6. has good response speed 7. wetted parts of stainless steel 1.4571/316L and titanium 8. high measuring accuracy 9. meter sizes DN 25 to 200(1" to 8") 10. compact Unit with maintenance free 11. Good rangeability 12. for measurement of gases and vapours/steam 13. two-wire connection, output 4 to 20 mA 14. hazardous-duty version EEx ib IIC T6..T3 15. high temperature version with special seals. Disadvantages 1. high cost. 2. not available over 200 mm size 3. upper temperature limit is 204C 4. In-line mounting required

Page 32 of 43

ULTRASONIC FLOW METERS In ultrasonic flowmeters, the measurement of flow rate is determined by the variation in parameters of ultrasonic oscillations. There are two types of ultrasonic flowmeters currently in use : (i) Transit time flowmeters (ii) doppler flowmeter Transit Time flowmeters: A sound wave propogated in the direction of flow through the medium requires a shorter transit time from one point to another than a sound wave propogated in the opposite direction. It uses 2 ultrasonic sensors which are clamped on the pipe at opposite sides under an angle with the pipe axis. Both sensors are able to transmit and receive ultrasonic waves. These devices measure flow by measuring the time taken for ultrasonic wave to transverse a pipe section, both with and against the flow of liquid within the pipe. An ultrasonic beam is projected right across the pipe at an acute angle, first with the flow and then in opposition to the flow direction. The difference in transit time is proportional to flow rate. It consists of two transducers, A and B, inserted into a pipe line, and working both as transmitter and receiver, as shown in Fig. The ultrasonic waves are transmitted from transducer A to transducer B and vice versa. An electronic oscillator is connected to supply ultrasonic waves alternately to A or B which is working as transmitter through a changeover switch, when the detector is connected simultaneously to B or A which is working as receiver. The detector measures the transit time from upstream to downstream transducers and vice versa. If the mediums measured mean flow velocity is now electronically multiplied by the cross section of the pipeline, the result is the flow-rate per unit of time. The same applies to A(A )and B(B ) From point A to point B, the ultrasonic waves move with the velocity. vAB = c0 + vm .cos and in the opposite direction, from point B to point A, with velocity vBA = c0 - vm .cos

Page 33 of 43

The following applies to the different transit times : from point A to point B,

tAB =

L -----------------------c0 + vm .cos L -----------------------c0 - vm .cos

and from point B to point A

tBA =

A Transmitter and Receiver B Transmitter and Receiver L distance between the ultrasonic waves vm - mean flow velocity of the liquid tAB (vAB) transit ime of the sound waves from point A to point B (propogation velocity) tBA (vBA) transit ime of the sound waves from point A to point B (propogation velocity) C0 velocity of sound in the liquid calibration constant GK calibration constant - angle between pipe axis and measurement line

The mean flow velocity vm of the medium is calculated from the last two equations :

vm In = GK . tAB - tBA tAB . tBA

tAB and tBA are measured continually Since, this type of flowmeter relies upon an ultrasonic signal traversing across the pipe, the liquid must be relatively free of solids and air bubbles. It requires a relatively clean fluid. There is no obstruction to flow and hence no pressure loss. It is ideally suited to very corrosive liquid. The approach pipe work conditions are fairly critical. This type of meter is gaining limited acceptance in the water and chemical industries. DOPPLER FLOWMETERS : In Doppler principle, a transmitting transducer sends a continuous signal into the liquid. Particles, gas / air bubbles or disturbances in the liquid reflect part of this signal. The reflected signal is sensed by the receiving transducer and the difference between the transmitted and received frequency is calculated. This frequency is directly proportional to the liquid velocity. Doppler ultrasonic flowmeters measure liquids with particle size > 100 microns.

Page 34 of 43

The velocity of the fluid is given by the equation: =fK V= f Ct 2 f0 COS Where, f = difference between transmitted and received frequency Ct = velocity of sound in the transducer f0 = frequency of transmission = Angle of transmitter and receiver crystal with respect to the pipe axis. K = constant Advantages of Ultrasonic Flowmeters : (i) does not impose additional resistance to the flow or disturb the flow pattern as the transducers are inserted in the wall of pipe. (ii) velocity/output relationship is linear (iii) no moving parts (iv) Repeatability is in the order of 0.01% QUANTITY FLOW METERS Quantity flow meters are used for the measurement of small percentage of industrial flow rate. These meters operate by passing te fluid to be measured through the meter in separate and distinct increments of alternately feeling and emptying containers of known fixed capacity. The number of times te container is filled and emptied gives the quantity of flow. QUANTITY FLOW METERS

POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS

METERING PUMPS

POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS

These are essentially flow quantity meters. They are most widely used for the applications where the highest degree of accuracy and good repeatability are required. These devices work on the principle that as the liquid flows through the meter, it separates the flow of liquid into separate known volumetric increments which are counted and totalled. The sum of the increments gives the measurement of the total volume of liquid passed through the meter. It may be divided into five catogories namely Nutating disc type, Oscillating piston type, rotating vane type, reciprocating piston type, lobed impeller type.
METERING PUMPS

A metering pump is a positive displacement pump which is used to provide a predictable and accurate rate of process fluid flow. In many cases it becomes the final control element of an instrument control loop. Any positive displacement pump may be used as a metering pump due to its volumetric mode of fluid transfer. In practice, however, only those pumps which have very little internal or external leakage, are used for metering purposes. Metering pumps may be classified by their basic mode of operation as

Page 35 of 43

1. Reciprocating piston pumps

MASS FLOW METER

2. Peristaltic pumps

3. Diaphragm pumps.

True mass flow meters measure the mass rate of flow directly as compared to volumetric flow rate. QM = QV x , where QM= Mass flow rate, QV = Volume flow rate, =fluid density CORIOLIS METERS The working principle of this type of instrument is Newton's second law of motion - F=ma. Each sensor consists of one or two tubes enclosed in a sensor housing. The flow tube is driven by an electromagnetic coil located at the center of the bend in the tube. The fluid being measured flows through the sensor tube which is vibrated at its natural frequency by an electromagnetic device with an amplitude of less than 1mm and frequency of about 80 Hz. As the fluid moves through the vibrating tube it is forced to take on the tube's vertical momentum. During half of the vibration cycle when the tube is moving upward, fluid flowing into the meter pushes downward against the tube resisting this upward force. Conversely fluid flowing out of the meter, having been forced upward, now resists having its vertical momentum decreased and pushes upward against the tube. This combination of resistive forces causes the flow sensor tube to twist, This is called "Coriolis Effect". During the second half of the vibration cycle when the tube moves downwards, the resultant twist will be in the opposite direction, the amount that the sensor tube twists is directly proportional to the mass flow rate of the fluid flowing through it. Electromagnetic sensors are located on each side of the flow tube to measure the respective velocity of the vibrating tube at these two points. Any time difference between these two velocity signals is caused by the twisting of the tube. The sensors send this information to the meter's electronic unit where it is processed and converted to an output signal directly proportional to the mass flow rate. In meters with double flow tubes, the two tubes vibrate twist 180"out of phase, and their combined twist determines the mass flow rate.

Page 36 of 43

CORIOLIS PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

MASS FLOW METERS

Page 37 of 43

A Coriolis flowmeter consists of two primary components: the flow tube assembly, which is typically called the sensor, and an electronics assembly. The sensor is commonly interfaced to the electronics with a cable that permits the electronics to be located remotely from the sensor. The function of the sensor is to react to the Coriolis forces produced by the fluid flowing through the oscillating tubes. The electronics provides the energy to oscillate the flow tubes, processes the signals from the flow detectors mounted on the flow tubes, and produces outputs which represent the mass flow rate of the fluid.

APPLICATIONS Coriolis flow meters are currently being used in many industrial area that require flow measurement : chemical, petroleum, petrochemical, food and beverage, pulp and paper, and pharmaceutical. Due to the versatility of these flowmeters they are being used for process control, batching, inventory, precision filling of containers, and custody transfer.

Page 38 of 43

FLOW SWITCHES

Flow switches are used for visual and/or electrical checking of liquid flow in industry.

Indicator G : Standard for all flow switches. Scale marks are from 1 to 10 to permit visual checking of the flow rate. The switching point can be changed as and when required even under flowing conditions. Indicator A : Flow switches are available with indicator also. The dial is marked in flow units (e.g. l/h, m3/h) to provide more accurate flow readings. The switching points are factory marked on the dial. With this indicator it is possible to adjust the switching points under non-flowing conditions. Measuring system C has a hinged measuring disc moving freely in the axis of the conical tube. At flowing conditions, the system adjusts so that the force acting on the disc is in equilibrium with the spring force. Each flow rate thus corresponds to a particular position of the measuring disc. A built-in magnet transmits the disc position to the indicator and simultaneously actuates the limit switches.

Page 39 of 43

Paddle type flow switches can be used wherever a simple, economic yet reliable monitoring instrument is required for controlling flow rates in pipes. The device operates as follows : The flowing medium presses against the paddle of the paddle of the flow switch. The paddle is fitted to one end of a balance arm which is in direct contact with a pre-stressed leaf spring. At the other end of the balance arm is a permanent magnet. This magnet actuates a reed contact located within a moveable housing outside the media. The reed contact switches on or off depending on the position of the permanent magnet and the switch housing. The status of the switch may then be used to electrically control the fluid flow. The movable reed switch on the PSR/PS allows the contacts to be set either normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C). APPLICATIONS : Cooling circuits in steel industries and process industries as varied as fertilizer, chemical, paper etc. Flow switches are used in following applications : In Air Conditioning System : 1. Safety control and automatic signal device in a chilled water system. 2. Safety control and automatic signal device in a condenser cooling water system. 3. To start cooling water tower fan when flow occurs in condenser cooling system 4. Used as sequence starters and safety controls in condenser, evaporator, and compressor motor starter circuits. In Hot Water Space Heating System: 1. Used to actuate stand-by pump in event primary pump fails 2. Safety control to reduce the possibility of thermal shock in hot water boilers 3. Safety control to prevent freeze-up of a unit ventilator hot water coil. In Hot Water Supply System: 1. Actuating and safety control on instantaneous hot water heating units. 2. Actuate a booster water heater whenever a draw of water occurs 3. Tankless heater system to actuate circulator pump when a draw of water occurs In pump system: 1. Safety control to prevent pump operation if well water level is too low 2. Actuate a booster pump in a system where water supply pressure is inadequate 3. To maintain pump operation while flow occurs in a by-pass line

Page 40 of 43

In water cooled equipment : used as a safety control to prevent damage if flow fails in the supply line to water cooled equipment. In blending or additive System: used as an actuating control in a pipeline blending system. In Liquid Transfer System : Control the operation of liquid transfer from one location to another In fire sprinkler system : used as a Safety control to actuate alarm or signals, and to start or stop mechanical equipment when fire occurs In water treatment system : used to actuate an additive device or electrical element in a water treatment system. In liquid processing, Reclaiming or disposal system : used to sound alarm, actuate signal or stop equipment should essential liquid flow fail. In Duct Type Heating System: used as a safety shut off switch should air flow fail in duct heating system. In Exhaust Ventilating system: used as a safety control to sound alarm, actuate signal, or stop process if air flow fails in exhaust system. In Air supply System: 1. Used to sound alarm, actuate signal or stop equipment should necessary air flow fail in supply system 2. Used to control operation of air cleaner, humidifier or other air treatment equipment
HOT WATER SPACE HEATING SYSTEM

In the system shown above, the primary pump and the stand-by pump are installed in parallel in a simple return and supply system. The flow switch is installed in a discharge line of the primary pump and connected electrically to the starter of the stand-by pump

Page 41 of 43

During normal operation the flow in the primary pump discharge line keeps the electrical contact in the flow switch open, and the stand-by pump remains stopped. Should the primary pump fail, the lack of flow in the discharge line would cause the contact in the flow switch to close, and the stand-by pump would immediately start. If another flow switch is placed in the stand-by pump discharge line, then either pump could be used as a primary pump and the other as a stand-by. In this system, failure of either pump used as a primary pump would cause the stand-by pump to function. It also may be desirable to use the flow switch in a central control system to actuate a signal whenever there is either flow or no-flow in the pump discharge line

Page 42 of 43

SELECTION GUIDE FOR FLOW SENSORS

Page 43 of 43

PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
INTRODUCTION The Measurement and Control of Pressure is very important in almost all chemical and Petrochemical Industries, Power Plants and other Industries. Many of the Processes in these Industries use liquids, gases, steam, etc which requires highly accurate measurement and control of pressure for Trouble Free and Safety Operation. PRESSURE Pressure is defined as Force Applied Per Unit Area. Mathematically, pressure is expressed as; P = F/A Where P Pressure, F Force, A Area

TYPES OF PRESSURE 1. Gauge Pressure - Pressure above atmospheric pressure. Hence, the Zero of the Gauge Pressure scale depends on the Atmospheric Pressure at that location. 2. Absolute Pressure Pressure above the absolute Zero. 3. Atmospheric Pressure or Barometric Pressure 4. Vacuum - Pressure less than atmospheric Pressure. 5. Differential Pressure UNITS OF PRESSURE A unit often used for expressing high pressures is atmospheres, abbreviated atm. A micron, abbreviatedm, is 0.001 mm of Hg column absolute pressure at 32F. A pound per square inch, abbreviated psig for gauge pressures and psia for absolute pressures, is the common. Common units of pressure Pascal (N/m2), Bar, kgf/cm2, psi (lb.f/in2), Torr (mm Hg) and mm H20 MEASUREMENT OF LOW PRESSURES Pressures, which are less than 1 psi, are normally considered as low pressure and low pressures are usually calibrated in inches of water.(1 Psi = 27.7 inches of H20)
.

PRESSURE CONVERSION TABLE A pressure conversion table is used for conversion of pressure from one unit to other.
MULTIPLY BY k Pascal Bar kgf/cm2 psi (lb.f/in2) Torr (mm Hg) mm H20 Table - 1 k Pascal Bar kgf/cm2 psi (lb.f/in2) 0.145 14.5 14.22 1 0.01933 0.001422 Torr (mm Hg) 7.501 750.1 735.6 51.71 1 0.0735 mm H20

1 100 98.07 6.895 0.1333 9.807 x 10-4

0.01 1 0.9807 0.06895 0.001333 98.07 x 10-6

0.0102 1.02 1 0.07031 0.001359 0.0001

102 10200 10000 703 13.59 1

Page 1 of 35

VACUUM MEASUREMENT
Vacuum Measurement is the measurement of Pressures below Atmospheric Pressure. The Vacuum Scale is normally graduated in inches of mercury (Inch of Hg) or inches of water (Inch of H20). Mechanical Transducers made of deformation elements like Bourdon Tube, bellows and diaphragms are used to measure Vacuum just as they are used to measure pressure.

TOTAL OR ABSOLUTE PRESSURE

GAUGE PRESSURE (psig) ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE AT SEA LEVEL VACUUM ABSOLUTE REFERENCE

FIG - 1 Note: Atmospheric Pressure at sea level is also called Barometric Pressure. Standard Atmospheric Pressure at sea level = 760 mm Hg = 29.91 in Hg = 14.697 psig.

PRESSURE SCALE
30
POSITIVE GAUGE PRESSURE

20 15 10
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE AT SEA LEVEL

ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SCALE

5
VACUMM PRESSURE SCALE

NEGATIVE GAUGE PRESSURE

5 10 15

X 10

20 25 30
ABSOLUTE REFERENCE

FIG - 2

Note: At X the pressure can be expressed as 10 of Mercury Absolute, or as 20 of Mercury Vacuum, or as -20 of Mercury Gauge.
Page 2 of 35

TO MAXIMUM

BALLOON

10,000 ft. ELEVATION 9.7 PSI

MOUNTAIN

5000 ft. ELEVATION 12.2 PSI

SEA LEVEL 14.7 PSI FIG - 3

Note: Variation of atmospheric pressure at different elevations from sea level SOME OF THE INSTRUMENTS USED TO MEASURE ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE ARE 1. SIMPLE MERCURY BAROMETER
N A M E O F TH E IN S TR U M E N T S W H IC H A R E U S E D T O M E A S U R E ATM O SPH ERIC PR ESSU R E A R E: * S IM P LE M E R C U R Y B AR O M ETER * A N E R O ID B A R O M ETER

VACUUM

SCALE HERE IS 30"HIGH

30" 25" 20" 15" 10" 5"

M E R C U RY A TM O S P H ER IC P R E S SU R E

S IM P L E B A R O M E TE R FO R M E A S U R IN G A TM O SPH E R IC PR ESSU R E

FIG - 4

Simple Barometer for measuring atmospheric pressure

Page 3 of 35

2. ANEROID BAROMETER

FIG - 5

Aneroid Barometer Aneroid means Using No Fluid

2.04 INCHES OF MERCURY (Hg)

WEIGHT

1 LB

EARTH

FIG 6

The one pound weight, the 2.04 of mercury and 27.7 of water all exert a pressure of one pound per square inch.

27.7 INCHES OF WATER (H 2 COLUMN O)

Page 4 of 35

ADDITIONAL NOTES ON PRESSURE PRINCIPLES

Pressure is simply the force per unit area that a fluid exerts on its surroundings. If it is a gas, then the pressure of the gas is the force per unit area that the gas exerts on the walls of the container that holds it. If the fluid is a liquid, then the pressure is the force per unit area that the liquid exerts on the container in which it is contained. Obviously, the pressure of a gas will be uniform on all the walls that must enclose the gas completely. In a liquid, the pressure will vary, being greatest on the bottom of the vessel and zero on the top surface, which need not be enclosed. Static Pressure The statements made in the previous paragraph are explicitly true for a fluid that is not moving in space, that is not being pumped through pipes or flowing through a channel. The pressure in case where no motion is occurring is referred to as static pressure. Dynamic Pressure If a fluid is in motion, the pressure that it exerts on its surrounding depends on the motion. Thus, if we measure the pressure of water in a hose with the nozzle closed, we may find a pressure of, say, 40 1b per square inch (note : force per unit area). If the nozzle is opened, the pressure in the hose will drop to a different value, say, 30 1b per square inch. For this reason, a thorough description of pressure must note the circumstances under which it is measured. Pressure can depend on flow, compressibility of the fluid, external forces, and numerous other factors. Gauge Pressure In many cases, the absolute pressure is not the quantity of major interest in describing the pressure. The atmosphere of gas that surrounds the earth exerts a pressure, because of its weight, at the surface of the earth of approximately 14.7 psi, which defines the atmosphere unit. If a closed vessel at the earths surface contained a gas at an absolute pressure of 14.7 psi, then there would be no net pressure on the walls of the container because the atmospheric gas exerts the same pressure from the outside. In cases like this, it is more appropriate to describe pressure in a relative sense-that is, compared to atmospheric pressure. This is called gauge pressure and is given by Pg = Pabs Patm Where Pg = gauge pressure Pabs = absolute pressure Patm = atmospheric pressure In the English system of units, the abbreviation psig is used to represent the gauge pressure. Head Pressure For liquids, the expression head pressure, or pressure head, is often used to describe by the weight of the liquid above the point at which the pressure is being described. This pressure depends only on the height of the liquid above that point and the liquid density (mass per unit volume). In terms of an equation, if a liquid is contained in a tank, the pressure at the bottom of the tank is given by P = gh where; P = pressure in Pa = density in Kg/m g = acceleration due to gravity (9.8 m/s) h = depth in liquid in m
Page 5 of 35

METHODS OF PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS 1. By Means Of Mechanical Pressure Sensors/ Elements/Transducers 2. By Means Of Electrical/ Electronic/ Pressure Sensors/Elements/ Transducers

SIMPLE U-TUBE MANOMETER

PRESSURE PRESSURE

4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4

4 3 2

15 10 5

1 0 1 2 3 4

0 5 10 15

MERCURY AS LIQUID

WATER AS LIQUID THE SAME INLET PRESSURE IS NOW EXPRESSED AS 27.16 INCHES OF WC

DIFFERENCE IN HEIGHT OF MERCURY COLUMNS

FIG 7

Simple U - Tube Manometers with pressure Simulation MEASUREMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Measurement of Differential Pressure (D.P.) is one of the Important Factors for accurate. Measurement of Flow rate and level. Hence, precise measurement of D.P. is of Prime importance in industrial processes. In Differential Pressure Measurement the difference between two working pressures is indicated
HP LP

4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE

DP = HP - LP

FIG 8

Measurement of Differential pressure

Page 6 of 35

BELL TYPE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE The Bell Type Differential Pressure Meter is shown in Figure 9. With this device differential pressures from about 1 to 15 in. of water may be measured. The Bell mater is therefore normally employed for lower differential pressure in gases. The motion of the bell is taken from the housing by various mechanical and electrical methods. The bell is arranged to close the opening at the top or bottom of the housing so that protection is afforded against over range and reversal of pressures.

PRESSURE INLET PRESSURE TIGHT SHAFT

BELL

PRESSURE INLET

FIG- 9 Bell type differential pressure element

5 4 3

PRESSURE

2 1 0 -1

FIG 10

Single Limb Well Type Manometer

Page 7 of 35

VERTICAL COLUMN

ANGL E COLU MN

FIG 11

Inclined Tube Manometer

IN IO N + SE C T O R = Q U A D R A N T A SSE M B L Y

SC A L E

P IV O T P IN IO N

M OVEM ENT SE C T O R

C O N N E C T IN G L IN K
T R A V E L IN G ANGLE

SO C K E T

P R O C E SS P R E SSU R E

FIG 12

Dial type indicating Pressure Gauge using C- Type Bourdon tube

Page 8 of 35

FIG 13

Elastic deformation elements for pressure sensing CHEMICAL PRESSURE GAUGES LIQUID SEALED TYPE: The chemical seal gauge (sometimes called diaphragm Gauge with separator) is used to indicate the Pressure of corrosive liquid or gases which are Incompatible with bourdon tube material. This Instrument also finds use in applications when the process fluid contains solids or is highly viscous. The chemical pressure gauges consists essentially two parts 1. Pressure gauge 2. Liquid sealed unit The sealed unit is provided with Teflon diaphragm or any other material compatible with the corrosive Fluid to be measured and gasket to segregate the Corrosive fluid from the liquid under seal. For remote indication sealed unit with copper capillary or stainless steel capillary extension protected with PVC covering is available as an optional feature.
PRESSURE GUAGE PORTION

M E A S U R IN G IN S T R U M E N T PR O C ESS PRESSU RE

C A P IL L A R Y T U B IN G

L IQ U ID S E A L E D U N IT

TO PRO CESS C A PSULE

FIG 14

Chemical Seal Gauge or Diaphragm Gauge. Process fluid pressure acting on the primary fluid within the capsule, forces the secondary fluid up the tubing. This forces the coil to expand or unwind.
Page 9 of 35

PARTIAL LIST OF FILLING FLUIDS NORMALLY USED IN SEAL TYPE AND REMOTE SEAL TYPE PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS S.No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Table 2 FILLING FLUID TOLUENE DOW CORNING SILICON (DC -200) KEROSENE MERCURY 70% GLYCERIN WITH 30% WATER DOW CORNING SILICON 96.5% GLYCERIN TEMP. RANG -40 to + 200F -30 to + 300F -30 to + 350F -30 to + 700F -30 to + 300F +40 to +70 to 600F 450F

P R E S S U R E G A U G E P O R T IO N

C A P IL L A R Y E X T E N S IO N

L IQ U ID S E A L E D U N IT

FIG 15

Chemical Seal Gauge with Capillary extension SELECTION GUIDE FOR MECHANICAL PRESSURE SENSORS/ ELEMENTS/ TRANSDUCERS MINIMUM RANGE DIAPHRAGM BELLOWS CAPSULE C TYPE BOURDON TUBE SPIRAL TYPE BOURDON TUBE HELICAL TYPE BOURDON TYPE
Table- 3 Page 10 of 35

MAXIMUM RANGE 0 0 0 0 0 0 to to to to to to 400 psi 800 psi 50 psi 100,00 psi 4000 psi 10,000 psi

0 0 0 0 0 0

to to to to to to

2 H2O 5 H2O 1 H2O 12 psi 15 psi 50 psi

ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS/ELEMENTS Any of the Mechanical Elastic deformation elements may be joined to an electrical element to form a pressure transducer. These transducers may produce a change of resistance, inductance, or capacitance. IT is essential that for each unit change of pressure there is a unit change of electrical characteristic. RESISTANCE TYPE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER Resistance Type devices used in pressure transducers are: 1. Strain Gauges 2. Moving Contacts Strain Gauge is simply a fine wire in the form of a grid. When the grid is distorted, the resistance of the wire changes. L R = K ---A Where, K = a constant for the particular kind of wire L = length of wire A = cross sectional area. As the Strain gauge is distorted by the elastic deformation element, its length is increased and its cross-sectional area is reduced. Both of these changes increase the resistance. Because little distortion is required to change the resistance of a strain gauge through its total range, this type of transducer can be used to detect very small movements and, therefore, very small pressure changes. Fig: A Strain Gauge consists of a wire grid bonded to an impregnated paper or ceramic packing.

GRID WIRE LEAD WIRES

CERAMIC OR IMPREGNATED PAPER

FIG- 16 Resistance Type Pressure Transducer

The resistance variation of this strain gauges due to the pressure increase is measured by means of wheat stone

Page 11 of 35

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR RESISTOR

R1 R2

OUTPUT E + AE
R3

EXCITATION POWER SUPPLY

+ -

TERMINAL RESISTANCE ADJUSTMENT

CALIBRATION RESISTOR

FIG- 17 Wheat stone circuit for strain gauges

The Moving Contact Type of Resistance Transducer is most often used with a Bellows because of the force required.

PRESSURE

BELLOW S

S L ID E R

R E S IS T A N C E ELEM ENT S P R IN G

L E A D W IR E S

FIG- 18 Moving contact type of Resistance Transducer is not as Sensitive to small pressure change as the strain gauge.

Page 12 of 35

INDUCTANCE TYPE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER Inductance type pressure Transducers consist of three parts: a Coil, a Movable magnet core, and the elastic deformation element. The element is attached to the core. As the pressure varies, the element causes the core to move within the coil. This type inductance unit used for pressure measurement employs a mutual inductance unit, or differential transformer. In this type, three coils are wound on a single tube. The center coil is connected to an ac source. Voltage is induced in the two outside coil. When the movable core is centered, the induced voltages in each of the outside coils are equal. Moving the core unbalances these voltages, and the difference between them can be measured
FORCE SECONDARY COIL-2
O U T P U T

MOVABLE
R E M O CORE L E V A B C O R E
A -C IN P U T

SECONDARY COIL-1

O U T P U T

FIG- 19 When the movable core is moved off center different voltages result in the two outside Coils, which can be measured as an indication of pressure change.

CAPACITIVE TYPE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER Capacitance Type Pressure Transducers consist of two conductive plates and a dielectric. As the pressure increases, the plate moves, changing the capacitance.
LP

O UTPUT

H IG H FR EQ UENCY O SCILLATOR

HP C APAC ITAN CE PLATES

FIG- 20 Capacitive Type Pressure Transducer Page 13 of 35

PRIMARY COIL

PIEZOELECTRIC TRANSDUCER As pressure is applied to crystals of certain materials a difference in voltage across particular points of their structure occurs.

PR ESSU R E

CR YSTAL

S P R IN G

L E A D W IR E S

A M P L IF I E R

FIG- 21 Piezoelectric Crystals used in combination with bellows as Pressure Transducer

MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VACUUMS AND ULTRA HIGH VACUUMS

Measurement of high vacuums and Ultra high vacuums are very important in the processing of foods, chemicals, drugs and pharmaceuticals. CLASSIFICATION OF HIGH VACUUM SENSORS 1. IONISATION TYPE
1.1. HOT CATHODE IONISATION VACUUM MEASUREMENT 10-3 to 10-11 of mmHg 1.2. COLD CATHODE IONISATION VACUUM MEASUREMENT 10-1 to 10-7 of mmHg SENSORS SENSORS RANGE RANGE OF OF

2. THERMAL
2.1. RESISTANCE WIRE VACUUM SENSORS (PIRANI VACUUM GAUGE) 2.2. THERMOCOUPLE VACUUM SENSORS 2.3. THERMOPILE VACUUM SENSORS

3. MECHANICAL
3.1. McLEOD VACUUM GAUGE Page 14 of 35

1.1 HOT CATHODE IONISATION VACUUM SENSORS RANGE OF MEASUREMENT 10-3 to 10-11 of mmHg
PO SIT IV E IO N C O L L E C T O R IO N CURRENT DETECTOR IN D IC A T IN G M ETER
-

IO N S
+ + + + +

TO VACUUM SY ST E M

ELECTRONS G R ID
-

HOT CATHODE M E T E R FO R ELECTRON CURRENT

+ + +

FIG- 22 Schematics for hot cathode ionization vacuum gauge

Working Principle: Electrons emitted from the hot cathode filament acquire kinetic energy while passing through the grid of the vacuum and collide with the gas molecules from the vacuum system and produce positive ions. These ions are attracted by the collector plate thus forming an ion current. The amount of this ion current flow is directly proportional to the vacuum pressure in the vacuum system and indicated in an Ion Current Detector.
1.2 COLD CATHODE IONISATION VACUUM MEASUREMENT 10-1 to 10-7 of mmHg SENSORS RANGE OF

The cold cathode vacuum gauges are also called as Philips gauges after the name of first manufacturer. The basic difference between the working principle of the Hot Cathode Gauge and Cold Cathode Gauge is that, in the hot filament design the electrons are produced by the hot cathode. Whereas in the cold cathode design the electrons are with drawn from the cathode surface by creating high potential field.
2.1 RESISTANCE WIRE VACUUM DETECTOR (PIRANI VACUUM GAUGE)
COMPENSATING CELL OUTPUT VOLTAGE

VOLTAGE SUPPLY

PROCESS PRESSURE MEASURING CELL

FIG- 23 Resistance wire (Pirani) vacuum detector

The resistance wire or Pirani vacuum detector is based on the principle that heat loss from a resistance wire filament carrying constant current is proportional to the vacuum gas pressure surrounding the filament provided the
Page 15 of 35

process temperature is constant. A second resistance wire which is enclosed in a reference vacuum cell is used to compensate for process temperature variations.
2.2 SINGLE THERMOCOUPLE VACUUM SENSORS

HEATER TH ERM OCOUPLE

O N E P IE C E D E T E C T IO N M ETAL YUBE

D .C P O T E N T IO M E T E R READOUT

1 1 0 V , 5 0 H z , A .C .

FIG- 24 Single Thermocouple Vacuum Gauge

As shown in the figure 24, the Single Thermocouple detector consists of a wire heated by the passage of constant AC or DC current. A thermocouple is placed in the center of the heated element and measures the temperature of the heated element. As the vacuum in the detection tube varies the temperature of the heater filament also varies and is measured in terms of vacuum.
2.3 THERMOPILE VACUUM SENSORS
P R O C E S S C O N N E C T IO N TO V AC U UM SY STEM

A H EATED HERM OCOUPLE

UNHEATED CO M PENSATO R THERM OCOUPLE H EATED THERM OCOUPLE

O N E P IE C E D E T E C T IO N M ETAL YUBE

D .C READOUT

1 1 0 V , 5 0 H z , A .C .

FIG- 25 Multiple Thermocouple (Thermopile) vacuum gauge Page 16 of 35

By using Thermopiles i.e. several thermocouples connected in series, the sensitivity of the vacuum gauge can be increased. As seen from the figure25 the thermocouples A & C are heated by low voltage alternating current thus combining the heater and the temperature sensing functions. A change in process vacuum pressure results in a change of thermopile temperature. A 3rd unheated thermocouple B is included in the circuit to compensate for operating process temperature variations. 3.1 McLEOD VACUUM GAUGE
M E R C U R Y R E S E R V O IR

C H E M IC A L TRAP FO R C O N DEN SABLE VAPO UR

100 500 1000 2000 3000 4000

5000 6000

C A P IL L A R Y A N D P L A T T IN U M W IR E

FIG- 26 MCLEOD GAUGE

The McLeod Gauge elements are shown schematically in Figure. This type of gauge is generally used as a primary standard for the measurement of high vacuums. It has the advantages that it is simple to use and that its calibration is the same for nearly for all non- condensable gases. The gauge is filled with the gas and by periodically rotating the assembly by means of the some electric motor. When the gauge is returned to the vertical position, the trapped gas is compressed to a smaller volume by the action of the mercury. At this pressure, the height of the mercury column in the capillary tube is directly related to the vacuum. The capillary tube contains a fine platinum wire, the total resistance of which depends on the height of the mercury around it. The resistance of the platinum wire is than measured by a resistance thermometer type instrument. With this gauge vapour traps are usually necessary to eliminate condensable vapor from the vacuum system. A few gases which deviate from the ideal gas law at low pressure require special calibration in the McLeod gauge.
10 10 10 10 10 2 1 0
hot wire gages
bellows gages
hot filament ion gages

-1 -2 -3 -4

FIG- 27 Pressure Gauge Spectrum

10 10

P R E S S U R E IN m m O F M E R C U R Y

Page 17 of 35

HINTS FOR SELECTION INSTRUMENTS 1. FOR LONGER LIFE

AND

USE

PRESSURE

GAUGES

To ensure longer life and accuracy, gauges should be loaded only upto of the total range with constant load. In case of alternating load, it should be loaded only upto 2/3 of the total range. Only Vacuum gauges can be loaded to the full scale range. For Compound gauges the highest effective range in both directions for constant load and for alternating load should be of the total range respectively 2. TEMPERATURE PROTECTION A) Gauges shall not be exposed to excessive heat or cold. They should not be mounted on hot boiler casings or hot machine parts and should be placed at some distance from boilers or other sources of heat. When exposed to frost bourdon tubes which contain water are liable to burst. . B.) Gauges should be connected to the tapping point by means of a piping which is sufficiently long to keep the gauge and bourdon tube cold. If the gauge cannot be grasped by hand without discomfort, it is working at a too high temperature. Working fluids at a temperature exceeding 100 Degree C should not be allowed to enter the bourdon tube. . C.) It is essential that steam should be prevented from entering the bourdon tube. This is effected by interposing a siphon in which the steam condenses between the gauge and the tapping point. The Syphon should be filled with water before the gauge is put into service. 3. POSITION OF THE GAUGE Normal gauges should be installed with the face of the dial in a vertical position while in other positions the weight of the working parts may influence the reading. 4. RAPIDLY FLUCTUATING PRESSURE, SHOCK PRESSURE AND VIBRATION Gauges cannot be expected to have a normal life if they are used without protection in any of the following conditions a.) Pressure changing in valve very quickly or fluctuating rapidly b.) Pressure applied or released very quickly so as to produce shock or heating. c.) Pressure oscillating with high frequency, producing a destructive pressure ripple. d.) Mechanical vibration transmitted to the gauge through either mounting piping or

e.) If a machine on which the gauge would normally be mounted vibrates, it is preferable to mount the gauge with adequately flexible piping on a wall or stanchion nearby
Page 18 of 35

MATERIAL SELECTION GUIDE FOR PRESSURE GAUGES An Industrial Pressure Gauge selection is based on a number of factors. Though important are the requirements of accuracy , caste style and other features of any gauge, the most important information is choice of materials for bourdon tube, Diaphragm, movement and bezels depending upon the media. The details given below should help you in appropriate material selection for most common fluids encountered in various industries. However, this legend is only to be used as a guide, the final choice should take into accounting all other process parameters, for which you are the best judge.

MATERIAL
APPLICATION BRONZE STEEL #316 STAIN LESS MONEL STEEL DIAPHRAGM SEALSTEEL

ACETONE ACETIC ACID ACETIC ANHYDRIDE ACETYLENE ACROLEIN AIR ALCOHOLS ALKALI CLEANERS ALUM CHLORIDE ALUM HYDROXIDE ALUM SULFATE AMMONIA AMMONIUM CHLORIDE AMMONIUM NITRATE AMMONIUM SULFATE ANILINE ARGON BEER BAUXITE & WATER BENZIDINE BEZENE

Page 19 of 35

BENZOIC ACID BENZOL BLACK LIQUOR BORIC ACID BRINES BROMIDE BROMINE BUTANE BUTYL ALCOHOL BUTYRIC ACID CALCIUM CHLORIDE CALCIUM HYDROXIDE CARBOLIC ACID CARBON DIOXIDE CARBON MONOXIDE CARBON TET CARBONATED WATER CAUSTIC SODA CAUSTIC PHOSPATE CEMENT SLURRY CHLORINE DIOXIDE CHLORINE DRY CHLORINE MOIST CHLOROFORM DRY CHROMIC ACID CIDER CITRIC ACID COFFEE CORN OIL CRUDE OIL ( SWEET )

DETERGENTS ETHANOL ETHYL ACETATE ETHYLENE OXIDE FATTY ACIDS FERRIC CHLORIDE FERRIC SULFATE FERROUS CHLORIDE FERROUS SULFATE FLUORINE FORMALDEHYDE FORMIC ACID FREONS FURFURAL GASOLINE GLYCERINE HYDRO BROMIC ACID HYDROCHLORIC ACID HYDRO FLUORIC ACID HYDRO FLUOSILIC ACID HYDROGEN HYDROGEN PEROXIDE HYDROGEN SULPHATE ( SULPHURIC ACID) HYDROGEN SULPITE ( SULPHUROUS ACID )

Page 20 of 35

HYDROXY ACETIC ACID KEROSENE LACQUERS LACTIC ACID LINSEED OIL LIME WATER MAGNESIUM CHLORIDE MERCURIC CHLORIDE MERCURY METHYLENE CHLORIDE MILK NAPHTHA NAPHTHALENE NICKEL CHLORIDE NITRIC ACID NITROGEN OLEIC ACID OLEUM OXALIC ACID OXYGEN PALMITIC ACID PER CHLORIC ACID PHOSPHORIC ACID PHOTOGRAPHIC BLEACH PICRIC ACID PROPANE QUININE ROCHELLE SALT SEA WATER SILICATE SOLUTION SILVER NITRATE SOAPS SODIUM CARBONATE SODIUM CHLORIDE SODIUM CHROMATE SODIUM CYANIDE SODIUM PHOSPHATE SODIUM SULPHIDE SOUR OILS STEAM STEARIC ACID SULFUR CHLORIDE SULFUR DIOXIDE SULFUR TRI OXIDE SUFURIC ACID SULFUROUS ACID TALL OIL TANIC ACID TARTARIC ACID TIN CHLORIDE TOLUENE TRITIUM GAS TURPENTINE VARNISH WATER WHISKY ZINC CHLORIDE ZINC SUPHATE HYDROGEN SULPHIDE

Page 21 of 35

PARTIAL LIST OF MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION FOR WETTED PARTS IN INSTRUMENTATION (TO BE SELECTED IN ACCORDANCE TO THE PROCESS MEDIUM) COPPER BRASS PHOSPHOR BRONZE CARBON STEEL 304 STAINLESS STEEL 316 STAINLESS STEEL ALUMINIUM LEAD MONEL NICKEL INCONEL HASTELLOY ZIRCONIUM TANTALUM SILVER PLATINUM TITANIUM MOLYBDENUM

Note: Materials like Teflon, Nitrile Rubber, Neoprene Rubber etc., is Used for lining and coating purposes.

Page 22 of 35

PRESSURE GAUGE DATA SHEET

CUSTOMER PROJECT SERIAL NO. QUANTITY PROCESS DETAILS SERVICE PRESSURE MAX NOR MIN MAX NOR MIN TEMPERATUREC TAG NO. GENERAL DIAL SIZE MODEL NO. DIAL RANGE MARKINGS GAUGE TYPE ACCURACY BOURDON-SOCKET BOURDON TYPE BOURDON MATERIAL SOCKET MATERIAL BOURDON SOCKET BUILT-IN PULSATION/SURGE CHECK PULSATION/SURGE/CHECK MATERIAL MOVEMENT MOVEMENT MATERIAL HAIRSPRING GUARD DIAL / POINTER POINTER MATERIAL POINTER COLOUR ZERO ADJUSTMENT DIAL MATERIAL DIAL BACKGROUND/MARKING WINDOW MATERIAL CASE/RING RING TYPE RING MATERIAL CASE TYPE CASE MATERIAL MOUNTING OTHERS CONNECTION TYPE PROTECTION CLASS GAUGE COLOUR ENQUIRY NO. QUOTE PAGE

STANDARD LIQUID FILLED REMOTE DIAPHARAGM SEAL +- 1% +/- 25% +-0.5% +- 0.01% C HELICAL 316SS PHOSPHER BRONZE 403SS MONEL 316SS BRASS 403SS MONEL TIG WELDED SILVER BRAZED YES NO 316SS BRASS St.St. YES ANODIZED AI. BLACK YES ALUMINIUM WHITE/BLACK HI-TEMP ACRYLIC BAYONET NO

Lo COPPER AL SAFETY SOLID FRONT Lo COPPER AL STEM FLUSH PANELM SURFACE BOTTOM CENTRE BACK LO BACK WEATHER PROOF BLACK Page 23 of 35

FLAPPER-NOZZLE PRINCIPLE (BAFFLE) The design of pneumatic transmitters, controllers, and all other pneumatic instruments is based on the Flapper Nuzzle principle. A Baffle-Nozzle amplifier is the primary detector in almost all pneumatic transmitters and controllers. Its function is to convert mechanical motion to a pneumatic signal. Fig. Shows a baffle-0nozzle actuated by pressure in an input bellows. Because the baffle is often mounted on a pivoting element, this instrument is also called a flapper-nozzle amplifier. In principle, the operation of a baffle-nozzle is quite simple. The output increases from a minimum value to supply pressure as decreasing nozzle clearance blocks the flow of air.

SUPPLY RESTRICTIO N 0.012 in (0.3m m ) DIA

(BAFFLE)
NO ZZLE 0.032 in (0.8m m ) DIA NO ZZLE CLEARANCE

AIR SUPPLY 20 PSIG (138 K Pa)

BAFFLE FLAPPER

IN PUT PRESSU RE PI

O UTPUT PRESSURE Po

FIG- 28 Flapper Nozzle Principle

PNEUMATIC TRANSMISSION Pneumatic Transmission is a telemetering method in which analog information is transmitted as Air Pressure. In a Typical Pneumatic Transmission System, a pneumatic Transmitter located in the field converts a process measurement, such as a level or temp, to a proportional Pneumatic Pressure. The Pressure signal is transmitted to a pneumatic Indicator, Recorder, or Controller, usually located in the Control Room. In the Case of a Pneumatic Control Loop, the controller, responding to the transmitted measurement signal, sends a return signal to the field to position a final control element, such as a pneumatically operated valve. See Fig.1.

Page 24 of 35

PLANT INSTRUM ENT AIR SU PPLY 100 PSI (700 kPa) FILTER R EG ULA TO R A /S

FIELD SCALE 0-100

TEM PERA TURE TRANSM ITTER 0.100 3.15 PSI (20.100 kPa)

A /S

20 PSI (140 kPa)

1/4 in O R 3/8 in Cu TUBE TRANSM ISSIO N LINES

RECO RDER

ALARM (PRESS. SW ITC H )

FILTER REG ULATO R

A/S 20 PSI
A /S

(140 kPa)

VALVE PO SITIO NER or VO LU M E BO O STER C ON TRO L VALVE

3-15 psig (20.100 kPa) CO NTRO LLER

A/S AIR SUPPLY FIG- 29 Typical Pneumatic Transmission System

PNEUMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Pneumatic Transmission systems, USING 1/4 or 3/8 (~ 6.4 or 9.5-mm) plastic or metal tubing, with Transmission distances up to 1000ft. (~ 305m), are widely employed in the Process Industries. Transmission lags on closed-loop automatic control. Generally, Pneumatic or Electrical Instruments can provide the same functions with equal accuracy. Because of the delay in Pneumatic transmission, electrical system may be preferred for installations with long transmission distances. However, pneumatic instruments offer certain other advantages, again, of particular interest in the process Industries. ADVANTAGES OF PNEUMATIC TRANSMISSION 1. Pneumatic Instruments are inherently explosion-proof. Electrical Instruments must meet stringent safety specifications for use in hazardous areas. 2. Pneumatic Systems provide Protection against power failure. With Compressed Air storage or turbine-driven compressors, a pneumatic system can maintain process control even during an electric power failure. 3. Pneumatic Systems are directly operated with Air-Operated Valves. AirOperated valves are by far the most common final control elements in the process Industries. Electrical Control Systems require an electric-to-pneumatic transducer for pneumatic valve operation. PNEUMATIC SIGNAL RANGES 0% 3 0.2 0.2 0.2 to to to to 100% 15 Psig 1.0 kg/cm2 1.0 bar 100K Pa 20.68 19.61 19.99 19.99 to to to to 103.42 98.04 99.97 99.97 N/ m2 N/ m2 N/ m2 N/ m2
Page 25 of 35

AIR SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS AIR QUALITY To ensure accurate and reliable operation of pneumatic instruments, a clean, dry, regulated air supply must be provided, solid or liquid contaminants in compressed air can log the small passages that are a part of all pneumatic instruments, causing loss of accuracy or even complete failure. Moisture in the air, condensing and freezing, can cause the same problems. Corrosive contaminants and oil in compressed air can damage metal and plastic instrument components, resulting in unreliable operation and excessive maintenance costs. For these reasons, considerable care is given to the design and maintenance of instrument air supply systems. In most plants, separate air supply systems, including compressors, filters, and moisture revoval equipment, are used for instrument air. AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE The Instrument air Supply Pressure must be regulated maintain accurate operation with a typical pneumatic transmitter, a change of 5 Psi (33 kPa) in supply pressure will change the Transmitter output by about 1%, causing a measurement uncertainty. As shown in Fig.1, a separate filter regulator is used for each field instrument. This provides on final stage of filtering and moisture removal, as well as a stable instrument supply pressure. In a control panel, a single high-capacity regulator & filter set is used to supply all instruments through an air supply header. A second regulator and filter set is usually provided for standby service.

MOTION BALANCE AND FORCE BALANCE DESIGNS USING BELLOWS AND DIAPHRAGMS
A) MOTION BALANCE ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSORS When absolute pressure is to be sensed with bellows elements, it normally involves two bellows, one for measuring and the other for compensating. The compensating element is fully evacuated and sealed, while the sensing element is connected to the process being measured. The figure illustrates the beam balance version of this design, and the other figure shows the opposed bellows design. In either arrangement, an increase in process pressure causes the measuring bellows to extend, which results in an increase of readout through the motion balance mechanism. .

FIG- 30 (Motion balance absolute pressure sensors)

Beam balance bellows sensor

Page 26 of 35

FIG- 31

Opposite bellows Detector

(Motion balance absolute pressure sensors)

FORCE BALANCE ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSORS

The force balance detector shown in fig is available as a pneumatic or electronic transmitter, but not as direct indicator because there is no motion to drive a pointer. For local indication, an output gauge can be installed. The pressure being sensed is applied to the inside of the bellows within the capsule. The space on the outside of the bellows is evacuated, thus providing a zero absolute pressure reference. The process pressure exerts a force on the capsule that is applied to the lower end of the force bar. Due to the force balance nature of the unit, the force bar is constantly balance; therefore, the sensing bellows do not move as long as the pressure detected is within the range of the instrument. If the range of the capsule is exceeded, the bellows extend to the right where they are supported by the capsule backup plate.
T o E le c tr o n ic o r P n e u m a t ic T r a n s d u c e r /T r a n s m itte r

FORCE BAR

FULC R UM & SEAL

EVACUATED SPA CE PR O CESS C O N N E C T IO N

BELLOW S

FIG- 32

Force Balance Absolute Pressure Sensors

Page 27 of 35

MOTION BALANCE SENSORS WITH ATMOSPHERIC REFERENCE

When Bellows are used as the pressure sensing element it is desirable to add a spring for ranging and accurate characterization. Without the calibration, spring temperature effects and work hardening of the bellows would contribute to loss of accuracy. The following figures illustrate designs using single bellows elements. In both designs, the inside of the bellows ids open to Atmosphere, which represents the pressure reference, and the outside is exposed to the process pressure. The difference in the two designs involve only the location of the calibration springs and the method applied in transmitting bellows motion to the readout pointer. The spring loaded metal bellows are compressed by the process pressure forcing the lower end of the bellows upward against the opposing force of the spring. Thos vertical movement is transmitted through suitable linkage or a torque tube assembly to the pointer. These units can also act as differential pressure detectors if the inside of the bellows is connected to a process pressure instead of being left open to the Atmosphere. Dual bellows elements are also available as differential pressure sensors.

P o in te r

S c a le

C A L IB R A T E D S P R IN G

BELLOW S

PRO CESS PRESSURE

FIG- 33

Bellows Sensor with Calibration Spring

BELLOWS
STOP

CALIBRATED SPRING

SCALE

PROCESS CONNECTION

TORQUE TUBE

FIG-34

Bellows Detector with Calibration Spring

Page 28 of 35

D) FORCE BALANCE PRESSURE SENSORS WITH ATMOSPHERIC REFERENCE The following figures illustrates two of the bellows element gauge pressure sensors. When relatively low pressures need to be measured, the process pressure is introduced into the inside of the bellows, while for higher pressure the outside surface of the bellows is exposed to the process pressure. The force of the process pressure is applied to the lower end of the force bar. Due to the force balance nature of the unit, the force bar is constantly balance; therefore, the sensing bellows do not move as long as the pressure detected is within the range of the instrument. These units are available as transmitters only, because they do not have enough motion to drive a local pointer.

FIG- 35

Force Balance Low Gauge Pressure Sensor

FIG- 36

Force Balance Gauge Pressure Detector

Page 29 of 35

ACTUATING SIGNAL (INPUT) LINK B

SPRING

ADJUSTABLE LINKAGE NOZZLE

FEEDBACK (OUTPUT)

AIR SUPPLY RELAY PNEUMATIC OUTPUT

FIG- 37 Motion Balance Schematic

PNEUMATIC OUTPUT MEASUREMENT SIGNAL FEEDBACK (OUTPUT)

AIR SUPPLY RELAY

NOZZLE

ADJUSTABLE

SPRING

SET SIGNAL

FIG- 38 Force Balance Schematic

Page 30 of 35

NOZZLE R A N G E D E PR E SSO R A IR SU PPL Y RANGE ELEVATOR RANGE ROD F U L C R U M & SP A N RANGE W HEEL FO R C E B A R O U T PU T Z E R O A D JU ST M E N T

L .P

H .P

FIG- 39 Force Balance DP Cell with adjustment shown

DEAD WEIGHT PISTON GAUGES

As illustrated in Figure these are piston gauge in which the test pressure is balanced against a known weight that is applied to a known piston area. The test pressure is applied by the secondary piston. The principal purpose of these freepiston gauges is a primary standard to calibrate other pressure sensors. Piston gauges, or dead weight tester, are normally provided with a number of interchangeable piston assemblies and NBS certified weight. They can be used to calibrate at pressure levels as low as 5 PSIG or as high as 100,000 PSIG.

DEAD W E IG H T GAUGE U N D ER TEST P R IM A R Y P IS T O N C Y L IN D E R

SCREW

S E C O N D A R Y P IS T O N

D E A D W E IG H T P IS T O N T E S T
FIG- 40

Dead Weight Piston Test

Page 31 of 35

APPLICATIONS INSTRUMENTS

DIFFERENTIAL

PRESSURE

GAUGES/

1) FLOW RATE Flow rate can be measured with Differential Pressure Gauges (DPG) / Instruments if DPG instrument is installed across a sharp edged orifice plate in a pipeline, the gauge can indicate flow rate with the help of data on pressure drop verses flow rate. DPG instrument with 2 SPST switches can be used for high and low flow indications. The pressure tapping has to be at proper location in the line to avoid clogging due to moisture, dust etc. The location of the orifice also has to be as recommended by the orifice manufacturer.

DPG

PIPE

ORIFICE

2) AIR FILTER & COLLECTOR / BAG FILTER MONITORING

DPG Lo EXH AUST B A G F IL T E R BLOW ER DPG Hi Hi

Lo H EATER M A T E R IA L H O T A IR F L O W

In pharmaceutical, food & chemical processes, small batches of compounds are to be dried. Dryers specially made for this purpose use hot dry air. Air is sucked from the room through filters and blown over heater coils. The blower forces this hot air through the compound to be dried. Part of the compound gets carried along with the air while being removed by an exhaust blower. A collector / bag filter is used to collect it. DPG instruments are used for pre filter as well as collector filter to monitor clogging. DPG instrument with switch can start cleaning cycle of collector filter at preset differential pressure. 3) STRAINER / FILTER MONITORING DPG instruments are used to monitor pressure drop across strainer used in line with positive displacement flow meters. Petroleum oil companies & chemical plants etc. use positive displacement flow meters to measure volume. Contaminated fluids can damage these expensive and critical flow meters. These meters need filtered fluids for proper functioning, so trainers are used. Positive displacement flow meter manufacturers specify maximum pressure drop across the meter including strainer increases than specified, the pumping energy cost increases.
DPG Hi Lo

POSITIVE

FILTER

DISPLACEM T EN FLOW ETER M

Page 32 of 35

DPG Hi Lo

D P G W IT H S W IT C H

F IL T E R E L E M E N T F IL T E R C A T R ID G E

S E L F C L E A N IN G F IL T E R

4) COLLECTOR / BAG MONITORING

AIR FLOW

SUCTION

DPG DUST

Hi BAG FILTERS

ST LADEN AIR

EXHAUST BLOWER

Bag / collector filters are used in material handling equipment in many industries. DPG instruments are used to measure pressure drop across these filters, which get chocked during use. The operating range of these filters is typically between 50 to 150 mm of water. Initially the filter has a drop around 50 mm (approx.) of water across them. During operation, the differential pressure across collector filter increases. Filter cleaning process is then started till the differential pressure falls to an acceptable level. In such applications, instrument with a switch is very useful to initiate the cleaning cycle. 5) BLOWER PERFORMANCE Air flow through blower needs to be monitored depending on the down steam conditions and requirement of air. In order to have a energy efficient air handling system. DPG instrument can monitor differential pressure across the blower or the static pressure at the outlet of blower and give indications of low / high flow at preset pressure limits. This is useful foe monitoring blower performance or controlling air flow.

BLOW ER DPG Lo Hi

Page 33 of 35

DPG

6) PUMP PERFORMANCE Diaphragm type DPG instruments can be used to monitor pump performance. Addition of switch is very useful to monitor pumps installed at remote locations. The malfunctioning of a pump / blockage in a pipeline will lead to increase / decrease in differential pressure. This change in differential pressure can be used to warn the operator for high / low settings.

PUMP

7) LEVEL MEASUREMENT DPG instruments can be used as Lo liquid level indicators. With high pressure port connected to a tapping at the bottom of tank and low port kept open to atmosphere. DPG instruments calibrated in units like Hi mm, inches of water etc. can be used to measure liquid level as a function of head which is specified by the user. If the tanks LIQUID TANK are closed / pressurised, the low pressure port can be connected to the top of the tank. Regardless of the tank pressure, liquid inside will give similar head as in open tank and the instrument will indicate level. To measure the correct level in open tanks, the instrument should be mounted at the bottom level of the tank. 8) CONDITION MONITORING OF HEATING / COOLING SYSTEM DPG instruments can be used across heat exchangers to measure pressure difference in transformer oil cooling system. Here heat exchanger uses a high pressure on one side to ensure direction of leakage and avoid mixing of water with oil. This is essential for safety of transformer. In transformer oil cooling system, where oil is at a higher temperature is passed through heat exchanger with water as cooling medium. Instruments with switch in such application, provides a signal for alarm at a preset value of pressure difference. Other than above, DPG is also used to measure differential pressure across heat exchanger where pr. drop increases due to scaling.
DPG Hi Lo

DPG

HEAT EXCHANGER

Page 34 of 35

CLASSIFICATION OF PRESSURE MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

1) LIQUID COLUMN ELEMENTS o o o o U TUBE MANOMETER WELL MANOMETER INCLINED MANOMETER LIQUID BAROMETER

2) ELASTIC ELEMENTS o o BOURDON TUBES DIAPHRAGM

o
o

METALLIC CAPSULE BELLOW

3) PRESSURE TRANDUCER o o o o o o o PIEZOELECTRIC TRANSDUCER CAPACITANCE TRANSDUCER STRAIN GAUGES TRANSDUCER POTENTIOMETRIC TRANSDUCER ROSEMOUNT WIRE TRANSDUCER MAGNETIC (INDUCTIVE TRANSDUCER) & MAGNETIC (RELUCTIVE TRANSDUCER) MAGNETIC TRANSDUCER

4) HIGH VACCUM MEASUREMENT o o o o THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY GAUGE PIRANI GAUGE IONISATION ( HOT CATHODE ) IONISATION ( COLD CATHODE )

5) HIGH PRESSURE SENSORS (GREATER THAN 1400 bars) o o o o o o OPTICAL - 4338 bars DEAD WEIGHT PISTON GAUGE TYPICAL 5 psig to 100000 psig (ie. 6896 Bars) PIEZOELECTRIC, MAGNETIC & HELICAL BOURDON TRANSDUCERS (UPTO 6896 Bars ) BULK MODULES, STRAIN GAUGES. MANAGING CELLS UPTO 13.793 Bars CAPACITANCE, POTENTIOMETRIC, INDUCTIVE & RELUCTIVE TRANSDUCERS UPTO 10000Psig STRAIN GAUGES EVEN GREATER THAN 100000 Psig

Page 35 of 35

TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
PRINCIPLES OF TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
1. BASIC THERMODYNAMICS CONCEPTS Basic general, together. Thermodynamics is essential in Temperature measurement. In increased temperature and increased molecular activity go Higher temperature can cause: Metals to expand, Liquids to expand Solids to melt, and Electrical properties (resistance) to change.

2. PRINCIPLES OF TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT This involves two concepts; one is that a change in temperature causes a change in physical dimensions of a material. The second is that a change in temperature causes a change in electrical properties, such as resistance or voltage. 3. TEMPERATURE SENSORS These are the actual elements that sense the temperature change, such as a bimetal or liquid-filled system. 4. TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS These include the temperature sensor as well as the auxiliary equipment needed to produce a usable output. 5. TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS These are devices that produce a scaled output (3-15 psi or mA) for a certain range of temperature input. 6. TEMPERATURE SCALES Celsius/Fahrenheit/Kelvin/Rankine are simply different scales of the same thing temperature.
B O IL IN G P O IN T

4-20

-H 2O

212

100

3 7 3 .1 5
F R E E Z IN G P O IN T

6 7 1 .6 9

-H 2O

2 7 3 .1 5

4 9 1 .6 9

ABSO LUTE ZERO

FIG -1 Temperature Scales

4 5 9 .6 9

2 7 3 .1 6

F a h r e n h e it

c e lc iu s

k e lv in

R a n k in e

Page 1 of 41

HEAT AND TEMPERATURE :

Heat is a form of energy. When heat is applied to a substance, the activity of the molecules of that substance is increased. The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one pound of water one degree Fahrenheit is called British Thermal Unit (BTU). The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one pound of any substance one degree Fahrenheit is called the Thermal capacity of that substance. The ratio of the Thermal capacity of a substance to the thermal capacity of water is called Specific heat of that substance. Specific heat of some solids and liquids are given in the table below. Specific heat has no unit of measurement, but is the same numerically as the thermal capacity.
MATERIAL ALCOHOL COPPER GLASS MERCURY PLATINUM Table-1 Table of Specific Heats SPECIFIC HEAT 0.59 0.093 0.14 0.033 0.032

The amount of Heat (Q) required to raise the Temperature of a mass (M) of a substance having a thermal capacity of C from Temperature T1 to T2 is expressed: BTU lbs Deg F Q = M x C (T2-T1) Temperature measurements determine the amount of heat possessed by a body at a particular instant. Temperature scales provide a means to express this in numbers All solids expand when heat is applied to them. When a metal rod is heated uniformly along its entire length, each unit of its length gets longer. This increase in length per unit of length per degree of temperature rise is termed the Coefficient of Linear expansion. The Co-efficient has different values for different materials. A table of typical coefficients of linear expansion () is shown. From the table it can be learnt that each inch of a copper strip becomes 1.000009 inches long when heated one degree Fahrenheit.
MATERIAL / F / F

ALCOHOL WATER MERCURY GLASS COPPER PLATINUM INVAR

Table-2 Table of Co-efficients

0.00061 0.000115 0.0001 0.000005 0.000009 0.000005 0.0000008 0.000015 0.000039 0.000016 0.0000027

Page 2 of 41

LT2 = LT1[1+a(T2-T1)] The expansion of a solid due to heat affects not only its length, but also its dimension. The thermal expansion of the volume of substance can be expressed. VT2 = VT1[1+b(T2-T1)]

is the Coefficient of Volumetric expansion and is approximately equal to 3. Liquids also expand, when heated according to the same equation. Coefficients of volumetric expansion of various materials are also listed in the table.
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT - MECHANICAL MERCURY- IN - GLASS THERMOMETERS From the Table 2 it can be seen that the volumetric expansion of mercury is over six times greater than that of glass. The Mercury-in-glass Thermometer depends on this inequality for its operation. Such a thermometer consists of a glass tube of very fine bore joined to a reservoir at the bottom and sealed at the top. A measured quantity of mercury is enclosed.

10 0

1 00

8 6 4 2 0

0 0 0 0 0
12 10

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 10

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 6 4 2 0

S T R A IG H T TYPE

ANGLE TYPE
(A N G L E 9 0)

ANG LE TYPE
(A N G L E 4 5)

When the thermometer is heated, the mercury expands much more than the glass and therefore is forced to rise up the tubing. For each particular temperature, the mercury rises to a certain point. Using a regulated bath, which can establish and maintain temperatures very closely, reference marks can be made on the thermometer. The spaces between these marks are evenly divided. The more reference marks, the more accurately can the thermometer be read. Some Mercury-in-glass thermometers are calibrated for immersion and others for partial immersion. For accurate readings, the thermometer should be immersed as recommended by the manufacturer. The most common type of mercury-in-glass thermometer used for process measurements is the Industrial thermometer. In this type, the glass tube is unmarked; the graduations are engraved on metals. Both the tube and scales are enclosed in a metal case. The lower portion of the glass tube extends out of the bottom of the case, into a metal bulb chamber with an external pipe thread permitting it to be screwed into pipeline. The industrial thermometer is available in vertical, horizontal, or oblique angle types. For better thermal conductivity between the metal bulb chamber and the glass thermometer, the chamber contains a liquid with excellent heat transfer characteristics. To prevent damage to the thermometer, and to permit replacement without draining the process pipeline, the chamber may be screwed
Page 3 of 41

into a secondary chamber called a Separable socket. This however slows down the response of the thermometer to temperature changes. THERMAL TIME CONSTANTS Thermal time constants are involved in temperature measurement because it takes time for heat to transfer from one point to another.
INSULATION

PROTECTING TUBE OR SHEATH THERMOWELL

FILLING FLUID

SENSOR

FIG -3 Heat transfer in Temperature Measurement

FR 6 3 .2 % o f F R

FIG -4 Time Constant in Temperature Measurement

Page 4 of 41

FIG. 5 Response of Thermometer well in moving liquid PROTECTION TUBE A tube like assembly in which the thermocouple/ RTD/ filled-in system bulb is installed in order to protect the element from the harsh environments. THERMOWELL A threaded or flanged closed end tube which is mounted directly to the process or vessel designed to protect the thermocouple/ RTD/ Filled-in system bulb from the process surroundings

BIMETAL THERMOMETERS With the development of alloys whose coefficients of thermal expansion can be controlled, the bimetal thermometer has become a most dependable temperature-measuring device. One of these is a nickel alloy named invar, which hardly expands at all when heated. Another nickel alloy is available which expands considerably when heated. Welded together and rolled to the desired thickness, these alloys provide the bimetallic material used in the modern thermometer. Alloys of widely differing rates of thermal expansion are used for short temperature ranges those of less differing expansion for longer ranges.

Page 5 of 41

The term used to describe the thermal activity of a bimetal is flexivity. The actual movement of bimetal strip is proportional to its flexivity. With one end fixed, a straight bimetal strip deflects in proportion to its temperature, to the square of its length, and inversely with its thickness. The angular deflection of a pointer attached to a helical bimetal is determined by the same factors. The modern bimetal thermometer employs a multiple helix arrangement, or coils within coils. This construction permits the use of long bimetallic element in a small space. One end of the bimetal is usually fixed to the bottom of the stem and the other end to shaft to which the pointer is attached. Bimetal thermometers are available with slender stems for laboratory use and thicker stems for industrial use (see fig 6a & 6b). Special thermometers with alarm contacts and with secondary pointers for indicating maximum or minimum temperatures are also available.

FIG 6b

FIG 6a

Bimetal Thermometers are made for precision laboratory work as well as for a variety of industrial purposes.

PRESSURE SPRING THERMOMETERS There are four classes of pressure spring thermometers, as listed by The Instrument Society of America standards: CLASS 1. LIQUID-FILLED (EXCEPT MERCURY) CLASS 2. VAPOUR PRESSURE CLASS 3. GAS - FILLED CLASS 4. MERCURY-FILLED CLASS 1 & 4: LIQUID-FILLED AND MERCURY-FILLED THERMOMETERS Both types operate on the principle of Thermal expansion, just as the Mercury-in-glass thermometer does. When the bulb is immersed in a heated substance, the liquid expands causing the pressure spring to unwind (fig 7). The indicating, recording or controlling mechanisms are attached to the pressure spring. It should be noted that the liquid or mercury is put into the system under pressure and completely fills it.
Page 6 of 41

The volume of liquid in the bulb determines the measuring range of the system. The wider the range, the greater the required volume. The bulb expands with temperature, but since this expansion is small compared to the expansion of the liquid, the effect is negligible. If the coefficients of volumetric expansion of the metal and the liquid vary similarly, the overall effect is to reduce the net expansion for a given range. Slight variations in the coefficients can be accommodated in the calibration of the thermometer.

F IL L IN G T U B E BOURDON TUBE

W ELD C A P IL L A R Y

M ERCURY

BULB

HEAT

FIG 7 In a totally filled system, pressure develops when the bulb is heated since the fluid has no room for expansion

COMPENSATED THERMOMETER SYSTEMS

The object of the thermometer is to detect changes of temperature at the bulb. There is, however, the possibility of error caused by variation of temperature along the tubing or at the pressure spring itself. The bulb of the liquid filled system is designed to contain most of the liquid. In long systems, however, the volume of the tubing may be great enough to allow temperature changes along the tubing. Several methods have been devised to eliminate such errors. Systems employing these modifications are termed compensated systems. Fully compensated systems (fig 8) employ a second pressure spring and tubing. This tubing is not connected to the bulb but instead is terminated at that point. By means of linkage, the motion of the compensating pressure spring is made equal and opposite to the motion of the primary pressure spring. If temperature along the primary tubing varies, causing expansion of the primary spring, the expansion of the compensating spring due to the variation acts to cancel out the resulting motion of the indicating mechanism. The only motion remaining is caused by expansion of the fluid in the bulb.

Page 7 of 41

M C R SPA E ER U Y C
COM PENSATINGSPIRAL

COM PENSATING TUBING

M EASURINGSPIRAL DEAD END

SO W E LID IR

M EASURING TUBING

C PILLA YTU A R BE

FIG-8 The tubing of the second pressure spring (Compensating spiral) in series with the first does not enter the bulb
MEASURING SPIRAL BIMETALLIC STRIP

FIG-9 Self-compensating capillary tubing encloses a solid wire, expansion and contraction of which compensates for changes of temperature along the tubing.

FIG-10 Compensating bimetallic strip overcomes error caused by temperature change of the pressure spring

Another method of compensation involves the use of a special type of tubing containing a solid wire (fig 9). As the tubing expands due to temperature variations, the wire expands so that the effective volume of the system remains constant. Variations in the temperature surrounding the pressure spring require correction. The thermometer must be compensated to nullify these variations which will affect correct readings of process temperature. This can be accomplished by including a bimetal strip (fig 10) in the mechanism joining the pressure spring to the indicator. This bimetal acts to move the indicator in a direction opposite to that caused by the expansion of the pressure spring, but only enough to eliminate the small amount of movement due to temperature changes at the spring. Another method employs a secondary pressure spring without tubing (fig 11). This secondary spring is part of the primary system, but the linkage connecting them is arranged so that the movement of the secondary spring cancels out the movement of the primary spring caused by changes of temperature at the springs.

Page 8 of 41

FIG-11

COMPENSATING SPIRAL

COMPENSATING TUBING

MEASURING SPIRAL

MEASURING TUBING

Secondary spring, identical with and linked to the primary spring, is used to cancel out any movement of the primary due to temperature change at the spring, which is not related to process temperature.

CLASS 3 - GAS - FILLED PRESSURE SPRING THERMOMETERS This type depends upon the increase in pressure of a confined gas (constant volume) due to temperature increase. The relationship between temperature and pressure in this kind of system follows Charles law and may be expressed: T1 P1 --= --T2 P2

WHERE, T1 = INITIAL TEMPERATURE P1 = INITIAL PRESSURE

T2 P2

= INCREASED TEMPERATURE = INCREASED PRESSURE.

The system is filled under high pressure. The increase in pressure for each degree of temperature rise is therefore greater than if the filling pressure were low. Nitrogen is the gas most often used for such systems, because it is chemically inert and possesses a favorable coefficient of thermal expansion. Except for the size of the bulb, the gas-filled system is identical to the liquid filled types. The gas-filled bulb must be larger and its volume must be considerably greater than that of the rest of the system. Special bulbs consisting of a length of small diameter tubing may be used to measure the average temperature along the bulb; these may be as much as 200 feet long. Gas-filled systems are subject to the same errors as liquid-filled systems, and the same methods may be used to compensate for them.
Page 9 of 41

CLASS 2 VAPOUR PRESSURE THERMOMETERS Unlike the liquid and gas-filled systems which depend upon volumetric expansion for their operation, vapour -pressure thermometers depend upon the Vapour pressure of liquid which only partially fills the system. In this type of system the liquid can expand, but as it is heated its Vapour pressure increases (fig 12). Water in a pressure cooker behaves in the same manner as the water is heated and changes to steam (water Vapour), the pressure builds up. Vapour pressure does not increase according to linear proportion (a unit increase in pressure for each unit of temperature rise). At lower temperatures, the Vapour pressure increase for each unit of temperature change is small; at higher temperatures the vapour pressure change is much greater. Fig.13 shows some typical vapour Pressure Vs Temperature curves which illustrate this non-uniform characteristic. Another characteristic of the partially-filled vapour pressure thermometer is the shift of the vapour and the liquid when the temperature of the sensitive bulb changes from a value lower than the temperature of the pressure spring to a value higher. When the temperature of the bulb is lower, the liquid remains in the bulb and vapour occupies the tubing and spring (fig.14).

S P R IN G

VAPOR

T U B IN G

BULB

L IQ U ID

FIG - 12 In a partially filled system the liquid expands when the bulb is heated and the vapour pressure increases

Page 10 of 41

100 A 80 VAPOR PRESSURE LB.PER SQ.IN.ABSOLUTE B 60 40 A -E T H Y L C H L O R ID E 20 120 100 C 80 A 60 40 20 -2 0 20 60 100 140 180 220 TEM PERATURE B D E 160 200 240 280 320 360 B -E T H Y L E T H E R C -C H L O R O F O R M D -M E T H Y L A L C O H O L E -D IS T IL L E D W A T E R C D E

FIG - 13 The unit vapours pressure increases logarithmically with the temperature

SP R IN G
SPRING

L IQ U ID
VAPOR TUBING

T U B IN G

BULB
BULB

VAPOR

LIQUID

L IQ U ID

FIG-14 In the vapour pressure thermometer the liquid remains in the bulb when the bulb temperature is lower than the rest of the system. vapour occupies tubing and spacing

FIG-15 When the bulb temperature is higher than the rest of the system, the vapour stays in the bulb. The liquid occupies tubing and spacing

When the bulb temperature is higher than that of the rest of the system, the liquid and vapour changes takes place, with the bulb now containing the vapour and the pressure spring the liquid (fig 15). Therefore, with the simple partially-filled vapour pressure thermometer, the temperature of the bulb should always remain lower than or higher than the temperature of the remainder of the system.

Page 11 of 41

Manufacturers have developed a method of filling the vapour pressure thermometer that overcomes this limitation. This is the dual-filled system in which two different liquid, a vapourizing and a non- vapourizing type are used (fig 16). The temperature sensitive fluid which vapourizes is called the actuating liquid. The vapour pressure acts on a second liquid which does not vapourize. This second liquid is called the transmitting liquid, since it transmits the vapour pressure of the first liquid to the pressure spring much as any hydraulic fluid does. In this dual-filled system. There is no transfer of vapour and liquid; the actuating liquid and its vapour remain in the bulb at all times. Location of bulb: The difference in height between the bulb and the pressure spring may also introduce errors, especially in the partially filled vapour pressure system. Since this system is not filled under pressure as are the totally filled systems, any column of fluid could create a pressure sufficient to cause an error in the reading. It is important, therefore, to inform the manufacturer about the height of the bulb if it is to be located above the pressure spring, and to maintain that dimension when installing the thermometer (fig 17). Because totally filled systems are filled under high pressure, the pressure due to the height of the bulb has little effect and little or no error is involved. Response to change in temperature: The next important consideration in the study of pressure spring thermometers is their response to change in temperature. The installation, of course, influences the speed of response. It should be noted however, that the gas-filled system has the fastest response, the vapour-pressure system the next fastest, and the liquid-filled has the slowest (fig 18).

SPRING

PRESSURE SPRING

TUBING

HEIGHT OF BULB ABOVE PRESSURE SPRING

VAPOR ACTUATING LIQUID TRANSMITTING LIQUID

FIG - 16 In the dual filled system there is no transfer of liquid and vapour as there is in the partially filled system

FIG - 17 When the bulb located above the pressure spring of a partially filled vapour pressure system, the column might create sufficient pressure to cause an error in the reading

Page 12 of 41

200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 -1 -2

A C

A -G A S B -V A P O R C -L I Q U I D M E R C U R Y

TEMPERATURE

-3

-4

-5

-6

T IM E IN M IN .

FIG - 18 Relative response of Gas, Vapour and Mercury Thermometers

0.04

0.06

0.08

FIG - 19 The response of pressure spring thermometers is faster in moving liquid than in moving air

FIG - 20 Specially designed Finned Bulb for measuring air or gas temperature

The response of all three is faster in moving air or gas; and the faster the liquid moves the faster will be the response (fig 19). A faster response will be obtained if more bulb area is exposed to the fluid. Manufacturers have designed many special bulbs to improve the response, especially for measuring air or gas temperatures (fig 20). For liquid temperature measurement, the bulb should be large enough to provide sufficient area to sense temperature changes, but not so large that its mass slows its response. For every application there is a best selection. A complete description of the operating conditions will permit the manufacturer to supply this. In conclusion, the characteristics of the types of tube systems are shown in the table 3.
Page 13 of 41

0.02

30.0 40.0

10.0

20.0

1.0

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

5.0

RESPONSE IN MINUTES 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 A 0.1 0.05 0

A-WATER B-AIR

CLASS CLASS 1 CLASS 2 CLASS 3 CLASS 4

FILLING FLIUD

LOW LIMIT

HIGH LIMIT 600F 600F 1000F 1000F

SHORTEST SPAN 25 F 40 F 100 F 40 F

LONGEST SPAN 300F 300F 1000F 1000F

LIQUIDS & OTHER -300F THAN MERCURY VAPOUR GAS MERCURY -300F -450F -48F

Table 3 Table of Characteristics of Classes of Tube Systems

PHOTOGRAPHS OF FILLED-IN SYSTEM TEMPERATURE SWITCHES / TRANSMITTERS/ TEMPERATURE GAUGES

TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

CAPILLARY TYPE

RIGID STEM TYPE

TEMPERATURE SWITCH

TEMPERATURE GAUGES

Page 14 of 41

TRANSMITTERS

TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT - ELECTRICAL o THERMOCOUPLES

A device that converts one form of energy into another is called a transducer. A thermocouple is a transducer, which converts thermal energy into electrical energy. It is a simple device consisting of two dissimilar wires joined at their ends. When an end of each wire is connected to a measuring instrument (as in fig. 23), the thermocouple becomes an accurate and sensitive temperature measuring device. Three phenomena govern the behaviour of a thermocouple, the Seebeck, Peltier and Thompson effects. o THE SEEBECK EFFECT

The joined ends of a thermocouple form a junction called the hot junction or measuring junction. The other two ends of the wire, which are connected to a measuring instrument, form the cold junction or reference junction. Simply stated, the voltage produced by heating, the measuring junction varies with the difference in temperature between the measuring junction and the reference junction. The Seebeck effect describes the result of heating one junction of a circuit formed of two dissimilar metal conductors. In such a circuit, electric current flows as long as the two junctions are at different temperatures. (See fig. 21 A)

A+

T 1<T2

em f = E

FIG 21 A If A and B are dissimilar metals, current will flow through the junctions which are at temperatures T1 and T2, provided T1 and T2 are different temperatures FIG 21 B The arrows show the direction of current. Heat is lost at the hot Junction (T2) since the direction of the current is the same as that produced by the Seebeck effect Page 15 of 41

BA +
T 1+ T T T2-T T 2+

B -

THE PELTIER EFFECT

When a current flows across the junction of two dissimilar metal conductors, it has been noticed that heat is either liberated or absorbed, depending upon the direction of current flow (See fig.21 B). If the current flow is in the same direction as the current produced by the Seebeck effect, heat is liberated at the hot junction and absorbed at the cold junction. o THE REVERSIBLE HEAT EFFECT

The Thompson effect concerns the reversible heat effects resulting from the passage of an electric current through a conductor in which there is a temperature gradient. The temperature of a current-carrying copper wire may vary along its length. Heat is liberated at any point where the current at that point flows in the same direction as the heat. (See fig. 22.) With an iron wire however, heat is absorbed at any point where the current at that point flows in the same direction as the heat. Thus, in a copper wire, the current tends to reduce the difference in temperature, whereas in the iron wire the current tends to increase the difference.
FIG 22
T1 P2 T2 T1 P1

(A )
T T2

T 1-

T 1+

(B )
T 1+ T T2 T 1T

(C )

The Thompson (Reversible Heat) effect. (A) A bar of metal is heated at its midpoint to a temperature of T2. (B) A current from an external source is passed through it. Points P1 and P2 which were at equal temperature T1 (lower than T2) when no current flowing have their temperature changed to T1+T and T1-t respectively when the current flows in the direction shown. (C) When the current flow is reversed, the temperature reverses also. The case above corresponds to the behaviour of

In a circuit made up of iron and copper wire with the cold junction at 30f the emf increases as the temperature of the hot junction increases. But as the temperature approaches a maximum, the rate of increase is reduced until finally it reaches zero. Once past the maximum temperature, the emf decreases, meaning that the polarity of the wires is reversed and the voltage which produces the Seebeck current is the sum of the Peltier emf at the junctions and the two Thompson emf along the dissimilar wires. This is true basis of thermoelectric thermometry. THE LAW OF INTERMEDIATE TEMPERATURES This law states the sum of the voltages generated by two thermocouples (See fig.23), one with its reference junction at 32 f and its measuring junction at a higher temperature (A f), and the other thermocouple with its reference Junction at A f and its measuring junction a still higher temperature (B f) is equal to the voltage generated by one thermocouple with its reference junction at 32 f and its Measuring junction at B f. Because of this law, it is Possible to establish a reference temperature of a fixed Value. By using
Page 16 of 41

a temperature sensitive resistor in the Measuring circuit that automatically eliminates the Voltage change due to temperature change at the Reference junction, the voltage in the circuit remains Constant at the fixed value. Therefore, the only Voltage change in the circuit is the result of a change in the temperature of the measuring junction.

A F V1

3 2 F

B F V2

FIG - 23 The law of Intermediate Temperature permits the establishment of a reference temperature of fixed value

B F V 3=V 1+V 2

3 2 F

THE LAW OF INTERMEDIATE METALS This law states that the use of a third metal in a thermocouple circuit does not affect the voltage as long as the junction of the third metal with the thermocouple metal are at the same temperature (See fig.24). This law makes it possible to use extension wires of a metal different from the thermocouple materials. This is actually common practice in industry. For instance, because of the high cost of platinum the extension lead wires used with Platinum/Platinum-10% Rhodium Thermocouples may both be copper or one copper and the other an alloy. With Chromel-Alumel thermocouples, the extension lead wires may be copper constantan or iron and an alloy. Of all the material used for thermocouples, platinum is no doubt the most important. The Platinum/Platinum-10% Rhodium thermocouple is the primary standard for temperatures between 630.5 c and 1063 c.

IRON (METAL1) IRON (METAL1)

COPPER (METAL3) COPPER (METAL3)

FIG 24

"J"
CONSTANTAN CONSTANTAN (METAL2) (METAL2)

The law of intermediate metals states that the THIRD METAL temperatures of the THIRD METAL EXTENSION WIRES EXTENSION WIRES three metals at junction J must be the same

COPPER (METAL3) COPPER (METAL3)

Page 17 of 41

NOTES ON THERMOCOUPLE LEAD WIRE OR COMPENSATING CABLES The Thermocouple measuring junction is usually located some distance from the instrument with which it is used, sometimes several hundred feet. Since the thermocouple is connected to the instrument by wire, we have two problems: (1) the location of the reference junction, and (2) the errors introduced by the Leadwires connecting wires.
IRON

FIG 25

CONSTANTAN

Leadwires

Temperatures in a Thermocouple Circuit

Variations in temperature of the reference junction cause a change in thermal emf, since the thermal emf depends on the temperature difference of the measuring and reference junctions. If a temperature is to be measured within one degree, the referencejunction temperature should be constant within one degree (unless reference-junction compensation is employed). The reference junction may be located, for example, adjacent to the thermocouple or may be placed near or in the measuring instrument. Ordinarily temperature variations of some magnitude are expected adjacent to the thermocouple because the thermocouple may be installed in a furnace and heat exchanger. Temperature variations at the measuring instrument are normally more constant, especially when the instrument is installed in a temperature-controlled or air-conditioned room. Therefore, the reference junction is located near and generally inside the measuring instrument.
Further, the introduction of connecting wire into the thermocouple circuit has no effect so long as the ends of the wire are at the same temperature. However, the temperature adjacent to the thermocouple may be several hundred degrees while the temperature at the instrument difference (Th Ta), shown in fig. 25, may be several hundred degrees. Therefore it is necessary to use connecting wires or lead wires that will avoid error. THERMOELECTRIC TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT There are two methods of selecting lead wires: (1) the thermocouple wires themselves may be extended to the instrument and (2) the lead wires may be made of thermocouple metals having the same thermoelectric properties as the thermocouple with which they are used. The first method involves theoretically no error and, indicated in table 4, is used for copper-constantan and iron-constantan thermocouples, and sometimes for Chromel Alumel thermocouples. THERMOCOUPLES AND LEAD WIRES
THERMOCOUPLE LEAD WIRE

+
COPPER IRON CHROMEL CHROMEL CHROMEL PLATINUMRHODIUM Table 4

CONSTANTAN CONSTANTAN ALUMEL ALUMEL ALUMEL PLATINUM

+
COPPER IRON CHROMEL IRON COPPER COPPER

CONSTANTAN CONSTANTAN ALUMEL COPPER- NICKEL ALLOY CONSTANTAN (TO 125 ONLY) COPPER- NICKEL

Page 18 of 41

Thermocouples & Lead Wire

The cost of long lengths of chromel alumel wire is high, and the cost of platinum wire in moderate lengths is prohibitive. With chromel-alumel and platinum thermocouples less expensive lead wire is used, as indicated in table 4. Iron and a copper-nickel-alloy lead wire, which have a temperature- emf characteristic very close to that of chromel - alumel are widely used. Copper and Constantan lead wire may be used for Chromel- Alumel thermocouples only where high accuracy is not required, since the temperatureemf characteristics of these pairs do not quite match beyond 125F. For platinum thermocouples, lead wires are made of copper and a coppernickel alloy, then temperature-emf characteristic of which is the same as for the platinum thermocouple. The error involved in using lead wire of different material depends on how well the temperature-emf characteristic of the lead wire matches that of the thermocouple. Suppose that, with a Chromel- Alumel thermocouple used in the range 1000 to 2000F, the thermocouple head temperature is 250F and the temperature at the reference junction is 32F. If the lead wires are copper and Constantan, the error caused is the difference between the emf of the different materials at 250 and 32F. This is 5.28 4.97 or 0.31 millivolt. At 1400F this represents an error of 13.3F, or 0.95 percent, which is not an allowable error for most industrial applications. For greater accuracy it becomes necessary to use the iron-and coppernickel-alloy lead wires. Naturally it is important that the polarity of lead wires and thermocouple be observed during installation; otherwise, a large error may result. Lead wires may be solid, or may be stranded for flexibility. Various kinds of insulation may be obtained, such as enamel, cotton covering, asbestos, glass, polyvinyl covering or lead sheath over an insulating cover. The useful range of this thermocouple actually is from 0 C to 1500 C. The behaviour of other thermocouple materials is determined by using them with platinum as the second material. When selecting a pair of materials for use as a thermocouple, the greater the thermoelectric difference between them the better the result. Fig.26 illustrates the characteristics of the common thermocouple materials when compared with platinum.
-2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
X 100C

30 ds/dt in microvolts per C

COPPER CHROM EL IR O N Pt 90 R h 10

20 10 0 -1 0 -2 0 -3 0 -4 0

ALUM EL

C O N STA N TA N

-5 0
T H E R M O E L E C T R IC P O W E R V s P L A T IN U M

FIG- 26 Page 19 of 41

The electrical characteristics of various metals when used with platinum as a dissimilar metal in thermocouple are compared. Notice that the copper, Iron, Chromel and Platinum -10% Rhodium are positive with respect to platinum, white alumel and constantan are negative. From this, the reason for the selection of iron constantan, copper constantan, Chromel Alumel, and Platinum / Platinum -10% Rhodium becomes apparent.

In addition to the common combinations seen in fig. 26, others have found application in temperature measurement. Chromel-constantan, for example, is an excellent combination for temperatures up to 2000 F. Nickel/Nickel-molybdenum is some times used in place of chromel-alumel. Tungsten Rhenium is used for temperatures up to 4200 F. Other combinations for special application are chromel-white gold, molybdenumtungsten, tungsten-tridium and tridium / iridium rhodium.

THERMOCOUPLE
COPPER CONSTANTAN(T)

GAUGE
14 20 24 28 8 14 20 24 28 8 14 20 24 28 24 8 14 20 18 20 24 28

MAX. OPERATING TEMP. F

700 600 500 400 1400 1000 900 700 700 2500 2000 1800 1600 1600 3000 1800 1200 1000 4200 1800 1600 1600

IRON CONSTANTAN(J)

CHROMEL ALUMEL (K)

PT- 10% RHODIUM PLATINUM (S) CHROMEL CONSTANTAN TUNGSTEN 5% RHENIUM TUNGSTEN 26% RHENIUM

Table 5 Table of Maximum Temperatures for Thermocouples

The size of the wire and the protection of the thermocouple are also important. The wire size affects both the sensitivity and the maximum operating temperature of the thermocouple. Thermocouple wire sizes range from fine (40 AWG) to heavy (8 AWG). While a 20 gauge wire requires only two minutes to reach 80% of its final temperature reading, an 8 gauge wire requires nearly nine minutes. The table at the top is a summary of the maximum temperature for various thermocouples.

Page 20 of 41

In most cases, thermocouples cannot be used without protection from the environment in which they are used. The environment may be a reducing atmosphere (where oxygen content is low and hydrogen and carbon monoxide are present) or an oxidizing atmosphere (where oxygen and water vapour are present). For example, iron corrodes in an oxidizing atmosphere and chromel becomes contaminated in a reducing atmosphere. Platinum / platinum-rhodium thermocouples always require protection The device used for thermocouples are called Thermocouple wells and Protecting tubes. They may be made of metal such as iron, steel, nickel or incone; silica compounds such as corundum or carbofrax or metal ceramic compounds such as chromium oxide and aluminum oxide. Sometimes a thermocouple must be enclosed in a primary metal protector as well as a secondary silica protector. The table at the bottom of the page lists some of the more common protecting tube materials. The selection of the complete thermocouple assembly should be carefully made, and manufacturers have made available a considerable amount of data to aid in this. TYPE WROUGHT IRON CAST IRON 304 SS NICKEL INCONEL CORUNDUM CARBOFRAX RECOMMENDED MAX. TEMP. (F) 1200 1500 1800 2000 2200 3000 3000 COMMENTS
FOR GENERAL USE EXCEPT CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE FOR ACID & ALKALINE SOLUTIONS FOR CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERES & SOLUTIONS FOR SPECIAL CHEMICAL APPLICATIONS SUBSTITUTE FOR NICKEL WHEN SULPHUR PRESENT FOR STEEL INDUSTRY WHERE THERMAL SHOCK MAY BE HIGH FOR APPLICATIONS WITH HIGH THERMAL & MECHANICAL SHOCK FOR BRASS & BRONZE FOUNDRIES HIGH THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY

CHRONIUM & 3000 ALUMINIUM OXIDE

Table 6

Table of Protecting Tube Materials

MINERAL INSULATED THERMOCOUPLES: (MI Thermocouples) Mineral Insulated Thermocouples can be used under very stringent field conditions, for example for temperature measurement in Nuclear Energy Plants, Reactor or Compressor vessels in the Chemical industry, Heat Treatment Furnaces, Gas Turbines, Power Stations, Boiler flue gases, Skin surface, Super Heaters and for many varied applications. These Thermocouples are flexible, can be measured in small dimensions and have a quick response time.

Page 21 of 41

MINERAL INSULATED (MI) THERMOCOUPLES

The outer sheath, the thermocouple wires, and the insulation material form an inseparable unit, the Thermocouple wires being insulated from each other and from the sheath with high purity mineral oxide. The standard sheath material is either of stainless steel or heat resistant alloy Inconel 600. Other sheath material available on request. Depending upon the thermocouple type and sheath material, these Thermocouples can be used for temperatures of over 1000oc depending upon duration and operating conditions. Lengths of 40 meters and more can be made. Immersion Length The portion of the thermocouple / RTD, which is subject to the temperature which is being measured. Dual Element Two thermocouple/ RTD/ Filled-in system bulb elements housed within one protection tube. Grounded Junction The internal conductors of this thermocouple are welded directly to the surrounding sheath material, forming a completely sealed integral junction.

Ungrounded Junction Although the internal thermocouple conductors are welded together they are electrically insulated from the external sheath material and are not connected to the sheath in any way. Ungrounded junction thermocouples are ideal for use in conductive solutions or wherever circuit isolation is required. Ungrounded junctions are required where measuring Instrumentation does not provide channel to channel isolation. Exposed Junction The thermocouple junction or measuring point is exposed without any protection assembly or tube. Exposed junction thermocouples due to their design, offer the user the fastest response time.

Page 22 of 41

Measuring Junction or Hot Junction The junction in a thermocouple, which actually measures the temperature of the object. Often referred to as the Hot Junction. DIGITAL TEMPERATURE INDICATORS

SALIENT FEATURES TO BE NOTED

Three Temperature ranges from - 50C to 700C for thermocouple inputs. Four temperature ranges from -200C to 800C for RTD inputs. LED display; optional LCD display for outdoor installation. Single set point with Relay output as an option. Ease of adjustment upon removal of front lens. Overflow indication for Sensor Break.

THERMOPILE ARRANGEMENT

Fe Cu

ALUMINIUM BLOCK

MULTICORE CABLE

INSULATED TERMINALS OIL BATH

HEATER
THERMOSTAT

HEATER SUPPLY

FIG 27

Page 23 of 41

RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS ( RTD )

CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF PLATINUM INDUSTRIAL RESISTANCE THERMOMETER ASSEMBLY

INCONEL O R STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH

HIGH-PURITY CERAM IC INSULATO R EXTENSIO N LEAD W IRES

CERAM IC-ENCAPSULATED RESISTANCE ELEM ENT

INTERNAL LEAD W IRES HIG H PURITY CERAM IC PACKING PO W DER

HIG H-TEM PERATURE HERM ETIC SEAL

FIG - 28 Platinum industrial resistance thermometer assembly

When precise temperature measurement by electrical means is desired, the resistance thermometer is used in a bridge circuit. The thermometer itself is furnished in the form of a bulb, which consists of a fine wire wrapped around an insulator and enclosed in metal. The most common shape for a resistance thermometer resembles a bimetal thermometer bulb (fig.29).

FIG 29 High Speed Resistance Thermometer Bulb

Platinum wire is the best material for a resistance thermometer since it is useful over a wide range of temperatures (-400 F to 1200 F). Nickel is frequently used because of its lower cost and also because over its useful range (-250 F to +600 F), its resistance per degree of temperature change is greater than that of platinum. Copper is generally restricted to temperature below that of nickel. Its full useful range is -328 F to +250 F. The important considerations in the selection of resistance thermometer wire are: 1. PURITY 2. UNIFORMITY 3. STABILITY 4. HIGH RESISTANCE CHANGE PER DEGREE TEMPERATURE CHANGE. 5. GOOD CONTAMINATION RESISTANCE.
Page 24 of 41

Resistance thermometer of the same material should be interchangeable without requiring recalibration of the instrument being used. For this reason, they are manufactured to have a fixed resistance at a certain temperature. Platinum resistance thermometers generally have a resistance of 25 ohms at 32 F. Nickel thermometers generally have a resistance of 100 ohms at 77 F. Copper thermometers generally have a resistance of 10 ohms at 77 F. Since temperature measurement by resistance thermometers is actually a resistance measurement, the Wheatstone bridge is used, with variations. The bridge may be DC or AC, although for this discussion we shall deal with the DC type in its simplest form.

MILLIVOLTMETER

Rb
BATTERY

The simplest form of resistance thermometer uses the indicating millivoltmeter. The Wheatstone bridge circuit is used with this type of meter (fig PLATINUM 30). BULB As the temperature resistance of the bulb Rt raises, its resistance raises. Because of this, the bridge is unbalanced. The unbalance is detected by the millivoltmeter, causing it to deflect to a point that will restore FIG - 30 balance to the circuit. When calibration the Platinum industrial resistance circuit, a precision resistor is substituted for the thermometer assembly temperature bulb, and the battery voltage is adjusted by varying Rb until the meter reads the correct temperature for this resistance. For instance (fig 31), if a platinum bulb is to be used, a precision resistor of 25 ohms would require that the meter reading be 32 F.

MILLIVOLTMETER

Rb
BATTERY

25
OHMS

FIG - 31 Wheatstone bridge circuit with 25 ohm resistor in place of the platinum bulb.

The resistance bulb has three leads (fig.32). This is necessary so that the same amount of lead wire is used in both branches of the bridge, this arrangement is generally preferred because the lead length may be lengthened or shortened without affecting the meter reading (fig.33).

Page 25 of 41

Rx Rb
R t1
BATTERY

Ry
MILLIVOLTM ETER

Rz
R t2

RESISTANCE Rt1EQUALS Rt2

PLATINUM BULB

FIG 32 The Resistance bulb has three leads, so that the same amount of lead wire is used in both branches of the bridge

FIG 33 Lead length does not affect meter readings, Rt1 is added to the Rx bridge arm, while Rt2 is added to Rz bridge arm, so that lead length has no imbalance effect

THERMISTOR In recent years, Thermistors have found increasing use in temperature measurement. These are very small, solid, semi-conductors made of various metal oxides. They are available in several shapes such as rods, discs, beads, washers, and flakes. The electrical resistance of a Thermistors decreases with an increase in temperature. For temperature measurement, they are used in bridge circuits, like the resistance thermometer. Because of their very small size the bridge current must be kept low.

FIG . 34

Page 26 of 41

PYROMETERS: A Pyrometer, or radiation thermometer, is a non-contact instrument that detects an objects surface temperature by measuring the temperature of the electromagnetic radiation (infrared or visible) emitted from the object.
RADIATION PYROMETERS Radiation Pyrometers are used for measuring temperatures upto 10,000F (See fig 35). They are also used for measuring higher temperature of moving objects, or when the use of other sensitive devices is impractical.
INDICATOR THERMOCOUPLE

LENS

FIG 35 In radiation pyrometry the radiant heat or energy from the hot substance is translated into emf by the Thermocouple and indicated in degrees of temperature.

HOT SUBSTANCE

MATERIAL BRASS COPPER (CALORIZED) CAST IRON IRON MONEL NICKEL STEEL WROUGHT IRON STAINLESS STEEL

100C 0.6

200C 0.61 0.95 0.74 0.43 0.37 0.79 0.94 0.62

500C 0.59 0.6 0.84 0.43 0.79 0.94 0.73

Table 7 Emission Factors of Oxidized Metals

The operation of the radiation thermometer involves measuring thermal energy which is radiated by a body when that body is heated. The Stefan Boltamann Law governing this principle is stated by the formula: W = KT4 This principle states that the total radiation (W) per unit is per second from a Black body or surface is proportional to its absolute (Kelvin) temperature raised to the fourth power. The Stefan Boltamann constant factor (K) varies with the substance being measured.

Page 27 of 41

The tendency to radiate thermal energy is called emissivity. All Substances have different emission factors and the factor may range from 0 to 1. The emissivity of copper, for example ie. 0.6 . A body or surface which emits all thermal energy that it absorbs (but which reflects home) is called a black body. The emissivity of a black body is 1, the maximum possible emissivity. The emissivity factor is included in the Stefan Boltamann constant factor K. The table lists the emissivity of various materials. It is used to measure the temperature of a hot ingot of iron in the open, radiation pyrometer readings will be low since iron is a poorer emitter than a black body. When readings are taken while the iron is still in the furnace, the walls and iron, the iron can be said to be emitting as much thermal energy as it is absorbing. Thus it approximates the characteristics of a black body, and the reading of its temperature will be accurate. In an industrial radiation pyrometer, the temperature sensitive element is either a single thermocouple or several connected thermocouples (a thermopile). Whichever is used, they save as the input to the some meters or circuits as if they were receiving their thermal energy directly rather than from a radiation unit. Finally, it should be remembered that in temperature measurement, primary or sensing element must be carefully selected and properly installed to provide the best sensitivity and response. More than any other measurement, temperature is subject to the details of installation.

TEMPERATURE SENSORS: A COMPARISON Thermocouple RTD Thermistor I.C.Sensor

Advantages: Self Powered Simple Rugged Inexpensive Wide variety of physical forms Wide Temperature range Disadvantages: Non-linear Low voltage Reference required Least stable Least Sensitive

Advantages: Most stable Most accurate More linear than Thermocouple Disadvantages: Expensive Slow Current source required Small resistance change Four-wire measurement

Advantages: High output Fast Two-wire Ohms measurement Disadvantages: Non-linear Limited temperature range Fragile Current

Advantages: Most linear Highest output Inexpensive Disadvantages: T<250C Power supply required Slow Self-heating Limited Configurations

Page 28 of 41

AD590-TWO-TERMINAL IC TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER o FEATURES Linear Current Output: 1 A/oK Wide Temperature Range: 55oC to +150oC Probe Compatible Ceramic Sensor Package Two Terminal Device: Voltage In/Current Out Laser Trimmed to 0.5oC Calibration Accuracy (AD590M) Excellent Linearity: 0.3oC Over Full Range (AD590M) Wide Power Supply Range: +4 V to +30 V Sensor Isolation from Case Low Cost

AD590 DESCRIPTION The AD590 is a two-terminal integrated circuit temperature transducer that produces an output current proportional to absolute temperature. For supply voltages between +4 V and +30 V the device acts as a high impedance, constant current regulator passing 1A/oK. Laser trimming of the chips thinfilm resistors is used to calibrate the device to 298.2 A output at 298.2oK (+25oC). o The AD590 should be used in any temperature sensing application below +150oC in which conventional electrical temperature sensors are currently employed. The inherent low cost of a monolithic integrated circuit combined with the elimination of support circuitry makes the AD590 an attractive alternative for many temperature measurement situations. Linearization circuitry, precision voltage amplifiers, resistance measuring circuitry and cold junction compensation are not needed in applying the AD590.In addition to temperature measurement, applications include temperature compensation or correction of discrete components, biasing proportional to absolute temperature, flow rate measurement, level detection of fluids and anemometry. The AD590 is available in chip form making, it suitable for hybrid circuits and fast temperature measurements in protected environments. THE LM335 TEMPERATURE SENSOR The LM335 temperature sensor is an easy to use, cost-effective sensor with decent accuracy (around +/- 3 degrees C calibrated). The sensor is essentially a zener diode whose reverse breakdown voltage is proportional to absolute temperature. Since the sensor is a zener diode, a bias current must be established in order to use the device. The spec sheet states that the diode should be biased between 400 uA and 5 mA; we'll bias it at 2 mA. It is important to note that selfheating can be a significant factor, which is why I'm not choosing a higher bias current. The bias circuit is as follows:

Page 29 of 41

The temperature sensor's voltage output is related to absolute temperature by the following equation: Vout = VoutT0 * T / T0, where T0 is the known reference temperature where VoutT0 was measured. The nominal VoutT0 is equal to T0 * 10 mV/K. So, at 25 C, VoutT0 is nominally 298 K * 10 mV/K = 2.98 V (to be really accurate, we would need a reference temperature and a voltmeter, but nominal values are OK for our purposes). Thus, the voltage dropped between +5 and the diode is 5V - 2.98V = 2.02V. In order to get 2 mA bias current, we need a 1 K resistor for R1. A pinout of the sensor is provided below:

Note that the adj pin is unconnected. The adj pin is used to trim the diode to be more accurate.

Page 30 of 41

POLARITY OF THERMOCOUPLES & EXTENSION LEAD WIRES (COMPENSATING CABLES) AS USED IN DIFFERENT COUNTRIES

Page 31 of 41

PHOTO GALLERY TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

Page 32 of 41

Page 33 of 41

Page 34 of 41

Page 35 of 41

Page 36 of 41

Page 37 of 41

PHOTO GALLERY: THERMOCOUPLE / RTD ASSEMBLIES

Page 38 of 41

SAMPLE FOR ORDERING INFORMATION

Page 39 of 41

NON CONTACT THERMOMETER

Measure surface temperatures instantly and accurate without contact. The MiniTemp uses infrared technology ready to go whenever you need it. Simply point and shoot for quick and easy temperature measurements. Display reads in either Celsius or Fahrenheit Package includes: 9V Battery, Instruction Guide Available Accessory: Pouch and Wrist Strap Kit

APPLICATIONS

Page 40 of 41

Page 41 of 41

INTRODUCTION Control of the processes in the plant is an essential part of the plant operation. There must be enough water in the boilers to act as a heat sink for the reactor but there must not be water flowing out the top of the boilers towards the turbine. The level of the boiler must be kept within a certain range. The heat transport pressure is another critical parameter that must be controlled. If it is too high the system will burst, if it is too low the water will boil. Either condition impairs the ability of the heat transport system to cool the fuel. In this section we will look at the very basics of control. We will examine the fundamental control building blocks of proportional, integral and differential and their application to some simple systems. 1.1 BASIC CONTROL PRINCIPLES Consider a typical process control system. For a particular example let us look at an open tank, which supplies a process, say, a pump, at its output. The tank will require a supply to maintain its level (and therefore the pumps positive suction head) at a fixed predetermined point. This predetermined level is referred to as the setpoint (SP) and it is also the controlled quantity of the system. Clearly whilst the inflow and outflow are in mass balance, the level will remain constant. Any difference in the relative flows will cause the level to vary. How can we effectively control this system to a constant level? We must first identify our variables. Obviously there could be a number of variables in any system, the two in which we are most interested are: The controlled variable - in our example this will be level. The manipulated variable the inflow or outflow from the system. If we look more closely at our sample system (Figure 1), assuming the level is at the setpoint, the inflow to the system and outflow are balanced. Obviously no control action is required whilst this status quo exists. Control action is only necessary when a difference or error exists between the setpoint and the measured level. Depending on whether this error is a positive or negative quantity, the appropriate control correction will be made in an attempt to restore the process to the setpoint. Henceforth, the error will always take the form of: Error = Setpoint Measured Quantity OR e = SP -M

The control action will be either to vary the inflow or outflow from the system in order to keep the level at the setpoint. Let us consider the general format for achieving these objectives. As can be seen from Figure 2, the process can be represented by a closed loop. The system output (level) is monitored by a process sensor and the measurement signal is fedback to a comparator at the input of the system. The second input to the comparator is the setpoint signal; the comparators output being the difference or error signal. The amplifier, a present just a black box, will provide the appropriate correction to maintain the process at its setpoint despite disturbances that may occur. It can be seen that if the system were being operated in manual control the feedback path would not be present. The operator would provide this feedback and apply the necessary correction to the system whilst observing the effect on the controlled variable. This is termed open loop operation.
Disturbances

Figure 2 Feedback Control Block Diagram

1.1.1 Feedback Control This concept justifies the use of the word negative in three ways: The negative aspect of feeding the measured signal backwards from the output to the input of the system. (Actual definition of negative feedback control). The control correction must be negative in that a correction rather than a compounding of error must occur. The fact that an error must occur before a correction can take place, i.e., retrospective or negative control action. In the next section we will study in more detail the methods used to effect the necessary control corrections. 1.1.2 Feedforward Control If we wish to control our process without an error first occurring, we must base our control on correction of the disturbances, which will eventually, cause a process error. This is termed feedforward control. Feedforward control is rarely if ever used on its own but is used in conjunction with feedback control to improve the response of control to process disturbances. 1.1.3 Summary Controlled Variable output quantity of system (Level, Temperature, etc.). Manipulated Variable means of maintaining controlled variable at the setpoint. Error signal equals the difference between the setpoint and the measurement.. Setpoint desired process level. (SP) Measurement actual process level. (M) Closed Loop automatic control. Open Loop manual control. Feedback control is error correction following a disturbance. Feedforward control is control of disturbances, which could cause a process error.

1.2 ON/OFF CONTROL Figure 1 Typical On/Off Control Scheme Let us consider our level control system in a little more practical detail. The valve in the inflow line to the system is an electrically operated solenoid valve. (Remember an electrically operated solenoid valve has only two operating positions fully open or fully closed.) Assume that under initial conditions with a demand on the system the level will start to fall and V1 will have to be opened to provide an inflow. This can easily be achieved by mounting a differential pressure switch, P1 at the bottom of the tank to operate when the level falls to L1. When the level is at L1 the liquid will be height h1 above switch. The pressure at the switch will be P1 = gh1. the mass density of the liquid g the acceleration due to gravity h1 the height of the liquid The resulting switch closure can energize the solenoid valve V1 causing an inflow to the tank. Assuming the valve is correctly sized, this will cause a rise in the level back towards the setpoint. In order to arrest the rise in level the built in differential feature of the switch can be employed to de-energize the solenoid valve when level L2 is reached. This system will achieve a mean level in the tank about the desired setpoint. This method is known as ON/OFF control. Clearly it is impossible to maintain the system at the setpoint since there must be a difference in the operating levels L1 and L2 as the valve can only be energized or de-energized. It is often counter productive to try to reduce the differential between L1 and L2 to too small a value as this will result Notein excessive cycling, and hence wear, of the valve. Usual practice is to control with a deadband about the setpoint as shown in Figure 4.

SP time L1

Periodic Time

Figure 4 Typical On/Off Response

The sinusoidal cycling is typical of on/off control. on/off control can be used to advantage on a sluggish system, i.e., where the periodic time is large. Typical uses in CANDU units are electric heater controls in de-aerator tanks and PHTS bleed condenser and pressurizer. If fine control is required a simple on/off control system is inadequate. We will discuss a method for achieving a finer control in the next section. 1.2.1 Summary On/off control - control signal is either 0% or 100% Control at setpoint not achievable, a deadband must be incorporated. Useful for large, sluggish systems particularly those incorporating electric heaters.

1.1 BASIC PROPORTIONAL CONTROL

In our example of on/off control it was seen that an all or nothing control correction was applied as the result of an error signal occurring. Clearly it would be to our advantage if the control signal were proportional to the magnitude of error. This is the basis of proportional control and is the most frequently encountered control mode. How can this control be achieved? Referring to Figure 5 it can be seen that we can modify our system to use a pneumatically operated control valve and a level transmitter with a 20 100 kPa pneumatic output.

If the outflow (Qo) increases then the level in the tank will fall. The pressure sensed by the level transmitter, which is representative of the level in the tank, will also fall causing a decrease in the output signal from the level transmitter. This output signal is fed to the (air to close) control valve (valve fully open with 20 kPa signal, fully closed with 100 kPa signal). A falling level will therefore cause the valve to progressively open and hence raise the level in the tank. The system as shown is somewhat impractical as the initial setpoint conditions will need to be set by some manual method and then ensuring that steady state conditions are achieved with the valve at, say 50% opening and a level transmitter output of 60 kPa (50% range). This simple system does illustrate however a major disadvantage with proportional control. Notice that the control signal (valve opening) can only change when the level signal is changing. Thus if a disturbance occurs, say an increase in demand, the level will drop and the output from the level transmitter will also fall. This will cause the air to close valve to open more, hence increasing the inflow. After a period of time the inflow will have increased such that a now mass balance is established between inflow and outflow. But where is the level at this time? Certainly not at the setpoint. In the example given it will stabilize at some steady state level below the setpoint. This steady state deviation is known as offset and is inherent in all proportional control systems. Despite this obvious disadvantage, (we cannot return the process to the setpoint after a disturbance with proportional control) this mode of control will form the basis for all our control strategies. In the next section we will discuss a more practical control scheme using proportional control and also ways of lessening the problem of offset.

Example 1 A tank has inflow and outflow equal to 50% of maximum and its level is at the setpoint, say 50%. A step change in outflow occurs to 60% (+10%). Outflow now exceeds inflow so the level will fall. The output from the level transmitter will also fall and, for our system, will match the fall in level say 1% change in signal for a 1% change in level. The LT signal will open the A/C valve more, by 1% in fact. The inflow is now 51%, still less than the outflow. The level will continue to fall until inflow equals outflow, i.e., (60%). This can only happen when the LT signal has changed by 10%) and this change reflects a drop in level on 10%: i.e., 10% offset. To restore the process to the setpoint requires a further increase of inflow. This increase can only be achieved by a further decrease in signal to the valve (i.e., as decrease in LT output corresponding to a further decrease in level). With the conditions as stated in the example there is no way in which a 50% level can be achieved with a 60% outflow. A 50% level with a 60% outflow requires a 60% inflow. Our systems can only provide a 60% inflow from a 40% level signal. Example 2 An alternative method of illustrating proportional control is by means of a simple float system (Figure 6). Assume the inflow and outflow are equal and the level is at the setpoint. If an increase in outflow occurs the level in the tank must fall. The float will also fall as the level falls. This drop in float position will cause the valve on the inflow to open more thus increasing the inflow. Eventually the fall in level will result in a valve opening, which will restore the mass balance between the inflow and the outflow. Note an increased inflow can only be achieved as a result of a lower level in the tank. The level is no longer at the setpoint an offset has been generated.

1.1.1

Summary

Proportional control provides a control signal, proportional to the magnitude and direction of the error signal. After a disturbance, proportional control will provide only a new mass balance situation. A change in control signal requires a change in error signal, therefore offset will occur. Proportional control stabilizes an error; it does not remove it. 1.4 Proportional Control 1.4.1 Terminology M = Measurement Signal SP = Setpoint e = Error e = SP M Note: If M>SP then e is negative If M<SP then e is positive m = Controller Signal Output in O/P = final initial k = Gain when controller uses e = SP -M THEN K is negative for Direct Acting (usually 50% of output span) m = ke + b Direct Action Mm Reverse Action Mm K is positive for Reverse Acting b = bias

PB = Proportional Band Small (narrow) PB = High Gain Large (wide) PB = Low Gain

1.4.2 Practical Proportional Control A more practical proportional control scheme can be achieved by inserting a controller between the level transmitter and the control valve. This will eliminate the setting up problems mentioned in the previous module (i.e., it will have a setpoint control) and also introduce other advantages, which will be discussed in this section. In a practical system one of the primary considerations is the failure mode of the valve. In our example of an open tank with a valve on the inflow it would be reasonable to assume that the valve should close in the event of an air supply failure to prevent the tank overflowing, i.e., an air to open valve. A/O 20 - 100 kPa SP

To achieve the necessary control action on, say, a falling tank level it is necessary to convert the decreasing output of the level transmitter to an increasing input signal to the control valve. The level controller will perform this function and is termed an indirect or reverse acting () controller. It can be seen that if the valve action had been chosen air to close, then this reversal would not have been required and a direct () acting controller could have been used. Normally controllers are capable of performing either control action, direct or reverse, by a simple switching process. The controller will also accept our desired setpoint input and perform the comparison between setpoint and measurement to calculate the errors magnitude and direction. Up to now we have only assumed proportionality constant or one, i.e., the control signal equals the input error. Is this always the best ratio? Consider the following graphs of input, output and level with respect to time: instead of control signal = error signal, control signal = error signal x gain constant (k). Clearly for any given error signal the control signal Note will be increased in magnitude, the inflow will be increased, and a new mass balance will be achieved in a shorter time as shown in Figure 9. (If we refer back to our simple ballcock system in section 1.1, it can be seen that the gain could be varied by adjusting the position of the valve-operating link on the float arm.) The offset is much reduced. In instrumentation this adjustment of controller gain is referred to as proportional band (PB).

Proportional band is defined as that input signal span change, in percent, which will cause a hundred percent change in output signal. For example if an input signal span change of 100% is required to give an output change of 100% the system is said to have a proportional band of 100%. If the system was now adjusted such that the 100% change in output was achieved with only a 50% change in input signal span then the proportional band is now said to be 50%. There is a clear relationship between proportional band and gain. Gain can be defined as the ratio between change in output and change in input. Gain=output /input By inspection it can be seen that a PB of 100% is the same as a gain of one since change of input equals change in output. PB is the reciprocal of gain, expressed as a percentage. The general relationship is: % gain = 100/ PB Small values of PB (high gain) are usually referred to as narrow proportional band whilst low gain is termed wide proportional band. Note there is no magic figure to define narrow or wide proportional band, relative values only are applicable, for example, 15% PB is wider than 10% PB, 150% PB is narrower than 200% PB.

Figure 11 Decay Response Curve

With reference to Figure 10, consider a high gain system (say gain = 50, PB = 2%). Under steady state conditions with the process at the setpoint the inflow will have a constant value. This is usually taken to be a control signal of 50% for a proportional controller with the process at the setpoint. In other words we have a 50% control capability. With our high gain system it can be seen that the maximum control signal will be achieved with an error of =1% (control signal = gain x error). This control signal will cause the valve to go fully open, the level will rise and the process will cross the setpoint. The error signal will now change sign and when the error again exceeds 1% the resultant control signal will now cause the valve to fully close hence completely stopping the inflow. This process will be repeated continuously we have reverted to an on/off control situation with all the disadvantages previously mentioned. Obviously there must be some optimum setting of PB which is a trade off between the highly stable but sluggish low gain system with large offset, and the fast acting, unstable on/off system with mean offset equal to zero. The accepted optimum setting is one that causes the process to decay in a decay method as shown in both Figures 10and 11. The quarter decay curves show that the process returns to a steady state condition after three cycles of damped oscillation. This optimization will be discussed more fully in the section on controller tuning. Recall the output of a proportional controller is equal to: m = ke where m = control signal %100 k = controller gain = PB e = error signal = (SP M) Clearly if the error is zero the control signal will be zero, this is an undesirable situation. Therefore for proportional control a constant term or bias must be added to provide a steady state control signal when the error is zero. For the purposes of this course we will assume the steady state output of a proportional controller when at the setpoint to be 50%. The equation Notefor proportional control becomes: m = ke + b where b = bias (=50% added to output signal)

Calculation of Offset Example: An air to open valve on the inflow controls level in a tank. When the process is at the setpoint the valve opening is 50%. An increase in outflow results in the valve opening increasing to a new steady state value of 70%. What is the resulting offset if the controller PB is: a) 50% b) 25%

This additional control signal is known as Reset action, it resets the process to the setpoint. Reset action is always used in conjunction with Noteproportional action. Mathematically, reset action is the integration of the error signal to zero hence the alternative nomenclature Integral action. The combination of proportional plus reset action is usually referred to as PI control. The response of PI control is best considered in open loop form, i.e., the loop is opened just before the final control element so that the control

It can be seen that proportional action will be equal to ke where k is the gain of the controller. Reset action will cause a ramping of the output signal to provide the necessary extra control action. After time, say t, the reset action has repeated the original proportional response; this is the repeat time, the unit chosen for defining reset action. It can be seen that increased reset action would increase the slope of the reset ramp. Note that proportional action occurs first followed by reset action. Reset action is defined as either reset rate in repeats per minute (RPM) or reset time in minutes per repeat (MPR).

We have already mentioned that the optimum setting for proportional control is one, which produces a decay curve. What is the optimum setting for reset action? We will discuss this more fully in the module on controller tuning. For now, let us just consider a very slow reset rate and a very fast reset rate. A very slow reset rate will ramp the control signal up very slowly. Eventually the process will be returned to the setpoint. The control will be very sluggish and if the system is subjected to frequent disturbances the process may not ever be fully restored to the setpoint! If a very fast reset rate is used, the control signal will increase very quickly. If we are controlling, say, a large volume tank, the level response of the tank may lag behind the response of the controller. The control signal will go to its limiting value (0 or 100%) and the limiting control signal will eventually cause the process to cross the setpoint. The error signal will now change its sign, and reset action will also reverse direction and quickly ramp to the other extreme.

This process will continue indefinitely, the control valve cycling, with eresulting wear and tear, from one extreme to the other. The actual process level will cycle about the setpoint. This cycling is known as reset windup and will occur if the process is subject to a sustained error and a too fast reset rate. The reset rate must be decreased (reset time increased). The mathematical expression for P + I control becomes:

Proportional control i.e., (proper sign of gain) inputs a 180 lag into the system (the correction must be opposite to the error). Reset action introduces a further lag. This fact must be taken into account when tuning the controller. (It follows proportional action). The total lag must be increased and is now closer to 160. (160 lag means the feedback signal is now in phase with the input and adding to it the system is now unstable.) Reset action causes the loop to be less stable 1.5.1 Summary Reset action removes offset. Its units are Repeats per Minute (RPM) or Minutes per Repeat (MPR) If reset action is faster than the process can respond, Reset Windup can occur. Reset Action makes a control loop less stable. Do not subject process loops with reset control to sustained errors the control signal will be ramped to the extreme value reset windup will occur.

1.6 RATE OR DERIVATIVE ACTION Consider a control system subjected to a disturbance, which causes the error to increase in a ramped manner. Proportional control would respond to this ramped error with a similarly ramped output signal whose slope is proportional to the controller gain. We could reduce the final deviation from the setpoint, i.e., the offset, and the recovery time, if we can provide some extra control signal related to the rate of change of the error signal. This is termed rate or derivative action and is usually incorporated with proportional control. Rate action is an anticipatory control, which provides a large initial control signal to limit the final deviation. The typical open loop response is shown in Figure 15. It can be seen that the derivative action gives a large, immediate, control signal, which will limit the deviation. Proportional action is then superimposed upon this step. When the error stops changing derivative action ceases. Note that the displayed step response unobtainable in practice because the normal response approximates and exponential rise and decay. The rate response gives an immediate control signal, which will be equal to what the proportional response would be after some time, say, T minutes. Derivative units are given in minutes. These are the minutes advance of proportional action. Derivative action is a leading control and, therefore, tends to reduce the overall lag in the system the system is somewhat more stable.

Mathematically proportional plus derivative (PD) control is expressed as:

m = controller signal k = controller gain TD = derivative time e = error b = bias signal The use of derivative control is limited. At first glance, derivative control looks attractive. It should help reduce the time required to stabilize an error. However, it will not remove offset. The control signal from derivative action ceases when the error stops changing, which will not necessarily be at the setpoint. Its use, in practice, is also limited to slow acting processes. If used on a fast acting process, such as flow, control signals due to derivative action will often drive the control valve to extremes following quite small but steep (Large de/dt)changes in input. Consider a simple flow control system, consisting of an orifice plate with flow transmitter and square root extractor plus direct acting controller and air to close valve (refer to Figure 16). This system is subjected to a small, but fast, process disturbance. How will this control scheme perform under proportional and derivative control modes?

Fig 16

To answer this question, let us consider the PD response to a fast change in process signal in an open loop system (Figure 17).

The upper portion of Figure 17 shows a positive process excursion, AB, from the zero error condition, followed by an equal negative excursion, BC, which returns the error to zero. Note that the rate of change, i.e., the slope of the process change, from B to C is twice the rate of change of the process, from A to B. Mathematically: The proportional control action from B to C will be equal but opposite to the proportional control action from A to B. The rate or derivative control action from B to C will be double that from A to B. The resulting open loop control signal pattern is shown in the lower portion of Figure 17. The controller gain and derivative settings remain constant.Very shortly after time (t0) the control signal increases abruptly to a value determined by the rate of change of the error (e), the derivative or rate time setting, and the controller gain. Proportional action ramps the control signal up, until time (t1), to a value determined by the error (e) and the controller gain setting. This includes the direction of the error and controller action. At time (t1) the rate of change of the process error, de/dt, momentarily becomes zero, so the original change in the control signal due to the rate action drops out. Then, the process error change direction becomes negative, and the derivative control action now produces an abrupt negative control signal, double the original derivative control signal. The proportional control action then ramps the control signal down until time (t2). At time (t2) the rate of change of the process error becomes zero, so the derivative control signal again drops out leaving the control signal at its original bias (zero) error value. Note that this final bias, (zero) error value of the control signal and, hence, the control valve position at the end of this excursion, is determined solely by the proportional. The valve has been stroked rapidly and repeated by the derivative action subjecting it to unnecessary wear, with no improvement in control.

The response of the closed loop shown in Figure 16 would be somewhat different because the resulting valve action would continuously alter the error signal. However, the valve would still be subjected to rapid and repeated stroking unnecessarily. Thus, it can be seen from the above discussion that the use of derivative action on fast acting processes such as flow is not advisable. Let us look at the control of a sluggish (generally a physically large) system. As an example, consider a large tank with a variable outflow and a control valve on the inflow. A large volume change will, therefore, be necessary before any appreciable change in level occurs. Consider a large change in the outflow. After some delay (due to the sluggishness of the system) the controller will respond. If we have only proportional mode on the controller the delays will mean that the controller is always chasing the error initiated by the outflow disturbance. The response to proportional control is shown in Figure 18. Note that the process has not fully stabilized after a considerable period of time. The addition of derivative action, however, causes an anticipatory response. The control signal increases more rapidly and the process is returned to a steady state in a much shorter time. Note also that: The system is more stable (less cycling) with PD control. Offset still exists.

Figure 18 Large System Under Proportional and Proportional Plus Derivative Control

1.6.1 Summary Derivative or rate action is anticipatory and will usually reduce, but not eliminate, offset. Its units are minutes (advance of proportional action). It tends to reduce lag in a control loop. Its use is generally limited to slow acting processes 1.7 MULTIPLE CONTROL MODES We have already discussed some of the possible combinations of control modes. These are: Proportional only, Proportional plus reset (integral) P + I, Proportional plus derivative (rate) P + D. It is also possible to use a combination of all three-control modes, Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (P + I + D). At a glance proportional only does not appear very attractive we will get an offset as the result of a disturbance and invariably we wish to control to a fixed setpoint. An application of proportional only control in a CANDU system is in the liquid zone level control system. The reason that straight proportional control can be used here is that the controlled variable is not level but neutron flux. The manipulated variable is the water level; therefore offset is not important as the level is manipulated to provide the required neutron flux. In general it can be said that the vast majority of control systems (probably greater than 90%) will incorporate proportional plus integral modes. (We usually want to control to a fixed setpoint.) Flow control systems will invariably have P + I control. Derivative control will generally be limited to large sluggish systems with long inherent control time delays, (for example, that shown in Figure 18.). A good general example is the heat exchanger. The thermal interchange process is often slow and the temperature sensor is usually installed in a thermal well, which further slows the control signal response. Frequently heat exchanger temperature controllers will incorporate threemode control (P + I + D).

NOTES ON ALARM ANNUNCIATORS

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Annunciators are normally used to call Attention to abnormal process conditions. An Annunciator provides a means whereby a number of potential Alarm Points in a Process Plant can be displayed in a centralized location. Annunciators usually include individual illuminated visual displays that are labeled to identify the particular monitored variable that is abnormal and audible devices. Annunciators may also call attention to the return to normal of the process conditions. The individual alarm points are operated from a common power supply and share a number of annunciators system components, including an audible signal generator (horn), a flasher and acknowledge and test pushbuttons. In normal operation the Annunciator system and individual alarm points are quiescent. The field device contact is an alarm switch that monitors a particular process variable and is actuated when the variable exceeds preset limits. In electrical annunciator systems it is normally a switch contact that closes (makes) or opens (breaks) the electrical circuit to the logic module and thereby initiates the alarm condition. In the alert stage the annunciator turns on the visual indicator for the particular alarm point and the audible signal and the flasher for the system.

FIG - Integral Logic Annunciator Arrangement

-Page 01 of 06

The visual indicator is usually a back lighted nameplate engraved with an inscription to identify the variable and the abnormal condition, but it can also be a bulls-eye light with a nameplate. The audible signal can be a horn, a buzzer, or a bell. The flasher is common to all individual alarm points and interrupts the circuit to the visual indicator as that point goes into the alert condition. This causes the light to continue to flash intermittently until either the abnormal condition returns to normal or it is acknowledged by the operator. The horn acknowledgment pushbutton is provided with a momentary contact; when it is operated, it changes the logic module circuit to silence the audible signal, stop the flasher and turn the visual indicator on steady. When the abnormal condition is corrected, the field device contact returns to normal and the visual indicator is automatically turned off. The lamp test pushbutton with its momentary contact tests for burned-out lamps in the visual indicators. When activated, the pushbutton closes a common circuit (bus) to each visual indicator in the annunciator system, turning on those lamps that are not already on as a result of an abnormal operating conditions.

-Page 02 of 06

OPERATING SEQUENCES The operation of an individual alarm points in the normal, alert, acknowledged; and return-to-normal stages is the annunciator sequence. A wide variety of sequences can be developed from commercially available logic components; many special sequences have been designed to suit the requirements of particular process applications. The five most commonly used annunciator sequences are shown in table 1 identified by the code designation of the Instrument Society of America (ISA). (For additional details on less frequently used sequences, see the ISA recommended practice RP-18.1.) FLASHING SEQUENCE ISA Sequence 1B, also referred to as flashing sequence A, is the one most frequently used. The alert condition of an alarm point results in a flashing visual indication and an audible signal. The visual indication turns off automatically when the monitored process variable returns to normal. DIM SEQUENCE ISA Sequence 1D (often referred to as a dim sequence) is identical to Sequence 1B except that ordinarily the visual indicator is dim rather than off. A dimmer unit, common to the system, is required. Because all visual indicators are always turned on for dim (normal), flashing (alert), or steady (acknowledged) the feature for detecting lamp failure is unnecessary. RING BACK SEQUENCE ISA Sequence 2A (Commonly referred to as a ring back sequence) differs from Sequence 1B in that following acknowledgment the return-to-normal condition produces a dim flashing and an audible signal. An additional momentary contact reset pushbutton is required for this sequence. Pushing the reset button after the monitored variable has returned to normal turns off the dim flashing light and silences the audible signal. This sequence is applied when the operator must know if normal operating conditions have been restored. MANUAL RESET SEQUENCE ISA Sequence 2C is like Sequence IB except that the system must be reset manually after operation has returned to normal in order to turn off the visual indicator. This sequence is also referred to as a manual reset sequence and, like Sequence 2A, requires an additional momentary contact reset pushbutton. Sequence 2C is used when it is desirable to keep the visual indicator on (after the horn has been silenced by the acknowledgment pushbutton) even though the field device contact has returned to normal. FIRST OUT SEQUENCE ISA sequence 4A, also known as the first out sequence, is designed to identify the first of a number of interrelated variables that have exceeded normal operating limits. The first alarm causes flashing, and all subsequent points in the group turn on the steady light only. This sequence monitor interrelated variables. The Visual indication is turned off automatically when conditions return to normal after acknowledgment

-Page 03 of 06

MOST COMMONLY USED ANNUNCIATOR SEQUENCES

ISA Code for the Sequence IB FLASHING SEQUENCE Annunciator Condition Process Variable Condition ( Field device Contact ) Normal Abnormal Abnormal Normal Normal Normal Abnormal Abnormal Normal Visual Indicator Audible Signal Use Frequency

Normal Alert Acknowledged Normal again Test Normal Alert Acknowledged Normal again

Off Flashing On Off On Dim Flashing On Dim

Off On Off Off Off Off On Off Off

55%

ID DIM SEQUENCE

2A RING BACK SEQUENCE

Normal Alert Acknowledged Return to Normal Reset Test Normal Alert Acknowledged Return to Normal Reset Test Normal Alert Initial Subsequent Acknowledged Initial Subsequent Normal Again Test

Normal Abnormal Abnormal Normal Normal Normal Normal Abnormal Abnormal Normal Normal Normal Normal Abnormal Abnormal Normal Normal

Off Flashing On Dim Flashing Off On Off Flashing On On Off On Off Flashing On On On Off On

Off On Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off Off Off On Off Off Off Off Off

2C MANUAL RESET SEQUENCE

4A FIRST OUT SEQUENCE

28%

All Others

-Page 04 of 06

-Page 05 of 06

-Page 06 of 06

INTRODUCTION TO YOKOGAWA PCI PRODUCTS

o TRANSMITTERS o FLOWMETERS o RECORDERS o CONTROLLERS- UT SERIES o CONTROLLERS- US 1000S

TRANSMITTERS

EJX
INTRODUCTION: Pressure usually transuded to force by allowing it to act on a known area.
P= F A

In various units of a plant, Very high or Very low pressure both may cause partial or complete failure in operation.

Classification of Pressure

Absolute Pressure Measured above total vacuum or zero absolute. Zero absolute represents total lack of pressure. Atmospheric Pressure The pressure exerted by the earth's atmosphere. Atmospheric pressure at sea level is 14.696 Pisa. The value of atmospheric pressure decreases with increasing altitude. Barometric Pressure Same as atmospheric pressure.

Differential Pressure The difference is magnitude between some pressure value and some reference pressure.

In a sense, absolute pressure could be considered as a differential pressure with total vacuum or zero absolute as the reference. Gauge Pressure The pressure above atmospheric is called Gauge Pressure. Represents positive difference between measured pressure and existing atmospheric pressure. Yokogawa's Pressure family 1] EJX110A, EJX130A, EJX310A, EJX430A, EJX440ADifferential Pressure and Pressure Transmitter 2] EJX210A - Flange Mounted Differential Pressure Transmitter 3] EJX510A, EJX530A Absolute Pressure and Gauge Pressure Transmitter 4] EJX118A, EJX438A Diaphragm Sealed Differential Pressure and Pressure Transmitter 5] EJX910A Multivariable Transmitter 1] EJX110A, EJX130A, EJX310A, EJX430A and EJX440A: Differential Pressure and Pressure Transmitters 1.1] HANDLING CAUTIONS EJX Series transmitters are thoroughly tested at the factory before shipment. When taking delivery of an instrument, visually check them to make sure that no damage occurred during shipment. Also check that all transmitter mounting hardware shown in figure below. If the transmitter is ordered without the mounting bracket and the process connector, the transmitter mounting hardware will not be included. After checking the transmitter, carefully repack it in its box and keep it there until you are ready to install it. Storage The following precautions must be observed when storing the instrument, especially for a long period. (a) Select a storage area which meets the following conditions: It is not exposed to rain or subject to water seepage/leaks. Vibration and shock are kept to a minimum. It has an ambient temperature and relative humidity within the following ranges. Ambient temperature: 40 to 85C without integral indicator 30 to 80C with integral indicator Relative humidity: 0% to 100% R.H. Preferred temperature and humidity: Approx. 25C and 65% R.H.

(b) When storing the transmitter, repack it carefully in the packaging that it was originally shipped with. (c) If the transmitter has been used, thoroughly clean the chambers inside the cover flanges, so that there is no process fluid remaining inside. Before placing it in storage, also make sure that the pressure detector is securely connected to the transmitter section. SELECTING THE INSTALLATION LOCATION The transmitter is designed to withstand severe environmental conditions. However, to ensure that it will provide years of stable and accurate performance, take the following precautions when selecting the installation location. (a) Ambient Temperature Avoid locations subject to wide temperature variations or a significant temperature gradient. If the location is exposed to radiant heat from plant equipment, provide adequate thermal insulation and/or ventilation. (b) Ambient Atmosphere Do not install the transmitter in a corrosive atmosphere. If this cannot be avoided, there must be adequate ventilation as well as measures to prevent the leaking of rain water and the presence of standing water in the conduits. (c) Shock and Vibration Although the transmitter is designed to be relatively resistant to shock and vibration, an installation site should be selected where this is kept to a minimum. (d) Installation of Explosion-protected Transmitters An explosion-protected transmitters is certified for installation in a hazardous area containing specific gas types. Pressure Connection Never loosen the process connector bolts when an instrument is installed in a process. The device is under pressure, and a loss of seal can result in a sudden and uncontrolled release of process fluid. When draining toxic process fluids that have condensed inside the pressure detector, take appropriate steps to prevent the contact of such fluids with the skin or eyes and the inhalation of vapors from these fluids.

CAUTION 1. The temperature and pressure of fluid should be maintained at levels that are consistent with normal operating conditions. 2. The ambient temperature should be maintained at a level that is consistent with normal operating conditions. 3. Please take care to prevent water hammer and the like from inducing excessive pressures in pipes and valves. If phenomena are likely, install a safety valve or take some other appropriate measure to prevent pressure from exceeding PS. 4. Take appropriate measures at the device or system level to protect transmitters if they are to be operated near an external heat source.

COMPONENT NAMES

INSTALLATION 1. With differential pressure transmitters, the distance between the impulse piping connection ports is usually 54 mm as shown below. By changing the orientation of the process connector, the dimension can be changed to 51 mm or 57 mm.

2. The transmitter can be mounted on a nominal 50 mm (2-inch) pipe using the mounting bracket supplied, as shown in figure below. The transmitter can be mounted on either a horizontal or a vertical pipe.

3. When mounting the bracket on the transmitter, tighten the (four) bolts that hold the transmitter with a torque of approximately 39 Nm {4kgfm}. Changing the Process Connection The transmitter is shipped with the process connection specified at the time of ordering. To change the process connection, the drain (vent) plug must be repositioned. To reposition a drain (vent) plug, use a wrench to slowly and gently unscrew it. Then, remove and remount it on the opposite side. Wrap sealing tape around the drain (vent) plug threads (*1 in the figure below), and apply a lubricant to the threads of the drain (vent) screw(s) (*2 below). To tighten the drain (vent) plugs, apply a torque of 34 to 39 Nm {3.5 to 4kgfm}.

Swapping the High/Low pressure Side Connection This section is applicable only for EJX110A and EJX130A differential transmitters, and not applicable for gauge or absolute pressure transmitters. Rotating Pressure-detector Section 180 This procedure can be applied only to a transmitter with a vertical impulse piping type. The procedure below can be used to turn the pressure detector assembly 180. Perform this operation in a maintenance shop with the necessary tools laid out and ready for use, and then install the transmitter in the field after making the change. 1) Use an Allen wrench (JIS B4648, nominal 2.5 mm) to remove the two setscrews at the joint between the pressure-detector section and transmitter section. 2) Leaving the transmitter section in position, rotate the pressure-detector section 180. 3) Tighten the two setscrews to fix the pressure detector section and transmitter section together (at a torque of 1.5 Nm).

Using the Communicator This method is applicable only to the Model EJX110A and EJX130A. With a communicator, you can change which process connection is used as the high-pressure side without mechanically rotating the pressure-detector section 180. To change, call parameter D15: H/L SWAP for BRAIN Communication or H/L swap for HART Communication and select REVERSE (right side: low pressure; left side: high pressure) or select NORMAL to change back to normal (right side: high pressure; left side: low pressure).

INSTALLING IMPULSE PIPING

The impulse piping that connects the process outputs to the transmitter must convey the process pressure accurately. If, for example, gas collects in a liquid filled impulse line, or the drain for a gas-filled impulse line becomes plugged, it will not convey the pressure accurately. Since this will cause errors in the measurement output, select the proper piping method for the process fluid (gas, liquid, or steam). Pay careful attention to the following points when routing the impulse piping and connecting the impulse piping to a transmitter. CONNECTING IMPULSE PIPING TO A TRANSMITTER 1. Check the High and Low Pressure Connections on the Transmitter Symbols H and L have been placed on the capsule assembly to indicate high and low pressure side. With differential pressure transmitters, connect the high-pressure side impulse line to the H side, and the low-pressure side impulse line to the L side. With gauge/absolute pressure transmitters, connect the impulse line to the H side

2. Tightening the Process Connector Mounting Bolts After connecting an impulse line, tighten the process connector mounting bolts uniformly. 3.Connecting the Transmitter and 3-Valve Manifold (for differential pressure transmitters) A 3-valve manifold consists of two stop valves to block process pressure and an equalizing valve to equalize the pressures on the high and low pressure sides of the transmitter. Such a manifold makes it easier to disconnect the transmitter from the impulse piping, and is convenient when adjusting the transmitter zero point. There are two 3-valve manifold types: the pipe mounting type and the direct-mounting type; care should be taken with respect to the following points when connecting the manifold to the transmitter.

PIPE-MOUNTING TYPE 3-VALVE MANIFOLD 1) Screw nipples into the connection ports on the transmitter side of the 3-valve manifold, and into the impulse piping connecting ports on the process connectors. (To maintain proper sealing, wind sealing tape around the nipple threads.) 2) Mount the 3-valve manifold on the 50 mm (2-inch) pipe by fastening a U-bolt to its mounting bracket. Tighten the U-bolt nuts only lightly at this time. 3) Install the pipe assemblies between the 3-valve manifold and the process connectors and lightly tighten the ball head lock nuts. (The ball-shaped ends of the pipes must be handled carefully, since they will not seal properly if the ball surface is scratched or otherwise damaged.) 4) Now tighten the nuts and bolts securely in the following sequence: Process connector bolts -- Transmitter-end ball head lock nuts-- 3-valve manifold ball head lock nuts-- 3-valve manifold mounting bracket U-bolt nuts

DIRECT-MOUNTING VALVE MANIFOLD

TYPE

Mount the 3-valve manifold on the transmitter. (When mounting, use the two gaskets and the four bolts provided with the 3-valve manifold. Tighten the bolts evenly.) Mount the process connectors and gaskets on the top of the 3-valve manifold (the side on which the impulse piping will be connected).

PROCESS PRESSURE TAP ANGLES If condensate, gas, sediment or other extraneous material in the process piping gets into the impulse piping, pressure measurement errors may result. To prevent such problems, the process pressure taps must be angled as shown in figure below according to the kind of fluid being measured.

If the process fluid is a gas, the taps must be vertical or within 45 degrees either side of vertical. If the process fluid is a liquid, the taps must be horizontal or below horizontal, but not more than 45 degrees below horizontal. If the process fluid is steam or other condensing vapor, the taps must be horizontal or above horizontal, but not more than 45 above horizontal.

IMPULSE PIPING CONNECTION EXAMPLES

OPERATION Preparation for Starting Operation This section describes the operation procedure for the EJX110A as shown in figure below (vertical impulse piping type, high-pressure connection: right side) when measuring the liquid flow rate.

EJX430A and EJX310A as shown in figure below when measuring pressure.

Check that the process pressure tap valves drain valves, and 3-valve manifold stop valves on both the low pressure and high-pressure sides are closed, and that the 3-valve manifold equalizing valve is opened. The procedure mentioned below is to be followed to introduce process pressure into the impulse piping and transmitter. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS Open the low pressure and high pressure tap valves to fill the impulse piping with process liquid. Slowly open the high-pressure stop valve to fill the transmitter pressure-detector section with process liquid. Close the high-pressure stop valve. Gradually open the lowpressure stop valve and completely fill the transmitter pressure-detector section with process liquid. Close the low-pressure stop valve. Gradually open the high-pressure stop valve. At this time, equal pressure is applied to the low and high-pressure sides of the transmitter. Check that there are no liquid leaks in the impulse piping, 3-valve manifold, transmitter, or other components.

GAUGE/ABSOLUTE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

Open the tap valve (main valve) to fill the impulse piping with process fluid. Gradually open the stop valve to introduce process fluid into the transmitter pressuredetector section. Confirm that there is no pressure leak in the impulse piping, transmitter, or other components.

ADJUSTING ZERO POINT FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS Before adjusting zero point, make sure that the screw is located inside the cover. Use a slotted Equalize the transmitter, and then turn the counterclockwise to decrease the output. The resolution of 0.01% of the setting range. STARTING OPERATION After completing the zero point adjustment, follow the procedures below to start operation. Steps 1) and 2) are specific to the differential pressure transmitters. 1) Close the equalizing valve. 2) Gradually open the low-pressure stop valve. This places the transmitter in an operational condition. 3) Confirm the operating status. If the output signal exhibits wide fluctuations (hunting) due to periodic variation in the process pressure, use the communicator to dampen the transmitter output signal. Confirm the hunting using a receiving instrument or the integral indicator, and set the optimum damping time constant. 4) After confirming the operating status, perform the following. SHUTTING DOWN THE TRANSMITTER Shut down the transmitter as follows. 1) Turn off the power. 2) Close the low-pressure stop valve. 3) Open the equalizing valve. 4) Close the high-pressure stop valve. 5) Close the high pressure and low pressure tap valves. equalizing valve is open. The zero-adjustment screwdriver to turn the zero-adjustment screw. screw clockwise to increase the output or zero point adjustment can be made with a

DRAINING CONDENSATE Gradually open the drain screw or drain plug and drain the transmitter pressure-detector section as shown in fig below. When all accumulated liquid is completely removed, close the drain screw or drain plug. Tighten the drain screw to a torque of 10 Nm, and the drain plug to a torque of 34 to 39 Nm.

VENTING GAS Gradually open the vent screw to vent gas from the transmitter pressure-detector section as shown in figure below 2) When the transmitter is completely vented, close the vent screw. 3) Tighten the vent screw to a torque of 10 Nm.

MAINTENANCE Since the accumulated process fluid may be toxic or otherwise harmful, take appropriate care to avoid contact with the body or inhalation of vapors when draining condensate or venting gas from the transmitter pressure-detector section and even after dismounting the instrument from the process line for maintenance. Disassembly and Reassembly Always turn OFF power and shut off and release pressures before disassembly.

REPLACING THE INTEGRAL INDICATOR 1) Remove the cover. While supporting the integral indicator with one hand, loosen its two mounting screws. 2) Dismount the LCD board assembly from the CPU assembly. When doing this, carefully pull the LCD board assembly straightforward so as not to damage the connector pins between it and the CPU assembly. Attaching the Integral Indicator 1) Align both the LCD board assembly and CPU assembly connectors and engage them. 2) Insert and tighten the two mounting screws. 3) Replace the cover.

Replacing the CPU Board Assembly 1) Remove the cover and remove the indicator. 2) Turn the zero-adjustment screw to the position (where the screw head slot is horizontal) as shown in figure below 3) Disconnect the output terminal cable (cable with brown connector at the end). When doing this, lightly press the side of the CPU assembly connector and pull the cable connector to disengage. 4) Use a socket driver (width across flats, 5.5mm) to loosen the two bosses. 5) Carefully pull the CPU assembly straightforward to remove it. 6) Disconnect the flat cable (cable with white connector at the end) that connects the CPU assembly and the capsule.

Mounting the CPU Assembly 1) Connect the flat cable (with white connector) between the CPU assembly and the capsule. 2) Connect the output terminal cable (with brown connector). 3) Align and engage the zero-adjustment screw pin with the groove on the bracket on the CPU assembly. Then insert the CPU board assembly straight onto the post in the amplifier case. 4) Tighten the two bosses. 5) Replace the cover.

Cleaning and Replacing the Capsule Assembly 1) Remove the two setscrews that connect the transmitter section and pressure-detector section. 2) Remove the hexagon-head screw and the stopper. 3) Separate the transmitter section and pressure detector section. 4) Remove the nuts from the four flange bolts. 5) While supporting the capsule assembly with one hand, remove the cover flange. 6) Remove the capsule assembly. 7) Clean the capsule assembly or replace with a new one.

Troubleshooting If any abnormality appears in the measured values, use the troubleshooting flow chart below to isolate and remedy the problem. Since some problems have complex causes, these flow charts may not identify all.

BASIC FLOW AND SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

EJX510A & EJX530A Absolute Pressure & Gauge Pressure Transmitters INSTALLING IMPULSE PIPING Figure shown below shows some examples of typical impulse piping connections. Before connecting the transmitter to the process, study the transmitter installation location, the process piping layout, and the characteristics of the process fluid (corrosiveness, toxicity, flammability, etc.), in order to make appropriate changes and additions to the connection configurations. If the impulse line is long, bracing or supports should be provided to prevent vibration. The impulse piping material used must be compatible with the process pressure, temperature, and other conditions. A variety of process pressure tap valves (main valves) are available according to the type of connection (flanged, screwed, welded), construction (globe, gate, or ball valve), temperature and pressure. Select the type of valve most appropriate for the application.

OPERATION Following procedure has to follow to introduce process pressure into the impulse piping and transmitter. 1) Open the tap valve (main valve) to fill the impulse piping with process fluid. 2) Gradually open the stop valve to introduce process fluid into the transmitter pressure-detector section. 3) Confirm that there is no pressure leak in the impulse piping, transmitter, or other components.

EJX118A and EJX438A Diaphragm Sealed Differential Pressure and Pressure Transmitters COMPONENT NAMES

INSTALLATION Mounting the Diaphragm Seals Mount the diaphragm seals using the flanges as shown in figure below.

The figure below shows how to mount the diaphragm seals on a tank. The mating flange, gasket, bolts and nuts are to be procured by the user.

The transmitter should be installed at least 600 mm below the high pressure (HP) process connection to ensure a positive head pressure of fill fluid. Pay special attention to vacuum applications. If it can not be installed at least 600 mm below the HP process connection, use the equation below:

Mounting the Flushing Connection Ring The flushing connection ring is mounted to the pressure detector section as shown in figure below

(1) Mount the ring holder on the ring and loosely tighten the mounting screws. (2) Place the spiral gasket in the ring groove. With the ring correctly aligned and flush with the face of the pressure detector, securely tighten each ring holders mounting screws. (3) Position the ring so that the drain/vent plugs are aligned straight up and down. Mounting to Process Flange Tighten the bolts to completely close the gap between the ring and the pressure detector section. The mating flange, gasket, stud bolts and nuts are to procured by the user

OPERATION Preparation for Starting Operation This following point describes the operation procedure for the EJX118A when measuring liquid level in a closed tank and EJX438A when measuring pressure in a tank.

(a) Confirm that there is no leak in the connecting part of each diaphragm seal mounting flange. (b) Turn ON power and connect the communicator .Open the terminal box cover and connect the communicator to the SUPPLY + and terminals. (c) Using the communicator, confirm that the transmitter is operating properly. Check parameter values or change the setpoints as necessary. If the transmitter is equipped with an integral indicator, its indication can be used to confirm that the transmitter is operating properly. Troubleshooting Basic Troubleshooting

EJX910A- Multivariable Transmitters

EJX910A Features Multi Sensing Function The EJX910A multivariable transmitter has a Multi Sensing function that enables a single transmitter to measure differential pressure, static pressure, and external temperature. Mass flow measurement instruments can calculate and output the flow value using these three measured variables. The EJXMVTool mass flow configuration software is used to configure mass flow calculation. Simultaneous Analog Output and Pulse Output (HART protocol type) The EJX910A has one analog output for the output of single measured variables. With digital communications, all of these variables can be output simultaneously. In addition to analog output, pulse output is provided as a standard function of the EJX910A. It can perform both types of output simultaneously. Pulse output is used for total flow, flow rate, and alarm status.

Block Diagram of EJX910A System (HART protocol type) Flow Calculation There are two flow calculation modes: auto compensation mode and basic mode. The EJXMVTool mass flow configuration software is required to configure auto compensation mode. Auto Compensation Mode Configuration of the fluid physical properties and the EJX910A primary device can be performed from an EJXMVTool dialog window. In auto compensation mode, all flow factors for flow calculation are dynamically compensated to an optimum value with a high level of accuracy. The flow factors that are automatically compensated are discharge coefficient, diameter of primary device, upstream internal pipe diameter, gas expansion factor, density, and viscosity.

Auto Compensation Mode Block Diagram

Configuration Procedure for Auto Compensation Mode The EJXMVTool is required to configure auto compensation mode. Following steps shows the procedures for HART protocol type. Before starting the configuration procedure, have on hand all data on the fluid and the primary devices. (1) Have ready a power supply, a personal computer, a HART modem, and the FSA210 mass flow configuration software. (2) Install the mass flow configuration software on the personal computer.

(3) Connect the EJX910A to the power supply. (4) Connect the HART modem to the personal computer and connect its clips to the supply terminals on the EJX910A. (5) Perform flow configuration. (6) Execute flow simulation using the HART HHT orthe FSA210 to confirm the configured flow Parameters. When executing the simulation, it is necessary toconnect the RTD or mock resistance (about 100 Ohms) to the transmitter. Input the differential pressure, static pressure, and temperature values and confirm that the desired flow is obtained. (7) Remove the HART modem from the EJX910A. (8) Turn off the power supply. Basic Mode In basic mode, flow operation and density compensation are performed conventionally, with the flow factors being input manually. The flow rate is calculated using the constant flow factor. Density compensation by phase Gas: Compensation as ideal gas by temperature and pressure. Liquid: Compensation by temperature. Selection of the operational expression according to the fluid type and unit category, is done according to the table shown below Table: Flow Operational Expression for Basic Mode

Type: Symbols

Flow Unit Category (Mass Flow Unit (HART protocol type))

Normal Standard Volume Flow Unit (HART protocol type)

Volume Flow Unit (HART protocol type)

Configuration Procedure for Basic Mode Either a communicator or the mass flow configuration software is required to carry out configuration in basic mode. Calculation of the basic mode parameters is necessary to perform configuration. Following shows the procedures for HART protocol type. (1) Have ready a power supply, a personal computer, a HART modem and the FSA210 mass flow configuration software. (2) Install the flow configuration software on the personal computer. This is not necessary if only the HART communicators used for configuration. (3) Connect the EJX910A to the power supply. (4) Connect the HART communicator or the HART modem to the EJX910. (5) Perform flow configuration.

(6) Execute flow simulation with the HART HHT or the FSA210 software to confirm the configured flow parameters. When executing the simulation, it is necessary to connect the RTD or mock resistance (about 100 Ohms) to the transmitter. Input the differential pressure, static pressure, and temperature values and confirm that the desired flow has been obtained. (7) Remove the HART communicator or the HART modem from the EJX910A. (8) Turn off the power supply.

COMPONENT NAMES

WIRING RTD Cable Connection Connection of the RTD cable is always required to measure external temperature. The procedures are mentioned below to connect and disconnect a cable when a cable gland or a conduit is used. 1 Connecting Shielded Cable with Cable Gland (External temperature input code:-1, -2, -3, and -4) RTD connection components: EJX910A, two cable glands, and RTD cable. Two cable glands are attached.

Components for the cable gland The cable gland assembly consists of an entry, seal, running coupler, and backnut. Make sure that the seal is attached inside the entry and that the thread size of the cable gland is the same as that for the RTD electrical connection.

Procedure (1) Disassemble the cable gland: loosen the running coupler to separate the backnut from the entry. (2) Remove the protection cap over the transmitter electrical connection and install the entry on the electrical connection. Note that a nonhardening sealant should be applied to the threads for a 1/2 NPT connection and a gasket should be used for an M20 connection.

(3) Pass the RTD cable through the running coupler and backnut assembly.

(4) Remove the cap from the connecting port. Then insert the RTD cable and firmly plug its connector into the connecting port in the transmitter's terminal box.

(5) Align the running coupler on the entry.

(6) Turn the running coupler until the seal in the entry comes into contact with the RTD cable.

(7) Rotate the running coupler another half turn to securely tighten the seal on the RTD cable.

2 Connecting Shielded Cable for Conduit Use (External temperature input code: -B, -C, and -D) RTD connection components: EJX910A and RTD cable

Procedure (1) Remove the protection cap protecting the RTD electrical connection and insert the RTD cable.

(2) Remove the cap protecting the connecting port. Then insert the RTD cable and firmly plug the connector into the connecting port in the transmitter's terminal box. (3) Insert the cable through the conduit and attach it to the RTD electrical connection.

3 Removing Shielded Cable with Cable Gland (External temperature input code: -1, -2, -3, and -4) (1) By pulling out the string attached to the connector, slowly unplug the connector from the transmitter's connecting port. (2) Remove the running coupler and backnut assembly by turning the running coupler. (3) Pull the RTD cable out through the entry, running coupler, and backnut assembly. (4) Remove the entry from the RTD electrical connection. 4 Removing Shielded Cable for Conduit (External temperature input code: -B, -C, -D)

(1) By pulling out the string attached to the connector, slowly unplug the connector from the transmitter's connecting port. (2) Remove the conduit from the RTD electrical connection. (3) Pull the RTD cable out through the RTD electrical connection. 5 Cable Connection RTD Terminal Box Side EJX910A multivariable transmitter RTD I/F is for 3- wire Type RTD, Pt100. The following connection is to be followed when wiring an RTD of the 2- or 4-wire type.

The Method of Wiring for the RTD Side RTD Terminal

OPERATION Multivariable Transmitters 1) Open the low pressure and high pressure tap valves to fill the impulse piping with process liquid. 2) Slowly open the high pressure stop valve to fill the transmitter pressure-detector section with process liquid. 3) Close the high pressure stop valve. 4) Gradually open the low pressure stop valve and completely fill the transmitter pressuredetector section with process liquid. 5) Close the low pressure stop valve. 6) Gradually open the high pressure stop valve. At this time, equal pressure is applied to the low and high pressure sides of the transmitter. 7) Check that there are no liquid leaks in the impulse piping, 3-valve manifold, transmitter, or other components

MAINTENANCE Disassembly and Reassembly Always turn OFF power and shut off and release pressures before disassembly. Use proper tools for all operations. Removing the Integral Indicator 1) Remove the cover. 2) While supporting the integral indicator with one hand, loosen its two mounting screws. 3) Dismount the LCD board assembly from the CPU assembly. When doing this, carefully pull the LCD board assembly straight forward so as not to damage the connector pins between it and the CPU assembly. Attaching the Integral Indicator 1) Align both the LCD board assembly and CPU assembly connectors and engage them. 2) Insert and tighten the two mounting screws. 3) Replace the cover.

Troubleshooting If any abnormality appears in the measured values, use the troubleshooting flow chart below to isolate and remedy the problem. Basic Troubleshooting First determine whether the process variable is actually abnormal or a problem exists in the measurement system. If the problem is in the measurement system, isolate the problem and decide what corrective action to take. This transmitter is equipped with a self-diagnostic function which will be useful in troubleshooting, and the transmitter equipped with an integral indicator will show an alarm code as a result of self-diagnosis.

FLOW METERS

o VORTEX FLOWMETERS o MAGNETIC FLOWMETER o MASS FLOW METER o VARIABLE AREA FLOWMETER

VORTEX FLOW METER

PRINCPLE OF MEASUREMENT When a vortex shedder is placed in a flowing fluid, it generates a Karman vortex street, with alternating whirl vortices on the downstream side of the shedder as shown in Figure below

Assuming that the frequency of vortex generated by a shedder is f, the flow velocity is v, and the vortex shedder width is d, the following equation is obtained.

This equation also applies to YEWFLO installed in a pipeline.

Q: Volumetric flow rate D: Inside diameter of YEWFLO St: Strouhal number From equations (1) and (2), the volumetric flow rate is given by,

Strouhal number (St) is a dimensionless number which is a function of the shape and size of the vortex shedder. Therefore, by selecting an appropriate shape, the Strouhal number can be kept constant over a wide range of Reynolds numbers.

Relationship between Strouhal Number and Reynolds Number

Thus, once the Strouhal number is known, the flow rate can be obtained by measuring the vortex shedding frequency. Equation (3) also shows that the flow rate can be measured independently of the fluid pressure, temperature, density and viscosity. However, compensations for temperature and pressure are necessary when measuring volumetric flow and mass flow rate in the reference (standard) state. METHOD OF DETECTING VORTEXSHEDDING FREQUENCY The vortex shedder of YEWFLO has a trapezoidal cross section which provides excellent linearity of the vortex-shedding frequency and generates a stable and strong street pattern. Figure shows the vortex flow-pattern forming behind a trapezoidal vortex shedder.

To transmit the vortex-shedding frequency, YEWFLO uses piezoelectric elements to detect the stress generated by the alternating lift on the whole vortex shedder when vortices are generated.

The features of the piezoelectric element method are as follows: (1) The piezoelectric element sensor can be built into the vortex shedder to avoid direct contact with the process fluid. (2) Because the method detects stress, the vortex shedder does not need to be displaced far, so the meter construction remains stable and rigid. (3) Because the piezoelectric element is very sensitive, a wide range of flow rates, from low to high velocity, can be measured. (4) Wide range of operating temperature and pressure

Principle of Frequency Detection

When the fluid flows directly into the shedder bar pictured in above figure , vortices are generated from the vortex shedder. The shedder is subjected to alternating lift representing the same frequency as that of vortex-shedding. This alternating lift produces stress changes in the vortex shedder. The frequency of these stress changes, the vortex-shedding frequency, is detected by piezoelectric elements hermetically sealed in the vortex shedder. The intensity of the alternating lift is proportional to the square of the flow velocity and the density of the fluid. The peak value of lift FL is given by,

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Dual piezoelectric elements fixed on the upper part of the vortex shedder efficiently detect the signal stress caused by the vortex street while eliminating the effects of noise such as pipeline vibration.

As expressed by the arrows in above figure, stress caused by pipeline vibration can be divided into three components of force: lift, drag, and vertical force. The alignment of the dual piezoelectric elements as shown above figure is set so as not to sense the vibration in the directions of the drag and vertical force. The vibration in the direction of lift, however, is sensed as part of the vortex signal since they appear in the same direction. While in a digital YEWFLO, an effective combination of the proven dual-sensor alignment and spectral signal processing (SSP) technology eliminates noise caused by pipeline vibration or the like even in this vertical direction.

SPECTRAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (SSP) The converter circuitry incorporating the SSP technology is shown in the figure below. The SSP, a state-of-the-art technology, effectively rejects the effects of pipeline vibration.

MAGNETIC FLOW METER

Principle Magnetic Flowmeter is measured conductive liquid with these features. Especially, magnetic flowmeter is strong against corrosive fluid and slurry fluid. The principle employs Faradays law of electromagnetic induction. When the magnetic field applies and a conductive liquid flows in the flow tube, an EMF which is proportional to the flow velocity is generated. EMF is generated in perpendicular direction to the magnetic field and flow according to Fleming's rule. Magnetic flowmeter detects the generated EMF with electrodes attached flow tube wall. E=D*V*B E : electromotive force (V) D : inner diameter of flow tube (m) V : average flow velocity (m/s) B : magnetic flux density (T/m2)

Converter

Coils

Flow velocity

Electrode

1] The magnitude of the induced voltage E is directly proportional to the velocity of the conductor V, conductor width D,and the strength of the magnetic field B. 2] Magnetic field coils placed on opposite sides of the pipe generate a magnetic field. As the conductive process liquid moves through the field with average velocity V, electrodes sense the induced voltage. 3] The width of the conductor is represented by the distance between electrodes. 4] An insulating liner prevents the signal from shorting to the pipe wall. 5] The only variable in this application of Faraday's law is the velocity of the conductive liquid V because field strength is controlled constant and electrode spacing is fixed.

CORIOLIS MASS FLOW METER - ROTAMASS

The Coriolis meter uses an obstruction less U-shaped tube as a sensor and applies Newton's Second Law of Motion to determine flow rate. Inside the sensor housing, the sensor tube vibrates at its natural frequency. The sensor tube is driven by an electromagnetic drive coil located at the center of the bend in the tube and vibrates similar to that of a tuning fork.

The fluid flows into the sensor tube and is forced to take on the vertical momentum of the vibrating tube. When the tube is moving upward during half of its vibration cycle the fluid flowing into the sensor resists being forced upward by pushing down on the tube.

The fluid flowing out of the sensor has an upward momentum from the motion of the tube. As it travels around the tube bend, the fluid resists changes in its vertical motion by pushing up on the tube. The difference in forces causes the sensor tube to twist. When the tube is moving downward during the second half of its vibration cycle, it twists in the opposite direction. This twisting characteristic is called the Coriolis Effect.

According to Newton's Second Law of Motion, the amount of sensor tube twist is directly proportional to the mass flow rate of the fluid flowing through the tube. Electromagnetic velocity detectors located on each side of the flow tube measure the velocity of the vibrating tube. Mass flow is determined by measuring the time difference exhibited by the velocity detector signals. During zero flow conditions; no tube twist occurs, resulting in no time difference between the two velocity signals. With flow, a twist occurs with a resulting time difference between the two velocity signals. This time difference is directly proportional to mass flow.

FLOW SENSOR CONTRUCTION

The Coriolis mass flow meter measures the mass flow independent of the properties of the flowing medium. In addition the density and the temperature of the fluid is measured. The detector tubes are excited by an electro-magnetic driver at a resonant frequency. When the fluid passes through the tubes the effect of the Coriolis forces deflects the tubes minutely. The interaction in the tubes between the natural resonant frequency and the minute deflection due to the Coriolis effect is detected as a small phase difference by two electromagnetic sensors. This small phase difference is a direct measure of the mass flow through the detector. The resonance frequency of the tubes is a measure of the density of the fluid in the meter.

No Flow : Parallel Vibration

Mass Flow : Coriolis Twist

FLOW EQUATION

Ac 1 M = Sk Ae f V
M Ac Ae Sk Sk(20C) fv Skt = = = = = = = = Mass flow rate Amplitude of coriolis oscillation Amplitude of excitation oscillation Sensor constant (calibration constant) Sk(20C) (1+Skt x (T-20C)) temperature correction Sensor constant at 20C Excitation frequency temperature correction coefficient (material constant)

Density Equation:

= KD

f (20 C) l f (20 C) v

With density fl(20) fv(20) KD fv(20) = = = = exciting frequency of the empty tubes at 20C exciting frequency of the filled tubes at 20C density calibration constant fv / (1+FKT (T of the actual frequency temperature correction on material and size 20 C)) temperature correction

FKT

coefficient,

depending

VARIABLE AREA METERS ROTA METER

1] Rotameters (also known as variable-area flow meters) are typically made from a tapered glass tube that is positioned vertically in the fluid flow 2] A float that is the same size as the base of the glass tube rides upward in relation to the amount of flow. 3] Because the tube is larger in diameter at the top of the glass than at the bottom, the float resides at the point where the differential pressure between the upper and lower surfaces balance the weigh if the float. 4] In most Rotameter applications, the flow rate is read directly from a scale inscribed on the glass; in some cases, an automatic sensing device is used to sense the level of the float and transmit a flow signal. 5] These "transmitting Rotameter" are often made from stainless steel or other materials for various fluid applications and higher pressures.

They measure a wider band of flow (10 to 1) than an orifice plate with an accuracy of 2 percent, and a maximum operating pressure of 300 psig when constructed of glass. Rota meters are commonly used for purge flows and levels.

Users Manual

Model DX102/DX104/DX106/DX112

DAQSTATION DX100

1 A 1

1 E 0

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IM 04L01A01-01E 5th Edition

CUT ALONG THIS LINE

Setting Items in the Setting Mode (Enclosed in parentheses are references.)

Soft key

Title

Item

File (8.9)

Header string to be written to file Name of directory to which data are to be saved Range of data to be saved during manual save Daylight savings time (10.14) Daylight savings time switch time

Quick Reference

Model DX102/DX104/DX106/DX112

DAQSTATION DX100

Save/Load, Clear data

#7 - #1

Save settings

Save setup data to the external storage medium (9.1)

#7 - #2

Load settings

Load setup data from the external storage medium (9.1)

#7 - #3

Save data

Store measured data using key operation (9.2)

Use this quick reference together with the users manual IM 04L01A01-01E.

#7 - #4

Load display data

Load the display data on the external storage medium (9.3)

#7 - #5

Load event data

Load the event data on the external storage medium (9.4)

Operation Screens Trend/Digital/Bar graph/Information (Alarm Summary/Message Summary/Memory Summary)/Historical Trend Switching Operation Screens

#7 - #5

File list

List the files on the external storage medium (9.5)

#7 - #6

Delete

Delete files on the external storage medium (9.5)

#7 - #7
ENTER

Format
DISP/

Format the external storage medium (9.5)

FOLD ALONG THIS LINE

#7 - #8

Clear data

Clear the measure/computed data in the internal memory (9.7)

Time set (3.7)

Enter the current time

Press the DISP/ENTER key to display the screen menu or the operation screen. Press the up, down, right, or left arrow key to select the operation screen.

Math range (11.4)

Math alarm (11.5)

Computing equations, display span, and unit for computation channels Alarm type for the computation channel Alarm value for the computation channel Output relay On/Off for the computation channel Output relay number for the computation channel

Sampling Interval and Sampling length for Display Data and Event Data When Acquiring the display data only from four measurement channels (The sampling length for the display data when acquiring both the display data and the event data is approximately 3/4 of the values in the table below.)
Display Update Rate 15 s 1 min 5 min 20 min 30 min 1 h
Sampling Interval (s)

4h 0.5 2
Sampling length (approx.) 10 h 41 h

10 h 10 40 60 120 480 1200 8 days 34 days 52 days 104 days 416 days 1041 days

#10

Constant (11.6)

Constants (K01 to K12)

#11

Tag (7.1) TLOG (11.7) Rolling average (11.10)

Tag names of the computation channels Timer number used in TLOG, sum unit Turn On/Off the rolling average Sampling interval and the number of samples for the rolling average

#12

Batch set (10.12)

When Acquiring the event data only from four measurement channels (The sampling length for the event data when acquiring both the display data and the event data is approximately 1/4 of the values in the table below.)
Sampling Interval (s)

Application name, Supervisor name, Manager name, Batch number, Lot number, Auto increment, Display information

125 ms 500 ms 1 s
Sampling length (approx.) 4.2 h

5s 16 h

30 s 33 h 6 days 41 days

120 s

600 s 166 days 833 days

IM 04L01A01-01E 5th Edition

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Run Mode Operation Mode: Setting Mode: Basic Setting Mode: Entered when the power is turned ON. Entered by pressing the MENU key. Entered by pressing the FUNC key for three seconds while the menu screen for the setting mode is displayed.
#1
[End] soft key + DISP/ENTER key Operation mode setting mode Basic setting mode
FUNC key for 3 seconds
MENU key

Setting Items in the Setting Mode (Enclosed in parentheses are references.)

Soft key Title Range (5.1 to 5.7) Alarm (6.2)

Item

Input type, span, scale, etc. Alarm type Alarm value Output relay On/Off Output relay number #2 Tag (7.1) Filter (5.8) Moving average (5.8) Alarm delay time (6.3) #3 Trend/Save interval USER key (10.2) #4 Message (7.5) #5 #5 - #1 Display Group set/Trip line

Power ON

Operation screens
MENU or ESC key Soft keys
MENU or ESC key Soft keys

Menu screen Menu screen

Tag name Filter time constant/Off (DX102/DX104) Number of samples for the moving average/Off (DX106/DX112)

ESC key

Trend display update rate (7.3) Auto save interval (8.8) Assign an action to the USER key

Message string

Setting screens

Returning to the operation mode: from the setting mode: Display the menu screen and press the MENU key or the ESC key. from the basic setting mode: Display the menu screen and press the [End] soft key to display a confirmation window. Select [Yes] and press the DISP/ ENTER key to return to the operation mode.
FUNC

Group name (7.6) Assign channels to groups (7.6) Trip line position, display color (7.7) #5 - #2 #5 - #3 Color (7.8) Zone (7.9) Graph (7.10)

Measurement channel display color

Partial (7.11)

Zone upper and lower limits Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph Bar graph base position Specify the scale display position for trends. Turn On/Off partial expanded display Position and boundary for the partial expanded display #5 - #4 View (7.13)

key function

LCD (7.14)

NOTE To avoid injury, death of personnel or damage to the instrument, the operator must refer to the explanation in the Users Manual or Service Manual.

Display direction (trend, bar graph) Background color (white or black) Trend line width Trip line width Grid for the trend display Interval for switching group displays (Scroll time) Scale digit LCD brightness Turn On/Off the LCD backlight saver Transition time for the LCD backlight saver and conditions that restore the backlight

The #5 - #4 and #5 - #4 soft keys are for Color, Zone, Graph, and Partial settings for computation channels.

IM 04L01A01-01E

Foreword
Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA DAQSTATION DX100. This Users Manual contains useful information about the functions, installation, wiring, operating procedures, and troubleshooting of the DX100. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises. In addition, a quick reference is provided on the previous page. This reference briefly explains operations that are used frequently. Separate this reference from the manual for use. The following four manuals, including this one, are provided as manuals for the DX100.
Manual Name DX100 Users Manual Manual No. IM 04L01A01-01E Description This manual. Explains all functions and procedures of the DX100 excluding the communication functions. Included in the accompanying CD-ROM. Explains the communication functions of the Ethernet/serial interface. Explains the communication functions of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface. For models with /CF1. Included in the accompanying CD-ROM. Describes the functions and operating procedures of DAQSTANDARD Software that comes with the package.

DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual Fieldbus Communication Interface Users Manual

IM 04L02A01-17E

IM 04L02A01-18E

DAQSTANDARD Software IM 04L02A01-61E

Notes
This manual describes the DX100 style number S4. For functions that have been added or changed on the DX100 style number S4, see appendix 3. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the DX100s performance and functions. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWAs permission is strictly prohibited. The TCP/IP software used in this product and the documentation for that TCP/IP software are based in part on BSD Networking Software,Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California.

Trademarks
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Zip is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Iomega Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. FOUNDATION of FOUNDATION Fieldbus is a trademark of Fieldbus Foundation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated. Company and product names that are used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Revisions
First edition: Second edition: Third edition: Fourth edition: Fifth edition: October 1999 February 2000 June 2000 February 2001 November 2003

Safety Precautions
The DX100 conforms to IEC safety class I (provided with terminal for protective grounding), Installation Category II, and EN61326-1 (EMC standard), class A (use in a commercial, industrial, or business environment). This product is a measurement category II (CAT II) instrument.
* Mesurement category II (CAT II) Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards.

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation. If the DX100 is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection provided by the DX100 may be impaired. YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements. Please use this instrument as a mesurement category II (CAT II) instrument. The following symbols are used on the DX100. Handle with care. To avoid injury, death of personnel or damage to the instrument, the operator must refer to the explanation in the Users Manual or Service Manual. High temperature: To avoid injury caused by hot surface, do not touch the heat sink. Functional ground terminal. Do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal. Protective ground terminal.

AC ON (power) OFF (power)

IM 04L01A01-01E

Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions. Failure to comply may result in injury or death (electric shock hazard).

WARNING
Power Supply Before connecting the power cord, ensure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage rating for the instrument, and for desktop types, that it is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord itself. Power Cord and Plug (Desktop Type) To prevent an electric shock or fire, be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA. The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective grounding terminal. Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding. Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power. Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal. Doing so poses a potential shock hazard. Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or the fuse might be defective. Also, make sure to check them before operation. Fuse To prevent fire, only use a fuse that has a rating (voltage, current, and type) that is specified by the instrument. When replacing a fuse, turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord. Never short the fuse holder. Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors. Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard. Do Not Remove Covers Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages. Do not remove the cover if the power supply is connected. The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWAs qualified personnel only. External Connection Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or control unit. Damage to the protection Using the instrument in a manner not specified in this manual can damage the instruments protection.

IM 04L01A01-01E

iii

Checking the Contents of the Package

Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the DX100. If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage, contact the dealer from which you purchased them.

DX100 Main Unit

There is a name plate on the back side of the key panel cover. Open the cover and check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate match those on the order.
Panel mount type
MODEL STYLE SUFFIX SUPPLY FREQUENCY NO
Made in Japan

Desktop type

MODEL STYLE SUFFIX

MODEL SUFFIX NO
STYLE

SUPPLY FREQUENCY NO
Made in Japan

MODEL
Model code DX102 DX104 DX106 DX112 External storage medium Language Options Suffix code Optional code Description DAQSTATION DX100 (2 ch) DAQSTATION DX100 (4 ch) DAQSTATION DX100 (6 ch) DAQSTATION DX100 (12 ch) Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card English, deg.F/DST (DAQSTANDARD Software included) Alarm output relay (2 relays)/remote control*1 Alarm output relay (4 relays)/remote control*1 Alarm output relay (6 relays)*1 Batch function RS-232 interface*5 RS-422-A/485 interface*5 Fieldbus Communication Interface*5*6 FAIL/memory end output relay*2 Clamped input terminal Desktop type*3 Computation function (report function included) Cu10, Cu25 RTD input/3 terminal isolated RTD 3 terminal isolated RTD*4 24 VDC/AC power supply Remote control 24 VDC Power supply for transmitter(2 loops)*7 24 VDC Power supply for transmitter(4 loops)*8

1 2 3 2 /AR1 /AR2 /A3 /BT1 /C2 /C3 /CF1 /F1 /H2 /H5[ ] /M1 /N1 /N2 /P1 /R1 /TPS2 /TPS4

*1 /AR1, /AR2, and /A3 cannot be specified simultaneously *2 If /F1 is specified, /A3 cannot be specified. *3 /H5: Can only be specified when /P1 is simultaneously specified, /H5D: UL, CSA cable, /H5F: VDE cable, /H5R: SAA cable, /H5J: BS cable *4 /N2 can only be specified on DX106, and DX112 models *5 /C2, /C3, and /CF1 cannot be specified simultaneously. *6 If /CF1 is specified, make sure to specify /M1. *7 If /TPS2 is specified,/TPS4, /A2, /A3 and /F1 cannot be specified. *8 If /TPS4 is specified, /TPS2, /A1, /A2, /A3 and /F1 cannot be specified.

IM 04L01A01-01E

Checking the Contents of the Package NO. (Serial No.) When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the DX100, please quote the serial No.

Standard Accessories
The following standard accessories are supplied with the DX100. Make sure that all items are present and undamaged.

/H5D

/H5F

/H5J

/H5R

/H5H

9. One of these power cord types is supplied according to the instruments suffix code

Number Part Name 1 Fuse

Part Number/Model Qty A1347EF A1352EF 1 1 5 B9900CW IM 04L01A01-01E IM 04L02A01-18E 2 1 1

Notes 250 V 1 A, time lag (except for /P1 model) 250 V 4 A, time lag (for /P1 model) M4 For panel mounting (except for /H5[ ] model) This manual Fieldbus Communication Interface. Provided only when /CF1 is specified for the optional code. CD-ROM containing the PDF files of this manual, the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface. Included only when the suffix software code for language is -2. For Windows 95/98, Windows NT4.0, Windows Me, Windows 2000. Provided on a CD-ROM. Zip disk, included only when the medium suffix code for external storage medium is -2. ATA flash memory card (32MB CF card + adapter, capacity and model of the CF card may vary) included only when the suffix code for the external storage medium is -3.

2 3 4 5

Terminal screw Mounting bracket Users Manual Users Manual

Electronic Manual B9968MZ

Application (DAQSTANDARD Software)

DXA100-02

External storage

A1053MP

B9968NL

IM 04L01A01-01E

Checking the Contents of the Package

Number Part Name 9 Power cord Part Number/Model Qty A1006WD 1 Notes Provided only when /H5D is specified for the optional code. Maximum rated power voltage: 125 V Provided only when /H5F is specified for the optional code. Maximum rated power voltage: 250 V Provided only when /H5R is specified for the optional code. Maximum rated power voltage: 250 V Provided only when /H5J is specified for the optional code. Maximum rated power voltage: 250 V Provided only when /H5H is specified for the power supply code. (complies with the CCC) Maximum rated power voltage: 250 V Provided only when /CF1 is specified for the optional code.

A1009WD

A1024WD

A1023WD

A1064WD

Clamp filter

A1179MN

Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)

The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately. If you make an order, make sure that all items are present and undamaged. For information about ordering accessories, contact the dealer from which you purchased the DX100.
Number 1 2 3 Part Name 3.5" floppy disk Zip disk Part Number/Model 7059 00 A1053MP Qty 10 1 1 Notes 2HD 100 MB 32MB card (capacity and model of the CF card may vary, please be careful when ordering) 250 0.1% 100 0.1% 10 0.1% 250 0.1% 100 0.1% 10 0.1% 250 V 1 A time lag (except for /P1 model) 250 V 4 A, time lag (for /P1 model)

ATA flash memory card B9968NL (CF card + adapter)

Shunt resistor (for the screw terminal) Shunt resistor (for the clamped input terminal) Fuse

4159 20 4159 21 4159 22 4389 20 4389 21 4389 22 A1347EF A1352EF

1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 2

Mounting bracket

B9900CW

Software (Sold Separately)

The following software application is available:
Name DAQEXPLORER Model DXA200-02 Required O/S Windows 98, Windows NT4.0, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP Notes Provided on a CD-ROM.

IM 04L01A01-01E

How to Use this Manual

Structure of the Manual
This user's manual consists of the following sections: For information about the communication functions, the fieldbus function, and the DAQ standard software, see the respective manuals (IM 04L02A01-17E, IM 04L02A01-18E, and IM 04L02A01-61E).
Chapter 1 2 3 Title and Contents Overview of Functions Describes the functions of the DX100. Before Using the DX100 Describes the installation and wiring procedures. Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations Describes the names of each part of the DX100, how to use the storage medium drive, run mode, and common key operations. Switching Operation Screens Describes how to use the operation screen such as the trend display and digital display. Describes the operations that can be performed using the arrow keys and the DISP/ENTER key on the front panel. Input Channel Settings Describes how to set input specifications such as the range, filter, moving average, scan interval, integration time of the A/D converter, burnout, and reference junction compensation. Acknowledging and Setting Alarms Describes how to acknowledge alarms and how to set alarms. Setting and Operating the Display Describes how to set the display specification of the operation screen, how to display messages, and other display-related operations. Data acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium Describes how to acquire the measured/computed data and how to save the data to the external storage medium. Managing Files and Initializing Data Describes how to save and load the setup data, manage files on the external storage medium, save the data residing in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operations, initialize the internal memory, and other operations. Other Functions Describes how to set and operate key lock, key login/logout, user key, and other functions. Computation/Report Function (Option) Describes how to use the optional computation (report) function. Troubleshooting Describes the error messages and the troubleshooting measures of the DX100. Maintenance Describes fuse replacement and other information. Specifications Describes the specifications of the DX100. Describes the initial values of the setting mode and basic setting mode, file formats of ASCII files.

6 7

11 12 13 14 Appendix Index

Note
This manual covers information regarding DX100s that have a suffix code for language -2 (English).
IM 04L01A01-01E

vii

How to Use this Manual

Conventions Used in this Manual

Unit K ....... Denotes 1024. Example: 768 KB (File capacity) k ........ Denotes 1000. M ....... Denotes 1024K. Example: 1.44 MB (Storage capacity of floppy disks) B ....... Bytes. Example: 1.44 MB (Storage capacity of floppy disks) Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual. Affixed to the instrument. Indicates danger to personnel or instrument and the operator must refer to the Users Manual. The symbol is used in the Users Manual to indicate the reference.

WARNING

Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or death to the user. Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or moderate injury, or damage to the instrument. Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument.

CAUTION
Note

Notation regarding procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 11, the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations. [ ] ............ Represents contents that are displayed on the screen. Example: [Volt] ....... Indicates a reference item. Example: 1.3 Display Function

#12

...... Denotes the soft key that is used to make a selection on the setting and basic setting menus.

Procedure

Follow the steps indicated with numbers. The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time. Depending on the operation, not all steps need to be taken. This section describes the setting parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures. It does not give a detailed explanation of the function. For detail on the function, see chapter 1.

Explanation

viii

IM 04L01A01-01E

Contents
Foreword ......................................................................................................................................... i Safety Precautions .......................................................................................................................... ii Checking the Contents of the Package .......................................................................................... iv How to Use this Manual ................................................................................................................ vii

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Chapter 1 Overview of Functions

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Overview of the DX100 .................................................................................................... 1-1 Functions of the Input Section ......................................................................................... 1-2 Display Function .............................................................................................................. 1-5 Storage Function ............................................................................................................ 1-15 Alarm Function ............................................................................................................... 1-17 Computation Function and Report Function (/M1 Option) ................................................................................................................... 1-20 Batch Function (/BT1 Option) ........................................................................................ 1-22 Other Functions ............................................................................................................. 1-24

Chapter 2 Before Using the DX100

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Precautions on the Use of the DX100 .............................................................................. 2-1 Installing the DX100 ......................................................................................................... 2-3 Input Signal Wiring ........................................................................................................... 2-5 Alarm Output Wiring (/AR1, /AR2, /A3 Option) ................................................................ 2-9 FAIL/Memory End Wiring (/F1 Option) ........................................................................... 2-11 Remote Control Wiring (/R1 Option) .............................................................................. 2-13 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring (/TPS2, /TPS4, Option) ............................... 2-15 Power Supply Wiring ...................................................................................................... 2-17

8 9 10 11 12 13 14
App Index

Chapter 3 Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 Names of Parts and Functions ......................................................................................... 3-1 Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch .................................................................................. 3-4 Inserting/Removing the External Storage Medium .......................................................... 3-5 Run Mode ........................................................................................................................ 3-7 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode) .............................. 3-10 Common Key Operations ............................................................................................... 3-19 Setting the Date and Time ............................................................................................. 3-23

Chapter 4 Switching Operation Screens

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Operation Screens ........................................................................................................... 4-1 Explanation of the Status Display Section ....................................................................... 4-2 Using the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Screens ............................................................ 4-5 Using the Overview Screen ........................................................................................... 4-11 Using the Information Screen (Alarm Summary, Message Summary, and Memory Summary) ........................................................................................................ 4-13 Using the Historical Trend .............................................................................................. 4-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

Contents

Chapter 5 Measurement Channel Settings

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 Voltage Input Setting ........................................................................................................ 5-1 Thermocouple (TC)/Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Setting ............................ 5-3 Digital Input (DI) Setting ................................................................................................... 5-5 Difference Computation (Delta) Setting. .......................................................................... 5-7 Scaling Setting ................................................................................................................. 5-9 Square Root Computation Setting ................................................................................. 5-11 Skip Setting .................................................................................................................... 5-13 Input Filter and Moving Average Setting ........................................................................ 5-14 Setting the A/D Integration Time, Scan Interval, Burnout, and Reference Junction Compensation (Basic Setting Mode) ............................................................................. 5-15

Chapter 6 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay (Option) ............................................. 6-1 Alarm Setting ................................................................................................................... 6-5 Setting the Alarm Delay Period ........................................................................................ 6-8 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function (Basic Setting Mode) ............................................ 6-10

Chapter 7 Setting and Operating the Display

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 Setting Tag Names ........................................................................................................... 7-1 Selecting Tag Display or Channel Number Display (Basic Setting Mode) ....................... 7-2 Setting the Display Update Rate (Trend) ......................................................................... 7-3 Using Message Strings (Trend) ....................................................................................... 7-4 Setting the Message String (Trend) ................................................................................. 7-7 Setting Groups ................................................................................................................. 7-8 Setting the Trip Line (Trend) .......................................................................................... 7-10 Setting the Channel Display Colors (Trend, Bar Graph) ................................................ 7-12 Using Zone Displays (Trend) ......................................................................................... 7-13 Setting the Scale Division, Bar Graph Base Position (Bar Graph), and Scale Position (Trend) .................................................................................................... 7-15 Using Partial Expanded Display (Trend) ........................................................................ 7-20 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expanded Display (Basic Setting Mode) ..... 7-22 Setting the Display Direction, Background Color, Waveform Line Width, Trip Line Width, Grid, Scroll Time, and Scale digit ......................................................... 7-23 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function ........................ 7-25

Chapter 8 Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 x Data Types to be Acquired and Saved ............................................................................. 8-1 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data ........................................................... 8-3 Function to Acquire Other Data ........................................................................................ 8-9 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium 8-10 Acquiring Display Data ................................................................................................... 8-12 Acquiring Event Data ..................................................................................................... 8-13 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium ..................... 8-15 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data ....................................................... 8-18 Setting the File Header, Directory Name, and the Saved Data during Manual Save ..... 8-20 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data (Basic Setting Mode) ...................................................................................................... 8-22 Setting the Method of the Display/Event Data Acquisition (Basic Setting Mode) ........... 8-23 Specifying the Date/Time When Data Is To Be Saved to the External Storage Medium (Basic Setting Mode) ...................................................................................................... 8-26 Storing Measured/Computed Data at Arbitrary Times (Manual Sampling) .................... 8-28
IM 04L01A01-01E

Contents

Chapter 9 Managing Files and Initializing Data

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 Saving/loading setup data ................................................................................................ 9-1 Saving data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operation ................................................................................................................... 9-5 Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium .................................................... 9-6 Viewing Event Data in the External Storage Medium ...................................................... 9-7 Managing files/Displaying free space on the external storage medium ........................... 9-8 Saving the Screen Image ............................................................................................... 9-13 Clearing Data from the Internal Memory ........................................................................ 9-14 Initializing Setup Data .................................................................................................... 9-15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
App Index

Chapter 10 Other Functions

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13 10.14 10.15 10.16 USER Key ...................................................................................................................... 10-1 Assigning an Action to the USER Key ........................................................................... 10-2 Using Key Lock .............................................................................................................. 10-3 Setting the Key Lock Function (Basic Setting Mode) ..................................................... 10-4 Using the Key Login/Logout Function ............................................................................ 10-6 Setting the Key Login/Logout Functions (Basic Setting Mode) ...................................... 10-8 Displaying the Log Screen/System Screen .................................................................. 10-10 Setting the Memory Alarm Time (/F1 Option Provides an Relay Output Alarm, Basic Setting Mode) ............................. 10-12 Setting the Remote Control Functions (/R1 Option, Basic Setting Mode) ................... 10-13 Setting the Displayed Language (Basic Setting Mode) ................................................ 10-16 Checking or Changing Batch/Lot Numbers and Entering or Changing Comments (/BT1 Option) ............................................................................................................... 10-17 Setting the Batch Information (/BT1 Option) ................................................................ 10-19 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Batch Function (/BT1 Option, Basic Setting Mode) .............................................................................. 10-21 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function ................................................ 10-22 Setting the Temperature Unit (Basic Setting Mode) ..................................................... 10-24 Setting the Time Zone (Basic Setting Mode) ............................................................... 10-25

Chapter 11 Computation/Report Function (Option)

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 11.11 11.12 11.13 Overview of the Computation Function .......................................................................... 11-1 Explanation of Computing Equations ............................................................................. 11-4 Using the Computation Function .................................................................................... 11-8 Setting Computation Channels .................................................................................... 11-10 Setting the Alarm .......................................................................................................... 11-12 Setting Constants ......................................................................................................... 11-14 TLOG Computation ...................................................................................................... 11-15 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation ............................. 11-17 Setting the Timer (Basic Setting Mode) ....................................................................... 11-18 Using the Rolling Average ............................................................................................ 11-20 Overview of the Report Function ................................................................................. 11-22 Using the Report Function ........................................................................................... 11-25 Setting the Report Function (Basic Setting Mode) ....................................................... 11-26

Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
12.1 12.2 A List of Messages ......................................................................................................... 12-1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart ........................................................................................... 12-9

IM 04L01A01-01E

Contents

Chapter 13 Maintenance
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................................... 13-1 Replacing the Fuse ........................................................................................................ 13-2 Calibration ...................................................................................................................... 13-3 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts ................................................... 13-5

Chapter 14 Specifications
14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 Input Specifications ........................................................................................................ 14-1 Display Specifications .................................................................................................... 14-3 Data Storage Specifications ........................................................................................... 14-5 Alarm Function Specifications ........................................................................................ 14-8 Specifications of Communication Functions .................................................................. 14-9 Specifications of Optional Functions ............................................................................ 14-10 General Specifications ................................................................................................. 14-14 Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................. 14-19

Appendix
Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Parameters and Initial Settings ......................................................................... App-1 Data Formats of ASCII Files .............................................................................. App-9 The Relationship between Style Numbers and Functions .............................. App-14

Index

xii

IM 04L01A01-01E

Chapter 1 Overview of Functions

1.1

Overview of the DX100

Unlike conventional recorders that record data on charts, the DX100 displays the measured data acquired in the internal memory to a LCD in the form of waveforms, numerical values, and bar graphs. The measured data can also be saved to external storage media such as floppy disks, Zip disks, and ATA flash memory cards.
DX100 External storage media Floppy disk

1
Overview of Functions

Zip disk

ATA flash memory card

The data that have been saved to an external storage medium can be displayed on a PC using the standard software that comes with the package. The data can also be loaded into the DX100 to be displayed. By using the Ethernet interface that comes standard with the DX100, the data can be transferred to a server on a network (client function). The data stored on the DX100s external storage medium can also be read from a PC on the network (server function).
DX100 DX100

Measured data

Server

Primary

Secondary

Data on the external storage medium

DX100

This manual does not cover the communication functions using the Ethernet network or serial interface. See the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E).

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-1

1.2

Functions of the Input Section

Number of Measurement Channels/Scan Interval

The number of measurement channels and scan intervals for different models are listed in the table below. For the procedure related to setting the scan interval, see section 5.9.
Model DX102 DX104 DX106 DX112 Number of Measurement Channels 2 channels 4 channels 6 channels 12 channels Scan interval 125 ms or 250 ms 125 ms or 250 ms 1 s or 2 s 1 s or 2 s

Input Type and Computation

You can select the input type of a measurement channel from DC voltage, thermocouple, resistance temperature detector (RTD), and digital input (contact signal or voltage signal). You can also perform computation on the measured data such as the difference, square root, and scaling. The input type and computation are configured as an input mode on the DX100. For the procedure related to setting the different modes, see sections 5.1 to 5.7.
Input Mode DC voltage Thermocouple Resistance temperature detector Digital input Notation*1 Volt TC RTD Description Measures a DC voltage in the range 20 mV to 50 V. Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N, W, L, and U. Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for Pt100, JPt100, Cu10*2, and CU25*2. Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0% or 100% of the display range. Contact input: Closed contact is 1. Open contact is 0. Voltage input: Less than 2.4 V is 0. Greater than or equal to 2.4 V is 1. When the input type*3 is set to DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD, or digital input, the value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel (this channel is called a reference channel) from the input signal of the channel set to compute the difference is displayed as the measured value of that channel. When the input type*3 is set to DC voltage, the square root of the input signal of the channel set to compute the square root is displayed as the measured value of that channel. The computed result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed. When the input type*3 is set to DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD, or digital input, the input signal can be converted to a value in the appropriate unit desired and displayed. Channels that are not measured. They are not displayed.

Difference

Delta

Square root

Sqrt

Scaling

Scale

Skip

*1 Notation used by the DX100 to represent the input modes. It is used when setting the measurement channels. *2 This is optional. *3 This item defines the type of signals that can be connected to the input terminal when the input mode is set to Difference, Square root, or Scaling. The description of the input types, DC voltage, Thermocouple, Resistive temperature detector, and digital input, are the same as the descriptions given for the input modes, DC voltage, Thermocouple, Resistive temperature detector, and digital input, respectively.

1-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.2 Functions of the Input Section If the signal to be measured is a DC current, a shunt resistor is attached to the input terminal to convert the current signal to a voltage signal. The input mode is set to DC voltage in this case. For the various types of shunt resistors and the procedure related to setting the current input, see section 5.1.

1
Overview of Functions

Input Range and Measurable Range

You can select the Input range that is appropriate for the input signal for DC voltage, Thermocouple, RTD, and digital input. (For example, R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N, W, L, and U are available input ranges for Thermocouple.) For each Input range, a measurable range is defined (for example, the measurable range for /R of Thermocouple is 0.0 C to 1760 C). For details, see section 14.1.

Burnout
When measuring temperature using a thermocouple and the thermocouple burns out, you can specify the measurement result to be set to positive over range*1 or negative over range.*2 Burnout can be set on each measurement channel. The initial setting is set so that burnout is not indicated. For the setting procedure, see section 5.9. *1 Positive over range is a condition in which the input signal is over the upper limit of the measurable range. The measured value is indicated as + . *2 Negative over range is a condition in which the input signal is below the lower limit of the measurable range. The measured value is indicated as .

Reference junction compensation (RJC)

When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple, the reference junction compensation can be used. You can select whether to use the reference junction compensation provided by the DX100 or external reference junction compensation. If you are using external reference junction compensation, you will also set the reference voltage. The initial setting is set so that the reference junction compensation provided by the DX100 is used. For the setting procedure, see section 5.9.

Filter and Moving Average

The filter and moving average are used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal. Filtering is provided on the DX102 and DX104. Moving average is provided on the DX106, and DX112. The filter or moving average can be set on each channel. For the setting procedure, see section 5.8. Filter Function (DX102 and DX104) Suppresses the effects of noise above the frequency determined by the specified time constant. The time constant can be set to 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s. The filter is initially turned OFF.
Effects of using filter(Output response fot a step input) Input

63.2% of the output value

Output response curve (when using the filter)

2, 5, 10 s (time constant, the time it takes to reach 63.2% of the output value)

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-3

1.2 Functions of the Input Section Moving Average (DX106, and DX112) The input signal of the measurement channel is set to the averaged value of the m most current data points (the number of moving-averaged data points) acquired at the scan interval. The number of moving-averaged data points can be set in the range 2 to 16. The moving average is initially turned OFF. The figure below shows an example indicating the operation of the buffer for the moving average computation when the number of moving averaged data points is set to 5.
Buffer data at the nth sampling Buffer data at the n+1th sampling New data 15.0mV 10.0mV 5.0mV 0.0mV 5.0mV Deleted Moving average value 0.0mV 5.0mV Deleted 8.0mV Buffer data at the n+2th sampling New data 10.0mV 15.0mV 10.0mV 5.0mV 0.0mV

1 2 3 4 5

10.0mV 5.0mV 0.0mV 5.0mV 10.0mV

Integration Time of the A/D Converter

The DX100 uses an A/D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital signal. By setting the integration time to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle, the power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated. The integration time of the A/D converter is selected according to the model from the table below. If Auto is selected, the DX100 will automatically detect the power supply frequency and select 16.7 ms or 20 ms. Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16.7 ms and 20 ms, this setting can be used to eliminate the power frequency noise for either frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz. 100 ms is available on the DX106, and DX112. However, when the integration time is 100 ms, the scan interval is fixed to 2 s. For the setting procedure, see section 5.9.
Model DX102/DX104 Integration Time of the A/D Converter Select 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 20 ms (50 Hz), or auto (Automatically switches between 16.7 ms and 20 ms. Fixed to 20 ms on /P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply.) Select 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 20 ms (50 Hz), 100 ms, or auto (Automatically switches between 16.7 ms and 20 ms. Fixed to 20 ms on /P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply.)

DX106/DX112

1-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.3

Display Function
5.5 TFT Color LCD and the Screen Configuration The DX100 has a 5.5 TFT color LCD (240-by-320 dot resolution). The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section.
Status display section

1
Overview of Functions

Common Items Related to the Display

Data display section

Status Display Section Displays the displayed screen name, date and time or batch name (batch name is for / BT1 option only), internal memory/external storage medium usage condition, alarm condition, key lock, user name (key login function), and computation condition (option). For details, see section 4.2. Data Display Section Displays the operation screen such as the trend display, digital display, and bar graph display of the measured and computed data as well as alarm, message, and file information. Displays the setup screen for the setting and basic setting modes when the DX100 is being configured. For details related to the setting and basic setting modes, see section 3.5. Group Display The data displayed on the trend, digital, and bar graph displays are the data of measurement or computation channels that are assigned to the group. Up to 6 channels can be assigned to a single group. For the procedure used to assign channels to groups, see section 7.6, Setting Groups. Up to four groups can be registered. The groups are common to the trend, digital, and bar graph displays. On the trend, digital, and bar graph displays, the displayed groups can be automatically switched at 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, or 1 min intervals. Channel Number of Tag Display The channels can be displayed as channel number or tags. The setting applies to all channels. For the procedure related to the selecting the channel display or tag display, see section 7.2. For the procedure related to setting the tags, see section 7.1.

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-5

1.3 Display Function

Trend Screen
Displays the waveform of the measured and computed data. The direction of the waveform display can be set to horizontal or vertical. For details related to the display method, see section 4.3. Trend Display (Vertical)

Scale Display update rate(Time/div) Message Trip line Tag/Channel no. Measured/computed value Unit Alarm mark Numerical display section

Trend Display (Vertical, All channels)

Waveform for all channels that are registered to display the trend Data from selected group

Trend Display (Horizontal, Type 1)

Trend Display (Horizontal, Type 2)

Updating the Waveform and Updating the Numerical Display One division along the time axis consists of 30 dots on the LCD. The displayed waveform is updated at an interval corresponding to one dot. This interval is determined by the time period corresponding to one division (referred to as the display update rate). The relationship between the display update rate and the speed of movement of waveforms is as follows:
Display Update Rate (/div) 15 s* 30 s* 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 2 h 4 h 10 h 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 2.5 1.0

Speed of movement 2376 1188 594 of waveform (approximate value, mm/h) * for DX102 and DX104 only

Note
The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis is derived from the following equation given the dot pitch of the LCD (0.33 mm): The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis = 30 (dots) x 0.33 (mm) x 60 (min)/display update rate (min)

Measured/computed values are updated every second. However, when the scan interval on the DX106/DX112 is 2 s, the display update rate is also 2 s. 1-6
IM 04L01A01-01E

1.3 Display Function Displayed Data The data displayed on the screen are a maximum and minimum values of the data that are sampled at the scan interval, within the time period corresponding to one dot.
Displayed data of the waveform (when the display update rate is set to one minute)

1
Overview of Functions

} 2 s (1 dot)

Maximum value 1 division (30 dots) =1 min. Minimum value When the display update rate is set to one minute, the time period corresponding to one dot (the sampling interval of displayed data) is 2 s.

The time period corresponding to one dot is called the sampling interval of displayed data. The sampling interval of displayed data is determined by the display update rate. The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of displayed data is as follows:
Display Update Rate (/div) Sampling interval of displayed data (s) * 15 s* 30 s* 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 2 h 4 h 10 h 0.5 1 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 1200

for DX102 and DX104 only

For the procedure related to setting the display update rate, see section 7.3. Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed.
Information All channel display Description Waveforms of all the channels that were set to display the trend are displayed on one trend screen. Sections 4.3 and 8.10 Messages specified by the user can be displayed at arbitrary points in time. For example, by displaying a message when a certain operation is carried out, the point at which the operation is carried out can be seen visually. Displayed messages are stored. Sections 7.4 and 7.5 The waveform can be displayed vertically or horizontally. The vertical display is in the same direction as the chart recorder and is convenient when the DX100 is used with the chart recorder. Section 7.13 The displayed color of waveforms can be specified for each channel. The color also applies to the bar graph display. Section 7.8 You can select from three types: 1, 2, or 3 dots. The specified thickness of waveform lines applies to all channels. Section 7.13 Displays a line to indicate a particular value of interest (trip line) for each group. You can select the thickness of the displayed line from three types: 1, 2, or 3 dots. Up to four trip lines can be displayed on a single group. Sections 7.7 and 7.13

Message display

Display direction of waveforms

Displayed color of waveforms

Thickness of waveform lines

Trip line display

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-7

1.3 Display Function

Scale display A scale appropriate for the measured item can be displayed for each channel. The number of divisions of the display scale created by the main scale marks can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 div (also applies to the bar graph display). Medium and small scale marks are displayed in between the main scale marks. You can select whether or not to display the scale for each channel and the display position. Section 7.10 The numerical display section can be turned ON or OFF. If the numerical display section is turned OFF, the display shows only the waveform and the scale. See section 4.3. The waveform of each channel is displayed in its display range (zone). The waveforms are easier to view, because they do not overlap. See the explanation of the zone display below. Section 7.9 You can expand the important section of the display range. See the explanation of the partial expanded display below. Sections 7.11 and 7.12

Turn ON/OFF the numerical display section Zone display

Partial expanded display

Explanation Regarding the Zone Display The display range of the waveform is called a zone. Zones can be set for each channel. The waveforms can be set in different zones, so that they are easier to view. In the example shown in the figure below, channel 1 is displayed in the zone 0 to 30%, channel 2 in the zone 30 to 60%, and channel 3 in the zone 60 to 100%.
Normal display Zone display Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3
0% 0% 100% 30% 60% 100%

CH1

CH2

CH3

Explanation Regarding the Partial Expanded Display By compressing a section of the display scale of the waveform, the remaining section of the display is expanded. You specify a value on the display scale (boundary value) to be moved to another position on the display scale (boundary value displacement position). In the example shown in the figure below, 0 V (boundary value) is moved to the 30% position of the display scale (boundary value displacement position). The section below the boundary (accounts for 30% of the entire display) represents 6 V to 0 V and the section above the boundary (accounts for 70% of the entire display) represents 0 V to 6 V.
Normal Display
0 % of full display span 50 100 0

Partial Expanded Dispaly

Compressed portion 30 Expanded portion 100

0 Measured value

1-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.3 Display Function

Digital Screen
The measured/computed data are displayed using numerical values in large size. See section 4.3.
Tag/Channel no.

1
Overview of Functions

Measured/computed value Unit

Alarm mark

Updating of the Numerical Display Measured/computed values are updated every second. However, when the scan interval on the DX106/DX112 is 2 s, the display update rate is also 2 s.

Bar graph Screen

The measured/computed data are displayed using bar graphs. See section 4.3. Bar Graph Display (Vertical)
Tag/Channel no. Alarm mark Upper limit of span Alarm point mark Bar graph Lower limit of span Unit

Measured/computed value

Updating of the Bar Graph and the Numerical Display Measured/computed values are updated every second. However, when the scan interval on the DX106/DX112 is 2 s, the display update rate is also 2 s. Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed.
Information Display direction Base position Description The bar graphs can be displayed horizontally or vertically. Section 7.13 When the bar graph is displayed horizontally, the starting point of the bar (base position) can be set to the minimum edge of the measurement scale or to the center position. Section 7.10 The displayed color of the channels are common with the trend display. Section 7.8 The number of divisions of the scale can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12. Section 7.10 (common with the trend display)

Displayed color Scale display

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-9

1.3 Display Function

Overview Screen
A list of measured/computed values and alarm conditions of all measurement/ computation channels is displayed. You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend or bar graph of the group containing the selected channel. For the procedure used to display the overview, see section 4.4.

Tag/Channel no. Cursor

Alarm type Measured/ computed value

The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red. The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is not occurring is displayed in green.

Updating of the Numerical Display Measured/computed values are updated every second. However, when the scan interval on the DX106/DX112 is 2 s, the display update rate is also 2 s.

Alarm Summary
A list of the most recent alarms can be displayed. By scrolling the screen using arrow keys, up to 120 incidents can be displayed. By selecting an alarm from the list using arrow keys, the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the alarm can be recalled. For a description on the historical trend display, see Historical Trend in this section. For the operating procedure, see section 4.5.
Number of the alarm information displayed at the last line of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag/Channel no. Alarm No. (1, 2, 3, 4) /Type (H, L, h, l, R, r, T, t) Date & Time (when the alarm occurred) Date & Time (when the alarm released)

Cursor

Mark (see section 6.1)

1-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.3 Display Function

Message Summary
The messages that were entered in the trend display and the times when they were entered (message information) are displayed in a list. By scrolling the screen using arrow keys, up to 100 incidents can be displayed. By selecting a message from the list using arrow keys, the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the message can be recalled. For a description on the historical trend display, see Historical Trend in this section. For the operating procedure, see section 4.5.
Number of the message displayed at the last line of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was entered User name (when using key login function)

1
Overview of Functions

Cursor

Memory Summary
The information pertaining to the display data file and event data file in the internal memory is displayed. Display data correspond to the data on the trend display. Event data are data acquired to the internal memory according to the specified sampling interval and data collection period. The data are separate from the display data. In addition, the number of manual sampled data, TLOG data (option), and report data (option) residing in the internal memory are displayed. For models that have the alarm output relays (option), the ON/OFF state of the relays are also listed. For details related to the data residing in the internal memory, see section 1.4. By selecting the display data file or event data file using the arrow keys, the historical trend display can be recalled. For a description on the historical trend display, see Historical Trend in this section. For the operating procedure, see section 4.5.
Number of data sets in the internal memory/The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the newest data were acquired Status of alarm output relays Red: Activated Green: Released Selection of the file type to be displayed, display data files or event data files

Date and time the data File status acquisition ended* Number of data in the file Date and time the data acquisition started

Cursor

For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), a batch number and lot number can be displayed in place of the date and time when the data acquisition ended. For the setting procedure, see section 10.12.

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-11

1.3 Display Function

Report Data (/M1 option)

Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed. The report function is used to write the average, minimum, maximum, and sum at specified intervals for the specified channels. Reports can be made hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly. For details related to the report data, see section 1.6. For the operating procedure, see section 4.5.
The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type

Date and time the report started Date and time the report was created

Status of data (see section 11.11)

Historical Trend
The display data and event data of the measured/computed data stored in the internal memory or external storage medium are displayed as a historical trend. For details related to the display data, see Trend Display in this section. For details related to the event data, see section 1.4. Alarms and scales are not displayed on the historical trend display. Methods Used to Display the Historical Trend The following four methods are available in displaying the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory: Display from the alarm summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.5. Display from the message summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.5. Display from the memory summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.5. Recall from the screen menu. For the operating procedure, see section 4.6. For methods used to display the historical trend of display data or event data in the external storage medium, see section 9.3 and 9.4. Information Displayed on the Historical Trend The displayed information shown below is common to the historical trend of display data and event data.
Time axis Zoom factor of the time axis Icons for switching screens Display reference position

Tag/Channel no. Unit Measured/computed value (maximum and minimum value at the display reference position) Measured/computed value (maximum and minimum value over the entire display range)

1-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.3 Display Function The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the cursor keys. The time axis can be expanded or reduced. The entire data of the file that is being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed at the top section of the screen (right section if the trend display is vertical). You can specify the position to be displayed on the historical trend display using a cursor. The specified position becomes the display reference position.

1
Overview of Functions

Display reference position Cursor All data display

The memory information of the file being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed. For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), information such as the batch number and lot number are also displayed.
File name and data type Serial number of the instrument that sampled the data Start/stop time and user name (user name is displayed only when the key login function is used)

Half Screen Display (Only when displaying the historical trend of the display data) Displays the historical trend of the display data on the lower half of the screen (left half if the trend display is horizontal) and the current display data on the upper half of the screen (right half if the trend display is horizontal). For the operating procedure, see section 4.6.

Current trend

Historical trend (display data only)

Current trend information

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-13

1.3 Display Function

Setting Screen
The various functions of the DX100 are configured using the setting mode or the basic setting mode. Setting Mode Screen This screen is used to set the input range, filter/moving average, alarm, group, channel display color, etc. For details, see section 3.5. Setting screen example for the setting mode

Cursor (blue)

Parameter selections (selected using the soft keys)

Basic Setting Mode Screen This screen is used to configure the basic specifications of the various functions such as burnout, reference junction compensation, A/D integration time, and the method used to acquire data to the internal memory. For details, see section 3.5. Setting screen example for the basic setting mode

Cursor (blue)

Parameter selections (selected using the soft keys)

Setting the Display Conditions of the LCD

The following display conditions of the LCD can be configured.
Screen Attribute Background color of the operation screen LCD brightness Backlight saver Settings You can select white or black for the background color of the screen. The initial setting is white. For the setting procedure, see section 7.13. The brightness of the LCD can be set between eight levels. The initial setting is 4. For the setting procedure, see section 7.14. The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there is no key operation for a certain amount of time. The screen returns to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence. The initial setting is set so that the backlight saver is disabled. For the setting procedure, see section 7.14.

1-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.4

Storage Function
Display Data and Event Data The measured/computed data are first acquired to the DX100s internal memory as two types of data, display data and event data. Then, the data are saved to the external storage medium automatically or when the external storage medium is inserted into the drive. You can select whether to save the measured/computed data as display data, event data, or as both. The capacity of the internal memory for acquiring display data and event data is 1.2 MB. When the measured/computed data are saved as both display data and event data, 0.9 MB is used to save display data and 0.3 MB is used to save event data.
DX100

1
Overview of Functions

Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory

1 2 3 4

ENTER

DISP/

Internal memory Display data only 1.2MB Event data only 1.2MB Display data and event data 0.9MB 0.3MB

Display data

Event data Display data Event data

Display data are used to display waveforms on the DX100s screen. Display data consists of maximum and minimum values of the measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot on the time axis on the screen. Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and are useful for long-term observations. Event data are instantaneous values of the measured/computed data at specified sampling intervals of the event data. By setting the sampling interval equal to the scan interval, all measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval can be saved. In addition, the event data generated when an event occurs (an alarm, for example) can also be saved. This is useful when you wish to observe the measured/computed data in detail. For detail, see sections 8.1 and 8.2.
The time period corresponding to one dot on the screen Display data Maximum value Minimum value

Measurement data

Event data Scan interval Sampling inteval for event data

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-15

1.4 Storage Function Manual Sampled Data Every time a given key operation is carried out, all measured/computed data (instantaneous values) at that point are acquired to the internal memory. However, this excludes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF. For the action of acquiring data and the operating procedure, see sections 8.1, 8.3, and 8.12. TLOG Data (Only on models with the optional computation function (/M1) All measured/computed data (instantaneous values) can be acquired to the internal memory at predetermined intervals. However, this excludes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF. For the action of acquiring data, see sections 8.1 and 8.3. Report Data (Only on models with the optional computation function (/M1) The average, maximum, minimum, and sum can be computed for the specified channels at predetermined intervals and the result can be acquired to the internal memory. You can select one hour (hourly report), one day (daily report), one hour/one day (hourly and daily reports) one day/one week (daily and weekly reports), or one day/one month (daily and monthly reports) for the interval. For the action of acquiring data, see sections 8.1 and 8.3.

Saving Data to the External Storage Media

External Storage Media Various data can be saved to the following storage media: 3.5 floppy disk (1.44 MB, 2HD) Zip disk (100 MB) ATA flash memory card (4 MB to 440 MB): The size varies depending on the memory card that you are using. Save Method There are two methods of saving data to the external storage medium. One method is to insert the storage medium to the drive when data is to be saved (referred to as manual save). The other method saves data automatically at certain time intervals to a storage medium that has been inserted into the drive beforehand (referred to as auto save). Other Types of Data That Can Be Stored In addition to the types of data described in Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory, the following types of data can be stored on the external storage medium. Setting data The DX100 setting data, such as the setting of the functions of the input section as described in section 1.2, can also be stored to an external storage medium to the specified file name. The stored data can also be loaded and used by the DX100. Image data of the display screen The image data of the display screen can be stored to the external storage medium. The image data can be pasted to documents created on a PC.

Saving Data via Ethernet

The display data, event data, and report data, as described in Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory, can be automatically transferred to an FTP server via Ethernet for storage. Conversely, the DX100 can operate as an FTP server. The DX100 can be accessed from a PC and the data in the external storage medium can be retrieved for storage. For these functions, see the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E). 1-16
IM 04L01A01-01E

1.5

Alarm Function
This function generates an alarm when the measured/computed data meets a certain condition. When an alarm occurs, information notifying the alarm occurrence is displayed on the screen. In addition, a signal can be output from the relay output terminals on the rear panel of the DX100 (only on models with the optional alarm output relay function (/AR1, /AR2, or /A3)). Alarm Indication The alarm conditions are displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and through the trend, digital, bar graph, overview and other screens. The detailed information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary. There are two methods in displaying alarms. One method is to clear the alarm display when the cause of the alarm is no longer met (non-hold display). The other method is to display the alarm until the alarm is confirmed (hold display). Alarm Indication Example (Overview display and alarm summary display)

1
Overview of Functions

Tag/Channel no. Cursor

Alarm type Measured/ computed value

The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red. The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is not occurring is displayed in green.

Number of the alarm information displayed at the last line of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag/Channel no. Alarm No. (1, 2, 3, 4) /Type (H, L, h, l, R, r, T, t) Date & Time (when the alarm occurred) Date & Time (when the alarm released)

Cursor

Mark (see section 6.1)

Number of Alarms You can set up to four alarms for each channel. Alarm Conditions The following eight conditions are available: Upper limit alarm (H) An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the alarm value. Lower limit alarm (L) An alarm occurs when the measured value falls below the alarm value.

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-17

1.5 Alarm Function

Upper limit alarm Alarm occurrence Lower limit alarm Measured alarm value /computed data

Alarm release

Alarm release alarm value Measured/computed data Alarm occurrence

Delay upper limit alarm (T) An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above the alarm value for the specified time period (delay period). Delay lower limit alarm (t) An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below the alarm value for the specified time period (delay period).
Delay upper limit alarm example (T is the specified delay period)

Measured/computed data X2 T1 T

X4 Alarm value

Alarm occurrence

Alarm release

Alarm does not occur at T1, because the time period is shorter than the specified delay period (T). The input exceeds the alarm value at X2, but the alarm occurs at X3 at which the specified delay period elapses (the time when the alarm occurs is the time at X3). The input falls below the alarm value at X4 and the alarm is released. Difference upper limit alarm (h)*1 An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value. Difference lower limit alarm (l)*1 An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value.
*1 Can be specified only on difference computation channels.

Upper limit on rate-of-change alarm (R)*2 The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked. An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value. Lower limit on rate-of-change alarm (r)*2 The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked. An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value.
*2 Can be specified only on measurement channels.

1-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.5 Alarm Function

Upper limit on rate-of-change alarm
R alarm Measured T2 value Variation |T2-T1| Measured T1 value T2 Variation |T2-T1|

Lower limit on rate-of-change alarm

1
Overview of Functions

r alarm t1 Interval t2-t1 t2 Time t1 Interval t2-t1 t2 Time

The interval is defined by the following equation and is set in terms of the number of measured data points. Interval = scan interval number of measurements Alarm Hysteresis This applies to upper (H) and lower (L) limit alarms on measurement channels. A width (hysteresis) can be specified on the value used to set or release the alarm. This prevents the alarm from being set or released repetitively when the measured value is fluctuating around the alarm value. The hysteresis is fixed to 0.5% of the display span (display scale if the range is set to [Scale]). The initial setting is [ON].
Upper Limit Alarm (H) Alarm occurrence 1V Hysteresis (approx. 0.5%) Alarm set point

Measured value

Alarm release

Lower Limidt Alarm (L) Measured value 1V Alarm release

Hysteresis (approx. 0.5%)

Alarm occurrence

Alarm set point

Alarm Output Relay If you are using a model with the optional alarm output relay (/AR1, /AR2, or /A3), a contact signal can be generated according to the alarm conditions. For the procedure related to setting the alarm output relay, see section 6.2, Alarm Setting. The following functions can be specified on the alarm output relay. For details, see section 6.4. When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay, notify the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation (reflash alarm function). When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay, operate the relay when all specified alarms are active (AND function) Energize or de-energize the alarm output relay when the alarm occurs (energize/deenergize function of the output relay). When the alarm changes from the ON state to the OFF state (return to normal condition), turn OFF the output relay with an alarm ACK operation (output relay hold function).
IM 04L01A01-01E

1-19

1.6

Computation Function and Report Function (/M1 Option)

Computing equations are assigned to channels that are dedicated to performing computations. Displaying computation channels and acquiring computed data can be carried out in the same manner as in the measurement channels. The computation is performed every scan interval. For detail, see sections 11.1 and 11.2.

Computation chan and nels

Model DX102 DX104 DX106 DX112 Channel Channels 31 to 34 (4 channels) Channels 31 to 34 (4 channels) Channels 31 to 42 (12 channels) Channels 31 to 42 (12 channels)

Types of Computations
The following types of computations can be performed.
Type Four arithmetical operations SQR ABS LOG EXP Relational computation Logical computation Description Addition (+), subtraction (), multiplication (), and division (/) Computes the square root. Determines the absolute value. Determines the common logarithm. Determines the exponent. Determines <, , >, , =, of two elements and outputs 0 or 1. Determines the AND (logical product), OR (logical sum), XOR (exclusive logical sum) of two elements, NOT (negation) of an element and outputs 0 or 1.

Statistical computation (TLOG) Determines the average (AVE), maximum (MAX), minimum (MIN), sum (SUM), and maximum - minimum (P-P) at specified time intervals for the specified channels. You can specify the interval. For detail, see section 11.7. Rolling average Determines the moving average of the computed result at scan intervals for the channel for which the equation is specified. The sampling interval and the number of samples are specified for each channel. The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour, the maximum number of samples is 64. The initial setting is set so that the rolling average is disabled.

The following elements can be used in the computing equations.

Element Measured data Computed data Constants (K01 to K12) Communication input data (C01 to C12) Condition of the remote control terminals (D01 to D08) Description Values measured on the measurement channels. Values computed on the computation channels. Set by the computation function. Set by the communication function. DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual Use ON/OFF (1 or 0) of the remote input signal.

1-20

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.8 Computation Function and Report Function (/M1 Option)

Report Function
The report function is one of the functions provided by the optional computation function (/M1). This function computes the average, maximum, minimum, and sum for the specified channels at specified intervals and writes the result to the internal memory. You can select the report type from hourly reports only, daily reports only, hourly and daily reports, daily and monthly reports, and weekly and monthly reports. The reports are created every hour on the hour for hourly reports, at the specified hour on the hour for daily reports (once a day), at the specified hour on the hour on the specified day for weekly reports (once a week), and at the specified hour on the hour on the specified date for monthly reports (once a week). For example, in the case of daily reports, the average, maximum, minimum, and sum over a day for the specified channels are computed at the specified time (on the hour), and the results are acquired to the internal memory. This constitutes one report data set. The report data residing in the memory can be displayed on the DX100s LCD (see section 1.3, Display Function). In addition, the report data residing in the internal memory can be saved to an external storage medium (section 1.4, Storage Function). Because the report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format, spreadsheet applications can be used to view the data (see appendix 2, Data Format of ASCII Files). For details related to the report function, see section 11.11.
Item Report type Description Select from hourly reports only, daily reports only, hourly and daily reports, daily and weekly reports, and daily and monthly reports. Up to 12 channels Average, maximum, minimum, and sum Up to 40 ASCII format

1
Overview of Functions

Number of channels per report Computed data Number of reports that can be acquired to the internal memory Data format

For a display example of report data, see section 1.3.

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-21

1.7

Batch Function (/BT1 Option)

Batch function is used to include information such as batch numbers and lot numbers along with the data acquired to the internal memory. By including information such as batch numbers, lot numbers, and supervisor names along with the measured/computed data, you will be able to manage the stored data. By using the key login function in combination with this function, the operators that are allowed to store data on the DX100 can be restricted and identified.

Adding Batch Information to the Measured/Computed Data (Display Data and Event Data)
The following information can be added to the display data and event data acquired to the internal memory. For the setting procedure, see section 10.12. The operator can change the batch number, lot number, and comment for each lot. In addition, the lot number can be automatically increased by one when one lot is complete. Serial number of the DX100 (the number written on the name plate of the DX100). Application name (up to 16 characters). Supervisor name (up to 16 characters). Manager name (up to 16 characters). Batch name Batch number (up to 16 characters). Lot number (0 to 9999). Start information. Start date and time and user name* (up to 16 characters).
* Only when the key login function is used.

Stop information. Stop date and time and user name* (up to 16 characters).
* Only when the key login function is used.

Comment information. Comment (up to 32 characters x 3 lines). The date and time when comment was written. User name* of the user who wrote comment (up to 16 characters).
* Only when the key login function is used.

Identifying Operators (Users) by using the Key Login Function

By using the key login function, the users that can log into the DX100 can be restricted and identified. When the batch function is activated, the security is enhanced in the following manner as compared with the standard key login function. For the operating procedure of the key login function, see section 10.5. For the setting procedure, see section 10.6. User names that are already registered cannot be specified. The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified.

Changing the Messages

When the optional batch function is installed, messages 1 through 3 can be changed in the operation mode. For the procedure related to changing the messages, see section 7.4.

1-22

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.7 Batch Function (/BT1 Option)

Display
The following items are displayed: The batch number/lot number and date/time are alternately displayed in the status display section. See section 4.1. When the STOP key is pressed, batch information is displayed in the stop confirmation screen. See sections 8.5 and 8.6.

1
Overview of Functions

Confirming the Stored Data

The display data and the event data in the internal memory or the external storage medium, can be displayed on the historical trend display. When the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory or in the external storage medium is displayed, batch information can be shown in the memory information display. See section 4.6. The batch number and lot number for each file can be displayed in place of the date and time of the file creation on the memory summary screen and on the screen used to select the display data and event data to be loaded from the external storage medium. See sections 4.5, 9.3, and 9.4.

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-23

1.8

Other Functions
One of the following actions can be assigned to the USER key. Alarm ACK is initially assigned. For the setting and operating procedure, see section 10.2, and 10.1, respectively. Action That Can Be Assigned
Name of Action None Trigger Action None Provides a key trigger for starting acquiring the event data. (when [Key Trigger] is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data) Section 8.11 Release alarm indication and relay output (when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold. Section 6.4) Starts/stops computation. (when the computation function (/M1) is equipped) Section 11.3 Clears computed results. (when the computation function (/M1) is equipped and the computation is suspended) Section 11.3 Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory. Section 8.13 Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory. Section 7.4 Saves the screen image data to the external medium. Section 9.6

USER key

AlarmACK

Math Mathrst

M.sample Message 1 to Message 8 Snapshot

Key Lock
Key lock is a function that locks key operations, removal of the Zip disk, and the saving of data to the external storage medium during manual save mode. A password needs to be entered to release the key lock. For the setting and operating procedure, see section 10.4, and 10.3, respectively. Items and Behaviors of the Key Lock (Can be set individually)
Item Behavior during Key Lock START key Disabled STOP key Disabled MENU key Disabled USER key Disabled DISP/ENTER key Switching operation screens is disabled. [Alarm ACK] soft key Disabled Math (Computation) [Math START] soft key*1 Disabled (option) [Math STOP] soft key*1 Disabled (option) Disabled (option) [Math reset] soft key*1 Write memory [Message] soft key*2 Disabled [Manual sample] soft key*2 Disabled [Trigger] soft key*2 Disabled [Save Display] soft key*2 Disabled Disabled [Save Event] soft key*2 [E-Mail START] soft key*2 Disabled [E-Mail STOP] soft key*2 Disabled Disabled [E-Mail test] soft key*2 Media (External storage medium) During manual save Prevent saving when an external storage medium is inserted. Prevent Zip disk removal. During auto save Prevent Zip disk removal. *1 Set together by [Math] parameter. *2 Set together by [Write memory] parameter.

1-24

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.8 Other Functions

Key Login/Logout
This function allows only certain users to access the DX100. The users are distinguished by their name, user IDs, and passwords. You can select whether or not to use User IDs. In addition, you can set whether or not to allow operations in the basic setting mode for each user. Up to 7 users can be registered. For the key login function with Batch function (/BT1 option), see section 1.7. For the setting and operating procedure, see section 10.6, and 10.5, respectively.

1
Overview of Functions

Log Display
A list of phenomena that occurred can be displayed in the order of occurrence for the following items: Error messages (50 most recent messages) A log of key login and logout (50 most recent logins) A log of communication commands (200 most recent commands) A log of file transfers using the FTP client function (50 most recent transfers) A log of e-mail transmissions (the 50 most recent transmissions) A log of Web operations (the 50 most recent operations) For details related to the display format, see section 10.7. Error Log Example Displays the date and time of the error occurrence, error code number, and the message.
The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen / total number of logs Date and time of occurrence Error code Error message

System Screen
The total number of inputs on the DX100, the capacity of the internal memory, the communication functions, the external storage drive, the options, the MAC address, and the firmware version number can be displayed. For the operating procedure, see section 10.7.
Number of measurement channels* Number of computation channels Internal memory capacity Optional functions Communication function External storage medium drive Optional functions MAC address Firmware version number

When the cramped input terminal is equipped (/H2 option), C is indicated as ANALOG: 12(C) in this example.

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-25

1.8 Other Functions

Displayed Language
The displayed language can be set to English, Japanese, German, or French. For the setting procedure, see section 10.10.

FAIL/Memory End Output (/F1 option)

Operation at System Failure This function activates the relay output when the CPU fails. The relay is de-energized on CPU failure. The relay is de-energized if the CPU fails. This relay action cannot be reversed to energized on failure and thus this relay is de-energized also upon power-off (including a power failure). Relay Behavior (De-energized on failure)

C Normal

C Failure

C Power-off

NO, C, and NC denote normally-opened, common, and normally closed, respectively.

Operation at Memory End This function activates the relay output when the remaining space (time) in the internal memory or the external storage medium becomes small. The relay is energized if the memory end is detected. The relay action cannot be reversed to de-energized on memory end. When the relay is energized, save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium during manual save, or use another external storage medium during auto save. The memory end detection operates as follows. When using auto save When using auto save and the storage medium is inserted, the relay is energized when the remaining space on the storage medium falls to 10%. At this point, the icon of the external storage medium on the status display section on the screen turns to red from green. See section 4.2. When using manual save When the type of data to be acquired is display data only or display data and event data When the remaining time for storing the display data in the internal memory falls to the specified time, the relay is energized. When the type of data to be acquired is event data only In the [Free] mode, the relay is energized when the remaining time for storing the event data in the internal memory falls to the specified time. In the [Trigger] or [Rotate] mode, the relay is not energized (There is no memory end output).

1-26

IM 04L01A01-01E

1.8 Other Functions Relay behavior (energized on memory end)

1
Overview of Functions

C Normal

C Power-off

Memory end

NO, C, and NC denote normally-opened, common, and normally closed, respectively.

For the setting procedure, see section 10.8.

Remote Control Function (/R1 option)

When a contact or open collector signal is applied to the remote control terminal, a predetermined action is carried out. Arbitrary actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals. The available actions are listed below. For the setting procedure, see section 10.9.
Name of Action None Start/Stop Trigger Remote Signal Action Edge Trigger No operation. Start/stop acquiring data to the internal memory. Sections 8.4 and 8.5 Trigger to start acquiring event data to the internal memory (valid only when event data are specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to external trigger Section 8.11) Release alarm display/relay output (valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set to hold Section 6.4). Adjust the internal clock to the nearest hour. Start/stop computation (only for models with the computation option (/M1). Reset the computed value of the computation channel (reset to 0, only on models with the computation option (/M1) while the computation is stopped). Write the instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory once. Load and activate the setup data file that had been created and stored in the external storage medium. Display messages 1 to 8 on the trend display and write them to the internal memory. Save the screen image data to the storage medium.

Alarm ACK

Trigger

Time adj Computation (Math)

Trigger Edge

Computation (Math) reset Trigger

Manual sample Load setup data 1 to 3 Messages 1 to 8 Snapshot

Trigger Trigger Trigger Trigger

Remote Signal (Edge and trigger) The above actions are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal (edge) or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms (trigger).
Rising/Falling edge Rising Falling Trigger

250 ms or more

For contact inputs, the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to close and falls when the contact switches from close to open. For open collector signals, the remote signal rises when the collector signal (voltage level of the remote terminal) goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high.

IM 04L01A01-01E

1-27

1.8 Other Functions

Daylight Savings Time

When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled, the DX100 automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour. (Example: If the time is set to 9 oclock on June 1, the time is set ahead to 10 oclock June 1.) When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled, the DX100 automatically sets the clock back by one hour. (Example: If the time is set to 9 oclock on December 1, the time is set back to 8 oclock December 1.) For the setting procedure, see section 10.14.

Temperature Unit
The temperature unit can be set to Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F). This applies to all channels. For the setting procedure, see section 10.15.

24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter (/TPS2, /TPS4 option)

Provides 24 VDC power to transmitters.

1-28

IM 04L01A01-01E

Chapter 2 Before Using the DX100

2.1

Precautions on the Use of the DX100

Read the following precautions before using the DX100 and the external storage medium (floppy disk, Zip disk, ATA flash memory card).

2
Before Using the DX100

Handling Precautions
Use care when cleaning the DX100, especially any plastic parts. When cleaning, wipe with a dry, soft cloth. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner, since these may cause discoloring and deformation. Keep electrically charged objects away from the DX100 as this may cause malfunction. Do not apply volatile chemicals to the LCD monitor or panel keys. Do not allow rubber and vinyl products to remain in contact with the DX100 for long periods of time. This may damage the DX100. Do not apply shock to the DX100. When not in use, make sure to turn OFF the power switch. If there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the DX100, immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord. Then, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

CAUTION
Dont put any weight on the DX100 while it is in reclined position with its front feet up, as it may damage the feet.

IM 04L01A01-01E

2-1

2.1 Precautions on the Use of the DX100

Handling precautions of external storage media

Take special care in handling external storage media as they are delicate products. For general precautions, see the instruction manual that came with the external storage medium. Floppy disks and Zip disks may not operate properly under high or low temperature environment. If you are using the DX100 in a low-temperature environment (less than 10C), let the DX100 warm-up for at least 30 minutes beforehand. If you are using them in a high-temperature environment (greater than 40C), we recommend the external storage medium be inserted into the drive when saving the data and be removed after the data have been saved (manual save, see section 8.4.) Remove the external storage medium from the drive when turning ON/OFF the DX100. Do not remove the external storage medium while the access lamp is lit. Doing so can destroy the data on the medium. If you are using a commercially available compact flash card on DX100s in the ATA flash memory card drive, be careful of static electricity. The DX100 may not operate properly if you touch the compact flash card that is inserted into the DX100 when your body is charged with static electricity. Handling the CF Card and Adapter Insert the CF card into the adapter as shown in the figure below. The card should remain in the adapter when removing it from the card slot on the DX100.

2.3

Input Signal Wiring

2
CAUTION
If a strong tension is applied to the cable wired to the DX100, the terminals of the DX100 and/or the cable can be damaged. In order to prevent tension from being applied directly on the terminals, fasten all wiring cables to the rear of the mounting panel. To prevent fire, use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70C or more.

Before Using the DX100

Precautions to be taken while wiring

Take the following precautions when wring the input signal cables. It is recommended that crimp-on lugs (designed for 4 mm screws) with insulation sleeves be used on the lead wire ends. However, this does not apply to the optional clamped terminals (optional code /H2).

Crimp-on lug

Take measures to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit. Move the measurement circuit away from the power cable (power circuit) and ground cable. It is desirable that the item being measured does not generate noise. However, if this is unavoidable, isolate the measurement circuit from the item. Also, ground the item being measured. Shielded wires should be used to minimize noise caused by electrostatic induction. Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX100 as necessary (make sure you are not grounding at two points). To minimize noise caused by electromagnetic induction, twist the measurement circuit wires at short, equal intervals. Make sure to earth ground the protective ground terminal through minimum resistance (less than 100 ). When using internal reference junction compensation on the thermocouple input, take measures to stabilize the temperature at the input terminal. Always use the input terminal cover. Do not use thick wires which may cause large heat dissipation (cross sectional area 0.5 mm2 or less recommended). Make sure that the ambient temperature remains reasonably stable. Large temperature fluctuations can occur if a nearby fan turns ON or OFF. Connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices can cause signal degradation, affecting all connected devices. If you need to make a parallel connection, then Turn the burnout function OFF. (See section 5.9) Ground the instruments to the same point. Do not turn ON or OFF another instrument during operation. This can have adverse effects on the other instruments. RTDs cannot be wired in parallel. 2-5

IM 04L01A01-01E

2.3 Input Signal Wiring

WARNING
To prevent electric shock, ensure the main power supply is turned OFF.

CAUTION
Do not apply input signals that exceed the following values. This can damage the DX100. Maximum input voltage Voltage range of 2 VDC or less or thermocouples: 10 VDC Voltage range between 6 and 50 VDC: 60 VDC Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 VACrms (50/60Hz) The DX100 is an INSTALLATION CATEGORY II product.

DC Current Input

+ DC current input Shunt resistor NOTE: For a 4 to 20 mA input, use a shunt resistor of 250 0.1%.

Leadwire resistance: 10 max./wire The resistance of the three wires should be approximately equal.

2-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

2.4

Alarm Output Wiring (/AR1, /AR2, /A3 Option)

2
WARNING
To prevent electric shock, ensure the main power supply is turned OFF. If a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the alarm output terminal, use ring-tongue crimp-on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose. Furthermore, use double-insulated wires (dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more) for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied. For all other wires, use basic insulated wires (dielectric strength of 1350 VAC). To prevent electric shock, attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals.

Before Using the DX100

CAUTION
To prevent fire, use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70C or more.

Wiring Procedure
1. 2. Turn OFF the DX100 and remove the cover for the option terminal. Connect the alarm output cables to the terminal. The terminal arrangement will be one of the figures shown on the next page depending on the alarm output relay option (number of outputs). Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws.

IM 04L01A01-01E

2-9

2.4 Alarm Output Wiring (/AR1, /AR2, /A3 Option) Alarm Terminal Position Enclosed in parentheses are the relay numbers assigned to each option terminal.

Option terminal (I01 to I06)

Terminal Arrangement (Only the position of the alarm output terminals is indicated.) When the relay is not energized, NC is closed and NO is open. C is the common terminal. /AR1, /AR1/F1
02 Option Terminal 01 NC C NO

/AR2, /AR2/F1
02 Option Terminal 04 03 01 NC C NO

/A3, /A3/R1
06 Option Terminal 04 03 05 02 01 NC C NO

Contact Specifications
Item Output type Output capacity Dielectric strength Specification Relay transfer contact (energize/de-energize switchable) 250 VAC (50/60 Hz), 3 A 250 VDC, 0.1 A (resistive load) 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between output terminals and the ground terminal

For details related to the switching of energized/de-energized state of the alarm relays, see section 6.4.

2-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

2.5

FAIL/Memory End Wiring (/F1 Option)

2
W WARNING
To prevent electric shock, ensure the main power supply is turned OFF. If a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the FAIL/Memory End output terminal, use ring-tongue crimp-on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose. Furthermore, use double-insulated wires (dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more) for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied. For all other wires, use basic insulated wires (dielectric strength of 1350 VAC). To prevent electric shock, attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals.

Before Using the DX100

CAUTION
To prevent fire, use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70C or more.

Wiring Procedure
1. 2. Turn OFF the DX100 and remove the cover for the option terminal. Connect the FAIL/Memory End output cables to the terminal. The terminal arrangement for the FAIL/Memory End output option is as follows. Terminal Position

Option terminal

Terminal Arrangement (Only the position of the FAIL/Memory End output terminals is indicated.) When the relay is not energized, NC is closed and NO is open. C is the common terminal.
FAIL NC C NO Memory End

Option Terminal

Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws.

FAIL output is a de-energize relay (de-energized on failure), and the memory end output is an energize relay (enrgized on memory end).

Note

IM 04L01A01-01E

2-11

2.5 FAIL/Memory End Wiring (/F1 Option)

Contact Specifications
Item Output type Output capacity Dielectric strength Specification Relay transfer contact 250 VAC (50/60 Hz), 3 A 250 VDC, 0.1 A (resistive load) 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between output terminals and the ground terminal

For details related to the FAIL/Memory End output, see section 1.8.

2-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

2.6

Remote Control Wiring (/R1 Option)

2
WARNING
To prevent electric shock, ensure the main power supply is turned OFF.

Before Using the DX100

CAUTION
To prevent fire, use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70C or more.

Wiring Procedure
1. 2. Turn OFF the DX100 and remove the cover for the option terminal. Connect the remote control signal cables to the terminal. The terminal arrangement for the remote control option is as follows. Terminal Position

Option terminal

Terminal Arrangement (Only the position of the remote control terminals is indicated.) C is a common terminal for terminals 1 through 8.
6 3 C 4 1 7 8 5 2

Option Terminal

Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws.

Note
Use shielded wires for the remote control wires to reduce the effects of noise. Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX100.

IM 04L01A01-01E

2-13

2.6 Remote Control Wiring (/R1 Option)

Input Specifications
Item Input signal Input conditions Specification Voltage-free (dry) contact, open-collector (TTL or transistor) ON voltage: Less than or equal to 0.5 V (30 mA DC) Leakage current in the OFF state: No more than 0.25 mA Signal duration: 250 ms minimum Photocoupler isolation (one side common) Internal isolated power source (5 V 5%) 500 VDC for one minute between input terminals and the ground terminal

Input type Dielectric strength

For details related to the control and input types, see section 10.9.

2-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

2.7

24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring (/ TPS2, /TPS4, Option)

2
WARNING
To prevent electric shock, ensure the main power supply is turned OFF.

Before Using the DX100

CAUTION
Never short-circuit the power supply terminals or apply an external voltage, otherwise damage to the DX100 may result. Do not use current that exceeds the maximum output current (25 mADC). This may cause damage to the DX100. To prevent fire, use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70C or more.

Wiring diagram
Arrange the wires as shown below.
DX100 Current 24 VDC power supply terminal +

Transmitter

+ Input terminal Shunt resistor : 250 ohms

Wiring Procedure
1. 2. Turn OFF the DX100 and remove the cover for the option terminal. Connect the 24 VDC power supply wires to the terminal. The terminal arrangement for the 24 VDC power supply option is as follows. Terminal Position

Option terminal

IM 04L01A01-01E

2-15

2.7 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring (/TPS2, /TPS4, Option) /TPS2
Option Terminal +

/TPS4
Option Terminal +

Note
Use shielded wires to reduce the effects of noise. Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX100.

2-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

2.8

Power Supply Wiring

2
Before Using the DX100
Precautions to be taken when wiring the power supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the DX100, observe the following warnings.

For the Panel Mount Type

WARNING
To prevent electrishock, ensure the main power supply is turned OFF. To prevent the possibility of fire, use 600 V PVC insulated wire (AWG18) or an equivalent wire for power wiring. Make sure to earth ground the protective earth terminal through a grounding resistance less than 100 before turning ON the power. Use crimp-on lugs (designed for 4 mm screws) for power and ground wiring termination. (See section 2.3, Input Signal Wiring) To prevent electric shock, make sure to attach the transparent terminal cover. Make sure to provide a power switch (double-pole type) on the power supply line in order to separate the DX100 from the main power supply. Put an indication on this switch as the breaker on the power supply line for the DX100. Switch Specification Rated power current: 1 A or more (except for /P1 model), 3 A or more (for /P1 model) Rated rush current: 60 A or more (except for /P1 model), 70 A or more (for /P1 model) Use a switch complied with IEC 60947-1, 3. Connect a fuse (between 2 A and 15 A) to the power line. The power switch and fuse used on the power supply line should be CSA approved (for the use in North America) or VDE approved (for the use in Europe). Do not add a switch or fuse to the ground line.

Use a power supply that meets the following conditions:

Item except for /P1 model for /P1 model 24 VDC/AC 21.6 to 26.4 VDC/AC 50/60 Hz (for AC) 50/60 Hz2% (for AC) 30 VA (for DC), 45VA (for AC) Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50/60 Hz Allowable power supply frequency range 50/60 Hz2% Maximum power consumption 45 VA (100 V), 62 VA (240 V)

Note
Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC, as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy (applies to all models except the ones with the /P1 option).

IM 04L01A01-01E

2-17

2.8 Power Supply Wiring Wiring Procedure 1. Turn OFF the DX100 and remove the transparent power terminal cover. 2. Connect the power supply wires and the protective ground wire to the power terminals.
except for /P1 model for /P1 model

L N

Protective ground wire Pwer supply wires

Replace the power terminal cover, and fasten it with screws.

For the Desktop Type

Except for /P1 model Precautions to be taken when wiring the power supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the DX100, observe the following warnings.

WARNING
Before connecting the power cord, ensure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage rating for the instrument, and that it is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord itself. Confirm that the power is turned OFF before connecting the power cord. To prevent electric shock and the possibility of fire, use only the power cord that is supplied by YOKOGAWA. Always use protective earth terminal to prevent electric shock. Connect the power cord to a three-pole power outlet that has a protective earth terminal. Never use an extension cord that does not have protective earth terminal, otherwise the protection function will be compromised.

Use a power supply that meets the following conditions:

Item conditions Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50/60 Hz Allowable power supply frequency range 50/60 Hz2% Maximum power consumption 45 VA (100 V), 62 VA (240 V)

Note
Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC, as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy (applies to all models except the ones with the /P1 option).

2-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

2.8 Power Supply Wiring Connection Procedure 1. Check that the DX100 is turned OFF. 2. Connect the power cord (supplied with the DX100) to the power connector on the rear panel of the DX100.

2
Before Using the DX100

Ensure that the power supply voltage is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord, then plug the other end of the power cord into an outlet that meets the requirements. Use only a 3-prong AC outlet with a protective ground terminal.

For Models With the /P1 Option (24 VDC/AC power supply model) The wiring procedure of the power supply is the same as that for the panel mount type.

IM 04L01A01-01E

2-19

Chapter 3 Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

3.1

Names of Parts and Functions

Front Panel

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations
1

Front cover knob 5

1 2 3 4

12
DISP/
ENTER

3 6
START STOP USER FUNC ESC MENU

DISP/
ENTER

key panel cover knob

LCD screen Displays various operation screens such as the trend display and the setup screen to configure the DX100. Label A label used to distinguish the channels. The user can write on this label and use it as a reference. Operation key Left, right, up, and down arrow keys and the DISP/ENTER key. The keys are used to switch the operation screen in the operation mode. In the setup screens, the keys are used to select parameters and to confirm the new settings.

Key panel cover Open this cover to access the keys besides the arrow keys and the DISP/ENTER key. Open the cover by pulling the tab on the upper left corner of the cover toward you.

Front cover Open the front cover when turning ON/OFF the DX100 or inserting or removing the external storage medium such as the floppy disk. Open the cover by pushing down on the tab located at the center of the top edge of the cover and pulling it forward. Keep the cover closed at all times except when accessing the power switch and the external storage medium.

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-1

3.1 Names of Parts and Functions

Note
For DX100s which are side-by-side mounted vertically, when a front panel is opened the down arrow key may interfere the upper front panel.

START key Used to start the data acquisition to the internal memory and display the waveform on the trend display. Also starts computation and the report function when the computation function (/M1) is equipped. 7. STOP key Used to stop the data acquisition to the internal memory. It also stops the updating of the waveform on the trend display. If the model has the optional computation function (/M1), the report is stopped. For computation, you can select whether or not to stop the operation when the STOP key is pressed. 8. ESC key Used to cancel an operation. Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode. 9. MENU key Used to enter the setting mode. Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode. 10. USER key Executes the action assigned to this key. 11. FUNC key Used to execute various functions in the operation mode. For the functions that you can execute, see section 3.4. Also, used to enter the basic setting mode from the setting mode. 12. Soft keys When the FUNC key is pressed, the functions are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen. During the setting/basic setting modes, the parameters are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen.
with floppy disk drive with Zip drive with ATA flash memory card drive

13. Power switch 14. Storage medium drive Floppy disk drive, Zip drive, or ATA flash memory card drive depending on the specification. 15. Eject button (Access lamp for Zip drive) Used when ejecting the storage medium. Also is the access lamp for the Zip drive. The access lamp is lit while the Zip disk is being accessed. 16. Access lamp for the floppy disk drive The access lamp is lit while the floppy disk is being accessed. 3-2
IM 04L01A01-01E

3.1 Names of Parts and Functions

Rear Panel
2 3 (RS-232) 1(Note1) 1(Note2)

L N

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations
5 6 3 (RS-422-A/485) (Fieldbus)

Note1 Panel mount type models Desktop type models with /P1 Note2 Desktop type models without /P1

1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

Power terminals and a protective ground terminal Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord. Ethernet port Connect the Ethernet cable (10Base-T). Serial interface port (/C2, /C3 option) or fieldbus interface port (/CF1 option) RS-232 port or RS-422-A/485 port or FOUNDATION Fieldbus port depending on the specification. Connect the interface cable. Input terminals Connect the input signal cable of the item being measured. Option terminals (/AR1, /AR2, /A3, /F1, /R1, /TPS2, /TPS4 option) Connect optional input/output signal cables. Functional ground terminal
See the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E) to use Ethernet port and the serial interface port.

Note

Desktop Type
1. 2. Carrying handle Four feet and two folding front feet
1

2
IM 04L01A01-01E

3-3

3.2

Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch

This section describes the procedures to turn ON/OFF the power switch.

Procedure Turning ON the power 1. Check the following points before turning ON the power switch. The power cord/wires are connected correctly to the DX100. The DX100 is connected to the correct power supply (see section 2.7). The proper fuse is set (see section 13.4).

CAUTION
If the input wires are connected in parallel with another instrument, avoid turning ON/OFF the DX100 or the other instrument when either one is in operation. This may affect the reading.

2. 3. 4.

Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward. Turn the power switch ON. Close the cover. After performing a self-diagnosis for a few seconds, a screen in the operation mode appears.

Turning OFF the power 1. Check that the external storage medium is not being accessed and turn OFF the power switch.

Note
If nothing is displayed when the power switch is turned ON, turn OFF the power switch and check the points listed in step 1. After checking the points, turn ON the power switch again. If the unit still does not work, it is probably malfunctioning. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs. If an error message is displayed on the screen, take measures according to the description in chapter 12, Troubleshooting. Turn ON the power switch, let the DX100 warm up for at least 30 minutes, and then start the measurements.

3-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.3

Inserting/Removing the External Storage Medium

This section describes the procedures to insert and remove the external storage medium. Three types of media can be used depending on the specification. Model DX1 -1: Floppy disk Model DX1 -2: Zip disk Model DX1 -3: ATA flash memory card For the handling procedure of the storage medium, see section 2.1.

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

Procedure Inserting the storage medium 1. Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward. Insert the medium into the drive until a click is heard. 2. When the power switch is turned ON, closing the front cover causes the DX100 to detect the existence of an external storage medium in the drive. If the storage medium is detected, an external storage medium icon is displayed in the status display section of the screen
Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card

Note
Keep the front cover closed during operation except when accessing the power switch and the external storage medium. This will protect the storage medium and the drive from foreign particles such as dust.

Removing the storage medium Floppy disks and ATA flash memory cards can be removed from the drive regardless of whether the DX100 is turned ON or OFF. Zip disks cannot be removed when the DX100 is turned OFF. 1. If the DX100 is turned ON, check that the storage medium is not being accessed.

Note
The access lamp is lit while the storage medium is being accessed. A message Data are being saved to the medium. is displayed while measured/computed data are being saved to the medium.

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-5

3.3 Inserting/Removing the External Storage Medium 2. Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward. Push the eject button to remove the storage medium. Close the front cover. If the DX100 is turned ON, the external storage medium icon in the status display section disappears.
Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card

Note
If the key lock function for the storage medium is engaged, the Zip disk cannot be ejected even if the eject button is pressed. Release the key lock before attempting to eject the Zip disk. See section 10.4.

Procedure when the Zip disk cannot be ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given in the Removing the storage medium section, carry out the following steps to remove it. 1. Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward. 2. Insert a pin of approx. 1 mm in diameter into the eject button hole and press slowly. This will cause the Zip disk to be ejected.

Zip disk eject hole Eject button

Insert a pin.

Explanation Formatting external storage media Format the external storage medium before use. The external storage medium is formatted to the following types using the DX100. Format type Floppy disk: Zip disk: ATA flash memory card:

2 HD, 1.44 MB FDISK 1 partition (hard disk format) FDISK 1 partition (hard disk format)

External storage media formatted on other devices can be used as long as the format type is the same as those indicated above.

3-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.4

Run Mode
There are three run modes on the DX100: operation, setting, and basic setting. This section describes the functions and relationships of the three modes.

Mode Types
Power ON Operation mode

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

[END] soft key - DISP/ENTER

Operation screens

MENU or ESC

Setting mode
Pressing FUNC for 3 seconds

Basic setting mode

Menu screen

Soft key

MENU or ESC

Soft key

ESC

Setting screens

Mode Type Operation mode

Description This mode is used for daily operation. This mode is entered when the power is turned ON. This mode is used to configure the DX100 operation such as input range and alarms. This mode is entered by pressing the MENU key in the operation mode. Measured data cannot be displayed in this mode. Operations such as measurements, alarm detection, and data acquisition are continued.

Possible Operations Monitoring operation Data acquisition Setting the operation Operation related to the file on the external storage medium

Setting mode

Basic setting mode (Setup mode)

This mode is used to configure the Basic settings of the functions basic environment of the DX100 such Operation related to the file on as the input format and the data the external storage medium storage format. This mode is entered by pressing the FUNC key for three seconds at the setting mode menu. This mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress. Operations such as measurements, alarm detection, and data acquisition are stopped.

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-7

3.4 Run Mode

Functions and Operations in the Operation Mode

Operation screen Displays various operation screens such as trend, digital, bar graph, alarm summary, message summary, memory summary, historical trend, and report display (option). Screens are switched by the arrow keys and the DISP/ENTER key. See chapter 4. Operations using the FUNC key Pressing the FUNC key displays a menu that is assigned to the soft keys at the bottom of the screen. The menu varies depending on the setup information and options. Press the [Next] soft key to display the soft key menu in the next line. The function is executed by pressing the soft key. Press the FUNC or ESC key to erase the menu without executing the assigned function.

FUNC key menu

Menu Batch Alarm ACK Ref. section 10.11 6.1, 6.4 Description Displays the batch screen (for models with /BT1). Release alarm indication and relay output (when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold.) Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory. Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory. Enables or disables key lock. (when key lock is in use) Logout (when being logged in while key login is in use) Starts acquiring event data (when [Key Trigger] is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data) Starts/stops computation. (when the computation function (/M1) is equipped) Clears computed results. (when the computation function (/M1) is equipped and the computation is suspended) Clears the computation dropout display. (when the computation function (/M1) is equipped and the computation dropout occurs) Saves the screen image data to the external medium. Displays log screens or the system information screen. Executes FTP test. Stores the display data or event data to the external storage medium. (only when the display data or event data (free mode) are being acquired to the internal memory). Starts/stops E-mail transmission. Executes E-mail test. Displays the Modbus status screen. Displays the fieldbus status screen.

Message Manual sample Key lock Logout Trigger Math START/STOP Math reset

7.4 8.12 10.3 10.5 8.6, 8.11 11.3 11.3

Math ACK

11.3

Snapshot Log FTP test*1 Save Display/Save Event

9.6 10.7

8.7

E-Mail START/STOP1 E-Mail test1 Modbus master1 Fieldbus2

*1 See the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E). *2 See the Fieldbus Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-18E).

3-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.4 Run Mode Other key operations START/STOP Starts/stops acquiring measured/computed data. For the operating procedure, see sections 8.5 and 8.6. The waveform on the trend display also starts/stops. When the computation function (/M1) is equipped, computation and the report function also start/stop. For the operating procedure, see sections 11.3 and 11.12. USER Executes the assigned function. See section 10.1.

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

Functions of the Setting and Basic Setting Modes

Configure functions using the arrow keys, the DISP/ENTER key, the soft keys, and the character/number input keys. See 3.5 Configuring the functions and chapters 5 through 11 for detail. Also see section 9.1 to save the setup data.

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-9

3.5

Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)

Basic Setting Mode The basic setting mode is used to change the basic configuration of various functions. The basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress or the storage medium is being accessed. Setting Mode The setting mode is used to change the functions for each channel and the display specifications. All items except the ones listed below can be changed while data acquisition or computation is in operation. Items that cannot be changed are grayed and the cursor cannot be moved on them. Items that cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress Input range Display update rate for the trend display Auto save interval Computing equation Constants for computation Items that cannot be changed while computation is in progress. Range setting Computing equation Constants for computation TLOG timer number and sum scale

Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode

3-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)

Configuration Details
The configuration details of the setting mode and the basic setting mode are shown below. Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections. Settings related to the input
Item Scan interval (5.9) Input specifications (5.1 to 5.7) Input type Measurement range Upper and lower limit of span Reference channel for differential computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Burn out Off/Up/Down Switch between [Internal] and [External] Compensation voltage when set to [External] Filter time constant/Off (DX102/ Integration time of the A/D DX104) (5.8) converter (5.9) Number of samples for the moving average/Off (DX106/DX112) (5.8) Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Scan interval

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

Burnout (5.9) Reference junction compensation (5.9)

Noise elimination

Settings related to the alarm

Item Alarm Setting Mode Alarm type (6.2) Alarm value (6.2) Output relay On/Off (6.2) Output relay number (6.2) Alarm delay time (6.3) Basic Setting Mode Display hold/non-hold (6.4) The time interval for the rate-ofchange alarm (for measurement channels only) (6.4) Hysteresis (for measurement channels only) (6.4) Reflash alarm AND operation Relay energize/de-energize Relay hold/non-hold

Alarm output relay operation (option) (6.4)

Settings related to the display

Item Display group Setting Mode Group name (7.6) Channel assignment (7.6) Group display switching interval (7.13) Tag name (7.1) Switch between tag display and channel number display (7.2) Measurement channels to display the trend (applies also to measurement channels that data are to be acquired) (8.10) Use/not use the partial expanded display (7.12) Basic Setting Mode

Tag/Channel display Trend

Display rate (7.3) Message (7.5) Trip line position, display color (7.7) Trip line width (7.13) Channel display color (7.8) (applies also to bar graphs) Display direction (vertical/horizontal) (7.13) Trend line width (7.13) Grid (7.13) Scale value digits (7.13) Number of scale divisions (7.10) (applies also to bar graphs) Scale position (7.10) Zone upper and lower limits (7.9) Partial expanded display (7.11)

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-11

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)
Bar graph Channel display color (applies also to trends) (7.8) Bar graph direction (vertical/horizontal) (7.13) Number of scale divisions (applies also to trends) (7.10) Bar graph base position (7.10) Background color (white or black) (7.13) Brightness (7.14) Backlight saver specifications (7.14)

LCD

Settings related to data storage

Item Data acquisition (8.11) Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Types of data to be acquired Event data Sampling interval Mode (Free/Trigger/ Rotate) Number of blocks (number of memory divisions) Data length (file size) Pretrigger position Type of trigger to use Measurement channels that data are to be acquired (applies also to measurement channels for which to display the trend) Computation channels (option) that data are to be acquired (applies also to computation channels for which to display the trend) Name of the directory to which data are to be saved (8.9) File header string (8.9) Range of data to be saved during manual save (8.9) Auto save interval (during auto save) (8.8) Save method to the storage media, auto save or manual save (8.11) Memory timeup(8.12)

Channel selections for data acquisition (8.10)

Storage media

Memory end alarm

Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm (10.8) Timer mode (absolute time/ relative time) (11.9) Interval time (11.9) Reference time for the absolute timer (11.9) Turn On/Off data storage to the internal memory (11.9)

TLOG data

Settings related only to the computation channels (configured on a screen dedicated to computation channels, option)
Item Computation specifications (11.4) Constants (11.6) Alarm Setting Mode Computing equation Upper and lower limit of span Unit Constants (K01 to K12) Alarm type (11.5) Alarm value (11.5) Output relay On/Off (11.5) Output relay number (11.5) Alarm delay time (6.3) Basic Setting Mode

Tag/Channel display

Tag name (7.1)

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-12

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)
Trend Channel display color (7.8) Number of scale divisions (7.10) Scale position (7.10) Zone display (7.9) Partial expansion display (7.11) Computation channels to display the trend (applies also to computation channels that data are to be acquired) (8.10)

Bar graph

Channel display color (Applies also to trends) (7.8) Number of scale divisions (7.10) Bar graph base position (7.10) Timer number to use, sum scale (11.8) Timer mode (absolute time/ relative time) (11.9) Interval time (11.9) Reference time for the absolute timer (11.9) Turn On/Off reset at each interval (11.9) Turn On/Off data storage to the internal memory (11.9) On/Off Sampling interval Number of samples

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

TLOG computation

Rolling average (11.10)

Other settings
Item Time User key Key lock (10.4) Setting Mode Date/time(3.7) Action assignment (10.2) Use/Not use key lock Password Keys to lock, enable/disable the key lock Use/Not use key login Auto logout On/Off Use/Not use user ID User name User ID Password Allow/Prohibit basic setting mode Basic Setting Mode

Key login (10.6)

Remote control (option) (10.9) Report (option) (11.13)

Action assignment on remote terminals Report types Date/Time of creation Report channel assignments Sum scale Select the display language Date/Time to switch Temperature unit Time difference from GMT

Display language (10.10) Daylight savings time (10.14) Temperature (10.15) Time zone (10.16) Batch (option)

Application name (10.12) Use/Not use batch function Supervisor name (10.12) (10.13) Manager name (10.12) Batch number (10.12) Lot number (10.12) Auto increment of batch number (10.12) Switching batch name/time indication on memory summary (10.12)

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-13

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)

File management and data clearing

Operations related to the internal memory
Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Initialize settings (basic setting mode/setting mode) and clear measured/ computed data in the internal memory (9.8) Initialization of Clear measured/computed data in the settings/data clearing internal memory (9.7)

Management of files on the external storage media

Item File management Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Save setup data (9.1) Load setup data (9.1) Delete files (9.5) Format external storage media (9.5) Save setup data (9.1) Load setup data (9.1) Save measured data with key operation (9.2) Load/display display data (9.3) Load/display event data (9.4) List files (9.5) Delete files (9.5) Format external storage media (9.5)

The menu screen and items of the setting mode

The menu screen and items of the setting mode are as follows. Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections. [Math set1], [Math set2], [Math set3] are displayed when the computational function (/M1) is equipped. [Batch set] is displayed when the batch function (/BT1) is equipped.

To [Display] menu on the next page

To [Save/Load, Clear data] menu on the next page

3-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode) [Display] menu

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

[Save/Load, Clear data] menu

Soft key #1

Settings in the setting mode Title Item Range (5.1 to 5.7) Input type Measurement range Upper and lower limits of span Reference channel for difference computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Alarm type Alarm value Output relay On/Off Output relay number Tag name Filter time constant/Off (DX102/DX104) Number of samples for the moving average/Off (DX106/DX112) Trend display rate (7.3) Auto save interval (8.8) Assign an action to the USER key Message string Group name (7.6) Assign channels to groups (7.6) Trip line position, display color (7.7) Measurement channel display color Zone upper and lower limits Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph Bar graph base position Specify the scale display position for trends. Turn On/Off partial expanded display Position and boundary for the partial expanded display Trend display direction Bar graph display direction Background color (white or black) Trend line width Trip line width Grid for the trend display Group display switching interval (Scroll time) Scale digit

Alarm (6.2)

Tag (7.1) Filter (5.8) Moving average (5.8) Alarm delay time (6.3)

Trend/Save interval USER key (10.2)

#4 #5 #5 - #1

Message (7.5) Display Group set/Trip line

#5 - #2 #5 - #3

Color (7.8) Zone (7.9) Graph (7.10)

Partial (7.11)

#5 - #4

View (7.13)

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-15

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)
Soft key #5 - #4 Settings in the setting mode Title Item LCD (7.14) LCD brightness Turn On/Off the LCD backlight saver Transition time for the LCD backlight saver and conditions that restore the backlight Computation channel display color Zone upper and lower limits for the computation channels Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph displays for the computation channels Bar graph base positions for the computation channels Specify the scale display position for trends for the computation channels. Turn On/Off partial expanded display for the computation channels Position and boundary for the partial expanded display for the computation channels

#5 - #5 #5 - #6

Math (Color) (7.8) Zone (7.9) Graph (7.10)

Partial (7.11)

File (8.9)

Header string to be written to file Name of directory to which data are to be saved Range of data to be saved during manual save Daylight savings time (10.14) Summer/winter time On/Off Save setup data to the external storage medium (9.1) Load setup data from the external storage medium (9.1) Store measured data using key operation (9.2) Load/Display the display data on the external storage medium (9.3) Load/Display the event data on the external storage medium (9.4) List the files on the external storage medium (9.5) Delete files on the external storage medium (9.5) Format the external storage medium (9.5) Clear the measure/computed data in the internal memory (9.7) Date/time Computing equations, display span, and unit for computation channels Alarm type for the computation channels Alarm value for the computation channels Output relay On/Off for the computation channels Output relay number for the computation channels Constants (K01 to K12) Tag names of the computation channels Timer number used in TLOG, sum scale Turn On/Off the rolling average Sampling interval and the number of samples for the rolling average Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number Auto increment of batch number Switching batch name/time indication on memory summary

#7 #7 - #1 #7 - #2 #7 - #3 #7 - #4 #7 - #5 #7 - #6 #7 - #7 #7 - #8 #7 - #9 #8 #9

Save/Load, Clear data Save settings Load settings Save data Load display data Load event data File list Delete Format Clear data Time set (3.7) Math range (11.4) Math alarm (11.5)

#10 #11

Constant (11.6) Tag (7.1) TLOG (11.8) Rolling average (11.10)

Alarm delay time (6.3) #11 Batch set (10.12)

3-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)

The menu screen and items of the basic setting mode

The menu screen and items of the basic setting mode are as follows. Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections.

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

To [Save/Load, Initialize] menu below

[Save/Load, Initialize] menu

See the DX100/DX200 communication Interface User's Manual.

Soft key #1 Settings in the basic setting mode Title Item Alarm (6.4) Reflash alarm AND operation of alarm output relays Energize/de-energize alarm output relays Hold/non-hold alarm output relays Hold/non-hold alarm displays Rate-of-change alarm interval Turn On/Off the alarm hysteresis Integration time of the A/D converter Scan interval Burn out Off/Up/Down Reference junction compensation (select internal/ external, compensation voltage when using external) Temperature unit Save method to the external storage medium Type of data to be acquired Event data Sampling interval Mode (Free/Trigger/Rotate) Number of blocks (number of memory divisions) Data length (file size) Pretrigger position Type of trigger to use Measurement channels to acquire data/display the trend Computation channels to acquire data/display the trend Date and time to save data

A/D (5.9)

Temperature (10.15) #3 Memory (8.11)

Memory & trend (8.10)

Memory timeup (8.12)

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-17

3.5 Configuring the Functions (Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode)
Soft key #5 Settings in the basic setting mode Title Item Aux Switch between tag display and channel display (7.2) Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm (10.8) Set the displayed language (10.10) Use/Not use partial expanded display (7.12) Use/Not use batch function (for models with /BT1) (10.13) Time difference from GMT Use/Not use key lock Password Keys to lock, enable/disable the key lock Use/Not use key login Auto logout On/Off Use/Not use user ID User name User ID Password Allow/Prohibit basic setting mode Save setup data to the external storage medium (9.1) Load setup data from the external storage medium (9.1) Delete files on the external storage medium (9.5) Format the external storage medium (9.5) Initialize the setup data in the internal memory and clear measured/computed data (9.8) Action assignment on remote terminals Report types Date/Time of creation Report channel assignments Sum scale Timer mode (absolute time/relative time) Interval Reference time for the absolute timer Turn On/Off reset at each interval Turn On/Off data storage

Time zone(10.16) #6 Key lock (10.4)

Key login (10.6)

#8 #8 - #1 #8 - #2 #8 - #3 #8 - #4 #8 - #5 #9 #9 - #1 #9 - #2

Save/Load, Initialize Save settings Load settings Delete Format Initialize Option Remote (10.9) Report (11.13)

#9 - #3

Timer (TLOG) (11.9)

#10 #10 - #1 #10 - #2 #10 - #3 #10 - #4 #10 - #5 #10 - #6 #11 #11 - #1 #11 - #2 #11 - #3 #11 - #4 #11 - #5 #11 - #6 End *

Communications Ethernet (IP_Address)* Ethernet (DNS)* FTP transfer file* FTP connection* Control (login, timeout)* Serial/Memory out* Web, E-Mail Web* Basic E-Mail settings* Alarm E-Mail settings* Scheduled E-Mail settings* System E-Mail settings* Report E-Mail settings* End (3.6) Terminate operations in the basic setting mode

See the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E).

3-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.6

Common Key Operations

This section describes common key operations that are used often.
Soft keys Arrow keys

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations
DISP/
ENTER START STOP USER FUNC ESC MENU

DISP/ENTER key

Key operations in the basic setting mode

Procedure Entering the basic setting mode 1. Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode. 2. Hold the FUNC key down for three seconds to enter the basic setting mode. 3. Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens.

Note
Basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress or the storage medium is being accessed. Stop data acquisition and computation first before entering the basic setting mode. Changing and storing the data acquiring method in the basic setting mode ([#3 Memory] and [#4 Memory and trend]) clears the measured/computed data in the internal memory. Make sure to save the data to the external storage medium before entering the basic setting mode.

Common key operations in the basic setting mode are described.

Cursor position (bule)

Setting selections (selected using the soft keys)

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-19

3.6 Common Key Operations Selecting the parameter 1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The available selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen above the soft keys. 2. Select the parameter with the soft key. The box containing the parameter that was changed turns yellow. The cursor moves to the next parameter. To cancel the settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] and press the DISP/ENTER key. Confirming the settings 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key confirms the new settings. The parameter boxes return to a white color. The cursor moves to the first parameter on the page. Returning to the menu screen of the basic setting mode 1. Press the ESC key to return to the menu screen of the basic setting mode. Exiting the basic setting mode Carry out the following steps when the basic setting menu is displayed. 1. Press the [END] soft key. A confirmation window with a message [Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect?] appears. 2. Selecting [Yes] with the arrow key and pressing the DISP/ENTER key saves the new settings and returns to the operation mode. If you do not wish to save the new settings, select [No] with the arrow key and press the DISP/ENTER key to return to the operation mode. Selecting [Cancel] with the arrow key and pressing the DISP/ENTER key cancels the operation to exit the basic setting mode and returns to the basic setting mode menu. In this case, the setting changes made up to that point are held.

Key operations in the setting mode

Procedure Entering the setting mode 1. Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode. 2. Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens.

Cursor position (bule)

Setting selections (selected using the soft keys)

3-20

IM 04L01A01-01E

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

Entering Numbers
The operation to enter numbers is used such as when setting the date, time, or the display span of the input range.
Window for entering numbers

Select numbers

Procedure When the window used to enter the numbers appears, enter the value according to the following key operations. Left and right arrow keys: Selects the input position Up and down arrow keys: Enters the number

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-21

3.6 Common Key Operations

Entering characters
Used to set tag names, set message strings, set or enter passwords.
Window for entering characters

Select character

Insert/overwrite

Selected character type

Procedure When the window used to enter the string appears, enter the characters according to the following key operations. Left and right arrow keys: Selects the input position Up and down arrow key: Enters the character [A/a/1] soft key: Selects upper-case alphabet (A), lower-case alphabet (a), or numbers (1). The character type is switched in the following order each time the [A/a/1] soft key is pressed. The selected character type is displayed to the right down of the input window. Upper-case alphabet (A) lower-case alphabet (a) numbers (1) [DEL] soft key: Deletes the character at the cursor position. [BS] soft key: Deletes the character to the left of the cursor position. [INS] soft key: Selects insert or overwrite Insert and overwrite modes switch each time the [INS] soft key is pressed. The selected mode is displayed to the right down of the window.

Copying/clearing character strings

When entering a character string in the basic setting mode or the setting mode, you can copy and paste a preexisting string. You can also clear a selected string. The soft keys used to perform these operations appear only when these operations are appropriate. Procedure Copying a character strings To copy a character string to another box, follow the procedures below. 1. Move the cursor to the copy source string and press the [Copy] soft key. The [Paste] soft key appears. 2. Move the cursor to the copy destination box and press the [Paste] soft key. The character string is copied.

Clearing the character string 1. To clear the character string, press the [Clear] soft key.

3-22

IM 04L01A01-01E

3.7

Setting the Date and Time

Set the date and time. The set date and time can be specified whether it belong to the summer time or the winter time. The summer time and the winter time are defined by the daylight savings time adjustment function. For detail, see section 10.14, Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function.

3
Names of Parts/Run Mode/Common Operations

Procedure Press
MENU

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the window for the date and time setting, press the soft key

YY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS Enter the date and time. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays the number input keypad. Enter the date and time and press the [DISP/ENTER] key. For the procedures related to entering numbers, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key closes the window without setting the [DST] box. To cancel the setting and close the window, press the ESC key. DST (Daylight savings time adjustment function) [Summer] or [Winter] is displayed in the [DST] box corresponding to the date and time indicated in the [YY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS] box when the window is opened. Operate as follows to set [Summer] or [Winter] for the date and time entered. Pressing the right arrow key shifts the cursor to the [DST] box. Select [Summer] or [Winter] by the soft key and press the DISP/ENTER key. The window closes. To cancel the setting and close the window, press the ESC key before pressing the DISP/ENTER key.

IM 04L01A01-01E

3-23

Chapter 4 Switching Operation Screens

4.1

Operation Screens
This chapter describes the screen (operation screen) used to display the measured/ computed data.
Status display section

4
Data display section

Switching Operation Screens

Sub menu Screen menu Displayed by pressing the DISP/ENTER key

The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section. The operation screen includes trend, digital, bar graph, alarm summary, message summary, memory summary, report (option), and historical trend. The arrow keys and the DISP/ENTER key are used to switch the screen. Screen menu: Displayed when the DISP/ENTER key is pressed. Sub menu: Displayed when the right arrow key is pressed while the screen menu is displayed. The following operations are possible. For trend, digital, and bar graph screens, the displayed group can be automatically switched. Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm selected in the Alarm Summary occurred or the message selected in the Message Summary is written. Also displaying the historical trend selected in the Memory Summary. Switching to the trend or bar graph screen that contains the channel data pointed on the overview screen.

1 2 3 4

DISP/
ENTER

Four arrow keys

DISP/ENTER key

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-1

4.2

Explanation of the Status Display Section

The following information is displayed in the status display section during the operation mode and the setting mode. (The information is not displayed in the basic setting mode. [Setup Mode] is displayed instead).
5-1

1 2 3

10 9 11

6 6-1([Free] ode)

6-2([Trigger] or [Rotate] mode) 4 A B C D E F G

1. User name The user name is displayed when a user is logged in using the key login function. 2. Group name or screen name The name of the group or screen that is displayed in the data display section. [All] is displayed only during all channel display (see section 4.3). 3. Current date and time The current date and time are displayed. On models with the optional /BT1 batch function, the date and time and batch number and lot number are alternately displayed every 5 s when Use batch function (see section 10.13) is being set. 4. ON/OFF state of the measured/computed data acquisition. A and B are displayed alternately: Data acquisition in progress or waiting for the event data trigger. C: Data acquisition is suspended.

Note
For event data that starts acquiring data upon receiving a trigger, the indicator indicates that the data acquisition is in progress even when it is in the trigger wait state. The trigger wait state can be identified using the bar graph described in item 6.

4-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

4.2 Explanation of the Status Display Section 5. The usage condition of the display data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when display data acquisition is enabled. Bar graph Displays the used space of the display data storage area. Time period The remaining time for acquiring the display data. When the remaining time is less than one hour, the time is displayed in units of minutes.
Remaining time Greater than or equal to 100 days Greater than or equal to 100 hours, less than 100 days Unit % days Note Percentage of the remaining area with respect to the display data storage area unit less than one day is rounded off. unit less than one hour is rounded off. unit less than one minute is rounded off.

4
Switching Operation Screens

Greater than or equal to 60 minutes, hours less than 100 hours Less than 60 minutes minutes

n/16 The maximum number of display data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 (see section 8.2). 16 represents this value. n represents the number of files in the internal memory.

Note
The display data are overwritten for the following cases. Be aware of these cases, because data that are overwritten are lost. When the display data storage area in the internal memory becomes full. In such case, [Overwrite] is displayed in the status display section. When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16.

6. The usage condition of the event data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when event data acquisition is enabled. When the trigger mode is set to [Free] (see section 8.2) Bar graph Displays the used space of the event data storage area. Time period The remaining time for acquiring the event data. When the remaining time is less than one hour, the time is displayed in units of minutes. For the detail of the displayed unit, see Time period in item 5 above. n/16 The maximum number of event data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 (see section 8.2). 16 represents this value. n represents the number of files in the internal memory.

Note
The event data are overwritten for the following cases. Be aware of these cases, because data that are overwritten are lost. When the event data storage area in the internal memory becomes full. In such case, [Overwrite] is displayed in the status display section. When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-3

4.2 Explanation of the Status Display Section When the trigger mode is set to [Trigger] or [Rotate] (see section 8.2) Bar graph Displays the used space with respect to the specified memory length (data length, see section 8.11). When pretrigger is specified and the START key is pressed causing the DX100 to enter the trigger wait state, data of size equal to the pretrigger amount are acquired to the internal memory. The bar is displayed in orange. After acquiring data of size equal to the pretrigger, the length of the bar stays fixed. However, the relevant data are updated until the trigger is activated. When the trigger is activated, the bar turns green. Data are acquired to the internal memory after the pretrigger data. During the [Trigger] mode, [Full] is displayed when data acquisition to all blocks is complete. When [Full] is displayed, event data are no longer acquired even if the trigger condition is met. In this case, save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium. Block display When the event data storage area is divided into multiple blocks, the usage condition of the blocks are displayed. White block: No data Green block: Block containing data that were acquired to the internal memory after starting the current acquisition of event data. Gray block: Block containing data that were acquired before the current start operation. 7. The external storage medium condition D: The front cover is open. No display: No storage medium inserted. E and F displayed in order: Accessing the storage medium. F: Storage medium is idle (no access) G: The used space of the storage medium is indicated by the green level indicator in the icon. The colored section indicating the level turns red when the amount of free space on the storage medium falls below 10%.

Note
When the front cover is closed, the DX100 checks whether or not an external storage medium is inserted in the drive. Keep the front cover closed during operation in order to prevent adverse effects caused by foreign particles such as dust entering the DX100.

8. Computation icon (Option) Computation icon not displayed: No computation option or computation is suspended White computation icon: Computation in progress Yellow computation icon: Computation data dropout occurred

Note
Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval. The computation icon returns to the green icon by pressing FUNC [MathACK] soft key (see section 11.3). If a computation dropout occurs, make the scan interval longer (see section 5.9) or reduce the number of computation channels that are turned On (see section 11.4).

9. Key lock icon Key icon: Key lock ON No display: Key lock OFF 10. E-mail transmission function icon Displayed when the e-mail transmission function is started. 11. Alarm icon Displayed when any one of the alarms is occurring. For details, see section 6.1. 4-4
IM 04L01A01-01E

4.3

Using the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Screens

TREND, DIGITAL, BAR GRAPH
(Screen menu) (Sub menu)
(Operation screens) (Screen menu) (Sub menu)

Operation Flow Diagram

TREND

DISP

DIGITAL BAR GRAPH

Changing groups Group channels All channels Scale ON/OFF Numerical display ON/OFF Auto scroll ON/OFF
DISP

4
Switching Operation Screens

Changing groups Auto scroll ON/OFF

Changing groups
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

Switching screens
TREND DIGITAL BAR GRAPH

: Screen menu,

: Sub menu,

DISP

: DISP/ENTER key,

: Arrow keys

Procedure Displaying the screen 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. 2. Select [Trend], [Digital], or [Bar Graph] using the up and down arrow keys. 3. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key.

4. 5.

Select the group using the up and down arrow keys. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-5

4.3 Using the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Screens Displaying or clearing the scale on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. ([Trend] is selected.) 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select [SCALE ON]* or [SCALE OFF].*
* The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the scale. To close the menu without displaying/clearing the scale, press the ESC key.

Showing the all channel display/returning to the group display On the group display, the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed (see section 7.6). On the all channel display, the waveform of all channels that are set to display the trend (see section 8.10) are displayed over the current group display. See Explanation. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. ([Trend] is selected.) 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select [ALL CHANNEL]* or [GROUP CHANNEL] using the up and down arrow keys.
* The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

4-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

4.3 Using the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Screens Displaying or clearing the numerical display section on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. ([Trend] is selected.) 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select [DIGITAL ON]* or [DIGITAL OFF]* using the up and down keys.
* The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu.

4
Switching Operation Screens

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays/clears the numerical display section. To close the menu without displaying/clearing the numerical section, press the ESC key.

Changing the group on the display screen The following three methods are available. If all channel display is selected, waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend (see section 8.10) are displayed even when the group is changed. Changing the group on the display screen from the screen menu 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select the group using the up and down arrow keys. 4. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the selected group. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key. Changing the group on the display screen using the arrow keys 1. The displayed group changes in the order Group 1, Group 2, Group 3, Group 4, Group 1, and so on by pressing the right arrow key on the trend, digital, and bar graph screens. 2. By pressing the left arrow key, the displayed group changes in the reverse order. Automatically switch the displayed groups/stop the automatic switching The displayed group on the trend, digital, and bar graph screens can be automatically switched at the specified interval. In each screen, the displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4. You can select 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, or 1 min for the switch interval. For the procedure related to setting the switch interval, see section 7.13. 1. On the trend, digital, and bar graph screens, press the DISP/ENTER key to display the screen menu. 2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu. To close the sub menu that you opened, press the left arrow.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-7

4.3 Using the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Screens 3. To enable automatic switching, select [AUTO SCROLL ON]* using the up and down arrow keys. To disable automatic switching, select [AUTO SCROLL OFF]* using the up and down arrow keys.
* The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu.

Press the DISP/ENTER key to enable or disable the automatic switching of the displayed groups.

Switching the trend, digital, and bar graph screens The following two methods are available: Switch between trend, digital, and bar graph from the screen menu The operating procedure is the same as Displaying the screen on page 4-5. Switching the trend, digital, and bar graph screens using the arrow keys 1. The displayed screen changes in the order trend, digital, bar graph, trend, and so on by pressing the down arrow key on the trend, digital, and bar graph screens. 2. By pressing the up arrow key, the displayed screen changes in the reverse order.

Starting the waveform display of the trend screen/stopping the waveform update The operation procedure used to start the waveform display of the trend screen and the procedure used to stop the waveform update are the same as the operation used to start/stop the data acquisition to the internal memory. When the data are being acquired to the internal memory, the waveform is displayed. When it is stopped, the waveform is not updated. For the operating procedure, see sections 8.4 and 8.6.

4-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

4.3 Using the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Screens Explanation About group display and all channel display The group display of trend, digital, and bar graph and the all channel display of the trend are displayed in the following fashion (see table below). They depend on whether channels are assigned to the groups and whether the channels are set to display the trend and store the data.
Assigned to Trend Display/Data Numerical Display*3 Storage Specification*2 Bar Graph Groups*1 Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes No Display Display Don't display Don't display Trend's Waveform Display Group All Channels Display Don't display Don't display Don't display Display Don't display Display Don't display Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory Yes No Yes No

4
Switching Operation Screens

*1 Whether or not the channel is assigned to a group. *2 Whether or not the channel is set to display the trend and store the data. *3 Numerical display refers to the numerical display of trend, digital, and bar graph screens.

The numerical display of trend, digital, and bar graph screens and the bar graph display are updated at all times when they are displayed. It is not affected by whether or not the waveform of the trend screen is shown. The waveform of the trend screen is updated at the display update rate. For the procedure related to setting the display update rate, see section 7.3, Setting the Display Update Rate (Trend). For the procedure related to setting the channel to display the trend and to store the data, see section 8.10. For the procedure used to assign channels to groups, see section 7.6.

Alarm indication Alarms are checked at all times and displayed on the relevant displays regardless of whether or not the waveform of the trend screen is shown. Alarms are displayed using alarm type symbols. For details related to the alarms, see section 6.2.
Name Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Difference upper limit alarm Difference lower limit alarm Upper limit on rate-of-change alarm Lower limit on rate-of-change alarm Delay upper limit alarm Delay lower limit alarm Symbol H L h l R r T t

The display direction of the trend and the bar graph For the setting procedure of the display direction of the trend and the bar graph, see section 7.13.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-9

4.3 Using the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Screens Trend (Vertical Display)

Scale Display update rate(Time/div) Message Trip line Tag/Channel no. Measured/computed value Unit Alarm mark

Trend (Vertical Display, All Channel Display)

Waveform of all channels that are registered to display the trend Data of selected group

Digital

Tag/Channel no.

Measured/computed value Unit

Alarm mark

Bar Graph (Vertical Display)

Tag/Channel no. Alarm mark Upper limit of span Alarm point mark Bar graph Lower limit of span Unit

Measured/computed value

4-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

4.4

Using the Overview Screen

Operation Flow Diagram

(Screen menu) (Overview screen) (Screen menu)
DISP

(Sub menu)
DISP

DISP DISP

To TREND To BAR GRAPH

Channel selection

4
Switching Operation Screens

Cursor ON/OFF

: Screen menu,

: Sub menu,

DISP

: DISP/ENTER key,

: Arrow keys

Procedure Displaying the screen. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. 2. Select [Trend], [Digital], or [Bar Graph] using the up and down arrow keys. Select [Overview] using the up and down arrow keys. 3. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key. Displaying or clearing the cursor 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select [CURSOR ON]* or [CURSOR OFF].*
* The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays or clears the cursor. To close the menu without displaying/clearing the cursor, press the ESC key.

Switching to the trend or bar graph screen of the channel selected with the cursor 1. Move the cursor to select the channel using the arrow key. 2. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. 3. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 4. Select [JUMP TO TREND] or [JUMP TO BAR] using up and down arrow keys.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen. To close the menu without displaying the screen, press the ESC key.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-11

4.4 Using the Overview Screen Explanation Overview Screen

Tag/Channel no. Cursor

Alarm type Measured/ computed value

The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red. The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is not occurring is displayed in green.

4-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

4.5

Using the Information Screen (Alarm Summary, Message Summary, and Memory Summary)
(INFORMATION)
DISP

Operation Flow Diagram

(Screen rmenu) (Sub menu) (Screen menu) (Sub menu)

DISP

Information selection MEMORY SUMMARY

DISP DISP

To HISTORICAL TREND

4
Switching Operation Screens

To Report data When displaying Report data

: Screen menu,

: Sub menu,

DISP

: DISP/ENTER key,

: Arrow keys

Procedure Displaying the alarm summary, message summary, or memory summary 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. 2. Select [INFORMATION] using the up and down arrow keys. 3. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 4. Select [ALARM SUMMARY], [MESSAGE SUMMARY], or [MEMORY SUMMARY] using the up and down arrow keys.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen. To close the menu without displaying the screen, press the ESC key.

Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm occurred This operation is carried out on the Alarm Summary screen. 1. Select the alarm of which to display the trend using the up and down arrow keys.
Selected alarm

2. 3. 4.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. Select [JUMP TO HISTORY] using the up and down arrow keys.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-13

4.5 Using the Information Screen (Alarm Summary, Message Summary, and Memory Summary) 5. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the historical trend. The displayed data type is as follows: When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory: Display data When configured to acquire only the event data to the internal memory: Event data When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory: Data type selected in the memory summary To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

Recalling the historical trend at the time the message was written This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen. 1. Select the message of which to display the trend using the up and down arrow keys.
Selected message

2. 3. 4.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the historical trend. The displayed data type is as follows: When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory: Display data When configured to acquire only the event data to the internal memory: Event data When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory: Data type selected in the memory summary To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

Selecting the type of file (display data or event data) to display in the Memory Summary This operation is carried out on the Memory Summary screen. 1. Select display data or event data using the left and right arrow keys. The selected file type is indicated by a green circle to the left of [DISPLAY DATA] or [EVENT DATA]. Information about the selected file is displayed.

4-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

4.5 Using the Information Screen (Alarm Summary, Message Summary, and Memory Summary) Opening the display/event data file from Memory Summary (recalling the historical trend). 1. Select the file using the up and down arrow keys.

Selected file

2. 3.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key.

4
Switching Operation Screens

4. 5.

Select [JUMP TO HISTORY] using the up and down arrow keys. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the historical trend. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

Displaying the report data (option) This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen. For detail of the report data, see section 11.11. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select [REPORT DATA] using the up and down arrow keys.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the report data. To close the menu without displaying the report data, press the ESC key.

Changing the report data to be displayed The index number of the report data currently displayed/the number of report data sets in the internal memory is displayed in the [Index] column of the report data display. The most recent report data set is the one with the largest report data index number. When the report data are being displayed, the arrow keys can be pressed to switch the report being displayed. The operation when the four arrow keys are pressed are as follows: Up arrow key: Displays next report data. Down arrow key: Displays the previous report data. Right arrow key: Displays the report data that is 10 data sets after the report data being displayed. However, if there are less than 10 data sets, the most recent report data (with the maximum report data index number) are displayed. Left arrow key: Displays the report data that is 10 data sets before the report data being displayed. However, if there are less than 10 data sets, the oldest report data (report data index number 1) are displayed.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-15

4.5 Using the Information Screen (Alarm Summary, Message Summary, and Memory Summary) Explanation Alarm Summary
Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag/Channel no. Alarm No. (1,2,3,4)/Type (H,L,h,l,R,r,T,t) Date & Time (Alarm activated). Date & Time (Alarm released).

Cursor

Mark (see section 6.1)

Message Summary
Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was written

Cursor

The date and time when the message was entered and the user name (when using key login function) are displayed. Memory Summary
Number of data sets in the internal memory/The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the last data were acquired Status of alarm output relays Red: Activated Green: Released Selection of the file type to be displayed, display data files or event data files

Cursor

Date and time the data File status acquisition ended* Number of data in the file Date and time the data acquisition started
* On models with the optional /BT1 batch function, the batch number and lot number for each file can be displayed in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended.

4-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

4.5 Using the Information Screen (Alarm Summary, Message Summary, and Memory Summary) Report Data (/M1 option)
The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type

Date and time the report started Date and time the report was created

4
Switching Operation Screens
Status of data (see section 11.11)

Note
When new report data are created while displaying the report data, the screen is not updated. The most recent report data can be displayed by carrying out the following operations. Press the DISP/ENTER key and display the report data again from the menu, or Press the right arrow key.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-17

4.6

Using the Historical Trend

(HISTORICAL TREND) Moving the cursor

Operation Flow Diagram

(Screen menu)
DISP DISP DISP

(Screen menu)

(Sub menu)
DISP

Memory information Changing groups Group channels All channels Expanding/reducing the time axis

ALARM SUMMARY MESSAGE SUMMARY MEMORY SUMMARY Load display data Load event data

: Screen menu,

: Sub menu,

DISP

: DISP/ENTER key,

: Arrow keys

Procedure There are 6 methods in displaying the historical trend screen. From the alarm summary. See section 4.5. From the message summary. See section 4.5. From the memory summary. See section 4.5. From [Load display data]. See section 9.3. From [Load event data]. See section 9.4. Recall from the screen menu. Described in this section. Displaying the historical trend screen (from the screen menu) Of the data being sampled, the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER displays the screen menu. 2. Select [TREND HISTORY] using the up and down arrow keys. 3. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

Note
Even if the display data are not configured to be acquired to the internal memory (see section 8.11), the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend.

Showing the all channel display/returning to the group display On the group display, the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed (see section 7.6.) On the all channel display, the waveform of all channels that are set to display the trend (see section 8.10) are displayed over the current group display. See the explanation in section 4.3. This operation is carried out on the Historical Trend screen. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. ([TREND HISTORY] is selected.) 4-18
IM 04L01A01-01E

4.6 Using the Historical Trend 2. 3. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. Select [ALL CHANNEL] or [GROUP CHANNEL] using the up and down arrow keys.

4
4. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

Switching Operation Screens

Changing the group on the display screen If all channel display is selected, waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend (see section 8.10) are displayed even when the group is changed. 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. ([TREND HISTORY] is selected.) 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select the group using the up and down arrow keys. 4. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the selected group. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key. Expanding/ reducing the time axis The time axis can be expanded or reduced with respect to the display reference position. Display data: The time axis can be expanded to twice the trend display. It can also be reduced down to minimum 1/60th of the trend display. Event data: The time axis can be reduced down to minimum 1/60th. The factor by which the display can be expanded or reduced at one time by carrying out the procedures below varies depending on the display update rate for the display data, and the sampling interval for the event data being displayed. To expand or reduce the display further, repeat the procedures below 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. ([TREND HISTORY] is selected.) 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select [ZOOM +] or [ZOOM ] using the up and down arrow keys.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key expands or reduces the time axis. To close the menu without switching the screen, press the ESC key.

Scrolling the waveform Pressing the up or down arrow key (vertical display) or the left or right arrow key (horizontal display) while displaying the historical trend scrolls the waveform along the time axis.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-19

4.6 Using the Historical Trend Specifying the displayed position with the cursor The cursor position on the all data display locates the display reference position. Enclosed in parentheses are for the horizontal trend display. 1. Pressing the right (up) arrow key displays the all data display in the right (upper) section of the screen.

Display reference position Cursor All data display Date and time of the cursor position

2. 3.

Move the cursor to select the displayed position using the up and down (left and right) arrow keys. Pressing the left (down) arrow key switches to the historical trend screen with shifted waveforms.

Display the current trend data and the historical trend data Displays the current display data on the upper (right) half of the screen and the historical trend on the lower (left) half of the screen. 1. Pressing the left (down) arrow key displays the current trend and the historical trend. To return to the previous screen, press the up arrow key. Displaying the memory information 1. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the screen menu. ([TREND HISTORY] is selected.) 2. Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu. To close the sub menu, press the left arrow key. 3. Select [INFORMATION ON] using the up and down arrow keys.

Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays the window with the memory information. For models with the batch function (/BT1), batch number and lot number information of the display/event data (displayed as a historical trend) is also displayed.

5. 4-20

To clear the window, press the DISP/ENTER key or one of the arrow keys.
IM 04L01A01-01E

4.6 Using the Historical Trend Explanation Background color of the historical trend The background color of the historical trend is either black or white, opposite of the background color displayed for the current trend. Historical Trend
Time axis Expanding/Reducing rate Icons for switching screens Display reference position

4
Switching Operation Screens

Tag/Channel no. Unit Maximum and minimum values at the display reference position
*

Maximum and minimum values* among the data displayed

All digits may not be displayed because of the limitation of the display area.

Historical Trend (Displaying the current trend and the historical trend).

Current trend

Historical trend

Data from the current trend

Note
It is possible that not all of the digits of the maximum and minimum values of the computation channel data will be displayed.

IM 04L01A01-01E

4-21

Chapter 5 Measurement Channel Settings

5.1

Voltage Input Setting

To measure the DC voltage input or the DC current input using an external shunt resistor, follow the procedures below to set the voltage input. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

5
Measurement Channel Settings

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. 3. 4. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. Mode Set the mode to [Volt]. Range Set the input range. Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

Note
Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value.

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-1

5.1 Voltage Input Setting Explanation Measurable range The following table shows the mode, range, and measurable range.
Mode Volt Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V 6V 20 V 50 V Measurable Range 20.00 to 20.00 mV 60.00 to 60.00 mV 200.0 to 200.0 mV 2.000 to 2.000 V 6.000 to 6.000 V 20.00 to 20.00 V 50.00 to 50.00 V

DC current input An external shunt resistor is connected to the input terminal to convert a current signal to a voltage signal. The shunt resistors in the following table can be provided. A 250 shunt resistor, for example, is used to convert a 4 to 20 mA to a 1 to 5 V.
Name Shunt resistors (for screw terminals) Shunt resistors (for clamped terminals) Model Code 4159 20 4159 21 4159 22 4389 20 4389 21 4389 22 Specification 250 0.1% 100 0.1% 10 0.1% 250 0.1% 100 0.1% 10 0.1%

5-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

5.2

Thermocouple (TC)/Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Setting

To measure TC and RTD signals, follow the procedures below to set the input range. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

5
Measurement Channel Settings

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. 3. 4. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. Mode Set the mode to [TC] (thermocouple) or [RTD] (resistance temperature detector. Range Set the type of thermocouple or RTD. Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

Note
Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value.

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-3

5.2 Thermocouple (TC)/Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Setting Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Measurable range The following table shows the mode, range, and measurable range.
Mode TC Range R S B K E J T N W L U Pt100 JPt100 CU1 CU2 CU3 CU4 CU5 CU6 CU25 Measurable Range (C) 0.0 to 1760.0C 0.0 to 1760.0C 0.0 to 1820.0C 200.0 to 1370.0C 200.0 to 800.0C 200.0 to 1100.0C 200.0 to 400.0C 0.0 to 1300.0C 0.0 to 2315.0C 200.0 to 900.0C 200.0 to 400.0C 200.0 to 600.0C 200.0 to 550.0C 200.0 to 300.0C 200.0 to 300.0C 200.0 to 300.0C 200.0 to 300.0C 200.0 to 300.0C 200.0 to 300.0C 200.0 to 300.0C Measurable Range (F) 32 to 3200F 32 to 3200F 32 to 3308F 328 to 2498F 328.0 to 1472.0F 328.0 to 2012.0F 328.0 to 752.0F 32 to 2372F 32 to 4199F 328.0 to 1652.0F 328.0 to 752.0F 328.0 to 1112.0F 328.0 to 1022.0F 328.0 to 572.0F 328.0 to 572.0F 328.0 to 572.0F 328.0 to 572.0F 328.0 to 572.0F 328.0 to 572.0F 328.0 to 572.0F Note IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 IEC584, DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 W-5% Re/W-26% Re (Hoskins Mfg.Co.), ASTM E988 Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710 Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710 JIS C1604-1989, JIS C1606-1997, IEC751-1995, DIN IEC751-1996 JIS C1604-1989, JIS C1606-1989 CU10 GE1 (Cuid based on a particular manufacturer) CU10 L&N (Cuid based on a particular manufacturer) CU10 WEED (Cuid based on a particular manufacturer) CU10 BAILAY (Cuid based on a particular manufacturer) CU10 = 0.00392 at 20C CU10 = 0.00393 at 20C CU25 = 0.00425 at 0C

RTD

Cu1 to 6, and Cu25 are options.

For the setting procedure of the reference junction compensation and the burnout for the thermocouple input, see section 5.9.

5-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

5.3

Digital Input (DI) Setting

To measure the digital input, follow the procedures below to set the input range. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

5
Measurement Channel Settings

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. 3. 4. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. Mode Set the mode to [DI]. Range Select [Level] or [Cont] (Contact). Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter 0 or 1 and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

Note
Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value.

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-5

5.3 Digital Input (DI) Setting Explanation Measurable range The following table shows the mode, range, and measurable range.
Mode DI Range Level Contact Measurable Range 0: Less than 2.4 V 1: Greater than or equal to 2.4 V 0: Opened 1: Closed

5-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

5.4

Difference Computation (Delta) Setting.

To measure the difference between the inputs of two channels, follow the procedures below to set the input range. The difference computation channel displays the computed result of (the measured value of the difference computation channel) - (the measured value of the reference channel). Select the input type for the difference computation channel from DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD, and digital input. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

5
Measurement Channel Settings

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. 3. 4. First channel and last channel Set the channels that will measure the difference. Mode Set the mode to [Delta]. Type Select the input type from [Volt], [TC], [RTD], and [DI]. Range If the type is [Volt] enter the input range. If it is [TC] or [RTD] enter the type of TC or RTD. If it is [DI] enter [Level] or [Cont]. Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.
For TC or RTD input, the display span cannot exceed the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the input range. Example: For TC type L, the measurable range is 200.0 to 900.0C. The allowed range of display span: 1100.0 to 1100.0C. For DC voltage input, the display span cannot exceed the measurable range. The upper limit and the lower limit cannot be set to the same value.

Note

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-7

5.4 Difference Computation (Delta) Setting. 6. Ref. CH Set the reference channel (see Explanation).

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Measurable range The following table shows the mode, type, range, and measurable range.
Mode Delta Type Range Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V 6V 20 V 50 V R S B K E J T N W L U Pt100 JPt100 CU1 to 6 (CU10) CU25 Level Contact Measurable Range 20.00 to 20.00 mV 60.00 to 60.00 mV 200.0 to 200.0 mV 2.000 to 2.000 V 6.000 to 6.000 V 20.00 to 20.00 V 50.00 to 50.00 V 1760.0 to 1760.0C 1760.0 to 1760.0C 1820.0 to 1820.0C 1570.0 to 1570.0C 1000.0 to 1000.0C 1300.0 to 1300.0C 600.0 to 600.0C 1300.0 to 1300.0C 2315.0 to 2315.0C 1100.0 to 1100.0C 600.0 to 600.0C 800.0 to 800.0C 750.0 to 750.0C 500.0 to 500.0C (option) 500.0 to 500.0C (option) 1 to 1 1 to 1 3168 to 3168F 3168 to 3168F 3276 to 3276F 2826 to 2826F 1800.0 to 1800.0F 2340.0 to 2340.0F 1080.0 to 1080.0F 2340 to 2340F 4167 to 4167F 1980.0 to 1980.0F 1080.0 to 1080.0F 1440.0 to 1440.0F 1350.0 to 1350.0F 900.0 to 900.0F 900.0 to 900.0F

Delta

RTD

Delta

The relationship with the reference channel Even if the input type or the measurement range of the difference computation channel and the reference channel is not the same, the difference computation is performed according to the following rules. When the decimal position between the reference channel and the difference computation channel is different, the measured value of the reference channel is adjusted to the decimal position of the measured value of the difference computation channel to make the computation. Example: When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100.0, the computation result becomes 10.00 100.0 = 90.00. When the units for the reference channel and the difference computation channel are different, the measured value is not adjusted. Example: When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 V and the measured value of the reference channel is 5.00 mV, the computation result becomes 10.00 V 5.00 mV = 5.00 V. When the reference channel is set to [Scale] or [Sqrt], the computation uses the scaled values. 5-8
IM 04L01A01-01E

5.5

Scaling Setting
For DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD and digital input, the measured values can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed. Set the upper and lower limits of the display span, the upper and lower limits after scaling, and the unit. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

5
Measurement Channel Settings

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. Mode Set the mode to [Scale]. Type Select the input type from [Volt], [TC], [RTD], and [DI]. Range Select the input range using the soft keys according to the input type. Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

Note
Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value.

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-9

5.5 Scaling Setting 6. Upper and lower limits of scale Set the upper and lower limits of the scale. Enter a value in the allowed range using the same method as step 5. Allowed range: 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions: . . . . The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit setting.

Note
Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the same value. The DX100 converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits. In other words, conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5, and 100 if the scale setting is 5.0 to 5.0. The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is coarser than the value derived using a span of 100. Because the display becomes rough, set this value so that it is greater than 100.

Unit Set the unit. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a character string. Enter the unit (up to 6 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Measurable Range See sections listed below.
Mode Scale Type Volt TC RTD DI Range/Measurable Range See section 5.1, Voltage Input Setting. See section 5.2, Thermocouple (TC)/Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Setting. See section 5.2, Thermocouple (TC)/Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Setting. See section 5.3, Digital Input (DI) Setting.

5-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

5.6

Square Root Computation Setting

Computes the square root of the DC voltage input. The result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed. Set the upper and lower limits of the display span, the upper and lower limits after scaling, and the unit. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

5
Measurement Channel Settings

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 4

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. 3. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. Mode Set the mode to [Sqrt]. Range Select the input range from [20 mV], [60 mV], [200 mV], [2 V], [6 V], [20 V], and [50 V]. Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

Note
Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value.

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-11

5.6 Square Root Computation Setting 5. Upper and lower limits of scale Set the upper and lower limits of the scale. Enter a value in the allowed range using the same method as step 4. Allowed range: 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions: . . . . The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit setting.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [YES] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation For the range and measurable range, see section 5.1, Voltage Input Setting. Computing equation The DX100 uses the following square-root computation: Using the following definitions: Vmin: Lower limit of span Vmax: Upper limit of span Fmin: Lower limit of scale Fmax: Upper limit of scale Vx: Input voltage Fx: Scaling value
Fx = (F max Fmin ) Vx Vmin min V max V + F min

When the value inside the square root is negative, when Fmin < Fmax: , or when Fmin > Fmax: + is displayed.

5-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

5.7

Skip Setting
These channels will not be measured or displayed. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

5
Measurement Channel Settings

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. Mode Set the mode to [Skip].

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-13

5.8

Input Filter and Moving Average Setting

Set the input filter (for DX102/DX104, low pass filters) or the moving average of the input (for DX106/DX112).

To display the setting screen press the soft key

.
1

Input Filter Setting (for DX102/DX104) 2. Filter Select [Off] or set the time constant of the filter. Moving Average Setting (for DX106/DX112) 3. Moving Average - Count Select [Off] or set the number of data points for the moving average.

Note
Regardless of this setting, filter and moving average operations are not performed for the digital inputs (DI).

Moving Average

5-14

5.9

Setting the A/D Integration Time, Scan Interval, Burnout, and Reference Junction Compensation (Basic Setting Mode)
Set the integration time of the A/D converter, scan interval, thermocouple input burnout, and reference junction compensation (RJC).

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

5
Measurement Channel Settings

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3 4 5 6

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. Setting the integration time of the A/D converter 1. Integrate Select from [Auto], [50 Hz], [60 Hz], and [100 ms] using soft keys. DX102/DX104: Auto/50 Hz/60 Hz DX106/DX112: Auto/50 Hz/60 Hz/100 ms [Auto]: automatically switches 20/16.7 ms (fixed to 20 ms on DC power supply models) [50 Hz]: fixed to 20 ms [60 Hz]: fixed to 16.7 ms [100 ms]: fixed to 100 ms (the scan interval is 2 s) Setting the scan interval 2. Scan interval Input signals are scanned at every scan interval. For the models with computation function (/M1) , the computation carried out at every scan interval. DX102/DX104: 125 ms/250 ms DX106/DX112: 1 s/2 s (when the A/D integration time is 100 ms, 2 s only) Setting the thermocouple input burnout and setting the reference junction compensation This setting is void for all input settings other than the TC. 3. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels.

IM 04L01A01-01E

5-15

5.9 Setting the A/D Integration Time, Scan Interval, Burnout, and Reference Junction Compensation (Basic Setting Mode) 4. Burnout Select from [Off], [Up], and [Down]. [Off]: Disable the burnout function. [Up]: When the thermocouple burns out, the measured result is set to positive over range + . [Down]: When the thermocouple burns out, the measured result is set to negative over range . RJC Set [External] or [Internal]. [External]: Use the external RJC. [Internal]: Use the RJC of the DX100. Volt (V) If [External] is selected, set the reference junction compensation voltage to add to the input. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the voltage. Enter a value (20000 V to 20000 V, initial value is 0 V) and press the DISP/ ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation The integration time of the A/D converter The DX100 uses an A/D converter to convert the input signal to a digital signal. The A/D converter operates at an integral time of 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 20 ms (50 Hz), or 100 ms. By setting the integration time to match the frequency of the power supply being used, power supply frequency noise can be minimized. Burnout of Thermocouple Input When the alarm is set to detect positive or negative over range, the occurrence of burnout of thermocouple can be displayed as an alarm. Turn the burnout function OFF when connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices. Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input When using the reference junction compensation of the DX100, see Precautions to be taken while wiring in section 2.3, Input Signal Wiring. When using the external reference junction compensation, set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage. As in the example in the following figure, if the reference junction temperature for the external reference junction compensation is T0 C, set the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C reference for T0 C as the reference junction compensation voltage.
An example of External reference junction compensation DX100 External reference junction compensation (Maintain the junction between the thermocouple and the copper wire at T0 C) Copper wire Thermocouple

1 2 3 4

5-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

Chapter 6 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

6.1

Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay (Option)

This section describes the procedures to release the alarm indication and the output relay when the behavior of the indicator or the output relay is set to [hold]. The indicator or output relay condition varies depending on the timing at which the alarm release operation is carried out.

Procedure Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode. 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. 2. To release the alarm indication and the output relay, press the [Alarm ACK] soft key.

6
Acknowledging and Setting Alarms
Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out when [Alarm ACK] is assigned to the USER key. 1. To release the alarm indication and the output relay, press the USER key. Explanation The indications and output relays generated by all alarms are released. The release operation is void if the behavior of the indicator or the output relay is set to [non-hold]. The release operation can be executed via remote control (option) or via communications. Alarm indication The alarm condition can be confirmed with the alarm icon in the status display section and the alarm indication on the operation screen such as the trend display. The indicator pattern varies depending on the hold/non-hold setting. The alarm icon in the status display section
Alarm icon

Indicator Hold/Non-hold Non-hold Hold

Alarm Activated Released Activated Released

Alarm Indication Red icon No icon displayed Blinking red icon (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Blinking green icon (icon disappears with alarm ACK)

IM 04L01A01-01E

6-1

6.1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay (Option)

Non -hold Activated Alarm Released
Blinking red icon Blinking green icon

Hold Activated Released Red icon

Red icon

Blinking red icon

Indication No icon

No icon Alarm ACK Alarm ACK

Alarm indication in the trend display

Alarm type

Measured value Alarm mark

Indicator Hold/Non-Hold Non-hold

Alarm Activated Released

Alarm Indication Alarm mark, alarm type, measured values: All red Alarm mark: Green color Alarm type: Not displayed Measured value: Blue color Alarm mark: Blinks in red (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Alarm type, measured value: Displayed in red Alarm mark: Blinks in green (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Alarm type: Not displayed Measured value: Blue

Hold

Activated

Released

Alarm indication in the digital display

Measured value

Alarm mark

Indicator Hold/Non-Hold Non-hold

Alarm Activated Released

Alarm Indication Alarm mark, measured values: All red Alarm mark: Green Measured value: Blue Alarm mark: Blinks in red (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Measured value: Red Alarm mark: Blinks in green (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Measured value: Blue

Hold

Activated

Released

6-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

6.1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay (Option) Alarm indication in the bar graph display
Alarm mark

Alarm point mark

Measured value
Indicator Hold/Non-Hold Non-hold Alarm Activated Released Alarm Indication Alarm mark, alarm point mark, and measured values: All red Alarm mark: Green Alarm point mark: Green Measured value: Blue Alarm mark: Blinks in red (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Alarm point, measured values: Red Alarm mark: Blinks in green (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Alarm point mark: Green Measured value: Blue

Hold

Activated

6
Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

Released

Alarm indication in the overview display

Alarm type Tag/Channel no. Channel data display area Measured value

Indicator Hold/Non-Hold Non-hold

Alarm Activated

Alarm Indication Channel display area: Red Channel (tag), alarm type, and measured values: All white Channel display area: Green Channel (tag) and measured value: Black Alarm type: Not displayed Channel display area: Red Channel (tag): Blinks in white (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Alarm type and measured value: White Channel display area: Green Channel (tag): Blinks in black (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Alarm type: Not displayed Measured value: Black

Released

Hold

Activated

Released

IM 04L01A01-01E

6-3

6.1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay (Option) Alarm Summary Display

Mark

Alarm Information

Indicator Hold/Non-Hold Non-hold

Alarm Activated Released

Alarm Indication Displays alarm information Mark: Red Mark: Green Displays alarm information Mark: Blinks in red (Stops blinking with alarm ACK) Mark: Blinks in green (Stops blinking with alarm ACK)

Hold

Activated

Released

Alarm output relay (option)

Relay Hold/Non-Hold Non-hold Hold Alarm Activated Released Activated Released Alarm Indication Active Idle Active (temporarily suspend with alarm ACK) Idle with alarm ACK

Non-hold Activated Alarm Released Activated Alarm output relay Released

Hold Alarm ACK

Alarm ACK

Note
When the basic setting mode is entered, the activated/released condition of the previous alarm output relay is held. (Alarm detection is not carried out in the basic setting mode, and you cannot release the alarm output relay.)

6-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

6.2

Alarm Setting
This section describes the procedures related to setting the alarm specification on each channel. The auxiliary alarm function are set in the basic setting mode. (See section 6.4)

Note
Set the measurement range before setting the alarm. All of the alarm settings of a channel are canceled in the following cases: When the input type is changed (Volt, TC, etc.). When the input range is changed. When the upper and lower limits of the span or scale are changed on channels that are set to scaling or square root computation (including changes in the decimal point position). If the range setting is set to [Skip], alarm setting is not possible. (The alarm setting boxes are grayed in this case.)

6
Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. Once new settings are confirmed, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. (For the channels set here, [Range] is also simultaneously set.) On/Off When the alarm is turned on, [Type], [Value], and [Relay On/Off] are displayed. Type Set the alarm type. For the alarm types, see Explanation. 6-5

2. 3.

IM 04L01A01-01E

6.2 Alarm Setting

Note
If you select delay alarm (T or t) for the alarm type, you must set the alarm delay period. See section 6.3.

5.*

6.*

Value Enter the value at which the alarm is activated. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. Relay On/Off Set whether or not to activate the output relay (On/Off). When turned ON, the output relay number box appears. Number Set the output relay number. For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position, see section 2.4, Alarm Output Wiring (/AR1, /AR2, /A3 Option).
* When the alarm output relay option is not installed, these settings are void.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Alarm type The following eight types of alarm type are available.
Name Upper limit alarm Symbol H Description An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value. An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to below the alarm value. An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value. An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value. The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked. An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value (see section 6.4). The time interval is specified using a number of measurements.

Lower limit alarm

Difference upper limit alarm*1

Difference lower limit alarm*1

Upper limit on rate-of-change alarm*2

6-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

6.2 Alarm Setting

Lower limit on rate-of-change alarm*2 r The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked. An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value (see section 6.4). The time interval is specified using a number of measurements. An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period (delay period, see section 6.3, Setting the Alarm Delay Period.). An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period (delay period, see section 6.3, Setting the Alarm Delay Period.).

Delay upper limit alarm

Delay lower limit alarm

*1 *2

Can be specified only on difference computation channels. Can be specified only on measurement channels.

6
Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

IM 04L01A01-01E

6-7

6.3

Setting the Alarm Delay Period

Set the alarm delay period for delay upper/lower limit alarm.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. Once new settings are confirmed, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel (option) Twice press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

#11

.
1

2 2

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. (For the channels set here, [Tag], [Moving Average] or [Filter] for measurement channels, and [Tag], [TLOG] or [Rolling Average] for computation channels are also simultaneously set.) Alarm delay period Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the alarm delay period. Enter an integer value in the range 1 to 3600 s and press the DISP/ ENTER key. Procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. If the scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay period, it will operate at the specified period + 1 s. Example: If the alarm delay period is set to 5 s, it will operate at 6 s.

6.3 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function (Basic Setting Mode) Explanation Operation of the delay upper/lower limit alarm For the operation of the delay upper/lower limit alarm, see section 1.5. This section will describe special cases of its operation. When delay alarm is set on a computation channel and the computation is stopped If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting, the alarm is turned ON after the specified period (delay period) elapses.
Computation stopped

Alarm value Computed value T Alarm turns ON

6
Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

Delay alarm when a power failure occurs Alarm detection is reset upon a power failure. It restarts the operation after the power recovers.
Measured/computed data

Alarm value T Alarm : Off On T Off On Off T On Power failure occurence/recovery Off

Power failure occurence/recovery

Operation when the alarm setting is changed If a new delay alarm is set The alarm detection starts at that time. It is unaffected by the conditions existing before the alarm is set. If the alarm setting of a preexisting delay alarm is changed If an alarm is not occurring at the time of the change, alarm detection starts at the new setting. If an alarm is occurring at the time of the change and the alarm type is set to delay upper limit alarm, the alarm continues as long as the input is above or equal to the new setting. If the input is below the new setting, the alarm turns OFF. If the alarm type is set to delay lower limit alarm, the alarm continues as long as the input is below or equal to the new setting. If the input is above the new setting, the alarm turns OFF.

IM 04L01A01-01E

6-9

6.4

Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function (Basic Setting Mode)

These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. Once new settings are confirmed, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

Procedure

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. Setting reflash 1.* Reflash Select [On] or [Off]. [On]: Use reflash function [Off]: Not use reflash function Setting the AND/OR logic of output relays 2.* Relay - AND Select the relays that are to use the AND logic. Set the last relay that is to use the AND logic. The relays beyond this relay will use the OR logic. Select from [None], [I01] (I01 only), [I01 - I02] (I01 and I02), ... , and [I01 - I06] (I01 to I06). The setting is valid for relays specified by options. Setting the output relay operation (energize/de-energize) 3.* Relay - Action Select energize or de-energize using the soft key. Setting the output relay operation (hold/non-hold) 4.* Relay - Behavior Select hold or non-hold using the soft key.
* When the alarm output relay option is not installed, these settings are void.

Setting the alarm indication operation (hold/non-hold) 5. Indicator Select hold or non-hold using the soft key.

6-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

6.4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function (Basic Setting Mode) Setting the interval for the rate-of-change alarm 6. Rate of change - Increase, Rate of change - Decrease The time interval is specified using a number of sampling times (number of measurements, see section 1.5). Select the limit from 1 to 15 using the soft key. Setting the alarm hysteresis 7. Hysteresis Select [On] or [Off] using the soft key. [On]: The hysteresis is 0.5% of the display span or scale. [Off]: No hysteresis Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key.

6
Explanation

Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

Alarm output relay (option) A contact signal is generated when an alarm occurs. The number of output relays is 2 to 6 points (depends on the specification). Reflash When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay, this function notifies the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation. When a succeeding alarm occurs, the output relay temporarily turns OFF. The reflash alarm function is set only to output relays I01, I02, and I03. The initial setting is [Off] (Not use Reflash).
(assuming I01 is assigned) Channel 1 (assuming I01 is assigned) Alarm status Channel 2 (assuming I01 is assigned) Channel 3

Alarm relay status (reflash = on)

Output relay (option) Approx. 500 ms

(I01 output)

Approx. 500 ms (I01 output)

Alarm relay status (reflash = off)

Output relay (option)

Note
If the reflash alarm is specified, relays I01 to I03 are used as reflash relays regardless of the number of alarm output relays. Therefore, relays I01 to I03 operate as OR logic (see AND/ OR of alarm output relays) and non-hold (see Hold/Non-hold operation of the alarm output relay) regardless of the settings made in AND/OR of alarm output relays and Hold/Nonhold operation of the alarm output relay.

IM 04L01A01-01E

6-11

6.4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function (Basic Setting Mode) AND/OR of alarm output relays When sharing an alarm output relay among multiple alarms, you can select from the following conditions that cause the alarm output relay to be activated. AND: Activated when all alarms are being generated simultaneously. OR: Activated when at least one of the alarms is being generated. Specify the alarm output relay to operate under the AND condition as in [I01 (first relay) to Ixx (where xx is the relay number)]. The initial setting is set to [None].
Channel 1 Alarm status Channel 2

AND Alarm relay status OR

Note
If the reflash alarm is turned ON, I01 to I03 operates as reflash alarms. They are fixed to OR logic operation. Specifying AND produces no effect.

Energize/De-energize operation of the alarm output relay You can select whether to energize or de-energize the alarm output relay when the alarm occurs. By selecting de-energize, the alarm output relay will operate in the same manner as when the alarm occurs when the power supply is disrupted. Energize or deenergize applies to all alarm output relays. The initial setting is set to [energize].

Energize

De-energize

C Alarm off

C Alarm on

Power failure

NO = Normally opened ; C = common ; and NC = normally closed

6-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

6.4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function (Basic Setting Mode) Hold/Non-hold operation of the alarm output relay When the alarm changes from the activated state to the released state, you can select to Turn OFF the output relay in sync with the alarm release (non-hold), or Hold the output relay ON till an alarm acknowledge operation is executed (hold) This applies to all alarm output relays. The initial setting is set to [Nonhold]. When set to non-hold
Alarm on Alarm off * Shows the status of the normally-opened (NO) contact of the relay. The status is the reverse for the normally-closed contact.

Relay output

on*

Relay output off*

When set to hold

Alarm on

6
Acknowledging and Setting Alarms

Alarm off Alarm ACK Relay output on* Relay output off*

Note
If the reflash alarm is turned ON, I01 to I03 are set to non-hold. Specifying hold produces no effect.

Hold/Non-hold of the alarm indicator When the alarm changes from the activated state to the released state, you can select to Release the alarm indicator in sync with the alarm release (non-hold), or Hold the alarm indicator till an alarm acknowledge operation is executed (hold) The initial setting is [Nonhold]. For details regarding the alarm indicator, see section 6.1.

IM 04L01A01-01E

6-13

Chapter 7 Setting and Operating the Display

7.1

Setting Tag Names

Tag names can be displayed in place of channel numbers on the operation screen (trend screen, digital screen, etc.). The basic setting mode is used to select whether tag names or channel numbers are displayed (see section 7.2). Tag names are saved to the file along with the data.

Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel (option) Twice press the soft key

7
Setting and Operating the Display

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

#11

.
1

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. (For the measurement channels set here, [Moving Average] or [Filter], and [Alarm Delay Time] are also simultaneously set. For the computation channels, [TLOG], [Rolling Average], and [Alarm Delay Time] are also simultaneously set.) Tag Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the tag name. Enter the tag name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22.

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.2

Selecting Tag Display or Channel Number Display (Basic Setting Mode)

Select whether tag names or channel numbers are to be displayed on the operation screen (trend screen, digital screen, etc.). The initial setting is channel number display. Tag names are set in the setting mode.

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Tag/Channel Select [Tag] or [Channel]. [Tag]: Display tag names. [Channel]: Display channel numbers.

Note
If a channel is set to display the tag, but the tag name is not entered, the channel will display the channel number.

7-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.3

Setting the Display Update Rate (Trend)

The time period corresponding to 1 division on the time axis on the trend display is specified. The time axis on the trend display is determined by the display update rate. The sampling interval of the display data is also determined by the display update rate. The display update rate cannot be changed while data sampling is in progress.

To display the setting screen press the soft key

7
Setting and Operating the Display

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Time/div (Display update rate) Select the display update rate from 15 s*, 30 s*, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, and 10 h.
* for DX102 and DX104 only

Note
When [Auto save] is set for saving data to the external storage medium, the [Auto save interval] box is displayed under [Time/div]. [Auto save interval] is the interval at which the display data residing in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium. The selectable values for [Auto save interval] vary depending on the [Time/div] setting. For the setting procedure, see section 8.8.

Explanation The display data sampling interval and the speed of movement of waveforms along the time axis The following table shows the display rate, display data sampling interval, and the speed of movement of waveforms along the time axis
Display update rate (/DIV) Display data sampling interval (s) 15 s* 30 s* 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 2 h 4 h 10 h 0.5 1 2 4 297 10 119 20 59 40 30 60 20 120 240 480 1200 10 5 2.5 1.0

Speed of movement 2376 1188 594 of waveforms (Estimated value, mm/h) *

IM 04L01A01-01E

for DX102 and DX104 only

7-3

7.4

Using Message Strings (Trend)

Arbitrary character strings can be registered. They can be displayed on the trend display and stored along with the display/event data. Number of messages: 8 Number of characters: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters A list of messages can be displayed on the message summary screen. See section 4.5. For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), messages 1, 2, and 3 can be altered from the operation screen to be used.

Note
When data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped, messages cannot be displayed or written.

For Models without the Batch Function (/BT1 Option)

Procedure Displaying a message on the trend screen/Writing a message to the internal memory Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode. 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft keys. 2. Press the [Message] soft key. Eight soft keys for the messages and a window containing a list of messages are displayed.

Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to display. A message mark, time, and the message are displayed on the trend screen.

Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out when one of [Message1] to [Message8] is assigned to the USER key. 1. Press the USER key, to display a message on the trend display and write a message to the internal memory.

7-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.4 Using Message Strings (Trend)

For Models with the Batch Function (/BT1 Option)

Procedure Displaying a message on the trend screen/Writing a message to the internal memory/Changing message strings Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode. 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft keys. 2. Press the [Message] soft key. [Write] and [Set] soft keys are displayed.

7
Displaying a message on the trend screen/Writing a message to the internal memory 3. Press the [Write] soft key. Eight soft keys for the messages and a window containing a list of messages are displayed. 4. Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to display. A message mark, time, and the message are displayed on the trend display. Changing message strings 3. Press the [Set] soft key. The [Message1] to [Message3] soft keys and a window containing a list of messages are displayed. 4. Press the soft key of the message to be changed. A window to enter a message string appears.

Setting and Operating the Display

Enter the message string (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. The window used to enter the message string disappears. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Character on page 3-22. Press the FUNC key or the ESC key to erase the window.

Operation using the USER key The operating procedure is the same as for models without the batch function (/BT1 option)

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-5

7.4 Using Message Strings (Trend) Explanation Example of Message Display

Message mark Time

Message

Displayed colors of the message The message colors on the trend screen are shown below. They cannot be changed.
Message Number 1 Displayed Color 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow-green Light blue

7-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.5

Setting the Message String (Trend)

These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Procedure

To display the setting screen press the soft key

7
Setting and Operating the Display

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Characters Move the cursor to the desired message number. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the message string. Enter the message string (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Character on page 3-22.

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-7

7.6

Setting Groups
Trend, digital, and bar graph screens are displayed in groups. Channels can be assigned to each group and the group name can be registered. Number of groups: 4 Number of channels: Up to 6 channels/group As for setting the channels to display the trend, see section 8.10.

Press the soft key Press the soft key

Next 1/3
#5

. .

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. Group number Select the group number (1 to 4). Group name Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the group name. Enter the group name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. CH set Assign measurement/computation channels to groups. Enter the channel number according to the following rules using the same method as step 2. Enter the channel number using two digits. Separate each channel with a period. Consecutive channels can be specified using a hyphen. Example: To set CH1, CH3, CH5 to CH8 to a particular group, 01.03.0508 is entered.

7-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.6 Setting Groups

Note
The channels are displayed in the order they are specified on the trend, digital, bar graph screens. One channel can be assigned to multiple groups. A channel cannot be assigned twice in the same group.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Initial settings of the groups Group Name Group 1: GROUP 1 Group 2: GROUP 2 Group 3: GROUP 3 Group 4: GROUP 4 The initial value varies depending on the number of installed channels.

7
Setting and Operating the Display
DX104 01.02.03.04 01.02.03.04 01.02.03.04 01.02.03.04 DX106 01.02.03.04.05.06 01.02.03.04.05.06 01.02.03.04.05.06 01.02.03.04.05.06 DX112 01.02.03.04.05.06 07.08.09.10.11.12 01.02.03.04.05.06 07.08.09.10.11.12

Group Number DX102 1 2 3 4 01.02 01.02 01.02 01.02

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-9

7.7

Setting the Trip Line (Trend)

A line to indicate a particular value of interest (trip line) can be displayed on the trend display. The maximum number of trip lines that can be displayed in one group is four. The position of the trip line is specified as a percentage of the display span. You can specify the thickness of the trip lines. See section 7.13.

Press the soft key Press the soft key

Next 1/3 #5

. .

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. Group number Select the group number (1 to 4). On/Off Move the cursor to the desired trip line and press the [On] soft key. [On]: Use the trip line. The [Position] and [Color] boxes appear. [Off]: Not use the trip line. Position (display position) Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the display position. Enter a numerical value (1 to 100) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. Color Select the color of the trip line from 16 colors.
IM 04L01A01-01E

7-10

7.7 Setting the Trip Line (Trend) Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Initial colors of the trip lines Trip line No.1: Red Trip line No.2: Green Trip line No.3: Blue Trip line No.4: Yellow Available colors for the trip line Red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, limes, cyan, dark blue, yellow, silver, and purple

7
Setting and Operating the Display

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-11

7.8

Setting the Channel Display Colors (Trend, Bar Graph)

Procedure

Press the soft key Press the soft key

Next 1/3

Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel (option) To display the setting screen press the soft key
1

2 3 4

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-15

7.10 Setting the Scale Division, Bar Graph Base Position (Bar Graph), and Scale Position (Trend) Setting the number of divisions for the scale 2. Division This is the number of scale divisions. The scale is equally divided and scale marks are displayed at the divided position. Select the number of divisions from [4] to [12] and [C10]. [C10]: The scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks, and scale values are indicated at 0, 30, 50, 70, and 100% positions. For bar graph display: Only the main scale marks are displayed. For trend display: See Explanation. Setting the bar graphs base position 3. Bar graph (base position of the bar graph) Select normal or center.

Note
When the bar graph is displayed vertically (see section 7.13), the base position is fixed to [Normal] (the bottom of the bar graph is the base position).

Setting the scale position on the trend screen 4. Scale position The [Scale position] is used to set the scale display position for each channel when the scale display is turned [On] (see section 4.3) on the trend screen. Select the position from [1] to [6]. Select [Off] for channels without scale.

Note
The scale for the channels that are assigned to the group in the trend screen are displayed. The larger the number of scales to be displayed, less amount of area there is to display the waveform.

7-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.10 Setting the Scale Division, Bar Graph Base Position (Bar Graph), and Scale Position (Trend) Explanation

Scale Specifications
Scale display position On the trend screen, the scale for the channels that are assigned to groups can be displayed in 6 different positions (see the figure below). During trend vertical display (see page 7-19 for horizontal display) The scale display position is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 from the top.
4 scale division sample 5 scale division sample 6 scale division sample 7 scale division sample 8 scale division sample 9 scale division sample

10 scale division sample 11 scale division sample 12 scale division sample C10 scale division sample

7
Setting and Operating the Display

The scale is divided into 4 to 12 sections as shown in the figure above. If the scales for two or more channels are specified to the same position, the scale for the channel that was assigned first to the group is displayed. Example 1: When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order: [03.02.01.05], and the scale display positions for channels 3, 2, 1, and 5 are all set to [1] The scale for channel 3 is displayed at position 1. Vacant positions in between scale assigned positions are void. The scales are displayed close together from the display position 1. Example 2: When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order: [01.02.03.05], and the scale display position for channels 1, 2, 3, and 5 are set to positions 1, 3, 5, and 6, respectively The scales for the channels are actually displayed at positions 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. If the scale display position is set to [Off], the scale is not displayed. During trend horizontal display The scale display position is 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 from the left.

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-17

7.10 Setting the Scale Division, Bar Graph Base Position (Bar Graph), and Scale Position (Trend) Scale marks The scale can be divided into 4 to 12 sections using the main scale marks. When the scale is divided into 4 or 5 section, the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 10 sections using small and medium marks. When the scale is divided into 6 to 12 sections, the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 5 sections using small marks. However, small marks are not displayed for the following cases: When the measurement/computation range resolution is smaller than the total number of sections created by small marks. When zone display is used When partial expanded display is used Scale values The scale values are displayed at all main scale marks when the scale is divided into 4 to 7 (4 to 6 for trend vertical display) sections using the main scale marks. When the scale is divided into 8 to 12 (7 to 12 for trend vertical display) sections, the scale values are displayed at every other main scale mark. In addition, the upper or lower limit of the scale is displayed at the end of the scale. Rule 1 Up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign can be displayed for the scale values. Rule 2 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is less than or equal to one digit, the value is displayed as . or 0. . Example 1: If the scale is set to 0.05 to 0.5, the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0.0 to 0.5. Example 2: If the scale is set to 0.005 to 0.05, the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 0.0 to 0.0. Rule 3 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is two digits or three digits, the value is displayed with the decimal fraction is discarded. Example 3: If the scale is set to 0.1 to 100.0, the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 to 100. Rule 4 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is greater than or equal to four digits, a three-digit mantissa and exponent are displayed (10 or 102, for example). Example 4: If the scale is set to 10 to 2000, the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 0 to 200 10. The number of digits of the scale values can be increased by one digit within Rule 1. For the procedure, see section 7.13. Consider the case when the scale marks are between 49.0 and 51.0 using [C10] division. Normally the decimals of the scale values are truncated according to Rule 3. However, if the number of digits is increased by one, the values are displayed as follows:

7-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.10 Setting the Scale Division, Bar Graph Base Position (Bar Graph), and Scale Position (Trend) Unit The unit is displayed near the center of the scale. When the partial expanded display is used, the position will be shifted. When the trend is displayed horizontally, the number of characters that can be displayed is up to 3. If the [Scale digit] is set to [Fine], up to 4 characters can be displayed.

Bar base position

Bar base position: normal

Bar base position: center The base position is at the center (50%) of the display span.

7
Setting and Operating the Display

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-19

7.11 Using Partial Expanded Display (Trend)

By compressing a section of the display scale of the measured/computed data, the remaining section of the display is expanded. For detail, see section 1.3. To use the partial expanded display, first, set the partial expanded display to [Use] in the basic setting mode. This will display a partial expanded display setting box in the setting mode (see section 7.12). Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press the soft key

Next 1/3

. .

Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel (option) To display the setting screen press the soft key
1

#3 #6

2 3 4

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. (For the channels set here, [Zone] and [Graph] are also simultaneously set.) On/Off When [On] is selected, the [Expand] and [Boundary] boxes are displayed. [On]: Use the partial expanded display. [Off]: Not use the partial expanded display. Expand (Boundary displacement position) Set the position to which a particular value (the boundary, see step 4) in the display span is to be moved as a percentage of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter the position and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. The range for the position: 1 to 99
IM 04L01A01-01E

7-20

7.11 Using Partial Expanded Display (Trend)

Boundary This is a value within the display span. By moving the value within the display span to another position (see step 3), the area on either side of the boundary is expanded or compressed. Enter the boundary using the same method as step 3. The range for the boundary: The minimum value of the span +1 digit to the maximum value of the span 1 digit (when the range is not set to scaling) The minimum value of the scale +1 digit to the maximum value of the scale 1 digit (when the range is set to scaling).

Note
The partial expanded display is turned OFF for all channels if the partial expanded display setting (use/not use) in the basic setting mode is changed and stored. When the range setting of the channel is set to [Skip] or when the span width is less than or equal to 1 digit, the partial expanded display cannot be specified. (The box is grayed in this case.)

7
Setting and Operating the Display

IM 04L01A01-01E

7-21

7.12 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expanded Display (Basic Setting Mode)
Set whether or not to use the partial expanded display. The initial setting is [Not] (disabled). The display specifications of the partial expanded display are set in the setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Partial Select [Use] or [Not]. [Use]: Partial expanded display can be set in the setting mode. [Not]: Partial expanded display cannot be set.

7-22

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.13 Setting the Display Direction, Background Color, Waveform Line Width, Trip Line Width, Grid, Scroll Time, and Scale digit
The display direction of the trend and bar graph can be set to horizontal or vertical. The background color used in the trend, digital, bar graph, and information screens can be set to white or black (common to all screens). The line width of the waveform can be selected as 1, 2, or 3 dots. The line width of the trip line can be selected as 1, 2, or 3 dots. The grid lines can be displayed on the trends waveform display area by dividing the display span into 4 to 12 sections. The interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched on the trend, digital, and bar graph screens can be specified. The displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4. You can increase the number of digits of the scale values by one digit on the trend display. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

7
Setting and Operating the Display

Press the soft key Press the soft key

Next 1/3
#5

. .

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. Set the display direction of the trend 1. Direction - Trend Select [Horizontal], [Vertical], or [Horizon 2]. Set the display direction of the bar graph 2. Direction - Bar graph Select [Horizontal] or [Vertical].
IM 04L01A01-01E

7-23

7.13 Setting the Display Direction, Background Color, Waveform Line Width, Trip Line Width, Grid, Scroll Time, and Scale digit Set the background color 3. Background Select white or black.

Note
The background color of the historical trend is opposite that of the trend display.

Setting the line width of the waveform 4. Trend line Select the width of the waveform line as [1], [2], or [3] dots. Setting the width of the trip line 5. Trip line Select the width of the trip line as [1], [2], or [3] dots. Setting the number of grids on the waveform display area 6. Grid Select the number of grids from [4] to [12], or [Auto]. [Auto]: Display the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first assigned channel of the group. Setting the interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched 7. Scroll time Select the interval from [5 s], [10 s], [20 s], [30 s], and [1 min]. Setting the number of displayed digits of the scale value 8. Scale digit [Normal]: See the explanation given in Scale values in section 7.10. [Fine]: The number of displayed digits of the scale value is increased by one. See the explanation given in Scale values in section 7.10. Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Grid on the waveform display area

Grid(The number of grid is 10 in this example)

7-24

IM 04L01A01-01E

7.14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function
There are eight screen brightness settings which can be selected (1 to 8). The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there has been no key operation for a certain amount of time. The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence. The screen saver is initially disabled. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

7
Next 1/3
#5
. .

Press the soft key Press the soft key

Setting and Operating the Display

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3 4

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. Setting the brightness of the screen 1. Brightness Select from 1 to 8. A higher number corresponds to a brighter screen setting. Setting the backlight saver 2. Saver When [On] is selected, [Saver time] and [Restore] boxes are displayed. 3. Saver time Select the time from 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, and 1 hour. If the specified time elapses without any key operation, the LCD backlight is automatically dimmed. 4. Restore Select [Key] or [Key + Alm] (Key + Alarm). [Key]: The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation. [Key + Alm]: The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence. Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key.
IM 04L01A01-01E

7-25

Chapter 8 Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

8.1

Data Types to be Acquired and Saved

Data type The types and the contents of the data that are acquired are as follows. Beside those data listed below, the setup data (see section 9.1) and the screen image data (see section 9.6) can be saved to the external storage medium.
Type Display data Content Event data Waveform data that are used to display trends on the LCD screen. The maximum and minimum values from measured/computed data within the sampling intervals are held. A header string can be written into the display data file (a character string that is common to all data files). Alarm and message information is held. Data format: Binary format The instantaneous values of the measured/computed data are acquired at the specified sampling interval. There is a mode in which the data acquisition is started when a trigger occurs or another mode in which the data acquisition is started when the START key is pressed. The header string can be written into the event data file (a character string that is common to all data files). Alarm and message information is held. Data format: Binary format Every time a key that executes manual sampling is pressed, measured/computed data (instantaneous values) of all channels at that point are acquired. Up to 50 samples of data can be stored in the internal memory. The header string can be written into the manual sampled data file (a character string that is common to all data files). Data format: ASCII format Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period. Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory. The header string can be written into the TLOG data file (a character string that is common to all data files). Data format: Binary format Consists of hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports. Data are computed at intervals depending on the report type (one hour for hourly report, one day for daily report, etc). Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period. Up to 40 reports can be stored in the internal memory. Each report file can contain up to 12 measured/computed channels of report data. The header string can be written into the report data file (a character string that is common to all data files). Data format: ASCII format

Data Types and File Names

Manual sampled data

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

TLOG data (option) Report data (option)

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-1

8.1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved File name File names are automatically assigned (month/day/hour/minute of the first sampled data + sequence number. extension) for display data, event data, manual sampled data, TLOG data (option), and report data (option). Display data file: Mddhhmma.DDS Event data file: Mddhhmma.DEV Manual sampled data file: Mddhhmma.DMN TLOG data file: Mddhhmma.DTG Hourly report data file: Mddhhmma.DHR Daily report data file: Mddhhmma.DDR Weekly report data file: Mddhhmma.DWR Monthly report data file: Mddhhmma.DMR where, M: month (1 to 9, X (10), Y (11), Z (12)), dd: date, hh: hour, mm: minute, a: sequence number

Note
The sequence number of the file name is normally set to 0. However, if the display data acquisition is started, stopped, and restarted within one minute, for example, then the file name of the two files will have sequence numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files, respectively (The two files will have the same Mddhhmm (month/day/hour/minute) section).

8-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.2

Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data

The display and event data are acquired by specifying the channels, sampling interval, file size, and other information.

Specifying the data to be acquired

Display data and event data Specify the type of data to be acquired depending on the application. Several examples are shown below. Please use them as references. Example 1: Continuously record the waveform data as in the conventional charttype recorders. Select display data only. Example 2: Continuously record the waveform data and when an alarm occurs, record detailed data around the alarm incident. Select display data and event data. For the event data, select Trigger or Rotate for the mode. Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data (event data file size). Example 3: Continuously record detailed data. Select even data only. Select Free for the mode. Example 4: Recording is not necessary under normal circumstances. Only record detailed data around the alarm incident. Select event data only. Select Trigger or Rotate for the mode. Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data.

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

Data type
Select display data only, display data and event data, or event data only.

Channels to be stored
Select the channels to be acquired from measurement and computation channels.

Data acquisition
Display data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to display data only, or display data and event data. Data acquisition starts when the START key is pressed and stops when the STOP key is pressed. The display data are overwritten when the display data storage area in the internal memory becomes full, or the number of files* exceeds 16.
* The number of display data files During manual save, a file is created for each data write operation (a set of start and stop operations). During auto save, a file is created every auto save interval and at every specified date/time.

Note
The display data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary. Section 4.5 When a power disruption occurs the file is closed.

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-3

8.2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Event data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to event data only, or display data and event data. There are three modes in data acquisition, [Free], [Trigger], and [Rotate]. [Free] mode can be set when acquiring the event data only.
Mode Free Description Data acquisition is started by pressing the START key. The operation is stopped by pressing the STOP key. When the storage area of the internal memory becomes full, or the number of files* in the internal memory exceeds 16, it is overwritten. * The number of display data files During manual save, a file is created for each data write operation (start and stop operations). During auto save, a file is created every specified interval (data length, see section 8.11) and at every specified date/time. When the internal memory is not divided into blocks: One event data file is created in the internal memory. Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state. After the trigger is activated, data are acquired for the specified time (data length, see section 8.11) and the operation is stopped. At this point, the acquisition does not start even if the trigger is activated.
Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated Stop

Trigger

When the internal memory is divided into blocks: An event data file each in the block is created. Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state. After the trigger is activated, data are acquired for the specified time (data length, see section 8.11) and the operation is stopped. When the trigger is activated again, data are acquired and stored to the next block. When all blocks are full, no more acquisition takes place.
First block Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated Trigger wait Trigger activated Second block Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated Stop Last block Data acquisition

8-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data

Mode Rotate Description When the internal memory is not divided into blocks: One event data file is created in the internal memory. Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state. After the trigger is activated, data are acquired for the specified time (data length, see section 8.11) and the operation is stopped. Data are overwritten when the trigger is activated again. Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state, data are overwritten. Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition.
Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated

When the internal memory is divided into blocks: An event data file each in the blocks is created. Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state. After the trigger is activated, data are acquired for the specified time (data length, see section 8.11) and the operation is stopped. When the trigger is activated again, data are acquired and stored to the next block. When all blocks are full and the trigger is activated, data are overwritten to the first block. Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state, data are overwritten to the next block. Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition.
First block Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated Trigger wait Trigger activated Second block Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated Last block Data acquisition

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

Note
The event data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary. Section 4.5 When a power failure occurs, the event data file in the internal memory is closed as one file.

Pretrigger for the event data

Pretrigger is applied to the event data with [Trigger] or [Rotate] modes. You can have event data before the trigger point be stored. It is specified in terms of a percentage of the data length (0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, 100%). If 0% is selected, all data are after the trigger point. The initial setting is 0%.

Trigger type for the event data

When [Trigger] or [Rotate] is selected, the trigger type is selected by turning each type of trigger ON/OFF. The triggers operate in an OR fashion: the trigger is activated when any of the conditions that are turned ON are satisfied.
Type Key trigger Description The trigger condition is satisfied when the FUNC - [Trigger] soft key or the USER key (only when the trigger function is assigned to the USER key) is pressed. The trigger condition is satisfied when the external contact specified by Remote Control function is turned ON. See section 10.9. The trigger condition is satisfied when any of the alarms occur.

External trigger Alarm trigger

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-5

8.2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data

Number of data points that can be acquired and sampling length (the maximum auto save interval for display data, the maximum data length for event data)
This section describes the number of data points of the display data/event data that can be acquired and the sampling length. Use the information when determining the amount of time it takes for the internal memory to become full or when deciding the channels to be acquired or the sampling interval. The possible range of menus of the auto save interval of display data and the data length of event data is displayed in the soft keys based on the information described here. Data format The display data have minimum and maximum values for each sampling interval. Event data consists of instantaneous values. The number of data bytes per channel is shown in the following table.
Data Type Display data Event data Measurement Channel 4 bytes/channel 2 bytes/channel Computation Channel 8 bytes/channel 4 bytes/channel

Example Data format when the data of measurement channels 1 to 4 and a computation channel 31 are acquired. Display data
1st scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 min max min max min max min max 2nd scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 min max min max min max min max to nth scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 min max min max min max min max 2 bytes (binary data) CH31 min CH31 max CH31 min CH31 min CH31 max CH31 max

Event data
1st scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2nd scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 to nth scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH31

2 bytes (binary data)

Internal memory capacity The capacity of the internal memory that is used for data storage is 1.2 MB. The internal memory is allocated depending on the acquired data as follows.
Data being acquired Display data only Display data and event data Event data only Internal Memory Capacity 1.2 MB Display data: 0.9 MB Event data: 0.3 MB 1.2 MB
IM 04L01A01-01E

8-6

8.2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired The following table shows the maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired.
Data being acquired Display data only Maximum number of data points per channel 1,200,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 4 + number of computation channels 8) Except, the maximum number of data points is 100,000 Display data 900,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 4 + number of computation channels 8) Except, the maximum number of data points is 75,000 Event data 300,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 2 + number of computation channels 4) Except, the maximum number of data points is 30,000

Display data and event data

Event data only

1,200,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 2 + number of computation channels 4) Except, the maximum number of data points is 120,000

Sampling length The sampling length can be derived from the following equation. Sampling length = the maximum number of data points per channel sampling interval Calculation example Display data only Measurement channel: 2, computation channel: none
Data Display data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Maximum number of data points = 1,200,000/(2 CH 4 bytes + 0 8 bytes) = 150,000. However, since 100,000 data points is the limit, Maximum number of data points = 100,000 When the display update rate is 30 min/div (60 s sampling interval) Sampling length = 100,000 data points 60 s = 6,000,000 s (approx. 69 days)

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

Measurement channel: 12, computation channel: 6

Data Display data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Maximum number of data points = 1,200,000/(12 CH 4 bytes + 6 8 bytes) = 12,500 When the display update rate is 30 min/div (60 s sampling interval) Sampling length = 12,500 data points 60 s = 750,000 s (approx. 8 days)

Event data only Measurement channel: 2, computation channel: None

Data Display data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Maximum number of data points = 1,200,000/(2 CH 2 bytes + 0 4 bytes) = 300,000 However, since 120,000 data points is the limit, Maximum number of data points = 120,000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length = 120,000 data points 1 s = 120,000 s (approx. 33 hours)

Measurement channel: 12, computation channel: 6

Data Event data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Maximum number of data points = 1,200,000/(12 CH 2 bytes + 6 4 bytes) = 25,000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length = 25,000 data points 1 s = 25,000 s (approx. 7 hours)

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-7

8.2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Display data and event data Measurement channel: 2, computation channel: none
Data Display data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Maximum number of data points = 900,000/(2 CH 4 bytes + 0 8 bytes) = 112,500 However, since 75,000 data points is the limit, Maximum number of data points = 75,000 When the display update rate is 30 min/div (60 s sampling interval) Sampling length = 75,000 data points 60 s = 4,500,000 s (approx. 52 days) Maximum number of data points = 300,000/(2 CH 2 bytes + 0 4 bytes) = 75,000 However, since 30,000 data points is the limit, Maximum number of data points = 30,000 data points When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length = 30,000 data points 1 s = 30,000 s (approx. 8 hours)

Event data

Measurement channel: 12, computation channel: 6

Data Display data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Maximum number of data points = 900,000/(12 CH 4 bytes + 6 8 bytes) = 9,375 When the display update rate is 30 min/div (60 s sampling interval) Sampling length = 9,375 data points 60 s = 562,500 s (approx. 6.5 days) Maximum number of data points = 300,000/(12 CH 2 bytes + 6 4 bytes) = 6,250 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length = 6,250 data points 1 s = 6,250 s (approx. 1.7 hours)

Event data

8-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.3

Function to Acquire Other Data

When the manual sample key is pressed, the instantaneous values of all channels (excluding the measurement channels that are set to [Skip] and the computation channels that are turned Off) are acquired. Up to 50 data sets can be stored in the internal memory. When this number is exceeded, data are overwritten from the oldest data.

Manual sampled data

Note
The number of manual sampled data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary. Section 4.5

TLOG data (option)

TLOG data are acquired at each time interval set by timers. Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory. When this number is exceeded, data are overwritten from the oldest data.

Note
Up to 16 TLOG files (number of start and stop) can be stored to the internal memory. When the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16, TLOG data are overwritten even if the number of data sets is less than 400. The number of TLOG data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary. Section 4.5

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

Report data (option)

Report data are acquired at each time interval (one hour for hourly report, one day for daily report, etc). Up to 40 data sets can be stored in the internal memory. When this number is exceeded, data are overwritten from the oldest data. For hourly only, this constitutes 40 minutes of report data. For daily+monthly, this constitutes 39 daily reports and one monthly report or 38 daily reports and two monthly reports.

Note
The number of report data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary. Section 4.5

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-9

8.4

Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium
There are two methods in which the data are saved to the external storage medium, manual save and auto save.

Manual Save
The external storage medium is inserted into the drive only when storing the data residing in the internal memory. When saving the data residing in the internal memory to the external storage medium, insert the storage medium into the drive and close the front cover. The storage medium in the drive is detected, and you can save the data residing in the internal memory to the storage medium. When the save operation is finished, remove the storage medium from the drive. Repeat the same procedure the next time the data is to be saved. You can specify whether to save the entire data in the memory or only the data that have not been saved to the storage medium beforehand.

Auto Save
The external storage medium is placed in the drive at all times. Data saving to the external storage medium is done automatically. Displayed data The display data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium at the specified interval (auto save interval, see section 8.8) or the specified date and time (see section 8.12).
The down arrows ( ) in the example below indicate the times at which the display data or event data (only during "free" mode) in the internal memory is closed as a single file. Example 1 Auto save interval: 1 day Date and time to save data: Not specified 7/19 13:10 7/20 13:10 7/21 13:10 7/22 13:10

Start Example 2 Auto save interval: 1 day Date and time to save data: 0:00 everyday 7/19 13:10 7/20 0:00 7/21 0:00 7/22 0:00

Start Example 3 Auto save interval: 12 hours Date and time to save data: 0:00 everyday 7/19 13:10 7/20 0:00 12:00 7/21 0:00 12:00 7/22 0:00 12:00

Start Example 4 Auto save interval: 2 days Date and time to save data: 0:00 everyday 7/19 13:10 7/20 0:00 7/21 0:00 7/22 0:00

Start

Event data During the free mode The event data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium at the specified interval (data length, see section 8.11) or the specified date and time (see section 8.12). 8-10
IM 04L01A01-01E

8.4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium During trigger or rotate mode After acquiring the data to the internal memory over the specified period (data length, see section 8.11), the event data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium. The following figure shows the operation when the acquisition area in the internal memory is divided using the trigger mode.
Data save to the external storage medium First block Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated Trigger wait Trigger activated Second block Data acquisition Trigger wait Trigger activated Stop Last block Data acquisition

Manual sampled data The first time manual sample is executed, a manual sampled data file is created on the external storage medium. The data are appended to this file for each successive manual sample operation.

Note
When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when manual sample is ececuted, all unsaved data are saved the first time when manual sample is ececuted, after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive.

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

TLOG data The first time TLOG data is acquired, a TLOG data file is created on the external storage medium. The data are appended to this file at each time interval. When the number of TLOG data sets exceeds 400, a new file is created.

Note
When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved, all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive.

Report data The first time report computation is executed, a report data file is created on the external storage medium. A file is created for each type of report such as hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports. The data are appended to this file at each time interval.

Note
When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved, all unsaved data are saved the first time when the report data is created after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive.

Dividing report files The report files are divided at the following times. When data acquisition is stopped. For hourly reports When the 0:00 report is created every day. When the number of data sets in the file reaches 25. For daily reports When the report for the first day of the month is created every month When the number of data sets in the file reaches 32.
IM 04L01A01-01E

8-11

8.5

Acquiring Display Data

This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to [Display] or [E + D]. For setting the data acquisition method, see sections 8.10 and 8.11.

Procedure Start data acquisition To begin data acquisition, press the START key. The icon in the status display section will change accordingly.
Icon

Stop data acquisition 1. Press the STOP key. A confirmation window opens.

On models with the computation option, the confirmation window displays the following choices: [Mem + Math] (terminate acquisition and all computations), [Memory] (terminate acquisition), and [Cancel]. For models with the batch function (/BT1 option) that has the batch function enabled (see section 10.13), the batch information is also displayed.

Note
When the memory area becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16, existing data will be overwritten starting with the oldest data. When a power disruption occurs the file is closed. When the power resumes, data are written to a new file. The START/STOP operation also starts/stops the report function. When the computation is stopped, it is started with the START key.

8-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.6

Acquiring Event Data

This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to [Event] or [E + D]. For setting the data acquisition method, see sections 8.10 and 8.11.

Procedure

8.7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Explanation Name of the directory to which to save the data For the setting procedure of the directory to which to save the data, see section 8.9. Each time the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the data are saved, the sequence number of the directory name increments by one. Example: When the specified directory name is DATA0, the first set of data are saved to DATA0.000 and the second set of data are saved to DATA0.001. When the directory name is changed, the sequence number is reset to zero. When the data are divided and saved over multiple external storage media due to lack of space on the storage medium, the same directory name is used. If the specified directory already exists in the external storage medium, an error message is displayed and the operation terminates (data are not saved).

When using auto save

Data are automatically stored by leaving the external storage medium inserted in the drive. For the data storage operation, see section 8.4. Procedure

Note
Do not remove the external storage medium while it is being accessed. For the memory usage display of the internal memory, see section 4.2. To check the free space on the storage medium, see section 9.5. For the name of the directory in which the data are saved, see section 8.9.

When the external storage medium does not have enough space 1. The message [Not enough free space on media] appears. Change the external storage medium. The unsaved data are saved to the external storage medium at the time for the next auto save execution.

Note
Be aware that data in the internal memory will be overwritten if there is not enough free space on the external storage medium or if the storage medium is not inserted in the drive in the following cases: When the number of display data files exceeds 16. A file is created for each auto save interval (see section 8.8). When the event data are acquired to the internal memory in the free run mode and the number of files exceeds 16. A file is created at specified acquisition periods (data length, see section 8.11).

8-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Saving the data to the external storage medium using key operation during auto save mode This operation applies when the data acquisition of the display data, or the data acquisition of event data in the free mode is in progress and the data storage to the storage medium is set to auto save. The display data or event data can be saved to the external storage medium at arbitrary times. The data acquisition to the internal memory continues even if this operation is carried out. 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu shown below. [Save Display]: When the type*1 of data acquired to the internal memory is display data or display data and event data. [Save Event]: When the type*1 of data acquired to the internal memory is event data and the free mode*1*2 is set.
*1 For the setting procedure, see section 8.11. *2 The soft key is not displayed in the trigger or rotate mode.

Press the soft key to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium.

[Save Display]: The display data file is closed and saved to the external storage medium. [Save Event]: The event data file is closed and saved to the external storage medium. Explanation Saving the data using key operation during auto save mode The data are acquired to the internal memory for the specified period from the point at which the data were previously saved to the external storage medium using key operation. Then, the data in the internal memory are saved to the storage medium. This operation is repeated. The following figure shows an example in which data are saved to the external storage medium at one-hour intervals.
Execute data saving to the external storage medium using key operation. 10:00 Save to external storage medium 11:00 11:20 12:0012:20 13:20 Time

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

Saving the data to the storage medium using key operation

All data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium. This cannot be executed while data acquisition or computation is in progress. For the operating procedure, see section 9.2.

Note
See section 9.7 or 9.8 to clear data in the internal memory.

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-17

8.8

Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data

When the method to save the data residing in the memory to the external storage medium is [auto save], you set the auto save interval. The auto save interval is used in saving the display data. The display data residing in the internal memory is automatically saved to the external storage medium as a single file at each auto save interval.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed). The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Auto save interval Displayed when [auto save] is selected. See section 8.8. Select from the choices shown on the soft keys.

8-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data Explanation Choices for the auto save interval The maximum auto save interval varies depending on the display update rate (sampling interval is determined from the display update rate), the data type (display data only/ display data and event data), and the number of measurement and computation channels to be stored (see section 8.10). The available choices for the auto save interval are displayed on the soft key. See the table below.
Display update rate (/DIV) Sampling interval (s) Auto save interval (choices) 15 s* 0.5 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 30 s* 1 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 1 min 2 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 2 min 4 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 min 10 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 10 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 20 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 40 60 120 2h 240 4h 480 10 h 1200

1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day

2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day

4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day

8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

for DX102 and DX104 only

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-19

8.9

Setting the File Header, Directory Name, and the Saved Data during Manual Save
File header Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used to write a header comment to the display data, event data, manual sampled data, TLOG data (option) and report data (option). Directory name When saving data to the external storage medium, you can specify the name of the directory to which the files are to be saved. All data other than the setup data (display data, event data, manual sampled data, TLOG data (option), report data (option), and screen image data) are saved to this directory. Setup data are saved to the root directory. During auto save, data is saved to the directory specified here. During manual save, data is saved to the directories with names consisting of the character string specified here followed by a sequence number (see section 8.7). When saving the data residing in the internal memory to the external storage medium through key operation, data is saved to the directories with names consisting of the character string specified here followed by A + sequence number (see section 9.2). Saved data during manual save When using manual save, you can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not previously been saved to the storage medium.

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Header Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a string. Enter the header (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. Directory name Enter the directory name (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) using the same method as step 1.

8-20

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.9 Setting the File Header, Directory Name, and the Saved Data during Manual Save

Note
The following character combinations can not be used as directory names: AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK. All spaces, or spaces at the top or in the middle of character strings are also not allowed for directory names.

Save data Displayed when [Manual Save] is selected. Select [Unsave] or [All]. The initial setting is [All] [Unsave]: Saves only the data that have not been saved when the medium is inserted into the drive. [All]: Save all the data residing in the memory when the medium is inserted into the drive.

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-21

8.10 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data (Basic Setting Mode)
Specify the channel for which the display or event data are to be acquired to the internal memory. The waveforms of the specified channels can be displayed on the trend display. The waveforms for the channels that are turned OFF are not displayed, but numerical values, bar graphs and alarms are displayed. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Press

FUNC

for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Meas CH/Math CH* To set the measurement channels, select [Meas CH]. To set the computation channels, select [Math CH].
* [Math CH] appears only on models with the computation option (/M1).

2. 3.

First channel and last channel Select the desired channel numbers. On/Off [On]: Display the trend/acquire data [Off]: Do not display the trend/do not acquire data The initial setting is [On] for all channels.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation The number of measurement and computation channels available in the different models
Model DX102 DX104 DX106 DX112 Measurement Channel 2 channels (1 to 2) 4 channels (1 to 4) 6 channels (1 to 6) 12 channels (1 to 12) Computation channel 4 channels (31 to 34) 4 channels (31 to 34) 12 channels (31 to 42) 12 channels (31 to 42)
IM 04L01A01-01E

8-22

8.11 Setting the Method of the Display/Event Data Acquisition (Basic Setting Mode)
Set the method of the display/event data acquisition. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8
Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. Data save to the external storage medium 1. Save Set save method to the external storage medium. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. [Auto]: auto save [Manual]: manual save

Note
If [Manual] (manual save) is selected in step 1, set whether to save all the data in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved. See section 8.9.

Data acquisition Acquiring only the display data 2. Data Select [Display].

Note
If [Auto] (auto save) is selected in step 1 and [Display] is selected in step 2, set the auto save interval for the display data. See section 8.8.

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-23

8.11 Setting the Method of the Display/Event Data Acquisition (Basic Setting Mode) Acquiring only the event data 2. Data Select [Event]. Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed. 3. Event - Sample rate This is the sampling interval for the event data. You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval. DX102, DX104: 125 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 60 s, 120 s, 300 s, and 600 s DX106, DX112: 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 60 s, 120 s, 300 s, and 600 s 4. Event - Mode Select from [Free], [Trigger], or [Rotate]. If [Free] is selected, item 6 is displayed. If [Trigger] or [Rotate] is selected, items 5, 6, 7, and 8 are displayed. 5. Event - Block The event data storage area in the internal memory is divided by the specified number. Select [1], [2], [4], [8], or [16]. (Select [1], [2], or [4] when acquiring display and event data) 6. Event - Data length The size of the event data file is expressed as a length of time over which data are acquired. The data length that can be specified varies depending on the sampling interval ([sample rate] in item 3), number of blocks, and the number of measurement and computation channels that are acquired. 7. Event - Pre-Trigger This is the range of data to be acquired before the trigger point. It is specified as a percentage of the data length (0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, and 100%). If 0% is selected, all data after the trigger point are acquired. 8. Event - Trigger [Key]: When using key operation to activate the trigger, turn this parameter On. [External]: When using remote control function (option) to activate the trigger, turn this parameter On. [Alarm]: When using alarms as triggers, turn this parameter On.

Note
If the [Alarm] parameter is turned On, trigger is activated if any one of the alarms occurs. If [Alarm] parameter is turned On and the alarm was already activated when the START key is pressed, trigger is also activated. OR logic applies to the [Key], [External], and [Alarm] parameters. If any one of the conditions that are turned On is met, the trigger is activated.

Acquiring display data and event data 2. Data type Select [E+D].

Note
If [Auto] (auto save) is selected in step 1 and [E + D] is selected in step 2, set the auto save interval for the display data. See section 8.8.

8-24

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.11 Setting the Method of the Display/Event Data Acquisition (Basic Setting Mode) Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed. The procedures used to set each parameter are the same as those described for Acquiring only the event data. In step 4, [Free] is not selectable. Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Choices for the data length The maximum value of the data length varies depending on the sampling interval. It is also dependent on the type of data to be acquired (display data and event data or event data only) and the number of measurement and computation channels to be acquired (see section 8.10). The available choices for the data length are displayed on the soft key menu. See the table below.
Sample rate (s) Data length (choices) 0.125* 0.25* 3 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 3 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 0.5* 3 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 3 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 3 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 5 10 30 60 120 300 600

10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day

10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day

8
1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12 h 1 day 2 day 3 day 5 day 7 day 10 day 14 day 31 day

Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

for DX102 and DX104 only

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-25

8.12 Specifying the Date/Time When Data Is To Be Saved to the External Storage Medium (Basic Setting Mode)
When the method used to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium is set to auto save, the display data or event data (only during Free mode) in the internal memory is closed as a single file and automatically saved to the external storage medium. This operation repeats when the auto save interval or the specified date or time is reached. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Timeup type If a setting other than [Off] is specified, [Date] or [Day of the week] and [Time(hour)] are displayed. [Off]: Disable this function. [Hour]: Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium every hour on the hour. [Day]: Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium every day at the hour on the hour specified by [Time(hour)]. [Week]: Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium at the day specified by [Day of the week] at the hour on the hour specified by [Time(hour)]. [Month]: Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium at the date specified by [Date] at the hour on the hour specified by [Time(hour)].

8-26

IM 04L01A01-01E

8.12 Specifying the Date/Time When Data Is To Be Saved to the External Storage Medium (Basic Setting Mode) 2. Date or Day of the week When [Timeup type] is set to [Hour], [Day], or [Month], [Date] is displayed. However, the [Date] setting is valid only when [Timeup type] is set to [Month]. It is invalid otherwise. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the value. Enter the date (1-28)* and press DISP/ENTER. Procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.
* You cannot specify 29, 30, or 31.

When [Timeup type] is set to [Week], [Day of the week] is displayed. Enter the day of the week using the soft key. 3. Time(hour) Time when data is to be saved. This is invalid when [Timeup type] is set to [Hour]. Enter the hour (00-23) using the same method as step 2.

8
Explanation

Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium

When power failure occurs during auto save mode Acquired data are saved to the storage medium at power restoration. When the power restores, the data saving operation restores.
Example: Timeup type is set to [Hour].
15:20 Power failure 13:10 14:00 15:00 15:41 Power restoration 16:00 17:00 Time

Start

Save to the storage medium

When the data are saved to the storage medium using key operation during auto save mode ( see Explanation in section 8.7) The data saving operations are not affected by this key operation.
Example: Timeup type is set to [Hour].
15:25 Data saving using key operation 13:10 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 Time

Start

Save to the storage medium

IM 04L01A01-01E

8-27

8.13 Storing Measured/Computed Data at Arbitrary Times (Manual Sampling)

The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels (excluding the measurement channels that are set to [Skip] and the computation channels that are turned Off) can be stored to the internal memory with a key operation. Computation channels are options. For the data format of the manual sampled data, see appendix 2, Data Formats of ASCII Files. Procedure Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode. 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. 2. Press the [Manual sample] soft key. The instantaneous values of all channels (excluding the measurement channels that are set to [Skip] and the computation channels that are turned Off) are stored to the internal memory.

Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out only when the manual sampling is assigned to the USER key. 1. Press the USER key. The instantaneous values of all channels (excluding the measurement channels that are set to [Skip] and the computation channels that are turned Off) are stored to the internal memory.

8-28

IM 04L01A01-01E

Chapter 9 Managing Files and Initializing Data

9.1

Saving/loading setup data

You can save the setup data to or load setup data from the external storage medium. The operation can be carried out in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode. A setup data file has 25 KB in size (maximum).

Saving setup data (in the setting mode)

Saves the setup data (set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode) to the external storage medium. The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen. soft key to display the [Save settings] screen.

File list

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data

Enter the name of the setup data file to be saved. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a string. Enter the string (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. To cancel the operation and return to the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu, press the ESC key.

Note
The extension PNL will automatically be added to the file name. The following character combinations cannot be used as file names. AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for file names. Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are not allowed.

Press the DISP/ENTER key to save the data. The saved file appears in the file list. If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium, a message will appear to confirm overwriting. Select [Yes] or [No] and press the DISP/ENTER key.

IM 04L01A01-01E

9-1

9.1 Saving/loading setup data

Loading setup data (in the setting mode)

Loads the setup data set in the setting mode only, from a setup file in the external storage medium and make the settings effective. Setting items that are inconsistent with the content of the basic setting mode of the DX100 will not be acquired. Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

#7 #2

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen. soft key to display the [Load settings] screen.

File list

A list of setup files in the storage medium appears. Select the file to be loaded (The extension of setup files is PNL). To cancel the operation and return to the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu, press the ESC key. Press the DISP/ENTER key to load the file. After loading, the screen returns to the operation mode. The loaded setup data are made effective.

Note
If the loaded data does not take effect, refer to the error log. For the procedure related to displaying the error log, see section 10.7.

9-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

9.1 Saving/loading setup data

Saving setup data (in the basic setting mode)

Saves the setup data (set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode) to the external storage medium. The created file has the same parameters as the file created in the setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

#8 #1

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Initialize] menu screen. soft key to display the [Save settings] screen.

File list

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data

IM 04L01A01-01E

9-3

9.1 Saving/loading setup data

Loading setup data (in the basic setting mode)

Loads the setup data (set in both the setting mode and the basic Setting mode) from a setup file in the external storage medium and make the settings effective. Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

#8 #2

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Initialize] menu screen. soft key to display the [Load settings] screen.

File list

A list of setup files in the storage medium appears. Select the file to be loaded (The extension of setup files is PNL). To cancel the operation and return to the [Save/Load, Initialize] menu, press the ESC key. Press the DISP/ENTER key to load the file. After loading, the screen returns to the operation mode. The loaded setup data take effect.

Note
If the loaded data does not take effect, refer to the error log. For the procedure related to displaying the error log, see section 10.7.

9-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

9.2

Saving data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operation
The following data in the internal storage memory are saved to the external storage medium using key operation. Display data/Event data/Manual sampled data/TLOG data (option)/Report data (option)

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

#7
#3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen. [Save data] soft key to save the data in the internal memory to

the external storage medium.

Note
The data in the internal memory cannot be saved to the external storage medium while data acquisition or computation is in progress.

Explanation Name of the directory to which to save the data The name of the directory to which to save the data is the specified name. Axx, where xx is the sequence number. Each time carrying out the key operation and the data are saved, the sequence number of the directory name increments by one. Example: When the specified directory name is DATA0, the first set of data are saved to DATA0.A00 and the second set of data are saved to DATA0.A01.

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data

IM 04L01A01-01E

9-5

9.3

Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium

Loads the display data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen. This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of display data is set ([Display] or [E+D] in section 8.11). See section 4.6, for the use of the historical trend.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen. soft key to display the [Load display data] screen.

File list

For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), press the [Time] soft key when displaying the date and time of file creation and the [Batch] soft key when displaying the batch number and lot number.

The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the [Directory name] column. Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory containing the display data to be loaded. A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column. Root directory is denoted by [/]. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list. Press the up or down arrow key to select the display data file to be loaded. To move back to the [Directory name] column, press the left arrow key. Press the DISP/ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen. To return to the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen without displaying the historical trend, press the ESC key.

9-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

9.4

Viewing Event Data in the External Storage Medium

Loads the event data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen. This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of event data is set ([Event] or [E+D] in section 8.11). See section 4.6, for the use of the historical trend.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen.

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Load event data] screen.

File list

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data

The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the [Directory name] column. Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory containing the event data to be loaded. A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column. Root directory is denoted by [/]. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list. Press the up or down arrow key to select the event data file to be loaded. To move back to the [Directory name] column, press the left arrow key. Press the DISP/ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen. To return to the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen without displaying the historical trend, press the ESC key.

IM 04L01A01-01E

9-7

9.5

Managing files/Displaying free space on the external storage medium

Displays a list of files and the amount of free space on the external storage medium (in the setting mode only). Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium. Formats the external storage medium.

Display the list of files and the free space on the external storage medium (in the setting mode)
A list of files on the external storage medium can be displayed. In addition, the amount of free space is also displayed. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen.

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [File list] screen.

File list

3. 4.

The directories in the external storage medium are displayed. Using the arrow keys select the directory. Files in the directory are listed to the right. [/] is the root directory. Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor to the file list. The list can be scrolled using the arrow keys. To move back to the [Directory name] column, press the left arrow key. Free space Displays the amount of free space on the external storage medium. Press the ESC key to return to the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen.

9-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

9.5 Managing files/Displaying free space on the external storage medium

Deleting files and directories on the external storage medium (in the setting mode)
Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium. The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen.

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Delete] screen.

File list

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data
Deleting a file in a directory 1. Of the directories listed in the [Directory name] column, select the directory in which the file you wish to delete exists using the up and down arrow keys. The [File name] column displays a list of files in the selected directory. [/] is the root directory. 2. Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor onto the [File name] column. Use the up and down arrow keys to select the file to be deleted. 3. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box. 4. Use the arrow keys to select [Yes] and press the DISP/ENTER key to delete the selected file. The file is cleared from the file list. To cancel the delete operation, select [No] and press the DISP/ENTER key.

Note
If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation, the screen returns to the [Save/Load, Clear Data] menu.

IM 04L01A01-01E

9-9

9.5 Managing files/Displaying free space on the external storage medium Deleting all the files in the directory 1. Of the directories listed in the [Directory name] column, select the directory in which the files you wish to delete exist using the up and down arrow keys. The [File name] column displays a list of files in the selected directory. [/] is the root directory. 2. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box. 3. Use the arrow keys to select [Yes] and press the DISP/ENTER key to delete all the files in the directory. All files are cleared from the file list. To cancel the delete operation, select [No] and press the DISP/ENTER key.

Note
If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation, the screen returns to the [Save/Load, Clear Data] menu.

Deleting a directory A directory can be deleted if there are no files in the directory. To delete a directory that has files, delete all the files in the directory first. 1. Of the directories listed in the [Directory name] column, select the directory you wish to delete using the up and down arrow keys. Check that no files are displayed in the [File name] column. [/] is the root directory. The root directory cannot be deleted. 2. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box. 3. Use the arrow keys to select [Yes] and press the DISP/ENTER key to delete the directory. The directory name is cleared from the [Directory name] column. To cancel the delete operation, select [No] and press the DISP/ENTER key.

Note
If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation, the screen returns to the [Save/Load, Clear Data] menu.

9-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

9.5 Managing files/Displaying free space on the external storage medium

Formatting the external storage medium (in the setting mode)

Formats the external storage medium. The function is the same as the formatting the external storage medium in the basic setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen.

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Format] screen.

To change the volume name after formatting, enter the new volume name. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a string. Enter the string (up to 11 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22.
The following character combinations cannot be used as volume names. AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for volume names. Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are not allowed. When using storage media formatted by the instrument on a Windows 2000 PC, you must change the volume label.

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data

Note

Select [Quick] or [Normal] to set in the [Type] box. To cancel the operation and return to the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu, press the ESC key. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays a confirmation window. Use the arrow keys to select [Yes] and press the DISP/ENTER key to format the medium.

Explanation Type [Quick]: Performs only a logical format. [Normal]:Performs both a physical format and a logical format. Format type Floppy disk: 2HD, 1.44 MB Zip disk: FDISK 1 partition (hard disk format) ATA flash memory card: FDISK 1 partition (hard disk format) Format time
Type of storage media Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card
IM 04L01A01-01E

Quick Approx. 6 s Approx. 3 s Approx. 3 s Approx. 5 s

Normal Approx. 1 min. 30 s Approx. 10 min. Approx. 1 min. 30 s Approx. 6 min.

Note

20MB 160MB

9-11

9.5 Managing files/Displaying free space on the external storage medium

Deleting files and directories on the external storage medium (in the basic setting mode)
Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium. The function is the same as that in the setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

#8 #3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Initialize] menu screen. soft key to display the [Delete] screen.

File list

Deleting files and directories can be executed in the same procedure as that in the setting mode. See page 9-9.

Formatting the external storage medium (in the basic setting mode)
Formats the external storage medium. The function is the same as that in the setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

#8 #4

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Initialize] menu screen. soft key to display the [Format] screen.

Formatting the external storage medium can be executed in the same procedure as that in the setting mode. See page 9-11. 9-12
IM 04L01A01-01E

9.6

Saving the Screen Image

The screen image that is displayed is saved to the external storage medium using the FUNC key or USER key* operation. The data size of the screen image is approximately 12 KB/screen.
* Only when [Snapshot] is assigned to the USER key. See sections 10.2.

Procedure FUNC key operation This operation is carried out in the operation mode. The images of soft keys or messages are not saved. 1. Confirm the storage medium is in the drive. 2. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. 3. Press the [Snapshot] soft key. The screen image is saved to the external storage medium.

USER key operation This applies only when [Snapshot] is assigned to the USER key. This key operates in all run modes (operation, setting, and basic setting modes). The exact screen image that is displayed when the USER key is pressed is saved. However, error messages are not saved. 1. Confirm the storage medium is in the drive. 2. Press the USER key. The screen image is saved to the external storage medium. Explanation File format Screen image data is in PNG format. File name File names are automatically assigned (Month, date, hour, and minute when the screen image data were stored + sequence number) to screen image data files. Mddhhmma. PNG where, M: month (1 to 9, X (10), Y (11), Z (12)), dd: date, hh: hour, mm: minute, a: sequence number

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data

Note
The sequence number of the file name is normally set to 0. However, if the screen image data is saved twice within a minute, for example, then the file name of the two files will have sequence numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files, respectively. (The two files will have the same Mddhhmm (month/day/hour/minute) section.)

IM 04L01A01-01E

9-13

9.7

Clearing Data from the Internal Memory

Clears display data, event data, manual sampled data, TLOG data (option), and report data (option) from the internal memory.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. Press
MENU

Press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Clear data] menu screen.

Twice press the soft key Press

Next 1/3

[Clear data] soft key to display a confirmation window.

Selecting [Yes] and pressing the DISP/ENTER key clears the data from the internal memory.

9-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

9.8

Initializing Setup Data

Initializes the setup data in the internal memory. Also Clears display data, event data, manual sampled data, TLOG data (option), report data (option), and logs from the internal memory. The DX100 returns to the operation mode . For the initial settings of the setup data, see Appendix 1.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key Press Press

Next 1/3

#8 #5

soft key to display the [Save/Load, Initialize] menu screen. soft key to display the [Initialize] screen.

9
Managing Files and Initializing Data

Select the type of initialization to set in the [Type] box. To cancel the operation and return to the [Save/Load, Initialize] menu, press the ESC key. [Clear 1]: Initializes the settings in the basic setting mode, settings in the setting mode and clears the internal memory. [Clear 2]: Initializes the settings in the setting mode and clears the internal memory. [Clear 3]: Clears the internal memory. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key displays a confirmation window. Pressing the DISP/ENTER key initializes the settings and returns to the operation mode.

IM 04L01A01-01E

9-15

Chapter 10 Other Functions

10.1 USER Key

An action can be assigned to the user key. For details of actions, see section 10.2. Alarm Ack (see chapter 6) is assigned as the initial value.

DISP/
ENTER START STOP USER FUNC ESC MENU

USER key

Executing the action that has been assigned

Procedure For the operating procedure, see sections listed below.
Assigned action (soft key) None Trigger AlarmACK Math Math rst M.sample Message1 to Message8 Snapshot Reference section 8.6 6.1 11.3 11.3 8.13 7.4 9.6

10
Other Functions

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-1

10.2 Assigning an Action to the USER Key

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Action Selecting the action to be assigned.

AlarmACK

6.1

Math Math rst M.sample Message 1 to 8 Snapshot *

11.3 11.3 8.13 7.4 9.6

Snapshot works in all modes. Other actions work in the operation mode or the setting mode.

10-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.3 Using Key Lock

Key lock is a function used to prevent key operations, Zip disk removal, and saving data to the external storage medium in the manual save mode. To release a key lock, you must enter a password. The key lock ON/OFF condition is retained even if the power is turned OFF. Thus, the next time the power is turned ON, the preexisting state is restored. Key lock is set in the basic setting mode. Procedure Enabling key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode. 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. 2. Press the [Keylock] soft key. The key lock function is enabled.

Note
If a locked key is pressed when the key lock function is engaged, a message This key is locked. is displayed. A key lock icon appears in the status display section when the key lock is enabled. See section 4.2.

Releasing the key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode. 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. 2. Press the [Keylock] soft key. A window appears for you to enter the password.

10
Other Functions

Enter the password and press the DISP/ENTER key. (The password is set in the basic setting mode. See section 10.4.) For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. The key lock is released.

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-3

10.4 Setting the Key Lock Function (Basic Setting Mode)

Select whether or not to enable the key lock on the individual keys and the external storage medium. The initial setting is [Free] (disabled) on all parameters. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Use/Not Select [Use] or [Not]. If [Use] is selected, various parameters are displayed. [Use]: Use key lock. [Not]: Do not use key lock. Password Set the password used to release the key lock in the operation mode. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a string. Enter the string (up to 6 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. For each parameter, select whether or not to enable the key lock. [Free]: Disable [Lock]: Enable

10.4 Setting the Key Lock Function (Basic Setting Mode) Explanation Key locked parameter and the behavior during key lock (can be set individually)
Parameter Behavior during key lock [START] key Disabled [STOP] key Disabled [MENU] key Disabled [USER] key Disabled [DISP/ENTER] key Disabled to change operation screens [Alarm ACK] soft key Disabled Math (Computation) [Math START] soft key*1 Disabled Disabled [Math STOP] soft key*1 [Math reset] soft key*1 Disabled Write memory [Message] soft key*2 Disabled [Manual sample] soft key*2 Disabled [Trigger] soft key*2 Disabled Disabled [Save Display] soft key*2 [Save Event] soft key*2 Disabled [E-Mail START] soft key*2*3 Disabled [E-Mail STOP] soft key*2*3 Disabled [E-Mail test] soft key*2 Disabled Media (External storage medium) During manual save Prevent saving when an external storage medium is inserted, Prevent Zip disk removal. During auto save Prevent Zip disk removal. *1 Set together by [Math] parameter. *2 Set together by [Write memory] parameter. *3 Can be set when the e-mail transmission function is engaged.

10
Other Functions

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-5

10.5 Using the Key Login/Logout Function

This function allows only certain users to access the DX100. The users are distinguished by their user IDs and passwords. You can select whether or not to use User IDs. In addition, you can set whether or not to allow operations in the basic setting mode for each user. When logged out, only the login operation can be accessed. Enabling/Disabling the key login/logout and using/not using the user ID are set in the basic setting mode. See the next section. When logged in, the user name is displayed in the status display section. See section 4.2. The records of key login/logout can be viewed on the log screen. See section 10.7.

Note
When the power is turned OFF and turned ON again, the DX100 starts in the logged out condition.

Procedure Logging in 1. Press the FUNC key. Soft keys and a list of user names are displayed. 2. Select the user using the soft key.

When using the user ID, a window appears for you to enter the user ID. Enter the user ID and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22.

A window appears for you to enter the password. Enter the password and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22.

10-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.5 Using the Key Login/Logout Function The user name is displayed in the status display section.
User name

Logging out 1. Press the FUNC key. The [Logout] soft key is displayed. 2. Press the [Logout] soft key. The user name shown in the status display section disappears.

Auto logout This function is available in the operation mode. If there is no key operation for ten minutes, the user is automatically logged out. The auto logout function can be activated in the basic setting mode. Explanation Power up operation
Power ON

Log out status Logout operation or Auto logout Login operation FUNC key Password User ID

10
Operation mode

Other Functions

When the basic setting mode is terminated When the basic setting mode is terminated and the mode returns to the operation mode, the DX100 is in the logged out condition. Saving the user name The user name is stored to the display and event data files at the following points: when the display or event data acquisition starts and ends and when a message is written.

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-7

10.6 Setting the Key Login/Logout Functions (Basic Setting Mode)

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Use/Not Select [Use] or [Not]. If [Use] is selected, items 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9 are displayed. [Use]: Use key login. [Not]: Do not use key login. Auto logout Select [On] or [Off]. [On]: Use the auto logout. [Off]: Do not use the auto logout. User ID Use/Not [Use]: Use the user ID. [Not]: Do not use the user ID. If [Use] is selected, item 7 (User ID) appears.
For models with the batch function, The key login function of all users (1 to 7, item 4) turns [Off] (item 5), when [User ID] is changed to [Use] from [Not].

Note

4. 5.

Number This is the user registration number (1 to 7). Select the user number to be set. On/Off Set whether or not to enable the key login function for the selected user. [On]: Enable the key login function for the selected user. [Off]: Disable the key login function for the selected user.

10-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.6 Setting the Key Login/Logout Functions (Basic Setting Mode) 6. User name Enter the user name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters). Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a string. Enter the string and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22.

Note
For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), duplicate user names cannot be registered. See "Confirming operation" below. quit cannot be used as the user name. All spaces are also not allowed for the user name.

User ID Enter the user ID (up to 4 alphanumeric characters) using the same method as step 6. Password Enter the password (up to 6 alphanumeric characters) using the same method as step 6.

Note
For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), the combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified. See Confirming operation below.

Enter setup Select whether or not to allow the login user to enter the basic setting mode. [Enable]: The user can enter the basic setting mode. [Disable]: The user can not enter the basic setting mode.

10
Other Functions

Note
The [Enter Setup] of all users cannot be set to [Disabled]. If specified, the user with the lowest registration number with the fifth parameter turned [On] is automatically set to [Enabled] (The setting is changed when the setup data is stored and the basic setting mode is terminated.).

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. For models without the batch function (/BT1 option) If the user name already exists, a confirmation message This user name is already registered, is displayed. At this point the user name is registered. If necessary, change the user name to be registered. For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), If the user name already exists, an error message This user name is already registered, is displayed. The user name entry box stays yellow, and the user name is not registered. Change the user name to be registered. If the combination of the user ID and passwor that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past, an error message Duplicate used combination of user ID and password, is displayed. Change the combination of the user ID and password to be registered. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key.
IM 04L01A01-01E

10-9

10.7 Displaying the Log Screen/System Screen

The following list is displayed on the log screen. Error messages (the newest 50) A record of key login/logout (the newest 50) A record of communication commands (the newest 200) A record of file transfers made using the FTP client function (the newest 50) A record of web operation (the newest 50) A record of e-mail transmission (the newest 50) If the number exceeds the limit, entries are deleted starting with the oldest one. The number of input points, capacity of the internal memory, options, MAC address, and the firmware version number of the DX100 can be displayed on the screen for confirmation. Procedure Display the log screen/system screen 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. 2. Press the [Log] soft key. The types of logs that can be displayed and the system screen are assigned to the soft keys and displayed.

Press a soft key to display the log. [Error] soft key: Displays a log of error messages. [Key login] soft key: Displays a log of key login/logout. [Commu] soft key: Displays a log of communication commands that have been executed. [FTP] soft key: Displays a log of file transfers made using the FTP client function. [Web] soft key: Displays a log of operations on the Web screen. [E-Mail] soft key: Displays a log of e-mail transmission. [System] soft key: Displays a system screen. Use the up and down keys to scroll through the log.

Returning to the operation screen To return to the operation screen from the log screen or the system screen, press the DISP/ENTER key to display the screen menu, select the desired screen using the up and down arrow keys, and then press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Error message log
The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen / total number of logs Date and time of occurrence Error code Error message

10-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.7 Displaying the Log Screen/System Screen Key login/logout log

The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen / total number of logs

User name User No. Date/time Login/logout

Communication command log

The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen / total number of logs Ethernet interface Green: Good connection Gray: No connection Message I/O symbol (>: input, <: output) A number used to identify the user that is connected Date and time when the access occurred

FTP log
The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen / total number of logs

File name FTP server (P: primary, S: secondary) Error code Date and time when the file transfer was made

10
Other Functions

Web operation log

The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen / total number of logs

Date/time

Operation Type Error code (see chapter 12)

E-mail log
The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen / total number of logs

Recipient address Recipient No. Error code (see chapter 12) Date/time Mail type

System screen See section 1.8.

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-11

10.8 Setting the Memory Alarm Time (/F1 Option Provides an Relay Output Alarm, Basic Setting Mode)
When the remaining time for storing the display or event data in the internal memory falls to the specified time (Memory alarm) during manual save, an alarm is generated via email or the relay contact output (/F1 option). For details related to the relay output action, see section 1.8. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Memory alarm This is the minimum storage time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated. Select a value from [1 h], [2 h], [5 h], [10 h], [20 h], [50 h], [100 h] and [off]. [Off]: Memory alarm function is disabled (the function does not operate in either manual save or auto save (see section 1.8)).

10-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.9 Setting the Remote Control Functions (/R1 Option, Basic Setting Mode)
Various actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals. The assigned action can then be executed by applying a remote input signal to the corresponding terminal. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Twice press the soft key Press the soft key

Next 1/3
#9
.

To display the setting screen press the soft key

10
Other Functions

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Action Assign actions to Remote numbers 1 to 8. For the functions that can be assigned, see the explanation.

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-13

10.9 Setting the Remote Control Functions (/R1 Option, Basic Setting Mode) Starts/stops data acquisition: [StartStop] Remote input: Rising/start, falling/stop Start Starts/stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data, and the report (option). Stop Stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data, and the report (option). If the data acquisition is in progress, applying a rising signal produces no effect. If the data acquisition is stopped, applying a falling signal produces no effect. External trigger for event data acquisition: [Trigger] Remote input: Trigger, 250 ms or more This becomes the external trigger that starts the acquisition of the event data to the internal memory. This is valid only when acquiring the event data to the internal memory using the trigger or rotate mode, the acquisition start trigger is set to external trigger, and the DX100 is in the trigger wait state (see section 8.2). For all other cases, applying the remote signal produces no effect. Releasing the alarm indication and output relay: [AlarmACK] Remote input: Trigger, 250 ms or more Releases the alarm indication and relay output (option). This is the same function as when the [AlarmACK] soft key is pressed. Adjusting the internal clock: [Time adj] Remote input: Trigger, 250 ms or more Adjusts the internal clock of the DX100 to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied.
Time of signal input 00 min. 00 s to 01 min. 59 s 02 min. 00 s to 57 min. 59 s 58 min. 00 s to 59 min. 59 s New time Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour. Example: 10 hr. 01 min. 50 s becomes 10 hr. 00 min. 00 s. Time is unchanged. Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour. Example: 10 hr. 59 min. 50 s becomes 11 hr. 00 min. 00 s.

Starts/stops computation (option): [Math] Remote input: Rising/start, falling/stop Starts/stops the computation. This is valid only on models with the computation function (/M1 option). If the computation is started, applying a rising signal produces no effect. If the computation is stopped, applying a falling signal produces no effect. Clears computed results (option): [Math rst] Remote input: Trigger, 250 ms or more Resets the data on all computation channels. This is valid only on models with the computation function (/M1 option) and while the computation is stopped. For all other cases, applying the remote signal produces no effect. Manual sampling: [M.sample] Remote input: Trigger, 250 ms or more The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels (excluding the measurement channels that are set to [Skip] and the computation channels that are turned Off) can be stored to the internal memory.

10-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.9 Setting the Remote Control Functions (/R1 Option, Basic Setting Mode) Loads the setup data: [Pnl1 load] [Pnl2 load] [ Pnl3 load] Remote input: Trigger, 250 ms or more The setup data of the file LOAD 1.PNL, LOAD 2.PNL, or LOAD 3.PNL that is saved in the external storage medium are loaded for use. The file, LOAD 1.PNL, LOAD 2.PNL, or LOAD 3.PNL must be created and saved to the external storage medium beforehand. Writing messages: [Message1] to [Message8] Remote input: Trigger, 250 ms or more Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend screen. The displayed message is also written to the internal memory. When the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped, messages cannot be displayed or written. Applying a remote signal produces no effect. Snapshot: [Snapshot] Remote input signal: Trigger, 250 ms or more Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium. The snapshot function operates in all modes (operation mode, setting mode, and basic setting mode). Error messages, even if they are displayed, are not saved. Remote input signal The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal (edge) or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms (trigger).
Rising/Falling edge Rising Falling Trigger

250 ms or more

10
Other Functions

For contact inputs, the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open. For open collector signals, the remote signal rises when the collector signal (voltage level of the remote terminal) goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high.

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-15

10.10 Setting the Displayed Language (Basic Setting Mode)

Select the language that is used on the screen. The initial setting is English. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Aux - Language Select the language.

10-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.11 Checking or Changing Batch/Lot Numbers and Entering or Changing Comments (/BT1 Option)
The batch number and lot number can be checked or changed on the batch screen. You can also enter comments. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the operation mode. Opening the batch screen 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. 2. Press the [Batch] soft key to display the batch screen.
3 4

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. Change the batch number (up to 16 characters) Cannot be changed while data are being acquired to the internal memory. 3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the batch number box. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the batch number. The current batch number is displayed. Change it and press the DISP/ENTER key. The batch number is confirmed and the screen returns to the batch screen. Procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. Changing the lot number (up to 4 numerical digits) Cannot be changed while data are being acquired to the internal memory. 4. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the lot number box. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the lot number. The current lot number is displayed. Change the number and press the DISP/ ENTER key. The lot number is confirmed and the screen returns to the batch screen. Procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

10
Other Functions

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-17

10.11 Checking or Changing Batch/Lot Numbers and Entering or Changing Comments (/BT1 Option) Entering comments (up to 32 characters x 3 lines) The comment, the name of the user that entered the comment (only when the key login function is enabled), and the date and time when the comment was entered are written to the internal memory along with the measured/computed data. The comment is cleared when the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped. 5. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the first line in the comment box. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the comment. Enter the comment and press the DISP/ENTER key. The comment is confirmed and the screen returns to the batch screen. Enter comments in the second and third lines in the similar fashion. Procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. The date and time at which the DISP/ENTER key is pressed after entering the last comment is written to the internal memory as the date and time when the comment was entered.

Note
You can enter the comment once while data acquisition is in progress. However, if you had entered a comment before you started data acquisition, you cannot reenter the comment while data acquisition is in progress. Comments are not saved to the setup file.

Clearing the batch screen Press the DISP/ENTER key or the ESC key to close the batch screen.

10-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.12 Setting the Batch Information (/BT1 Option)

You can set the following items that are attached to the data acquired in the internal memory. Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number In addition you can set whether or not to use the following functions: Automatically increment the lot number at the end of the batch. Display the batch number and lot number for each file in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended, on the memory summary screen. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate position. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Twice press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

For models with the computation function, the soft key positions change. Operate as follows: To display the setting screen press the soft key

10
Other Functions

#12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Application name Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the application name. Enter the application name (up to 16 characters), and press the DISP/ ENTER key. Procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22. Supervisor name Enter the supervisor name (up to 16 characters) using the same method as step 1.

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-19

10.12 Setting the Batch Information (/BT1 Option) 3. Manager name Enter the manager name (up to 16 characters) using the same method as step 1. Batch number Enter the batch number (up to 16 characters) using the same method as step 1. Lot number Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the lot number. Enter the lot number (0-9999), and press the DISP/ENTER key. Procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. Auto increment (Automatic increment of the lot number) Set whether or not to automatically increment the lot number (to the next lot number) when the data acquisition to the internal memory is complete. [On]: Automatically increment the lot number when the data acquisition is complete. [Off]: Do not change the lot number.
The lot number after 9999 is 0.

4. 5.

Note

Disp information (Displayed information of the stored data) Set whether to display the batch number and lot number or the date and time of file creation on the memory summary, display data load, and event data load screens. [Batch]: Display the batch number and lot number. [Time]: Display the date and time of file creation.

10-20

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.13 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Batch Function (/BT1 Option, Basic Setting Mode)
This setting is possible on models with the batch function. It is set in the basic setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

10
The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Batch [Use]: Use the batch function. [Not]: Do not use the batch function.

Other Functions

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-21

10.14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function

When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled (the time set at [Summer]), the DX100 automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour. (Example: If the time is set to 9 oclock on June 1, the time is set ahead to 10 oclock June 1.) When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled (the time set at [Winter]), the DX100 automatically sets the clock back by one hour. (Example: If the time is set to 9 oclock on December 1, the time is set back to 8 oclock December 1.) The daylight savings time adjustment function is set using year, month, day, and time. Set the time for every year. The year is specified using the lower two digits. 00 to 79 represent year 2000 to 2079. 80 to 99 represent 1980 to 1999. Procedure Setting the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled/ disabled These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed.) The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. On/Off Select whether or not to use the daylight savings time adjustment function. If [On] is selected, a box used to enter the year, month, and day appears. If this parameter is set to [On] and the summer/winter time is set, this parameter turns [Off] automatically when the set time is elapsed. 2. Summer/Winter Set the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled/disabled. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the year, month, day, and time. Enter the values and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.

10-22

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key.

10
Other Functions

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-23

10.15 Setting the Temperature Unit (Basic Setting Mode)

Select the temperature unit from C or F. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Temperature Unit Select [C] or [F]. [C]: Celsius [F]: Fahrenheit Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key.

10-24

IM 04L01A01-01E

10.16 Setting the Time Zone (Basic Setting Mode)

Set the time difference from GMT (Greenwich mean time). Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white.
MENU

Press Press

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Press the soft ykey

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. GMT Pressing the [Input] soft key or one of the character/number input keys displays a window used to enter the time difference. Enter the value (-1200 to 1200 (upper two digits: hours, lower two digits: minutes)) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. Example: If the local time leads 9 hours to GMT, set 900.

10
Other Functions

IM 04L01A01-01E

10-25

Chapter 11 Computation/Report Function (Option)

11.1 Overview of the Computation Function

Equations can be written to computation channels by using the measured data or computed data as variables. The result of the computation can be displayed or stored. Computation is performed every scan interval. In addition, a moving average (rolling average) can be calculated on the computed result, and the moving average value can be used as the computed data for that channel. For report functions, see sections 11.11 to 11.13.

Computation channels
Model DX102 DX104 DX106 DX112 Channels Channel 31 to 34 (4 channels) Channel 31 to 34 (4 channels) Channel 31 to 42 (12 channels) Channel 31 to 42 (12 channels)

Types of computations
In the table below, y represents the computed result. X and n generally represent the measured data and a constant. For details, see Data that can be used in equations.
Type Four arithmetical operations Description Addition (+), subtraction (), multiplication (), and division (/) Determines the power. y = Xn SQR ABS LOG EXP Relational computation Logical computation Determines the square root. Determines the absolute value. Determines the common logarithm. y = log10x Determines the exponent. y = ex Determines <, , >, , =, of two elements and outputs 0 or 1. Determines the AND (logical product), OR (logical sum), XOR (exclusive logical sum) of two elements, NOT (negation) of an element and outputs 0 or 1. Determines the sum, maximum, minimum, average, and maximum minimum (PP) values at specified time intervals over the time interval. There are three timers used to set the time interval. For detail, see section 11.7.

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

Statistical computation (TLOG)

Data that can be used in equations

For TLOG computation, only measured and computed data can be used. For all other computations, all types of data can be used. Measured data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations. If scaling is in effect, the scaled values are used in the computation. Computed data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations. Constants (K01 to K12) The values assigned to K01 to K12 can be used as constants. Enter the values as K01 to K12 in the equations. Range of constants (Maximum number of significant digits is 5): 9.9999E + 29 to 1.0000E 30, 0, 1.0000E 30 to 9.9999E + 29

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-1

11.1 Overview of the Computation Function Communication input data (C01 to C12) Data that have been specified through the communication interface can be used. Enter the data as C01 to C12 in the equations. For the procedure used to set the data, see the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E). Range of numerical values (Maximum number of significant digits is 5): 9.9999E + 29 to 1.0000E 30, 0, 1.0000E 30 to 9.9999E + 29 Conditions of the remote control terminals (D01 to D08) The conditions of the remote input signal can be assigned to 1 and 0, and used in the equations. Enter the data as D01 to D08 (the number following the letter D is the remote terminal number) in the equations. The correlation between the conditions of the remote input signal and the value 1 and 0 are shown below.
Type of the remote input signal Contact Open collector Status 1 or 0

close open Voltage level is Lo at the remote terminal Voltage level is Hi at the remote terminal

1 0 1 0

Unit handling
The unit corresponding to the measured/computed data in the equation is not compensated. In computations, measured and computed data are handled as values without units. For example, if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V, the computed result of 01 + 02 is 40.

Order of precedence of the operators

The order of precedence of the operators in the equation is as follows. The operators are placed in order from the highest precedence.
Type Functions Power Logical negation Multiplication and division Addition and subtraction Greater than/less than Equal/not equal Logical AND Logical OR, exclusive OR Operator (higher precedence) ABS( ), SQR( ), LOG( ), EXP( ), TLOG.MAX( ), TLOG.MIN(), TLOG.P-P( ), TLOG.SUM( ), TLOG.AVE( ) NOT ,/ +, .GT., .LT., .GE., .LE. .EQ., .NE. AND OR, XOR (lower precedence)

Displaying the computed result

The computed data of computation channels can be displayed in each operation screen. Displaying the waveform and bar graph The data are displayed in the range defined by the upper and lower limits of the span. For the settings related to displaying the computed result, see sections below. Set computation channels: See section 11.4. Assign channels to groups: See section 7.6. Display tags: See sections 7.1 and 7.2. Set the channel display color: See section 7.8. Use zone display: See section 7.9. Set the number of scale divisions: See section 7.10. 11-2
IM 04L01A01-01E

11.1 Overview of the Computation Function Set the base position of the bar graph: See section 7.10. Specify the scale display position: See section 7.10. Use partial expanded display: See sections 7.11 and 7.12. Numerical display The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point. The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel. However, special displays are used for cases given in the table below.
Data Condition The computed result exceeds 99999999. The computed result is below 9999999. The value exceeds 3.4E + 38, or is below 3.4E + 38 in the middle of computation. Computation positive over display range overflow Display + + + or

negative over display range

An error is detected. error When the following computation is specified, a computation error occurs. X/0 SQR (X) LOG (X) When a skipped channel No. is entered in the equation. The number of stacks (see section 11.2) in the equation exceeds 17. error

Rolling average
The moving average of the computed result of the equation specified for the computation channel is determined, and the result is displayed as computed data for that channel. The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel. The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour; the maximum number of samples is 64. The initial setting is [OFF] (do not perform moving average). For the setting procedure, see section 11.10.

Alarm
You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel. The alarm types are upper limit alarm (H), lower limit alarm (L), delay upper limit alarm (T), and delay lower limit alarm (t). The hysteresis is fixed to 0. For the procedures to set the alarms, see section 11.5. For the alarm indication, see sections 4.2 and 6.1.

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

Acquiring the computed data

Display data and event data The computed data from the computation channels can be acquired as the display data and event data in the same manner as for the measurement channels. See chapter 8. Manual sampled data The instantaneous values of all computation channels (excluding the computation channels that are turned Off) can be stored to the internal memory with the manual sampling operation. For the operating procedure, see section 8.12. TLOG data The TLOG data are acquired every interval. For the setting procedure, see section 11.9.

Setting computation channels

The computation channel specifications are set in the setting mode. For detail, see sections 11.4 through 11.6. The timer used in the TLOG computation is set in the basic setting mode. For detail, see section 11.9. 11-3

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.2 Explanation of Computing Equations

This section describes the meaning of the computation equation and how to write them.

Four arithmetical computations

The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data, computed data, constants (K01 to K12), communication interface data (C01 to C12), and the remote control terminal conditions (D01 to D08). EXAMPLE: Addition (+): 01+02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 plus the measured value of channel 2 Subtraction (): 01-02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 minus the measured value of channel 2 Multiplication ( ): 01 K03 Computes the measured value of channel 1 multiplied by constant K03 Division (/): 01/K02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 divided by constant K02

Note
When you set an expression as e.g. 31 + 01 on channel 31, the summation of channel number 1 will be displayed in channel 31.

Power, SQR, ABS, LOG, EXP Computations

The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data, computed data, constants (K01 to K12), communication interface data (C01 to C12), and the remote control terminal conditions (D01 to D08). You can nest a computing element inside the parentheses of another computing element. EXAMPLE: Power ( ): 01 02 Raises measured value of channel 1 to the power of measured value of channel 2 Square root (SQR): SQR (01) Returns the square root of the measured value of channel 1 Absolute value (ABS): ABS (01) Returns the absolute value of the measured value of channel 1 Logarithm (LOG): LOG (01) Returns the common logarithm of the measured value of channel 1 Exponent (EXP): EXP (01) Raises e to the power of the measured value of channel 1

Note
The natural logarithm is not directly provided, but can be obtained by using the following: logex = log10x/log10e as logbx = logax/logab Therefore, to calculate the natural logarithm of the value of channel 01, set K01 = 1. Then the expression will become: LOG (01)/LOG (EXP(K01))

11-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.2 Explanation of Computing Equations

Relational Computation
The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data, computed data, constants (K01 to K12), communication interface data (C01 to C12), and the remote control terminal conditions (D01 to D08). You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element (Example: 01.LT.ABS(02)). EXAMPLE: 02.LT.03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value in channel 3, otherwise the value will be 0. 02.GT.03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value in channel 3, otherwise the value will be 0. 02.EQ.03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value in channel 3, otherwise the value will be 0. 02.NE.03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value in channel 3, otherwise the value will be 0. 02.GE.03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value in channel 3, otherwise the value will be 0. 02.LE.03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value in channel 3, otherwise the value will be 0.

Logical Computation
The computation is performed using e1 and e2 which are identified as either zero or non zero. The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data, computed data, constants (K01 to K12), communication interface data (C01 to C12), and the remote control terminal conditions (D01 to D08). You can specify a computing equation that performs logical computation on a computing element. AND Logical product Syntax:e1ANDe2 Condition: If both e1 and e2 are non 0, the operation results in 1, otherwise in 0. Status: e1 = 0, e2 = 0 e1ANDe2 = 0 e1 0, e2 = 0 e1ANDe2 = 0 e1 = 0, e2 0 e1ANDe2 = 0 e1 0, e2 0 e1ANDe2 = 1

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-5

11.2 Explanation of Computing Equations OR Logical sum Syntax:e1ORe2 Condition: If both e1 and e2 are 0, the operation results in 0, otherwise in 1. Status: e1 = 0, e2 = 0 e1ORe2 = 0 e1 0, e2 = 0 e1ORe2 = 1 e1 = 0, e2 0 e1ORe2 = 1 e1 0, e2 0 e1ORe2 = 1 XOR Mutually exclusive logical sum Syntax:e1XORe2 Condition: If e1 and e2 have different values, the operation results in 1, otherwise in 0. Status: e1 = 0, e2 = 0 e1XORe2 = 0 e1 0, e2 = 0 e1XORe2 = 1 e1 = 0, e2 0 e1XORe2 = 1 e1 0, e2 0 e1XORe2 = 0 NOT Logical negation Syntax:NOTe1 Condition: Reverses the value of data e1 Status: e1 = 0 NOTe1 = 1 e1 0 NOTe1 = 0 EXAMPLE: 01-02OR03.GT.04 Determines the OR of the computed results of 01-02 and 03.GT.04.

11-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.2 Explanation of Computing Equations

TLOG Computation (MAX, MIN, AVE, SUM, MAXMIN)

Only measured data and computed data can be used in the TLOG computation. In the explanation below, e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel. You cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1. In addition, only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation. TLOG.MAX ( ) Syntax: TLOG.MAX (e1) Result: Computes the maximum value of channel e1 TLOG.MIN ( ) Syntax: Result: TLOG.AVE ( ) Syntax: Result:

TLOG.MIN (e1) Computes the minimum value of channel e1

TLOG.AVE (e1) Computes the average value of channel e1

TLOG.SUM ( ) Syntax: TLOG.SUM (e1) Result: Computes the summation of channel e1 TLOG.P-P ( ) Syntax: Result:

TLOG.P-P (e1) Computes the maximum value minimum value of channel e1

An example of computing equations TLOG.MAX(01)+K01 SQR(02) Examples of computing equations that are not allowed TLOG.AVE(01)+TLOG.AVE(02) Reason: TLOG appears twice in one equation. TLOG.AVE(ABS(01)) Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

Rules for writing an equation (common items)

Follow the rules below in writing the computing equations. Use up to 40 characters to write equations. The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses. Specify the channels in the equation using channel numbers. (Example: Channel 1 is 01 or 1) You can use 01 or 1, for example, to specify one-digit numbers for channels, constants, communication input data, and conditions of the remote control terminals in equations. Example: 01, 1, K01, K1, C01, C1, D01, D1 The data value for the channel used in the equation, and for all channels greater in number than that channel, are substituted with data from the previous scan. Do not use more than 16 stacks (channel, K01 to K12, C01 to C12, D01 to D08) in one equation. Otherwise, a computation error may occur. The computed result is set to positive overflow (displayed as + ) in this case. Example: The number of stacks in the equation 01+K01 (03+04 K02) is five.

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-7

11.3 Using the Computation Function

Operations related to the computation function are as follows: Start/stop computation. This operation can be carried out with the START/STOP key, the FUNC key, or the USER key (when [Math] is assigned). Reset computation data. This operation can be carried out with the FUNC key, or the USER key (when [Math rst] is assigned). Release the computation data dropout display. This operation is carried out with the FUNC key.

Start/stop computation
Procedure Operation using the START/STOP key Starting the computation (also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory) 1. Press the START key to start the computation. At this point, the data acquisition to the internal memory is also started. When the computation is started, a computation icon is displayed in the status display section. For details related to the status display section, see section 4.2. Stopping the computation (also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory) 1. Press the STOP key. A confirmation window is displayed. For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), the batch information is also displayed. 2. Use the arrow keys to select [Mem + Math] and press DISP/ENTER to stop the computation. At this point, the data acquisition to the internal memory is also stopped. The computation icon in the status display section also disappears. Operation using the FUNC key 1. Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu. When the computation is suspended the [Math START] soft key is displayed. If the computation is in progress the [Math STOP] soft key is displayed. Starting the computation 2. Press the [Math START] key to start the computation. When the computation is started, a computation icon is displayed in the status display section. For details related to the status display section, see section 4.2.

Stopping the computation 2. Press the [Math STOP] key to stop the computation. The computation icon in the status display section disappears.

11-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.3 Using the Computation Function Operation using the USER key The operation is for when the start/stop function of computation is assigned to the USER key. Starting the computation 1. Press the USER key to start the computation. When the computation is started, a computation icon is displayed in the status display section. For details related to the status display section, see section 4.2. Stopping the computation 1. Press the USER key to stop the computation. The computation icon in the status display section disappears.

Note
When the computation is stopped, the computed data of the computation channel is held at the value that existed immediately before. If data are being written to the internal memory, the value held is written.

Resetting the computation

This is executable only when the computation is suspended. Data from all computation channels are cleared. Procedure Operation using the FUNC key 1. Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu. The [Math RESET] soft key is displayed only when the computation is suspended. 2. Pressing the [Math RESET] soft key clears the data from all computation channels.

Operation using the USER key The operation is for when the reset function of computation is assigned to the USER key. 1. Press the USER key to reset the computation data of all computation channels.

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

Clearing the computation dropout display

When a computation data dropout occurs during computation, the computation icon displayed in the status display section turns yellow. The computation icon will return to a white color once the computation data dropout has been acknowledged.
Computation icon

Procedure 1. Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu. The [Math ACK] soft key is displayed only when a computation data dropout occurs. Pressing the [Math ACK] soft key causes the yellow computation icon in the status display section to return to a white color.

Explanation Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval. When this occurs frequently, lower the CPU load by reducing the number of computation channels or making the scan interval longer. When computation data are acquired to the internal memory, the data immediately before a computation drop out are substituted for the computation data at the time of the dropout. 11-9

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.4 Setting Computation Channels

This section describes the procedures to set equations to computation channels. The equation is set in the setting mode. Equations cannot be set while data acquisition or computation is in progress. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed). The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Twice press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

2 3 5 4

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. 2. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. Math On/Off If [On] is selected a box for the equation will appear. When not using computation, select [Off]. Calculation expression Enter the equation (up to 40 characters). Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter an equation. Enter the equation using the following key operations and press the DISP/ENTER key. For writing equations, see Rules for writing an equation (common items) in section 11.2.

11-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.4 Setting Computation Channels Left and right arrow key: Select the input position. Up and down arrow key: Select the input character. Use the [M1/M2] soft key to switch the function of the window between number input and computing element input. [M1/M2] soft key: Each time the [M1/M2] soft key is pressed the function of the window switches between number input and computing element input. The selected function is displayed to the bottom of the window. [M1]: Number is selected. [M2]: Computing element is selected. [Del] soft key: Delete the character at the cursor position. [Bs] soft key: Delete the character before the cursor position. [Ins] soft key: Switch between insert and overwrite. Each time the [Ins] soft key is pressed insert and overwrite switches. The selected function is displayed to the bottom of the window. [Over]: Overwrites the cursor position. [Ins]: Inserts at the cursor position.

Note
When using TLOG computation, timers must be set in the basic setting mode and the number of the timer and the sum unit (only for TLOG.SUM) must be set in the setting mode.

Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range given below and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. Allowed range: 9999999 to 99999999 The decimal can be set in the following positions: . . . .
The upper and lower limits of span cannot be set to the same value.

Note

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

Unit Set the unit Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a character string. Enter the unit (up to 6 alphanumeric characters) and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering character strings, see Entering Characters on page 3-22.

Note
When computation is turned On/Off or when equations and span settings are changed, the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF.

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-11

11.5 Setting the Alarm

You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel. The alarm types are upper limit alarm (H), lower limit alarm (L), delay upper limit alarm (T), and delay lower limit alarm (t). The hysteresis is fixed to 0.

Note
When [Math On/Off] is turn ON, an entry box used to enter the equation is displayed and the alarm setting boxes are activated (white color). Set the alarm after setting the equation. When computation is turned On/Off or when equations and span settings are changed, the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF.

Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed). The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Twice press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. First channel and last channel Select the desired channels. (For the channels set here, the [Math] is also simultaneously set.) On/Off Turn the alarm On (enabled). Items 3, 4 and 5 are displayed. [On]: Use alarm [Off]: Do not use alarm

11-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.5 Setting the Alarm 3. Type Set the alarm type. [H]: Upper limit alarm [L]: Lower limit alarm [T]: Delay upper limit alarm [t]: Delay lower limit alarm
If you select delay alarm (T or t) for the alarm type, you must set the alarm delay period. See section 6.3.

Note

5.*

6.*

Value Set the value at which the alarm is activated. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. Rly (Relay) Set whether or not to activate the relay output. If [On] is selected, output relay [Number] is displayed. Number Set the output relay number. For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position, see section 2.4.
* If the alarm output relay option (/AR1, /AR2, or /A3) is not installed, this setting is void.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Alarm type Four types of alarms are available.
Name Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Delay upper limit alarm Symbol H L T Description An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value. An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value. An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period (delay period, see section 6.3, "Setting the Alarm Delay Period."). An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period (delay period, see section 6.3, "Setting the Alarm Delay Period.").

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

Delay lower limit alarm

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-13

11.6 Setting Constants

Total of 12 constants (K01 to K12) can be defined. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed). The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Twice press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

#10

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Constant Select the constant you wish to set using the arrow keys. Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value. Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP/ENTER key. For the procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21. [E], [+]: Used when setting numbers with exponents. Example: 5.0E+12

11-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.7 TLOG Computation

Determines the sum, maximum, minimum, average, and maximum minimum (PP) values of the specified channel at specified time intervals. The interval is set by timers. The example shown in the following figure indicates the case in which the average value of channel 1 over each interval, TLOG.AVE(01), is determined.
Equation : TLOG.AVG(01) Average value Average value

Scan interval

Interval set by a timer Time

Sampling

TLOG computation cannot be performed when the corresponding measurement channel is set to [Skip] or the corresponding computation channel is turned Off.

Timer Mode and Action

Timer mode There are two timer modes: absolute mode and relative mode. Absolute mode Timer expires at times determined from the reference time and the interval. The reference time is specified by the hour (00 to 23). Example 1: Reference time: 14:00 Interval: 12 h The expiration time is set to 2:00 (2:00 AM) and 14:00 (2:00 PM). Example 2: Reference time: 00:00 Interval: 10 min The expiration time is set to 0:00, 0:10, 0:20, ..., 23:40, and 23:50. For example, if the computation is started at 9:36, the time expiration will occur at 09:40, 09:50, 10:00, and so on. Relative mode The timer is started when the computation is started. The timer is repeated at each interval. The timer is suspended while the power is lost. Example: Interval: 00:15 The timer expires every 15 minutes after the computation is started. Setting timers Timers are set in the basic setting mode. For detail, see section 11.9. Setting the timer No. for TLOG computation The number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG is selected from 1, 2, and 3 in the setting mode. For the setting procedure, see section 11.8.

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

About the sum scale of the TLOG.SUM

In the sum computation (TLOG.SUM) of time series, data are summed over the scan interval. However, for flow values that have units /s, /min, or /h, a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result, because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different. In these cases, the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed.

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-15

11.7 TLOG Computation For example, if the scan interval is 2 s, and the input value is 100 m3/min, a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute. However, if the computing unit is set to /min, then 2 s/60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has a m3/min unit. The following equations are applied. The scan interval unit is in seconds. Off (measured value) /s (measured value) x scan interval /min (measured value) x scan interval/60 /h (measured value) x scan interval/3600 For the setting procedure, see section 11.8.

About [Reset]
Whether or not to reset the computed result at every timeout is selectable. The figure below shows the action of TLOG.SUM computation. Example: Result of the TLOG.SUM computation
Interval Reset = On 1 Reset 2 Reset 3 Reset

Reset = Off

In case of TLOG.MAX computation, for example, the maximum value is derived for every interval when Reset is On, and the maximum value from the start of computation is derived when Reset is Off.

If power is lost while the TLOG computation was in progress

The TLOG computation is resumed when the power is restored. The operation varies depending on whether power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create the TLOG data.
Time of Recovery After the time to create the TLOG data TLOG Computation Operation TLOG data are created immediately when power is restored. The measured/computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used. At the next scheduled TLOG computation time, data will be used from the point in time after the power was restored. After power is restored, TLOG data are created at the normally scheduled time to perform the TLOG computation. All measured/ computed data excluding the power disruption period are used.

Before the time to create the TLOG data

How the measured/computed data are handled when there is an abnormality in the data
Type of Abnormal Data Positive over* Negative over* Error * Report Data AVE not used not used not used MAX/MIN/P-P used used not used SUM not used not used not used

over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels

11-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.8 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation
Set the number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG. Also, set the [sum scale] that is used when determining the sum in TLOG.SUM. These are set in the setting mode. The timer specifications are set in the basic setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. (The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed). The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press
MENU

Twice press the soft key

Next 1/3

To display the setting screen press the soft key

#11

2 3

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)
The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. First-CH and Last-CH Select the desired channels. (For the channels set here, the [Tag], [Rolling average], and [Alarm Delay Time] are also simultaneously set.) Timer No. This is the timer specified in the basic setting mode. Select 1, 2, or 3. Sum scale When the channel is computing TLOG.SUM, select [Off], [/s], [/min], or [/h]. The initial setting is [Off]. You do not have to set this for channels that are not computing TLOG.SUM (leave it [Off]).

2. 3.

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-17

11.9 Setting the Timer (Basic Setting Mode)

Up to three timers can be specified. The timers specified here are used to determine the interval for the TLOG computation. In addition, all the data of measurement and computation channels can be stored at the interval determined by the timers. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

Report data display The reports can be displayed from the [Information] - [Memory Summary] menu in the operation mode. See section 4.5. Status display If the data of a measurement or a computation channel enter any of the conditions listed below within the relevant time period (one hour for hourly reports and one day for daily reports, for example), status is output to the report. For the displayed position, see the report data output example in section 4.5.
Power Failure/Time Change Power failure Time change Status P C

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-23

11.11 Overview of the Report Function

Data Condition Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error Status E

For measurement channels Positive (+) over range O Negative () over range O Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5% of the measurable range. For example, consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2.000 to 2.000 V. If the input signal exceeds 2.200 V, + over range occurs. If the input signal falls below 2.200 V, over range occurs. Over range occurs when the input type is TC (thermocouple) or RTD (resistance temperature detector) and the input exceeds approximately 10C of the measurable range. For example, consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0.0 to 1760.0C. If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770.0C, + over range occurs. If the input signal falls below approximately 10.0C, over range occurs. For computation channels Positive (+) computation overflow (when the value exceeds 3.4E + 38) O Negative () computation overflow (when the value falls below 3.4E + 38) O

Numerical display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point. The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel. However, special displays are used for cases given in the table below. Measurement channel
Item AVE (Average value) MAX, MIN (Maximum value, minimum value) SUM (Sum value) Data Condition of Measurement Channels When all data are measurement errors or over range When all data are measurement errors Positive (+) over range Negative () over range When all data are measurement errors or over range When the sum value exceeds 3.4E + 38 When the sum value is below 3.4E + 38 Displayed value (Blank) (Blank) 99999 99999 (Blank) 9.999999E + 99 9.999999E + 99

Computation channel
Item AVE (Average value) MAX, MIN (Maximum value, minimum value) Data Condition of Computation Channels When all data are computation errors or over range When all data are computation errors When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 When the minimum value is below 9999999 Displayed value (Blank) (Blank) 999999999 99999999

The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values. For example, if the span setting of the equation is 200.0, then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999.9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999.9. SUM (Sum value) When all data are computation errors or computation overflow When the sum value exceeds 3.4E + 38 When the sum value is below 3.4E + 38 (Blank) 9.999999E + 99 9.999999E + 99

Storing to the internal memory and Saving to the external storage medium
Report data are stored to the internal memory at the end of each time interval. The maximum number of report data files (data set for each interval) that can be stored in the internal memory is 40. For detail, see chapter 8. 11-24
IM 04L01A01-01E

11.12 Using the Report Function

Starting/Stopping the report function
The report start/stop is in sync with the data acquisition start/stop. Procedure Starting the report (also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory) 1. Press the START key. The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a start icon and the computation icon appears. For details related to the status display section, see section 4.2. The report function starts. When the time to create the report arrives, the report data are stored to the internal memory. Stopping the report (also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory) 1. Press the STOP key. A confirmation window opens. For models with the batch function (/BT1 option), the batch information is also displayed. 2. Use the arrow keys to select [Mem + Math] (stop the data acquisition to the internal memory and computation) or [Mem] (stop the data acquisition), and press the DISP/ENTER key. The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a stop icon. The report stops.

Note
When the report function is stopped, the report file on the external storage medium is closed. When the report function is started again, the data is saved to a new file.

Clearing the report data in the internal memory

These procedures are carried out in the setting mode. The report data are cleared along with the display data, for example. For the procedures, see section 9.7.

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-25

11.13 Setting the Report Function (Basic Setting Mode)

Set the report type, report channels, the time and date to create the report. The report function is set in the basic setting mode. Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (blue) to the appropriate parameter. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Select using the soft keys. The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow. By confirming the new settings, they change back to white. Press Press
MENU

. for 3 seconds. The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears.

FUNC

Twice press the soft key Press the soft key

Next 1/3 #9
.

To display the setting screen press the soft key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure. 1. Report set [Hour]: Creates hourly reports. [Day]: Creates daily reports. [Hour +Day]: Creates hourly and daily reports. [Day+Week]: Creates daily and weekly reports. [Day+Month]: Creates daily and monthly reports. Date/Day of the week This is the date or day of the week on which the report is created. If the [Report set] is set to [Day+Month], [Date] is displayed. If [Day+Week] is specified, [Day] is displayed. If [Hour], [Day], or [Hour+Day] is specified, [Date] is displayed. However, this setting is void. Date (for monthly reports) Pressing the [Input] soft key displays a window used to enter the date. Enter the date (01-28)* and press the DISP/ENTER key. Procedures related to entering numerical values, see Entering Numbers on page 3-21.
* You cannot specify 29, 30 or 31.

Day (for weekly reports) Enter the day of the week using the soft key.

11-26

IM 04L01A01-01E

11.13 Setting the Report Function (Basic Setting Mode) 3. Time (hour) Set the time to create daily, weekly, and monthly reports with the time on the hour (00 to 23). Enter the time using the same method as step 2. This setting is void for hourly reports. Report CH This is the report channel to which the measurement/computation channel is assigned. Select from R01 to R12. The reports are output in order according to this number. On/Off [On]: Use the report channel. [Off]: Do not use the report channel. The report data number and the data are not displayed. Channel Set the measurement or computation channel to assign to the report channel. All measurement and computation channels can be specified. However, the reports are not created for channels that are set to [Skip] or those that have the computation turned [Off]. Sum scale (sum unit) Select [Off], [/s], [/min], [/h], or [/day]. See section 11.11.

Confirming operation To confirm the new settings, press the DISP/ENTER key. To cancel the new settings, press the ESC key. A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation. Select [Yes] using the arrow keys and press the DISP/ENTER key. Explanation Date/Day of the week This is the date for monthly reports or the day of the week for weekly reports. The report is created at the specified time on the specified date or day of the week. Time This is the time at which daily, weekly, and monthly reports are created. Hourly reports are created every hour on the hour.

11
Computation/Report Function (Option)

IM 04L01A01-01E

11-27

Chapter 12 Troubleshooting

12.1 A List of Messages

Occasionally, error codes and messages appear on the screen while using the DX100. The entire list of messages is given below. Error codes and messages related to communications are also listed here. The messages are displayed in the language that you have chosen. For the procedures regarding language selection, see section 10.10.

Errors Related to Parameter Settings Setting Errors

Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 21 22 23 30 31 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 45 46 61 62 63 64 70 71 81 83 85 86 87 88 89 Message System error. Incorrect date or time setting. A disabled channel is selected. Incorrect function parameter. The input numerical value exceeds the set range. Incorrect input character string. Too many characters. Incorrect input mode. Incorrect input range code. Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel. The upper and lower span limits are equal. The upper and lower scale limits are equal. The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span. Partial expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel. The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal. The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper limit. The display band is narrower than 4% of the entire display. Incorrect group set character string. There is no specified input channel. Exceeded the number of channels which can be set. A channel number cannot repeat in a group. There is no character string saved in the clipboard. The character string saved in the clipboard is too long. There is no channel specified by the MATH expression. MATH expression grammar is incorrect. MATH expression sequence is incorrect. MATH upper and lower span values are equal. The range of the MATH constant is exceeded. Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded. All space or quit string cannot be specified. Duplicate used combination of user ID and password. The login password is incorrect. The key-lock release password is incorrect. This key is locked. This function is locked. Press [FUNC] key to login. Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. See section 3.7. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual. Enter a proper value. Enter a proper character string. Enter specified number of characters. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See sections 5.1 to 5.7. See sections 5.5 and 5.6. See section 7.11. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See section 7.9. See section 7.9. See section 7.9. See section 7.6. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See section 7.6. Copy a character string to the clipboard. Paste a character string with the specified number of characters. See section 11.4. See section 11.2. See section 11.2. See section 11.4. See section 11.4. See section 11.6. See section 10.6. See section 10.6 (when /BT1 is equipped). See section 10.5. See section 10.3. See section 10.3. See section 10.3. See section 10.5.

12
Troubleshooting

IM 04L01A01-01E

12-1

12.1 A List of Messages

Code 90 91 92 93 94 100 101 102 103 104 Message No permission to enter to the SETUP mode. Password is incorrect. Press [ESC] key to change to the operation mode. String including space or all space cannot be specified. More than one address cannot be specified. IP address doesnt belong to class A, B, or C. The result of the masked IP address is all 0s or 1s. SUBNET mask is incorrect. The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address. FTP client failed because the memory mode is manual. Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section See sections 10.5 and 10.6. See sections 10.3 and 10.5. Press the ESC key. Spaces are not allowed in the Web user name and password. Multiple addresses cannot be specified. Only a single sender is allowed. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual. See Communication Interface Users Manual.

Execution Errors
Code 150 151 152 153 155 160 Message This action is not possible because sampling is in progress. This action is not possible during sampling or calculating. This action is not possible because saving is in progress. This action is not possible because formatting is in progress. The message is not written while sampling is stopped. Cannot load the specified data. Change the memory setting. Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section See sections 8.5 and 8.6. See sections 8.5, 8.6, and 11.3. Wait till the saving ends. Wait till the formatting ends. See sections 8.5 and 8.6. See sections 4.5, 9.3, and 9.4.

Operation Errors Errors related to external storage medium

Code 200 201 202 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 230 231 Message Operation aborted because an error was found in media. Not enough free space on media. Media is read-only. Media has not been inserted. Media is damaged or not formatted. Format error. The file is read-only. There is no file or directory. Exceeded the allowable number of files. The file or directory name is incorrect. Unknown file type. Directory exists. Delete the directory or change directory name. Invalid file or directory operation. The file is already in use. Try again later. There is no setting file. Abnormal setting exists in file. Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section See Communication Interface Users Manual. Use another storage medium. Release the write protection. Insert a storage medium into the drive. Use another storage medium or carry out formatting. Try formatting again or use another storage medium. Access to other files or make the file write-enable. See Communication Interface Users Manual. Delete files or change storage medium. See sections 8.9 and 9.1. Access to other files. See section 8.9. Cannot handle files and directories in the 2nd and deeper layers. Wait till file is free. Access to other files. Access to other files.

12-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

12.1 A List of Messages

Errors related to historical trend

Code 232 233 234 Message There is no available data. The specified historical data do not exist. The specified channel is not assigned to the display group. Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section This message may appear when recalling historical trend. Access to other files. This message may appear when recalling historical trend. See section 4.5. This message may appear when switching to trend or bar graph from overview. See sections 4.4 and 7.6.

Errors related to e-mail and Web server

Code 260 261 Message IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available. SMTP server is not found. Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section The IP address is not specified. Check the IP address. Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name. Check the DNS setting. Check the SMTP server name. The host name of the DX is not correct. Check the host name. The port number for SMTP server is not correct. Check the port number. Check the senders address. Check the recipients address. May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in the middle of the e-mail transmission. Check the cable connection. Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the network. If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP address, check to see that the IP address is correct. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in the middle of the e-mail transmission. The setup screen cannot be output to the Web. This message is displayed on the Web screen.

262

Cannot initiate E-mail transmission.

263 264 265

Senders address rejected by the server. Some recipients addresses are invalid. SMTP protocol error.

266 267

Ethernet cable is not connected. Could not connect to SMTP server.

268 269

E-mail transmission request failed. E-mail transfer error.

275 276

The current image cannot be output to the Web.

12
Troubleshooting

Image data currently being created. Unable to perform key operation. Try again a little later. This message is displayed on the Web screen. Could not output screen to Web. Failed to create the image. This message is displayed on the Web screen.

Note
The FTP client function on the DX100 has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes. If the server does not respond within this time period, the transfer fails. The FTP client function on the DX100 overwrites files with the same file names on the server without any warnings, unless the server rejects the request. For information regarding the FTP client function of the DX100, see the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E).

Communication Errors
For information regarding the communication function of the DX100, see the DX100/ DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E).

Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes, Output Communication Command Execution, and Setup Data Loading
Code 300 301 302 303 350 351 352 353 354 Message Command is too long. Too many number of commands delimited with ;. This command has not been defined. Data request command can not be enumerated with sub-delimiter. Command is not permitted to the current user level. This command cannot be specified in the current mode. The option is not installed. This command cannot be specified in the current setting. This command is not available during sampling or calculating.

12-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

12.1 A List of Messages

Memory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output Communication Command Execution
An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed on the screen.
Code 360 361 362 363 Message Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or RS by using XO command. The memory data is not saved for the communication output. There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND. All data have already been transferred.

Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors

An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed on the screen.
Code 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 Message Command error. Delimiter error. Parameter error. No permission. No such connection. Use quit to close this connection. Failed to disconnect. No TCP control block.

Other Communication Errors

An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed on the screen.
Code 400 401 402 403 404 410 411 420 421 422 Message Input username. Input password. Select username from admin or user. Login incorrect, try again! No more login at the specified level is acceptable. Login successful. (The special user level) Login successful. (The general user level) Connection has been lost. The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded. Communication has timed-out.

12
Troubleshooting

Note
For information regarding the communication function of the DX100, see the DX100/DX200 Communication Interface Users Manual (IM 04L02A01-17E).

IM 04L01A01-01E

12-7

12.1 A List of Messages

Status Messages
Code 500 501 503 504 505 506 507 510 511 512 520 521 551 Message Execution is complete. Please wait a moment... Data are being saved to media... File is being loaded from media... Formatting... Memory save to media was interrupted. Exchange media to continue the saving operation. Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating. MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating. Because memory save is manual mode, FTP is not available. Connecting to the line... The data file is being transferred. FTP test is being executed...

Cautions
Code 600 601 610 611 Message Measured data and Settings have been initialized. Measured data have been initialized. This username is already registered. There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode. Ref. section See section 10.6. See section 10.6.

System Errors
Servicing is required when a system error occurs. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Code 901 902 910 911 912 913 914 921 922 923 924 930 940 Message ROM failure. RAM failure. A/D memory failure for all input channels. Channel 1 A/D memory failure. Channel 2 A/D memory failure. Channel 3 A/D memory failure. Channel 4 A/D memory failure. Channel 1 A/D calibration value error. Channel 2 A/D calibration value error. Channel 3 A/D calibration value error. Channel 4 A/D calibration value error. Memory acquisition failure. The Ethernet module is down.

12-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

IM 04L01A01-01E

Wire correctly (See section 2.3). Fix the terminal block properly. Fasten the terminal screws. Insulate the RTD from ground. If burnt, replace the TC.

YES

Is the input wiring parallel with other equipment?

YES

Stop the TC burnout upscale/downscale function of other equipment. Ground the recorder and other equipment at the same grounding pole. Disconnect parallel wiring. (Use a double-element TC, for instance.)

Is the RJC setting correct (for TC input)?

Set correctly (See section 5.9).

YES

Contact your nearest Sales & Service Center.

12-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

12.2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart

Display and other functions do not work properly.

Is the input free of noise?

YES

Separate the input and communication wiring from the noise source. Ground the recorder properly. Use shielded cables for input and communication wiring. Insert an isolation transformer into the power line. Insert a power line filter into the power line. If an inductive load is connected to an alarm contact output, use a surge suppresser on that line.

Contact your nearest Sales & Service Center.

12
Troubleshooting

IM 04L01A01-01E

12-11

Chapter 13 Maintenance

13.1 Periodic Maintenance

Check the operation periodically to keep the DX100 in good working order. Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed. Is the display and storage functioning properly? In the event of problems, see section 12.2. Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated? If replacement is necessary, see section 13.4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts.

13
Maintenance

IM 04L01A01-01E

13-1

13.2 Replacing the Fuse

Replace the fuse every two years for preventive maintenance.

WARNING
For safety reasons, make sure to turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the DX100 from the main power supply before replacing the fuse. To prevent the possibility of fire, use only the specified fuse purchased from YOKOGAWA. Never short circuit the fuse holder to bypass the use of a fuse. To avoid the possibility of electric shock, open the front panel only when replacing the fuse. Do not touch the rear side of the front panel when replacing the fuse, because it can become hot. Make sure not to damage the cable while replacing the fuse.

For fuse rating, see section 13.4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts. Follow the procedures below to replace the fuse. 1. Turn OFF the power switch. 2. Disconnect the DX100 from the main power supply. 3. Open the cover and remove the two screws. 4. Pull the front panel slightly toward you and lift it. 5. While pressing the fuse carrier located to the right of the power switch, turn it counterclockwise approximately 45 degrees. The carrier and the fuse will slide out. 6. Replace with a new fuse, insert the carrier in the fuse holder, and turn it clockwise while pressing the carrier to fix it in place. 7. Lift the front panel slightly, and attach it to the top and then the bottom of the rubber packing. Secure the front panel with screws.

Note
For DX100s which are side-by-side mounted vertically, a front panel always interfere the upper one when it is opened so that front panels except the top one cant be opened directly. First open the top front panel and then the lower one by one. For the same reason, when closing front panels, first close the bottom front panel and then the upper one by one.

13-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

13.3 Calibration
To maintain the measurement accuracy, we recommend the DX100 be calibrated once a year. Calibration service is also provided by YOKOGAWA dealers. For details, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

Required Instruments
For calibrating the DX100, calibration instruments with the following resolution are necessary. Recommended Instruments DC voltage standard: YOKOGAWA Model 2552 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 20 mV to 20 V: 0.005% Decade resistance box: Yokogawa M&C Model 2793-01 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 0.1 to 500 : (0.01%+2 m) Resolution: 0.001 (To purchase these instruments, contact the supplier of the DX100 .)

Calibration procedure
1. Connect the DX100 and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure, and allow the instruments to warm-up adequately ( warm-up time for the DX100 is at least 30 minutes). Check that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the normal operating conditions (See chapter 14). Apply input signals corresponding to 0, 50, and 100% of the specified input range and calculate the errors from the readings. If the error is not within the accuracy specifications, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

2. 3.

Note
For TC input, the temperature of the input terminals must be measured and a voltage corresponding to the temperature at the reference junction must be added.

DC Voltage Measurement (Example for the DX112)

13
Maintenance

+ Input terminals DC voltage standard

+ -

IM 04L01A01-01E

13-3

13.3 Calibration Temperature Measurement Using the RTD (Example for the DX112)

The resistance of three lead wires must be equal.

/b +/A

-/B

Input terminals

Decade resistance box (Model 2793-01 from Yokogawa M&C)

Temperature Measurement Using the TC (Example for the DX112)

Copper wires Thermocouple wires or TC extension wires

+
-

DC voltage standard

Copper wires

Thermocouple wires

0 C standard temperature device

Input terminals

Reference Junction Compensation for the Thermocouple Input As the measurement terminal of the DX100 is generally at room temperature, the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0C. The DX100 measures the temperature of the terminal and makes adjustments by calculation. Therefore, when the measurement terminals are shorted (equivalent to 0C at the detector tip), the temperature at the measurement terminal is displayed. When calibrating the DX100, this compensation voltage (thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature) must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application. As shown in the figure, by using the 0 C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 C, you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference from the DC voltage standard and make the calibration.

13-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

13.4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts

To maintain the reliability of the DX100 and to use it in good working order for a long time, we recommend periodic replacement of worn parts as preventive maintenance. The recommended replacement periods for worn parts are shown in the following table. The replacement periods apply when the DX100 is operated under standard operating conditions. Please consider the actual operating conditions when determining the actual replacement periods for your DX100. The replacement of the worn parts except the fuse must be conducted by a qualified YOKOGAWA personnel. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have the LCD replaced.

Item Fuse

Replacement Part Name Period 2 years 2 years FUSE FUSE Back light module Lithium battery

Part Number A1347EF A1352EF

Specifications 250 V, 1 A, time lag

Quantity Used 1 1 1 1 for front panel,

(except for /P1 model)

250 V, 4 A, time lag

(for /P1 model)

LCD Battery 5 years 10 years

Rubber 5 years 1 each strip Floppy disk drive Zip drive PWB assembly * 5 years 5 years 5 years 5 years 5 years

Dust and water proof rubber strip for front cover

1 1 Power Assy* Sub Power Assy* AD Assy* 1 1 Up to models

Replacement Period at the Upper Limit of the Normal Operating Temperature (50C) The replacement period varies depending on the temperature in which the instrument is operated, and the instruments specifications. If the instrument is used in a 30C environment, it may be operational for 10 years or more.

Note
The recommended replacement period for the back light module is the period when the brightness falls to half. The speed of degradation of the brightness varies depending on the operating conditions and the judgement is subjective. These factors should be considered when determining the actual replacement period.

13
Maintenance

IM 04L01A01-01E

13-5

Chapter 14 Specifications

14.1 Input Specifications

Number of Inputs: DX102: two channels DX104: four channels DX106: six channels DX112: twelve channels DX102, DX104: 125 ms or 250 ms DX106, DX112: 1 s or 2 s (2 s when an A/D integration time is set to 100 ms) Volt (DC voltage), TC (thermocouple), RTD (resistance temperature detector), DI (digital input), DC current (with external shunt resistor attached)
Measuring range 20.00 to 20.00 mV 60.00 to 60.00 mV 200.0 to 200.0 mV 2.000 to 2.000 V 6.000 to 6.000 V 20.00 to 20.00 V 50.00 to 50.00 V 32 to 3200F 0.0 to 1760C 32 to 3200F 0.0 to 1760C 32 to 3308F 0.0 to 1820C 200.0 to 1370C 328 to 2498F 200.0 to 800C 328.0 to 1472.0F 200.0 to 1100C 328.0 to 2012.0F 200.0 to 400C 328.0 to 752.0F 32 to 2372F 0.0 to 1300C 32 to 4199F 0.0 to 2315C 200.0 to 900C 328.0 to 1652.0F 200.0 to 400C 328.0 to 752.0F 200.0 to 600C 328.0 to 1112.0F 200.0 to 550C 328.0 to 1022.0F OFF: less than 2.4 V ON: more than 2.4 V Contact ON/OFF

Scan Interval:

Inputs:

Input type

Volt

RTD*5

DI *1 *2 *3 *4

Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V 6V 20 V 50 V R*1 S*1 B*1 K*1 E*1 J*1 T*1 N*1 W*2 L*3 U*3 Pt100*4 JPt100*4 DCV input (TTL) Contact input

R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N: IEC584-1 (1995), DIN IEC584, JIS C1602-1995 W: W-5% Rd/W-26% Rd (Hoskins Mfg. Co.), ASTM E988 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710, U: Cu-CuNi, DIN43710 Pt100: JIS C1604-1997, IEC751-1995, DIN IEC751-1996 JPt100: JIS C1604-1989, JIS C1606-1989 *5 Measuring current: i = 1 mA

Selectable from 20 ms (50 Hz), 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 100 ms (50/ 60 Hz for DX106/112), or AUTO (automatic selection from 20 ms and 16.7 ms by detection of power supply frequency) Thermocouple Burnout: Burnout upscale/downscale function can be switched ON/OFF (for each channel). Burnout upscale/downscale selectable Filter: DX102, DX104: Signal damping On/off selectable for each channel Time constant: selectable from 2, 5, and 10 seconds DX106, DX112: Moving average On/off selectable for each channel Number of samples to be averaged is selectable from 2 to 16

A/D Integration Time:

14
Specifications

IM 04L01A01-01E

14-1

14.1 Input Specifications Computation: Differential computation: Between any two channels Available for Volt, TC, RTD, and DI ranges. Linear scaling: Available for Volt, TC, RTD, and DI ranges. Scaling limits: 30000 to 30000 Decimal point: user selectable Engineering unit: user definable, up to 6 characters Square root: Square root computation and linear scaling Available for Volt range. Scaling limits: 30000 to 30000 Decimal point: user selectable Engineering unit: user definable, up to 6 characters

14-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.2 Display Specifications

Display unit: Channel display color: 5.5-inch TFT color LCD (VGA, 240 320 dot resolution) Trend/Bar graph: Selectable from 16 colors (Red, Green, Blue, Blue violet, Brown, Orange, Yellow green, Lightblue, Violet, Gray, Lime, Cyan, Darkblue, Yellow, Light Gray, Purple) Initial settings of channel display color: Channel 1: Red, Channel 2: Green, Channel 3: Blue, Channel 4: Blue violet, Channel 5: Brown, Channel 6: Orange, Channel 7: Yellow-green, Channel 8: Light blue, Channel 9: violet, Channel 10: Gray, Channel 11: Lime 12: Cyan Background: White or black selectable Direction: vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels: 6 channels per screen (maximum) Number of group screens: 4 All channels indication: 24 channels (maximum, including computation channels) Line width: 1, 2, and 3 dots selectable Display update rate: Waveform: (One division has 30 dots.) DX102, DX104: 15 s, 30 s, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 min., 1, 2, 4, 10 hours/div selectable DX106, DX112: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 min., 1, 2, 4, 10 hours/div selectable Numerical value: 1 s (2 s when the scan interval is 2 s.) Contents: Waveform, Numerical value (numerical display section can be turned ON/OFF), scale (scale display can be turned ON/OFF), grid lines (number of divisions selectable from 4 to 12), hours : minutes on time axis, trip lines (line widths are selectable from 1, 2 and 3 dots), messages (up to eight different messages of up to 16 characters for each), alarm indication Zone display and partial expanded display are available. Direction: Vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels: 6 channels per screen (maximum) Number of group screens: 4 Scales: 4 to 12 divisions selectable Base position of bar: Left, right or center (only for horizontal display) Display update rate: 1 s (2 s when the scan interval is 2 s) Contents: Bar graph, numerical value, unit, scale, alarm indication 14-3

Trend screen:

14
Specifications

Bar graph screen:

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.2 Display Specifications Number of indication channels: 6 channels per screen (maximum) Number of group screens: 4 Display update rate: 1 s (2 s when the scan interval is 2 s) Contents: Numerical value, unit, alarm indication Automatic display switching: The displayed group can be automatically changed on the trend, digital, and bar graph screens. The display switching interval is selectable from 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, and 1 min. Overview screen: Number of indication channels: Measured values and alarm status of all channels Information screen: Alarm summary: Displays the list of alarms. Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing. Message summary: Display the list of messages and time. Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing. Memory summary: Display the file list in internal memory. Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing. Tags: Number of characters: 16 characters maximum Historical trend screen: Display the retrieved data from internal or external memory. Display format: Whole screen display or divided into 2 areas (only when displaying the historical trend of the display data) Time axis operation: Can be expanded, reduced, and scrolled Memory information: The following information of the retrieved data are displayed: File name, serial number of the DX which is used to acquire data, starting and ending time of data acquisition, user name (when using key login function), and batch information (models with /BT1) Log display: Display the logs of error messages, key login/logout, communication interface commands, and file transfers via FTP. System screen: Display the number of input points, capacity of the internal memory, options, MAC address, and firmware version number. Backlight saver function: The LCD backlight automatically dims if no key is pressed for a certain preset time (can be set from 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 and 60 minutes). Display language: Selectable from English, German, French, and Japanese. Temperature unit: C or F selectable Digital screen:

14-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.3 Data Storage Specifications

External storage medium: Selectable from: 1) 3.5-inch floppy disk (2HD, 1.44 MB) 2) PCMCIA ATA flash memory card (4 to 440 MB), or CF card (32 to 512 MB, adapter required) 3) Zip disk (100 MB) Saving method: Manual or automatic selectable Manual saving: Data saving by inserting external storage medium Automatic saving: Display data: Periodic saving (10 min to 31 days) to external storage medium Event data: In case of trigger free...Periodic saving (3 min to 31 days) to external storage medium In case of using trigger...Save the data when data acquisition is finished Sampling Interval: Display data: Linked with the waveform display update rate Event data: Linked with the specified sampling interval Sampling Interval for Event Data: A sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval cannot be specified. DX102, DX104: Selectable from 125, 250, 500 ms, and 1, 2, 5, 10, 30, 60, 120 s, 300 s, 600 s DX106, DX112: Selectable from 1, 2, 5, 10, 30, 60, 120, 300, and 600 s File types: The following two file types can be created. Event data file (stores instantaneous values acquired periodically at a specified sampling interval) Display data file (stores the maximum and minimum values for each sampling interval from among measured data acquired at scan intervals) Files can be created in the following combinations. Event data file (only for trigger mode) + display data file Display data file only Event data file only Data format: Binary Data size per channel: Display data: Measurement data...4 bytes/datum, computation data...8 bytes/datum Event data: Measurement data...2 bytes/datum, computation data...4 bytes/datum Modes for event data: Event data only: Selectable from Free, Trigger or Rotate Display data + Event data: Selectable from Trigger or Rotate Sampling length: The sampling length (the maximum data length) can be derived from the following equation. Sampling length = the maximum number of data points per channel sampling interval Maximum number of data points per channel: calculated from internal memory capacity, types of data, data size, and number of measurement or computation channels data to be stored 14-5

14
Specifications

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.3 Data Storage Specifications Internal memory capacity

Data type Display data only Display data and event data Event data only Capacity of internal memory 1.2 MB Display data: 0.9 MB Event data: 0.3 MB 1.2 MB

Maximum number of data points per channel that can be stored

Data type Display data only Maximum number of data points per channel 1,200,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 4 + number of computation channels 8) Except, the maximum number of data points is 100,000 Display data 900,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 4 + number of computation channels 8) Except, the maximum number of data points is 75,000 Event data 300,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 2 + number of computation channels 4) Except, the maximum number of data points is 30,000

Display data and event data

Event data only

1,200,000 bytes/(number of measurement channels 2 + number of computation channels 4) Except, the maximum number of data points is 120,000

This logic is explained in more detail below: 1) When acquiring display data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20, the number of computing channels is 10, and the display rate is 30 min/div (60 sec sampling interval), then: Number of data per channel = 1,200,000 bytes/(20 4 bytes + 10 8 bytes) = 7,500 data*
* Maximum number of data points is 100,000.

Sampling length per file = 7,500 60 sec = 450,000 sec = approx. 5 days 2) When acquiring event data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20, the number of computing channels is 10, and the sampling interval is 1 sec, then: Number of data per channel = 1,200,000 bytes/(20 2 bytes + 10 4 bytes) = 15,000 data*
* Maximum number of data points is 100,000.

Sampling length = 15,000 1 sec = 15,000 sec = approx. 4 hours 3) When acquiring both display data and event data The sampling length is calculated by defining the capacity for display data as 900,000 bytes and the capacity for event data as 300,000 bytes. The method of calculation is the same as shown above. Except, the maximum number of data points is 75,000 for display data and 30,000 for event data.

14-6

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.3 Data Storage Specifications Example of sampling length:

In case measurement ch = 4 ch, mathematical ch = 0 ch Display data file only Display rate 1 min (min/div) Sampling interval 2s (s) Sampling length Event data file only Sampling interval Sampling length 125 ms 500 ms 4.2 h 16 h 1s 33 h 5s 6 days 41 h 5 min 10 s 20 min 40 s 30 min 60 s 60 min 120 s (approx.) 240 min 480 s

8 days 34 days 52 days 104 days 416 days (approx.) 30 s 120 s 41 days 166 days (approx.) 20 min 40 s 30 min 60 s 60 min 120 s 240 min 480 s

Display data file + Event data file Display data file Display rate (min/div) Sampling interval (s) Sampling length Event data file Sampling interval Sampling length 125 ms 500 ms 1 s 1h 4.2 h 8.3 h 5s 41 h 30 s 10 days 1 min 2s 31 h 5 min 10 s

6 days 26 days 39 days 78 days 312 days (approx.) 120 s 41 days

In case measurement ch = 6 ch, mathematical ch = 0 ch Display data file only Display rate (min/div) Sampling interval (s) Sampling length Event data file only Sampling interval Sampling length 1s 27 h 1 min 2s 27 h 5 min 10 s 20 min 40 s 30 min 60 s 60 min 120 s (approx.) 240 min 480 s

5 days 23 days 34 days 69 days 277 days (approx.) 5s 10 s 30 s 60 s 120 s 5 days 11 days 34 days 69 days 138 days (approx.) 20 min 40 s 30 min 60 s 60 min 120 s 240 min 480 s

Display data file + Event data file Display data file Display rate (min/div) Sampling interval (s) Sampling length Event data file Sampling interval Sampling length 1s 6.9 h 5s 34 h 10 s 2 days 30 s 60 s 8 days 17 days 1 min 2s 20 h 5 min 10 s

4 days 17 days 26 days 52 days 208 days (approx.) 120 s 34 days

Manual sampled data: Trigger:

Key operation, communication command, or remote input signals (/R1 option) Data format: ASCII Max. number of data sets internal memory can hold: 50 TLOG data (/M1 option): Trigger: Timeout of the timer Data format: Binary Max. number of data sets or files internal memory can hold: 400 data sets or 16 files (number of START/STOP operations) Report data (/M1 option): Types: Hourly, daily, hourly + daily, daily + monthly and daily + weekly Data format: ASCII Max. number of report data internal memory can hold: 40 Screen image data: Trigger: Key operation, communication command, or remote input signals (/R1 option) Data format: png format Output: External storage medium or communication interface
IM 04L01A01-01E

14
Specifications

14-7

14.4 Alarm Function Specifications

Number of alarms: Alarm types: Up to four alarms for each channel Upper and lower limits, delay upper and lower limits, difference upper and lower limits, and upper limit and lower on rate-of-change Alarm delay time: Selectable from 1 s to 3600 s for each channel Interval time of rate-of-change alarms: The scan interval times 1 to 15, common to all channels. Display: The alarm status (type) is displayed in the numerical value display area upon occurrence of an alarm. A common alarm indication is also displayed in the status display section. The alarm indication behavior: non-hold or hold-type can be selectable for common to all channels. Hysteresis: On (0.5% of display span)/off selectable (applied to upper and lower limits alarms, common to all measurement channels) Relay outputs (option): Number of points: 2, 4, 6 points Relay action: Energized/de-energized, hold/non-hold, AND/ OR, reflash actions selectable. The alarm relay condition is held even in the basic setting mode. Alarm information: The date and time of alarm occurrences/recoveries, alarm types, etc. Up to 120 latest alarms are stored in the internal memory. Displayed on the alarm summary screen.

14-8

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.5 Specifications of Communication Functions

Connection: Protocols: FTP client functions: FTP server functions: Ethernet (10BASE-T) TCP/IP Automatic file transport from the DX100 (FTP client protocol) File transport on request by host computer (FTP server protocol) Directory operation, file output, and file delete on the external storage medium Files can be transported: Display data file, event data file and report data file Real time monitor function: Monitor the measured/computed data on the DX100. YOKOGAWA private protocol is used. E-mail transmission function: E-mail is automatically transmitted at the following times. Alarm activation/release, recovery from a power failure, memory end detection, occurrence of error related to the external storage medium and FTP client, at the specified time, and report creation. Destination: Specify two groups of destinations. Web server function: Displays the DX100 screen on the Internet Explorer browser. Browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 to 5.5 Monitor screen: Screen for monitoring Operator screen: Switch the screen from the browser. Modify and write messages. Set access control (user name and password) on each screen.

14
Specifications

IM 04L01A01-01E

14-9

14.6 Specifications of Optional Functions

Alarm Output Relays (/AR1, /AR2, /A3):
An alarm signal is output from the rear panel as a relay contact signal. /AR1 and /AR2 includes remote control functions (/R1) Relay contact rating: 250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load) Terminal configuration: SPDT (NO-C-NC). Energized-at-alarm/de-energized-at-alarm, AND/OR, hold/non-hold, and reflash actions are selectable.

Batch Function (/BT1):

Information added to the measured/computed data: Serial number of the DX100, Application name, Supervisor name, Manager name, Batch number, Lot number, Comment information Displaying information: Displays the application name, supervisor name, manager name, batch name, and comment when data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped. Identifying operators (users) by using the key login function: User names that are already registered cannot be specified. the combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified. Messages: Messages 1 through 3 can be changed in the operation mode. Confirming the stored data: Batch information can be shown on the memory information display.

Serial Communication Interface (/C2, /C3):

This interface allows the host computer to control and make settings for the DX100 as well as receive data from the DX100. Connection: EIA RS-232 (/C2) or RS-422-A/485 (/C3) Protocols: YOKOGAWA private protocol, Modbus protocol Synchronization method: Start-stop asynchronous transmission Connection method (RS-422-A/485): 4-wire half-duplex multi-drop connection (1 : N where N = 1 to 31) Transmission speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bps Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit: 1 bit Parity: Odd, even, or none Communication distance (RS-422-A/485): Up to 1200 m Communication mode: ASCII for input/output for control and setting ASCII or binary for output of measured data Modbus: Mode: RTU SLAVE, RTU MASTER Data type: SLAVE: Data read and data write by the master device MASTER: Data raed from the slave device (Computation function /M1 is necessary) Wiring: 4 wires (for RS-422-A/485)

14-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.6 Specifications of Optional Functions

Fieldbus Communication Interface (/CF1)

Bidirectional digital communication with field devices and DCSs connected in a multidrop fashion according to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus standard specified by the Fieldbus Foundation. Interface: FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 (transmission speed: 31.25 kb/s) Physical layer type: 113 (standard-power signaling, bus powered, non I.S.) External power supply: supply voltage: 9 to 32 VDC Supply current: 16.5 mA (maximum) Connection: M4 screws (2 terminals) Dielectric strength: Withstand voltage 500 V rms (50/60 Hz, for one minute) between communication terminal and ground terminal Functional specification: Function block: 8 AI function blocks (transmit measured/computed data to other instruments, one channel each) 1 MAI function block (transmit measured/computed data to other instruments, up to 8 channels) 1 MAO function block (receive measured data and other data from other instruments and record or display the data, up to 8 channels) Link master function Others: Computation function /M1 is necessary

FAIL/Memory End Output (/F1):

The relay contact output on the rear panel informs of the occurrence of a system error. Another relay contact output informs of the time until end of the internal memory space (selectable from 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 or 100 hours) before the data is overwritten, or of the time when the remaining space on the external storage medium reaches to 10% of whole capacity. Relay: De-energized on system error Energized on memory end Contact specification: 250 VDC/0.1 A (resistive load), 250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A

Clamped Input Terminal (/H2):

Clamped input terminal is used for input terminal.

Desktop Type (/H5[ ]):

Provides carrying handle. Power cord is provided when /H5D, /H5F/, H5R, or /H5J is specified. /H5: Screw type power terminal (can only be specified when /P1 is simultaneously specified ).

Computation Functions (/M1):

Can perform computation, display the computed data assigned to channels in trends and numerical values, and store computed data. Channels assignable to computed data: DX102, DX104: Up to 4 channels DX106, DX112: Up to 12 channels Operation: General arithmetic operations: Four arithmetic operations, square root, absolute, common logarithm, exponential, power, relational operations (<, , >, , =, ), logical operations (AND, OR, NOT, XOR) Statistical operations: Average, maximum, minimum summation, and maximum - minimum Special operations: Rolling average (moving average on computed results) Constant: Available (Up to 12 constants)
IM 04L01A01-01E

14
Specifications

14-11

14.6 Specifications of Optional Functions Digital input data via communication: Digital data via communication can be used in calculation expression (Up to 12 data) Remote input status: Remote input status (0/1) can be used in calculation expression (Up to 8 inputs) Report functions: Report type: Hourly, daily, hourly + daily, daily + monthly, and daily + weekly Operation: Average, maximum, minimum and summation Data format: ASCII TLOG data: Saves all measured/computed data at the specified interval.

Cu10, Cu25 RTD Input /3 terminal isolated RTD Input (/N1):

This option allows Cu10 and Cu25 inputs to be added to the standard input types. A,B,b terminals are of isolated input type for DX106 and DX112.
Input type Cu10 (GE) Cu10 (L&N) RTD Cu10 (WEED) (measurement Cu10 (BAILEY) current : i = 1.25 mA) Cu10 : = 0.00392 at 20C Cu10 : = 0.00393 at 20C Cu25 : = 0.00425 at 0C Measuring range

200 to 300C

Measuring accuracy (Measuring accuracy for other inputs are the same as standard):
Input type Cu10 (GE) Cu10 (L&N) Cu10 (WEED) Cu10 (BAILEY) Cu10 : = 0.00392 at 20C Cu10 : = 0.00393 at 20C Cu25 : = 0.00425 at 0C Pt100 Jpt100 Accuracy guaranteed range 70 to 170C 75 to 150C 200 to 260C 200 to 300C (0.3% of rdg + 0.8C) Measuring range (0.3% of rdg + 0.6C) Measuring accuracy

(0.4% of rdg + 1.0C)

3 terminal Isolated RTD Input (/N2):

A, B, b terminals are of isolated input type.
* Can be specified only for DX106 and DX112. A,B,b terminals of DX102 and DX104 are isolated as standard.

24 VDC/AC Power Supply (/P1):

Powered by 24 VDC or 24 VAC. For related specifications, see Power Supply, Normal Operating Conditions, Effects of Operating Conditions, and Other Specifications in section 14.7. Rated power supply: 24 VDC/AC Allowable power supply voltage range: 21.6 to 26.4 VDC/AC Dielectric strength: Power supply to ground terminal: 500 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute Rated power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz (for AC) Allowable power supply frequency range: 50/60 Hz2% (for AC) Rated power consumption: 30 VA (for DC), 45 VA (for AC)

14-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.6 Specifications of Optional Functions Power consumption:

Supply voltage Backlight saving mode 24 VDC 17 VA 24 VAC(50/60Hz) 28 VA Normal 19 VA 32 VA Max. 30 VA 45 VA

Effects on measured value: With variation within 21.6 to 26.4 V (50/60 Hz): 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power supply frequency (at 24 VAC): (0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less

Remote Control (/R1):

This option allows the following functions to be controlled remotely by a contact or an open collector input (up to eight inputs): Alarm acknowledgment (trigger, 250 ms or longer) Start/stop of data acquisition (rising and falling edge) Trigger for event data acquisition (trigger, 250 ms or longer) Time adjustment (adjusting the internal clock to the nearest hour upon remote signal, trigger, 250 ms or longer)
Time of signal input Processing

Cut off reading of less than one minute. hh:00:00 to hh:01:59 e.g. 10:00:50 is corrected as 10:00:00 Round up reading of less than one minute. hh:58:00 to hh:59:59 e.g. 10:59:50 is corrected as 11:00:00 hh:02:00 to hh:57:59 No process is to be performed.

Start/stop of computation (rising and falling edge, /M1 option) Reset of computation data (trigger, 250 ms or longer, /M1 option) Manual sampling (trigger, 250 ms or longer) Writing messages (up to 8 different messages can be set, trigger, 250 ms or longer) Load of setting parameters (up to 3 setup data files can be set, trigger, 250 ms or longer) Snapshot (saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium)

24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter (/TPS2 or /TPS4)

Number of loops: Output voltage: Rated output current: Maximum output current: 2(/TPS2) or 4(/TPS4) 22.8 to 25.2 VDC (under rated output current) 4 to 20 mADC 25 mADC (overcurrent protection operation current: approximately 68 mADC.) Allowable cable resistance: RL (17.8 - minimum operation voltage of transmitter)/0.02 A Where 17.8 V = 22.8 V 5.0 V 22.8 V : Minimum output voltage 5V : Maximum voltage across the load resistor (250 ) Maximum length of cable: 2 km (when using CEV cable) Insulation resistance: 20 M or more (500 VDC) between output terminal and ground terminal Withstand voltage: 500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10 mA) for one minute between output terminal and ground terminal 500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10 mA) for one minute between output terminals 14-13

14
Specifications

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.7 General Specifications

Construction
Mounting: Flush panel mounting (on a vertical plane) Mounting may be inclined backward up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane. Allowable Panel Thickness: 2 to 26 mm Material: Case: drawn steel Bezel: polycarbonate Case Color: Case: Grayish blue green (Munsell 2.0B 5.0/1.7 or equivalent) Bezel: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B 3.6/0.3 or equivalent) Front Panel: Water and dust-proof (based on IEC529-IP65, and NEMA No.250 TYPE4 (except External Icing Test), except for side-by-side mounting) Dimensions: 144(W) 144(H) 218(D) mm Weight: DX102: approx. 2.9 kg DX104: approx. 3.0 kg DX106: approx. 3.0 kg DX112: approx. 3.0 kg

Standard Performance
Measuring Accuracy: The following specifications apply to operation of the DX100 under standard operation conditions: Temperature: 23 2C Humidity: 55% 10% RH Power supply voltage: 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz 1% Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes. Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation of the DX100.
Input Range Measurement accuracy (digital display) 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV (0.1% of rdg + 2 digits) 2V 6V 20 V (0.1% of rdg + 3 digits) 50 V (0.15% of rdg + 1C) R However, R, S : 3.7C at 0 to 100C, S 1.5C at 100 to 300C B: 2C at 400 to 600C B (Accuracy at less than 400C is not guaranteed.) K E J T N W L U Pt100 JPt100 (0.15% of rdg + 0.7C) However, (0.15% of rdg + 1C) at 200 to 100C (0.15% of rdg + 0.5C) (0.15% of rdg + 0.5C) However, (0.15% of rdg + 0.7C) at 200 to 100C (0.15% of rdg + 0.7C) (0.15% of rdg + 1C) (0.15% of rdg + 0.5C) However, (0.15% of rdg + 0.7C) at 200 to 100C (0.15% of rdg + 0.3C) Max. resolution of digital display 10 V 10 V 100 V 1 mV 1 mV 10 mV 10 mV

DC voltage

TC (Excluding the reference junction compensation accuracy)

0.1C

RTD

14-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.7 General Specifications Measuring accuracy in case of scaling (digits): Accuracy during scaling (digits) = measuring accuracy (digits) multiplier + 2 digits (rounded up) where the multiplier = scaling span (digits)/measuring span (digits). Example: Assuming that range: 6V measuring span: 1.000 to 5.000 V scaling span: 0.000 to 2.000 Then, Measuring accuracy = (0.1% 5 V + 2 digits) = (0.005 V [5 digits] + 2) = (7 digits) Multiplier = 2000 digits (0.000 to 2.000)/4000 digits (1.000 to 5.000 V) = 0.5 Accuracy during scaling = 7 digits 0.5 + 2 = 6 digits (rounded up) Reference junction compensation: Internal/External selectable for each channel Reference junction compensation accuracy (above 0C): Types R, S, B, W: 1C Types K, J, E, T, N, L, U: 0.5C Maximum allowable input voltage: 10 V DC (continuous) for ranges of 2 V or less and TC ranges 60 V DC (continuous) for 6 VDC, 20 VDC, and 50 VDC ranges Input resistance: Approximately 10 M or more for ranges of 2 V DC or less and TC Approximately 1 M for 6 VDC, 20 VDC, and 50 VDC ranges Input source resistance: Volt, TC: 2 k or less RTD: 10 or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal). Input bias current: 10 nA or less Maximum common mode noise voltage: 250 Vrms AC (50/60 Hz) Maximum noise voltage between channels: 250 Vrms AC (50/60 Hz) Interference between channels: 120 dB (when the input source resistance is 500 and the inputs to other channels are 60 V) Common mode rejection ratio: 120 dB (50/60 Hz 0.1%, 500 imbalance, between the minus terminal and ground) Normal mode rejection ratio: 40 dB (50/60 Hz 0.1%)

Power Supply
Rated power supply: 100 to 240 VAC (automatic switching, except for /P1 model) 24 VDC/AC (for /P1 model) Allowable power supply voltage range: 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC (except for /P1 model) 21.6 to 26.4 VDC/AC (for /P1 model) Rated power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz (automatic switching, for AC) Rated Power consumption: 62 VA (except for /P1 model) 30 VA (for /P1 model, DC), 45 VA (for /P1 model, AC)

14
Specifications

IM 04L01A01-01E

14-15

14.7 General Specifications Power consumption: Except for /P1 model

Supply voltage Backlight saving mode 100 VAC 30 VA 240 VAC 42 VA Normal 32 VA 47 VA Max. 45 VA 62 VA

For /P1 model

Supply voltage Backlight saving mode 24 VDC 17 VA 24 VAC(50/60Hz) 28 VA Normal 19 VA 32 VA Max. 30 VA 45 VA

Normal Operating Conditions

90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC (except for /P1 model) 21.6 to 26.4 VDC/AC (for /P1 model) Power supply frequency: 50 Hz 2%, 60 Hz 2% Ambient temperature: 0 to 50C (when using FDD or Zip drive: 5 to 40C) Ambient humidity: 20% to 80% RH (at 5 to 40C) Vibration: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.2 m/s2 or less Shock: Not acceptable Magnetic field: 400 A/m or less (DC and 50/60 Hz) Noise: Normal mode (50/60 Hz): Volt: The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring range. TC: The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force. RTD: 50 mV or less Common mode noise (50/60 Hz): 250 Vrms AC or less for all ranges Maximum noise voltage between channels (50/60 Hz): 250 Vrms AC or less Mounting position: Can be inclined up to 30 deg backward. Mounting at an angle away from the perpendicular is not acceptable. Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes after power on Altitude: 2000 m or less above sea level Power supply voltage:

Effects of Operating Conditions

Ambient temperature: With temperature variation of 10C: (0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less for Volt and TC ranges Excluding the error of reference junction compensation (0.1% of rdg + 2 digit) or less for RTD ranges Except for /P1 model With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC (50/60 Hz): 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency (at 100 VAC): (0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less For /P1 model With variation within 21.6 to 26.4 VDC/AC: 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency (at 24 VAC): (0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less AC (50/60 Hz) and DC 400 A/m fields: (0.1% of rdg + 10 digits) or less

Power supply:

Magnetic field:

14-16

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.7 General Specifications Input source resistance: Volt range With variation of +1 k: Ranges of 2 V or less: within 10 V Ranges of 6 V or greater: 0.1% of rdg or less TC range With variation of +1 k: Within 10 V (100 V when the burnout upscale/ downscale function is switched on) RTD range (Pt100) With variation of 10 per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal): (0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less With maximum difference of 40 mohms between wires: approximately 0.1C

Transport and Storage Conditions

The following specifies the environmental conditions required during transportation from shipment to the start of service and during storage as well as during transportation and storage if the DX100 is temporarily taken out of service. No malfunction will occur under these conditions with serious damage, which is impossible to repair; however, calibration may be necessary to recover normal operation performance. Ambient temperature: 25C to 60C Humidity: 5% to 95% RH (No condensation is allowed). Vibration: 10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 maximum Shock: 392 m/s2 maximum (while being packed)

Other Specifications
Clock: With calendar function (year of grace) The time can be adjusted by a remote contact (with the remote control option). Summer and wintertime can be set. 100 ppm, excluding a delay (of 1 second, maximum) caused each time the power is turned on. A built-in lithium battery backs up the setup parameters (battery life: approximately ten years at room temperature). ON/OFF and password can be set. Power on with log out mode and all key operations are not permitted. User name, User ID and password are required to enter the operation mode. Each terminal to ground terminal: 20 M or greater (at 500 VDC)

Daylight saving: Accuracy of clock: Memory backup: Key lock function: Key login function:

14
Specifications

Insulation resistance:

IM 04L01A01-01E

14-17

14.7 General Specifications Dielectric strength: Power supply to ground terminal: 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute (except for /P1 model) Power supply to ground terminal: 500 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute (for /P1 model) Contact output terminal to ground terminal: 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute Measuring input terminal to ground terminal: 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute Between measuring input terminals: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz), 1 minute (except for b-terminal of RTD input of DX106 and DX112) Between remote control terminal to ground terminal: 500 VDC, 1 minute

Safety and EMC Standards

CSA: UL: CE: Certified by CSA22.2 No. 1010.1, Installation category (Overvoltage category) II*1, Pollution degree 2*2 Certified by UL61010B-B (CSA NRTL/C) EMC: Complies with EN61326-1 Complies with EN61000-3-2 Complies with EN61000-3-3 Low voltage: Complies with EN61010-1, Measurement category II*3
*1 Installation category (Overvoltage category) describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. II applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board. *2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. *3 Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards.

14-18

IM 04L01A01-01E

14.8 Dimensional Drawings

136.5 0 (5.37)
+0.4

Unit : mm (approx. inch)

23.4 (0.92)

218 (8.58) 165.5 (6.52)

PANEL THICKNESS 2 TO 26

9.3 (0.37) 136.5+0.4 0

7.5

(Min. SPACE FOR MOUNTING)

144 (5.67) 151.5 (5.96)

(0.30)

(5.37)
(DIMENSIONS AFTER MOUNTING)

144 (5.67) 151.5 (5.96)

Note
When mounting to a panel, use two brackets, one each of the top and bottom of the DX100, or on the left and right sides. The dimensional tolerance is 3% unless otherwise specified. (However, the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0.3 mm).

14
Specifications

IM 04L01A01-01E

14-19

14.8 Dimentional Drawings

Panel Cutout
Single-Unit Mounting 137 +2 0 (5.39)
137 +2 0 (5.39)

Side-by-Side Mounting (horizontally)

Side-by-Side Mounting (vertically ,max. 3units) 137 +2 0 (5.39)

137 +2 0 (5.39)

175Min (6.89)

Units 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 n

+2 0

(mm) 175Min (6.89)

282 426 570 714 858 1002 1146 1290 1434 (144xn)-6

14-20

IM 04L01A01-01E

+2 0

14.8 Dimentional Drawings

Desktop type
138.8

218 144 23.4 165.5

38.1

144

Note
The dimensional tolerance is 3% unless otherwise specified. (However, the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0.3 mm).

15.7

142.8

14
Specifications

IM 04L01A01-01E

14-21

Appendix

Appendix 1
Setting mode

Parameters and Initial Settings

Initial settings are thick-framed.

Parameters Range Volt TC

Menu 20 mV 6V R E W RTD Scale Volt TC PT 20 mV 6V R E W RTD DI Unit Delta Volt TC 20 mV 6V R E W RTD DI Ref. CH DI Sqrt Unit Skip Level 20 mV 6V Cont 60 mV 20 V 200 mV 50 V 2V PT Level 60 mV 20 V S J L JPT Cont 200 mV 50 V B T U K N 2V PT Level 60 mV 20 V S J L JPT 60 mV 20 V S J L JPT Cont 200 mV 50 V B T U 2V K N 200 mV 50 V B T U K N 2V

Notes Other parameters: Upper/lower limits of span

Other parameters: Upper/lower limits of span

Other parameters: Upper/lower limits of span Upper/lower limits of scale

Character string Other parameters: Upper/lower limits of span

Up to model types
Other parameters: Upper/lower limits of span

Other parameters: Upper/lower limits of span Upper/lower limits of scale

Character string On H R Off L r Off Up to model types

Character string, Initial setting is all space

Alarm

On/Off Type Value Relay On/Off Number

h T

l t Numerical value

On I01 to I06 Off 5 9 13

Tag

Tag 2 6 10 14 2s 10 s 30 s 10 min 2h 1h 1 min 20 min 4h 2 min 30 min 10 h 3 7 11 15 5s 4 8 12 16 10 s

Moving average Count

DX106/DX112

Filter Alarm delay time Trend/Save interval Time/div

Off 1 s to 3600 s 15 s 5 min 1h Auto save interval

DX102/DX104 Numerical value 15 s and 30 s are for DX102 and DX104 only

App
Appendix

10 min to 31 days

Up to other parameters set

Character string, Initial setting is all space Character string, Initial setting is all space Character string, Initial setting is [DATA 0]

Message File

Characters No.1 to No.8 Header Directory name Save data Unsave On On All Off Off

Daylight saving time

Summer Winter

IM 04L01A01-01E

App-1

Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings

Parameters User key Action Menu None Math rst Message 3 Message 7 Group set Group number Group name CH set Trip line On/Off Position Color Red Brown Violet Darkblue Color CH1 to CH12 Red Brown Violet Darkblue Zone Graph Lower Upper Division 0 to 95 5 to 100 4 8 12 Bar graph Scale position Partial On/Off Expand Boundary View Direction Background Trend line Trip line Grid Trend Horizontal White 1 1 Auto 7 11 Scroll Scale digit LCD Brightness Backlight saver On/Off 5s 1 min Normal 1 5 On 30 min Restore Math color CH31 to CH60 Key Red Brown Violet Darkblue Math Zone Math partial Lower Upper On/Off Expand Boundary 0 to 95 5 to 100 On 1 to 99 Off Numerical value
Saver time 1 min

Notes Trigger M. sample Message 4 Message 8 2 GROUP 2 Off Numerical value Green Orange Gray Yellow Green Orange Gray Yellow Blue Y. green Lime Lightgray Blue Y. green Lime Lightgray B. violet Lightblue Cyan Purple B. violet Lightblue Cyan Purple Numerical value 5 9 C10 Center 2 6 Off Numerical value Vertical Vertical Black 2 2 4 8 12 10 s Fine 2 6 Off 2 min 1h Key + Alm Green Orange Gray Yellow Blue Y. green Lime Lightgray B. violet Lightblue Cyan Purple Numerical value See section 14.2 for initial settings. 5 min 10 min 3 7 4 8 20 s 30 s 3 3 5 9 6 10 Horizon 2 3 Off 4 6 10 7 11 See section 14.2 for initial settings. Initial values are No.1: Red, No.2: Green, No.3: Blue, No.4: Yellow Alarm ACK Messsage 1 Message 5 Snapshot 3 GROUP 3 4 GROUP 4 Fixed Character string See section 7.6 for initial settings. Math Message 2 Message 6

1 GROUP 1 On

Normal 1 5 On 1 to 99

Bar graph Horizontal

App-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings

Parameters Math Graph Division Menu 4 8 12 Bar graph Scale position Save/Load, Clear data Save settings Load settings Save data Load display data Load event data File list Delete Format Clear data Time set Math set YY/MM/DD HH: MM: SS DST Math range On/Off
Calculation expression

Notes 5 9 C10 Center 2 6 3 Off 4 6 10 7 11

Normal 1 5

Numerical value Summer On Winter Off Equation for computation Numerical value Character string On H Off L Off Up to model types Numerical value, Initial setting is [1]
Character string, Initial setting is all space

Span Lower Span Upper Unit Math alarm On/Off Type Value
Relay On/Off On

t Numerical value

Number Constant Tag TLOG Rolling average K01 to K12 Tag Timer No. Sum scale
On/Off

I01 to I06

1 Off On 1s 5s 15 s 2 min 6 min 20 min

2 /s Off 2s 6s 20 s 3 min 10 min 30 min

3 /min 3s 10 s 30 s 4 min 12 min 1h Numerical value Numerical value

Character string, Initial setting is all space Character string, Initial setting is all space Character string, Initial setting is all space Character string, Initial setting is all space

/h 4s 12 s 1 min 5 min 15 min

Interval

1 to 64 Number of samples Alarm delay time Batch set Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number Auto increment Disp information 0 to 9999 On Batch 0 Off Time 1 s to 3600 s 10 s

Numerical value

App
Appendix

IM 04L01A01-01E

App-3

Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings

Basic setting mode

Initial settings are thick-framed.
Parameters Alarm Reflash Relay Action Behavior Indicator AND Menu On None I01 - I04 Energize Hold Hold Off I01 I01 - I05 De-energ Nonhold Nonhold 2 6 10 14 Off 50 Hz 250 ms 2s Up External Numerical value C Auto Display Sample rate 125 ms 2s 60 s Mode Block Free 1 16
Data length 3 min to 31 days

Notes I01 - I02 I01 - I06 I01 - I03 Up to model types

Rate of change Increase 1 Decrease 5 9 13 Hysterisis A/D Integrate Scan interval Burnout set RJC Volt (V) Temperature unit Memory Save Data Event On Auto 125 ms 1s Off Internal

3 7 11 15 60 Hz

4 8 12

100 ms

Initial setting is 50 Hz for models with /P1. 100 ms is for DX106 and DX112 only DX102/DX104 DX106/DX112

Down

F Manual E+D 250 ms 5s 120 s Trigger 2 Event 500 ms 10 s 300 s Rotate 4 8 1, 2, and 4 when [Data] is set to [E + D] Up to other parameters set 25 100 50 1s 30 s 600 s 125 ms, 250 ms, and 500 ms are for DX102 and DX104 only

Pre-trigger 0

5 95 Off Off Off Math CH

75 Trigger Key Alarm Memory and trend Meas CH/Math CH First-CH Last-CH On/Off Memory timeup Timeup type Date Day of the week Time (hour) AUX Tag/Channel Memory alarm Language Partial Batch Time zone Tag 1h 20 h English Use Use SUN THU On Off Month On On Meas CH
External On

Up to model types Off Hour Day Week Numerical value MON FRI Channel 2h 50 h Japanese Not Not for models with /BT1 Numerical value 5h 100 h German French 10 h TUE SAT Numerical value WED

Time difference from GMT 0

App-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings

Parameters Keylock Use/Not password START STOP MENU USER DISP/ENTER Alarm ACK Math Write memory Media Key login Use/Not Auto logout User ID Use/Not Number On/Off User name User ID Password Enter setup Save/Load, Initialize Save settings Load settings Delete Format Initialize Option Remote Action NO.1 to NO.8 None Time adj Pnl 1 load Message 2 Message 6 Option Timer (TLOG) Number Mode Interval 1 Off
(Absolute) 1 min

Menu Use Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Use On Use 1 5 On 1 to 7 Enable Disable Not

Notes Character string Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock Not Off Not 2 6 Off Character string 3 7 4

User 1 to User 7

Start Stop Math Start Stop Pnl 2 load Message 3 Message 7 2 Relative 2 min 6 min 20 min 3h 12 h

Trigger Math rst Pnl 3 load Message 4 Message 8 3 Absolute 3 min 10 min 30 min 4h 24 h

Alatm ACK M. sample Message 1 Message 5 Snapshot Initial setting Timer 1: Absolute Timer 2, 3: Off

4 min 12 min 1h 6h

5 min 15 min 2h 8h (Relative) Ref. time Reset Action Option Report Report set Date Date of the week Time (hour) SUN THU On Off Off Day + Week

Numerical value
Numerical value, Initial setting is [0:00]

Off Datasave Hour Day + Month Numerical value MON FRI TUE SAT Numerical value WEN Day Hour + Day

App
Appendix

IM 04L01A01-01E

App-5

This section describes the data format of the ASCII file. The DX100 creates two types of ASCII files, the manual sampled data file and the report file.

Data format of the manual sampled data file

The manual sampled data are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas. The channel/tag, unit, and manual sampled values are not output for channels in which the input range is set to [Skip] or for which the computation is turned OFF. Example The following example is for channels 1, 2, 3, 4, and 31. MANUAL SAMPLE DATA Model Serial No.:, XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header : , AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH/TAG, 1 CH01 , CH02 , CH03 , CH04 UNIT, V , V , V , V , mV 2000/01/01 01:08:43, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000, -0.014, 12.00 2000/01/01 01:08:48, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000, -0.014, 12.00 2000/01/01 01:09:15, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000, -0.014, 12.00 CH/TAG, 1 CH01 , CH02 , CH03 , CH04 UNIT, V , V , V , V , V 2000/01/01 01:15:30, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000, -0.014, 12.00 2000/01/01 01:18:12, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000, -0.014, 12.00

, CH31

Data size Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section. Title + carriage return line feed + serial number + carriage return line feed + file header + carriage return line feed + channel/tag (8 + 19 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed + unit (6 + 9 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed The size of the title is fixed to 20 bytes. The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes. The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes. The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes. Calculation example Manual sampled data for 12 channels 20 + 2 + 38 + 2 + 49 + 2 + (8 + 19 12) + 2 + (6 + 9 12) + 2 = 467 bytes Size of the data section of one data set The following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one data set. Date and time of manual sampling + measured value (8 number of measurement channel) + computed value (10 number of computation channels) + carriage return line feed The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 19 bytes. The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes. Calculation example Manual sampled data for 12 measurement channels 19 + (8 12) + (10 0) + 2 = 117 bytes

App
Appendix

IM 04L01A01-01E

App-9

Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Number of data sets and file size The file size of 50 data sets* for 12 measurement channels is calculated as follows. Size of the header section + 50 size of the data section of one data set = 5900 bytes
* 50 data sets is the maximum numbiof manual sampled data sets that can be written in the internal memory. If there are more than 50 data sets, they are overwritten starting with the oldest data set.

Note
Positive (+)/negative () over range in measurement channels Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5% of the measurable range. For example, consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2.000 to 2.000 V. If the input signal exceeds 2.200 V, + over range occurs. If the input signal falls below 2.200 V, over range occurs. Over range occurs when the input type is TC (thermocouple) or RTD (resistance temperature detector) and the input exceeds approximately 10C of the measurable range. For example, consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0.0 to 1760.0C. If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770.0C, + over range occurs. If the input signal falls below approximately 10.0C, over range occurs. Positive (+)/negative () computation overflow in computation channels Positive (+) computation overflow occurs when the value exceeds 3.4E + 38. Negative () computation overflow occurs when the value falls below 3.4E + 38. Output value when detected erroneous data, measurement over range data, or computation overflow data Channels Measurement channels Data measurement error positive (+) over range negative () over range Output value Blank 99999 99999

Computation channels

computation error 999999999 positive (+) computation overflow 999999999 negative () computation overflow 99999999

CH/TAG and UNIT lines In the following cases, both the CH/TAG line and the UNIT line are rewritten after a carriage return line feed and followed by manual sampled data. When the measurement channel is switched from some setting other than [Skip] to [Skip]. When the measurement channel is switched from [Skip] to some other setting. When the computation channels are turned On or turned Off. When the unit is changed. Four lines from the bottom of the file example shows the output when the unit for channel 31 is changed from mV to V.

App-10

IM 04L01A01-01E

Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files

Data format of the report file

The hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas. The channel/tag, unit, average value, maximum value, minimum value, and sum value are not output for channels in which the input range is set to [Skip] or for which the computation is turned OFF. Example The following example is the daily report for four channels. DAILY REPORT, START TIME, 2000/01/31 20:00 Model Serial No.:, XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header:, AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH/TAG, CH01 , CH02 , CH03 , CH04 UNIT, V , V , V , V 2000/01/01 00:00, C, C, C, C AVE, 0.00, 0.10, 0.20, 0.30 MAX, 0.00, 1.00, 2.00, 3.00 MIN, 0.00, -1.00, -2.00, -3.00 SUM, 0.000000E-01, 1.000000E+04, 2.000000E+04, 3.000000E+04 Status Various events that occur while creating the report data are saved as status data and output in the report. The positions of the various statuses in the report are fixed. E: Error (an error is detected) O: Over (an over range/computation overflow is detected) P: Power failure (a power disruption has occurred) C: Change (the time has been changed) Data size Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section. Title + carriage return line feed + serial number + carriage return line feed + file header + carriage return line feed + channel/tag (8 + 19 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed + unit (6 + 9 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed The size of the title varies depending on the report type as follows. For hourly reports (HOURLY): 45 bytes For daily reports (DAILY): 44 bytes For weekly reports (WEEKLY): 45 bytes For monthly reports (MONTHLY): 46 bytes The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes. The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes. The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes. Calculation example Monthly data for 12 channels 46 + 2 + 38 + 2 + 49 + 2 + (8 + 19 12) + 2 + (6 + 9 12) + 2 = 493 bytes

App
Appendix

IM 04L01A01-01E

App-11

Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Size of the data section of one report data set The following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one report data. Carriage return line feed + date and time of creation + status (11 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed + average value (5 + 14 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed + maximum value (5 + 14 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed + minimum value (5 + 14 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed + sum value (5 + 14 number of channels that are output) + carriage return line feed The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 16 bytes. The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes. Calculation example Monthly data for 12 channels 2 + 16 + (11 12) + 2 + (5 + 14 12) + 2 + (5 + 14 12) + 2 + (5 + 14 12) + 2 + (5 + 14 12) + 2 = 852 bytes Number of report data sets and file size The file size varies depending on the number of report data sets as follows. One report data set of monthly reports Size of the header section + size of the data section of one report data set = 3055 bytes 40 report data sets* of monthly reports Size of the header section + 40 size of the data section of one report data set = 83317 bytes
* 40 report data sets is the maximum number of report data sets that can be written in the internal memory. If there are more than 40 data sets, they are cleared starting with the oldest data set.

Note
When the measurement and computation channel data enter the condition described in the following table, status E and O are output in the report. Data Condition Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error Status E

For measurement channels Positive (+) over range O Negative () over range O Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5% of the measurable range. For example, consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2.000 to 2.000 V. If the input signal exceeds 2.200 V, + over range occurs. If the input signal falls below 2.200 V, over range occurs. Over range occurs when the input type is TC (thermocouple) or RTD (resistance temperature detector) and the input exceeds approximately 10C of the measurable range. For example, consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0.0 to 1760.0C. If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770.0C, + over range occurs. If the input signal falls below approximately 10.0C, over range occurs. For computation channels Positive (+) computation overflow (when the value exceeds 3.4E + 38) Negative () computation overflow (when the value falls below 3.4E + 38) O O

App-12

IM 04L01A01-01E

Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files

Measurement/computation errors are discarded when MAX and MIN are determined. Measurement/computation errors, over range, and computation overflow are discarded when determining AVE and SUM. The report output values of AVE, MAX, MIN and SUM vary depending on the data condition of the measurement and computation channels as shown in the table below. Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report Output Value

AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range (Blank) (Average value) MAX, MIN When all data are measurement errors (Maximum value, Positive (+) over range minimum value) Negative () over range SUM (Sum value) When all data are measurement errors or over range When the sum value exceeds 3.4E + 38 When the sum value is below 3.4E + 38 (Blank) 99999 99999 (Blank) 9.999999E + 99 9.999999E + 99

Item

Data Condition of Computation Channels

Report Output Value (Blank) (Blank) 999999999 99999999

AVE When all data are computation errors or over range (Average value) MAX, MIN When all data are computation errors (Maximum value, When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 minimum value) When the minimum value is below 9999999

App
Appendix

IM 04L01A01-01E

App-13

Appendix 3

The Relationship between Style Numbers and Functions

The following table shows the relationship between the style numbers and the functions that have been added or changed.

Functions that have been added on style number S2

Batch function (/BT1 option) Cramped input terminal (/H2 option) Desk top type with screw type power terminal (/H5 option) Cu10 and Cu25 RTD input/three-wire isolated RTD input (/N1 option) 24 V DC/AC power supply (/P1 option) Delay upper/lower limit alarm function Automatic switching function of displayed groups Memory information on historical trend display Historical trend display of event data Function used to store the data to the external storage medium using key operation during auto save mode German and French as displayed language System screen Conformity to Water and Dust-Proof Specification NEMA NO.250 TYPE4 Certified by UL3111-1 (CSA NRTL/C)

Function s that has been added on style number S4

24 VDC power supply for transmitter (/TPS2 or /TPS4) Fieldbus communication interface (/CF1) Web server function E-mail transmission function Modbus master function Communication command for key operation Communication output of alarm summary and message summary 50 VDC input range Combination of houry and daily report Alarm output relay condition is held in the basic setting mode Horizontal display type 2 for trend screen [C10] scale division and [FINE] scale digit [AUTO] grid Memory timeout function Display update rate 15 s, 30 s, and 10h Event data sampling interval 300 s and 600 s Memory end alarm [OFF] German and French for all screens Snapshot as remote control function Improved display format for a group with three channels

App-14

IM 04L01A01-01E

Index
A
absolute mode ................................................................. 11-15 absolute value .................................................................... 11-1 access lamp ......................................................................... 3-2 accessories (sold separately) ................................................. vi accessories (standard) ............................................................ v adjusting the internal clock (remote control) .................... 10-14 alarm (computation) ........................................................... 11-3 Alarm ACK ........................................................................... 6-1 alarm function .................................................................... 1-17 alarm hysteresis ................................................................. 1-19 alarm icon ..................................................................... 4-4, 6-1 alarm mark .................................................................... 6-2, 6-3 alarm output relay .............................................................. 1-19 alarm point mark .................................................................. 6-3 alarm summary .................................................................. 1-10 alarm trigger ......................................................................... 8-5 all channel display ......................................................... 1-7, 4-9 AND/OR ............................................................................. 6-12 application name ................................................................ 1-22 arithmetical operations ....................................................... 11-1 ASCII file .......................................................................... App-9 ATA flash memory card ....................................................... 3-5 auto logout ......................................................................... 10-7 auto save .................................................................. 1-16, 8-10 auto save interval ............................................................... 8-19 automatic increment of the lot number ............................. 10-20 automatic switching of displayed group ............................. 7-23 common logarithm ............................................................. 11-1 communication input data .................................................. 11-2 computation channels ........................................................ 11-1 computation dropout display .............................................. 11-9 computation function ................................................. 1-20, 11-1 computation icon .................................................................. 4-4 computation operators ................................................................................... 11-4 + ................................................................................... 11-4 .EQ. ............................................................................. 11-5 .GT. .............................................................................. 11-5 .LE. .............................................................................. 11-5 .LT. .............................................................................. 11-5 .NE. .............................................................................. 11-5 / .................................................................................... 11-4 ABS ............................................................................. 11-4 AND ............................................................................. 11-5 EXP ............................................................................. 11-4 LOG ............................................................................. 11-4 NOT ............................................................................. 11-6 OR ............................................................................... 11-6 SQR ............................................................................. 11-4 TLOG.AVE ................................................................... 11-7 TLOG.MAX .................................................................. 11-7 TLOG.MIN ................................................................... 11-7 TLOG.P-P .................................................................... 11-7 TLOG.SUM .................................................................. 11-7 XOR ............................................................................. 11-6 ..................................................................................... 11-4 ..................................................................................... 11-4 conditions of the remote control terminals ......................... 11-2 constants ............................................................................ 11-1 contact specifications (alarm) ............................................ 2-10 contact specifications (FAIL/memory end) ......................... 2-12 copying a character strings ................................................ 3-22 cursor (historical trend) ...................................................... 1-13 cursor (overview) ............................................................... 1-10

B
background color ............................................................... 1-14 backlight saver ................................................................... 1-14 bar graph screen .................................................................. 1-9 base position ............................................................... 1-9, 7-19 basic setting mode ...................................................... 3-7, 3-10 batch function ..................................................................... 1-22 batch information ............................................................... 1-22 batch name ........................................................................ 1-22 batch number ..................................................................... 1-22 batch screen .................................................................... 10-17 block ............................................................................ 8-4, 8-24 brightness .......................................................................... 1-14 burnout ................................................................................. 1-3

D
daily report ....................................................................... 11-22 data acquisition (display data) ............................................. 8-3 data acquisition (event data) ................................................ 8-4 data acquisition (manual sampled data) .............................. 8-9 data acquisition (report data) ............................................... 8-9 data acquisition (TLOG data) ............................................... 8-9 data display section ............................................................. 1-5 data formats of ASCII files ............................................... App-9 data length ......................................................... 8-4, 8-24, 8-25 data used in computation ................................................... 11-1 date and time ..................................................................... 3-23 date and time (entering comment) ................................... 10-18 daylight savings time .......................................................... 1-28 DC current ............................................................................ 1-3 DC voltage ........................................................................... 1-2 DDR ..................................................................................... 8-2 DDS ..................................................................................... 8-2 delay lower limit alarm ....................................................... 1-18 delay upper limit alarm ....................................................... 1-18 deleting directories .................................................... 9-10, 9-12 deleting files ................................................................ 9-9, 9-12 Delta ..................................................................................... 1-2 DEV ...................................................................................... 8-2 DHR ..................................................................................... 8-2

C
calibration ........................................................................... 13-3 capacity (internal memory) ................................................... 8-6 carrying handle .................................................................... 3-3 cautions (messages) .......................................................... 12-8 Celsius ............................................................................. 10-24 channel assignment (group) ................................................ 7-8 channel display area ............................................................ 6-3 channel display color ......................................................... 7-12 channel number display ....................................................... 1-5 channels to acquire the data .............................................. 8-22 channels to display the trend ............................................. 8-22 clearing computed results (remote control) ...................... 10-14 clearing data ...................................................................... 9-14 clearing the character string ............................................... 3-22 combinations of user IDs and passwords .......................... 1-22 comment ............................................................................ 1-22
IM 04L01A01-01E

Index
Index

Index-1

Index
DI ......................................................................................... 1-2 difference ............................................................................. 1-2 difference lower limit alarm ................................................ 1-18 difference upper limit alarm ................................................ 1-18 digital input ........................................................................... 1-2 digital screen ........................................................................ 1-9 digits of the scale values .................................................... 7-18 dimensional drawings ...................................................... 14-19 directory name ................................................................... 8-20 directory name (manual save) ........................................... 8-16 directory name (saving data using key operation) ............... 9-5 display conditions of the LCD ............................................ 1-14 display data ................................................................. 1-15, 8-1 display direction (bar graph) ................................................ 1-9 display direction (trend) ........................................................ 1-7 display reference position .................................................. 1-13 display update rate ............................................................... 1-6 displayed color (bar graph) .................................................. 1-9 displayed color (message) ................................................... 7-6 displayed color (trend) ......................................................... 1-7 displayed color (trip line) .................................................... 7-11 displayed data of the waveform ........................................... 1-7 displayed data type (historical trend) ................................. 4-14 displayed information ....................................................... 10-20 displayed language ............................................................ 1-26 dividing report files ............................................................. 8-11 DMN ..................................................................................... 8-2 DMR ..................................................................................... 8-2 DTG ..................................................................................... 8-2 DWR .................................................................................... 8-2 FTP test ............................................................................... 3-8 FUNC key ..................................................................... 3-2, 3-8 functional ground terminal ........................................................ ii

G
grid ..................................................................................... 7-24 group display ................................................................. 1-5, 4-9

H
H .......................................................................................... 6-6 h ........................................................................................... 6-6 half screen display ............................................................. 1-13 historical trend .................................................................... 1-12 hold/non-hold (alarm indication) ......................................... 6-13 hold/non-hold (alarm output relay) ..................................... 6-13 hourly report ..................................................................... 11-22

I
Initial settings (basic setting mode) .................................. App-4 Initial settings (setting mode) ........................................... App-1 initializing ........................................................................... 9-15 input specifications (remote control) .................................. 2-14 input terminals ...................................................................... 3-3 input type ............................................................................. 1-2 installation ............................................................................ 2-3 integration time .................................................................... 1-4 internal memory ................................................................. 1-15 interval (rate-of-change alarm) ........................................... 1-19

E
e-mail transmission function icon ......................................... 4-4 eject button .......................................................................... 3-2 energize/de-energize (alarm output relay) ......................... 6-12 entering characters ............................................................ 3-22 entering numbers ............................................................... 3-21 error messages .................................................................. 12-1 ESC key ............................................................................... 3-2 Ethernet port ........................................................................ 3-3 event data ................................................................... 1-15, 8-1 expanding the time axis ..................................................... 4-19 exponent ............................................................................ 11-1 extension .............................................................................. 8-2 external storage medium (handling) .................................... 2-2 external storage medium condition ...................................... 4-4 external trigger ..................................................................... 8-5 external trigger for event data (remote control) ................ 10-14

K
key ....................................................................................... 3-2 key lock .............................................................................. 1-24 key lock icon ........................................................................ 4-4 key login function (with batch function) .............................. 1-22 key login/logout .................................................................. 1-25 key operations (basic setting mode) .................................. 3-19 key operations (setting mode) ............................................ 3-20 key panel cover .................................................................... 3-1 key trigger ............................................................................ 8-5

L
L ........................................................................................... 6-6 l ............................................................................................ 6-6 label ..................................................................................... 3-1 LCD ...................................................................................... 1-5 list of files ............................................................................. 9-8 load the setup data (remote control) ................................ 10-15 loading setup data (basic setting mode) .............................. 9-4 loading setup data (setting mode) ........................................ 9-2 log (communication command) ........................................ 10-11 log (e-mail) ....................................................................... 10-11 log (error message) .......................................................... 10-10 log (FTP) .......................................................................... 10-11 log (key login/logout) ........................................................ 10-11 log (web operation) .......................................................... 10-11 log display .......................................................................... 1-25 logical computation ............................................................ 11-1 logical format ...................................................................... 9-11 lot number .......................................................................... 1-22 lower limit alarm ................................................................. 1-17 lower limit on rate-of-change alarm .................................... 1-18

F
Fahrenheit ........................................................................ 10-24 FAIL/memory end output ................................................... 1-26 FDISK ................................................................................ 9-11 file format ........................................................................... 9-13 file header .......................................................................... 8-20 file name ....................................................... 8-2, 9-1, 9-3, 9-13 filter ...................................................................................... 1-3 floppy disk ............................................................................ 3-5 foot ....................................................................................... 3-3 format time ......................................................................... 9-11 format type ......................................................................... 9-11 formatting .................................................................. 9-11, 9-12 free ....................................................................................... 8-4 free space ............................................................................ 9-8 front cover ............................................................................ 3-1 front panel ............................................................................ 3-1

Index-2

IM 04L01A01-01E

Index

M
MAC address ..................................................................... 1-25 maintenance ...................................................................... 13-1 manager name ................................................................... 1-22 manual sampled data .................................................. 1-16, 8-1 manual sampled data file (data format) ........................... App-9 manual sampling (remote control) ................................... 10-14 manual save .............................................................. 1-16, 8-10 mark ..................................................................................... 6-4 maximum number of data points per channel ...................... 8-7 measurable range (DC volt) ................................................. 5-2 measurable range (DI) ......................................................... 5-6 measurable range (difference computation) ........................ 5-8 measurable range (RTD) ..................................................... 5-4 measurable range (TC) ........................................................ 5-4 measurement channels ........................................................ 1-2 memory information ........................................................... 4-20 memory summary .............................................................. 1-11 memory timeup .................................................................. 8-26 MENU key ............................................................................ 3-2 message .............................................................................. 1-7 message string ..................................................................... 7-7 message summary ............................................................. 1-11 mode .................................................................................. 8-24 model ...................................................................................... iv monthly report .................................................................. 11-22 moving average ................................................................... 1-3

Q
quick ................................................................................... 9-11

R
R .......................................................................................... 6-6 r ............................................................................................ 6-7 range (computation channel) ........................................... 11-11 range (scaling) ................................................................... 5-10 rear panel ............................................................................. 3-3 reducing the time axis ........................................................ 4-19 reference channel ................................................................ 5-8 reference junction compensation ......................................... 1-3 reflash ................................................................................ 6-11 relational computation ........................................................ 11-1 relative mode ................................................................... 11-15 releasing the alarm .............................................................. 6-1 releasing the alarm (remote control) ................................ 10-14 remote control function ...................................................... 1-27 remote signal ..................................................................... 1-27 removing zip disk ................................................................. 3-6 replacement periods for worn parts ................................... 13-5 replacing the fuse ............................................................... 13-2 report data ................................................................... 1-16, 8-1 report data display ............................................................. 1-12 report date ........................................................................ 11-27 report day of the week ..................................................... 11-27 report file (data format) .................................................. App-11 report function ......................................................... 1-21, 11-22 report time ........................................................................ 11-27 reset (TLOG) .................................................................... 11-16 resistance temperature detector .......................................... 1-2 rising/falling edge ............................................................... 1-27 RJC ...................................................................................... 1-3 rolling average ................................................................... 11-3 rotate .................................................................................... 8-5 RTD ...................................................................................... 1-2 rules for writing an equation (common items) .................... 11-7 run mode .............................................................................. 3-7

N
normal (formatting) ............................................................. 9-11 number of alarms ............................................................... 1-17 number of data bytes per channel ....................................... 8-6 number of display data files ................................................. 8-3 numerical display (report) ................................................ 11-24 numerical display section ..................................................... 1-8

O
operation mode .................................................................... 3-7 operation screen .................................................................. 4-1 option terminals .................................................................... 3-3 order of precedence of the operators ................................. 11-2 over display range (computation) ....................................... 11-3 over range (measurement) ....................................... 1-3, 11-24 overflow .............................................................................. 11-3 overview screen ................................................................. 1-10

S
sample rate ........................................................................ 8-24 sampling interval (display data) ........................................... 1-7 sampling interval (event data) ............................................ 8-24 sampling length .................................................................... 8-7 saved data (manual save) .................................................. 8-20 saving data to the external storage media ......................... 1-16 saving data using key operation .......................................... 9-5 saving data via Ethernet .................................................... 1-16 saving setup data (basic setting mode) ............................... 9-3 saving setup data (setting mode) ......................................... 9-1 saving the data using key operation (auto save) ............... 8-17 scale (bar graph) .................................................................. 1-9 scale (trend) ......................................................................... 1-8 scale display position ......................................................... 7-17 scale marks ........................................................................ 7-18 scale specifications ............................................................ 7-17 scale values ....................................................................... 7-18 scaling .................................................................................. 1-2 scan interval ......................................................................... 1-2 screen menu ........................................................................ 4-1 sequence number ....................................... 8-2, 8-16, 9-5, 9-13 serial interface port .............................................................. 3-3 serial number ................................................................. v, 1-22 setting items (basic setting mode) ..................................... 3-17 setting items (setting mode) ............................................... 3-14

P
panel cutout ..................................................................... 14-20 partial expanded display ...................................................... 1-8 password (key lock) ........................................................... 10-4 password (key login) .......................................................... 10-9 periodic maintenance ......................................................... 13-1 physical format ................................................................... 9-11 PNG ................................................................................... 9-13 PNL ...................................................................................... 9-1 power (computation) .......................................................... 11-1 power supply ............................................................. 2-17, 2-18 power supply for transmitter ............................................... 1-28 power switch ........................................................................ 3-2 power terminals .................................................................... 3-3 pretrigger .............................................................................. 8-5 protective ground terminal ................................................... 3-3

Index
Index

IM 04L01A01-01E

Index-3

Index
setting mode ............................................................... 3-7, 3-10 setting screen ..................................................................... 1-14 settings (alarm) .................................................................. 3-11 settings (computation) ........................................................ 3-12 settings (data storage) ....................................................... 3-12 settings (display) ................................................................ 3-11 settings (input) ................................................................... 3-11 setup mode .......................................................................... 3-7 shunt resistor ....................................................................... 5-2 skip ....................................................................................... 1-2 snapshot ............................................................................ 9-13 soft key [+] ............................................................................... 11-14 [A/a/1] .......................................................................... 3-22 [BS] .............................................................................. 3-22 [Clear] .......................................................................... 3-22 [Copy] .......................................................................... 3-22 [DEL] ............................................................................ 3-22 [E+D] ............................................................................ 8-24 [E] .............................................................................. 11-14 [INS] ............................................................................. 3-22 [Paste] ......................................................................... 3-22 soft keys ............................................................................... 3-2 software .................................................................................. vi specifications 24 VDC power supply for transmitter ......................... 14-13 24 VDC/AC power supply .......................................... 14-12 3 terminal isolated RTD input .................................... 14-12 alarm ............................................................................ 14-8 alarm output relays .................................................... 14-10 batch function ............................................................ 14-10 clamped input terminal .............................................. 14-11 communication (Ethernet) ........................................... 14-9 computation functions ................................................ 14-11 Cu10, Cu25 RTD input .............................................. 14-12 data storage ................................................................. 14-5 desktop type .............................................................. 14-11 dimentional drawings ................................................. 14-19 display ......................................................................... 14-3 FAIL/memory end output ........................................... 14-11 fieldbus communication interface .............................. 14-11 general ....................................................................... 14-14 input ............................................................................. 14-1 normal operating conditions ...................................... 14-16 power supply ............................................................. 14-15 remote control ............................................................ 14-13 serial communication interface .................................. 14-10 standard operation conditions ................................... 14-14 speed of movement of waveform ......................................... 1-6 Sqrt ...................................................................................... 1-2 square root .................................................................. 1-2, 11-1 square-root computation .................................................... 5-12 stacks ................................................................................. 11-7 START key ........................................................................... 3-2 start/stop computation (remote control) ........................... 10-14 start/stop data acquisition (remote control) ...................... 10-14 statistical computation ........................................................ 11-1 status (report) ................................................................... 11-23 status display section .................................................... 1-5, 4-2 status messages ................................................................ 12-8 STOP key ............................................................................. 3-2 storage function ................................................................. 1-15 storage medium drive .......................................................... 3-2 style number ............................................................... i, App-14 sub menu ............................................................................. 4-1 sum scale (report) ............................................................ 11-22 sum scale (TLOG) ............................................................ 11-15 summer/winter ................................................................. 10-22 supervisor name ................................................................ 1-22 system errors ..................................................................... 12-8 system screen .................................................................... 1-25

T
T ........................................................................................... 6-7 t ............................................................................................ 6-7 tag display ............................................................................ 1-5 TC ........................................................................................ 1-2 temperature unit ................................................................. 1-28 thermocouple ....................................................................... 1-2 time zone ......................................................................... 10-25 timer ................................................................................. 11-15 timeup ................................................................................ 8-26 TLOG computation ........................................................... 11-15 TLOG data .................................................................. 1-16, 8-1 trend screen ......................................................................... 1-6 trigger ................................................................................... 8-4 trigger (remote signal) ........................................................ 1-27 trip line ................................................................................. 1-7 troubleshooting .................................................................. 12-9

U
unit (computation) ............................................................ 11-11 unit (scale) ......................................................................... 7-19 unit (scaling) ....................................................................... 5-10 unit (square-root computation) ........................................... 5-12 unit handling ....................................................................... 11-2 updating (bar graph) ............................................................ 1-9 updating (digital) .................................................................. 1-9 updating (overview) ............................................................ 1-10 updating (trend) .................................................................... 1-6 upper limit alarm ................................................................ 1-17 upper limit on rate-of-change alarm ................................... 1-18 usage condition (internal memory) ....................................... 4-3 user ID ............................................................................... 10-9 USER key ................................................................... 1-24, 3-2 user name .......................................................................... 10-9

V
version number .................................................................. 1-25 viewing display data ............................................................. 9-6 viewing event data ............................................................... 9-7 volume name ..................................................................... 9-11

W
waveform lines ..................................................................... 1-7 weekly report .................................................................... 11-22 wiring (alarm output) ............................................................ 2-9 wiring (FAIL/memory end) .................................................. 2-11 wiring (input signal) .............................................................. 2-5 wiring (power supply) ......................................................... 2-17 wiring (remote control) ....................................................... 2-13 wiring (transmittor power supply) ....................................... 2-15 writing messages (remote control) ................................... 10-15

Z
zip disk ................................................................................. 3-5 zone display ......................................................................... 1-8

Index-4

IM 04L01A01-01E

Users Manual

Models UT350/UT320 Digital Indicating Controllers Users Manual

IM 05D01D02-41E

IM 05D01D02-41E
4th Edition

Blank Page

Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the UT350/UT320 digital indicating controller.

I How to Use the Manuals

Purpose Setup Basic operation Title 1. Installation 2. Initial Settings Description Describes the tasks (installation, wiring, and others) required to make the controller ready for operations.

Describes examples of setting PV input types, control output types, and alarm types. Making settings described herein allows you to carry out basic control. Operating procedures 3. Operations Describes key operation sequences. and troubleshooting 4.1 Troubleshooting For operation control through external contact inputs, see 1.5 Terminal Wiring Diagrams. Brief operation Contains the parameter map used as a guideline for setting 5. Parameters and setpoint recording parameters and lists of parameters for recording User Settings.

I Regarding This Users Manual

(1) This manual should be provided to the end user. Keep an extra copy or copies of the manual in a safe place. (2) Read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of how to operate this product before starting operation. (3) This manual describes the functions of this product. Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereinafter simply referred to as Yokogawa) does not guarantee the application of these functions for any particular purpose. (4) Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual, in part or in whole, be transcribed or copied without permission. (5) The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. (6) Every effort has been made to ensure that the details of this manual are accurate. However, should any errors be found or important information be omitted, please contact your nearest Yokogawa representative or our sales office.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

I Safety Precautions
The following symbol is indicated on the controller to ensure safe use.

CAUTION

This symbol on the controller indicates that the operator must refer to an explanation in the users manual in order to avoid the risk of injury or death of personnel or damage to the instrument. The manual describes how the operator should exercise special care to avoid electric shock or other dangers that may result in injury or loss of life.

The following symbols are used in the hardcopy users manuals and in the users manual supplied on the CD-ROM.

NOTE
Indicates that operating the hardware or software in a particular manner may damage it or result in a system failure.

IMPORTANT
Draws attention to information that is essential for understanding the operation and/or features of the controller.

I Force Majeure
(1) Yokogawa assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the use or any unpredictable defect of the product. (2) No portion of the software supplied by Yokogawa may be transferred, exchanged, leased or sublet for use by any third party without the prior permission of Yokogawa. (3) Be sure to use the spare parts approved by Yokogawa when replacing parts or consumables. (4) Use this software with one specified computer only. You must purchase another copy of the software for use on each additional computer. (5) Copying this software for purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited. (6) Store the floppy disk(s) (original medium or media) containing this software in a secure place.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

iii

I Regarding Protection, Safety, and Prohibition Against Unauthorized Modification

(1) In order to protect the product and the system controlled by it against damage and ensure its safe use, make certain that all of the instructions and precautions relating to safety contained in this document are strictly adhered to. Yokogawa does not guarantee safety if products are not handled according to these instructions. (2) Modification of the product is strictly prohibited. (3) Reverse engineering such as the disassembly or decompilation of software is strictly prohibited.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Blank Page

Toc-i

Models UT350/UT320 Digital Indicating Controllers Users Manual

IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition

CONTENTS
Introduction........................................................................................................... i 1. Installation .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Model and Suffix Codes .................................................................................. 1-1 How to Install ................................................................................................... 1-2 How to Connect Wires .................................................................................... 1-5 Hardware Specifications ................................................................................ 1-7 Terminal Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................ 1-13

Initial Settings ......................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Names and Functions of Front Panel Parts ................................................... 2-2 Setting PV Input Type (Setting First at Power-on) ......................................... 2-3 Changing PV Input Type ................................................................................. 2-6 Setting Control Output Type ........................................................................... 2-8 Changing Alarm Type ..................................................................................... 2-9 Description of Multiple Setpoints and PID ................................................... 2-12

Operations .............................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 Monitoring-purpose Operating Displays Available during Operation ......... 3-1 Setting Target Setpoint (SP) ........................................................................... 3-3 Performing/Canceling Auto-tuning ................................................................ 3-4 Setting PID Manually ....................................................................................... 3-5 Setting Alarm Setpoints .................................................................................. 3-6 Selecting Target Setpoint Numbers (SP.NO) ................................................. 3-7 Switching between Run and Stop .................................................................. 3-8 Switching between AUTO and MAN ............................................................... 3-9 Manipulating Control Output in Manual Operation ..................................... 3-10

Troubleshooting and Maintenance ........................................................ 4-1

4.1 4.2 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 4-1 Maintenance .................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 Cleaning ........................................................................................... 4-5 Replacing Brackets ........................................................................... 4-5 Attaching Terminal Cover .................................................................. 4-6 Replacing Parts with a Limited Service Life ....................................... 4-7 Replacing Control Output Relays ...................................................... 4-8

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Toc-ii
Parameters .............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 5.2 Parameter Map ................................................................................................ 5-1 Lists of Parameters ......................................................................................... 5-4

Function Block Diagram and Descriptions............................................ 6-1

Revision Information ............................................................................................ i

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-1

Installation
This chapter describes installation, wiring, and other tasks required to make the controller ready for operation.

1.1

Model and Suffix Codes

Before using the controller, check that the model and suffix codes match your order.
Model UT350 UT320 Type -0 -2 -3 0 1 2 Suffix Code Description Digital indicating controller (provided with retransmission output and 15 V DC loop power supply as standard) Standard type Heating/cooling type Standard type (with 24 V DC loop power supply) None With communication, heater burnout alarm With heater burnout alarm

Optional functions

Check that the following items are provided: Digital indicating controller (of ordered model) ...................... 1 Brackets (mounting hardware) ............................................. 1 pair Unit label.............................................................................. 1 Users Manuals .................................................................... 3 (A2 size) Users Manual (Reference) (CD-ROM version) .................... 1

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-2

1.2

How to Install
NOTE
To install the controller, select a location where: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. no one may accidentally touch the terminals, mechanical vibrations are minimal, corrosive gas is minimal, temperature can be maintained at about 23 C and the fluctuation is minimal, no direct radiant heat is present, no magnetic disturbances are caused, no wind blows against the terminal board (reference junction compensation element), no water is splashed, no flammable materials are around,
150mm

150mm

150mm 150mm

Never place the controller directly on flammable items or equipment. If the controller has to be installed close to flammable items or equipment, be sure to provide shielding panels all around the controller, at least 150 mm away from every side; the panels should be made of either 1.43 mm-thick metal-plated steel plates or 1.6 mmthick uncoated steel plates.

NOTE
Never touch the opening at the bottom of the case. It is to be used in the factory at shipping.

G Installation Position
Install the controller at an angle within 30 from horizontal with the front panel facing upward. Do not install it facing downward. The position of right and left sides should be horizontal.

Front panel of controller

Must not exceed 30

Rear of controller

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-3

I External Dimensions and Panel Cutout Dimensions

UT350
96 11 100 Large bracket Unit: mm

91.8

Small bracket 1 to 10 mm (Panel thickness)

General installation
117 min.

Side-by-side close installation

[(N-1) 96+92]
+0.8 0

(53)

145 min.

+0.8 0

"N" stands for the number of controllers to be installed. However, the measured value applies if N 5.

+0.8 0

(25)

UT320
48 11 100 Small bracket

112

Unit: mm

91.8

Small bracket 1 to 10 mm (Panel thickness)

General installation
70 min.

Side-by-side close installation

[(N-1) 48+45]
+0.6 0

(53)

145 min. "N" stands for the number of controllers to be installed. However, the measured value applies if N 5.

+0.8 0

+0.6 0

(25)

+0.8 0

112

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-4

I How to Install

Turn off the power to the controller before installing it on the panel because there is a possibility of electric shock.

CAUTION
After opening the mounting hole on the panel, follow the procedures below to install the controller: 1. 2. Insert the controller into the opening from the front of the panel so that the terminal board on the rear is at the far side. Set the brackets in place on the top and bottom of the controller as shown in the figure below, then tighten the screws of the brackets. Take care not to overtighten them.
Large bracket Panel
(top mounting hardware)

Direction to insert the controller

Insert the controller into the opening at the front of the panel.

Terminal board

Insert a screwdriver into the brackets to tighten the screws.

Recommended tightening torque :0.4N m

Small bracket
(bottom mounting hardware)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-5

1.3

How to Connect Wires

1) Before carrying out wiring, turn off the power to the controller and check that the cables to be connected are not alive with a tester or the like because there is a possibility of electric shock. For the protection and safe use of the controller, be sure to place a circuit breaker (conforms with IEC60947, 5A, 100V or 220V AC) near the controller where the breaker can easily be operated. In addition, be sure to indicated that it is the instrument to cut the power supply of the controller. Wiring must be carried out by personnel who have basic electrical knowledge and practical experience.

CAUTION

NOTE
1) Provide power from a single-phase instrument power supply. If there is a lot of noise in the power line, insert an insulating transformer into the primary side of the line and use a line filter (recommended part: ZAC2205-00U from TDK) on the secondary side. As a countermeasures against noise, do not place the primary and secondary power cables close to each other. For thermocouple input, use shielded compensating lead wires for wiring. For RTD input, use shielded wires that have low conductor resistance and cause no significant differences in resistance between the three wires. The cables to be used for wiring, terminal specifications, and recommended parts are as shown below. Control output relays may be replaced. However, because they have a life of 100,000 times that of the resistance load, use auxiliary relays to turn on/off a load. The use of inductance (L) loads such as auxiliary relays, motors and solenoid valves causes malfunction or relay failure; always insert a CR filter for use with alternating current or a diode for use with direct current, as a spark-removal surge suppression circuit, into the line in parallel with the load. When there is possibility of being struck by external lightening surge, use the arrester to protect the instrument.

3) 4)

I For DC Relay Wiring

UT350/UT320 External DC power supply

I For AC Relay Wiring

UT350/UT320 External AC power supply

R
UTs contact Diode (Mount it directly to the relay coil terminal (socket).)

R
UTs contact

Relay (Use one with a relay coil rating less than the UTs contact rating.)

CR filter (Mount it directly to the relay coil terminal (socket).)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-6

G Cable Specifications and Recommended Cables

Purpose Thermocouple RTD Other signals Name and Manufacturer Shielded compensating lead wires, JIS C 1610, (See Yokogawa Electric's GS 6B1U1-E.) Shielded wires XPower supply, grounding, relay contact outputs 600 V PVC insulated wires, JIS C 3307, 0.9 to 2.0 mm2

Shielded wires (three conductors), UL2482 (Hitachi Cable)

G Recommended Terminal Lugs

Applicable wire size 0.3 to 1.65 mm
2

Tightening torque 0.8 Nm or less

3.7mm
7 mm or less 7 mm or less

3.7mm

G Terminal Covers (Optional parts)

Target Model For UT350 For UT320 Part Number T9115YD T9115YE 1 1 Sales Unit

1. Before attaching the terminal cover, bend the side with the groove inward as shown in Fig. A. Be careful not to bend it backwards. This not only marks it harder to attach the cover but will also weaken its hold. 2. Fit the holes on the top and bottom of the terminal cover the projections on the brackets (Fig. B) and lock in place. The figure right shows the attachment of a terminal cover to UT controller.

Fold the cover in the direction of the arrow. Figure A

Fit the cover hold over the protrusion on the mounting bracket.

Figure B

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-7

1.4

Hardware Specifications
PV Input Signals
Number of inputs: 1 (terminals
11 - 12 - 13 )

Input type: Universal input system. The input type can be selected with the software. Sampling period: 250 ms Burnout detection: Functions at TC, RTD, standard signal (0.4 to 2 V or 1 to 5 V) Upscale, downscale, and off can be specified. For standard signal, burnout is determined to have occurred if it is 0.1 V or less. Input bias current: 0.05 A (for TC or RTD b-terminal) Measurement current (RTD): About 0.13 mA Input resistance: 1 M or more for thermocouple or mV input About 1 M for DC voltage input Allowable signal source resistance: 250 or less for thermocouple or mV input Effects of signal source resistance: 0.1 V/ or less 2 k or less for DC voltage input Effects of signal source resistance: About 0.01%/100 Allowable wiring resistance: for RTD input Maximum 150 /wire: Conductor resistance between three wires should be equal However, 10 /wire for a maximum range of -150.0 to 150.0 C. Wire resistance effect: 0.1 C/10 Allowable input voltage: 10 V DC for thermocouple, mV, or RTD input 20 V DC for DC voltage input Noise rejection ratio: 40 dB (50/60 Hz) or more in normal mode 120 dB (50/60 Hz) or more in common mode Reference junction compensation error: 1.5 C (0 to 15 C, 35 to 50 C) 1.0 C (15 to 35 C)

Applicable standards: JIS, IEC, DIN (ITS-90) for thermocouples and RTD

Loop Power Supply

Supplies power to a two-wire transmitter. (15 V DC: terminals 14 - 15 ; 24 V DC: terminals 21 - 22 ) A resistor (10 to 250 ) connected between the controller and transmitter converts a current signal into a voltage signal, which is then read via the PV input terminal. Supply voltage: 14.5 to 18.0 V DC, max. 21 mA (provided with a protection circuit against a field short-circuit); 21.6 to 28.0 V DC, max. 30 mA (only for models with 24 V DC loop power supply) When using the 24 V DC loop power supply of the UT320, keep the operating ambient temperature between 0 C and 40 C.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-8

Retransmission Output
Either PV, target setpoint, or control output is output. Either the retransmission output or the loop power supply can be used with terminals 14 - 15 . Number of outputs: 1 (terminals Output signal: 4-20 mA DC Load resistance: 600 or less
14 - 15 )

Output accuracy: 0.3% of span under standard operating conditions (23 2 C, 55 10% RH, power frequency of 50/60 Hz)

Control Output
Universal output system, The output type can be selected with the software. Current output (Standard type: terminals 16 - 17 ; Heating/cooling type: Heating side: terminals Cooling side: terminals 14 - 15 )
Number of outputs 1 or 2 (two for heating/cooling type), switched between a voltage pulse output and current output. 4-20 mA DC 600 or less

16 - 17 ;

Output signal Load resistance Output accuracy

0.3% of span under standard operating conditions (23 2 C, 55 10% RH, power frequency of 50/60 Hz)

Voltage pulse output (Standard type: terminals 16 - 17 ; Heating/cooling type: Heating side: terminals Cooling side: terminals 14 - 15 )
Number of outputs 1 or 2 (two for heating/cooling type), switched between a voltage pulse output and current output.

16 - 17 ;

Output signal On-voltage = 12 V or more (load resistance: 600 or more) Off-voltage = 0.1 V DC or less Resolution 10 ms

Relay contact output (Standard type: terminals 1 - 2 - 3 ; Heating/cooling type: Heating side: terminals 2 - 3 ; Cooling side: terminals 4 - 7 )
Number of outputs Output signal Contact rating 1 or 2 (two for heating/cooling type) Three terminals (NC, NO, and common) / Two terminals Terminals 1-2-3 : 250 V AC or 30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load) Terminal 4-7 : 240 V AC or 30 V DC, 1A (resistance load) 10 ms

Resolution

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-9

Contact Inputs
Purpose: Selection between target setpoints or Auto/Man modes, or for other purposes Number of inputs: 2 Input type: Non-voltage contact or transistor open collector input Input contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more On/off determination: For non-voltage contact input, contact resistance of 1 k or less is determined as on and contact resistance of 20 k or more as off. For transistor open collector input, input voltage of 2 V or less is determined as on and leakage current must not exceed 100 A when off. Minimum status detection hold time: About 1 second.

Contact Outputs
Purpose: Alarm output, FAIL output, and others Number of outputs: 3 Relay contact rating: 240 V AC/1 A or 30 V DC/1 A (COM terminal is common.) (FAIL output : 1b)

Display Specifications
PV display: UT350: 4-digit, 7-segment red LED display, character height of 20 mm UT320: 4-digit, 7-segment red LED display, character height of 12 mm Setpoint display: 4-digit, 7-segment red LED display, character height of 9.3 mm (for both UT350 and UT320) Status indicating lamps: LEDs

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-10

Safety and EMC Standards

Safety: Complies with IEC/EN61010-1 (CE), approved by C22.2 No.61010-1, approved by UL508. Installation category : CAT. II Pollution degree : 2 (IEC/EN61010-1, C22.2 No.610101) Measurement category : I (CAT. I : IEC/EN61010-1) Rated measurement input voltage : 10V DC max.(across terminals), 300V AC max.(across ground) Rated transient overvoltage : 1500V (Note) Note : It is a value on the safety standard which is assumed by IEC/EN61010-1 in Measurement category I, and is not the value which guarantees an apparatus performance.

This equipment has Measurement category I, therefore do not use the equipment for measurements within Measurement categories II, III and IV.

CAUTION

Measurement category 1 2 3 4 CAT.1 CAT.2 CAT.3 CAT.4

Description For measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to MAINS. For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low voltage installation. For measurements performed in the building installation. For measurements performed at the source of the low-voltage installation.

Remarks Appliances, portable equipments, etc. Distribution board, circuit breaker, etc. Overhead wire, cable systems, etc.

Internal Wiring

3
Entrance 4 Cable Outlet

T 1

EMC standards: Complies with EN61326, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 and EN55011 (CE). AS/NZS 2064 compliant (C-Tick). Class A Group 1. The instrument continues to operate at a measuring accuracy of within range during tests. 20% of the

Construction, Installation, and Wiring

Construction: Dust-proof and drip-proof pront panel conforming to IP55. For side-byside close installation the controller loses its dust-proof and drip-proof protection. Material: ABS resin and polycarbonate Case color: Black Weight: About 1 kg or less Dimensions: UT350 96 (W) UT320 48 (W) 96 (H) 96 (H) 100 (depth from panel face) mm 100 (depth from panel face) mm

Installation: Panel-mounting type. With top and bottom mounting hardware (1 each)
IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-11

Panel cutout dimensions: +0.8 +0.8 UT350 920 (W) 920 (H) mm +0.6 +0.8 UT320 450 (W) 920 (H) mm Installation position: Up to 30 upward facing (not designed for facing downward) Wiring: M3.5 screw terminals (for signal wiring and power/ground wiring as well)

Power Supply Specifications

Power supply: Rated voltage of 100 to 240 V AC ( 10%), 50/60 Hz Power consumption: Max. 20 VA (8.0 W max.) Internal fuse rating: 250 V AC, 1.6A time-lug fuse Data backup: Non-volatile memory (can be written to up to 100,000 times) Withstanding voltage Between primary terminals* and secondary terminals**: At least 1500 V AC for 1 minute Between primary terminals* and grounding terminal: At least 1500 V AC for 1 minute Between grounding terminal and secondary terminals**: At least 1500 V AC for 1 minute Between secondary terminals**: At least 500 V AC for 1 minute

* Primary terminals indicate power terminals and relay output terminals ** Secondary terminals indicate analog I/O signal, voltage pulse output, and contact input terminals Insulation resistance: 20 M or more at 500 V DC between power terminals and grounding terminal Grounding: Class D grounding (grounding resistance of 100 or less)

Signal Isolations
PV input terminals: Isolated from other input/output terminals. Not isolated from the internal circuit. 15 V DC loop power supply terminals: Not isolated from 4-20 mA analog output and voltage pulse control output. Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit. 24 V DC loop power supply terminals: Isolated from the 15 V DC loop power supply terminals, 4-20 mA analog output terminals and voltage pulse control output terminals, other I/O terminals and the internal circuitry. 4-20 mA analog output terminals (for control output and retransmission): Not isolated between 4-20 mA outputs and from 15 V DC loop power supply and voltage pulse control output. Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit. Voltage pulse control output terminals: Not isolated from 4-20 mA outputs and 15 V DC loop power supply. Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit. Relay contact control output terminals: Isolated between contact output terminals and from other input/output terminals and internal circuit. Contact input terminals: Not isolated between contact input terminals and from communication terminals. Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-12

Relay contact alarm output terminals: Not isolated between relay contact alarm outputs. Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit. RS-485 communication terminals: Not isolated from contact input terminals. Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit. Power terminals: Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit. Grounding terminals: Isolated from other input/output terminals and internal circuit.

Environmental Conditions
Normal operating conditions: Ambient temperature: 0 to 50 C (40 C or less for side-by-side close installation) The operating ambient temperature range is between 0 C and 40 C when the 24 V DC loop power supply of the UT320 is used. Temperature change rate: 10 C/h or less Ambient humidity: 20 to 90% RH (no condensation allowed) Magnetic field: 400 A/m or less Continuous vibration at 5 to 14 Hz: Full amplitude of 1.2 mm or less Continuous vibration at 14 to 150 Hz: 4.9 m/s2 or less Short-period vibration: 14.7 m/s2, 15 seconds or less Shock: 147 m/s2 or less, 11 ms Installation height: Height above sea level of 2000 m or less Warm-up time: 30 minutes or more after power on Transportation and storage conditions: Temperature: -25 to 70 C Temperature change rate: 20 C/h or less Humidity: 5 to 95% RH (no condensation allowed) Effects of changes in operating conditions Effects from changes in ambient temperature: On voltage or thermocouple input, whichever is larger On RTD input, 1 V/ C or 0.01% of F.S./ C,

0.05 C/ C (ambient temperature) or less 0.05% of F.S./ C or less

On analog output,

Effects from power supply fluctuation (within rated voltage range) On analog input, larger On analog output, 1 V/10 V or 0.01% of F.S./10 V, whichever is

0.05% of F.S./10 V or less

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<1. Installation>

1-13

1.5

Terminal Wiring Diagrams

NOTE
Do not use unassigned terminals as relay terminals.

Terminal wiring diagrams are shown on and after the next page.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

I UT350 Standard Type (Model UT350-0

Control output Relay contact output
NC NO COM

or UT350-3 ) or Heating/Cooling Type (Model UT350-2 )

PV input * Not configured at factory before shipment See 2. Initial Settings, for more information. TC input 12 + 12 b 13 21.6-28.0VDC (30 mA DC max.)

<Toc>

1 2 3

Note: Select this option from * Wiring can only be carried the OT parameter. RS-485 communication * Wiring can only be carried out out for controllers with * Time proportional PID for controllers with 24 V DC loop power supply. relay contact output is communication functions. 24 V DC loop configured at factory 23 SDB(+) Maximum baud rate: 9600 bps power supply before shipment. 24 SDA(-) 25 RDB(+) 26 27 UT
RDA(-) SG

Receiving 4-20 mA DC Current Signals with the Controller

* When receiving 4-20 mA DC current signals,
set the PV input type to 1-5 V DC (setpoint 41).

RTD input 11 A

12 +
250 4-20mA

21 + 22 -

Contact rating: 250 V AC, 3 A 30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)

13 B mV/V input 12 + 13 -

13 Note: Connecting a 250 resistor to the terminals is optional. Model: X010-250-2 (resistor with M3.5 crimp-on terminal lugs)

Alarm output Alarm-1 output Alarm-2 output Alarm-3 output Common AL1 6 AL2 5 AL3 4 COM 7

Relay contact rating: 240 V AC, 1 A 30 V DC, 1 A (resistance load)

Power supply Power supply

Allowable range: 100 to 240 V AC ( 10%) (free voltage) 50/60 Hz shared

* This wiring is only possible for a controller with a heater burnout alarm.

Relay

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 17 Control output Current/voltage pulse output 16 + Note:Select this option from the OT parameter. 14 +
4-20 mA DC

Retransmission output

* PV retransmission is configured at factory before shipment.

CAUTION
Before carrying out wiring, turn off the power to the controller and check that cables to be connected are not alive with a tester or the like because there is a possibility of electric shock.

15 Load resistance: 600 or less

15 V DC loop power supply

8 9 10

4-20 mA DC, voltage pulse (12 V)

* If 15 V DC loop power supply is used, retransmission output cannot be used.

14 + 15 -

14.5-18.0VDC (21 mA DC max.)

* DIS is a setup parameter. Changing DIS setpoint allows you to change the function of external contact input. Correspondence between parameter DIS and external contact input functions
When DIS=OFF When DIS=1 (Factory-set default) 2.SP when DI1=ON 1.SP when DI1=OFF AUTO when DI2=ON MAN when DI2=OFF When DIS=2 When DIS=3 Hides the LOCK parameter when DI1=ON. When switching target setpoints 1 to 4: Shows the LOCK parameter when DI1=OFF. 1.SP2.SP3.SP 4.SP When DIS=4

Heater current detection input 29

CT CT
CT1 CT2 COM

Contact

+5V DI1 +5V DI2 COM

Transistor contact

No function No function Common

2.SP when DI1=ON DI1 19 1.SP when DI1=OFF STOP when DI2=ON RUN when DI2=OFF

19 18

28 30

No function Common

DI1 OFF ON OFF ON DI2 OFF OFF ON ON

DI2 18 COM 20

<1. Installation>

Common

IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

* OT is a setup parameter. You can change the settings of the parameter OT to change the control output type. See 2. Initial Settings, for more information.
Correspondence between parameter OT and control output types
OT=0 (factory-set default) Time proportional control Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) OT=1 Time proportional control Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) OT=2 Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) OT=3 On-off control Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 )

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Note: External Contact Input If the power is turned on when the external contact input is OFF, the mode (SP.no or A/M) existing before the power is turned off will be continued. (except for RUN/STOP)

1-14

I UT350 Heating/Cooling Type (Model UT350-2 )

Heating-side control output Relay contact output
NC NO COM

<Toc>

1 2 3

* Time proportional PID relay contact output is configured at factory before shipment. * Available if 4, 7 or 10 is set in the OT (Control Output Type) setup parameter.

RS-485 communication * Wiring can only be carried out for controllers with communication functions. Maximum baud rate: 9600 bps 23 SDB(+)

PV input * Not configured at factory before shipment See 2. Initial Settings, for more information. TC input 12 + RTD input 11 A 12 b 13 13 B mV/V input 12 + 13 -

Receiving 4-20 mA DC Current Signals with the Controller

* When receiving 4-20 mA DC current signals,
set the PV input type to 1-5 V DC (setpoint 41).

12 +
250 4-20mA

24
Contact rating: 250 V AC, 3 A 30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)

SDA(-)

25 RDB(+) 26 27
RDA(-) SG

13 Note: Connecting a 250 resistor to the terminals is optional. Model: X010-250-2 (resistor with M3.5 crimp-on terminal lugs)

Alarm output/cooling-side control output Alarm-1 output Alarm-2 output Relay AL1 6 UT

AL2 5 Alarm-3 output or cooling-side control AL3 4 output (Note) COM 7 Common

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 17 Heating-side control output * Available if 5, 6, 8, 9, 11 Current/voltage or 12 is set in the OT pulse output (Control Output Type) setup parameter. 16 + 4-20 mA DC,
voltage pulse (12 V)

* PV retransmission is configured at factory before shipment.

Retransmission output
15 V DC loop power supply

Relay contact rating: 240 V AC, 1 A 30 V DC, 1 A (resistance load)

14 +
4-20 mA DC

14 + 15 -

Note: The cooling-side control output is selected if 4, 5 or 6 is set in the OT (Control Output Type) setup parameter. The alarm-3 output is not available. The controller is factory-set to the cooling-side control output (time proportional PID relay contact output). Power supply Power supply
L

15 -

14.5-18.0VDC (21 mA DC max.)

Cooling-side control output

* If 15 V DC loop power supply is used, retransmission output cannot be used. * The retransmission output and 15 V DC loop power supply are not available if the cooling-side control output is set to current output and voltage pulse output.

14 + 15 -

8 9 10

4-20 mA DC, voltage pulse (12 V)

Allowable range: 100 to 240 V AC ( 10%) (free voltage) 50/60 Hz shared

* DIS is a setup parameter. Changing DIS setpoint allows you to change the function of external contact input. Heater current detection input 29
CT CT
CT1 CT2 COM

* This wiring is only possible for a controller with a heater burnout alarm.

Correspondence between parameter DIS and external contact input functions

When DIS=OFF When DIS=1 (Factory-set default) 2.SP when DI1=ON 1.SP when DI1=OFF AUTO when DI2=ON MAN when DI2=OFF

No function No function Common

When DIS=2 When DIS=3 Hides the LOCK parameter when DI1=ON. When switching target setpoints 1 to 4: Shows the LOCK parameter when DI1=OFF. 1.SP2.SP3.SP 4.SP

When DIS=4

Contact

+5V DI1 +5V DI2 COM

Transistor contact

2.SP when DI1=ON DI1 19 1.SP when DI1=OFF STOP when DI2=ON RUN when DI2=OFF

19 18 20

28 30

No function Common

DI1 OFF ON OFF ON DI2 OFF OFF ON ON

DI2 18 COM 20

Common

Note: External Contact Input If the power is turned on when the external contact input is OFF, the mode (SP.no or A/M) existing before the power is turned off will be continued. (except for RUN/STOP)

<1. Installation>

IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

* OT is a setup parameter. You can change the settings of the parameter OT to change the control output type. See 2. Initial Settings, for more information.
Correspondence between parameter OT and heating-side/cooling-side output types
OT=4 (factory-set default) Heating side: Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) Cooling side: Relay output (terminals 4 and 7 ) OT=5 Heating side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Relay output (terminals 4 and 7 ) OT=6 Heating side: Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Relay output (terminals 4 and 7 ) OT=7 Heating side: Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) Cooling side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 14 and 15 ) OT=8 Heating side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 14 and 15 ) OT=9 Heating side: Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 14 and 15 )

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

OT=10 Heating side: Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) Cooling side: Current output (terminals 14 and 15 )

OT=11 Heating side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Current output (terminals 14 and 15 )

OT=12 Heating side: Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Current output (terminals 14 and 15 )

The control output types, relay output and voltage pulse output shown in the table above refer to those of time proportional control. To change the type to a relay output for on-off control, select Relay Terminals and change the setpoint of the proportional band to 0.

1-15

I UT320 Standard Type (Model UT320-0

Control output Relay contact output
NC NO COM

or UT320-3 ) or Heating/Cooling Type (Model UT320-2 )

PV input * Not configured at factory before shipment See 2. Initial Settings, for more information. TC input 12 + 12 b 13 13 B mV/V input 12 + 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 17 Control output Current/voltage pulse output 16 + 14 +
4-20 mA DC

<Toc>

Receiving 4-20 mA DC Current Signals with the Controller

* When receiving 4-20 mA DC current signals,
set the PV input type to 1-5 V DC (setpoint 41).

1 2 3

Note: Select this option from * Wiring can only be carried the OT parameter. out for controllers with * Time proportional PID 24 V DC loop power supply. relay contact output is RS-485 communication * Wiring can only be carried out 24 V DC loop for controllers with configured at factory communication functions. power supply before shipment. 23 SDB(+) Maximum baud rate: 9600 bps 24
SDA(-)

RTD input 11 A

12 +
250 4-20mA

13 Note: Connecting a 250 resistor to the terminals is optional. Model: X010-250-2 (resistor with M3.5 crimp-on terminal lugs)

Contact rating: 250 V AC, 3 A 30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)

21 + 22 -

25 RDB(+) Alarm output Alarm-1 output Alarm-2 output Alarm-3 output Common
Relay

21.6-28.0VDC (30 mA DC max.)

AL1 6 AL2 5 AL3 4 COM 7

26 27

RDA(-) SG

Retransmission output

* PV retransmission is configured at factory before shipment.

Relay contact rating: 240 V AC, 1 A 30 V DC, 1 A (resistance load)

Power supply Power supply

8 9 10

4-20 mA DC, voltage pulse (12 V)

Note:Select this option Load resistance: 600 or less from the OT parameter. 15 V DC loop power supply * If 15 V DC loop power supply is used, retransmission output cannot be used. 14 + 15 14.5-18.0VDC (21 mA DC max.)

15 -

Allowable range: 100 to 240 V AC ( 10%) (free voltage) 50/60 Hz shared

* This wiring is only possible for a controller with a heater burnout alarm.

Heater current detection input 29

CT CT
CT1 CT2 COM

Contact

+5V DI1 +5V DI2 COM

Transistor contact

No function No function Common

2.SP when DI1=ON DI1 19 1.SP when DI1=OFF STOP when DI2=ON RUN when DI2=OFF

19 18 20

28 30

No function Common

DI1 OFF ON OFF ON DI2 OFF OFF ON ON

DI2 18 COM 20

<1. Installation>

IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Common

* OT is a setup parameter. You can change the settings of the parameter OT to change the control output type. See 2. Initial Settings, for more information.
Correspondence between parameter OT and control output types
OT=0 (factory-set default) Time proportional control Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) OT=1 Time proportional control Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) OT=2 Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) OT=3 On-off control Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 )

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Note: External Contact Input If the power is turned on when the external contact input is OFF, the mode (SP.no or A/M) existing before the power is turned off will be continued. (except for RUN/STOP)

1-16

I UT320 Heating/Cooling Type (Model UT320-2 )

Heating-side control output Relay contact output * Time proportional PID relay contact output is configured at factory NC 1 before shipment. * Available if 4, 7 or 10 is set in the OT NO 2 (Control Output Type) setup parameter.
COM

<Toc>

RS-485 communication * Wiring can only be carried out for controllers with communication functions. Maximum baud rate: 9600 bps 23 SDB(+)

PV input * Not configured at factory before shipment See 2. Initial Settings, for more information. TC input 12 + RTD input 11 A 12 b 13 13 B mV/V input 12 + 13 -

Receiving 4-20 mA DC Current Signals with the Controller

* When receiving 4-20 mA DC current signals,
set the PV input type to 1-5 V DC (setpoint 41).

12 +
250 4-20mA

24 3
Contact rating: 250 V AC, 3 A 30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)

SDA(-)

25 RDB(+) 26 Note: The cooling-side control output is selected if 4, 5 or 6 is set in the OT (Control Output Type) setup parameter. The alarm-3 output is not available. The controller is factory-set to the cooling-side control output (time proportional PID relay contact output). 27
RDA(-) SG

13 Note: Connecting a 250 resistor to the terminals is optional. Model: X010-250-2 (resistor with M3.5 crimp-on terminal lugs)

Alarm output/cooling-side control output Alarm-1 output Alarm-2 output

Relay

AL1 6 AL2 5

Alarm-3 output or cooling-side control AL3 4 output (Note) COM 7 Common

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 17 Heating-side control output * Available if 5, 6, 8, 9, Current/voltage 11 or 12 is set in the OT pulse output (Control Output Type) setup parameter. + 16 4-20 mA DC,
voltage pulse (12 V)

* PV retransmission is configured at factory before shipment.

Retransmission output
15 V DC loop power supply

Relay contact rating: 240 V AC, 1 A 30 V DC, 1 A (resistance load)

14 +
4-20 mA DC

14 + 15 -

Power supply Power supply

15 -

14.5-18.0VDC (21 mA DC max.)

8 9 10

Cooling-side control output

14 + 15 -

4-20 mA DC, voltage pulse (12 V)

Allowable range: 100 to 240 V AC ( 10%) (free voltage) 50/60 Hz shared

* This wiring is only possible for a controller with a heater burnout alarm.

Heater current detection input 29

CT CT
CT1 CT2 COM

Contact

+5V DI1 +5V DI2 COM

Transistor contact

No function No function Common

2.SP when DI1=ON DI1 19 1.SP when DI1=OFF STOP when DI2=ON RUN when DI2=OFF

19 18 20

28 30

No function Common

DI1 OFF ON OFF ON DI2 OFF OFF ON ON

DI2 18 COM 20

Common

Note: External Contact Input If the power is turned on when the external contact input is OFF, the mode (SP.no or A/M) existing before the power is turned off will be continued. (except for RUN/STOP)

* OT is a setup parameter. You can change the settings of the parameter OT to change the control output type. See 2. Initial Settings, for more information.

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

15 V DC Power Supply Wiring to Two-wire Sensor

* Wiring can only be carried out for controllers with 24 V DC loop power supply. 24 V DC Power Supply Wiring to Two-wire Sensor

<1. Installation>

IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Correspondence between parameter OT and heating-side/cooling-side output types

OT=4 (factory-set default) Heating side: Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) Cooling side: Relay output (terminals 4 and 7 ) OT=7 Heating side: Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) Cooling side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 14 and 15 ) OT=10 Heating side: Relay output (terminals 1 , 2 and 3 ) Cooling side: Current output (terminals 14 and 15 ) OT=5 Heating side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Relay output (terminals 4 and 7 ) OT=8 Heating side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 14 and 15 ) OT=11 Heating side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Current output (terminals 14 and 15 ) OT=6 Heating side: Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Relay output (terminals 4 and 7 ) OT=9 Heating side: Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Voltage pulse output (terminals 14 and 15 ) OT=12 Heating side: Current output (terminals 16 and 17 ) Cooling side: Current output (terminals 14 and 15 )

12
External resistor 100 (Note)

12
External resistor 250 (Note)
PV input 1 to 5 V DC signal

PV input 0.4 to 2.0 V DC signal 13

Two-wire transmitter

14 Loop power supply 14.5 to 18.0 V DC

Two-wire transmitter

21
Loop power supply 21.6 to 28.0 V DC

4-20 mA DC 15

4-20 mA DC 22

1-17

Note: Connecting a 100 resistor to the terminals is optional. Model: X010-100-2 (resistor with M3.5 crimp-on terminal lugs)

Note: Connecting a 250 resistor to the terminals is optional. Model: X010-250-2 (resistor with M3.5 crimp-on terminal lugs)

Blank Page

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

2-1

Initial Settings
This chapter describes examples of setting PV input types, control output types, and alarm types. Carrying out settings described herein allows you to perform basic control. Refer to examples of various settings to understand how to set parameters required. Refer to 5.1 Parameter Map for an easy to understand explanation of setting various parameters. If you cannot remember how to carry out an operation during setting, press the key for more than 3 seconds. This brings you to the display (operating display) that appears at power-on.
SET/ENT

Setup Procedure

Power-on

Denotes a step that must always be followed. Denotes a step that should be followed as necessary.

Set PV input.

(Factory-set to Unspecified.)

See 2.2 Setting PV Input Type (Setting First at Power-on), or 2.3 Changing PV Input Type. Set the control output. (Factory-set to Time Proportional Relay Output.)

See 2.4 Setting Control Output Type.

Set the alarm type and other setup parameters.

Set operating parameters.

Controller operation

The following explanation of operation for the UT350s panel, shown in the figure, is the same as that of the UT320s panel.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

2-2

2.1

Names and Functions of Front Panel Parts

3. Target setpoint (SP) number indicator lamps 5. Alarm indicator lamps 6. Light-loader interface 7. A/M key 8. SET/ENT key 1. Process variable (PV) 2. Setpoint display display 2. Setpoint display 3. Target setpoint (SP) number 4. Status indicator lamps indicator 6. Light-loader lamp interface 9. and keys 7. A/M key 1. Process variable (PV) display 4. Status indicator lamp 5. Alarm indicator lamps 8. SET/ENT key 9. and keys

Name of Part 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Process variable (PV) display Setpoint display Target setpoint (SP) number indicator lamps Status indicator lamp Alarm indicator lamps Light-loader interface A/M key SET/ENT key and keys

Function Displays PV. Displays a parameter symbol when you set a parameter. Displays an error code (in red) if an error occurs. Displays the setpoint (SP) or the output value (OUT) during operation. Displays the set value of parameters on the parameter setting display. When the SP number currently used for operation is 2, 3 or 4, the respective SP No. indicator lamp lighits. When the SP number is 1, the lamp does not lighit. Is lit in green during manual operation. MAN: Is lit when in manual mode. Blinks during auto-tuning. If any of alarms 1 to 3 occurs, the respective alarm indicator lamp (AL1 to AL3) is lit (in orange). Interface for an adapter cable used when setting and storing parameters from a PC. This requires an optional parameter setting tool. Used to switch between the AUTO and MAN modes. Each time you press the key, it switches to the AUTO or MAN mode alternately. Used to switch or register a parameter. Pressing the key for more than 3 seconds allows you to switch between the operating display and the menu for operating parameter setting display alternately. Used to change numerical values. On setting displays for various parameters, you can change target setpoints, parameters, and output values (in manual operation). Pressing the key decreases a numerical value, while pressing the key causes it to increase. You can hold down a key to gradually increase the speed of change.

A/M
SET/ENT

IMPORTANT
The controller automatically returns to the display at the time of power-on (i.e., operating display) if no key is operated for at least one minute.

I Setting of Main Parameters at the Factory before Shipment

Item Control output Control action PID parameter Alarm output Factory-set defaults for standard type controllers Time proportional PID relay output (variable) Reverse action (variable) Factory-set defaults for heating/cooling type controllers Heating side: Time proportional PID relay output (variable) Cooling side: Time proportional PID relay output (variable) Not specified P = 5.0%, I = 240 seconds, D = 60 seconds. Alarm-1: PV high limit, Alarm-2: PV low limit, Alarm-3: PV high limit

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

2-3

2.2

Setting PV Input Type (Setting First at Power-on)

NOTE
The controller displays the operating display when the power is turned on. However, if PV input type has not been set, IN appears. In this case, first use the key to display the input range code to use, then press the key to register it. Then, set the maximum value (RH) and minimum value (RL) of the PV input range (for voltage input, set the maximum value (SH) and minimum value (SL) of the PV input scale).
SET/ENT

The controller is configured to the initial value of each parameter at the factory before shipment. First check the initial values shown in 5.2 Lists of Parameters, and change parameter values as necessary.

Example of Temperature Input

-200C 1370C 1V 2V

Example of Voltage Input

4V 5V (Input signal)

Instrument input range PV input range

0C 800C

Instrument input range

Set a range to be controlled

PV input range PV input scale

Minimum value of PV input range (RL)

Maximum value of PV input range (RH)

Set a range to be controlled

50.0m3/h

0.0m3/h

Parameters to be set for temperature input 1. PV input type (IN): Set according to a sensor 2. Maximum value of PV input range (RH): Set the maximum value of the range to be controlled. 3. Minimum value of PV input range (RL): Set the minimum value of the range to be controlled.

Minimum value of Maximum value of PV input scale (SL) PV input scale (SH) Parameters to be set for voltage input 1. PV input type (IN): Set according to an input signal 2. Maximum value of PV input range (RH): Set the maximum value of an input signal. 3. Minimum value of PV input range (RL): Set the minimum value of an input signal. 4. Position of PV input decimal point (SDP): Set the position of the decimal point for PV input display. 5. Maximum value of PV input scale (SH): Set the maximum value of the scale to be controlled. 6. Minimum value of PV input scale (SL): Set the minimum value of the scale to be controlled.

The following operating procedure describes an example of setting the controller to a Ktype thermocouple (-199.9 C to 500.0 C) and the measurement range of 0.0 C to 200.0 C.

Display screen at power-on The parameter IN for setting the PV input type appears.
Displays parameter IN.
SP 2

PV
3 4

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. The figure below is an example of the controller set to a K-type thermocouple (-199.9 C to 500.0 C). See Instrument Input Range Codes.
PV

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Blinks during change.

A/M
SET/ENT

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

A/M
SET/ENT

Blinks during change.

Press the key once to display the parameter RH (maximum value of PV input range).
SET/ENT

10.

PV
SP 2

Displays parameter RH.

3 4

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

PV
SP 2

A/M
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. The figure below shows an example of setting the maximum value of PV input range to 200.0 C.

If the type of input is voltage, also configure the PV Input Decimal Point Position (SDP), Maximum Value of PV Input Scale (SH) and Minimum Value of PV Input Scale (SL) that follow this step.

PV
SP 2

11.
Blinks during change.

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

To set the type of control output, see steps 7 and later in 2.4 Setting Control Output Type. To finish settings, press the key for more than 3 seconds. This returns you to the display shown at power-on (figure below).
SET/ENT

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays PV.

PV
SP 2

A/M
3 4
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

The PV display in the figure above shows the error code for input burnout ( ) if PV input wiring is not yet complete. The error code disappears when you wire the PV input terminals correctly.
IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

2-5

I Instrument Input Range Codes

Select the unit from the UNIT parameter. Input Unspecified Type Instrument Input Range Code OFF 1 K 2 3 J 4 5 T 6 B S R Thermocouple N E L(DIN) 10 11 12 13 U(DIN) 14 W Platinel 2 PR20-40 W97Re3W75Re25 JPt100 31 RTD Pt100 35 36 37 Standard signal DC voltage 0.4 to 2 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 2 V 0 to 10 V -10 to 20 mV 0 to 100 mV 40 41 50 51 55 56 15 16 17 18 30 7 8 9 Instrument Measurement Accuracy Input Range Set the data item PV Input Type "IN" to the OFF option to leave the PV input type undefined. -200 to 1370 C -300 to 2500 F -199.9 to 999.9 C 0 to 2300 F 0.1% of instrument range 1 digit for temperatures -199.9 to 500.0 C equal to or higher than 0 C -199.9 to 999.9 F 0.2% of instrument range 1 digit for temperatures -199.9 to 999.9 C below 0 C -300 to 2300 F -199.9 to 400.0 C -300 to 750 F 0.0 to 400.0 C -199.9 to 750.0 F 0 to 1800 C 0.15% of instrument range 1 digit at 400 C or more 32 to 3300 F 5% of instrument range 1 digit at less than 400 C 0 to 1700 C 32 to 3100 F 0.15% of instrument range 1 digit 0 to 1700 C 32 to 3100 F 0.1% of instrument range 1 digit -200 to 1300 C 0.25% of instrument range 1 digit for temperatures -300 to 2400 F below 0 C -199.9 to 999.9 C -300 to 1800 F -199.9 to 900.0 C 0.1% of instrument range 1 digit for temperatures -300 to 1300 F equal to or higher than 0 C -199.9 to 400.0 C 0.2% of instrument range 1 digit for temperatures -300 to 750 F below 0 C 0.0 to 400.0 C -199.9 to 750.0 F 0 to 2300 C 0.2% of instrument range 1 digit 32 to 4200 F 0 to 1390 C 0.1% of instrument range 1 digit 32 to 2500 F 0 to 1900 C 0.5% of instrument range 1 digit at 800 C or more 32 to 3400 F No accuracy is guaranteed at less than 800 C 0 to 2000 C 0.2% of instrument range 1 digit 32 to 3600 F -199.9 to 500.0 C 0.1% of instrument range 1 digit (Note 1) (Note 2) -199.9 to 999.9 F -150.0 to 150.0 C 0.2% of instrument range 1 digit (Note 1) -199.9 to 300.0 F -199.9 to 850.0 C -300 to 1560 F 0.1% of instrument range 1 digit (Note 1) (Note 2) -199.9 to 500.0 C -199.9 to 999.9 F -150.0 to 150.0 C 0.2% of instrument range 1 digit (Note 1) -199.9 to 300.0 F 0.400 to 2.000 V 1.000 to 5.000 V 0.1% of instrument range 1 digit 0.000 to 2.000 V The read-out range can be scaled between -1999 to 0.00 to 10.00 V 9999. -10.00 to 20.00 mV 0.0 to 100.0 mV

* Performance in the standard operating condition (at 23 2 C, 55 10%RH, and 50/60Hz power frequency) Note 1: The accuracy is 0.3 C of instrument range 1 digit for a temperature range from 0 C to 100 C. Note 2: The accuracy is 0.5 C of instrument range 1 digit for a temperature range from -100 C to 200 C. * To receive a 4-20 mA DC signal, select a standard signal of 1 to 5 V DC and connect it to a 250 resistor. This resistor is optional. Model: X010-250-2 (resistor with M3.5 crimp-on terminal lugs)

NOTE
The controller may automatically initialize the registered operating parameter setpoints if any change is made to the data item PV Input Type (IN), Maximum Value of PV Input Range (RH), Minimum Value of PV Input Range (RL), PV Input Decimal Point Position (SDP), Maximum Value of PV Input Scale (SH) or Minimum Value of PV Input Scale (SL). After a change has been made to any of these data items, be sure to verify the registered operating parameter setpoints to ensure that they are correct. If any data item has been changed to its default, set it to a required value.
IM 05D01D02-41E 4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

2-6

2.3

Changing PV Input Type

The following operating procedure describes an example of changing the K-type thermocouple (-199.9 C to 500.0 C) to a Pt100 resistance temerature detector (-199.9 C to 500.0 C) and setting the measurement range of 0.0 C to 200.0 C.
PV input terminal Thermocouple/mV/V input.............................. RTD input ..................................................
12 - 13 11 - 12 - 13

Bring the operating display into view (display appears at power on).
Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the key once to display the menu FUNC.

SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

Displays menu FUNC.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

AL1

MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Press the key for more than 3 seconds to call up the menu OP.PA.
SET/ENT

Press the menu I/O.

key once to display the

PV
SP 2

Displays menu OP.PA.

3 4

PV
SP 2

Displays menu I/O.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
A/M
SET/ENT
SET/ENT

Press the key once to display the menu STUP.

Displays menu STUP.
SP 2

Press the key once to display the parameter IN (PV input type).
SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

PV
3 4

Displays parameter IN.

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
A/M
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

Press the key once to display the parameter PWD.

SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. The figure below is an example of the controller set to a Pt 100 resistance temperature detector (-199.9 C to 500.0 C).
PV

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Blinks during change.

A/M
SET/ENT

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

SET/ENT

2-7

Press the setpoint.

key once to register the

14.

Press the key once to display the parameter RL (minimum value of PV input range).
SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

PV
SP 2

Displays parameter RL.

3 4

SP
A/M
SET/ENT

AL1

MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

10.

Press the key once to display the parameter UNIT (PV input unit).
SET/ENT

15.

PV
SP 2

Displays parameter UNIT.

3 4

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. The figure below shows an example of setting the minimum value of PV input range to 0.0 C.
PV

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SP 2

SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Blinks during change.

11.

Press the key once to display the parameter RH (maximum value of PV input range).
SET/ENT

16.

PV
SP 2

Displays parameter RH.

3 4

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

PV
SP 2

SP
A/M
AL1
SET/ENT

MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

12.

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. The figure below shows an example of setting the maximum value of PV input range to 200.0 C.
PV
SP 2

17.

Press the key for more than 3 seconds. This returns you to the display shown at power-on (figure below).
SET/ENT

Displays PV.
3 4

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Blinks during change.

A/M
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

13.

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

PV
SP 2

The PV display in the figure above shows the error code for input burnout ( ) if PV input wiring is not yet complete. The error code disappears when you wire the PV input terminals correctly.

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

2-8

2.4

Setting Control Output Type

The following operating procedure describes an example of changing time proportional PID relay output (0: factory-set default) to current output (2).
Control output terminal Values in parentheses are setpoints Time proportional PID relay (0)/on-off(3) output........................... 1 - 2 Current (2)/time proportional PID voltage pulse (1) output............. 16 - 17 For details on the heating/cooling control output terminals, see 1.5 Terminal Wiring Diagrams.

Bring the operating display into view (display appears at power on).
Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the key once to display the menu FUNC.

SET/ENT

PV
3 4
SP 2

Displays menu FUNC.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

A/M
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Press the key for more than 3 seconds to call up the menu OP.PA.
SET/ENT

Press the menu I/O.

key once to display the

PV
SP 2

Displays menu OP.PA.

3 4

PV
SP 2

Displays menu I/O.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Press the key once to display the menu STUP.

Displays menu STUP.
SP 2

Press the key several times to display the parameter OT (control output type).
SET/ENT

PV
3 4

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays parameter OT.

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Press the key once to display the parameter PWD.

SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. The figure below shows an example of setting to current output (4 to 20 mA DC).

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

PV
A/M
SP 2

SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Blinks during change.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

SET/ENT

2-9

Press the setpoint.

key once to register the

10.

Press the key for more than 3 seconds. This returns you to the display shown at power-on (figure below).
SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

SP
A/M
SET/ENT

AL1

MAN

Displays target setpoint.

A/M
SET/ENT

2.5

Changing Alarm Type

The following operating procedure describes an example of changing alarm-1 (factory-set default: PV high limit alarm) to PV low limit alarm. When you have changed alarm type, the alarm setpoint will be initialized; set the alarm setpoint again.
Alarm output terminals Alarm-1 (terminal numbers Alarm-2 (terminal numbers Alarm-3 (terminal numbers
6 5 4

7 7 7

Factory-set defaults ).......PV high limit alarm ).......PV low limit alarm ).......PV high limit alarm

Bring the operating display into view (appears at power-on).

Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the key once to display the menu STUP.

Displays menu STUP.
SP 2

Displays menu FUNC.
SP 2

PV
3 4

Press the key once to register the setpoint. You can take the same steps for alarm-2 type (AL2), and alarm-3 type (AL3) that are displayed after this.
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

PV
A/M
SP 2

SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Press the key several times to display the parameter AL1 (alarm-1 type).
SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

Displays parameter AL1.

3 4

Press the key for more than 3 seconds. This returns you to the display shown at power-on (figure below).
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M

Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

A/M

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. The figure below shows an example of setting PV low limit alarm.

SET/ENT

10.
PV
SP 2

When setting an alarm setpoint, see 3.4 Setting Alarm Setpoints.

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Blinks during change.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

2-11

I List of Alarm Types

The table below shows the alarm types and alarm actions. In the table, codes 1 to 10 are not provided with stand-by actions, while codes 11 to 20 are provided with stand-by actions.
Alarm action Alarm type Alarm type code Contact opens if alarm occurs Alarm type Alarm action Alarm type code Contact opens if alarm occurs

Contact Open/close shows status of relay contact, closes if alarm and lit and unlit shows status of lamp occurs

Contact Open/close shows status of relay contact, closes if alarm and lit and unlit shows status of lamp occurs Hysteresis

No alarm Hysteresis 1 PV high limit Open (unlit) PV Closed (lit) Alarm setpoint Hysteresis 2 PV low limit Closed (lit) Alarm setpoint Open (unlit) PV 12 11

OFF De-energized on deviation low limit alarm

Open (lit) Deviation setpoint Hysteresis PV Target SP

Closed (unlit)

Hysteresis Open (unlit) PV Closed (lit) 7

Deviation high and low limits

Closed (lit)

Deviation setpoint Target SP

Hysteresis 3 Deviation high limit Open (unlit) PV Target SP Closed (lit) Deviation setpoint 13 Deviation within high and low limits

Hysteresis Closed Hysteresis (lit) Open Open (unlit) (unlit) Deviation setpoint Target SP Hysteresis PV

Hysteresis Deviation low limit Closed (lit) Deviation setpoint PV Target SP Hysteresis De-energized on Closed deviation high (unlit) limit alarm Open (lit) PV Deviation setpoint Target SP Fault diagnosis Fault diagnosis output output (Note 1) FAIL output (Note 2) The controller stops when in a FAIL state. The control output is set to OFF or 0% and alarm output is set to OFF. 5 De-energized on PV low limit 15 Open (lit) Open (unlit) 4 De-energized on PV high limit 14 Closed (unlit) PV

9 Open (lit) Alarm setpoint 19

Hysteresis 10 Closed (unlit) PV 20

Alarm setpoint

Heater burnout alarm 1

24
Heater burnout alarms 1 and 2

22 23
Heater burnout alarm 2

Sensor grounding Sensor grounding alarm alarm Hysteresis Closed (lit) Open (unlit) SP Alarm setpoint

SP high limit

Output high limit

Hysteresis Closed (lit) Open (unlit) Output value Alarm setpoint

SP low limit

Hysteresis Closed (lit) Open (unlit) Alarm setpoint SP

Output low limit

Hysteresis Closed (lit) Open (unlit) Alarm setpoint Output value

Note 1: The fault diagnosis output turns on in case of input burnout, A/D converter failure, or reference junction compensation (RJC) failure. The control output in case of input burnout or A/D converter failure is set to the value of the PO (Preset Output Value) setup parameter. In case of RJC failure, the controller continues control under the condition of RJC = OFF. Note 2: The FAIL output is on during normal operation and turns off in case of failure.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<2. Initial Settings>

It is effective in the following cases where; - the power is turned on - the target setpoint is changed - the target setpoint number is switched (however, except for remote setpoint) Normal Abnormal The alarm output turns on.

2-12

Stand-by Action
C Treated as normal

Low limit of alarm setpoint

The alarm output does not turn on in this region even if the PV value is below the low limit of the alarm setpoint. Time

Power-on

2.6

Description of Multiple Setpoints and PID

The UT350/UT320 controllers have a maximum of four target setpoint (SP) parameters and has PID for each of these setpoints. The following shows the correspondence between the target setpoint numbers (SP.NO), target setpoints (SP), and PID parameters. For example, if you have set 2 to the target setpoint number (SP.NO), the control parameters available are target setpoint (2.SP), proportional band (heating-side proportional band) (2.P), integral time (heating-side integral time) (2.I), derivative time (heating-side derivative time) (2.D), cooling-side proportional band (2.Pc), cooling-side integral time (2.Ic), and cooling-side derivative time (2.Dc). To use multiple target setpoints, see the table below to check the corresponding parameters.
Target setpoint number (SP.NO) Target setpoint (SP) PID parameter Proportional Integral time Derivative time Cooling-side band proportional (heating-side (heating-side (heating-side band integral time) derivative time) proportional band) 1.P 2.P 3.P 4.P 1.I 2.I 3.I 4.I 1.D 2.D 3.D 4.D 1.Pc 2.Pc 3.Pc 4.Pc Cooling-side Cooling-side integral time derivative time

SP.NO=1 SP.NO=2 SP.NO=3 SP.NO=4

1.SP 2.SP 3.SP 4.SP

1.Ic 2.Ic 3.Ic 4.Ic

1.Dc 2.Dc 3.Dc 4.Dc

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>

3-1

Operations
This chapter describes key entries for operating the controller. For operations using external contact inputs, see 1.5 Terminal Wiring Diagrams. If you cannot remember how to carry out an operation during setting, press the key for more than 3 seconds. This brings you to the display (operating display) that appears at poweron.
SET/ENT

NOTE
Do not use the instrument generating strong magnetic field such as radio equipment and the like near the controller. This may cause the fluctuation of the PV value.

3.1

Monitoring-purpose Operating Displays Available during Operation

The monitoring-purpose operating displays available during operation are roughly classified into two groups depending on the types of controller. One group is operating displays for a standard controller and the other group is operating displays for a heating/cooling controller.

I Operating Displays for a Standard Controller

G SP Display
The PV input value appears on the PV display. The target setpoint (1.SP) appears on the Setpoint display.

G OUT Display
The PV input value appears on the PV display. The control output value (OUT) appears on the Setpoint display.
Operating Displays

Power-on

PV
SP 2

Target Setpoint
SET/ENT

Output-value symbol o
key

PV
SP 2

Output value %

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

SP display (allows the target setpoint to be changed)

OUT display (allows the control output value to be changed)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>

3-3

3.2

Setting Target Setpoint (SP)

The following operating procedure describes an example of setting 120.0 to a target setpoint. In automatic operation, the controller starts control using set target setpoints.

NOTE
When the target setpoint is set through communication, the target setpoint cannot be changed by keystroke.

Bring the operating display into view (display appears at power on).
Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

AL1

MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Press the or required setpoint.

key to display the

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Blinks during change.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>

3-4

3.3

Performing/Canceling Auto-tuning
Auto-tuning should be carried out after setting a target setpoint (SP). Make sure the controller is in automatic operation mode (AUTO) and running state (RUN) before carrying out auto-tuning. See 3.8 Switching between AUTO and MAN, to change to AUTO and 3.7 Switching between Run and Stop, to change to Run.

NOTE
When on-off control is being used, auto-tuning cannot be carried out. Moreover, do not perform auto-tuning when controlling any of the following processes. Control processes with quick response such as flow control or pressure control Processes where even temporary output on/off results in inconvenience Processes where a large output change at control element results in inconvenience Processes where variations in PV may exceed an allowable range, adversely affecting product quality

Bring the operating display into view (display appears at power on).
Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the key five times to display the parameter AT.

SET/ENT

PV
3 4
SP 2

Displays parameter AT.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

A/M
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

MAN lamp OFF.

4. 2.
Press the key for more than 3 seconds to call up the menu OP.PA.
SET/ENT

Press the or key to display the required setpoint. Tuning for 1.SP is AT = 1.
PV

PV
SP 2

Displays menu OP.PA.

3 4

SP 2

A/M

PV
SP 2

SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Auto-tuning is complete when the MAN lamp goes off.

3.4

Setting PID Manually

If you know the values to be set or if suitable PID constants cannot be obtained by autotuning, follow the procedure below to set values.

Bring the operating display into view (display appears at power on).
Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the

key once to display 1Gr.

PV
SP 2

SP
3 4

Blinks during change.

AL1

MAN

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

A/M
SET/ENT

5. 2.
Press the key for more than 3 seconds to call up the menu OP.PA.
SET/ENT

Press the setpoints.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

PV
SP 2

Displays menu OP.PA.

3 4

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

SP
A/M
AL1 2 3
MAN
SET/ENT

A/M
SET/ENT

6. 3.
Press the key several times to display the parameter PID.
SET/ENT

Press the key once to display the parameter 1.P (proportional band for 1.SP).
SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

Displays parameter PID.

3 4

PV
SP 2

Displays parameter 1.P.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
A/M
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>

3-6

Press the or required setpoint.

key to display the

SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

[TIP] The PID parameter numbers set in step 4. should be set as follows: In case of PID for 1.SP, PID = 1Gr In case of PID for 2.SP, PID = 2Gr In case of PID for 3.SP, PID = 3Gr In case of PID for 4.SP, PID = 4Gr

A/M
SET/ENT

Blinks during change.

Press the key for more than 3 seconds. This returns you to the display shown at power-on (figure below).
SET/ENT

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

SP
PV
SP 2

AL1

MAN

Displays target setpoint

A/M
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

The same steps can be used for integral time (1.I) and derivative time (1.D) that are displayed after this.

3.5

Setting Alarm Setpoints

The following operating procedure describes an example of setting 160.0 to alarm-1 setpoint. Check alarm type before setting the alarm setpoint. To change the type of alarm, see 2.5 Changing Alarm Type.
Alarm output terminals Alarm-1 (terminal numbers Alarm-2 (terminal numbers Alarm-3 (terminal numbers
6 5 4

7 7 7

Factory-set defaults )............PV high limit alarm )............PV low limit alarm )............PV high limit alarm

Bring the operating display into view (display appears at power on).
Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the key for more than 3 seconds to call up the menu OP.PA.
SET/ENT

PV
3 4
SP 2

Displays menu OP.PA.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

A/M
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>
SET/ENT

3-7

Press the key twice to display the parameter A1.

Displays parameter A1.
SP 2

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

PV
3 4

3.6

Selecting Target Setpoint Numbers (SP.NO)

The following operating procedure describes an example of changing a target setpoint number (SP.NO) from 1 to 2.

NOTE
If a target setpoint number has been switched using contact input, when the contact input is on, that number cannot be selected by keystroke. When using target setpoint ramp setting function, PV tracking works if the target setpoint number is switched.

Bring the operating display into view (display appears at power on).
Displays PV.
PV
SP 2

Press the key for more than 3 seconds to call up the menu OP.PA.
SET/ENT

PV
SP 2

Displays menu OP.PA.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Displays target setpoint.

A/M
SET/ENT

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>
SET/ENT

3-8

Press the key several times to display the parameter SP.NO.

Displays parameter SP.NO.
SP 2

Press the setpoint.

SET/ENT

key once to register the

PV
3 4

PV
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
A/M
SET/ENT
SET/ENT

Press the or required setpoint.

key to display the

Press the key for more than 3 seconds. This returns you to the display shown at power-on (figure below).
SET/ENT

SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Blinks during change.

PV
SP 2

SP2 lamp ON.

3 4

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

3.7

Switching between Run and Stop

Switching between the RUN and STOP states can be performed only using external contact input.

NOTE
When the controller is shipped from the factory, it is configured so that switching between the RUN and STOP states cannot be performed. To make the switching possible, configure the DIS setup parameter as DIS = 4.

18
PV
SP 2

20 18 20

Start of operation when OFF

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

A/M
SET/ENT

Stop of operation when ON

When the controller is stopped, input and outputs are as follows:

PV input Displays PV.

Control output Preset output value (factory-set default: 0%) Alarm output ON in the event of an alarm

When the controller is stopped, control output display is

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>

3-9

A/M
SET/ENT

MAN lamp OFF.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>

3-10

3.9

Manipulating Control Output in Manual Operation

NOTE
Control output cannot be changed if the controller is stopped. In this case, the preset output value (setup parameter PO) will be output.

A control output value is linked with a display value changed using the that the control output changes as displayed without requiring the
SET/ENT

or key.

key. Note

Bring manual operating display into view. For switching to manual operation, see 3.8 Switching between AUTO and MAN.
PV
SP 2

Press the or key to change a control output value. You dont need to key. press the
SET/ENT

Displays output value.

PV
SP 2

Displays output-value symbol o.

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

MAN lamp ON.

A/M
SET/ENT

MAN lamp ON.

A/M
SET/ENT

I Manipulating the Control Output during Heating/Cooling Control

Either of the following two displays appears when the mode is switched to MAN during heating/cooling control. Heating-side OUT display

PV
SP 2

Symbol H represents the heating-side output.

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Heating-side output. %

A/M
SET/ENT

Cooling-side OUT display

Symbol C represents the cooling-side output.

SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

Cooling-side output. %

A/M
SET/ENT

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<3. Operations>

3-11

G Controller Behavior and Control Output Manipulation when the Dead Band is Positive
The following is an example when the DB parameter is set at 12.4%. key with the heating-side output under manipulation (i.e., coolingIf you hold down the side output C = 0.0%), the heating-side output (H =) decreases. Consequently, both the heating-side and cooling-side outputs change to 0.0%. If you keep the key held down longer, you enter the state of manipulating the cooling-side output, and its value begins to increase. Inversely, if you hold down the key with the cooling-side output under manipulation (i.e., heating-side output H = 0.0%), the cooling-side output (C =) decreases. Consequently, both the heating-side and cooling-side outputs go to 0.0%. If you keep the key held down longer, you enter the state of manipulating the heating-side output, and its value begins to increase.
Output (%)

Dead band: Operating parameter DB

-12.4 Cooling-side manipulated output

12.4 Heating-side manipulated output

DB=12.4 Change in manipulated output when the dead band is positive

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Blank Page

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-1

4.
4.1

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Troubleshooting
If the operating display does not appear after turning on the controllers power, follow the measures in the procedure below. If a problem appears complicated, contact our sales representative.
Is the instrument defective? Yes Totally inoperable? Yes Check wiring on the power supply terminals. No Is key operation faulty? Yes Check the key lock setting. No Is display faulty? Yes Turn off power, and then turn it on again. No Is I/O signal faulty? Yes Check the instruments I/O specifications. No Is communication link faulty? Yes Check the instrument's suffix code.

I Troubleshooting Flow

Check the supply voltage.

Check the specifications of I/O counterpart for wrong polarity.

Does the code include a communication option?

No Normal? No
Is key lock enabled? No communication capability.

Check the communication-related parameters.

Correct errors.

Yes

Check communication wiring.

No Correct? Yes Yes Disable key lock.

Check the specifications of communication counterpart.

Ask the vendor for repair.

Find the cause.

IMPORTANT
Take note of the parameter settings when asking the vendor for repair.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-2

I Errors at Power on
The following table shows errors that may be detected by the fault diagnosis function when the power is turned on.
Error indication (on PV display unit) (E000) (E001) (E002) PV decimal point blinks. Description of error Faulty RAM Faulty ROM None 0% or less or OFF 0% or less OFF 0% Stopped Faulty Contact us for repair. PV Control output Alarm output Retransmission Communioutput cation Remedy

System data error 0% Faulty calibration value

Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action (out of (out of (out of (out of accuracy) accuracy) accuracy) accuracy)

Normal action

(E400)

Parameter error

Preset value OFF output

Check and set the parameters, as they have been set to the limited values.

I Possible Errors during Operation

The following shows possible errors occurring during operations.
Error indication Description (on PV display unit) of error Displays RJC RJC error and PV alternately PV value blinks. EEPROM error (E300) A/DC error PV Measured with RJC=OFF Normal action 105% Control output Normal action Normal action Preset value output Preset value output Normal action Normal action Normal action Alarm output Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Retransmis- Commusion output nication Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Check wires and sensor. Remedy Faulty Contact us for repair. Faulty Contact us for repair.

(B.OUT) PV burnout error

Dependent on the BSL parameter Up-scale: 105% Down-scale: -5%

(OVER) or Excessive PV -5% or 105% (-OVER) Out of -5 to 105% (E200) Auto-tuning Normal action failure (Time-out) SP decimal point blinks. (on setpoint display unit) Faulty communication line Normal action

Normal action Normal action Normal action

Check process.

Check process. Press any key to erase error indication. Check wires and communication parameters, and make resetting. Recovery at normal receipt Faulty if power off/on does not reset start the unit. Contact us for repair. Check for abnormal power.

All indications off Runaway (due None to defective power or noise) All indications off Power off None

0% or less OFF or OFF

0% or less

Stopped

OFF

Stopped

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-3

I If a Power Failure Occurs during Operation

G Momentary Power Failures shorter than 20 ms
The controller is not affected at all and continues normal operation.

G Power Failures of 20 ms or longer

The alarm function of the controller continues to work normally. (Alarms with the stand-by feature temporarily return to their stand-by state, however.) Setting parameters that have already been configured retain their settings. Auto-tuning is cancelled. After recovery from a power failure, control action resumes in the same mode as the one before the occurrence of the power failure. The control output begins with the preset output value.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-4

I Troubleshooting when the Controller Fails to Operate Correctly

If your control tasks are not successful, check the preset parameters and controller wiring before concluding the controller to be defective. The following show some examples of troubleshooting you should refer to in order to avoid the possibility of other problems.

G The Controller does not Show the measured input (PV).

The UT350/UT320 controllers have a universal input. The type of PV input can be set/changed using the parameter IN. At this point, the controller must be wired correctly according to the selected type of PV input. Check the wiring first if the controller fails to show the correct PV. To do this, refer to 2. Initial Settings. With the parameters RH, RL, SDP, SH and SL, it is possible to scale the input signal and change its number of decimal places. Also check that these parameters are configured correctly.

G The Controller does not Provide any Control Output or the Control Output does not Change at all.
The UT350/UT320 controllers have a universal output. The type of control output can be set/changed using the parameter OT. At this point, the controller must be wired correctly according to the selected type of control output. Check the wiring first if the controller provides no control output. To do this, refer to 1.5 Terminal Wiring Diagrams. With the parameters OH and OL, it is possible to set/change the high and low limits of control output. The control output may not change at all, however, because of restrictions on these parameters. Also check the restrictions on these parameters. The control output can only be changed when the controller is in the MAN mode. If the MAN lamp is off (i.e., the controller is in the AUTO mode), you cannot change the control output using key operation.

G The control output does not change soon after the target setpoint (SP) has been changed.
If this happens, check the setpoint of the parameter C.MD. In cases where fixedpoint control is selected as the PID control mode (C.MD = 1), tracking based on the Iterm works to prevent the control output from changing suddenly even if the target setpoint SP is varied. The control output therefore may appear to be working incorrectly at first; however it gradually adapts itself to the new target setpoint.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-5

4.2
4.2.1

Maintenance
This section describes the cleaning and maintenance of the UT350/UT320.

Cleaning
The front panel and operation keys should be gently wiped with a dry cloth.

NOTE
Do not use alcohol, benzine, or any other solvents.

4.2.2

Replacing Brackets
When the brackets are broken or lost, purchase the following brackets for replacement.
Target Model UT350 UT320 Part No. T9115NL T9115NK Sales Unit A large bracket and small bracket in pair Two small brackets in pair

SEE ALSO
1.2 How to Install, for how to replace brackets.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-6

4.2.3

Attaching Terminal Cover

When a terminal cover is necessary, purchase the following part.
Target Model UT350 UT320 Part No. T9115YD T9115YE 1 1 Sales Unit

I Attaching Terminal Cover

The procedure for attaching the terminal cover is as follows.

Do not touch the terminals on the rear panel when power is being supplied to the controller. Doing so may result in electric shock.

CAUTION

Before attaching the terminal cover, turn off the source circuit breaker and use a tester to check that the power cable is not conducting any electricity.

Before attaching the terminal cover, fold it once or twice so that the side which has the Handle With Care symbol ( ), is on the outside.
Fold over. Grooved

Fold over. Grooved Alert symbol on the back

Folding Direction of Terminal Cover

NOTE
Do not fold the terminal cover the wrong way, doing so not only reduces the covers strength but may also cause the hinge to crack, thereby disabling attachment.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-7

With the cover properly folded, fit its top and bottom holes to the protrusions of the mounting brackets.

Fit the hole of the terminal cover to the protrusion on the mounting bracket.

Attaching Terminal Cover

4.2.4

Replacing Parts with a Limited Service Life

The following UT350/UT320 parts have a limited service life. The service life given in the table assume that the controller is used under normal operating conditions.
Part Aluminum electrolytic condenser EEPROM Alarm output relays Control output relays About 10 years (rated) About 100,000 times of writings About 100,000 more ON-OFF operations or with resistance load About 100,000 more ON-OFF operations or with resistance load Service life

If any of these parts, except control output relays, cause a controller failure due to deterioration, contact your dealer for replacement at your cost. SEE ALSO
4.2.5 Replacing Control Output Relays, for how to replace the control output relays.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-8

4.2.5

Replacing Control Output Relays

This subsection describes how to replace the control output relays. Since inspection is needed in case parts are replacement will be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or an engineer certified by YOKOGAWA. When replacement is required, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

Always turn off the power before starting the work in order to avoid electric shock.

CAUTION 1.

Do not pull out the internal unit for any other purpose other than to replace the control output relays.

Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (tip width of 6 mm is recommended) into the opening with the tip in parallel with the front panel, and then turn the screwdriver gently. Take this procedure to four openings 1, 2, 3 and 4 (see the figure below) on the upper and lower parts of the bezel, in order. The bezel slightly moves forward from the housing.

1 2

4 3

Push up the center of the bottom gasket of bezel by a finger to release the latch.
Latch (invisible in the panel) Center of the bottom gasket

Panel View from the bottom

Insert the screwdriver into the four openings and flip the tip forward to move the bezel more forward.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-9

Hold the bezel and pull it along with the internal unit out of the housing. (Note) Be careful not to damage the RJC sensor.

The location and number of the relays differ depending on the model code of the UT350/ UT320. Confirm the location of the control output relay to be replaced before pulling out the relay.
Upper

Relay (UT350-0

or UT320-0 )

Pull out the relay to be replaced. The control output relays are easy to remove and mount, since they are connected via a socket onto the print boards.

Insert the new relay in the socket. Use the following relay.
Manufacturer Model Power supply OMRON G6B-2114P-FD-US-P6B 12 V DC

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<4. Troubleshooting and Maintenance>

4-10

Insert the internal unit into the housing. Apply power to the controller and confirm that the initial operating display is shown. If the operating display is not shown properly, turn off the controller and pull out the internal unit. Then, insert it into the housing again.

This completes replacement of the control output relay.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-1

Parameters
This chapter contains a parameter map as a guideline for setting parameters, and lists of parameters for recording User Settings.

5.1

Parameter Map

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-2

UT350/UT320 Parameter Map

Operating Display

SP display

SET

OUT display

SET3S Menu

SET3S

OP.PA

SET To switch the parameter display, press the

SET/ENT

key.

SET3S

LL A1 A2 A3 AT SC SP.NO PID FL BS UPR DNR OH OL H DR HB1 HB2 HC1 HC2 ORB ORH ORL OR 1.SP 2.SP 3.SP 4.SP SET

Not displayed when OT parameter set to 4 to 6. Displayed in automatic operation

Pressing the key when PID = 1Gr causes PID for 1.SP to appear.
SET/ENT

Pressing the key when PID = 2Gr causes PID for 2.SP to appear.
SET/ENT

Pressing the key when PID = 3Gr causes PID for 3.SP to appear.
SET/ENT

Pressing the key when PID = 4Gr causes PID for 4.SP to appear.
SET/ENT

FL is displayed if you press the key when PID = MENU.

SET/ENT

Displayed for ON/OFF control

1.P 1.I 1.D 1.MR 1.Pc 1.Ic 1.Dc 1.DB 1.RP

2.P 2.I 2.D 2.MR 2.Pc 2.Ic 2.Dc 2.DB 2.RP

3.P 3.I 3.D 3.MR 3.Pc 3.Ic 3.Dc 3.DB

4.P 4.I 4.D 4.MR 4.Pc 4.Ic 4.Dc 4.DB RDV

Not displayed for ON/OFF control Displayed when integral time is OFF Displayed for heating/cooling control Displayed for heating/cooling control Displayed when parameter ZON=ON

The setpoints of the ORB, ORH and ORL parameters are only effective when a sensor grounding alarm is used. The OR parameter represents the moving average (for 5 cycle times) of the control output and is not a setpoint.

NOTE
Changing the registered value of a setup parameter may cause the registered value of an operating parameter to be initialized automatically. Thus, when you have changed a setup parameter, always check that the registered value of the operating parameter is appropriate. If it is initialized to default, reset it to the required value.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-3

SET SET3S

Press the Press the Press the

SET/ENT

key once. key for 3 seconds. or key once.

SET/ENT

STUP Password input

(No password is required when PWD = 0.)

SET

Password check display

SET Setup Parameter Setting Display

Control function related Input/Output related

FUNC

I/O

SET

When shipped from the factory, this parameter appears first after power-on.

SPH SPL AL1 AL2 AL3 HY1 HY2 HY3 DY1 DY2 DY3 CT CTc PO POc C.MD ZON AR TMU P.SL BPS PRI STP DLN ADR RP.T TEST

Not displayed when OT parameter set to 4 to 6.

Displayed for heating/cooling control. Displayed for heating/cooling control.

IN UNIT RH RL SDP SH SL RJC BSL OT RET RTH RTL DIS C.S1 C.S2 C.S3 C.S4 LOCK PWD

Displayed only for controllers with communication functions.

This parameter is not to be set.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-4

5.2

Lists of Parameters
* Parameters relating to PV or setpoints should all be set in real numbers. For example, use temperature values to define target setpoints and alarm setpoints for temperature input. * The User Setting column in the table is provided for the customer to record setpoints. * The column Target Item in CD-ROM in the table provides references from Users Manual (Reference) (CD-ROM version) which describes items in more detail and items that are not contained in this manual. * Numbers in ( ) are the parameter setpoints that apply when the communication function is used. ex. OFF (0), ON (1)

I Operating Parameters
Parameter Symbol Name of Parameter LL communication interface selection (LL) Setting Range and Description OFF (0): Communication is carried out via the RS485 communication terminals. ON (1): Communication is carried out via the lightloader adapter. PV alarm / SP alarm: -100.0 to 100.0% of PV input range Deviation alarm: -100.0 to 100.0% of PV input range span Output alarm: -5.0 to 105.0% An alarm common to the 1.SP to 4.SP parameters. Initial Value with communication : OFF (0) without communication : ON (1) User Setting Target Item in CD-ROM

Alarm 1-setpoint (A1) Alarm 2-setpoint (A2) Alarm 3-setpoint (A3) Auto-tuning (AT) Super function (SC)

PV high limit/SP high limit alarm: 100.0% of PV input range Deviation alarm: 0.0% of PV input range span Other PV/SP low limit alarm: 0.0% of PV input range Output high limit alarm: 100.0% Output low limit alarm: 0.0% OFF (0)

OFF (0): No auto-tuning 1: Auto-tuning for 1.SP 2: Auto-tuning for 2.SP 3: Auto-tuning for 3.SP 4: Auto-tuning for 4.SP AUTO (5): Performs auto-tuning to all groups 1 to 4.

OFF (0): Disable 1: Overshoot suppressing function Suppresses overshoots generated by abrupt changes in the target setpoint or by disturbances. 2: Hunting suppressing function (Stable mode) Suitable to stabilize the state of control when the load varies greatly, or the target setpoint is changed. Enables to answer the wider characteristic changes compared with Response mode. 3: Hunting suppressing function (Response mode) Enables quick follow-up and short converging time of PV for the changed target setpoint. Note: Use SUPER function (SC) 2 or 3 in PID control or PI control. SUPER function 2 or 3 is not available in the following controls: 1) ON/OFF control 2) P control (control for proportional band only) 3) PD control (control for proportional band and derivative item only) 4) Heating/cooling control Do not use hunting suppressing function when control processes with response such as flow or pressure control.

OFF (0)

Ref.2.1(5) Ref.2.1(6)

Target setpoint number selection (SP.NO)

PID parameter display number (PID)

0: Use target setpoint via communication. 1: Selects target setpoint 1 (1.SP). 2: Selects target setpoint 2 (2.SP). 3: Selects target setpoint 3 (3.SP). 4: Selects target setpoint 4 (4.SP). MENU (0): Move to FL parameter display 1Gr (1) to 4Gr (4): Display of each PID parameter

Ref.4.1(1)
MENU (0)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-5
User Setting Target Item in CD-ROM

Parameter Symbol

Name of Parameter PV input filter

Setting Range and Description OFF (0), 1 to 120 second. Used when the PV input fluctuates. -100.0% to 100.0% of PV input range span Used to correct the PV input range. OFF (0) 0.0% + 1 digit of PV input range span to 100.0% of PV input range span Set ramp-up-rate or ramp-down-rate per hour or minute. Sets unit in ramp-rate-time unit (TMU). -5.0 to 105.0% Heating-side limiter in heating/cooling control: 0.0 to 105.0% (OL < OH) -5.0 to 105.0% Cooling-side limiter in heating/cooling control: 0.0 to 105.0% (OL < OH) In ON/OFF control: 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range span In heating/cooling control: 0.0 to 100.0% 0: reverse action, 1: direct action
Control output 100% Reverse action Direct action

Initial Value OFF (0)

(FL) PV input bias (BS) Setpoint ramp-up-rate (UPR) Setpoint ramp-downrate (DNR) Output high limit Heating-side output high limit (in heating/cooling control) Output low limit Cooling-side output high limit (in heating/cooling control) ON/OFF control hysteresis Heating-side/cooling-side ON/OFF control hysteresis (in heating/cooling control) Direct/reverse action switching 0.0% of PV input range span OFF (0)

Ref.1.1(1)

OFF (0)

Ref.4.1(4)

(OH)

(OL)

(H)

100% Heating/cooling control: 100.0% 0.0% Heating/cooling control: 100.0% ON/OFF control: 0.5% of PV input range span Heating/cooling control: 0.5% 0

Ref.2.1(3)

(DR)

Ref.2.1(1)

+
Deviation (PV-SP)

Heater burnout current setpoint 1 (HB1) Heater burnout current setpoint 2 (HB2) Heater burnout current measurement 1 (HC1) Heater burnout current measurement 2 (HC2) ON/OFF rate detection band (ORB) ON/OFF rate high limit (ORH) ON/OFF rate low limit (ORL) On/off rate (OR) Target setpoint-1 (1.SP) Target setpoint-2 (2.SP) Target setpoint-3 (3.SP) Target setpoint-4 (4.SP)

OFF (0), or 1 to 50 A

OFF (0)

These are not setpoints.

The current value of the heater burnout detector is shown on the display of the HC1 or HC2 parameter.

Ref.3.3(5)

0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range span

1.0% of PV input range span 100.0%

ORL + 1 digit to 105.0%

-5.0% to ORH - 1 digit

0.0%

Ref.3.3(4)

This is not a setpoint.

0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range However, between target setpoint limiter lower limit (SPL) and upper limit (SPH).

The moving average (for 5 cycle times) of the control output is shown. 0.0% of PV input range

Ref.4.1(1)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-6

G PID-related Parameters
The following parameters are displayed when 1Gr is set to PID parameter display number (PID). In this case, the corresponding target setpoint is 1.SP (target setpoint-1). To set PID corresponding to target setpoint 2 to 4, set 2Gr, 3Gr, or 4Gr to PID. The relevant parameters will then be displayed.
Parameter Symbol Name of Parameter Proportional band/Heatingside proportional band (in heating/cooling control) Integral time Heating-side integral time (in heating/cooling control) Derivative time Heating-side derivative time (in heating/cooling control) Manual reset Setting Range and Description 0.1 to 999.9% In heating/cooling control: 0.0 to 999.9% (heating-side ON/OFF control applies when 0.0) OFF (0), 1 to 6000 second. 5.0% Initial Value User Setting Target Item in CD-ROM

(1.P)

240 second.

(1.I)

OFF (0), 1 to 6000 second.

60 second.

(1.D)

(1.MR)

-5.0 to 105.0% (enabled when integral time 1.I is OFF) The manual reset value equals the output value when PV = SP is true. For example, if the manual reset value is 50%, the output value is 50% when PV = SP becomes true. 0.0 to 999.9% (Cooling-side ON/OFF control applies when 0.0) OFF (0), 1 to 6000 second.

50.0%

Cooling-side proportional band (1.Pc) Cooling-side integral time (1.Ic) Cooling-side derivative time (1.Dc) Deadband (1.DB)

5.0%

Ref.4.1(1)
240 second.

OFF (0), 1 to 6000 second.

60 second.

-100.0 to 50.0% In heating/cooling control, a reagion where both of the heating- and cooling-side outputs are presented, or non of them is presented, can be set.

3.0%

Zone PID reference point-1 (1.RP)

0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range. Note that 1.RP 2.RP.

100% value of PV input range

Refer to the table below for recording setpoints when two sets or more of PID parameters are used.
Parameter n.P n.I n.D n.MR n.Pc n.Ic n.Dc n.DB n.RP None None n=2 n=3 n=4

Reference deviation (RDV)

OFF (0), 0.0 to100.0% of PV input range span Used to select PID constants according to a deviation from the setpoint. The 4th group of PID constants is used when the controller fails to keep track of the deviation.

OFF (0)

Ref.4.1(1)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-7

I Auto-tuning
Auto-tuning is a function with which the controller automatically measures the process characteristics to automatically set the optimum PID constants. This function does not work when the controller is performing on-off control. The UT350/UT320 employ the Limit Cycle Method. As shown in the figure below, the controller temporarily changes its control output in a step-waveform manner. Then, it calculates the optimum proportional band (P), integral time (I) and derivative time (D) from the resulting response to set them in their respective parameters.
Interval of auto-tuning Auto-tuning is complete when the 3rd peak arrives.

Setpoint

PV input value On Control output Off On Off PID control based on PID constants determined by auto-tuning On Time

Start of auto-tuning

If the Output High Limit (OH) and Output Low Limit (OL) parameters are already configured, the control output turns on and off only between the outputs high and low limits during auto-tuning.

G Auto-tuning Using Zone PID (see I PID Switching (Zone PID) later in this chapter)
Setting of AT Parameter OFF 1 2 3 4 AUTO Median value of each zone width The setpoints when autotuning is started Auto-tuned Setpoint Remarks Auto-tuning is turned off (disabled). Determines the values of 1.P, 1.I and 1.D parameters by auto-tuning. Determines the values of 2.P, 2.I and 2.D parameters by auto-tuning. Determines the values of 3.P, 3.I and 3.D parameters by auto-tuning. Determines the values of 4.P, 4.I and 4.D parameters by auto-tuning. Determines the values of all PID parameters in use by auto-tuning.

The AT parameter settings numbered 1 to 4 in the table above are dependent on how many zones have been set. For example, if you have set two zones, you can use AT parameter settings 1 and 2. Likewise, if you have set three zones, you can use AT parameter settings 1, 2 and 3.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-8

I Hysteresis (for Target Setpoints (On-Off Control) and Alarm Setpoints)

Hysteresis can be set in on-off control setpoints and alarm setpoints as well. With the hysteresis settings, it is possible to prevent relays from chattering. When hysteresis is set in a target setpoint
Output On Point of on-off action (Target setpoint) Hysteresis

Off

PV value

When hysteresis is set in an alarm setpoint

Example of hysteresis set in PV high limit alarm

Output On

Point of on-off action (Alarm setpoint)

Off

Hysteresis

PV value

I Target Setpoint Ramp Setting Function

Use this function to prevent the target setpoint from changing suddenly. The ramp setting function works when: [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] the target setpoint is changed (example: change in 1.SP from 100C to 150C); the target setpoint number is switched (example: switch from 1.SP to 3.SP); the power is turned on or the controller is recovered from power failure; a change is made from manual operation to automatic operation; or a change is made from the STOP state to the RUN state.

If the target setpoint before switching is smaller than the target setpoint after switching, the controller operates according to the settings of the Setpoint Ramp UP (UPR) and Ramp Time Unit (TMU) parameters. If the target setpoint before switching is greater than the target setpoint after switching, the controller operates according to the settings of the Setpoint Ramp Down (DNR) and Ramp Time Unit (TMU) parameters.

NOTE
When using target setpoint ramp setting function, PV tracking works in case of the above conditions [2] to [5].

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-9

The figure below shows an example when the Target Setpoint Number (SP.NO) parameter is switched. The 1.SP and 2.SP parameters are set to 500C and 640C, respectively. Thus, there is a temperature difference of 140C between the 1.SP and 2.SP parameters. This example shows how the temperature is changed by as much as this temperature difference over a period of two minutes. In this example, the UPR parameter is 70C and the TMU parameter is 1 minute.
1.SP 2.SP

2.SP=640C 140C temperature difference 70C/min (140C/2 min) rate of temperature change 2-minute interval of temperature rise Switching from 1.SP to 2.SP parameter

1.SP=500C

NOTE
When using target setpoint ramp setting function, PV tracking works in case of the above conditions [2] to [5].

I PID Switching (Zone PID)

Using a zone PID, you can automatically switch between groups of PID constants according to the temperature zone. You can set a maximum of three temperature zones.

Maximum value of PV input range (RH) Reference point 2 (2.RP) Reference point 1 (1.RP) Minimum value of PV input range (RL)

Setpoint

PV input value

Zone 3: Operated with 3rd group of PID constants Zone 2: Operated with 2nd group of PID constants Zone 1: Operated with 1st group of PID constants Time

<Setting Method> [1] [2] Set the Zone PID Selection (ZON) parameter to ON. Define a reference point. When using two zones, define only reference point 1 (1.RP) between the minimum and maximum values of the PV input range. When using three zones, define reference points 1 and 2 (1.RP and 2.RP) in the same way as noted above.

NOTE
Set the maximum and minimum values, as close as possible to those of the actual range to be controlled, in the Maximum Value of PV Input Range (RH) and Minimum Value of PV Input Range (RL) parameters. Otherwise, the controller may fail to determine the optimum values when auto-tuning is carried out.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-10

I Setup Parameters
G Control Function-related Parameters
Parameter Symbol Name of Parameter Target setpoint limiter upper limit (SPH) Target setpoint limiter lower limit (SPL) Alarm-1 type (AL1) Alarm-2 type (AL2) Alarm-3 type (AL3) Alarm-1 hysteresis (HY1) Alarm-2 hysteresis (HY2) Alarm-3 hysteresis (HY3) Alarm-1 delay timer (DY1) OFF (0), 1 to 25, 28 to 31 1: PV high limit (energized, no stand-by action) 2: PV low limit (energized, no stand-by action) 3: Deviation high limit (energized, no stand-by action) 4: Deviation low limit (energized, no stand-by action) 5: Deviation high limit (de-energized, no stand-by action) 6: Deviation low limit (de-energized, no stand-by action) These Alarm Type parameters are common to the parameters 1.SP to 4.SP. See 2.5 Changing Alarm Type for other alarm types. 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range span Output alarm: 0.0 to 100.0% Hysteresis for PV high limit alarm
Output On

Setting Range and Description 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range where, SPL < SPH Places a limit on the range within which the target setpoint is changed.

Initial Value 100.0% of PV input range 0.0% of PV input range 1

User Setting

Target Item in CD-ROM

Ref.3.3(4)
1

0.5% of PV input range span Output alarm: 0.5%

Point of ON/OFF action (Alarm setpoint)

Ref.3.3(2)
Hysteresis PV value

Off

An alarm is output when the delay timer expires after the alarm setpoint is reached. 0.00 to 99.59 (min, sec.) (enabled when alarm-1 type AL1 is 1 to 20 or 28 to 31)
PV Alarm setpoint Hysteresis Delay timer Alarm output
off

0.00

Delay timer on Time

Alarm-2 delay timer (DY2) Alarm-3 delay timer (DY3) Control output cycle time Heating-side control output cycle time (in heating/cooling control) Cooling-side control output cycle time (CTc) Preset output/Heating-side preset output (in heating/cooling control) Cooling-side preset output

0.00 to 99.59 (min, sec.) (enabled when alarm-2 type AL2 is 1 to 20 or 28 to 31) 0.00 to 99.59 (min, sec.) (enabled when alarm-3 type AL3 is 1 to 20 or 28 to 31) 1 to 1000 second. 30 second.

Ref.3.3(4)
1 to 1000 second. 30 second.

(CT)

(PO)

(POc)

-5.0 to 105.0% In heating/cooling control: Heating side 0.0 to 105.0% In Stop mode, fixed control output can be generated. 0.0 to 105.0% In Stop mode, cooling-side fixed control output can be generated.

0.0%

Ref.2.1(8)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-11
User Setting Target Item in CD-ROM

Parameter Symbol

Name of Parameter PID control mode

Setting Range and Description 0: Standard PID control (with output bump at SP change) 1: Fixed Point control (without output bump at SP change) Choose Fixed Point Control when controlling pressure or flow rate. OFF: SP selection ON: Zone PID 0

Initial Value

Ref.2.1(2)
OFF

(C.MD) Zone PID selection (ZON) Anti-reset windup (Excess integration prevention)

Ref.4.1(2)

(AR)

Ramp-rate time unit setting (TMU) Protocol selection (P.SL)

AUTO (0), 50.0 to 200.0% AUTO (0) Used when the control output travels up to 100% or down to 0% and stays at this point. The larger SP, the sooner PID computation (integral computation) stops. 0: hour, 1: minute 0 Time unit of setpoint ramp-up (UPR) and setpoint ramp-down (DNR) 0: PC link communication 0 1: PC link communication (with sum check) 2: Ladder communication 3: Coordinated master station 4: Coordinated slave station 7: MODBUS (ASCII) 8: MODBUS (RTU) 10: Coordinated slave station (loop-1 mode) 11: Coordinated slave station (loop-2 mode) (10, 11: When the master station is in dual-loop control, the slave station selects either of the loops to be controlled.) 0: 600, 1: 1200, 2: 2400, 3: 4800, 4: 9600 (bps) 4

Ref.2.1(4)

Ref.4.1(4)

Baud rate (BPS) Parity (PRI) Stop bit (STP) Data length (DLN) Address (ADR) Minimum response time (RP.T)

0: None 1: Even 2: Odd 1, 2

Communication function

7, 8; Fixed at 7, when the P.SL parameter is set to MODBUS (ASCII). Fixed at 8, when the P.SL parameter is set to MODBUS (RTU) or Ladder Communication. 1 to 99 However, the maximum number of stations connectable is 31. 0 to 10 ( 10 ms)

If this parameter symbol appears, press the SET/ENT key to return to the FUNC menu. Caution: Do not change the setpoint of the TEST parameter, otherwise the controller will be disabled. (TEST)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-12

G Input-/Output-related Parameters
Parameter Symbol Name of Parameter PV input type (PV INPUT terminals) 11 - 12 - 13 terminals PV input unit Setting Range and Description OFF (0), 1 to 18, 30, 31, 35 to 37, 40, 41, 50, 51, 55, 56 See Instrument Input Range Codes in 2. Initial Settings. C (0): Degree Celsius F (5): Fahrenheit - (2): No unit (This parameter is not shown for voltage input.) Set the PV input range, however RL < RH -Temperature input Set the range of temperature that is actually controlled. - Voltage input Set the range of a voltage signal that is applied. The scale across which the voltage signal is actually controlled should be set using the parameters Maximum Value of PV Input Scale (SH) and Minimum Value of PV Input Scale (SL). 0 to 3 Set the position of the decimal point of voltage-mode PV input. 0: No decimal place 1: One decimal place 2,3: Two, three decimal places -1999 to 9999, however SL < SH Set the read-out scale of voltage-mode PV input. Initial Value OFF (0) User Setting Target Item in CD-ROM

(IN)

C (0)

(UNIT) Max. value of PV input range (RH) Min. value of PV input range (RL)

Max. value of instrument input range Min. value of instrument input range

(SDP)

PV input decimal point position (displayed at voltage input)

(SH)

(SL)

Max. value of PV input scale (displayed at voltage input) Min. value of PV input scale (displayed at voltage input) Presence/absence of PV input reference junction compensation Selection of PV input burnout action Control output type

100.0

0.0

OFF (0), ON (1)

ON (1)

(RJC)

(BSL)

(OT)

OFF (0) 1: Up scale 2: Down scale 0 Time proportional PID relay contact output (terminals 1 - 2 - 3 ) 1 Time proportional PID voltage pulse output (terminals 16 - 17 ) 2 Current output (terminals 16 - 17 ) 3 ON/OFF control relay contact output (terminals 1 - 2 - 3 ) The following 4 to 12 are displayed only for heating/ cooling type controllers. 4 Heating-side relay output (terminals 1 - 2 - 3 ), cooling-side relay output (terminals 4 - 7 ) 5 Heating-side pulse output (terminals 16 - 17 ), cooling-side relay output (terminals 4 - 7 ) 6 Heating-side current output (terminals 16 - 17 ), cooling-side relay output (terminals 4 - 7 ) 7 Heating-side relay output (terminals 1 - 2 - 3 ), cooling-side pulse output (terminals 14 - 15 ) 8 Heating-side pulse output (terminals 16 - 17 ), cooling-side pulse output (terminals 14 - 15 ) 9 Heating-side current output (terminals 16 - 17 ), cooling-side pulse output (terminals 14 - 15 ) 10 Heating-side relay output (terminals 1 - 2 - 3 ), cooling-side current output (terminals 14 - 15 ) 11 Heating-side pulse output (terminals 16 - 17 ), cooling-side current output (terminals 14 - 15 ) 12 Heating-side current output (terminals 16 - 17 ), cooling-side current output (terminals 14 - 15 )

Heating/cooling type: 4

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-13
User Setting Target Item in CD-ROM

Parameter Symbol

Name of Parameter Retransmission output type

Setting Range and Description 1: PV, 2: SP, 3: OUT, 4: Loop power supply for sensor (15 V) In heating/cooling control, an output value before allocation to heating and cooling control (0 to 100%) is transmitted if setpoint 3 is selected (0 to 50%: Cooling-side output; 50 to 100%: Heating-side output). RET=1, 2: RTL + 1 digit to 100.0% of PV input range

Initial Value 1

(RET)

(RTH)

(RTL)

Max. value of retransmission output scale Min. value of retransmission output scale DI function selection

100.0% of PV input range 0.0% of PV input range 1

Ref.2.2(1)

RET=1, 2: 0.0% of PV input range to RTH - 1 digit

(DIS)

OFF (0) Disables the external contact input. 1 DI1: 2.SP (on)/1.SP (off), DI2: AUTO (on)/MAN (off) 2 DI1: Hides (on)/shows (off) the LOCK setup parameter. DI2: Unused. 3 See the table below. 4 DI1: 2.SP (on)/1.SP (off), DI2: STOP (on)/RUN (off)

Ref.3.1(1)

SP Selection when DIS = 3 is set

DI1 OFF ON OFF ON DI2 OFF OFF ON ON

1.SP 2.SP 3.SP 4.SP

SELECT display-1 registration (C.S1) SELECT display-2 registration (C.S2) SELECT display-3 registration (C.S3) SELECT display-4 registration (C.S4) Key lock (LOCK)

OFF (0), 201 to 1015 Select the desired parameter from among the operating and setup parameters, then register the number (D register No.) accompanying that parameter. For example, registering 231 for C.S1 allows you to change alarm-1 setpoint in operating display. Numbers for registering alarm SP parameter for operating display: Alarm-1 setpoint: 231 Alarm-2 setpoint: 232 Alarm-3 setpoint: 233 Above numbers are alarm setpoint parameters for target setpoint-1 (1.SP).

OFF (0)

Ref.6.1(1)

OFF (0): No key lock 1: Change to any parameter prohibited Prohibits any operating parameter or setup parameter from being changed. The setpoint of the LOCK parameter itself can be changed, however. 2: Change to and display of operating parameters prohibited Turns off the display for setting operating parameters, thus prohibiting any change to the parameter settings. (Hold down the SET/ENT key for more than 3 seconds to show the password check display.) 3: Disables the A/M key on the instruments front panel. 0: Password not set 1 to 9999

OFF (0)

Ref.7.1(2)

Password setting (PWD)

Ref.7.1(1)

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-14

I Useful Operating Displays (SELECT Display)

Registering frequently changed parameters in the SELECT display after ordinary operating displays will allow you to change settings easily. A maximum of four displays can be registered.
Useful operating display (SELECT display)

Ordinary operating displays (example)

PV
SP 2

PV
3 4
SP 2

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN

SP
AL1 2 3
MAN
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

A/M
SET/ENT

key

A/M
SET/ENT

key

A/M
SET/ENT

SP display

OUT display
SET/ENT

Alarm-1 setting display (example)

key

<Setting method> Set the parameter numbers (D register numbers) you wish to register for setup parameters C.S1 to C.S4.
Alarm parameter for target setpoint-1 Alarm-1 setpoint parameter Alarm-2 setpoint parameter Alarm-3 setpoint parameter Registration number 231 232 233

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-15

I Heating/Cooling Control (for a Heating/Cooling Controller Only)

In heating/cooling control, the controller outputs the result of computation after splitting it into heating-purpose and cooling-purpose signals. In addition, the controller can perform PID control or on-off control on the heating and cooling sides separately. When performing on-off control, set the proportional band to 0. The controller splits the result of computation (0 to 100%) into heating-side and coolingside signals, as described below. 0% to 50% of the computation result is presented as a 0% to 100% cooling-side output. 50% to 100% of the computation result is presented as a 0% to 100% heating-side output.
PV SP Communication

PID computation 0% to 100% Heating/cooling computation 0% to 50% Cooling-side output limiter Cooling-side MV output 0% to 100%

Manual MV output

50% to 100% Heating-side output limiter Heating-side MV output 0% to 100%

Heating/cooling control provides two methods in which either none of the heating- and cooling-side outputs are presented or both of the heating- and cooling-side outputs are presented, as shown in the following figures.
Output (%) 100 Cooling-side output
0 0 50 100(%) 0

Output (%) 100 Heating-side output Cooling-side output Heating-side output

0 50 100(%)

Deadband (positive) Value of control output before split into heating- and cooling-side outputs

Deadband (negative) Value of control output before split into heating- and cooling-side outputs

Precautions in Heating/Cooling Control

Keep the ratio of the heating-side proportional band (P) to the cooling-side proportional band (Pc) equal to or below 5. If neither the heating side nor the cooling side is performing on-off control, setting the integral time (I or Ic) of one side to 0 results in the Integral Time parameters of both sides being set to OFF, irrespective of the integral time setting of the other side.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<5. Parameters>

5-16

I Cycle Time
A cycle time can only be set if the type of control output is time proportional PID relay output or time proportional voltage pulse output. A cycle time refers to one period consisting of on-and off-state time lengths. The ratio of the on-state time to the off-state time differs according to the value of the control output. The figure below shows on-to-off time ratios of the control output when the cycle time is set to 10 seconds. Setting a shorter cycle time allows the controller to perform elaborate control at short time intervals. This significantly reduces the on-and off-state times, however it shortens the service life of a relay.

On Off Cycle time

Relays Behavior when Cycle Time = 10 sec.

For 20% of Control Output 10 sec. For 50% of Control Output For 80% of Control Output 10 sec. 10 sec.

On-state duration: 2 sec. Off-state duration: 8 sec.

On-state duration: 5 sec. Off-state duration: 5 sec.

On-state duration: 8 sec. Off-state duration: 2 sec.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<6. Function Block Diagram and Descriptions>

6-1

Function Block Diagram and Descriptions

This chapter contains the function block diagrams for Standard type, and Heating/cooling type. For details on these function block diagrams, refer to the descriptions mentioned later.

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<6. Function Block Diagram and Descriptions>

6-2

I Function Block Diagram for Standard Type

PV input terminals 11 , 12 and 13
PV INPUT

Communication terminals 23 to 27
RS485

Contact input (when parameter DIS=1)

DI1 DI2

Input selection Unit selection Input range conversion Input bias Input filter
SP.NO

Target setpoints 1 to 4 REMOTE

SP.NO=0

LOCAL
SP.NO=1 to 4

Target setpoint ramp-rate function

Manual operation

Control computation MAN

A/M

AUTO AUTO (ON)/MAN (OFF) switching

Preset output

Output limiter STOP RUN *1

24 V loop power supply

15 V loop power supply

Retransmission output

Alarm function

Control output

RET

LPS OUTPUT1 OUTPUT1

OUTPUT2 /RET

AL1

AL2

AL3

Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3

Terminals 21 and 22

Current or pulse terminals 16 and 17

Relay terminals 1 , 2 and 3

Current terminals 14 and 15

*1: If the setup parameter DIS (DI function selection) is set to 4, when the contact input 2 is ON (stop state), that controller outputs the preset output value. Terminal Legend Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key Parameter Function

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<6. Function Block Diagram and Descriptions>

6-3

I Function Block Diagram for Heating/Cooling Type

PV input terminals 11 , 12 and 13
PV INPUT

Communication terminals 23 to 27
RS485

Contact input (when parameter DIS=1)

DI1 DI2

Input selection Unit selection Input range conversion Input bias Input filter
SP.NO

Target setpoints 1 to 4 REMOTE

SP.NO=0

LOCAL
SP.NO=1 to 4

Target setpoint ramp-rate function

Manual operation

Control computation MAN

A/M

AUTO AUTO (ON)/MAN (OFF) switching

Heating/cooling computation

Heating-side output limiter Heating-side preset output

Cooling-side output limiter Cooling-side preset output

15 V loop power supply

Retransmission output

Alarm function

Heating-side output

Cooling-side output
AL3

RET

OUTPUT1

OUTPUT2 /RET

Relay

OUTPUT2 /LPS

AL1

AL2

Alarm 1 Alarm 2

Current or pulse terminals 16 and 17

Relay Current or pulse terminals terminals 1 , 2 and 3 14 and 15

Current terminals 14 and 15

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<6. Function Block Diagram and Descriptions>

6-4

Functions and Parameters for Standard Type in Initial State (Factory-set default)
Functions and parameters in initial state are given in the tables below. For details on each parameter, refer to 5.2 Lists of Parameters.

I PV Input
PV input (INPUT) is a universal input, which can receive signals from thermocouple, RTD, or DC voltage signals. The controller is capable of biasing, and first-order lag computation (filtering) on input signals. Each function can be set by the following parameters.

Setup Parameters
Function Input selection Unit selection Input range conversion IN UNIT RH, RL (SDP, SH, SL) Parameter I/O I/O I/O Menu

Operating Parameters
Function PV input bias PV input filter BS FL Parameter Menu OP.PA OP.PA

I Remote Input
Remote input can be received via communication. Set 0 in the parameter SP.NO (target setpoint number selection) for remote input. For more information, refer to GREEN Series Communication Functions (IM 05G01B02-01E). Each function can be set by the following parameters.

Operating Parameters
Function Target setpoint number selection SP.NO Parameter Menu OP.PA

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Setup Parameters
Function Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type AL1 AL2 AL3 Parameter Menu FUNC FUNC FUNC

Operating Parameters
Function Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint A1 A2 A3 Parameter Menu OP.PA OP.PA OP.PA

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

<Toc>

<6. Function Block Diagram and Descriptions>

6-8

I Retransmission Output
PV, target setpoint, or control output can be output to retransmission output (OUTPUT2/ RET). Each function can be set by the following parameters.

Setup Parameters
Function Retransmission output type Retransmission output scale RET RTH, RTL Parameter I/O I/O Menu

I 15 V DC Loop Power Supply

The 15 V DC loop power supply (OUTPUT2/RET) uses the same terminal as retransmission output. The 15 V DC loop power supply can not be used when retransmission output is used. To use the 15 V DC loop power supply, set 4 in retransmission output type selection parameter RET. Each function can be set by the following parameters.

Setup Parameters
Function Retransmission output type RET Parameter I/O Menu

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Revision Information
G Title : Models UT350/UT320 Digital Indicating Controllers Users Manual G Manual No. : IM 05D01D02-41E May 2000/1st Edition Newly published May 2002/2nd Edition Revision Jul. 2004/3rd Edition Change of the company name May 2006/4th Edition Revision by the change of safety standard description

Written by

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN

IM 05D01D02-41E

4th Edition: May 31, 2006-00

Blank Page

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION Network Solutions Business Division 2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 JAPAN Phone: +81-422-52-7179 Facsimile: +81-422-52-6793 Sales Branch Offices Tokyo, Nagoya, Osaka, Hiroshima, Fukuoka

YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Headquaters 2 Dart Road, Newnan, GA. 30265-1094 U.S.A. Phone: +1-770-253-7000 Facsimile: +1-770-251-0928 Sales Branch Offices / Texas, Chicago, Detroit, San Jose YOKOGAWA EUROPE B. V. Headquaters Databankweg 20, 3821 AL Amersfoort THE NETHERLANDS Phone: +31-334-64-1611 Facsimile: +31-334-64-1610 Sales Branch Offices / Houten (The Netherlands), Wien (Austria), Zaventem (Belgium), Ratingen (Germany), Madrid (Spain), Bratislava (Slovakia), Runcorn (United Kingdom), Milano (Italy), Velizy villacoublay(France), Johannesburg(Republic of South Africa) YOKOGAWA AMERICA DO SUL S.A. Headquarters & Plant Praca Acapulco, 31-Santo Amaro, Sao Paulo/SP, BRAZIL CEP-04675-190 Phone: +55-11-5681-2400 Facsimile: +55-11-5681-4434 YOKOGAWA ENGINEERING ASIA PTE. LTD. Head office 5 Bedok South Road, Singapore 469270 SINGAPORE Phone: +65-6241-9933 Facsimile: +65-6241-2606 YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CO., LTD. Seoul Sales office 395-70, Shindaebang-dong, Dongjak-gu, Seoul,156-010, KOREA Phone: +82-2-3284-3000 Facsimile: +82-2-3284-3019 YOKOGAWA TAIWAN CORPORATION Head office 17F, No.39, Sec. 1, Chung Hwa Road Taipei, 100 TAIWAN Phone: +886-2-2314-9166 Facsimile: +886-2-2314-9918 YOKOGAWA AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. Head office Centrecourt D1, 25-27 Paul Street North, North Ryde, N. S. W. 2113, AUSTRALIA Phone: +61-2-9805-0699 Facsimile: +61-2-9888-1844 YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD. Head office 40/4 Lavelle Road, Bangalore, 560 001, INDIA Phone: +91-80-227-1513 Facsimile: +91-80-227-4270 LTD. YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC Grokholskiy per. 13, Build. 2, 4th Floor, 129010, Moscow, RUSSIA FEDERATION Phone: +7-095-737-7868 Facsimile: +7-095-737-7869

Users Manual

Model US1000 Digital Indicating Controller

IM 5D1A01-01E

IM 5D1A01-01E
Y okogawa Electric Corporation
5th Edition

Introduction
This instruction manual describes the general operation of the US1000 Digital Indicating Controller. s Intended Readers This manual is intended for personnel in charge of the following: Installation and wiring Instrumentation and setup of the controller Operation and monitoring of the controller Maintenance of equipment

s Related Documents The following documents all relate to the US1000 Digital Indicating Controller. Read them as necessary. The codes enclosed in parentheses are the document numbers. US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions Provides detailed descriptions of US1000 functions. (IM 5D1A01-02E)

US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Communication Functions (IM 5D1A01-10E) Manual for using the US1000 communication function. Supplied with models having the optional communication function. LL1100 PC-Based Parameters Setting Tool (IM 5G1A01-01E) Manual for setting US1000 parameters from a personal computer. Supplied with the LL1100 PCBased Parameters Setting Tool. LL1200 PC-based Custom Computation Building Tool (IM 5G1A11-01E) Operation manual for creating custom computations of the US1000 controller. This manual also describes examples of custom computations. The LL1200 PC-based Custom Computation Building Tool includes the LL1100 PC- based Parameters Setting Tool. LL1200 PC-based Custom Computation Building Tool Reference (IM 5G1A11-02E) This is the functions manual necessary for creating custom computations of the US1000 controller. This manual should be referred to in order to find out and understand what functions offered by the LL1200.

Checking Package Contents

Visually check the product for any damage upon delivery. Keep the box and inner packaging that the product was delivered in, as you will need them if you have to send the controller back for repair. s Checking of Model and Suffix Codes Check the model and suffix codes of the delivered controller to ensure that it is the right model.
Analog input Analog output Contact Input Output 2 7 7 3 7 7

Model US1000

Suffix Codes -00 -11 -21

Option Codes

Description
Universal Voltage LPS Current Voltage Relay

Basic type Enhanced type (with custom computation) Position proportional type (with custom computation) /A10 RS-485 communication

1 2 2

1 1 1

1 2 2

1 2 1

1 1 1

0 2 *2

LPS: Loop power supply for transmitter * The two contact points in the US1000-21 relay item are the relay output and the feedback input.

s Package Contents Check the package contents against the list below. If anything is missing or damaged, immediately contact the dealer at which you purchased the product or your nearest Yokogawa representative. US1000 controller Brackets (Part No. T9115NK) Terminal board cover (Part No. L4001DA) Unit label (Part No. T9115VE) 1 1 pair 1 1

Instruction manuals US1000 Digital Indicating Controller (this manual) 1 US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions 1 US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Communication Functions 1 (Only supplied with models having the optional communication function.)

IM 5D1A01-01E

Documentation Conventions
s Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual.

WARNING
Indicates that operating the hardware or software in a particular manner may damage it or result in a system failure.

NOTE
Draws attention to information that is essential for understanding the operation and/or features of the product.

TIP Gives additional information to complement the present topic and/or describe terms specific to this document.

See Also Gives reference locations for further information on the topic.

s Description of Displays Some of the representations of product displays shown in this manual may be exaggerated, simplified, or partially omitted for reasons of convenience when explaining them.

IM 5D1A01-01E

iii

Notice
s This Instruction Manual (1) This manual should be passed on to the end user. Keep at least one extra copy of the manual in a safe place. (2) Read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of how to operate this product before you start using it. (3) This manual is intended to describe the functions of this product. Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereinafter simply referred to as Yokogawa) does not guarantee that these functions are suited to the particular purpose of the user. (4) Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual, in part or in whole, be transcribed or copied without permission. (5) The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. (6) Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in the preparation of this manual. Should any errors or omissions come to your attention however, please contact your nearest Yokogawa representative or our sales office. s Protection, Safety, and Prohibition Against Unauthorized Modification (1) In order to protect the product and the system controlled by it against damage and ensure its safe use, make certain that all of the instructions and precautions relating to safety contained in this document are strictly adhered to. Yokogawa does not guarantee safety if products are not handled according to these instructions. (2) The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual. If this symbol is indicated on the product, the operator should refer to the explanation given in the instruction manual in order to avoid personal injury or death to either themselves or other personnel, and/or damage to the instrument. The manual describes that the operator should exercise special care to avoid shock or other dangers that may result in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION

Protective ground terminal: This symbol indicates that the terminal must be connected to ground prior to operating the equipment. Function ground terminal: This symbol indicates that the terminal must be connected to ground prior to operating the equipment. Alternating current.

(3) If protection/safety circuits are to be used for the product or the system controlled by it, they should be externally installed on the product. (4) When you replace the parts or consumables of the product, only use those specified by Yokogawa. (5) Do not modify the product.

IM 5D1A01-01E

(6) This product has been approved as flameproof electrical equipment for use in a hazardous area, and hence usable in explosive atmospheres. However, when using this product in a hazardous area, abide by the conditions in the following standards: CSA standard (CSA C22.2 No. 213) Location Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Temperature Code T4 Note: For the installation procedure, see page App. 6-1. FM standard (FM 3611) Location Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Temperature Code T4 Note: For the installation procedure, see page App. 6-2. (7) The suitability of the final installation is to be determined by the local authorities having jurisdiction.

s Force Majeure (1) Yokogawa does not make any warranties regarding the product except those mentioned in the WARRANTY that is provided separately. (2) Yokogawa assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the use or any unpredictable defect of the product.

WARNING
Do not change the setting of the following US1000 controller parameter.

[Setup parameter] - [Main menu: USMD] - [Submenu: Test] Parameter: TST (Test mode)

This parameter is used to adjust a US1000 controller at the factory. If you change the setting of this parameter, the US1000 controller may not operate normally.

NOTE
Only personnel with an understanding of the US1000 controller and custom computation fucntions are qualified to change the settings of the following parameters as necessary. Those using the US1000 controller for the first time and those not knowledgeable about the custom computation function, should use the default values of the following parameters assigned to the controller. [Setup parameter] - [Main menu: CONF] - [Submenu: DO and DI] All the parameters under the submenus above. If you change the settings of these parameters, some of the fuctions assigned to each US1000 controller mode (US mode) may not work.

IM 5D1A01-01E

Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... i Checking Package Contents ............................................................................................... ii Documentation Conventions .............................................................................................. iii Notice.................................................................................................................................... iv 1. US1000 Digital Indicating Controller ...................................................................... 1-1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 What is on the Front Panel? ........................................................................... Characters and Symbols on Digital Displays ................................................. Operation Display and Parameter Setting Display ......................................... Preparing for Operation .................................................................................. Factory-Set Defaults ........................................................................................ Label Positions ................................................................................................ 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7

2. Installing US1000 Controller .................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 2.2 External Dimensions and Panel Dimensions .................................................. 2-2 Mounting the Controller ................................................................................. 2-3

3. Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Procedure for Wiring ...................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 Cables and Terminals ............................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Direction of wiring .................................................................................. 3-2 3.1.3 Preventing Noise ...................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.4 Terminal Designation ............................................................................... 3-3 3.1.5 Wiring for Power Supply and Transmitters Loop Power Supply ........... 3-4 3.1.6 Attaching the Terminal Cover .................................................................. 3-5 3.2 Signals Assigned to Terminals ....................................................................... 3-6 3.2.1 Terminal Assignment for US1000-00 (Basic Type) ................................. 3-7 3.2.2 Terminal Assignment for US1000-11 (Enhanced Type) .......................... 3-8 3.2.3 Terminal Assignment for US1000-21 (Position Proportional Type) ..... 3-20

4. Setting the Basic Functions ....................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 Example of Parameter Display ....................................................................... 4-2 Procedure for Setting the Basic Functions ..................................................... 4-3 Selecting the Controller Mode (US Mode) .................................................... 4-4 Selecting the PV Input Type ........................................................................... 4-6 Selecting the Control Computation and Output Types .................................. 4-9 Writing the Data Defined So Far (Parameter Initialization) ........................ 4-11 Defining the Alarm Outputs (as necessary) ................................................. 4-12 Setting the Target Setpoint, Alarm Setpoints, and PID Parameters ............ 4-15 Setting Other Functions (as necessary) ........................................................ 4-17

5. Customizing Operation Displays .............................................................................. 5-1

5.1 5.2 5.3 Registering Auxiliary Operation Displays (USER Displays) ........................ 5-2 Displaying the Alarm Status ........................................................................... 5-5 Registering Quick Parameter Call-up Functions (SELECT Displays) .......... 5-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

6. Operation .................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 Switching the Operation Mode ....................................................................... 6-2 Changing the Target Setpoint (SV) ................................................................ 6-3 Manipulating MV ............................................................................................ 6-4 Operations on Single-Loop Type of Controller ............................................. 6-5 Operations on Cascade Type of Controller .................................................... 6-6 Switching Between Cascade Open and Close ................................................ 6-8 Operations on Dual-loop Type of Controller ................................................. 6-9 Display and Operations during Heating/Cooling Computation ................... 6-11 Operation Mode Switching Using Contact Input ......................................... 6-12 Starting Controller Operation ....................................................................... 6-13 Auto-tuning ................................................................................................... 6-14 Manual Tuning .............................................................................................. 6-16 Stopping Controller Operation ...................................................................... 6-17 Power Failure during Operation ................................................................... 6-18

7. Other Functions.......................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 7.2 7.3 Communication Functions .............................................................................. 7-2 Custom Computation ...................................................................................... 7-3 D Register and I Relay .................................................................................... 7-4

8. Maintenance ................................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 Cleaning ........................................................................................................... Replacement of Mounting Bracket ................................................................. Limited Life Components and Maintenance .................................................. Procedure for Replacing Control Output Relays ............................................ Problems and Corrective Measures ................................................................ 8.5.1 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 8.5.2 Error Code Description ............................................................................ 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-4

Appendix 1 Hardware Specifications ................................................................... App. 1-1 Appendix 2 Engineering Units Available for the US1000 ................................. App. 2-1 Appendix 3 Operation Parameter Table ............................................................. App. 3-1 Appendix 4 Setup Parameter Table ..................................................................... App. 4-1 Appendix 5 Parameter Map .................................................................................. App. 5-1 Appendix 6 Conditions of Use in Hazardous Areas ........................................... App. 5-1
6.1 6.2 CSA standard ......................................................................................... App. 5-1 FM standard ........................................................................................... App. 5-3

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 1 Revision Record ........................................................................................................... Rev.-i

IM 5D1A01-01E

vii

Blank Page

Chapter 1 US1000 Digital Indicating Controller

US1000 Digital Indicating Controller

The US1000 digital indicating controller is designed with sophisticated, yet user-friendly control functions. The displays and operation keys on the front panel provide for smooth and secure operation. q Simplified setup The typical setup of the US1000s basic control function and the I/O terminal assignment are registered as the controller mode (US mode). Users can easily setup the controller by selecting this controller mode. q A wealth of displays and operating functions The US1000 controller has two easy-to-read digital displays and three bar graphs as analog displays. The operation mode is switched and MV output modified using the dedicated keys.

PV ALM LP2

Digital displays
SV MV

Operation mode keys

100

SV setting keys Analog bar displays

SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O

MV operation keys

IM 5D1A01-01E

1-1

1.1

What is on the Front Panel?

The US1000 controller displays process variables (PV), target setpoint values (SV), and MV output values (MV) in two ways: on a digital display and an analog bar display. Separate keys are provided for switching the operation mode and changing SV and MV, thus operators will have no problems operating the controller from the first time they use it.

Space for tag number lable

Overflow indicator (Yellow LED)

PV digital display (Indicates the process variable.*1)

ALM lamp (Lit when any alarm occurs.)

PV ALM LP2

LP2 lamp (Lit when Loop-2 data are displayed or in the open cascade status.)

MV lamp (Lit while MV is indicated on the SV digital display.*1)

SV MV

C mode key (Changes to CAS mode.)

SV digital display (Indicates the target setpoint.*1)

100

C mode lamp (Lit in CAS mode.)

A mode key (Changes to AUTO mode.) SV bar display (Displays the target setpoint.)

A mode lamp (Lit in AUTO mode.)

PV bar display (Displays the process variable.) Light-loader interface (Used for setting parameters from a personal computer.)

SET/ENT

M mode key (Changes to MAN mode.)

M mode lamp (Lit in MAN mode.)

0
Scale

DISP
O
SV setting keys (Increases/decreases the target setpoint.*1) SET/ENT key (Used for parameter setting.)

MV bar display (Displays the MV output.) Overflow/underflow indicators (Yellow LEDs) Internal unit fixing screw MV operation keys (Changes the MV output.)

DISP key (Switches operation displays.)

Underflow indicator (Yellow LED)

MV fast-change key*2 (Accelerates MV changing when pressed with the MV operation key.)

*1 This function is valid during operation. A different function is given when setting parameters. *2 This key is invalid with the US1000-21 model (position proportional type).

1-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 1 US1000 Digital Indicating Controller

1.2

Characters and Symbols on Digital Displays

The meanings of characters and symbols that appear on the PV and SV digital displays are explained here.

s PV Digital Display
Meaning Display Meaning Display Meaning Display Meaning Display

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z C F Layer*1 Layer*2

-1 /

< >

During parameter setting, one of the horizontal bar is displayed in the left-most digit of the PV digital display. Each bar indicates a different level of setting, as outlined below. *1 Main menu : The upper bar flashes. Submenu : The middle bar flashes. Parameter : The lower bar flashes. *2 When no submenu exists. Main menu : The upper bar flashes. Parameter : The lower bar flashes. s SV Digital Display
Meaning Display Meaning Display Meaning Display Meaning Display

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W Y Z C F

-1 / _

IM 5D1A01-01E

1-3

1.3

Operation Display and Parameter Setting Display

The US1000 controller shows different types of displays during operation and parameter setting. The functions given to the keys are also different between the two situations. q Display during operation The PV digital display indicates the PV value. The SV digital display usually indicates the SV value, but indicates the MV value when the MV lamp is lit. The SV keys are used to increase and decrease the SV value. The analog bar graphs show PV, SV, and MV. q Display during parameter setting The PV digital display indicates the parameter menu or parameter name. The SV digital display indicates the set data of a parameter. The SV keys are used to increase and decrease the set data of a parameter. The analog bar graphs remain the same as they were during operation. To change from operation to parameter setting, press the key for 3 to 6 seconds (this period of time is described as just for 3 seconds hereafter). To change from the parameter setting display back to the operation display, press the DISP key.
SET/ENT

Indicates a parameter menu or parameter name.

PV ALM LP2

SV MV

SV or MV

Press for 3 seconds.

100
SET/ENT

Indicates the set data. (No display for menu.)

100

SV setting keys
DISP
SET/ENT SET/ENT

Data setting keys

0 C

DISP
O C

DISP
O

Display during operation

Initial display for parameter setting

1-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 1 US1000 Digital Indicating Controller

1.4

Preparing for Operation

The US1000 controller must be set up before it can be operated. Set up the controller in the sequence shown below.

NOTE
The US1000 controller has no power switch. It starts operating and its control action as soon as it is plugged in, i.e., connected to its power source. Thus, the controller output should not be connected to the controlled equipment until just before operation.

Installation

See chapter 2

Wiring

See chapter 3

Setup of controller functions

See sections 4.1 to 4.7

Setting the target setpoint

See section 4.8

Operation

See chapter 6

Also read section 4.9, Setting Other Functions, and chapter 5, Customizing Operation Displays as necessary.

TIP
If you use the custom computation function, setup the controller functions and set the target setpoint using the LL1200 PC-Based Custom Computation Building Tool (optional). If you use the communication function, you should also read the US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Communication Functions (IM 5D1A01-10E) manual.

IM 5D1A01-01E

1-5

1.5

Factory-Set Defaults
When the US1000 controller is delivered from the factory, it is set up in the controller mode (US mode) for single-loop control. That is, it is set up to perform PID control for a single loop. The other items set are as listed below. To change the factory-set defaults, refer to the sections shown in the table.
Item Controller mode (US mode) Input type Input terminal Input range Engineering unit Input computation Analog burnout action Direct/reverse control action Control computation type Output type Output terminal Alarm output terminals Factory-set default Single-loop control Standard signal AIN1 1.000 to 5.000 V C None Off Reverse Continuous PID Current output OUT1A (4-20 mA) DO1 (PV high limit alarm) DO2 (PV low limit alarm) DO3 (PV high limit alarm) Off Off 200 ms Reference Section 4.3, Selecting the controller mode (US mode). Section 4.4, Selecting the PV input type. Section 4.4, Selecting the PV input type. Section 4.4, Selecting the PV input type. Section 4.4, Selecting the PV input type. Section 4.9, Setting other functions. Section 4.9, Setting other functions. Section 4.9, Setting other functions. Section 4.5, Selecting the control computation and output types. Section 4.5, Selecting the control computation and output types. Section 4.5, Selecting the control computation and output types. Section 4.7, Defining the alarm output.

Auto-tuning SUPER function Control period

Section 6.11, Auto-tuning. Section 4.9, Setting other functions. The separate US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions (IM 5D1A01-02E) manual.

See Also The initial values of all parameters listed in Appendix 3 and Appendix 4.

1-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 1 US1000 Digital Indicating Controller

1.6

Label Positions
Stick the accessory labels in the positions shown below. Be careful not to cover the light-loader interface or any display with the labels.
Tag number label
PV ALM LP2

TIC0001A

SV MV

200

Numeric label Unit label

SET/ENT

Light-loader interface
0

DISP
O

O/C mark labels (Attach when the valves open and close direction differs.)

IM 5D1A01-01E

1-7

Blank Page

Chapter 2 Installing US1000 Controller

Installing US1000 Controller

Before using the controller, install it according to the instructions given in this chapter.

CAUTION
To prevent electrical shock, only apply power to the controller when it is mounted on the panel.

NOTE
To install the controller, select a location where: no-one may accidentally touch the terminals mechanical vibrations are minimal no corrosive gas temperature can be maintained at about 23C and with minimal fluctuation no direct heat radiation no magnetic disturbances result no splashing water no flammable materials the terminal board (reference junction compensation element, etc.) is protected from wind

The housing of the controller is made of modified polyphenylenether resin and polycarbonato. Be sure to install the controller away from highly flammable items. Never place the controller directly on highly flammable items. If the controller has to be installed close to highly flammable items or equipment, be sure to surround the controller with shielding panels, placed at least 150 mm away from every side. These panels should be made of either 1.43-mm thick metal-plated iron plates or 1.6-mm thick uncoated iron plates.

150mm

IM 5D1A01-01E

2-1

2.1

External Dimensions and Panel Dimensions

The external dimensions and panel cutout dimensions are as shown below.
Unit: mm (approx inch)

72(2.83)

12(0.47)

149(5.87)

30(1.18) 62(2.44)

Mounting bracket Leave 5(0.20) mm or more space above.

136.4(5.37) 156(6.14)

Panel thickness:1(0.04) to 10(0.39)mm

Mounting bracket Leave 5(0.20) mm or more space below.

Terminal Cover

Weight : 0.8kg

External Dimensions

(General mounting) 68(2.68) 0

+0.7

(Side-by-side close mounting) L

Panel cutout width for side-by-side close mounting [Table 1]

Number of units 2 L (mm) 140 212 284 356 428 500 572 644 716 788 860 932 1004 L (inch) 5.51 8.35 11.18 14.02 16.85 19.69 22.52 25.35 28.19 31.02 33.86 36.69 39.53

137(5.39) 0

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

220(8.66) or more

93(3.66) or more L : refer to the Table 1

220(8.66) or more

13 14

Panel Cutout Dimensions

2-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

135.5(5.33)

144(5.67)

Chapter 2 Installing US1000 Controller

2.2

Mounting the Controller

Available for models with option code /A10 only

Loop power supply for transmitter 1

LPS1
19 20

Unavailable for US1000-00 AIN2

Analog input 2 RTD input 46 47 48 A b B

AIN1
Analog input 1 RTD input
1 2 3 A b B

RS-485 communication 21 22 23 24 SDB(+) SDA(-) RDB(+) RDA(-) SG

RS-485

Thermocouple input 46 47 48 +

Thermocouple input
1 2 3

Voltage input (mV, V)

1 2 3

Voltage input (mV, V) 46 47 +

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

46 47 48 49 50 51 52

AIN3
Analog input 3
4 5

OUT2A
MV output 2
49 50

Unavailable for US1000-21

DI1,2
Contact input 1, 2
6 7 8

Loop power supply for transmitter 2

51 52

LPS2

DI1: Contact input 1 DI2: Contact input 2 COM

For US1000-21: FBIN

Feedback input
55 56 57

OUT1R
55 56 57 58 59 60
Control relay output 1
55 56 57

DO1-3
Relay contact output 1-3
9 10 11 12
DO1: Contact output 1 DO2: Contact output 2 DO3: Contact output 3

NC NO COM

100% side IN 0% side

OUT2R
Control relay output 2
58 59 60

OUTR
Control relay output
58 59 60

COM

NC NO COM

H (Direct) L (Reverse) COM

SUPPLY
Power supply
13 14 15

L N GND

DI3-7
Contact input 3-7
31 32 33 34 35 8

DO4-7
Transistor open-collector output 4-7
36 37 38 39 40

DI3: Contact input 3 DI4: Contact input 4 DI5: Contact input 5 DI6: Contact input 6 DI7: Contact input 7 COM

DO4: Contact output 4 DO5: Contact output 5 DO6: Contact output 6 DO7: Contact output 7 COM

Unavailable for US1000-00

Figure

Terminal Assignment

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-3

3.1.5

Wiring for Power Supply and Transmitters Loop Power Supply

Perform wiring for the power supply and the transmitters loop power supply as instructed below.

s Wiring for Power Supply Use a single-phase power source. Use wires or cables with a minimum performance equivalent to that of 600 V vinyl insulation electric wires (JIS C 3307). If the source has a lot of noise, use an insulation transformer and line filter as shown in the figure below. The recommended line filter is TDKs ZAC2205-00U. When this noise-prevention measure is taken, keep the primary and secondary power cables well apart. To ensure safety, install a circuit breaker switch or an equivalent safety device and be sure that usage instructions for the device are clearly displayed.
Primary side Secondary side Line filter Circuit breaker 13 14 G 15 G L N

Insulation transformer Controller power

Class 3 grounding

s Wiring for Loop Power Supply of Transmitter Approximately 25.5 V DC power can be supplied to a two-wire sensor requiring a power supply. Yokogawas Brain transmitter with communication function and the dedicated Brain terminal can be used.
(Note)

2 1-5 V 3
Shielding

+
Sensor

19 20
100

or or

51 52

Class 3 grounding

RET1 RET2 Note Terminal numbers are 2 and 3 for AIN1 terminal, 47 and 48 for AIN2 terminal and 4 and 5 for AIN3 terminal.

3-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

3.1.6

Attaching the Terminal Cover

When you complete the wiring, attach the terminal cover as follows to prevent electrical shocks. 1. Fit the holes in the upper part of the terminal cover over the protrusions in the upper part of the housing. 2. Insert the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover into the screw hole in the rear of the controller and tighten it.
Fit the holes and the protrusions

Insert the screw and tighten it

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-5

3.2

Signals Assigned to Terminals

The US1000 controller has different signals assigned to terminals depending on the controllers model and suffix code, the controller mode (US mode), and the type of the control computation. Refer to the relevant subsection according to your controllers model and suffix code. Model US1000-00: Model US1000-11: Model US1000-21: Subsection 3.2.1 Subsection 3.2.2 Subsection 3.2.3

In each subsection, tables are given for each controller mode (US mode) and control computation type. Refer to the table that applies to your controllers settings.

See Also Section 4.3, Selecting Controller Mode (US Mode), for information on the controller modes (US modes). Section 4.5, Selecting Control Computation and Output Types, for information on the control computations.

q Contact Input Function The functions assigned to the contact inputs are as follow. RUN/STOP switchover: The controller is in STOP status when the contact is on, and in the RUN status when the contact is off. CAS/AUTO/MAN mode selection: When the contact is turned from off to on, the operation mode changes to the corresponding mode. Tracking switching: Tracking signal of AIN2 or AIN3 is effective when the contact is on. OPEN/CLOSE switchover: Cascade control is disabled (OPEN) when the contact is on; cascade control is enabled (CLOSE) when contact is off. PV-hold and MAN mode or AUTO mode: The controller holds PV in MAN mode when the contact is on, and is in the AUTO mode when contact is off.

q Alarm Output 1 to 4 The initial alarm types of the alarm output 1 to 4 are: Alarm output 1: Alarm output 2: Alarm output 3: Alarm output 4: PV high limit PV low limit PV high limit (secondary) PV low limit (secondary)

To change the alarm type assignments, refer to section 4.7, Defining Alarm Outputs.

3-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

3.2.1

Terminal Assignment for US1000-00 (Basic Type)

Single-loop control (US mode 1) Cascade primary-loop control (US mode 2) Cascade secondary-loop control (US mode 3) Cascade control (US mode 4)
Controller mode (US mode) US Mode 1 PV input Cascade input or feedforward input RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Voltage pulse or current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 US Mode 2 PV input Tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Tracking switching Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Contact off during error US Mode 3 PV input Cascade input RUN/STOP switchover CAS AUTO mode when the contact is off Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Voltage pulse or current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 US Mode 4 Primary-side PV input Secondary-side PV input RUN/STOP switchover OPEN/CLOSE switchover Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Voltage pulse or current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2

s US1000-00: US1000-00: US1000-00: US1000-00:

Terminal Terminal Code No. AIN1 AIN3 DI1 DI2 LPS1 OUT1A DO1 DO2 DO3 1-3 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 19, 20 16, 18 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12

Contact off when CAS mode Alarm output 3

The output from the OUT1A terminal will be voltage pulse output when the control computation is "time proportional PID," and current output when it is "continuous PID."

s US1000-00: US1000-00: US1000-00: US1000-00:

Loop control for backup (US mode 5) Loop control with PV switching (US mode 6) Loop control with PV auto-selector (US mode 7) Loop control with PV-hold function (US mode 8)
Controller mode (US mode) US Mode 5 PV input Tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Tracking switching Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Voltage pulse or current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Contact off during error US Mode 6 PV input 1 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover PV switching Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Voltage pulse or current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 US Mode 7 PV input 1 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Voltage pulse or current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 US Mode 8 PV input Cascade input, feedforward input, or tracking input RUN/STOP switchover 'PV-hold and MAN mode' or 'AUTO mode' Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Voltage pulse or current output Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3

Terminal Terminal No. Code AIN1 AIN3 DI1 DI2 LPS1 OUT1A DO1 DO2 DO3 1-3 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 19, 20 16, 18 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12

The output from the OUT1A terminal will be voltage pulse output when the control computation is time proportional PID, and current output when it is continuous PID.

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-7

3.2.2

Terminal Assignment for US1000-11 (Enhanced Type)

Single-loop control (US mode 1)
Control Computation (MVS1 Set Value) Terminal Terminal Time proportional PID (0, 1) Continuous PID (2) Code No. ON/OFF computation (3) AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 LPS1 LPS2 1-3 46 - 48 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 31, 8 32, 8 33, 8 34, 8 35, 8 19, 20 51, 52 PV input No function Cascade input or feedforward input RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) PV input No function Cascade input or feedforward input RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) PV input No function Cascade input or feedforward input RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) PV input No function Cascade input or feedforward input RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

s US1000-11:

OUT1A 16, 18

Retransmission output (0, 3) Retransmission output (4) Retransmission output (7) Retransmission output (10) Voltage pulse output (1) Heating pulse output (5) Heating pulse output (8) Heating pulse output (11) Heating current output (6) Heating current output (9) Heating current output (12) Current output (2) Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Cooling pulse output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Cooling current output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output

OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

Control relay output (0, 3) Heating control relay output (4) Heating control relay output (7) Heating control relay output (10) Alarm output 4 (1, 2) Alarm output 4 (5, 6) Alarm output 4 (8, 9) Alarm output 4 (11, 12) Alarm output 3 Cooling control relay output Alarm output 3 Alarm output 3

3-8

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

s US1000-11:

Cascade primary-loop control (US mode 2)

Control Computation (MVS1 Set Value) Continuous PID (2) PV input Cascade input or feedforward input Tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Tracking switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Current output Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Contact off during error Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3

Terminal Terminal Code No. AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 LPS1 LPS2 1-3 46 - 48 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 31, 8 32, 8 33, 8 34, 8 35, 8 19, 20 51, 52

OUT1A 16, 18 OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-9

s US1000-11:

Cascade secondary-loop control (US mode 3)

Control Computation (MVS1 Set Value)

Terminal Terminal Time proportional PID (0, 1) Continuous PID (2) Code No. ON/OFF computation (3) AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 LPS1 LPS2 1-3 46 - 48 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 31, 8 32, 8 33, 8 34, 8 35, 8 19, 20 51, 52 PV input Feedforward input Cascade input RUN/STOP switchover CAS AUTO mode when the contact is off MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) PV input Feedforward input Cascade input RUN/STOP switchover CAS AUTO mode when the contact is off MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) PV input Feedforward input Cascade input RUN/STOP switchover CAS AUTO mode when the contact is off MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) PV input Feedforward input Cascade input RUN/STOP switchover CAS AUTO mode when the contact is off MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

OUT1A 16, 18

Retransmission output (0, 3) Retransmission output (4) Retransmission output (7) Retransmission output (10) Voltage pulse output (1) Heating pulse output (5) Heating pulse output (8) Heating pulse output (11) Heating current output (6) Heating current output (9) Heating current output (12) Current output (2) Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 CAS output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 CAS output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Cooling pulse output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 CAS output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Cooling current output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 CAS output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output

OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

3-10

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

s US1000-11:

Cascade control (US mode 4)

Control Computation (MVS2 Set value)

Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) Primary-side PV input Cascade input or feedforward input

Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) Primary-side PV input Cascade input or feedforward input

Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) Primary-side PV input Cascade input or feedforward input

Secondary-side PV input Secondary-side PV input Secondary-side PV input Secondary-side PV input RUN/STOP switchover OPEN/CLOSE switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 RUN/STOP switchover OPEN/CLOSE switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 RUN/STOP switchover OPEN/CLOSE switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 RUN/STOP switchover OPEN/CLOSE switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

OUT1A 16, 18

Retransmission output (0, 3) Retransmission output (4) Retransmission output (7) Retransmission output (10) Voltage pulse output (1) Heating pulse output (5) Heating pulse output (8) Heating pulse output (11) Current output (2) Heating current output (6) Heating current output (9) Heating current output (12) Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Cooling pulse output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Cooling current output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output

OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-11

s US1000-11:

Loop control for backup (US mode 5)

Control Computation (MVS1 Set value)

Terminal Terminal Time proportional PID (0, 1) Continuous PID (2) Code No. ON/OFF computation (3) AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 LPS1 LPS2 1-3 46 - 48 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 31, 8 32, 8 33, 8 34, 8 35, 8 19, 20 51, 52 PV input Cascade input or feedforward input Tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Tracking switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) PV input Cascade input or feedforward input Tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Tracking switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) PV input Cascade input or feedforward input Tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Tracking switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) PV input Cascade input or feedforward input Tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Tracking switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

OUT1A 16, 18

Retransmission output (0, 3) Retransmission output (4) Retransmission output (7) Retransmission output (10) Voltage pulse output (1) Heating pulse output (5) Heating pulse output (8) Heating pulse output (11) Heating current output (6) Heating current output (9) Heating current output (12) Current output (2) Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Error output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Error output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Cooling pulse output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Error output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Cooling current output Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Error output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output

OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

3-12

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

s US1000-11:

Loop control with PV switching (US mode 6)

Control Computation (MVS1 Set Value)

Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) PV input 1

Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) PV input 1

Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) PV input 1

Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input, feedforward input, or tracking input input, or tracking input input, or tracking input input, or tracking input PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover Dual-PV switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover Dual-PV switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover Dual-PV switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover Dual-PV switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

OUT1A 16, 18

OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-13

s US1000-11:

Loop control with Dual PV auto-selector (US mode 7)

Control Computation (MVS1 Set Value)

Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) PV input 1

Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) PV input 1

Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) PV input 1

Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input, feedforward input, or tracking input input, or tracking input input, or tracking input input, or tracking input PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

OUT1A 16, 18

OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

3-14

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

s US1000-11:

Loop control with PV-hold function (US mode 8)

Control Computation (MVS1 Set Value)

Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) PV input No function

Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) PV input No function

Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) PV input No function

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

3-18

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

s US1000-11:

Loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs (US mode 15)
Control Computation (MVS1 Set Value)

Heating/cooling computation (4 - 6) PV input 1 PV input 2

Heating/cooling computation (7 - 9) PV input 1 PV input 2

Heating/cooling computation (10 - 12) PV input 1 PV input 2

PV input 3, cascade PV input 3, cascade PV input 3, cascade PV input 3, cascade input, feedforward input, input, feedforward input, input, feedforward input, input, feedforward input, or tracking input or tracking input or tracking input or tracking input RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2

OUT1A 16, 18

OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40

OUT1R 55 - 57 OUT2R 58 - 60

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-19

3.2.3

Terminal Assignment for US1000-21 (Position Proportional Type)

Single-loop control (US mode 1) Cascade secondary-loop control (US mode 3) Cascade control (US mode 4) Loop control for backup (US mode 5)
Controller mode (US mode) US mode 1 PV input No function Cascade input or feedforward input RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output US mode 3 PV input Feedforward input Cascade input RUN/STOP switchover CAS AUTO mode when the contact is off MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 CAS output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output US mode 4 Primary-side PV input Cascade input or feedforward input US mode 5 PV input Cascade input or feedforward input

s US1000-21: US1000-21: US1000-21: US1000-21:

Terminal Terminal Code No. AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 LPS1 LPS2 1-3 46 - 48 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 31, 8 32, 8 33, 8 34, 8 35, 8 19, 20 51, 52

Secondary-side PV input Tracking switching RUN/STOP switchover OPEN/CLOSE switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output RUN/STOP switchover Tracking input MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Error output Alarm output 4 Alarm output 3 No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output

OUT1A 16, 18 OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 FBIN OUTR 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40 55 - 57 58 - 60

3-20

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 3 Wiring

s US1000-21: US1000-21: US1000-21: US1000-21:

Loop control with PV switching (US mode 6) Loop control with PV auto-selector (US mode 7) Loop control with PV-hold function (US mode 8) Cascade control with two universal inputs (US mode 13)
Controller mode (US mode) US mode 6 PV input 1 US mode 7 PV input 1 US mode 8 PV input US mode 13 PV input 1 PV input 2

Terminal Terminal Code No. AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 LPS1 LPS2 1-3 46 - 48 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 31, 8 32, 8 33, 8 34, 8 35, 8 19, 20 51, 52

Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input, feedforward No function input, or tracking input input, or tracking input PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover Dual-PV switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output PV input 2 RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output

Cascade input, feedforward Cascade input or input, or tracking input feedforward input RUN/STOP switchover 'PV-hold and MAN mode' or 'AUTO mode' CAS mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output RUN/STOP switchover OPEN/CLOSE switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection CAS mode selection Message input No function Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output

OUT1A 16, 18 OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 FBIN OUTR 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40 55 - 57 58 - 60

IM 5D1A01-01E

3-21

s US1000-21: US1000-21:

Loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs (US mode 14) Loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs (US mode 15)
Controller mode (US mode) US mode 14 PV input 1 PV input 2 US mode 15 PV input 1 PV input 2

Terminal Terminal Code No. AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 LPS1 LPS2 1-3 46 - 48 4, 5 6, 8 7, 8 31, 8 32, 8 33, 8 34, 8 35, 8 19, 20 51, 52

Cascade input, feedforward PV input 3, cascade input, or tracking input input, feedforward input, or tracking input RUN/STOP switchover Dual-PV switching MAN mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output RUN/STOP switchover MAN mode selection AUTO mode selection Bit-0 of SV No. setting Bit-1 of SV No. setting Bit-2 of SV No. setting Bit-3 of SV No. setting Loop power supply for transmitter 1 Loop power supply for transmitter 2 Retransmission output 1 Retransmission current output 2 Retransmission voltage output 3 Alarm output 1 Alarm output 2 Alarm output 3 Alarm output 4 No function No function FAIL output Valve position feedback input Position proportional control relay output

OUT1A 16, 18 OUT2A 49, 50 OUT3A 17, 18 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 FBIN OUTR 9, 12 10, 12 11, 12 36, 40 37, 40 38, 40 39, 40 55 - 57 58 - 60

3-22

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

Setting the Basic Functions

This chapter describes the setting procedure and the meanings of the parameters used to select and adjust the US1000 controller functions. The parameters of the US1000 controller are largely divided into two types: operation parameters and setup parameters. Operation parameters are the parameters that are changed relatively often during operation. Setup parameters are the parameters that determine the controller functions and are rarely changed once they have been set. Some parameters must be set before operation (such as the controller mode (US mode) and the input type), while others can be set as necessary according to the users needs. This chapter describes the setting procedure for parameters that must be set and those that are used often. Refer to the parameter lists in Appendixes 3 and 4, and the parameter maps in Appendix 5 to set the other parameters.

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-1

4.1

Example of Parameter Display

To set an operation parameter or setup parameter, first call up the main menu to which the parameter belongs. Then, from the main menu, call up the submenu which contains the parameter, and then the target parameter from that submenu. Appendix 5 shows the locations of all of the main menus, submenus, and parameters to help you call up parameters. q Examples of parameter display
When a main menu is displayed, the top bar flashes slowly.

This decimal point flashes on loop-2 menus.

Example of a main menu display (Loop-2 setup menu)

When a submenu is displayed, the middle bar flashes slowly. This decimal point flashes on loop-2 submenus.

Example of a submenu display (Alarm setting submenu) When a parameter is displayed, the bottom bar flashes slowly.

This decimal point flashes on loop-2 parameter displays.

Set value

Example of a parameter display (Alarm 1 type)

4-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

4.2

Procedure for Setting the Basic Functions

Always set the US1000 controller functions following the procedure below. Changing the controller mode and input/output settings will initialize the related parameters depending on the change.
Set operation mode to MAN

Select controller mode (US mode)

See section 4.3

Select PV input type

See section 4.4

Select control computation and output types

See section 4.5

Write the data defined so far*

See section 4.6

Define alarm outputs

See section 4.7

Set target setpoint, alarm setpoints, and PID parameters

See section 4.8

Set other functions

See section 4.9

* This initializes the related parameters according to the controller mode (US mode) and PV input type. s Switching the Operation Mode key and change the operation mode to MAN. Setup Before starting to setup the functions, press parameters can only be set in MAN mode. Change both loop-1 and loop-2's operation mode to MAN when the controller mode (US mode) is dual-loop control or temperature and humidity control.

PV ALM LP2

100

Press the MAN mode key for 0.5 seconds.

SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-3

4.3

Selecting the Controller Mode (US Mode)

The controller mode (US mode) determines the basic action of the controller. The US1000 controller has 14 selectable controller modes.

NOTE
Since changing the controller mode resets the internal functions of the controller and initializes the related parameters accordingly, be sure to set the controller mode before setting other parameters. Some controller modes cannot be selected depending on the model and suffix codes of the US1000 controller. US1000-00: Modes that cannot be selected include dual-loop control, temperature and humidity control, cascade control with two universal inputs, loop control with PV switching or PV autoselector and two universal inputs, and custom computation control. US1000-21: Modes that cannot be selected include cascade primary-loop control, dual-loop control, and temperature and humidity control.

s Controller Mode (US Mode)

Controller mode Single-loop control Cascade primary-loop control Cascade secondary-loop control Cascade control Loop control for backup Loop control with PV switching Loop control with PV auto-selector Loop control with PV-hold function Dual-loop control Temperature and humidity control Cascade control with two universal inputs Loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs Loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs Custom computation control Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 21 Basic PID control Operates as a primary controller in cascade control. Operates as a secondary controller in cascade control. Performs cascade control with a single controller. PID control with backup function for the supervisory system. PID control with dual-PV switching function by contact input or PV range. PID control with dual-PV auto-selector function by minimum/maximum/average/difference. PID control with a PV- and MV-hold function. Basic PID control for independent two loops. Controls temperature and relative humidity independently by PID control. Performs cascade control using two universal inputs. Performs loop control with PV switching using two universal inputs. Performs loop control with PV auto-selector using two universal inputs. Controls by user-defined control and computation functions. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA: Not available NA NA NA Description Model: US1000 -00 -11 -21

See Also Block diagram for each controller mode is given in the appendix of the separate US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions (IM 5D1A01-02E) manual.

4-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

s Parameter to Set Controller Mode (US Mode)

Main menu USMD Submenu MD Parameter USM Description Controller mode (US mode) Setting range See the table on the previous page. Default 1

s Setting the Controller Mode (US Mode)

1. Press the

key for 3 seconds from an operation display to call up the mode menu (MODE) or loop-1 operation menu (O.LP1). (O.LP1 is displayed for the default setting.)

SET/ENT

SV MV

2. Press the

key once to call up the setup menu (STUP). Press the key. If a password has been set, input the password here.
SET/ENT

SV MV

3. The loop-1 setup menu (S.LP1) is then displayed.

Press the key once to call up the controller function setup menu (USMD). SV MV

4. Press the

key to call up the controller mode submenu (MD). SV MV

See Also Section 3.2, Signals Assigned to Terminals, for the signal assignment of the analog input terminals.

In this section, the procedure to set the type-J thermocouple and a measurement range of 0 to 500C for the AIN1 signal is described as an example.

4-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

s Input Types and Ranges of Universal Inputs

Input type Thermocouple K Setting 1 2 3 J T 4 5 6 B 7 Range (C) -270.0 to 1370.0 C -270.0 to 1000.0 C -200.0 to 500.0 C -200.0 to 1200.0 C -270.0 to 400.0 C 0.0 to 400.0 C 0.0 to 1800.0 C Range (F) -450.0 to 2500.0F -450.0 to 2300.0F -200.0 to 1000.0F -300.0 to 2300.0F -450.0 to 750.0F -200.0 to 750.0F 32 to 3300F 400 C and over: Below 400 C : S R N E L U 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 W Platinel 2 PR20-40 15 16 17 0.0 to 1700.0 C 0.0 to 1700.0 C -200.0 to 1300.0 C -270.0 to 1000.0 C -200.0 to 900.0 C -200.0 to 400.0 C 0.0 to 400.0 C 0.0 to 2300.0 C 0.0 to 1390.0 C 0.0 to 1900.0 C 32 to 3100F 32 to 3100F -300.0 to 2400.0F -450.0 to 1800.0F -300.0 to 1600.0F -300.0 to 750.0F -200.0 to 1000.0F 32 to 4200F 32.0 to 2500.0F 32 to 3400F 0.1% of F.S. 0 C and over: Below 0 C : 0.1% of F.S. 0.2% of F.S. 1.5% of F.S. 0.15% of F.S. 0.1% of F.S. 5% of F.S. T (below -200 C) : 1% of F.S. 0 C and over: Below 0 C : Accuracy 0.1% of F.S. 0.2% of F.S. 2% of F.S.

K (below -200 C) :

E (below -200 C) : 0.2% of F.S. 0.2% of F.S. 0.1% of F.S. 800 C and over:

0.5% of F.S.

Below 800 C : Accuracy not guaranteed W97Re3 W75Re25 RTD JPt100 30 31 Pt100 (ITS90) 35 36 37 Standard signal 0.4 to 2.0 V 1 to 5 V DC voltage 0 to 2 V 0 to 10 V -10 to 20mV 0 to 100mV 40 41 50 51 55 56 -200.0 to 500.0 C -300.0 to 1000.0F 0.1% of F.S. 0.2% of F.S. 0.1% of F.S. 18 0.0 to 2000.0 C 32 to 3600F 0.2% of F.S.

-150.00 to 150.00 C -200.0 to 300.0F -200.0 to 850.0 C -200.0 to 500.0 C -300.0 to 1560.0F -300.0 to 1000.0F

-150.00 to 150.00 C -200.0 to 300.0F 0.400 to 2.000 1.000 to 5.000 0.000 to 2.000 0.00 to 10.00 -10.00 to 20.00 0.0 to 100.0

0.2% of F.S. 0.1% of F.S.

* Performance under standard operating conditions (temperature: 23 2C; humidity: 55 10% RH; power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz). s Parameters to Set the PV Input Type
Main menu Submenu Parameter TYP1 UNI1 USMD IN RH1 RL1 Description Setting Range C: Celsius; F: Fahrenheit Within instrument input range Within instrument input range Default 1 C Maximum level of instrument range Minimum level of instrument range

Analog input-1 type for AIN1 terminal See the table above Analog input-1 unit Maximum value of analog input-1 range Minimum value of analog input-1 range

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-7

s Setting the PV Input Type

1. Follow steps 1 to 3 of the controller mode (US

mode) setting procedure in the previous section to call up the display shown on the right.
SV MV
SET/ENT

2. Press the

key once to call up the controller mode submenu (MD).

SV MV

3. Press the

key once to call up the analog input

SV MV

submenu (IN).

Press the key to display the analog input-1 type parameter (TYP1). (For example, select 4 for the type-J thermocouple.) Select the analog input1 type value using the and keys. A decimal point appears and flashes when the setting is changed. key to register the change. The decimal point disappears.
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

SV MV

5. Press the

SV MV

6. Press the
SET/ENT

key to display the analog input-1 unit parameter (UNI1). Select the analog input-1 unit using the and keys, and press the key to register the setting.

SET/ENT

SV MV

7. Press the

key to display the maximum value of the analog input-1 range parameter (RH1). Display the maximum value of the range you want to set using the and keys, and press the key to register the setting.
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

SV MV

8. Press the

key to display the minimum value of the analog input-1 range parameter (RL1). Display the minimum value of the range you want to set using the and keys, and press the key to register the setting.
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

SV MV

9. Press the

key twice to return to the controller function setup menu (USMD).

DISP

SV MV

4-8

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

4.5

Selecting the Control Computation and Output Types

You can select the type of control computation for each control loop. Normally, there is a single control loop. In the controller mode (US mode) for dual-loop control and temperature and humidity control, however, the US1000 controller has two control loops and a control computation type must be selected for each loop. The types of control computation are listed in the table below. Each control computation has a specific output type. The control computation for the US1000-21 model is fixed at position proportional PID and cannot be changed.

NOTE
Some control computation types cannot be selected depending on the US1000 model and suffix code. US1000-00: US1000-11: US1000-21: Only time proportional PID computation with voltage pulse output and continuous PID computation can be selected. All types except for position proportional PID computation can be selected. Only position proportional PID computation can be selected. It cannot be changed.

s Control Computation Types

Control computation type Time proportional PID computation with relay output Time proportional PID computation with voltage pulse output Continuous PID computation Setting 0 1 2 Description Output type

Outputs the PID computation results as a pulse Control relay output width of the time proportional on/off signal. Outputs the PID computation results as a pulse Voltage pulse output width of the time proportional on/off signal. Outputs the PID computation result as an analog signal. Compares the SV and PV and outputs the on/off signal depending on whether it is a positive or negative deviation. Outputs the PID or on/off computation result as two signals one for heating and the other for cooling. Controls so that the output and control valve opening are always compatible. Current output

On/off computation

Control relay output Either a control relay, voltage pulse, or current output can be selected for each of the heatingside and cooling-side outputs. Position proportional control relay output

Heating/cooling computation (See below) Position proportional PID computation

4 to 12

None

For dual-loop control and temperature and humidity control, both loop-1 and loop-2 have the same output combination :
4: Heating pulse output Cooling control relay output 5: Heating control relay output Cooling pulse output 6: Heating current output Cooling control relay output 7: Heating control relay output Cooling current output

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-9

s Parameters to Set the Control Computation Type

Main menu Submenu Parameter MVS1 USMD OUT MVS2 MV2 selection Description MV1 selection Setting Range 0: Control relay output, 1: Voltage pulse output, 2: Current output, 3: Control relay output for ON/OFF computation, 4 to 12: Output for heating/cooling computation Default

TIP
Either MVS1 or MVS2 will be displayed according to the controller mode (US mode). Set the displayed parameter. Set both for dual-loop control and temperature and humidity control.

s Setting the Control Computation Type

1. This display represents the last step of the PV

input type setting procedure of the previous section.
SV MV

2. Press the

key once to call up the controller mode submenu (MD).

SET/ENT

SV MV

3. Press the

key twice to call up the MV output submenu (OUT).

SV MV
SET/ENT

4. Press the

key to display the MV1 selection parameter (MVS1). Select the MV output type using the and keys. (For example, select 1 for time proportional PID computation with voltage pulse output.) A decimal point appears and flashes when the setting is changed. key to register the setting. The decimal point disappears.
SET/ENT

SV MV

5. Press the

SV MV

6. Press the

DISP key twice to return to the controller function setup menu (USMD).

SV MV

4-10

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

4.6

Writing the Data Defined So Far (Parameter Initialization)

Once you have reached this point, you need to write the information that you have defined so far (controller mode, PV input, and control computation) into the controller and initialize the related parameters.

s Parameter for Initializing Parameters

SV MV

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-11

4.7

Defining the Alarm Outputs (as necessary)

The alarm outputs are pre-assigned to the US1000 controllers contact output terminals. For example, the US1000-00 (basic type) set up for single-loop control (US mode = 1) assigns alarm output 1, alarm output 2 and alarm output 3 to DO1 (terminal nos. 9 and 12), DO2 (terminal nos. 10 and 12) and DO3 (terminal nos. 11 and 12), respectively. Refer to section 3.2 for the assignments of the other controller modes. Any one of the alarms listed in the table below can be assigned to each alarm output.
Alarm type PV high limit PV low limit High limit deviation Low limit deviation Deviation of high limit passive Deviation of low limit passive Deviation of high and low limits Deviation within high and low limits PV high limit passive PV low limit passive Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Alarm type PV high limit with waiting action PV low limit with waiting action High limit deviation with waiting action Low limit deviation with waiting action Deviation of high limit passive with waiting action Deviation of low limit passive with waiting action Deviation of high and low limits with waiting action Deviation within high and low limits with waiting action PV high limit passive with waiting action PV low limit passive with waiting action Setting 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Alarm type SV high limit SV low limit MV high limit MV low limit PV velocity alarm PV velocity alarm passive Self-diagnostic alarm Self-diagnostic alarm passive FAIL passive

Setting 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

TIP
The passive alarm turns the contact ON when normal, and OFF when the alarm occurs. The waiting action suppresses the alarm during the period from when control is started until it stabilizes.

See Also Section 3.2, Signals Assigned to Terminals, to find the terminal to which the alarm output is assigned. See section 3.14, Parameters for Alarm Output of the separate US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions manual, for detailed information on the alarm actions.

4-12

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

s Parameters for Defining the Alarm Outputs

Main menu Submenu Parameter AL1 S.LP1 S.LP2 AL2 ALM AL3 AL4 Description Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type Alarm 4 type Setting Range OFF, 1 to 29 (see the previous page) OFF, 1 to 29 (see the previous page) OFF, 1 to 29 (see the previous page) OFF, 1 to 29 (see the previous page) Default 1 2 1 2

After setting the controller mode (US mode) for dual-loop control or temperature and humidity control, also set the loop-2 alarm outputs. (These parameter settings are located under the S.LP2 setup parameter main menu.)

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-13

s Defining Alarm Outputs

1. This display represents the last step of the

parameter initializing procedure of the previous section.

SV MV

2. Press the

key once to call up the loop-1 setup

SV MV

menu (S.LP1).

3. Press the

key once to call up the target setpoint submenu (SV).

SV MV

SET/ENT

4. Press the

key once to call up the alarm setting submenu (ALM).

SV MV
SET/ENT

5. Press the

key to display the alarm-1 type parameter (AL1). Select the alarm type you want to set using the and keys. (For example, select 9 for PV high limit passive.) A decimal point appears and flashes when the setting is changed. key to register the setting. The decimal point disappears.
SET/ENT

SV MV

6. Press the

SV MV
SET/ENT

7. Press the

key. If AL2 and the parameters of other alarm types are required, also set these in the same manner (that is, select the value you want to set using the and keys, and press the key twice).
SET/ENT

SV MV

8. Press the

key twice to return to the controller function setup menu (USMD).

DISP

SV MV

4-14

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

4.8

Setting the Target Setpoint, Alarm Setpoints, and PID Parameters

The basic operation parameters should be pre-set. You can change the settings of these parameters after the start of operation.

s Parameters to Set Target Setpoint, Alarm Setpoints, and PID Parameters

Main menu Submenu Parameter 1.SV 1.A1 1.A2 O.LP1 O.LP2 1.PID 1.A3 1.A4 1.P 1.I 1.D Description Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Proportional band Integral time Derivative time Setting Range EU (0.0 to 100.0%) PV alarm: EU (-100.0 to 100.0%) Deviation alarm/PV-velocity alarm: EUS(-100.0 to 100.0%) SV alarm: EU (0.0 to 100.0%) MV alarm: -5.0 to 105.0% EU (0%) PV high limit: EU (100.0%) Deviation alarm: EUS (0.0%) MV high limit: 100.0% MV low limit: 0.0% PV velocity: EUS (100.0%) Other alarms: EU (0.0%) Default

0.1 to 999.9%, 0.0 to 999.9% for 999.9% heating/cooling computation OFF, 1 to 6000 sec. OFF, 1 to 6000 sec. 1000 sec. OFF

EU is the engineering unit corresponding to the instrument range; EUS is the engineering unit corresponding to the span of the instrument range. See Appendix 2 for further explanation. If you use loop-2, you must also set the parameters for loop-2. (Set the parameters listed under the O.LP2 operation parameter main menu.) s Setting the Target Setpoint, Alarm Setpoints, and PID Parameters

1. This display represents the last step of the alarm

output defining procedure in the previous section.

SV MV

2. Press the

key once. When the mode menu (MODE) is displayed, press the key once to call up the loop-1 operation menu (O.LP1).

DISP

SV MV

3. Press the

key once to call up the computation parameter submenu (PAR).

SV MV

SET/ENT

4. Press the

key once to call up the 1.PID submenu (1.PID).

SV MV

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-15

5. Press the

key once to display the target setpoint parameter (1.SV). Set the target setpoint value you want to set using the and keys. The decimal point flashes.

SET/ENT

SV MV

6. Press the

key to register the setting. The decimal point stops flashing.

SV MV

SET/ENT

7. Press the

key to display the alarm-1 setpoint parameter (1.A1). This is the alarm setpoint that corresponds to the alarm-1 type set in the previous section. Set the alarm setpoint value you want to set using the and keys. The decimal point flashes. key to register the setting. The decimal point stops flashing.
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

SV MV

8. Press the

SV MV

9. Press the

key to display the alarm-2 setpoint parameter (1.A2). Set it in the same manner as 1.A1 (that is, select the value you want to set using the and keys, and press the key twice). If you do not need to make a setting, just press the key.
SET/ENT SET/ENT

SET/ENT

SV MV

10. Set 1.A3 and 1.A4 in the same manner (that is,
SET/ENT

select the value you want to set using the and keys, and press the key twice). If you do not need to make a setting, just press the key.
SET/ENT

SV MV

11. Set the proportional band (1.P), integral time (1.I),

SET/ENT

and derivative time (1.D) in the same manner (that is, select the value you want to set using the and keys, and press the key twice).

SV MV

12. Press the

DISP key twice to return to the loop-1 operation menu (O.LP1).

SV MV

4-16

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

4.9

Setting Other Functions (as necessary)

Set the functions described in this section as necessary. This section describes the parameter setting procedure using the setting of the direct/reverse action of control as an example. Set other parameters in the same way, as necessary. Before setting, confirm the setting range of parameters referring to the parameter lists in Appendixes 3 and 4. When you set parameters, the parameter maps in Appendix 5 are helpful because they illustrate the display sequence and locations of the parameters. You can use the maps as an operation guide to call up the parameters you want to set or change. If you are also using loop-2, set loop-2 parameters in the same manner as the loop-1 parameters.

See Also See chapter 3 of the separate US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions manual, for deatailed information on each parameter.

(1) Direct/reverse action of control You can specify either a direct or reverse action of control. Menu: [Operation parameter]-[O.LP1/O.LP2]-[1.PID] Parameter: 1.DR q Setting Direct/Reverse Action of Control First, determine the values of the parameters to be set by referring to the parameter list in Appendix 3. Look at the operation parameter map in Appendix 5. Find the main menu O.LP1 and check that the submenu 1.PID is located below it. Then, find the parameter 1.DR below the submenu 1.PID. The parameter map shows the keys (by key symbols) used in reaching the parameter 1.DR starting from an operation display. Perform the following operations looking at the parameter map. 1. First, press the 2. Next, press the 3. Press the 4. Press the 5. Press the 7. Press the
SET/ENT SET/ENT SET/ENT

key for 3 seconds from an operation display to call up MODE. key once to call up O.LP1.

key to call up PAR. key once to call up 1.PID. key several times until the 1.DR parameter is displayed. or key. A decimal point will appear and flash. key to return to the submenu. key to register the new setting. Then, the decimal point disappears.
DISP

6. Change the setting using the

SET/ENT

8. When all the settings are finished, press the 9. Pressing the Pressing the
DISP DISP

key at a submenu returns to the main menu. key at a main menu returns to an operation display.

Set the following parameters referring to the parameter lists in Appendixes 3 and 4 and the parameter map in Appendix 5, as done for the direct/reverse action parameter setting. (2) PV filter and PV bias First order lag filtering function, and bias adding function used for correction in reference junction compensation Menu: [Operation parameter]-[O.LP1/O.LP2]-[PAR] Parameter: BS (PV bias), FL (PV filter)

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-17

(3) 10-segment linearizer Can be selected as one of the following two functions. Biasing: Provides biasing on any arbitrary 11 points of input. Approximation: Output values can be arbitrarily set against the arbitrary 11 points of input. Menu: Parameter: [Operation parameter]-[PYS1] 1.X1 to 1.X11, 1.Y1 to 1.Y11, 1.PMD

(4) Burnout action Sets the action upon detection of a burnout (wire breakage) for the thermocouple, RTD, and the standard signal inputs. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[AIN] Parameter: A.BO1, A.BO2, A.BO3 (5) Cascade input source The cascade input source can be selected as either an analog input terminal or as RS-485 communication. (The factory-set default is analog input terminal.) When you use the feedforward input instead of the cascade input, set the CMS parameter to CPT. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[S.LP1/S.LP2]-[SV] Parameter: CMS (6) Feedforward input To use the feedforward input, set the FFS parameter to AIN and set the CMS (cascade input source) parameter to CPT. A filter and computation for feedforward input are provided. Menu: Parameter: Menu: Parameter: [Setup parameter]-[S.LP1]-[CTL] FFS [Operation parameter]-[O.LP1]-[PAR] FGN, FBI, FBO, FFL

(7) Square-root computation Square-root extraction with changeable low signal cut-off point. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[AIN] Parameter: A.SR1, A.LC1, A.SR2, A.LC2, A.SR3, A.LC3 (8) SUPER function This function suppresses overshoots. It is more effective when used together with the auto-tuning function. Menu: [Operation parameter]-[O.LP1/O.LP2]-[PAR] Parameter: SC (9) PV tracking This function prevents a sudden changes in PV by temporarily making SV track PV when the controller is switched to AUTO mode. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[S.LP1 / S.LP2]-[SV] Parameter: PVT (10) SV ramp-up/ramp-down rate This functions is used as an SV changing operation, to gradually change SV toward the new value at a constant rate. Menu: Parameter: Menu: Parameter: [Setup parameter]-[S.LP1/S.LP2]-[SV] TMU (time unit for ramp-rate setting) [Operation parameter]-[O.LP1 / O.LP2]-[PAR] UPR, DNR (setpoint ramp-up/ramp-down)

4-18

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 4 Setting the Basic Functions

(11) Cycle time of MV output (Pulse width of on/off signal) The pulse width of an on/off signal in time proportional PID computation is proportional to the cycle time of the MV output. Pulse width of MV output = MV output (%) cycle time of MV output Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[C.CTL] Parameter: CT1, CT2 (12) Preset PID You can set multiple sets of PID parameters. For detailed information about preset PIDs, read section 3.10 of the separate US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions manual. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[C.CTL] Parameter: PPID (specifies either SV number selection or zone PID) (13) Behavior upon power recovery You can set the type of controller behavior upon power recovery. HOT: COLD: Menu: Parameter: Continues the same operation as prior to power failure. Starts in MAN mode. Outputs the preset MV value. [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[C.CTL] R.MD

(14) Retransmission output The function to re-transmit PV, MV, and SV data as an analog signal. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[RET] Parameter: RET1, RTH1, RTL1, RET2, RTH2, RTL2, RET3, RTH3, RTL3 (15) Password setting for parameter change operation You can set a password to prevent accidental or careless changes to setup parameter settings. The password is verified in the transmission from the operation parameter display to the setup parameter display. The password setting range is from 0 (no password) to 30000.

NOTE
Be sure to memorize the password. Once a password has been set, you cannot transmit to the setup parameter setting display without entering the correct password. To cancel a lost password, the controller must be sent back to a Yokogawa service center for repair at your cost. In the repair service, all parameters are initialized to the factory-set defaults. Thus, it is recommended to keep records of the user-set values for all of the parameters. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[MLCK] Parameter: PWD (16) Prohibition of key operation and parameter setting You can disable (i.e., lock) specific operation keys and set specific operation parameter menus so that they will not be displayed. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[KLCK] Parameter: SVC (SV setting key lock at operation displays) / (Data setting key lock)*1 </> (MV operation key lock) C (C mode key lock) A (A mode key lock) M (M mode key lock)*2

IM 5D1A01-01E

4-19

Menu: [Setup parameter]-[CMLP]-[MLCK] Parameter: MODE (Mode menu lock) O.LP1 (O.LP1 menu lock) O.LP2 (O.LP2 menu lock) PID (PID submenu lock)*3 USR (USR menu lock) PYS1 (PYS1 menu lock) PYS2 (PYS2 menu lock) *1: Disables all parameter setting operations except those for the parameters included in the key lock submenu KLCK and the password setting parameter. *2: While the setup parameter menu (STUP) is displayed, the M mode key lock becomes invalid and the operation mode can be switched to MAN. *3: Locks all of the submenus of 1.PID through to 8.PID. (17) Calibration of valve position (US1000-21 only) To perform position proportional control, you must set the valve position data of 0% and 100% openings to the controller. You can calibrate the valve position either automatically or manually.

NOTE
Perform this calibration with the controller connected to the control valve. Menu: [Setup parameter]-[USMD]-[VALV] Parameter: V.RS, V.L, V.H, V.AT q Calibrating the valve position (manually) 1. Display the V.RS parameter listed under the menu above. If V.RS is flashing, it means that the valve position has not been calibrated yet. key to select 1. (If it is already 1, set it back to 0 first and then reset it to 1.) Press the Press the 2. Press the
SET/ENT

key to reset the valve position settings. key to display the V.L parameter. key. This operates to close the valve and decrease the value on the

SET/ENT

Press and hold down the Press the 3. Press the

SET/ENT

SV digital display. When the digital value stops decreasing, the valve is fully closed. key. The 0% opening is adjusted, and the SV digital display indicates 0. key to display the V.H parameter. key. This operates to open the valve and increase the value on the
SET/ENT

Press and hold down the Press the

SET/ENT

SV digital display. When the digital value stops increasing, the valve is fully opened. key. The 100% opening is adjusted, and the SV digital display indicates 100.

q Calibrating valve position (automatically) 1. Call up the V.AT parameter, and press the Press the
SET/ENT

key to select ON.

key. The parameter starts flashing. When it stops flashing, calibration is completed.
DISP

If ERR is displayed, there may be some trouble in the wiring, valve, or process. Press the key to clear the error, and check the valve, process status, and so on.

4-20

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 5 Customizing Operation Displays

Customizing Operation Displays

In addition to the standard operation displays, two types of operation displays can be created according to your needs. q USER Display Data that needs to be referred to during the normal operation display sequence, can be displayed on the digital display. These displays are called USER displays. You can transfer from the last operation display to the USER display using the DISP key. When more than one USER display has been registered, the USER displays appear in sequence every time the DISP key is pressed. q SELECT Display You can select the operation parameters that are frequently checked or modified by simply calling them up from an operation display. This resulting display is called a SELECT display. You can call key for less than 3 seconds. If up SELECT displays from any operation display by pressing the you press the key for more than 3 seconds, the mode menu appears. In this case, go back to an operation display by pressing the DISP key and try again. When more than one SELECT display has key is pressed. To been registered, the SELECT displays appear in sequence every time the return to an operation display, press the DISP key.
SET/ENT SET/ENT

DISP

Operation display 1

Operation display 2

USER display (alarm)

USER display (PID group No.)

USER display (others)

DISP

SET/ENT

Press for less than 3 seconds.

SET/ENT

SELECT display 1

SELECT display 2

SELECT display 5

SET/ENT

IM 5D1A01-01E

5-1

5.1

Registering Auxiliary Operation Displays (USER Displays)

The types of USER displays are listed in the table below. You can select and register the USER displays you need during operation. The registered displays are then displayed using the DISP key in the order shown in the table. The initial values of the parameters in the table are all OFF (not registered). Set the parameters you want to register to ON. Menu: [Setup parameter] - [CONF] - [U.OPE]
Parameter U. 1AL U. 2AL U. SVN U. 1PI U. 2PI U. AI1 U. AI2 U. AI3 U. PV1 U. PV2 U. SMP Meaning Loop-1 alarm Loop-2 alarm SV number Loop-1 PID group number Loop-2 PID group number AIN1 measured value AIN2 measured value AIN3 measured value PV1 PV2 Sampling error counter PV digital display L1. ALM L2. ALM SVNO L1. PID L2. PID AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 PV1 PV2 SMP. ER SV digital display Number of occurring alarm (1 - 4) Number of occurring alarm (1 - 4) Specified SV number (1 - 8) Current PID group number (1 - 8) for zone PID Current PID group number (1 - 8) for zone PID AIN1 value (engineering unit) AIN2 value (engineering unit) AIN3 value (engineering unit) PV1 value (engineering unit) PV2 value (engineering unit) Error counter (0 - 30000)

See Also See section 3.10 of the separate US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions manual, for SV number and zone PID. See section 3.17 of the separate US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions manual, for sampling error counter.

5-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 5 Customizing Operation Displays

s Examples of USER Display q USER display of Loop-1 alarm

SV MV

Alarms 1 to 4 are all activated

Alarm 1 and 3 are activated

No alarm in occurrence

q USER display of SV number

SV MV

Specified SV number is 1.

q USER display of loop-1 PID group number

SV MV

Current PID group number for zone PID is 2.

q USER display of AIN1 measured value

SV MV AIN1 = 1789

q USER display of PV1

SV MV PV1 = 12.34

SV MV PV1 overflow

SV MV PV1 underflow

q USER display of sampling error counter

SV MV Error count is 12345.

IM 5D1A01-01E

5-3

s Registering USER Displays

If the controller is not in MAN mode, press the key to change to MAN mode. In an operation display, pressing the key for 3 seconds will retrieve the mode menu (MODE) or loop-1 operation mode (O.LP1). (O.LP1 is displayed for the default setting.)
SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the key once to display the setup menu (STUP). Then press the key once. If a password has been set, input the password here.
SET/ENT

SV MV

The loop-1 setup menu (S.LP1) appears. Press the key several times to display the detailed function setup menu (CONF).

SV MV

Press the key once to display the SELECT display registration submenu (C.SEL). Then press the key once to display the USER display registration submenu (U.OPE).

SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the key to display the USER display of the loop-1 alarm parameter (U.1AL). To register the USER display for use during operation, press the key and select ON, and then press the key. (If you do not need the USER display, leave it OFF and press SET/ENT key.)
SET/ENT SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the key to display the next USER display registration parameter. Set the parameters for the USER displays you want to "ON" in the same way as for U.1AL above.
SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the DISP key for 3 seconds to return to the operation display.

SV MV

5-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 5 Customizing Operation Displays

5.2

Displaying the Alarm Status

If the USER display functions described in the previous section are used, you can display alarm statuses from an operation display by pressing the DISP key. To set up the alarm status display function, perform the following.

1. Define alarm actions: Refer to section 4.7, Defining Alarm Outputs. 2. Set alarm setpoints: Refer to section 4.8, Setting Target Setpoint, Alarm Setpoints, and PID Parameters. 3. Set the U.1AL or U.2AL (USER display) parameter to ON: Refer to section 5.1, Registering Auxiliary Operation Displays (USER Displays).

IM 5D1A01-01E

5-5

5.3

Registering Quick Parameter Call-up Functions (SELECT Displays)

You can register up to 5 SELECT displays. An operation parameter that is frequently checked or modified during operation should be registered as a SELECT display. Registration involves setting the D-register numbers of operation parameters. The D-register numbers are given in the table on the next page.

s Examples of SELECT Display

SV MV SELECT display for the U1 parameter

SV MV A register number with no allocated parameter has been set for SELECT display 2.*1

SV MV A register number of nondisplayable parameter has been set for SELECT display 4.*2

*1: If you happen to register a D-register number that is not allocated to a parameter (i.e., a D-register number not found in the table on the next page), the SELECT display will indicate NoMAP followed by as many hyphens as the number of digits in the SELECT display number (1 to 5 digits). *2: Some parameters are not displayed depending on the controller mode (US mode) and the model and suffix code of the controller. If you register such parameters, the SELECT display will indicate SKIP followed by as many hyphens as the number of digits in the SELECT display number (1 to 5 digits). s Parameters to Register SELECT Displays
Main menu CONF Submenu C. SEL Parameter C.S1 - C.S5 Description Registration of SELECT display 1 to 5 Range of setting OFF, 201 to 773 Default OFF

5-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 5 Customizing Operation Displays

s D-register Numbers of Operation Parameters

Parameter Mode 206 O/C 207 SVNO Loop-1 computation parameters 241 AT. 1 242 SC. 1 243 BS. 1 244 FL. 1 245 UPR. 1 246 DNR. 1 247 CRT. 1 248 CBS. 1 249 CFL. 1 250 FGN. 1 251 FBI. 1 252 FBO. 1 253 FFL. 1 Loop-2 computation parameters 271 AT. 2 272 SC. 2 273 BS. 2 274 FL. 2 275 UPR. 2 276 DNR. 2 277 CRT. 2 278 CBS. 2 279 CFL. 2 Loop-1 1. PID 301 1. SV 302 1. A1 303 1. A2 304 1. A3 305 1. A4 306 1. P 307 1. I 308 1. D 309 1. MH 310 1. ML 311 1. MR 312 1. H 313 1. DR 314 1. Pc 315 1. Ic 316 1. Dc 317 1. Hc 318 1. DB 319 1. RP 320 1. PM 321 1. PMc Loop-1 2. PID 326 2. SV 327 2. A1 328 2. A2 329 2. A3 330 2. A4 331 2. P 332 2. I 333 2. D 334 2. MH 335 2. ML 336 2. MR 337 2. H 338 2. DR 339 2. Pc 340 2. Ic 341 2. Dc 342 2. Hc 343 2. DB 344 2. RP 345 2. PM 346 2. PMc No. No. Parameter Loop-1 3. PID 351 3. SV 352 3. A1 353 3. A2 354 3. A3 355 3. A4 356 3. P 357 3. I 358 3. D 359 3. MH 360 3. ML 361 3. MR 362 3. H 363 3. DR 364 3. Pc 365 3. Ic 366 3. Dc 367 3. Hc 368 3. DB 369 3. RP 370 3. PM 371 3. PMc Loop-1 4. PID 376 4. SV 377 4. A1 378 4. A2 379 4. A3 380 4. A4 381 4. P 382 4. I 383 4. D 384 4. MH 385 4. ML 386 4. MR 387 4. H 388 4. DR 389 4. Pc 390 4. Ic 391 4. Dc 392 4. Hc 393 4. DB 394 4. RP 395 4. PM 396 4. PMc Loop-1 5. PID 401 5. SV 402 5. A1 403 5. A2 404 5. A3 405 5. A4 406 5. P 407 5. I 408 5. D 409 5. MH 410 5. ML 411 5. MR 412 5. H 413 5. DR 414 5. Pc 415 5. Ic 416 5. Dc 417 5. Hc 418 5. DB 419 5. RP 420 5. PM 421 5. PMc No. Parameter Loop-1 6. PID 426 6. SV 427 6. A1 428 6. A2 429 6. A3 430 6. A4 431 6. P 432 6. I 433 6. D 434 6. MH 435 6. ML 436 6. MR 437 6. H 438 6. DR 439 6. Pc 440 6. Ic 441 6. Dc 442 6. Hc 443 6. DB 444 6. RP 445 6. PM 446 6. PMc Loop-1 7. PID 451 7. SV 452 7. A1 453 7. A2 454 7. A3 455 7. A4 456 7. P 457 7. I 458 7. D 459 7. MH 460 7. ML 461 7. MR 462 7. H 463 7. DR 464 7. Pc 465 7. Ic 466 7. Dc 467 7. Hc 468 7. DB 469 RHY 470 7. PM 471 7. PMc Loop-1 8. PID 476 8. SV 477 8. A1 478 8. A2 479 8. A3 480 8. A4 481 8. P 482 8. I 483 8. D 484 8. MH 485 8. ML 486 8. MR 487 8. H 488 8. DR 489 8. Pc 490 8. Ic 491 8. Dc 492 8. Hc 493 8. DB 494 RDV 495 8. PM 496 8. PMc No. Parameter Loop-2 1. PID 501 1. SV 502 1. A1 503 1. A2 504 1. A3 505 1. A4 506 1. P 507 1. I 508 1. D 509 1. MH 510 1. ML 511 1. MR 512 1. H 513 1. DR 514 1. Pc 515 1. Ic 516 1. Dc 517 1. Hc 518 1. DB 519 1. RP 520 1. PM 521 1. PMc Loop-2 2. PID 526 2. SV 527 2. A1 528 2. A2 529 2. A3 530 2. A4 531 2. P 532 2. I 533 2. D 534 2. MH 535 2. ML 536 2. MR 537 2. H 538 2. DR 539 2. Pc 540 2. Ic 541 2. Dc 542 2. Hc 543 2. DB 544 2. RP 545 2. PM 546 2. PMc Loop-2 3. PID 551 3. SV 552 3. A1 553 3. A2 554 3. A3 555 3. A4 556 3. P 557 3. I 558 3. D 559 3. MH 560 3. ML 561 3. MR 562 3. H 563 3. DR 564 3. Pc 565 3. Ic 566 3. Dc 567 3. Hc 568 3. DB 569 3. RP 570 3. PM 571 3. PMc No. Parameter Loop-2 4. PID 576 4. SV 577 4. A1 578 4. A2 579 4. A3 580 4. A4 581 4. P 582 4. I 583 4. D 584 4. MH 585 4. ML 586 4. MR 587 4. H 588 4. DR 589 4. Pc 590 4. Ic 591 4. Dc 592 4. Hc 593 4. DB 594 4. RP 595 4. PM 596 4. PMc Loop-2 5. PID 601 5. SV 602 5. A1 603 5. A2 604 5. A3 605 5. A4 606 5. P 607 5. I 608 5. D 609 5. MH 610 5. ML 611 5. MR 612 5. H 613 5. DR 614 5. Pc 615 5. Ic 616 5. Dc 617 5. Hc 618 5. DB 619 5. RP 620 5. PM 621 5. PMc Loop-2 6. PID 626 6. SV 627 6. A1 628 6. A2 629 6. A3 630 6. A4 631 6. P 632 6. I 633 6. D 634 6. MH 635 6. ML 636 6. MR 637 6. H 638 6. DR 639 6. Pc 640 6. Ic 641 6. Dc 642 6. Hc 643 6. DB 644 6. RP 645 6. PM 646 6. PMc No. Parameter Loop-2 7. PID 651 7. SV 652 7. A1 653 7. A2 654 7. A3 655 7. A4 656 7. P 657 7. I 658 7. D 659 7. MH 660 7. ML 661 7. MR 662 7. H 663 7. DR 664 7. Pc 665 7. Ic 666 7. Dc 667 7. Hc 668 7. DB 669 RHY 670 7. PM 671 7. PMc Loop-2 8. PID 676 8. SV 677 8. A1 678 8. A2 679 8. A3 680 8. A4 681 8. P 682 8. I 683 8. D 684 8. MH 685 8. ML 686 8. MR 687 8. H 688 8. DR 689 8. Pc 690 8. Ic 691 8. Dc 692 8. Hc 693 8. DB 694 RDV 695 8. PM 696 8. PMc User parameters 701 U1 702 U2 703 U3 704 U4 705 U5 706 U6 707 U7 708 U8 No. Parameter Ten-segment linearizer 1 726 1. X1 727 1. Y1 728 1. X2 729 1. Y2 730 1. X3 731 1. Y3 732 1. X4 733 1. Y4 734 1. X5 735 1. Y5 736 1. X6 737 1. Y6 738 1. X7 739 1. Y7 740 1. X8 741 1. Y8 742 1. X9 743 1. Y9 744 1. X10 745 1. Y10 746 1. X11 747 1. Y11 748 1. PMD Ten-segment linearizer 2 751 2. X1 752 2. Y1 753 2. X2 754 2. Y2 755 2. X3 756 2. Y3 757 2. X4 758 2. Y4 759 2. X5 760 2. Y5 761 2. X6 762 2. Y6 763 2. X7 764 2. Y7 765 2. X8 766 2. Y8 767 2. X9 768 2. Y9 769 2. X10 770 2. Y10 771 2. X11 772 2. Y11 773 2. PMD

IM 5D1A01-01E

5-7

s Registering SELECT Displays

If the controller is not in MAN mode, press the key to change to MAN mode. In an operation display, pressing the key for 3 seconds will retrieve the mode menu (MODE) or
SET/ENT

SV MV

loop-1 operation mode (O.LP1). (O.LP1 is displayed for the default setting.)

Press the key once to display the setup menu (STUP). Then press the key once. If a password has been set, input the password here.
SET/ENT

SV MV

The loop-1 setup menu (S.LP1) then appears. Press the key several times to display the detailed function setup menu (CONF).

SV MV

Press the key once to display the SELECT display registration submenu (C.SEL).
SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the key to enable registration of the SELECT display 1 parameter (C.S1). Find the D-register number of the operation parameter you want to register in the table on the previous page, and set it using the and keys. Example: To register the alarm-1 setpoint (1.A1), set "302."
SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the key to register the setting. The decimal point stops flashing.
SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the key once again to enable registration of the SELECT display 2 parameter (C.S2). Set the parameters of other SELECT displays (C.S2 to C.S5) as necessary, and in the same manner as done for C.S1.

SET/ENT

SV MV

Press the DISP key for 3 seconds to return to the operation display.

SV MV

5-8

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

Operation
Now that you have completed the installation, wiring and functionality setup procedures described in the previous chapters, you can actually start operating the US1000. This chapter describes the basic operations of the US1000 and specific operations for individual controller modes (US modes). It also explains basic tuning work and switching among the CAS, AUTO, and MAN modes by the contact inputs.

TIP
This chapter describes the controller operation of the following three types of controllers depending on their selected controller mode (US mode).

Controller type Single-loop type

Preset controller mode (US mode) Single-loop control, cascade primary-loop control, cascade secondary-loop control, loop control for backup, loop control with PV switching, loop control with PV auto-selector, loop control with PV-hold function, loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs, loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs Cascade control, cascade control with two universal inputs Dual-loop control, temperature and humidity control

Cascade type Dual-loop type

s Operation Display
Measured value (PV) Target setpoint (SV) Target setpoint (SV) SV increase key Measured value (PV)
SET/ENT

PV ALM LP2

SV MV

100

Operation mode switching key

SV decrease key
DISP
O

0 C

Manipulated variable (MV)

MV decrease key MV fast-change key

MV increase key

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-1

6.1

Switching the Operation Mode

s US1000 Operation Modes The US1000 can operate under one of the following operation modes: MAN mode: In this mode, MV can be manipulated manually using the MV operation keys.

AUTO mode: This mode performs automatic control so as to maintain the SV. SV can be changed using the SV setting keys on the front panel. CAS mode: This mode performs automatic control, regarding the cascade input from either an analog input signal or from RS-485 communication as the target setpoint.

s Switching the Operation Mode To switch the operation mode, press and hold either the (CAS mode), (MAN mode) key for 0.5 sec. to switch between modes, as follows:

(AUTO mode) or

CAS mode

AUTO mode

MAN mode

NOTE
The key is locked (disabled) for the default setting to avoid undesirable mode change. So, release the C mode key lock first, before you can enter the CAS mode. (See section 4.9 (16) for the information about key lock.) You cannot switch directly from the MAN mode to CAS mode. You must switch to the AUTO mode first, before you can enter the CAS mode. Even if the cascade-input signal is -5.0% or less or 105.0% or more, the operation mode can be switched to the CAS mode.

6-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

6.2

Changing the Target Setpoint (SV)

Use the (SV increase) or (SV decrease) key to change SV. If the controller is in CAS mode, SV cannot be changed. If this is the case, you will need to press the or key to change the operation mode to the AUTO or MAN mode before you can change the SV.

PV ALM LP2

PV SV

SV MV

100

SV (Flashes) SV increase key PV SV decrease key

SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O

Pressing the Pressing the

(SV increase) key increments SV. (SV decrease) key decrements SV.

TIP
When the deviation between SV and PV exceeds the value of parameter DVB, the bar segment of SV flashes. Pressing either of the or key displays SV on the SV digital display. (If MV was being displayed, the display automatically switches to the SV display.)

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-3

6.3

Manipulating MV
As the controller is switched to the MAN mode, (MAN mode lamp) goes on, and MV becomes available for incrementing or decrementing. To operate MV, use or and/or key.

PV ALM LP2

PV MV

MV lamp is ON

100

MAN mode lamp MAN mode key

SET/ENT

DISP
O

MV decrease key

MV fast-change key

MV increase key

If the controller is set to other than the MAN mode, press the To increase MV, press the To decrease MV, press the MV increase key. MV decrease key.

key to enter the MAN mode.

To accelerate the increasing or decreasing operation, press the key.

key while pressing the

TIP

To change MV, make sure the operation mode is MAN (i.e., the M mode lamp is on). To display MV on the SV digital display, press the or key. The MV lamp will then light up. (If SV was being displayed, the display automatically changes to the MV display.) You can also switch the SV digital display from SV to MV using the DISP key.

s Shutdown Function This function fully closes a control valve beyond its positioner deadband. This function is available when the output type is current of 4 to 20 mA and the operation mode is MAN. When output is reduced using the key until SHUT appears on the SV digital display, the shutdown function starts to operate and the output falls to approx. 0.0 mA.

6-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

6.4

Operations on Single-Loop Type of Controller

This section describes the operation displays that appear in the following controller modes (US modes), and their corresponding operations: Single-loop control Cascade primary-loop control Cascade secondary-loop control Loop control for backup Loop control with PV switching Loop control with PV auto-selector Loop control with PV-hold function Loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs Loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs

It is possible to switch between the two digital display combinations of PV and SV or PV and MV, using the DISP key at anytime during operation. The following operations are also available: Changing the operation mode using the , or key or key (only in AUTO or MAN mode) Changing SV using the Manipulating MV using the or and/or key (only in MAN mode)
PV and SV display
PV

PV and MV display
PV

PV SV
SV MV

ALM LP2

PV MV

MV lamp is ON
100

100

SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O C

DISP
O

Displayed alternately
DISP

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-5

6.5

Operations on Cascade Type of Controller

This section describes the operation displays that appear in the following controller modes (US modes), and their corresponding operations: Cascade control Cascade control with two universal inputs The operation displays and operations available on cascade type of controllers depend on whether the cascade is closed or opened.

s Operation Display and Operations for Cascade Close Cascade Close refers to the state where the two loops, the primary and secondary loops of the US1000, are connected. In this status, the secondary loop conducts control assuming the result of the PID computation at the primary loop as the target setpoint. The status has two combination patterns of digital operation display, the primary PV and primary SV, and the primary PV and secondary MV. To switch between them, use DISP key. Changing the operation mode using the , or key or key (only in AUTO or MAN mode) Changing the primary SV using the Manipulating MV using the or and/or key (only in MAN mode)

See Also Section 6.6, Switching Between Cascade Open and Close, for information on switching between cascade open and close.
Primary PV and SV display
PV ALM LP2

Primary PV and secondary MV display

PV ALM LP2

Primary PV Primary SV
SV MV

Primary PV Secondary MV

MV lamp is ON
100

SV MV

100

Primary PV Primary SV
SET/ENT SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O

Secondary MV

Displayed alternately
DISP

6-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

s Operation display and operations for cascade open Cascade Open refers to the state where the two loops, the primary and secondary loop in the US1000, are disconnected. In this status, the secondary loop obtains the manually set SV as a basis to conduct control. The left-side bar display shows the primary loops PV and SV, while the right-side one shows the secondary loops PV and SV. SV is indicated by the flashing bar-graph segment. Cascade Open has two digital operation-display combinations: secondary PV and secondary SV; and secondary PV and secondary MV. To switch between these, use the DISP key. When the cascade is opened, LP2 lamp is ON and the currently selected mode lamp flashes. Changing the operation mode using the , or Changing the secondary SV using the Manipulating MV using the or and/or or key key key (only in MAN mode)

See Also Section 6.6, Switching Between Cascade Open and Close, for information on switching between cascade open and close.
Secondary PV and SV display
PV

LP2 lamp is ON

Secondary PV and MV display

Secondary PV Secondary SV

ALM LP2

SV MV

MV lamp is ON
100

SV MV

100

Secondary PV Secondary MV

Primary PV and SV Secondary PV and SV

SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O

Secondary MV

The currently selected mode lamp flashes.

Displayed alternately
DISP

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-7

6.6

Switching Between Cascade Open and Close

Two ways are available to switch between the cascade open and close as follows: Switching using parameters Switching using contact Note that the latter has precedence over the former.

s Parameters for switching between cascade open and close Activate the OPEN/CLOSE switchover (O/C) parameter from the operation parameter mode menu (MODE) in order to change the settings. q Switching between cascade open and close 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the flash.
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

key on the operation display for 3 sec. to display the mode menu (MODE). key again to display the OPEN/CLOSE switchover (O/C) parameter. or key to change the parameter setting. A decimal point appears and starts to Switch to close status Switch to open status key to store the changed parameter condition. The decimal point disappears. key to return to the operation display.

CLOSE: OPEN: 4. Press the 5. Press the

SET/ENT

DISP

s Contact input for switching between cascade open and close For cascade controllers, a contact input terminal is assigned for cascade open/close switching. Contact input terminal: DI2 When DI2 is ON: Cascade open When DI2 is OFF: Cascade close

6-8

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

6.7

Operations on Dual-loop Type of Controller

This section describes the operations in the following controller modes (US modes): Dual-loop control Temperature and humidity control In dual-loop type of controllers, both of the US1000s two internal control loops performs the PID control computations. The left-side bar display shows the loop-1s PV and SV, while the right-side one shows the loop-2s PV and SV. SV is indicated by the flashing bar-graph segment. When the secondary loops information is displayed, the LP2 lamp lights up. The following operations are available for the displayed loop (see note below): Changing the operation mode using the , or key or key (only in AUTO or MAN mode) Changing SV using the Manipulating MV using the or and/or key (only in MAN mode) Note For example, if you press the key during the loop-2 display (i.e., when the LP2 lamp is on), then the operation mode for the loop-2 changes to MAN. The operation for the loop-1 is not affected.

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-9

DISP

PV ALM LP2 ALM LP2

Loop-1 PV
SV

Loop-1 PV Loop-1 MV

Loop-1 SV

MV lamp is ON
100

SV MV

Loop-1 SV (flashes) Loop-1 PV

100

SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O

Loop-1 MV

DISP

LP2 lamp is ON
PV PV ALM LP2 ALM LP2

Loop-2 PV
SV

Loop-2 PV Loop-2 MV

MV lamp is ON
100

SV MV

Loop-2 SV

100

Loop-2 PV

Loop-2 SV (flashes)
SET/ENT SET/ENT

0 C

DISP
O

Loop-2 MV

DISP

6-10

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

6.8

Display and Operations during Heating/Cooling Computation

The following displays are those specific to the heating/cooling computation. q Digital display for MV H is indicated at the left of the heating-side MV L is indicated at the left of the cooling-side MV If both the heating and cooling computations are being output, the heating-side is displayed. q Bar-graph display for MV The heating side appears on the right half of the bar display and the cooling side on the left half. For both the heating and cooling sides, the center of the bar display indicates the 0.0% level. The right and left ends of the bar display indicate 100.0% for the heating and cooling sides respectively. The lower limit of the output is 0.0%.

PV ALM LP2

Heating-side output (H displayed on left of value)

PV
SV MV

ALM LP2

SV MV

Cooling-side output (L displayed on left of value)

100

PV SV
SET/ENT SET/ENT

DISP
O C

DISP
O

Heating-side output bar display

Cooling-side output bar display

Cooling side Heating side Bar display

100% C 0% 100% If both the heating-side and O

cooling-side values are output.

Cooling side Heating side

100% C 0% 100% If neither heating-side nor O

cooling-side values are output.

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-11

6.9

Operation Mode Switching Using Contact Input

A contact input is assigned with the function of switching the operation modes. The assignment depends on the controller mode (US mode) as outlined below. A mode transition occurs when the contact input status changes from OFF to ON.

See Also Section 3.15 of the US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Functions manual for changing the contact input assignment.

q For single-loop control, loop control with PV auto-selector or loop control with PV autoselector and two universal inputs: DI2: Switches to MAN mode DI3: Switches to AUTO mode (for US1000-11 and -21 only) q For cascade primary-loop control, loop control for backup, loop control with PV switching or loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs: DI3: Switches to MAN mode (for US1000-11 and -21 only) q For cascade secondary-loop control, cascade control or cascade control with two universal inputs: DI3: Switches to MAN mode (for US1000-11 and -21 only) DI4: Switches to AUTO mode (for US1000-11 and -21 only) DI5: Switches to CAS mode (for US1000-11 and -21 only) q For loop control with PV-hold function: DI2: When on, PV and MV are held in MAN mode; when OFF, switches to AUTO mode DI3: Switches to CAS mode (for US1000-11 and -21 only) q For dual-loop control and temperature and humidity control: DI2: Switches secondary loop to MAN mode (for US1000-11 only) DI3: Switches primary loop to MAN mode (for US1000-11 only)

6-12

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

6.10 Starting Controller Operation

This section explains how to start the controller operation, using simple PID control as an example. s Starting manual operation 1. Turn the power on. The PV and SV digital values, and PV, SV and MV bar displays appear. 2. The lamp lights up, indicating the controller is in MAN mode. or key to set SV. 3. Press the 4. Press or key to turn on the MV lamp and display the MV value on the digital display. Adjust MV, as necessary. Balance PV at or around SV, while checking for a smooth response.

PV SV or MV
SV MV

ALM LP2

100

SV PV

2. MAN mode lamp lights up. 3. SV setting

SET/ENT

DISP
O

4. MV adjustment

s Switching from manual to automatic operation To change the operation mode to AUTO, press the key in step 4 in the above sequence (and the AUTO mode lamp lights up). No balancing is required when switching and the output will change without a bump.

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-13

6.11 Auto-tuning
Auto-tuning is a US1000 function that measures the process characteristics and automatically sets the optimum PID parameters during PID control. Auto-tuning is activated by the parameter setting. The auto-tuning uses a Stepping Response Method. When auto-tuning is activated, MV output turns on and off temporarily in a step-like manner. An appropriate PID is calculated and set from the response data.

WARNING
Do not use the auto-tuning function for the following processes. Fast-response processes such as flowrate and pressure. Processes in which a severe change in output, even if temporary, is undesirable. Processes in which any severe stress on the operating terminal is undesirable. Processes in which product quality can be adversely affected if PV fluctuates beyond its allowable range.

CAUTION
Auto-tuning is only available when the operation mode is set to AUTO. Before auto-tuning can be performed, the target setpoints and other parameters must be set up. Auto-tuning is not available for ON/OFF computation control. Auto-tuning is disabled when the US1000 is inactive.

TIP

To interrupt auto-tuning, set the AT parameter to off. Auto-tuning stops and the PID constant stays unchanged at the same value as before auto-tuning was started. Even if SV is changed during auto-tuning, auto-tuning is still based on the SV set when started. After completing auto-tuning, control is conducted according to the modified SV. Changing a PID constant during auto-tuning is not made effective, since the constant is reset when auto-tuning ends. The parameters are not reset when auto-tuning is terminated forcibly however, thus making the changed values effective. If an input burnout or A/D data conversion error occurs during auto-tuning, auto-tuning stops and outputs the preset MV value. If auto-tuning is run for more than 24 hours, it is terminated upon the auto-tuning timeout time and the error code ATERR is displayed. To dismiss the error code, press the DISP key once. The error will not affect the US1000 functions. It is recommended that the process be checked to find out the cause of the timeout. Auto-tuning on a zone PID control is performed using the PID parameters corresponding to the SV number to which the auto-tuning parameter is set, despite the SV number using in the zone PID control. Performing auto-tuning on a zone PID does not affect any SV number not being set in the zone PID function.

6-14

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 6 Operation

s Starting autos-tuning

Press the

SET/ENT

key for 3 sec. from an operation display

SV MV

to call up the mode menu (MODE).

Press the menu (O.LP1).

key once to call up the loop-1 operation

SV MV

Press the

SET/ENT

key once to call up the computation

SV MV

parameter submenu.

Press the

PAR

key once to display the auto-tuning

SV MV

selection parameter (AT).

Press the

key to select the SV number for

SET/ENT

auto-tuning and press the

key.
SV MV

Example: To perform auto-tuning using the PID parameters for SV number 1, select 1. To perform autotuning for all SV numbers, select 9.

The display switches to the operation display. When autotuning is run, the LEDs at both ends of the MV bar display flash. They cease flashing when auto-tuning stops.
SV MV
MV bar display
C O

The LEDs at both ends flash.

The value of upper and lower limit of output is output alternately during auto-tuning.

IM 5D1A01-01E

6-15

6.12 Manual Tuning

To using the US1000 with an unknown process, clarify the conditions for MAN mode operation as this will help you determine the proportional band, integral time and derivative time for the AUTO mode. For example, if PV varies considerably by changing the US1000 output slightly, the proportional band shall be set wide. Conversely, if PV varies only slightly with changes in output, then the proportional band shall be set narrow. In addition, if only a short delay time is allowed for changes made to the controllers MV, then the integral time and derivative time must be set short. For processes which have longer recovery time, the integral time and derivative time must be set long. s Tuning with Geglar/Nicholss Limiting Sensitivity There are a number of adjustments that can be made to determine the proportional band, integral time and derivative time. The method described here yields a response characteristic of 25% damping. 1. Set the operation mode to MAN and manipulate PV manually so that it matches SV. Set the integral time to 9999 sec., the proportional band to a large value and the derivative time to OFF. 2. Set the control operation mode to AUTO. 3. Decrease the proportional band from its large value (e.g., 100% 50% 20%). In this case, allow enough time to pass so that the control conditions can be monitored at every step. Continue this operation until the control loop starts continuous oscillation (cycling).
TIP

7-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 7 Other Functions

7.2

Custom Computation
If the standard functions of the US1000 controller mode (US mode) do not offer the type of control desired, you can customize the I/O computations, signal assignment and operation display. These functions are called custom computation functions. To use this custom computation functions, you will need the LL1200 PC-Based Custom Computation Building Tool that is available optionally. The LL1200 PC-Based Custom Computation Building Tool is accompanied by the LL1100 PC-based Parameters Setting Tool. q Main Specifications of Custom Computation Functions Available computation modules: Four-rule arithmetic, logic operation, ten-segment linearizer approximation, temperature and humidity calculation, fluid temperature compensation, fluid pressure compensation, etc. Customizable operation display: Display elements, display sequences, and display conditions

IM 5D1A01-01E

7-3

7.3

D Register and I Relay

The D register and I relay are not used for normal operations. The only operations that require D register and I relay numbers to be specified, are: Customizing the operation display Referring to the parameters for custom computation Communication with other devices Customizing signals assigned to the I/O contact

s What is a D register? D register refers to the CPU registers used by Yokogawas digital controllers and programmable controllers, that keep data on a word-basis. The US1000 stores all process data, setting parameters and definition information in this so-called D register. All US1000 data are managed by referring to their individual D register numbers. s What is an I relay? The US1000 stores its status conditions, such as the operation mode or alarm condition, in a so-called I relay. All statuss are managed by referring to their individual I relay numbers.

7-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 8 Maintenance

8.
8.1

Maintenance
This chapter describes how to clean and maintain the US1000.

Cleaning
The US1000 front panel should be cleaned gently with a soft, dry cloth.

NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or benzene as the body material may deteriorate.

8.2

Replacement of Mounting Bracket

If the mounting bracket is damaged, please order a replacement, specifying the following serial number.
Part No. T9115NK Selling unit One set (upper and lower brackets)

8.3

Limited Life Components and Maintenance

The following table lists those controller components with a limited life.
Components Aluminum electric capacitor EEPROM Contact output relay Control output relay Length of service life 7 to 10 years 100,000 writings About 100,000 on/off repetitions *1 About 100,000 on/off repetitions *1

*1: This service life is guaranteed only for the rated load. It is recommended that the US1000 be overhauled according to the limited-life data for each component. The control output relays can be replaced. But to carry out the replacement, contact YOKOGAWA sales staff or Repair Center because the inspection is required for safety.

TIP
Comments on fuse : The fuses employed in US1000 are free from periodically replacement because it is not a short-life part. To carry out fuse replacement, sufficient handling skill of the instrument and also soldering skill are required. In case that the fuse has burned out, please contact YOKOGAWA sales staff or Repair Center.
Part Name Fuse Part No. A1422EF Rated Current 1.6A Rated Voltage 250V Fuse Characteristics Quick acting (F)

IM 5D1A01-01E

8-1

8.4

Procedure for Replacing Control Output Relays

NOTE
Since inspection is needed in case parts are replaced, replacement will be carried out by a YOKOGAWA engineer or an engineer certified by YOKOGAWA. When replacement is required, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

WARNING
To avoid electric shock, turn off the power before starting replacement work allowing for the infuluence upon the process and other instruments.

s Required tools Phillips screwdriver Control output relay:

OMRON G6B-2114P-FD-US-P6B Rated to 30 V DC or 250 V AC Resistance load of 3 A

s Replacing 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Turn off the US1000 and the external power supply for the relay contacts. Insert a Phillips screwdriver into the lower hole on the bezel of the front panel at an angle of 90 from the front panel and loosen the screw. Hold the bezel of the front panel and gently pull it straight out towards you. Be careful not to pull it out on an angle, as the temperature sensor on the terminal face may be damaged. Remove the I/O board fitted with control output relays from the bezel, as instructed below. The I/O board is fixed to the bezel at the top and bottom. 4.1) Gently push up the top of the bezel and unlatch the I/O board's upper claw from the bezel's hole. 4.2) Gently push down the bottom of the bezel and unlatch the I/O board's lower claw from the bezel's hole. 4.3) Open the I/O board outward. At that moment, be careful not to place stress on the cable connections. Remove the fastening band that fixes the relays in place from the socket using tweezers or the like. Pick up the control output relay and gently pull it out from the socket as shown in the figure. Connect a new control relay to the socket. Insert the fastening band into the socket until it clicks into place.

Mount the I/O board back onto the bezel. First, insert the I/O board's lower claw into the bezel's lower hole. Next, force the I/O board's upper claw into the bezel's upper hole. 10. Replace the front panel onto the case. 11. Turn on the power to make sure the initial screen appears. If the display remains inactive or becomes abnormal, try pulling the front panel out and replacing it again.
4. to 6.
2. 3.

I/O board

8-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 8 Maintenance

8.5

Problems and Corrective Measures

If the US1000 seems to operate improperly, take the appropriate corrective actions explained in section 8.5.1, Troubleshooting. If an error code appears, take the appropriate action specified in section 8.5.2, Error Code Description.
TIP

Shipping the product back for repair For repair service requests, contact the dealer where you purchased the controller. As a rule, ship the defective product in the same packing box in which the product came delivered.

8.5.1

Troubleshooting
Is the controller defective? Yes Any error displayed? No No Yes

See the next page

Completely inactive? Yes Check power source terminal connection

Key operation failure? Yes Check key-lock setting

Display failure? Yes Turn power on/off

I/O signal failure? Yes Verify I/O specifications of instrument

Communication failure? Yes Check specification code

Check power supply voltage

Verify specifications of I/O destinations

Communication function included?

Normal?

Yes No Is the key locked? Yes Release settings

Communication function not included Check communicationrelated parameters

Check communication wiring Verify specifications of communicating partner

Problem solved Contact us for repair

NOTE
When replacing an instrument, the customized parameters are all initialized to their factory-set default values. Be sure to write down the customized parameters required before returning it.

IM 5D1A01-01E

8-3

8.5.2

Error Code Description

When turning on the power or during operation, an error code or the flashing decimal point may appear on the display. The following describes what the individual error codes or flashing decimal point mean and the remedies for such occurrences.

s Possible errors on power-up q Possible errors displayed on PV digital display

Error code display E000 E001 E002 Error content RAM failure ROM failure System data abnormal Manipulated variable (MV) Nothing output Nothing output Nothing output Output continues Remedy Contact us Contact us Contact us Contact us Error display clear DISP key

Rightmost decimal point flashes Calibration value abnormal

q Possible errors displayed on SV digital display When a parameter failure is encountered, a corresponding detailed error code in hexadecimal notation appears on the lower two digits of the SV digital display.
The error display depends on the model names and optional specifications.

US1000 software revision Power frequency code 5: 50 Hz 6: 60 Hz Bit No. Corresponding error 4 5 6 7 US mode Range data Setup parameter Operation parameter (+10) (+20) (+40) (+80) Bit No. 0 1 2 3 Corresponding error Calibration data (+1) Always 0 Custom calculation data (+4) Always 0

The sum of the values in the parentheses in the figure shown above is indicated as an error code.

Display example Calibration data and operation parameters are abnormal

Range data and setup parameters are abnormal

8-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Chapter 8 Maintenance

s Possible errors during operation q Possible errors displayed on PV digital display If ADERR (analog/digital converter circuit abnormal) appears, the cascade is set to open.
Error code display RJC and PV values appear alternately OVER or -OVER ADERR ATERR Rightmost decimal point flashes, all the others are switched off Leftmost decimal point flashes All indicators have disappeared Error content Reference junction compensation failure PV overflow or PV underflow Manipulated variable (MV) Continues Continues Remedy Contact us Check control target device /circuit Error display clear DISP key

Analog/digital conversion Preset MV for AUTO mode, Check wiring continues for MAN mode circuit failure Auto-tuning error Continues with same PID value Check control target as before starting auto-tuning device Contact us if this problem repeats itself after turning the controller off and on. Check communication wiring Check power supply

CPU failure Communication circuit failure Dead wire condition

G Non-hazardous

App. 1-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 1 Hardware Specifications

s Environmental Conditions Normal operating conditions Location: Indoor Warm-up time: 30 minutes or more Ambient temperature: 0 to 50C (40C or less for close side-by-side mounting) Temperature gradient: 10C/h or less Ambient humidity: 5 to 90% RH (no condensation) Magnetic field: 400 AT/m or less Continuous vibration: 5 to 14 Hz: Peak-to-peak amplitude of 1.25 mm or less 14 to 150 Hz: 4.9 m/s2 (0.5G) or less Short-period vibration: 14.7 m/s2 (1.5G) for no more than 15 s Shock: 147 m/s2 (15G) for no more than 11 ms Installation height: Up to an altitude of 2,000 m (as per the heat radiation condition for equipment) Effects of operating conditions Ambient temperature: Voltage and thermocouple input: 1 V/C or 0.01% of F.S./C or less RTD input: 0.05C/C or less Analog input 3: 0.02% of F.S./C or less Analog output: 0.05% of F.S./C or less Power supply (within rated voltage) Analog input: 1 V/10 V or 0.01% of F.S./10 V or less Analog output: 0.05% of F.S./10 V or less Transit and storage Temperature: -25 to 70C Temperature gradient: 20C/h or less Humidity: 5 to 95% RH (no condensation) Shock: The controller does not experience shock effects if dropped less than 1 m.

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 1-5

Blank Page

Appendix 2 Engineering Units Available for the US1000

Appendix 2

Engineering Units Available for the US1000

For the US1000, settings can be made in engineering units such as C. The US1000 contains two categories of engineering units: EU and EUS. s EU EU is the engineering unit for the instrument range. Use EU to set a target setpoint, or the upper and lower alarm limits. The notation, EU (-100.0 to 100.0%), is used to indicate the range of settings that can be set for each of the parameters listed in appendices 2 and 3. That is, parameters can be set using engineering units within the -100.0 to 100.0% range of that instrument. Example: For an instrument range of -270.0C to 1370.0C, EU (0.0%) is -270.0C. EU (100.0%) is 1370.0C. EU (-100.0%) is -1910.0C. Thus, EU (-100.0 to 100.0%) indicates a temperature range of -1910.0C to 1370.0C.
EU(-100.0%) -1910.0C 1640.0 EU(0.0%) -270.0C 1640.0 EU(100.0%) 1370.0C

s EUS EUS is the engineering unit indicating the span of the instrument range. Use EUS to set a bias or deviation alarm setpoint. The notation, EUS (-100.0 to 100.0%), is used for the range of settings that can be set for each of the parameters listed in appendices 2 and 3. That is, parameters can be set using engineering units within the -100.0 to 100.0% range of the instrument span. Example: For an instrument range of -270.0C to 1370.0C, The instrument span is 1640.0C. EUS (0.0%) is 0.0C. EUS (100.0%) is 1640.0C. EUS (-100.0%) is -1640.0C. Thus, EUS (-100.0 to 100.0%) indicates a temperature span of -1640.0C to 1640.0C.
EUS(-100.0%) -1640.0C 1640.0 EUS(0.0%) 0.0C 1640.0 EUS(100.0%) 1640.0C

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 2-1

Blank Page

Appendix 3 Operation Parameter Table

Appendix 3

Operation Parameter Table

The following tables list all the US1000 parameters. Some parameters are hidden (i.e., unavailable) depending on the model names or controller modes (US modes). s Table notations Main: Contains the code indications corresponding to the parameters in the main menu. Sub: Contains the code indications corresponding to the parameters in the submenu. Parameter: Contains the parameter code indications. Setting range: Range of parameter settings or options Default: Value set when shipped Setpoint: Column for customer to note customized setpoint EU*: Engineering unit corresponding to instrument range EUS*: Engineering unit corresponding to instrument span *Refer to Appendix 2 for details of EU and EUS. s Mode Menu
Main MODE Sub Parameter O/C SVNO Description Setting Range Default CLOSE 1 Setpoint

OPEN/CLOSE switchover CLOSE/OPEN SV number selection 1 to 8

s Loop-1 Operation Menu: Computation Parameter Submenu

Main Sub Parameter Description Setting Range OFF, 1 to 8: Individual execution among PID groups, 9: Collective execution for 1 to 8 PID groups. When PPID parameter is set at 0: OFF or 1. OFF, ON EUS (-100.0 to 100.0%) OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF, EUS (0.1 to 100.0%) OFF, EUS (0.1 to 100.0%) 0.001 to 9.999 EUS (-100.0 to 100.0%) OFF, 1 to 120 s -9.999 to 9.999 -100.0 to 100.0% -999.9 to 999.9% OFF, 1 to 120 s Default Setpoint

Auto-tuning selection

OFF

SC BS FL UPR 0.LP1 PAR DNR CRT CBS CFL FGN FBI FBO FFL

SUPER function selection PV bias PV filter Setpoint ramp-up Setpoint ramp-down Cascade ratio Cascade bias Cascade input filter Feedforward gain Feedforward input bias Feedforward output bias Feedforward input filter

OFF EUS (0%) OFF OFF OFF 1.000 EUS (0%) OFF 1.000 0.0% 0.0% OFF

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 3-1

s Loop-1 Operation Menu: 1.PID to 8.PID Submenus When using more than one PID parameter, duplicate the following list by the required number and record the setpoint values.
Main Sub Parameter n.SV n.A1 n.A2 n.A3 n.A4 n.P n.I n.D Description Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Proportional band Integral time Derivative time Upper limit of output Setting Range EU (0.0 to 100.0%) PV alarm: EU (-100.0 to 100.0%) Deviation alarm/PV-velocity alarm: EUS(-100.0 to 100.0%) SV alarm: EU (0.0 to 100.0%) MV alarm: -5.0 to 105.0% EU (0%) PV high limit: EU (100.0%) Deviation alarm: EUS (0.0%) MV high limit: 100.0% MV low limit: 0.0% PV velocity: EUS (100.0%) Other alarms: EU (0.0%) Default Setpoint

0.1 to 999.9%, 0.0 to 999.9% for 999.9% heating/cooling computation OFF, 1 to 6000 s OFF, 1 to 6000 s n.ML +0.1% to 105.0%; 0.0 to 105.0% for heating-side output limit in heating/cooling computation -5.0 % to n.MH - 0.1%; 0.0 to 105.0% for cooling-side output limit in heating/cooling computation -5.0 to 105.0% ON/OFF computation: EUS (0.0 to 100.0%), Position proportional PID or heating/cooling computation: 0.0 to 100.0% 0: Reverse action; 1: Direct action 0.0 to 999.9% OFF, 1 to 6000 s OFF, 1 to 6000 s 0.0 to 100.0% 1000 s OFF

n.MH

100.0%

n.ML n.PID n=1-8

Lower limit of output Manual reset

0.0%; heating/cooling computation: 100.0% 50.0% ON/OFF computation: EUS (0.5%), Position proportional PID or heating/cooling computation: 0.5% 0 999.9% 1000 s OFF 0.5%

n.MR

n.H 0.LP1 n.DR n.Pc n.Ic n.Dc n.Hc

Hysteresis Direct/reverse action switchover Cooling-side proportional band Cooling-side integral time Cooling-side derivative time Cooling-side relay hysteresis

n.DB

m.PID m=1-6 7.PID 8.PID n.PID n=1-8

m.RP RHY RDV n.PM n.PMc

Heating/cooling computation: -100.0 to 50.0% 3.0% Position proportional PID computation: 1.0 to 10.0% EU (0.0 to 100.0%) provided that Zone PID reference 1.RP2.RP3.RP EU (100.0%) point 4.RP5.RP6.RP Deadband Zone PID hysteresis EUS (0.0 to 10.0%) Zone PID reference OFF, EUS (0.0 to 100.0%) deviation Preset MV -5.0 to 105.0% EUS (0.5%) OFF -5.0% 0.0%

Cooling-side preset -5.0 to 105.0% MV

App. 3-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 3 Operation Parameter Table

s Loop-2 Operation Menu: Computation Parameter Submenu

Auto-tuning selection

OFF

SC BS 0.LP2 PAR FL UPR DNR CRT CBS CFL

SUPER function selection PV bias PV filter Setpoint ramp-up Setpoint ramp-down Cascade ratio Cascade bias Cascade input filter

OFF EUS (0%) OFF OFF OFF 1.000 EUS (0%) OFF

To be continued

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 3-3

s Loop-2 Operation Menu: 1.PID to 8.PID Submenus

Main Sub Parameter n.SV n.A1 n.A2 n.A3 n.A4 n.P n.I n.D Description Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Proportional band Integral time Derivative time Upper limit of output Setting Range EU (0.0 to 100.0%) PV alarm: EU (-100.0 to 100.0%) Deviation alarm/PV-velocity alarm: EUS(-100.0 to 100.0%) SV alarm: EU (0.0 to 100.0%) MV alarm: -5.0 to 105.0% EU (0%) PV high limit: EU (100.0%) Deviation alarm: EUS (0.0%) MV high limit: 100.0% MV low limit: 0.0% PV velocity: EUS (100.0%) Other alarms: EU (0.0%) Default Setpoint

n.MH

100.0%

n.ML n.PID n=1-8

Lower limit of output Manual reset

0.0%; heating/cooling computation: 100.0% 50.0% ON/OFF computation: EUS (0.5%), Position proportional PID or heating/cooling computation: 0.5% 0 999.9% 1000 s OFF 0.5%

n.MR

n.H 0.LP2 n.DR n.Pc n.Ic n.Dc n.Hc

Hysteresis Direct/reverse action switchover Cooling-side proportional band Cooling-side integral time Cooling-side derivative time Cooling-side relay hysteresis

n.DB

Deadband

3.0%

m.PID m=1-6 7.PID 8.PID n.PID n=1-8

m.RP RHY RDV n.PM n.PMc

EU (0.0 to 100.0%) provided that Zone PID reference 1.RP2.RP3.RP EU (100.0%) point 4.RP5.RP6.RP Zone PID hysteresis EUS (0.0 to 10.0%) Zone PID reference OFF, EUS (0.0 to 100.0%) deviation Preset MV -5.0 to 105.0% EUS (0.5%) OFF -5.0% 0.0%

Cooling-side preset -5.0 to 105.0% MV

App. 3-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 3 Operation Parameter Table

s USER Parameter Menu

Main Sub Parameter UI U2 U3 USR U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 Description USER parameter 1 USER parameter 2 USER parameter 3 USER parameter 4 USER parameter 5 USER parameter 6 USER parameter 7 USER parameter 8 Setting Range -19999 to 31500 -19999 to 31500 -19999 to 31500 -19999 to 31500 -19999 to 31500 -19999 to 31500 -19999 to 31500 -19999 to 31500 Default Refer to the following. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setpoint

q US mode = Loop control with PV switching (USM = 6), and US mode = Loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs (USM = 14) U1: PV upper limit for PV switching (Default = 0) U2: PV lower limit for PV switching (Default = 0) U3: Switching condition (Default = 0) U3 = 0: Switching within the PV range specified by U1 and U2 U3 = 1: Switching at the PV upper limit specified by U1 U3 = 2: Switching by contact input q US mode = Loop control with PV auto-selector (USM = 7) U1: Input selection (Default = 2) U1 = 0: Accepts the maximum value between inputs 1 and 2 U1 = 1: Accepts the minimum value between inputs 1 and 2 U1 = 2: Accepts the average value of inputs 1 and 2 U1 = 3: Accepts the difference between inputs 1 and 2 (input 2 - input 1) q US mode = Loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs (USM = 15) U1: Input selection (Default = 2) U1 = 0: Accepts the maximum value between input 1, input 2 (and input 3) U1 = 1: Accepts the minimum value between input 1, input 2 (and input 3) U1 = 2: Accepts the average value of input 1, input 2 (and input 3) U1 = 3: Accepts the difference between inputs 1 and (input 2 - input 1) U2: Number of inputs (Default = 0) U2 = 0: Uses two points (inputs 1 and 2) U2 = 1: Uses three points (inputs 1, 2 and 3)

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 3-5

s Ten-segment Linearizer-1 Menu To change the setting range and unit for ten-segment linearizer 1, edit the PY1X and PY1Y parameters from the Ten-segment Linearizer Unit submenu (C.PYS). If they are not edited, the following default values are assumed:
Main Sub Parameter 1. X1 1. Y1 1. X2 1. Y2 1. X3 1. Y3 1. X4 1. Y4 1. X5 1. Y5 1. X6 PYS1 1. Y6 1. X7 1. Y7 1. X8 1. Y8 1. X9 1. Y9 1. X10 1. Y10 1. X11 1. Y11 1. PMD Description Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 1 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 1 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 2 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 2 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 3 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 3 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 4 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 4 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 5 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 5 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 6 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 6 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 7 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 7 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 8 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 8 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 9 Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 9 Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 10 Setting Range EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) Default EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) 0 Setpoint

Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 10 EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) Ten-segment linearizer-1 input 11 EU (-66.7 to 105.0%)

Ten-segment linearizer-1 output 11 EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) Ten-segment linearizer-1 mode 0: Biasing; 1: Approximation

App. 3-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 3 Operation Parameter Table

s Ten-segment Linearizer-2 Menu To change the setting range and unit for the ten-segment linearizer 2, edit the PY2X and PY2Y parameters from the Ten-segment Linearizer Unit submenu (C.PYS). If they are not edited, the following default values are assumed:
Main Sub Parameter 2. X1 2. Y1 2. X2 2. Y2 2. X3 2. Y3 2. X4 2. Y4 2. X5 2. Y5 2. X6 PYS2 2. Y6 2. X7 2. Y7 2. X8 2. Y8 2. X9 2. Y9 2. X10 2. Y10 2. X11 2. Y11 2. PMD Description Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 1 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 1 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 2 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 2 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 3 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 3 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 4 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 4 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 5 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 5 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 6 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 6 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 7 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 7 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 8 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 8 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 9 Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 9 Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 10 Setting Range EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) EU (-66.7 to 105.0%) Default EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) EU (0.0%) EUS (0.0%) 0 Setpoint

Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 10 EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) Ten-segment linearizer-2 input 11 EU (-66.7 to 105.0%)

Ten-segment linearizer-2 output 11 EUS (-66.7 to 105.0%) Ten-segment linearizer-2 mode 0: Biasing; 1: Approximation

s Setup Parameter Menu

Main STUP Sub Parameter PS. IN Description Password input Setting Range 0 to 30000 Default 0 Setpoint

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 3-7

Blank Page

Appendix 4 Setup Parameter Table

Appendix 4

Setup Parameter Table

Some parameters are hidden (i.e., unavailable) depending on the model names or controller modes (US modes). s Table notations Main: Contains the code indications corresponding to the parameters in the main menu. Sub: Contains the code indications corresponding to the parameters in the submenu. Parameter: Contains the parameter code indications. Setting range: Range of parameter settings or options Default: Value set when shipped Setpoint: Column for customer to note customized setpoint EU *: Engineering unit corresponding to instrument range EUS *: Engineering unit corresponding to instrument span *: Refer to Appendix 2 for details of EU and EUS. s Single-loop Setup Menu: Target Setpoint Submenu
Main Sub Parameter CMS S.LP1 SV PVT TMU DVB Description Cascade input selection PV tracking selection Time unit for ramp-rate setting Deviation display range Setting Range AIN: Analog input CPT: Communication OFF, ON 0: 1 h; 1: 1 min EUS (0.0 to 100.0%) Default AIN OFF 0 EUS (1.65%) Setpoint

s Single-loop Setup menu: Alarm Setting Submenu

Main Sub Parameter AL1 AL2 AL3 AL4 HY1 HY2 HY3 S.LP1 ALM HY4 PVR.T Description Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type Alarm 4 type Alarm 1 hysteresis Alarm 2 hysteresis Alarm 3 hysteresis Alarm 4 hysteresis PV velocity alarm duration time 1 to 9999 s 0: Always enabled 1: Disabled in STOP mode 2: Disabled in STOP or MAN mode 3: 8 alarms & always enabled 4: 8 alarms & disabled in STOP mode 5: 8 alarms & disabled in STOP or MAN mode 1 sec. Setting Range OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) EUS (0.0 to 100.0%), MV alarm: 0.0 to 100.0% Default 1 2 1 2 EUS (0.5%), MV alarm: 0.5% Setpoint

AMD

Alarm mode

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 4-1

s Loop-1 Setup Menu: Control Function Submenu

Main Sub Parameter MVR S.LP1 CTL MOD AR FFS Description Output velocity limiter PID control mode Anti-reset windup Feedforward input selection Setting Range OFF, 0.1 to 100.0%/s 0: Batch control; 1: Fixed point control AUTO; 50.0 to 200.0% OFF = Disabled; AIN: Analog input Default OFF 1 AUTO OFF Setpoint

s Loop-2 Setup Menu: Target Setpoint Submenu

Main Sub Parameter CMS S.LP2 SV PVT TMU DVB Description Cascade input selection PV tracking selection Setting Range AIN: Analog input; CPT: Communication OFF, ON Default AIN OFF 0 EUS (1.65%) Setpoint

Time unit for ramp-rate setting 0: 1 h; 1: 1 min Deviation display range EUS (0.0 to 100.0%)

s Loop-2 Setup Menu: Alarm Setting Submenu

Main Sub Parameter AL1 AL2 AL3 AL4 HY1 S.LP2 ALM HY2 HY3 HY4 PVR.T Description Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type Alarm 4 type Alarm 1 hysteresis Alarm 2 hysteresis Alarm 3 hysteresis Alarm 4 hysteresis PV velocity alarm duration time Alarm mode 1 to 9999 s 0: Always enabled 1: Disabled in STOP mode 2: Disabled in STOP or MAN mode 1s Setting Range OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) OFF, 1 to 29 (see section 4.7) EUS (0.0 to 100.0%), MV alarm: 0.0 to 100.0% Default 1 2 1 2 EUS (0.5%), MV alarm: 0.5% Setpoint

AMD

s Loop-2 Setup Menu: Control Function Submenu

Main Sub Parameter MVR S.LP2 CTL MOD AR Description Setting Range Default OFF 1 AUTO Setpoint

Output rate-of-change limiter OFF, 0.1 to 100.0%/s PID control mode Anti-reset windup 0: Batch control; 1: Fixed-point control AUTO; 50.0 to 200.0%

App. 4-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 4 Setup Parameter Table

s Common Setup Menu: Analog Input Computation Submenu

Main Sub Parameter A.BS1 A.FL1 A.SR1 A.LC1 A.BO1 A.RI1 A.BS2 A.FL2 A.SR2 CMPL AIN A.LC2 A.BO2 A.RJ2 A.BS3 A.FL3 A.SR3 A.LC3 A.BO3 Description Analog input-1 bias Analog input-1 filter Analog input-1 square-root computation Setting Range EUS (-100.0 to 100.0%) OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF, ON Default EUS (0%) OFF OFF 1.0% OFF ON EUS (0%) OFF OFF 1.0% OFF ON EUS (0%) OFF OFF 1.0% OFF Setpoint

Analog input-1 square-root low signal cut off 0.0 to 5.0% Analog input-1 burnout action OFF: Disabled UPS: Upscale DNS: Downscale

Analog input-1 reference junction compensation OFF, ON Analog input-2 bias Analog input-2 filter Analog input-2 square-root computation EUS (-100.0 to 100.0%) OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF, ON

Analog input-2 square-root low signal cut off 0.0 to 5.0% Analog input-2 burnout action OFF: Disabled UPS: Upscale DNS: Downscale

Analog input-2 reference junction compensation OFF, ON Analog input-3 bias Analog input-3 filter Analog input-3 square-root computation EUS (-100.0 to 100.0%) OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF, ON

Analog input-3 square-root low signal cut off 0.0 to 5.0% Analog input-3 burnout action OFF: Disabled UPS: Upscale DNS: Downscale

s Common Setup Menu: Common Control Function Submenu

Main Sub Parameter PPID Description Preset PID function selection Setting Range 0: Disabled Preset PID 1: SV number selection 2: Zone PID HOT: Continues the operation prior to power failure COLD: Starts in MAN mode 0 to 60 s 1 to 1000 s 1 to 1000 s Default 0 Setpoint

R.MD CMLP C.CTL R.TM CT1 CT2 CTcl CTc2

Restart mode Restart timer Cycle time of MV1 Cycle time of MV2

COLD 0s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s

Cycle time of cooling side MV1 1 to 1000 s Cycle time of cooling side MV2 1 to 1000 s

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 4-3

s Common Setup Menu: Retransmission Output Submenu

Main Sub Parameter RET1 Description Retransmission output-1 type Maximum value of retransmission output-1 scale Minimum value of retransmission output-1 scale Retransmission output-2 type Maximum value of retransmission output-2 scale Minimum value of retransmission output-2 scale Retransmission output-3 type Maximum value of retransmission output-3 scale Minimum value of retransmission output-3 scale Setting Range OFF: Disabled; 1: PV1; 2: SV1; 3: MV1; 4: PV2; 5: SV2; 6: MV2 RET1 = 1/2/4/5: RTL1 + 1 digit to EU (100.0%) *1 RET1 = 3/6: RTL1 + 1 digit to 100.0% *1 RET1 = 1/2/4/5: EU (0.0%) to RTH1 - 1 digit *1 RET1 = 3/6: 0.0% to RTH1 - 1 digit *1 OFF: Disabled; 1: PV1; 2: SV1; 3: MV1; 4: PV2; 5: SV2; 6: MV2 RET2 = 1/2/4/5: RTL2 + 1 digit to EU (100.0%) *1 RET2 = 3/6: RTL2 + 1 digit to 100.0% *1 RET2 = 1/2/4/5: EU (0.0%) to RTH2 - 1 digit *1 RET2 = 3/6: 0.0% to RTH2 - 1 digit *1 OFF: Disabled; 1: PV1, 2: SV1, 3: MV1, 4: PV2, 5: SV2, 6: MV2 RET3 = 1/2/4/5: RTL3 + 1 digit to EU (100.0%) *1 RET3 = 3/6: RTL3 + 1 digit to 100.0% *1 RET3 = 1/2/4/5: EU (0.0%) to RTH3 - 1 digit *1 RET3 = 3/6: 0.0% to RTH3 - 1 digit *1 Default 3 Setpoint

RTH1

100.0

RTL1

0.0

RET2 CMLP RET

RTH2

P.RH1

RTL2

P.RL1

RET3

RTH3

P.RH1

RTL3

P.RL1

*1: A +1 digit denotes a value with one digit added to the rightmost digit of an engineering unit. A -l digit denotes a value with one digit subtracted from the rightmost digit of an engineering unit. For example, if RTL1 is 15.0C, then RTL1 + 1 digit equals 15.1C. s Common Setup Menu: Key Lock Submenu
Main Sub Parameter SVC / CMLP KLCK </> C A M Description SV setting key lock on operation displays Data setting key lock MV operation key lock C mode key lock A mode key lock M mode key lock Setting Range OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON Default OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Setpoint

s Common Setup Menu: Menu Lock Submenu

Main Sub Parameter MODE 0.LPI 0.LP2 CMLP MLCK PID USR PYS1 PYS2 PWD Description Mode menu lock 0.LPI menu lock 0.LP2 menu lock PID menu lock USR menu lock PYS1 menu lock PYS2 menu lock Password setting OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON 0: No password, 1 to 30000 Setting Range Default OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 0 Setpoint

App. 4-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 4 Setup Parameter Table

s Common Setup Menu: RS-485 Submenu

Main Sub Parameter Description Setting Range 0: Modbus (ASCII), 1: Modbus (RTU), 2: PC-link communication, 3: PC-link communication with sum check 600, 1200, 2400,4800,9600, 19200, 38400 bps N: None, E: Even, O: Odd 1, 2 7, 8 1 to 99 0 to 10 (x 10 ms) Default Setpoint

PSL

Protocol selection

BPS CMLP R485 PARI STP DLN ADR RSP.T

Baud rate Parity Stop bit Data length Controller address Minimum response time

9600 E 1 8 1 0

s Detailed Function Setting Menu: SELECT Display Setting Submenu

Main Sub Parameter C.S1 C.S2 CONF C. SEL C.S3 C.S4 C.S5 Description Registration for the SELECT display 1 Registration for the SELECT display 2 Registration for the SELECT display 3 Registration for the SELECT display 4 Registration for the SELECT display 5 OFF, 201 to 773 (see section 5.3) OFF Setting Range Default Setpoint

s Detailed Function Setting Menu: USER Display Submenu

Main Sub Parameter U.1AL U.2AL U.SVN U.1PI U.2PI CONF U. OPE U.AI1 U.AI2 U.AI3 U.PV1 U.PV2 U.SMP Description USER display of loop-1 alarm USER display of loop-2 alarm USER display of SV number USER display of loop-1 PID group number USER display of loop-2 PID group number USER display of AIN1 measured value USER display of AIN2 measured value USER display of AIN3 measured value USER display of PV1 USER display of PV2 USER display of sampling error counter Setting Range OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON Default OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Setpoint

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 4-5

s Detailed Function Setting Menu: Contact Output Submenu

Main Sub Parameter DO1 DO2 DO3 COMF DO DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 Description Relay output flag registration for DO1 Relay output flag registration for DO2 Relay output flag registration for DO3 Transistor output flag registration for DO4 Transistor output flag registration for DO5 Transistor output flag registration for DO6 Transistor output flag registration for DO7 Setting Range Set the functions (D register or I relay number). 0: Not registered 1 to 1700: D register 5001 to 7048: I relay Example: Loop-1 alarm output 1 = 5689 Loop-1 alarm output 2 = 5690 Loop-1 alarm output 3 = 5691 Loop-1 alarm output 4 = 5693 Loop-2 alarm output 1 = 5697 Loop-2 alarm output 2 = 5698 Loop-2 alarm output 3 = 5699 Loop-2 alarm output 4 = 5701 Depends on USM parameter Default Setpoint

s Detailed Function Setting Menu: Contact Input Submenu

Main Sub Parameter CAS1 AUT1 MAN1 CAS2 AUT2 MAN2 O/C R/S CONF DI TRF1 TRF2 SV.B0 SV.B1 SV.B2 SV.B3 DP1 DP2 MG1 MG2 MG3 MG4 Description Loop-1 mode switchover to CAS when the DI changes to on Loop-1 mode switchover to AUTO when the DI changes to on Loop-1 mode switchover to MAN when the DI changes to on Loop-2 mode switchover to CAS when the DI changes to on Loop-2 mode switchover to AUTO when the DI changes to on Loop-2 mode switchover to MAN when the DI changes to on OPEN(on)/CLOSE(off) switchover RUN(off) /STOP(on) switchover Loop-1 tracking flag Loop-2 tracking flag Bit-0 of SV number setting Bit-1 of SV number setting Bit-2 of SV number setting Bit-3 of SV number setting Operation display for interruption 1 Operation display for interruption 2 Interruptive message display 1 Interruptive message display 2 Interruptive message display 3 Interruptive message display 4 Setting Range Default Setpoint

Set the functions (D register or I relay number). 0: Not registered 1 to 1700: D register 5001 to 7048: I relay DI1: 5161; DI2: 5162; DI3: 5163; DI4: 5164; DI5: 5165; DI6: 5166; DI7: 5167

Depends on USM parameter

App. 4-6

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 4 Setup Parameter Table

s Detailed Function Setting Menu: Ten-Segment Linearizer Unit Submenu

Main Sub Parameter PY1X PY1Y CONF C. PYS PY2X PY2Y Description Ten-segment linearizer-1 input unit Ten-segment linearizer-1 output unit Ten-segment linearizer-2 input unit Ten-segment linearizer-2 output unit Setting Range Default 12 0: %, 1: ABS0, 2:ABS1, 3: ABS2, 4: ABS3, 5: ABS4, 6: EU (AIN1), 7: EUS (AIN1), 8: EU (AIN2), 9: EUS (AIN2), 10: EU (AIN3), 11: EUS (AIN3), 12: EU (PV1), 13: EUS (PV1), 14: EU (PV2), 15: EUS (PV2) 13 14 15 Setpoint

s Controller Function Setting Menu: Controller Mode Submenu

Main USMD Sub MD Parameter USM SMP Description Controller mode (US mode) Control period Setting Range See section 4.3 50, 100, 200, 500 ms Default 1 200 Setpoint

To be continued

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 4-7

s Controller Function Setting Menu: Analog Input Submenu

Main Sub Parameter TYP1 UNI1 RH1 RL1 SDP1 SH1 SL1 TYP2 UNI2 RH2 RL2 SDP2 SH2 SL2 TYP3 RH3 RL3 SDP3 SH3 SL3 P.DP1 P.RH1 Description Setting Range C: Celsius; F: Fahrenheit Within instrument input range Within instrument input range 0 to 4 *1 -19999 to 30000, SL1<SH1 -19999 to 30000, SL1<SH1 C: Celsius; F: Fahrenheit Within instrument input range Within instrument input range 0 to 4 *1 -19999 to 30000, SL2<SH2 -19999 to 30000, SL2<SH2 Default 41 C Maximum level of instrument range Minimum level of instrument range 1 100.0 0.0 41 C Maximum level of instrument range Minimum level of instrument range 1 100.0 0.0 41 5.000 1.000 1 100.0 0.0 1 Thermocouple, RTD: RH1 value; voltage input: 100.0 Thermocouple, RTD: RL1 value; voltage input: 0.0 1 Thermocouple, RTD: RH2 value; voltage input: 100.0 Thermocouple, RTD: RL2 value; voltage input: 0.0 Setpoint

Analog input-1 type for AIN1 terminal See section 4.4 Analog input-1 unit Maximum value of analog input-1 range Minimum value of analog input-1 range Analog input-1 decimal point position Maximum value of analog input-1 scale Minimum value of analog input-1 scale

Analog input-2 type for AIN2 terminal See section 4.4 Analog input-2 unit Maximum value of analog input-2 range Minimum value of analog input-2 range Analog input-2 decimal point position Maximum value of analog input-2 scale Minimum value of analog input-2 scale

USMD

Analog input-3 type for AIN3 terminal See section 4.4 Maximum value of analog input-3 range Minimum value of analog input-3 range Analog input-3 decimal point position Maximum value of analog input-3 scale Minimum value of analog input-3 scale PV1 decimal point position Maximum value of PV1 range Within instrument input range Within instrument input range 0 to 4 *1 -19999 to 30000, SL3<SH3 -19999 to 30000, SL3<SH3 0 to 4 *1 -19999 to 30000, 0<P.RH1P.RL130000 -19999 to 30000, 0<P.RH1P.RL130000 0 to 4 *1 -19999 to 30000, 0<P.RH2P.RL230000 -19999 to 30000, 0<P.RH2P.RL230000

P.RL1 P.DP2 P.RH2

Minimum value of PV1 range PV2 decimal point position Maximum value of PV2 range

P.RL2

Minimum value of PV2 range

*1: These setting ranges are displayed by underbars: _ and a period: .. For example, the setting range is displayed like _ _ _ _._ when the decimal point position is 1.

App. 4-8

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 4 Setup Parameter Table

s Controller Function Setting Menu: MV Output Submenu

Main Sub Parameter MVS1 Description MV1 selection Setting Range 0: Control relay output, 1: Voltage pulse output, 2: Current output, 3: Control relay output for ON/OFF computation, 4 to 12: Output for heating/cooling computation (see below) 0: 4 to 20 mA; 1: 0 to 20 mA; 2: 20 to 4 mA; 3: 20 to 0 mA 0: 1 to 5 V; 1: 0 to 5V; 2: 5 to 1 V; 3: 5 to 0 V OFF, ON Default 2 Setpoint

MVS2

MV2 selection Analog output-1 type for OUT1A terminal Analog output-2 type for OUT2A terminal Analog output-3 type for OUT3A terminal Reverse display and operation of MV

USMD

OUT

AO1 AO2 AO3 RVOP

0 0 0 OFF

4: Heating control relay output Cooling control relay output 5: Heating pulse output Cooling control relay output 6: Heating current output Cooling control relay output 7: Heating control relay output Cooling pulse output 8: Heating pulse output Cooling pulse output 9: Heating current output Cooling pulse output 10: Heating control relay output Cooling current output 11: Heating pulse output Cooling current output 12: Heating current output Cooling current output * For dual-loop control and temperature and humidity control, see section 3.2.2. s Controller Function Setting Menu: Valve Calibration Submenu
Main Sub Parameter V.RS Description Reset valve position Setting Range 0, 1; Setting 1 clears valve position data. The position data of a fully-closed valve is saved when the SET/ENT key is pressed after a valve is fully closed using the key. The position data of a fully-opened valve is saved when the SET/ENT key is pressed after a valve is fully opened using the key. OFF, ON Default 0 Setpoint

V.L USMD VALV V.H

Valve in fully-closed position

Indefinite

Valve in fully-opened position

Indefinite

V.AT

Automatic calibration for valve positioning

OFF

s Controller Function Menu: Parameter Initialization Submenu

Main USMD Sub INIT Parameter INIT Description Parameter initialization OFF, ON Setting Range Default OFF Setpoint

s Controller Function Menu: Test Mode Submenu

Main Sub Parameter TST Description Test mode Setting Range Do not use this mode. Default Setpoint

USMD TEST

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 4-9

Blank Page

Appendix 5 Parameter Map

Appendix 5

Parameter Map

The parameter maps help you retrieve the desired parameters by showing the individual configuration diagrams for the operation and setup parameter groups. Make use of this appendix together with parameter tables given in appendices 3 and 4 when setting parameters. Some parameters are hidden (i.e., unavailable) depending on the model names or controller modes (US modes).

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 5-1

s Operating Parameters
Operation display

DISP
SET/ENT

Operation display 1

Operation display 2

Operation display 3

Operation display n

USER display 1

3 sec.

SET/ENT

DISP
SET/ENT

3 sec.

DISP

SET/ENT

3 sec.

SET/ENT

SELECT display 1

SELECT display 2

MODE Mode menu

Loop-1 operation menu

O.LP1

Loop-2 operation menu

O.LP2

SET/ENT

DISP
Submenu

SET/ENT

DISP

Submenu
Computation parameter

PAR

1. PID

7. PID

8. PID

Computation parameter

PAR

1. PID

DISP

SET/ENT

DISP

SET/ENT

O/C
OPEN/CLOSE switchover SV number selection
SET/ENT

AT
Auto-tuning SUPER function

Target setpoint

1. SV 1. A1

Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint

7. SV

Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Proportional band

8. SV

AT
Auto-tuning

Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint

1. SV

SVNO

SC BS

7. A1

8. A1

SC
SUPER function

1. A1

Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint

1. A2

7. A2

8. A2

BS
PV bias

1. A2

PV bias

FL
PV filter Setpoint ramp-up Setpoint ramp-down

1. A3
Alarm 3 setpoint

7. A3

8. A3

FL
PV filter Setpoint ramp-up Setpoint ramp-down

1. A3
Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint

UPR

1. A4
Alarm 4 setpoint

7. A4
Alarm 4 setpoint Proportional band

8. A4 8. P 8. I

UPR

1. A4 1. P

DNR CRT

1. P
Proportional band

7. P 7. I

DNR CRT

Proportional band

1. I
Integral time Derivative time

Cascade ratio

Integral time Derivative time

CBS
Cascade bias

1. D

7. D

8. D

To the original submenu

Cascade ratio

CBS
Cascade bias Cascade input filter

1. D

CFL
Cascade input filter Feedforward gain

1. MH
Upper limit of output Lower limit of output

7. MH
Upper limit of output Lower limit of output

8. MH
Upper limit of output

CFL

1. MH
Upper limit of output Lower limit of output

FGN FBI

1. ML

7. ML

8. ML
Lower limit of output

1. ML

Feedforward input bias

1. MR
Manual reset

7. MR
Manual reset

8. MR
Manual reset

1. MR
Manual reset

FBO
Feedforward output bias

1. H
Hysteresis

7. H
Hysteresis Direct/reverse action

8. H
Hysteresis Direct/reverse action Cooling-side P

1. H
Hysteresis

FFL
Feedforward input filter

1. DR
Direct/reverse action Cooling-side P Cooling-side I

7. DR 7. Pc

8. DR 8. Pc 8. Ic

1. DR
Direct/reverse action Cooling-side P

1. Pc 1. Ic

1. Pc 1. I c

Cooling-side P Cooling-side I Cooling-side D Cooling-side relay hysteresis

7. Ic

Cooling-side I

Cooling-side I
SET/ENT

SET/ENT

Cooling-side D Cooling-side relay hysteresis

1. Dc 1. Hc

7. Dc

8. Dc
Cooling-side D

1. Dc
Cooling-side D Cooling-side relay hysteresis

7. Hc

8. Hc
Cooling-side relay hysteresis

1. Hc

1. DB
Deadband

7. DB
Deadband

8. DB
Deadband

1. DB
Deadband Zone PID reference point

1. RP
Zone PID reference point

RHY
Zone PID hysteresis

RDV
Zone PID reference deviation

1. RP

1. PM
Preset MV Cooling-side preset MV

7. PM
Preset MV

8. PM
Preset MV

1. PM
Preset MV Cooling-side preset MV

1. PMc

7. PMc
Cooling-side preset MV

8. PMc
Cooling-side preset MV

1. PMc

App. 5-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 5 Parameter Map

USER display 2

USER display n

SELECT display 5

USER parameter menu

USR

Ten-segment linearizer-1 menu

PYS1

Ten-segment linearizer-2 menu

PYS2

Setup parameter menu

STUP

SET/ENT

7. PID

0. PID

SET/ENT

DISP

Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint

7. SV 7. A1

Target setpoint Alarm 1 setpoint Alarm 2 setpoint Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Proportional band

8. SV 8. A1

USER parameter 1 USER parameter 2 USER parameter 3

U1 U2 U3 U4

1.X1
Input 1

2.X1
Input 1

PS.IN
Password input

1.Y1
Output 1

2.Y1
Output 1

7. A2

8. A2

1.X2
Input 2

2.X2
Input 2

7. A3
Alarm 3 setpoint Alarm 4 setpoint Proportional band

8. A3

USER parameter 4 USER parameter 5 USER parameter 6 USER parameter 7 USER parameter 8

1.Y2
Output 2

2.Y2
Output 2

7. A4 7. P 7. I

8. A4 8. P 8. I

U5 U6 U7 U8

1.X3
Input 3

2.X3
Input 3

OK? yes

1.Y3
Output 3

2.Y3
Output 3

1.X4
Input 4

2.X4
Input 4

Integral time Derivative time

7. D

8. D

1.Y4
Output 4

2.Y4
Output 4

7. MH
Upper limit of output Lower limit of output

8. MH
Upper limit of output

1.X5
Input 5

2.X5
Input 5

To the next page for setup parameters

7. ML

8. ML
Lower limit of output
SET/ENT

1.Y5
Output 5

2.Y5
Output 5

7. MR
Manual reset

8. MR
Manual reset

1.X6
Input 6

2.X6
Input 6

7. H
Hysteresis Direct/reverse action Cooling-side P Cooling-side I

8. H
Hysteresis Direct/reverse action Cooling-side P Cooling-side I

1.Y6
Output 6

2.Y6
Output 6

7. DR 7. Pc 7. Ic

8. DR 8. Pc 8. Ic

1.X7
Input 7

2.X7
Input 7

1.Y7
Output 7

2.Y7
Output 7

1.X8
Input 8

2.X8
Input 8

7. Dc
Cooling-side D Cooling-side relay hysteresis

8. Dc
Cooling-side D Cooling-side relay hysteresis

1.Y8
Output 8

2.Y8
Output 8

7. Hc

8. Hc

1.X9
Input 9

2.X9
Input 9

7. DB
Deadband Zone PID hysteresis

8. DB
Deadband

1.Y9
Output 9

2.Y9
Output 9

RHY

RDV
Zone PID reference deviation

1.X10
Input 10

2.X10
Input 10

7. PM
Preset MV Cooling-side preset MV

8. PM
Preset MV

1.Y10
Output 10

2.Y10
Output 10

7. PMc

8. PMc
Cooling-side preset MV

1.X11
Input 11

2.X11
Input 11

1.Y11
Output 11 Ten-segment linearizer-1 mode
SET/ENT SET/ENT

2.Y11
Output 11 Ten-segment linearizer-2 mode

1.PMD

2.PMD

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 5-3

s Setup Parameters
From PS.IN password input on the previous page O.LP1

Loop-1 operation menu

Operation display

SET/ENT SET/ENT

3 sec.

DISP

Loop-1 setup menu

S.LP1

Loop-2 setup menu

S.LP2

Common setup menu

CMLP

SET/ENT

DISP
Submenu ALM CTL

SET/ENT

DISP
Submenu ALM CTL

SET/ENT

DISP
C.CTL RET KLCK
Key lock

Submenu
Target setpoint

Alarm setting

Control function

Target setpoint

Alarm setting

Control function

Analog input computation

AIN

Common control setting

Retransmission output

MLCK
Menu lock

SET/ENT

DISP DISP

SET/ENT

DISP

SET/ENT

Cascade input selection

CMS

AL1
Alarm 1 type

Output velocity limiter

MVR

Cascade input

CMS PVT

AL1
Alarm 1 type

Output velocity limiter

MVR

Analog input-1 bias Analog input-1 filter

A.BS1 A.FL1

Preset PID function

PPID

Ret. output-1 type Max. value of ret. 1 scale

RET1

SV setting key lock Data setting key lock </> MV operation key lock

SVC /

MODE
Mode menu lock

PVT
PV tracking selection Time unit for ramp-rate Deviation display range

AL2
Alarm 2 type

MOD
PID control mode Anti-reset windup

PV tracking selection Time unit for ramp-rate Deviation display range

AL2
Alarm 2 type

MOD
PID control mode Anti-reset windup

R.MD
Restart mode

RTH1 RTL1

O.LP1
O.LP1 menu lock

TMU DVB

AL3
Alarm 3 type

TMU DVB

AL3
Alarm 3 type

A.SR1
Analog input1 square-root

R.TM
Restart timer

O.LP2
O.LP2 menu lock

Min. value of ret. 1 scale

AL4
Alarm 4 type Alarm 1 hysteresis

FFS
Feedforward input selection

AL4
Alarm 4 type Alarm 1 hysteresis

A.LC1
Square-root low signal cut off

CT1
Cycle time of MV1

RET2
Ret. output-2 type Max. value of ret. 2 scale Min. value of ret. 2 scale Ret. output-3 type

C
C mode key lock

PID
PID menu lock

HY1 HY2

A.BO1
To the original submenu
SET/ENT

Alarm 2 hysteresis
SET/ENT

To the original submenu

SET/ENT

Analog input-1 burnout action Analog input-1 reference junction Analog input-2 bias Analog input-2 filter

CT2
Cycle time of MV2

RTH2 RTL2

A
A mode key lock M mode key lock

USR
USR menu lock

A.RJ1

Alarm 2 hysteresis

CTc1
Cycle time of cooling MV1

PYS1
PYS1 menu lock

HY3
Alarm 3 hysteresis

A.BS2 A.FL2

CTc2
Cycle time of cooling MV2

RET3

PYS2
PYS2 menu lock

HY4
Alarm 4 hysteresis

RTH3
Max. value of ret. 3 scale

PWD
Password setting

PVR.T
PV velocity duration time

A.SR2
Analog input2 square-root Square-root low signal cutoff

RTL3
Min. value of ret. 3 scale

AMD
Alarm mode

A.LC2

A.BO2
Analog input-2 burnout action Analog input-2 reference junction

A.RJ2

A.BS3
Analog input-3 bias Analog input-3 filter

A.FL3

A.SR3
Analog input3 square-root

A.LC3
Square-root low signal cutoff

A.BO3
Analog input-3 burnout action

App. 5-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 5 Parameter Map

Detailed function setting menu

CONF

Controller function setting menu

USMD

SET/ENT

DISP
Submenu
USER display setting

SET/ENT

DISP
IN
Analog input

Submenu R485
RS-485 SELECT display setting

C.SEL

U.DPE

Contact output

Contact input

Ten-segment linearizer unit

C.PYS

Controller mode

OUT
MV output

Valve calibration

VALV

Parameter initialization

INIT

TEST
Test mode

SET/ENT

DISP

SET/ENT

DISP

SET/ENT

Protocol selection

PSL

C.S1
Registration for the SELECT 1

U.1AL
Loop-1 alarm Loop-2 alarm

DO1
Registration for DO1 Registration for DO2 Registration for DO3

CAS1
Loop-1 mode switchover to CAS

PY1X
Input unit 1

USM
US mode

TYP1
Input-1 type for AIN1 terminal

MV1 selection

MVS1 MVS2

V.RS
Reset valve position

INIT
Parameter initialization

TST
Test mode

BPS
Baud rate

C.S2
Registration for the SELECT 2

U.2AL U.SVN
SV number

DO2

AUT1
Loop-1 mode switchover to AUTO Loop-1 mode switchover to MAN

PY1Y
Output unit 1

SMP
Control period

UNI1
Input-1 unit

V.L
Fully-closed position

MV2 selection Output-1 type for OUT1A terminal

PARI
Parity

C.S3
Registration for the SELECT 3

DO3 DO4

MAN1 CAS2

PY2X
Input unit 2

RH1
Max. value of input-1 range

A01 A02

V.H
Fully-opened position

STP
Stop bit

C.S4
Registration for the SELECT 4

U.1PI
Loop-1 PID group number

PY2Y
Output unit 2

RL1
Min. value of input-1 range

V.AT
Automatic calibration

Registration for DO4 Registration for DO5

Loop-2 mode switchover to CAS

Output-2 type for OUT2A terminal

no OK?
Do not use this mode.

DLN
Data length

C.S5
To the original submenu
SET/ENT

U.2PI
Loop-2 PID group number AIN1 measured value AIN2 measured value AIN3 measured value

Registration for the SELECT 5

DO5 DO6

AUT2
Loop-2 mode switchover to AUTO

SDP1
To the original submenu
SET/ENT

A03
Output-3 type for OUT3A terminal

Input-1 decimal point position

ADR
Controller address

U.AI1 U.AI2 U.AI3

MAN2
Loop-2 mode switchover to MAN

SH1
Max. value of input-1 scale

RVOP
Reverse display and operation

yes

Registration for DO6

RSP.T
Min. response time

DO7
Registration for DO7

R/S
RUN/STOP switchover

SL1
Min. value of input-1 scale

TRF1
Loop-1 tracking flag

TYP2
Input-2 type for AIN2 terminal

U.PV1
PV1

TRF2
Loop-2 tracking flag

UNI2
Input-2 unit

U.PV2
PV2

SV.B0
Bit-0 of SV number

RH2
Max. value of input-2 range

U.SMP
Sampling error counter

SV.B1
Bit-1 of SV number

RL2
Min. value of input-2 range

SV.B2
Bit-2 of SV number

SDP2
Input-2 decimal point position

SV.B 3
Bit-3 of SV number

SH2
Max. value of input-2 scale

DP1
Interruptive display 1

SL2
Min. value of input-2 scale

DP2
Interruptive display 2

TYP3
Input-3 type for AIN3 terminal

MG1
Interruptive message 1

RH3
Max. value of input-3 range

MG2
Interruptive message 2

RL3
Min. value of input-3 range

MG3
Interruptive message 3

SDP3
Input-3 decimal point position

MG4
Interruptive message 4

SH3
Max. value of input-3 scale

SL3
Min. value of input-3 scale

P.DP1
PV1 decimal point position

P.RH1
Max. value of PV1 range

P.RL1
Mini. value of PV1 range

P.DP2
PV2 decimal point position

P.RH2
Max. value of PV2 range

P.RL2
Min. value of PV2 range

To the test mode

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 5-5

Blank Page

Appendix 6 Conditions of Use in Hazardous Areas

Appendix 6

Conditions of Use in Hazardous Areas

6.1

CSA standard
Before Model US1000 Digital Indicating Controller or any external equipment connected to it can be used in a hazardous area (as CSA standard non-incendive equipment), the field wiring parameters summarized in the following tables must be satisfied by all equipment either supplying energy to or receiving energy from the terminals of Model US1000 Digital Indicating Controller. q Field Wiring Parameters Voc: Maximum open-circuit output voltage Isc: Maximum short-circuit output current Ca: Maximum allowable capacitance La: Maximum allowable inductance Vn: Normal circuit voltage In: Normal circuit current Cn: Maximum allowable capacitance based on the Vn normal circuit voltage Ln: Maximum allowable inductance based on the In normal circuit current Vmax: Maximum input voltage Imax: Maximum input current Ci: Maximum internal capacitance Li: Maximum internal inductance

s Equipment Supplying Energy

Terminal Symbol (Signal Name) OUT1A and OUT2A (manipulated outputs) Current output Voltage pulse output OUT3A (retransmission output) LPS1 and LPS2 (transmitter's power supply)*1 AIN1 and AIN2 (analog inputs) FBIN (valve position feedback input) DI1 to DI7 (contact inputs) RS-485 (RS-485 communication)
*1: With a load resistance of at least 100

Signal Type

Voc Isc Ca La [V] [mA] [ F] [mH] 22.3 22.3 5.25 27 1.23 1.23 5 4.4 21 32.2 10 35 0.13 16 20 86 0.3 0.3 1 0.2 1 1 1 1 10 10 50 2 50 50 50 1

Vn [V] 22.3 22.3 5.25 27 1.23 1.23 5 4.4

In Cn Ln [mA] [ F] [mH] 21 30 2.7 24 0.13 13 20 40 0.3 0.3 1 0.2 1 1 1 1 100 50 100 100 100 100 100 10

Voltage output Voltage output Resistance temperature detector input Slide-resistor input Transistor contact

s Equipment Receiving Energy

Terminal Symbol (Signal Name) AIN1 and AIN2 (analog inputs) Signal Type Thermocouple input (mV DC) Standardized signal ("V DC" input) AIN3 (analog input) DO4 to DO7 (contact outputs) Standardized signal ("V DC" input) Transistor contact Vmax Imax Ci Li [V] [mA] [ F] [mH] 10 20 20 30 6 6 6 200 0 0 0 0.1 0 0 0 0

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 6-1

1 Model US1000 Digital Indicating Controller for use in hazardous locations: Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Provides Non-incendive Field wiring Connections for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Hazardous Locations. Temperature Code: T4 Ambient Temperature: 0 to 50 C 2 Wiring * All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical Codes. 3 Operation * WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD _ DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS. * AVERTISSEMENT _ RISQUE D'EXPLOSION. NE PAS DBRANCHER TANT LE QUE LE CIRCUIT EST SOUS TENSION, MOINS QU'IL NE S'AGISSE D'UN EMPLACEMENT NON DANGEREUX. 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void CSA Non-incendive Certification. 5 The suitability of the final installation is to be determined by the local authorities having jurisdiction.

App. 6-2

IM 5D1A01-01E

Appendix 6 Conditions of Use in Hazardous Areas

6.2

FM standard
Hazardous (Classfied) Locationm Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D or Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Hazardous (Classfied) Locationm Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D or Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Nonhazardous Location

Associated Apparatus

US 1000 Digital Indicating Controller

Control Equipment (Note 1)

(Note 3) (Note 4) (Note 5)

Nonincendive Field Wiring Parameters:

Output signal OUT1A OUT2A OUT3A Loop Power Supply for Transmitter (LPS1) Loop Power Supply for Transmitter (LPS2) Analog Input (AIN1) Analog Input (AIN2) Feedback Resistance Input Contact Input (DI 1-7) RS-485 Signal name Current Output Voltage Pulse Output Current Output Voltage Pulse Output Voltage Output Power Supply Power Supply RTD Input RTD Input Voc Isc Ca La [V] [mA] [ F] [mH] 22.3 22.3 5.25 27 27 1.23 1.23 1.23 5 4.4 32.2 32.2 10 35 35 0.13 0.13 16 20 86 0.3 0.3 1 0.2 0.2 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 50 2 2 50 50 50 50 1

The nonincendive field wiring concept allows interconnection of two FM Approved Nonincendive Apparatuses with nonincendive field wiring parameters not specifically examined in combination as a system when: Voc Vmax, Isc Imax, Ca Ci + C cable, La Li + L cable

IM 5D1A01-01E

App. 6-3

Intput signal Analog Input (AIN1) Analog Input (AIN2) Analog Input (AIN3) Contact Output (DO 1-7) MV, TC input Voltage input MV, TC input Voltage input Voltage intput

Signal name

Vmax Imax Ci Li [V] [mA] [ F] [mH] 20 20 20 30 6 6 6 200 0 0 0 0.1 0 0 0 0

Transistor Output

Notes: 1 Control equipment connected to the US 1000 Digital Indicating Controller must not use or generate more than 250Vrms or VDc. 2 Installation should be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70). 3 The configuration of associated Apparatus must be FMRC Approval under Nonincendive Field Wiring Concept or be a simple apparatus (a device which can neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 25mW, or 20 J, ex. Switches, thermocouples, LED's and RTD's). 4 Associated Apparatus manufacture's installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment. 5 Associated Apparatus connection is representative of each input and output signal connection. Each signal shall be wired in a sepatate shielded cable. 6 No revision to drawing without prior FMRC Approval. 7 The suitability of the final installation is to be determined by the local authorities having jurisdiction.

App. 6-4

IM 5D1A01-01E

Index

Index
/ ............................................................................... </> .................................................................................. 1.A1 ................................................................................ 1.A2 ................................................................................ 1.A3 ................................................................................ 1.A4 ................................................................................ 1.D .................................................................................. 1.DR ............................................................................... 1.I .................................................................................... 1.P ................................................................................... 1.PMD ............................................................................ 1.SV ................................................................................ 1.X1 ................................................................................ 1.Y1 ................................................................................ 10-segment linearizer ..................................................... 4-19 4-19 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-17 4-15 4-15 4-18 4-15 4-18 4-18 4-18 Block diagram .................................................................. 4-4 Bracket ....................................................................... 2-3, 8-1 BS ................................................................................... 4-17 Burnout action ................................................................ 4-18

C
C ..................................................................................... 4-19 C mode key lock ............................................................. 4-19 C.S1 .................................................................................. 5-6 Cables ............................................................................... 3-2 Calibration of valve position .......................................... 4-20 CAS mode .............................................................. 6-2, 6-12 CAS/AUTO/MAN mode selection ................................... 3-6 Cascade type .............................................................. 6-1, 6-6 Cascade Close ................................................................... 6-6 Cascade control ........................................................ 3-6, 4-4 Cascade control with two universal inputs ....................... 4-4 Cascade input ......................................................... 4-6, 4-18 Cascade open .................................................................... 6-7 Cascade open and close .................................................... 6-8 Cascade primary-loop control .......................................... 4-4 Cascade secondary-loop control ....................................... 4-4 CMS ................................................................................ 4-18 COLD ................................................................... 4-19, 6-18 Communication Functions ............................................... 7-2 Computation modules ....................................................... 7-3 Contact input .......................................... 3-6, 6-12, App. 1-3 Contact output .................................................. 3-6, App. 1-3 Continuous PID computation ........................................... 4-9 Control computation ......................................................... 4-9 Control output relay ............................................ 3-3, 3-6, 8-2 Control period ................................................................... 1-6 Control relay .............................................. 3-3, 4-9, App. 1-3 Controller mode ................................................................ 4-4 Controller type .................................................................. 6-1 Cooling .................................................................... 4-9, 6-11 CT1 ................................................................................. 4-19 CT2 ................................................................................. 4-19 Current output ................................................................... 4-9 Custom Computation ........................................................ 7-3 Custom computation control ............................................ 4-4 Cycle time of MV output ................................................ 4-19

A
A ..................................................................................... 4-19 A mode key lock ............................................................. 4-19 A.BO1 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.BO2 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.BO3 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.LC1 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.LC2 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.LC3 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.SR1 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.SR2 ............................................................................. 4-18 A.SR3 ............................................................................. 4-18 ADERR ............................................................................ 8-5 AIN1 .......................................................................... 3-3, 4-6 AIN1 measured value ....................................................... 5-2 AIN2 .......................................................................... 3-3, 4-6 AIN2 measured value ....................................................... 5-2 AIN3 .......................................................................... 3-3, 4-6 AIN3 measured value ....................................................... 5-2 AL1 ................................................................................. 4-13 AL2 ................................................................................. 4-13 AL3 ................................................................................. 4-13 AL4 ................................................................................. 4-13 Alarm functions .............................................................. 4-12 Alarm output ..................................................................... 3-6 Alarm outputs ................................................................. 4-12 Alarm setpoints ............................................................... 4-15 Alarm statuses .................................................................. 5-5 Alarm type ...................................................................... 4-12 Aluminum electric capacitor ............................................ 8-1 Analog input ..................................................................... 4-6 Analog input-1 type for AIN1 terminal ............................ 4-7 Analog input-1 unit .......................................................... 4-7 Approximation ................................................................ 4-18 AT ................................................................................... 6-14 ATERR ................................................................... 6-14, 8-5 AUTO mode ........................................................... 6-2, 6-12 Auto-tuning .................................................................... 6-14 Automatic operation ....................................................... 6-13

D
D Register ......................................................................... 7-4 D-register Numbers .......................................................... 5-7 Data setting key lock ...................................................... 4-19 Derivative time ..................................................... 4-15, 6-16 Direct/reverse action ....................................................... 4-17 DNR ................................................................................ 4-18 Dual-loop type ........................................................... 6-1, 6-9 Dual-loop control ............................................................. 4-4

B
B.OUT .............................................................................. 8-5 Backup function for the supervisory system. ................... 4-4 Biasing ............................................................................ 4-18

IM 5D1A01-01E

Index-1

E
EEPROM .......................................................................... 8-1 Engineering units .............................................. 1-6, App. 2-1 Environmental Conditions ....................................... App. 1-5 ERR .................................................................................. 8-5 Errors ................................................................................ 8-5 EU ............................................................................ App. 2-1 EUS ......................................................................... App. 2-1 External dimensions ......................................................... 2-2

F
Factory-set defaults .......................................................... 1-6 FBI .................................................................................. 4-18 FBO ................................................................................ 4-18 Feedback resistance input ........................................ App. 1-1 Feedforward input .................................................. 4-6, 4-18 FFL ................................................................................. 4-18 FGN ................................................................................ 4-18 FL ................................................................................... 4-17 Front Panel ........................................................................ 1-2

Manual Tuning ................................................................ 6-16 Maximum value of analog input-1 range ......................... 4-7 Measurement range .......................................................... 4-6 Menu lock ....................................................................... 4-20 Minimum value of analog input-1 range .......................... 4-7 MODE ............................................................................ 4-20 Model and Suffix Codes ...................................................... ii Mounting .......................................................................... 2-3 MV lamp ........................................................................... 6-4 MV operation key lock ................................................... 4-19 MV1 selection ................................................................ 4-10 MV2 selection ................................................................ 4-10 MVS1 ............................................................................. 4-10 MVS2 ............................................................................. 4-10

N
Noise-prevention .............................................................. 3-2 NoMAP ............................................................................ 5-6

O
O.LP1 ............................................................................. 4-20 O.LP2 ............................................................................. 4-20 O/C ................................................................................... 6-8 On/off computation .......................................................... 4-9 On/off signal ................................................................... 4-19 OPEN/CLOSE switchover ........................................ 3-6, 6-8 Operation displays ..................................................... 1-4, 5-1 Operation modes ...................................................... 6-2, 6-12 Operation parameters ................................. 4-1, 5-6, App. 3-1 Operations ........................................................................ 6-1 Output type ....................................................................... 4-9 OVER ............................................................................... 8-5 Overshoots ...................................................................... 4-18

H
Heating/cooling computation ................................. 4-9, 6-11 HOT ...................................................................... 4-19, 6-18 Housing ............................................................................ 2-1

I
I Relay .............................................................................. 7-4 INIT ................................................................................ 4-11 Input type ................................................................... 4-6, 4-7 Inputs ................................................................................ 4-6 Integral time .......................................................... 4-15, 6-16 Isolation ................................................................... App. 1-4

P
Panel cutout dimensions ................................................... 2-2 Parameter display ............................................................. 4-2 Parameter initialization ................................................... 4-11 Parameters ........................................................................ 4-1 Passive alarm .................................................................. 4-12 Password setting ............................................................. 4-19 PID .................................................................................. 4-20 PID group ......................................................................... 5-2 PID parameters ................................... 4-15, 4-19, 6-14, 6-16 Position proportional PID ........................................ 4-9, 4-20 Power failure ................................................................... 6-18 Power recovery ............................................................... 4-19 Power supply ............................................ 3-2, 3-4, App. 1-4 Power switch .................................................................... 1-5 PPID ............................................................................... 4-19 Preset PID ....................................................................... 4-19 Proportional band ................................................. 4-15, 6-16 Pulse width of on/off signal ............................................ 4-19 PV bias ........................................................................... 4-17 PV filter .......................................................................... 4-17 PV input ............................................................................ 4-6 PV tracking ..................................................................... 4-18 PV-hold and MAN mode .................................................. 3-6 PV1 ................................................................................... 5-2 PV2 ................................................................................... 5-2 PVT ................................................................................ 4-18 PWD ............................................................................... 4-19 PYS1 ............................................................................... 4-20 PYS2 ............................................................................... 4-20
IM 5D1A01-01E

K
Key lock .......................................................................... 4-20

L
Labels ............................................................................... 1-7 LL1100 PC-based Parameters Setting Tool ...................... 7-3 LL1200 PC-Based Custom Computation Building Tool .. 7-3 Loop control for backup ................................................... 4-4 Loop control with PV auto-selector ................................. 4-4 Loop control with PV auto-selector and two universal inputs ................................................................................ 4-4 Loop control with PV switching ...................................... 4-4 Loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs ................................................................................ 4-4 Loop control with PV-hold function ................................. 4-4 Loop-1 alarm ............................................................. 5-2, 5-5 Loop-2 alarm ............................................................. 5-2, 5-5 Low signal cut-off .......................................................... 4-18 LP2 lamp ................................................................... 6-7, 6-9

M
M .................................................................................... 4-19 M mode key lock ............................................................ 4-19 Main menu ........................................................................ 4-2 MAN mode ............................................................. 6-2, 6-12 Manipulating MV ............................................................. 6-4 Manual operation ............................................................ 6-13

Index-2

Index

R
R.MD .................................................................... 4-19, 6-18 Range ................................................................................ 4-6 Relay ................................................................... 3-3, 4-9, 8-1 Restart mode ................................................................... 6-18 RET1 .............................................................................. 4-19 Retransmission output .................................... 4-19, App. 1-3 RH1 .................................................................................. 4-7 RJC ................................................................................... 8-5 RL1 ................................................................................... 4-7 RS-485 communication .................................................. 4-18 RTD input wiring .............................................................. 3-2 RTH1 .............................................................................. 4-19 RTL1 ............................................................................... 4-19 RUN/STOP switchover ............................................ 3-6, 6-17

U
U. 1AL .............................................................................. 5-2 U. 1PI ................................................................................ 5-2 U. 2AL .............................................................................. 5-2 U. 2PI ................................................................................ 5-2 U. AI1 ............................................................................... 5-2 U. AI2 ............................................................................... 5-2 U. AI3 ............................................................................... 5-2 U. PV1 .............................................................................. 5-2 U. PV2 .............................................................................. 5-2 U. SMP ............................................................................. 5-2 U. SVN ............................................................................. 5-2 UNI1 ................................................................................. 4-7 Universal inputs ................................................................ 4-6 UPR ................................................................................ 4-18 USER displays .................................................................. 5-2 USM ................................................................................. 4-5 US mode ........................................................................... 4-4 USR ................................................................................ 4-20

S
Sampling error counter ..................................................... 5-2 SC ................................................................................... 4-18 SELECT display ........................................................ 5-1, 5-6 Setup parameters .............................................. 4-1, App. 4-1 Signals assigned to terminals ........................................... 3-6 Single-loop type ........................................................ 6-1, 6-5 Single-loop control ........................................................... 4-4 SKIP ................................................................................. 5-6 Square-root computation ................................................ 4-18 Starting controller operation ........................................... 6-13 Stepping response method .............................................. 6-14 STOP .............................................................................. 6-17 Stopping controller operation ......................................... 6-17 Submenu ........................................................................... 4-2 SUPER function ............................................................. 4-18 SV ..................................................................................... 6-3 SV digital display ............................................................. 6-3 SV number .............................................................. 4-19, 5-2 SV ramp-up/ramp-down rate .......................................... 4-18 SV setting key lock ......................................................... 4-19 SVC ................................................................................ 4-19 Switching the Operation Mode ................................ 6-2, 6-12

V
V.AT ................................................................................ 4-20 V.H .................................................................................. 4-20 V.L .................................................................................. 4-20 V.RS ................................................................................ 4-20 Valve position ................................................................. 4-20 Voltage input ..................................................... 4-6, App. 1-1 Voltage pulse output ......................................................... 4-9

W
Waiting action ................................................................. 4-12 Wire breakage ................................................................. 4-18 Wiring ............................................................................... 3-1

Z
Zone PID ........................................................................ 4-19

T
Tag Number .............................................................. 1-2, 1-7 Target Setpoint ........................................................ 4-15, 6-3 Temperature and humidity control ........................... 4-4, 6-9 Terminal assignment ......................................................... 3-1 Terminal cover .................................................................. 3-5 Terminal tightening torque ............................................... 3-2 Terminals .......................................................................... 3-2 Thermocouple wiring ....................................................... 3-2 Time proportional PID computation ............................... 4-19 Time proportional PID computation with relay output .... 4-9 Time proportional PID computation with voltage pulse output ................................................................................ 4-9 Tracking input ................................................................... 4-6 Tracking switching ........................................................... 3-6 Transmitter ........................................................................ 3-4 Troubleshooting ................................................................ 8-3 TYP1 ................................................................................ 4-7

IM 5D1A01-01E

Index-3

Blank Page

Revision Record
Manual Title : Model US1000 Digital Indicating Controller Manual Number : IM 5D1A01-01E
Edition First Second Third Forth fifth Date Aug., 1998 Nov., 1998 Oct., 1999 Jun, 2004 May, 2004 Newly published Notice of CE mark certification, corrections to the hardware specifications, and change of style code to S2. Notice of FM standard certification. Change of company name. Change of Safety and EMC standards. Details

Written by

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN

Blank Page

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

Project Data Backup:

By making backup copies of project data, the newest project data can be protected from data loss due to hardware failures such as a disk crash. Backup Tool Using Windows explorer can copy the whole project folder to an external media such as a MO or DAT, the project (all files and folders under the project folder) can be backed up. However, when backup the project to a different hard disk, or to a different PC via network, the Backup Tool introduced here is a useful program, which can backup the project conveniently. The backup tool can be started from both System View and Recipe View. The backup processing started from System View and the backup processing started from Recipe View act independent of each other. The operation of the backup tool started from Recipe View is the same as the operation of the backup tool started from System View. In this section, the operation of the backup tool started from System View is explained. Setting of Backup Information When using the backup function, it is necessary to set certain items of backup information (whether or not each project is to be backed up, and the backup destination if backed up) for each project first. Execution of Backup Timing The backup can be made by the backup function at the following two timings. Backup at the completion of engineering All specified project data is backed up when engineering is completed and System View is exited. Backup at any timing specified by the user The user backs up only the project data that needs to be backed up at any timing in System View. Restoring Backed up Project Data Use Windows Explorer to copy the backup data to the restore location in order to restore backed up project data. Note: When restoring a backed up project, if the same project is still existing in the system, all data of the existing project should be deleted completely before restoring the project. Otherwise, the restored data may conflict with the existing data and the whole project becomes abnormal and useless. 2 2

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING Flow of Project Backup The following flowchart shows the flow of the project backup.

1. Enter the name of the location where projects are to be backed up using Windows Explorer, and make sure it is shared. If the drive that is used as a backup destination is already shared, it is not necessary to perform this. 2. Set the backup information for the projects to be backed up in the Backup setting dialog box. Project databases for which no backup information is set are excluded from the backup targets. 3. Exit System View or select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu of System View. 3 3

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING The Backup specification dialog box is displayed in order to select the backup targets. 4. Select the projects to be backed up in the Backup Specification dialog box. 5. Click the [Back up] button in the Backup Specification dialog box. The backup is started. The project databases selected in the Backup specification dialog box are backed up to the chosen backup destination. During the backup executed upon exiting from System View, System View closes when the backup of all the project is completed. 6. The progress of the backup can be checked in the Backup Status Display dialog box. The progress of the backup is displayed for each project in the Backup Status Display dialog box. Setting Backup Information for Projects Set backup information for projects that are to be backed up. Project databases for which no backup information is set are excluded from the backup targets. Set the backup information in the Backup setting dialog box. Select [Set Backup] from the [Tools] menu. The Backup setting dialog box is displayed.

4 4

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

In the Backup Setting dialog box, the names of all the projects opened in System View are shown. Make the following settings for all projects to be backed up. Setting of whether or not to back up For each project listed, specify whether or not it should be backed up. If the project should be backed up: Check the check box. If a project should not be backed up: Do not check the check box. Backup on Closing Recipe View When the option box It is Backed up at the end is checked, the recipe data backup tool automatically starts when closing Recipe View. By default, this option is checked. Setting the Backup Destination Enter the UNC (Universal Naming Convention) path of a disk where the selected projects are to be backed up. The UNC path should be entered in the format \\computer name\storage location. Once the backup destination is set, it is displayed in the [Backup 5 5

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING destination] field. The drives to be used as backup destinations must be shared on the network in advance. Note: Make sure to set [Backup destination] for projects whose check boxes showing whether or not they should be backed up are checked. In addition, network sharing must be set for backup destination drives in advance. It is necessary to set network sharing even if the backup destination is a local drive. If no backup destinations are set or drives other than the ones shared on the network are set as backup destinations, the message, Project XXX backup destination is not set, is displayed When the items mentioned above are set for all the projects to be backed up, click the [OK] button, [Apply] button, or [Cancel] button. [OK]: The settings take effect and the Backup setting dialog box closes. [Apply]: The settings take effect. However, the Backup setting dialog box is not closed. [Cancel]: Cancels the settings, and the Backup setting dialog box closes. However, if the [Apply] button is clicked before [Cancel] button is clicked, the settings become valid at the time the [Apply] button is clicked. Backup Destination Specification Dialog Box Click the [...] button of the Backup setting dialog box in order to display the Browse for Folder dialog box. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, a drive and a folder can be selected as a backup destination.

6 6

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

In the Browse for Folder dialog box, a list of drives on the local PC and folders in those drives is displayed. In addition, a list of PCs connected to the network is displayed. Select a drive and a folder as a backup destination from the list and click the [OK] button. The Browse for Folder dialog box is closed, and the backup destination selected in the Browse for Folder dialog box is set in the [Backup destination] field of the Backup setting dialog box. Note: If the [Cancel] button is clicked, the Browse for Folder dialog box is closed without setting the backup destination. If a shared name was not specified for the selected backup destination, a message dialog box that displays the message, Project XXX backup destination is not set, appears. Click the [OK] button in the message dialog box to close the dialog box and return to the Backup destination specification dialog box. Execution of Backup The execute backup, exit System View or select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu. The Backup specification dialog is displayed. A list of the projects whose backup information is set in the Backup setting dialog box among the projects opened in System View is displayed in the Backup specification dialog box. 7 7

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

In the Backup specification dialog box, set the following items for each project listed. Setting of whether or not to Back up For each project listed, specify whether or not it should be backed up. If the project should be backed up: Check the check box. If the project should not be backed up: Do not check the check box. Projects that are excluded from backup will not be backed up even if they are set to be backed up in the Backup setting dialog box. Setting whether or not to Back up even if a Project is Used in Other PCs If the [Back up even if it is used other PC] check box is checked, backup is executed for all the target project data even if they are being used by other PCs. 8 8

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING If the [Back up even if it is used in other PC] check box is unchecked, backup is not executed for the project data that is being used by other PCs.

Execution of Backup Click the [Back up] button. The Backup specification dialog box is closed and a backup is started for all the projects chosen to be backed up. In addition, the Backup status display dialog box is displayed to show the progress of the backup. If a project to be backed up is being updated or written to by another PC, that project is not backed up. For projects that were not backed up, the message, Project XXX has not been backed up before. Please back it up, is displayed when System View is started next time. Moreover, if a backup fails, the message, Project XXX has not been backed up before. Please back it up, is also displayed when System View is started next time. If the [Not Back up] button is clicked, the Backup specification dialog box closes without executing a backup. Checking the Progress of Backup When a backup is being executed, the Backup status display dialog box is displayed.

9 9

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING The progress of the backup is displayed for each project in the Backup status display dialog box. The user can stop a backup at the end of each project backup by clicking the [Abort] button. The backup is aborted at the point where the backup currently in progress is completed. In this case, any project set to be backed up after the aborted project will not be backed up. Click the [Close] button to close the Backup status display dialog. This button cannot be operated while a backup is in progress. Backup Processing of Project Data The files in the project folder to be backed up will be copied to the backup destination, and the files in the project folder with the same project name at the backup destination will be deleted under the following conditions: Folder to be backed up The folders and files in the project folder will be backed up. If the same file exists in the project folder to be backed up and at the backup destination If there is any difference between the saving date of these two files, the target file is Copied to the backup destination. If not, it is not copied. If a file or folder that is not in the project folder to be backed up exists at the backup destination. That file or folder is deleted from the backup destination. If a file or folder that exists in the project folder to be backed up does not exist at the backup destination. That file or folder is copied to the backup destination. Note: If a backup fails for some reason during execution, execute the backup again. Writing to the project data to be backed up from Builder cannot be performed during a backup. Recommended System Configuration for Backup Considering that the number of sessions will increase due to actions of the backup tool, etc., a recommended system configuration for backup that takes this increase into account is shown below. In this configuration, since the operation monitoring is executed on a different PC than the one executing the engineering, the CPU load during backup processing is lowered, thus minimizing the influence of backup processing on the operation monitoring function. In addition, the increase of the number of sessions by backup processing can be suppressed. Note that a backup is executed via Ethernet in case the backup destination is another PC.

10 10

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

11 11

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING Number of Sessions Used for Backup The number of sessions to be used at backup is determined according to the following. Table Number of Sessions Used at Backup

FCS Automatic Backup By using the FCS automatic backup, you can recover the project database without performing offline download to the FCS and continue online maintenance in case of a hard disk crash in the PC on which the project database resides or similar cases. The FCS automatic backup consists of two functions, automatic backup of FCS database and FCS database diagnosis. Note: It should be noted that if the hard disk of the PC on which the project database resides crashes during backup, the project database loses consistency and it can no longer be recovered. Automatic Backup of FCS Database In order to perform online maintenance, the database within an FCS and the database within a PC must always be mutually consistent. There are, however, cases where the database within an FCS and the database within a PC may lose consistency due to hardware errors etc. For this reason, it is necessary to automatically back up the latest FCS database every time online download is performed to prevent Inconsistencies between the databases. The automatic backup of FCS database function automatically backs up the FCS database within the PC (changed files only) after online download to the FCS is completed. Note: The FCS automatic backup only backs up the current project. 12 12

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

Operating Conditions The automatic backup of FCS database function operates under the following conditions. A project must be specified as the backup target. The backup destination must be specified. The project attribute of the project must be current project. The FCS automatic backup must be set to be performed. Backup Destination The destination of the automatic backup of FCS database function is the same as the project backup destination explained in F1.6, Project Data Backup. Do not specify a removable disk such as a magneto-optic disk as the backup destination. The performance is degraded and the operability becomes lower. Files Backed up with Automatic Backup of FCS Database The files in the FCS folder under the project folder and the FCS related files in the ETC The automatic backup of FCS database backs up folder and COMMON folder function. Automatic Backup Timings of FCS Database When you set the automatic backup of FCS database function, the FCS database is backed up at the following timings. After online download is completed in FCS related builders (including FCS operations in System View) After FCS offline download is completed After saving the tuning parameters is completed After all generation is completed Note: The entire project is backed up to maintain the consistency of the project if you create or delete an FCS, or change the properties of an FCS. Backing up the entire project takes some time. Setting of Automatic Backup of FCS Database This section explains various settings and procedures for automatically backing up the FCS database. Note: In order to automatically back up the FCS database, the project backup, which is explained in Project Data Backup must have been set. 1. Select [Set Backup...] from the [Tools] menu of System View.The Backup Setting Dialog Box appears.

13 13

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

2. Check the [Backup FCS database automatically.] check box in the Backup setting dialog box. If you check this check box, [YES] is displayed in the [FCS backup] column of the current project in the backup target project list display area. [- - -] is always displayed for projects whose project attribute is not current project. 3. Click the [OK] or [Apply] button in the Backup setting dialog box. The backup message dialog box appears only when you set the automatic backup of FCS database function for the first time.

14 14

CENTUM CS 3000 ENGINEERING

Click the [OK] button in the backup message dialog box to close the backup message dialog box. Select [Start Backup...] from the [Tools] menu of System View to back up the project database only when you are setting the automatic backup of FCS database function for the first time. Note: The automatic backup of FCS database function compares the times at which files saved in the backup destination and current files were updated, and backs up only the files whose times of update are different. Back up the project data when you are setting the automatic backup of FCS database function for the first time because the file used for comparing the times of update may not exist in the backup destination. If you do not back up the project, the project cannot be recovered when errors occur in project data or it will take long to back up the project when the automatic backup of FCS database function is executed.

15 15

)LHOGEXV %RRN $ 7XWRULDO

Preliminary v. 1.1

Copyright by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000. All rights reserved.

PRELIMINARY 1.1

)LHOGEXV %RRN $ 7XWRULDO

This textbook is prepared for those who want to know more about technologies supporting FOUNDATION fieldbus and Function Blocks. Yokogawa Electric Corporation and its group funded for this textbook to make F OUNDATION fieldbus adopted by as many people as possible. No commercial ambitions are in this book. This textbook is for tutorials on fieldbus technologies and does not intend to override any technical contents of FOUNDATION fieldbus. If this textbook contains any explanation that conflicts with Foundation documents, the Foundation documents are correct and such conflict should come from an error of explanation of this textbook or this textbook failed to follow the technology update of Fieldbus Foundation. The authors want readers to use this textbook for getting more knowledgeable of FOUNDATION fieldbus and apply it to their industrial projects. Fieldbus is the language of 21st century.

For additional information, contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho Musashino, Tokyo 180-8758, JAPAN http://www.yokogawa.com/fieldbus Fieldbus Foundation 9390 Research Blvd, Suite II-250 Austin, TX 78759, USA Voice: 512 794 8890 Fax: 512 794 8893 http://www.fieldbus.org

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES This document is provided on an as is basis and may be subject to future additions, modifications, or corrections depending on the results of field trial testing. Yokogawa Electric Corporation hereby disclaims all warranties of any kind, express or implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, for this document. In no event will Yokogawa Electric Corporation be responsible for any loss or damage arising out of or resulting from any defect, error or omission in this document or from anyones use of or reliance on this document.

2000 Yokogawa Electric Corporation, Tokyo Japan. All rights reserved.

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION.......................................................... 1 WHAT IS FIELDBUS?...................................................... 1 FIELDBUS BENEFITS ...................................................... 1 FOUNDATION FIELDBUS ................................................ 2 PART A COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES.... 3 1. COMMUNICATION MODELS........................... 3 1.1 1.2 1.3 2. OSI REFERENCE MODEL ................................... 3 PROTOCOL DATA UNIT...................................... 3 COMMUNICATION THROUGH VCR..................... 4 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 10. 10.1 10.2 10.3 11. 11.1 11.2 AI BLOCK........................................................ 17 AO BLOCK ...................................................... 18 PID BLOCK ..................................................... 19 RESOURCE BLOCK AND TRANSDUCER BLOCK 19 RECOMMENDED VALUES ................................ 19 UNIT CODES .................................................... 24 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT ............................ 25 DEVICE MANAGEMENT ................................... 25 FUNCTION BLOCK MANAGEMENT ................... 25 APPLICATION TIME MANAGEMENT ................. 25 DEVICE INFORMATION FILES ................. 25 DEVICE DESCRIPTION...................................... 25 CAPABILITIES FILE .......................................... 26

PHYSICAL LAYER .............................................. 4 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 31.25KBPS PHYSICAL LAYER ............................ 4 SIGNALING METHOD ......................................... 4 WIRING RULES .................................................. 5 I.S CONSIDERATION .......................................... 6

PART-C MANAGING FIELDBUS PROJECTS ...... 27 PLANNING PHASE .................................................... 27 12.1 12.2 12.3 13. 13.1 13.2 13.3 14. 14.1 15. 15.1 15.2 15.3 DEVICES ON A BUS.......................................... 27 WIRING DESIGN .............................................. 28 SYSTEM DESIGN .............................................. 28 INSTALLATION PHASE ............................... 28 INSTALLATION................................................. 28 COMMISSIONING ............................................. 29 STARTUP AND TEST OPERATION ..................... 29 OPERATION PHASE ..................................... 29 CONTROL OPERATION ..................................... 29 MAINTENANCE PHASE............................... 29 DEVICE ALARMS ............................................. 29 REPLACING A FAULTY DEVICE ........................ 29 ASSET MANAGEMENT ..................................... 30

DATA LINK LAYER ............................................ 6 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL .............................. 6 ADDRESSES ....................................................... 6 LINK ACTIVE SCHEDULER ................................. 7 SCHEDULED COMMUNICATION.......................... 7 UNSCHEDULED COMMUNICATION ..................... 8 LINK MAINTENANCE ......................................... 8 DATA LINK PDUS ............................................. 8

APPLICATION LAYER ....................................... 9 4.1 FIELDBUS ACCESS SUBLAYER ........................... 9 FIELDBUS MESSAGE SPECIFICATION............................ 10

SYSTEM MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL......... 12 5.1 5.2 5.3 TAG AND ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT.................... 12 TAG LOCATION ............................................... 12 APPLICATION TIME SYNCHRONIZATION .......... 12

RENOVATION PHASE.............................................. 30 16.1 16.2 ADDITION OF APPLICATIONS ........................... 30 DEVICE UPGRADE ........................................... 30

DL PDU*

DL PCI *** 5-15

Ph PDU*
* ** *** **** PDU SDU PCI FCS

Application Layer Presentation Layer Session Layer Transport Layer Network Layer Data Link Layer Physical Layer

FMS Sub-Layer FAS Sub-Layer

Communication Stack

Start Preamble Delimiter 1+ 1 Protocol Data Unit Service Data Unit

Protocol Control Information Frame Check Sequence

Figure A-3
Data Link Layer Physical Layer

* The user application is not defined in OSI model

Figure A-1

Application Layer of Foundation fieldbus consists of two sublayers: Fieldbus Access sublayer (FAS) and Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS). FAS is a glue to map FMS services to Data Link Layer.

Page 3

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

1.3 Communication through VCR

Messages are exchanged between applications sitting on the FOUNDATION fieldbus. When a message is transferred, it goes down through a channel called Virtual Communication Relationship (VCR) to add PCI before it goes to the wire. At the destination, it goes up through the partner VCR to the receiving application. PCIs are appended and removed when a message goes through VCRs to allow layers perform their specific functionality. See Figure A-4.

2.1 31.25kbps Physical Layer

31.25kbps Physical Layer is the most common since IEC and ISA approved it in 1992. This textbook explains only wire medium but optical fiber can be used as an alternative. Though 31.25kbps sounds not fast enough compared with the latest telecommunication technologies, it is necessary to replace traditional 4-20mA analog transmission. It is intended to apply to field devices for various environments of industries. Many users want to enjoy simple installation of two-wired transmitters, and explosive gases prevent high-performance electronics in the hazardous area of the plant. Transmission in 31.25kbps was chosen for those applications, which demand devices of very low power consumption. A field device can draw electric current from the medium to feed energy to its electronics. It is called a bus-powered device and a fieldbusequivalent of two-wire installation.

Sender

Receiver

index

FMS FAS DLL

VCR

FMS FAS
VCR

DLL

PHL

DL-address

PHL

2.2 Signaling Method

Fieldbus utilizes a similar technology for smart transmitters to transmit an electric signal to the wire. Figure A-5 shows the electric equivalent circuit of signal transmission. Supply voltage is applied by a power supply through an impedance conditioner, typically consisting of inductors. DC current through the impedance conditioner feeds devices. Supply voltage is between 9V and 32V at the device terminals. Impedance conditioner makes output impedance of the power supply higher than 400 in signal frequency bandwidth.
Equivalent Circuit
I 1 +I 2 100 Vs 5F Time I1 I2 Vo 5F 100 I1 Time Vo Vs

Figure A-4

A fieldbus device has many VCRs so that it can communicate with various devices or applications at the same time. It is possible because the VCR guarantees the message goes to the correct partner without risks of losing information. A VCR is identified by an application with device-local identifier called index specified in Application Layer. It is also identified from other devices with DL-address specified in Data Link Layer. A VCR has a queue (fast-in, fast-out memory) or a buffer (memory to store data) to save messages. It is the responsibility of network configuration to give correct information of index and DL-address as well as other operating information to VCRs through Network Management.

Waveform

Terminators

Figure A-5

2. Physical Layer
Physical Layer is a mechanism to transmit and receive electric or optic signals to/from medium so that a data consisting of ones and zeros is transmitted from one node to the others. Physical Layer interests are wires, signals, waveform, voltage, and others all related to electricity and optics. Though IEC/ISA standard specifies various media with various speeds, Fieldbus Foundation chose its own subset, low speed wire and fiber media, and Ethernet. Ethernet is discussed in the later chapter of this textbook.

Each side of cable is terminated with a terminator of 100 impedance in signal frequency. It makes an instrumentation cable be a balanced transmission line so that a signal of relatively high frequency is transmitted with a minimum distortion.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 4

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

When a device increases its sink current with 10mA, it is fed from capacitors in terminators because the impedance conditioner of power supply prevents current change through inductors. Thus voltage between the wire pair decreases with 0.5V (= 10mA 50). In the next moment, device increases drawing current with 20mA to generate a modulated signal of 1V p-p amplitude while average current remains constant. Data is encoded as a voltage change in the middle of one bit time. Data one (1) is encoded as a voltage fall in the middle of the bit time, while zero (0) is encoded as a voltage rise. Additional out-ofband data are N+ and N- encoded as constant voltage during the bit time. They are used only for start and stop delimiters to encode the start and end of PHL SDU (= DL PDU) so that Physical Layer can transmit any combinations of zeros and ones in DL PDU. Figure A-6 shows typical waveform of a Physical Layer signal. Receiving Physical Layer retrieves bit time using the preamble and then the boundary of octets (bytes) using the start delimiter. End delimiter indicates end of the Physical Layer signal. Preamble length can be increased when the signal goes over repeaters.

Rule 1: Number of devices on a fieldbus is between 2 and 32. Rule 2: Cable is a twisted pair of individual shield (type A) with 18 AWG wires. Rule 3: Overall cable length does not exceed 1900m. Rule 4: Overall spur length does not exceed 120m. Maximum number of devices decreases according to the spur length as shown in the table A-1. Rule 5: When you use multiple twisted pairs with overall shield (type B) with 22 AWG wires, the total length decreases to 1200m.
Total Cable Length (Type A) 1900m (Type B) 1200m Cable Twisted pairs with individual shield Twisted pairs with overall shield

Table A-1 (a) Total cable length (Rule 3, 5)

Devices on the fieldbus 1-12 13-14 15-18 19-24 25-32 Total Spur Length 120m 90m 60m 30m 1m

Table A-1 (b) Spur length (Rule 4)

2.3 Wiring Rules

IEC/ISA standard specifies minimum amplitude and worst waveform of received signal at a device at the any place of the fieldbus network. Physical Layer receiver circuit must be able to receive this signal. You can configure the transmission line in any way as far as the received signal quality is guaranteed at all receiving nodes. However, it is not always simple and easy. Instead, ISA SP50 committee created a set of wiring rules to simplify the network design. Received signal is always of better quality than the minimum requirement if the fieldbus is designed according to these rules. They sound a little conservative but are useful to design a workable network very easily.
Terminator
o oo o oo

Junction Box Trunk (between Terminators) Terminator

Spurs

Figure A-7

Other cable types are defined but not recommended. You can check whether above rules are met when you see the cable installation drawing. Note this is not the only rule to limit the number of devices on a fieldbus. It is discussed later.

Signal Waveform
Preamble Start-Delimiter Data (DLL or higher) End-Delimiter
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 N+ N- 1 0 N- N+ 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 N+ N- N+ N- 1 0 1

bit time

Figure A-6

Page 5

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

2.4 I.S Consideration

Intrinsic Safe (I.S.) installation is important for plants where explosive gases exist. I.S. is the rule to design and install devices in a hazardous area to prevent an explosive gas ignited by electric discharge or surface temperature of a device. An I.S. field device must be carefully designed to prevent the ignition even when a single failure of its component takes place. An I.S. barrier must be installed to separate the hazardous area from the safe area as shown in Figure A-8. A barrier strictly limits the voltage, current and power fed to a device installed in the hazardous area. Therefore a field device must be operational within the restricted power supply. Devices and barriers must meet the same design criteria provided by safety organizations (IEC, FM, CENELEC, PTB, etc.). Note that I.S. is the only possible technology for zone 0 where explosive gases exist at any time. In zone 1 where such gases exist in most of time but not always, explosion proof technology is also applicable as well as I.S. Explosion proof is a technology of housing design and independent from fieldbus technologies.

Foundation fieldbus Data Link Layer is a subset of ISA s50.02 part - 3/4 and type 1 in IEC61158-3/4.

3.1 Medium Access Control

The most important functionality of Data Link Layer is Medium Access Control (MAC) of the fieldbus. Since all devices on the same cable receive the same Physical Layer signal, only one of them is allowed to transmit signal at a time. MAC is the method to achieve this goal. The domain of devices sharing the same Physical Layer signal is called link. In other words, only one device on a link is allowed to use medium (Physical Layer) at a time. Link Active Scheduler (LAS) is the role to control the medium access. Its functionality is explained in the following sections. The right to send a PDU is called token. The LAS possesses the token and gives it to another device to allow it to send messages. Token is then returned to the LAS for further medium access control. Since application messages have various levels of urgency, Data Link Layer supports a mechanism to transmit messages according to their urgency. Data Link Layer provides three levels of priority, URGENT, NORMAL and TIME_AVAILABLE, higher in this order. An URGENT message is transmitted immediately even when other messages of NORMAL or TIME_AVAILABLE priority are in the waiting queue, and vice versa. Maximum data size allowed for each priority is shown in Table A-2.
Priority URGENT NORMAL TIME_AVAILABLE Maximum Data (DLSDU) Size 64 bytes 128 bytes 256 bytes

HMI Terminator
ooo ooo

Host I/F

o oo o oo

Barrier

Table A-2 Maximum Data Size in each Priority

Safe Area Hazardous Area

3.2 Addresses
Communication partners in Data Link Layer are identified with DL-address, which consists of three components, Link, Node and Selector. See Figure A-9. Link field consists of 16 bits and identifies a link. When the communication is within a link, this field is often omitted. This field is necessary when a message is going to other links through bridges.

Figure A-8

3. Data Link Layer

Data Link Layer is a mechanism to transfer data from a node to the others that need the data. It also manages the priority and order of such transfer requests. Data Link Layer interests are data, address, priority, medium control, and others all related to message transfer. Since Data Link Layer operates on the low speed Physical Layer, it has mechanisms to use medium in an effective way.

Link (16 bit)

Node (8 bit)

Selector (8 bit)

Figure A-9

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 6

PRELIMINARY 1.1

(3) A Link Master becomes LAS

LAS

V(FUN)

BASIC

Link Master

BASIC

Link Master

Figure A-11

V(FUN)+V(NUN)

BASIC Class Devices

0xF7 0xF8 0xFC 0xFD 0xFF

Default Address Temporary Devices

Note that the LAS is an additional functionality to basic communication. Therefore it has different DL-address (0x04) as well as the node address.

Figure A-10 Selector field gives a device-internal address of 8 bits to identify a VCR. When a VCR is connected to another VCR, it is identified with DLCEP (Data Link Connection End Point) shown in this field. When a VCR is not connected to any others but open to send/receive messages, it is identified with DLSAP (Data Link Service Access Point) shown in this field. DLCEP and DLSAP have different ranges.
Several DL addresses are reserved for specific purposes. For example, devices can share the same global DLSAP for alarm reception.

3.4 Scheduled Communication

The LAS is responsible for scheduled communication, which is necessary to link Function Blocks. Function Blocks are distributed applications operating in a synchronized manner. The LAS takes the communication part of the synchronized data transfer. A Function Block of output parameter is a Publisher of data and other Function Blocks that receive this data are called Subscribers. The LAS controls periodic data transfer from a Publisher to Subscribers using Network Schedule.

3.3 Link Active Scheduler

Link Active Scheduler (LAS) is the role to control the medium access.

Page 7

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

When the time of scheduled communication comes, LAS sends Compel Data (CD) PDU to the Publisher DLCEP. Publisher is expected to transmit Data Transfer (DT) PDU stored in the data buffer of the DLCEP immediately. When Subscribers receive CD to the Publisher, they presume the next data transfer comes from the Publisher. Received data is stored in the buffer of Subscribers. A CD PDU is a token for a Publisher and the LAS interprets the publishing DT PDU as the returned token. See Figure A-12 (A).

The LAS controls the message transfer by updating the priority. When the token is given to all devices in a short time interval, the LAS gives more time to the nodes by lowering the priority. When the token does not go to all devices within a target token rotation time network parameter, the LAS increases the priority so that the token is given to all devices in a desired time interval. A device must return the token within the time interval given in the PT PDU. This is necessary to finish the unscheduled communication before the next scheduled communication. Note that the token is given to the node instead of DLCEP or DLSAP. Therefore the device is responsible to allow all DLCEPs and DLSAPs in the device send messages.

LAS
CD (token)
(1) LAS issues CD (Compel Data) with token to the Publisher.

Buffer

Figure A-12 (B)

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 8

PRELIMINARY 1.1
DLPDU

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Functionality Connect DLCEP Disconnect Poll a Publisher Send a data unit Give the token Return the token Request more PT Search new node Join the link Synchronize Time Request CT Measure delay in CT Becomes LAS Request LAS role No activity

Technical Information

EC DC CD DT PT RT RI PN PR TD CT RQ RR CL TL IDLE

Name Establish Connection Disconnect Connection Compel Data Data Transfer Pass Token Return Token Request Interval Probe Node Probe Response Time Distribution Compel Time Round-trip Time Query Round-trip Time Response Claim LAS Transfer LAS Idle

Typical example is a human-machine interface (Client) to read a data of a Function Block (Server). The Client sends a Read request to the Server and then Server sends back the data to the Client. This communication takes place at any moment. A Client may want to issue many requests at a time. Client-Server VCR has a queue to store those requests and sends requests one by one when the node have a token. A flow-control mechanism is available to manage error recovery and Servers processing power.

One-to-one two-way connected communication Universal communication

Manual operation Download configuration Maintenance Client

Table A-3 - DL PDUs

4. Application Layer
Application Layer consists of two sublayers. Fieldbus Access Sublayer (FAS) manages data transfer while Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS) encodes and decodes user data.

Response time depends on

Device throughput Bus traffic Request: Give me current pressure Server Response: Its 10.3 kPa.

Figure A-13

4.1 Fieldbus Access Sublayer

Fieldbus Access Sublayer (FAS) is a part of secure communication. Since fieldbus does not have layers (4 to 6) between DLL and APL, FAS directly maps APL requests to DLL services. This is the most important part of VCR management. The FAS provides three communication models for applications. They are explained below and summarized in Table A-4. It is expected a network manager configure correct VCRs according to the models communicating each other. Once configured, FAS provides communication facility according to these models.
Model Client-Server Publisher-Subscriber Source-Sink DLL Queued Buffered Queued Schedule by User Network User Direction Bi-direction Uni-direction Uni-direction

4.1.2 Publisher-Subscriber Model

Publisher-Subscriber model is designed to link Function Blocks. When a publishing Function Block runs, its output data is stored in the buffer of the Publisher VCR. Then the LAS sends CD to the VCR to force it transfer the data in DT PDU. Subscriber VCRs receive this PDU and gives the data to subscribing Function Blocks. Typical example is a linkage from output of an Analog Input (AI) block to process value input of PID control block.
One-to-many one-way connected communication Data transfer for instrumentation
Connect Function Blocks

Table A-4 Communication Models in FAS

Periodic schedule with highest priority

4.1.1 Client-Server Model

Client-Server model is universal and used in many communication technologies. An application called Client requests another application called Server to do a specific action through FMS. When the Server finishes the requested action, its result is transferred to the Client. It is a one-to-one two-way communication using DLCEP.
Server Information Report: Pressure is 10.3 kPa. Subscriber

Subscriber

Figure A-14

Page 9

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

Publisher-Subscriber model is one-to-many oneway communication using DLCEP. Subscribers are able to know whether data is updated since the last publish. This mechanism is important because Data Link Layer transfers data as scheduled regardless the publishing Function Block updates the data in the buffer.

4.2.1 Virtual Field Device (VFD)

A fieldbus device may have user applications, which are independent from each other and do not interact. A fieldbus device consists of Virtual Field Devices for such individual applications. An identifier, given to VCR, identifies the VFD. A Foundation device has at least two VFDs. One is Management VFD where network and system management applications reside. It is used to configure network parameters including VCRs as well as to manage devices in a fieldbus system. The other is a Function Block VFD where Function Blocks exist. It is possible for a field device to have two or more Function Block VFDs.

4.1.3 Source-Sink Model

Source-Sink model is designed to broadcast messages. It is one-to-many one-way communication without schedule. This model is sometimes called Report Distribution Model. A Source VCR transfers a message in the queue to an assigned global DLSAP address when the device has token. Sink VCRs have the same global address and receive the same message from a Source. Foundation devices use this model for two specific purposes. One is to report alarms or events detected in the Source, and the other is to transmit trend of Source Function Block. Alarms are acknowledged through Client-Server VCR. It is desirable for an alarm logger to receive alarms from devices with one VCR. A Sink can receive messages from many Sources if the Sources are configured to send messages to the same global address. A Sink can identify Source with its DLSAP address.

Management VFD

Function Block VFD

MIB OD SMIB NMIB RB TB

FB OD AI PID Link

VCRs

FMS FAS DLL PHL

SMSAP SM/NM Server Subscriber Publisher Source

Figure A-16

4.2.2 FMS Objects

Applications in a VFD are shown to other applications on the network using an object model, which consists of attributes, its behavior and access methods. 4.2.2.1 Object Examples Function Blocks have parameter objects to which another application can have an access. Alarms, Function Block Linkage are objects also. Their behavior is specified in Function Block Application specification. Network behavior is managed through Network Management Information Base (NMIB) objects. System behavior is managed through System Management Information Base (SMIB) objects. Schedules and VCRs are objects also. 4.2.2.2 Object Dictionary An object is identified with a number called index, which is unique within the VFD. Additional information to describe an object is necessary for open systems. Such information is called Object Dictionary (OD), which is an assembly of information called Object Descriptions to explain the objects.

One-to-many one-way connection-less communication

Event reporting
Device or process alarms Trending

On-demand aperiodic communication Event Report: My hardware failed. Source

Sink

Figure A-15

Sink

4.2 Fieldbus Message Specification

Fieldbus Message Specification (FMS) is a service interface for user applications to use fieldbus services. When a service is requested, it encodes request to transfer it to the other applications. Receiving FMS decodes the request to notify it to the application.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 10

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

A Client application can read such explanation with Get OD service and read the value when the object is a variable. The most fundamental object is a variable to contain a value. It may be a simple variable, a record (structure) or an array. Function Block parameters, VCR, NMIB and SMIB are examples of record variables. Other objects are event, domain, and program. They are explained in the next section.
Object Dictionary Data Type

4.2.3.2 Event Management Event is used to notify that an application detects something important. Failure, data update and alarms are examples of event. An event is notified with Source-Sink model repeatedly until it is acknowledged through Client-Server model. Its notification can be enabled or disabled through another Event-related service.
Event Notification Acknowledge Event Notification Alter Event Condition Monitoring
Report an event as Source Acknowledge an event Disable or enable an event

Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Object Description Get

Table A-6 Event Services

4.2.3.3 Domain Management Domain is a continuous memory area. It may be a program area or data area. A Client can download data to a domain or upload domain content through FMS services. Because a domain can be larger than the maximum size of FMS encoding, FMS allows to upload or download a domain in parts. Initiate and Terminate services are prepared to manage partial download and upload.
Request Domain Download (Generic) Initiate Download Sequence (Generic) Download Segment (Generic) Terminate Download Sequence Request Domain Upload Initiate Upload Sequence Upload Segment Terminate Upload Sequence
Request download Start downloading Download Stop downloading Request upload Start uploading Upload Stop uploading

Read Write

Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Event Event Event Domain Domain Program Program

Variable

Notify

Event

Download Start

Domain Program

Figure A-17

An object is accompanied with its Object Description sharing the same index. There are Object Descriptions without associated objects. Those Object Descriptions give other information such as object location, amount of objects, data type, data structure and so on.

4.2.3 FMS Services

FMS provides services to access FMS objects. Tables summarize them with service classes. 4.2.3.1 Variable Access Variable is a storage of data. Its value can be read or written by another application. An application can send a variable data without request from other application using Information Report service. Foundation fieldbus uses this service in publishing data and reporting trends. It is possible to define a list of variables for an effective transfer. When a variable is a record or an array and consists of multiple variables, it is possible to transfer it as a whole or only one component assigned with sub index.
Read Write Information Report Define Variable List Delete Variable List
Read value of a variable Write value to a variable Send value as Publisher or Source Define a list of variables to send Delete a list of variables

Table A-7 Domain Services

4.2.3.4 Program Invocation Program is a data processing functionality that can be managed from other applications. It was modeled for PLC ladder programs and can be used for Function Block Applications. When a program is downloaded, its invocation is tightly coupled with Domain management.
Create Program Invocation Delete Program Invocation Start Stop Resume Reset Kill
Create a Program object Delete a Program object Start a program Stop a program Resume a program execution Reset the program Disable the program

Table A-8 Program Services

4.2.3.5 Other Services FMS provides other services for Object Dictionary and Context management.

Table A-5 Variable Access Services

Page 11

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

An Object Description can be read by Get OD service. When objects are downloadable, their object descriptions need to be downloaded also. A connection between applications are managed though Context. Initiate and Abort services are fundamental and the status information of the partner can be transferred by other services.
Get OD Initiate Put OD Put OD Terminate Put OD Initiate Abort Reject Identify
OD Management Services Read an object description Start downloading OD Download an OD Stop downloading OD Context Management Services Establish a FMS connection Release a FMS connection Reject an improper request Ask VFD Identification (vendor, model)

6. High Speed Ethernet

Though Fieldbus specification allows faster media such as 1Mbps and 2.5Mbps, very few people are interested in using them. 31.25kbps Physical Layer has its niche to replace 4-20mA transmission in plant floor and work in a hazardous area. Other Physical Layers are giving their places to the stateof-art technologies.

6.1 Why Ethernet?

Ethernet is one of the most popular networks for office and business applications. Network components such as cables, hubs and switches are available with very cheap prices from commercial off the shelf (COTS) environment. Its media are evolving very quickly. 100Mbps Ethernet is replacing traditional 10Mbps Ethernet, and a faster Ethernet of 1Gbps is emerging. It is better to utilize those COTS components both in cost and availability.

Table A-9 Other FMS Services

5. System Management Protocol

System Management needs additional protocol to manage fieldbus systems. It must be operational even under abnormal situations such as system startup, wrong configuration, device failure and its replacement. Its protocol is called System Management Kernel Protocol (SMKP) and directly uses Data Link Layer services without Application Layer.

6.2 TCP/IP Protocol Suite

Much more important thing for high-speed fieldbus is TCP/IP, which is the de facto standard in information technology (IT) world. When FOUNDATIOn fieldbus goes over TCP/IP, it makes it possible to open the door to the IT world and build a total network from plant floor to enterprise level. IP (Internet Protocol) is used to transfer data to desired station of IP address. FOUNDATION fieldbus utilizes IP version 4 today and will switch to much powerful IP v6 in the near future. TCP (Transfer Control Protocol) provides connection-oriented transport services that can be used for Client-Server communication. UDP (User Data Protocol) transfers an amount of data to desired application and can be used for SourceSink communication. Publisher-Subscriber communication can use either TCP or UDP.

5.1 Tag and Address Assignment

A field device is identified with its PD tag as well as its node address as explained in Application part of this textbook. SMKP provide services to assign them to a device. When a device changes it address, it disappears and come back to the link with different address. Therefore its behavior is complicated in Data Link Layer. A special protocol is defined for this purpose.

5.2 Tag Location

Device Tag and Function Block Tag are useful for humans but need longer data for communication. SMKP provides services to replace Device Tag and Block Tag with node address and index to make further communications much simpler.

6.3 Field Device Access Protocol

It is desirable to have the same applications for measurement and control regardless to their physical location in a hierarchical network. FMS and SMKP services must be maintained for this goal. Field Device Access (FDA) protocol is designed for this purpose to allow all FMS and SMKP services go over TCP/IP.

5.3 Application Time Synchronization

Fieldbus Applications need synchronized sense of time to interact each other. For example, an event message needs time stamp to indicate when it is detected, because it is received sometimes later depending on the token rotation and bus traffic. SMKP provides a mechanism for all Management VFDs share the synchronized time.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 12

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

Part-B Applications
This part explains Function Blocks and other applications running over FOUNDATION fieldbus. Communication technologies supporting those applications are explained in Part-A of this textbook. This part gives you the knowledge on how measurement and control applications are implemented on FOUNDATION fieldbus. You will understand how carefully such applications are designed so that they can give your plant a secure control and a successful maintenance.

Function Block parameters are visible and accessible through communication services and the Block behavior depends on the values of parameters. A Function Block may reside in virtually any device on the network and a set of Function Blocks connected each other to form an application can reside in one device or be distributed among devices. Fieldbus Foundations System Architecture document says:
One of these models, the function block model, has been specified within the architecture to support low level functions found in manufacturing and process control. Function Blocks model elementary field device functions, such as analog input (AI) functions and proportional integral derivative (PID) functions. The function block model has been supplemented by the transducer block model to decouple function blocks from sensor and actuator specifics. Additional models, such as the exchange block model, are defined for remote input/output and programmable devices. The function block model provides a common structure for defining function block inputs, outputs, algorithms and control parameters and combining them into an Application Process that can be implemented within a single device. This structure simplifies the identification and standardization of characteristics that are common to function blocks.

7. Virtual Field Devices

A fieldbus device may have user applications, which are independent from each other and do not interact. A fieldbus device consists of Virtual Field Devices (VFDs) for such individual applications. VFDs can be seen as different field devices from application point of view. Communication services guarantee their independence. See Figure A-16 for relationship between VFD and communication.

7.1 VFDs in a Fieldbus Device

A FOUNDATION fieldbus device has at least two VFDs. One is Management VFD where network and system management applications reside. It is used to configure network parameters including VCRs as well as to manage devices in a fieldbus system. The other is a Function Block VFD where Function Blocks exist. It is possible for a field device to have two or more Function Block VFDs.

Function Block VFD contains three classes of blocks: Resource Block, Function Block and Transducer Block.

8.1.1 Resource Block

A Resource Block shows what are in the VFD. It gives you the manufacturers name, device name, DD and so on. If the VFD allows you to create or download a Function Block, Resource Block shows how much resource (memory and CPU time) is available. Status of hardware is also visible. Resource Block controls overall device hardware and Function Blocks within the VFD.

8. Function Block
This chapter focuses the most important concept of Function Block in FOUNDATION fieldbus, especially its models and parameters, through which you can configure, maintain and customize your applications.

8.1.2 Function Blocks

A Function Block is a generalized model of measurement and control. For example, AI block conditions raw data from transducer(s) and provides measured value in a common format. Function Blocks are classified into three classes: (1) a Standard Block as specified by the Fieldbus Foundation, (2) an Enhanced Block with additional parameters and algorithm, and (3) an Open Block or a Vendor-specific Block designed by individual vendors. A Function Block has input, output and contained parameters. Data generated in a block is exposed in an output parameter, which can be linked to input parameter of other Function Blocks.

8.1 What is a Function Block?

Function Block is a functional model common in measurement and control. It is a generalized concept of functionality you have in field instruments and control system such as analog input and output as well as PID control. FOUNDATION specification of Function Block Application Process Part 1 gives fundamental concepts while Part 2 and later give various Function Blocks.

Page 13

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

Inputs

Algorithm
Example: PID

Outputs

DI
Input

AI ML AO
Manual Control

AI AI

AI PID DI AO
Track, Feedforward Capability in Control

PID PD AO AO

Output

Feedback Control

Standard Block Parameters Mode, etc.

Block Specific Parameters Gain, etc.

AI PID

AI AI PID RA PID AO
Ratio Control

AI AI AI PID PID AO
Cascade Control

PID BG AO BG AO

Figure B-1
Table B-1 lists Function Blocks defined by the Fieldbus Foundation. You can see major functionality is implemented here. Part 2 blocks are most fundamental ones for measurement and control. Part 3 blocks are for advanced measurement. Advanced control blocks will be in Part 3 soon. Part 4 blocks provide I/O interface to other world such as 4-20mA. Part 5 blocks can be tailored for your application like PLC program.
Part-2 Blocks AI DI ML BG CS PD PID RA AO DO Part-3 Blocks DC OS SC LL DT IT Part-4 Blocks MAI MDI MAO MDO Part-5 Blocks Major in control and measurement Analog Input Block Discrete Input Block Manual Loader Block Bias/Gain Station Block Control Selector Block P, PD Controller Block PID, PI, I Controller Block Ratio Station Block Analog Output Block Discrete Output Block Enhanced Blocks Device Control Block Output Splitter Block Signal Characterizer Block Lead Lag Block Dead Time Block Integrator (Totalizer) Block (More blocks are under development) Multiple I/O Blocks Multiple Discrete Input Block Multiple Analog Input Block Multiple Discrete Output Block Multiple Analog Output Block IEC61131 Blocks (Under development)

SS AO
Override Control

Split Range Control

Figure B-2

8.1.3 Transducer Block

A Transducer Block is a model of sensors and actuators. It is modeled to give a similar expression to Function Blocks. Traditional sensors like pressure transmitters can be mapped to a Transducer Block. A Transducer Block is linked to a Function Block through CHANNEL parameter of the Function Block. Function Block is a general idea while Transducer Block is dependent of its hardware and principles of measurement. For example, pressure transmitter and magnetic flowmeter have different measurement principles but provide an analog measured value. Common part is modeled as an Analog Input (AI) block. The difference is modeled as Transducer Blocks that gives you the information on measurement principle.

8.2 Link and Schedule

A measurement or control application consists of Function Blocks connected each other. Figure B-3 shows an example of PID control consisting of AI, PID and AO blocks. They are connected through Link Objects in Function Block VFD. A Link Object connects two Function Block within a device, or a Function Block to a VCR for Publisher or Subscriber. A Function Block must get input parameters before its algorithm is executed. Its output parameters must be published after the algorithm execution. Therefore algorithm execution and PublisherSubscriber communication must be orchestrated even when blocks are distributed among devices. System Management and Data Link Layer cooperate to achieve this by using the Link Scheduling (LS) time distributed and synchronized by the Link Active Scheduler (LAS).

Table B-1 Function Blocks

Various measurement and control applications can be built by linking these Function Blocks. Figure B2 shows typical examples using Part-2 blocks.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 14

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

System Management in a field device starts Function Blocks according to the Function Block schedule. The LAS transmits Compel Data (CD) PDU to publishing device to force the output data transmitted, according to the LAS schedule. These two schedules (Function Block Schedule and LAS schedule) are defined as offsets in the control period called macro cycle, and must be configured to schedule Function Blocks and communication in a desired order. See Figure B-3 as an example.

8.3.1.3 Contained Parameters A contained parameter is neither input nor output. It is accessible only through on-demand Read or Write request. Its data type can be any of those defined by the Fieldbus Foundation.

8.3.2 Parameter Attributes

Block parameters have several attributes that make their behavior complex. 8.3.2.1 Access Right Function Block parameters can be readable (expressed as r) and/or writable (expressed as w). Even when a parameter is writable, there may be restrictions. For example, OUT parameter of AI block is writable when block mode is O/S or MAN. In other modes, a write request to this parameter is rejected. Vendor-specific range check for a write request is allowed. For example, many PID blocks reject a request to set proportional gain to zero. 8.3.2.2 Dynamic or Static A dynamic parameter varies when the Function Block is executed. Its value is lost when the power is off. A static parameter does not vary by the block execution but may be written by on-demand request. Its value is restored. If the value of a parameter just before the power off is retained when the power is applied again, this parameter is called as non-volatile. Static parameters can be written only when block mode is O/S; e.g., you need to change block mode before modifying static parameters. Do not forget to bring the block back to appropriate mode (AUTO or CAS). 8.3.2.3 Status of a parameter Input parameters, output parameters and some of contained parameters are records with status. Status shows whether the value of this parameter is useful or not. If the value is useful, the status is GOOD. If the value is not useful, the status is BAD. The status can be UNCERTAIN when the block is not 100% confident that the value is useful. Blocks have an option to interpret UNCERTAIN as GOOD or BAD. Status has additional field to show more details.

Application

PID

Schedule

Block Execution

Block Link over communication Internal Block Link

Device #1 Device #2 Communication

AI PID AO

Scheduled communication

For other communications

Figure B-3

8.3 Parameters
A block has a series of parameters, which are accessible by choosing one with FMS index. Parameters of a block have continuous indices.

8.3.1 Parameter Classes

Block parameters are classified into three classes: input, output and contained parameters. Function Blocks can have all of them while Resource Block and Transducer Blocks have only contained parameters. 8.3.1.1 Output Parameters An output parameter is an output of a Function Block and can be connected to input parameter(s) of other Function Block(s). It is possible for two or more Function Blocks share one output parameter from a Function Block. This is supported by periodic Publisher-Subscriber communication. An output parameter is a record consisting of value (analog or discrete) and its status (showing whether the value is useful). 8.3.1.2 Input Parameters An input parameter is an input of a Function Block and can accept one input parameter of another Function Block. Its data type must be equal to that of output parameter.

Page 15

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

8.4 Important Parameters

Several parameters are common to many blocks and very important.

8.5 View Objects

Since a Function Block has many parameters, it is not practical to read them one by one for display purposes, especially for operators. Fieldbus Foundation utilizes FMS Variable List concept for this purpose. A View Object is a predefined Variable List made of many block parameters. Four View Objects are defined for each block. They are VIEW 1: Operation Dynamic List of dynamic parameters that are necessary to run the plant by operators. VIEW 2: Operation Static List of static (configured) parameters that may be necessary to show operators along with dynamic parameters. VIEW 3: All Dynamic List of all dynamic parameters that may be used for detailed display or diagnosis. This list is bigger than VIEW 1 object. VIEW 4: Other Static List of static parameters that may be useful for configuration and maintenance purpose. This list is bigger than VIEW 2 object and may or may not consist of all static parameters.

8.4.1 Block Mode

All blocks have their mode, expressed by MODE_BLK parameter. It is a record of four components; Target, Actual, Permitted and Normal. Target is the mode into which an operator wants to bring this block. This component is writable. Actual shows the actual mode of the block and is read-only. When necessary condition is satisfied, Actual mode becomes same to Target. There is a chance that Actual mode stays different from Target by some reason.

Permitted mode shows which mode is allowed in this Function Block. Normal mode is a memo for operator to record mode that an operator expects in normal conditions. These two components are writable but it is not a good idea to change them without any reason.
Mode can be one of O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS and ROUT. In O/S (out of service) mode, the block does nothing but set parameter status to BAD. In MAN (Manual) mode, Function Block execution does not affect its output. In AUTO (Automatic) mode, the block works independently from upstream Function Blocks. In CAS (Cascade) mode, the Function Block receives set point from upstream Function Block. Actual mode of Function Blocks for output or control may become IMAN (initialize Manual) or LO (Local Override) according to the status of downstream block or local operation.

9. Important Blocks
Fieldbus Foundation specified ten (10) standard function blocks in the Part 2 of its specification. More function blocks were added later. However, only five Function Blocks (AI, DI, PID, AO and DO) are of the most importance in most cases, and only three of them (AI, PID and AO) are in many cases. This chapter gives you information of three important Function Blocks (AI, AO and PID) as well as Resource and Transducer Blocks. It also provides recommended values of block parameters, which came from Yokogawas long experience of measurement and control. You can use these values in most of cases. If a parameter is a bit-string (unsigned integer with each bit having an assigned meaning), names of bit to be set are listed using names in Foundation Document. If a parameter is dynamic and you cannot set it, value field indicates it as dynamic.

Permitted mode depends on the block. Resource Block has only O/S and AUTO modes. Transducer Block may have O/S, MAN and AUTO modes.

8.4.2 Scaling Parameters

Some Function Blocks need scaling of the data as 0100%. A scaling parameter is a record of four components: EU@100%, EU@0%, Unit Code and Point Position. EU@100% and EU@0% are values of 100% and 0%, respectively, in the engineering unit. Unit Code indicates the engineering unit of the scaling or parameter. It could be GMP, psi, inches or something else. Point Position shows the position of the point that an operator wants to show the floating-point value with desired resolution. Table B-10 summarizes important unit codes for your convenience.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 16

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

9.1 AI block
Analog Input (AI) block is designed to allow users enjoy standard model of generalized signalconditioning function. An AI block receives data measured by Transducer Block and manipulates it for Scaling Square root calculation (for orifice plate) Low-pass filter Alarm generation

9.1.3 Alarm Generation

When PV value is smaller than LO_LIM or LO_LO_LIM, LO or LO_LO alarm is generated, respectively. When PV value is larger than HI_LIM or HI_HI_LIM, HI or HI_HI alarm is generated, respectively. Following order is expected:
LO_LO_LIM LO_LIM HI_LIM HI_HI_LIM

9.1.4 Permitted modes

Permitted modes are O/S, MAN and AUTO. In MAN mode, you can modify OUT.value. In AUTO mode, PV.value and PV.status are copied to OUT.value and OUT.status respectively.

Figure B-4 shows the internal structure of an AI block.

9.1.5 Channel Value

AI Block CHANNEL ARITHMETICS scaling square root low cut filter OUT

One of data from Transducer Block is chosen by CHANNEL parameter, which is 1 or greater (upper bound depends on Transducer Block). Channel value is visible in SIMULATE parameter (Transducer Value and Transducer Status).

SIMULATE

9.1.6 Simulation
This functionality is very useful in starting up the plant. If you set SIMULATE.EnDisAble to Enabled, AI block uses Simulate Value and Simulated Status as Channel value instead of Transducer Value and Transducer Status. This function is active only when Simulation Switch (hardware) is ON. Do not forget to disable SIMULATE after using this function.

Figure B-4

9.1.1 Scaling and Square Root Calculation

Parameter L_TYPE controls scaling and square root. Value of a contained parameter PV (Process Value) of AI is determined by L_TYPE. When its value is direct, Channel value becomes OUT value. When its value is indirect, Channel value is scaled with XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE. XD_SCALE gives 0% and 100% value of Channel value and its engineering unit, while OUT_SCALE gives those of output value. When the value of L_TYPE is Square Root, output value is square root of scaled value. The resulting value could be very unstable because of the nature of orifice plate. In that case, cutoff function is used to force PV value to zero when it is less than LOW_CUT value.

9.1.7 Recommended Parameter Values

Recommended values for following three applications in Table B-2 are listed in the Table B7. Note that those values can be changed only when MODE_BLK.Target is Out-of-Service.
Application AI1: Simple Measurement Transducer Block gives measured value in the desired unit. AI block can be transparent. In case of Yokogawa devices, its transducer block gives differential pressure in the unit given in XD_SCALE of AI block and this application can be applied in most cases. Application AI2: Scaling in AI Transducer Block gives measured value in different unit and AI block needs to convert it into different unit. In case of a level meter with pressure transmitter, transducer block gives pressure and AI block converts it into level with a linear equation. Two set of values are needed: 0% Level = L0 inches = P0 psi 100% Level = L1 inches = P1 psi Application AI3: Orifice Plate Flowmeter Transducer Block gives measured differential pressure with an orifice plate and AI block converts it into flow rate by calculating square-root of differential pressure. Two set of values are needed: 0% flow = F0 GPM = P0 psi 100% flow = F1 GPM = P1 psi

9.1.2 Low-pass Filter

PV can be made more stable by applying singleexponential low-pass filter. Its time constant is given by PV_FTIME in seconds. If its value is zero, no filter is applied.

Table B-2 AI Block Applications

Page 17 Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

9.2 AO block
Analog Output (AO) block is designed to allow users enjoy standard model of output devices like a valve positioner. An AO block receives control value from a control block and send back current control value so that the control block can calculate next control value or track the current value if the AO block is not controlled by that control block. An AO block has bi-directional data-flow. One (forward path) is the flow from control value input to Transducer Block; the other (backward path) is the flow from Transducer Block to control value. Figure B-5 shows the AO block structure.

OUT is given to the Transducer Block though CHANNEL.

9.2.2 Backward Path

Current position of actuator, like control valve, is manipulated through the backward path. Current position is fed to READBACK in transducer block unit (XD_SCALE) and then converted into the same unit of SP (PV_SCALE). Thus PV shows the valve position in SP unit. BKCAL_OUT shows the current valve position (target or actual) to PID block. The value of SP (target position) is usually fed to BKCAL_OUT. It is possible to feed PV to BKCAL_OUT in include valve characteristics into the control loop (Note: this is not common in process automation).

AO Block Set point RCAS_IN selection BKCAL_OUT RCAS_OUT Scaling SIMULATE CAS_IN Scaling CHANNEL

9.2.3 Fault State

Fault State is prepared for very critical processes, where control valves need to be shut or open when upstream block is unavailable (gives BAD status) for pre-determined time interval.

Figure B-5

9.2.4 Modes 9.2.1 Forward path

Control value from controller becomes set point, SP. AO block has several paths to calculate SP, depending on the block mode. In CAS mode, it is calculated from CAS_IN, subscribed from publishing controller. In AUTO mode, SP value is given by on-demand Write request to SP. In RCAS (remote cascade) mode, remote controller gives data to RCAS_IN. In CAS or RCAS mode, CAS_IN or RCAS_IN is scaled by PV_SCALE for controller and then XD_SCALE for the Transducer Block. In most cases those parameters have the same unit, e.g., %, and those scales can be simply 0 and 100 for EU@0% and EU@100%. Before calculating SP, CAS_IN or RCAS_IN goes through limiting functions, boundary limit and rate limit. For boundary limit, the value is replaced with PV_HI_LIM (PV_LO_LIM) if the value is larger (smaller) than the limit. For rate limit, difference of current CAS_IN or RCAS_IN from the previous value is greater than SP_RATE_HI (or SP_RATE_LO to decrease); another value with limited rate is used to calculate PV. SP becomes to OUT if the communication is going well. If the controller disappears, OUT does not change. Or it goes to the predefined fault-state and may be replaced with FSTATE_VAL if options are appropriately selected. An AO block can be in one of O/S, MAN, LO (Local Override), AUTO, CAS (cascade), RCAS (Remote cascade) and ROUT (Remote output). IMPORTANT: It is necessary for bring AO block into CAS mode to set both CAS and AUTO bits in MODE_BLK.Target.

9.2.5 Recommended Parameter Values

Recommended values for following two applications in Table B-3 are listed in Table B-8. Note that those values can be changed only when MODE_BLK.Target is Out-of-Service.
Application AO1: Control with current target position Use AO block with PID Function Block. Tracking value from AO block gives current SP given by PID or local operation. Application AO2: Control with current valve position Use AO block with PID Function Block. Tracking value from AO block gives current valve position, PV.

Table B-3 AO Block Applications

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 18

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

9.3 PID block

A PID Block is a standardized model of PID control function. Process value comes through IN parameter and its control output is OUT parameter. Other input/output parameters exist to provide various control schemes, for example cascade control. Figure B-6 shows PID block architecture.

9.3.2.1 SP You can directly write set point to SP parameter when MODE_BLK.Target is AUTO, MAN or O/S. 9.3.2.2 CAS_IN In CAS mode, PID block receives set point through CAS_IN parameter. It must come from upstream Function Block and current set point is returned through BKCAL_OUT parameter.

PID Block BKCAL_IN ROUT_IN CAS_IN Set point RCAS_IN selection BKCAL_OUT RCAS_OUT IN FF_IN Filter Feed Forward Bypass Control Output OUT ROUT_OUT

9.3.3 PID Parameters

GAIN, RESET, and RATE are the tuning constants for the P, I, and D terms, respectively. Gain is a dimensionless number. RESET and RATE are time constants expressed in seconds. It has another PID parameter, BAL_TIME, which you can leave zero (0).

9.3.4 Recommended Parameter Values

Recommended values for following two applications in Table B-4 are listed in the table B-9. Note that those values can be changed only when MODE_BLK.Target is Out-of-Service.
Application PID1: Single Loop PID block gives OUT to AO or another PID. An operator gives SP tot his PID. Application PID2: Cascaded Loop PID block receives OUT from another PID

Figure B-6

9.3.1 Modes
A PID block can be in various modes of O/S, MAN, IMAN (Initialize Manual), LO (Local Override), AUTO, CAS (cascade), RCAS (Remote cascade) and ROUT (Remote output). Several new modes are important: 9.3.1.1 IMAN A PID block comes to IMAN mode when downstream AO block does not accept control from PID (e.g., O/S, MAN or LO mode). PID block tracks to BKCAL_OUT, which is the current output of AO block. 9.3.1.2 Normal Mode Normally mode of PID block is AUTO (closed loop) or CAS (cascaded loop). O/S and MAN may be used for operation.

Table B-4 PID Block Applications

9.4 Resource Block and Transducer Block

Detailed knowledge of Resource Block and Transducer Block is not always necessary. Only one thing is their mode. Their possible modes are O/S and AUTO. They affect the behavior of Function Blocks and must be set to AUTO for correct operation. Transducer Blocks may have various parameters depending on their functionality. Their definition and behavior need to be discussed individually. However several parameters are common through Transducer Blocks. Recommended values for Resource Block and Transducer Blocks are listed in Tables B-5 and B6, respectively. Note that those values can be changed only when MODE_BLK.Target is Out-ofService.

9.3.2 Set Point

A PID block accepts control set point with several methods depending on its mode. Following two parameters are important.

9.5 Recommended Values

Recommended values of block parameters are listed here. Number in front of a parameter name shows the index offset from the block header. Highlighted parameters (or components) are often initialized on shipping to useless values by some vendors. Those values prevent a Function Block be operational and must be set meaningful value as listed in the tables.

Page 19

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information
Parameter Mnemonic 1. ST_REV 2. TAG_DESC 3. STRATEGY 4. ALERT_KEY 5. MODE_BLK Target Actual Permitted Normal 6. BLOCK_ERR 7. RS_STATE 8. TEST_RW 9. DD_RESOURCE 10. MANUFAC_ID 11. DEV_TYPE 12. DEV_REV 13. DD_REV 14. GRANT_DENY 15. HARD_TYPES 16. RESTART 17. FEATURES 18. FEATURE_SEL 19. CYCLE_TYPE Value dynamic Any text 1 1 AUTO dynamic O/S+AUTO AUTO dynamic dynamic dynamic fixed

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Parameter Mnemonic 20. CYCLE_SEL 21. MIN_CYCLE_T 22. MEMORY_SIZE 23. NV_CYCLE_T 24. FREE_SPACE 25. FREE_TIME 26. SHED_RCAS 27. SHED_ROUT 28. FAULT_STATE 29. SET_FSTATE 30. CLR_FSTATE 31. MAX_NOTIFY 32. LIM_NOTIFY 33. CONFIRM_TIME 34. WRITE_LOCK 35. UPDATE_EVT 36. BLOCK_ALM 37. ALARM_SUM Disabled 38. ACK_OPTION 39. WRITE_PRI 40. WRITE_ALM 41. ITK_VER

PRELIMINARY 1.1
value Copy from CYCLE_TYPE fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed 640000 640000 dynamic OFF (1) OFF (1) fixed Bigger one from (3, MAX_NOTIFY) 640000 Unlocked (1) dynamic dynamic Other components are dynamic 0 Auto Ack Enabled (1) 0 dynamic fixed

fixed fixed fixed fixed dynamic fixed Do not write here fixed Copy from FEATURES *1) fixed

Notes: *1) Do not set Fault State Supported bit of FEATURES_SEL unless you definitely need Fault State. See also note 1 for AO block in Table B-8.

Table B-5 Recommended Parameter Values of Resource Block

Parameter Mnemonic 1. ST_REV 2. TAG_DESC 3. STRATEGY 4. ALERT_KEY 5. MODE_BLK Target Actual Permitted Normal 6. BLOCK_ERR 7. UPDATE_EVT 8. BLOCK_ALM 9. TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY 10. TRANSDUCER_TYPE 11. XD_ERROR 12. COLLECTION_DIRECTORY 13. PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE 14. PRIMARY_VALUE

Value dynamic Any text 1 1 AUTO dynamic O/S+AUTO AUTO dynamic dynamic dynamic fixed fixed dynamic fixed fixed dynamic

Parameter Mnemonic 15. CAL_POINT_HI 16. CAL_POINT_LO 17. CAL_MIN_SPAN 18. CAL_UNIT 19. SENSOR_TYPE 20. SENSOR_RANGE 21. SENSOR_SN 22. SENSOR_CAL_METHOD 23. SENSOR_CAL_LOC 24. SENSOR_CAL_DATE 25. SENSOR_CAL_WHO 26. SENSOR_ISOLATOR_MTL 27. SENSOR_FILL_FLUID 28. SECONDARY_VALUE 29. SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT

value Written by calibrator Written by calibrator fixed Written by calibrator fixed fixed fixed Written by calibrator Written by calibrator Written by calibrator Written by calibrator fixed fixed dynamic

Notes: *1) This table shows typical Transducer Block parameters. Since Transducer Block parameters depend on the physical principle, your Transducer Block may have different parameters. Do not forget to set STRATEGY, ALERT_KEY and MODE_BLOCK to above values in any case.

Table B-6 Recommended Parameter Values of Transducer Block

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 20

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

Parameter Mnemonic 1. ST_REV 2. TAG_DESC 3. STRATEGY 4. ALERT_KEY 5. MODE_BLK Target Actual Permitted Normal 6. BLOCK_ERR 7. PV 8. OUT 9. SIMULATE Simulate Status Simulate Value Transducer Status Transducer Value En/Disable 10. XD_SCALE EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point 11. OUT_SCALE EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point 12. GRANT_DENY 13. IO_OPTS 14. STATUS_OPTS 15. CHANNEL 16. L_TYPE 17. LOW_CUT 18. PV_FTIME 19. FIELD_VAL 20. UPDATE_EVT 21. BLOCK_ALM 22. ALARM_SUM Current Unacknowledged Unreported Disabled 23. ACK_OPTION 24. ALARM_HYS 25. HI_HI_PRI 26. HI_HI_LIM 27. HI_PRI 28. HI_LIM 29. LO_PRI 30. LO_LIM 31. LO_LO_PRI 32. LO_LO_LIM 33. HI_HI_ALM 34. HI_ALM 35. LO_ALM 36. LO_LO_ALM

Application AI1

Application AI2 dynamic Any text 1 1 AUTO dynamic O/S+MAN+AUTO AUTO dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic Disable

Application AI3

100 0 Transducer unit 1 100 0 Output unit 1

P1 P0 psi any

L1 F1 L0 F0 inch GPM any any dynamic Low Cutoff Propagate Fault Forward Appropriate value starting from 1 to receive transducer block output Direct Indirect Indirect Sq Root 0 0 Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic 0 Auto Ack Enabled (1) 0.5 0 +Infinity 0 +Infinity 0 -Infinity 0 -Infinity dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic

Table B-7 Recommended Parameter Values of AI Block

Page 21 Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information
Parameter Mnemonic Application-1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Application-2 Parameter Mnemonic

PRELIMINARY 1.1
Application-1 Application-2

1. ST_REV 2. TAG_DESC 3. STRATEGY 4. ALERT_KEY 5. MODE_BLK

Target Actual Permitted Normal

dynamic Any test 1 1 CAS+AUTO dynamic O/S+MAN+AUTO+CAS+RCAS CAS+AUTO dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic
dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic Disable

13. GRANT_DENY 14. IO_OPTS

dynamic SP-PV track in MAN +SP-PV track in LO *1)

6. BLOCK_ERR 7. PV 8. SP 9. OUT 10. SIMULATE

Simulate Status Simulate Value Transducer Status Transducer Value En/Disable

11. PV_SCALE
EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point

100 0 % 1 100 0 % 1

15. STATUS_OPTS 16. READBACK 17. CAS_IN 18. SP_RATE_DN 19. SP_RATE_UP 20. SP_HI_LIM 21. SP_LO_LIM 22. CHANNEL 23. FSTATE_TIME 24. FSTATE_VAL 25. BKCAL_OUT 26. RCAS_IN 27. SHED_OPT 28. RCAS_OUT 29. UPDATE_EVT 30. BLOCK_ALM

+Use PV for BKCAL_OUT NONE dynamic dynamic +Infinity +Infinity 100 0 Use 1 for experiment 0 *1) 0 *1) Dynamic Dynamic Normal Shed Normal Return (1) dynamic dynamic dynamic

12. XD_SCALE
EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point

Notes: *1) This configuration is for typical applications where control valves should remain at the current position when the data from controlling block becomes bad by communication error or block malfunction. If the process is very critical and the valve must become to pre-defined position when the control data is not available, use Fault State option. Set Fault state to Value + Use Fault state Value in restart of IO_OPTS. Give safety position to FSTATE_VAL and the time to go to Fault State in seconds to FSTATE_TIME. You must set Fault State Supported bit in FEATURES_SEL of Resource Block. See also note 1 for Resource block in Table B-5.

Table B-8 Recommended Parameter Values of AO Block

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 22

PRELIMINARY 1.1
Parameter Mnemonic Application PID1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Application PID2 Parameter Mnemonic

Technical Information
Application PID1
Application PID2

1. ST_REV 2. TAG_DESC 3. STRATEGY 4. ALERT_KEY 5. MODE_BLK

Target Actual Permitted Normal

dynamic Any test 1 1 AUTO+CAS dynamic O/S+MAN+AUTO+CAS+RCAS+R OUT AUTO AUTO+CAS dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic 100 0 % 1 100 0 % 1 dynamic No OUT limits in MAN +Obey SP limits if CAS or RCAS 1) + 3 more * AUTO

30. BKCAL_HYS 31. BKCAL_OUT 32. RCAS_IN 33. ROUT_IN 34. SHED_OPT 35. RCAS_OUT 36. ROUT_OUT 37. TRK_SCALE
EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point

0.5 dynamic dynamic dynamic Normal Shed Normal Return (1) dynamic dynamic

6. BLOCK_ERR 7. PV 8. SP 9. OUT 10. PV_SCALE

EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point

38. TRK_IN_D 39. TRK_VAL 40. FF_VAL 41. FF_SCALE

EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point

100 0 % 1 dynamic dynamic dynamic 100 0 % 1 0 dynamic dynamic

Other components are dynamic 0 Auto Ack Enabled (1)

11. OUT_SCALE
EU@100% EU@0% Units Index Decimal Point

12. GRANT_DENY 13. CONTROL_OPTS

42. FF_GAIN 43. UPDATE_EVT 44. BLOCK_ALM 45. ALARM_SUM

Disabled

14. STATUS_OPTS 15. IN 16. PV_FTIME 17. BYPASS 18. CAS_IN 19. SP_RATE_DN 20. SP_RATE_UP 21. SP_HI_LIM 22. SP_LO_LIM 23. GAIN 24. RESET 25. BAL_TIME 26. RATE 27. BKCAL_IN 28. OUT_HI_LIM 29. OUT_LO_LIM

Target to MAN if BAD IN * dynamic 0 OFF (1) dynamic +Infinity +Infinity 100 0 1 10 0 0 dynamic 100 0

46. ACK_OPTION 47. ALARM_HYS 48. HI_HI_PRI 49. HI_HI_LIM 50. HI_PRI 51. HI_LIM 52. LO_PRI 53. LO_LIM 54. LO_LO_PRI 55. LO_LO_LIM 56. DV_HI_PRI 57. DV_HI_LIM 58. DV_LO_PRI 59. DV_LO_LIM 60. HI_HI_ALM 61. HI_ALM 62. LO_ALM 63. LO_LO_ALM 64. DV_HI_ALM 65. DV_LO_ALM

0.5 0 +Infinity 0 +Infinity 0 -Infinity 0 -Infinity 0 +Infinity 0 -Infinity dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic

Notes: *1) For Application PID2, add [SP-PV track in MAN+SP-PV track in LO or IMAN+SP-PV track in ROUT] to CONTROL_OPTS. *2) Add [Target to next permitted mode if BAD CAS_IN] to STATUS_OPTS if your tool is able to show this new option (from FF 1.4).

Table B-9 Recommended Parameter Values of PID Block

Page 23

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

9.6 Unit Codes

Fieldbus Foundation specified numeric code for engineering units. Here is an extract of important ones. It is much better to manipulate units with their unit text provided by DD instead of numeric expressions like this. They are listed here for your convenience in case that your human-machine interface provides raw data expressions only. Refer Foundation document for missing units.
pressure flow temperature

code 1130 1032 1133

1034 1035 1036 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1149 1150 mass

unit Pa MPa kPa

mPa Pa hPa ba mbar torr atm psi psia psig g/cm2 kg/cm2 inH2O inH2O(4C) mmH2O mmH2O(4C)

code 1322 1330 1351

1352 1353 1356 1357 1358 1363 volume

unit kg/s lb/s l/s

l/min l/h CFS CFM CFH GPM

code 1000 1001 1002

length

unit K C F unit
m km cm mm feet inch yard mile area

code
1010 1011 1012 1013 1018 1019 1020 1021

code 1034 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1517 1042

1043 1044 1046 1047 1048 1050 1051 velocity

unit m3 cm3 mm3 l cl ml kl in3

ft3 yd3 pint quart gallon bushel barrel

code 1023 1024 1025 1027

1030 1031 1032 1033 electricity

unit m2 km2 cm2 mm2

in2 ft2 yd2 mile2

code 1088 1089 1090 1092 1093 1094

density

unit kg g mg t oz lb unit kg/m3 g/cm3 t/m3 kg/l

lb/in3 lb/ft3 frequency

code 1097 1100 1102 1103

1106 1107

code 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065

1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075

unit m/s mm/s m/h km/h knot

in/s ft/s yd/s in/min ft/min yd/min in/h ft/h yd/h MPH

code 1209 1211 1234 1240 1242 1243 1281 1284

time

unit A mA V/m V kV mV k unit second s

minute hour day miscellaneous

code
1077 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1085

unit
Hz GHz MHz kHz 1/s 1/min RPM

code 1054 1057

1058 1059 1060

code 1342 1422 1423 1424

unit % pH ppm ppb

Table B-10 Major Unit Codes defined by Fieldbus Foundation (FF-903)

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 24

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

To find a device of specific PD Tag. Note that even when a node address of a device is cleared, it must be able to join communication. For that purpose, a special address range (0xF80xFB) is prepared and a device without address can join the network using one in this address range.

10. System Management

System Management is an important application for all Foundation devices. It manages device information and its behavior in a FOUNDATION fieldbus system.

10.1 Device Management

A device on a FOUNDATION fieldbus can be identified from others by using one of three identifiers: Device Identifier (ID): A text string unique to the device in the world given by manufacturer. It is burnt in the device and will never change. Physical Device (PD) Tag: A unique name in the plant or a set of fieldbus segments, assigned by the user. It is used to identify a device for specific application purpose in the plant. (Physical) Node Address: A number of eight-bit length, unique in a fieldbus segment assigned by the user through network configuration.

10.2 Function Block Management

As explained in section 8.2 of this textbook, Function Block algorithm must start in a defined time. System Management Agent stores Function Block scheduling information and starts assigned Function Block at the desired time. Macro Cycle is the period of overall application and the schedule is designed as an offset time from the start of macro cycle.

10.3 Application Time Management

All System Management Agents in a system keep an application time (or system time). It is used to record an event with time stamp. System time and Link Scheduling (LS) time is not equal. LS-time is local in Data Link layer and used for communication and Function Block execution. System time is more universal and same in all devices in a system consisting of multiple fieldbus segments.

Device ID is unique to the device and the same Device ID does not exit in the world. It is given by the manufacturer and therefore good for management purpose. PD Tag is assigned by user to identify usage of the device in the plant. It is a text of 32 characters long. It is a common practice to give the same PD Tag to a new device replacing old broken device. Since Device ID and PD Tag is very long (32 bytes), it is not good to use them in the daily communication, especially in 31.25kbps low speed network. Instead, Node Address is used to identify devices in communication. Services to correlate those three identifiers are provided. For example, a pressure transmitter is shipped with a permanent Device ID 59454300031999DEC22001102344 and configured to have PD Tag FI1001 and node address 0xF5. System Management Agent in a field device responds to System Management Kernel Protocol (SMKP) requests from a manager to configure the device. Its functionality is: To know information on a device at a specific address, including Device ID, manufacturer, device name and type, To clear and set node address to the device of specific Device ID, To clear and give PD Tag to a device, and

11. Device Information Files

Several applications such as human-machine interface and fieldbus configuration need more information of devices. Several files are standardized by the Fieldbus Foundation to make devices interoperable and help your engineers.

11.1 Device Description

Device Description (DD) gives you information of blocks. You can read a function block parameter by name and display it properly according to its data type and display specification. This is very useful in handling enumerated parameter. For example, you have only to tell psi instead of its value 1042. Whenever you get a new device, you are able to use its full functionality simply installing its DD without updating host software. You can run DD Method for a dedicated procedure (sequence of communications) for calibration, diagnosis and so on. DD Menu shows a list of DD Methods. DD is useful for human-machine interface and the system configuration/maintenance. You can control process without the help of DD.

Page 25

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

11.1.2 Device Description Service

Gives information on parameters especially non-standard parameters
Name and explanation Data structure and attribute Access right Help menu Calibration methods, etc.

Device Description Service (DDS) is software for your human-machine interface. It retrieves information in DD binary by using a key DD Item ID stored in FMS Object Description of a parameter. DD binary files are stored in the following directory structure: <DD home directory> +- Manufacturer ID +--- Device type Manufacturer ID is a unique code given to the manufacturer by Fieldbus Foundation. You can identify the manufacturer of the device from this ID. It is thee byte in length and shown in hexadecimal expression with six characters. Yokogawas manufacturer ID is 594543, which stands for YEC. Device type identifies device from the manufacturer with two byte data or four-character hexadecimal. Yokogawas EJA has device type 0003.

Enables a standard screen show a new device

Values are read from the device over the fieldbus.
25.50 %
Fie ldb us
Measured_Value

Number of digits to display Engineering Unit Label of the value

Device Descriptions are provided from vendors and distributed from the Fieldbus Foundation

Figure B-7

11.1.1 What are DDL and DD?

DDL is the specification of Device Description Language, with which a device designer can describe the device functionality and data semantics. This text is then compiled with tokenizer software to generate DD binary files. DD binary consists of two files. One is DD binary with extension .ffo while the other is DD symbol list with extension .sym . Once they are installed in your machine, you will have a full access of the device. It is not a good idea for device vendors to write its full information individually. Instead, Fieldbus Foundation provides DD Library, which gives common DD and dictionary. A device vendor has only to describe its special part with DDL. DD binary files can be small by this convention. Figure B-8 shows hierarchical structure of DD. Fieldbus Foundation specifies standard part of blocks and provides DD library. Device profiles are under development to define a common part of various devices such as temperature transmitter and flow meter. Vendor-specific part is specified in their individual DD files.
Foundation Specification

11.2 Capabilities File

Capabilities File gives you information of device capability of both Network/System Management and Function Block. Though certain part of the information resides in the device itself, this file is useful for offline configuration where you can configure a fieldbus system without having real devices. A Capabilities file has an extension .cff.. Capabilities file is often called CFF, which stands for Common File Format. Figure B-9 shows how common files are used during the system design and maintenance.
Uploaded Value File Value File to Download Resource File for System Design Manufacturer Site

A new device

Handheld Communicator

Downloader

Block Formal Model Resource Transducer Block Block

Device Profile Flow Temp

Off-line System Design

PID

System Builder User Site

Network and System Design

Figure B-9

Extension

Extension Individual DD

Extension

Figure B-8

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 26

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

Part-C Managing Fieldbus Projects

This part gives you an example of fieldbus project management. Again, fieldbus is an enabling technology and is not going to wipe out your expertise in projects. Major steps and procedures must remain as they were, and you have only to add knowledge and experience of fieldbus-based control and measurement. Let us use an example project summarized in Figure C-1, which is a waste condensation plant of 15 feet 20 feet, consisting of 12 transmitters and 2 control valves forming a single loop and a cascade loop. This part gives you key items for your consideration in managing this project. Though the selection of devices is one of the most important items to be considered, it is often beyond the technical consideration and therefore described very briefly in this textbook.
Header
PT-101 PT

12.1 Devices on a Bus

How many devices do you put on a fieldbus segment? An economical analysis says twelve devices are many enough to enjoy the cost reduction from the first place. It is also said four or five devices are profitable in a renovation project from 4-20mA installation. Since our example project is a brand new plant, you may want to have all devices on a segment. Let us study the conditions to limit the number of devices before we reach the final decision. Communication Specifications Physical Layer restricts the number of devices as described in the next section. Data Link Layer specifies the address of 8-bit length. Because some of these are reserved for special purposes, the actual address range for field devices is 232. This value is still large enough and you dont have to take it account. Power Supply and IS Barrier If a bus-powered device is hooked on the fieldbus, the necessary power must be fed through the fieldbus from a power supply somewhere on the network. The capacity of the power supply must be larger than the total amount of the average current consumption of all bus-powered devices on the fieldbus. In the Intrinsic Safe fieldbus, the number of devices in the hazardous area is strictly limited by the total energy supplied through the safety barrier.

Flash Tank

LT-104 LT TT TT-102 LT-203 LT

LT-103 LT

Steam

Pump

LIC

CV-204

To Stack

FT-206 FT TT-205 TI

FIC

AT-202
PH

FT-201 FI

FT-207

TT-107

Drain

Cooler

FT-106 CV-105

To D1 & D2

Figure C-1

Since our example is not an I.S. installation and you have external power supplies of 350mA, they should not affect our decision. Application Interaction It is better to put interacting Function Blocks on one segment to avoid Function Block linkage over a bridge. A control loop is an example. Application interaction needs communication services over the fieldbus. The more you have interactions, the more communication demands increase. If the communication throughput is not fast enough to transfer all the data, this would also limit the number of devices on the fieldbus. A rough and safe estimation is as follows. Count the number of Function Block linkages in different devices (number of Publishers). Count the number of control blocks and output blocks (communication for Human-machine interface). Add two numbers to multiply 50ms. If the product in milliseconds is greater than 80% of control period (macro cycle), this configuration is risky and you would better to remove devices. Detailed throughput analysis is available in system design phase.

12. Planning Phase

When you start planning of this project, you may want to minimize the initial cost of the project. Your plant will survive, however, for decades and you need to consider the overall cost of the plant also. Fieldbus is not an exception. You would better to take a marginal design and reduce the future risk. Let us count devices first. They are summarized as follows:
Number 4 3 1 3 1 2 Devices Flow Transmitter Level Transmitter Pressure Transmitter Temperature Transmitter pH Transmitter Control Valve

Page 27

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

Risk Management If a device on the fieldbus fails, there is a slight possibility that it destroys the whole communication. In the worst case, no measured values can be accessible through the fieldbus and the control activities may be interrupted. The same situation can happen even by a loose wire or short circuits of the fieldbus cable. It is highly recommended to limit the number of control loops on a fieldbus segment to avoid a serious situation caused by this type of "worst mode failure. Our Project In the case of our project, we saw power supplies should not be the problem. Wiring should not be either because our plant is very small. Since we have a cascade control loop and a single loop, it is better to put them in different segments for risk management. A cascade loop has three Function Block linkages and a single loop has one, each segment can have more than ten monitoring input blocks within the throughput. In our cases 10 to 12 devices can be on a segment. Then let us conclude two segments. Number of power supplies and host interface modules shall be 2. Now you can order all instruments including bus power supplies and terminators except the cable.

Now you are able to order cables and their supplements (conduit, mating connectors, etc.). Trunk is type B cable while spurs are made of type A cable. Assign field devices tags to identify which segment they should be connected. Figure C-3 shows wiring.

12.3 System Design

Now you have a list of devices and available Function Blocks on each segment. Connect all AI Function Blocks except ones on LI-103, FI-106, FI207 to monitoring application on the host Control loops are combinations of AI, PID and AO blocks. Figure C-2 shows the connection of them for cascade level control. PID block in the valve controls the flow (FIC110) while that in the level transmitter controls the level (LIC110). Target mode is also shown.
AUTO
LI-103
LI10003

CAS
BKCAL_OUT

LIC110 OUT SP IN BKCAL_IN

PID

OUT

CV-105 FI-106
FI1006 FC100 FIC110 BKCAL_OUT CAS_IN OUT IN BKCAL_IN

AO
CAS_IN BKCAL_OUT

OUT

PID

12.2 Wiring Design

Your next step is to design wiring. Let us review wiring design rules first. Rule 1: Number of devices on a fieldbus is between 2 and 32. Rule 2: Cable is a twisted pair of individual shield (type A) with 18 AWG wires. Rule 3: Overall cable length does not exceed 1900m. Rule 4: Overall spur length does not exceed 120m. Maximum number of devices decreases according to the spur length as shown in the table A-1. Rule 5: When you use multiple twisted pairs with overall shield (type B), the total length decreases to 1200m. We could use type B cable for trunk because all instruments are installed near the tank. Measure the each spur length from the junction box to devices. Put devices to the segment within the 120m limit of total spur length. Make sure devices to form control loop are on the same segment. We have two segments (red and blue in Figure C-1).

Link via communication Internal link

Figure C-2

Determine block parameters as explained in Part B of this textbook. Configuration software generates other parameters for communication. Display the generated schedule to see how your fieldbus is busy.

13. Installation Phase

You can decrease installation period by using remote-configuration feature of fieldbus devices. Your engineers do not have to go to the field so frequently as they did with traditional 4-20mA devices.

13.1 Installation
Device installation is completely same to that for 420mA devices using installation and wiring drawings. It is recommended to assign PD tags to the devices before installation so that the device of correct tag is installed at the correct location in the plant.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 28

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

Trunk of wiring is the cable with terminators in each end. Other part is called spur and should be within 120 m in total. Wiring from junction box to devices can be a tree (or chicken-foot) topology if the spur length is within this limit. Figure C-3 shows the wiring plan.

14.1 Control Operation

During the operation phase, operators must be able to watch the plant operation and take over the control if needed. Input monitoring, loop display, manual operations, process alarm display are available through the host human-machine interface. There is no change from traditional control and the operators need no additional training.

HMI Terminators
ooo ooo ooo ooo

PT-101 PT

Host I/F Power Supplies

LT-104 LT TT TT-102 LT-103 LT

Control Room

LT-203 LT

15. Maintenance Phase

CV-204 FT FIC

LIC

600 ft
FT-206 FT FIC

Type B Trunk Type A Spur

FT
PH

FT-207

TT-107

TI TT-205 FT-106 CV-105

AT-202

FT-201

Figure C-3

Once the plant is in operation, it is in maintenance phase at the same time. You should be able to maintain the fieldbus control system during the plant operation. DD-based software is helpful for daily maintenance such as calibration and pH electrode cleaning.

15.1 Device Alarms 13.2 Commissioning

After connecting devices to the wire, turn on the power supply to check whether all devices are operational. If they dont have correct tag or address, assign them with appropriate configuration software. Download configuration to all devices as well as host interface module. All input values should be visible on the host screen. Your plant may not be operational yet at the commissioning. Simulation function is useful for this purpose. Turn on the simulation switch in a device. The location of the switch should be explained in the device instruction manual. Write Enable to Simulate.DisEnable parameter of AI and AO blocks, then the blocks use value and status that you write in the simulation field. You can check the display and control loops indicate correct value as designed. Do not forget to disable simulate hardware switch after the commissioning. When a device detects a problem in its operation, it reports a device alarm to you. It might be the sensor burnt out, loss of air, leak or something else. Before you go to the device location, you can see what the alarm tells. Open your diagnosis window and see reported alarms. Device may provide more information in Resource Block or Transducer Block. Electronic manual may be useful and diagnosis software shows the details of the problem in text retrieved by DD.

15.2 Replacing a faulty Device

When you need a faulty device replaced, follow this procedure. Make sure the plant is safely operating even when a device malfunctioned. Locate the replacing device in your stock. It must be the same device of the same revision. It is recommended to give it device tag and address before connecting it to the operating fieldbus. This clears all communication configurations and prevents any surprise in adding a device of unknown configuration to the operating fieldbus. Disconnect the faulty device from the bus. Be careful to not short-circuit the bus. When the wire is connected with screw terminals, remove the screws as quickly as possible to avoid a chattering cause undesired interrupt of the communication momentarily.

13.3 Startup and Test Operation

Instrumentation system over fieldbus is now operational. You can run the plant for test. Input values may need damping for smooth recording. You are able to tune PID parameters of the loops. After the test operation and tuning, upload tuned block parameters so that you can use them when the device is malfunctioned.

14. Operation Phase

Operation phase should not change from traditional system.
Page 29 Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

Replace the device and connect the wire again following the notes above. The device should start communication in seconds. When you set the tag and address before connecting the replacement, it joins the token rotation and stays inactive for control and measurement. Download the configuration as well as the tuned parameters to the device to recover the operating condition. The applications using this device will be operational. Make sure the whole plant comes back to the normal state.

Install them to the plant and connect the to the fieldbus using additional spurs with the same care for device replacement. Add them to your applications and download configurations to the devices. If the device addition does not change control strategy, this addition does not affect other devices and therefore you can add them without disturbing the plant operation.

16.2 Device Upgrade

Suppose you want to upgrade existing smart transmitter to fieldbus and add the existing fieldbus segments. Device vendor may provide upgrade kit from smart to fieldbus. In that case, you dont have to remove the installed instrument from the plant. Just replace necessary electronics parts for upgrade. Then you can add this device as an additional device to the fieldbus as explained in the previous section. Several fieldbus device supports field software upgrade so that you can have more functionality by this upgrade. Follow the instruction from the device vendor.

15.3 Asset Management

You may want to have information of devices in the field. When you do any maintenance, you keep the record what you did to the device. When a device malfunctioned, you need to find the replacement. Management software package for such information on your asset is often very helpful. It is also necessary to plan the plant shutdown for preventive maintenance. Figure C-4 shows an example of the management package.

Figure C-4

16. Renovation Phase

When you plan to renovate your plant, you can shorten the plant shutdown period by using online upgrade feature of fieldbus.

16.1 Addition of Applications

Suppose you plan to add temperature measurement at two points to this plant. Your power supply has enough capacity for additional devices. Since you designed wiring with a good margin, you can add two transmitters to the existing fieldbus segments.

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 30

PRELIMINARY 1.1

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical Information

Acronyms
AC AI APL AO ASN.1 AUTO AWG BG CCITT CAS CD CF CFF CL COTS CPU CS CT DC DC DC DCS DD DDL DDS Device ID DI DLCEP DLL DLSAP DT DT DO EC EU EUC ETS FAS FB FB FCS FDA FF FMS Gbps (Gbit/s) HMI ID IEC IMAN
Page 31

Alternating Current Analog Input Function Block Application layer Analog Output Function Block Abstract Syntax Notation 1 Automatic mode American Wire Gauge Bias/Gain Station Block International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee Cascade mode Compel Data DLPDU Capabilities File Common File Format Claim LAS DLPDU Commercial off the Shelf Central Processing Unit Control Selector Function Block Compel Time DLPDU Direct Current Disconnect Connection DLPDU Device Control Block Distributed Control System Device Description Device Description Language Device Description Service Device Identifier Discrete Input Function Block Data Link Connection End Point Data Link Layer Data Link Service Access Point Data Transfer DLPDU Dead Time Function Block Discrete Output Function Block Establish Connection DLPDU Engineering Unit End User Council Enterprise Technology Solutions Fieldbus Access Sublayer Fieldbus Function Block Frame Check Sequence Field Device Access Fieldbus Foundation Fieldbus Message Specification Gigabit per second Human Machine Interface Identifier International Electro-technical Commission Initialize Manual mode

IP IS ISA ISO IT IT Kbps (kbit/s) kHz LAN LAS LL LM LO LS Time mA MAC MAI MAN MAO Mbps (Mbit/s) MDI MDO ML NM NMIB OD OS O/S OSI PC PCI PD PDU PD Tag PHL (PHY) PID PLC PN PR PT PV RA RB RCAS RI ROUT RQ RR

Internet Protocol Intrinsic Safety International Society of Measurement and Control International Organization of Standard Information Technology Integrator Function Block kilobits per second kilohertz Local Area Network Link Active Scheduler Lead Lag Function Block Link Master Local Override mode Link Scheduling Time Milliampere Medium Access Control Multiple Analog Input Block Manual mode Multiple Analog Output Block Megabit per second Multiple Discrete Input Block Multiple Discrete Output Block Manual Loader Function Block Network Management Network Management Information Base Object Dictionary Output Splitter Block Out of Service mode Open System Interconnect Personal Computer Protocol Control Information PD Control Function Block Protocol Data Unit Physical Device Tag Physical Layer PID Function Block Programmable Logic Controller Probe Node DLPDU Probe Response DLPDU Pass Token DLPDU Process Value Ratio Station Block Resource Block Remote Cascade mode Request Interval DLPDU Remote Output mode Round-trip Time Query DLPDU Round-trip Time Response DLPDU

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Technical Information

FOUNDATION Fieldbus

PRELIMINARY 1.1

RT SC SDU SM SMIB SMKP SP SP50 TB TCO TCP TD TL UDP VCR VFD VIEW WAN

Return Token DLPDU Signal Characterizer Block Service Data Unit System Management System Management Information Base System Management Kernel Protocol Set Point Standard and Practice committee 50 Transducer Block Total Cost of Ownership Transfer Control Protocol Time Distribution DLPDU Transfer LAS DLPDU User Data Protocol Virtual Communication Relationship Virtual Field Device View Object Wide Area Network

Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2000

Page 32

<Int> <Ind> <Rev>

Toc-1

CS 1000/CS 3000 Foundation Fieldbus Tools

IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition

CONTENTS
1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication .................................................. 1-1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 What is Fieldbus? ........................................................................................... 1-2 Configuration of Fieldbus System ................................................................. 1-3 Component Equipment of Fieldbus System ................................................. 1-8 Fieldbus Hardware ........................................................................................ 1-10 Software for Configuring a Fieldbus System .............................................. 1-15 Fieldbus System Engineering ...................................................................... 1-16 Device Management ..................................................................................... 1-24 Operation and Monitoring ............................................................................ 1-25 System Maintenance .................................................................................... 1-28 Glossary ........................................................................................................ 1-29

2. 3.

Fieldbus Communication Module .......................................................... 2-1 FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus ................................................... 3-1
3.1 3.2 3.3 Position of Fieldbus Block ............................................................................. 3-2 FCS Control Functions Related to the Fieldbus ............................................ 3-4 Connection to Fieldbus Block ...................................................................... 3-12 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.4 Connection to the Faceplate Block .................................................. 3-15 Connection to the Regulatory Control Block .................................... 3-24 Connection to the Sequence Control Block ..................................... 3-27 Connection to the Calculation Block ................................................ 3-32 Connection to the Off-Site Block ..................................................... 3-36 List of Parameters that can be Connected ...................................... 3-37

Reliability ....................................................................................................... 3-48

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<Int> <Ind> <Rev>

Toc-2
What is Fieldbus Engineering? ...................................................................... 4-2 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 Positioning of Fieldbus-Related System Builders .............................. 4-3 Fieldbus Engineering Flow ................................................................ 4-6 Overview of System Builders Related to Fieldbus ............................. 4-9 Create New IOM Dialog Box ........................................................... 4-14 Download to IOM ............................................................................ 4-21 IOM Builder .................................................................................... 4-22 Download from IOM Builder ............................................................ 4-29 Control Drawing Builder .................................................................. 4-30 Start Fieldbus Engineering Tool ...................................................... 4-31

System Builders Related to Fieldbus..................................................... 4-1

4.1

4.2

System Builders ............................................................................................ 4-12 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6

4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6

Test Function ................................................................................................. 4-32 Engineering and Startup Procedure for Fieldbus System .......................... 4-33 Procedure for Modifications After Fieldbus System Startup...................... 4-37 On-line Maintenance ..................................................................................... 4-39

Fieldbus Engineering Tool ..................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Overview of Fieldbus Engineering Tool ......................................................... 5-2 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.1.8 5.1.9 5.1.10 5.1.11 5.1.12 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 What is the Fieldbus Engineering Tool? ............................................ 5-3 Position of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool .......................................... 5-4 Features of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool ...................................... 5-17 Operating Environment Requirements ............................................ 5-20 Overview of Fieldbus Engineering Tool ........................................... 5-23 Project Manager ............................................................................. 5-25 Editors ............................................................................................ 5-38 Utilities ............................................................................................ 5-49 Network Startup .............................................................................. 5-52 Maintenance ................................................................................... 5-54 Directory Structure for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool ...................... 5-55 Configuration Procedure Using Fieldbus Engineering Tool .............. 5-58 Procedure for Initial Setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool .......... 5-61 Calling Project Manager .................................................................. 5-63 Setting Security .............................................................................. 5-65 Configuring Control Bus .................................................................. 5-67 Setting Environment ....................................................................... 5-68 Importing Capabilities Files and DD Files to System Database ....... 5-70 Setting Procedure for the Project and Fieldbus Device .................... 5-75 Creating a New Project or Opening a Project .................................. 5-78 Importing Capabilities Files and DD Files to the Project Database .. 5-82 Importing Device Configuration Data to the Project Database ......... 5-84
IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

Initial Settings of Fieldbus Engineering Tool .............................................. 5-60

Setting Project and Fieldbus Device ............................................................ 5-74

<Int> <Ind> <Rev>

Toc-3
5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10 5.3.11 5.3.12 5.3.13 Calling Device Editor ...................................................................... 5-85 Display Device ID ........................................................................... 5-87 Registering a Device to the Project ................................................. 5-91 Calling Network Editor .................................................................... 5-94 Setting or Changing Network Parameters ....................................... 5-96 Changing Device Parameters ......................................................... 5-98 Upload to the Project Database .................................................... 5-105 Updating Capability File and DD File ............................................. 5-108 Replace Fieldbus Device, Update Capability File and DD File ........ 5-110 Procedure for Setting the FBAP ..................................................... 5-112 Calling FB Editor ............................................................................ 5-115 Create a New or Open a FBAP Block Diagram .............................. 5-116 Placement of Function Blocks in the FBAP Block Diagram ............. 5-119 Connecting Function Blocks ......................................................... 5-124 Other Operations Related to Creating the FBAP Block Diagram ... 5-129 Setting Block Parameters ............................................................. 5-131 Generation of the FBAP Configuration .......................................... 5-137 Creating FBAP Schedule .............................................................. 5-140 Output Host File Set ...................................................................... 5-150 Project Startup Procedure ............................................................. 5-152 Opening or Importing a Project ..................................................... 5-155 Changing a Registered Device ID ................................................. 5-156 Advanced LM Settings .................................................................. 5-157 Executing Project Startup ............................................................. 5-158 Project Backup ............................................................................. 5-173 Project Manager Error Messages ................................................. 5-176 Export and Import Error Messages ............................................... 5-178 Download Error Messages ............................................................ 5-180 Upload Error Messages ................................................................ 5-188 Error Messages Regarding to Upgrading Capability File and DD File ......................................................................................... 5-190 Error Messages Regarding to Display Device ID ........................... 5-191 Device Editor Error Messages ...................................................... 5-192 Network Editor Error Messages .................................................... 5-193 FB Editor Error Messages ............................................................. 5-194 Schedule Dialog Box Error Messages ........................................... 5-197 Parameter Dialog Box Error Messages ......................................... 5-198 Error Messages for Other Dialog Boxes ........................................ 5-199

5.4

Settings for FBAP ........................................................................................ 5-111 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10

5.5

Project Startup ............................................................................................ 5-151 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6

5.6

Fieldbus Engineering Tool Error Messages .............................................. 5-175 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.6.11 5.6.12

5.7

Connecting DAQ Station ............................................................................ 5-200

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<Int> <Ind> <Rev>

Toc-4
Overview of Device Management Tool .......................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.1.6 6.1.7 What is Device Management Tool? ................................................... 6-3 Position of the Device Management Tool .......................................... 6-4 Operating Environment of Device Management Tool ........................ 6-8 Application Capacities of Device Management Tool ........................ 6-10 Functional Overview of Device Management Tool ............................ 6-11 Naming Rules in Device Management Tool ..................................... 6-12 Window Configuration of Device Management Tool ........................ 6-14 User Registration ............................................................................ 6-17 Security Check ............................................................................... 6-19 Device Tag List Registration ............................................................ 6-21 Auto Setup ...................................................................................... 6-29 Device Tag List Display ................................................................... 6-31

Device Management Tool ...................................................................... 6-1

6.1

6.2

Security Settings of Device Management Tool ........................................... 6-16 6.2.1 6.2.2

6.3

6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12

Fieldbus Device Status Display ................................................................... 6-33 Fieldbus Device Parameter Display and Setting ......................................... 6-36 Run a Device Method .................................................................................... 6-42 Message Display ........................................................................................... 6-46 Operational History Display ......................................................................... 6-57 Event Display ................................................................................................ 6-59 Configuration of Control Bus ....................................................................... 6-64 Environment Setting ..................................................................................... 6-65 Maintenance .................................................................................................. 6-70 6.12.1 6.12.2 6.12.3 Creating Backup and Restoring Database ...................................... 6-71 Optimizing and Repairing Database ................................................ 6-72 Deleting Database .......................................................................... 6-73

6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 6.17

Data Export .................................................................................................... 6-74 Printout .......................................................................................................... 6-75 On-line Help ................................................................................................... 6-76 Starting/Exiting Device Management Tool .................................................. 6-77 Login and Logout .......................................................................................... 6-78 6.17.1 6.17.2 6.17.3 Login .............................................................................................. 6-79 Logout ............................................................................................ 6-80 Setting and Changing Password ..................................................... 6-81 Bookmark Operation ....................................................................... 6-83 Printing ........................................................................................... 6-85 Print Preview .................................................................................. 6-86

6.18

Common Window Operations ...................................................................... 6-82 6.18.1 6.18.2 6.18.3

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<Int> <Ind> <Rev>

Toc-5
Device Tag List Registration ........................................................................ 6-87 6.19.1 6.19.2 6.19.3 Registering by Accessing Host File Set ........................................... 6-88 Registering when Host File Set can not be Accessed ...................... 6-95 Registering by Auto Setup Command ............................................. 6-98 Device Tag List Table Display ........................................................ 6-101 Individual Device Tag Display ....................................................... 6-104

6.19

6.20

Device Tag List Display Operations ........................................................... 6-100 6.20.1 6.20.2

6.21 6.22

Fieldbus Device Status Display Operations .............................................. 6-106 Parameter Display/Change Operations ..................................................... 6-109 6.22.1 6.22.2 Displaying Parameters ................................................................... 6-110 Changing Parameters .................................................................... 6-114

6.23 6.24 6.25 6.26 6.27 6.28 6.29

Method Execution ........................................................................................ 6-118 Message Display Operations ..................................................................... 6-122 History Message Display Operations ........................................................ 6-125 Maintenance Operations ............................................................................ 6-127 Event Display .............................................................................................. 6-131 Configuring Control Bus ............................................................................ 6-133 Environment Setting for Device Management Tool .................................. 6-134 6.29.1 6.29.2 Specifying Directories, OPC Server and DDE Server .................... 6-135 Options ......................................................................................... 6-139 Registering User Groups .............................................................. 6-142 Registering User ........................................................................... 6-145

6.30

Security Specification ................................................................................. 6-141 6.30.1 6.30.2

6.31

Export Operations ....................................................................................... 6-147

Fieldbus Support Tools .......................................................................... 7-1

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Position of Fieldbus Support Tools ............................................................... 7-3 Fieldbus Support Tools Operating Environment .......................................... 7-8 Device Tools .................................................................................................... 7-9 Using Device Tool ......................................................................................... 7-12 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.5 Starting Device Tool ........................................................................ 7-14 How the Device List Works ............................................................. 7-15 Setting Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address to Field Device .................................................................................... 7-17 Creating a Capabilities File ............................................................. 7-20 Exiting Device Tool ......................................................................... 7-23

Device Tool Error Message .......................................................................... 7-24

Installation of Tools ................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 Installing Fieldbus Tools ................................................................................ 8-4 Uninstalling Fieldbus Tools .......................................................................... 8-18 Installing the Fieldbus Support Tools .......................................................... 8-21 Uninstalling Fieldbus Support Tools ........................................................... 8-28

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

Blank Page

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-1

Overview of Fieldbus Communication

The fieldbus communication can be applied to the CS 1000 and CS 3000 to communicate with a field device using the fieldbus system. A fieldbus is a method of communication for a field device in which digital signals make it possible to communicate in both directions. A system that uses a fieldbus is called a fieldbus system. The CS 1000 and CS 3000 positions the fieldbus system as a subsystem. This chapter explains the configuration of the hardware and software for the fieldbus system to give an overview of the fieldbus communication. It also explains the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders, Fieldbus Engineering Tool, Device Management Tool, operation and monitoring function, as well as, the system maintenance tools, which are necessary for the construction and operation of a fieldbus system.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-2

1.1

What is Fieldbus?
The fieldbus is a bus type method of communication using digital signals to make it possible to communicate in both directions that replaces the 4 to 20 mA analog signal that was the earlier standard. By using the high level communication of the fieldbus, optimized control can be performed by working in concert with the distributed control and control station (FCS) using the fieldbus device.

Communication Using Fieldbus

Communication using the fieldbus replaces the 4 to 20 mA analog communication and hybrid communication that was the standard for the earlier instrumentation control system. Large quantities of highly precise data can be transmitted by fieldbus communication, as compared to the earlier communication method. The control system that uses a fieldbus is called a fieldbus system. Also, field devices that are connected to the fieldbus are generally referred to as fieldbus devices. With the CS 1000 and CS 3000, the fieldbus system is positioned as a subsystem for using the fieldbus. The fieldbus is connected to the FCS via the fieldbus communication module (ACF11 or ALF111). The ACF11 or ALF111 controls and monitors the communication status of the fieldbus. Unlike the earlier analog signal, more than one fieldbus device can be connected to one line with fieldbus communication. Fieldbus devices can communicate with each other in both directions and because of this, self-distribution control can be performed. Moreover, process information such as process data and system alarms generated by the fieldbus can be collected by the FCS and referenced through HIS. Using sophisticated control and calculation of the FCS, calculation results can be fed back to the fieldbus device. Fieldbus devices also can be operated and monitored from the HIS via the FCS function block. This enables the user to execute optimal control that meets with the condition of the system.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-3

1.2

Configuration of Fieldbus System

The fieldbus system consists of the HIS, general-purpose PC (Master PC, Slave PC), FCS, ACF11, ALF111and other hardware equipment. The fieldbus system can be configured with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed either in the HIS or in the PC.

Overall Configuration of the Fieldbus System

The H1 fieldbus, a fieldbus designed to be intrinsically safe, is connected to the fieldbus system. The overall configuration of the fieldbus system is described below. SEE ALSO
For information about configuring Fieldbus and Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-4

When the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded into the HIS

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be called from CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders in the HIS. This allows engineering in which the system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool are integrated. Shown below is an example of an overall configuration of the fieldbus system.
Ethernet System builders Operation and monitoring Fieldbus Engineering Tool VL net HIS Master PC Device Management Tool (*1)

PFCS

Slave PC Fieldbus Support Tools ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
*1: This tool can also be installed on the HIS. Human Interface Station Personal Computer (Connected on VL net) Personal Computer (Connected on H1 Fieldbus) Control Station Fieldbus Communication Module

Fieldbus device
010201E.EPS

HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: PFCS: ACF11:

Figure A System Configuration Where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded in the HIS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-5

When the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded into the HIS

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be called from CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders in the HIS. This allows engineering in which the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool are integrated. Shown below is an example of an overall configuration of the fieldbus system.
Ethernet System builders HIS Master PC Device Management Tool (*1)

Operation and monitoring Fieldbus Engineering Tool LFCS2/LFCS

SFCS

V net

FCU RIO bus NIU ACF11

ACF11

Slave PC Fieldbus Support Tools

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
*1: This tool can also be installed on the HIS. Human Interface Station General-purpose PC (Connected on VL net) General-purpose PC (Connected on H1 Fieldbus) Control Station (Compact Type) Control Station Field Control Unit Remote Input/Output Bus Node Interface Unit Fieldbus Communication Module

Fieldbus device
010202E.EPS

HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: SFCS: LFCS2/LFCS: FCU: RIO Bus: NIU: ACF11:

Figure A System Configuration Where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded in the HIS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-6

When the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded in the General-Purpose PC

Engineering can be performed with the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed in different machines. It is necessary to share the same disk for storing data for the system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Shown below is an example of an overall configuration of a fieldbus system.
Ethernet System builders Operation and monitoring Device Management Tool (*1) HIS Master PC Fieldbus Engineering Tool

PFCS

VL net

Slave PC ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
010203E.EPS

HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: PFCS: ACF11:

Figure A System Configuration Where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded in the PC

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-7

When the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded in the General-Purpose PC

Engineering can be performed with the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed in different machines. It is necessary to share the same disk for storing data for the system builders and for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Shown below is an example of an overall configuration of the fieldbus system.
Ethernet HIS System builders Operation and monitoring PC Fieldbus Engineering Tool Device Management Tool (*1)

LFCS2/LFCS

SFCS

VL net

FCU RIO bus NIU ACF11

ACF11

Slave PC Fieldbus Support Tools

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
010204E.EPS

HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: SFCS: LFCS2/LFCS: FCU: RIO Bus: NIU: ACF11:

Figure A System Configuration Where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is Loaded in the PC

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-8

1.3

Component Equipment of Fieldbus System

This section explains each of the equipment, the FCS, HIS and PC, that make up the fieldbus system.

Components of the Fieldbus System

The role of each equipment comprising the fieldbus system is explained below. SEE ALSO
For information about configuring Fieldbus and Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

Control Station (FCS)

This station performs instrumentation control and electrical control for the entire plant including the fieldbus system. It performs the role of an interface for CS 1000 or CS 3000 with the fieldbus devices via the fieldbus communication module (ACF11). SEE ALSO
Refer to the Field Control Stations (IM 33Q06C20-01E) for details on the FCS hardware.

Human Interface Station (HIS)

This station performs engineering for the fieldbus communication module (ACF11) using the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders. It can also perform engineering related to the communication and control of the fieldbus by using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Once the fieldbus system is running, the HIS uses the operation and monitoring functions and the Device Management Tool to operate and monitor the function block (fieldbus block) configured inside the fieldbus device.

General - Purpose Personal Computer (Mater PC)

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool and the fieldbus Device Management Tool can be installed to a dedicated PC instead of an HIS for engineering work. This PC can perform engineering related to the communication and control of the fieldbus by using the installed Fieldbus Engineering Tool. It can also perform operation, monitoring and maintenance of the fieldbus device by using the installed Device Management Tool. The PC connected on the control bus (V net, VL net) is referred to as Master PC. Also, information related to the fieldbus created by the Fieldbus Engineering Tool (host file set) can be fetched to the HIS via Ethernet.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-9

General - Purpose Personal Computer (Slave PC)

The Fieldbus Support Tools are provided for supporting fieldbus system design, for implementation or maintenance of fieldbus engineering work for the fieldbus devices independently from the upper systems such as FCS or control bus. The physical device tag names, the node addresses and other settings can be set to the fieldbus devices before configuring them to the fieldbus system. The Fieldbus Support Tools can run on the PC connected to the HI fieldbus. This PC is referred to as Slave PC. The Fieldbus Support Tools consist of Device Tool, Fieldbus Engineering Tool for slave PC and Device Management Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-10

1.4

Fieldbus Hardware
This section explains the hardware comprising the fieldbus.

Fieldbus Hardware Configuration : PFCS/SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS

The fieldbus is connected to the fieldbus communication module (ACF11) loaded into the nest for I/O communication module (AMN33). And connected with the hardware components configured on the fieldbus. This section explains the fieldbus configuration in the filed side from AMN33.
AMN33 and ACF11 When using the ACF11 power supply

Terminator

External bus power supply Barrier/ arrester Terminator Cable Coupler

Safe side Danger side

Coupler

Terminator

When not using the ACF11 power supply

Fieldbus device
010401E.EPS

Figure Configuration of Hardware for AMN33 and under in the Fieldbus

FCS FCU ESB Bus EB401 SB401 (Redun- (Redundant) dant) Local Node

EB501 (Redundant) Remote Node Terminitor

Barrier/Arrester

Fieldbus Communication Module (ALF111)

Fieldbus communication module ALF111 behaves as a Link Active Scheduler (LAS) to control the communication on the fieldbus. It also passes data between field devices and FCS. SEE ALSO
For more information about ALF111, see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

Cables
The following types of cables can be chosen in accordance with fieldbus installation environment. Type A Type B Type D SEE ALSO
For more information about Fieldbus wiring cables, see Cable Used in the Fieldbus of 2. Fieldbus Communication Module.

Each twisted pair has a shield Multiple twisted pairs with overall shield Multiple conductor cable, no pairing of wires

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-14

Barrier
Barrier is a device to keep the Fieldbus power supply under a certain level to prevent from igniting the hazardous atmosphere. The intrinsic safety barriers are installed to isolate safe area and hazardous area. For a Fieldbus system, the Fieldbus power supply is in the safe side of the barrier, while the other side of the barrier is hazardous area. If intrinsic safety barrier is used on a Fieldbus, generally, the number of devices is two on safe side and four on hazardous side. However, the number of devices on hazardous side varies with the current consumption of the Fieldbus devices and type of barriers.

Arrester
It is a protective device to reduce the excessive voltage resulting from lightning to a safe level by grounding the discharge.

External Power Supply

It is a specific power supply unit for providing power to Fieldbus devices via the Fieldbus.

Terminator
The terminator helps to stabilize the communication signals transmitted on the bus.

Fieldbus Devices
The field devices such as transmitters and positioners that complaint to Foundation Fieldbus specifications. All the devices passed the ITK4.0X interoperability tests can be used regardless the maker of the devices.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-15

1.5

Software for Configuring a Fieldbus System

This section explains the software for configuring a fieldbus system. The software for FCS control, operation and monitoring, system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool are necessary to configure a fieldbus system. A Device Management Tool is provided to improve the operation and monitoring as well as maintenance for the fieldbus device.

Summary of Software for Configuring a Fieldbus System

The software used in configuring a fieldbus system is summarized in the table below. SEE ALSO
For information about configuring Fieldbus and Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

Table Summary of Software for Configuring a Fieldbus System

No. Item Operation and monitoring function Hardware Revision Remarks Necessity

HIS

This is the HIS basic function software. Exaopc R2.05 or later OPC interface package (for HIS) or DDE open data interface is required for displaying messages (*1) when using Device Management Tools. R2.05 or later Foundation Fieldbus Communication Package is required.

2 3 4 5

System builders FCS control function Fieldbus Engineering Tool Device Management Tool
*1: *2: *3: : :

HIS FCS HIS or PC PC

R2.05 or later This is the FCS basic function software. PC R2.01 or later Included in Fieldbus Support Tools (*2)

R2.01 or later Included in Fieldbus Support Tools (*3)

010501E.EPS

Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS) R3.01 or later version is required for displaying messages when using Device Management Tool. Fieldbus Engineering Tool R3.01 is included. Device Management Tool R3.01 is included. Required Helps to improve function

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-16

1.6

Fieldbus System Engineering

The system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool are used in engineering for the fieldbus system. Configuration information for the fieldbus device and fieldbus block are defined in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. With the system builders, engineering for the supervisory system including the ACF11 is performed based on the information defined by Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Position of Fieldbus System Engineering

The position of fieldbus system engineering relative to the flow of overall system is indicated below
System design

Creation of I/O list

Control loop design

Selection of fieldbus devices

Construction

Engineering with the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders

Engineering with the fieldbus engineering tool

Using Device Tool provided in Fieldbus Support Tools to configure tag name and node address of Physical Device.

Individual device setting

On-line debug/loop check

Legend Work flow Flow of output information

Receive

Fieldbus system engineering

Application/service
010601E.EPS

*1:

When the following two conditions are both satisfied, the engineering work by Device Tool, one of the Fieldbus Support Tools, is not required. The physical device tag names and node addresses already configured in the field devices. The capabilities files and DD files have already obtained from venders or Foundation Fieldbus. The tag names and node addresses for physical devices can also be configured using Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Figure Position of Fieldbus System Engineering

Before performing fieldbus system engineering, the processes indicated below must be completed and output information for those processes be prepared. Control loop design: output information is [Control loop design plans] Selection of fieldbus devices: output information is [List of fieldbus devices to be used]

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-17

Fieldbus System Engineering

The fieldbus system engineering is a general term for using the system builders related to the fieldbus for the fieldbus engineering. SEE ALSO
For information about configuring Fieldbus communication module (ALF111), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

System Builders
Using system builders such as IOM Builder on System View can configure ACF11 I/O module. When downloading the contents defined on the IOM Builder to the ACF11 module, the data defined by the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be obtained by fetching the host file set. SEE ALSO
For details on the fieldbus related CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders, refer to 4, System Builders Related to Fieldbus.

Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool is used to perform configuration for the fieldbus device, fieldbus block and fieldbus communication setup. The Fieldbus Engineering Tool on HIS or the master PC may download configured data to the ACF11 and fieldbus devices. The Fieldbus Engineering Tool on the slave PC may download configured data to fieldbus devices. SEE ALSO
Refer to 5, Fieldbus Engineering Tool for details on the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-18

Target Scope of Fieldbus System Engineering

In fieldbus system engineering, the engineering target scope differs from the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The engineering target scope for the system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is indicated below.

HIS Control bus Engineering section of system builders FCS FCS

ACF11

Fieldbus device function

Engineering section for fieldbus engineering tool

010602E.EPS

Figure Scope of Fieldbus System Engineering

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-19

Download Destination and Upload Destination

It is necessary to download the information defined in the fieldbus system engineering to the fieldbus device and the ACF11. Also, the data defined by the fieldbus device can be uploaded to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The download destination and upload destination in fieldbus system engineering are indicated in the following diagram.
System builders Fieldbus engineering tool Project manager Network startup function Maintenance function

System View

Start IOM builder

Download HIS Download IOM download Download FCS Upload

ACF11

Fieldbus device

Fieldbus device
010603E.EPS

Figure Download Destination and Upload Destination in Fieldbus System Engineering

TIP
Download or upload between the Fieldbus Engineering Tool on the master PC and the fieldbus devices is done via the FCS and ACF11. Download from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool on the slave PC to the fieldbus devices is done directly between them. When the Fieldbus Engineering Tool and system builders are installed in different machines, a control bus interface card (VF701) is required to be installed to the master PC where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is applied for downloading and uploading.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-20

Fieldbus System Engineering Format

The engineering may be performed differently when the system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool are applied in the same machine or in different machines, and the fieldbus system engineering method will differ depending on this difference.

When HIS is Installed with Fieldbus Engineering Tool

When using the system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the same machine, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be started from system builders, IOM Builder. Also, data defined with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is saved under the directory specified in System View.
Ethernet HIS CS 1000/CS 3000 System builders Fieldbus Engineering Tool

PFCS

VL net

ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Legend Downloading channel

010604E.EPS

Figure Engineering Format When Performed in the Same Machine

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-21

When HIS is Installed with Fieldbus Engineering Tool

When using the system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the same machine, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be started from system builders IOM Builder. Also, data defined with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be created under the directory specified in System View.
Ethernet HIS CS 1000/CS 3000 System builders Fieldbus Engineering Tool

V net

LFCS2/LFCS

SFCS

FCU

ACF11
ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Legend Downloading channel

010605E.EPS

Figure Engineering Format When Performed in the Same Machine

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-22

When General-Purpose PC is Installed with Fieldbus Engineering Tool

When the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool are installed in different machines, downloading to the fieldbus devices will be performed from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool on the master PC. ACF11 data will be downloaded from the system builders in the HIS. It is required to designate a directory on the system builders of System View for holding the data of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. This directory should be shared by HIS and master PC.
Ethernet HIS CS 1000/CS 3000 System builders Master PC Fieldbus Engineering Tool

VL net

PFCS

ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Legend Downloading channel

010606E.EPS

Figure Engineering Performed in Different Machines

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-23

When General-Purpose PC is Installed with Fieldbus Engineering Tool

V net

LFCS2/LFCS

SFCS

FCU

ACF11
ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Legend Downloading channel

010607E.EPS

Figure Engineering Performed in Different Machines

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-24

1.7

Device Management
The Device Management Tool provides device management service for operating and monitoring the fieldbus devices. The Device Management Tool runs on HIS, master PC or slave PC.

Operation and Monitoring of Fieldbus Device with Device Management Tool

The Device Management Tool runs on HIS, master PC or slave PC. It can also change the parameters for the fieldbus block when required. It provides additional fieldbus device operation and monitoring functions to the HIS, it is also useful for maintaining the fieldbus devices. SEE ALSO
Refer to 6, Device Management Tool for details on the device management tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-25

1.8

Operation and Monitoring

Parameters for the fieldbus block are assigned beforehand to the terminal number of the fieldbus communication module (ACF11) and this terminal number is connected to the faceplate block. This allows an operator to run and monitor the fieldbus device using the HIS operation and monitoring window. SEE ALSO
For information about configuring Fieldbus and Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

Overview of Operation and Monitoring

The HIS operation and monitoring window can be used to perform the following operation and monitoring. The internal parameters for the fieldbus block (diagnostic data, etc.) can be displayed. Using the same operation as in the case of the FCS function block, parameters for the fieldbus block can be adjusted. Error alarms arising from a failure of the fieldbus device and device alarms automatically generated from the fieldbus device (IO failure) can be constantly monitored.

Display and Revision of Parameters Assigned to the Terminal Number

It is necessary to assign the fieldbus block parameters to a corresponding terminal number (%Znnusmm) with the system builders in order to display or change the fieldbus block parameters on operation and monitoring console. By connecting this terminal number for which assignment has been completed to the faceplate block, the fieldbus block parameters can be displayed or changed using the HIS operation and monitoring windows (tuning window, graphic window, trend window, etc.). The fieldbus block parameters cannot be displayed or changed unless the terminal number is connected to the faceplate block. TIP
The external I/O terminal parameters for the fieldbus block can be displayed only with the operation and monitoring window after the terminal number is connected to an FCS function block other than the faceplate block. The parameters cannot be changed. Parameters that have not been assigned to a terminal number are displayed or changed using the parameter display and setting function for the device management tool.

Tuning Window
The fieldbus block parameters can be changed in the tuning window. To do this, the faceplate block connected to the terminal number corresponding to the fieldbus block parameters is assigned to the tuning window and the parameters are changed in relation to that faceplate block.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-26

Graphic Window
The fieldbus block parameters can be displayed in the graphic window. After connecting the terminal number corresponding to the fieldbus block parameters to an FCS function block such as the PVI, the FCS function block tag is assigned to the graphic window.

Trend Window
The fieldbus block parameters can be displayed in the trend window. After connecting the terminal number corresponding to the fieldbus block parameters to an FCS function block such as the PVI, the FCS function block tag is assigned to the trend window.

Historical Message Report Window

The fieldbus messages (alarms and events) are displayed in the historical message report window.
Historical Report - [Operation and Monitoring Message] File Edit View Window Help
STOP

Message No 1401 0040 1106 1102 1102 1104 1101 0471 1101 1102 0039 0089 1401 Ready

Date 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 98/08/31 08:05:14 PM 08:05:14 PM 08:05:14 PM 08:05:14 PM 08:05:14 PM 08:05:14 PM 08:05:06 PM 08:05:06 PM 08:04:19 PM 08:04:19 PM 08:04:19 PM 08:04:18 PM 08:04:12 PM

Message Text PID040301 ************************ MAN FCS0104 PID040301 Normal from PI/O not Ready PID040301 ************************ NR PID040301 ************************ PV =0.000000 **** CNF Recover PID040301 ************************ PV =0.000000 **** IOP Recover PID040301 ************************ MV =74.000000 **** OOP Recover PID040301 ************************ PV =0.000000 **** CNF FCS0104 Online Download Complete PID040301 ************************ PV =0.000000 **** IOP PID040301 ************************ PV =0.000000 **** CNF Recover FCS0104 PID040301 IN PI/O not Ready FCS0104 SS-COM Error UNIT 04 SLOT 01 STN001 CODE= A3D2 PID040301 ************************ MAN IMAN 33Items Found
010801E.EPS

Figure Historical Message Report Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-27

Message Monitor Window

Fieldbus messages (message nos. 3xxx) are displayed in real time. Also, the types of messages to be displayed can be specified in the message registration dialog box. Message filtering function is operative in message monitor window. SEE ALSO
For details on messages displayed in the message monitor window, refer to the Operating Messages (IM 33S02H10-01E).

Message Monitor

Header 1 3001 1998/09/01 17:10:14 2 3002 1998/09/01 15:03:22

Message FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Device Error FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 02 SLOT 01 Device Recover

Ready

range: All

2/2
010802E.EPS

Figure Message Monitor Window

Message Registration Dialog Box

The items indicated below can be specified in the message registration dialog box. Number of messages to be retained in the window Type of messages to be displayed Color of messages to be displayed
Message Registration Maximun Number Of Line: Sequence Messages Operation Messages Field Bus Messages All Messages Details OK Cancel Apply
010803E.EPS

200 Color White White White White

Figure Message Registration Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-28

1.9

System Maintenance
The system maintenance function refers to the function that displays the status of the ACF11 in the system status overview window, or displays an ACF11 error as a system alarm message. SEE ALSO
For information about configuring Fieldbus communication module (ALF111), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

System Status Overview Window

The status of the ACF11 is displayed in the system status overview window.

System Alarm Message Display : PFCS/SFCS

When an error occurs in the ACF11, a system alarm message is displayed. Messages generated by other devices are also displayed. A list of the system alarm messages that are displayed is given below.
Table List of ACF11 Related System Alarm Messages : PFCS/SFCS
Message number 0081 0082 0083 0085 Alarm message STNxx IOM Fail UNIT xx SLOT xx STNxx IOM Recover UNIT xx SLOT xx STNxx IOM Configuration Error UNIT xx SLOT xx STNxx IOM Communication Error UNIT xx SLOT xx
010901E.EPS

System Alarm Message Display : LFCS2/LFCS

When an error occurs in the ACF11, a system alarm message is displayed. Messages generated by other devices are also displayed. A list of the system alarm messages that are displayed is given below.
Table List of ACF11 Related System Alarm Messages : LFCS2/LFCS
Message number 0081 0082 0083 0085 Alarm message STNxx IOM Fail RIOx NODE xx UNIT xx SLOT xx STNxx IOM Recover RIOx NODE xx UNIT xx SLOT xx STNxx IOM Configuration Error RIOx NODE xx UNIT xx SLOT xx STNxx IOM Communication Error RIOx NODE xx UNIT xx SLOT xx
010902E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-29

1.10 Glossary
This manual uses the terms given below in addition to basic terminology. Refer to this list as necessary.

ACF11
ACF11 is a Fieldbus communication module. ACF11 can be installed in a PFCS, SFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS field control station for Foundation Fieldbus H1 communication.

ALF111
ALF111 is a Fieldbus communication module. ALF111 can be installed in a KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 filed control station for Foundation Fieldbus H1 communication.

Common File Format

This is the name of the format for the files (Capabilities File, Configuration File) for information exchange used in fieldbus engineering and the specifications that prescribe that format.

DDL (Device Description Language)

This is the description language for describing the device configuration elements and the specifications of that language.

DD (Device Description) File

The source of a DD file is written in DDL. After the source file is compiled by Tokenizer, a program for making object file, the DD file of a device is created. The DD files of various Fieldbus devices can be downloaded from web site of Foundation Fieldbus (www.fieldbus.org).

DDOD (Device Description Object Dictionary)

This is the object file in which the DD source described using DDL has been compiled using the software called Tokenizer. Specifications for the device function resources are described in the DD source.

FB Pool
This is where the block resources that all of the devices in the project are stored. This is created in the project database at the time the devices are registered using the Device Editor (device editing function) of the fieldbus engineering tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-30

LAS (Link Active Scheduler)

This is the function that controls the fieldbus communication schedule. Only one device with the LAS function exists in a network for a single segment.

MIB (Management Information Base)

This is a general term for the network and system management information database that each device has.

Network Management (NM)

This is the name of the communication protocol for network configuration management and statistical management. The Network Management client is called the network manager (NMgr) and the server is called the network management agent (NMA). The fieldbus engineering tool corresponds to NMgr.

System Management (SM)

This is the name of the protocol that directs the operation of the various fieldbus devices distributed in the fieldbus. System management includes the physical device tag assign function, address assign function, time synchronization function and the function block scheduling function.

VCR (Virtual Communication Relationship)

Configured application layer channels that provide for the transfer of data between Fieldbus device applications.

VFD (Virtual Field Device)

This is a logical device and there are multiple copies inside the fieldbus device. A single VFD includes multiple function block application configuration elements.

Alert
The messages initiated from the Fieldbus devices for the upper level system (such as CS 3000 or CS 1000) including the alarm messages and the event messages.

Export/Import
Export outputs configuration data for the fieldbus in accordance with the Common File Format so that it can be used in a variety of media. Import means to import a configuration data file that has been described in a format that follows the Common File Format, to the project database from external media.

Extended Parameters
In a Fieldbus function block, other than the parameters stipulated by Foundation Fieldbus, the device vendor specific parameters are referred to as extended parameters.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-31

Capabilities File
A Capability File describes the communication objects in a Fieldbus device. It is a text file that contains the resource information, the capabilities, default settings and index information of the device. The information in the capability file is indispensable when performing offline configuration. In general, each model of device requires one capability file. The capability files can be downloaded from web site of Foundation Fieldbus (www.fieldbus.org).

Configuration Data File (Value File)

This is the text file that describes information for downloading to the fieldbus device or link master device. Download means to read the configuration data file. The configuration data file is described according to the Common File Format.

Scheduling Function
This is the function for creating the schedule that prescribes the execution timing for periodic communication and the function block. The schedule can be created off-line.

Segment
A Segment is a section of an H1 Fieldbus that is terminated in its characteristic impedance. Each Segment can include H1 devices and an ACF11 or an ALF111 Fieldbus communication module.

Terminal Number
This is the numbered software terminal (%Znnusmm) for identifying FCS process I/O. This is used instead of using the tag name. I/O terminal data or internal parameters for the fieldbus block can be treated as process I/O for the FCS function block. In this case, the correlation between the two can be defined with CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders.

Communication and FB Schedule

This refers to the execution timing for periodic communication and the function block determined beforehand.

Device Pool
Device pool is a location for keeping the DD (Device Description) files and capability files provided by device vendors. The DD files can be downloaded from vendors' web sites or from Foundation Fieldbus web site (http://www.fieldbus.org).

Trend Object
Trend object is an object for keeping a Fieldbus function block short-term trend data locally.

View Object
View object is an object for viewing and storing the Fieldbus device static and dynamic parameters such PV, scale high and low limit values

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<1. Overview of Fieldbus Communication>

1-32

Standard Block Parameters

In a Fieldbus function block, the parameters stipulated by Foundation Fieldbus are referred to as Standard Block Parameters.

Function Blocks
Function Blocks (FBs) are built into Fieldbus devices to achieve the desired control functionality such as PID or AI. In this document the function blocks are also referred to as Fieldbus function blocks.

Fieldbus Device
This is the general term for field devices connected to the fieldbus, such as a transmitter or positioner that has a fieldbus communication function.

Fieldbus Block
This is the general term for the function block of the fieldbus device. The resource block, function block and transducer block corresponds to the function of fieldbus. One resource block is always installed in the fieldbus device. The function block and transducer block are installed as necessary. When something is called a fieldbus block in this manual, it refers to a function block. When using FCS function block, this refers to a function block for the FCS.

Fieldbus Block I/O Terminal

This is the I/O terminal (Input terminal, Output terminal) for the fieldbus device function block.

Host File Set

This is a set of information for the fieldbus configuration that is necessary to the application (host application) of Device Management Tool and CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders .

Host Application
Host means the DCS or PC controller. Host application is the general term for the application that operates in the DCS or PC controller.

Macro Cycle
A macro cycle is a period that all function blocks are executed, and all operational traffic is passed during the macro cycle. The synchronous and asynchronous communications are scheduled in LAS according to the macro cycle.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<2. Fieldbus Communication Module>

2-1

Fieldbus Communication Module

The fieldbus communication module (ACF11) has the function to control 1 segment of fieldbus using a communication method specific to the fieldbus. The ACF11 is installed in the nest for I/O communication modules. Also, there is an upper limit to the number of fieldbus devices that can be connected to the fieldbus, and when connecting, it is necessary to select the appropriate cable. SEE ALSO
For information about the Fieldbus communication module (ALF111), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

Fieldbus Communication Method

The fieldbus communication module (ACF11) has the function to control 1 segment of the fieldbus (one bus segment) using the communication method specific to the fieldbus (fieldbus communication). Compared to the earlier used 4 to 20 mA analog communication method and hybrid communication method, this method has the following superior characteristics. Multiple fieldbus devices can be connected to a single fieldbus cable Communication is performed with digital signals Large quantities of multiple data can be transmitted by a communication method that is based on dual directions and multiple signals. Further, the fieldbus communication method solves problems that occurred with the hybrid communication method, such as, the slow speed of the digital transmission and low level of inter-operability with fieldbus devices of other manufacturers.

Work Required Before Installing the ACF11 to the IOM Nest

Before installing the ACF11 to the IOM nest, use the worksheet given in this manual, ACF11 device ID management table, and register the device ID for the ACF11. When downloading from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool to the ACF11, set the physical device tag name and device ID for the ACF11, which is the download target in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Refer to the ACF11 device ID management table to set the device ID when performing this procedure. SEE ALSO
On how to set the device ID in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, see 5.5.3, Changing a Registered Device ID.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<2. Fieldbus Communication Module> Table ACF11 Device ID Management Table

2-2

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

FCS station name

System Node numbers (1 or 2) (1 to 8) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Unit numbers 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

Slot numbers

ACF11 device ID 5945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF115945431001:ACF11020001E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<2. Fieldbus Communication Module>

2-3

Installing Fieldbus Communication Module : PFCS/SFCS

Up to two ACF11 can be installed in the nest for I/O communication modules (AMN33). Also, up to five AMN33 can be connected for one FCS. One ACF11 can control per segment of fieldbus. A maximum of 10 segments can be controlled in one FCS.
Nest for I/O communication modules (model AMN33) Fieldbus communication module (model ACF11)

Insert Terminator (model YCB138)

LED

Terminal block (can be removed)

To the fieldbus device

020002E.EPS

Figure Installing the ACF11 in the Nest for I/O Communication Modules : PFCS/SFCS

IMPORTANT
When one ACF11 is installed in the AMN33, a communication module other than the ACF11 (ACM11 or ACM12) cannot be installed as another communication module.

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<2. Fieldbus Communication Module>

2-4

Installing Fieldbus Communication Module : LFCS2/LFCS

Up to two ACF11 can be installed in the nest for I/O communication modules (AMN33). Also, up to forty AMN33 can be connected for one FCS. One ACF11 can control per segment of fieldbus. A maximum of 80 segments can be controlled in one FCS. This cannot be used in the RIO bus system 2.
Nest for I/O communication modules (model AMN33) Fieldbus communication module (model ACF11)

Insert Terminator (model YCB138)

LED

Terminal block (can be removed)

To the fieldbus device

020003E.EPS

Figure Installing the ACF11 in the Nest for I/O Communication Modules : LFCS2/LFCS

IMPORTANT
When one ACF11 is installed in the AMN33, a communication module other than the ACF11 (ACM11 or ACM12) cannot be installed as another communication module.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<2. Fieldbus Communication Module>

2-5

The Number of Connected Fieldbus Devices

The number of fieldbus devices that can be connected per 1 segment is 32 including the ACF11. However, it is necessary to determine the number of fieldbus devices to be connected based on the capacity of power that can be supplied from the power supply. Also, the more fieldbus devices connected, the longer the fieldbus communication and control cycles. Accordingly, it is necessary to limit the number of connected fieldbus devices in order to obtain the expected communication and control cycle. The table below indicates the number of fieldbus devices that can be connected per 1 segment.
Table Number of Connected Fieldbus Devices

Connected device type Self Power supply Bus Power supply Bus Power supply

With Barrier No No Yes

Maximum devices connected per 1 segment 32 (1) 12 6 (2)

Remarks

Guideline for number of devices to which power can be supplied by the ACF11 built-in bus power supply is up to 6.External bus power supply is required , if more than six devices are connected.
020004E.EPS

*1: *2:

This value includes all devices connected in the fieldbus. Thus, in addition to the fieldbus devices, the ACF11, Hand Held Terminal, etc. are counted as devices. Generally, up to 4 devices can be connected to the danger side and up to 2 devices to the safe side.

Number of Connected Devices in Consideration of the Power Consumption

When using the ACF11 built-in bus power supply, the number of fieldbus devices connected to the segment should be such that the power consumption amount is 80 mA or less. As a guideline, the number of fieldbus devices to which power can be supplied by the ACF11 built-in bus power supply is up to six. To connect more than this number of fieldbus devices will require an external bus power supply. Also, when an external bus power supply is used, the ACF11 built-in bus power supply cannot be used.

Number of Connected Devices in Consideration of the Communication and Control Cycles : PFCS/SFCS
The fieldbus communication and control cycles are determined according to the number of connected fieldbus devices. When the total number of fieldbus devices connected to 1 segment exceeds the fieldbus capacity, the expected communication and control cycles cannot be obtained in that segment. For example, to make the dead time for the process 2 seconds or less when the FCS control cycle is the standard cycle of 1 second, the guideline for the number of I/O points per 1 segment is 16.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<2. Fieldbus Communication Module>

2-6

Number of Connected Devices in Consideration of the Communication and Control Cycles : LFCS2/LFCS
The fieldbus communication and control cycles are determined according to the number of connected fieldbus devices. Elements that determine the communication and control cycles are indicated below. Total number of fieldbus devices connected to 1 segment (fieldbus capacity) Total number of fieldbus devices connected to the nest for I/O communication modules (RIO bus capacity) When the total number of fieldbus devices connected to 1 segment exceeds the fieldbus capacity, the expected communication and control cycles cannot be obtained in that segment even if the total number of fieldbus devices connected to the nest for I/O communication modules is below the RIO bus capacity. For example, to make the dead time for the process 2 seconds or less when the FCS control cycle is the standard cycle of 1 second, the guideline for the number of I/O points per 1 segment is 16 when [Read at high speed from IOM] is specified.

Number of Fieldbus Blocks per Segment

In the case of the AI block, the maximum number of fieldbus blocks that can be linked to the I/O terminalQYs is 32 per segment. Only the function block parameters are targets for linking to the I/O terminal. The maximum number of blocks that can acquire alarms or events is 64 per segment. The blocks targeted for acquisition are the function blocks and resource blocks of the fieldbus devices defined by the fieldbus engineering tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<2. Fieldbus Communication Module>

2-7

Cable Used in the Fieldbus

Selection of cable type and setting of the cable length is determined by the environment in which the fieldbus is installed.

Type and Total Length of Cable

Select cable appropriate to the installation environment from the following wiring materials. There is a limit on the total length of the cable. Determine the total length of the cable within the range of lengths indicated below. Type A (individually sheathed twisted pair cable) Type B (group sheathed twisted pair cable) Type D (group sheathed non-twisted pair cable) 1900 m 1200 m 200 m

For type B cables, some cables signal attenuation is large. In this case, it is necessary to limit the total length of the cables or the total number of fieldbus devices connected in order to maintain the signal amplitude. For example, when the total number of connected fieldbus devices is 11 to 20, limit the total length of the cable to 600 m or less. When the number of devices is 10 or less, the total length of cable should be 1200 m or less. When using Type D cable, up to 2 twisted pair cables are used, and avoid mutual interference by using non-twisted pair cables. Also, when using multi-conductor cable, make sure that only fieldbus signals, analog signals and hybrid signals overlay the multi-conductor cable.

Number and Length of Branch Cables

When connecting fieldbus devices to branched cables, there are limits to the length of the branch cable according to the number of branch cables (number of connected fieldbus devices). Determine the total length of the branch cables within the range indicated below. Number of connected devices 1 to 12 Number of connected devices 13 to 14 Number of connected devices 15 to 18 Number of connected devices 19 to 24 Number of connected devices 25 to 32 TIP
When there are many fieldbus devices connected, it may become necessary to have the actual number of connected devices less than the number indicated above depending on conditions such as the power supply and communication performance.

120 m 90 m 60 m 30 m 0m

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

Blank Page

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-1

FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus

Fieldbus process information is acquired using the FCS control function. The acquired process information can be referenced with the operation and monitoring function. Also, the plant including the fieldbus can be controlled properly using the sophisticated control and calculation available in the FCS control function. SEE ALSO
For information about configuring Fieldbus and Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

Overview of FCS Control Function in the Fieldbus System

Data in the fieldbus system and process information, such as, system alarms are acquired using the FCS control function. The acquired process information can be referenced with the operation and monitoring function. Also, control of the plant including the fieldbus can be properly performed by combining the sophisticated control and calculation functions available in the FCS control function with the control loop of the fieldbus.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-2

3.1

Position of Fieldbus Block

In the FCS, the fieldbus block parameters can be treated as process I/O.

Position of the Fieldbus Block in the FCS

Parameters for fieldbus blocks can be assigned to the numbered software terminals (%Znnusmm) so that they can be treated as the process I/O signals. The assigned software terminals (%Znnusmm) can be connected to the function blocks in the FCS. Via the numbered software terminals, FCS control function can be linked to the fieldbus block function, so that the parameters of the fieldbus function blocks can be set or referenced by operation and monitoring function of HIS.

FCS PID SET IN OUT

Process I/O ACF11

Terminal number

AI PV OUT

AO CAS IN

SP OUT

Fieldbus block Fieldbus device

Back Calculation Fieldbus device

030101E.EPS

Figure Position of the Fieldbus Block

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-3

Fieldbus parameters consist of the fieldbus block external I/O parameters (CAS_IN, OUT, etc.) and the fieldbus block internal parameters (PV, SV, etc.) For the fieldbus block external I/O parameters (CAS_IN, OUT, etc.), software terminals (%Znnusmm) with all different numbers can be assigned. Moreover, the assigned software terminals can be connected to various types of FCS function blocks. For the internal parameters, only the specific types of parameters such as PV, SV or etc. can be assigned to the software terminals (%Znnusmm). Moreover, the assigned software terminals can only be connected to faceplate function blocks. However, using the device management tool can set and reference the internal parameters that can not be assigned to the software terminals (%Znnusmm). SEE ALSO
For details on assignment of fieldbus block parameters to the software terminals (%Znnusmm), refer to 3.3, Connection to Fieldbus Block. For details on connection between the fieldbus block internal parameters and faceplate blocks, refer to 3.3.1, Connection to the Faceplate Block

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-4

3.2

FCS Control Functions Related to the Fieldbus

This section explains the characteristics of the FCS control function in the fieldbus system for the following items. Fieldbus blocks connectable to FCS function blocks Fieldbus block data type Conversion of the data status from the fieldbus block to the FCS function block Output value tracking Output clamp detection Output fault state Fieldbus block alert display SEE ALSO
Refer to 3.3.1, Connection to the Faceplate Block for details on the following contents. Referencing and setting the fieldbus block internal parameters Referencing and setting the fieldbus block mode (MODE_BLK) Referencing the fieldbus block alarm status (ALARM_SUM)

Fieldbus Blocks Connectable to FCS Function Blocks

The fieldbus block can be cascade connected to the FCS function block as process I/O. Because of this, the fieldbus block internal parameters can be referenced. In addition, alarms and events occurring in the fieldbus device are notified to the HIS. Of the standard fieldbus blocks prescribed by the FOUNDATION Fieldbus (Low speed Voltage Mode), those that are handled in the fieldbus system are indicated in the list below.
Table List of Fieldbus Blocks Handled in the Fieldbus System
SYMBOL FUNCTION BLOCK

AI AO DI DO PID
RA CS OS SC IT IS MDI MDO MAI MAO

Analog input block Analog output block Digital input block Digital output block PID control block
Ratio Block Control Selector Block Output Splitter Block Signal Characterizer Block Integrator Block Input Selector Block Multiple Discrete Input Block Multiple Discrete Output Block Multiple Analog Input Block Multiple Analog Output Block
030201E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-5

Fieldbus Block Data Type

The data type is defined according to the type of data handled by the FCS. The table below indicates the FCS data type used in fieldbus block data.
Table List of Data Types for the Fieldbus Block
Name 32 bit IEEE754 format floating point data (with data status) 32 bit IEEE754 format floating point data 32 bit signed integer data 16 bit signed integer data 8 bit signed integer data 32 bit unsigned integer data 16 bit signed integer data 8 bit unsigned integer data Contact data (with data status) Contact data Mode data Alarm summary data FCS data type AF32S AF32 AI32 AI16 AI8 AU32 AU16 AU8 DS D MODE ALARM
030202E.EPS

Correlation Between Fieldbus Block Parameters and Data Type

The table below indicates the correlation between typical parameters and data type for the fieldbus block.
Table Correlation Between Fieldbus Block Typical Parameters and Data Type
Data type Fieldbus Float with Status Unsigned8 with Status Bit String Mode structure Float
*1: *2:

FCS AF32S DS(*2) ALARM MODE AF32

Corresponding fieldbus block parameters OUT, CAS_IN, BKCAL_OUT, PV, SP, etc. OUT_D, CAS_IN_D, BKCAL_OUT_D, PV_D, SP_D, etc. ALARM_SUM(*1) MODE_BLK(*1) GAIN(P), RESET(I), RATE(D), etc.
030203E.EPS

Alarm status (ALARM_SUM) and block mode (MODE_BLK) for the fieldbus block can be referenced and set from the faceplate block. Among the Fieldbus block parameters applied for FCS data type DS, ON=1, OFF=0 will be the values for the items of OUT_D, CAS_IN_D, BKCAL_OUT_D, PV_D, SP_D and so on. However, for the internal parameter such BYPASS, ON=2 and OFF=1. These data items can not be connected to digital I/O.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-6

Conversion of Data Status from the Fieldbus Block to the FCS Function Block
Data status for the fieldbus block consists of information that indicates the data quality, substatus and limit. In the FCS, these data statuses are converted to those for the FCS function block. The table below indicates the conversion of data status from the fieldbus block to the FCS function block.
Table List of Conversion of Data Status from the Fieldbus Block to the FCS Function Block (1/2)
Fieldbus block Quality Level Name Level 0 1 2 3 Sub status Name Non-specific Configuration Error Not Connected Device Failure 0 0 Bad 4 Sensor Failure 1 2 3 5 6 7 1 Uncertain No Communication with LUV No Communication Out of Service Unrelated Not limited Unrelated Level Limit Name FCS function block Data status BAD (PTPF) CND BAD (OOP) BAD (BAD | OOP) Low limited BAD | IOP- (BAD | OOP) High limited BAD | IOP+ (BAD | OOP) Constant BAD | IOP- | IOP+ (BAD | OOP) BAD (PTPF) CND BAD (PTPF) QST NORMAL

Combination of sub status 8 to 15 and limit 0 to 3 Combination of sub status 0 to 15 and limit 0 to 3 0 2 Good All sub status (Non-cascade) 1 2 3
Note 1: Note 2: Quality Limit ( ) indicates the data status in the case of output data. [|] means satisfied simultaneously. Bad Uncertain Good (Non-cascade) Good (Cascade) Non limited Low limited High limited Constant

Not limited

Low limited CLP High limited CLP+ Constant CLP- | CLP+

030204E.EPS

Invalid value (true measured value and calculated value are not reflected) Uncertain value Valid value (there is a possibility an alarm will occur) Valid value (can be used for control)

Change in the value is unrestricted Change in the value is limited in the low value direction Change in the value is limited in the high value direction Change in the value is not possible in the low value or high value direction

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-7

Table List of Conversion of Data Status from the Fieldbus Block to the FCS Function Block (2/2)

Fieldbus block Quality Level Name Level 0 1 2 3 4 5 3 Good (Cascade) 6 7 8 Sub status Name Non-specific Initialization Acknowledge Initialization Request Not Invited Not Selected Do Not Select Local Override Fault State Active Initiate Fault State 1 All sub status 2 3
Note 1: Note 2: *1: Quality Limit

FCS function block Limit Level Name NORMAL MINT CND 0 Not limited NORMAL CND NORMAL Low Limited CLPHigh Limited CLP+ Constant CLP- | CLP+ (*1) (*1) (*1)
030205E.EPS

Data status

9 to 15

( ) indicates the data status in the case of output data. [|] means satisfied simultaneously. The FCS function block data status under Good (Cascade) Not Limited is also satisfied at the same time. Bad Uncertain Good (Non-cascade) Good (Cascade) Non limited Low limited High limited Constant Invalid value (true measured value and calculated value are not reflected) Uncertain value Valid value (there is a possibility an alarm will occur) Valid value (can be used for control)

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-8

Output Value Tracking

Output value tracking is the output operation that matches the manipulated output value for the FCS function block to the value (actual output value) of the connected fieldbus block. When an error occurs in the fieldbus communication, the data status will indicate an error in addition to the fieldbus block mode making a switch. At this time, the output operation for the connected FCS function block will stop. After that, when the data status of the value read back (read back value) from the fieldbus block returns to normal, the FCS function block manipulated output value is matched to the actual output value of the fieldbus block. Due to this process, the FCS function block output operation will have a bumpless restart. Readback of the manipulated output value, which is synchronized to the execution of the fieldbus block, is automatically performed in the fieldbus communication module (ACF11) to bumplessly control the output, in addition to the writing of the manipulated output.

Output Clamp Detection

The FCS function block can detect an output clamp from the data status of the connected fieldbus block. SEE ALSO
For details on the output clamp, see A3.3, Output Clamp in Function Block Details of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-12

3.3

Connection to Fieldbus Block

The fieldbus block can be connected to the following FCS function blocks. Faceplate block Regulatory control block Sequence control block Calculation block
*1: Off site block can only be used with the CS 3000.

TIP
The fieldbus block cannot be connected to the following FCS function blocks. SFC block Unit instrument, Operation

Fieldbus Block I/O Connection

The I/O terminal parameters (CAS_IN, OUT, etc.) and internal parameters (PV, SP) for the fieldbus block are treated as process I/Os in the FCS. Process I/Os are distinguished by the terminal number (%Znnusmm). The fieldbus block parameters are assigned to the process I/O terminal number and by connecting this terminal number to the FCS function block, the fieldbus block can be operated and monitored using the operation and monitoring function.
FCS PID SET IN OUT

AI PV OUT

Terminal number

AUTO OUT

CAS IN CAS

Back Calculation Fieldbus device Fieldbus device

030301E.EPS

Figure Connection of the FCS Function Block and Fieldbus Block I/O

SEE ALSO
Refer to 3.3.6, List of Parameters that can be Connected for a list of the fieldbus block parameters that can be connected as FCS process I/O.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-13

Assignment to the Fieldbus Block Terminal Number : PFCS/SFCS

The range of numeric values specified for the process I/O terminal numbers is given below. Also, the assignment to the terminal number of the fieldbus block parameter is done with the IOM Builder of CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders.
Table Terminal Number Assignment : PFCS/SFCS
Terminal number: %Znnusmm Symbol nn u s mm Name Node number Unit number Slot number Range 1 (fixed) 1 to 5 1 to 2 Position of the AMN33 Position of the ACF11 Remarks

Terminal position 1 to 32
030302E.EPS

Assignment to the Fieldbus Block Terminal Number : LFCS2/LFCS

The range of numeric values specified for the process I/O terminal numbers is given below. Also, the assignment to the terminal number of the fieldbus block parameter is done with the IOM Builder of CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders.
Table Terminal Number Assignment : LFCS2/LFCS Terminal number: %Znnusmm Symbol nn u s mm Name Node number Unit number Slot number Range 1 to 8 (max. 16) 1 to 5 1 to 2 Position of the AMN33 Position of the ACF11 maximum of 16 when two ACF modules are installed or when high-speed reading is set.
030303E.EPS

Remarks

Terminal position 1 to 32

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-14

Connection of Fieldbus Block External I/O Terminal Parameters

The terminal number to which is assigned the fieldbus block external I/O terminal parameters (CAS_IN, OUT, etc.) can be connected to the FCS function block. The external I/O terminal parameters that were connected can be displayed using the operation and monitoring function.

IMPORTANT
Connecting remote external I/O terminal parameters (RCAS_IN, RCAS_OUT, ROUT_IN, RCAS_IN_D, RCAS_OUT_D) of fieldbus function blocks to FCS function blocks is not yet supported up, so do not do this.

Connection of Fieldbus Block Internal Parameters

Display and change of the fieldbus block internal parameters (PV, SP, etc.) are basically done with the device management tool. After assigning them to a terminal number, certain fieldbus block internal parameters can only be connected to the faceplate block out of the various FCS function blocks. The connected internal parameters can be displayed and changed with the operation and monitoring function. Further, in order to monitor the fieldbus block internal parameters, these parameters are periodically transmitted.

IMPORTANT
Do not write the fieldbus block internal parameters from any FCS function block other than the faceplate block.

TIP
To change the fieldbus block mode from the operation and monitoring function, it is necessary to connect the fieldbus block internal parameter MODE_BLK to the faceplate block. Because the fieldbus block mode may automatically switch due to an error in the final control element, we recommend connecting this parameter to the FCS faceplate block, so that the output block (AO, DO) and control block (PID) of the fieldbus block can change the mode from the operation and monitoring function.

SEE ALSO
Refer to 6.5, Fieldbus Device Parameter Display and Setting regarding displaying and changing the parameter with the device management tool. Refer to 3.3.1, Connection to the Faceplate Block for details on connecting the fieldbus block internal parameters and the faceplate block.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-15

3.3.1

Connection to the Faceplate Block

In order to reference or set the fieldbus block parameters, it is necessary to connect them to the faceplate block. The fieldbus block internal parameters (MODE_BLC, ALARM_SUM, PV, SP, OUT, SP_HI_LIM, SP_LO_LIM, OUT_HI_LIM, OUT_LO_LIM) can be connected to one section of the faceplate block.

Connection of the Fieldbus Block and Faceplate Block

The fieldbus block parameters can be referenced or set by connecting the fieldbus block and faceplate block. As with process I/O, the fieldbus block parameters and faceplate block data items are connected by a data connection that uses a terminal number (%Znnusmm). Connect the fieldbus block parameters and faceplate block data items in the following cases. When a fieldbus block output block (AO, DO) mode is operated from the operation and monitoring function Connect the output block (AO, DO) of the fieldbus block and the faceplate block. When a fieldbus block control block is applied for local control Connect the control block (PID) and the faceplate block to perform operation and monitoring from the operation and monitoring function. However, this is not necessary when there is a local operation and monitoring device, and the output to the setpoint value for the fieldbus block control block is regarded as a process output.
Faceplate block

MODE

Terminal number

PID CAS_IN PV OUT IN PV SP BKCAL_IN MODE OUT

AO CAS_IN

BKCAL_OUT

OUT

Fieldbus block

030304E.EPS

Figure Referencing the Fieldbus Block Internal Parameters

TIP
When the fieldbus block internal parameters are changed directly from a device such as the Hand Held Terminal in the fieldbus, the faceplate block parameters are automatically tracked to the post-change value.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-16

List of Faceplate Blocks that Can be Connected

There are three types of faceplate blocks: the analog type, sequence type and hybrid type. The table below gives a list of the faceplate blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block. SEE ALSO
For details on the faceplate block, see D4, Faceplate Blocks in Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).

Table List of Faceplate Blocks That Can Be Connected to the Fieldbus Block Type Model INDST2 Analog type INDST2S INDST3 BSI Sequence type Hybrid type
: -: *1: *2:

Name Dual-Pointer indicating Station Block Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block Batch Status Indicator Block Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block

Connection possibility

(2) (2) (2) (2)

030305E.EPS

PBS5C PBS10C(*1) HAS3C

Can connect. Cannot connect. This is a function block that can only be used for the CS 3000. Fieldbus digital I/O can be connected. But I/O other than status does not have any meaning because a time delay occurs in the fieldbus.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-17

Data Referencing and Setting for the Fieldbus Block Parameters

By connecting the connection terminal of the faceplate block analog data (JPV, JSV, JMV, J01, J02, J03 and J04) and the connection terminal (JMOD, JALM) for MODE or ALRM data to the ACF11 I/O terminal using the terminal number, the fieldbus block parameters can be referenced or set.

Parameters That Can be Connected to the Faceplate Block

All of the fieldbus block parameters that can be connected to each terminal of the faceplate block are indicated in the table below.
Table Parameters of the Fieldbus Block That Can be Connected to the Faceplate Block
Faceplate Block I/O Terminal Related Data Item JMOD JALM JPV JSV JMV J01 J02 J03 J04 MODE ALRM PV SV MV SVH SVL MH ML Fieldbus Block Parameter MODE_BLK ALARM_SUM PV SP OUT SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM Access READ / WRITE READ READ READ / WRITE READ / WRITE READ / WRITE READ / WRITE READ / WRITE READ / WRITE
030306E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-18

The table below gives a list of the fieldbus block parameters that can be connected to each faceplate block.
Table List of Fieldbus Block Parameters That Can be Connected to Each Faceplate Block

I/O terminal Data item INDST2 FCS Block INDST2S INDST3 BSI PBS5C PBS10C (*1) HAS3C Corresponding parameters Access AI DI PID AO DO Fieldbus Block RA CS OS SC IT IS MDI MDO MAI MAO

JMOD MODE

JALM ALRM

JPV PV

JSV SV

JMV MV

J01 SVH

J02 SVL

J03 MH

J04 ML

MODE_ ALARM_ PV SUM BLK R/W R R

SP R/W

OUT R/W

SP_HI_ SP_LO_ OUT_HI_ OUT_LO_ LIM LIM LIM LIM R/W R/W R/W R/W

(*2) (*2)

(3) (4) (5) (6)

030307E.EPS

Note: The only parameters that can be connected to the faceplate block I/O terminal with the mark indicated in the upper portion of the table are the fieldbus block parameters with the mark indicated in the lower portion of the table. *1: These are function blocks that can only be used with the CS 3000. *2: The output parameter is OUT_N (N=1 or 2) *3: Connect the MDI output parameter OUT_DN (N= 1 to 8) to the faceplate block, the corresponding PV can be monitored. *4: Connect the MDO input parameter IN_DN (N= 1 to 8) to the faceplate block, the corresponding MV can be manipulated. *5: Connect the MAI output parameter OUT_N (N= 1 to 8) to the faceplate block, the corresponding PV can be monitored. *6: Connect the MAO input parameter IN_N (N= 1 to 8) to the faceplate block, the corresponding MV can be manipulated.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-19

Example of a Faceplate Block and Fieldbus Block Connection

The diagram below is an example of a faceplate block and fieldbus block connection.
MODE ALRM [INDST3] JMOD FCS %Znnus03 Fieldbus ALARM_SUM MODE_BLK [PID] IN BKCAL_IN OUT PV SP %Znnus04 %Znnus05 %Znnus06 %Znnus07 %Znnus12 %Znnus13 JALM JPV JSV JMV PV SV MV MODE [INDST2S] JMOD JMV MV

OUT

CAS_IN

MODE_BLK

OUT

[AI]

BKCAL_OUT

[AO]

030308E.EPS

Figure Faceplate Block and Fieldbus Block Connection

IMPORTANT
Alarm setpoint values for the fieldbus block (HI_HI_LIM, HI_LIM, LO_LIM, LO_LO_LIM) cannot be connected to the faceplate block. Set the fieldbus block alarm setpoint values with the device management tool in the PC. Faceplate block data is updated at unfixed intervals. This cannot be used in control requiring a precise response time.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-20

Fieldbus Block Mode Referencing and Setting

Same as FCS function blocks, the fieldbus block also has block execution mode represented in MODE_BLK. When connecting the MODE_BLK to JMOD terminal of a faceplate block via a PIO terminal(%Znnusmm), the fieldbus block mode can be referenced or manipulated on the faceplate block. It is important to set the correct block mode when fieldbus blocks are connected to each other or connected to FCS function blocks.

Correlation Between the Mode Display Symbols for the Fieldbus Block and Faceplate Block
The mode display symbols differ in the faceplate block mode and fieldbus block mode. The table below shows the correlation between the respective mode display symbols.
Table Correlation Between the Mode Display Symbols for the Fieldbus Block and Faceplate Block Fieldbus block Block mode O/S IMAN LO MAN AUTO CAS (*1) RCAS ROUT
*1:

Faceplate block Block mode O/S IMAN TRK MAN AUT CAS PRD RCAS ROUT
030309E.EPS

The fieldbus block primary direct operating status (mode is PRD) is placed as one status of the MAN mode in the faceplate block. Accordingly, when the fieldbus block changes to the primary direct operating status, the mode for the faceplate block connected to the fieldbus block becomes MAN. Conversely, even if the faceplate block mode is set to PRD, the setting is invalid.

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-21

Setting Recommended Mode A fieldbus block is executed in a pre-defined valid mode. When connecting a fieldbus block to an FCS function block in a cascade loop, the fieldbus block should be set to the mode recommended in the table below.
Table Recommended Mode and Valid Mode for the Fieldbus Block
Fieldbus block AI DI PID AO DO RA CS OS SC IT IS MDI MDO MAI MAO
*1: *2:

Recommended mode AUTO AUTO CAS (*1) CAS (*1) CAS (*1) MAN MAN AUTO AUTO MAN MAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

Valid mode O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO

Is cascade connection to the FCS function block allowed?

O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS, ROUT Allowed O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS O/S, (MAN), AUTO (*2) O/S, (MAN), AUTO (*2) O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, AUTO
030310E.EPS

Allowed Allowed

Allowed

AUTO mode is recommended if the loop is not a cascade-connected loop. The parenthesised mode is optional.

If a mode other than the recommended one is defined, the cascade loop with the FCS function block does not function properly. In this case, the data status of the fieldbus block will show Good-Not Invited, and the FCS function block mode will become IMAN. Also, it is recommend to set the AUTO mode for the fieldbus blocks not connected with FCS function blocks in cascade loops. TIP
When the fieldbus block mode is set to AUTO, connect SP to the faceplate block to change the fieldbus block manipulated setpoint value (SP) from the HIS. Also, when the fieldbus block mode is set to MAN, if the fieldbus block manipulated output value (OUT) is connected to the faceplate block, manual output can be performed. Even when the MODE change operation is not performed, the mode may automatically switch due to an error found in final control element. Thus, we recommend connecting the control block (PID) and output block (AO, DO) for the fieldbus block to the faceplate block. When an error occurs in the process, the mode switches to the specified status (different parameter value). After that, if the process returns to normal, the mode automatically returns to the setpoint value. However, if the process does not return to normal, the execution mode remains in the transitioned state.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-22

Effect on Connected Blocks when the Mode Changes from O/S to Others
If a fieldbus block or a faceplate block changes its mode from O/S to others, the mode of the connected block will change its mode accordingly. The special relationship in the mode transition in this case is indicated below. MAN mode in this table represents a mode other than O/S.
Table Effect on Connected Blocks when the Mode Changes from O/S to Others

Mode Change Operation Faceplate block O/SMAN O/SMAN O/S(MAN)MAN O/S(MAN)O/S MANO/S O/S O/S O/S(MAN) MAN Fieldbus block O/S MAN O/S O/S MAN O/SMAN MANO/S O/SMAN MANO/S Faceplate block MAN MAN MAN O/S O/S O/S O/S MAN O/S(MAN)

Result Fieldbus block MAN MAN MAN O/S MAN MAN O/S MAN O/S
030311E.EPS

Note: The section enclosed by the thick line frame indicates the mode change operation. There are two operations: the faceplate block mode change operation and the fieldbus block mode direct change operation.

Mode Transition Because of Local Device Operation The effect on the FCS function block mode when the fieldbus block mode has switched due to operation of a local device is indicated below. Changes in the fieldbus block parameters because of the Hand Held Terminal may cause the fieldbus block mode to change to O/S. In this case, because the fieldbus block data status becomes Bad, an IOP or OOP will be detected by the connected FCS function block. If the fieldbus block mode is set to anything other than CAS, the mode for the FCS function block at the cascade connected destination changes to IMAN

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-23

Referencing Fieldbus Block Alarm Status

When connecting the ALARM_SUM of fieldbus block to JALM terminal of a faceplate block via a PIO terminal(%Znnusmm), the fieldbus block alarm status can be referenced on the faceplate block. However, the alarm status display symbols for the faceplate block and fieldbus block differ. The table below shows the correlation between the respective alarm status display symbols.
Table Correlation Between the Alarm Status Symbols for the Faceplate Block and Fieldbus Block Fieldbus block alarm status
High high Alarm High Alarm Low low Alarm Low Alarm Deviation high Alarm Deviation low Alarm Block Alarm Discrete Alarm

Faceplate block alarm status

HIHI HI LOLO LO DV+ DVBLCK DISC
030312E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-24

3.3.2

Connection to the Regulatory Control Block

The regulatory control blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block I/O terminal parameters are indicated below. When connecting, there are precautions related to settings for the regulatory control block.

List of Regulatory Control Blocks that can be Connected

Regulatory control blocks can be connected to the fieldbus block external I/O terminal. They cannot be connected to the fieldbus block internal parameters. To connect to the internal parameters, use the faceplate block. The table below gives a list of the regulatory control blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block.
Table List of Regulatory Control Blocks That Can Be Connected to the Fieldbus Block (1/2)
Block Type Input terminal PVI PVI-DV PID PI-HLD PID-BSW ONOFF ONOFF-E Adjustment control ONOFF-G ONOFF-GE PID-TP PD-MR PI-BLEND PID-STC MLD MLD-PVI MLD-SW Manual operation MC-2 MC-2E MC-3 MC-3E RATIO Signal setting PG-L13 BSETU-2 BSETU-3 Signal limit
: -: *1: *2: *3:

Code Input Indicator Block

Name

Connection Possible

Input Indicator-Block with Deviation Alarm PID Controller Block Sampling PI Controller Block PID Controller Block with Batch Switch Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block Enhanced Two-Position ON/OFF Controller Block Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block Enhanced Three-Position ON/OFF Controller Block Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block PD Controller Block with Manual Reset Blending PI Controller Block Self-Tuning PID Controller Block Manual Loader Block Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW Two-Position Motor Control Block Enhanced Two-Position Motor Control Block Three-Position Motor Control Block Enhanced Three-Position Motor Control Block Ratio Set Block 13-Zone Program Set Block Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block Velocity-Limiter Block (*3) (*3) (*1)
030313E.EPS

(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (*1)

(1) (2) (2) (1)

VELLIM

Can be connected. Cannot be connected. Cannot be connected to the SET terminal. Inching output cannot be done because a time difference occurs in the fieldbus. Cannot be connected to the OUT2 terminal.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus> Table List of Regulatory Control Blocks That Can Be Connected to the Fieldbus Block (2/2) Block Type Code AS-H/M/L Signal selection SS-H/M/L SS-DUAL FOUT Dual signal selector block Pulse count Alarm
: -: *1: *2: *3: *4:

3-25
Connection Possible (*1) (*1) (*2) (*3) (*4) 030314E.EPS

Name Auto Selector Block Signal Selector Block Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block Cascade Signal Distributor Block Feedforward Signal Summing Block Non-Interference Control Output Block Control Signal Splitter Block Pulse Count Input Block Representative Alarm Block

FFSUM XCPL SPLIT PTC ALM-R

Sequence control blocks can be connected to the fieldbus block external I/O terminal. They cannot be connected to the fieldbus block internal parameters. The table below gives a list of the sequence control blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block.
Table List of Sequence Control Blocks that can be Connected to the Fieldbus Block (1/2)
Block type Sequence table Logic chart Code ST16 ST16E LC64 SI-1 SI-2 SO-1 SO-2 SIO-11 SIO-12 SIO-21 SIO-22 SIO-12P SIO-22P Switch instrument SI-1E SI-2E SO-1E SO-2E SIO-11E SIO-12E SIO-21E SIO-22E SIO-12PE SIO-22PE
: *1: *2: *4: *5:

Name Sequence Table Block Rule Extension Block Logic Chart Block Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 Outputs Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 Outputs Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 One-Shot Outputs Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 One-Shot Outputs Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 Outputs Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 Outputs Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 One-shot Outputs Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 One-shot Outputs

Connection Possible (*1) (*1) (*1) (*2) (*2) (*2)(*4) (*2)(*4) (*2)(*4)(*5) (*2)(*4) (*2)(*4)(*5) (*2)(*4) (*2)(*4) (*2)(*4) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2)
030315E.EPS

Can be connected. The fieldbus block discrete I/O block (DI, DO) can be connected. However, due to a time delay occurring in the fieldbus, a short time delay output or one-shot output will not work correctly. The fieldbus block discrete I/O block (DI, DO) can be connected. In this case, however, a time delay will occur in the fieldbus. It is necessary to aware of the restrictions when connecting the OUT terminal to fieldbus function block DO. Though the switch instrument can open or close properly, the handshake between the switch instrument and DO block is not supported. In order to connect the output of switch instrument to fieldbus function block DO, it is necessary to have a logic operation block such as a logical OR block in between. Moreover, the answerback input should use a signal from fieldbus function block DI.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus> Table List of Sequence Control Blocks that can be Connected to the Fieldbus Block (2/2) Block type TM CTS CTP Sequence auxiliary CI CO RL RS Valve monitor
: -: *2: *3:

3-29
Connection Possible (*2) (*2) (*2) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*2)
030322E.EPS

Code Timer Block

Name

Software Counter Block Pulse Train Input Counter Block Code Input Block Code Output Block Relational Expression Block Resource Scheduler Block Valve Monitoring Block

VLVM

Can be connected. Cannot be connected. The fieldbus block discrete I/O block (DI, DO) can be connected. In this case, however, a time delay will occur in the fieldbus. The parameters for the connected fieldbus block are limited to 4 bytes or less.

Precautions when Connecting to a Sequence Control Block

In the sequence control block and fieldbus block connection, everything becomes status I/O. Pulse output cannot be done.

IMPORTANT
Pulse output and flashing output for the sequence table do not work. In the switch-instrument blocks pulse contact output, normal output cannot be performed in a pulse time that is less than the fieldbus control cycle. Data synchronicity between the two data that is read as the answerback input signal for the Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs (SI-2, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-22P, SI-2E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E, SIO-22PE) cannot be guaranteed. Also, data synchronicity between the two data output as the output signal for the Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs (SO-2, SIO-12, SIO-22, SIO-22P, SO-2E, SIO-12E, SIO-22E, SIO-22PE) cannot be guaranteed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-30

Cautions when Connecting Fieldbus Function Block DO to Switch Instruments

When connecting the fieldbus DO function blocks to switch instrument blocks, the enhanced type (SO-1E, SO-2E, SIO-11E, SIO-12E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E, SIO-12PE and SIO22PE) switch instrument blocks should be used. If non-enhanced type (SO-1, SO-2, SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P and SIO22P) switch instrument blocks are used, the following restrictions are applied. Among the switch instruments, only SIO-11 and SIO-21 can be connected to function block DO. If other switch instruments are connected to DO, the handshake between the switch instruments and DO block does not function, though the switch instruments can open and close. Configure the switch instrument (SIO-11 or SIO-21) as follows when connecting to fieldbus function block DO.
[SIO-21] IN MV Q01 [OR] OUT 0 : Close 1 : Open %Znnus02 %Znnus03 FCS Fieldbus 0: Close 1: Open 2 or more : Varies with switch instruments BK_CAL CAS 0 : Close 1 : Open Limit Switches %Znnus01

[DO] 0 : Not Open 1 : Open OUT [Up-scale Limit] 0 : Not Close 1 : Close OUT [Down-scale Limit]

Answer back inputs from limit switches

030321E.EPS

Figure Connection Between SIO-21 and Fieldbus Function Block DO

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-31

In order to connect the output of SIO-11 or SIO-21 to fieldbus function block DO, it is necessary to have a calculation block such as a logical OR block in between. The calculation block should only have the boolean output 0/1. The calculation block with different value such as 0/2 should not be used. Since the handshake does not function between the switch instrument block (SIO-11 or SIO-21) and DO block, the connection error cannot be detected. Regarding to the connection between SIO-11 or SIO-21 switch instrument and the calculation block, connect the MV of the switch instrument block to the input terminal of the calculation block. Regarding to the connection between the operation block and fieldbus function block DO, connect the output of the calculation block to the I/O element (%Z) assigned to CAS terminal of the DO block. The answerback signals of SIO-11 and SIO-21 should be the signals from the fieldbus function block DI. A sample of using the answerback signals from DI block is shown as follows. On the IOM Builder to define the process I/O terminal elements (%Z) as follows and then connected the defined elements to the SIO-21 IN terminal. %Znnusmm %Znnusmm+1 DI01.OUT RD (Connect this element to SIO-21 IN termi nal) DI02.OUT RD

Then define the fieldbus DI function blocks DI01 and DI02 to make them behave as follows. DI01.OUT DI02.OUT 0 (Valve Not Open), 1 (Valve Open) 0 (Valve Not Close), 1 (Valve Close)

The output (OUT) of DI block such as [0 (Valve Not Open), 1 (Valve Open)] indicates different situation varies with the types of the applied transducer blocks. It is necessary to check the specification of the transducer blocks corresponding to the DI blocks, and decide the DI block parameters properly.

After the above settings are completed, the SIO-21 should initiate the answerback error alarms (ANS+/ANS) if the SIO-21 has output abnormality. Unless the DO block is in CAS mode, the answerback error alarms (ANS+/ANS) occurs even when the transducer block is in O/S mode. TIP
When DI01.OUT data status is BAD, the alarm status of the connected SIO-11 or SIO-21 switch instrument block becomes IOP. When the fieldbus device fails, the alarm status of SIO-11 and SIO-21 becomes IOP instead of OOP. When the DI block DI01, assigned to %Znnusmm, becomes O/S, the alarm status of SIO-11 and SIO-21 becomes IOP. However, if the DI block DI02, assigned to %Znnusmm+1, becomes O/S, the alarm status of SIO-11 and SIO-21 does not become IOP. The alarm status of SIO-11 and SIO-21 may become PERR (answerback undefined alarm) due to the inconsistency between FCS scan period and Fieldbus link active scheduler (LAS). If block returns to normal status right after the occurrence of PERR, this phenomenon is not considered as an error.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-32

3.3.4

Connection to the Calculation Block

The calculation blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block I/O terminal parameters are indicated below.

List of Calculation Blocks that can be Connected : PFCS/SFCS

Calculation blocks can be connected to the fieldbus block external I/O terminal. They cannot be connected to the fieldbus block internal parameters. The table below gives a list of the calculation blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block.
Table List of Calculation Blocks that can be Connected to the Fieldbus Block (1/2) : PFCS/SFCS Block Type Code ADD Arithmetic calculations MUL DIV AVE SQRT EXP LAG INTEG LD RAMP LDLAG Analog calculations DLAY DLAY-C AVE-M AVE-C TPCFL ASTM1 ASTM2 General-purpose CALCU calculations CALCU-C
: -: *1:

Name Addition Block Multiplication Block Division Block Averaging Block Square root Block Exponential Block First-order lag Block Integration Block Derivative Block Ramp Block Lead/lag Block Dead-Time Block Dead-Time Compensation Block Moving-Average Block Cumulative-Average Block Temperature and Pressure Correction Block ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS ASTM Correction Block: New JIS General-Purpose Calculation Block General-Purpose Calculation Block with string I/O

Connection Possible

FUNC-VAR Variable Line-Segment Function Block

(*1)
030316E.EPS

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-35

Table List of Calculation Blocks that can be Connected to the Fieldbus Block (2/2) : LFCS2/LFCS Block Type Code SW-33 SW-91 DSW-16 DSW-16C DSET Auxiliary DSET-PVI BDSET-1C BDSET-1L BDSET-2C BDSET-2L BDA-C BDA-L AND OR NOT SRS1-S SRS1-R SRS2-S SRS2-R WOUT Logical operation block OND OFFD TON TOFF GT GE EQ BAND BOR BNOT
: -: Can be connected. Cannot be connected.

Name Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block Selector Switch Block for 16 Data Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data Data Set Block Data Set Block with Input Indicator One-Batch String Data Set Block One-Batch Data Set Block Two-Batch String Data Set Block Two-Batch Data Set Block Batch String Data Acquisition Block Batch Data Acquisition Block Logical AND Block Logical OR Block Logical NOT Block Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs Wipeout Block ON-Delay Timer Block OFF-Delay Timer Block One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger) One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger) Comparator Block (Greater Than) Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal) Equal Operator Block Bitwise AND Block Bitwise OR Block Bitwise NOT Block

Connection Possible

030319E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-36

3.3.5

Connection to the Off-Site Block

The off-site blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block I/O terminal parameters are indicated below.

List of Off-Site Blocks that can be Connected

Off-site blocks can be connected to the fieldbus blocks external I/O terminal. They cannot be connected to the fieldbus block internal parameters. The table below gives a list of the off-site blocks that can be connected to the fieldbus block.
Table List of Off-Site Blocks that can be Connected to the Fieldbus Block Code FSBSET BLEND
: -:

Name Batch Set Control Block Blending Master Control Block

Connection Possible 030320E.EPS

Can be connected. Cannot be connected.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-37

3.3.6

List of Parameters that can be Connected

This section explains the fieldbus block parameters that can be connected to the I/O terminal of an FCS function block.

Parameters that can be Connected to an FCS Function Block

The parameters that can be connected refer to those fieldbus block parameters that can be assigned to the ACF11 terminal numbers (%Znnusrrun). Parameters that have been assigned to terminal numbers can be connected to the FCS function block I/O terminals. The parameters that can be connected are listed below by type of fieldbus block.

Notes when Referencing the Parameter Lists

The items marked with - indicate that they cannot be defined to ACF11 terminal numbers. Readback parameter, VIEW No and Communication module, are not definition items on the builder. The readback parameter is automatically connected.

A Note when Setting Definitions on the Builder Screen

The fieldbus block parameters MODE_BLK and ALARM_SUM can only be connected to a faceplate block.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-38

Resource Block (R_B)

Table List of Resource Block (R_B) Parameters Parameter MODE_BLK ALARM_SUM Readback parameter MODE_BLK Direction WT RD Data type MODE ALARM VIEW No 1 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD
030321E.EPS

Remarks

Analog Input Block (AI)

Table List of Analog Input Block (AI) Parameters Parameter MODE_BLK PV OUT OUT FIELD_VAL ALARM_SUM OUT Readback parameter MODE_BLK Direction WT RD RD WT RD RD Data type MODE AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S ALARM VIEW No 1 1 0 1 1 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD CAS_RD D_RW D_RD D_RD
030322E.EPS

Remarks

Write enabled only when block mode is MAN

Analog Output Block (AO)

Table List of Analog Output Block (AO) Parameters
Parameter MODE_BLK PV SP SP OUT OUT READBACK CAS_IN CAS_IN SP_HI_LIM SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM SP_LO_LIM RCAS_IN(*1)
*1:

Readback parameter MODE_BLK SP OUT BKCAL_OUT SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM

Direction WT RD RD WT RD WT RD RD WT RD WT RD WT

Data type MODE AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32S

VIEW No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 2 2 2 0

Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RD D_RW D_RD D_RW D_RD D_RD CAS_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW CAS_RW

Remarks

Write enabled only when block mode is AUTO or MAN Write enabled only when block mode is MAN When monitoring When configuring control loop

RCAS_OUT(*1) WT

030323E.EPS

Connecting to RCAS_IN, RCAS_OUT is not yet supported.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-39

Discrete Input Block (DI)

Table List of Discrete Input Block (DI) Parameters Parameter MODE_BLK PV OUT_D OUT_D FIELD_VAL_D ALARM_SUM OUT_D Readback parameter MODE_BLK Direction WT RD RD WT RD RD Data type MODE DS DS DS DS ALARM VIEW No 1 1 0 1 1 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD CAS_RD D_RW D_RD D_RD
030324E.EPS

Remarks

Write enabled only when block mode is MAN

Discrete Output Block (DO)

Table List of Parameters for Discrete Output Block (DO) Parameter MODE_BLK PV_D SP_D SP_D OUT_D OUT_D READBACK_D CAS_IN_D CAS_IN_D OUT_D SP_D Readback parameter MODE_BLK Direction WT RD RD WT RD WT RD Data type MODE DS DS DS DS DS DS DS DS DS VIEW No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RD D_RW D_RD D_RW D_RD D_RD CAS_RW CAS_RW When monitoring When configuring control loop When configuring control loop
030325E.EPS

Remarks

Write enabled only when block mode is AUTO or MAN Write enabled only when block mode is MAN

RD BKCAL_OUT_D WT

RCAS_IN_D(*1) RCAS_OUT_D(*1) WT

*1:

Connecting to RCAS_IN_D, RCAS_OUT_D is not yet supported.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-40

PID Controller Block (PID)

Table List of PID Controller Block (PID) Parameters
Parameter MODE_BLK PV SP SP OUT OUT CAS_IN CAS_IN SP_HI_LIM SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM SP_LO_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM OUT_LO_LIM RCAS_IN(*1) ROUT_IN(*1) TRK_IN_D TRK_VAL FF_VAL ALARM_SUM
*1:

Readback parameter MODE_BLK SP OUT BKCAL_OUT SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM

Direction WT RD RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT

Data type MODE AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32S AF32S DS AF32S AF32S ALARM

VIEW No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 1 1 0 1

Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RD D_RW D_RD D_RW D_RD CAS_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW CAS_RW CAS_RW D_RD D_RD CAS_WT D_RD

Remarks

Write enabled only when block mode is AUTO or MAN Write enabled only when block mode is MAN When monitoring When configuring control loop

RCAS_OUT(*1) WT ROUT_OUT(*1) WT RD RD WT RD

When monitoring When monitoring

030326E.EPS

Connecting RCAS_IN, RCAS_OUT, ROUT_IN, ROUT_OUT to FCS function block is not yet supported.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-41

Ratio Set Block (RA)

Table List of Ratio Set Block (RA) Parameters
Parameter MODE_BLK ALARM_SUM PV SP SP SP Readback Parameter Direction Data Type VIEW No. MODE_BLK WT RD RD RD WT MODE ALARM AF32S AF32S AF32S 1 1 1 1 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RD D_RD D_RW Write enabled only when block mode is AUTO or MAN. Write enabled only when block mode is MAN. When monitoring; When in a control loop Remarks

OUT OUT OUT

RD WT

AF32S AF32S

0 1

D_RD D_RW

CAS_IN CAS_IN SP_HI_LIM SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM SP_LO_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM OUT_LO_LIM RCAS_IN(*1) TRK_IN_D TRK_VAL
*1:

BKCAL_OUT SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM RCAS_OUT(*1)

RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT WT RD RD

AF32S AF32S AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32S DS AF32S

1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 1 1

D_RD CAS_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW CAS_RW D_RD D_RD

When monitoring When monitoring

030327E.EPS

Connecting RCAS_IN, RCAS_OUT to function blocks is not supported.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-42

Control Selector Block (CS)

Table List of Control Selector Block (CS) Parameters
Parameter MODE_BLK OUT OUT OUT Readback Parameter Direction Data Type VIEW No. MODE_BLK WT RD WT MODE AF32S AF32S 1 0 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RW Write enabled only when block mode is MAN. When monitoring; When in a control loop. When monitoring; When in a control loop. When monitoring; When in a control loop. Remarks

SEL_1 SEL_1 SEL_2 SEL_2 SEL_3 SEL_3 OUT_HI_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM OUT_LO_LIM

BKCAL_SEL_1 BKCAL_SEL_2 BKCAL_SEL_3 OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM

RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT RD WT

AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32 AF32 AF32 AF32

1 0 1 0 1 0 2 2 2 2

D_RD CAS_RW D_RD CAS_RW D_RD CAS_RW S_RD S_RW S_RD S_RW

030328E.EPS

Output Splitter Block (OS)

Table List of Output Splitter Block (OS) Parameters Parameter MODE_BLK SP SP OUT_1 OUT_1 OUT_1 SP Readback Parameter Direction Data Type VIEW No. MODE_BLK WT RD WT RD WT MODE AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S 1 1 1 0 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RW D_RD D_RW Write enabled only when block mode supports MAN. Write enabled only when block mode supports MAN. When monitoring; When in a control loop.
030329E.EPS

Remarks

OUT_2 OUT_2 OUT_2

RD WT

AF32S AF32S

0 1

D_RD D_RW

CAS_IN CAS_IN

BKCAL_OUT

RD WT

AF32S AF32S

1 0

D_RD CAS_RW

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-43

Signal Characterizer Block (SC)

Table List of Signal Characterizer Block (SC) Parameters Parameter MODE_BLK OUT_1 OUT_1 OUT_1 Readback Parameter Direction Data Type VIEW No. MODE_BLK WT RD WT MODE AF32S AF32S 1 0 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RW Write enabled only when block mode supports MAN. Write enabled only when block mode supports MAN.
030330E.EPS

Remarks

OUT_2 OUT_2 OUT_2

RD WT

AF32S AF32S

0 1

D_RD D_RW

Integrator Block (IT)

Table List of Integrator Block (IT) Parameters
Parameter MODE_BLK OUT OUT OUT Readback Parameter Direction Data Type VIEW No. MODE_BLK WT RD WT MODE AF32S AF32S 1 1 1 Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RW Write enabled only when block mode is MAN. Write enabled only when block mode is MAN. Write enabled only when block mode is MAN.
030331E.EPS

Remarks

OUT_TRIP OUT_TRIP

OUT_TRIP

RD WT

AF32S AF32S

1 1

D_RD D_RW

OUT_PTRIP OUT_PTRIP

OUT_PTRIP

RD WT

AF32S AF32S

1 1

D_RD D_RW

Input Selector Block (IS)

Table List of Input Selector Block (IS) Parameters

Parameter MODE_BLK OUT OUT

Readback Parameter Direction Data Type VIEW No. MODE_BLK OUT WT RD WT MODE AF32S AF32S 1 1 1

Communication Model D_RW D_RD D_RW

Remarks

Write enabled only when block mode is MAN.

030332E.EPS

SELECTED

AF32S

R_RD

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

Remarks

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-48

3.4

Reliability
This section explains the Reliability in the connection to the fieldbus block. SEE ALSO
For information about the Fieldbus system with Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see B1, FCS Fieldbus Compatibility in Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

Operation in Response to the Power Failure and Failure Mode : PFCS/SFCS

For power failure and failure, a power failure and failure mode in conjunction with the contents of the fault that occurred, is provided. When a fault occurs, output of process I/O or FCS control action in response to the respective power failure and failure mode is performed.
Table Output of Process I/O and FCS Control action By Power Failure and Failure Mode : PFCS/SFCS

Power failure and failure mode FBD single power failure FCS power failure Fieldbus device maintenance (*3) ACF11 maintenance Fieldbus device failure (*3) Fieldbus transmission stop ACF11 operation stop CPU operation stop Processor unit control right switching
*1: *2: *3: *4:

Output of process I/O At occurrence Fault state operation (*1) Initialization start (*4) At recovery Initialization start (*4)

FCS control action At occurrence MAN fallback At recovery Output restart Initialization start or restart

MAN fallback

Output restart

Fault state operation (*1) Fault state operation (*2) No change Output restart No change No change Initialization start Restart
030401E.EPS

Fault state operation for the fieldbus device is executed. If power is still being supplied to the fieldbus, this operates. Fault state operation for the fieldbus device is forcibly executed. The operation is the same as when there is a prolonged power failure in a single power failure for the fieldbus device. Output value tracking is performed.

Operations in the above table assume the following operation and processing.

Fault State Operation in the I/O Module : PFCS/SFCS

When a fieldbus device or an FCS recovers from power failure state, the output values held at the moment just prior to the power failure may be used depending on the recovery function when the output operation restarts.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-49

Operation in Response to the Power Failure and Failure Mode : LFCS2/LFCS

For power failure and breakdowns, a power failure and failure mode in conjunction with the contents of the fault that occurred, is provided. When a fault occurs, output of process I/O or FCS control action in response to the respective power failure and failure mode is performed.
Table Output of Process I/O and FCS Control Action by Power Failure and Failure Mode : LFCS2/ LFCS Power failure and failure mode FBD single power failure ACF11 single power failure FCU single power failure FCS power failure Fieldbus device maintenance (*3) ACF11 maintenance Fieldbus device failure (*3) Fieldbus transmission stop ACF11 operation stop FCU operation stop Processor unit control right switching
*1: *2: *3: *4:

Output of process I/O At occurrence Fault state operation (*1) Output restart Fault state operation (*2) Fault state operation (*1) Initialization start (*4) At recovery Initialization start (*4)

FCS control action At occurrence Operation of process I/O when a power failure occurs At recovery

Output restart

Initialization start or restart

MAN fallback

Output restart

Fault state operation (*1)

Fault state operation (*2) No change

Output restart No change

No change

Initialization start Restart

030402E.EPS

Operations in the above table assume the following operation and processing.

Fault State Operation in the Process I/O Module : LFCS2/LFCS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-50

Control Action When FCS Loses Power : PFCS/SFCS

When FCS loses power supply, the fieldbus block behaves differently according to the elapsed time of the power failure (TIM) is longer or shorter than the fieldbus block fault state detection time (Tfs). While the FCS function block connected will change to IMAN (AUT) mode after an FCS power failure events regardless of the elapsed time of the power failure. The control actions are illustrated as follows. The actions illustrated is under the condition that the power supply for fieldbus devices are guaranteed by external power sources and the FCS start condition is set as AUTO (Restart).

When Power Failure Time (TIM) is Longer Than Fault State Detection Time (Tfs) : PFCS/SFCS
AC power supply for an FCS

TIM Block mode of FCS function block

Tih

AUT

IMAN(AUT)

AUT

Tfs Block mode of fieldbus block

CAS

IMAN(AUT)

CAS

Output of fieldbus block (AO block, in this case)

030403E.EPS

Figure When Power Failure (TIM) Time is Longer Than Fault State Detection Time (Tfs) : PFCS/ SFCS

When FCS power failure duration exceeds the fault state detection time (Tfs): The fieldbus block performs fault state operation, and the fieldbus block mode becomes LO. At this time, the fieldbus block either holds its current output value or outputs a user defined value. When FCS Recovers from Power Failure: The ACF11 starts initialization and the fieldbus block mode is kept as LO, so the FCS function block mode is IMAN (AUT). When the ACF11 initialization and output value tracking is completed (execution time Tih), the FCS function block mode changes to AUT and the fieldbus block mode changes to CAS to start the output.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-51

When Power Failure Time (TIM) is Shorter Than Fault State Detection Time (Tfs) : PFCS/SFCS
AC power supply for an FCS

TIM Block mode of FCS function block

AUT

IMAN(AUT)

AUT

Block mode of fieldbus block

CAS

Output of fieldbus block (AO block, in this case)

030404E.EPS

Figure When Power Failure (TIM) Time is Shorter Than Fault State Detection Time (Tfs) : PFCS/ SFCS

At the Moment of FCS Momentary Power Failure: The fieldbus block does not perform fault state operation, and there is no change on its output. When FCS Recovers from the Momentary Power Failure: ACF11 starts initialization while No communication with fieldbus is indicated as the data status. At this moment, the FCS function block mode is IMAN (AUT). When ACF11 initialization is completed (execution time Ti), the FCS function block changes to AUT.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-52

Control action When the Process I/O Section Has a Power Failure : LFCS2/LFCS
FCS function block and fieldbus block perform the following operation when the process I/ O section has a power failure, or in the cases of RIO bus transmission stops, node operation stops and ACF11 operation stops. The following explanation takes the case where the process I/O section has a power failure as an example. In other cases, the operations for the FCS function block and the fieldbus block are the same as for the process I/O power failure. When the process I/O section stops operating, the fieldbus block operation differs according to whether the power failure time (TIM) is longer or shorter than the fieldbus block fault state detection time (Tfs). Whether the power failure time is longer or shorter, the FCS function block mode temporarily changes to IMAN (AUT) mode. Due to this condition, the restart operation during the process I/O power failure will differ depending on whether the communication module is the ACF11, or another module. Control action when the ACF11 stops operating is indicated below. The control action described here is based on the assumption that the power supply to the fieldbus device is maintained by the external bus power supply.

When the power failure time (TIM) is longer than the fault state detection time (Tfs) : LFCS2/LFCS
PI/O AC power supply

TIM Block mode of FCS function block

Tih

AUT

IMAN(AUT)

AUT

Tfs Block mode of fieldbus block

CAS

IMAN(AUT)

CAS

Output of fieldbus block (AO block, in this case)

030405E.EPS

Figure When the Power Failure Time (TIM) is Longer than the Fault State Detection Time (Tfs) : LFCS2/LFCS

After the fault state detection time (Tfs) has elapsed from when the process I/O section has a power failure: The fieldbus block performs fault state operation, and the fieldbus block mode becomes LO. At this time, fieldbus block output changes to hold or to a user defined value. When the process I/O section recovers power: The ACF11 recovers from a momentary power failure. At this time, the ACF11 undergoes initialization and the fieldbus block mode is LO. Because of this, the FCS function block mode changes to IMAN (AUT). When the ACF11 initialization and output value tracking is completed (execution time Tih), the FCS function block mode is restored to AUT and the fieldbus block mode is restored to CAS. This restarts output.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<3. FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus>

3-53

When the power failure time (TIM) is shorter than the fault state detection time (Tfs) : LFCS2/LFCS
PI/O AC power supply

TIM Block mode of FCS function block

AUT

IMAN(AUT)

AUT

Block mode of fieldbus block

CAS

Output of fieldbus block (AO block, in this case)

030406E.EPS

Figure When the Power Failure Time (TIM) is Shorter than the Fault State Detection Time (Tfs) : LFCS2/LFCS

When the process I/O section has a power failure: The fieldbus block fault state operation is not performed, and output does not change. When the process I/O section recovers power: ACF11 undergoes initialization, and Not communicating with the fieldbus is displayed as the data status. At this time, the FCS function block mode changes to IMAN (AUT). When ACF11 initialization is completed (execution time Ti), the FCS function block is restored to AUT.

Control Action when the Processor Section Stops Operating : PFCS/SFCS

When the FCS processor section stops because of an error, the fallback operation is performed by the ACF11. When the FCS processor section recovers from the error, the fallback operation stops. When fallback starts: Fault state execution is requested to the fieldbus device from ACF11. When fallback stops: A request to cancel fault state execution is sent to the fieldbus device from ACF11.

Control Action when RIO Bus Transmission Stops or FCU Operation Stops : LFCS2/LFCS
When RIO bus transmission or FCU operation stops due to a power failure or error, fallback operation is executed by the ACF11. When there is a recovery from the power failure or error, the fallback operation stops. When fallback starts: Fault state execution is requested to the fieldbus device from ACF11. When fallback stops: A request to cancel fault state execution is sent to the fieldbus device from ACF11.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

Blank Page

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-1

System Builders Related to Fieldbus

This chapter explains CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders related to the fieldbus used to perform fieldbus engineering. The startup procedure for fieldbus system and the revision procedure after startup are also explained. Note that the fieldbus engineering described in this chapter only covers the engineering for the fieldbus system can be carried out in the scope of system builders including the upper lager system engineering related to ACF11. SEE ALSO
For information about the system builders regarding to Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-2

4.1

What is Fieldbus Engineering?

A system configured with fieldbus can be separated into upper level system and lower level system with the ACF11 module as the boundary. The fieldbus engineering for the upper level system can be performed using CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders installed in an HIS.

Fieldbus Engineering for Upper Level System

Fieldbus engineering for upper level system is mainly composed of the definition of the fieldbus communication module (ACF11), assignment of fieldbus block parameters to the ACF11 software terminals (%Znnusmm), and connection of the ACF11 software terminals and the FCS function blocks. Through these operations, the logical correlation between the fieldbus devices connected on the fieldbus and the ACF11 software terminals can be established, so that data can be exchanged between the fieldbus devices and the FCS function blocks.
Ethernet HIS Master PC Fieldbus engineering for upper level system Definition of ACF11 Assignment of fieldbus block parameters to ACF11 software terminals Connection of ACF11 software terminals and FCS function blocks Control bus FCS

Upper level system

Lower level system Slave PC ACF11 H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device

Fieldbus device
040101E.EPS

Figure Fieldbus Engineering for Upper Level System

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-3

4.1.1

Positioning of Fieldbus-Related System Builders

The following diagram shows the positioning of the fieldbus-related CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders within the overall configuration of a fieldbus system and the positioning of the fieldbus-related system builders within the overall engineering flow for the fieldbus system.

Positioning Within the Overall Fieldbus System

The CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders are implemented in the HIS. The positioning of the system builders within the overall fieldbus system is shown below.
Ethernet HIS CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders Master PC

PFCS

VL net

Slave PC ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: PFCS: ACF11:

Fieldbus device
040102E.EPS

Human Interface Station General-purpose PC (Connected on VL net) General-purpose PC (Connected on H1 Fieldbus) Control station Fieldbus communication module

Figure Positioning of CS 1000/CS 3000 System Builders Within the Overall Fieldbus System

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-4

Positioning Within the Overall Fieldbus System

The system builders are implemented in the HIS. The positioning of the system builders within the overall fieldbus system is shown below.
Ethernet HIS CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders Master PC

LFCS2/LFCS FCU

SFCS

V net

FCU RIO bus NIU ACF11

ACF11

Slave PC

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: SFCS: LFCS2/LFCS: FCU: RIO bus: NIU: ACF11: Human Interface Station General-purpose PC(Connected on V net) General-purpose PC(Connected on H1 Fieldbus) Control station (compact type) Control station Field control unit Remote I/O bus Node interface unit Fieldbus communication module

Fieldbus device
040103E.EPS

Figure Positioning of CS 1000/CS 3000 System Builders Within the Overall Fieldbus System

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-5

Positioning within the Engineering Flow

The positioning of the system builders within the engineering flow for the overall fieldbus system is shown below.
System design

Creation of I/O list

Control loop design

Selection of fieldbus devices

Construction

Engineering with the system builders

Engineering with the fieldbus engineering tool

Using Device Tool provided in Fieldbus Support Tools to configure tag name and node address of Physical Device.

Individual device setting

On-line debug /loop check

Legend Work flow Flow of output information

Test operation

Engineering performed with system builders

Application/service
040104E.EPS

*1:

When the following two conditions are both satisfied, the engineering work by Device Tool, one of the Fieldbus Support Tools, is not required. The physical device tag names and node addresses are already configured in the field devices. The capabilities files have already obtained from venders or Foundation Fieldbus. The tag names and node addresses of physical devices can be configured using Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Figure Positioning of CS 1000/CS 3000 System Builders within the Engineering Flow

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-6

4.1.2

Fieldbus Engineering Flow

The basic flow of fieldbus engineering is shown below.

Basic Flow of Fieldbus Engineering

Engineering start

Fieldbus system design

Define ACF11

Download to ACF11 from system view

Define ACF11 terminal number

Engineering using the fieldbus engineering tool (*2)

Download from the IOM builder to the FCS and ACF11 (*1)

Download to the fieldbus device

Connect the ACF11 terminal number and FCS function block

Parameter adjustment Legend Upload parameters (HIS or Master PC) Workflow Operation performed by the system builders Operation performed by other tools without using the system builders
040105E.EPS

Engineering completed

Figure Basic Flow of Fieldbus Engineering

*1: *2: If the data defined on Fieldbus Engineering Tool are saved under the designated directory, these data will be downloaded together to ACF11. Engineering can be performed on HIS, master PC or slave PC, but when performed on slave PC, it is necessary to fetch the data configured in the slave PC to HIS or master PC.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-7

TIP
When using Fieldbus Engineering Tool to perform online maintenance to the fieldbus devices connected on the H1 fieldbus, the physical device tag names and the node addresses should be set to the devices before hand. Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be applied in HIS, master PC or salve PC for fieldbus engineering. When performing the engineering in the slave PC, the upper system can not be accessed so that only the field devices can be configured.

Fieldbus System Design

The fieldbus devices configuration, fieldbus block configuration, communication specifications, and control specifications are designed.

Definition of the ACF11

New registration and setting of the fieldbus communication module (ACF11) are performed. Also, the directory where definition data is located is specified in order to import definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. This operation is done using The new IOM dialog box called from the system builders of System View.

Downloading from System View to the ACF11

Definition data is downloaded to the ACF11. This operation is done using the system builders of System View.

Engineering Using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Engineering for the lower layer system including the ACF11 is performed. The fieldbus device configuration, fieldbus block configuration and definitions related to communication information are performed, and generation is executed. This can be done using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed in HIS, master PC or slave PC. But when using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed in slave PC, it is necessary to reflect the configured data to HIS or master PC. If the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool are residing in the same machine, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be started from the IOM Builder of the system builders. TIP
Even when engineering for the lower level system is done using the engineering tool of another manufacturer, the Yokogawa Electrics fieldbus engineering tool is required for data definitions related to the ACF11.

SEE ALSO
Refer to 5, Fieldbus Engineering Tool concerning the details of engineering using the fieldbus engineering tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-8

Definition of the ACF11 Terminal Number

Fieldbus block parameters are assigned to the ACF11 terminal number. This operation is done using the IOM Builder of the system builders.

Downloading from the IOM Builder to the FCS and ACF11

Definition data is downloaded to the FCS and ACF11. This operation is performed using the IOM Builder of the system builders. TIP
If there is definition data for the fieldbus engineering tool under the directory specified in the new IOM dialog box when ACF11 was defined, then this engineering tool definition data will also be downloaded to the ACF11.

Downloading to Fieldbus Devices

The data configured with Fieldbus Engineering Tool on HIS or on master PC can be fetched to a slave PC, the slave PC can download the data directly to the field devices. However, HIS or master PC can download the configured data to the field devices via ACF11 module. The downloading will be performed by Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed on HIS, master PC or slave PC. TIP
When downloading the configured data from an HIS or a master PC via ACF11 module, it may take much more time than downloading from a slave PC. Further more, it is necessary to confirm the ACF11 module's working state by monitoring its parameters on Device Management Tool before downloading.

Connection of ACF11 Software Terminals and FCS Function Blocks

The ACF11 software terminals and FCS function blocks may be connected using the Control Drawing Builder of the system builders.

Parameter Adjustment
Parameters for the fieldbus block may be adjusted. This operation is performed using the operation and monitoring function or Device Management Tool on HIS, master PC or slave PC.

Uploading Parameters (HIS or Master PC)

Parameters for fieldbus blocks may be uploaded to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Uploading parameters should be performed accordingly when required parameters need to be adjusted in Fieldbus Engineering Tool. This can be performed using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed on HIS or master PC.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-9

4.1.3

Overview of System Builders Related to Fieldbus

The fieldbus-related system builders are mainly for system generation and system test.

Configuration of System Builders Related to Fieldbus

Fieldbus-related system builders System builders System View New IOM dialog box IOM download IOM Builder (*1) Fieldbus Engineering Tool start Function for downloading from IOM Builder Control Drawing Builder

System test Wiring FCS simulation

Fieldbus Engineering Tool Project manager Various builders Host File Set

Host File Set output Download

Legend Calling function Data flow

040106E.EPS

*1:

When the system builders and the fieldbus engineering tool are in the same machine, this function can be called up.

Figure Configuration of System Builders Related to Fieldbus

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-10

CS 1000/CS 3000 System Builders

Definitions related to ACF11, assignment of fieldbus block parameters to the ACF11 terminal number, and connection of the terminal number and FCS function block are performed in the builders for system generation. SEE ALSO
Refer to 4.2, System Builders for details on engineering in System View.

System View
Opens various system builders.

New IOM Dialog Box

Definitions related to the ACF11 such as the loading position of the ACF11 and number of I/ O points are set. Also, the directory where definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is specified.

Download to IOM
Downloads definition data to the ACF11. At this time, definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is also automatically downloaded to the ACF11.

IOM Builder
This defines the ACF11 terminal number. The fieldbus block parameters are assigned to the terminal number.

Fieldbus Engineering Tool Start

When the System Builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool are used in the same machine, the project manager for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be called from the IOM Builder. This becomes necessary when the system and fieldbus engineering are performed in parallel.

Downloading from IOM Builder

Definition data is downloaded to the ACF11. At this time, definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is also automatically downloaded to the ACF11.

Host File Set Read/Expansion

Imports definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. When download is executed on IOM Builder, definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is automatically opened as the host file set.

Control Drawing Builder

Connects the terminal number defined on IOM Builder and the I/O terminal for the FCS function block.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-11

Test Function
System testing and debugging can be performed with test function. During the implementation of engineering, testing and debugging should be performed regularly. SEE ALSO
Refer to 4.3, Test Function for details on test function.

Wiring
Debugging can be performed without the fieldbus device being connected. However, a simulation of the fieldbus block cannot be done.

FCS Simulation
A test can be performed without using the physical FCS when using the FCS simulation.

Conditions for Using Fieldbus Engineering Tool

With the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be called or definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be imported. To do this however, there are the following conditions.
Table Operation Allowed Based on Position of Fieldbus Engineering Tool Data

Installed in the same machine Data is in specified position Fieldbus Engineering Tool start Host file set opens automatically when data downloaded During download to IOM, Fieldbus Engineering Tool definition data is downloaded to ACF11 During download from IOM Builder, Fieldbus Engineering Tool definition data is downloaded to ACF11 Data is not in specified position

Not installed in the same machine Data is in specified position Data is not in specified position

040107E.EPS

Can be executed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-12

4.2

System Builders
ACF11 and fieldbus related definitions can be set on the builders for system generation. For these definitions, the new IOM dialog box, IOM Builder and Control Drawing Builder are used.

Builders for System Generation

The builders for system generation are shown below.
Fieldbus-related system builders System builders System View New IOM dialog box IOM download IOM Builder (*1)

Fieldbus Engineering Tool start

Downloading from IOM Builder Control Drawing Builder

Fieldbus Engineering Tool Project manager Various builders Host File Set

Host File Set output Download

Legend Calling function Data flow

040201E.EPS

*1:

When the system builders and the fieldbus engineering tool are in the same machine, this function can be called up.

Figure Builders for System Generation

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-13

Items Need to be Defined

The table below gives a list of the items that need to be defined for ACF11.
Table List of Items That Need to be Set for ACF11
Category Category Type Unit Card information Slot Node address Duplicate Next Card HighSpeed Read Data Block tag name I/O number specification Parameter Direction Data type P & ID Tag Name Tag Name Tag Comment Lv 1 Switch Position Label Tag information Label Btn 1 Btn 2 Tag mark Upper window Help number
*1:

Item

Data acquisition (*1) Create New IOM dialog box Create New IOM dialog box Create New IOM dialog box Create New IOM dialog box Create New IOM dialog box Create New IOM dialog box Create New IOM dialog box IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder IOM Builder

Remarks

Dual redundancy cannot be specified. Information on detail setting tab. Fixed to 0x14.

040202E.EPS

Where the data is acquired from is indicated below. New IOM dialog box Acquired from the new IOM dialog box setting in system view IOM Builder Acquired from the IOM Builder setting

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-14

4.2.1

Create New IOM Dialog Box

The ACF11 can be configured using Create New IOM dialog box in System View.

Open a Create New IOM Dialog Box : PFCS/SFCS

In one section of the system view data tree, with a folder or file under FCS being selected, select [Create new], then [IOM] from the [File] menu. The new IOM dialog box is displayed. The new IOM dialog box has the following two tabs. Type and position tab Specify the type of communication I/O module (IOM type) and the position where the module is loaded. Details setting tab Set details related to fieldbus communication such as the number of I/O points for the ACF11 and communication error processing. The following is an example of a new IOM dialog box display.
Create New IOM Type and Position Set Details IOM Type Category Type AMN33 (Fieldbus Communication) ACF11 (Fieldbus Communication Module)

Installation Position Unit 1 Slot 1

Duplicate Next Card High Speed Read IOM Comment

Cancel
040203E.EPS

Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box : PFCS/SFCS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-15

Open a Create New IOM Dialog Box : LFCS2/LFCS

In the data tree section of System View, with NODExx folder under FCS-IOM folder being selected, select [Create new], then [IOM] from the [File] menu. The new IOM dialog box is displayed. The new IOM dialog box has the following two tabs. Type and position tab Specify the type of communication I/O module (IOM type) and the position where the module is loaded. Details setting tab Set details related to fieldbus communication such as the number of I/O points for the ACF11 and communication error processing. The following is an example of a new IOM dialog box display.
Create New IOM Type and Position Set Details IOM Type Category Type AMN33 (Fieldbus Communication) ACF11 (Fieldbus Communication Module)

Installation Position Unit 1 Slot 1

Duplicate Next Card High Speed Read IOM Comment

Cancel
040204E.EPS

Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box : LFCS2/LFCS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-16

Setting Items in the Type and Position Tab

The setting items for the type and position tab is given below.

IOM Type
Specify the type of communication I/O module used. For the IOM class, specify [Fieldbus communication], and for the IOM type, specify [Fieldbus communication (ACF11)].

Installation Position
Set the items indicated below as the loading position for the ACF11. Unit position: 1 to 5 Slot position: 1 to 2 Also, the slot position where the ACF11 can be loaded will differ depending on the setpoint values for the following two items. [High Speed Read] in the type and position tab [Number of Terminals] in the details setting tab The relationship between the settings for the two items above and the slot position where the ACF11 can be loaded is shown in the table below.
Table Slot Position where ACF11 Can Be Loaded
High Speed Read Number of Terminals Slot 1 Slot 2

Not specified Specified Not specified Specified

16 16 32 32 (*1)
040205E.EPS

(*1)

: Can be loaded. Blank: Cannot be loaded. *1: Can be loaded only in the case of PFCS/SFCS. Cannot be loaded with the LFCS2/LFCS.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-17

Duplicate Next Card

This cannot be specified in the ACF11.

High Speed Read

If only one ACF11 is loaded in 1 unit and when this item is specified, the data output from the ACF11 can be read to the FCS at high speed. In the default setting, this is not specified.

IOM Comment
The comment text related to the defined ACF11 should be entered. Up to 24 alphanumeric or 12 double-byte characters can be used.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-18

Setting Items in the Detail Setting Tab

An example of the ACF11 detail setting tab is given below.
IOM Properties Type and Position Set Details IOM IOM type Unit 2 AMN33 (Fieldbus Communication) ACF11 (Fieldbus Communication Module) Slot 0x 14 16 1

Node Address Number of Terminals

Communication Error Process Stale Count Limit Interval of Communication Establishment Retries 2 10 sec

Perform Fallback Fieldbus Database Directory Default... Command

Revert to initial value OK Cancel

040206E.EPS

Figure ACF11 Detail Setting Tab

Node Address
Node Address

This cannot be specified. The node address is fixed at 0x14.

Number of Terminals : PFCS/SFCS

Number of Terminals

Number of Terminals From 16 to 32

Default Setting With high-speed read Without high-speed read Terminals from 17 are not defined. Change is not allowed.

Change Change is allowed. The terminals from 17 will be undefined. Change is allowed. Change is allowed. The error message [Definitions on terminals from 17. Delete them.] will occur when saving or downloading the changed module.
040207E.EPS

From 32 to 16

Terminals from 17 are defined.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-19

Number of Terminals : LFCS2/LFCS

Number of Terminals

For the number of software terminals for an ACF11, 16 or 32 can be specified. The default setting is 16. It can be selected from the list box. Note that when changing the number of terminals on a ACF11 already defined, it may cause the following effects.
Table Ability to Change the Number of Terminals and Effects of Change : LFCS2/LFCS
Number of Terminals From 16 to 32 Default Setting With high-speed read Without high-speed read Terminals from 17 are not defined. From 32 to 16 Terminals from 17 are defined. Change is not allowed. Change is allowed. The terminals from 17 will be undefined. Change is allowed. Change is allowed. The error message [Definitions on terminals from 17. Delete them.] will occur when saving or downloading the modified module.
040208E.EPS

Change

Communication Error Processing

Communication Error Process

The settings for Stale Count Limit and Interval of Communication Establishment Retries should be defined. Normally, the default settings should be used. Clicking on [Revert to initial value] resets all settings to the default. Stale Count Limit This is the limit value for the number of BNU communication error counted in the fieldbus system. The communication between fieldbus devices and between a device and ACF11 module is referred to as BNU (Buffered, Network Schedule, Unidirectional Broadcast) communication. Even when BNU data transmission stops, as long as the number of errors is within the limit specified, system does not consider it as an abnormal status. Only when the limit is exceeded, system will consider it as an abnormality. An integer between 0 and 255 can be specified. The default is 2, and normally the default setting should be used. If 0 is specified, system will not check the communication error. Interval of Communication Establishment Retries This is the interval for the time to send the communication retry signals to re-establish the communication between the ACF11 and the fieldbus devices. An integer between 0 and 25 (seconds) can be specified. The default setting is 10, and normally the default setting should be used. If 0 is specified, system will not perform the communication establishment retry.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-20

Perform the Fallback Operation

Perform Fallback

Check this when performing the fallback operation. The default setting is to fallback.

Fieldbus Database Directory

Specify the directory in which definition data for the fieldbus engineering tool used in the system builders is stored. This directory is called the fieldbus database directory. The defined data under the specified directory will be used by the following operations. When performing an IOM download from System View. When performing an IOM download from FCS status display window. When performing an IOM download from IOM Builder. When the [Browse] button is clicked, the dialog box for selecting the directory is displayed. Specify the fieldbus database directory in this dialog box. The definition data under the specified directory can be created, revised and deleted using the fieldbus engineering tool function.

Command Line
Command

To set an optional setting to an I/O module, a line of command script can be put in the field of Command Line. For ACF11, QUBTIM (Communication Time Out) can be used to set the tolerant time limit for waiting for a response. QUBTIM (Communication Time Out): This command script can be used to specify the tolerant time limit for waiting for a response in QUB communication, one of the communication methods of Fieldbus. Syntax: QUBTIM=65.0 (65.0 is a default setting) QUBTIM (Communication Time Out) can be set within the range of 0.0 to 6550.0 (seconds). The time resolution is 100 millisecond. When 0.0 is specified, the QUB communication response time will have no limit. The default setting is 65.5 (second).

IMPORTANT
When command scripts are modified in command lines of an I/O module, downloading the I/O module configuration will be necessary. During downloading, the I/O module will be in FAIL state for a while. So that be careful when changing the command line.

TIP
Command Line is applicable only for the CS 1000/CS 3000 release R2.10 or later editions.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-21

4.2.2

Download to IOM
Download to the ACF11 is executed on System View.

Download to ACF11 in System View

In one section of System View data tree, with the IOM folder, or NODE folder of LFCS2, LFCS, that contains the ACF11 selected, select [IOM download], from System View [Load] menu. The dialog box to confirm execution of download is displayed. Data defined on system builders will be downloaded to the ACF11 from this dialog box. When downloading from IOM Builder, the files in the same directory but defined on Fieldbus Engineering Tool will be downloaded together with the data defined on the IOM Builder to the ACF11 module. TIP
When the defined data for the fieldbus engineering tool exists in the specified directory, the above described download method will download the data to the ACF11, together the data defined by the system builders.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-22

4.2.3

IOM Builder
With the IOM Builder, the block tag name and parameters for the fieldbus block are assigned to various terminal numbers. In the assigned terminal numbers, direction of the parameter data and parameter data type are defined.

Function of IOM Builder

As with the analog I/O module, process I/O for a fieldbus device is logically expressed by terminal number (%Znnusmm). With the IOM Builder, the block tag name and parameters for the fieldbus block are assigned to these terminal numbers. After the assignment to the terminal number, the number can be connected to FCS function blocks. For this reason, the terminal numbers are required as many as the number of parameters in the fieldbus block connected to the FCS function block.

Assigning a Terminal Number

The same number of terminal numbers as the number of ACF11 I/O points (16 or 32) specified in System View, is displayed in the IOM Builder. Accordingly, the maximum number of terminal numbers that can be assigned in one ACF11 is 32. Because of this, it is necessary to determine the fieldbus configuration, so that the total number of terminal numbers is 32 or less. The following is an example of assignment to a fieldbus blocks terminal number.
FCS function block to be connected FIC100 PID IN FIC100 PID OUT

%Z012101 To assigned software terminals AI AO AI

%Z012102

FI-1001A

VO-1004

FI-1001A

VO-1004
040209E.EPS

Figure Assignment to a Terminal Number

In the IOM Builder, it is necessary to define the data direction and data type in addition to assigning the fieldbus blocks block tag name and parameters to terminal number. An example of the definition of a terminal number is given below. Also, the values in the table correspond to the above figure.
Table Example of Terminal Number Definition
Terminal number Block tag name Parameter Direction Data type

%Z012101 %Z012102

FI-1001A VO-1004

OUT CAS_IN

RD WT

AF32S AF32S
040210E.EPS

SEE ALSO
Refer to 3.3.6, List of Parameters that can be Connected for details on the fieldbus block parameters for connection assignment.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-23

Example of Connecting the Faceplate Block and Internal Parameters

By connecting the fieldbus block internal parameters and the faceplate block, the internal parameters can be referenced and set. The diagram below is an example of connecting the faceplate blocks I/O terminals and the fieldbus block internal parameters.
MODE ALRM [INDST3] JMOD FCS %Znnus03 Fieldbus ALARM_SUM MODE_BLK [PID] IN BKCAL_IN OUT PV SP %Znnus04 %Znnus05 %Znnus06 %Znnus07 %Znnus12 %Znnus13 JALM JPV JSV JMV PV SV MV MODE [INDST2S] JMOD JMV MV

OUT

CAS_IN

MODE_BLK

OUT

[AI]

BKCAL_OUT

[AO]

040211E.EPS

Figure Example of Connecting the Faceplate Block and Fieldbus Block

The table below gives an example of assignment to the terminal numbers in the above diagram.
Table Example of Assignment to Terminal Numbers in a Faceplate Block and Fieldbus Block Connection
Terminal number Block Parameter Contents Output process value Setpoint Block mode Alarm summary Process value Setpoint Output setpoint High-limit setpoint Low-limit setpoint Output high-limit Output low-limit Block mode Output value
040212E.EPS

%Znnus01 %Znnus02 %Znnus03 %Znnus04 %Znnus05 %Znnus06 %Znnus07 %Znnus08 %Znnus09 %Znnus10 %Znnus11 %Znnus12 %Znnus13

OUT CAS_IN/BKCAL_OUT MODE_BLK ALARM_SUM PV SP OUT SP_HI_LIM SP_LO_LIM OUT_HI_LIM OUT_LO_LIM MODE_BLK OUT

PID

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-24

Opening IOM Builder

Clicking on the ACF11 definition file in System View may open IOM Builder.
IOM Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT Stn:FCS0101 Train:1 Node:1 File:2-1ACF11.edf] File Edit View Tool Window Help

Block Tag Name Specify Block Tag Name.

Terminal Number %Z012101 %Z012102 %Z012103 %Z012104 %Z012105 %Z012106 %Z012107 %Z012108 %Z012109 %Z012110 %Z012111 %Z012112 %Z012113 %Z012114

Block Tag Name

Parameter

Direction RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD

Data Type AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S

Message

Ready

Position: Line 2 Column 2

040213E.EPS

Figure IOM Builder

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-25

Setting Items for IOM Builder

Setting items for the IOM Builder are given below. User specification is mandatory for the block tag name, parameters, direction and data type. For setting items where there is a setpoint value in the default, an error occurs and the setting returns to the previous value if the setting is left blank. For setting items where the default is a blank column, there is no problem with leaving the setting blank.

IMPORTANT
For software terminals with different numbers, the definitions of block tag name, parameters and direction should not be duplicated. A compiler error will occur if all the three items of the different terminals have the same definitions.

Terminal Number
Terminal numbers below are displayed. %Znnusmm
%Z: nn: u: s: mm: *1: Fixed Node number (*1) (01 to 08) Unit number (1 to 5) Slot number (1 or 2) Terminal number (01 to 16)

In the case of PFCS/SFCS, 01 is fixed.

Block Tag Name

Tag Mark - Detailed Setting Items

This is the tag mark type. Make a selection from the list. The default setting is General.

Upper Window - Detailed Setting Items

This is the window name when extending to the upper screen. This item is optional.

Help - Detailed Setting Items

This is the help message number defined by the user. This item is optional.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-29

4.2.4

Download from IOM Builder

When download is executed in the IOM Builder, on-line load to the FCS and download to the ACF11 are performed. If there are definition data for the fieldbus engineering tool under the directory specified in System View, this definition data will also be downloaded to the ACF11.

Download to FCS and ACF11 in IOM Builder

The following download is executed when [Download] is selected from the [File] menu of the IOM Builder. On-line load to the FCS Download of system builders definition data to the ACF11 If there are definition data for the fieldbus engineering tool under the directory specified in System View, this definition data will also be downloaded to the ACF11.

IMPORTANT
Even when there are no modifications in the system builders, definition data of the system builders will be downloaded to the ACF11. If fieldbus engineering tool data does not exist in the specified position, definition data for the fieldbus engineering tool is not downloaded to the ACF11. In this case, WARNING is generated and only data defined in the system builders is downloaded to the ACF11. When download of definition data for the fieldbus engineering tool to the ACF11 fails, WARNING is generated and unsuccessful download is notified to the user. Processing continues and on-line load to the FCS is performed.

The number of information expanded as a host file set from the fieldbus engineering tool to the system builders is indicated below.
Table Quantity of Information Expanded from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool
Expanded information Per ACF11 Per fieldbus device

Device list Block list VCR list

31 64 128

34 36
040216E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-30

4.2.5

Control Drawing Builder

The software terminals defined on the IOM Builder can be connected to the FCS function block.

Connection of Software Terminal and FCS Function Block on Control Drawing Builder
FCS function block can be registered, removed, wired and assigned with execution priority on the Control Drawing Builder. By these operations, the software terminals defined on the IOM Builder can be connected to the FCS function blocks. The created control drawing can be downloaded to the FCS. An example of connecting software terminals to an FCS function block on Control Drawing Builder is shown below.
Control Drawing Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT Stn:FCS0102 Draw:DR0002 File:DR0002.edf - [100%]] File Edit View Insert Format Tools Draw Window Help 100% Tag Name Mod... Tag Comment PID TEMPERATURE CON 001 TIC1001 002 FIC1001 PID STEAM FLOW CONT 003
300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800

150

100

IN
200

FIC100 PID

OUT

300

250

%Z012101

%Z012102

Message

Ready

400

350

X:675 Y:168

1024x686

Select

Change
040217E.EPS

Figure Connecting Software Terminals to an FCS Function Block on Control Drawing Builder

SEE ALSO
See Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E), F3, Control Drawing Builder for details on the Control Drawing Builder.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-31

4.2.6

Start Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The fieldbus engineering tool project manager can be started in IOM Builder.

Starting Project Manager

When [Fieldbus Engineering] is selected from the IOM Builder [Tool] menu, the fieldbus engineering tool project manager is started. However, if the fieldbus engineering tool is not installed in the same machine, it cannot be started. TIP
The following engineering is performed in the fieldbus engineering tool. Fieldbus device registration Definition of the fieldbus device network configuration Construction of the fieldbus block control loop

Even if fieldbus engineering is not performed in the fieldbus engineering tool, defining a temporary input value in the IOM Builder allows engineering to progress as usual. Also, by using the system test function, the system can be operated and system debug performed. In this case, engineering with the fieldbus engineering tool is performed after system debug.

SEE ALSO
Refer to 5, Fieldbus Engineering Tool for details on the fieldbus engineering tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-32

4.3

Test Function
By using the Test Functions, the system can be operated and debugged even when the I/O connection to the fieldbus devices is not established.

I/O Disconnection and Wiring

With I/O disconnection status in the Test Function, communication with the fieldbus devices is not performed. In this state, IOP or OOP does not occur. Wiring method is the same as for other communication I/O modules. The data types that can be wired are indicated below.
Table Data Types Can Be Wired
Data type
AI8 AU8 AI16 AU16 AI32 AU32 AF32 AF32S D DS

Wiring type that can be used

Wiring type where the wiring connection destination is analog input

Wiring type where the wiring connection destination is analog output

Wiring type where the wiring connection destination is contact input Wiring type where the wiring connection destination is contact output
040301E.EPS

SEE ALSO
Refer to the Engineering Test Guide (IM 33S04N10-01E) for details on the wiring.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-33

4.4

Engineering and Startup Procedure for Fieldbus System

This section explains the engineering and starting up procedures of the fieldbus system in the following sections. Performing FCS and fieldbus engineering in parallel Performing fieldbus engineering afterwards Off-line loading procedure after the system is constructed

Before Connecting the Fieldbus Device to the Fieldbus

Before connecting the fieldbus devices to the fieldbus, the following settings need to be set to the fieldbus devices. If these settings are not correctly set, the fieldbus devices on the fieldbus can not be recognized by the ACF11 or slave PC, communication such as downloading cannot be carried out. These settings may be set with Device Tool, one of the fieldbus support tools, on the slave PC. Tag names of the devices on the fieldbus Node addresses on the fieldbus The tag names and node addresses of physical devices can be configured using Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-34

When FCS and Fieldbus Engineering are Performed in Parallel

The procedure for connecting the fieldbus to FCS function blocks, and operating the fieldbus system is given below. 1. After FCS startup, define ACF11 on System View. At this time, specify 16 or 32 as the number of software terminals for the ACF11 then specify the path of the fieldbus database directory. When the definition is completed, execute IOM download to the ACF11. When this download is completed, the ACF11 will be displayed in the FCS status display window. Use the Fieldbus Engineering Tool to perform fieldbus engineering. If the engineering work is performed on a slave PC, the configured data need to be reflected to the HIS or master PC. Assign the block tag name and parameters of the fieldbus block to a terminal number with the IOM Builder. Execute download with the IOM Builder.

3. 4. TIP

When download is executed on the IOM Builder, the data defined with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool (host file set) will be imported to the system builders. Then, the definitions from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool will be automatically downloaded to the ACF11. When downloading to ACF11, the whole data defined on the standard builder will always be completely downloaded even though there is no discrepancy with the existing information in the ACF11.

Download the configured data to the fieldbus devices using Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Downloading can be performed on the slave PC after it fetching the configured data from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed on the HIS or the master PC. However, downloading can be carried out from HIS or master PC via ACF11 module to the fieldbus devices.

TIP
Download to the fieldbus device can be executed even after Step 6. However, data for the fieldbus device to which download has not been completed, cannot be accurately referenced.

On the Control Drawing Builder, connect the FCS function blocks with software terminals of ACF11, then download to the FCS. Thus data of the fieldbus devices can be read and written from the FCS function blocks.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-35

When Performing Fieldbus Engineering Afterwards

This section explains how to perform engineering and system debug for the FCS while the fieldbus is not connected, then connect the fieldbus afterwards. The so called fieldbus not connected cases are as follows: Engineering with the fieldbus engineering tool has not been performed. ACF11 module is not installed. Fieldbus devices are not connected. Before connecting to the fieldbus system, the FCS engineering and system debugging should be performed. And the FCS engineering and system debugging should include the FCS function blocks created for connecting to fieldbus blocks. At the point where the fieldbus can be connected, the fieldbus engineering should be performed. The data defined via this engineering work can be downloaded to the ACF11 on the IOM Builder. After this downloading, data from the fieldbus devices can be correctly referenced.

Procedure Until System Debug is Performed

The procedure up to the point where system debug is performed is indicated below. 1. The ACF11 is defined in System View. At this time, 16 or 32 is selected as the number of I/O points for the ACF11. After being defined, the ACF11 is not yet installed, but IOM download to the ACF11 is executed. When this download is complete, the ACF11 will be displayed in the FCS status display window. On the IOM Builder, fieldbus block tag names and parameters can be assigned to the software terminals of ACF11.

IMPORTANT
When the software terminals are not defined, they can still be connected to the FCS blocks. However, when the system starts up, IOP/OOP alarms will occur in the FCS function blocks because of the lack of connections. To prevent IOP/OOP from occurring, it is necessary to perform the following: If the actual fieldbus block tag name and parameter are determined, they should be assigned to the software terminals. If the actual fieldbus block tag name and parameter are determined, temporary tag name and parameter should be assigned to the software terminals. When the above operation is completed, a WARNING indicating an consistency error between the fieldbus engineering tool and engineering data will occur when downloading from the IOM Builder. Therefore, the terminals that will have IOP/OOP are determined before putting the system online.

3. 4.

Perform downloading on the IOM Builder. On the Control Drawing Builder, connect the FCS function blocks to software terminals and download to the FCS. However, if the software terminal are not defined, IOP or OOP will occur in the FCS function blocks connected to the terminals when the system is started up. Perform system debugging without the fieldbus connected.
IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-36

Procedure for Connecting the Fieldbus

Connect the fieldbus after system debug is finished. The procedure for connecting the fieldbus is indicated below. 1. 2. 3. 4. Perform fieldbus engineering in Fieldbus Engineering Tool. On System View, specify the directory where definition data of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is to be placed. Assign the block tag name and parameters of the fieldbus block to a terminal number with the IOM Builder. Download to the ACF11 with the IOM Builder.

Procedure for Off-line Load After the System is Constructed

After the system is configured with the FCS, fieldbus, etc., off-line loading the defined data can be performed in the procedure indicated below. 1. 2. Execute FCS off-line load in System View. Execute IOM download to the ACF11 in System View.

IMPORTANT
If IOM Builder download is not executed after engineering with Fieldbus Engineering Tool is completed, the system may not startup even after IOM download is executed in System View. The reason the system does not startup is that a misalignment in the database in the ACF11 defined respectively by the system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool is occurring. If this happens, download on IOM Builder.

If necessary, download to the fieldbus device with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-37

4.5

Procedure for Modifications After Fieldbus System Startup

This section explains how to change the fieldbus system after the system startup, such as how to change the assignment of the software terminal and how to add or remove a fieldbus device and so on. The detailed procedures vary with the contents to be changed. The procedures for the various type changes are shown as follows.

IMPORTANT
It is necessary to complete the download on the IOM Builder after making changes with the fieldbus engineering tool. If the download is not completed correctly, the ACF11 may not operate properly, or may not startup after FCS off-line download or IOM download from System View or from FCS Status Display window.

Adding Fieldbus Devices or Changing Contents with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool
Procedures to be executed when a fieldbus device has been added or when changes have been made in conjunction with re-generation or re-scheduling with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool are indicated below. 1. Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be applied in HIS, master PC or salve PC for fieldbus engineering. When performing the engineering in the slave PC, it is necessary to reflect the configured data to HIS or master PC. Revise the terminal number with the IOM Builder. Execute download with the IOM Builder. Download the configured data to the fieldbus devices using Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The procedure for downloading at this stage is the same as the downloading for fieldbus system start-up. With the Control Drawing Builder, connect the FCS function block and terminal number, and download to the FCS.

2. 3. 4.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-38

Replacing a Fieldbus Device or Changing the Contents with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool
When a fieldbus device is replaced, certain contents need to be changed with the fieldbus engineering tool though the change does not require system re-generation. Changes made to each part should be downloaded separately to the fieldbus devices. Also, when replacing a fieldbus device, a physical device tag and node address must be correctly set for the fieldbus device.

Deleting a Fieldbus Device

The procedure when deleting a fieldbus device is given below. 1. 2. Revise the FCS function block and terminal number connection with the Control Drawing Builder, and download to the FCS. Do re-engineering or re-scheduling using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool on HIS or master PC. When performing the engineering in the slave PC, it is necessary to reflect the configured data to HIS or master PC. Revise the terminal number with the IOM Builder. Execute download with the IOM Builder. Download the configured data to the fieldbus devices using Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The procedure for downloading at this stage is the same as the downloading for fieldbus system start-up.

3. 4. 5.

TIP
All data will be downloaded to the fieldbus device regardless of the modification with the fieldbus engineering tool. Accordingly, it will take the same amount of time as a download at the time of fieldbus system startup.

Replacing or Resetting the ACF11

After replacing or resetting the ACF11, select ACF11 in system view or the HIS status display window, and execute an IOM download.

Changing a Terminal Number Definition

The procedure when changing a terminal number definition is indicated below. 1. 2. Revise the terminal number with the IOM Builder, then download with the IOM Builder. With the Control Drawing Builder, connect the FCS function block and terminal number, and download to the FCS.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-39

4.6

On-line Maintenance
The on-line maintenance can be applied for changing definition items on-line that are related to the fieldbus.

IMPORTANT
To perform the process management safely, do not connect link master devices such as the fieldbus-direct-connection type PC tool to the fieldbus in operation. If such a connection is necessary, take safety precautions such as setting the FCS control function related to the corresponding process, to Manual.

Definition Items Subject to On-line Maintenance

Of the various definition items related to the fieldbus, those that are subject to on-line maintenance are indicated below.

IMPORTANT
When certain definition items are modified during online maintenance, ACF11 may stops during the online downloading to modified contents to the ACF11 module. The definition items are indicated in the following table. This phenomenon should be taken into consideration when performing online maintenance. When online downloading the data defined in CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders, the contents defined by Fieldbus Engineering Tool will be automatically collected and downloaded. If the contents defined by Fieldbus Engineering Tool are modified during the online maintenance, downloading the modified contents may cause the ACF11 to stop.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus> Table List of Definition Items Subject to On-line Maintenance
Function item IOM type Installation position Item for maintenance Category Type Unit Slot Items causing ACF11 stop

4-40

Duplicate Next Card High Speed Read Create New IOM Node Address Use points Communication error processing Perform fallback Fieldbus Database Directory Command Block tag name Parameter Direction Data Type P&ID Tag Name Tag Name IOM Builder Tag Comment Switch Position Label Label Btn 1, Btn 2 Lv 1 Tag Mark Upper Window Help
040601E.EPS

Stale count limit Interval of Connection Establishment Retries

Subject items

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<4. System Builders Related to Fieldbus>

4-41

Control Actions During ACF11 Online Maintenance

To add or remove an AFC11 module or to modify the settings on the defined items can be performed during online maintenance. After the online maintenance, the FCS function blocks connected to the ACF11 and the data and data status of the ACF11 software terminals will behave as follows.

When Adding a New ACF11 or Increasing the Number of Terminals

When adding a new ACF11 module or when increasing the number of software terminals of the ACF11 from 16 to 32 (Increasing the number of terminals), the data of the terminals will be initialized into BAD status. After the online maintenance, when the ACF11 can properly access data from the fieldbus devices, the BAD status will be released and the data status will return to normal.

When Removing a ACF11 or Decreasing the Number of Terminals

When removing an ACF11 module or when decreasing the number of software terminals of the ACF11 from 32 to 16 (Decreasing the number of terminals), the FCS function blocks connected to the removed terminals will generate IOP/OOP and CNF (Connection Fails) alarms.

When Settings of ACF11 Definition Items are Changed

The data status of the modified definition items have the following behaviors during the online maintenance. Note that the so called during the online maintenance stands for a time period started from the beginning of downloading the configuration to ACF11 till the completion of the downloading. The healthy terminals before the online maintenance will be kept normal during the online maintenance. After downloading the ACF11 configuration, these terminals continue the data update except for the time period of initialization. The abnormal terminals before the online maintenance will be abnormal during the online maintenance. After downloading the ACF11 configuration, data and data states of these terminals will be updated.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

Blank Page

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-1

Fieldbus Engineering Tool

In the engineering for the entire fieldbus system, the secondary system engineering including the ACF11 is performed using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. This chapter explains the functions of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. It also explains the individual operating procedures following the overall flow of engineering with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Fieldbus communication modules vary with the upper level systems. If the upper level system is STARDOM FCN, NFLF111 should be used instead of ACF11. If the upper level system is STARDOM FCJ (Foundation Fieldbus Communication Compatible), NFJT100-H100 should be used instead of ACF11. The compatibility of upper level systems, fieldbus modules and fieldbus engineering tool are shown as follows.
Table Compatibility of Upper Level Systems, Fieldbus Modules and Fieldbus Engineering Tool Upper Level System CS1000 CS3000 Fieldbus Module ACF11 ACF11 ACF11 ACF11 STARDOM NFLF111 NFJT100-H100 (*1)
*1: Yes: No: FCJ with built-in NFLF111 capabilities. Compatible Incompatible

Fieldbus Engineering Tool Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

050001E.EPS

IMPORTANT
When configuring Fieldbus and Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), do not use the package of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. SEE ALSO
For more information about configuring Fieldbus and Fieldbus communication module (ALF111) connected to CS 3000 KFCS2, KFCS RFCS5 or RFCS2 (migration FCS2), see Foundation Fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E).

TIP
For STARDOM system, NFLF111 is used instead of ACF11. If the upper level system is STARDOM, the terms in this document are redefined with the following meanings listed to the right-hand side. CS1000/CS3000 System ACF11 Control Bus HIS or Master PC FCS CS1000/CS3000 System builders IOM Builder STARDOM NFLF111 Control Network Master PC FCN/FCJ Resource Configurator Resource Configurator

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-2

5.1

Overview of Fieldbus Engineering Tool

This section gives an overview of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool functions. It also explains the configuration, features, and operating environment of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-3

5.1.1

What is the Fieldbus Engineering Tool?

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool is the software that performs the various configuration tasks that are related to the fieldbus when performing engineering for the fieldbus system.

Tasks Performed with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool is the software that performs tasks, such as, configuration of the devices connected to the fieldbus (fieldbus devices) and configuration of the fieldbus network when performing fieldbus system engineering. The following are possible by using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The function blocks for each of the fieldbus devices can be combined to configure the control loop (builder function). The control loop configuration data can be transmitted to the fieldbus device via the network (download function) The control loop configuration data can be passed to the supervisory system (host file set generation function) The Fieldbus Engineering Tool conforms to the Foundation fieldbus (Low speed Voltage Mode) standardized by the Fieldbus Foundation. Hereafter, the Foundation fieldbus (Low speed Voltage Mode) will be referred to as H1 fieldbus.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-4

5.1.2

Position of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool operates in the HIS or PC (master PC) connected to the control bus or the PC (slave PC) connected to the H1 fieldbus. The position of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is explained in this section. TIP
The Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC is one of the software packages included as part of the fieldbus support tool.

IMPORTANT
The functions that can be used with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the HIS or master PC differ from those that can be used with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC. On HIS or master PC, only the following functions of Fieldbus Engineering Tool are available. Display Device ID Configuring Control Bus

TIP
For STARDOM, control bus configuration is not required but control network needs to be configured using Resource Configurator.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-5

Positioning within the Overall Fieldbus System

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool operates in the HIS or master PC connected to the VL net for the CS 1000 system. It can also operate in the slave PC connected to the H1 fieldbus. The figure below indicates the position that the fieldbus engineering occupies in the overall configuration of the fieldbus system.
Operates in the HIS or master PC Ethernet HIS Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the HIS Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the master PC Master PC

PFCS

VL net

Slave PC ACF11 Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: PFCS: ACF11:

Fieldbus device
050101E.EPS

Human interface station Personal computer (connected to the VL net) Personal computer (connected to the H1 fieldbus) Control station Fieldbus communication module

Figure Positioning within the Overall Fieldbus System

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24,2000-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-6

Positioning within the Overall Fieldbus System

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool operates in the HIS or master PC connected to the V net for the CS 3000 system. It can also operate in the slave PC connected to the H1 fieldbus. The figure below indicates the position that the fieldbus engineering occupies in the overall configuration of the fieldbus system.
Operates in the HIS or master PC Ethernet HIS Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the HIS Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the master PC Master PC

LFCS2/LFCS FCU

SFCS

V net

FCU RIO bus NIU

ACF11

Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC ACF11 Slave PC

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: SFCS: LFCS2/LFCS: FCU: RIO bus: NIU: ACF11:

Fieldbus device
050102E.EPS

Human interface station Personal computer (connected to the V net) Personal computer (connected to the H1 fieldbus) Control station (compact type) Control station Field control unit Remote I/O bus Node interface unit Fieldbus communication module

Figure Positioning within the Overall Fieldbus System

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-7

Positioning within the Overall Fieldbus System STARDOM

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool operates on the master PC connected to control network for the STARDOM system. It can also operate in the slave PC connected to the H1 fieldbus. The figure below indicates the position that the fieldbus engineering occupies in the overall configuration of the fieldbus system.
HMI

Ethernet VDS Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the master PC Master PC

N F P C L S P F U U 1 1 1

FCN

V net FCJ (Foundation Fieldbus Communication Compliant)

Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC Slave PC

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HMI: VDS: Master PC: Slave PC: FCN: FCJ: NFLF111:

Fieldbus device
050131E.EPS

Human machine interface Data server/HMI server General-purpose PC (connected to control network) General-purpose PC (connected to H1 fieldbus) Modules Autonomous Controller All-in-one Autonomous Controller Fieldbus communication module

Figure Positioning within the Overall Fieldbus System STARDOM

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-8

Positioning Slave PC
The Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC is used to perform engineering for the fieldbus device when no upper layer system, such as the FCS, is connected to the H1 fieldbus. When an actual device is connected to the slave PC, the physical device tag name and node address set for the actual device can be changed. The following figure indicates the position of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool in slave PC. A separate power supply and terminator for the fieldbus are required for the slave PC.
Slave PC Fieldbus Engineering Tool

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device

Fieldbus device
050103E.EPS

Slave PC: Personal computer (connected to the H1 fieldbus)

Figure Positioning Slave PC

TIP
Using Fieldbus Support Tools on Slave PC, the tag names and node addresses can be set to the fieldbus devices without tag names and node addresses. The capabilities files for the field devices can also be created if the files are not existing.

SEE ALSO
For more information about Device Tool, see 7, Fieldbus Support Tools.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-9

Positioning within the Engineering Flow

In fieldbus system engineering, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool performs the various configuration related to the fieldbus. The following figure indicates the positioning of the operations performed using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.
System design

Creation of I/O list

Control loop design

Selection of fieldbus device

Instrumentation

Engineering with the system builders

Engineering with Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Setting physical device tag names and node addresses using Device Tool of Fieldbus Support Tools (*1)

Device setting

On-line debug /loop check

Legend Work flow Flow of output information

Test operation

Operations performed with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Application/service
050104E.EPS

*1:

There is no need to perform engineering using the Device Tool of Fieldbus Support Tools when both of the conditions below are satisfied. The physical device tag name and node address have been set for the fieldbus device. The capabilities files have been obtained from the fieldbus device vendor or the Fieldbus Foundation. The tag names and node addresses of physical devices can be configured using Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Figure Positioning within the Engineering Flow

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-10

Prior to performing engineering with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, it is necessary that the following processes be completed and that the output information for those processes be available. Control loop design: Output information is in Control Loop Design Specifications Selection of fieldbus devices: Output information is in List of Fieldbus Devices Used Engineering using the Device Tool of Fieldbus Support Tools: Output information is in Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address of Fieldbus Device. A portion of the output information for the engineering with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is used as information for engineering with CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders.

Positioning within the Engineering Flow STARDOM

SEE ALSO
For more information about the fieldbus implementation with STARDOM and the information about implementation of Fieldbus Engineering Tool, see STARDOM FOUNDATION Fieldbus Manual (IM 34P02Q51-01E).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-11

Builders and Tools Used for Engineering

The builders and tools used in fieldbus system engineering are shown as follows according to the engineering operation performed.

CS 1000/CS 3000 System Builders Related to the Fieldbus

The CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders are used to perform configuration related to the fieldbus for the CS 1000 or CS 3000 and the configuration information for connecting the ACF11 I/O terminal. The configuration data is also loaded to the ACF11 communication content definition database.

Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the HIS or the master PC

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the HIS or the master PC is used to perform configuration tasks such as configuration of fieldbus devices, fieldbus blocks and fieldbus communication information. It also downloads the configuration data to the fieldbus devices. The tag names and node addresses of physical devices can be configured.

Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the slave PC can be used to change the physical device tag name and node address set for the fieldbus device.
Ethernet HIS System builders ACF11 data ACF11 data Fieldbus Engineering Tool (*1) Device data Device data Master PC

Control bus Slave PC FCS ACF11 Communication content definition database Device tool Device data Device data Fieldbus Engineering Tool Device data Device data

H1 fieldbus Fieldbus device Fieldbus block Fieldbus block Fieldbus device Legend Data download route
050105E.EPS

*1:

Can also be used in the HIS.

Figure Builders and Tools Used for Engineering

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-12

Engineering Utilities STARDOM

Vary with engineering details of fieldbus systems, the following three engineering utilities can be used.

Logic Designer
FCN/FCJ control applications can be created using Logic Designer. The PASPOU for fieldbus access and the device lables assigned for Foundation Fieldbus communication modules are needed when using Logic Designer to access fieldbus function blocks.

Resource Configurator
Input and output configuration of Foundation Fieldbus communication modules can be defined using Resource Configurator. When downloading to FCN/FCJ, the engineering data defined by Fieldbus Engineering Tool are gathered automatically with host file set.

Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Configuration of fieldbus devices, fieldbus function blocks and fieldbus communications are defined using Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The configured data can be downloaded to the fieldbus devices. The physical device tag name and node address can also be changed. The configured data of the Foundation Fieldbus communication modules may be used by the Resource Configurator.

Referencing Data Among the Various Engineering Functions

Data can be referenced among the various engineering functions in the fieldbus system.

Sharing data between CS 1000/CS 3000 System Builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool
The configuration data set with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be imported to the system builders. This makes it possible to ensure the information in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is same as that in the system builders.

Sharing Data between HIS and Slave PC or between Master PC and Slave PC
The configuration data engineered in the HIS or the master PC can be imported to the slave PC. This makes it possible to ensure the information is same between the HIS and slave PC or between the master PC and slave PC. To import the configuration data, the project data exported from the HIS or master PC is imported to the slave PC. TIP
The slave PC can also be connected to the HIS or the master PC using Ethernet. In this case, data can be directly imported to the slave PC by referencing the project in the HIS or master PC from the slave PC.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-13

Positioning within the Fieldbus Engineering Flow

The position of fieldbus engineering within the standard engineering flow using a slave PC in addition to the HIS or master PC, is indicated below.
Engineering start

Fieldbus system design

Define ACF11

Download to ACF11 from System View

Define ACF11 terminal number

Engineering using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool (*2)

Download from the IOM Builder to the FCS and ACF11 (*1)

Download to the fieldbus device

Connect the ACF11 terminal number and FCS function block

Parameter adjustment (HIS or master PC)

Legend

Upload parameters

Work flow Operation performed with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Engineering completed

Operation performed with other than the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

050106E.EPS

*1: *2:

If the definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is under the specified directory, then this definition data is also included in the download to the ACF11. Either the HIS, master PC or slave PC can be used in engineering. However, when using the slave PC, it is necessary to import the configuration data created by the slave PC to the HIS or master PC.

Figure Positioning within the Fieldbus Engineering Flow

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-14

TIP
In order to perform engineering using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool when the fieldbus device connected to the H1 fieldbus is in on-line state, a physical device tag name and node address must already be set for the fieldbus device. Engineering with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can also be performed by using the HIS or master PC or the slave PC by itself. When the slave PC is used by itself, engineering is performed to the fieldbus device as target since no upper layer system is connected.

Fieldbus System Design

The fieldbus devices configuration, fieldbus block configuration, communication specifications, and control specifications are designed.

Definition of the ACF11

New registration and setting of the fieldbus communication module (ACF11) are performed. Also, the directory where definition data is located is specified in order to import definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. This operation is done using the New IOM dialog box opened from the system builders of System View.

Downloading from System View to the ACF11

Definition data is downloaded to the ACF11. This operation is done using the system builders of System View.

Engineering Using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Engineering for the secondary system including the ACF11 is performed. The fieldbus device configuration, fieldbus block configuration and definitions related to communication information are performed, and generation is executed. This operation is done with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool that is operating in either the HIS, master PC or slave PC. However, when the operation is performed with the slave PC, the data must be reflected in the HIS or the master PC. Also, if the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and Fieldbus Engineering Tool are used in the same machine, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be started from the IOM Builder of the system builders. TIP
To defined the ACF11 related settings requires Yokogawa Fieldbus Engineering Tool, even when engineering for lower layer system is implemented with other vendors engineering tools.

SEE ALSO
For the engineering flow using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, see 5.1.12, Configuration Procedure Using Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-15

Definition of the ACF11 Terminal Number

Fieldbus block parameters are assigned to the ACF11 terminal number. This operation is done using the IOM builder.

Downloading from the IOM Builder to the FCS and ACF11

The definition data is downloaded to the FCS and ACF11. This operation is performed using the IOM builder. TIP
If the definition data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool exist in the directory specified in IOM properties dialog box when ACF11 was created, then the engineering tool definition data will also be downloaded to the ACF11 together.

Downloading to the Fieldbus Device

After the configuration data defined by the Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the HIS or the master PC is imported to the slave PC, it can be downloaded from the slave PC to the fieldbus device. It is also possible to download the data to the fieldbus device from the HIS or the master PC via the ACF11. This download is performed using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool in the HIS, master PC or slave PC. TIP
Downloading from the HIS or the master PC via the ACF11 takes more time than when downloading from the slave PC. Also, to execute a download via the ACF11, first confirm that the interface function for the ACF11 is working properly by displaying the fieldbus device parameters using the Device Management Tool.

Connection of the ACF11 Terminal Number and FCS Function Block

The ACF11 terminal number and FCS function block are connected. This operation is performed on the Control Drawing Builder.

Parameter Adjustment
Parameters for the fieldbus block are adjusted. This operation can be done using the Operation and Monitoring Function, Device Management Tool, on HIS, master PC or slave PC.

Uploading Parameters (HIS or Master PC)

Parameters for the fieldbus block are uploaded to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Perform upload as required such as when adjusting the parameters in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. This operation is performed using the Upload dialog box in the HIS or master PC Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-16

Positioning within the Fieldbus Engineering Flow STARDOM

SEE ALSO
For more information about the fieldbus implementation with STARDOM and the information about implementation of Fieldbus Engineering Tool, see 1.5.1, "Fieldbus System Construction Procedure in STARDOM FOUNDATION Fieldbus Manual (IM 34P02Q51-01E).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-17

5.1.3

Features of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The following are the features of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Function Block Application Process (FBAP)

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool conforms to the concept of function block application process (FBAP) propounded by the Foundation fieldbus. Function resources peculiar to the respective device vendors are built into the fieldbus device compatible with the Foundation fieldbus. Fieldbus configuration in the Foundation fieldbus refers to selecting the necessary items from among the various function resources of the device, and combining these to create a control loop that extends to multiple devices. In the Foundation fieldbus, this control loop is called the function block application process (FBAP). The most important purpose of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is to efficiently create the FBAP.

Graphical User Interface

Various editors with a graphical user interface are provided in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The various settings related to the device and network, as well as, the creation of the FBAP configuration can be efficiently performed by using these editors.

Various Settings Related to the Device and Network

The various parameter values can be set with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool by entering or selecting a value in the editor or the various dialog boxes expanded from the editor.

Creating the FBAP Configuration

The FBAP configuration refers to information related to the FBAP. The FBAP configuration can be created in a block diagram format with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The function blocks, one type of function resource, can be arranged in the editor window. By connecting the various types of function blocks with lines, the FBAP configuration can be created.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-18

Off-line Configuration
Configuration data can be created with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, even when communication with the device cannot be performed by using the device capabilities files and DD File. This is called off-line configuration.

IMPORTANT
In addition to the HIS and master PC, off-line configuration can be done also with a slave PC. When using a slave PC, the configuration data created in the slave PC must be reflected in the HIS or the master PC and then downloaded to the ACF11 from the HIS or master PC.

Capabilities File and DD File

In fieldbus devices that conform to Foundation fieldbus, a Capabilities Files and DD File are provided for each type of device. The capabilities files and DD File are provided from the Fieldbus Foundation or fieldbus device vendors. If the capabilities file is not available, one can be created using the device tool in the slave PC. One capabilities file and one DD File is required for each device type. Information necessary for the configuration, such as, information on the resources of the device type, parameter default values, and index information, are described in text format in the capabilities file. DD File is an object file in which the specifications for the device block parameters are described. A DD source file, written in accordance with the DDL (Device Description Language) specifications, is generated via compilation using the software called Tokenizer. By using DD File, extended parameters and transducer block parameters specific to the function block device can be handled. Copy the capabilities files and DD File used in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool into a specific directory. TIP
Capabilities File is the same as Resource File by the previous terminology of Fieldbus Foundation. According to the FS1.4 standard for Common File Format, the new terminology uses Capabilities File to replace the original term of Resource File. In Fieldbus Engineering Tool, the term Resource File changes to Capability File, the methods to handle the files are not changed.

Creating Configuration Data

Configuration data in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is created by using information described in the capabilities file and DD File. Even if the network wiring is not finished, or if the device or Fieldbus Engineering Tool is not connected to the network, the fieldbus configuration can be performed first.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-19

Downloading the Configuration Data Created

When the device is connected to the fieldbus and communication becomes possible, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is connected to the network, and the created configuration data is downloaded to the device via the network.

Separation from Upper Level System Configuration

In the course of design process, the documents of Control Loop Design Specifications and List of Fieldbus Devices should be prepared. With the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, the fieldbus is configured according to the Control Loop Design Specifications and List of Fieldbus Devices, as well as the Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address of Fieldbus Device which is output by the Device Tool of Fieldbus Support Tools. Thus, the upper level system for the fieldbus system (FCS and etc.,) can be performed using CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and the fieldbus configuration can be performed in parallel without waiting for the completion of the upper level system configuration.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-20

5.1.4

Operating Environment Requirements

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool operates in the HIS and a personal computer (PC). The operating environment for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is indicated below.

Hardware Environment (Master PC)

Unit Model
IBM PC/AT compatible computer

Main Memory
128 MB or more

Hard Disk
Disk space 120 MB or more (Fieldbus Engineering Tool requires 50 MB + Device Management Tool requires 50 MB + Control Bus Communication requires 10 MB + Electronic Online Document requires 10 MB).

CPU
Intel Pentium 300 MHz or faster

Interface Board
Ethernet card Control Bus Interface Card (VF701)

Hardware Environment (Master PC) STARDOM

Unit Model
IBM PC/AT compatible computer

Main Memory
128 MB or more (More than 160 MB is recommended)

Hard Disk
Disk space 200 MB or more

CPU
Intel Pentium 300 MHz or faster (Pentium II 400 MHz or faster is recommended)

Interface Card
Ethernet Card 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T or 10BASE5, as long as the card is supported in the environment of Windows XP SP1, or Windows 2000 Professional SP2.
IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-21

Hardware Environment (Slave PC)

Unit Model
IBM PC/AT compatible computer It is necessary to be able to install the fieldbus communication card PCMCIA (Release 2.1).

Main Memory
128 MB or more (Recommended to use the one with ECC)

Hard Disk
Disk space 120 MB or more Fieldbus Support Tools will be installed in this PC, in which Fieldbus Engineering Tool is included. When installing the electronic online document for Fieldbus, 50 MB additional hard disk space is required.

CPU
Intel Pentium 300 MHz or faster

Interface Board
Fieldbus communication card : Fieldbus communication card manufactured by National Instruments (PCMCIA) (Model name: PCMCIA-FBUS, Revision: R2.3.6)

Software Environment (Master PC)

OS
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2, or Service Pack 3

Software Environment (Slave PC)

OS
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2, or Service Pack 3

NI-FBUS
NI-FBUS (Rev: R2.3.6) by National Instruments Co. This package is the attachment to PCMCIA-FBUS card.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-22

CS 1000/CS 3000 System

ACF11
Fieldbus Communication Module ACF11 (Rev:R6 or later) However, when tag assignment or addresses assignment is carried out on HIS or a master PC with Fieldbus Engineering Tool, the ACF11 card R7 or later is required.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-23

5.1.5

Overview of Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool consists of a project manager, various editors, utilities, network startup and maintenance functions. This section explains the overview of the engineering bus tool functional structure and the functions.

Overview of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The diagram below indicates the overview of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.
Project manager Device pool

Various editors

System database System device pool

Utilities

Default values for configuration data

Network startup

Project database Maintenance Project device pool Configuration data Legend Data flow Calling function Fieldbus devices Fieldbus Engineering Tool function
050107E.EPS

Figure Overview of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-24

Project
What is the Project?
Project

A project is the unit of engineering managed by the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The Fieldbus Engineering Tool performs configuration for each project. One project has the configuration data related to one segment (range in which communication can be performed in the fieldbus without using a bridge). The Fieldbus Engineering Tool can have multiple projects.

IMPORTANT
A Project created and controlled on Fieldbus Engineering Tool is a separated project, different from the project created on CS 1000/CS 3000 System View.

Project Database
The project database is the database that stores all configuration data related to one project. A project database is created for each project.

Project A Configuration data for segment A is stored. Project database A

Ethernet

HIS or Master PC Fieldbus Engineering Tool Project B Configuration data for segment B is stored. Project database B FCS Slave PC Control bus

ACF11

H1 fieldbus

Segment A

Segment B

050108E.EPS

Figure Relationship Between Project, Project Database and Segment

IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-25

5.1.6

Project Manager
The project manager is the function that manages all of the data for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, such as, the project database and device pool. Also, it can retrieve the various editors, utilities, network startup, and maintenance tool.

Overview of the Project Manager

The diagram below indicates the overview of Project Manager.

Project manager

Device pool

DD File (Provided by the fieldbus device vendor)

File for printing System database Project management System device pool Default value of configuration data Capabilities file (Provided by the vendor of the device)

Configuration data file

Database management

Device pool management Project database Primary LM definition Project device pool Configuration data Range of addresses for polling

Host file set

Function to change the physical device tag name and node address

Legend Data flow

050109E.EPS

Figure Overview of the Project Manager Functions

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-26

Project Management
This function manages the project. The project management function includes the functions indicated below.

Create Project
This function generates a new project. When a new project is created, a directory (project directory) with the same name as the project name is generated and various files, such as, the project database file are generated in that directory.

Project Maintenance
This function opens and closes an existing project. When a project is opened, the configuration data can be changed for that project. With the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, multiple projects cannot be opened at one time. This function closes the project when changes are completed for the project.

Save Project
A different name can be attached to the project currently opened and then saved.

Read Project
This function reads the contents of an existing project to the currently opened project.

Delete Project
This function deletes the project. All of the files for the project database, etc. in the project directory are deleted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-27

Database Management
This is the function for managing the project database. It also performs a portion of system database management.

IMPORTANT
In the course of generation or etc., database will be frequently accessed. If the power is cut off during database access, the project database could be damaged. Never cut off the power during database access. Do not use any software application other than the Fieldbus Engineering Tool to open the database.

The database management function includes the functions indicated below.

Project Export
Export

This is the function used for backing up the project. When a project is exported, the configuration data file is output. The configuration data file consists of multiple device object files and the system configuration file. These files are in text format that conforms to the Common File Format that has been standardized by the Fieldbus Foundation. If a necessity arises to download these files again, import them and then perform the operation. Information output to the device object file Configuration data for the device registered in the project is output to the device object file. Basically, one device object file is generated for one device. The name of the device object file is automatically created by using the first five letters of the project name and a serial number.
Table Information Output to the Device Object File
No. Type of information 1 2 3 4 5 6
VCR list Network parameter Communication schedule SM parameter FB schedule FBAP parameter Description VCR (Virtual Communication Relationship) list Parameter values related to communication, time synchronization, and scheduling used in one part of the data link layer and physical layer (shared in the project) Communication scheduling information (this is divided into Link Schedule Activation Variable parameters and Schedule Domain information, due to different downloading methods) used by the LAS (Link Active Scheduler) Parameter values necessary for the SM (System Management) application Scheduling information that indicates execution order for FB Parameter values for the FBAP constituents
050110E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-28

Information output to the device object file differs according to the device class. The table below indicates the output information for each device class.
Table Device Class and Information that is Output
Device class Basic device Linkmaster device Master device Contents of the output file VCR list, SM parameter, FB schedule, FBAP parameter (*1) VCR list, SM parameter, FB schedule, FBAP parameter, Network parameter, Communication scheduling

Host interface device (*2) VCR list, SM parameter, Network parameter, Communication scheduling
050111E.EPS

*1: *2:

FBAP parameters are data downloaded to the FBAP VFD (a virtual device with function resources). Other data is downloaded to the MIB (the network and system management information database that each device has). The host interface device has the same communication function as the linkmaster device, but does not have a FBAP VFD. Thus, it does not have an FB schedule.

Information output to the system configuration file The names of all device object files and capabilities files related to a single project are output to the system configuration file. By selecting the system configuration file when importing a project, all related device object files can be imported.

Device Configuration Data Export

Export

This is the function for backing up the device configuration file or using it in another project. By exporting the device configuration data, the device object file for the exported device is output in common file format.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-29

Project Import
Import

This function is used to import a project database so that the project can be restored from the project backup. This function is only for re-engineering the projects with backup copies. The engineering operation can also be performed in another HIS or PC where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed. The following files are necessary to import a project. System configuration file The device object file with the file name being recorded to the system configuration file. The capabilities file with the file name being recorded to the system configuration file. The DD File whose file name is stored in the system configuration file. When selecting the system configuration file at the time of importing, all of the device object files, capabilities files and DD File described in the selected system configuration file are imported, and the project opens. If the capabilities file does not exist in the specified directory when importing a project, a message will be displayed and the import operation will be aborted. In a case where the DD File to be imported does not exist under the specified directory, whether to import without the DD File or to abort the import can be selected in the dialog box displayed at the beginning of import operation. If the import is executed without the DD File, the device will be registered in the project as one that handles only the standard parameters.

IMPORTANT
When the project is imported without the DD File, part of information for the extended parameters of the device will be lost. The directory FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL is defined as the recommended location where the capabilities file and DD File are to be copied. When changing the destination, change the directory path using the environment setting.

TIP
The projects created with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool of release R2.01 or earlier does not support DD File. These projects can be reconfigured to be DD File-compatible by using the project import. Check the points noted below prior to executing the project import function. The project to be imported must be exported first. Prepare a DD File compatible with the capabilities file to be imported.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-30

Cautions when Importing A Project Created with Fieldbus Engineering Tools Release R2.01
When importing a project created with Fieldbus Engineering Tools release R2.01 into a project created with Fieldbus Engineering Tools release R3.01, the capabilities file name need to be changed on the system configuration before import. Change the resource file name to the capabilities file name in accordance with Fieldbus Foundation standard by change the setting for ResourceFileName in [Device n] item in the system configuration file. Example: Change Resource File into Capability File (EJA Series Differential Pressure Transmitter). In the old project, the script for EJA capabilities file is D:Fieldbus\kappa\FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL\EJA.DRF In the new project for importing the EJA capabilities file, the script should be changed to 594543\0003\010104.CFF TIP
Capabilities File is the same as Resource File by the previous terminology of Fieldbus Foundation. According to FS1.4 standard for Common File Format, the new terminology used Capabilities file to replace the original term of Resource File, the new file extension .CFF is to replace the original file extension .DRF. In Fieldbus Engineering Tool, the method to handle the both of Resource File Format (.DRF) and Capabilities format (.CFF) are not changed. When creating new project, choose Capabilities format.

When importing a project created with Fieldbus Engineering Tool release R2.01 into a project created with Fieldbus Engineering Tool release R3.01, a dialog message box [Includes Invalid Value] may appear and abort the importing. When this dialog message box appears and the importing aborts, it means that the initial settings in the capabilities file created with Fieldbus Engineering Tool are not described correctly. It may also means that the designated capabilities file does not have description for initial settings when creating the project with the tool of R2.01. However, if parameter uploading has been performed after creating the project, this phenomenon will not occur. When the importing aborts, do the following may recover the importing. 1. On Fieldbus Engineering Tool release R2.01 download dialog box, uncheck the [Execute Block parameter download] option, then perform downloading. If downloading has been performed, this step may be skipped to go to next step directly. Upload parameters. Run Export. Use Fieldbus Engineering Tool release R3.01 to import the file exported by the above procedures.

2. 3. 4.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-31

What to Do when Specified Capabilities File is Wrong

Regardless the release number of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool used for creating the project, a message dialog box [The specified capabilities file is wrong] may appear when import the project into a project created with Fieldbus Engineering Tools release R3.01. This means that the following settings corresponding to the field devices in the project created do not meet the description in the imported capabilities file. _MANUFACID=0xXXXXXX _DEVTYPE=0xXXXX _DEV_REV=0xXX If this message dialog appears, check the above settings in the imported file and the settings in exported file corresponding to the device that is giving the error. If the settings in the two files are not same, either use the capabilities file for creating the project or the capabilities file provided for the field device.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-32

Import Device Configuration Data

Import

This is the function for importing the configuration data for each device to the project database. Since the imported device configuration data can be downloaded to the same addressed same type device only, so that the imported data can not be changed except the device ID. Importing device configuration data requires the device object file, the capabilities file that is the source of the device object file, and DD File. When a fieldbus device is replaced, using this function can download the previous devices configuration to the new one. Importing device configuration data requires the device object file and capabilities file that were the source of the device object file.

Host File Set Generation

Generate the Host Files

Host file set consists of project configuration data output from the project database. The project configuration data are divided into multiple files in the format that can be used by CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders. These files are collectively referred to as the host file set. A host file set consists of the following information.
Table Information Output to the Host File Set
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 File name Device.hfs Blkinfo.hfs Type of information Device configuration list Block information Description Correspondence table of device number, vendor name, model, device ID, physical device tag, and node address Correspondence table of block tag name and block index (including index of view objects for referencing block type and parameters within the block) Correspondence table of vendor specific FBAP parameters and parameter index added to the device Information about the connected terminals and the connection between the function block and object List of purposes for the VCR (including information about communication with which VFD for which device) Information for analyzing alert information Information about defined trend objects Configuration of host interface device Correspondence table of standard FBAP parameters and the parameter index Information about the defined view objects List of data types List of reserved words
050112E.EPS

Blkparam.hfs Block parameter list Terminal.hfs Terminal information Vcrusage.hfs VCR application list Alert.hfs Trend.hfs Hostif.hfs Stblkpar.hfs View.hfs Alert information Trend information Host interface device information Standard block parameter list View information

Datatype.hfs Data type list Reserved.hfs Reserved word list

Note: For information in 1 through 8, 10 and 11, a file is output in which the contents differ for each configuration performed. For information in 9 and 12, files with the same contents are always output once output is performed. Information in 9 and 12 is called the option.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-33

Consistency Check
Check

This function checks if there are any contradictions in the contents of the configuration data saved in the project database. If data outside the possible setting range is set, a warning dialog box is displayed.

Print Device List

A list of all devices registered in the project is created and printed.

IMPORTANT
Do not change the file name and folder configuration of the host file set that was output. If the file name or folder configuration are changed, the configuration data cannot be imported to an supervisory system, such as, the CS 1000/CS 3000.

Device Pool Management

Device Pool

The device pool management is a function that manages the device pool in the system database or project database. The device pool is the area for storing the capabilities files and DD Files provided by the fieldbus device vendors. There is one capabilities file and one DD File for each device model. Information for configuration such as device function resource information, parameter default values, and index information are described in text script in the capabilities file. The device block parameter specifications are described in the DD File. The device pool management function includes the following functions.

Importing a Capabilities File and DD File

Device capabilities files can be obtained from a CD-ROM, FDC, or network devices, etc. to a device pool in the system database or a device pool in the project database. At the same time, the DD File that corresponds to the capabilities file to be read is also read to the device pool. In order to determine the file for the DD File that corresponds to the capabilities file, the values of MANUFAC_ID, DEV_TYPE, DEV_REV and DD_REV are used. If the DD File corresponding to the capabilities file does not exist under the specified directory, whether the file is imported without the DD File or the import operation is aborted can be selected in the dialog box displayed at the beginning of import operation. When the import is executed without the DD File, the device will be registered in the project as one that only handles the standard parameters. Prior to importing, the capabilities file and DD File to be used must be copied to the FF_PRJ\DEVPOLL directory under the directory where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-34

IMPORTANT
When the project is imported without the DD File, the extended parameters cannot be adjusted with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool since the information cannot be acquired for the extended parameters of the device. The directory FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL is defined as the recommended location where the capabilities file and DD File are to be copied. When changing the destination, change the directory path using the environment setting.

The capabilities files and DD Files of devices that are shared among multiple projects should be imported to the system database. The project database is created by copying the system database, and therefore all capabilities file and DD File setting data imported to the system database will be copied to the project database. The capabilities files and DD Files of devices that are used only in a specific project can be directly imported to the project database. The general idea of importing capabilities file and DD File is indicated below.
FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL directory Import capabilities file and DD File to a device pool in the system database.

Automatically copied when the new project is created. Project database Project device pool Configuration data

System database System device pool Default value of configuration data

Import capabilities file and DD File to a device pool in the project database.
050113E.EPS

Figure Importing a Capabilities File and DD File

Deleting a Capabilities File and DD File

A device capabilities file is deleted from the system database or project database. At the same time, the DD File that corresponds to the capabilities file to be deleted will also be deleted from the project.

Print Device Model List

A list of all device models that can be registered in the project (capabilities file list) is created and printed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-35

Primary LM Definition
Primary LM Settings

The primary LM (Linkmaster) definition is a procedure for setting the time publisher device and scheduled linkmaster devices. The H1 fieldbus project has one or more of each of the time publisher device and linkmaster device. A single device can be specified as both the time publisher device and linkmaster device.

Time Publisher
Time Publisher

The time publisher device stores the standard time in the project and manages the schedule for executing the application block processes (FB schedule). The FB schedule is downloaded to the time publisher device when the project is downloaded. Only a device in which the SM (System Management) is installed can be specified as a time publisher device. SM is a function that performs physical device tag assignment, address assignment, time synchronization, and FB schedule management.

Time Synchronized Cycles

This is the time interval at which the time publisher performs time synchronization (unit: seconds).

Linkmaster Device
LINK Master

The link-master device executes the LAS (Link Active Schedule) function. The LAS function manages the communication schedule according to the standard time of the project stored in the time publisher device. The scheduled linkmaster device refers to the device that has the first priority to become a linkmaster device at the time the project begins control. When the project is downloaded, the communication schedule is loaded to the linkmaster device. SEE ALSO
For details on the SM, see System Management (FF-880) published by the Fieldbus Foundation.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-36

Specify Polling Address Range

When assigning addresses or assigning tags, it is required to have the list (LIVE_LIST) of the field devices that are communicating on the Fieldbus and the devises node addresses. To acquire the LIVE_LIST, pre-set a range for searching the node addresses may speed up the search. This precept range is referred to as Polling Address Range. Polling address range can be specified manually or automatically. When the polling address range is set automatically, the node addresses of all the registered field devices will be included in the polling address range. To manually or to automatically setting the polling address can be designated by user. Manually set polling address range will take effect only after downloading from IOM Builder to ACF11 (*1). When adding a new field device, the node address of the added device should be set within the polling address range.
*1: For STARDOM, downloading to Foundation Fieldbus communication modules of FCN/FCJ is performed from Resource Configurator.

Change Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address

This function is used to change the physical device tag name and node address of a physical device connected to the fieldbus. When a single device is connected, the physical device tag name and node address for the connected device can be changed from the slave PC. When the node address specified by the project manager is not within the range of 0x10 to 0xF7, the node address for the actual device will default to a preset value (0xF8 to 0xFB). In this case, it will be necessary to change the node address after it has been assigned for the actual device.

IMPORTANT
In order to use this function to change the physical device tag name and node address, it is necessary to set the device ID beforehand. Set Display Device ID or the device ID acquired from the device using the device tool. After changing the physical device tag name and node address, it is necessary to download the new tag name and address to the device.

Tag Assignment
Tag Assignment

Changes the physical device tag name and node address for the actual device specified.

Address Assignment
Address Assignment

Changes the node address for the actual device specified.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-37

Others
Editors
Editors can be called for project configuration. Three types of editors are used in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool: device editor, network editor, and FB editor.

Utilities
Various utilities include the security, on-line help, and control bus setting utilities can be used. The security, on-line help, control bus setting and environment setting utilities are available.

Control Bus Configuration Window

To communicate HIS or master PC to control bus, the control bus needs to be configured. The settings for the control bus can be defined on the Control Bus Configuration window. For a slave PC, control bus communication is not required, so that the control bus configuration window is not available. TIP
Control bus configuration window is not available for STARDOM.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-38

5.1.7

Editors
Various editors are provided for creating project configuration data (device configuration, network configuration, FBAP configuration, and schedule). All of the configuration data created by those editors are stored in the project database.

Overview of the Editors

The following diagram indicates the overview of the editors.
Work of each Editor

Device editor

Network editor Text file for printing

FB editor FBAP block diagram Project database Project device pool Schedule creation Text file for printing Entry check and save Configuration data

Legend Data flow

050114E.EPS

Figure Overview of the Editors

Device Editor (Edit Device)

This is the function for registering the devices used for the project. The device editor has the functions indicated below.

Device Management
This is the function for registering to or deleting devices from the project. The user selects a device from the device pool in the project database, sets a physical device tag name and device ID to that device, and registers them to the project. When the device is registered, its configuration data is created based on information contained in the capabilities file for the registered device. The configuration data created is stored in the project database. Configuration data is information specific to each device that has been registered in the project. When a device is deleted from the project, the configuration data related to the deleted device is deleted from the project database.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-39

Setting Device ID and Physical Device Tag Name

Device ID, PD Tag

This is the function for setting the device ID and physical device tag name. Setting the device ID The device ID is an identifier for specifying one device out of the whole universe of devices. The device ID is pre-assigned by the vendor for the respective devices. Normally, the device ID given to the actual device by the vendor is set. However, if the device ID is unknown, such as, not having the actual device in hand, a temporary device ID can be set and then changed later on to the actual device ID. Setting the physical device tag name The physical device tag name is an identifier for specifying one device out of the devices connected to the network. It is necessary to set one physical device tag name for each of the devices in the network without any duplication. Set the physical device tag name before connecting the device to the fieldbus. If the physical device tag name is not set, the node address cannot be set in the device. SEE ALSO
For the setting of the device ID, see 5.5.3, Changing a Registered Device ID. For the display of device ID, see 5.3.6, Display Device ID.

Network Editor (For Network Configuration)

This is the function for setting the network configuration for the fieldbus device connected to the fieldbus. The network editor has the following functions.

Setting Network Parameters

Node Address, Device Classes

This is the function for setting the device network parameters. Set the node address and device class for each device registered in the project. Node address The node address is the parameter for identifying the device when communicating. It is necessary to set node addresses without any duplication within the project. Device class In the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, the fieldbus devices consist of basic devices and link-master devices. The device class basic or link-master can be set to a device. A basic device does not run the LAS function while a link-master device does. If the device class is set as basic then it becomes a basic device and if set as linkmaster, it becomes a link-master device. Only devices with built-in LAS can be specified as a link-master device. The default setting for device class is basic. In one project, at least one link-master device is required.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-40

Node Address Auto Assignment

This is the function that automatically assigns a node address to a device for which one has not been set. The device type is determined from the DeviceClass value in the capabilities file and the node address is assigned according to the device type that has been determined using one of the methods below. Basic device: DeviceClass=BASIC For each device, a node address is assigned in descending order within the range of 0xF7 to 0x16. Note that a node address which is already in use cannot be assigned. Link-master device: DeviceClass=LINKMASTER For each device, a node address is assigned in ascending order within the range of 0x16 to 0xF7. Note that a node address which is already in use cannot be assigned. Host interface device: DeviceClass=HOSTINTERFACE For each device, a node address is assigned in ascending order within the range of 0x14 to 0x15. Note if both 0x14 and 0x15 are used, 0x16 can be assigned.

Changing Device Parameters

This is the function for changing device parameters. Using this function, values for parameters whose setpoint values were set through off-line configuration can be changed manually. Normally, the device parameters are generated automatically when the device is registered. The default settings described in the capabilities file that are considered the most suitable for the network based on communication capability, are set as the device parameters. Normally, the default settings are used. But they can be changed when required. Using the Parameter Edit dialog box can change device parameters. The parameters indicated below are displayed in the Parameter Edit dialog box. NMIB: SMIB: SMAA: LAS: LASAR: LASDOM: LASSUB: VCR: NM (Network Management) parameter (common) SM (System Management) parameters (common) SM (System Management) parameters (for address assignment, common area) LAS schedule parameters (common area) Version part Summary part Sub-schedule part

VCR (Virtual Communication Relationship) parameters

IMPORTANT
Use the default values as much as possible for the network parameters and SM parameters. If these parameters are changed without using discretion, there is a risk that the fieldbus device may not operate properly. If these parameters must be changed, take caution that no contradictions occur in the parameter values.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-41

FB Editor (For FBAP Configuration)

FBAP

This is the function for creating a block diagram of the function block application processes (FBAP) and entering function block parameter values to create the FBAP configuration. The FBAP block diagram is created in the drawing area in the center of the FB editor. The setting of parameter values for the function block is performed in the dialog box expanded from the FB editor. The FB editor includes the functions indicated below.

FBAP Configuration Management

This is the function that executes creation, deletion, and save commands of the FBAP configuration. TIP
The save function in the FBAP configuration management saves the created FBAP block diagram. It does not perform a consistency check of the entered data or automatic generation of necessary data. These processes are performed by the FBAP generation function.

Creating FBAP Block Diagram

Function Block, Connection

This is the FBAP block diagram creation function. The I/O connections between the function blocks can be described in a block diagram format and an FBAP block diagram is created using the FB editor. The FBAP block diagram consists of three elements: function blocks, connection terminals, and connections. Connection terminals are treated the same as function blocks with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Function blocks A function block is the smallest unit of a collection of control and calculation functions of the device has. The FB editor uses a variety of square frames to depict these blocks. The FBAP block diagram is created by combining these function blocks. Given below is an example of a function block.
AO_800 (AO_01) CasIn RcasIn

AO
AVP_2

BkcalOut Out RcasOut

050115E.EPS

Figure A Function Block

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-42

The following function blocks are available.

Table Function Block
SYMBOL AI AO DI DO PID RA CS OS SC IT IS MDI MDO MAI MAO FUNCTION BLOCK Analog Input Block Analog Output Block Discrete Input Block Discrete Output Block PID Control Block Ratio Set Block Control Selector Block Output Splitter Block Signal Characterizer Block Integrator Block Input Selector Block Multiple Discrete Input Block Multiple Discrete Output Block Multiple Analog Input Block Multiple Analog Output Block
050116E.EPS

Connection terminals Connection terminals are terminals that perform inputs and outputs to and from outside the project. In the FB editor, these terminals are indicated by a square frame to which is attached an upside-down triangular mark. I/O which corresponds to function blocks for devices outside the project can be set by using the connection terminals. This enables settings related to exchange of data with the supervisory system function block or the function block of another project. The illustration below is an example of a connection terminal.
TO_1000-01 (TO-01) In ACF11_1
050117E.EPS

Figure A Connection Terminal

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-43

Block name of the connection terminal and function block is displayed in a pair of parentheses together with the block ID. The block ID is a unique string, the string should not be identical within the fieldbus system. The block ID cannot be modified. The block ID format is as follows. <Block Type>_<Number> The block type for input terminal is TI and the block type for output terminal is TO. <Number> is the same number of the I/O terminal in the connected host interface device. Here are samples of block names attached with block IDs. TO_1000-01(TO_02) AI_600-02 (AI_01) The block ID number of the connection terminal for receiving the input signal from the I/O element and the block ID number of the connection terminal for sending the input signal should be the same. If they are not consistent, a generation error will occur (*1). So they must be consistent.

AO_600-02 (AO_01) TI_1064-01 (TI_05) Out ACF11-14 New_valve_positioner_2

050132E.EPS

TO_1000-01 (TO_05) CasIn RcasIn

BkcalOut Out RcasOut

In ACF11-14

Figure A Readback Loop Connection

TO_1000-01(TO_05) is a connection terminal for readback input of DCS function block. The connection terminal for the output signal from DCS TI_1064-01(TI_05) must have the same block ID number. If multiple outputs and multiple inputs are used for connection, the numbers should not be identical except for the readback connection terminals, otherwise, generation errors will occur (*1).
*1: Only when the option of [Check Read-Back Correspondence of Connection Terminal] is checked (default) in the [Environment Settings] window, generation errors may occur for inconsistency of the numbers.

TIP
If a project exported from the older version of Fieldbus Engineering Tool prior than R4.10, and using R4.10 or later Fieldbus Engineering Tool to import the project, the option [Check Read-Back Correspondence of Connection Terminal] in [Environment Settings] window will be disabled. In this case, inconsistence of readback terminal numbers will not trigger error alarms. When maintaining an old version project, it is necessary to export the project using the old version Fieldbus Engineering Tool, then import the project using the upgraded R4.20 Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Connection A connection is the line connecting function blocks within the same project or connection terminals. In the FB editor, connections are indicated by a black, straight line. In the function block and connection terminals, there are fieldbus I/O terminals (input terminal, output terminal). By using connections between input terminals and output terminals, the function blocks and connection terminals can be connected.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-44

Changing FBAP Parameters

This is the function for changing parameters included in the function block that can be rewritten. The FBAP parameters are set in the Parameter Edit dialog box. In the resource block setting, only parameter changes can be performed. Set the channel number of the function block to be connected in the channel parameter for the I/O function block when connecting between the transducer block and I/O function block. Parameters that cannot be overwritten cannot be changed. Also, the value of the link object parameter is automatically generated at the time of generation. Therefore, it cannot be changed.

FBAP Generation
It is necessary to generate the FBAP configuration in order to download it to the device. The VCR value and link object parameter values are generated when the FBAP configuration is generated, based on the FBAP configuration and configuration data for the device. The generated VCR value and link object parameter values are stored in the project database. If there is an error in the configuration data, an error notification dialog box is displayed at the time of generation. TIP
The FBAP generation function is used by executing generation after first saving the FBAP block diagram.

All FBAP Generation

All FBAP created on FB editor can be generated together. However, the FBAP configuration that already successfully generated will not be generated again when applying All FBAP Generation.

Print FBAP Block Diagram

This is the function for printing the FBAP block diagram that was opened. When the FBAP block diagram is not open, this function cannot be used.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-45

Schedule Creation
This is the function that creates a schedule for executing the function block (FB schedule) and a schedule for communication between function blocks (LAS schedule). It is necessary to create these schedules in order to efficiently perform the processes using FBAP.

Automatic Schedule Creation

This is the function for automatically creating an execution timing chart that becomes the source information for generating a schedule. This function is automatically executed after the execution of the FBAP configuration generation. This can also be executed with the Schedule Display dialog box.

Multi-schedule Creation
The schedule for multiple FBAP configurations are scheduled at the same time within a single macro cycle in the Foundation fieldbus. The individual schedules that are scheduled in a macro cycle are called sub-schedules. The schedule for each FBAP configuration corresponds to a sub-schedule. Also, the macro cycle schedule in which multiple sub-schedules are scheduled is called a multi-schedule. A multi-schedule is created with respect to all FBAP configurations in a project. Due to this, the multi-schedule cannot be created unless the generation of all FBAP configurations has been completed normally. The illustration below is an example of a multi-schedule.
Macro cycle Sub-schedule period (control cycle for FBAP1)

DI FBAP1 DO

Sub-schedule period (control cycle for FBAP2)

FBAP2

PID

: Block execution time : Communication time : Background communication time

050118E.EPS

Figure A Multi-schedule

In the above example, two cycles are performed for FBAP1s sub-schedule. FBAP2s subschedules are for three cycles. The user sets the time for the macro cycle and each sub-schedule (FBAP control cycle). When setting, it is necessary to make adjustments so that the macro cycle becomes the least common multiple of each sub-schedule period.
IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-46

Schedule Display and Revision

This is the function for graphically displaying and manually revising the execution timing chart that was created with the automatic schedule creation function. The execution timing for the FB schedule and execution timing for the communication schedule can be revised. TIP
A new execution timing chart cannot be created with this function. Only an execution timing chart created with the automatic schedule creation can be revised.

Schedule Generation and Save

This is the function for generating parameter values (a portion of the block parameters and a portion of the network parameters) related to the FB schedule, LAS schedule and schedule. The generated schedule is saved in the project database. This is executed when clicking the [OK] button in the Schedule Display dialog box. FB schedule The FB schedule parameters are generated based on the execution timing chart. The generated FB schedule parameters are shown in the table below.
Table Generated FB Schedule Parameters Parameter name StartTimeOffset FbObjectIndex VfdRef Function block index VFD reference number
050119E.EPS

Description Function block processing start time (relative time)

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-47

LAS (Link Active Scheduler) The parameters required by LAS and related to communication are generated based on the execution timing chart. The generated parameters are shown in the table below.
Table LAS Parameters Generated

Parameter name LinkScheduleActivationVariable ScheduleSummary ScheduleVersionNumber ScheduleBuilderIdentifier NumberOfSubschedules V_MSO_ Schedule summary

Description Version number of the schedule to be executed next Version number of the schedule ID of the person/object that created the schedule Number of sub-schedules Overhead necessary for executing the schedule

StorageRequiredForTotalSchedule Schedule capacity TimingResolutionRequiredTo Timing resolution MeetScheduleJitterCommitments Macrocycle Duration Macro cycle
050120E.EPS

Table LAS Parameters Generated (Sub-scheduler Related)

Parameter name SubSchedule SubscheduleVersionNumber SubscheduleIdentifier SubschedulePeriod Sub-schedule

Description Sub-schedule version number Sub-schedule ID Sub-schedule period

050121E.EPS

Table LAS Parameters Generated (Sequence Related)

Parameter name ScheduleStartingTimeOffset MaximumComputedDurationOf SequenceExecution Description Relative time for starting communication Maximum period for executing a sequence
050122E.EPS

Table LAS Parameters Generated (Element Related) Parameter name ElementType ElementParameter Element type Address of DLCEP sending the CD
050123E.EPS

Description

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-48

Block parameter The function block parameters are generated based on the execution timing chart. The generated function block parameters are shown in the table below.
Table Generated Function Block Parameter Values
Parameter name PeriodOfExecution NextBlockToExecute Description Repetition cycle for function block processing Index of function block where the next process is executed. The function block existing in the same fieldbus device as the generated parameters is the subject.
050124E.EPS

Network parameter The network parameters are generated based on the execution timing chart. The generated function block parameters are shown in the table below.
Table Generated Network Parameter Values Parameter name MaxTokenHoldTimeArray Description Array indicating the delegation time given to each fieldbus device while the delegated token makes the round of all fieldbus devices Default value for the delegation time given to each fieldbus device while the delegated token makes the round of all fieldbus devices
050125E.EPS

DefTokenHoldTime

Entry Check and Save

This is the function that checks to see if there is anything wrong with all the data entered by the user. If there is nothing wrong, the entered data is saved to the database. If something is wrong, a message to this effect is displayed in the dialog box. Also, in the FB editor and schedule creation function, the consistency check and save functions are performed at the time of generation; not at input.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-49

5.1.8

Utilities
The utilities are provided in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool including security, on-line help, and environment setting utilities.

Overview of Utilities
The diagram below shows the overview of utilities.
Utilities

Security

Project database Project device pool

On-line help

Configuration data

Environment setting

Legend Data flow

050126E.EPS

Figure Overview of Utilities

Security
Security

This is the utility that restricts the users who can use the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. This function ensures the integrity of the configuration data. The security function includes the functions indicated below. Login Setting Password User registration

Login
The Login window is displayed when the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is started. The user logs into the Fieldbus Engineering Tool by entering his/her pre-registered user name and password in this Login window. Only one person at a time can log into the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. To do a new login when another user is already logged in, close the project manager that is already open, and then have the new user login. MASTER is a user name registered in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool beforehand by default. At the time of installation, there is no password for MASTER. We recommend setting a password for MASTER when using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-50

Setting Password
This is the function for setting and changing the password for a registered user. Open the password setting window from the Login window, and then set or change the password.

User Registration
This is the function for registering or deleting a user who can use the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. A user is registered or deleted with the user account setting window. Enter the user name and password with the user account setting window to register a user. The password can later be changed using the password setting window. User registration and deletion is performed by logging in with the default user MASTER. User registration and deletion cannot be performed using another user name.

On-line Help
The following items are available in Online Help menu. Using the Online Manual Explains how to use the online help Builder Definition Items The items for configuration are listed as topic for help. Form the topic list, click the item for configuration, the corresponding help message for the item will be opened. Fieldbus Index Displays the contents of this document (Fieldbus Manual). Version Information Displays the version of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. TIP
When using online help, the Fieldbus Online Documents need to be installed. When CS 1000/CS 3000 system and the fieldbus tools (engineering tools and device management tools) or when STARDOM system and the fieldbus tools are applied in the same PC, the Acrobat Reader in the CS 1000/CS 3000 system CD-ROM or in the STARDOM system CD-ROM should be used.

SEE ALSO
For more information about installing the Fieldbus Online Document, see chapter 8, Installation of Tools.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-51

Environment Setting
Environment Settings

The environment setting provides the three functions indicated below.

Directory Path Setting

This is the function for setting or changing path information for the directory where the capabilities files and DD File have been copied. The default setting is \FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL which is located under the directory where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed. Change the directory path if the capabilities files and DD File have been copied to a location other than the default directory.

Switching Transducer Block Display

Transducer Block

This is the function for switching between display and hide of the transducer block. By switching to display, the transducer block can be handled in the following dialog boxes. Parameter dialog box called from the FB editor Download dialog box TIP
Transducer blocks perform the following functions, Converts the data obtained from the physical devices such sensors or actuators into the format that can be accessed by function blocks. Converts the output signals from function blocks into the format that can be applied to physical devices like sensors or actuators.

Check the Consistency of Readback Connection Terminal

Check READ-BACK Correspondence of Connection Terminal

By default, the consistency between the output connection terminal and readback connection terminal is checked before generation. However, this option can be changed. TIP
When implementing fieldbus system with STARDOM, it is necessary to check the consistency of readback connection terminal. When implementing fieldbus system with CS 1000/CS 3000, it is not necessary to check the consistency of readback connection terminal.

SEE ALSO
For more information about checking the readback terminals, see Creating FBAP Block Diagram of FB Editor (For FBAP Configuration) in 5.1.7 Editor.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-52

5.1.9

Network Startup
This is the function for downloading the configuration data created using various editors to the fieldbus device. Download is performed with the fieldbus device connected to the fieldbus.

Overview of Network Startup

The diagram below shows the overview of the network startup.

Network startup Project database Project device pool Download Configuration data

Legend Data flow Fieldbus

050127E.EPS

Figure Overview of the Network Startup

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-53

Download
Downloading

This will load the configuration data to the fieldbus device. The download function includes the functions indicated below. Download using the Download dialog box Data is downloaded to all devices (group download). Also, resource blocks, function blocks, transducer blocks and devices can be selected in multiple and downloaded all at once. Download using the project manager Data is downloaded to individual devices (individual download.) The user can set whether to include block parameters in the data targeted for downloaded. Also, download history is saved. Group download is required in the circumstances described below. When the function block configuration has been changed When the LAS has been changed When the FB schedule has been changed When the common communication parameters in the network have been changed When devices have been added or deleted TIP
It is necessary to change the function block parameters of the device subject for downloading, in advance, in order to safely perform download process with respect to an operating fieldbus system. This parameter change is performed with the operation and monitoring function. When downloading block parameters, it is necessary, in advance, to upload the block parameters of the device subject for downloading.

SEE ALSO
For details on changing parameters to safely perform a download, see Performing Pre-Downloading Operation in 5.5.5, Executing Project Startup.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-54

5.1.10 Maintenance
With the maintenance function, the upload function is used to upload resource block, function block, and transducer block parameter values to the project database.

Overview of Maintenance
The diagram below shows the overview of the maintenance function.

Maintenance Project database Project device pool Upload Configuration data

Legend Data flow Fieldbus

050128E.EPS

Figure Overview of Maintenance

Upload
Uploading

The upload function is the function that the configuration data set in the fieldbus device is uploaded to the project database in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Resource block, function block, and transducer block parameter values are uploaded. Only static parameters can be uploaded. The upload function includes the functions indicated below. Upload function using the Upload dialog box Parameter values for all devices are uploaded. Also, resource blocks, function blocks, transducer blocks and devices can be selected in multiple and their parameter values uploaded all at once. Upload function using the project manager Parameter values for individual device are uploaded. Also, upload history is saved.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-55

5.1.11 Directory Structure for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

This section explains the overall structure of the directories controlled by the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, as well as each directory and each file.

Overall Structure of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool Directories

The structure of the directories controlled by the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is shown in the diagram below. The management of these directories and files is performed with the project manager.
KAPPA Insthist.txt Manifest.txt Readme.txt Bin Various setting files, various executable files, help file, etc. SysDb System database file Ff_prj Configuration object file DevPool MANUFAC_ID(*1) DEV_TYPE(*2) Device capabilities file (.drf) DD File (.ffo) Project directory PrjDb Project database file Lpr Print file Src System configuration file Device object file Hfs Host file Log Error log file Legend Project directory Folder File
050129E.EPS

*1: *2:

MANUFAC_ID is indicated by a 6-digit number in hexadecimal. DEV_TYPE is indicated by a 4-digit number in hexadecimal.

Figure Directory Structure

IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-56

Summary of Directory and File

KAPPA
This is the directory where all files and directories related to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool are stored.

Insthist.txt
This is a text file that saves the processing logs when the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed.

Manifest.txt
This is a text file that describes the Fieldbus Engineering Tool information at the time of shipment.

Readme.txt
This is a text file that describes important notes and precautions related to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Be sure to read this before using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Bin
This is the directory where SysDb, various executable files, setting files, help file, etc. are stored.

SysDb
This is the directory where the system database is stored.

Configuration Object File

This is the file that stores the setup information for the HIS or PC where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed.

DevPool
This is the directory where the device capabilities files and DD File are stored.

Project Directory
This is the directory where all files and directories related to a single project are stored.

PrjDb
This is the directory where the project database is stored.

Project Database File

This is the file for the project database.

Lpr
This is the directory where the print file is stored.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-57

Print File
This is the file output using the print function.

Src
This is the directory where the configuration data files are stored.

System Configuration File

This is the file where configuration data for the project is recorded.

Device Object File

This is the file where configuration data for devices registered in the project is recorded.

Hfs
This is the directory where the host file set is stored.

Host File Set

This is a group of files where project information is recorded. Information used in the application that operates in the supervisory system (host application) is recorded in text format. A host file set consists of multiple files. The individual files are called host files.

Log
This is the directory that stores the error log files and history files when downloading or uploading is performed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-58

5.1.12 Configuration Procedure Using Fieldbus Engineering Tool

This section explains the basic procedure when performing the fieldbus configuration using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Basic Configuration Procedure Using Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The basic procedure for configuring the fieldbus can be broadly divided into the following phases.
Start

Initial setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Settings for the project and fieldbus device

Settings for FBAP

Project startup

End
050130E.EPS

Figure Basic Configuration Procedure when Using Fieldbus Engineering Tool

SEE ALSO
For initial setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, see 5.2, Initial Setting of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. For settings for the project and fieldbus device, see 5.3, Setting Project and Fieldbus Device. For FBAP settings, see 5.4, Settings for FBAP. For project startup, see 5.5, Project Startup.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-59

Outline of Procedures
Initial Setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool
Security related settings such as user name and password, as well as settings related to communication in the control bus are performed. Also, capabilities files for the fieldbus device are imported to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. In the case of a slave PC, settings related to control bus communication are not required.

Settings for the Project and Fieldbus Device

A project is created and devices are registered in the created project. Also, settings related to the network configuration of the registered devices are performed.

Settings for FBAP

Function blocks of registered devices are combined and the FBAP (function block application process) is created. Scheduling of communication with the created FBAP function block is performed.

Project Startup
This procedure performs the preparations necessary for project startup, then starts a project. Also, it backs up the project for which startup was completed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-60

5.2

Initial Settings of Fieldbus Engineering Tool

As the initial settings of Fieldbus Engineering Tool, settings related to security, communication and environment can be set; capabilities files and DD Files can be imported to the system database. This section explains the initial settings of Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-61

5.2.1

Procedure for Initial Setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

In the initial setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, settings necessary to perform communication for the HIS or the master PC with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed are set; and importing of capabilities files is performed.

What is the Initial Setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool?

In the initial setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, security settings, control bus settings and environment settings are determined. Also, capabilities files and DD File are imported to the system database. When capabilities files are imported to the system database, the capabilities file and DD File setting data is automatically copied to a newly created project.

Flow of the Initial Setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The flow of the initial setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is indicated below.
Start of initial setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Calling the project manager

Security setting

Control bus setting (*1)

Environment setting

Importing capabilities files and DD File to the system database

Legend Operations that are always performed Operations performed as necessary Start and end of operation
050201E.EPS

End of initial setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

*1:

Setting is not required in the case of a slave PC.

Figure Flow of the Initial Setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-62

Summary of Each Procedure

Calling the Project Manager
Start the Fieldbus Engineering Tool and call the project manager. If the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool are installed in the same machine, the project manager can be called from the system builders. SEE ALSO
For calling the project manager from the system builders, see 4.2.6, Start Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Setting the Security

Security related settings, such as, user name and password are set to restrict the users who can user the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, in order to ensure the integrity of the configuration data.

Setting the Control Bus

The control bus is set to specify the communication path of the HIS or master PC in the network. The control bus settings are set using the control bus communication function; and not the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Setting is not required in the case of a slave PC.

Setting the Environment

Specify the directory path where the capabilities files and DD File are stored. Whether to display or hide the transducer block is also set.

Importing Capabilities Files and DD File to the System Database

Device capabilities files and DD File are imported to the system database in order to register devices in the project.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-63

5.2.2

Calling Project Manager

The project manager is called to perform settings with respect to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The various functions and editors of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be called from the project manager.

Calling Project Manager

The following procedure is used to call the project manager. 1. With the HIS or master PC, select [Fieldbus tool], then [Engineering tool] from the Windows [Start] menu. With a slave PC, select [Fieldbus tool H1], then [Engineering tool] from the Windows [Start] menu. The Login window is displayed.

Login User Name(U) Password(P) OK Change Password Tool Exit

050202E.EPS

Figure Login Window

Enter the user name and password. Then click the [OK] button. Log into the Fieldbus Engineering Tool and the Copyright dialog box is displayed.

Fieldbus Engineering Tool R4.20.00

Warning: This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law.

Copyright (C) 1996. SOFTING GmbH. All Rights Reserved Copyright (C) 1998-2003. YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation. All Rights Reserved OK
050203E.EPS

Figure Copyright Dialog Box

TIP
With the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, the default user name MASTER is automatically registered at the time of installation. In the state in which it was installed, there is no password set for MASTER. Accordingly, a user can login by clicking the [OK] button without entering a password.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-64

Click the [OK] button. The Fieldbus Engineering Tool starts and the project manager is displayed.
a p p a

Project Manager

Project System Device Pool View Option Help

050204E.EPS

Figure Project Manager

Exiting Project Manager

When configuration using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is completed, exit the project manager. When exiting the project manager, select [Exit] from the [Project] menu for the project manager. The project manager closes and the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is exited.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-65

5.2.3

Setting Security
This is the operation for registering and deleting users, and setting passwords to restrict the users, who can login to the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, to maintain the integrity of the configuration data.

User Registration and Deletion

New users, who can log into the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, can be registered with the Login User List dialog box. Registered users can also be deleted. Registration and deletion of users can only be performed when logged in with the user name MASTER. When registering or deleting users, login with the user name MASTER. Also, the user name that can be entered are within 20 alphanumeric characters (including, underscores and hyphens). For the user name, there is no distinction between uppercase and lowercase characters. TIP
A list of registered users can be viewed in the Login User List dialog box, even when a user name other than MASTER is logged in. However, if the registration or deletion operation is performed, an error message is displayed.

User Registration
1. Select [Security], then [User entry] from the [Open ] menu in the project manager. The Login User List dialog box is displayed.

Login User List

MASTER

Register Delete Close

050205E.EPS

Figure Login User List Dialog Box

2. 3.

Click the [Register] button. The Account Registration dialog box is displayed. Enter the user name, then click the [OK] button. The user is registered and the Account Registration dialog box closes. The user name of the registered user is displayed in the Login User List dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-66

User Deletion
Select the user name of the user to be deleted in the Login User List dialog box, and then click the [Delete] button. The selected user is deleted. TIP
The default user MASTER cannot be deleted. If an attempt is made to delete MASTER, an error message is displayed.

Changing a Password
The password for a registered user can be changed in the Change Password dialog box. Also, only the password of the user currently logged in can be changed. To change the password of another user, login with that users name. Furthermore, the user name that can be entered are within 14 standard-width alphanumeric characters (including, underscores and hyphens). For the password, there is a distinction between uppercase and lowercase characters. 1. Select [Security], then [Change password] from the [Open] menu in the project manager. The Change Password dialog box is displayed.

Change Password
User Name: MASTER OK Cancel

Now Password(P)

New Password(N)

Re-enter New Password(R)

050206E.EPS

Figure Change Password Dialog Box

Enter the current password in the now password box, enter the password you wish to change to in the new password box, and then re-enter this password in the reenter new password box. After entry is complete, click the [OK] button. The password is now changed and the Change Password dialog box closes.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-67

5.2.4

Configuring Control Bus

Control bus can be configured to specify the communication path of the HIS or master PC in the network. Setting is not required in the case of a slave PC. TIP
Control bus configuration is not required for STARDOM.

Configuring Control Bus

Control bus configuration is the operation for specifying the communication path to perform communication with the fieldbus. Settings related to the control bus, such as, domain name, station name, and segment name are set. Communication between the HIS or master PC in the fieldbus system and the fieldbus devices is performed via two types of networks: the control bus and the fieldbus. For this reason, the communication between the HIS or master PC and fieldbus devices can not be established unless control bus setting is completed. This control bus setting must be completed prior to downloading. Control bus configuration window can be called from Feidlbus Engineering Tool on an HIS or a master PC. Choose [Control Bus Configuration] taskbar on [Tools] menu may call up the Control Bus Configuration Window. The segment name and ACF11 loading position (FCS station name, RIO or ESB bus number, node numbers, unit number and, slot number) need to be specified in the control bus configuration window. When doing so, the project name defined by engineering tool should be used as the segment name. If the segment name does not match the project name, download cannot be performed. SEE ALSO
See the section Configuring Control Bus (Settings after Installation) in 8.1, Installing Fieldbus Tools regarding the procedure for setting the control bus.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-68

5.2.5

Setting Environment
When the location to store the capabilities files and DD File has been changed from the default directory, specify the directory path indicating where the capabilities files and DD File are stored. Also, whether to display or hide the transducer block can be selected. These settings are done in the Environment Settings dialog box. And whether to check consistency of readback connection terminals can be set. TIP
The default location where the capabilities files and DD File are stored is FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL which is found under the directory where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed. The corresponding directory path must be specified when the capabilities files and DD File are stored somewhere other than in this directory.

Calling Environment Settings Dialog Box

Environment Settings

Select [Environment settings...] from the [Option] menu in the project manager. The Environment Settings dialog box opens.
Environment Settings Directory Path of DD file/Capabilities File D:/Fieldbus/kappa/DD Show Transducer Blocks Refer...

Check READ-BACK correspondence of Connection Terminal

OK Cancel
050207E .EPS

Figure Environment Settings Dialog Box

Specifying the Directory Path Indicating Where the Capabilities Files and DD File are Stored
The procedure below is used to specify the directory path for where the capabilities files and DD File are stored. 1. Specify the directory path using one of the following operations. Select the directory path from the [Directory Path of Capabilities files/DD Files] combo box. Specify the directory path in the directory reference dialog box that appears when the [Refer...] button is clicked. 2. Click the [OK] button. The directory path is changed and the screen returns to the project manager. Clicking on the [Cancel] button returns the screen to the project manager without changing the directory path.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-69

Display or Hide Transducer Block

Select whether or not to display the transducer block in the following dialog boxes. Parameter dialog box called from the FB editor Download dialog box Follow the procedure below to switch between display and hide. 1. Click the [Transducer block] check box to switch between display and hide. Enter a check mark in the box to display the transducer block. Remove the check mark, and the transducer block will not be displayed. 2. Click the [OK] button. The display setting of the transducer block is switched and the screen returns to the project manager. Clicking on the [Cancel] button returns the window to the project manager without switching the display setting.

Check the Consistency of Readback Connection Terminal

Whether to check or not check the consistency of the reaback connection terminals during FB editor generation can be set. The option is set as follows. 1. Option of [Check Read-Back Correspondence of Connection Terminal] Check the option box [Check READ-BACK Correspondence of Connection Termi nal], consistency of the reaback connection terminals will be checked during FB editor generation. Uncheck the option box [Check READ-BACK Correspondence of Connection Terminal], consistency of the reaback connection terminals will not be checked during FB editor generation.

Click [OK] Button Click [OK] button, the option [Check READ-BACK Correspondence of Connection Terminal] switches from Checked to Unchecked or vice versa, then the display returns to Project Manager. Click [Cancel] button, the option [Check READ-BACK Correspondence of Connection Terminal] is intact, and the display returns to Project Manager.

IMPORTANT
When implementing fieldbus system with STARDOM, it is necessary to check the consistency of readback connection terminal.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-70

5.2.6

Importing Capabilities Files and DD Files to System Database

When there are shared device capabilities files or DD files in the created project, these capabilities files and DD files are imported to the system database.

Importing Capabilities Files and DD Files to System Database

Add...

Vendor Name: Yokogawa Electric Co Device Name: Model Name: ACF11 ACF11

Device Revision: DD Revision: CF Revision:

05 01 03
050208E.EPS

Figure System Device Pool Dialog Box

By selecting the device name in the Imported Capabilities File list box in the System Device Pool dialog box, the device revision, DD revision and CF (capabilities file) revision can be checked.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-71

Click the [Add] button. The Capabilities File Selection dialog box is displayed.

Capabilities File Selection

+ -

DEVPOOL 001151 594543 + + 0001 0003 STD LC1

Model Name EJA EJA EJA

Revision 01 02 01

Device Revision 02 02 02

DD Revision 01 01 02

Cancel
050209E.EPS

Figure Capabilities File Selection Dialog box

In the tree view on the left side of the screen, manufacturer IDs, device types and option folders are displayed hierarchically.

IMPORTANT
Before importing the capability files and DD files from external media, the following preparation should be done to create a location for holding the copied DD files and capability files. Under the folder for device type (such as 0003), create a subfolder for holding the imported capability files. Imported DD files are not held in this folder. The DD files, regardless optional or not, are held in the folder for device type. It is better to use a name for the subfolder that is easy to understand what optional capability file is held.

Select the device type in the tree view. In the list view on the right side of the screen, information for each capabilities file including name (device name), revision information, file date and file type are displayed. Select the capabilities file to be imported in the list view.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-72

Click the [OK] button. Import begins. To terminate the import operation, click on the [Cancel] button. The screen returns to the Capabilities File Selection dialog box without importing the file. After the import begins, the DD files corresponding to the capabilities file is also read. The operation and results will differ depending on whether the DD files to be read exists under the specified directory.

When the DD files to be read exists under the specified directory The Capabilities File Selection dialog box closes and the device name of the capabilities file that has been imported is displayed in the Imported Capabilities File list box found in the System Device Pool dialog box. When the DD files does not exist under the specified directory The confirmation message dialog box appears.
Project Manager The DD file corresponding to the selected Capabilities File does not exist. Continue without the DD file.

Cancel
050211E.EPS

Figure Confirmation Message Dialog Box

Click the [OK] button to import the capabilities file without importing the DD files . The Capabilities File Selection dialog box closes and the device name of the capabilities file that has been imported is displayed in the Imported Capabilities File list box found in the System Device Pool dialog box. To terminate the import operation, click on the [Cancel] button. The import operation is aborted and the screen returns to the Capabilities File Selection dialog box. 6. 7. Repeat the operation in steps 2 to 5 as necessary. Click the [Close] button. The System Device Pool dialog box closes.

TIP
When importing a capability file, the revision of the device (DEV_REV), the revision of DD file, the revision of capability file and the optional information are checked. If an identical capability file exists, the importing is aborted. The same capabilities file as the one already imported cannot be imported again. If an attempt is made to import the same capabilities file, an error dialog box is displayed. To import the same capabilities file again, first delete the imported capabilities file from the system database.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-73

Deleting Capabilities Files and DD Files from System Database

If for some reason such as a version upgrade, a capabilities file is no longer necessary, it can be deleted from the system database. When a capabilities file is deleted, the DD Files corresponding to that capabilities file is also deleted. The following procedure is used to delete a capabilities file from the system database. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select [Display...] from the [System device pool] in the project manager. The System Device Pool dialog box is displayed. Select the device name of the capabilities file to be deleted from the Imported Capabilities File list box. Click the [Remove] button. The deleted file will disappear from the list box. Repeat the operation in steps 2 to 4 as necessary. Click the [Close] button. The System Device Pool dialog box closes.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-74

5.3

Setting Project and Fieldbus Device

After the initial setting for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is completed, settings for the project and fieldbus device are determined next. This section explains the setting for the project and fieldbus device.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-75

5.3.1

Setting Procedure for the Project and Fieldbus Device

In the settings for the project and fieldbus device, the project is created and the devices are registered.

What are the Settings for the Project and Fieldbus Device?
First, a new project is created or an existing project is opened. Next, the devices to be used in the project are registered in the project. The function block for the device can be used with the FBAP when the device is registered. The various parameters set for the registered device are changed as necessary.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-76

Setting Flow for the Project and Fieldbus Device

The setting flow for the project and fieldbus device are indicated below.
Start setting for the project and fieldbus device

Create new project or open a project

Import capabilities files and DD Files to the project database

Import device configuration data to the project database

Call device editor

Display device ID. (*1)

Register device to project

Call network editor

Set or change network parameters

Change device parameters

Upload to project database

Update DD file and capability file.

Replace a physical device then update its DD file and capability file.

Legend Operations that are always performed Operations performed as necessary Start and end of operation
050301E.EPS

End settings for the project and fieldbus device

*1:

Only performed on HIS and master PC.

Figure Setting Flow for the Project and Fieldbus Device

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-77

Summary of Each Procedure

Create New Project or Open a Project
Create a new project. Also, to change an existing project, open the project to be changed.

Import Capabilities Files and DD Files to the Project Database

Import the capabilities files and DD Files to the project database when using new devices or new capabilities files and DD Files.

Import Device Configuration Data to the Project Database

Import the device configuration data to the project database when appropriating a device.

Call Device Editor

Call the device editor to perform device settings.

Display Device ID
Display the device Ids of all devices connected on the fieldbus.

Register Device to Project

Call Network Editor

Call the network editor to set the node address of the device and device class.

Set or Change Network Parameters

Set or change network parameters for each device. The parameters to be set are the node address and device class.

Change Device Parameters

Change the device parameters as necessary.

Upload to Project Database

Upload block parameter values set in the fieldbus device to the project database as necessary.

Update DD File and Capability File

The registered device information is updated after the device DD file, capability file or the physical device itself is changed.

Replace a Physical Device then Update Its DD File and Capability File
If a physical device is replaced, the DD file and capability file of the device as well as the device information needs to be updated.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-78

5.3.2

Creating a New Project or Opening a Project

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool controls the device connected to one segment of the fieldbus in units called a project. Engineering is performed for each project. If a project is not created, then a new project is created. If the settings for an existing project are changed, then the project which to be changed is opened.

Creating a New Project

A project is created using the following procedure. 1. Select [New (N) ...] from the [Project (P)] menu in the project manager. The file open dialog box is displayed.
Open Save in: DevPool Example Prj1 Ff_prj ?

File name: Save as type: Project files(*.prj)

Save Cancel
050302E.EPS

Figure Example of File Open Dialog Box

If the project is to be created in a specific directory, select the directory where the project will be created. Select the same directory as the one specified in the create New IOM dialog box of the system builders in order to use the Fieldbus Engineering Tool configuration data with the system builders. Enter the project file name for the project to be created in the file name box, then click the [Save] button. A new project is created and a project database is generated for saving the various settings related to the project. Also, all of the capabilities files imported to the system database are copied to the project database.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-79

Information related to the project is displayed in the project manager when the process for creating a new project is completed.
a p p a

Project Manager

Project Device Pool Device Tools Network View Option Help

Devices in Project ACF11_14 PI101 PCV101

Project Title: Date of Creation: Date of Modification:

pr j 12, 12, 1998 12, 12, 1998

5.3.3

Importing Capabilities Files and DD Files to the Project Database

Capabilities files and DD files are imported to the project database as necessary. This operation is performed when there are capabilities files necessary for individual projects other than those that were automatically copied at the time when the project was created. Importing capabilities files automatically imports the DD files corresponding to those files. If for some reason, such as a version upgrade, capabilities files and DD files become no longer necessary, they can be deleted from the project database.

Importing Capabilities Files and DD Files to the Project Database

Before importing the capabilities files and DD files to the system database, specify in the Environment Settings dialog box the directory path indicating where the capabilities files and DD files are stored. The following procedure is used to import a capabilities file and DD files to the project database. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the project with the capabilities file and DD files to be imported. Select [Display (S) ...] from the [Device pool (E)] menu in the project manager. The Device Pool dialog box is displayed. Click the [Add] button. The Capabilities File Selection dialog box is displayed. Select the device type in the tree view on the left side of the screen. In the list view on the right side of the screen, information for each capabilities file including name (device name), revision information and file date are displayed. In the list view, select the device name corresponding to the capabilities file to be imported. Click the [OK] button. Import is executed after it is confirmed that the DD files corresponding to the capabilities file to be read exists under the specified directory. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Capabilities File Selection dialog box without importing the file. Repeat steps 3 to 6 of the procedure as necessary. Click the [Close] button. The Device Pool dialog box closes.

5. 6.

7. 8.

SEE ALSO
For more information about importing DD files, see 5.2.6, Importing Capabilities Files and DD Files to System Database.

TIP
A list of the devices that can be registered in the project can be saved as a print file. Select [Print (P) ...] from the [Device pool (E)] menu.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-83

Deleting Capabilities Files and DD Files from the Project Database

Delete capabilities files from the project database. Along with the capabilities files, the corresponding DD files will also be deleted. Deletion is done using the following procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select [Display (S) ...] from the [Device pool (E)] menu in the project manager. The Device Pool dialog box is displayed. Select the device name of the capabilities file to be deleted from the Imported Capabilities File list box. Click the [Remove] button. A dialog box asking for confirmation whether it is okay to delete the file is displayed. Click the [OK] button. The device name of the capabilities file that has been deleted will disappear from the Imported Capabilities File list box in the Device Pool dialog box. Repeat steps 2 to 4 of the procedure as necessary. Click the [Close] button. The Device Pool dialog box closes.

5. 6.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-84

5.3.4

Importing Device Configuration Data to the Project Database

The configuration data is imported to the project database when device settings are appropriated from another project.

Importing Device Configuration Data to the Project Database

The following procedure is used to import device configuration data. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Create a new project. Select [Import (I) ...] from the [Device (D)] menu in the project manager. The file open dialog box is displayed. Click [OK] button. Select the device object file for the device to be imported from the [file name] list box. Click the [OPEN] button. The configuration data contained in the selected device object is registered to the project database. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the file open dialog box without importing the file. Repeat steps 2 to 5 of the procedure if required.

IMPORTANT
The device configuration data can not be imported to an existing project.

TIP
In order to import device configuration data, the capabilities file, which is the source of the device object file, is copied beforehand to the FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL directory under the directory where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed (here, copy means copying the file from an external media). If there is no capabilities file, the device configuration data cannot be imported. If the capabilities file has already been copied, there is no need to copy the capabilities file.

SEE ALSO
For details on configuration data files that can be imported, see 5.1.6, Project Manager.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-85

5.3.5

Calling Device Editor

Call the device editor. The device editor is used to register a device to the project and set the configuration data for the registered device.

Calling Device Editor

Available Device Types, Devices in Project

The following procedure is used to call the device editor. 1. 2. Open the project. This step is unnecessary if the project is already opened. Select [Device editor] from the [Tool] menu in the project manager. The device editor is displayed.

a p p a

Device Editor

Edit View Help

Available Device Types ACF11 YVP EJA Remove Remove All Device Name: Vendor Name: Model Name: Revision: ACF11 Yokogawa ACF11*A 1 Add >

Devices in Project ACF11 FI1001 VP1001

Device Name: Device ID: PDTag:

ACF11 ACF11-176M ACF11-14 Modify

050305E.EPS

Figure Device Editor

TIP
When the devices with same model name but different revisions are imported, they are indicated with same device name on device editor. However, their revision numbers displayed can distinguish them.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-86

The available device types group box and devices in project group box are displayed in order to import device configuration data. The information for selecting the device to be registered in the project is displayed in the available device types group box. Information related to the configuration of the device registered in the project is displayed in the devices in project group box.
Table Information Displayed in the Available Device Types Group Box.
Box name Available device types list Device name Vendor name Model name Revision Display contents List of the device types that can be registered in the project Name of device selected in the available device types list Name of vendor offering the device selected in the available device types list Name of model of device selected in the available device types list Revision of the device selected in the available device types list
050306E.EPS

Table Information Displayed in the Devices in Project Group Box

Box name Devices in project list Device name Device ID PD tag Display contents List of device IDs set in the configuration data Device name of the device selected in the devices in project list Device ID of the device selected in the devices in project list Physical device tag of the device selected in the devices in project list
050307E.EPS

Exiting the Device Editor

Exit the device editor after the device configuration data setting is completed. Select [Exit (X)] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the device editor. The device editor closes.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-87

5.3.6

Display Device ID
Display Device ID

The IDs of all fieldbus devices connected on the HI fieldbus can be displayed. To display the devices IDs, the fieldbus communication must be established via ACF11 module. The IDs can be displayed on HIS or master PC. The following items are displayed together with the device IDs. Device Tag Name Node Address Device Class Device Revision Information

Displaying Device ID
On the dialog box for displaying device ID, an option [Display Device Revision Info] can be checked so as to display the revision information together with the device ID. However, it takes much more time to display the revision information. By default, this option is not checked. Though this option is not checked, the revision information of each device is displayed on the device ID dialog box for each individual device by performing the procedure for displaying individual device ID after the device ID is updated (refreshed). The process of gathering device information from the field devices can be interrupted. The device information already gathered before interruption can be displayed. However, on the device ID dialog box for each individual device the process cannot be interrupted.

Display Device IDs of New Project

1. 2. 3. Create a new project on project manager window of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Then register ACF11 fieldbus communication module to the project. Click [Control Bus Configuration] on [Tools] menu, then enter the segment name of the fieldbus into Control Bus Configuration window. Click [Download] on [Device] menu to download to ACF11. After downloading to ACF11, the communication with fieldbus devices via ACF11 is established. Choose [Display Device ID] on [Project] menu. [Display Device ID] dialog box displays.

Display Device ID Device Tag Name Node Address EJA1001 0xF5 Device ID Device Class MANUFAC_ID 0x594543 DEV_TYPE 0x0003 DEV_REV 0x02 DD_REV 0x01

594543EJA... BASIC

Display Device Revision Info

Stop

Save

Individual Update

Update
050308E.EPS

Figure Display Device ID Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-88

If the information regarding the device revision is required, check the option [Display Device Revision Info]. By default, this option is not checked. When the dialog box is closed, the checked option becomes invalid. So that this option is remain unchecked when the dialog box is open again. Click [Update] button on the dialog box. The information gathered from the field devices are displayed. If the option [Display Device Revision Info] is not checked, Device Tag Name, Node Address, Device ID and Device Class items are displayed. If the option [Display Device Revision Info] is checked, Device Tag Name, Node Address, Device ID, Device Class items and device revision information (MANUFAC_ID, DEV_TYPE, DEV_REV and DD_REV) are displayed. The fieldbus devices are connected via ACF11 modules, the information of the fieldbus devices cannot be displayed if they were not configured. However, STARDOM can display the fieldbus device revision information even the fieldbus devices are not configured. To interrupt the process for updating the field device information, go to procedure step 8. The displayed contents can be output to a CSV file by clicking [Save] button. To interrupt the process for updating the field device information, click [Stop] button on the Display Device ID dialog box. A confirmation dialog box displays. The [Stop] button is valid only when the [Update] button is pressed.

7. 8.

Display DeviceID Is Device ID display processing stopped?

Yes

No
050327E.EPS

Figure Confirmation Dialog Box

Click [OK] button on the confirmation dialog box, the updating process stops after the process for gathering an individual device is completed. To click [No] button on the confirmation dialog box, the updating process continues.

SEE ALSO
For more information about displaying the individual device ID after the device information is updated in the dialog box, see Displaying Individual Device ID.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-89

Display Device IDs of Existing Project

1. 2. Click [Polling Address Setting] on [Option] menu, then set the ranges of polling address. Click [Download] on [Device] menu to download to ACF11. After downloading to ACF11, the communication with fieldbus devices via ACF11 is established. Choose [Display Device ID] on [Project] menu. [Display Device ID] dialog box displays. If the information regarding the device revision is required, check the option [Display Device Revision Info]. By default, this option is not checked. When the dialog box is closed, the checked option becomes invalid. So that this option is remain unchecked when the dialog box is open again. Click [Update] button on the dialog box. The information gathered from the field devices are displayed. If the option [Display Device Revision Info] is not checked, Device Tag Name, Node Address, Device ID and Device Class items are displayed. If the option [Display Device Revision Info] is checked, Device Tag Name, Node Address, Device ID, Device Class items and device revision information (MANUFAC_ID, DEV_TYPE, DEV_REV and DD_REV) are displayed. To interrupt the process for updating the field device information, go to procedure step 7. Click [Save] button on the dialog box can save the information into a CSV file. To interrupt the process for updating the field device information, click [Stop] button on the Display Device ID dialog box. A confirmation dialog box displays. The [Stop] button is valid only when the [Update] button is pressed. Click [OK] button on the confirmation dialog box, the updating process stops after the process for gathering an individual device is completed. To click [No] button on the confirmation dialog box, the updating process continues.

3. 4.

6. 7.

SEE ALSO
For more information about displaying the individual device ID after the device information is updated in the dialog box, see Displaying Individual Device ID.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-90

Displaying Individual Device ID

1. Following the procedure for displaying device IDs of new project or the procedure displaying device IDs of existing project to update the device information on the dialog box.

SEE ALSO
For more information about the procedure for displaying device IDs of new project, see Displaying Device IDs of New Project. For more information about the procedure for displaying device IDs of existing project, see Displaying Device IDs of Existing Project.

Choose a device tag from the displayed device list. If the information regarding the device revision is required, check the option [Display Device Revision Info]. Click [Individual Update] button. The information of the selected device is displayed. If the option [Display Device Revision Info] is checked, Device Tag Name, Node Address, Device ID, Device Class items and device revision information (MANUFAC_ID, DEV_TYPE, DEV_REV and DD_REV) are displayed. If the option [Display Device Revision Info] is not checked, Device Tag Name, Node Address, Device ID and Device Class items are displayed.

TIP
The [Stop] button becomes invalid when the [Individual Update] button is pressed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-91

5.3.7

Registering a Device to the Project

The FBAP is created by combining the function blocks built in the device. In order to use the device function blocks, the device is registered in the project.

Registering a Device to the Project

Configuration data for the device is automatically generated when a device is registered in a project. The generated configuration data is registered in the project database. The only devices that can be registered in the project are those whose capabilities files have been imported to the project database. The following procedure is used to register a device. 1. 2. Select the type name of the device to be registered from the available device types list box. Click the [Add] button. Or, select [Add to the project (A)] from the [Edit (E)] menu. The New Device dialog box is displayed. At this time, a character string to which has been added the device serial number registered in the device type, is entered as the default value in the Device ID box and PD tag box.
New Device Device ID: PDTag: TMP1 TMP1 OK Cancel
050309E.EPS

Figure Example of New Device Dialog Box

3. 4.

Enter the device ID in the Device ID box. Enter the physical device tag name in the PD tag box. The physical device tag name can be specified with up to 16 alphanumeric characters.

IMPORTANT
In the specifications for the fieldbus, the physical device tag name can be a maximum of 32 characters. In the CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders, however, the maximum is 16 characters (standard-width alphanumeric characters). If connecting to the CS 1000, CS 3000 or STARDOM, be sure the physical device tag name does not exceed 16 characters when setting the physical device tag name with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. If more than 16 characters are used, an error occurs when expanding with system builders. Only one ACF11 can be registered in one fieldbus project.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-92

Click the [OK] button. The New Device dialog box closes and the physical device tag name for the device that has been added is displayed in the Devices in Project list box. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the New Device dialog box without changing the device ID and physical device tag name.

When completed, close the device editor. And then the network parameters are automatically calculated.

TIP
A list of the devices registered in the project can be saved to a print file. Select [Print (P) ...] from the [Project (P)] menu in the project manager.

SEE ALSO
For changing the device ID of a registered device, see 5.5.3, Changing a Registered Device ID.

Deleting a Device From the Project

Devices that are no longer necessary can be deleted from the project. The user can delete a specified device only, or delete all devices at one time.

Deleting a Specific Device

The following procedure is used to delete a specific device. 1. 2. 3. Select the device to be deleted from the devices in project list box in the device editor. Select [Remove (R)] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the device editor. A dialog box for confirmation will appear. Click [OK] to continue. Configuration data for the selected device will be deleted from the project database, then the display of the selected device will disappear from the devices in project list box. Repeat steps 1 and 3 of the procedure if required. When completed, close the device editor. And then the network parameters are automatically calculated.

4. 5.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-93

Deleting All Devices

The following procedure is used to delete all devices. 1. 2. Select [Delete all (I)] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the device editor. A dialog box confirming whether user really wants to delete all devices is displayed. Click the [OK] button. All device configuration data is deleted from the project database and all device displays disappears from the devices in project list box. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the dialog box without deleting the devices. When completed, close the device editor. And then the network parameters are automatically calculated.

TIP
If the function block for the device to be deleted is arranged in the FBAP block diagram, the device cannot be deleted. If the delete operation is executed, a dialog box, indicating that the function block has been arranged in the FBAP block diagram, is displayed. Before deleting a device, delete all the function blocks for the device to be deleted from the FBAP block diagram.

SEE ALSO
For the procedure to delete function blocks from the FBAP block diagram, see 5.4.4, Placement of Function Blocks in the FBAP Block Diagram.

IMPORTANT
When registering or deleting a device, always be sure to perform generation using the FB editor.

SEE ALSO
For generation, see 5.4.8, Generation of the FBAP Configuration.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-94

5.3.8

Calling Network Editor

Calls the network editor. The network editor is used to set the node address and device class with respect to the device registered in the project.

Calling the Network Editor

SM Support

The following procedure is used to call the network editor. 1. 2. Open the project. This step is unnecessary if the project is already opened. Select [Network editor (D)] from the [Tool (T)] menu in the project manager. The network editor is displayed.
a p p a

Network Editor

Edit View Help

Devices in Project ACF11 EJA YEWFLO YVP

Device Device ID: Vendor Name: Device Name: Model Name: Device Revision: Option Folder: Parameters Device Class: SM Support: Node Address:

Yokogawa Electric Corp: EJA EJA100 02 DDRevision :01 CF Revision STD Basic 0x17, 0x70, 0x00, 0x00 0xF7

:01

Modify...

050310E.EPS

Figure Network Editor

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-95

In the network editor, the Devices in project list box, the Device group box, and the Parameter group box are displayed. A list of the physical device tag names for the devices registered in the project is displayed in the Devices in project list box. Detailed information regarding the device selected in the Devices in project list box is displayed in the Device group box and the Parameter group box.
Table Information Displayed in the Device Box
Item Device ID Vendor Name Device Name Model Name Device Revision DD Revision CF Revision Option Folder Description ID of the device registered in the project Name of the vendor supplying the device Name of the device (not the tag name) Model name of the device Device revision (DEV_REV) DD File revision (DD_REV) Capability file revision Option folder for holding capability files
050312E.EPS

Table Information Displayed in the Parameter Box

Item Device Class SM Support Node Address Description Class that indicates the communication function Numeric value when the bit array indicating the function supported by System Management is expressed as a hexadecimal. Expressed in code that conforms to SM section definitions in Function Block Application Process Part 1, 2 (FF 94 890/891) Node address that was set
050313E.EPS

Exiting the Network Editor

Exit the network editor after the setting of the node address and device class for the device are completed. Select [Exit (X)] from the [Edit (D)] menu in the network editor. The network editor closes.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-96

5.3.9

Setting or Changing Network Parameters

After a device is registered in the project, the node address and device class are set manually as device network parameters. The node address can also be assigned automatically for devices whose node address has not been set.

Manually Changing the Node Address and Device Class Settings

The following procedure is used to set or change the network parameters (node address and device class) for the device. 1. 2. From the Devices in project list box in the network editor, select the device for which the network parameter is to be set or changed. Click the [Modify] button. The Network Parameter dialog box is displayed.
Network Parameter Device ID: Node Address: Device Class Basic Linkmaster OK Cancel
050314E.EPS

EJA_8 0x0

Figure Network Parameter Dialog Box

Enter the node address in the Node address box. Set the node address so that there are no duplicate addresses in the project. ACF11: 0x14 is fixed Basic: 0xF7 is the high limit Linkmaster: 0x14 is the low limit Select the device class. Select either linkmaster or basic. If the device class for a device with built-in linkmaster communication function is set as linkmaster, then it will operate as a linkmaster device. The device class for a device that does not have the linkmaster communication function cannot be set as linkmaster.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-97

Click the [OK] button. The Network Parameter dialog box closes and the network parameter that was set is saved in the project database. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Network Parameter dialog box without changing the network parameter. Repeat steps 1 to 5 as necessary to set the network parameters for each device.

IMPORTANT
Always be sure to use the FB editor to perform generation when the node address has been changed.

SEE ALSO
Regarding generation, see 5.4.8, Generation of the FBAP Configuration.

Automatically Assigning the Node Address

A node address can automatically be assigned to devices for which a node address has not been set. To assign the address, select: [Node address auto assignment] from the [Edit] menu. The node address will be assigned automatically.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-98

5.3.10 Changing Device Parameters

Change the device parameters as necessary. Since the value described in the capabilities file is set as the default value in the device parameters, it usually does not matter if the setting is left as the default value. Change the default settings only if it is necessary. Parameters can be changed also by directly entering a numeric value or keyword or selecting a keyword from the keyword list.

Changing the Device Parameters

All Parameters

The following procedure is used to change the device parameters. 1. Select [All Parameters (A)] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the network editor. The Parameter dialog box is displayed.

Parameter Dialog Devices in Project List example + Common Pressure_Transmitter_2 VCR VCR1 VCR2 VCR3 VCR4 VCR5 VCR6 VCR7 VCR8 VCR9 + Valve_Positioner_3

Parameter Element FasArTypeAndRole FasDllLocalAddr FasDllConfiguredRemot FasDllSDAP FasDllMaxConfirmDelay FasDllMaxConfirmDelay FasDllMaxDlsduSize FasDllResidualActivity FasDllTimelinessClass FasDllPublisherTimeWir FasDllPublisherSynchro FasDllSubscriberTimeW FasDllSubscriberSynchr FmsVfdId FmsMaxOutstandingSer FmsMaxOutstandingSer FmsFeaturesSupported

Value Type SERVER+QUB+NOBYPAS OctetString 248 Unsigned32 FREE Unsigned32 NONSCHEDULED+DISOR OctetString 60000 Unsigned16 60000 Unsigned16 128 Unsigned16 Boolean TRUE OctetString TRUE Unsigned16 FALSE Unsigned32 Unsigned16 Unsigned32 Unsigned32 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 NONE,GET_OD+READ+W BitString

Range 0~0xff 0~0xff

1~256 0x00,0xff

0~ 0~ 0~

Cancel

Print File
050315E.EPS

Figure Parameter Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-99

Project, Common area or device, Group and Element are expanded as a hierarchical structure in the Devices in Project list.
Table Contents Displayed in the Devices in Project List
Display target Project Common area Device Group Element Screen display Project name Common area Physical device tag name Parameter group name Element name (number) Parameters with the same meaning are displayed in group. This is displayed when the group is comprised of multiple elements.
050316E.EPS

Remarks The screen display cannot be changed. Parameter groups common to the network (projects) are shown in the common area.

Select the parameter group, VCR or element to be edited from the Devices in Project list. A list of the parameters to be edited will be displayed in the list view on the right side of the screen. In the list view, Parameter name, Element name, Value, Type and Range will be displayed. If the parameter is rewritable, only the value can be changed.

Table Details of the List View Box name Parameter Element Value Type Range Display contents Name of the parameter. Name of the parameter element. Value of the specified parameter. Setting is also possible. Parameter data type. High and low limit of the parameter and number of characters that can be entered.
050317E.EPS

Enter the parameter value in the Value box using one of the following operations.

Enter the value directly in the input area using the keyboard Select a keyword as the value to be set from the keyword list that is displayed by clicking on the arrow button besides the input area. 4. Click the [OK] button. The Parameter dialog box closes and the setting is saved in the project database. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Parameter dialog box without changing the device parameters.

TIP
Parameters displayed in gray and the parameters (element) prohibited for changing can not be rewritten. The settings of the selected parameter group or VCR parameters can be saved as a text file for printing. When clicking on the Print file button in the Parameter dialog box, a dialog box for opening a file appears. In this dialog box, enter the name of the file to be saved.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-100

The following parameter groups can be selected with the Parameter dialog box called from the network editor. NMIB: SMIB: SMAA: LAS: NM (Network Management) parameters (common) SM (System Management) parameters (common) SM (System Management) parameters (for address assignment, common) LAS schedule parameters (common) LASAR: Version part LASDOM: Summary part LASSUB: Sub-schedule part VCR (Virtual Communication Relationship) parameters

VCR: TIP

Parameters can be changed also in the Parameter dialog box called from the FB editor. However, the parameter groups that can be selected will differ.

IMPORTANT
When the network parameters are entered, the range of the values will be checked. This check is performed based on the range provided as the default (range defined by the Foundation Fieldbus). The parameter limit values described in the capabilities file are not used for the check performed when parameters are entered, but used for the consistency check performed prior to generation.

How to Enter Parameters Directly

When directly entering parameter values in the input area, values can be entered using a keyword in addition to entering a numeric value. The keyword that has been entered is converted to a numeric value and saved in the database. When the entry is re-displayed, it is converted back to a keyword. With those parameters that can be entered via keyword selection, a keyword can be selected from the keyword list that is displayed by clicking on the arrow button besides the input area.

Entering a Parameter Directly Using a Numeric Value

Enter the value using the following input format. When the parameter data type is Bit String or Octet String Enter in hexadecimal. When the parameter data type is Structure (DS: Data Structure) Enter in hexadecimal, delimit with comma (,). When element in the structure is Bit String type, that element can be entered in the same way as with Bit String. Example of entry is given below. Example: Bit String: 0x1010 Data Structure: 0x10, 0x10
IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-101

Entering a Parameter Directly Using a Keyword

When entering a keyword, use the same input format that is used when entering a numeric value. The elements of keyword are connected using the + symbol if the parameter is a structure including connection type elements, connection type BitString or OctetString. Example of entry is given below. Example: ModeBlk=AUTO,AUTO,MAN,O/S ModeBlk=AUTO,AUTO,AUTO+MAN+O/S,O/S IoOpts=INVERT+FSTATE

How to Enter Parameters via Keyword Selection

The method for entering a parameter via keyword selection differs depending on the parameter data type. Examples of entering parameters via keyword selection are given below. TIP
Elements are entered with the same method that is used when entering parameters.

BitString parameter (Selection type)

Select one keyword from the keyword list.
QUB_INITIATOR QUB_RESPONDER BUN_SUBSCRIBER
050318E.EPS

Figure

Keyword Selection for BitString Parameter (Selection Type)

BitString parameter (Connection type)

More than one keyword can be selected by placing a check mark in the check boxes.
NONE GET_OD ALL
050319E.EPS

Figure

Keyword Selection for BitString Parameter (Connection Type)

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-102

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-105

5.3.11 Upload to the Project Database

Block parameter values set for the fieldbus device are uploaded to the project database as necessary.

Calling the Upload Dialog Box

The following operations can be used to call up the Upload dialog box. Select [Upload] from the [Project] menu in the project manager Or, startup directly from an external application Doing this displays the Upload dialog box.
Upload Device in project

STR3 2 Temperature_sensor_2 Temperature_sensor_2(RESOURCE) 3 AI_400(AI) 3 2 New_valve_positioner_3 New_valve_positioner_3(RESOURCE) 3 3 PID_400(PID) (AO) 3 2 New_valve_positioner_4 New_valve_positioner_4(RESOURCE) 3 (PID) 3 AO_466(AO) 3 2 TI1001 3 TI1001(RESOURCE) 3 TI1001-AI(AI) 2 VP1001 3 VP1001(RESOURCE) 3 VP1001-PID(PID) 3 VP1001-AO(AO)

Temperature_sensor_2 New_valve_positioner_3 New_valve_positioner_4 TI1001 VP1001

Execute

Cancel

050324E.EPS

Figure Upload Dialog Box

The devices in project and the blocks are displayed in the Upload dialog box. The physical device tag name is displayed in the device. Also, for the block, the block tag name and block type are displayed. These tag names cannot be changed. The blocks that can be displayed are resource blocks, function blocks and transducer blocks. Further, the host interface device (ACF11) is not displayed, and therefore is not available for upload.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-106

Executing an Upload
The following procedure is used to execute upload. 1. Select a project, device, or block. Multiple devices and blocks can be selected as the upload target. Also, all of the devices in project is uploaded when a project is selected. Click the [Execute] button with the upload target selected. Upload is executed. A message dialog box is displayed while upload is being executed.

PJT1 Project Name : PJT1 1998/12/14 15:11:57 Start uploading to YW1001. 1998/12/14 15:12:09 Start uploading block parameter toYW1001. 1998/12/14 15:12:09 Start uploading block parameter toYW1001 [View[2]]. 1998/12/14 15:12:12 Start uploading block parameter toYW1001 [View[4]]. 1998/12/14 15:12:16 Start uploading block parameter toYW1001 [TagDesc]. 1998/12/14 15:12:18 Start uploading block parameter toYW1001 [AlarmSum]. 1998/12/14 15:12:23 Start uploading block parameter toYI1001. 1998/12/14 15:12:23 Start uploading block parameter toYI1001 [View[2]]. 1998/12/14 15:12:25 Start uploading block parameter toYI1001 [View[4]]. 1998/12/14 15:12:29 Start uploading block parameter toYI1001 [TagDesc]. 1998/12/14 15:12:31 Start uploading block parameter toYI1001 [AlarmSum]. 1998/12/14 15:12:38 End uploading to YW1001.

Stop

Save Progress bar

Detail
050325E.EPS

Figure Message Dialog Box

A message indicating the status of the upload execution is displayed in the message dialog box. While upload is executing, all messages are stored in a text file (upload.log) under the Log directory. Also, how the execution process is proceeding can be seen in the progress bar. A list of the messages displayed in the message dialog box is given below.
Upload of the **device ** block will start. Upload of the **device ** block has been completed.
050326E.EPS

Note: In the area indicated by **, the physical device tag name or block name is displayed.

Figure List of Messages Displayed in the Message Dialog Box

To terminate the upload execution, click the [Stop] button. A dialog box to confirm termination is displayed. Clicking the [Stop] button in this dialog box terminates the upload. If [Cancel] is clicked, the upload is not terminated and the dialog box closes. Also, upload continues while the confirmation dialog box is being displayed.

TIP
During upload execution, whenever the upload for each block completes normally, the data is written to the database by block. If an error occurs while upload is being executed or if the [Stop] button is clicked, the block data being processed at the time the upload terminated is not written to the database.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

Replace a Device with Same Revision Number

1. Choose a device on Project Manager window of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Then click [Upload] in [Device] menu. If the communication of fieldbus devices is established, the fieldbus device parameters can be uploaded. Replace the physical device. The new device should have the same device tag, node address and device class of the one to be replaced. Choose the device on Project Manager window of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Then click [Download] in [Device] menu to download the parameters to the new device.

2. 3.

Replace a Device with Different Revision Number

1. Choose a device on Project Manager window of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Then click [Upload] in [Device] menu. If the communication of fieldbus devices is established, the fieldbus device parameters can be uploaded. Copy the capability file and DD file of the new device to a folder (FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL) under the Fieldbus Engineering Tool installed folder. On Project Manager window of Fieldbus Engineering Tool, use "Import" in Device menu to import the capability file and DD file to Device Pool.

2. 3.

SEE ALSO
For more information about importing capability files and DD files, see 5.2.6 Importing Capability Files and DD Files to System Database.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Choose [Renew CF/DD] on [Device] menu to upgrade the device. If the function blocks in the new version device are different from the previous device, it is necessary to edit the function blocks on FB Editor, and to delete the invalid blocks. Run Generate on FB Editor. Replace the physical device. The new device should have the same device tag, node address and device class of the one to be replaced. Choose the device on Project Manager window of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Select [Download] in [Project] menu on Project Manager window of Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Download dialog box displays. On the Download dialog box, click [Execute] button to start download the information to all the fieldbus devices including the newly replaced device.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-111

5.4

Settings for FBAP

The function blocks for the registered devices are combined and settings for the FBAP set. This section explains how to perform the setting for the FBAP.

Precautions on the Number of Registered Devices and When Configuring the FBAP
The specifications of the fieldbus communication module (ACF11), which is the subject of engineering, indicate the number of field devices that can be registered with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool; the number of registered connection terminals in the FBAP configuration; and the communication count between the blocks, as follows: Number of registered devices Maximum number: 32 (including the ACF11) A maximum of 32 devices, including the ACF11, can be registered in one segment (one project) Number of VCR (Virtual Communication Relationship) Maximum number: 94 This is the maximum number of VCR that can be set in the ACF11. Number of connection terminals Maximum number: 64 The ACF11 can use 32 each of connection terminals for inputs and for outputs. Communication count Maximum count: 32 This is the maximum count of the communication schedules (sequences) for the LAS (Link Active Scheduler) that the ACF11 contains. In order to complete generation normally, always create the system to stay within the range of registered quantities indicated above. If the configuration does not fall within the range of registered quantities above, the following error messages will be displayed when the generation function is executed. When the number of configured VCRs exceeds the allowed maximum number Error while generating common objects. Error on generating a VCR object for Device <DeviceName>, FB <FbName>, Parameter <ParameterName>. Warning! There are not enough VCR definitions to generate all needed VCRs for the Host Interface Devices! When the number of communication schedules exceeds the allowed maximum number Error on generating a LAS Schedule object for Device <DeviceName>, FB <FbName>, Parameter <ParameterName>. SEE ALSO
For details on the error messages, see Generation found under 5.6.9, FB Editor Error Messages.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-112

5.4.1

Procedure for Setting the FBAP

The procedure for setting the FBAP is explained below.

What is Setting the FBAP?

FBAP is a series of control loops created by combining the function blocks of multiple devices. By combining the function blocks of the registered devices, the FBAP used by the project is set. Primarily the following operations are performed when setting the FBAP. Creating the FBAP block diagram A diagram indicating the configuration of the function blocks used in the FBAP (block diagram) is created. This is called the FBAP block diagram. Setting function block parameters The parameters for each function block are set. Generating the FBAP configuration Generation is performed based on the block diagram and parameters and the VCR values and link object parameter values are generated. Performing these operations allows the setting data related to the FBAP to be downloaded to the device. TIP
The Fieldbus Engineering Tool can handle the following function resources of a device. However, the function block is the only one of these resources that can be placed in the FBAP block diagram. Function block Resource block Transducer block Link object Alert object

SEE ALSO
For details on the various function resources, see Function Block Application Process Part 1, 2 (FF-890/ 891.)

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-113

Flow of Setting for the FBAP

Flow of the Setting for the FBAP

The following shows the flow of setting for the FBAP.

Start setting for the FBAP

Calling FB editor

Creating or selecting a FBAP block diagram

Placing function blocks in the FBAP block diagram

Connecting the function blocks

Other operations related to creating the FBAP block diagram

Setting block parameters

Generation of the FBAP configuration

Creating the FBAP schedule Legend Operations that are always performed Output host file set Operations performed as necessary Start and end of operation Setting for the FBAP complete Group of operations performed repeatedly
050401E.EPS

Figure Flow of Setting for the FBAP

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-114

Summary of Each Step

Calling FB Editor
Call the FB editor to created the FBAP.

Creating New or Select a FBAP Block Diagram

Create a new FBAP block diagram. To change an existing FBAP block diagram, open the FBAP block diagram to be changed.

Placing Function Blocks in the FBAP Block Diagram

Place the function blocks to be used in the FBAP in the FBAP block diagram.

Connecting the Function Blocks

Connect the arranged function blocks.

Other Operations Related to Creating the FBAP Block Diagram

Change the grid or move objects as necessary.

Setting Block Parameters

Set the parameters included in the function block, resource block and transducer block. The parameters of these blocks are set in the Parameter dialog.

Generation of the FBAP Configuration

Execute generation of the FBAP configuration, and generate the VCR value and link object parameter values. The schedule automatic creation function starts automatically and the execution timing chart, which is the basis for creating the schedule, is generated when generation is completed.

Creating a FBAP Schedule

Create an execution schedule for function block processing and for communication based on the execution timing chart generated upon completion of generation. The schedule is created in the Schedule dialog box.

Output Host File Set

Output the host file set used by the application that operates in the supervisory system (host application).

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-115

5.4.2

Calling FB Editor
Calling the FB editor to create the FBAP block diagram.

Calling FB Editor
The following procedure is used to call the FB editor. 1. 2. Open a project. This step is unnecessary if the project is already opened. Select [FB editor (D)] from the [Tool (T)] menu in the project manager. The FB editor is displayed.
a p p a

FBAP1.lay - FB Editor

FBAP Edit Options View Help

Control Cycle:

250

msec

BNU Communication Stale Count Limit:

050402E.EPS

Figure FB Editor

Exiting the FB Editor

After the FBAP has been created, exit the FB editor. Select [Exit (X)] from the [FBAP] menu in the FB editor. The FB editor closes. If there was an FBAP configuration open, it is automatically saved.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-116

5.4.3

Create a New or Open a FBAP Block Diagram

If the FBAP block diagram has not been created, create a new FBAP block diagram. To change an existing FBAP block diagram, open the FBAP block diagram to be changed.

Creating a New FBAP Block Diagram

The following procedure is used to create an FBAP block diagram. 1. Select [New (N) ...] from the [FBAP] menu in the FB editor. Or, click the [New] icon in the toolbar. The new FBAP dialog box is displayed.

New FBAP FBAP Name:

Cancel
050403E.EPS

Figure Example of New FBAP Dialog Box

2. 3.

Enter the name of the new FBAP to be created in the FBAP name box. Click the [OK] button. The new FBAP dialog box closes. The drawing area is initialized and the name of the new FBAP block diagram created is displayed in the FB editor title bar. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the dialog box and the new FBAP block diagram is not created.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-117

Opening an Existing FBAP Block Diagram

The following procedure is used to open an existing FBAP block diagram to make changes. 1. Select [Open (O) ...] from the [FBAP] menu in the FB editor. Or, click the [Open] icon in the toolbar. The open FBAP dialog box is displayed.
Open FBAP _ FBAPs FBAP1

Open _

_ Cancel
050404E.EPS

Figure Open FBAP Dialog Box

2. 3.

Select the new FBAP block diagram to be changed from the FBAP list box. Click the [Open] button. The dialog box for opening an FBAP is displayed. The name of the newly selected FBAP block diagram is displayed in the FB editor title bar. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the open FBAP dialog box and the FBAP block diagram will not be opened.

TIP
When creating a new FBAP block diagram drawing or opening a FBAP block diagram drawing while another FBAP block diagram is open on the FB editor, the opened FBAP block diagram drawing will be automatically closed. If there is un-saved modification in the FBAP block diagram drawing to be closed, a dialog box will be displayed prompt for confirmation. The FBAP block diagram drawing can be printed out. Select [Print (P) ...] from the [FBAP] menu on the FB editor while the FBAP block diagram drawing is open.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-118

Deleting the FBAP Block Diagram

An existing FBAP block diagram can be deleted when it is no longer necessary. The function blocks that were used in the deleted FBAP block diagram are released and can be used in another FBAP block diagram. The following procedure is used to delete a FBAP block diagram. 1. 2. Open the FBAP block diagram to be deleted. Select [Remove (R)] from the [FBAP] menu. The FB editor confirmation dialog box is displayed.

FB Editor Do you really want to remove this FBAP?

Yes

No
050405E.EPS

Figure Example of FB Editor Dialog Box

Click the [Yes] button. The FB editor confirmation dialog box closes and the FBAP block diagram is deleted. Clicking the [No] button closes the dialog box without deleting the FBAP block diagram.

Closing the FBAP Block Diagram

Close the FBAP block diagram when setting for the FBAP block diagram has been completed. To close the FBAP block diagram, select [Close (C)] from the [FBAP] menu in the FB editor.

Saving the FBAP Block Diagram

The FBAP block diagram can be saved during setting, so that the contents of the settings will not be lost due to an operation error. To save an FBAP block diagram during setting, select [Save (S)] from the [FBAP] menu in the FB editor. TIP
If an attempt is made to close the FBAP block diagram when the FBAP block diagram has not been saved during setting, a confirmation dialog box asking whether to save the FBAP block diagram is displayed. Clicking the [Yes] button closes the FBAP block diagram after it has been saved. Clicking the [No] button closes the FBAP block diagram without being saved. Clicking the [Cancel] button returns to the FB editor.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-119

5.4.4

Placement of Function Blocks in the FBAP Block Diagram

The function blocks for the device registered in the project database are stored in the area called the FB pool. The function blocks used in the FBAP block diagram are selected from the function blocks registered in this FB pool and placed in the FBAP block diagram. Function blocks already being used cannot be placed in another FBAP block diagram.

Placing the Function Blocks in the FBAP Block Diagram

1. Select [Insert function block (I) ...] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the FB editor. Or, click the [Insert function block ] icon in the toolbar. The FB Pool dialog box is displayed. The physical device tag name of the device is shown in the Devices in project list box and the function block default block tag name is shown in the Available function blocks list box.

TIP
The block ID is displayed in a pair of parentheses next to the block tag name.

FB Pool Devices in Project YVP_2 EJA_8 Temperature_sensor_4 YEWFLO_5 Available Function Blocks AO_800 (AO-01) DI_900 (DI-01) DI_1000 (DI-02) PID_1100 (PID-01)

Cancel
050406E.EPS

Figure FB Pool Dialog Box

Select the device to be used from the Devices in project list box. The block tag names of the function blocks included in the selected device is listed in the Available function blocks list box. Also, the word (used) is shown in the function blocks that have already been placed in another FBAP block diagram. Select the function block to be used from the Available function blocks list box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-120

Click the [OK] button. The FB Pool dialog box closes and the mouse cursor changes to a cross. Click the [Cancel] button and the FB Pool dialog box closes. Click anywhere in the drawing area.
a p p a

FBAP1.lay - FB Editor

FBAP Edit Options View Help

Control Cycle:

250

msec

BNU Communication Stale Count Limit:

Drawing area

Place the cross cursor at any position and click

050407E.EPS

Figure Deciding the Function Block Position

The Function Block Name dialog box is displayed.

Function Block Name Block Tag Name: OK DEFAULT TAG Cancel
050408E.EPS

Figure Function Block Name Dialog Box

TIP
The block ID in a pair of parentheses is not displayed next to the block tag name in the Function Block Tag Name dialog box.

The default block tag name varies depending on whether or not the block tag name has been changed in the Parameter dialog box called from the FBAP editor. The default block tag names are as follows. When the block tag name has not been changed A character string in which the function block type name and OD index are connected by an underscore (<Type Name>_<ODIndex>). When the block tag name has been changed The block tag name that was last set in the Parameter dialog box.
IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-121

To change the default block tag name, enter the block tag name in the block tag name box. The block tag name can be specified with up to 16 alphanumeric characters.

IMPORTANT
In the specifications for the fieldbus, the fieldbus device block tag name can be a maximum of 32 characters but in the CS 1000, CS 3000 or STARDOM the maximum is 16 characters (alphanumeric characters, excluding block ID). If connecting to the CS 1000, CS 3000 or STARDOM, make sure the tag name does not exceed 16 characters when setting the tag name with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. If more than 16 characters are used, an error occurs when open on CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders.

Click the [OK] button. The function block is registered and is placed in the drawing area at the position of the cross cursor. At the top of the placed function block, the block tag name is displayed and the physical device tag name is shown at the bottom. Click the [Cancel] button and the function block is not registered.
Input terminal input parameter Display block tag name

a p p a

FBAP1.lay - FB Editor

FBAP Edit Options View Help

Control Cycle:

1000

msec

BNU Communication Stale Count Limit:

AO_800 (AO_01) CasIn RcasIn

AO
YVP_2

BkcalOut Out RcasOut Output terminal Output parameter

Drawing that shows the block type

Physical device tag name of the device where this function block resides

The function block is placed

050409E.EPS

Figure Placement of Function Blocks

Repeat steps 1 to 7 as required.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-122

TIP
When the block tag name of the function block is changed, the tag name displayed in the FB editor changes. But the block tag name shown in the FB pool does not change and remains the default name. The transducer block cannot be placed in the drawing area. Connect the transducer block to a function block when using a transducer block in the FBAP. The transducer block and function block can be connected by setting the channel number for the transducer block as the Channel parameter for the AI or AO function block in the Parameter dialog box. It is necessary to select the function block when setting or changing a placed function block or deleting the function block. Click the function block to select it. When selecting multiple function blocks at the same time, drag the mouse, and enclose the function blocks to be selected, using the displayed dotted line.

SEE ALSO
See 5.4.7, Setting Block Parameters for changing the settings of placed function blocks and setting the channel parameter.

Changing the Block Tag Name for Function Blocks

The following procedure is used to change the block tag name of the function block. 1. 2. Click the function block. A small square is shown at each corner of the function block. Select [Change block tag name (T) ...] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the FB editor. Or, press the [Enter] key. The Function Block Name dialog box appears. Enter the block tag name in the block tag name box. Click the [OK] button. The Function Block Name dialog box closes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Function Block Name dialog box without changing the block tag name of the function block.

3. 4.

TIP
The Function Block Name dialog box will also open by double-clicking the function block whose block tag name is to be changed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-123

Deleting Function Block

The function block can be deleted when it is no longer necessary. The following procedure is used to delete a function block. 1. 2. Click the function block to be deleted in the drawing area. Select [Remove (R)] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the FB editor. Or, press the [Delete] key. The selected function block will disappear from the drawing area.

Invalid Function Block in FBAP

When upgrading a physical device's capability file and DD file, the function blocks in the physical device may be changed. If a function block in the physical device is deleted, its virtual function block in FBAP becomes invalid function block. An invalid function block in FBAP is shown in the figure below.
a p p a

FBAP1.lay - FB Editor

FBAP Edit Options View Help

Control Cycle:

1000

msec

BNU Communication Stale Count Limit:

Invalid Block

TO_1000-2 (TO_02) Out In ACF11-14

050410E.EPS

Figure An Invalid Function Block in FBAP

SEE ALSO
For more information about invalid function blocks, see 5.3.12 Updating Capability File and DD File.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-124

5.4.5

Connecting Function Blocks

The function blocks placed in the drawing area are linked by connections.

IMPORTANT
The function which connects the remote terminals of the fieldbus function block (RCAS_IN, RCAS_OUT, ROUT_IN, ROUT_OUT, RCAS_IN_D and RCAS_OUT_D) and the FCS function block is currently not supported. Do not use the remote terminals.

Connecting Function Blocks

Connect the function blocks displayed in the drawing area. The following procedure is used to connect the function blocks. 1. Select [Insert connection (C) ...] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the FB editor. Or, click the [Insert connection] icon in the toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to a cross. Press the left mouse button on top of the I/O terminal for the connection origin function block. Drag the cross cursor to the top of the I/O terminal for the connection destination function block with the left mouse button held down.

2. 3.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-125

Release the left mouse button. A connecting line (connection) will be inserted from the position where the left mouse button was pressed to the position where it was released. Only a straight line connecting two points can be drawn for the connection. If the function blocks cannot be connected with a single straight line, tie together multiple connections to connect the function blocks.
a p p a

FBAP2.lay - FB Editor

FBAP Edit Options View Help

Control Cycle:

1000

msec

BNU Communication Stale Count Limit:

AO_466 (AO_01) TO_1000 (TO_01) CasIn RcasIn

AO
New_valve_positioner_2

BkcalOut Out RcasOut

In ACF11-14

Click here

Drag to here and release

050411E.EPS

Figure Connecting Function Blocks

5. 6.

Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required. Click the [Pointer] icon in the toolbar or select [Pointer] from the [Edit (E)] menu. The mouse cursor returns to the arrow pointer.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-126

Registering Readback Connection Terminals

When registering the readback connection terminals, the number that following the block ID should be the same as the number of the block ID in the Out connection terminal.
Choose the same number from FB pool.
a p p a

FBAP2.lay - FB Editor

FBAP Edit Options View Help

Control Cycle:

1000

msec

BNU Communication Stale Count Limit:

AO_900-02 (AO_01) TI_1064-01 (TI_01) Out ACF11-14 New_valve_positioner_2 CasIn RcasIn TO_1000-01 (TO_01)

BkcalOut Out RcasOut

In ACF11-14

050432E.EPS

Figure Registering Readback Connection Terminals

IMPORTANT
It is necessary to register the readback connection terminal for STARDOM since the controller builder cannot configure the connection to the fieldbus function blocks.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-127

Assigning Internal Parameters to Connection Terminals

For connecting internal parameters to host interface devices, the parameters need to be assigned to the connection terminals. 1. On FB Editor window, choose [Contained Parameter Connection] from [Edit] menu. The dialog box for assigning the parameters to connection terminals is shown as follows.

Contained Parameter Connection Num Of Mansetting

No 44 45 46 47 48 Block Tag Name FI1001 AI_600-02

5
Parameter PV ST_REV STRATEGY PV Label

AO_900-03

FI1001

Print File

Cancel
050433E.EPS

Figure Dialog Box for Assigning Internal Parameters

Manually input the number of channels for parameters. The specified number of continuous channels are reserved for the input terminals. The detailed connection data can also be manually set for these input terminals. If the number of channels is set to zero, the parameters cannot be manually set. The connection data consist of Block Tag Name, Parameter and Label. Choose the block tag name in the project by selecting from the block tag name combo box.

TIP
The block tag name cannot be selected if a block is not defined with a tag name.

4. TIP

Choose a parameter name by selecting from the parameter combo box.

The parameters in the parameter combo box are the parameters of the block selected from the block tag name combo box. If no block is selected, the parameters cannot be selected either.

5. 6.

Enter label name. Click [OK]. The entered data are saved and the dialog box for assigning the parameters closes.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-128

After designating the number of channels on the dialog box for assigning parameters, (manual) is displayed next to each assigned function block on the [Available Function Blocks] list box in [FB Pool] dialog box. The number of connection terminals includes both the TI and TO blocks and they all displayed with (manual).
FB Pool Project Device ACF11-14 EJA_02 YVP-03 Available Function Blocks TO_1084 (TO_43) TO_1086 (TO_44) (manual) TO_1088 (TO_45) (manual) TO_1090 (TO_46) (manual) TO_1092 (TO_47) (manual) TO_1094 (TO_48) (manual) TI_1096 (TI_01) TI_1098 (TI_02) TI_1100 (TI_03) TI_1102 (TI_04)

Cancel
050434E.EPS

Figure Dialog Box Displaying the Number of Manually Assigned Parameters

TIP
The connection terminals displayed together with (manual) cannot be selected. It has the same meaning as (used).

When printing the defined contents on the contained parameter connection dialog box, it is necessary to export the contents to a text file (CSV file), and then use a general-purpose text editor to print out the text file. 1. 2. Click [Print File] button on the contained parameter connection dialog box, a dialog box for saving the file with a designated name displays. Designate a name for the file on this dialog box. The contents are saved into the text file (CSV file) and the file is located in the folder LPR under the root folder of the project. By default, the file name is IOPARAM.CSV. Both the folder name and the file name can be modified. Save the file after the file name and folder name are confirmed. Use a general-purpose text editor to open the text file. Run print on the editor to print out the text file. The print layout of the file is as follows.

3. 4.

Num of Mansetting No Block Tag Name 1 OFC_25000-11 2 AO_5000-11 ... 48 TB_200-7

Parameter FLOW_OUT RCAS_IN PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE

Label TO_1000-2 TI_1100-2

050435E.EPS

Figure Print Layout

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-129

5.4.6

Other Operations Related to Creating the FBAP Block Diagram

The other functions that can be performed in the FB editor are explained below. The other functions include changing the grid and moving an object.

Changing Grid Setting

Grid Settings

The type and spacing of the grid in the drawing area can be set. The following procedure is used to set the grid. 1. Select [Grid (G) ...] from the [Option (O)] menu in the FB editor. The Grid Settings dialog box is displayed.

Grid Settings Display Grid Setting Dots Lines Spacing: 15

050412E.EPS

OK Cancel Default

Figure Grid Settings Dialog Box

2. 3. 4. 5.

Clicking the Display grid check box switches whether to display the grid or not. Select the grid type using the Setting radio button. Either points or lines can be selected. Enter the grid spacing in the Spacing box. Click the [OK] button. The Grid Settings dialog box closes and the changes in the grid settings will be reflected in the drawing area. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Grid Settings dialog box without changing the grid settings.

TIP
The object display size changes when the grid spacing is changed. The wider the spacing, the larger the display and the narrower the spacing, the smaller the display. The grid settings can be returned to the default settings by clicking the [Default] button in the Grid Settings dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-130

Moving an Object
The position of the object in the drawing area can be changed. The following procedure is used to move the object. 1. 2. 3. Press the left mouse button on top of the object to be moved. Drag the mouse cursor, with the left mouse button held down, to where the object will be moved. Release the left mouse button. The object will move to the place where the left mouse button was released.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-131

5.4.7

Setting Block Parameters

Parameters included in the function block, resource block, and transducer block are set in the Parameter dialog box.

Setting Block Parameters

All Parameters

The following procedure is used to set the function block, resource block, and transducer block parameters. 1. 2. When setting parameters for a function block, click on the target function block in the drawing area of the FB editor. Select [All Parameters (A)] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the FB editor. The Parameter dialog box appears. When a function block has been selected in the drawing area of the FB editor, the parameters for the selected function block are expanded on the screen.

Parameter Dialog Devices in Project List EXAMPLE + EJA100A-2 Valve_Positioner-3 Valve_Positioner-3(RES AO_800(AO) DI_900(DI) (DI) PID_1100(PID) Link object Link object Link object Link object Link object Link object Link object Link object Link object Link object Link object

Parameter PeriodOfExecution NextBlockToExecute StRev TagDesc Strategy AlertKey ModeBlk ModeBlk ModeBlk ModeBlk PvScale PvScale PvScale PvScale OutScale OutScale OutScale OutScale GrantDeny OK

Element

TARGET ACTUAL PERMITTED NORMAL EU_100 EU_0 UNITS_INDEX DECIMAL EU_100 EU_0 UNITS_INDEX DECIMAL GRANT

Type Range Unsigned3 Unsigned1 Unsigned1 0x20202020202020202020 OctetStrin Unsigned1 0 Unsigned8 0~255 1 BitString O/S BitString O/S BitString Cas+Auto+Man+O/S BitString Auto FloatingPo 100 FloatingPo 0 Unsigned1 % Integer8 0 FloatingPo 100 FloatingPo 0 Unsigned1 % Integer8 0 BitString
Value 32000 0

Cancel

Print File
050413E.EPS

Figure

Parameter Dialog Box

Project, Device, Block or link object and Element are expanded as a hierarchical structure in the Devices in Project list.
Table Contents Displayed in the Devices in Project List

Display target Project Device Block Link object Element

Window display Project name Physical device tag name Block tag name. Block type Link object Element name (number)

Remarks

This is displayed when the link object is comprised of multiple elements.

050414E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-132

To change the block tag name, click on the block tag name in the Devices in Project list. This enables editing of the block tag name being displayed. Enter the new block tag name.

TIP
When a block tag name has been deleted, only the block type will be displayed in the Devices in Project list. Note that block tag names cannot be deleted for function blocks that are being used in the FBAP configuration.

Select the block or link object to be edited in the Devices in Project list. A list of the parameters and elements that can be edited will be displayed in the list view on the right side of the screen. To see the description of a parameter or element, click on the applicable parameter or element in list view with the right mouse button. From the pop-up menu that appears, select Parameter description... A description dialog box appears.

Description Name Unit: % | (Space) | -> OUT(Engineering Unit) This parameter describes the state of the block mode. OK
050415E.EPS

Figure

Description Dialog Box

The parameter name or element name, engineering unit and description (English) will be displayed in the description dialog box. If there is no DD file, the description dialog box will not be displayed. 6. Enter the parameter value in the Value box using one of the following operations. Enter directly in the input area using the keyboard. Select a keyword as the value to be set from the keyword list which is displayed by clicking on the arrow button besides the input area. 7. Click the OK button. The Parameter dialog box closes and the setting is saved in the project database. Clicking on the Cancel button closes the Parameter dialog box without changing the block parameters. TIP
Parameters displayed in gray and the parameters (element) prohibited for changing can not be rewritten. Parameters for link objects are automatically created during generation. Do not change these parameters. Note that the value of StaleCountLimit can be changed. Switching between display and hide of the transducer block can be done in the Environment Settings dialog box. The settings of the selected block or link object can be saved as a text file for printing. When clicking on the Print file button in the Parameter dialog box, a dialog box for opening a file appears. In this dialog box, enter the name of the file to be saved.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-133

The appearance and operation of the Parameter dialog box called from the FB editor is the same as for the Parameter dialog box called from the network editor. However, the parameter groups that can be selected will differ. The following parameter groups can be selected in the Parameter dialog box called from the FB editor. The default values for these block parameters can be obtained from the capabilities file. Resource Block parameters Function Block parameters Transducer Block parameters Link Object parameters

SEE ALSO
Regarding the screen for and operation of the Parameter dialog box called from the network editor, see 5.3.10, Changing Device Parameters.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-134

How to Enter Parameters

Entering a Parameter Directly Using a Numeric Value

Enter the value using the following input format. When the parameter data type is Bit String or Octet String Enter in hexadecimal. When the parameter data type is structure (DS: Data Structure) Enter in hexadecimal, delimit with comma (,). When element in the structure is Bit String type, that element is entered in the same way as with Bit String. Example of entry is given below. Example: Bit String: IoOpts=0x1010 Data Structure: ModeBlk=0x80,0x80,0x10,0x10 AlarmSum=0x8010,0x8010,0x8010,0x8010

Entering a Parameter Directly Using a Keyword

When entering a keyword, use the same input format that is used when entering a numeric value. The elements of keyword are connected using the + symbol if the parameter is a structure including connection type elements, connection type BitString or OctetString. Example of entry is given below. Example ModeBlk=AUTO,AUTO,MAN,O/S ModeBlk=AUTO,AUTO,AUTO+MAN+O/S,O/S IoOpts=INVERT+FSTATE

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-135

Fieldbus Block Mode

As with the FCS function block, there is a MODE parameter in the fieldbus block that determines the block execution mode. It is necessary to set the fieldbus block mode (MODE parameter value) correctly when connecting between fieldbus blocks, or between a fieldbus block and an FCS function block. The fieldbus block is operated by the mode that was set. Use the recommended values given in the table below for the fieldbus block mode (Target) when connecting the FCS function block and fieldbus block in cascade style. If anything other than this mode is used, the cascade connection with the FCS connection block will not function normally. If not doing a cascade connection, the recommended fieldbus block mode is AUTO. When using a cascade connection and if the fieldbus block mode is anything other than the established value, then the data status for the fieldbus block becomes Good - Not Invited. In such a case, the FCS function block mode becomes IMAN.
Table Fieldbus Block Mode
Fieldbus Block AI DI PID AO DO RA CS OS SC IT IS MDI MDO MAI MAO
*1: *2:

Recommended mode AUTO AUTO CAS (*1) CAS (*1) CAS (*1) MAN MAN AUTO AUTO MAN MAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

Valid mode O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS, ROUT O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS O/S, (MAN), AUTO (*2) O/S, (MAN), AUTO (*2) O/S, MAN, AUTO, CAS O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, AUTO O/S, MAN, AUTO O/S, AUTO
050416E.EPS

AUTO is recommended when not in cascade loop. The parenthesized mode is optional.

TIP
When the parameter of MODE_BLK is Target, Permitted or Normal, if setting the mode to CAS corresponds to each parameter, it becomes to Auto first then becomes to CAS mode. When releasing from CAS mode, it returns to Auto mode. Nevertheless, it is possible to set to Auto mode and release from Auto mode.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-136

IMPORTANT
The fieldbus block mode cannot be changed using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. However, by entering a value in the Parameter dialog box and then downloading that value, the initial value for the mode can be set. The value can be entered as a keyword as in the case of AUTO, or in hexadecimal bit string format. An example of mode entry is shown as follows.
Table An Example of Mode Entry
Parameter ModeBlk ModeBlk ModeBlk ModeBlk Element Target Actual Permitted Normal Entry Auto Auto Auto Auto
050417E.EPS

If the mode contains multiple elements, the elements can be entered as follows. ModelBlk=Target,Actual,Permitted,Normal Mode Parameter (DS69) 1. 2. 3. 4. Target (bit string) Actual (bit string) Permitted (bit string) Normal (bit string)

Table Hexadecimal Expression when Setting the Mode

(Multiple Denied) Target/Normal ROUT RCAS CAS AUTO MAN LO IMAN O/S Keywords ROUT,AUTO ROUT,AUTO CAS,AUTO AUTO MAN LO IMAN O/S Hex 0x90 0x50 0x30 0x10 0x08 0x04 0x02 0x01 (Multiple Permitted) Permitted ROUT RCAS CAS AUTO MAN LO IMAN O/S Keywords ROUT RCAS CAS AUTO MAN LO IMAN O/S Hex 0x80 0x40 0x20 0x10 0x08 0x04 0x02 0x01
050418E.EPS

Example)

ModeBlk=0x10,0x10,0x10,0x10 Or ModeBlk=Auto,Auto,Auto,Auto

Also, this input format is the same as for the capabilities file and object file.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-137

5.4.8

Generation of the FBAP Configuration

It is necessary to generate the FBAP configuration in order to download the FBAP configuration to the device. The FBAP block diagram is checked when the FBAP configuration is generated. If there are no errors in the FBAP block diagram, the VCR value and link object parameter value is generated. A consistency check is automatically performed with respect to the generated values and if no errors are discovered, the generated values are saved in the project database. Further more, the host file set generation will be started, the configuration will be output from the project database to host file set. Also, if generation is successful, the schedule automatic creation function is started and the execution timing chart required to create the schedule is generated.

Setting the Control Cycle and BNU Communication Stale Count Limit
Control Cycle, BNU Communication Stale Count Limit

The control cycle and the BNU communication stale count limit for the opened FBAP block diagram can be set. BNU communication is used for the communication between fieldbus devices and between a fieldbus device and ACF11 module. Control Cycle Time period of the control cycle for all control loops in the opened FBAP block diagram drawing. BNU Communication Stale Count Limit When the count of unhealthy transmissions detected on the fieldbus exceeds this limit, BNU communication will be in abnormal status. The settings for Control Cycle and for BNU Communication Stale Count Limit can be entered from keyboard directly. The value entered will be effective after pushing <Enter> key. These settings are required for the generation of the FBAP configuration. When the settings are modified, the [Generation] needs to be performed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-138

Generating FBAP Configuration

Generation

Generation of the FBAP configuration is done with the FBAP block diagram open. The following procedure is used to generate the FBAP configuration. 1. Select [Generation (G)] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the FB editor. Or, click the [Generation] icon in the toolbar. A dialog box for confirmation pops out. Click [OK] to continue for generation. A dialog box showing generation progress displays. When generation completes successfully, the automatic scheduler creator would start and the Time Chart for the scheduler would be created. The dialog box for Generation Successful message is shown as follows.
FB Editor Generation successful. OK
050419E.EPS

Figure FB Editor Generation Successful Dialog Box

If generation fails due to a mistake in the configuration data setting or other reason, a dialog box indicating the error will appear. 3. Click [OK] button. The dialog box closes.

TIP
The only check performed prior to the generation of the VCR value and link object parameter value is a check for the accuracy of the connections in the FBAP block diagram. After the VCR value and link object parameter value are generated, a consistency check with respect to the generated values is performed. If generation fails, revise the configuration data in accordance with the contents displayed in the dialog box indicating an error and then perform generation again. If the generation status is a fail, startup cannot be performed (a message is output).

IMPORTANT
Unless the generation is completed normally, the host file set generation function, export function, download function and schedule creation function cannot be executed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-139

All FBAP Generation

Generate All

All FBAP created on FB editor can be generated together. Click [Generate All] on [Edit] menu, or click [Generate All] icon may start to generate all FBAP configuration.

050420E.EPS

Figure Generate All Icon

Moreover, All FBAP generation can be performed only when the FBAP configuration drawing is not opened.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-140

5.4.9

Creating FBAP Schedule

Create the FBAP schedule. To efficiently perform the FBAP processes, it is necessary to create a schedule that defines the execution order of the function block processes and the execution order of the communication between the function blocks. Also, the Schedule dialog box is used to create the schedule.

Creating a Schedule
Scheduling

Use the Schedule dialog box to create the schedule. In the Schedule dialog box, the schedule is created using the following procedures. Create a new execution timing chart Normally, the creation of a new execution timing chart is automatically performed with the schedule automatic creation function in the FB editor after the FBAP configuration is generated. However, if changing the version number of the schedule, the macrocycle, time resolution, and safety factor, then a new execution timing chart is created using the Schedule dialog box. Revising the execution timing chart The detail for the newly created execution timing chart is revised using the Schedule dialog box. Printing the execution timing chart If necessary, the execution timing chart can be printed. Generating and saving the schedule The schedule is generated based on the revised execution timing chart. Also, data for the generated schedule is saved in the project database. TIP
As the result of creating the execution timing chart, a warning is displayed when the FBAP control cycle exceeds the macrocycle. A warning is displayed when the lowest common multiple of the control cycle for each FBAP does not match the macrocycle.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-141

Creating a New Execution Timing Chart

Open the Schedule dialog box and create a chart indicating the execution timing for the function blocks (FB execution timing chart) and a chart indicating the execution timing for communication (communication execution timing chart). Use the following procedure to create the execution timing charts. 1. Select [Schedule/display] from the [Edit (E)] in the FB editor. Or, click the schedule creation icon in the toolbar. The Schedule dialog box is displayed.

Schedule Show Schedule Auto Schedule VersionNumber: 2 Re-Schedule MacrocycleDuration: 100 1000 msec % Undo TimeResolution: 20 msec SafetyFactor: 0 %

User Entry msec 1000

0 TI1001-AI.Out VP1001-PID VP1001-PID.BkcalOut ACF11-14-OUT-1 VP1001-AO FBAP1 AI_400 AI_400.Out TERMi_1064 TERMi_1064.Out PID_400

200

400

600

800

Help

Cancel

Communication bar

Block bar
050421E.EPS

Figure Schedule Display Dialog Box

In the Schedule dialog box, all FBAP schedules are displayed in the range for 1 cycle of the macrocycle. However, only the first cycle of each FBAP sub-schedule is available for revision. From the second cycle on, the contents of the first cycle are displayed repeatedly.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-142

Click the [Modify] button when changing the default values for the version number, macrocycle (*1), time resolution, or the safety factor. The Modify Defaults dialog box is displayed.
Macro-cycle can be changed in the [Modify Defaults...] dialog box on the FB editor. It can not be changed in the [Modify Defaults...] dialog box opened from the schedule dialog box

*1:

Schedule Modify Defaults VersionNumber: MacrocycleDuration: TimeResolution: SafetyFactor: 2 1000 20 0 msec msec %

Cancel

050422E.EPS

Figure Modify Defaults Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-143

Enter the version number, macrocycle, time resolution, or the safety factor. For the safety factor, normally the default value is used as is. For the other setting items as well, it usually does not matter if the default values are left as is. The setting items in the Modify Details dialog box are indicated below.

Version: This is the schedule version name. Macrocycle Duration: This is the control macrocycle (msec). Set this so that this is the lowest common multiple of each FBAP control cycle. Time Resolution: This is the time resolution for the schedule (msec). When creating the schedule, multiples of the time resolution can be used as reference value for calculating start time. Safety Factor: This is the factor (%) indicating the percentage added to the communication time in order to guarantee function block execution. For example, if the safety factor is set at 10%, then the communication time will be calculated as 1.1 times. The default is 0%. After the settings in the Modify Defaults dialog box are complete, always click the [OK] button. The consistency check of the input values (range check and type check) is executed. After that, rescheduling is automatically performed and the input values are written to the database. The Modify Defaults dialog box closes and the setpoint values will be reflected in the Schedule dialog box. Also, the erase the changes to the default values, click the [Undo] button. The values return to the setpoint values before they were changed. 4. Click the [New schedule] button. Using the input default values and based on the entire FBAP configuration, the execution timing chart is generated. The execution timing chart that has been created is displayed in the Schedule dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-144

Revising the Execution Timing Chart

The execution timing chart can be revised if necessary. If rescheduling is performed after dragging and moving the block bar or communication bar, the execution timing chart reflecting the revisions is created. Use the following procedure to revise the execution timing chart. 1. Drag and move the block bar or communication bar. The position of the bar is adjusted to match the grid specified by the time resolution. The bar display status will be shaded (cancel fixed.) Also, the terminals cannot be moved. Cancel the fixed status of the bar if necessary. Click above the bar with the right mouse button and select [Cancel fixed] from the menu that appears. When the bar is in cancel fixed status, revisions can be made using rescheduling. Click [Reschedule]. If rescheduling is performed, the execution timing chart reflecting the revisions will be created. The bar that was moved in step 1 changes to a pinned display (fixed status), and it falls outside the target for revisions using rescheduling. Also, to cancel rescheduling execution, click the [Undo] button. Execution can be canceled only once. Display the bar status if necessary. Click above the bar with the right mouse button and select [Property] from the menu that appears. The bar property dialog box is displayed.
VP1001-PID.BkcalOut's property VP1001-PID.BkcalOut's property Start Time Execution Time 140 35 msec msec

OK
050423E.EPS

Figure Property Dialog Box

Repeat steps 1 to 4 as necessary.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-145

Printing the Execution Timing Chart

The execution timing chart can be printed. Click the [Print] button to execute printing. The standard print dialog box for Windows will appear. Printing can be executed from this dialog box. An example of a printed execution timing chart is given below. The printing is divided into a header section and a Gantt chart. The header section prints on every page.
P1 Schedule results Project Name: Project 1 Time Resolution: 10 (msec) Safety Factor: 10(%) Header section

Version: 1 Macrocycle Duration: 1000 (msec)

20 TI1001 TI1001.OUT FIC1001 FIC1001.OUT TERM1

100

(msec)

Gantt chart section

050424E.EPS

Figure Printed Execution Timing Chart

Generating and Saving a Schedule

After a new execution timing chart is created or one is revised, the schedule is generated and saved. To generate and save a schedule, click the [OK] button in the Schedule dialog box. Based on the execution timing chart, the FB schedule, LAS schedule, communication schedule, some of the block parameter values and some of the network parameter values are automatically generated. The data thus generated is saved to the project database. At the same time, the Schedule dialog box closes. To exit without generating and saving the schedule, click the [Cancel] button. The Schedule dialog box closes without generating or saving the schedule.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-146

Button Operation Availability in the Schedule Display Dialog Box

During or after the execution of an operation, there are buttons that can be operated and those that cannot be operated in the Schedule dialog box. The availability of button operation for each type of operation status is shown in the table below.
Table Availability of Button Operation (1/2)
Status Buttons that operate New schedule Modify defaults Print (when there is an existing schedule Cancel Help Buttons that do not operate Undo OK Reschedule Right button

Initial status (when opening)

Property

While creating a new schedule (New schedule button is depressed) Undo Ok Modify defaults Print Cancel Help New schedule Reschedule Cancel Help

All

After creating new schedule

New schedule Reschedule

Property

Areas of manual revisions (after moving elements) During rescheduling (Reschedule button depressed)

Undo OK Print Modify defaults All

Erase Property

After rescheduling

Undo OK Print Cancel Help Modify defaults Undo OK Modify defaults Print Cancel Help

New schedule Reschedule

Cancel fixed Property

After changing default values (rescheduling automatically performed)

New schedule Reschedule

Cancel fixed (when there are manual revisions) Property

050425E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<Toc> <Ind> Table Availability of Button Operation (2/2)

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-147

Status

Buttons that operate

Buttons that do not operate

Right button

New schedule OK Modify defaults After executing undo Print Cancel Help New schedule Reschedule Modify defaults Cancel Cancel New scheduleOK OK Modify defaults Print Cancel Help

Undo Reschedule

Fixed cancel (when there are manual revisions) Property

After cancel fixed

Undo OK Print

Erase Property

After erasing

Undo Reschedule

Property Cancel fixed (when fixed)

050426E.EPS

Revising an Existing Schedule

A schedule created in the Schedule dialog box and stored in the project database, can be revised from the scheduler display dialog box, or on the FB Schedule dialog box or the Communication Schedule dialog box called out form the device editor.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-148

Revising a Function Block Execution Schedule

FB Schedule

Use the following procedure to revise a function block execution schedule. 1. 2. 3. Select [Device editor (D)] from the [Tool (T)] menu in the project manager. Select the device for which the function block execution schedule is to be changed from the Devices inside project list box. Select [FB schedule (F) ...] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the device editor. The FB Schedule dialog box opens.
FB Schedule PDTag: New_valve_positioner_2 Schedule Parameters VFD Reference: Start Time Offset: (1/32msec) 2 4480 Modify Close
050427E.EPS

Scheduled Function Blocks AO_466 PID_400

Figure FB Schedule Dialog Box

4. 5.

Select the function block for which the execution start time is changed from the Scheduled function block list box. Click the [Modify] button. The Modify FB Schedule dialog box is displayed.
FB Schedule Modify

Start Time Offset: OK

64 Cancel
050428E.EPS

Figure Modify FB Schedule Dialog Box

6. 7.

Enter the function block execution start time in the Start time offset box. Click the [OK] button. The function block execution start time is changed and the Modify FB Schedule dialog box closes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Modify FB Schedule dialog box without changing the function block execution. Repeat steps 2 to 7 as necessary.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-149

Revising a Communication Execution Schedule

Communication Schedule

Use the following procedure to revise a communication execution schedule. 1. 2. 3. Select [Device editor (D)] from the [Tool (T)] menu in the project manager. Select the device for which the communication execution schedule is to be changed from the Devices inside project list box. Select [Communication schedule (F) ...] from the [Edit (E)] menu in the device editor. The Communication Schedule dialog box opens.

Communication Schedule PDTag: ACF11_1 Schedule Parameter Connection End Point: Time Offset: (1/32msec) 0xf622 1280 Modify Close
050429E.EPS

Scheduled Function Block Outputs AI_400.Out PID_400.BkcalOut TERMI_1064.Out

Figure Communication Schedule Dialog Box

4. 5.

Select the communication item for which the execution start time will be changed from the Scheduled function block outputs list box. Click the [Modify] button. The modify Communication Schedule dialog box is displayed.
Communication Schedule Modify

Connection End Point: Time Offset: OK

0x1822 704 Cancel

050430E.EPS

Figure Modify Communication Schedule Dialog Box

6. 7.

Enter the communication execution start time in the Time offset box. Click the [OK] button. The communication execution start time is changed and the modify Communication Schedule dialog box closes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the modify Communication Schedule dialog box without changing the function block execution time. Repeat steps 2 to 7 as necessary.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-150

5.4.10 Output Host File Set

Output the host file set that the application operating in the supervisory system (host application) uses.

Outputting the Host File Set

Use the following procedure to output a host file set. 1. Select [Generate host file set (G) ...] from the [Project (P)] menu in the project manager. The Host File Generation dialog box is displayed.

Host File Generation Option Host Files Standard Block Parameter List Data Type Reserved Word View Information OK Cancel

050431E.EPS

Figure Host File Generation Dialog Box

2. 3.

The default setting on the host file generation dialog box is that all option boxes are checked. Only the un-required options need to be removed for the host file. Click the [OK] button. The host file set is output to the Hfs directory in the project directory and the Host File Generation dialog box closes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Host File Generation dialog box without outputting the host file set.

IMPORTANT
Do not change the file name and folder configuration of the host file set that was output. If the file name or folder configuration is changed, the configuration data cannot be imported by the system builders. When importing the host file set to the CS 1000, CS 3000 or STARDOM, select all options.

SEE ALSO
For details on the Hfs directory, see 5.1.11, Directory Structure for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. For details on the information output as the host file set, see 5.1.6, Project Manager.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-151

5.5

Project Startup
After the settings related to the project are completed, perform project startup. This section explains project startup.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-152

5.5.1

Project Startup Procedure

In project startup, preparation for downloading and downloading of the project configuration data to the device is performed.

What is Project Startup?

In project startup, the project configuration data that was set is downloaded to the device. By downloading, operation of the device begins.

Work Performed Prior to Installing the Device

To perform project startup, the following work must be completed prior to installing the ACF11 or the fieldbus device.

Work Performed Before Installing the ACF11 to the IOM Nest

Before installing the ACF11 to the IOM nest, use the worksheet given in this manual, ACF11 device ID management table, and register the device ID for the ACF11. When downloading from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool to the ACF11, set the physical device tag name and device ID for the ACF11, which is the download target in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Refer to the ACF11 device ID management table to set the device ID when performing this procedure. SEE ALSO
Regarding the worksheet, see chapter 2, Fieldbus Communication Module. On how to set the device ID in the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, see 5.5.3, Changing a Registered Device ID.

Work Performed Before Installing Fieldbus Device

Before connecting the fieldbus, set the following values in the fieldbus device. If the values are not set, or if the values set for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is different from those set for the actual device, the ACF11 cannot recognize the device in the fieldbus and downloading and other communication cannot be performed. Physical device tag name in the fieldbus Node address in the fieldbus SEE ALSO
The tag names and node addresses for physical devices need to be defined using Device Tool in the slave PC. For more information about Device Tool, see 7.4 Using Device Tool. The tag names and node addresses of physical devices can also be defined using Fieldbus Engineering Tool. For more information, see section Changing Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address. in chapter 5.5.5 Executing Project Startup.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-153

Flow of Project Startup

The workflow for project startup is shown below.
Begin project startup

Set the control bus (*1)

Open or import project

Change registered device IDs

Set the advanced LM

Execute project startup

Project backup

Legend Operations that are always performed Operations performed as necessary

End project startup

Start and end of operation

050501E.EPS

*1:

This setting is unnecessary for a slave PC.

Figure Flow of Project Startup

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-154

Summary of Each Step

Setting the Control Bus
If setting related to the control bus were not performed at the time of installation, then the control bus related settings are performed at this point. This setting is unnecessary for a slave PC. SEE ALSO
For details on settings related to the control bus, see 5.2.4, Configuring Control Bus.

Opening or Importing a Project

To download the project, open the project created. Also, if a project that was backed up as described later on is downloaded again, import the configuration data.

5-157

5.5.4

Advanced LM Settings
Setting the advanced LM (Linkmaster) refers to specifying the Ap clock sync interval, time publisher device and the preferred LM device. If more than one device of the linkmaster class has been set in a single project, the one that has priority is determined by this setpoint value.

Setting the Time Publisher Device and Linkmaster Device

Use the following procedure to do the advanced linkmaster settings. 1. Select [Advanced LM setting (P) ...] from the [Network (N)] menu in the project manager. A message dialog box will appear and the progress of downloading is displayed in the dialog box.
Advanced LM Settings WARNING!!! The Information below is important for correct download. It should only be changed by an advanced User of the FF Engineering Tool. ApClockSyncInterval(sec): Time Publisher Device: Preferred LM Device: 20 0x14 0x14

Cancel
050502E.EPS

Figure Advanced LM Settings Dialog Box

2. 3. 4. 5.

Enter the time interval at which time synchronization is performed in the Ap clock sync interval (seconds) box. Enter the node address of the device to be set as the time publisher device in the Time publisher device box. Enter the node address of the device to be set as the preferred LM device in the Preferred LM device box. Click the [OK] button. The Advanced LM Settings dialog box closes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Advanced LM Settings dialog box without setting the advanced LM.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-158

5.5.5

Executing Project Startup

Project startup refers to downloading the configuration data for all devices in the project and starting control using the devices. Prior to startup, it is necessary to perform the tag assignment, address assignment, device class setting and pre-download operations. TIP
In a case, such as, downloading imported configuration data where the consistency checks in conjunction with the input or generation of configuration data have not been performed, the consistency check is done prior to downloading. If an error occurs during the consistency check, downloading is not performed.

IMPORTANT
Confirm that the physical device tag name, node address and device class are set. If the physical device tag name, node address and device class are not set, an error will occur when downloading. Also, set the physical device tag name, and node address before installing a device in each field.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-159

Performing Pre-Downloading Operation

Pre-download operations must be performed to safely execute download for a system currently running. Pre-download operation refers to changing the AO block parameters for the fieldbus device to be downloaded prior to downloading.

IMPORTANT
Always perform the pre-download operation in order to download safely. Since the AO block OUT parameter is not the one that is downloaded, the value for this parameter remains the same before and after downloading. The value for the OUT parameter prior to download is retained during download. If pre-download operation is not performed, there is a risk that the control loop including the fieldbus device targeted for downloading will perform unexpected operations during download or after download is completed. For example, if the fieldbus device targeted for downloading is the valve that controls fuel supply, the valve may remain opened during download.

Perform procedures 1 to 3 indicated below with respect to the AO block as the pre-download operation. Also, when the current mode of the AO block is CAS, and if the same setting as indicated in procedure 2 below can be performed by changing the output value of the upper block connected to the AO block (FCS function block, etc.), then procedure 2 can be omitted. 1. Set the AO block mode to MAN To change the AO block output value, the mode must be changed to MAN. This operation is performed with the operation and monitoring function or the Device Management Tool. If it is performed with the operation and monitoring function, then the parameters required for the operation (MODE, OUT) should be assigned in the faceplate block beforehand. Set the AO block OUT value on the safe side Set the AO block OUT value on the safe side. For example, assume there is a fieldbus device that controls how much the valve opens and that setting the OUT value of the AO block for that device to 0 is the specification for the valve to close. Further, assume that in the control loop that contains this fieldbus device, the valve closed state is the safe status. In this example, the OUT value for the AO block is set to 0.

IMPORTANT
Take note that setting the OUT value for the AO block to 0 does not necessarily mean it is the safe side. The safe side setting differs according to the specifications of the fieldbus device and design of the control loop. Perform the pre-download operation after first confirming which setting is the safe side.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-160

Set the mode for the upper block connected to the AO block (for example, the FCS function block) to MAN. By setting the upper block mode to MAN, the upper block restarts output after tracking the actual output value of the AO block so that the AO block output value does not change from the initial status (value of the safe side set in procedure 2). If the upper block is the fieldbus block, parameters required by the operation (MODE, OUT) need to be assigned to the faceplate block beforehand and changed with the operation and monitoring function or the Device Management Tool.

IMPORTANT
Always set the upper block mode to MAN. After download is complete, the fieldbus block starts up from the mode value that was downloaded. If the upper block mode is set to AUT and when the mode value downloaded to the AO block is CAS, then cascade control by the upper block is restarted right after download is completed. For this reason, there is a risk that the control loop including the fieldbus device may perform unexpected operations depending on the upper block output value.

Download to the ACF11 from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Even when the directory for fieldbus engineering configuration data of the engineering tool is not specified in CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders, downloading to the ACF11 can be performed from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. While when the directory is specified, downloading to the ACF11 can be performed from the system builders. Fieldbus engineering configuration data the engineering tool will be downloaded together. When downloading to the ACF11 the control bus communication function must be working normally. After downloading to the ACF11 is completed, the ACF11 module begins operating. When downloading to the ACF11 performed from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool, follow the procedures below. 1. 2. Select ACF11 as the device where downloading is performed from the Devices in project list box in the project manager. Select [Download (D)] from the [Device (D)] menu in the project manager. A dialog box will appear to indicate the downloading progress.

IMPORTANT
Do not perform any parameter change operations whatsoever with the operation and monitoring function during download. If a parameter is changed with the operation and monitoring function during download, the fieldbus device will start up according to the changed parameter after download is completed which is extremely dangerous. For example, if the AO block mode is set to MAN and OUT to 50 with the operation and monitoring function, the AO block will output 50% after download is completed. Also, parameters cannot be changed from the Device Management Tool during download.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-161

TIP
For STARDOM, it is not possible to download to NFLF111 from Fieldbus Engineering Tool but possible from Resource Configurator.

Action when the Download Is Terminated Before Completion

If the user forcibly terminates the tool or if download is terminated due to an error in the communication route, download cannot be re-executed until the time the FCS detects a timeout (approximately 60 seconds). If download is executed before a timeout is detected, an error will occur. Re-execute the download after the timeout time has elapsed. There may be an error termination with the first download request after timeout. The reason for this is that the ACF11 has detected a contradiction in the ACF11 internal status, because communication was terminated abnormally; and it is not because of a fault. In this case, continue to re-execute download. The data downloaded to the ACF11 up to the point the download was terminated is valid. If an IOM load was executed, data after this will be reflected in the ACF11 EEPROM. Thus, if download was terminated due to an error, always perform download again once the cause of the error has been removed.

Action when the Network Manager in the Fieldbus (NMgr) Is Accessing the ACF11
The network manager (Network Manager: NMgr) may access the device in the fieldbus to monitor the operating condition of the device. If the NMgr is accessing the ACF11, a download request will result in an error, since the ACF11 cannot accept any other requests. Immediately stop accessing by the NMgr while downloading.

Physical Device Tag Name and Device ID for the ACF11

When executing download, the physical device tag name set with the device editor and the actual physical device tag name for the download destination are compared, and download begins only if they match. The device ID is used for managing by the user. The following values are specified as the physical device tag name and device ID for the ACF11.
Physical device tag name: ACF11-14 Fixed Node Address (hexadecimal notation) Device ID: 5945431001:ACF11-176M201512 Fixed Manufacturing Serial No.
050503E.EPS

IMPORTANT
The ACF11 node address is fixed as 0x14 (hexadecimal). If the ACF11 is replaced because of a malfunction, it is recommended that the ACF11 device ID set with the device editor be rewritten to the device ID for the ACF11 following replacement. Also, the device ID manufacturing serial number is printed on the ACF11 circuit board.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-162

Downloading to ACF11 from CS 1000/CS 3000 Builder

Data configured on the builder need to be downloaded to ACF11. This operation is performed with the system builders. SEE ALSO
For downloading to the ACF11 from CS 1000/CS 3000 builders, see 4.2.4, Download From IOM Builder.

IMPORTANT
When Fieldbus Engineering Tool release R3.01 and CS 1000/CS 3000 release R2.05 are implemented together, when downloading from IOM builder, the following warning message will prompt. However, this does not effect the performance of the system. WARNING: Invalid Host file set of Fieldbus database directory. (Error code: 0x20246122)

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-163

Changing Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address

IMPORTANT
The physical device tag names and node addresses can be changed with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. If the physical device tag names and node addresses are not set, use the device tool in the slave PC to set them. To change the physical device tag names and node addresses, it is necessary to register the correct device ID of the device in the project for which changes are to be made. Use Display Device ID or the device tool to register the device ID obtained from the physical device.

SEE ALSO
For more information about the device tools, see chapter 7. Fieldbus Support Tools.

When changing the tag names and node addresses of physical devices, tag assignment and addresses assignment need to be done. When assigning a tag name and a node address to a H1 conformed physical device, only that device should be connected on the Fieldbus. For newly created project or an existing, the tag name assignment and addresses assignment can be done in the following procedures.

For a Newly Created Project

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Create a New Project. Assign a physical tag name and node address to ACF11, and then register them into the project. Click [Generate All] to start generation. Register the segment name on Control Bus Configuration Window. Download to ACF11 on IOM builder.

Then, tag assignment and node address assignment can be carried out.

For an Existing Project

1. 2. 3. Open the project. Set a polling address range if required. Download to ACF11 on IOM builder, one of system builders.

Then, tag assignment and node address assignment can be carried out. When tag assignment or address assignment is completed, the further tag alignment or address assignment change can be carried out only after the previous assignment is generated and downloaded.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-164

Set Polling Address Range

For address assignment, the polling address range should have been set. The procedure for setting the polling address range is shown as follows. When the dialog box for polling address range setting is displayed, the tasks for accessing the devices database will be denied. 1. Click [Polling Address Setting..] on [Option] menu in Project Manager, the dialog box for setting the polling address range will be displayed.
Polling Address Setting Automatic decision of Polling Address range Manual decision of Polling Address range Range of Polling Address 0x10 0xE8 0x23 0xFF Range of node address polled ascending order continuously Range of node address polled in descending order continuously OK Cancel
050504E.EPS

Figure Polling Address Setting Dialog Box

Clicking the option button for [Automatic decision of Polling Address Range] may allow the Project Manger set the range automatically. Clicking the option button for [Manual decision of Polling Address Range] will only allow the range to be set manually. The default option is [Manual decision of Polling Address Range]. Polling address range can be manually specified is limited with the range of 0x14 to 0xF7 in hexadecimal. A value beyond this range will generate an error message. Clicking [OK] button, the specified polling address range will be set and the dialog box will be closed.

3. 4.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-165

Tag Assignment
When physical tag name or both physical tag name and node address are changed, tag assignment is required. Tag assignment can be performed as follows. 1. Using the network editor, confirm that the physical device tag name and node address for changing have been registered in the project. If they are not registered, use the device editor or the network editor to register them. Once the registration the physical device tag name and node address is confirmed correct, choose a device in the Devices in Project list box in Project Manager. Click [Tag Assign..] on [Device] menu. The physical device tag name and node address assigning for corresponding field device will start. When it is completed, a message will pop out to notify the completion of the changes.

2. 3.

Address Assignment
When node address of a physical device is changed, address assignment is required. Address assignment can be performed as follows. 1. Using the network editor, confirm that the node address of the designated device has been registered in the project. If the node address is not registered, use the network editor to register it. Once the registration the physical device node address is confirmed correct, choose a device in the Devices in Project list box in Project Manager. Click [Address Assign] on [Device] menu. The node address assignment for corresponding field device will start. When it is completed, a message will pop out to notify the completion of the changes.

2. 3.

Setting the Device Class for Physical Devices

Device Class Setting

Download cannot be started if the device class entered with the network editor is different from the one set for the actual device in the fieldbus. In this case, it is necessary to enter the correct device class with the network editor or to set the device class entered with the network editor for the actual device. 1. 2. Choose a device for setting device class from the [Device in Project] list box of Project Manager. Choose [Device Class Setting] on [Device] menu of Project Manager.

To set the device class for the actual device, select [Set device class] from the [Edit] menu. By doing this, the device class entered using the network editor will be set for the actual device. While the setting is in progress, the progress is displayed in the message dialog box. An error will occur if the field device can not be found or can not be reached.

IMPORTANT
The device class set for the actual device will be retained even if the power to the device is cut off.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-166

If the status is as indicated below, the device class can be set for the actual device. With the HIS or master PC, set the device class after completing the following steps. Create the project (the entire process from the registration of the device to the completion of generation) Set the physical device tag name and node address for the actual device Download to the ACF11 Connect the fieldbus device to the H1 fieldbus With a slave PC, set the device class after the following steps have been completed. Create the project (from the registration of the device to the input of the node address and device class) Set the physical device tag name and node address for the actual device Connect to the H1 fieldbus of the fieldbus device

Downloading to the Fieldbus Devices

Downloading to the various fieldbus devices is executed with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. The following methods are available for executing download. Using the Download dialog box By selecting a project as the download target, the entire project can be started up. Also, download can be performed to multiple devices and blocks in the project. Using the project manager Download can be performed directly to individual devices from the project manager menu. The device begins operating when downloading is completed normally. If download is executed for all devices in the project, the device does not begin operating unless data download to all devices is completed normally. If an error occurs during downloading, the process is immediately terminated. At this time, downloaded data will be set in those devices where download was already completed normally.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-167

Calling the Download Dialog Box

Perform one of the following operations to call up the Download dialog box. Select [Download] from the [Project] menu in the project manager Start directly using an external application By doing this, the Download dialog box is displayed.
Download Device in project 1 toms EJA_4 EJA_4(RESOURCE) - 3 3 toms(AI) 3 (AI) EJA_4(RESOUR... toms(AI) (AI)

Execute Block parameter download Execute Close

050505E.EPS

Figure Download Dialog Box

The devices and blocks in the project are displayed in the Download dialog box. For the device, the physical device tag name is displayed. Also, for the block, the block tag name and block type are displayed. These tag names cannot be changed. The blocks available for display are the resource block, function block, and transducer block. However, if the check box for [Display transducer block] is marked off in the environment setting dialog box, the transducer block will not be displayed. Also, because the host interface device (ACF11) is not displayed, download to the ACF11 cannot be performed with the Download dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-168

Executing a Download
Use the following procedure to execute download. 1. Select the project, device or block. Multiple devices and blocks can be selected as the download target. Also, all of the devices in project is downloaded when a project is selected. Check [Execute block parameter download] when downloading block parameters. This is not checked in the default setting. Also, if a block was selected in step 1, this cannot be checked. Click the [Execute] button with the download target selected. The following actions differ depending on whether [Execute block parameter download] was checked.

When [Execute block parameter download] is checked The message dialog box, Did you execute block parameter upload? is displayed. If the [Yes] button is clicked in this dialog, download is executed. If the [No] button is clicked, the screen returns to the Download dialog box without executing download. When [Execute block parameter download] is not checked Download is executed. An Example of a message dialog box display is given below.
PJT1 Project Name : PJT1 1998/12/14 15:27:36 Start downloading to YW1001. 1998/12/14 15:29:18 Start downloading block parameter to YW1001. 1998/12/14 15:29:48 Start downloading block parameter to YI1001. 1998/12/14 15:30:55 End downloading to YW1001.

Stop

Save Progress bar

Detail
050506E.EPS

Figure Message Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-169

A message indicating the status of the download execution is displayed in the message dialog box. All messages are stored in a text file (download.log) under the Log directory. Also, how the execution process is proceeding can be seen in the progress bar. There are two types of messages: regular messages and detail messages. During download, only regular messages are displayed. Also, an error message is treated as a regular message. A list of the messages displayed in the message dialog box is given below.
Project Name : PJT1 1998/12/14 15:27:36 Start downloading to YW1001. ------- (*2) 1998/12/14 15:27:36 Lock FCS Segment. 1998/12/14 15:27:36 Initializing Engineering Tool. 1998/12/14 15:27:42 Getting LiveList. 1998/12/14 15:27:44 Checking Physical Device Tag. 1998/12/14 15:27:46 Connecting VCR for system. 1998/12/14 15:28:01 Read OD information. 1998/12/14 15:28:03 Initializing VCR for application. 1998/12/14 15:28:05 Downloading VCR (No.2). 1998/12/14 15:28:08 Downloading VCR (No.4). 1998/12/14 15:28:11 Downloading VCR (No.6). 1998/12/14 15:28:14 Downloading VCR (No.7). 1998/12/14 15:28:17 Downloading VCR (No.8). 1998/12/14 15:28:20 Aborting VCR. 1998/12/14 15:28:22 Connecting VCR for application. 1998/12/14 15:28:24 Change mode of resource block to O/S. 1998/12/14 15:28:26 Initializing LinkObject (No.1). 1998/12/14 15:28:28 Initializing LinkObject (No.2). 1998/12/14 15:28:30 Initializing LinkObject (No.3). 1998/12/14 15:28:32 Initializing LinkObject (No.4). 1998/12/14 15:28:34 Initializing LinkObject (No.5). 1998/12/14 15:28:36 Aborting VCR. 1998/12/14 15:28:38 Connecting VCR for system. 1998/12/14 15:28:41 Downloading VCR (No.3). 1998/12/14 15:28:43 Downloading VCR (No.5). 1998/12/14 15:28:46 Downloading SMIB. 1998/12/14 15:28:55 Initializing block schedule (No.1). 1998/12/14 15:28:58 Initializing block schedule (No.2). 1998/12/14 15:29:01 Initializing block schedule (No.3). 1998/12/14 15:29:04 Initializing block schedule (No.4). 1998/12/14 15:29:07 Downloading Macrocycle. 1998/12/14 15:29:10 Downloading block schedule (No.1). 1998/12/14 15:29:13 Aborting VCR. 1998/12/14 15:29:15 Connecting VCR for application. 1998/12/14 15:29:18 Start downloading block parameter to YW1001. ------- (*2) 1998/12/14 15:29:48 Start downloading block parameter to YI1001. 1998/12/14 15:30:47 Downloading LinkObject (No.1). 1998/12/14 15:30:49 Downloading LinkObject (No.2). 1998/12/14 15:30:51 Change mode of resource block to AUTO. 1998/12/14 15:30:53 Aborting VCR. 1998/12/14 15:30:55 Unlock FCS Segment. 1998/12/14 15:30:55 End downloading to YW1001. -------------- (*2) ----------------------xxxx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx Stop downloading to *** --------------(*2)
050507E.EPS

Note: In the area indicated by **, the actual physical device tag name or block name is displayed. *1: Normal message

Figure List of Messages Displayed in the Message Dialog Box

IMPORTANT
When downloading is aborted due to VCR initialization error, do the following to handle the error. 1. 2. Performs address assignment to the device that the error occurs. Start downloading again.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-170

To terminate the download execution, click the [Stop] button. A dialog box to confirm termination is displayed. Clicking on the [Stop] button in this dialog box terminates the download. If [Cancel] is clicked, the download is not terminated and the display returns to the Download dialog box. Also, download continues while the confirmation dialog box is being displayed.

IMPORTANT
If execution of download was terminated, operation of the device and block cannot be guaranteed. To correctly operate the device and block, it is necessary to execute download once more.

After download is completed, a detail message can be displayed. Clicking the [Detail] button displays the detail message. Also, clicking the [Detail] button once more returns to the regular message display.

Saving Messages
After download is completed, all messages generated during the download can be saved to a text file by specifying the directory and file. Use the following procedure to save messages. 1. Click the [Save] button in the Download dialog box. The dialog box for specifying the file in which the messages are to be saved is displayed. Specify the directory and file, and save them. Further, in the default setting, the Log directory is specified as the storage location.

Saving the History

History

An download history is saved when download is executed. The upload history is also saved when the upload function is called from the download function. A maximum of 255 historical information can be saved. Further, the history cannot be changed. The following types of historical information are saved. Physical device tag name Block tag name Type of loading (download or upload) Date and time (Year, month, day and time) Result (error, terminated, or completed)

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-171

History is displayed in the Download/Upload History dialog box. To call the Download/ Upload History dialog box, select [History] from the [Project] menu in the project manager.
Download/Upload History Device tag name ACF11_5 ACF11-14 EJA_4 EJA_4 EJA_4 Block tag name Download Error Normal Upload Download Date 1998/10/12 17:15 1998/10/16 12:23 Upload

AI_600 EJA_4

Update

050508E.EPS

Figure Download/Upload History Dialog Box

TIP
The following operations can be performed in the Download/Upload History dialog box. The history can be rearranged in order of date or tag name A search can be performed using the date or tag name as the keyword The Download/Upload History dialog box can be displayed while download is being executed. In this case, click the [Update] button and the historical display on the screen will be updated

Executing Download for Individual Devices Using the Project Manager

Instead of the Download dialog box, download can be performed from the individual devices using the project manager. However, when download from HIS or master PC, the control bus communication function must be working correctly. When downloading to individual devices, the devices to which download has been completed will start operating. Use the following procedure to execute download to individual devices. 1. 2. Select the device for executing download from the devices in project list box within the project manager. Select [Download (D)] from the [Device (D)] menu in the project manager. First, a consistency-check is performed. If an error occurs due to the consistencycheck, download is terminated. After the Consistency-check is completed, a confirmation dialog box prompting for block parameter download is displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-172

Click [Yes] or [No] in the confirmation dialog box.

When the [Yes] button is clicked Block parameters become the download target and a message dialog, Did you execute block parameter upload? will be displayed. If the [Yes] button is clicked, download is performed. If the [No] button is clicked, the screen returns to the project manager without performing the download. When the [No] button is clicked The block parameters do not become the download target. Download is performed. While download is being executed, a message dialog box is displayed. 4. To terminate the download, click the [Stop] button. The download will be discontinued after the communication processing during execution is completed.

Confirming the Download Completion

A confirmation dialog box indicating normal completion is displayed when download is dialog box is displayed that indicates the cause of the error and up to which device download was completed normally (or, which device did not complete download). If a fieldbus communication error occurs when downloading, download may be terminated. If a communication error occurs, a communication error dialog box is displayed. The following four items are possible causes for the communication error to occur. Connection for download cannot be established Connection for download was disconnected An error response was returned with respect to the request Response to request did not return within the specified time (60 seconds) Re-execute the download if a communication error occurs. If the download is re-executed, the download may complete normally. If an error occurs again even when download is re-executed, the segment status or the download target device needs to be examined.

Operation After Download

The fieldbus device begins operation immediately after download from the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is completed. The operation start time mode becomes the value set with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Change the mode as required. After download, change the mode from the Device Management Tool if the current mode is O/S and change it with the operation and monitoring function or Device Management Tool if the current mode is MAN. If the fieldbus device mode is O/S, the mode cannot be changed with the operation and monitoring function.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-173

5.5.6

Project Backup
After project startup has been completed, back up the project if necessary. By backing up the project, if for some reason ,such as, the project stops, the back up can be used to start the project again. There are two methods for backup, backing up the data for the entire project and backing up the data for individual devices. Project backup is done using the export function.

Backing Up the Configuration Data for the Entire Project

Use the following procedure to backup configuration data for the entire project. 1. 2. 3. Select [Export (E)] from the [Project (P)] menu in the project manager. The save-as dialog box is displayed. Enter the system configuration file name in the File name box. Click the [OK] button. The save-as dialog box is closed and the system configuration file and device object file is output to the Src directory in the project directory. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the save-as dialog box without outputting the system configuration file and device object file.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-174

Backing Up Device Configuration Data

Use the following procedure to back up device configuration data. 1. 2. 3. Select [Export (E) ...] from the [Device (D)] menu in the project manager. The Save As dialog box is displayed. Enter the device object file name in the File name box. Click [SAVE] button. The Save As dialog box is closed and the device object file name is output to the Src directory in the project directory. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the save-as dialog box without outputting the device object file.

SEE ALSO
On how to import a project that has been backed up, see 5.3.4, Importing Device Configuration Data to the Project Database. For details on the Src directory, see 5.1.11, Directory Structure for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Backing Up the Project Directory

Each project directory can be copied and backed up without using the project import function. However, because the size of the project database can be several MB, use an external memory medium, such as, an MO disk when copying each project directory.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-175

5.6

Fieldbus Engineering Tool Error Messages

If an error occurs, the Fieldbus Engineering Tool displays an error message that indicates the contents of that error. This section explains the Fieldbus Engineering Tool error messages.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-176

5.6.1

Project Manager Error Messages

The project manager error messages are listed in the table below.

General
Table Error Messages (General)
Error message <File Name> The above file name is invalid. Included invalid character. Cause 1, 2, or 25 or more characters input, or [|] input ['] (single quotation) was input Steps to take Set file name within 3 to 24 characters. Or, delete [|] Delete ['] Check whether location and conten ts of ..BIN\SYSDB directory is correct. Check whether the home path is entered in the Path section of the KAPPA.INI file, which indicates the location of executable files Restart after the other application is completed Check the path and the directory Delete the project directory manually Check the version of the ODBC driver
050601E.EPS

Unable to create new Database for the project.

Database file for new project cannot be found

Unable to open the database. <Directory> Path not found. Check that the correct path was specified. Error while deleting Project Path. Could not remove current project from ODBC list!

Database being used in another application Specified directory cannot be found Project was not completely deleted ODBC driver not installed properly

Consistency Check
If the consistency check function detects an error, an error message containing one of the following error codes is output.
Table Error Messages (Consistency Check)
Error code 0 -1 -2 -3 No error Error during range test: value is not within the valid range Value conversion error: incorrect string Value conversion error: value is not within the valid format range
050602E.EPS

Description

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-177

Security Function
Table Error Messages (Security Function)
Error message (Login Dialog Box) You don't have permission to access Engineering Tool. Invalid User name. Invalid Password. (Change Password Dialog Box) You dont have permission to access Engineering Tool. That password is invalid. Cause Logged in with a user name not registered in the database [OK] button clicked without specifying user name Entered something other than the login users password Started Change Password dialog box and performed password change procedure without entering user name Entered a string different from the current password Steps to take Login with a user name registered in the database Specify user name Enter password for the login user Specify user name Enter current password Enter standard-width characters

New password is invalid. Entered double-width characters. (Can not use double-width characters) Re-entered password did not correspond to new password.

Entered a character string different from Enter same character string as the new password new password Register only up to 200 users

(Account Registration Dialog Box) Maximum number of users that can be Registered the 201st user registered is 200. User name already registered. Invalid user name. (User Entry Dialog Box) User name is invalid. Must login as MASTER to register or delete. Do you really want to remove the user name? Could not update database. Unable to remove user name. (Project Manager) Engineering Tool now in use.

Entered a user name already registered Enter a unique user name (for example, MASTER) Entered something other than doubleEnter double-width characters, width character, alphanumeric character, - or _ alphanumeric characters, - or _ Clicked [Delete] button without specifying user name Logged in with name other than MASTER and performed registration/ deletion Login using Performed a deletion Deleted MASTER Started project manager when it is already running Use the project manager already started or delete it and then start a new one
050603E.EPS

Specify user name Login using MASTER

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-178

5.6.2

Export and Import Error Messages

The export and import error messages are listed in the table below.

Export and Import

Table Error Messages (Export and Import) (1/2)

Error message Included invalid character. <File Name> The above file name is invalid. Section or Entry Identifier not found.

Reason ' was entered. | was entered.

Solution Remove the ' . Remove the | .

The key (section or parameter) which Obtain a correct Capabilities File from should be described is sure not to exist the device vender or FF. Or examine in the Capabilities File or the Device the content of the Device Object File. Object File. The Database is damaged. The Database is either being used by another application or is damaged. The parameter name not described in the DDOD file exists in the Device Object File (DOF file). Or the importing processing was advanced by DD none though it was project which corresponded to DD. Replace the existing database with the database from the installation disk, and re-import all projects. Close the other application, or create a new project. Examine whether the block parameter name of the importing Device Object File is correct. Or the DD file is prepared then importing again.

Error while accessing the Project Database Unable to open the database

The parameter can not be interpreted exists. Please examine the content of the file under importing.

The specified file is not found: <file_name> Provide the file then execute this function again.

1. Provide the Capabilities File under a correct directory. 2. Set the stored directory of the The specified Capabilities File does not Capabilities File using the exist. Environment Setting dialog. 3. Obtain the Capabilities File from the device vender or FF. Number of characters of the block parameter value described in the Capabilities File exceeds 255. The import of the Capabilities File is continued, then input any value using the Parameter Edit dialog.

Number of characters of the block parameter value exceeds 255. Parameter name: <par_name> Continue? (This parameter value is not read) The Capabilities File with the upward compatibility exists. File name: <file_name> Improve the Resource Files revision?

If you want to improve the revision, The Capabilities File with the upward you continue it. If not, stop the import compatibility exists though the process, provide the Capabilities File Capabilities File to read when importing used in the project then execute it a project was not found. again. 1. Continue as it is. The skipped block is treated as nothing. 2. Obtain the Capabilities File from the device vender or FF. Set the directory path stored the Capabilities File using the Environment Setting dialog then execute it again. Solution
050604E.EPS

Because the block type was not The processing of this block is skipped described in the Capabilities File, the because the block type is unknown. block information was not able to be registered. (Corresponding DDOD) The directory path stored the Capabilities File is not correctly set. Error message Failed in the initialization of the DDS library because the directory path stored the Capabilities File was not correctly set. Reason

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<Toc> <Ind> Table Error Messages (Export and Import) (2/2) Error message Reason

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-179

Solution The process will continue without the parameters. The block parameters can not be displayed or set. If not to continue, importing the capabilities file will be aborted. The process will continue without the view information. Upload may fail. If not to continue, importing the capabilities file will be aborted. Obtain the DD file corresponding to the Capabilities File used from the device vender or FF.
050605E.EPS

Failed in the parameter information acquisition. (or the DD file is not found.) Fails to access the parameters from Continue? DD file. (You can not treat parameters of this block concerned.) Failed in the view information acquisition. (or the DD file is not found.) Fails to access the view information Continue? from DD file. (Upload function may fail.) The DD file corresponding to the The DD file corresponding to the selected Capabilities File does not exist. Capabilities File used does not exist. Continue without the DD file.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-180

5.6.3

Download Error Messages

The download error messages are listed in the table below.

Download
Table Error Messages (Download) Error message Internal error Fieldbus communication error (*1) Cause Database is damaged Indicates that an error has occurred in communication with the device Steps to take Generate project, restart tool and do download process again Eliminate cause of error by referring to detail information, restart tool and do download process again

FCS communication error (*2)

Indicates that an error has occurred Eliminate cause of error by referring to during communication between the detail information, restart tool and do Fieldbus Engineering Tool and the ACF11. download process again Re-input the correct device ID (shown in <Other Device ID>), then do download process again Re-input the correct physical device tag name (shown in <Other PDTag>), then do download process again

Invalid Device ID. (<Other Device ID>) Device ID in database differs from "User Error (2)" (*3) actual device ID Invalid Physical Device Tag. (<Other PDTag>) "User Error (1)" (*3) Physical device tag name in database differs from actual physical device tag name

Cant find device to download to

Check whether the device to download The fieldbus device subject to download exists on the fieldbus, then perform does not exist on fieldbus download process again The node address in the database Re-input the correct node address, differs from the actual node address for execute generation and then perform the device download process again Check whether ODRevisions for device and for capabilities file match, then do download process again When they are different, replace the device or perform engineering again using the corresponding capabilities file. Re-input the correct device class (shown in <Other Device class>), then do download process again Perform engineering again after replacing the device to download or obtaining a capabilities file that matches the device
050606E.EPS

Invalid OdRevision "User Error (3)" (*3)

VFD OdRevision in database differs from actual VFD ODRevision

Invalid Device Class. (<Other Device Class>) Device to download does not match contents of capabilities file used (<error factor>)
*1: *2: *3:

Device class in database differs from actual device class Device to download differs from contents of capabilities file

Displays contents of No. 1 to No. 3 in Table Others discussed later. Displays contents of No. 4 in Table Others discussed later. Displays contents in Table User Errors discussed later.

Detail information is added to the error messages concerning download. The detail information includes data that is useful for specifying the location of the error generated during downloading. Particularly for fieldbus communication errors, the error class and error code (class_code) specified by Foundation fieldbus are attached and using them, it is possible to pinpoint the cause of the error.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-181

Detail Information
Table Details of Error Messages (Download) (1/3) Error message Error code (0x) 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 801261 801261 Other error code 801260 801029 801261 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code Error code (0x) See 3 or 5 of "Negative acknowledgment" Establishing communication See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" path for the <physical See 4 of "Other" device tag name> (when VCR=<VFD number>) network See 5 of "Other" Acquiring physical device tag name and device ID when node address =<node address> Download initializing Details (part 1) Details (part 2) (*1) See 1 or 2 of "Negative acknowledgment" See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" See 4 of "Other" See 5 of "Other" See 1 or 2 of "Negative acknowledgment" See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" Acquiring node addresses See 4 of "Other" for all devices in the fieldbus See 5 of "Other" See 4 of "Negative acknowledgment" See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" See 4 of "Other"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error

Device subject to download does not exist. 801261 Internal error Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Invalid Physical Device Tag. (<Other PDTag>) "User Error (1)" (*2) Invalid Device ID. (<Other Device ID>) "User Error (2)" (*2) Internal error

See 5 of "Other"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Invalid OdRevision "User Error (3)" (*2) Internal error

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment" Writing <parameter name> See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" to <physical device tag name> See 4 of "Other" See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error Error message

Writing the nth (<number>) number of FB start entry when See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" VFD to the <physical device See 4 of "Other" tag name>=<VFD number> See 5 of "Other" Details (part 1) Details (part 2) (*1)
050607E.EPS

*1: *2:

For specifics of Details (part 2), see Table Negative Acknowledgment and Table Others discussed later. Displays contents in Table User Errors discussed later.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool> Table Details of Error Messages (Download) (2/3)
Error message Error code (0x) 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 801261 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code Error code (0x) Download of <parameter name> to <physical device tag name> failed Details (part 1) Details (part 2)

5-182

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

See 3, 6, 7, 8 or 9 of "Negative acknowledgment" See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" See 4 of "Other" See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment" See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" Writing LAS schedule to <physical device tag name> See 4 of "Other" See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 5 of "Negative acknowledgment" See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" Establishing communication path for <physical device tag See 4 of "Other" name> (when VCR=<VFD number>) function block See 5 of "Other"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Invalid OdRevision "User Error (3)" (*2) Internal error

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Writing the nth (<number>) number of the communication See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" path data to the <physical See 4 of "Other" device tag name> See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment"

See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Writing the function block parameter <parameter name> See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" to the <physical device See 4 of "Other" tag name> See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment" See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" See 4 of "Other" See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 5 of "Negative acknowledgment"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Writing the %dth number of the link object data when VFD to the <physical device tag name>=<VFD number>

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error Error message

Establishing communication path for the <physical device See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" tag name> (when VCR=<VFD See 4 of "Other" number> network See 5 of "Other" Details (part 1) Details (part 2)
050608E.EPS

*1: *2:

For specifics of Details (part 2), see Table Negative Acknowledgment and Table Others discussed later. Displays contents in Table User Errors discussed later.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool> Table Details of Error Messages (Download) (3/3)
Error message Error code (0x) 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code 801260 801029 Other error code
*1:

5-183

Details (part 1)

Details (part 2) See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Writing the <physical device tag name> macro cycle

See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" See 4 of "Other" See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Initializing the <physical device tag name> macro cycle

See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" See 4 of "Other" See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Changing the resource block MODE to O/S when VFD to See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" <physical device tag name> See 4 of "Other" =<VFD number> See 5 of "Other" See 3 or 6 of "Negative acknowledgment"

Fieldbus communication error FCS communication error Internal error

Restoring the resource block MODE to AUT when VFD for See 1, 2, or 3 of "Other" <physical device tag name> See 4 of "Other" =<VFD number> See 5 of "Other"
050609E.EPS

For specifics of Details (part 2), see Table Negative Acknowledgment and Table Others discussed later.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-184

Detail Information (user error)

Table User Error

No. 1 2 3

Contents
(%s) Sets the device ID acquired using SM-Identify. (%s) Sets the physical device tag name acquired using SM-Identify. Device: od_revision=%d. Engineering tool: od_revision = %d
050610E.EPS

Detail Information (negative acknowledgment)

Table Negative Acknowledgment

No. 1 2 3 4 5

Contents Negative Confirmation:: FMS-Service=0x%x, class_code=0x%x, add_detail=0x%x, add_description=%s, vfd_number=0x%x index=0x%x Negative Confirmation:: NMA-Service=0x%x, class_code=0x%x, add_detail=0x%x, add_description=%s Abort Indication:: FMS-Service=0x%.2x, local=0x%x, abort_id=0x%x, reason=0x%x, detail_length=%d, detail=%s Negative Confirmation:: SM-Service=0x%x,rc=0x%x, add_detail=0x%x Negative Confirmation:: FMS-Service=0x0, class_code=0x%x, snd_len=0x%x, rcv_len=0x%x, supported_features=0x%.2x0%.2x0x%.2x0x%.2x0x%.2x0x%.2x0x%.2x0x%.2x

6 to 9 Negative Confirmation:: FMS-Service=0x%x, class_code=0x%x, add_detail=0x%x, add_description=%s

050611E.EPS

FMS_service: FMS service code (42:OD_READ_LOC, 38:ABORT, 0:INITIATE, 5:WRITE, 61:GEN_INIT_DOWNL_SEQ, 62:GEN_DOWNL_SEG, 63:GEN_TERM_DOWNL_SEQ) NMA_service: NMA service code (36:MGMT_READ) class_code: FMS service or NMA service error code SM_service: SM service code (3:SM_IDENTIFY) rc: SM service reason code

SEE ALSO
For details on the class_code for FMS_Service and NMA_Service, see the Foundation Fieldbus specification. When the class_code for FMS_Service or NMA_Service is 0x0800, see 4.12.2, Function Block Services and Protocol found in Function Block Application Process Part 1, based on the add_detail value. Even more detailed information can be obtained from it. For details on the SM_Service rc, see the Foundation Fieldbus specification.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-185

Detail Information (Other)

Table Other

No. 1 2 3 4 5

Contents Wrong Confirmation:: comm_ref = 0x%x, layer = 0x%.2x,service = 0x%.2x, primitive = 0x%.2x Wrong Indication:: comm_ref = 0x%x, layer = 0x%.2x,service = 0x%.2x, primitive = 0x%.2x Reject receive:: comm_ref = 0x%x, layer = 0x%.2x,service = 0x%.2x, primitive = 0x%.2x EventContent = 0x%x, Event Details = 0x%x, Supplement = %s or Errcode = 0x%x Detail = 0x%x
050612E.EPS

No. 4 error occurs mainly because the ACF11 or device to download is not physically connected or because configuration of the VCS or ACF11 has not been performed correctly. The following explains the causes of typical errors and their corrective measures. EventContent=0x170306, EventDetail=0xC7BB Supplment=dReturn=0x252B The ACF11 is not installed or the power supply to the ACF11 is OFF. Install the ACF11 in the proper position. EventContent=0x170304, EventDetail=0x12 Supplment= (or EventContent=) 0x170304, EventDetail=0x12 Supplment=0x34 The HIS and ACF11 or the master PC and ACF11 are logically unconnected because of a failure in the FCS or control bus. Check the connection. EventContent=0x170306, EventDetail=0xC7AA Supplment=dReturn=C5D8 Generation for the ACF11 is not completed correctly. Because this means that engineering has not been performed, the ACF11 cannot recognize the device to download. Follow the engineering procedure to download to the ACF11. EventContent=0x170306, EventDetail=0xC793 Supplment=dReturn=0000 FCS on-demand communication resources have not been released. This situation occurs when the communication path between the HIS and FCS or between the master PC and FCS is interrupted during download or when operation of the HIS or master PC is stopped due to a power outage. The on-demand communication resources are released automatically after one minute has elapsed. Execute download after waiting about a minute. Errcode=0x170004 The project to download is not defined. Set the correct project name with the control bus configuration definition window.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-186

Error Classes and Error Codes for FMS Service and NMA Service (class_code)
Table Error Classes and Error Codes (class_code)
constant value E_FMS_INIT_OTHER E_FMS_INIT_MAX_PDU_SIZE_INSUFF E_FMS_INIT_FEAT_NOT_SUPPORTED E_FMS_INITOD_VERSION_INCOMP E_FMS_INITUSER_DENIED E_FMS_INITPASSWORD_ERROR E_FMS_INIT_PROFILE_NUMB_INCOMP E_FMS_VFD_STATE_OTHER E_FMS_APPLICATION_OTHER E_FMS_APPLICATION_UNREACHABLE E_FMS_DEF_OTHER E_FMS_DEF_OBJ_UNDEF E_FMS_DEF_OBJ_ATTR_INCONSIST E_FMS_DEF_OBJECT_ALREADY_EXISTS E_FMS_RESOURCE_OTHER E_FMS_RESOURCE_MEM_UNAVAILABLE E_FMS_SERV_OTHER E_FMS_SERV_OBJ_STATE_CONFLICT E_FMS_SERV_PDU_SIZE E_FMS_SERV_OBJ_CONSTR_CONFLICT E_FMS_SERV_PARAM_INCONSIST E_FMS_SERV_ILLEGAL_PARAM E_FMS_ACCESS_OTHER E_FMS_ACCESS_OBJ_INVALIDATED E_FMS_ACCESS_HARDWARE_FAULT E_FMS_ACCESS_OBJ_ACCESS_DENIED E_FMS_ACCESS_ADDR_INVALID E_FMS_ACCESS_OBJ_ATTR_INCONST E_FMS_ACCESS_OBJ_ACCESS_UNSUPP E_FMS_ACCESS_OBJ_NON_EXIST E_FMS_ACCESS_TYPE_CONFLICT E_FMS_ACCESS_NAME_ACCESS_UNSUP E_FMS_OD_OTHER E_FMS_OD_NAME_LEN_ODERFLOW E_FMS_OD_ODERFLOW E_FMS_OD_WRITE_PROTECT E_FMS_OD_EXTENSION_LEN_ODERFLOW E_FMS_OD_OBJ_DESCR_ODERFLOW E_FMS_OD_OPERATE_PROBLEM E_FMS_OTHER constant value class_ code 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 0x0006 0x0100 0x0200 0x0201 0x0300 0x0301 0x0302 0x0303 0x0400 0x0401 0x0500 0x0501 0x0502 0x0503 0x0504 0x0505 0x0600 0x0601 0x0602 0x0603 0x0604 0x0605 0x0606 0x0607 0x0608 0x0609 0x0700 0x0701 0x0702 0x0703 0x0704 0x0705 0x0706 0x0800 class_ code error class 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 error class error code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 error code meaning class OD Access Service Resource Definition Initiate meaning class Other Max_PDU-Size-insufficient Feature-Not-Supported Version-OD-Incompatible User-Initiate-Denied Password-Error Profile-Number-Incompatible VFD-State Other Application Other Unreachable Other Object-Undefined Object-Attributes-Inconsistent Object-Already-Exists Other Memory-Unavailable Other Object-State-Conflict PDU-Size Object-Constraint-Conflict Parameter-Inconsistent Illegal-Parameter Other Object-Invalidated Hardware-Fault Object-Access-Denied Invalid-Address Object-Attribute-Inconsistent Object-Access-Unsupported Object-Non-Exist Type-Conflict Name-Access-Unsupported Other Name-Length-Overflow OD-Overflow OD-Write-Protected Extension-Length-Overflow OD-Descr-Length-Overflow Operational-Problem Other Other error
050613E.EPS

error

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-187

Reason Codes for SM Service (rc)

Table Reason Codes (rc)

constant value E_SM_INVALID_STATE E_SM_WRONG_PD_TAG E_SM_WRONG_DEVICE_ID E_SM_WRITE_FAILED E_SM_SM_NOT_TO_OP E_SM_DLL_NO_RESOURCE E_SM_DLL_TIMEOUT E_SM_DLL_UNKNOWN E_SM_SERV_NOT_SUPPORTED E_SM_PARAM_IV E_SM_NR_TO_SET_PD_TAG E_SM_NR_TO_WHO_HAS_PD_TAG E_SM_NR_TO_SET_ADDR E_SM_NR_TO_IDENTIFY E_SM_NR_TO_ENABLE_SM_OP E_SM_NR_TO_CLEAR_ADDRESS E_SM_MULTIPLE_TAGS E_SM_TAG_WHO_HAS_PD_TAG E_SM_PD_TAG_IDENTIFY E_SM_DEV_ID_IDENTIFY E_SM_CONFIGURATION E_SM_ALREADY_CONFIGURED E_SM_LIST_TO_LONG E_SM_ALREADY_STARTED E_SM_ALREADY_STOPPED E_SM_TI_NOT_SET E_SM_LOCAL_ERROR E_SM_NO_RESOURCE E_SM_WRONG_ADDRESS E_SM_ENCODING E_SM_ILLEGAL_PDU

value 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x10 0x12 0x13 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x27 0x28 0x29 0x2a 0x2b 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x51 0x52

value meaning Remote error: invalid state Remote error: PD Tag not match Remote error: device id not match Remote error: SMIB object write failed Remote error: starting SM operational failed DLL error insufficient resources DLL error timeout DLL error unspecified reason Service not supported Parameter invalid No response to SET PD TAG No response to WHO HAS PD TAG No response to SET ADDR No response to IDENTIFY No response to ENABLE SM OP No response to CLEAR ADDRESS Multiple response to WHO HAS PD TAG Non-Matching PD-TAG for WHO HAS TAG PDU Non-Matching PD-TAG for IDENTIFY Non-Matching DEV ID for IDENTIFY configuration data false SM is already configured list has to many elements time master is activated time master is stopped clock interval is not set/ local SM error occurred no SM resources available wrong source address encoding failed wrong type of SM pdu
050614E.EPS

SEE ALSO
Regarding the error class and error code (class_code) and for a list of reason codes (rc), see the Foundation Fieldbus specifications shown below. FF-870 Fieldbus Message Specification FF-880 System Management FF-890 Function Block Application Process Part 1

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-188

5.6.4

Upload Error Messages

The upload error messages are listed in the table below.

Upload
Table Error Messages (Upload)

Error message Internal error Fieldbus communication error

Cause Database is damaged (See detail information)

Steps to take Generate project, restart tool and do upload process again Resolve cause of error by referring to detail information, restart tool and do upload process again

FCS communication error (User Error) Invalid Device ID. (<Other Device ID>) Invalid Physical Device Tag. (<Other PDTag>) Cant find device to upload to

Segment lock, segment lock Resolve cause of error by referring continue request or segment unlock to detail information, restart tool failed with respect to the FCS and do upload process again Re-input the correct device ID Device ID in database differs from (shown in <Other Device ID>), actual device ID then do upload process again Physical device tag name in database differs from actual physical device tag name Field device subject to upload does not exist on the fieldbus VFD OdRevision in database differs from actual VFD OdRevision Resource block was specified No function block exists in specified device Re-input the correct physical device tag name (shown in <Other PDTag>), then do upload process again Check whether the targeted device exists on the fieldbus, then perform upload process again Check whether ODRevisions for device and for capabilities file match, then do upload process again Select a block other than a resource block, then do upload process again Select a device in which a block exist, then do upload process again
050615E.EPS

Invalid OdRevision

Specified block is not uploaded. Specified device is not uploaded.

For the uploading, beside the above displayed messages, the more detailed information can be displayed. The detailed information includes the useful information related to determine the source and location of the specific error occurred in course of loading. Especially for the fieldbus communication errors, the error class and error code (class_code) stipulated by Foundation Fieldbus are attached to the error messages, thus the triggers of the error can be identified.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-189

Detailed Information
Table Details of Error Messages (Upload)

No. 1 2 3 4 5

6 to 9 Negative Confirmation:: FMS-Service=0x%x, class_code=0x%x, add_detail=0x%x, add_description=%s

050616E.EPS

FMS_service: NMA_service: class_code: SM_service: rc:

FMS service code (42:OD_READ_LOC, 38:ABORT, 0:INITIATE, 4:READ, 5:WRITE NMA service code (36:MGMT_READ) FMS service or NMA service error code SM service code (3:SM_IDENTIFY) SM service reason code

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-190

5.6.5

Error Messages Regarding to Upgrading Capability File and DD File

The error messages that may occur during upgrading capability files and DD file are shown as follows.

Upgrading Capability Files and DD File

Table Error Messages (Upgrading Capability File and DD File)
Error Message Internal Error occurs at exporting the succession data. Renew CF/DD function is ended. Cause Database is damaged or the text file is not properly created. Troubleshooting

Internal Error occurs at deleting the Database is damaged. device. Renew CF/DD function is ended. Internal Error occurs at adding the Database is damaged or the text file device. Renew CF/DD function is ended. access failure. Internal Error occurs at importing the succession data. Renew CF/DD function is ended. Internal Error occurs at restoring FBAP. Renew CF/DD function is ended. Internal Error occurs at getting device information. Renew CF/DD function is ended. Database is damaged or the text file access failure. Database is damaged or the text file access failure. Database is damaged.
050617E.EPS

Delete the abnormal device. Export the project and import it again. Register the device deleted before. If required, reconfigure the FBAP.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-191

5.6.6

Error Messages Regarding to Display Device ID

The error messages that may occur when displaying device ID are shown as follows.

Display Device ID
Table Error Messages (Display Device ID)

Error Message

Cause

Troubleshooting To reset and restart ACF11 or to perform IOM load to ACF11. Check the wiring cables under Vnet.
050618E.EPS

Cannot access the Live List. Failed in the Node Address acquisition. CAF11 abnormal, or network physical connection error.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-192

5.6.7

Device Editor Error Messages

The device editor error messages are listed in the table below.

Device Editor
Table Error Messages (Device Editor)
Error message Function Blocks of the Device <DeviceName> are being used in a FBAP. You cant remove this device. Please enter no more than 32 characters. Contains invalid character. Tag name is not correct Valid character: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, _ Cause Steps to take

Attempted to delete a device containing Open the FB editor and delete functions that are used in more than the applicable function block from one FBAP configuration the FBAP 33 characters or more were entered ['] or [|] was entered (for device ID). Value other than A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, _ was entered (for physical device tag name) Enter 32 characters or less Delete ['] and [|] (for device ID). Delete any characters other than A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, _ (for physical device tag name).
050619E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-193

5.6.8

Network Editor Error Messages

The network editor error messages are listed in the table below.

Network Editor
Table Error Messages (Network Editor) Error message
Value is out of range. Valid range: 16(0x10)-247(0xF7) Conversion error

Cause

Steps to take

Value other than 16(0x10) to 247(0xF7) was Enter a value in the range of 16(0x10) to entered. Or, nothing was entered 247(0xF7) Value other than 0 to 9, 0x was entered Enter a value between 0 and 9 or 0x Use the device editor and register the device
050620E.EPS

No devices found in project <project_name> Device is not registered

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-194

5.6.9

FB Editor Error Messages

The FB editor error messages are listed in the table below.

FBAP Configuration Creation

Table Error Messages (FB Editor)

Error message Enter up to 8 characters FBAP name is not correct Valid character: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, _ Could not open the LAY file. Invalid position. Enter up to 32 characters Tag name is not correct Valid character: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, _

Cause 9 characters or more were entered ['], [|], ["] or [*] was entered

Steps to take Enter a string of 8 characters or less Delete ['], [|], ["] and [*] Check the location of the layout file (should be in the SRC directory for the current project) Redo the placement Enter 32 characters or less

Layout file does not exist Element is not placed in the drawing area or is overlapping 33 characters or more were entered

Delete any characters other than A to Value other than A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, _ _ was entered (for physical device tag) (for physical device tag).
050621E.EPS

Internal Parameter Connection

Table Error Messages (Internal Parameter Connection)
Error message Cause Solution

When try to add new assignment to the Possible range of the manual setting is reserved I/O terminal channels that are Use the unassigned channels. exceeded. all assigned on FBAP. No. %d has already been set. The number of the manual settings cannot be changed. When try to remove a terminal channel that has been assigned with parameter from the reserved channel range. The defined parameter is not available in the specified block, or the data type of the parameter cannot be handled. Though the block is specified, the parameter is not. Identical parameters exist for the same block. Identical wiring connection exist on FBAP. Before manually change the reserved channels range, it is necessary to check that the channels are not assigned. When reduce the range, it is necessary to delete the assignment first. Delete the parameter.

Please confirm the BlockTag name and Parameter name of No. %d. Is not an illegal Parameter defined? Is Parameter name specified? Is not there repetition in the set content? Have not you already been defined by the FB Editor for Remote-Parameter? Contained Parameter Connection definition has been modified. Cancel modifications? The generation is necessary to reflect modified contents.

Redefine the parameter name, or delete the block name. Delete one the of connections. Manually delete the wiring connection. Or delete the wiring connection on FBAP.

Run generation after changing the After the internal parameter connection parameter connection. If the FB editor is changed, the FB editor is to be closed is closed without running generation, without running generation to compile the changed data may be lost. the changed data.
050628E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-195

Generation
Table Error Messages (Generation) (1/2)
Error message Error while generating common objects. Error while generating FB Schedule. Cause Resource for common objects (VCRs for each VFD) is insufficient Resource of FB schedules for the devices applied is insufficient Resource for VCRs and link objects with respect to alert objects is insufficient Resource for VCR and link object with respect to trend objects is insufficient Steps to take Replace the device or change the FBAP configuration, or reduce the number of devices. Replace the device or change the FBAP configuration, or reduce the number of devices. Replace the device or change the FBAP configuration, or reduce the number of devices. Replace the device or change the FBAP configuration Replace the device or change the FBAP configuration Reduce the wirings between blocks so that to reduce communication traffics.

Error while generating Alert objects. Error while generating the Trend objects.

Error while generating Link Object for Resource of link objects for Device <DeviceName>, FB <FbName>, corresponding devices is insufficient Parameter <ParameterName>. Error on generating a LAS Schedule object for Device <DeviceName>, FB <FbName>, Parameter <ParameterName>. Error on generating a VCR object for Device <DeviceName>, FB <FbName>, Parameter <ParameterName>. Generator: no LinkMaster device in project. Unable to generate. Error on checking structure: Invalid connection between different Parameter Types. Error on checking structure: There is no signal source. Error on checking structure: Unconnected connect terminal found. Error on checking structure: Unconnected connection. Error on checking structure: Output signals are joined. Unknown error on checking the structure. Error on checking structure: Found signal without a destination. Warning! There are not enough VCR definitions to generate all needed VCRs for the Host Interface Devices! insufficient Resource of VCR and link objects for LAS schedules is insufficient. Resource of VCR for corresponding devices is insufficient A linkmaster device does not exist in the project. Generation cannot be executed Attempted to connect two function blocks with different formats (for example, analog parameter and digital parameter) A connection other than having at least 1 connection source and 1 connection destination is drawn

Replace the device or change the FBAP configuration Add a device that can act as the linkmaster to the project The incorrect connection is shown in a different color. Check the parameter format for the connected function blocks Check all connections to see if each has connection source and connection destination

There is a connection terminal in the Connect the terminal or delete it from FBAP that is not connected to another the configuration FB There is a connection in the FBAP that Delete the connection or place it is not connected to any FB correctly There is a connection in the FBAP that Delete the connection or place it is connected to 2 or more FB outputs correctly Generation could not be executed because of an error that cannot be specified A connection other than having at least 1 connection source and 1 connection destination is drawn Delete the FBAP, then create it again Connect the FB or delete it from the configuration

Use a different host interface device, The number of VCR or revise the FBAP configuration or definitions for the format defined by number of devices so that it conforms DRF is insufficient to generate all VCRs. to the host interface device specifications
050622E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<Toc> <Ind> Table Error Messages (Generation) (2/2) Error messages Failed in the construction of the schedule result. Cause

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-196

Solution Reconstruct the project. The database may be damaged The steps to be taken for each cause respectively is indicated below: 1. Change the control cycle so that the control loop can be executed correctly 2. Change to a macrocycle duration that is appropriate for the control system 3. Revise each control cycle or macrocycle duration so that the lowest common multiple for all FBAP control cycles matches the macrocycle duration

An exception occurred in the construction of data required to construct the schedule result. Possible three causes are shown below: 1. Because the specified control cycle value was too small, the time for executing a single loop exceeded the control cycle 2. Because the macrocycle value was too small, the DefTokenHoldTime calculation result was smaller than the obtainable minimum value 3. The lowest common multiple for all FBAP control cycles does not match the macrocycle duration

WARNING message is triggered. Open the schedule display dialog box and check all the schedules (Edit/Schedule/Display).

The input/output terminal number of The terminal numbers of input and Use the input and out terminals with the connection terminal is not output terminals connected for the consistent numbers. corresponding. parameter readback are inconsistency. Device: %s, Block: Parameter %s (%s) The input/output terminal number is same though the readback parameter is unnecessary. Device: %s, Block: %s, Parameter: %s(%s) The connection terminal on the input side is not described Device: %s, Block: %s, Parameter: %s(%s) The connection terminal on the output side is not described Device: %s, Block: %s, Parameter: %s(%s) The same numbers of terminals are used for input and output connection even though readback is not required. Use different terminal numbers when connecting input and output terminals.

No terminal for parameter readback is connected.

Connect the input terminal for parameter readback.

No terminal for parameter readback is connected.

Connect the output terminal for parameter readback. Check VCR type and do the following: SERVER/SOURCE: Change the device. (If the device is not compliant to FF specification) PUBLISHER/SUBSCRIBER: Delete the communication related wiring. Delete the communication related wiring. If the device is defined as a Link Master device, change it into Basic. Delete the communication related wiring. If the device is defined as a Link Master device, change it into Basic. Delete the identical wiring, or delete the manually wired connection.

The resource of VCR is insufficient. Upper Limit:%d(VCR Usage:%s)

Insufficient VCR resource.

The resource of Subschedule is insufficient. Upper Limit:%d The resource of LAS Schedule is insufficient. Upper Limit:%d Error on generating a Terminal for Device %s, Parameter %s (%s), Remote-Parameter (%s) has already defined at Contained Parameters Connection Dialog.

Insufficient sub-scheduler resource.

Insufficient LAS sequence resource.

Identical wiring connection exists due to manual wiring.

050623E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-197

5.6.10 Schedule Dialog Box Error Messages

The error messages for the Schedule dialog box are listed in the table below.

Schedule Dialog Box

Table Error Messages (Schedule Dialog Box)
Error message Reason Solution Enter a value that is within range.

Out of definable range. (10 % to 500 % Entry was out of range for scale value valid) change. Failed in the construction of the schedule result. Communication exception generated. (Warning) Schedule result exceeds the Control Cycle. Required Delegation time for communication with device could not be secured sufficiently. Evaluation Results: Default Delegation time allocated in device -> <time> msec (<time> msec or more) Ratio of remaining time to Macrocycle -> <ratio> % (<ratio> % or more) There is a possibility that delaying to HMI and the alarm transmission occurs because the number of devices and block executions is too many. Adjust them in the following order. 1. Increase the control cycle or the Macrocycle. 2. Decrease the number of communication. (Or decrease the number of devices.) 3. Minimize the time resolution or the safety factor with the range which the performance permits. Macrocycle Duration is not LCM of Control Cycle of all FBAP.

An exception found in data construction Restructure the project. There is a necessary to construct schedule result. possibility that the database is broken. Start time change caused invalid block None or communication order. Change Control Cycle to an Specified Control Cycle is smaller than appropriate value for this fieldbus the time required to execute one loop. system.

Delegation time could not be secured sufficiently for each device because the specified Mcrocycle value is small or the number of devices and block executions is too many.

1. Increase the control cycle or the Macrocycle. 2. Decrease the number of communication. (Or, decrease the number of device.) 3. Minimize the time resolution or the safety factor with the range which the performance permits.

LCM of Control Cycle of all FBAP is not corresponding to Macrocycle Duration.

Correct each Control Cycle or Macrocycle Duration so that the LCM of Control Cycle of all FBAP may become Macrocycle Duration.
050624E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-198

5.6.11 Parameter Dialog Box Error Messages

The error messages for the Parameter dialog box are listed in the table below.

Parameter Dialog Box

Table Error Messages (Parameter Dialog Box)
Error message Value is out of range for data type Internal error in function check. Value is out of range. Valid range: <value 1>, <value 2> to <value 3>, <value 4> This is Read-Only parameter. You can not modify the value of this parameter. Cause A value outside the specified format was entered Data whose length exceeding defined data length was entered A value outside the specified range was entered Attempted to edit an read-only parameter Steps to take Enter a value with the defined format Enter a value with the specified length Enter a value within the specified range Values for read-only parameters cannot be entered
050625E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-199

5.6.12 Error Messages for Other Dialog Boxes

A list of error messages for other edit dialog boxes is given in the table below.

Advanced LM Settings
Table Error Messages (Advanced LM Settings) Error message Value is out of range. Valid range: <value 1>, <value 2> to <value 3>, <value 4> No value entered. Invalid type. Included invalid value. Cause Steps to take

A value outside the range was entered Enter a value within the valid range No value was entered Other than a numeric value was entered Invalid character was entered Enter a value within the valid range Enter a value that fits the data type (enter a numeric value (including 0x)) Delete the invalid character and enter a numeric value (including 0x)
050626E.EPS

Modify Defaults Dialog Box

Table Error Messages (Modify Defaults Dialog Box)

Error message Enter an integer from 1 to 65535. Enter a positive integer. Enter an integer from 1 to 134217727. Enter a numeric value. Enter an integer from 1 to 2047. Enter a positive integer. Enter an integer from 0 to 32767. Enter a positive integer.

Cause Value outside range was entered for the version Value other than a numeral was entered for the version Value other than a numeral was entered for the macrocycle duration Value other than a numeral was entered for the macrocycle duration Value outside range was entered for the time resolution Value other than a numeral was entered for the time resolution Enter an integer from 0 to 65535 for the safety factor Enter a positive integer for the safety factor

Steps to take Enter a value within the allowable range Enter a numeric value Enter a value within the allowable range Enter a numeric value Enter a value within the allowable range Enter a numeric value Enter a value within the allowable range Enter a numeric value
050627E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-200

5.7

Connecting DAQ Station

DAQ Station is Foundation Fieldbus compliant recorder. The configuration of connecting function block with a DAQ Station is shown as follows. SEE ALSO
In this chapter, a configuration drawing of FBAP for connecting DAQSTATION to fieldbus is explained as a sample. For more information about engineering, see other chapters in this document. For more information about DAQSTATION and its compatibility with Foundation Fieldbus, see Fieldbus Communication Interface Manual (IM 04L02A01-18E).

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-201

Recording Measured Data of DAQSTATION by the DAQSTATION

To record the measured data of a DAQSTATION by itself, the outputs (OUT) of the AI function blocks or the outputs (OUT_N : N=1 to 8) of MAI block of the DAQSTATION should be connected to the inputs (IN_N : N=1 to 8) of MAO block in the DAQSTATION.
AI_4000-2

AI
DAQSTATION-2 AI_4100-2

Out

AI
DAQSTATION-2 AI_4200-2

Out

AI
DAQSTATION-2 AI_4300-2

Out MAO_10000-2 In1 In2 In3 In4 MAO In5 In6 In7 In8 DAQSTATION-2 Out AI_4600-2

AI
DAQSTATION-2 AI_4400-2

Out

AI
DAQSTATION-2 AI_4500-2

Out

AI
DAQSTATION-2

AI
DAQSTATION-2 AI_4700-2

Out

AI
DAQSTATION-2

Out

050701E.EPS

Figure Example 1: Configuration of Function Blocks

MAI_9000-3 Out1 Out2 Out3 Out4 Out5 Out6 Out7 Out8 MAO_10000-3 In1 In2 In3 In4 MAO In5 In6 In7 In8 DAQSTATION-3
050702E.EPS

MAI

DAQSTATION-3

Figure Example 2: Configuration of Function Blocks

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-202

Recording Measured Data of Other Devices by DAQSTATION

To record the measured data of fieldbus devices by a DAQSTATION, the outputs (OUT) of the AI function blocks of the fieldbus devices should be connected to the inputs (IN_N : N=1 to 8) of MAO block in the DAQSTATION. The parameters can be connected to MAO are as follows. OUT BKCAL_OUT OUT_1 OUT_2 OUT_3 OUT_4 OUT_5 OUT_6 OUT_7 OUT_8
AI_1000-7

AI
3051-7 AI_1100-7

Out

AI
3051-7 AI_1000-8

Out

AI
3051-8 AI_1100-8

Out MAO_10000-4 In1 In2 In3 In4 MAO In5 In6 In7 In8 DAQSTATION-4 Out AI_1000-9

AI
3051-8 AI_1000-6

Out

AI
3051Fieldbus-6 AI_1100-6

Out

AI
3051Fieldbus-6

AI
3051Fieldbus-9 AI_1100-9

Out

AI
3051Fieldbus-9

Out
050703E.EPS

Figure Example: Configuration of Function Blocks

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-203

Accessing Measured Data of DAQSTATION from CS 1000/CS 3000

To access the measured data of a DAQSTATION from CS 1000/CS 3000, the outputs (OUT) of the AI function blocks or the outputs (OUT_N : N=1 to 8) of MAI block of the DAQSTATION should be connected to the input terminals of FCS via Connection terminals. On CENTUM CS 1000/CS 3000 IOM Builder, the output parameters of function blocks need to be assigned with FCS I/O elements. Then the connection between the FCS I/O elements and FCS function blocks need to be defined in the control drawings.
MAI_9000-5 Out1 Out2 Out3 Out4 Out5 Out6 Out7 Out8 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1002-1 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1004-1 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1006-1 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1008-1 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1010-1 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1012-1 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1014-1 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1000-1 AI_4000-5 TERMO_1016-1 Out AI_4100-5 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1018-1 Out AI_4200-5 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1020-1 Out AI_4300-5 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1022-1 Out AI_4400-5 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1024-1 Out AI_4500-5 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1026-1 Out AI_4600-5 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1028-1 Out AI_4700-5 In ACF11-14 TERMO_1030-1 Out In ACF11-14
050704E.EPS

AI
DAQSTATION-5

MAI

AI
DAQSTATION-5

DAQSTATION-5

AI
DAQSTATION-5

Figure Example: Configuration of Function Blocks

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool> Table Example: Assignment of FCS I/O Elements (IOM Builder)
Terminal Number %Z012201 %Z012202 %Z012203 %Z012204 %Z012205 %Z012206 %Z012207 %Z012208 %Z012209 %Z012210 %Z012211 %Z012212 %Z012213 %Z012214 %Z012215 %Z012216 Block Tag Name MAI_9000-5 MAI_9000-5 MAI_9000-5 MAI_9000-5 MAI_9000-5 MAI_9000-5 MAI_9000-5 MAI_9000-5 AI_4000-5 AI_4100-5 AI_4200-5 AI_4300-5 AI_4400-5 AI_4500-5 AI_4600-5 AI_4700-5 Parameter OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT Direction WT WT WT WT WT WT WT WT RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD Data Type AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S
050705E.EPS

5-204

MAI-OUT1 PVI

%Z012201

AI1-OUT PVI

%Z012209

MAI-OUT2 PVI

%Z012202

AI2-OUT PVI

%Z012210

MAI-OUT3 PVI

%Z012203

AI3-OUT PVI

%Z012211

MAI-OUT4 PVI

%Z012204

AI4-OUT PVI

%Z012212

MAI-OUT5 PVI

%Z012205

AI5-OUT PVI

%Z012213

MAI-OUT6 PVI

%Z012206

AI6-OUT PVI

%Z012214

MAI-OUT7 PVI

%Z012207

AI7-OUT PVI

IN %Z012215

MAI-OUT8 PVI

%Z012208

AI8-OUT PVI

IN %Z012216

050706E.EPS

Figure Example: Configuration on Control Drawing Builder

IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-205

Recording Measured Data of CS 1000/CS 3000 by DAQSTATION

To record the measured data of CS 1000/CS 3000 by DAQSTATION, Defined a MAO on FB Editor. On CENTUM CS 1000/CS 3000 IOM Builder, the input parameters (IN_N : N=1 to 8) of MAO block need to be assigned with FCS I/O elements. Then the connection between the FCS I/O elements and FCS function blocks need to be defined in the control drawings. On FB editor, the input parameters of MAO block should not be connected to the output terminals of FCS via Connection terminals.

IMPORTANT
Data updating period varies with the traffic of the fieldbus. Data updating period of MAO is between 1 to 8 seconds, in proportion of the number of data written to the MAO input terminals.

MAO_10000-2 In1 In2 In3 In4 MAO In5 In6 In7 In8 DAQSTATION-2
050707E.EPS

Figure Example: Configuration of Function Blocks Table Example: Assignment of FCS I/O Elements (IOM Builder)
Terminal Number %Z012101 %Z012102 %Z012103 %Z012104 %Z012105 %Z012106 %Z012107 %Z012108 Block Tag Name MAO_10000-2 MAO_10000-2 MAO_10000-2 MAO_10000-2 MAO_10000-2 MAO_10000-2 MAO_10000-2 MAO_10000-2 Parameter IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 Direction Data Type WT WT WT WT WT WT WT WT AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S AF32S
050708E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<5. Fieldbus Engineering Tool>

5-206
%Z012105

MAO-IN1 PVI

OUT

%Z012101

MAO-IN5 PVI

OUT

MAO-IN2 PVI

OUT

%Z012102

MAO-IN6 PVI

OUT

%Z012106

MAO-IN3 PVI

OUT

%Z012103

MAO-IN7 PVI

OUT

%Z012107

MAO-IN4 PVI

OUT

%Z012104

MAO-IN8 PVI

OUT

%Z012108

050709E.EPS

Figure Example: Configuration on Control Drawing Builder

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-1

Device Management Tool

The Device Management Tool provides functions needed to operate/monitor fieldbus devices. It monitors the status of fieldbus devices and changes the parameters of fieldbus blocks if necessary. The Tool can run on a PC or an HIS to supplement the fieldbus operation and monitoring functions provided by the HIS and to support maintenance of fieldbus devices. Fieldbus communication modules very with the upper level systems. If the upper level system is STARDOM FCN, NFLF111 should be used instead of ACF11. If the upper level system is STARDOM FCJ (Foundation Fieldbus Compatible), NFJT100H100 should be used instead of ACF11. The compatibility of upper level systems, fieldbus modules and Device Management Tool are shown as follows.
Table Compatibility of Upper Level Systems, Fieldbus Modules and Device Management Tool
Upper Level System CS1000 CS3000 STARDOM Fieldbus Module ACF11 ACF11 ALF11 NFLF111 NFJT100-H100 (*1) Device Management Tool Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
060001E.EPS

*1: Yes:

FCJ with built-in NFLF111 capabilities. Compatible

TIP
For STARDOM system, NFLF111 is used instead of ACF11. If the upper level system is STARDOM, the terms in this document are redefined with the following meanings listed to the right-hand side. CS1000/CS3000 System ACF11 ALF111 Control Bus HIS or Master PC FCS STARDOM NFLF111 NFLF111 Control Network Master PC FCN/FCJ

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-2

6.1

Overview of Device Management Tool

To provide an overview of the Device Management Tool, the following sections explain the operation flow describing what must be done before the Device Management Tool can be used and the location of the Tool within a system. The operating environment needed to run the Device Management Tool and the Tools application capacities are also explained, together with the functional overview and window configuration as well as how to assign tag names for the fieldbus devices operated/ monitored by the Device Management Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-3

6.1.1

What is Device Management Tool?

The Device Management Tool is used to manage, monitor and maintain the fieldbus devices (sensors, positioners, analyzers, etc.) connected to the Foundation fieldbus (low-speed voltage mode) as well as display and change their parameters. In this chapter, the Foundation fieldbus (low-speed voltage mode) is referred to as H1 fieldbus.

Operation Flow Before Running Device Management Tool

Operation Flow before Running Device Management Tool

The figure below shows the operation flow describing what must be done before running the Device Management Tool and the classification of users who generally perform these operations.
Operation flow User classification

Install the Device Management Tool. Setup the personal computer.

System manager

Configure the Device Management Tool.

Set environment for the Device Management Tool.

User who manages the Device Management Tool

Manage, monitor and maintain fieldbus devices using the various functions of the Device Management Tool.

060101E.EPS

Figure Operation Flow Before Running Device Management Tool and User Classification

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-4

6.1.2

Position of the Device Management Tool

The Device Management Tool runs on the HIS or on the personal computer connected to the control bus (hereafter referred to as Master PC), and runs on the personal computer connected to the H1 fieldbus (hereafter referred to as Slave PC). TIP
The Device Management Tool running in the Slave PC is one of the packages of the fieldbus support tools.

IMPORTANT
The Device Management Tool utilized on HIS or the master PC has different functions from the Device Management Tool utilized on the slave PC. When fieldbus communication module ACF11 on FCS is connected to H1 fieldbus. The messages sent from fieldbus (Fieldbus Messages) can be displayed on HIS and on Master PC.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-5

Fieldbus Configuration Related to Whole System Architecture

The Device Management Tool can run on the HIS or on the master PC connected to the control bus. Both HIS and master PC can collect fieldbus messages from the historical message file saved in the HIS via the OPC server or DDE server in the HIS. The Device Management Tool can also run on the slave PC connected to the H1 fieldbus. On the slave PC, the fieldbus devices can be monitored even when the fieldbus is not connected to the ACF11 or ALF111 module. The figure below shows fieldbus configuration related to the whole system architecture when implemented by Device Management Tool.
Runs on HIS or the master PC Ethernet HIS Device Management Tool runs on HIS Master PC Device Management Tool runs on master PC

Control bus PFCS

Slave PC Device Management Tool runs on slave PC

ACF11 H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: PFCS: ACF11:

Fieldbus device
060102E.EPS

Human Interface Station General-purpose Personal Computer (Connected on Control Bus) General-purpose Personal Computer (Connected on H1 Fieldbus) Field control station Fieldbus communication module

Figure Example of Fieldbus System Configuration

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-6

Fieldbus Configuration Related to Whole System Architecture

Control bus SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS KFCS2/KFCS

Slave PC Device Management Tool runs on slave PC

ACF11 H1 fieldbus

ALF111 H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Slave PC: SFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, KFCS2, KFCS: ACF11, ALF111:

Fieldbus device

Fieldbus device
060103E.EPS

Human Interface Station General-purpose Personal Computer (Connected on Control Bus) General-purpose Personal Computer (Connected on H1 Fieldbus) Field control station Fieldbus communication module

Figure Example of Fieldbus System Configuration

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-7

Fieldbus Configuration Related to Whole System Architecture STARDOM

The Device Management Tool can run on the master PC connected to the control network of STARDOM. The Device Management Tool can also run on the slave PC connected to the H1 fieldbus. On the slave PC, the fieldbus devices can be monitored even when the fieldbus is not connected to the FCN/FCJ. The figure below shows fieldbus configuration related to the whole system architecture when implemented with Device Management Tool.
HMI

Ethernet VDS Device Management Tool runs on master PC Control Network

N F P C L S P F U U 1 1 1

Master PC

FCN

FCJ (Foundation Fieldbus Communication Compliant)

Device Management Tool runs on slave PC Slave PC H1 Fieldbus H1 Fieldbus

Fieldbus Device
HMI: VDS: Master PC: Slave PC: FCN: FCJ: NFLF111:

Fieldbus Device
060111E.EPS

Human Machine Interface Data Server / HMI Server General-purpose Personal Computer (Connected on Control Bus) General-purpose Personal Computer (Connected on H1 Fieldbus) Modular Type Autonomous Controller All-In-One Type Autonomous Controller Fieldbus Communication Module

Figure Fieldbus Configuration Related to Whole System Architecture STARDOM

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-8

6.1.3

Operating Environment of Device Management Tool

The following explains the environment in which the Device Management Tool is used.

Hardware Environment (Master PC)

Main unit: CPU: Memory: IBM PC/AT compatible machine Pentium 300 MHz or higher 128 MB or more When running the Device management Tool on HIS, the main memory of the HIS should be 96 MB or larger. Free hard disk space: 120 MB or more (Fieldbus Engineering Tool requires 50 MB + De vice Management Tool requires 50 MB + Control Bus Communica tion requires 10 MB + Electoronic online document requires 10MB). 800x600 or higher (1024x768 or 1280x1024 recommended.) Ethernet board Control bus interface card (VF701)

Display resolution: Interface card:

Hardware Environment (Master PC) STARDOM

Unit Model: Main Memory: Hard Disk: CPU: Interface Card: IBM PC/AT compatible computer 128 MB or more (More than 160 MB is recommended) Disk space 200 MB or more Intel Pentium 300 MHZ or faster (Pentium II 400 MHZ or faster is recommended) Ethernet Card: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T or 10BASE5, as long as the card is supported in the environment of Windows XP SP1, or Windows 2000 Professional SP2.

Hardware Environment (Slave PC)

Main unit: IBM PC/AT compatible machine However it should be compatible with Fieldbus communication card for PCMCIA (Release 2.1) CPU: Memory: Free hard disk space: Pentium 300 MHz or higher 128 MB or more 120 MB or more When Fieldbus Support Tools is installed, the Device Management Tool will be included. Display resolution: Interface card: 800x600 or higher (1024x768 or 1280x1024 recommended.) Fieldbus Communication Card National Instruments. Co. Fieldbus Communication Card for PCMCIA Model: PCMCIA-FBUS Version: R2.3

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-9

Software Environment (Master PC)

OS: If DDE server is used Windows XP Service Pack 1 Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or Service Pack 3 If DDE server is not used. Windows XP Service Pack 1 Windows 2000 Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2 or Service Pack 3

Software Environment (Slave PC)

OS: Windows XP Service Pack 1 Windows 2000 Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2, or Service Pack 3 NI-FBUS (Rev: R2.3.6) National Instruments Co. Provided together with PCMCIA-FBUS card.

NI-FBUS:

Others
The following optional packages, Exaopc OPC interface packages and DDE open interface packages for HIS, must be installed in the HIS in order to run the Device Management Tool: PHS 2411 (*1) : LHS 2411 (*2) : PHS 2410 (*1) : LHS 2410 (*2) :
*1: *2:

Exaopc OPC Interface Package (for HIS) Exaopc OPC Interface Package (for HIS) Open Data Interface Package a for DDE Open Data Interface Package a for DDE

A dedicated package for the CS 1000. A dedicated package for the CS 3000.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-10

6.1.4

Application Capacities of Device Management Tool

The application capacities of the Device Management Tool such as the numbers of physical device tags, number of segments, number of users are explained as follows.

Application Capacity - Device Management Tool

Table Application Capacities of Device Management Tool

Item Number of device tags Number of messages Number of history messages Number of users Number of user groups Number of events

Capacity 3000 devices

Remarks

Number of segments 200 segments 3000 messages 1000 messages 200 users 8 groups 512 events Maximum number of messages that can be received from the HIS and displayed Maximum number of history messages that can be stored Including three default users Including three default user groups Maximum number of events that can be stored
060104E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-11

6.1.5

Functional Overview of Device Management Tool

The functions provided by the Device Management Tool consist of the registering functions used to enter user names and device tags and the executing functions used to perform various operations of the Device Management Tool.

Functional Overview of Device Management Tool

A user who uses the Device Management Tool must first complete his/her user registration and register device tags using the Tools registration functions. When the registrations are completed, the user can then log in to the Device Management Tool and manage or monitor the fieldbus devices using the various executing functions of the Device Management Tool. The figure below shows the functional overview of the Device Management Tool.
Registering functions Executing functions

User registration Device tag list registration

Security Device tag list display Fieldbus device status display Fieldbus device parameter display/setting Method Message display History message display Event display Setting Control Bus Environment setting Maintenance Export

Print Help
060105E.EPS

Figure Functional Overview of Device Management Tool

IMPORTANT
If the upper level system is STARDOM, the message display window of Device Management Tool should not be used. In STARDOM system, the alarm messages received from fieldbus devices are treated as system alarms on VDS.
IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-12

6.1.6

Naming Rules in Device Management Tool

The following explains the naming rules, or how to assign names for the devices and block tags managed by the Device Management Tool.

Device Tag Name

Device tag names are assigned for devices such as sensors (flow meters and pressure gauges) and actuators. Assign device tag names based on the convention specified by the Fieldbus Foundation. Device tag names must be unique within each Device Management Tool.

Block Tag Name

Block tag names are assigned for blocks in a device. The device blocks managed by the Device Management Tool include the function blocks, resource blocks and transducer blocks. The Device Management Tool uses each block by referencing its tag name set in the corresponding device. The Device Management Tool does not assign block tag names. Block tag names must be unique within each device. Identical names may be used for blocks each belonging to a different device. However, it is recommended that block tag names remain unique even among multiple devices to facilitate the block tag management functions (such as the ones listed below) in the Device Management Tool. Alarm search by block tag name, performed as part of the message display function History message search by block tag, performed as part of the event management function

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-13

Relationship of Device Tag Names and Block Tag Names

The figure below shows the inclusive relationship of device tags and block tags in the Device Management Tool as well as the applicable naming rules.
Device Management Tool requires that device tag names must be unique.

Device Management Tool Segment: S1 Device tag name: F101 Block tag name: F101R Block tag name: FI101 Block tag name: FIC101 Device tag name: F102 Block tag name: F102R Block tag name: FI102 Block tag name: FIC102 Segment: S2 Segment: S3

Block tag names must be unique under each device tag. Block tag names may be identical if each corresponds to a different device tag. However, it is best to avoid identical names.
060106E.EPS

Figure Device Tags and Block Tags and Naming Rules

A device tag name and a block tag name may be identical. Similarly, a segment name and a device tag name or a segment name and a block tag name may be identical.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-14

6.1.7

Window Configuration of Device Management Tool

The Device Management Tool uses one master window called main window and several child windows corresponding to each of the Device Management Tool. One or more child windows are displayed inside the main window. If a bookmark is attached to a child window being displayed, the child window can be called via onetouch operation from the next time. Menu windows called pop-up menus can be opened using the mouse.

Configuration of Main Window

The main window of the Device Management Tool has a menu bar, a toolbar and a status bar. When a child window is being displayed, the menu bar, toolbar and status bar of the main window will function as the menu bar, toolbar and status bar of the child window. When multiple child windows are being displayed, they become effective for the active child window. The figure below shows the configuration of the main window.
Device Management Tool File(F) Option(O) Function(M) Bookmark(B) Device(S) Registar(A) Data(D) System(Y) Window(W) Help(H)

Menu bar Toolbar

Device Status Display Select Segment Device Tag Name Segment1 Segment2 Segment3 F101 F102 F103 Status READY READY NOT READY

Child window

Update(P)

Status bar

12/10/98

3:16 PM
060107E.EPS

Figure Configuration of Device Management Tools Main Window

TIP
For all windows, the date and time display follows the local setting (short format date) specified in the control panel.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-15

Toolbar
The figure below describes the toolbar.
New window display Print Device status display Message display Parameter display Operational history display

Device tag list table display Individual device tag list display

Call window for device select Previous device Next device Help
060108E .EPS

Figure Description of Toolbar

Bookmark
Bookmark

The user can attach a bookmark to windows he/she has displayed. The bookmark attached to a window is stored in the menu. A desired window can be displayed by selecting the corresponding bookmark from the menu. Up to 20 bookmarks can be attached to different windows. The table below shows the windows to which a bookmark can be attached and how each bookmark is displayed in the menu.
Table Bookmark Display Formats
Window name Device tag list table display Individual device tag list display Device status display Message display Parameter display L D: Segment name: Device tag name C: Segment name M P: Segment name: Device tag name: Block tag name
060109E.EPS

Bookmark display format

Pop-up Menu
Pop-up menus are windows that are called via clicking of the right mouse button. The contents of each pop-up menu vary depending on the type of the window for which the menu is displayed and the position of the mouse pointer at the click. The figure below is a display example showing the pop-up menu for the Status Display window.
Device Tag List Individual Device Tag Message Parameter History Update
060110E.EPS

Figure A Pop-up Menu

IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-16

6.2

Security Settings of Device Management Tool

The security settings in Device Management Tool contain the user registration and the security check. The user registration allows a user to login to Device Management Tool and to operate and monitor. The security check function checks the operation and monitoring privilege entitled for the logged-in user.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-17

6.2.1

User Registration
This function is used to register a user who is allowed to log in to the Device Management Tool as well as the user group to which the user belongs. The security level of each user is specified by the user group.

User and User Group

A maximum of 200 users can be registered. The maximum number of user groups that can be registered is eight. Three user names (MASTER, USER and GUEST) and three user groups (MASTER, USER and GUEST) are already registered as users and user groups by default.
Users and user groups already registered in the Device Management Tool by default

User group name: MASTER User name: MASTER

User group name: USER User name: USER

User group name: GUEST User name: GUEST

Device Management Tool

User group name: GROUP1 User name: USER1 User name: USER3 User name: USER5

User group name: GROUP2 User name: USER7

User name: USER2

User name: USER4

User name: USER6

Additional users and user groups registered

060201E.EPS

Figure Relationship of Users and User Groups

Default User
Three user names (MASTER, USER and GUEST) are already registered by default. The two default user names other than MASTER can be changed or deleted. MASTER cannot be changed nor deleted. Initially no password is set for the three users. A password must be set for each of the users in the Password Setting window when required.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-18

Default User Group

Three user groups (MASTER, USER and GUEST) are already registered by default. The user group name and security cannot be changed nor the group itself deleted for any of these user groups.

Security Items Specified for User Group

The table below shows the security items that can be specified for each user group and the settings for the user groups that are provided by default. Security settings can be changed freely for any user group except for the user groups that are provided by default.
Table User List Format (Table of Security Items) User group name MASTER USER GUEST
060202E.EPS

Environment setting Method Display Change Display Change Display (*1) Change Confirm (*2) Save Restore Display Set Parameter setting Maintenance

User registration

Device tag list

: Allowed. Blank: Not allowed. *1: Displayed parameters include fieldbus device statuses, messages and history messages. *2: Confirming parameters indicates specifying whether or not to display a confirmation dialog box when setting parameters ( : displayed, Blank: not displayed).

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-19

6.2.2

Security Check
This function is used to check the operation and monitoring privilege of a user who has logged in to the Device Management Tool.

Security Check
When the Device Management Tool is started, a Login window is displayed. The user enters his/her user name and password and logs in to the Device Management Tool. Each user who has logged in to the Device Management Tool can display and operate windows within the range of security entitled for his/her user group. Every time the user displays any window in the Device Management Tool or change any data in the windows, the security check function will check details of the registered security privilege of the user group to which the user belongs. If the operation performed is outside of the users privilege, a dialog box will appear to alarm it to the user. TIP
Only one user can log in to the Device Management Tool at one time. If other user is currently using the tool, the next user must log in after the current user has logged out.

Setting for Non-security Application

To use the Device Management Tool in non-security application, uncheck Login Window in the Environment Set dialog box of the Device Management Tool. From the next time, the Device Management Tool can be started without a login procedure. In this application, the user who has started the Device Management Tool can perform all operations available in the tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-20

6.3

Register and Display Device Tag List

The device information managed by the Device Management Tool can be registered and displayed. There are following three features. Register to Device list Manually registers the fieldbus physical device information to device list. Auto Setup Automatically registers the fieldbus physical device information to device list. Display Device List Displays the registered fieldbus devices in a list.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-21

6.3.1

Device Tag List Registration

The information and list of fieldbus devices managed by Device Management Tool can be manually registered. Registration in the device tag list is performed from the Field Device Tag List Registration windows. Two types of registration windows are provided: the Table Register window and Individual Register window. Information can be registered in the device tag list by loading a file (host file set) that has been output from the Engineering Tool or via input by the user from the Individual Register window.

Flow of Device Tag List Registration

The figure below shows the operation flow of device tag list and device information registration.
Start of operation

Display the Field Device Tag List Table Register window.

Can Host File Set be accessed from Engineering Tool ? Yes Read the Host File Set from the Engineering Tool using the Read to Device Tag List function.

Display the Individual Field Device Tag Register window.

Enter all items needed for registration in the device tag list. Display the Individual Field Device Tag Register window.

Enter the unit name, loop name and user comment.

Update the Field Device Tag List Table Register window.

End of operation
060301E.EPS

Figure Flow of Device Tag List Registration

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-22

Field Device Tag List Table Register Window and Individual Register Window
On the [Fieldbus Device Tag List Table Register] window, the [Individual Field Device Tag Register] window can be called up. The Host File Set exported from Fiedbus Engineering Tool can be fetched for accessing the device configuration or updating the device list. The [Individual Field Device Tag Register] window can register the configuration for each Fieldbus device individually.

Table Register Window

Listed below are the functions that can be executed in the Table Register window: Field Device Tag List Table Register Individual Device Tag Register Read Host File Set Export from Engineering Tool Update Device Tag List Call Read Device Information Dialog Box and read device information
Field Device Tag List Table Register Device Tag Name Segment Name Segment1 1 F101 Segment1 2 F102 Segment1 3 F103 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Address 0x15 0x16 0x17

Device No. 1 Yo 2 Yo 3 Yo

060302E.EPS

Figure Field Device Tag List Table Register Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-23

Individual Field Device Register Window

Listed below are the items to be set in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window: Register a device information
Individual Field Device Tag Register Device Tag Name Segment Name : : F101 Segment1

Address Device No. Vendor Name Model Name Unit Name Loop Name User Comment

: : : : : : :

0x15 1

Delete(D)

Resister(E)

Copy(C)

060303E.EPS

Figure Individual Field Device Tag Register Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-24

Items Registered in Device Tag List

The table below shows the items registered in the device tag list and the description of each item.
Table Table of Items Registered in Device Tag List Item Device tag name Segment name Address Device No. Vendor name Model name Unit name Loop name User comment
*1: *2:

Description Name of the device tag. The Device Management Tool identifies the device using this device tag name. Name assigned for the H1 fieldbus (*1). Address of a device in the segment. Logical number assigned for a device in the H1 fieldbus (*2). Name of the device manufacturer. Official designation of the device. Name of the unit in which the device is installed. Name of the loop in which the device is located. Comment for the device assigned by the user.

Registration (*3) Required Required Required Required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required
060304E.EPS

*3:

Called project name in the Engineering Tool. Device number is one of the items in the device tag list and indicates a logical number assigned for a device in the H1 fieldbus (by the segment). Device numbers are determined by the Engineering Tool: numbers are assigned sequentially for the device tags defined in each segment, starting from the one with the largest address. In the Device Management Tool, set a device number that has been defined for the target device tag in the manner described above. For example, the devices with addresses of 0xF7, 0xF6, 0xE2 and 0xE1 can be numbered as 1, 2, 3 and 4. The device number is set automatically if the host file set is read from the Engineering Tool. If a device tag at an address in the middle of existing device addresses is deleted or a new device added at an address in the middle, the device numbers of the affected device tags must be changed in the applicable segment. This is normally done by reading the host file set for the segment again from the Engineering Tool. Since devices are assigned sequentially from the largest address, adding a device does not normally affect the device numbers of the existing device tags. Items indicated Not required can be omitted. Set these items if necessary.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-25

Registering Device Information

Device information can be registered in the device tag list in the two ways listed below. When the registration is complete, update the device tag list. Reading from the Engineering Tool Input by the user from the Individual Field Device Tag Register window

Reading from Engineering Tool

Host File Set output from the Engineering Tool can be accessed from Device Management Tool. Information for most items in the fieldbus device tag list can be obtained from the Engineering Tool. For the device information items to be registered in the device tag list but cannot be obtained from the Engineering Tool can be input by the user in the registration window. The table below shows the items that can be obtained from the Engineering Tool host file set.
Table Items Read from Engineering Tool Item Device tag name Segment name Address Device No. Vendor name Model name Unit name Loop name User comment Reading Can be read Can be read Can be read Can be read Can be read Can be read Cannot be read Cannot be read Cannot be read Remarks Must be registered in the device tag list. Must be registered in the device tag list. Must be registered in the device tag list. Must be registered in the device tag list. Need not be registered in the device tag list. Need not be registered in the device tag list. Need not be registered in the device tag list. Input by the user if registered in the device tag list. Need not be registered in the device tag list. Input by the user if registered in the device tag list. Need not be registered in the device tag list. Input by the user if registered in the device tag list.
060305E.EPS

User Input from Individual Field Device Tag Register Window

If the Engineering Tool does not reside in the same system, the Host File Set exported from Engineering Tool can not be accessed by Device Management Tool via network, information can be entered by the user from the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. This applies even when the Engineering Tool is available in the same system, if the item to be registered cannot be obtained from the host file sets in the Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-26

Updating Device Tag List

The device tag list consists of three databases: device tag list work file, device tag list master file and device information. The details of the fieldbus devices shown in the device tag list display windows reflect the contents stored in the master file. On the other hand, maintenance operations performed to the device tag list (registration, change and deletion) affect the contents of the work file. The contents of the work file are reflected in the master file when the user performs update operation. At the same time, they are also reflected in the database which the Device Management Tool uses for communication with fieldbus devices. When reading information, selecting [Undo] in the Read to Device Tag List dialog box overwrites the work file with the contents of the master file. This operation discards the current contents of the work file and replaces them with the contents of the last updated master file.
Field Device Tag List Registration windows Field Device Tag List Display windows

Edit the device tag list Update the device tag list Device Tag List work file [Undo]

Display the device tag list Update the device tag list Device Tag List master file

Device Tag List device information

Export Read device information Text file in CSV format

060306E.EPS

Figure Mechanism of Updating Fieldbus Device Tag List

IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00e

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-27

Reading Device Information

Device information refers to the definition information of a fieldbus device needed for the Device Management Tool to communicate with the physical fieldbus devices. Device information can be obtained from the applicable fieldbus devices when the device tag list is updated and stored in the device database. When the device information of a fieldbus device is obtained, the block tag parameters of the device can be displayed in the Parameter Display window.

Read Device Information Window

Whether or not to obtain applicable device information when updating the device tag list can be set in the Environment Set dialog box of the Device Management Tool. Device information cannot be obtained if the setting in the Environment Set dialog box is not made to Read device information when updating the device tag list. Even when it is set to read device information, information will not be obtained if the target fieldbus device is not connected. In the latter case, use the Read Device Information window to obtain device information from the fieldbus device after it is physically connected. Also use the Read Device Information window after updating the device information, such as adding a block tag to a device. Device information can be read by the segment or all at once for all devices in all segments. If the information is read by the segment, whether to read information by the device or all at once for all devices in the segment can be selected. Reading device information takes longer if many devices are specified. The information is normally read by the segment. It normally takes around 45 seconds to read device information for one device.
Read Device Information Object Device Segment Unit Segment1 Select All Device Select Device F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 All Device of All Segment

Read

Stop

Cancel

060307E.EPS

Figure Read Device Information Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-28

Checking Entered Data

The data entered in the device tag list via registration operation are checked in terms of the following items. If an error is found in the data entered, a message etc. will appear to notify the user.

Checking for Range Data

The range of data is checked when the data is entered in the field. Address: Device no.: 0x15 to 0xF7 (21 to 247) 1 to 32

Checking for Missing Data Items

The device tag data entered is checked to see if the following items are included: Device tag name Segment name Address Device no.

Checking for Data Consistency

The device tag data entered is checked to see if there are identical entries within the segment for the following items: Address Device no.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-29

6.3.2

Auto Setup
Auto Setup can be used for automatically register the information configured for the devices.

Automatic Registration to Device List

Auto Setup

Using Auto Setup, device list registration and the followed works can be done automatically. Using Auto Setup, the Environment Setting, Device Information registration, Device List Update and Device Information Refreshing will be performed automatically, moreover, the statuses of Fieldbus devices will be displayed. SEE ALSO
For more information about registering device tag list, see 6.3.1, Device Tag List Registration.

Environment Set
For registering device tag list, it is necessary to designate the directories where the Host File Set of Fieldbus Engineering Tool Locates. The directories can be designated on Environment Set dialog box. When starting Auto Setup, the dialog box for Environment Setting will open. However, the option for opening the Environment Set dialog box by Auto Setup starting needs to be checked. SEE ALSO
For more information about environment setting, see 6.11, Environment Setting.

Registering Configured Device Information

The configured device information can be read from Host File Set for registering into device list. To register the configured information of all segments together or to register the configured information of each individual segment is selectable. The configured device information will be registered as follows vary with the conditions of segments. The information already registered will not be registered again. Registration for that information will skip. If there is more than one set of configurations under the same device tag name, the latest one will be registered for the device. Moreover, when access to Host File Set for the information of a segment fails, an error message will display. It will skip the failed segment and continue to access information of the rest segments.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-30

Device List Update

Based on the information of configured devices registered in the device list work file, device list master file and device information may be updated. When updating the device list fails, an error message will display and Auto Setup will abort.

Fetching Device Information

The device information can be fetched from the filed devices. The devices, whose information has already fetched, will not be fetched again. Fetching the device information can be performed on the window for fetching the device information. Moreover, when accessing a device information fails, or when communication to a device fails, an error message occurs. In this case, it will skip the failed device and fetch to the information of the rest devices.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-31

6.3.3

Device Tag List Display

The device tag list display function allows the contents of device tags to be displayed all at once as a list or individually for each device tag.

Field Device Tag List Table Display Window

The following functions are available in the Field Device Tag List Table Display window.

Sorting Items in Field Device Tag List Table Display

Normally the Field Device Tag List Table Display window shows devices by the segment in the order of device tag names. In this window showing fieldbus devices, the devices can be sorted using the segment, address and device tag name as the keys. Sorting can be performed in ascending order or descending order of the address. Up to three sorting conditions can be specified.

Search/Filtering Items in Field Device Tag List Table Display

Normally the Field Device Tag List Table Display window shows all devices. In a fieldbus device tag list, specific devices can be displayed through filtering, using the segment, vendor name and unit name as filtering conditions. A wildcard character (*) can be specified when filtering strings (this character cannot be used for addresses and device numbers). For example, specify *ABC* to find strings that have ABC in the middle. Up to three filtering conditions can be specified. If multiple conditions are specified, and or or can be specified as an operator.
Field Device Tag List Table Register Device Tag Name Segment Name Segment1 1 F101 Segment1 2 F102 Segment1 3 F103 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Address Device No. Vendor Name Model Name 0x15 1 0x16 2 0x17 3

060308E.EPS

Figure Field Device Tag List Table Display Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-32

Individual Field Device Tag List Display Window

The Individual Field Device Tag Display window shows the contents of each device tag.
Individual Field Device Tag Display Device Tag Name Segment Name : : F101 Segment1

Address Device No. Vendor Name Model Name Unit Name Loop Name User Comment

: : : : : : :

0x15 1

060309E.EPS

Figure Individual Field Device Tag Display Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-33

6.4

Fieldbus Device Status Display

Device Status Display

The status of multiple segments can be displayed in a list. The status of each segment indicates the representative status of fieldbus devices in that segment. The user can also specify a segment to show the status of fieldbus devices in the segment. Use the Device Status Display window to monitor the operating condition of fieldbus devices.

Fieldbus Device Status Display

The Device Status Display window for monitoring fieldbus devices may monitor different type of devices when monitoring on an HIS or a master PC and when monitoring on a slave PC. From an HIS or a master PC, only the devices whose function block is connected to FCS process I/O terminals, at least one process data item of the block is connected FCS process I/O, can be monitored. For the devices beyond the monitoring scope, their information may be referred to on the Parameter Display windows and on the Message Display windows. All the devices in the same fieldbus segment of the slave PC can be monitored on slave PC. However, the fieldbus devices with abnormalities are beyond the monitoring scope.
*1: Do not use the message window if the upper level system is STARDOM.

The figure below shows the Device Status Display window.

Device Ststus Display Select Segment Device Tag Name Segment1 Segment2 Segment3 F101 F102 F103 Status READY READY NOT READY

10/10/11 14:49:23

Enable Auto Update

Period

sec.

Update(P)
060401E.EPS

Figure Device Status Display Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-34

Device Status Display HIS or Master PC

Device Status Display window have the following items using different marks and different character strings to reflect the status of devices on HIS or on Master PC.

Representative Status Display for Segment HIS or Master PC

Normal: + (green) is displayed. This symbol is displayed if all fieldbus devices in the segment are normal. (The status of devices not monitored will be ignored. If none of the fieldbus devices in the segment are monitored, this symbol will be displayed.) Abnormal: !(red) is displayed. This symbol is displayed if at least one of the fieldbus devices in the segment is abnormal. A fieldbus device whose power is off is considered abnormal. Status unavailable: ? (black) is displayed. This symbol is displayed when the status of fieldbus device in the segment is not available caused by an FCS power failure or a communication error, or by the discrepancies in device tag list definitions or control bus configuration definitions.

Device Status Display HIS or Master PC

Normal: Abnormal: + (green) and READY are displayed. - (red) and NOT_READY are displayed.

Status unavailable: ? and COM_ERROR are displayed. These are displayed for all devices in the segment if the status of the segment cannot be determined. Not monitored: No symbol. ===== is displayed. From an HIS or a master PC, when the devices to be monitored has not connection with the process I/O, this mark displays because they are out of the monitoring scope.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-35

Device Status Display Slave PC

Device Status Display window have the following items using different marks and different character strings to reflect the status of devices on Slave PC.

Representative Status Display for Segment Slave PC

Device Status Display Slave PC

Normal: + (green) and READY are displayed. This is displayed if the fieldbus devices in the segment connected to the Slave PC are all normal. Not monitored: No symbol. ===== is displayed. From an HIS or a master PC, when the devices to be monitored has not connection with the process I/O, this mark displays because they are out of the monitoring scope. Status unavailable: ? and COM_ERROR are displayed. These are displayed for all devices in the segment if the status of the segment cannot be determined.

Updating Display
The Device Status Display window shows the Fieldbus devices statuses when the first time the window is opened. Thereafter, auto updating the device information or manual updating device information can be set on the Device Status Display window.

Auto Update
When Enable Auto Update option is checked, the device information will be updated at the designated period.

Manual Update
When Enable Auto Update option is not checked, the device information can only be updated manually, by clicking [Update] button on the window or clicking [Update] on [Data] menu.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-36

6.5

Fieldbus Device Parameter Display and Setting

The block tag parameters can be displayed in the Parameter Display window. The type of parameters displayed varies depending on the sensor type (sensor, positioner or analyzer) and the type of function block. Values can be set or changed for some parameters.
Parameter Display Device Tag Name Segment Name Block Tag Name Block Type Operation Dynamic Operation Static F101 Segmnt1 FIC101 PID All Dynamic Other Static Specify Prameter Set(S) Update(I)

Date and time of last update Parameter name Element name

98/03/02 6:04:22 PM

MODE_BLK Target Actual Permit Normal BLOCK_ERR : PV status value SP status

= MAN : MAN = = : GOOD : 9.8 = GOOD

Data
060501E.EPS

Figure Parameter Display Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-37

Parameters for Display

Specific parameters of fieldbus devices are described in DD file, the directory where DD files are placed can be specified on Environment Settings window. The parameters and the function blocks for displaying the parameters are effected as follows if the DD files are not placed in the specified directory.

When DD Files are Placed in the Specified Directory

When DD files for fieldbus device are placed in the specified directory, the following three types of blocks will be available for parameter display. Resource Block Function Block Transducer Block If Transducer Blocks are not displayed, it is necessary to enable [Show Transducer Blocks] on the Environment Setting dialog box of Fieldbus Engineering Tool, and to assign tag names for the blocks on the parameter editing dialog box of FB Editor, then download the settings. Furthermore, all parameters including the extra parameters added by fieldbus device vendors can be set for parameter display.

6-40

Display by Individual Specification

User can specify and display certain parameters. Parameters may be specified by keyboard entry or data menu selection. The user can also specify and display the parameters that are not grouped in the display group.

Parameter Display
Parameter Display

The Parameter Display window shows the items listed below. Device tag name Segment name Block tag name Block tag type Parameter name Element name Data (parameter value) All parameters of field devices may be displayed. Among the parameters, some of them are multi-dimensional with more elements or array type. The parameters displayed on the parameter window are as follows. TIP
Some parameters may changed while some others can not. For the parameters that can be changed, there is an equal mark [ = ] between the parameter name and parameter value. While for the parameters that can not be changed, there is a colon [ : ] between the parameter name and parameter value.

Simple Variable (Parameter with Single Datum)

The parameter display format: Parameter Name: Datum Value

Record (Parameter with Multiple Data)

The parameter display format: Parameter Name: Element Name : Data Element Name : Data :

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-41

Array of Simple Variables (Parameter with Multiple Data in an Array)

The parameter display format: Parameter Name: 1: Data 2: Data : Array Element Number: Data :

Parameter Setting
Parameters can be set only when they have the write-enable attribute. Values cannot be written to the parameters with the read-only attribute ( Read only is set in Other of the Parameter Attribute Table). When a parameter is set or changed, the parameter change is recorded as a history message. If necessary, enter the reason for change after changing a parameter value. The reason can be entered from the keyboard or selected from the data menu that displays the five reasons entered most recently. When the parameter data has been successfully set, the reason for the change is saved in the history message file. Furthermore, plus and minus infinite can be set by entering [+INF] and [-INF].

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-42

6.6

Run a Device Method

Device Method is a device specific script for describing how to control the device. Running a device method means to run the method embedded in the device. By running the device specific method, to reset, to calibrate, to check ranges can be performed by device itself. Running a device method can be started on the window for running methods.

Method
Method

Method
A device method is a control procedure configured by the device vendors for control or calibrate the devices. Besides controlling the device, It can runs like an wizard to prompt user to follow the preset procedures. The device method is configured in the DD file provided by vendors. The methods provided by vendors have the following types: A sequence of control procedures for the devices without vendor provided User Dialog Interface For an example, the device has its specific reset sequence. A sequence of control procedures for the devices with vendor provided User Dialog Interface. For an example, when using an external instrument to calibrate the device, a series of calibration procedures and compensation values can be entered via the vendor provided User Dialog Interface. Checking Ranges When Setting Parameters For an example, the parameters are not only limited by the High-Low limits, but also adjusted in accordance with other related parameters. Built-In Procedures for Parameter Settings (Actions) Vary with models of devices, the specific procedures for setting certain parameters may be required. The specific procedures are referred to as Actions. By running a method with built-in actions the operators can set the parameters without thinking about his own procedures. SEE ALSO
There are many kinds of methods providing various operations. For more information about those methods, please refer to the manuals provided by the vendors of the device.

Method Menu
More than one method can be provided for one device. The methods can be displayed in the method menu. To run a method, can select one from the method list in the method menu. Varying with devices, the method menu is in tree structure. The contents in a method and the structure of methods are defined in the DD file provided by the device vendors.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-43

Execute a Method
Methods can be executed from the method menu on Method Execution Window. On Method Execution Window, the various messages can be displayed, and the key entries for the methods are also possible.
METHOD EXECUTION WINDOWS File (F) Edit (E) Options (O)

F101 FIC100 TOP MENU METHOD 1 TOP MENU 2 SUB MENU 1 ST_REV TAG_DESC SUB MENU 2 + SUB MENU 3 +

###Start of Menu: 12/02/99 11:12:01 F101 FIC100 TOP MENU METHOD 1 ### Do you continue to execute? 1. Yes 2. No 3. Assign Test 4. Add And Remove Abort Method 5. Send Value Test 6. for Loop Test 7. Other 1 2 Selected: 1(Yes) <<get_unsigned_value>> Success 1 <<get_string_value>> Success

Input :

060601E.EPS

Figure Method Execution Window

Method Execution and Display

In method menu tree display area, the methods of the device are displayed in TreeView. The objects on the TreeView are in the descending hierarchies. Device Tag Block Tag Menu Submenu For some devices submenu is not available. The menu name or the submenu name displayed at the bottom is the menu for the method to be executed. Clicking on this menu may start the method.

IMPORTANT
For the device that running a method, user may start other applications to access the same device. When the two tasks are conflict to each other, the device may not act reliably. User should be well aware of the consequences and doing this under users responsibility.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-44

Message Display
In method display area, the messages related to the running method will be displayed. The messages have the following types: Method execution start message When starting a method, the method name and run time will display. Dialog messages specific to each method The dialog messages built-in the running method will display. Event detection message When event occurs when running a method, the message for the event detection will display after aborting the method execution. When this happens, the method execution window should closed on. Method execution end message When method execution is completed, a message to show the end of method execution will display. The displayed messages will be stored in a buffer. The size of buffer is 32 Kbytes. When the messages exceeds the capacity of the buffer, the stored messages will be removed in FIFO manner. TIP
The messages are displayed in alphanumeric (1 byte) characters.

Dialog Interface with Key Entry and Password Entry

When starting a method with dialog interface, that allows key entry and password entry, the method will be in waiting state until the required key entries are performed. The text entered on the dialog box will be displayed on the message display area. The entered password will displayed with asterisk characters (*) in the method execution area.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-45

Method Execution for Accessing Parameters

On method Execution Window, the displayed parameter name used as method name can access (read and write) the parameter by starting the execution of the method. The parameter to be accessed is defined in DD file. TIP
Even if a method does not use the parameter name, the method can still access the parameter, if access the parameter is built-in the method, by starting the execution of the method.

When accessing parameters, normally, the parameters are displayed on the parameter display window. The differences between the parameter display window and the method execution window are as follows:
Table The Differences between Parameter Display Window and Method Execution Window Item Range of parameters Parameter range check Accessing parameters by Actions Usage Parameter Display Window All parameters and extra parameters Not available No Action Method Execution Window The parameters listed as menu names Available By Actions

Only the required parameters are It is convenient when displaying or setting all parameters on the window accessed via range check and Actions. and has better performance.
060602E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-46

6.7

Message Display
When the Device Management Tool is running, the fieldbus device alarms, fieldbus device events, process alarms, upload events and fieldbus communication module (ACF11 or ALF111) self-diagnostic testing error messages can be displayed.

IMPORTANT
Do not use the message window if the upper level system is STARDOM. In STARDOM system, the alarm messages received from fieldbus devices are treated as system alarms on VDS. The device management tool running in the slave PC does not support to display the above-mentioned messages.

Message Display Next data[N] Numb

All Data[A]

Re-read[O] Message

Date/Time

3001 98/02/04 4:41 PM FCS01 3150 98/02/04 1:15 PM

2 3112 98/02/03 3:24 PM 3 3112 98/02/03 3:20 PM 4 3111 98/02/03 2:57 PM 5 3111 98/02/03 2:52 PM 6

FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Device Error Device=FI1001 FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Update Event Type=09 Rev=000A Device=FI1001 Block=AI_601 Alert Key=1, Standard Type=UPDATE - Static data update, Mfr type=0, Message Type=Event Notification, Priority=2, Time Stamp=02/04/98 13:13:16.321, Revsion=10 FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Process Alarm Clear Device=FI1001 Block=AI_601 Alert Key=1, Standard Type=HI - High limit, Mfr type=0, Message Type=Alarm Clear, Priority=7, Time Stamp=02/03/98 15:24:34.083, Subcode=0, Value=79.493683, Units=6810 FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Process Alarm Clear Device=FI1001 Block=AI_601 Alert Key=1, Standard Type=HIHI - Critical high limit, Mfr type=0, Message Type=Alarm Clear, Priority=8, Time Stamp=02/03/98 15:23:13.086, Subcode=0, Value=89.358665, Units=6810 FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Process Alarm Occur Type=04 Device=FI1001 Block=AI_601 Alert Key=1, Standard Type=HIHI - Critical high limit, Mfr type=0, Message Type=Alarm Occur, Priority=8, Time Stamp=02/03/98 14:54:42.111, Subcode=0, Value=98.490501, Units=6810 FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Process Alarm Occur Type=02 Device=FI1001 Block=AI_601 Alert Key=1, Standard Type=HI - High limit, Mfr type=0, Message Type=Alarm Occur, Priority=7, Time Stamp=02/03/98 14:53:10.080, Subcode=0, Value=85.425720, Units=6810

060701E.EPS

Figure Message Display Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-47

Acquiring and Displaying Messages

Message Display

The Device Management Tool may collect messages from HIS via the OPC or DDE server services and displays them in the Message Display window.

Acquiring Messages from HIS via OPC

Messages related to fieldbus devices are stored in the HISs historical message save file along with other messages managed in the HIS. These messages can be displayed on the HISs historical message report window. The Device Management Tool uses the HISs OPC server service to acquire messages from the HISs historical message save file in units of 500 messages. To display messages with the Device Management Tool, Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS) must be installed in the HIS. When the Message Display window is initially opened, the Device Management Tool acquires from the HIS the most recent 500 messages related to fieldbus. These messages are then displayed in the window and also stored in the work area. The messages are managed based on time and the serial number in the message. When data acquisition operation is performed again, additional 500 messages are acquired from the HIS and displayed. The messages acquired from the HIS by the latest data acquisition operation are added to the messages acquired by the previous acquisition and stored in the work area. If the user performs update operation by clicking on the [Re-read (O)] button, the most recent 500 messages will be acquired from the HIS and displayed. When clicking [Next Data] button, the next 500 messages can be displayed. If the [All data (A)] button is clicked in the update operation, all messages will be acquired from the HIS and displayed. Update operation clears the contents in the work area and displays the most recent messages instead. Clicking [All Data] may make HIS go through a thorough gathering, it will take a long time, so that it is better to click [Next Data] button for further messages. When updating all data, the working area is cleared first then the updated data are stored in the area.
Ethernet

HIS OPC Server

Master PC Device management tool

Device management tool

Historical message save file

Control bus

FCS

060702E.EPS

Figure Obtaining Messages from HIS via OPC

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-48

SEE ALSO
For more information about Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS), see M2 "OPC Interface" of Reference Option (IM 33S01B30-01E).

Acquiring Messages from HIS via DDE

Messages related to fieldbus devices are stored in the HISs historical message save file along with other messages managed in the HIS. These messages can be displayed on the HISs historical message report window. The Device Management Tool uses the HISs DDE server service to acquire messages from the HISs historical message save file in units of 64 messages. To display messages with the Device Management Tool, DDE open data interface package must be installed in the HIS. When the Message Display window is initially opened, the Device Management Tool acquires from the HIS the most recent 64 messages related to fieldbus. These messages are then displayed in the window and also stored in the work area. The messages are managed based on time and the serial number in the message. When data acquisition operation is performed again, additional 64 messages are acquired from the HIS and displayed. The messages acquired from the HIS by the latest data acquisition operation are added to the messages acquired by the previous acquisition and stored in the work area. If the user performs update operation by clicking on the [Re-read (O)] button, the most recent 64 messages will be acquired from the HIS and displayed. When clicking [Next Data] button, the next 63 messages can be displayed. If the [All data (A)] button is clicked in the update operation, all messages will be acquired from the HIS and displayed. Update operation clears the contents in the work area and displays the most recent messages instead. Clicking [All Data] may make HIS go through a thorough gathering, it will take a long time, so that it is better to click [Next Data] button for further messages. When updating all data, the working area is cleared first then the updated data are stored in the area.
Ethernet

HIS DDE Server

Master PC Device management tool

Device management tool

Historical message save file

Control bus

FCS

060703E.EPS

Figure Obtaining Messages from HIS via DDE

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-49

TIP
The DDE open data interface package for HIS uses the NetDDE server function. When the Device Management Tool on the master PC requests NetDDE communication to the NetDDE server on the HIS, a dialog box to enter user name and password will be displayed if the user name and password of the Windows running the Device Management Tool are different from those of the Windows running the NetDDE server. Enter the user name and password for the Windows running the NetDDE server to perform NetDDE communication. To suppress this dialog box, add the Windows user name and password on the master PC running the Device Management Tool, in the Windows on the HIS in which the NetDDE server is running. If the Device Management Tool is used on the same machine as the HIS, the dialog box to enter user name and password will not be displayed.

SEE ALSO
See M3, DDE Interface for the details of DDE open data interface packages in part M Options of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).

Display by Search
The message display function of the Device Management Tool can specify a specific period of time to search and display messages. Specify the beginning and end of the search period. If the beginning of search period is not specified, messages will be displayed from the most recent one. If the end of search period is not specified, the search target will include all messages up to the oldest one that is currently stored in the fieldbus Device Management Tool.

Restriction on Number of Messages

The Device Management Tool can save 3000 messages in the work area. Messages beyond this number cannot be acquired nor displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-50

Message Types and Contents

The table below shows the types and contents of messages that can be displayed using the message display function.
Table Messages Types and Contents
Message type Fieldbus device failure Recovery of Fieldbus Device to Normal ACF11 Self-diagnosed Failure ACF11 Configuration Failure Occurrence of an Update Event in ACF11 Occurrence of a Fieldbus Device Alarm Recovery of Fieldbus Devices to Normal Occurrence of Process Alarm from Fieldbus Devices Recovery of Fieldbus Devices from Process Alarm Update of Fieldbus Devices Contents An error in the fieldbus device itself or a bus communication error The fieldbus device has returned to normal state from error state. An error has occurred in the ACF11 due to inconsistent addresses, etc. An error in a database that has been downloaded An event generated by the ACF11 when its database is changed An alarm generated by the fieldbus device. It may be a configuration error, I/O error or memory error. The alarm generated by the fieldbus device has been cleared. An alarm generated by a fieldbus block. The event that occurs when the fieldbus block generates an alarm such as IOP (I/O open) and CLP (clamped status). The alarm generated by the fieldbus block has been cleared. An event that occurs in a fieldbus device when its configuration or fieldbus block setting is changed. An event that occurs when the write-enable/disable status of a fieldbus device is changed. The write-enable/disable status can be changed via the WRITE_LOCK switch of the device's resource block. An ALF111 internal error caused by address inconsistency and so on.
060704E.EPS

Change in Write Protection of Fieldbus Devices

ALF111 Self-diagnosis Error

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-51

Message Components
The table below shows the items that comprise a message. The items displayed and how they are treated in the history message display are explained.
Table Message Components
Item Message number Date and time Contents 4-digit decimal number (message number managed by the HIS) Date (yy/m/dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the message was received by the HIS. Device tag or block tag information (including ACF11 or ALF111 information) describing the message string in the HIS. Normally consists of 64 characters or less. May contain up to 256 characters. Alert Key Standard Type Mfr Type Message string Detailed alarm information (*2) Message Type Priority Time Stamp Subcode Value Relative Index Units Revision
060705E.EPS

HIS (*1)

*1: *2:

Indicates how the item is treated in the history message display. indicates that the item is displayed in the Historical Message Report window. indicates that the item is displayed as a hexadecimal string in the Historical Message Report window. The information is set in the fieldbus device based on the convention specified by the Fieldbus Foundation. Each item of detailed alarm information is represented by a hexadecimal number on the HIS, but it is converted to a character string when displayed in the Device Management Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-52

Detailed Alarm Information

The following explains the detailed information of alarms.

Alert Key
Indicates the ALERT_KEY parameter value as is.

Standard Type
Indicates the type of the alarm. A table of standard types is shown below.
Table Table of Standard Types

Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Undefined LO - Low limit HI - High limit

Character string

LO LO - Critical low limit HI HI - Critical high limit DV LO - Deviation low DV HI - Deviation high DISC - Discrete BLOCK - Block Alarm UPDATE - Static data update WRITE - Write protect changed. UPDATE- Link associate with function block UPDATE - Trend associate with block
060706E.EPS

Mfr Type
Indicates the name of the alarm using DD (Device Description) file.

Message Type
Indicates the type of the message (reason the alarm was generated). A table of message types is shown below.
Table Table of Message Types
Value 0 1 2 3 Undefined Event Notification Alarm Clear Alarm Occur
060707E.EPS

Character string

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-53

Priority
Alarm priority levels are indicated by 0 to 15. The methods to notify the alarm occurrence are stipulated for each level according to numbers of 0 to 15.

Time Stamp
Indicates the time the alarm was issued. TIP
The timestamp for alarms generated by fieldbus devices is indicated using GMT (time zone). To display alarms with the local time, the appropriate time zone must be specified in Windows system configuration. To specify the time zone, display the system properties from [System] in the HIS or PCs control panel. Set TZ as the systems environmental variable, together with its value. (To set the Japan time, set TZ as the variable and JST-9 as its value.) Note that setting the time zone in [Date and Time] in the HIS or PCs control panel does not set the systems environment variable to TZ; hence, the time of occurrence displayed with the alarms may not be correct.

Subcode
Indicates detailed information regarding the alarm. A list of subcodes is shown below.
Table Table of Subcodes
Bit string 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 Block Configuration Error Link Configuration Error Simulate Active Local Override Device Fail Safe Set Device Needs Maintenance Soon Input Failure/ process variable has BAD status Output Failure Memory Failure Lost Static Data Lost NV Data Readback Check Failure Device Needs Maintenance Power-up Out-of-Service
060708E.EPS

Character string

Value
The representative data of the alarm, displayed for an analog alarm or discrete alarm.

Relative Index
The relative index in the block for the parameter that generated the alarm.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-54

Units
The engineering unit of the representative data, displayed for an analog alarm or discrete alarm.

Revision
The new revision, displayed for an update event.

Message Display Format

The following shows the message display formats used on the HIS and in the Device Management Tool.

HIS
The messages displayed on the HIS are shown below.
Table Table of Fieldbus Messages (1/2) Message number 3001 3002 3011 3021 3050 3101 Message type Fieldbus Device Failure Recovery of Fieldbus Device to Normal ACF11Self-Diagnosed Failure ACF11 Configuration Failure Occurrence of an Update Event in ACF11 Occurrence of a Fieldbus Device Alarm Message format FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Device Error Device=xxxx FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Device Recover Device=xxxx FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx ACF Error Detected Type=xx Code=xxxx FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Configuration Error Type=xx Code=xxxx FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx ACF Update Event Type=xx Rev=xxxx FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Device Alarm Type=xx Code=xxxx Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1)

3102

FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Recovery of Fieldbus Devices Device Recover Code=xxxx to Normal Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1) FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Occurrence of Process Alarm Process Alarm Occur Type=xx from Fieldbus Devices Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1) FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Recovery of Fieldbus Devices Process Alarm Clear from Process Alarm Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1) Update of Fieldbus Devices FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Update Event Type=xx Rev=xxxx Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1)

3111

3112

3150

3160

FCSxxxx FB RIOx NODE xx SLOT xx Change in Write Protection of Write Protect Changed Type=xx Rev=xxxx Fieldbus Devices Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1)
060709E.EPS

*1:

Indicated by a hexadecimal number on the HIS.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<Toc> <Ind> Table Table of Fieldbus Messages (2/2)

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-55

Message number 3171

Message type Fieldbus Device Abnormal

Message format FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Device Alarm Type=xx Code=xxxx Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1)

3172

FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Fieldbus Device Recovered to Device Recover Normal Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1) Fieldbus Device Detected a Process Alarm The Process Alarm detected by the Fieldbus Device vanished FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Process Alarm Occur Type=xx Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1) FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Process Alarm Clear Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1)

3173

3174

3175

FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Fiedlbus Device Update Event Update Event Type=xx Rev=xxxx Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1) FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Enable/Disable Write Write Protect Changed Type=xx Protection of Fieldbus Device Device=xxxx Block=xxxx Detail=(*1) Fieldbus Device Failure Fieldbus Device Recovery ALF111 Self-diagnosis Error FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Device Error Device=xxxx FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx Device Recover Device=xxxx FCSxxxx FB FIOx NODE xx SLOT xx PORT xx ALF Error Detected Type=xx Code=xxxx
060710E.EPS

3176 3181 3182 3183

*1:

Indicated by a hexadecimal number on the HIS.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-56

Device Management Tool

The display format of messages in the Device Management Tool is shown below.
3150 98/02/04 1:13:24 PM FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Update Event Message number Date/time received by HIS Source station name Slot number Unit number Node number RIO bus number Type=09 Rev=000A Device=F101 Block=FIC101 Alert Key=1, Alert type Device revision number ALERT_KEY parameter value Block tag name Device tag name Standard Type=UPDATE - Static data update, Mtr type=0, Alarm value using DD file (Device Description) Alarm type Message Type=Event Notification, Priority=2, Priority Reason for message occurrence

Time Stamp=02/04/98 13:13:16.321, Revsion=10 Revision Alarm issue time

060711E.EPS

Figure An Example of a Message Display (Message No. 3150) : ACF11

3150 98/02/04 1:13:24 PM FCS01 FB RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 01 SLOT 01 Update Event Message number Date/time received by HIS Source station name Slot number Unit number Node number RIO bus number Type=09 Rev=000A Device=F101 Block=FIC101 Alert Key=1, Alert type Device revision number ALERT_KEY parameter value Block tag name Device tag name Standard Type=UPDATE - Static data update, Mtr type=0, Alarm value using DD file (Device Description) Alarm type Message Type=Event Notification, Priority=2, Priority Reason for message occurrence

Time Stamp=02/04/98 13:13:16.321, Revsion=10 Revision Alarm issue time

060712E.EPS

Figure An Example of a Message Display (Message No. 3150) : ALF111

The message number and message contents are same with the HIS. The message display format varies depending on the type of the message.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-57

6.8

Operational History Display

Operation History Display

This function is used to save in file the history messages that describe operations in the Device Management Tool, such as user login/logout and changing passwords and parameters. The history messages saved in the file can be viewed in the History Message Display window.

Contents of Display by History Message Display

The figure below shows the History Message Display window and the display contents.
Operational History Display 1 2 3 4 5 ID 1 2 1 2 1 DATE/TIME 98/02/04 8:01:48 PM 98/02/03 8:23:34 PM 98/02/03 8:02:32 PM 98/02/02 4:08:18 PM 98/02/02 9:03:24 PM Operational History Login Logout Login Logout Login User MASTER master master master master

060801E.EPS

Figure History Message Display Window

Display Order of History Messages

All history messages are displayed in descending order starting from the one that was issued most recently (DATE/TIME).

Format of History Message

The format of history message is shown below: ID, date/time, history message, user name, reason for change TIP
If the Device Management Tool was started without a login procedure, all history messages will show MASTER as their user name. Whether or not to perform a login procedure can be specified in the Environment Set dialog box of the Device Management Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-58

Components of History Message Display and Meaning of History Message ID

The table below shows the elements that comprise a history message.
Table Components of History Message Display Item ID DATE/TIME User Name Modified by: Description Predefined ID number corresponding to the type of the history message. 2-digit decimal number yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss Name of the user who is currently logged in. Can be specified for parameter setting only.
060802E.EPS

Opertopnal history Contents of the history message. A variable-length character string.

The table below shows the meaning of each history message ID.
Table Meanings of History Message Event IDs
ID 1 2 3 11 21
*1:

Operation Login Logout Changing password Setting parameter Login Logout Password Change

History message format

Segment:Segment1 Device:P101 PIC101 OUT.Value=20.0Pa (*1)

Updating device tag list Device List Update

060803E.EPS

The underlined portions vary depending on the device tag name and parameter type.

Number of History Messages Saved

Up to 1000 history messages can be saved. When the number of messages saved reaches 1000, the oldest history message will be deleted every time a new history message is generated.

Search/Filtering of History Messages

Specific history messages can be displayed through filtering, using the event ID, time of occurrence and user name as filtering conditions. All items of history message display can be used as filtering conditions. A wildcard character (*) can be specified when finding strings (except for ID searches). For example, specify *ABC* to find strings that have ABC in the middle.

Database Output
The user can output the history messages saved in the file to a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Value) format (i.e., export the history messages). The output file can be retrieved in any application software prepared by the user (e.g., Microsoft Excel).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-59

6.9

Event Display
Event Display

The events generated in the Device Management Tool, such as communication errors will be saved into a file and the contents of the file can be viewed in the Event Display window.

Contents of Display by Event Display

The figure below shows the Event Display window and the display contents.
Event Display Issue Date
1 98/02/02 3:01:30 PM 2 98/02/02 3:01:30 PM 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Program Name
YKLIBC_FALIB YKLIBC_DBACCESS

Event Type Event Content Event Details Function ID

Error Error 0x19000F 0x19000F 0x0 0x0 0xC01 0xE01

060901E.EPS

Figure Event Display Window

Display Order of Events

All history events are displayed in descending order starting from the one that was issued most recently.

Components of Event Display

The table below shows the elements that comprise an event.
Table Components of Event Display
Item Issue date Program name Event type Event contents Event details Function ID Supplement yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss Name of the program in which the event occurred Type of the event Description of the event Details of the event ID number of the function that caused the event Supplementary information regarding the event
060902E.EPS

Description

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-60

Number of Events Saved

Up to 512 events can be saved. When the number of events saved reaches 512, the oldest event will be deleted every time a new event is generated.

Search/Filtering of Events
Specific events can be displayed through filtering, using the event ID, time of occurrence and program name as filtering conditions. All items of event display can be used as filtering conditions. A wildcard character (*) can be specified when finding strings (except for function ID searches). For example, specify *ABC* to find strings that have ABC in the middle.

Event Content and Event Detail When Event Type Indicates Error
When [Event Type] is indicated as Error, the error code will be displayed in the column of [Event Content]. Some error codes may have detailed codes displayed in the column of [Event Details]. The descriptions of error codes categorized by the programs they were generated are explained as follows Further more, the following two types of errors are classified according to the cause of the errors. Setting Errors: The errors occurred because the user had not set the parameters. Comm. Errors: The errors occurred because of the abnormalities in the communication of Control Bus, RIO Bus and H1 Fieldbus.

Window Program (ProgramName: YKLIBC_WINDOW) errors

Table Window Program (ProgramName: YKLIBC_WINDOW) errors

Error code 0x23 0x24

Description Error occurred when window sends a request to HIS DDE server. Error occurred when window sends a request for printout

Type Setting Error

060903E.EPS

Fieldbus Access OCX (ProgramName: YKLIBC_FAOCX) errors

Table Fieldbus Access OCX (ProgramName: YKLIBC_FAOCX) errors
Error code 0x130009 0x130024 Timeout Use default DD Description Type Comm.Error Setting Error
060904E.EPS

Fieldbus Access Library (ProgramName: YKLIBC_FALIB) errors

Table Fieldbus Access Library (ProgramName: YKLIBC_FALIB) errors
Error code 0x140022 Use default DD Description Type Setting Error
060905E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-61

Parameter Change Library (ProgramName: YKLIBC_PARAM) errors

The following error messages only occur when applying Device Management Tools on slave PC.
Table Parameter Change Library (ProgramName:YKLIBC_PARAM) errors
Error Code 0x150011 0x150201 0x150213 0x150221 0x150226 0x150234 0x150235 0x150239 0x150242 0x150249 0x15024A 0x15024B 0x150257 0x150258 0x150259 0x15025A 0x15025B 0x15025C 0x15025D 0x150263 0x150267 0x150273 0x150275 0x150281 0x150292 0x150293 0x150299 0x15029A 0x15029B Error Code Description Specified data length is not long enough for received frame. OpenSession return E_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING OpenPhysicalDevice return E_NOT_FOUND GetVFDList return E_COMM_ERROR GetVFDList return E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST OpenVFD return E_COMM_ERROR OpenVFD return E_NOT_FOUND OpenVFD return E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST Read return E_NOT_FOUND Read return E_COMM_ERROR Read return E_PARAMETER_CHECK Read return E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST Write return E_COMM_ERROR Write return E_PARAMETER_CHECK Write return E_EXCEED_LIMIT Write return E_WRONG_MODE_FOR_REQUEST Write return E_WRITE_IS_PROHIBITED Write return E_DATA_NEVER_WRITABLE Write return E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST OpenLink return E_NOT_FOUND OpenLink return E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST GetDeviceList return E_COMM_ERROR GetDeviceList return E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST Can not find the tag at the address designated by GetPdTag GetObjectDescription return E_NOT_FOUND GetObjectDescription return E_OBJECT_ACCESS_DENIED GetObjectDescription return E_COMM_ERROR GetObjectDescription return E_PARAMETER_CHECK GetObjectDescription return E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST Description Type
060906E.EPS

Type

Comm.Error

Setting Error

Comm.Error

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-62

Fieldbus Library (ProgramName: YKLIBC_FBLIB) errors

Table Fieldbus Library (ProgramName: YKLIBC_FBLIB) errors

Error code 0x160002 0x160012 0x160013 0x160016

Description Received a Negative Confirmation Unknown Confirmation Received data size abnormal Received an ABORT Confirmation

Type

Setting Error

060907E.EPS

Control Bus Communication Library (ProgramName:YKLIBC_YKCOMCTLBUS) Errors

Table Control Bus Communication Library (ProgramName:YKLIBC_YKCOMCTLBUS) Errors
Error code 0xF10011 0xF10012 0xF10108 0xF1010A 0xF1010D Communication error v_sts error i_return error Communication error between FCS and ACF11/ALF111.
060908E.EPS

Description Unregistered segment name

Type Setting Error

Comm.Error

Control Bus Communication Library (ProgramName:YKLIBC_YKCOMCTLBUS) Errors STARDOM

Table Control Bus Communication Library (ProgramName:YKLIBC_YKCOMCTLBUS) Errors STARDOM
Detailed code 0xF10011 0xF10012 0xF10103 0xF10104 0xF10105 0xF10106 0xF10107 0xF10108 0xF1010D 0xF1010F Communication error TCP/IP connection error VCR logic connection error VCR logic disconnection error TCP/IP disconnection error HSE send error HSE receive error i_return error Communication error between FCN/FCJ and NFLF111.
060909E.EPS

Description Unregistered segment name

Type Setting error

Comm.Error

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-63

Database Manager Create (ProgramName: YKLIBC_DBCREATE) errors

Table Database Manager Create (ProgramName: YKLIBC_DBCREATE) errors

Error code 0x18001f 0x180020

Description No segment name has registered in device list Segment name or device tag has not registered

Type Setting Error

060912E.EPS

Database Manager Access (ProgramName: YKLIBC_DBACCESS) errors

Table Database Manager Access (ProgramName: YKLIBC_DBACCESS) errors

Error code 0x190009 0x19000a 0x19000b 0x190017

Description Device tag can not be found for the device number Not registered Device tag Not registered Block name Use default DD

Type

Setting Error

060913E.EPS

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-64

6.10 Configuration of Control Bus

When HIS or master PC is required to communicate with Control Bus, the control bus needs to be configured. Control Bus Configuration Window can be called up from Device Management Tool. For slave PC, there is no need to configure control bus.

Calling Up Control Bus Configuration Window

The window for configuring the control bus can be called up from Device Management Tool. SEE ALSO
For more information about control bus configuration, see section Configuring Control Bus (Settings after Installation) in 8.1, Installing Fieldbus Tools.

TIP
Control bus configuration window is not available for STARDOM. Resource Configurator is used for configuring STARDOM control network.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-65

6.11 Environment Setting

Environment Setting

Certain items must be set before using the Device Management Tool. They include items related to directory and DDE Server specification and those related to option specification. TIP
With STARDOM, OPC/DDE server cannot be configured.

Directory, OPC Server and DDE Server Specification Items

The directory, OPC and DDE server specification items are as follows. Directory for the backup file is to be saved. Directory for the host file set created by Engineering Tool. Path of the directory for DD file OPC/DDE server selection Computer name of the HIS that runs OPC server service. Select a station that runs DDE server, HIS or ICS. Computer name of the HIS that runs DDE server service. Environment Set window for Auto Setup In the Environment Set dialog box, several items can be specified other than the DDE server, such as the backup file and host file set directories, as well as the options to select whether or not to use the Login window and read device information when updating the device tag list.
Environment Set

Directory/OPC/DDE Server
Directory Backup File HostFileSet DD File OPC/DDE Server OPC Server Computer Name DDE Server HIS(CS 1000/CS 3000) Computer Name ICS(CS) File[ICS.EXE]

Option

Refer to... Refer to... Refer to...

Refer to...

Cancel

061101E.EPS

Figure Environment Set Dialog Box (Directory/OPC/DDE)

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-66

Directory for Backup File

When creating a backup for the database using the maintenance function, specify a path for the backup file.

Directory of Host File Set

Specify the directory where the host file set created by the Engineering Tool exists. However, if the CS 3000 system has ALF111 filedbus communication module, this directory should be the same directory that holds the host file set designated on fieldbus builder. The contents of the host file set are read by the Device Management Tool via the device tag list registration function. When specifying the host file directory, specify the directory where the host file set is stored. The host file set located in this directory becomes the target of read. The location of host file set and the directory to be specified are shown below.

IMPORTANT
If a copy of the host file set, created for backup purposes, etc., is placed in the directory specified as the target of read, the file will also be read to the device tag list. Therefore, do not place any files in the specified directory other than the original host file set created automatically by the Engineering Tool, CS 3000 system builder or fieldbus builder.

Specified directory

.......

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-68

Select a Station (HIS or ICS) that Runs DDE Server

Set the DDE server from which the messages to be displayed are obtained. Select either of the following two items as the message source (CS). HIS (CS 1000/CS 3000) ICS (CS) In the case of a CS1000/CS 3000 system, select HIS (CS 1000/CS 3000) and enter the name of the HIS computer on which the DDE server is running.

Computer Name of the HIS that Runs DDE Server

If DDE server is in an HIS, the computer name of the HIS needs to entered. TIP
This is also required when device management tool is running in a HIS. For a HIS or a master PC, when installing for the first time, the OPC server is selected by default. However, when upgrading, the DDE server is selected which was the default selection of the previous version.

Environment Setting Dialog Display for Auto Setup

When Auto Setup is started, calling up the Environment Setting dialog box or not can be specified. The default setting is not calling up the environment setting dialog box.

Option Specification Items

The option specification items include the following two: Show or hide the Login window Specification to read device information
Environment Set Directory/OPC/DDE Server Login Login Window Option

Read Device Information Execute Reading Device Information when the device list is updated

This dialog is displayed at Auto Setup

Cancel

061105E.EPS

Figure Environment Set Dialog Box (Option Tab)

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-69

Show or Hide Login Window

Specify whether to show or hide the Login window when the Device Management Tool is started. The default setting is to show the Login window. To use the Device Management Tool in non-security application, change the setting so that the Login window will not to be displayed. With this setting, the user who started the Device Management Tool can perform all operations available in the tool. In this application, the History Message Display window shows MASTER as the user name for all messages.

Specification to Read Device Information

Specify whether or not to read the applicable device information when updating the device tag list after registration operation. The default setting is to read device information. When registering fieldbus devices in the device tag list before they are connected, it is more efficient not to select this specification because unnecessary communication can be spared. In this case, the corresponding device information must be read from the Read Device Information window after a fieldbus device is physically connected.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-70

6.12 Maintenance
The following explains the maintenance function of the Device Management Tool. The following three maintenance functions are provided: Creating a backup and restoring the database Optimizing and repairing the database Deleting a backup database

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-71

6.12.1 Creating Backup and Restoring Database

The contents registered by the user can be saved as a backup database and restored. The backup contents will be saved in the directory specified by the user in the Environment Set dialog box. The backup contents can be deleted.

Database Items to Be Saved

The items listed below can be backed up all at once: Contents of device tag list registration (master file and work file) Contents of user registration (including the password set for each user) Contents of user group registration History messages

Restoring Database
This function overwrites the current database with the backup database. If an error occurs in the database for some reason, the database can be restored to its original state by restoring the backup database.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-72

6.12.2 Optimizing and Repairing Database

The database in which the user registration contents are saved can be optimized and repaired.

Optimizing Database
Optimizing the database in which the entered contents are saved reduces the memory capacity used for the database. Optimize the database after registration is completed or before exporting it. The database will be optimized automatically when it is backed up.

Repairing Database
If an error occurs for some reason, the database can be repaired when possible. If the database is not repairable, recreate the database or restore it from the backup database.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-73

6.12.3 Deleting Database

The backup databases created by the maintenance function can be deleted. Use this function to delete unnecessary backups.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-74

6.13 Data Export

The export function is used to output data used in the Device Management Tool so that they can be used by other software (e.g., Microsoft Excel).

Data to Be Exported
The following data managed by the Device Management Tool can be exported: Contents of the device tag list master file Messages History messages

Output Format
Data is output from the Device Management Tool in CSV (Comma Separated Value) format. TIP
The Office2000 or Office97 software programs listed below can run properly on the HIS or the PC in which the fieldbus tools (Device Management Tool and Engineering Tool) are installed: Word and Excel Date/time data is always output in yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss format. The output is not affected by the local setting (short format date) in the control panel.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-75

6.14 Printout
The contents (reports) displayed by each function of the Device Management Tool can be printed. Reports are printed with the date/time of print and page number.

Print Contents
The table below shows the contents printed by each function of the Device Management Tool.
Table Table of Print Contents Item Device tag list table display Individual device tag list display Device status display Message display Parameter display Operational history display Event display Field device tag list table register Print contents Contents of the field device tag list table display currently shown (contents of the master file) Contents of the individual field device tag display currently shown (contents of the master file) Status of the devices in the segment which is currently selected in the fieldbus Device Status Display window List of messages to be displayed in the Message Display window The device tag, block tag and contents of the selected tab strip being displayed in the Parameter Display window List of history messages to be displayed in the History Message Display window List of events to be displayed in the Event Display window Contents of the field device tag list table registration currently displayed (contents of the work file)

Individual field device tag Contents of the individual field device tag registration currently displayed register (contents of the work file) User register User group register Contents of user registration Contents of user group registration
061401E.EPS

A report title is printed at the top of the report. The date/time of print and page number will also be added. TIP
Date/time data is always printed in yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss format. The output is not affected by the local setting (date: short format) in the control panel.

Print Preview
How the printed data will look can be checked in the window using the print preview function.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-76

6.15 On-line Help

This function allows the user to display explanations of functions and operations related to the Device Management Tool.

Displaying On-line Help

To display the On-line Help window, select [Help (H)] from the menu bar in the Device Management Tools main window. The following items are available: Using Online Manual Definition Items Fieldbus Manual Version Information TIP
When using online help, the Fieldbus Online Documents need to be installed. When CS 1000/CS 3000 system and the fieldbus tools (engineering tools and device management tools) or when STARDOM system and the fieldbus tools are applied in the same PC, the Acrobat Reader in the CS 1000/CS 3000 system CD-ROM or in the STARDOM system CD-ROM should be used.

SEE ALSO
For more information about installing the Fieldbus Online Document, see chapter 8, Installation of Tools.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-77

6.16 Starting/Exiting Device Management Tool

The following explains the procedures for starting and exiting the Device Management Tool.

Starting Device Management Tool

When starting the Device Management Tool on HIS or master PC, select [Fieldbus Tool] [Device Management Tool] from [Programs (P)] in the start menu. While when starting Device Management Tool on slave PC, select [Fieldbus Tool] - [Device Management Tool H1] from [Programs (P)] in the start menu. The Device Management Tool will be started and the Login window will be displayed. TIP
The Login window will not be displayed if the [Login Window] option is not selected in the Environment Set dialog box.

Exiting Device Management Tool

To exit the Device Management Tool, select [Exit (X)] from the [File (F)] menu. The Device Management Tool will close. The logout procedure will be executed automatically. TIP
When Auto Setup is running, or Method Execution Window is open, Device Management Tool can not be ended.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-78

6.17 Login and Logout

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-81

6.17.3 Setting and Changing Password

The following explains how to set a password needed to log in to the Device Management Tool and change the current password. Use the Change Password dialog box to set or change the password.

Setting and Changing Password

Follow the procedure below to set or change the password: 1. Select [Change Password (C)] from the [System (Y)] menu. The Change Password dialog box will be displayed.

Password Change User Name MASTER Current Password(P) New password(N) New Password Re-entry(R) Cancel OK

061703E.EPS

Figure Change Password Dialog Box

TIP
The Change Password window can also be called by clicking on the [Change Password (C)...] button in the Login window.

To change the password, enter the current password. No password is set when the Device Management Tool is first started. When setting a password for the first time, there is no need to enter the current password. Enter the new password. Then, enter the new password again. The password must be entered using 14 standard-width characters or less (doublewidth characters and standard-width katakana characters cannot be used). Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished. Click on the [OK] button in the Change Password dialog box. The new password is now set.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09, 2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-82

6.18 Common Window Operations

The following explains the common operations performed in the main window as well as the function windows that are called from the main window or via rightclicking of the mouse. The common operations performed in these windows are listed below: Bookmark Print Print preview

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-83

6.18.1 Bookmark Operation

The following explains how to set, execute and delete bookmarks.

Setting Bookmark
To set a bookmark, select [Add Bookmark] from the [Bookmark (B)] menu. The active window will be added to the list of bookmarks.

Executing Bookmark
To execute a bookmark, select the corresponding bookmark command from the [Bookmark (B)] menu.
Bookmark (B) Add Bookmark Delete Bookmark L D:Segment1:FI101 C:Segment1:FI101 M P:Segment1:F101:FIC101

Bookmark

061801E.EPS

Figure Bookmark (B) Menu

SEE ALSO
For the details of bookmark commands, see 6.1.7, Window Configuration of Device Management Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-84

Deleting Bookmark
Follow the procedure below to delete a bookmark: 1. Select [Delete Bookmark] from the [Bookmark (B)] menu. The Delete Bookmark dialog box will be displayed.
Delete Bookmark L D:Segment1:FI101 C:Segment1:FI101 D:Segment1:FI102 M P:Segment1:F101:FIC101

Delete Close

061802E.EPS

Figure Delete Bookmark Dialog Box

In the Delete Bookmark dialog box, select the bookmark to be deleted from the list and click on the [Delete] button. The selected bookmark will be deleted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-85

6.18.2 Printing
The contents of the active window can be printed. Use the Print dialog box to print.

Printing Procedure
Follow the procedure below to print the contents of the active window: 1. Select [Print (P)...] from the [File (F)] menu. The Print dialog box will be displayed.
Print Printer Name Number of Sets Laser Jet 4000 1

Cancel

061803E.EPS

Figure

Print Dialog Box

In the Print dialog box, enter the number of copies to be printed and click on the [OK] button. Printing will start.

TIP
Printing can also be executed from the [Print] button in the Print Preview dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-86

6.18.3 Print Preview

The print image can be viewed in the Print Preview dialog box. Printing can be executed from the Print Preview dialog box.

How to Call the Print Preview Dialog Box

To display the Print Preview dialog box, select [Print Preview (V)] from the [File (F)] menu. The Print Preview dialog box will be displayed.

1/1

Cancel

1/1

First page Previous page Next page Last page

(Send file by e-mail) (Export to a file) Print button Zoom button

061804E.EPS

Figure Buttons in Print Preview Dialog Box

How to Print from Print Preview Dialog Box

Follow the procedure below to print from the Print Preview dialog box: 1. 2. Click on the print button in the Print Preview dialog box. The Print dialog box will be displayed. In the Print dialog box, specify the print range and number of copies to be printed. Click on the [OK] button. Printing will start.

How to Zoom-in Print Preview

Click on the zoom button in the Print Preview dialog box. The display size will switch every time the zoom button is clicked.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-87

6.19 Device Tag List Registration

On Device Tag List Registration window, the configured device information can be registered manual in to device list. The Device Tag List Registration windows included Field Device Tag List Table Register window and Individual Filed Device Tag Register window. When Auto Setup is enabled, the device list registration can be performed automatically.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-88

6.19.1 Registering by Accessing Host File Set

When the Device Management Tool can access Host File Set of Engineering Tool, the items already entered in the Engineering Tool can be used for the device tag list by importing them from the Engineering Tools Host File Set to the Device Management Tool. While importing the device list, the validity of the devices will be checked and the result will be displayed on the dialog box. The user should enter the items that cannot be imported from the Host File Set of Engineering Tool. However, these items can be omitted.

How to Fetch Device Tag List

Follow the procedure below for fetching the device tag list by introducing the Host File Set to Device Management Tool from Engineering Tool.

IMPORTANT
When fetching the Host File Set of the Engineering Tool, the target directory must be specified beforehand in the Environment Set dialog box of the Device Management Tool.

1. 2.

Select [Device Tag List (D)...] from the [Register (A)] menu. The Field Device Tag List Table Register window will be displayed. Select [Import to Device List (O)...] from the [File (F)] menu. The Read to Device Tag List dialog box will be displayed.
Read to Device Tag List Read from HostFileSet Object Device All Device of All Segment Segment Unit Segment1 Select All Device Select Device Read

Read from Device Tag List Master File (Cancel of Change in Editing Work File)

Undo

Cancel
061901E.EPS

Figure Read to Device Tag List Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-89

In the Read to Device Tag List dialog box, select the target device and click on the [Read] button. The contents of the corresponding host file set in the Engineering Tool will be read to the device tag list of the Device Management Tool.

Result Display after Fetching the Device List

After fetching the host file set of the Engineering Tool, the duplication of the address assignment and device number will be checked for each segment. The errors detected by this check will be displayed in the dialog box of [Potential Modification of Device List].
Potential Modification of Device List The following description is double defined in the device list. Update the device list after modifying with Individual DeviceTag Register. FI1005 The following device number of segment is double defined. example2, 1 example2, 2 example2, 3 example2, 4 example2, 5 example2, 6 example2, 7 example2, 8

Close Copy

061902E.EPS

Figure Potential Modification of Device List Dialog Box

The number displayed in the Potential Modification of Device List dialog box is the number of the devices whose numbers or addresses are conflicting. Clicking the [Copy] button may put the contents of the dialog box into the clipboard. Using other Windows applications such as Notepad can printout the contents after pasting the contents into it. TIP
To fetch the host file set of Engineering Tool, the path for the directory of the host file set of Engineering Tool must be specified in the Environment Set dialog box of Device Management Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-90

When fetching the tag names, the newly fetched tag names may conflict with the existing tags of the devices in different segments. In this case, the newly fetched tags will overwrite the information of the existing tags if their names are duplicated. The information of overwritten tags will be displayed in the Result of Reading Host File dialog box.
Result of Reading Host File The device list was changed as follows. Close EJA100A-14 ( example2 -> example1 ) YF100-9 ( example2 -> example1 ) YF100-13 ( example2 -> example1 ) Valve_Positioner-10 ( example2 -> example1 ) Valve_Positioner-8 ( example2 -> example1 ) Pressure_Transmitter-6 ( example2 -> example1 ) Pressure_Transmitter-11 ( example2 -> example1 ) Host_interface-5 ( example2 -> example1 ) Host_interface-12 ( example2 -> example1 ) EJA100A-4 ( example2 -> example1 ) AVP-3 ( example2 -> example1 ) AVP-19 ( example2 -> example1 ) ACF11-19 ( example2 -> example1 ) EJA100A-14 ( example1 -> example2 ) YF100-9 ( example1 -> example2 ) Copy

061903E.EPS

Figure Result of Reading Host File Dialog Box

Clicking the [Copy] button may put the contents of the dialog box into the clipboard. Using other Windows applications such as Notepad can printout the contents after pasting the contents into it.

How to Register Device Tag List

To register the fetched contents of host file to the host file set, do the following operations. 1. 2. Select [Individual Device Tag (E)...] from the [Register (A)] menu. The Individual Field Device Tag Register window will be displayed. In the Individual Field Device Tag Register window, enter items that cannot be read from the host file set in the Engineering Tool (unit name, loop name and user comment) if required. These items may be omitted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-91

To enter the unit name or loop name, select [(Select Set)] from the combo box list in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. The Select Set dialog box will be displayed.
Individual Field Device Tag Register Device Tag Name Segment Name : : F101 Segment1 (Register Selective Items) Segment1 : : : : : : : 0x15 1

Address Device No. Vendor Name Model Name Unit Name Loop Name User Comment

Delete(D)

Copy(C)

061904E.EPS

Figure Comb Box List

In the Select Set dialog box, the registration contents in the corresponding combo box in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window can be changed or deleted or new contents can be added. The contents entered in the Select Set dialog box will be registered in the combo box in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window.
Select Set Item Name Segment Name Select Item Segment1 Delete(D) Change(U) Set Segment2 Add(I) Close

061905E.EPS

Figure Select Set Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-92

Click on the [Register (E)] button in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. The contents set in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window will be entered in the device tag list work file. If the unit name or loop name was not entered correctly, the following message will appear when the [Register (E)] button is clicked.

Individual Field Device Tag Register This Device Data Unregistered in Master.

061906E.EPS

Figure Individual Field Device Tag Register Warning Dialog Box

Select [Update Device Tag List (S)] from the [Register (A)] menu. A dialog box to confirm the device tag list update will be displayed.

Individual Field Device Tag Register

OK to Update Device List?

Yes

061907E.EPS

Figure Device Tag List Update Confirmation Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-93

Click on the [Yes] button in the update confirmation dialog box. Checking for the duplicated defined devices will be performed, then the device tag list will be updated and a dialog box will open to notify that the device tag list update is completed.

Individual Field Device Tag Register

Registered.

061908E.EPS

Figure Device Tag List Update Complete Dialog Box

TIP
If the environment set option of the Device Management Tool is specified so that device information is not read when the device tag list is updated, updating the list does not cause the corresponding device information to be read automatically. In this case, read the applicable device information using the Read Device Information window as necessary.

SEE ALSO
For the environment set option, see Specification to Read Device Information in 6.11, Environment Setting. For reading device information, see Reading Device Information in 6.3.1, Device Tag List Registration.

Click on the [OK] button in the update complete dialog box.

Deleting Device Tag

Follow the procedure below to delete the device tag displayed in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window: 1. 2. Click on the [Delete (D)] button in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click on the [Yes (Y)] button in the delete confirmation dialog box. The deletion will be executed and the next device tag will be displayed.

Copying Device Tag

The device tag displayed in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window can be copied to register a similar device tag. Follow the procedure below to copy a device tag. Note that the address and device number must be changed. 1. 2. Click on the [Copy (C)] button in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click on the [Yes] button in the delete confirmation dialog box. The deletion will be executed and the next device tag will be displayed. A dialog box will be displayed to enter the name of the device tag to copy information to.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-94

3. 4.

Enter the name of the device tag to copy information to. The device list for the copied device tag will be displayed. Change the registration contents. If a copy was made within the same segment, the address and device number must be changed because they are same as those of the original. Click on the [Register (E)] button to register the copied device tag.

Creating New Device Tag

Follow the procedure below to create a new tag and register it in the device tag list: 1. Click on the [>*] button for creating a new device tag in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. A blank Individual Field Device Tag Register window will be displayed. Enter the contents for the device tag list. Click on the [Register (E)] button to register the new device tag.

2. 3.

061909E.EPS

Figure New Device Tag Creation Button and Device Switching Buttons

Switching Between Devices

The device shown in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window can be switched using the device switching buttons or from the menu bar or toolbar. Device switching using the device switching buttons Click on a desired device switching button in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. The switching takes place in the order of display in the device tag list. The following four types of device switching buttons are available: [<<]: First device [<]: Previous device [>]: Next device [>>]: Last device Switching from the menu bar From [Device (S)], select [Go to First Device], [Go to Previous Device (P)], [Go to Next Device (N)] or [Go to Last Device]. Switching from the toolbar Click on a desired device switching button on the toolbar. The switching takes place in the order of display in the device tag list. The following two device switching buttons are available: []: Previous device []: Next device If the entered contents have yet to be registered for the current device, any switching operation will display a dialog box indicating that the contents are not registered. Clicking on the [Yes] button registers the entered contents and displays the target device. If the [No] button is selected, the entered contents will not be registered but discarded as the device switching takes place.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-95

6.19.2 Registering when Host File Set can not be Accessed

If the Device Management Tool can not access Host File Set of Engineering Tool, all items in the device tag list will be entered by the user.

How to Register in Device Tag List

Follow the procedure below to register in the device tag list when Engineering Tool resides in the different machine and the Device Management Tool can not access the Host File Set via network. 1. 2. Select [Individual Device Tag (D)...] from the [Register (A)] menu. The Field Device Tag List Table Register window will be displayed. Enter all items in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. Follow the procedure below to enter the segment name, vendor name, model name, unit name and loop name. Select [(Select Set)] from the combo box list in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window.
Individual Field Device Tag Register Device Tag Name Segment Name : : F101 Segment1 (Register Selective Items) Segment1 : : : : : : : 0x15 1

Address Device No. Vender Name Model Name Unit Name Loop Name User Comment

Delete(D)

Copy(C)

061910E .EPS

Figure Comb Box List

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-96

The Select Set dialog box will be displayed. In the Select Set dialog box, the registration contents in the corresponding combo box in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window can be changed or deleted or new contents can be added. The contents entered in the Select Set dialog box will be registered in the combo box in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window.
Select Set Item Name Segment Name Select Item Segment1 Delete(D) Change(U) Set Segment2 Add(I) Close

061911E.EPS

Figure Select Set Dialog Box

Click on the [Register (E)] button in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window. The contents set in the Individual Field Device Tag Register window will be registered in the device tag list work file. If the segment name, vendor name, model name, unit name or loop name is not entered correctly, the following message will appear when the [Register (E)] button is clicked.

Individual Field Device Tag Register Registered.

061912E.EPS

Figure Individual Field Device Tag Register Warning Dialog Box

Select [Update Device Tag List (S)] from the [Register (A)] menu. A dialog box to confirm the device tag list update will be displayed.

Individual Field Device Tag Register

OK to Update Device List?

Yes

061913E.EPS

Figure Device Tag List Update Confirmation Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-97

Individual Field Device Tag Register

Registered.

061914E.EPS

Figure Device List Update Complete Dialog Box

TIP
If the environment set option of the Device Management Tool is specified not to read the device information read when the device tag list is updated, this operation does not cause the corresponding device information to be read automatically. In this case, read the applicable device information using the Read Device Information window as necessary.

Click on the [OK] button in the update complete dialog box.

SEE ALSO
See 6.19.1, Registering by Accessing Host File Set for the procedures to delete a device tag, make a copy, create a new device tag and switch between devices.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-98

6.19.3 Registering by Auto Setup Command

With Auto Setup command, accessing Host File Set of Engineering Tool and registering the configuration to the device list can be done automatically.

Registering to Device List by Auto Setup Command

To start Auto Setup command, do follows: Moreover, the path for the directory of the Host File Set can be designated. Thus the Environment Set window can be set to pop out when starting the Auto Setup. This setting can be set on the Environment Set window. 1. After starting Auto Setup, the path for the directory where the Host File Set locates needs to be specified. The Environment Setting window needs to be called up for setting the path. Triggering Environment Setting window display by Auto Setup command can be defined on the Environment Setting window. Click [Auto Setup] in File] menu of Device Management Tool. If the Environment Set Window is set to display when staring Auto Setup, this dialog will appear. If not, a dialog box for selecting segments will display. If Environment Set windows display, the path for the directory where the DD file is located can be designated. Click [OK] button, the dialog box for selecting segments will display.
Select Segment All Segments Segment Unit Cancel OK

061915E.EPS

Figure Select Segment Dialog Box

SEE ALSO
For more information about the path for the directory that holding the host file set, see 6.29.1, Specifying Directories, OPC Server and DDE Server.

On the Select Segment dialog box, the following options are available. All Segment is checked by default.

Select all segments Check the option [All Segment]. Select only one segment Check the option [Segment Unit]. Then a segment can be selected from the list in the dropdown menu. No segment is selected by default.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-99

Click [OK] button. Auto Setup window will display and Auto Setup will be in progress. If the option [Segment Unit] is checked but no segment has been selected from the dropdown menu, a warning message box will display with the following message: Select Segment!

If click [Cancel] button instead of selecting a segment, the Auto Setup will abort.
Auto Setup Start Auto Setup Completed Auto Setup

Cancel

061916E.EPS

Figure Auto Setup Dialog Box

In Auto Setup dialog box, the messages indicating the Auto Setup process are displayed. TIP
Auto Setup can not be aborted from menu bar or task bar. The messages displayed in Auto Setup dialog box can be put into clipboard.

To abort Auto Setup, click the [Cancel] button on the dialog box. However, when the process is aborted, it does not return to the state before Auto Setup process. The process will be aborted right after processing the current device. After the Auto Setup process, click [Close] button, then the dialog box will be closed.

6. TIP

The [Close] button is active only when the process is completed or when the process is aborted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-100

6.20 Device Tag List Display Operations

The device tag list display function includes the display of device tag list table and display of an individual device tag. The device tag list table display shows a list of registered devices. It also provides functions to sort the display order in the device tag list, display devices by search and set whether or not to display certain categories in the list. The individual device tag display shows fieldbus device information for each device.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-101

6.20.1 Device Tag List Table Display

Information about all fieldbus devices can be displayed as a table. The table also provides functions to sort the display, perform search and set whether or not to display columns.

How to Open Field Device Tag List Table Display Window

To open the Field Device Tag List Table Display window, select [Device Tag List (L)...] from the [Function (M)] menu. The Field Device Tag List Table Display window will be displayed.
Field Device Tag List Table Register Device Tag Name Segment Name Segment1 1 F101 Segment1 2 F102 Segment1 3 F103 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Address Device No. Vendor Name Model Name 0x15 1 0x16 2 0x17 3

062001E.EPS

Figure Field Device Tag List Table Display Window

TIP
The Field Device Tag List Table Display window can also be called via the operations shown below: Click on the [Device Tag List] button on the toolbar. Select [Device Tag List...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-102

Sorting Displayed Items

Follow the procedure below to sort the displayed items in the Field Device Tag List Table Display window: 1. Select [Sort (E)...] from the [Data (D)] menu. The Sort dialog box will be displayed.
Sort Preferred Key Segment Name Second Key Device Tag Name Third Key Ascend Descend Ascend Descend Ascend Descend OK Cancel

062002E.EPS

Figure Sort Dialog Box

In the Sort dialog box, specify the items used as keys and ascending or descending order. Click on the [OK] button. The display order in the Field Device Tag List Table Display window will be sorted based on the specified conditions.

How to Perform Device Search

Follow the procedure below to display specific devices in the Field Device Tag List Table Display window using the search function: 1. Select [Search (F)...] from the [Data (D)] menu. The Search dialog box will be displayed.
Search Search Item First Key Search Strings OK Cancel

Second Key

Select All(F) Third Key Condition AND(A) OR(O)

062003E.EPS

Figure Search Dialog Box

In the Search dialog box, specify the items used as keys, strings to find and search condition (AND or OR). Click on the [OK] button. The Field Device Tag List Table Display window will show only the devices that satisfy the specified conditions. Clicking on the [Select All (F)] button will display all devices.

TIP
A wildcard character (*) can be used when finding strings (except for the search for address and device numbers). For example, specify *ABC* to find strings that have ABC in the middle.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-103

Showing/Hiding Columns
In the Field Device Tag List Table Display window, whether to show or hide each of the items can be set. 1. Select [Display Column on/off (D)...] from the [Option (O)] menu. The Display Column on/off dialog box will be displayed.
Clicking this button will hide the selected items.

Display Column on/off Indication Device Tag Name Segment Name Address Device No. Vendor Name Model Name Unit Name Loop Name User Comment Non-Indication OK Cancel

Clicking this button will show the selected items.

062004E.EPS

Figure Display Column On/Off Dialog Box

In the Display Column on/off dialog box, specify the items to be displayed and those not to be displayed. Click on the [OK] button.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-104

6.20.2 Individual Device Tag Display

Fieldbus device information can be displayed for each device.

How to Call the Individual Field Device Tag Display Window

To call the Individual Field Device Tag Display window, select [Individual Device Tag (D)...] from the [Function (M)] menu. The Individual Field Device Tag Display window will be displayed. TIP
The Individual Field Device Tag Display window can also be called via the operations shown below: Double-click on any device tag name in the Individual Field Device Tag Display window. Click on the [Individual Device Tag] button on the toolbar. Select [Individual Device Tag...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

How to Switch Displayed Device - Individual Field Device Tag Display Window
The device being displayed can be switched using the device switching buttons in the Individual Field Device Tag Display Window. Switching will display devices in the order shown in the Field Device Tag List Table Display window. [<<]: First device [<]: [>]: Previous device Next device

[>>]: Last device TIP

The device can also be switched by selecting [Previous Device (P)] or [Next Device (N)] in the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-105

How to Switch Displayed Device - Select Device Window

Follow the procedure below to switch the device being displayed: 1. Select [Select Device (S)...] from the [Device (S)] menu. The Select Device window will be displayed.
Select Device

Segment Device Tag Block Tag

Cancel

062005E.EPS

Figure Select Device Window

TIP
The Select Device window can also be called by choosing [Select Device...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

In the Select Device window, specify the segment name and device tag name. Click on the [OK] button. The Individual Field Device Tag Display window will show the information of the fieldbus device that corresponds to the specified device tag name.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-106

6.21 Fieldbus Device Status Display Operations

The status of connected devices can be displayed. Statuses are displayed by the segment.

How to Open Device Status Display Window

To open the Device Status Display window, select [Device Status (C)...] from the [Function (M)] menu. The Device Status Display window will be displayed.
Device Status Display Select Segment Device Tag Name Segment1 Segment2 Segment3 F101 F102 F103 Status READY READY NOT READY

10/10/11 14:49:23

Enable Auto Update

Period

sec.

Update(P)
062101E.EPS

Figure Fieldbus Device Status Display Window

TIP
The Device Status Display window can also be called via the operations shown below: Click on the [Device Status] button on the toolbar. Select [Device Status...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

How to Switch Segments

To switch to another segment, click on the desired segment name shown inside the Select Segment area of the Device Status Display window. A list of statuses for the fieldbus devices belonging to the selected segment will be displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-107

How to Update Display Automatically

To automatically update display, do the following: 1. Check the option [Enable Auto Update] on Device Status Display Window.
Device Status Display Select Segment Device Tag Name Status

Enable Auto Update(U)

Period

Start Auto Update(S)

062102E.EPS

Figure Device Status Display with Enable Auto Update Option Checked

TIP
When option [Enable Auto Update] is not checked, the label of button will become [Update].

The period for auto update needs to be set within the range of 30 to 120 seconds. The period may vary with the number of segments for auto updating. If the number of segments is 20 or less, 30 second updating period will have not problem. If the number of segments exceeds 20, the updating period should be set longer accordingly. Click [Start Auto Update] button, then the device information will be updated automatically.

IMPORTANT
The discrepancies in seconds exist between the defined update period and the actual updating period vary with the communication traffic load. If communication to one or more segments fails, the auto update will wait for 20 seconds for response of each segment before it skips it. Under such situation, the update period will be largely delayed. To avoid this phenomenon, the segments or the field device that caused communication failure should be removed from the list for Device Status Display.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

6.22.1 Displaying Parameters

The block tag parameters can be displayed for the fieldbus devices that are registered in the device tag list. The parameters are shown in the Parameter Display window. The Parameter Display window shows no data (parameter values) when it is first opened. Perform update operation to display data. The description for parameters can also be displayed.

How to Call the Parameter Display Window

To call the Parameter Display window, select [Parameter (P)...] from the [Function (M)] menu. The Parameter Display window will be displayed.
Parameter Display Device Tag Name Segment Name Block Tag Name Block Type Operation Dynamic Operation Static 98/03/02 6:04:22 PM F101 Segmnt1 FIC101 PID All Dynamic Other Static Specify Prameter Set(S) Update(I)

MODE_BLK Target Actual Permit Normal BLOCK_ERR : PV status value SP status

= MAN : MAN = = : GOOD : 9.8 = GOOD

062201E.EPS

Figure Parameter Display Window

TIP
The Parameter Display window can also be called via the operations shown below: Click on the [Parameter] button on the toolbar. Select [Parameter...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse. Double-click on the desired device tag name in the Device Status Display window.

How to Select a Block Tag

Select the block tag name to display data for, from the Block Tag Name combo box list.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-111

How to Select a Display Group

To select a display group, click on the tab strip for the desired display group in the Parameter Display window. The display will switch to show the selected display group. No data will be shown initially, after switching to the new display group. Perform update operation to display data. Following the update operation, the window will continue to show the data for the display group that was acquired by that update operation. Perform update operation again to view the latest data.

How to Display (Update) Data

To update the display, click on [Update (I)] in the Parameter Display window. The data of the currently selected block tag will be displayed. TIP
Data can also be displayed via the following operations: Select [Update (R)] from the [Data (D)] menu. Select [Update] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

When updating the display, it may require more than one transmission. If an error occurs in between the transmissions, all transmissions will be stopped, the data carried by the later transmissions become unavailable. These unavailable parameters or element data will be displayed as ***** . TIP
When DD files for new fieldbus devices in the updated list can not be found, a message indicating that the DD file is missing will display on the status bar. In this case, the additional parameters specific to the device and the transducer block can not be displayed, only the parameters stipulated by Foundation Fieldbus can be displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-112

How to Select Parameters via Specify Parameter

Follow the procedure below to select parameters to be displayed using the Specify Parameter tab in the Parameter Display window: 1. Select [Specify Parameter] in the Parameter Display window.
Parameter Display Device Tag Name Segment Name Block Tag Name Block Type Operation Dynamic Operation Static 98/03/02 6:13:03 PM F101 Segmnt1 FIC101 PID All Dynamic Other Static Specify Prameter Set(S) Update(I)

Parameter Name ACK_OPTION ALARM_SUM ALERT_KEY BLOCK_ERR CLR_FSTATE CONFIRM_TIME CYCLE_SEL CYCLE_TYPE

ACK OPTION
: 0x0000

062202E.EPS

Figure Parameter Display Window (Specify Parameter Tab)

2. 3.

Select the desired parameter from the combo box. The parameter can also be entered from the keyboard. No data will be shown initially, after the parameter is selected. Perform update operation to display data for the selected parameter.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-113

Parameter Description Display

In the Parameter Display window, the descriptions for the parameters can be displayed too. Select a parameter (or an element) then click the right mouse button, then select [Parameter Description...] from the pop-out menu. A dialog box for the parameter description appears.
Description SpLoLim ->PV_SCALE.UNITS_INDEX The setpoint low limit is the lowest setpoint operator entry that can be used for the block.

OK
062203E.EPS

Figure Parameter Description Dialog Box

In the Parameter Description dialog box, the parameters, the descriptions and the engineering units (or reference of related engineering units) are displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-114

6.22.2 Changing Parameters

Some parameters can be changed. Use the Parameter Set dialog box to change the parameter settings (parameter values).

How to Change Parameter

Follow the procedure below to change any of the parameter shown in the Parameter Display window: 1. 2. In the Parameter Display window, click on the data area of the parameter whose setting is to be changed. Click on the [Set (S)] button in the Parameter Display window. The Parameter Set dialog box will be displayed.
Parameter Set Device Tag Name Segment Name Block Tag Name Parameter Name Element Name F101 Segment1 FIC101 MODE_BLK Target Cancel Set

Data modified by:

062204E.EPS

Figure Parameter Set Dialog Box

3. TIP

Enter the data (parameter).

Plus and minus infinite can be entered as follows. Plus infinite: +INF

Minus infinite: -INF

Enter the reason for change. Up to 36 double-width characters or 72 standard-width characters can be entered. The combo box menu lists the five reasons for change that have been entered most recently. An applicable reason can be selected from the list. Reason for change can be omitted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-115

Click on the [Set] button in the Parameter Set dialog box. If the entered data is correct, the data will be set for the parameter being selected, and the Parameter Set dialog box will close. If the entered data is not correct, one of the following dialog boxes will be displayed with a corresponding message that indicates the error in the entered content.

Parameter Display Unable to Set This Parameter.

Parameter Display Click Data Field.

Parameter Display Invalid Parameter.

062205E.EPS

Figure Parameter Set Warning Dialog Boxes

Click the [OK] button and enter the correct data again in the Parameter Set dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-116

How to Input Parameter

In the Parameter Display window, the parameter can be entered by entering the data text (parameter value). The parameter can also be entered by selecting from the list. The procedure for entering the parameters is explained as follows.

Picking Up One Datum for Entering

When only picking up one parameter for entering, the procedure is as follows. 1. Point the cursor to the combo box where the datum to be entered, then click the right button of the mouse and select the required parameter.
Parameter Set Device Tag Name Segment Name Block Tag Name Parameter Name Element Name F101 Segment1 FIC101 MODE_BLK Target Cancel Set

Data modified by:

RCas ROut RCas Cas Auto Man OOS

062206E.EPS

Figure Picking up One Datum for Entering

Then the selected data will be shown in the combo box. It is also possible to directly enter the text of the parameter into the combo box 2. Click the [Set] button. The selected or entered parameter will be set.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-117

Picking Up More Data for Entering

When picking up more parameters for entering, the procedure is as follows.
Parameter Set Device Tag Name Segment Name Block Tag Name Parameter Name Element Name F101 Segment1 FIC101 MODE_BLK Target Cancel Set

Data modified by:

Auto:LO

Select...

062207E.EPS

Figure Picking up More Data for Entering

Click the [Select...] button on Parameter Set dialog box. Then a dialog box for parameter selection appears.
Select ROut RCas Cas Auto Man LO IMan

Cancel

062208E.EPS

Figure Parameter Selection Dialog Box

On the Parameter Selection dialog box. The parameters for entering are displayed and the already selected parameters are checked. 2. 3. Select or Deselect the parameters by check the check boxes of the parameters. Click the [OK] button. Then the dialog box will be closed and the selected parameters will be displayed to the entry area and separated by semi colon [ ; ]. When clicking the [Cancel] button, the dialog box will be closed without taking the selected parameters. Click the [Set] button. The entered parameters will be set.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-118

6.23 Method Execution

On Method Execution Window, Method Execution can be performed.

Open Method Execution Window

Do the following may open the Method Execution Window. 1. Select a device then one the following operation may open the Method Execution Window.

On Device Status Display window, select a device for running the method. Activate the parameter window of the device for running the method. On the Device List Table Display/Register Window, select a device for running the method. Activate the Device List Table Display/Register Window of the device for running the method. 2. Click [Exec Method] on [Device Maintenance] menu. A Method Execution will display.

METHOD EXECUTION WINDOWS File (F) Edit (E) Options (O)

F101 FIC100 TOP MENU METHOD 1 TOP MENU 2 SUB MENU 1 ST_REV TAG_DESC SUB MENU 2 + SUB MENU 3 +

Input :

062301E.EPS

Figure Method Execution Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-119

In method menu tree display area, the methods of the device are displayed in TreeView. In the TreeView, the objects are displayed in descending hierarchies by Device Tag, Block Tag, Menu and Submenu. The objects displayed are all attached with the icons specific to the types of the objects. In the TreeView area of this window, the operation is the same as the TreeView in the Windows Explorer. However, the path and property of objects can not be modified. TIP
A Method Execution Window can only be used to apply the method that the window opened for. If running a new method, the current method execution window must be closed, then open a new window for the new method. Exiting Device Management Tool will be denied if a Method Execution Window is still open.

Start Method Execution

Method Execution
In TreeView area, the applicable methods are listed, clicking a method, the method execution can be started. Once a method is running, other method can not be started. TIP
When clicking an icon of a device or a block tag, the icons of the lower hierarchies of the clicked icon will be displayed. Displaying the lower hierarchical icons may take a few seconds for accessing the information of the icons. When displaying the same lower icons after closing the folder, the access will be carried out again and will take a few more seconds.

When Method Execution is started, the following messages will be displayed in the method execution display area. ### Start of Menu:<Date Time> <Device Tag> <Block Name> <Menu Name> <Submenu Name>....###
*1: When running a method without submenu, the <Submenu Name> will not be displayed in the message.

During the execution of a method, the messages built in the method will be displayed. TIP
The messages in the Method Execution area can be selected by clicking [Select All] on [Edit] menu. After selecting all messages or part of messages, clicking [Copy] on [Edit] menu, the selected messages can be copied into clipboard.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-120

Input from Keyboard during Method Execution

During execution method may pause and wait for an input from keyboard. In this case, do the following: 1. TIP
Push <- or -> keys may move cursor to left or right. Right-click the mouse may display the text strings entered in the past. The new entry can be selected from the list.

Enter a text to key entry area.

Push [Enter] key. The text input from the keyboard will the entered, the text will be displayed on the method execution area. However, after entering a password, asterisks (*) will be displayed instead of characters.

IMPORTANT
The text entered from keyboard should be alphanumeric (one byte) characters. Some methods allow using Japanese Kanji (two-byte characters) while some others may not properly executed if Japanese Kanji is used.

Method Execution Result Display

If exceptional events occurred during the method execution, the vents will be displayed after the method execution. If the method execution completed normally, the method shows a normal status and displays the following message: ### End of Menu ### After the Method Execution, the objects in the menu may be different from the objects before the Method Execution.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-121

Method Execution Window and Related Operation

Clear Display Area
On [Edit] menu, click [Clear Display Area] will clear the messages displayed in the method execution area.

Log ON/OFF
On [Option] menu, click [Log ON/OFF] may toggle the logging from OFF to ON or vice versa from ON to OFF. The setting is OFF when the Method Execution Window is opened. Location and file name of the log file are as follows: Location: <Device Management Tool Folder>\log\ File name: ykmsd.log

How to Close Method Execution Window

After execution of a method, click [Close] button or click [Close] one [File] menu may close the Method Execution window. When clicking [Close] while the method execution is still running, a confirmation dialog box will appear.
DVMTD Executing the method Abort? OK Cancel

062302E.EPS

Figure Confirmation Dialog Box for Aborting Method Execution

Click [OK] button, the method execution will be aborted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-122

6.24 Message Display Operations

Messages regarding fieldbus can be displayed. Messages are listed in the Message Display window.

IMPORTANT
Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS) is required for message acquisition from HIS via CS 1000/CS 3000 OPC server. A DDE open data interface package for HIS is needed to obtain messages from an HIS via the CS 1000/CS 3000s DDE server. Do not use the message dislay window if the upper level system is STARDOM. In STARDOM system, the alarm messages received from fieldbus devices are treated as system alarms on VDS.

SEE ALSO
For more information about Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS), see M2 OPC Interface of Reference Option (IM 33S01B30-01E). See M3, DDE Interface for the details of DDE server functions in Part M,Options of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).

How to Call the Message Display Window

Select [Message (M)...] from the [Function (M)] menu. A message window will display with the latest messages. If the messages are gathered via an OPC server in a HIS, 500 messages in the historical message file are acquired and sorted, only the fieldbus related messages are displayed in this message window. If the messages are gathered via an DDE server in a HIS, 64 messages in the historical message file are acquired and displayed in this message window. TIP
The Message Display window can also be called via the operations shown below: Click on the [Message] button on the toolbar. Select [Message...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-123

How to Display Messages

Messages can be displayed using several methods explained below:

Displaying Next Messages

Click on the [Next data (N)] button in the Message Display window. The next list of messages will be displayed. When data acquisition is performed HIS OPC server, additional 500 messages acquired from the HIS historical message save file are added to the previously acquired messages and the fieldbus related messages are displayed. When data acquisition is performed HIS DDE server, additional 64 messages acquired from the HIS historical message save file are added to the previously acquired messages and the fieldbus related messages are displayed.

Displaying All Messages

Click on the [All data (A)] button in the Message Display window. All messages regarding fieldbus will be acquired from the HIS and displayed in the Message Display window. While the messages are being acquired, the text in the [All data (A)] button changes to [Cancel].

Canceling Acquisition of All Messages

Click on the [Cancel] button in the Message Display window. Acquisition of all messages will be canceled. Message acquisition is canceled after every 64 messages.

Displaying Most Recent Messages

Click on the [Re-read (O)] button in the Message Display window. The most recent 64 messages will be acquired from the HIS and displayed. When data acquisition is performed HIS OPC server, 500 messages are acquired from the HIS historical message save file and the fieldbus related messages are displayed. When data acquisition is performed HIS DDE server, 64 messages are acquired from the HIS historical message save file and the fieldbus related messages are displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-124

How to Search Message

Follow the procedure below to perform search and display specific messages: 1. Select [Search (F)...] from the [Data (D)] menu. The Search dialog box will be displayed.
Search Search Item First Key OK Cancel Search String

Second Key

Select All[F] Third Key Condition AND(A) OR(O) Date - Time FROM 1998/02/16 00:00 TO 1998/02/24 00:00

062401E.EPS

Figure Message Search Dialog Box

TIP
The Search dialog box can also be displayed by selecting [Search...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

In the Search dialog box, specify the search keys, strings to find and search condition (AND or OR). Click on the [OK] button. The window will show only the messages that satisfy the specified conditions. To specify the range of date/time as a search condition, enter the beginning date/time of search period in FROM and the end date/time in TO. Specify date and time in yyyy/ mm/dd format and hh:mm format, respectively. Clicking on the [Select All (F)] button in the Search dialog box displays all messages.

TIP
A wildcard character (*) can be used when finding strings (except for the search for numbers). For example, specify *ABC* to find strings that have ABC in the middle.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-125

6.25 History Message Display Operations

History messages regarding login, logout and changing of parameter settings can be displayed. History messages are listed in the History Message Display window.

How to Call the History Message Display Window

To call the History Message Display window, select [History Mes.(H)...] from the [Function (M)] menu. The History Message Display window will be displayed.
Operational History Display 1 2 3 4 5 ID 1 2 1 2 1 DATE/TIME 98/02/04 8:01:48 PM 98/02/03 8:23:34 PM 98/02/03 8:02:32 PM 98/02/02 4:08:18 PM 98/02/02 9:03:24 PM Operational History Login Logout Login Logout Login User MASTER master master master master

062501E.EPS

Figure History Message Display Window

TIP
The History Message Display window can also be called via the operations shown below: Click on the [History Message] button on the toolbar. Select [History Message...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-126

How to Perform History Message Search

Follow the procedure below to perform search and display specific history messages: 1. Select [Search (F)...] from the [Data (D)] menu. The Search dialog box will be displayed.
Search Search Item First Key OK Cancel Search Strings

Second Key

Select All[F] Third Key Condition AND(A) OR(O) Date - Time FROM 1998/02/16 00:00 TO 1998/02/24 00:00

062502E.EPS

Figure History Message Search Dialog Box

TIP
The Search dialog box can also be displayed by selecting [Search...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

In the Search dialog box, specify the search keys, strings to find and search condition (AND or OR). Click on the [OK] button. The window will show only the history messages that satisfy the specified conditions. To specify the range of date/time as a search condition, enter the beginning date/time of search period in FROM and the end date/time in TO. Specify date and time in yyyy/ mm/dd format and hh:mm format, respectively. Clicking on the [Select All (F)] button in the Search dialog box displays all history messages.

TIP
A wildcard character (*) can be used when finding strings (except for ID searches). For example, specify *ABC* to find strings that have ABC in the middle.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-127

6.26 Maintenance Operations

The following explains the operations of the maintenance. The specific maintenance functions are listed below. These functions are performed in the Maintenance window. Creating a backup database Restoring the database Optimizing the database Recovering the database Deleting a backup database

How to Call the Maintenance Window

To display the Maintenance window, first close all child windows. Then, select [Maintenance (M)...] from the [System (Y)] menu. The Maintenance window will be displayed.
Maintenance Date User Size
464896 1st Backup 483328 2nd Backup

Comment

File Name
BU980216193930.mdb BU980226183318.mdb

98/02/16 7:39:30 PM master 98/02/26 6:33:18 PM master

Backup Restore Optimize Repair Delete Close

Comment
062601E.EPS

Figure Maintenance Window

Note that operations other than maintenance will be disabled while the Maintenance window is displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-128

Creating a Backup Database

Follow the procedure below to back up the database: 1. In the Maintenance window, enter a comment for the backup in the Comment field. The backup comment can be omitted, but it its recommended to enter one so that the contents of the backup can be identified later. Click on the [Backup] button in the Maintenance window. A confirmation dialog box to confirm the backup operation will be displayed.

Maintenance

OK to Backup?

Yes

062602E.EPS

Figure Backup Confirmation Dialog Box

TIP
The created backup file will be saved in the directory specified in the Environment Set dialog box of the Device Management Tool.

Click on the [Yes] button in the backup confirmation dialog box. The contents of the device tag list (master file and work file), user registration (including password), user group registration and history messages will be backed up, and the contents of the backup file will be displayed in the Maintenance window (backup date/time, user name, file size, comment and file name).

Restoring Database
Follow the procedure below to restore the database: 1. 2. From the list of backup files displayed in the Maintenance window, select the backup file to use to restore the database. Click on the [Restore] button in the Maintenance window. A dialog box to confirm the restore operation will be displayed.

Maintenance

OK to Restore?

Yes

062603E.EPS

Figure Restore Confirmation Dialog Box

Click on the [Yes] button in the restore confirmation dialog box. The contents of the device tag list (master file and work file), user registration (including password), user group registration and history messages will be restored.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-129

Optimizing Database
Follow the procedure below to optimize the database: 1. Click on the [Optimize] button in the Maintenance window. A dialog box to confirm the optimization operation will be displayed.

Maintenance

OK to Optimize Current Database?

Yes

062604E.EPS

Figure Optimization Confirmation Dialog Box

Click on the [Yes] button in the optimization confirmation dialog box. Optimization of the database will begin. When the optimization is complete, a dialog box will open to notify that that the processing is complete.

Maintenance

Optimized.

Click on the [Yes] button in the delete confirmation dialog box. The selected database file(s) will be deleted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-131

6.27 Event Display

Events that occurred in the Device Management Tool, such as communication errors, can be displayed. Events are listed in the Event Display window.

How to Call the Event Display Window

To display the Event Display window, select [Event (E)...] from the [System (Y)] menu. The Event Display window will be displayed.
Event Display Issue Date
1 98/02/02 3:01:30 PM 2 98/02/02 3:01:30 PM 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Program Name
YKLIBC_FALIB YKLIBC_DBACCESS

Event Type Event Content Event Details Function ID

Error Error 0x19000F 0x19000F 0x0 0x0 0xC01 0xE01

062701E.EPS

Figure Event Display Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-132

Event Search
Follow the procedure below to perform search and display specific events: 1. Select [Search (F)...] from the [Data (D)] menu. The Search dialog box will be displayed.
Search Search Item First Key OK Cancel Search Strings

Second Key

Select All[F] Third Key Condition AND(A) OR(O) Date - Time FROM 1998/02/16 00:00 TO 1998/02/24 00:00

062702E.EPS

Figure Search Dialog Box

TIP
The Search dialog box can also be displayed by selecting [Search...] from the pop-up menu that appears with right-clicking of the mouse.

In the Search dialog box, specify the search keys, strings to find and search condition (AND or OR). Click on the [OK] button. The window will show only the events that satisfy the specified conditions. To specify the range of date/time as a search condition, enter the beginning date/time of search period in FROM and the end date/time in TO. Specify date and time in yyyy/mm/dd format and hh:mm format, respectively. Clicking on the [Select All (F)] button in the Search dialog box displays all events.

TIP
A wildcard character (*) can be used when finding strings (except for function ID searches). For example, specify *ABC* to find strings that have ABC in the middle.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-133

6.28 Configuring Control Bus

When HIS or master PC is required to communicate with Control Bus, the control bus needs to be configured. For slave PC, there is no need to configure control bus. TIP
Control bus configuration window is not available for STARDOM. Resource Configurator is used for configuring STARDOM control network.

How to Configure Control Bus

Configuring control bus is to designate the route for communicating to Filedbus. Domain name, station name segment name and so on are all need to be designated and configured. In a system with Fieldbus, the communication between an HIS or a master PC and Fieldbus devices go through Control Bus and Fieldbus two types network. So that the communication can not be established between HIS or master PC and Fieldbus devices without properly configuring the Control Bus. From Device Management Tool, the window for configuring Control Bus can be called up. To call up Control Bus Configuration window, click [Control Bus Configuration] on [Option] menu. The window for control bus configuration will display. On the window for configuring control bus, the segment name, ACF11or ALF111 installation position (FCS Station Name, RIO Bus Number, Node Number, Unit Number, Slot Number and Port Number) can be specified. SEE ALSO
For more information about configuring control bus, see section Configuring Control Bus (Settings after Installation) in 8.1, Installing Fieldbus Tools.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-134

6.29 Environment Setting for Device Management Tool

The environment settings for the Device Management Tool includes items related to directory, OPC Server specification and DDE Server specification and those related to option specification. The environment settings for the Device Management Tool are specified in the Environment Set dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-135

6.29.1 Specifying Directories, OPC Server and DDE Server

Specify the directory paths for the following items on the Environment Set dialog box. Where to save backup files Where the host file set created in the Engineering Tool is saved Directory for DD Files Selecting OPC server package and specifying HIS computer name. Selecting DDE server package and specifying HIS computer name Opens Environment Set Dialog Box when starting Auto setup. TIP
With STARDOM, OPC server and DDE server cannot be configured.

How to Open the Environment Set Dialog Box

To display the Environment Set dialog box, select [Environment Set (U)...] from the [Option (O)] menu. The Environment Set dialog box will be displayed.
Environment Set

Directory/OPC/DDE Server
Directory Backup File HostFileSet DD File

Option

Refer to... D:\Feildbus\KAPPA\FF_PRJ D:\Feildbus\KAPPA\FF_PRJ\DEV\POOL Refer to... Refer to...

OPC/DDE Server
OPC Server Computer Name DDE Server HIS(CS 1000/CS 3000) Computer Name ICS(CS) File[ICS.EXE]

HIS0164

Refer to...

This dialog is displayed at Auto Setup

Cancel

062901E.EPS

Figure Environment Set Dialog Box (Directory/OPC/DDE Server Tab)

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-136

Specifying the Paths of Directories

On the Environment Set dialog box, the following paths may be specified. Directory path for backup file to be saved Directory path for the host file set created by Engineering Tool Directory path for DD files The procedure for specifying the paths is shown as follows. 1. TIP
When the Environment Set dialog box is called, it opens with the [Directory/OPC/DDE Server] tab already selected.

Click on the [Directory/OPC/DDE Server] tab in the Environment Set dialog box.

Specify the directory in the Environment Set dialog box. Clicking on each [Refer to] button displays a dialog box to specify the corresponding directory. Click on the [OK] button in the Environment Set dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-137

Selecting OPC Server Package and Specifying HIS Computer Name

The type of OPC server package should be specified as follows: 1. 2. Click [Directory/OPC/DDE Server] tab in the Environment Set dialog box. Choose an interface, OPC server for message acquisition although two servers, OPC and DDE are listed on the window. The default setting selects OPC server.

OPC server DDE server 3. TIP

This specification is necessary even when the HIS and Device Management Tool are running on the same machine.

Enter the computer name of the HIS on which the OPC server operates.

Click on the [OK] button in the Environment Set dialog box.

Selecting DDE Server Package and Specifying HIS Computer Name

The type of DDE server package should be specified as follows: 1. 2. Click the [Directory/OPC/DDE Server] tab in the Environment Set dialog box. Choose an interface, DDE server for message acquisition although two servers, OPC and DDE are listed on the window. The default setting selects DDE server.

OPC server DDE server 3. Specify the model of package for obtaining messages from the following two choices. In this system, HIS should be specified.

HIS (CS 1000/CS 3000) ICS (CENTUM CS) 4. TIP

This specification is necessary even when the HIS and Device Management Tool are running on the same machine.

Enter the computer name of the HIS on which the DDE server operates.

Click on the [OK] button in the Environment Set dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-138

Option for Environment Set Dialog Box to be Opened by Auto Setup

The Environment Set Dialog box can be opened automatically when starting Auto Setup if this option is checked. Do the following may check or uncheck this option. By default setting, this option is checked. Check the option box of [This Dialog is Displayed at Auto Setup], then the dialog box will be displayed when starting Auto Setup. Uncheck the option box of [This Dialog is Displayed at Auto Setup], then the dialog box will not be displayed when starting Auto Setup.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-139

6.29.2 Options
The following option items can be specified. Login environment Reading device information

How to Call the Environment Set Dialog Box

To display the Environment Set dialog box, select [Environment Set (U)...] from the [Option (O)] menu. The Environment Set dialog box will be displayed.
Environment Set Directory/OPC/DDE Server Login Login Window Option

Read Device Information Execute Reading Device Information when the device list is updated

This dialog is displayed at Auto Setup

Cancel

062903E.EPS

Figure Environment Set Dialog Box (Option Tab)

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27,2002-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-140

Specifying Options
1. 2. Click on the [Option] tab in the Environment Set dialog box. In the Environment Set dialog box, specify [Login Window] and [Execute Reading Device Information when the device tag list is updated] by ticking the corresponding checkbox.

[Login Window] If this checkbox is ticked, the Login window will be displayed when the Device Management Tool is started. [Execute Reading Device Information when the device tag list is updated] If this checkbox is ticked, the corresponding device information will be read when the device tag list is updated. 3. Click on the [OK] button in the Environment Set dialog box.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-141

6.30 Security Specification

Security for the Device Management Tool is provided by means of registering each user who is allowed to log in to the Device Management Tool and the user group to which he/she belongs. Register the user group before registering the user. TIP
If the Device Management Tool is used in non-security application, there is no need to register user groups and users.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-142

6.30.1 Registering User Groups

Specify the groups to which users allowed to log in to the Device Management Tool will belong, as well as the security level of each group. Register user groups in the User Group Register window.

Calling the User Group Register Window

Follow the procedure below to display the User Group Register window: 1. Select [User (U)...] from the [Register (A)] menu. The User Register window will be displayed.
User Register User List User Name 1 MASTER 2 USER 3 GUEST 4 USER1 Group Name MASTER USER GUEST USERGr1 Full Name MASTER USER GUEST USER1

All Operations Monitoring and parameter setting Only Monitoring Only Monitoring

063001E.EPS

Figure User Register Window

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-143

Click on the [Group Register (G)...] button in the User Register window. The User Group Register window will be displayed.
User Group Register 1 2 3 4 Group Name MASTER USER GUEST USER1 Description All Operations Monitoring and Parameter setting Only Monitoring Only Monitoring

Set Group Name Description

Device Tag List Display Change

Trend Display Change Data

Parameter Set Display Change OK Environment Set Display Change

Add(I) Change(U) Delete(D)

User Register Display Change

Maintenance Save Restore

Print(P) Close

063002E.EPS

Figure User Group Register Window

How to Register a New User Group

Follow the procedure below to register a new user group: 1. In the User Group Register window, enter the group name and description in the Set field.

Group name: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters or 10 double-byte characters. Description: Up to 100 alphanumeric characters or 50 double-byte characters. 2. Specify the items regarding security in the Set field of the User Group Register window, and click on the [Add (I)] button. The user group will be added to the group list shown in the User Group Register window.

How to Change Registration Contents of User Group

Follow the procedure below to change the registration contents of a user group: 1. Select the user group to change the registration contents of from the group list in the User Group Register window. The details of the selected user group will be displayed in the [Set] filed of the User Group Register window. Change the registration contents, then click on the [Change (U)] button in the User Group Register window. The registration contents of the selected user group will be changed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-144

How to Delete a User Group

Follow the procedure below to delete the registration contents of a user group:

IMPORTANT
Do not delete the user group to which the user who is currently using the program belongs. If a user group is deleted, the registration of all users who belong to the deleted user group will also be deleted.

Select the user group to be deleted from the group list in the User Group Register window. The details of the selected user group will be displayed in the [Set] field of the User Group Register window. Click on the [Delete (D)] button in the User Group Register window. The selected user group will be deleted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-145

6.30.2 Registering User

Calling the User Register Window

Follow the procedure below to display the User Register window: Select [User (U)...] from the [Register (A)] menu. The User Register window will be displayed
User Register User List User Name 1 MASTER 2 USER 3 GUEST 4 USER1 Group Name MASTER USER GUEST USERGr1 Full Name MASTER USER GUEST USER1

All Operations Monitoring and parameter setting Only Monitoring Only Monitoring

063003E.EPS

Figure User Register Window

How to Register a New User

Follow the procedure below to register a new user: 1. Enter the user name, group name, full name and description in the [Register] field of the User Group Register window. For the group name, select one of the group names that are already registered.

User name Up to 20 alphanumeric characters or 10 double-byte characters. The following characters cannot be used for user names: / \ [ ] : ; =, + * ? < > Full name Up to 20 alphanumeric characters or 10 double-byte characters. Description Up to 100 alphanumeric characters or 50 double-byte characters. 2. Click on the [Add (I)] button in the User Register window. The registered user will be added to the user list shown in the User Register window.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-146

How to Change Registration Contents of User

Follow the procedure below to change the registration contents of a user: 1. Select the user to change the registration contents of from the user list in the User Register window. The details of the selected user will be displayed in the [Set] filed of the User Register window. Change the registration contents, then click on the [Change (U)] button in the User Register window. The registration contents of the selected user will be changed.

How to Delete a User

Follow the procedure below to delete the registration contents of a user: 1. Select the user to be deleted from the user list in the User Register window. The details of the selected user will be displayed in the [Set] field of the User Register window. Click on the [Delete (D)] button in the User Register window. The selected user will be deleted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

<6. Device Management Tool>

6-147

6.31 Export Operations

The data in the Device Management Tool can be exported (output) to a file in CSV format. The types of data that can be exported are shown below: Device tag list contents Messages History messages

How to Export
Follow the procedure below to export data: 1. Display the window showing the data to be exported. When exporting the registration contents of the device tag list, note that the Device Tag List Display windows show the contents of the master file, while the Device Tag List Registration windows show the contents of the work file. Select [Export (A)...] rom the [File (F)] menu. A dialog box to confirm the export operation will be displayed.

Field Device Tag List Table Display

OK to Export Device Tag?

Yes

063101E.EPS

Figure Confirmation Dialog Box for Exporting Field Device Tag List

Click on the [Yes] button in the export confirmation dialog box. The Export File Set dialog box will be displayed.
Export File Set Look in: Devicelist_1 Devicelist_2 Export
?

File name: Files of type

Devicelist_3 CSV File (*.csv) Open as read-only

Open Cancel

063102E.EPS

Figure Export File Set Dialog Box

Set the export file, then click on the [Open (O)] button in the Export File Set dialog box. The specified data will be output to a text file in CSV format.

IM 33S05P10-01E

2nd Edition : Nov.09,2001-00

Blank Page

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-1

Fieldbus Support Tools

The Fieldbus Support Tools are fieldbus tools that operate in a general-purpose PC connected to the H1 fieldbus. The fieldbus support tools provides support tools for engineering on fieldbus devices and fieldbus system design. TIP
If the upper level system is STARDOM, the terms in this document are redefined with the following meanings listed to the right-hand side. CS1000/CS3000 System ACF11 ALF111 HIS or the general-purpose PC connected on control bus Control Bus FCS CS1000/CS3000 System Builders STARDOM NFLF111 NFLF111 Master PC Control Network FCN/FCJ Resource Configurator

Tasks Performed with the Fieldbus Support Tools

The fieldbus support tools include the following three types of tools: Fieldbus Engineering Tool Device Management Tool Device Tool What each tool performs is indicated below.

Fieldbus Engineering Tool

The Fieldbus Engineering Tool included in the Fieldbus Support Tools provides the same functions as the Fieldbus Engineering Tool when applied to HIS or a general-purpose PC on control bus. However, there are some restrictions regarding the actual use of functions. The available function blocks are also different. The following functions are available on the Fieldbus Engineering Tool in HIS and generalpurpose PC connected on control bus, but not available fieldbus engineering tool of the fieldbus support tools in the PC connected on H1 fieldbus. Control Bus Configuration Display Device ID SEE ALSO
Refer to 5, Fieldbus Engineering Tool for details on the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-2

Device Management Tool

The Device Management Tool included in Fieldbus Support Tools provides the same functions as the Device Management Tool that operates in HIS PC or a general-purpose PC. However, there are some restriction regarding the actual use of functions. Functions are not available in Fieldbus Support Tools mentioned below: Control Bus Configuration HIS Message Acquisition SEE ALSO
Refer to 6, Device Management Tool for details on the Device Management Tool.

Device Tool
The device tool performs the following operations that are necessary as part of engineering. Display Device List Displays the fieldbus devices connected on the H1 fieldbus. Setting the physical device tag name and node address Normally, a physical tag name and node address are set for the fieldbus device. If they have not been set, it is necessary to set them using the device tool. This setting is performed prior to start engineering using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. Creating a capabilities file The capabilities file is provided by the fieldbus device vendor or the Fieldbus Foundation. For Fieldbus engineering, prepare Capabilities File and DD files. If a capabilities file is not available, create a temporary capabilities file using the device tool for Fieldbus engineeing. This chapter introduces the Device included in Fieldbus Engineering Tools.

IMPORTANT
When using Fieldbus Support Tools, it is necessary to run NIFB.EXE, a program attached to the fieldbus communication card (PCMCIA-FBUS), before staring the included tools. It is important to get the official capability files from the fieldbus foundation or from the device vendor. After getting the official capability files, the temporary files should be removed and performs the regarded engineering accordingly.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-3

7.1

Position of Fieldbus Support Tools

This section explains the position of Fieldbus Support Tools.

Position in Overall Fieldbus System

The Filedbus Support Tools can run on the PC connected to the H1 fieldbus (hereinafter, the PC connected to H1 fieldbus is referred to as Slave PC. The PC connected to Control Bus is referred to as Master PC.)
Ethernet HIS Master PC

PFCS

VL net

Slave PC ACF11 Fieldbus Support Tools

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Salve PC: PFCS: ACF11:

Fieldbus device
070101E.EPS

Human Interface Station General-purpose PC (connected to Control Bus) General-purpose PC (connected to H1 fieldbus) Field control station Fieldbus communication module

Figure Position in Overall Fieldbus System

IM 33S05P10-01E

1st Edition : Jan.24, 2000-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-4

Position in Overall Fieldbus System

Control bus SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS KFCS2/KFCS

Slave PC Device Support Tools

ACF11 H1 fieldbus

ALF111 H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device
HIS: Master PC: Salve PC: SFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, KFCS2, KFCS : ACF11, ALF111 :

Fieldbus device

Fieldbus device
070102E.EPS

Human Interface Station General-purpose PC (connected to Control Bus) General-purpose PC (connected to H1 fieldbus) Fieldbus control station Fieldbus communication module

Figure Position in Overall Fieldbus System

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-5

Fieldbus Configuration Related to Whole System Architecture STARDOM

The Fieldbus Support Tools can run on the slave PC connected to the H1 fieldbus. The figure below shows fieldbus configuration related to the whole system architecture when implemented with Fieldbus Support Tools.
HMI

Ethernet VDS Master PC

Control Network N F P C L S P F U U 1 1 1 FCN FCJ (Foundation Fieldbus Communication Compliant)

H1 Fieldbus Slave PC Fieldbus Support Tools

H1 Fieldbus

Fieldbus Device
HMI: VDS: Master PC: Slave PC: FCN: FCJ: NFLF111:

Fieldbus Device
070105E.EPS

Figure Fieldbus Configuration Related to Whole System Architecture - STARDOM

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-6

Position when Only Applied in Slave PC

When H1 fieldbus has not yet connected into its upper level system, using the Fieldbus Support Tools in a Slave PC can configure the fieldbus devices such as setting their parameters. When using Slave PC for a separated H1 fieldbus, an independent fieldbus power supply and the bus terminators are required.
Slave PC Fieldbus support tools

H1 fieldbus

Fieldbus device

Fieldbus device
070103E.EPS

Slave PC: General-purpose PC (connected to H1 fieldbus)

Figure Position of when Only Applied in Slave PC

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-7

Position Within the Engineering Flow

The tasks performed using the device tool (fieldbus support tool) includes setting of the physical device tag name and node address to the fieldbus device and creation of a capabilities file. The following diagram shows the position of each operation performed with the device tool (fieldbus support tool), within the engineering flow of the fieldbus system.
System design

Creation of I/O list

Control loop design

Selection of fieldbus devices

Instrumentation work

Engineering with CS 1000/CS 3000 system builders

Engineering with the Fieldbus Engineering Tool

Setting physical devices tag names and node addresses with Device Tool provided in Fieldbus Support Tools.

Device element setting

On-line debug /loop check

Legend Work flow Flow of output information

Trial operation

Fieldbus system engineering

Application/service
070104E.EPS

Figure Positions Within Engineering Flow of Operations Performed with Device Tool

The process of [selection of fieldbus devices] must be completed and the [list of fieldbus devices used] should have been output, prior to performing engineering with the device tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-8

7.2

Fieldbus Support Tools Operating Environment

The fieldbus support tools operate in a slave PC running Windows XP or Windows 2000. The operating environment of the fieldbus support tools is explained below.

Hardware Environment
The following hardware environment is necessary to use the fieldbus support tools.

Unit Model
IBM PC/AT compatible computer A PCMCIA slot (Type II) is required. This slot shall allow a card that conforms to the PCMCIA (Release 2.1) standards to be installed.

Main Memory
128 MB or more

Hard Disk
Disk space 120 MB or more

CPU
Intel Pentium 300 MHz or faster

Interface Card
Fieldbus communication card : Fieldbus communication card made by National Instruments Co. (Model: PCMCIA-FBUS, Revision: R2.3.6)

Software Environment
The following software environment is required for implementing the Fieldbus Support Tools.

OS
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2, or Service Pack 3

NI-FBUS
NI-FBUS made by National Instruments Co. (Revision: R2.3.6) This software comes with the PCMCIA-FBUS.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-9

7.3

Device Tools
The device tool consists of the following three functions: Device list display Setting physical device tag name and node address Capabilities file creation

IMPORTANT
As a rule, use the device tool with only one fieldbus device connected to the slave PC. The tool can be used with more than one fieldbus device connected. However, if this is the case, be careful not to confuse the fieldbus devices for which the physical device tag name and node address are set.

Device List Display

This function is used to display the fieldbus devices connected to the H1 fieldbus in a list. When using the physical device tag name and node address setting function or the capabilities file creation function, use the device list display function to select the target fieldbus device. Device List Display is composed of below three featurs.

Device List Display

Displays the devices connected to the H1 fieldbus in a list.

Device List Update

Updates the display of the list of devices.

Device List Save

Saves the list of devices to a file.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-10

Setting Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address

This function is used to set a physical device tag name and node address for the fieldbus device. Four featurs are provided with this function.

Tag Assign
Sets a physical device tag name for the fieldbus device selected from the device list.

Address Assign
Sets a node address for the fieldbus device selected from the device list.

Tag Clear
Clears the physical device tag name currently set for the fieldbus device selected from the device list. The node address is cleared at the same time.

Address Clear
Clears the node address currently set for the fieldbus device selected from the device list. After the node address has been cleared, 0xF8 through 0xFB will be set as a temporary node address.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-11

Capabilities File Creation

This function is used to create a capabilities file for the fieldbus device. TIP
Capabilities file is a file in text format that conforms to the Common File Format standard specified by the Fieldbus Foundation. Information specific to the fieldbus, communication capacity (network parameters), initial values for the function blocks and other information are written in the capabilities file. A capabilities file is necessary to perform engineering using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool.

Acquiring Field Device Information

This function is used to acquire device data set in the fieldbus devices. All of the parameters that are required in engineering of Fieldbus Engineering Tool can be acquired from field devices. The parameters for fieldbus engineering can be acquired. But the resource blocks and parameters of the function blocks can not be acquired. Run Upload of Fieldbus Engineering Tool can acquire the parameters.

Create Temporary Capabilities File

This function is used to generate a temporary capabilities file from the device data acquired using the device data acquisition function. The capabilities file that has been generated is stored in the directory specified by the user. Normally, you should specify a directory which is located under the directory where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed (Kappa), as shown below. Kappa\FF_PRJ\DEVPOOL Example: D:\Fieldbus\Kappa\Ff_prj\Devpool

A sub-directory and the capabilities file are stored in the specified directory based on the following rule. MANUFAC_ID\DEV_TYPE\DEV_REV+DD_REV+00.cff Example using Yokogawas EJA) 594543\0003\010100.cff (Number is hexadecimal)

IMPORTANT
The created temporary capability file can not be used to replace the official capability file. It is only for engineering purpose while the official capability file is not available. It is important to get the official capability files from the fieldbus foundation or from the device vendor.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-12

7.4

Using Device Tool

This section explains the basic procedure used to perform engineering with the Device Tool.

Engineering Procedure Using Device Tool

The procedure for setting a physical device tag name and node address to an actual device and for creating a capabilities file is indicated below.
Start

Starting the device tool

Performing the device list tasks

Setting the physical device tag name and node address to the actual device

Create a capabilities file

Exiting the device tool Legend Operations that are always performed Operations performed as necessary End Start and end of operation
070401E.EPS

Figure Engineering Procedure Using Device Tool

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-13

Overview of Each Step

Starting the Device Tool
Start the device tool.

Performing the Device List Tasks

Display the fieldbus devices connected to the H1 fieldbus in a list. The display of the list of devices can be updated and the display contents saved to a file.

Setting the Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address to the Actual Device
Set the physical device tag name and node address to the fieldbus device selected from the device list.

Creating a Capabilities File

Create a capabilities file for the fieldbus device selected from the device list.

Exiting the Device Tool

Exit from the device tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-14

7.4.1

Starting Device Tool

This section explains how to start Device Tool.

Starting the Device Tool

To start the device tool, choose [Programs] on [Start] menu bar, then choose [Fieldbus Tool], click [Device Tool]. The fieldbus tool starts and the Fieldbus Device Tool window appear.
Fieldbus Device Tool Device List Port Name Node Address Physical Device ... Device ID MANUFAC_ID DEV_TYPE DEV_REV DD_REV Update Device List Tag Assignment Address Assignment Capabilities File Editor Save Device List Clear Tag Address

Help Close

070402E.EPS

Figure Fieldbus Device Tool Window

IMPORTANT
It is necessary to run NIFB.EXE, a program provided together with fieldbus communication card (PCMCIA-FBUS) before start Device Tool. More than one device tool may not start on the same PC. The device tool can also be started on a slave PC where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool or the Device Management Tool is already running. However, do not access the same fieldbus device from more than one tool at the same time.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-15

7.4.2

How the Device List Works

Various information regarding the fieldbus devices connected to the H1 fieldbus are displayed in the device list in the fieldbus device tool window. The display of device list can be updated and the display contents saved to a file.

Update Device List

The devices connected to the H1 fieldbus are displayed in the ascending order of node address in the device list in the fieldbus device tool window. The PCMCIA-FBUS card and fieldbus communication module (ACF11 or ALF111) are also displayed. For each device shown, the device attributes (device ID, physical device tag name, node address, MANUFAC_ID, DEV_TYPE, DEV_REV and DD_REV) will be displayed. These device attributes cannot be changed in the fieldbus device tool window.
Fieldbus Device Tool Device List Port Name H1TEST H1TEST H1TEST H1TEST Node Address 0x14 0xEA 0xF4 0xFE Physical Device ... ACF11-14 FI1006 FFTEMP interface0-0 Device ID MANUFAC_ID 5945431001:ACF1... 5945430003J0000... 0x594543 0011513244mvt00... 0x001151 NIC_PCMCIA-FB... DEV_TYPE DEV_REV 3 12868 1 2 DD_REV 1 1 Update Device List Tag Assignment Address Assignment Capabilities File Editor Save Device List Clear Tag Address

Device list is updated successfully. Saving device list is completed successfully.

Help Close

070403E.EPS

Figure Update Device List

To update the device list display, click on the [Update Device List] button. The latest device list will be displayed. Various dialog boxes can be called, a physical device tag name and node address can be set, and a capabilities file can be created for each of the devices shown in the device list. TIP
When the device list display is updated, an error may generate depending on the device status and communication status and all device attributes may not be acquired. The device attributes that could not be acquired are not displayed in the device list. Also, depending on the status of the error, an error message may not be displayed. While a command is being executed to call any dialog box other than the capabilities file creation dialog box, the mouse cursor shown in the fieldbus device tool window changes to an icon indicating a waiting status (hourglass). Operations cannot be performed in the screen while this icon is displayed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-16

Saving the Device List

The contents displayed in the device list in the fieldbus device tool window can be saved to a file in CSV (comma delimiter) format. Use the following procedure to save the device list. 1. 2. 3. Click on the [Save Device List] button in the fieldbus device tool window. A dialog box for specifying a file name appears. Specify the file name for the device list to be saved. Use .csv as the file name extension. Click on the [OK] button. The device list is saved and the file name specification dialog box closes. Clicking on the [Cancel] button closes the file dialog box without saving the device list.

The format of the saved file is indicated below. Port name, node address (hexadecimal display), physical device tag name, device ID, MANUFAC_ID (hexadecimal display) ,DEV_TYPE,DEV_REV,DD_REV Example: interface0-0,0x14,ACF11-14,5945431001:ACF11-176M201372,,,, interface0-0,0xF1,FI1002,5945431003DEMO0129,0x594543,1,2,3

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-17

7.4.3

Setting Physical Device Tag Name and Node Address to Field Device
Set a physical device tag name and node address for the fieldbus device selected from the device list in the fieldbus device tool window.

IMPORTANT
Depending on the device, the physical device tag name and node address may not be set correctly. If this happens, first clear the physical device tag name and node address and initialize the device, and then set the tag name and address again. Normally, it is not necessary to use the tag clear function and address clear function. When a physical device tag name and node address are set to a device or the current name/address cleared, the communication information inside the device will also be cleared. Therefore, after setting/clearing the physical device tag name and node address, download the communication information again using the Fieldbus Engineering Tool. It is not necessary to download the block parameters since the block parameters inside the device will be retained.

Setting Physical Device Tag Name

Tag Assignment

Set the physical device tag name using the procedure below. Even if a new physical device tag name is set, the value prior to the setting will be retained in the node address. 1. 2. From the device list in the fieldbus device tool window, select the device for which the physical device tag name is to be set. Click on the [Assign Tag] button. The tag assignment dialog box appears. The list shows the physical device tag name that is currently set for the device selected from the device list.

Tag Assignment

FI1006

CANCEL
070404E.EPS

Figure Tag Assignment Dialog Box

Enter the physical device tag name to be set. The character string to be entered must consist of standard-width alphanumerics, underscores and hyphens only. A character string of up to 32 characters can be entered.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-18

Click on the [Assign] button. If no physical device tag name has been entered, or if a device with the same physical device tag name that was entered already exists on the same bus, an error occurs. Then use a unique physical device tag instead. If the physical device tag name has been correctly entered, it is set to the device and the tag assignment dialog box closes. An updated device list is displayed in the fieldbus device tool window. Clicking on the [Cancel] button closes the tag assignment dialog box without setting the physical device tag name.

Setting Node Address

Address Assignment

The node address is set using the following procedure. 1. 2. From the device list in the fieldbus device tool window, select the device for which the node address is to be set. Click on the [Assign Address] button. The address assignment dialog box appears. The dialog box shows the node address that is currently set for the device selected from the device list.

Address Assignment

0xEA

CANCEL
070405E.EPS

Figure Address Assignment Dialog Box

3. 4.

Enter the node address to be set in the range of 0x10 through 0xF7. Click on the [Assign] button. An error will occur if a device with the same node address that was entered already exists on the same bus. If the node address has been correctly entered, it is set to the device and the address assignment dialog box closes. An updated device list is displayed in the fieldbus device tool window. Clicking on the [Cancel] button closes the address assignment dialog box without setting the node address.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-19

Clearing the Physical Device Tag Name

Clear the physical device tag name using the following procedure. 1. 2. From the device list in the fieldbus device tool window, select the device whose physical device tag name is to be cleared. Click on the [Device Tag] button in the Clear column. The tag clear confirmation dialog box appears.

Tag Clear Clear the device tag? When the device tag is cleared, the address is also cleared.

Yes

No
070406E.EPS

Figure Tag Clear Confirmation Dialog Box

Click on the [Yes] button. When the physical device tag name for the device is cleared, the node address is cleared at the same time and the tag clear confirmation dialog box closes. An updated device list is displayed in the fieldbus device tool window. Clicking on the [No] button closes the tag clear confirmation dialog box without clearing the physical device tag name.

Clearing the Node Address

Clear the node address using the following procedure. 1. 2. From the device list in the fieldbus device tool window, select the device whose node address is to be cleared. Click on the [Address] button in the Clear column. The address clear confirmation dialog box appears.

Address Clear

Clear the address?

Yes

No
070407E.EPS

Figure Address Clear Confirmation Dialog Box

Click on the [Yes] button. The node address for the device is cleared, and the address clear confirmation dialog box closes. An updated device list is displayed in the fieldbus device tool window. Clicking on the [No] button closes the address clear confirmation dialog box without clearing the node address.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-20

7.4.4

Creating a Capabilities File

A capabilities file can be created using the capabilities file editor dialog box. First, acquire the device data regarding the device for which a capabilities file is to be created. Next, change parts of the device data (device name, file description and communication capacity) as required. Finally, execute the capabilities file save command to generate a capabilities file.

IMPORTANT
While the capabilities file is being created, do not execute other function that is called from the fieldbus device tool window. This may cause the executed function or creation of the capabilities file to be terminated abnormally. It is important to get the official capability files from the Fieldbus Foundation or from the device vendor and to replace the temporary capability file as soon as the official capability file becomes available.

Calling Capabilities File Editor Dialog Box

Call the capabilities file editor dialog box using the following procedure. 1. 2. From the device list in the fieldbus device tool window, select the device for which a capabilities file is to be created. Click on the [Generate Capabilities File] button. The capabilities file creation dialog box appears. The dialog box shows the physical device tag name of the device selected in the device list.
Capabilities File Editor Get Device Data Save Vendor name : Model name : Device name : File description : Exit
070408E.EPS

PD-Tag

FI1001

Figure Capabilities File Editor Dialog Box

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-21

Acquiring Device Information

Get Device Data

Acquire the device information do the following. 1. Click on the [Get Device Data] button in the capabilities file creation dialog box. The range and format of the physical device tag name are checked. After the check is completed, the device data will be acquired from the device connected to the H1 fieldbus. After the device data is acquired, the vendor name, model name, device name, and file description will be displayed in the capabilities file editor dialog box.
Capabilities File Editor Get Device Data Save Vendor name : Model name : Device name : File description : Exit
070409E.EPS

PD-Tag

FI1001

Figure Capabilities File Editor Dialog Box

TIP
The following items will be displayed after the device settings are acquired. Vendor name: Model name: Device name: File description: The Vendor Name acquired via communication (FMS-Identify service) The Model Name acquired via communication (FMS-Identify service) Same value as for Model Character string (This is a Capability file for device name made by CFGen)

Change the Device name and File description if required.

IMPORTANT
With respect to the initial settings of the function block parameters, the values set in the device will be written to the capabilities file, the settings cannot be changed.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-22

Closing the Capabilities File Creation Dialog Box after Saving the Capabilities File
Perform the following steps to close the capabilities file creation dialog box after saving the capabilities file. 1. Click on the [Save] button in the capabilities file creation dialog box. A check is performed for any missing information (whether data has been input, range and type). After the check is completed, a dialog box for specifying the capabilities file name appears. If necessary, specify a new name under which the capabilities file will be saved.

IMPORTANT
Normally, the file name and directory name should not be changed when saving a capabilities file. The file name and directory name are already specified in the following formats. File name: MANUFAC_ID\DEV_TYPE\DEV_REV+DD_REV+00.cff Example using Yokogawa EJA) 594543\0003\010100.cff MANUFAC_ID\DEV_TYPE\ cannot be changed. This is automatically determined. Directory name: Directory where the Fieldbus Engineering Tool is installed (Kappa) \Ff_prj\Devpool\

Check the file name of the capabilities file to be saved and click on the [OK] button. The capabilities file is generated. The generated capabilities file is saved and the capabilities file creation dialog box closes.

Closing the Capabilities File Creation Dialog Box Without Saving the Capabilities File
Perform the following steps to close the capabilities file creation dialog box without saving the capabilities file. Click on the [Exit] button Click on the Close button found at the right edge of the dialog box title bar. The capabilities file creation process is terminated and the capabilities file creation dialog box closes.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-23

7.4.5

Exiting Device Tool

This section explains how to exit Device Tool.

Exiting the Device Tool

Click on the [Close] button in the fieldbus device tool window to exit the device tool. The fieldbus device tool window closes, allowing you to exit from the device tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<7. Fieldbus Support Tools>

7-24

7.5

Device Tool Error Message

If an error occurs, the Device Tool displays an error message to give the detail of that error. This section explains the Device Tool error messages.

Communication Error Messages

When H1 Fieldbus communication error occurs, the Device Tool displays the following message. Communication error Occurred. Function=<%s> Error Code=<%s> The communication error message codes and details, as well as the countermeasures of the errors are shown in the following table.
Table Communication Error Message Code Details and Countermeasures ERROR CODE E_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING E_NOT_FOUND E_WRITE_IS_PROHIBITED E_MALTIPLE E_CONFIG_ERROR E_COMM_ERROR E_TIME_OUT
070501E.EPS

DETAIL NI-FBUS is not running Can not find the specified device on the bus.

COUNTERMEASURE Start NI-FBUS Refresh the device list then choose a proper device.

WRITE_LOCK parameter is enabled, Disable the WRITE_LOCK parameter. so that can not write. A device with identical device tag or device ID exists. Registry information or network information is not correct. Connect only one device to confirm the device tag name. Reconfirm the NI_FBUS configuration.

Error occurred when communicating E_SERVER_CONNECTION_LOST to devices.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-1

Installation of Tools
Installing the fieldbus tools and fieldbus support tools requires a CD-ROM that contains these tools (Model SSSSM01). This chapter explains how to install and uninstall the fieldbus and fieldbus support tools.

IMPORTANT
The Fieldbus tools and Fieldbus support tools are stored in CS 1000/CS 3000 CD-ROM and CD-ROM (Model SSSSM01) named as [CENTUM FOUNDATION FIELDBUS TOOL] which is provided separately from the CD-ROM containing the CS 1000/CS 3000 software. These tools may be installed separately from the CS 1000/CS 3000 software. The Fieldbus Online Document is provided in the same CD-ROM with other Fieldbus Tools. When installing Fieldbus Tools, checking the [Fieldbus Online Document] option box may install the online document together with other tools.

TIP
The PC connected to the control bus is called master PC, while the PC connected to the H1 fieldbus is called slave PC. In this chapter, a tool that runs on the HIS and master PC is called fieldbus tool, while one that runs on the slave PC is called fieldbus support tool.

Fieldbus Tools Control Bus Communication Engineering Tool Device Management Tool HIS Master PC

CS 1000/CS 3000 CD-ROM

CENTUM FOUNDATION FIELDBUS TOOL CD-ROM (Model SSSSM01)

Control bus

Slave PC

Fieldbus Support Tools Engineering Tool Device Management Tool Device Tool
080001E.EPS

H1 fieldbus

Figure Installation of Fieldbus Tools and Fieldbus Support Tools

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<Toc> <Ind>
Fieldbus Tools Engineering Tool Device Management Tool

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-2

Master PC

VDS

STARDOM CD-ROM

CENTUM FOUNDATION FIELDBUS TOOL CD-ROM (Model SSSSM01)

Control Network

Slave PC

Fieldbus Support Tools Engineering Tool Device Management Tool Device Tool
080002E.EPS

H1 fieldbus

Figure Installation of Fieldbus Tools and Fieldbus Support Tools STARDOM

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-3

Overview of Installation - Fieldbus Tools and Fieldbus Support Tools

The procedure for installing the fieldbus tools in the HIS or master PC differs from the procedure for installing the fieldbus support tools in the slave PC. SEE ALSO
For how to install the fieldbus tools to CS1000/CS 3000 system, see 8.1, Installing Fieldbus Tools. For more information about the installation procedure of Fieldbus Tool for installing to STARDOM, see STARDOM FOUNDATION Fieldbus (IM 34P02Q51-01E). For how to install the fieldbus support tools, see 8.3, Installing the Fieldbus Support Tools.

IMPORTANT
The Fieldbus Tools can be installed in a machine where the CS1000/CS 3000 software is already installed. Before installing the Fieldbus Tools, check if there is enough free space available on the hard disk. Install the fieldbus tools and fieldbus support tools in different machines, respectively.

Overview of Uninstallation - Fieldbus Tools and Fieldbus Support Tools

If the installed fieldbus tools or fieldbus support tools become no longer necessary, they can be deleted via the uninstallation procedure. SEE ALSO
For how to uninstall the fieldbus tools to CS1000/CS 3000 system, see 8.2, Uninstalling Fieldbus Tools. For more information about the installation procedure of Fieldbus Tool for installing to STARDOM, see STARDOM FOUNDATION Fieldbus (IM 34P02Q51-01E). For how to uninstall the fieldbus support tools, see 8.4, Uninstalling Fieldbus Support Tools.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-4

8.1

Installing Fieldbus Tools

This section explains how to install the fieldbus tool software packages on the HIS or master PC. SEE ALSO
For more information about the installation procedure of Fieldbus Tool for installing to STARDOM, see STARDOM FOUNDATION Fieldbus (IM 34P02Q51-01E).

Basic Requirements - Fieldbus Tools

Software Packages to be Installed
The fieldbus tools include the following software packages: Control Bus Communication Function Engineering Tool Device Management Tool Fieldbus Online Document You can select and install only the desired software packages. More than one software package can be selected.

IMPORTANT
Installing the Engineering Tool and Device Management Tool requires the corresponding serial number which should be indicated on the CD-ROM containing the purchased tools. The Control Bus Communication Function is used by both the Engineering Tool and the Device Management Tool. Therefore, the Control Bus Communication Function must be installed and set up at the same time as, or earlier than, the other two tools.

TIP
If the Control Bus interface card (VF701) is installed in Master PC, the control bus driver for the card needs to be installed to the PC.

SEE ALSO
For more information about the VF701 card and how to install the card, see Peripherals (IM 33Y06G0101E). For more information about installation of control bus driver, see CS 1000 Installation (IM 33S01C1001E) or CS 3000 Installation (IM 33Q01C10-01E).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-5

Directories Used for Installation

By default, the software packages will be installed in the following directories: C:\Fieldbus\VNET for Control Bus Communication Function C:\Fieldbus\KAPPA for Engineering Tool C:\Fieldbus\YKIKI for Device Management Tool C:\Fieldbus\FbDocument for online document

Initial and Overwriting Installation

There are two installation types for the fieldbus tools and online document: initial installation and overwriting installation. Initial installation Initial installation refers to the first installation of the fieldbus tool. In initial installation, user can select the target directory. Overwriting installation Overwriting installation refers to replacing the existing fieldbus tool with the new version. In overwriting installation, you cannot change the target directory.

IMPORTANT
Do not specify a directory whose name includes a space. If the directory name includes a space, installation cannot be executed correctly.

Compatibility with Other Software Programs

The software programs listed below are guaranteed to work on the HIS (Release R3.03 or later) and master PC properly with the fieldbus tool software packages.
Table Compatible Software Applications Category Work Sheet Word Processor Development Anti-Virus Software Microsoft Excel Microsoft Word Microsoft Visual Basic Microsoft Visual C++ Virus Buster Version 9.0 (2000), 2002 (XP) +SP1 or SP2 9.0 (2000), 2002 (XP) +SP1 or SP2 6.0+SP5 6.0+SP5 2002 5.0.5, 5.0, 4.05 5.01, 5.5+SP2, 6.0+SP1 4.75 Used in Electronic Document (*1) (*2) Latest version
080101E.EPS

Remarks

Document Reader Adobe Acrobat Reader Microsoft Internet Explorer Browser Netscape Navigator
*1: *2:

Use the Acrobat Reader in the CD-ROM of Electronic Documents. SP stands for Service Pack.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-6

IMPORTANT
Do not install any software programs other than those listed above on the same machine where the fieldbus tool software packages are installed. Their compatibility cannot be guaranteed.

Requirements Before Installation

The following are required before actually installing the fieldbus tools:

Confirming the Disk Capacity Available

Each fieldbus tool requires sufficient free space on the hard disk of the HIS or master PC in which the tool is installed: make sure the necessary space as shown below is available before installing each software package. Control Bus Communication Function: Engineering Tool: Device Management Tool: Fieldbus Online Document: 10 MB 50MB 50 MB 10 MB

Installing the Ethernet Card

The master PC communicates with other devices via Ethernet. Install the Ethernet card on the master PC before installing the tools. SEE ALSO
See the Ethernet card manual for details on how to install the Ethernet card into the master PC.

Confirming the Serial Number

Before installing, make sure the serial number is correct. Installing the Engineering Tool and Device Management Tool requires the corresponding serial number. Serial number is the ID number that is indicated on the CD-ROM containing the purchased tools.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-7

Installation Procedure for the Fieldbus Tools

The procedure for installing the fieldbus tools is shown below:
Start of Installation Procedure

Setting up the Hosts file (*1)

Starting the installation program(SETUP.EXE)

Selecting the software packages to be installed

Installing the Control Bus Communication Function

Setting up the Control Bus Communication Function

Installing the Engineering Tool

Installing the Device Management Tool (if required)

Installing Fieldbus Online Document (*2)

Restarting the PC

Legend End of Installation Procedure Work flow

080102E.EPS

*1: *2:

Required when installing the Device Management Tool. When Online Document is required.

Figure Installation Procedure for the Fieldbus Tool

IMPORTANT
If the installation procedure is aborted because of an error, repeat the above procedure from the step, Starting the installation program (SETUP.EXE).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-8

Setting Up the Hosts File - Device Management Tool

IMPORTANT
The Hosts file is required only in the following situation: You are installing the Device Management Tool in the master PC. The HIS function is not installed on the master PC where you want to install the Device Management Tool.

The IP address and host name of the HIS from which messages are to be acquired, need to be added to the \system32\drivers\etc\Hosts file. An example of the file setup is shown below.
Hosts - Notepad File Edit Search # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #

Help

Copyright (c) 1993 - 1999 Microsoft Corp. This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP/IP for Windows. This file contains the mappings of IP address to host names. Each entry should be kept on an individual line. The IP address should be placed in the first colimn followed by the corresponding host name. The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space. Additionally, comments (such as these) may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a '#' symbol. For example: 102.54.94.97 38.25.63.10 rhino.acme.com x.acme.com # source server # x client host

127.0.0.1

localhost #HIS IP address and host name

172.17.1.24 HIS0124

IP Address

Host Name

Comment

IP address and host name of the HIS from which messages are to be acquired
080103E.EPS

Figure A Hosts File

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-9

Starting the Installation Program (SETUP.EXE)

1. 2. 3. Start Windows and login as Administrator. Load the CD-ROM containing the fieldbus tools (Model SSSSM01) in the CD-ROM drive. From the Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel, specify SETUP.EXE in the root directory of the CD-ROM. A dialog box for selecting Japanese or English appears. Select English. Click the [Next] button. A dialog box appears, asking if you have Administrator authority. Click the [Yes] button. The setup window for fieldbus tools appears, together with a dialog box for selecting the software package to be installed.

4. 5. 6.

Selecting a Software Package to be Installed

Select the software package to be installed from the ones listed below. You can select more than one software package. Control Bus Communication Function Engineering Tool Device Management Tool Fieldbus Online Document

IMPORTANT
The Control Bus Communication Function is used by both the Engineering Tool and the Device Management Tool. Therefore, install it at the same time as, or prior to, the Engineering Tool and Device Management Tool.

Clicking the [Next] button begins installation of each software package selected.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-10

Installing the Control Bus Communication Function

The following explains the procedure for installing the Control Bus Communication Function. SEE ALSO
For more information about the installation procedure of Control Bus communication package for installing to STARDOM, see STARDOM FOUNDATION Fieldbus (IM 34P02Q51-01E).

1. 2.

On the dialog box for starting installation, click [OK] button to open the dialog box for selecting communication route. In the communication route selection dialog box, select [CENTUM V net/VL net] (*1) or [STARDOM Control Network] (*2). The default is [CENTUM V net/VL net]. Route selection is not required if the installation is to upgrade the existing communication packages. The previous setting will be used. Installation procedure after selecting [CENTUM V net / VL Net] is as follows.
For installing to CS1000/CS3000 For installing to STARDOM

*1: *2:

3. 4. 5.

Click [Next] button. A dialog box for confirming the version number displays. In the version confirmation dialog box, confirm the version of the Control Bus Communication Function to be installed. Click the [OK] button. A confirmation dialog box appears, asking if the target directory is correct. If the Control Bus Communication Function of a later version has already been installed, a confirmation dialog box appears asking whether or not you still want to continue to install. If this confirmation dialog box appears, specify whether or not to continue installation by either of the following operations.

Clicking the [Install] button enables the installation process to continue by displaying a dialog box for confirming the target directory. Clicking the [Cancel] button cancels the installation process. 7. Confirm the target directory in the target directory confirmation dialog box. With initial installation, change the target directory if necessary. Usually, the default directory need not be changed. In the case of overwriting installation, the setting cannot be changed. Click the [Next] button. If there is not enough space available in the disk, a dialog box appears to indicate insufficient disk space. If this dialog box appears, do one of the following.

In the case of initial installation Change to a different drive, or cancel the installation process or to increase the free disk space by taking remedial actions. In the case of overwriting installation Cancel the installation process and increase the free disk space by taking remedial actions. If there is sufficient space in the disk drive, a dialog box for selecting the communication route appears. 9. If the hard disk has sufficient free space, click [Confirm] button to start installation. Once the installation is completed successfully, the menu items of the Control Bus Communication Function are added to the [Fieldbus Tool] menu that is displayed from the [Start] menu of Windows. In addition, the short-cut of the Control Bus Communication Function is registered in the directory window of the Fieldbus Tool.
IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-11

Configuring Control Bus (Settings after Installation)

Configuring Control Bus

After installing the Control Bus Communication Function, link the fieldbus segment name and the fieldbus communication module (ACF11, ALF111) in the Control Bus Setup window to set up the Control Bus Communication Function. On the control bus setting window, choose a fieldbus communication module, then the setting details of the corresponding segment are displayed. The items that can not be set are grayed. The setting items are as follows.
Table Segment Setting Items of Selected Module

Item

Setting

ACF11
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes

ALF111
Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
080104E.EPS

SEGMENT TYPE BUS NODE UNIT SLOT PORT COMMENT

Yes: No: Need to be set. Need not to be set.

Device Management Tool for ALF111 has the same functionality as for ACF11.

IMPORTANT
During configuration, the previous setup remains effective until the Control Bus Setup window is closed. While setting up the control bus configuration, do not activate the communication function of any other tools that run on the HIS or master PC.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-12

From the [Start] menu of Windows, choose [Control Bus Configuration Definition]. The Control bus Setup Window opens.
Control Bus Setup - [Control Bus Setup Form]

File

Edit

Sort

Help

FCS INDEX FCS FCS01 SEGMENT ALF111-1 TYPE ALF111-2 TYPE ALF111 ACF11 ALF111 ALF111 1 1 1 1 2 DOMAIN STATION 1 2 COMMENT BUS NODE UNIT SLOT PORT COMMENT 1 1 1 1 1

TYPE

Record : Form View

/ 3 NUM
080105E.EPS

Figure A Control Bus Setup Window

2. 3. 4.
*1: *2:

If there are any defined FCS, click the combo box of the [FCS INDEX] field to show a list of FCS names. Select the FCS the fieldbus is to be connected to. To define a new FCS, click on the [>*] button and then enter the station name in the [FCS] field using up to eight alphanumeric characters. Enter the domain number linked to the specified FCS in the [DOMAIN] field in the range of 1 through 24 (*1) or 1 through 64 (*2).
Setting range for the CS 1000 system. Setting range for the CS 3000 system.

5.
*1: *2:

Enter the station number linked to the specified FCS in the [STATION] field in the range of 1 through 24 (*1) or 1 through 64 (*2).
Setting range for the CS 1000 system. Setting range for the CS 3000 system.

6. 7. 8.
*1: *2:

Enter a comment in the [COMMENT] field using up to 24 characters or 12 full-byte characters. This entry may be omitted. Enter the segment name of the fieldbus in the [SEGMENT] field using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Choose a module, ACF11(*1) or ALF111(*2), from TYPE dropdown list box.
For PFCS, SFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS For KFCS2 or KFCS

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-13

9.
*1: *2:

Enter the RIO bus number (*1) or ESB bus number (*2) in the [BUS] field.
For ACF11. Set 1 or 2. For ALF111. Set 1.

10. Enter the node number in which ACF11 or ALF111 is installed (*1) in the [NODE] field.
*1: Set 1 for the PFCS or SFCS. Set a number between 1 and 8 for the LFCS2 or LFCS. Set a number between 1 to 15 for KFCS2 or KFCS.

11. Enter the unit number of the communication module nest (AMN33) in which ACF11 is installed (*1) in the [UNIT] field, in the range of 1 through 5.
*1: For ACF11 only. This setting is not available for ALF111.

12. Enter in the [SLOT] field the ACF11 (*1) installing slot number in the communication module nest (AMN33), or slot number in the node where ALF111 is installed.
*1: *2: For ACF11. Set 1 or 2. For ALF111. Set a number between 1 to 8.

13. Enter the ALF111 port number (*1) into PORT field.
*1: For ALF111 only. This setting is not available for ACF11.

14. Enter a comment in the [COMMENT] field using up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. This entry may be omitted. 15. Select [Exit] from the [File] menu. The Control Bus Setup window closes and the setup becomes effective.

IMPORTANT
When deleting a segment, select all fields of the segment by clicking the left button of the segment, the click [Cut] on [Edit] menu. When deleting an FCS, select all fields of the FCS by clicking the left button of the FCS then do the same as above explained. The settings defined in the Control Bus Setup window are stored in the ykvconf.mdb file. It is recommended to make a backup copy of this file. This file is saved in the following location. \Vhfset\ykvcnf.mdb

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-14

Installing the Engineering Tool

The following explains the procedure for installing the Engineering Tool. 1. 2. In the version confirmation dialog box, confirm the version of the Engineering Tool to be installed. Click the [OK] button. A dialog box for user registration appears. If the Engineering Tool of a later version has already been installed, a confirmation dialog box appears asking whether or not you want to install the old version. If this confirmation dialog box appears, specify whether or not to continue installation by either of the following operations.

Clicking the [Install] button enables the installation process to continue and displays a dialog box for user registration. Clicking the [Cancel] button cancels the installation process. 4. In the user registration dialog box, enter the user name, the organization name and the serial number of the Engineering Tool. Serial number is the ID number that is indicated on the CD-ROM containing the purchased tools. Entering the correct number enables you to continue with the installation process. If the entered serial number is incorrect, the user registration dialog box opens again to interrupt the installation process. Click the [Next] button. A dialog box for confirming the target directory appears. In the target directory confirmation dialog box, check if the target directory is correct. With initial installation, change the target directory if necessary. Usually, the default directory need not be changed. With overwriting installation, setting for the directory cannot be changed.

5. 6.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-15

Click the [Next] button. If there is not enough space in the disk drive, a dialog box appears to indicate insufficient disk space. If this dialog box appears, do one of the following.

In the case of initial installation Change the disk drive, or cancel the installation process or increase the free disk space by taking some remedial actions. In the case of overwriting installation Cancel the installation process and increase the free disk space by taking remedial actions. If there is enough space available in the disk drive, a dialog box for selecting the components appears. 8. In the component selection dialog box, select the components to be installed. The Engineering Tool and system database can be selected as components.

IMPORTANT
In the case of overwriting installation, selecting [System Database] in the component selection dialog box overwrites the system database and security information of the Engineering Tool and then returns to the initial installation screen.

Click the [Next] button. Installation of the selected components begins.

IMPORTANT
If [System Database] is selected in the dialog box for selecting the components, a dialog box appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing files. To overwrite the existing files, select [Yes] in this dialog box.

Once the installation is completed successfully, the menu items of the Engineering Tool are added to the [Fieldbus Tool] menu that is displayed from the [Start] menu of Windows. In addition, the short-cut of the Engineering Tool is registered in the directory window of the Fieldbus Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-16

Installing the Device Management Tool

The following explains the procedure for installing the Device Management Tool. 1. 2. In the version confirmation dialog box, confirm the version of the Device Management Tool to be installed. Click the [OK] button. A dialog box for user registration appears. If the Device Management Tool of a later version has already been installed, a confirmation dialog box appears asking whether or not you still want to continue to install. If this confirmation dialog box appears, specify whether or not to continue installation by either of the following operations.

Clicking the [Install] button enables the installation process to continue and displays a dialog box for user registration. Clicking the [Cancel] button cancels the installation process. 4. In the user registration dialog box, enter the user name, the organization name and the serial number of the Device Management Tool. Serial number is the ID number that is indicated on the CD-ROM containing the purchased tools. Entering the correct number enables you to continue with the installation process. If the entered serial number is incorrect, the user registration dialog box opens again to interrupt the installation process. Click the [Next] button. A dialog box for confirming the target directory appears. In the target directory confirmation dialog box, check if the target directory is correct. With initial installation, change the target directory if necessary. Usually, the default directory need not be changed. With overwriting installation, the setting for the directory cannot be changed. Click the [Next] button. If there is not enough space in the disk drive, a dialog box appears to indicate insufficient disk space. If this dialog box appears, do one of the following.

5. 6.

In the case of initial installation Change to a new drive, or cancel the installation process or increase the free disk space by taking remedial actions. In the case of overwriting installation Cancel the installation process or increase the free disk space by taking remedial actions. Installation begins if enough space is available. Once the installation is completed successfully, the menu items of the Device Management Tool are added to the [Fieldbus Tool] menu that is displayed from the [Start] menu of Windows. In addition, the short-cut of the Device Management Tool is registered in the directory window of the Fieldbus Tool.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-17

Installing Fieldbus Online Document

The procedure for installing the Fiedbus Online Document is as follows: 1. Confirm the path for installation on the dialog box for confirming the destination directory. If it is the first time installation, the destination directory may be changed if required. In general situation, use the default directory. If it is re-installation, the previously installed directory can not be changed. Click [Next] button. The destination disk space will be checked for installation. If it is the first time installation: Change the path for installation or abort the installation. If it is re-installation: Abort the installation then try to get more free space on the disk. If the hard disk has sufficient free space, click [Confirm] button to start installation. 3. Click [Next] button. Installation of Fieldbus Online Document starts to copy files to the destination directory. Then the installation will end.

If a dialog box prompts for insufficient disk space, do the followings:

After Installing Online Document

After installing the online document, the Acrobat Reader needs to be installed for reading the document. TIP
When CS 1000/CS 3000 system and the fieldbus tools (engineering tools and device management tools) or when STARDOM system and the fieldbus tools are applied in the same PC, the Acrobat Reader in the CS 1000/CS 3000 system CD-ROM or in the STARDOM system CD-ROM should be used.

In the same CD-ROM of Fieldbus Tools, ar405enu.exe, ar500enu.exe and ar505enu.exe can be found in the path of [Drive:\CENTUM\READER\ENGLISH]. Double click ar505enu.exe to install Acrobat Reader 5.0.5, double click ar500enu.exe to install Acrobat Reader 5.00 or double click ar405enu.exe to install Acrobat Reader 4.05.

Restarting the PC
When installation is completed, a dialog box pops out to prompt for PC Restart. 1. 2. Click the [OK] button. The dialog box closes. Then restart the PC. The Control Bus Communication Function will automatically be started when the PC is restarted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-18

8.2

Uninstalling Fieldbus Tools

This section explains how to uninstall the software packages included in the Fieldbus Tools (Engineering Tool, Device Management Tool and Control Bus Communication Function). If you uninstall the Control Bus Communication Function, Fieldbus Tool communication with the HIS or master PC connected to the control bus becomes no longer possible. SEE ALSO
For more information about STARDOM master PC and uninstallation of software fieldbus tools, see Instruction Manual of STARDOM FOUNDATION Fieldbus (IM 34P02Q51-01E).

Uninstalling the Engineering Tool

1. From the Control Panel of Windows, choose [Add/Remove Programs]. The Add/Remove Programs Properties opens. The Add/Remove Programs Properties window opens. Click the Install/Uninstall tab in the window that has opened. From the list shown in the Add/Remove Programs Properties, choose [Engineering Tool]. In the Add/Remove Programs Properties window, click the [Add/Remove...] button. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the removal of the selected application and all of its components. Click the [Yes] button in the file deletion confirmation dialog box. The Engineering Tool is uninstalled.

2. 3. 4.

If you uninstall the Engineering Tool, the following data are removed. Icons for Engineering Tool All files in the directory for Engineering Tool Registry key The following data remain even if the Engineering Tool is uninstalled. All data located under the project database directory <FF_PJT> Files under \WINNT\system32

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-19

Uninstalling the Device Management Tool

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Control Panel of Windows, choose [Add/Remove Programs]. The Add/Remove Programs Properties window opens. Click the Install/Uninstall tab in the window that has opened. From the list shown in the Add/Remove Programs Properties, choose [Device Management Tool]. In the Add/Remove Programs Properties window, click the [Add/Remove...] button. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the removal of the selected file. Click the [Yes] button in the file deletion confirmation dialog box. The Device Management Tool is uninstalled.

If you uninstall the Device Management Tool, the following data are removed. Icons for Device Management Tool All files in the directory for Device Management Tool Registry keys The following data remain even if the Device Management Tool is uninstalled. Device Management Tool user data service files under the directory \DB Files under \WINNT\system32

Uninstalling the Control Bus Communication Function

IMPORTANT
If you uninstall the Control Bus Communication Function, Fieldbus Tool communication with the HIS or master PC connected to the control bus becomes no longer possible.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Choose [Add/Remove Programs..] in Control Panel of Windows. Add/Remove Programs Properties window appears. Click the Install/Uninstall tab. Choose V net in the list. Click [Add/Remove] button in the Add/Remove Programs Properties window. A dialog box appears for confirmation. Them click [OK]. Control Bus Communication Function will be uninstalled.

Uninstallation of the Control Bus Communication Function will remove the following items. Icons for Control Bus Communication Function All files in the directory for Control Bus Communication Function Registry key The following data will remain even after the Control Bus Communication Function is uninstalled. Control Bus Communication Function user data service files under the directory \VHFSET\ykvcnf Files under WINNT\system32

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-20

Uninstalling Fieldbus Online Document

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click [Add/Remove Programs] icon on Control Panel of Windows. Then [Add/Remove Programs Properties] dialog box will appear. Select the Install/Uninstall tab of this dialog box. Choose [Fieldbus Online Document] from ListView. Click [Add/Remove] button on the [Add/Remove Programs Properties] dialog box. A Confirm File Deletion dialog box will appear for reconfirmation. Clicking [Yes] button will start to remove the [Fieldbus Online Document].

After uninstalling the Fieldbus online document, the files under the designated destination directory for Fieldbus Online Document will all be deleted.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-21

8.3

Installing the Fieldbus Support Tools

This section explains how to install the software packages of fieldbus support tools in the slave PC.

Basic Requirements - Fieldbus Support Tools

The following software packages can be installed as fieldbus support tools: Engineering Tool (H1 fieldbus) Device Management Tool (H1 fieldbus) Device Tool (H1 fieldbus) Fieldbus Online Document (Electronic Documentation)

Directories Used for Installation

By default, the software packages will be installed under the common directory H1SupportTool as follows: Engineering Tool C:\H1SupportTool\KAPPA Device Management Tool C:\H1SupportTool\YKIKI Device Tool C:\H1SupportTool\DEVTOOL Fieldbus Online Document C:\H1SupportTool\FbDocument

Initial and Overwriting Installation

There are two installation types for the fieldbus support tools: initial installation and overwriting installation. Initial installation Initial installation refers to the first installation of the fieldbus support tool. In initial installation, user can select a directory for installation. Each software package will be installed in the directory created under the selected directory. Overwriting Installation Overwriting installation refers to replacing the existing fieldbus support tool with the new version. In overwriting installation, you cannot change the directory.

IMPORTANT
Do not specify a directory whose name includes a space. If the directory name includes a space, installation cannot be executed correctly.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-22

Compatibility with Other Software Programs

The software applications that compatible with Fieldbus Support Tools are also compatible with Fieldbus Tools. SEE ALSO
For more information about the software applications that can run in the same environment with Fieldbus Tools, see section Basic Requirements - Fieldbus Tools in chapter 8.1 Installing Fieldbus Tools.

IMPORTANT
Do not install any software programs other than those listed above on the same machine where the software packages of Fieldbus Support Tools are installed. Their compatibility cannot be guaranteed.

Requirements before Installation

The following are required before actually installing the fieldbus support tools:

Confirming the Disk Capacity Available

Each fieldbus support tool requires sufficient free hard-disk space in the slave PC on which the tool is installed: make sure there is at least 120 MB free disk space.

Installing the PCMCIA-FBUS Card

The slave PC communicates with fieldbus devices via the H1 fieldbus before installing the fieldbus support tools switch off the PC and insert the PCMCIA-FBUS card into the slave PC. Then, install the NI-FBUS software attached with the card to slave PC. SEE ALSO
See the PCMCA-FBUS card manual for details on how to insert the PCMCIA-FBUS card and how to install NI-FBUS to the slave PC.

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-23

Check Serial Number

When installing Fieldbus Support Tools, the serial number is required. The serial number is availed when purchasing the CD-ROM of Fieldbus Support Tools. For the user of Fieldbus Engineering Tool or Device Management Tool, the serial number of the these packages can be used as the serial number of Fieldbus Support Tools. For the user of Fieldbus Support Tools, the serial number of Fieldbus Support Tools should be used to install Fieldbus Support Tools.

Installation Procedure for the Fieldbus Support Tools

The procedure for installing the fieldbus support tools is shown below:
Start of Installation Procedure

Running the installation program (SETUP.EXE)

Configuring the PCMCIA-FBUS

Connecting slave PC

Legend End of Installation Procedure Work flow.

080301E .EPS

Figure Installation Procedure for the Fieldbus Support Tools

IMPORTANT
If the installation procedure is aborted because of an error, repeat the above procedure from the step, Running the installation program (SETUP.EXE).

IM 33S05P10-01E

3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-24

Running the Installation Program (SETUP.EXE)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start Windows and login as Administrator. Load the CD-ROM containing the fieldbus support tools (Model SSSSM01) in the CDROM drive. Specify SETUP.EXE in the H1SupportTool directory of the CD-ROM. A dialog box for selecting Japanese or English appears. Select English. Click the [Next] button. A dialog box appears, asking if you have Administrator authority. Click the [Yes] button. A version confirmation dialog box appears. Confirm the version of the fieldbus support tool to be installed. Click the [OK] button. A user registration dialog box displays. If the fieldbus support tool of a later version has already been installed, a confirmation dialog box appears asking whether or not you want to continue to install. If this confirmation dialog box appears, specify whether or not to continue installation by either of the following operations.

Clicking the [Install] button enables the installation process to continue and displays a dialog box for user registation. Clicking the [Cancel] button cancels the installation process. 9. On the user registration dialog box, user name, organization and serial number need to be entered. The serial number is availed when purchasing the CD-ROM of Fieldbus Support Tools. For the user of Fieldbus Engineering Tool or Device Management Tool, The serial number of either package can be used as the serial number of Fieldbus Support Tools. Installation will continue only when the serial number is correctly entered, otherwise, the dialog box for registration displays again.

10. Click [Next] button. A dialog box for specifying the target directory displays. 11. Confirm the target directory in the target directory confirmation dialog box. With initial installation, change the target directory if necessary. Usually, the default directory need not be changed. In the case of overwriting installation, setting of the directory cannot be changed. 12. Click the [Next] button. If there is not enough space in the disk drive, a dialog box appears to indicate insufficient disk space. If this dialog box appears, do one of the following. In the case of initial installation Change to a new drive, or cancel the installation process or increase the free disk space by taking remedial actions.. In the case of overwriting installation Cancel the installation process and increase the free disk space by taking remedial actions.

If there is sufficient space available in the disk, a dialog box for selecting the Engineering Tool components appears.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-25

13. In this dialog box, select the Engineering Tool components to be installed. The Engineering Tool and system database can be selected as components.

14. Click the [Next] button.

IMPORTANT
If [System Database] is selected in the dialog box for selecting the Engineering Tool components, a dialog box appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing files. To overwrite the existing files, select [Yes] in this dialog box.

Installation of Device Management Tool, Device Tool and Fieldbus Onlien Document will continue. The progress of setup is displayed during installation. Once the installation is completed successfully, the menu items of the Engineering Tool, Device Management Tool and Device Tool are added to the [Fieldbus Tool H1] menu that is displayed from the [Start] menu of Windows.

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-26

Configuring the PCMCIA-FBUS

After installing the Fieldbus Support Tool, configure the PCMCIA-FBUS using the NI-FBUS software by National Instrument. TIP
The NI-FBUS must be installed in the slave PC to configure the PCMCIA-FBUS card. Setting of PCMCIABUS card is explained here for H1 Fieldbus connection.

Setting the Port

From the [Start] menu of Windows, choose [Program] - [National Instrument FBUS] [Interface Config]. The interface card utility (fbconf.exe) starts, allowing you to set the port.
Port Interface Name Device Tag SEG01 interface0-0 type Device Address Fixed Default Visitor Advanced...

OK Cancel

Device Type

Basic Device Link Master Device

Usage

NI-FBUS Bus Monitor

080302E.EPS

Figure Port Window

Enter the project name or segment name to be used in the communication in the Interface Name field. Specify the project name in the case of Engineering Tool, or segment name in the case of Device Management Tool. For Device Type, specify [Basic Device] if there is ACF11 or ALF111 on the H1 fieldbus. If there is no ACF11 on the H1 fieldbus, specify [Link Master Device].

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-27

Advanced Settings of the Port

Clicking the [Advanced...] button in the Port window displays the Advanced Stack Configuration window. This window allows you to define advanced settings of the port. The following shows an example of advanced settings.
Advanced Stack Configuration Dlme Link Master Info Max Scheduling Overhead Def Min Token Deleg Def Token Hold Time Target Token Rot Time Link Maint Tok Hold Time Time Distribution Period Max Inactivity To claim Las Delay Las DB Spdu Distri Period System Management Info Primary Time Master T1 T2 T3 Clock Sync Interval 0x10 0x75300 0x2bf200 0x15f900 10 4 84 700 4096 0x0 5000 100 200 Device ID: NIC_PCMCIA-FBUS_A59591_0 Configured Link Settings Slot Time Dlpdu Phl Overhead Max Response Delay First Unpolled Node This Link Min Inter-Pdu Delay Num of Unpolled Node Preamble Extension Post Trans Gap Max Inter Chan Signal Time Sync Class 8 0 10 0x25 0 16 0xba 0 0 0 1 ms OK Cancel

080303E.EPS

Figure Advanced Port Settings

The range of node addresses that can be specified for devices varies depending on the values set in First Unpolled Node and Num Of Unpolled Node. Set necessary values by referencing the table shown below.
Table Settings of First Unpolled Node and Num of Unpolled Node Setting of First Unpolled Node 0x25 0x26 0x25 Setting of Num of Unpolled Node 0xba 0xba 0xb9 Range of node addresses that can be specified for devices 0x10-0x24, 0xdf-0xff 0x10-0x25, 0xe0-0xff 0x10-0x24, 0xde-0xff
080304E.EPS

Connecting the Slave PC

After installing the Fieldbus Support Tools, connect the slave PC to the H1 fieldbus. TIP
The PCMCIA-FBUS card must be installed on the slave PC before it can be connected to the H1 fieldbus.

IMPORTANT
When connecting the slave PC to the H1 fieldbus via cable, be careful not to cause shortcircuit in the bus cable. If short-circuits occurs in the bus cable, power supply to all fieldbus devices connected to the H1 fieldbus will be cut off. This may cause the system to malfunction.
IM 33S05P10-01E 3rd Edition : July 27, 2002-00

<8. Installation of Tools>

8-28

8.4

Uninstalling Fieldbus Support Tools

This section explains how to uninstall the fieldbus support tools.

Uninstalling Fieldbus Support Tools

1. 2. 3. 4. 5 From the Control Panel of Windows, choose [Add/Remove Programs]. The Add/Remove Programs Properties window opens. Click the Install/Uninstall tab in the window that has opened. From the list shown in the Add/Remove Programs Properties, choose [Fieldbus Support Tool]. In the Add/Remove Programs Properties window, click the [Add/Remove...] button. A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the removal of the selected file. Click the [Yes] button in the file deletion confirmation dialog box. The fieldbus support tools are uninstalled. If you uninstall the fieldbus support tools, the following data are removed. Engineering Tool, Device Management Tool and Device Tool icons All files located under the directory for Engineering Tool All files located under the directory for Support Tool Registry keys The following data will remain even after the Fieldbus Support Tools is uninstalled. Data Files under the project database directory <FF_PJT> Data Files under the directory \WINNT\system32 User database files under the directory \H1SupportTool\YKIKI\DB

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16, 2002-00

<Int> <Toc> <Rev>

Ind-1

CS 1000/CS 3000 Foundation Fieldbus Tools

IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition

INDEX
A
ACF11 .............................................................. 1-11 Address Assignment Fieldbus Engineering Tool .................. 5-165 Address Assignment Device Tool ................... 7-18 Advanced LM Settings .................................... 5-157 AI ...................................................................... 3-38 ALF111 ............................................................. 1-13 All FBAP Generation ......................................... 5-44 AMN33 ............................................................. 1-10 Analog Input Block ............................................ 3-38 Analog Output Block ......................................... 3-38 AO .................................................................... 3-38 Assigning a Terminal Number ........................... 4-22 Auto Setup ........................................................ 6-29 Automatic Registration to Device List ................ 6-29 Connection of Fieldbus Block External I/O Terminal Parameters ............................... 3-14 Connection of Fieldbus Block Internal Parameters ............................................. 3-14 Connection of Software Terminal and FCS Function Block ...................................................... 4-30 Connection of the Fieldbus Block and Faceplate Block ...................................................... 3-15 Connection to Fieldbus Block ............................ 3-12 Control Drawing Builder .................................... 4-30 Control Selector Block ...................................... 3-42 Create New IOM ............................................... 4-14 Creating a Capabilities File Device Tool .......... 7-20 Creating a New Project ..................................... 5-78 Creating FBAP Schedule ................................ 5-140 CS .................................................................... 3-42

D B
Block Tag Name ................................................ 6-12 Data Referencing and Setting for the Fieldbus Block Parameters ................................... 3-17 Database Management .................................... 5-27 DD File ............................................................. 5-18 DD Files .................................................. 5-70, 5-82 Device Class ................................................... 5-165 Device Configuration Data Export ..................... 5-28 Device Editor .......................................... 5-38, 5-85 Device List Display Device Tool ........................ 7-9 Device Management ......................................... 1-24 Device Management Tool .................................... 6-2 Device Parameters ........................................... 5-98 Device Pool Management ................................. 5-33 Device Tag List Display ......................... 6-31, 6-100 Device Tag List Registration .................... 6-21, 6-87 Device Tag List Table Display .......................... 6-101 Device Tag Name .............................................. 6-12 Device Tool ......................................................... 7-2 Device Tools ........................................................ 7-9 DI ...................................................................... 3-39 Directory Structure for the Fieldbus Engineering Tool ........................................................ 5-55 Discrete Input Block .......................................... 3-39 Discrete Output Block ....................................... 3-39
IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

C
Cable .................................................................. 2-7 Capabilities File ................................................ 5-18 Capabilities File Creation .................................. 7-11 Capabilities Files ..................................... 5-70, 5-82 Changing a Registered Device ID ................... 5-156 Clearing the Node Address Device Tool ......... 7-19 Clearing the Physical Device Tag Name Device Tool .......................................... 7-19 Command Line ................................................. 4-20 Component Equipment of Fieldbus System ........ 1-8 Configuration of Control Bus Device Management Tool .................... 6-64 Configuration of Fieldbus System ....................... 1-3 Configuring Control Bus .................................... 8-11 Configuring Control Bus Fieldbus Engineering Tool .................... 5-67 Configuring Control Bus Device Management Tool .................. 6-133 Connecting Function Blocks ............................ 5-124

<Int> <Toc> <Rev>

Ind-2
Functional Overview of Device Management Tool ........................................................ 6-11

Display Device ID .............................................. 5-87 Display Individual Device ID .............................. 5-90 DO .................................................................... 3-39 Download ......................................................... 5-53 Download from IOM Builder .............................. 4-29 Download to ACF11 in System View ................. 4-21 Download to FCS and ACF11 in IOM Builder .... 4-29 Download to IOM .............................................. 4-21 Download to the ACF11 .................................. 5-160 Downloading to Fieldbus Devices ....................... 4-8 Downloading to the Fieldbus Devices .............. 5-166

G
Generate All .................................................... 5-139 Generation ............................................ 5-44, 5-138

H
History Message Display Device Management Tool .................. 6-125 Host File Set ..................................................... 5-32 Host File Set Read/Expansion .......................... 4-10

E
Engineering and Startup Procedure for Fieldbus System ................................................... 4-33 Environment Setting Fieldbus Engineering Tool .................... 5-51 Environment Setting Device Management Tool ........ 6-65, 6-134 Environment Settings Fieldbus Engineering Tool .................... 5-68 Event Display ........................................ 6-59, 6-131 Exiting Device Management Tool ...................... 6-77 Export Device Management Tool ........ 6-74, 6-147

I
Import a Project .............................................. 5-155 Importing Device Configuration Data ................. 5-84 Individual Device Tag Display .......................... 6-104 Individual Field Device Register ........................ 6-23 Individual Field Device Tag List Display ............. 6-32 Initial Setting of the Fieldbus Engineering Tool .. 5-61 Input Selector Block .......................................... 3-43 Installing Fieldbus Online Document ................. 8-17 Installing Fieldbus Tools ...................................... 8-4 Installing the Control Bus Communication Function ................................................. 8-10 Installing the Device Management Tool ............. 8-16 Installing the Engineering Tool .......................... 8-14 Installing the Fieldbus Support Tools ................. 8-21 Integrator Block ................................................. 3-43 IOM Builder ....................................................... 4-22 IS ...................................................................... 3-43 IT ...................................................................... 3-43

F
Fallback Operation ............................................ 4-20 FB Editor .............................................. 5-41, 5-115 FBAP Block Diagram ...................................... 5-116 FCS Control Function Using Fieldbus ................. 3-1 FCS Control Functions Related to the Fieldbus ... 3-4 Field Device Tag List Table Display .................... 6-31 Field Device Tag List Table Register .................. 6-22 Fieldbus Block Alarm Status ............................. 3-23 Fieldbus Block Alert Display : LFCS2/LFCS ...... 3-11 Fieldbus Block Alert Display : PFCS/SFCS ....... 3-11 Fieldbus Block Mode Referencing and Setting .. 3-20 Fieldbus Blocks ................................................... 3-4 Fieldbus Communication .................................... 1-1 Fieldbus Communication Module .... 1-11, 1-13, 2-1 Fieldbus Database Directory ............................. 4-20 Fieldbus Device Parameter Display and Setting .................................................... 6-36 Fieldbus Device Status Display ............. 6-33, 6-106 Fieldbus Devices ................................................ 2-5 Fieldbus Engineering .......................................... 4-2 Fieldbus Engineering Tool ......................... 1-17, 5-3 Fieldbus Support Tools ....................................... 7-1 Fieldbus System Engineering ........................... 1-17 Function Blocks .............................................. 5-119

L
Linkmaster Device ................................ 5-35, 5-157

M
MAI ................................................................... 3-46 Maintenance Fieldbus Engineering Tool ......... 5-54 Maintenance Device Management Tool ........ 6-70, 6-127 MAO ................................................................. 3-47 Master PC .......................................................... 1-8 MDI ................................................................... 3-44 MDO ................................................................. 3-45 Message Display Device Management Tool ........ 6-46, 6-122 Method ............................................................. 6-42 Method Execution ........................................... 6-118 Multiple Analog Input Block ............................... 3-46
IM 33S05P10-01E 4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<Int> <Toc> <Rev>

Ind-3
R
R_B .................................................................. 3-38 RA .................................................................... 3-41 Ratio Set Block ................................................. 3-41 Reading Device Information .............................. 6-27 Registering a Device to the Project ................... 5-91 Registering Device Information ......................... 6-25 Reliability .......................................................... 3-48 Replace Fieldbus Device ................................ 5-110 Resource Block ................................................. 3-38

Multiple Analog Output Block ............................ 3-47 Multiple Discrete Input Block ............................. 3-44 Multiple Discrete Output Block .......................... 3-45

N
Naming Rules ................................................... 6-12 Nest for the Communication Module ................. 1-10 Network Editor ........................................ 5-39, 5-94 Network Parameters ......................................... 5-96 Network Startup ................................................ 5-52 Node Address Fieldbus Engineering Tool ........ 5-36, 5-163 Node Address Device Tool ............................. 7-10 Node Address Auto Assignment ....................... 5-40

S
Saving the Device List Device Tool ................. 7-16 SC .................................................................... 3-43 Schedule Creation ............................................ 5-45 Security Fieldbus Engineering Tool ................ 5-65 Security Device Management Tool ..... 6-16, 6-141 Setting Block Parameters ................................ 5-131 Setting Node Address Device Tool ................. 7-18 Setting Physical Device Tag Name Device Tool .......................................... 7-17 Setting Up the Hosts File Device Management Tool ...................... 8-8 Settings for FBAP ........................................... 5-111 Signal Characterizer Block ................................ 3-43 Slave PC ............................................................. 1-9 Start Fieldbus Engineering Tool ........................ 4-31 Starting Device Management Tool ..................... 6-77 System Builders ...................................... 1-17, 4-12 System Builders Related to Fieldbus ................... 4-1 System Maintenance ........................................ 1-28

O
Off-line Configuration ........................................ 5-18 On-line Maintenance ......................................... 4-39 Operation and Monitoring ................................. 1-25 Operational History Display Device Management Tool .................... 6-57 OS .................................................................... 3-42 Output Clamp Detection ...................................... 3-8 Output Fault State : LFCS2/LFCS ..................... 3-10 Output Fault State : PFCS/SFCS ........................ 3-9 Output Host File Set ........................................ 5-150 Output Splitter Block ......................................... 3-42 Output Value Tracking ......................................... 3-8

P
Parameter Display/Change Device Management Tool .................. 6-109 Physical Device Tag Name Fieldbus Engineering Tool ........ 5-36, 5-163 Physical Device Tag Name Device Tool .......... 7-10 Physical Device Tag Name and Device ID for the ACF11 .................................................. 5-161 PID ................................................................... 3-40 PID Controller Block .......................................... 3-40 Polling Address Range .......................... 5-36, 5-164 Primary LM Definition ....................................... 5-35 Project .............................................................. 5-24 Project Backup ................................................ 5-173 Project Database .............................................. 5-24 Project Export ................................................... 5-27 Project Import ................................................... 5-29 Project Management ......................................... 5-26 Project Manager ..................................... 5-25, 5-63 Project Startup ................................................ 5-151

T
Tag Assignment Device Tool ........................... 7-17 Tag Assignment Fieldbus Engineering Tool .. 5-165 Terminal Number .............................................. 4-25 Terminal Number : LFCS2/LFCS ....................... 3-13 Terminal Number : PFCS/SFCS ........................ 3-13 Test Function .................................................... 4-32 Time Publisher .................................................. 5-35 Time Publisher Device .................................... 5-157 Time Synchronized Cycles ................................ 5-35 Transducer Block .............................................. 5-69

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

<Int> <Toc> <Rev>

Ind-4

U
Uninstalling Fieldbus Online Document ............. 8-20 Uninstalling Fieldbus Support Tools .................. 8-28 Uninstalling the Control Bus Communication Function ................................................. 8-19 Uninstalling the Device Management Tool ......... 8-19 Uninstalling the Engineering Tool ...................... 8-18 Update Capability File and DD File ................. 5-110 Update Device List Device Tool ...................... 7-15 Updating Capability File and DD File ............... 5-108 Updating Device Tag List ................................... 6-26 Upload .............................................................. 5-54 Upload to the Project Database ...................... 5-105 Utilities Fieldbus Engineering Tool .................. 5-49

IM 33S05P10-01E

4th Edition : Dec.16,2002-00

User's Manual

Plant Resource Manager Overview

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

IM 33Y05Q11-01E
Y okogawa Electric Corporation
7th Edition

Introduction
This manual describes an overview of the system running Plant Resource Manager (hereinafter often abbreviated as PRM). The manual mainly explains what Plant Resource Manager is and its general operating procedures. It also explains the standard engineering procedures of PRM. SEE ALSO
For more information about the functions and operations of Plant Resource Manager, see the following: Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E).

This manual consists of the following chapters: Chapter 1 Overview of PRM This chapter describes the functions and system configuration of PRM. Chapter 2 User Interface of PRM This chapter describes the functions of PRM Client the user interface of PRM. Chapter 3 Engineering Procedure This chapter describes the standard engineering procedure of PRM. Chapter 4 Maintenance Tasks This chapter describes the basic tasks performed during PRM maintenance. Chapter 5 PRM Database Maintenance This chapter describes how to back up the PRM database.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

Plant Resource Manager Document Map

Overview
Plant Resource Manager Overview IM 33Y05Q11-01E

Reference
Plant Resource Manager Reference IM 33Y05Q10-01E

Installation
Plant Resource Manager Installation IM 33Y05Q12-01E

PRM Advanced Diagnostic Application

Plant Resource Manager Engineering Guide of PRM Advanced Diagnostic Application IM 33Y05Q23-01E

Users manual Relationship to a referred manual Reference manual

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-01

iii

Safety Precautions
Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
In order to protect the system controlled by the product and the product itself and ensure safe operation, observe the safety precautions described in this users manual. We assume no liability for safety if users fail to observe these instructions when operating the product. If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this user's manual, the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired. If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the product or for the product itself, prepare it separately. Be sure to use the spare parts approved by Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereafter simply referred to as YOKOGAWA) when replacing parts or consumables. Modification of the product is strictly prohibited. The following symbols are used in the product and users manual to indicate that there are precautions for safety:

Indicates that caution is required for operation. This symbol is placed on the product to refer the user to the users manual in order to protect the operator and the equipment. In the users manuals you will find precautions to avoid physical injury or death of the operator, including electrical shocks.

Identifies a protective grounding terminal. Before using the product, ground the terminal.

Identifies a functional grounding terminal. Before using the product, ground the terminal.

Indicates an AC supply.

Indicates a DC supply.

Indicates that the main switch is ON.

Indicates that the main switch is OFF.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

iv Notes on Handling Manuals

Please hand over the users manuals to your end users so that they can keep the users manuals on hand for convenient reference. Please read the information thoroughly before using the product. The purpose of these users manuals is not to warrant that the product is well suited to any particular purpose but rather to describe the functional details of the product. No part of the users manuals may be transferred or reproduced without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA. YOKOGAWA reserves the right to make improvements in the users manuals and product at any time, without notice or obligation. If you have any questions, or you find mistakes or omissions in the users manuals, please contact our sales representative or your local distributor.

Warning and Disclaimer

The product is provided on an "as is" basis. YOKOGAWA shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any direct or indirect loss or damage arising from using the product or any defect of the product that YOKOGAWA can not predict in advance.

Notes on Software
YOKOGAWA makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the softwares merchantability or suitability for any particular purpose, except as specified in the terms of warranty. This product may be used on a machine only. If you need to use the product on another machine, you must purchase another product. It is strictly prohibited to reproduce the product except for the purpose of backup. Store the CD-ROM (the original medium) in a safe place. It is strictly prohibited to perform any reverse-engineering operation, such as reverse compilation or reverse assembling on the product. No part of the product may be transferred, converted or sublet for use by any third party, without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Documentation Conventions
Typographical Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used throughout the users manuals:

Commonly used conventions throughout users manuals: Character string to be entered:

The characters that must be entered are shown in monospace font as follows: Example: FIC100.SV=50.0

Mark
This symbol indicates the description for an item for which you should make a setting in the products engineering window. While operating an engineering window, the help information for the selected item can be accessed from Builder Definition Items in the Help menu. Listing more than one definition item after this symbol implies that the paragraph on the page describes more than one definition item. Example:
Tag name, Tag importance, Window name

Mark
Indicates a space between character strings that must be entered. Example: . AL PIC010 -SC

Character string enclosed by brackets ({ }):

Indicates an option that can be omitted. Example: . PR TAG{ .sheet name}

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

vi
Conventions used to show key or button operations: Characters enclosed by brackets ([ ]):
Characters enclosed by brackets within any description on a key or button operation, indicate either a key on the HIS (Human Interface Station) keyboard, a key on the operation keyboard, a button name on a window, or an item displayed on a window. Example: To alter the function, press the [ESC] key.

Conventions used in command syntax or program statements:

The following conventions are used within a command syntax or program statement format:

Characters enclosed by angle-brackets:

Indicate character strings that user can specify freely according to certain guidelines. Example: #define <Identifier><Character string>

... Mark
Indicates that the previous command or argument may be repeated. Example: Imax (arg1, arg2, ...)

Characters enclosed by brackets ([ ]):

Indicate those character strings that can be omitted. Example: sysalarm format_string [output_value ...]

Characters enclosed by separators (

Example:

Indicate those character strings that can be selected from more than one option.

opeguide <format_character_string> [, <output_value> ...] OG,<element number>

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

vii Symbol Marks

Throughout this users manual, you will find several different types of symbols are used to identify different sections of text. This section describes these icons.

CAUTION
Identifies instructions that must be observed in order to avoid physical injury and electric shock or death of the operator.

WARNING
Identifies instructions that must be observed in order to prevent the software or hardware from being damaged or the system from becoming faulty.

IMPORTANT
Identifies important information required to understand operations or functions. TIP Identifies additional information. SEE ALSO Identifies a source to be referred to. Clicking a reference displayed in green can call up its source, while clicking a reference displayed in black cannot.

Drawing Conventions
Some drawings may be partially emphasized, simplified, or omitted, for the convenience of description. Some screen images depicted in the users manual may have different display positions or character types (e.g., the upper / lower case). Also note that some of the images contained in this users manual are display examples.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

viii

Copyright and Trademark Notices

All Rights Reserved
The copyrights of the programs and online manual contained in the CD-ROM are reserved. The online manual is protected by the PDF security from modification, however, it can be output via a printer. Printing out the online manual is only allowed for the purpose of using the product. When using the printed information of the online manual, check if the version is the most recent one by referring to the CD-ROMs version. No part of the online manual may be transferred, sold, distributed (including delivery via a commercial PC network or the like), or registered or recorded on video tapes.

Trademark Acknowledgments
CENTUM is registered trademark of YOKOGAWA. Oracle is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation. Oracle8i, Oracle9i and Oracle10g are registered trademarks of ORACLE Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Visual Basic and Visual C++ are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. MAXIMO is a registered trademark of MRO Software, Inc. Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX Corporation. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems,Inc. Netscape Communicator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. NetDDE is a registered trademark of Wonderware Corporation. MELSEC-A is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric SA. Memocon-SC is a registered trademark of Yaskawa Electric Corporation. PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation, Inc. SYSMAC is a registered trademark of OMRON Corporation. SIEMENS and SIMATIC are registered trademarks of Siemens Industrial Automation Ltd. "FOUNDATION" in "FOUNDATION fieldbus" is a registered trademark of Fieldbus Foundation. All other company and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. We do not use TM or mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks in this manual.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

Toc-1

Plant Resource Manager Overview

IM 33Y05Q11-01E 7th Edition

CONTENTS
1. Overview of PRM .................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 1.2 PRM Components ........................................................................................... 1-2 Configuration of PRM ..................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3 1.4 System Configuration When Communicating with FF-H1 Devices ..... 1-5 System Configured with HART Compliant Devices ......................... 1-13

Connecting with a Computerized Maintenance Management System (Option) .......................................................................................................... 1-19 Advanced Diagnosis ..................................................................................... 1-20

User Interface of PRM ............................................................................. 2-1

2.1 2.2 PRM Client ....................................................................................................... 2-2 Configuration of PRM Client........................................................................... 2-4

Engineering Procedure .......................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Setup Task ....................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.10 3.3 Setup Preparations for Connecting CS 1000/CS 3000 ...................... 3-3 Setup Preparations for Connecting STARDOM ................................. 3-7 Security Setting .............................................................................. 3-12 Registration of New Devices ........................................................... 3-13 Registration of Additional Devices ................................................... 3-17 Assignment of Devices to Plant Hierarchy ....................................... 3-18 Service Code .................................................................................. 3-19 Setting Maintenance Alarms ........................................................... 3-20 Tuning Maintenance Alarms ............................................................ 3-21 Advanced Diagnostic Applications (Option) .................................... 3-22 Registration of Plug-In Applications (Option) ................................... 3-23 Settings of Interface for CMMS (Option) .......................................... 3-24

Startup Task ................................................................................................... 3-11

Adjustment and Diagnostic Task ................................................................. 3-25

Maintenance Task ................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Utilizing Maintenance Alarms ......................................................................... 4-2 Viewing Device Information ........................................................................... 4-3 Setting Maintenance Information ................................................................... 4-4 Recording Maintenance Information ............................................................. 4-5 Printing Maintenance Information ................................................................. 4-6

PRM Database Maintenance .................................................................. 5-1

IM 33Y05Q11-01E 7th Edition : June 07,2005-01

Blank Page

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-1

Overview of PRM
This chapter describes the functions and system configuration of PRM.

What Is PRM?
Plant Resource Manager (PRM) is designed to improve the efficiency of the management and maintenance of field devices, that were registered and assigned to plant hierarchy. Also, it automatically creates management documents on devices so that they can be managed electronically. It can also access devices with a field communication function such as devices that support FOUNDATION fieldbus (ex.HART devices), manage device parameters, and execute device adjustment and diagnosis available with devices and so forth. SEE ALSO
For more information about PRM, see the following: Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-2

1.1

PRM Components
PRM consists of the following three components: PRM Server PRM Client Field Communication Server

PRM Server
The main information stored in PRM server consists of messages, device parameters and maintenance records as well as the related information. PRM server collects messages from CENTUM CS 1000/CS 3000 HIS or STARDOM (through OPC server) and stores the messages in the PRM server. PRM clients collect the information of the field devices through the field communication server and store the information in the PRM server. PRM server also stores the maintenance records sent from the PRM clients.

Storing Device Information

Messages, device parameters, maintenance records, calibration and diagnosis information are stored in PRM Server. By using this information, the user can achieve the following: Messages If connected with a CS 1000/CS 3000 or STARDOM (via OPC Server), PRM Server automatically collects and saves the information generated by field devices around the clock. By monitoring the message history, PRM can continuously manage the operating status of devices. Device Parameters PRM can manage the history of device parameters. This information can be utilized in the diagnosis of device deterioration.

PRM Client
PRM Client activates PRMs human interface functions. The user of PRM generally works on a PRM Client PC. SEE ALSO
For more information about PRM Client, see the following: 2, User Interface of PRM

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-3

Field Communication Server

Field Communication Server collects the information of field devices at the requests of PRM clients. The collected information is feedback to PRM clients and a part of the information is saved in PRM server. The communication paths to the field devices are defined in the device path configuration file. SEE ALSO
For more information about the device path configuration definition file, see the following: A11, Device Path Configuration Definition of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q1001E)

Field Communication Server has the following three functions: Interface of PRM Clients Field Communication Control Bus Communication

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-4

1.2

Configuration of PRM
This section describes the configuration of the system in which PRM runs.

System Configuration of PRM

A PRM system can be flexibly configured according to the PRM system scale. To configure a large-sized system, each of PRM Client, PRM Server and Field Communication Server should run on individual PCs. To configure a small-sized system, these three functions can run on a single PC.

Single Server System

This system consists of only one PRM server. Therefore, the management of PRM is carried out by on the basis of PRM Server. In the case of a CS 1000/CS 3000, one PRM Server is required for one project.

Multiple-Server System
A PRM client can establish the dynamic connection with two or more PRM servers and field communication servers. This system is applied when the number of devices subjected to the management is very large, when the project is classified to a number of virtual projects and when the comprehensive maintenance of the devices in multiple projects is carried out.

Direct Link to FF-H1 Physical Devices

When tuning the field devices, the direct link between the field communication server and the FF-H1 physical devices can be established. When PRM client, PRM server and field communication server are installed in a same PC, using a fieldbus interface board can directly link to the FF-H1 physical devices. The communication functions properly even both the V net card and the fieldbus interface board are installed in the same PC.

STARDOM Connected System

When a system is connected with STARDOM, one PRM server is needed for one control network. For a wide area network, the control networks can be connected with routers; in this case, the configuration is the same as the Multi-Server system. Moreover, if multiple STARDOM control networks are connected in one PRM system, the tags of the devices should not be identical in the whole system.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-5

1.2.1

System Configuration When Communicating with FF-H1 Devices

This section describes an example of system configuration when communicating with FF-H1 devices. SEE ALSO
For more information about the operating environment of PRM, see the following: 1.1, Operating Environments in Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-6

A Large Scale System Consists of Single PRM Server (PRM Server, PRM Clients and Field Communication Server Located Separately)
The following shows an example of PRM system configuration in a large-sized system. PRM Server, PRM Clients and Field Communication Server are separately installed to different PCs. There is one PRM system for one CS 1000/CS 3000 project. In this case, PRM Client may be set up on multiple PCs for one PRM Server.
PC PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version) PC PRM Server (Oracle 8i or Later Version) PC PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

CENTUM CS 3000 HIS

PC Field Communication Server

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication) FCS FCU FCU FCS

ESB bus (*1) (*1) EB401 SB401 (dual- (dualredundant) redundant) Local node I/O node Terminator ALF11 SB bus ALF111 ALF111 (control) (standby)

H1 Fieldbus Coupler Terminator

H1 Fieldbus Coupler HIS: Human interface station Field devices FCS: Field control station FCU: Field control unit ESB bus: Extended serial backboard bus SB401: ESB bus interface slave module (I/O nest side) EB401: ER bus interface master module (FCS side) ALF111(*1):FOUNDATION fieldbus communication module Field devices
010201E.EPS

*1:

The ALF111 can be used only with the CS 3000 system.

Figure System Configuration Example (Large-Sized System)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-7

IMPORTANT
Only PRM Client can be used in CS 1000/CS 3000 HIS environment.

SEE ALSO
For more information about versions of Oracle that support PRM, see the following: 1.1, Operating Environments in Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-8

A Small Scale System Consists of Single PRM Server (PRM Server, PRM Clients and Field Communication Server Located Together)
The following shows an example of PRM system configuration in a small-sized system. In this configuration, the functions of PRM Client, PRM Server and Field Communication Server can run on a same PC.
HIS PC PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version) PRM Server (Oracle 8i or Later Version) Field Communication Server

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication)

HIS: Human interface station FCS: Field control station ALF11: FOUNDATION fieldbus communication module

FCS

FCU

ALF11

SB bus

Terminator

H1 fieldbus

Coupler

Field devices
010202E.EPS

Figure System Configuration Example (Small-Sized System)

SEE ALSO
For more information about versions of Oracle that support PRM, see the following: 1.1, Operating Environments in Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-9

A Large Scale System Consists of Multiple PRM Servers

A large scale system consists of multiple PRM servers is shown as follows. A PRM client can access multiple PRM servers and filed communication servers by switching from one to the other in turns. Multiple PRM servers are applied when the number of devices subjected to the management is very large and the project is classified to a number of virtual projects and when the comprehensive maintenance of the devices in multiple projects is carried out.
PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

Ethernet Server Set Server Set

HIS

Field Communication Server

PRM Server (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

Asset Management System

HIS

Field Communication Server

PRM Server (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

Asset Management System

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication) FCS FCS

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication)

Legacy Devices

FF-H1 Devices

Project A (Server Set A)

Projec B (Server Set B)

010203E.EPS

Figure A System Consists of Multiple PRM Servers (Large Scale)

IMPORTANT
PRM Client can be installed in the PC where CS 1000/CS 3000 HIS is installed.

SEE ALSO
For more information about versions of Oracle that support PRM, see the following: 1.1, Operating Environments in Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E) For more information about the server set, see the following: A1.9, Glossary of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-10

Network for Tuning Field Devices

A simple network for tuning the field devices is illustrated below. This is a PRM system without FCS. When PRM client, PRM server and field communication server are installed in a same PC, using a fieldbus interface board can directly link to the FF-H1 physical devices. TIP
Both the V net card and the fieldbus interface board can be installed in the same PC.

Ethernet PC PRM Client (Oracle 8i or later version) PRM Server (Oracle 8i or later version) Field Communication Server

Terminator

Fieldbus Coupler Via Fieldbus Interface Board of National Instruments Corporation

FF-H1 Devices
010212E.EPS

Figure Simple Network for Tuning Field Devices

Moreover, with the PCMCIA type fieldbus interface card (of National Instruments Corporation), this system can be schemed using a note PC.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-11

A System Connected with STARDOM

An example of system configuration for a system connected with SATARDOM is illustrated as follows:

System Configuration
The following figure shows the configuration of a system connected with STARDOM.
VDS/HMI HMI HMI Client PRM PRM Client PRM Client

VDS (HMI Client) HMI Server Data Server

OPC DA Server A&E Server HDA Server

PRM (PRM Client) PRM Server Field Communication Server

Controller FCN PSU CPU NFLF 111 FCJ (FF-H1 supported)

Control bus

FF-H1

010204E.EPS

Figure A System Connected with STARDOM

If the PRM system consists of multiple server sets, the STARDOM should be configured to one of the sets. SEE ALSO
For more information about connection with STARDOM, see the following: A14. Connection with STARDOM in Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-01

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-12

A Large Scale System Consists of Multiple PRM Servers (HART Devices Applied)
Shown as follows is a large scale system that consists of multiple PRM servers, and the HART devices and FF-H1 devices are applied together in the system. The system configuration is about the same as the system with FF-H1 devices only (in the previous page). However, the field communication server can be linked to the HART devices via the RS232C/RS-422 interfaces.
PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

Ethernet Server Set Server Set

HIS

Field Communication Server

PRM Server (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

Asset Management System

HIS

Field Communication Server

PRM Server (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

PRM Client (Oracle 8i or Later Version)

Asset Management System

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication) FCS RS-232C RS-232C/RS-485 RS-485 Converter FCS

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication) RS-232C RS-232C/RS-485 RS-485 Converter

Legacy Devices HART Devices FF-H1 Devices HART Devices

Project A (Server Set A)

Projec B (Server Set B)

010205E.EPS

Figure A System Consists of Multiple PRM Servers (Large Scale with HART Devices)

IMPORTANT
PRM Client can be installed in the PC where CS 1000/CS 3000 HIS is installed.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-13

1.2.2

System Configured with HART Compliant Devices

Three examples of a system configured HART Compliant Devices are explained as follows. Connect to Vnet Using FCS HART Module Connect to Serial Port Using Multiplexer Module Connect to Serial Port Using HART Modem PRM also manages the HART devices connected to the STARTDOM system through the HART modules.

Common Specifications of HART Compliant Devices

The commands and services are supporting the devices with HART Revision 5. Revision 4 or earlier versions are not supported.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-14

Connect to Vnet Using FCS HART Module

A system configuration of using FCS HART module to establish communication with HART devices is shown as follows. Field communication server communicates to the field devices via HART module with FCS on demand communication methods.
HIS/ENG PRM Client Field Communications Server PRM Client PRM Server

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication)

FCS

ESB bus HART I/O module (stand-by) HART I/O module (in service)
Local Node HART devices

SB401: ESB bus interface slave module (in Local Node) EB401: ER bus interface master module (in Local Node) EB501: ER bus interface slave module (in Remote Node) SB401 (dual-redundant) EB401 (dual-redundant) ER bus

DEV1 DEV2 HART I/O module (stand-by) HART I/O module (in service)
Remote Node HART devices

DEV1 DEV2

EB501 (dual-redundant)

010206E.EPS

Figure Connect to Vnet Using FCS HART Module

Note: PRM Server, PRM Client and Field Communication Server can run on a same PC.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-15

Connect to Serial Port Using Multiplexer Module (Typical Configuration)

A system configuration of using multiplexer module to link HART devices to serial port is shown as follows. Field communication server communicates to the field devices via the multiplexer module connected on the serial port. This configuration is a typical one.
(*1) PRM Client Field Communications Server HIS/ENG PRM Client PRM Server

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) *1: RS-232C/RS-485 converter RS Communication RS-485

LFCS

Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication)

HART Multiplexer (over the counter)

Slave No.2
A A M 1 1 A A M 1 1 DEV2 HART Devices DEV1

Slave No.1

Master

4-20 mA HART Data

010207E.EPS

Figure Connect to Serial Port Using Multiplexer Module (Typical Configuration)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-16

Connect to Serial Port Using Multiplexer Module (Pepperl+Fuchs Multiplexer)

PRM R2.02 and R2.03 only supports the Pepperl+Fuchs (P+F) multiplexer. The configuration with Pepperl+Fuchs multiplexers is shown as follows.
PRM Client PRM Server PRM Client

Ethernet PRM Client Field Communications Server RS-485 (*1)

*1: RS-232C/RS-485 converter

HART Multiplexer (Master No.1)

HART Multiplexer (Master No.2)

HART Multiplexer (Master No.31) Directly connected to Master

HART Multiplexer (Slave No.1) Connected to Slave

HART Devices

HART Multiplexer (Slave No.15)

010208E.EPS

Figure Connect to Serial Port Using Multiplexer Module (Pepperl+Fuchs Multiplexer)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-17

Multiplexer Connection Settings

The settings regarding to P+F multiplexer connection are shown as follows.
Table Setting Items P+F Multiplexer Connection
Item PC Interface Description Connects to a serial port on Field Communication Server using RS485/RS232C. Only one serial port can support multiplexer or modem connection so that more than one ports cannot be used. 31 master devices with RS485 daisy chain connection can be connected to one COM port. Up to 15 salve multiplexers can be connected to a master multiplexer. Up to 16 devices can be connected to a multiplexer, either a master or a slave. Up to 255 devices can be connected to a multiplexer via slave multiplexers. HART multi-drops cannot be applied to multiplexers.

Master Daisy Chain Master/Slave 16 Devices/Multiplexer 255 Devices/Multiplexer Multi-Drops

HART devices can be connected directly to a master multiplexer or to salve HART Device Connection multiplexer. The connections are referred to as Master Connection and Slave Connection.
010209E.EPS

Master Connection
HART compliant devices can be connected to a master multiplexer. The master multiplexer can be used for connecting the HART devices only or can connect slave multiplexers and HART devices.

Slave Connection
HART compliant devices can be connected to slave multiplexers.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-18

Connect to Serial Port Using HART Modem

A typical system configuration of using HART modem to link HART devices to serial port is shown as follows. For the field devices connected to the multiplexers, with this kind of connection, the maintenance, tuning and check can be performed with this kind of configuration.
PRM Client PRM Client Field Communications Server HIS/ENG PRM Server

RS232C HART Modem

Vnet/IP Bus2 (Open communication) Vnet/IP Bus1 (Control communication)

LFCS

ESB bus

A A M 1 1

DEV1 HART device

010210E.EPS

Figure Connect to Serial Port Using HART Modem

Specification of HART Modem Connection

Specification of HART modem connection is described below:
Table Specification of HART Modem Connection
Item PC Interface Multi-Drops Description Connects to a serial port on Field Communication Server using RS-232C. Only one serial port supports multiplexer or modem connection so that more than one port cannot be used. HART protocol supports multidrop connection.
010211E.EPS

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-19

1.3

Connecting with a Computerized Maintenance Management System (Option)

Maintenance tasks can be executed in real time by connecting PRM with a computerized maintenance management system. This makes it possible to carry out maintenance tasks such as the sharing of Device Master and online transmission of work requests from PRM Client to a computerized maintenance management system, MAXIMO available from MRO. SEE ALSO
For more information about connecting with a computerized maintenance management system, see the following: Part D, Interface for CMMS of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<1. Overview of PRM>

1-20

1.4

Advanced Diagnosis
In order to comprehensively handle the multiple parameters in the field communication devices, field devices and the auxiliary devices are automatically diagnosed and maintained, thus to decrease the maintenance cost and increase the operability of the plant. To construct an environment for these purposes, the Advanced Diagnosis package is provided. Advanced Diagnosis package consists of various diagnostic applications (PAA), which are the algorisms for parsing the parameters of the devices. Moreover, as a part of the diagnosis, the periodic device data sampling can be performed automatically. Various diagnostic modules are provided. By starting or stopping these diagnostic modules, the same type of diagnosis jobs can be performed and managed.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-1

User Interface of PRM

PRM is comprised of PRM Client, PRM Server and Field Communication Server. Among these three software functions, PRM Client is used as the user interface of PRM. This chapter describes an overview of PRM Client.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-2

2.1

PRM Client
This section describes the functions of PRM Client and general configuration. PRM Client provides the following functions: Device status management (On-service, Spare, Off-service) Device status monitoring: Supported devices only Device adjustment and diagnosis Maintenance information management Calibration Data Management Audit trail Others

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-3

Device information is stored and managed in the PRM database.

PRM Server

PRM database

eDIAG database (*2) Connected via COM ports

PRM Client Device status management/ monitoring (Device Navigator) Maintenance information management Management of Calibration Data Audit trail Other functions PLUG-IN Application Adjustment and diagnosis

Downloading/Uploading Calibration Data (*1)

Loading third-party software

Documenting Calibrator (Option)

Field Communication Server

Selfdiagnostic tools

Third-party software
020101E.EPS

*1:

An optional package is required when applied with documenting calibrators.

Figure Functions of PRM Client and General Configuration

SEE ALSO
For more information about PRM terminology, see the following: A1.9, Glossary in Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-4

2.2

Configuration of PRM Client

This section describes the configuration of PRM Client and the menus and windows called from PRM Client.
Device Master

Inspection Memo Plant View Inspection Schedule Inspection Information Management Parts List

Device Navigator

Network View

Link to Document Management of Calibration Data

Class View

Audit Trail Maintenance Alarm

Audit Trail

Parameter Comparison

Adjustment and Diagnosis

Tool

Connection and management of Supervisory facilities

Browse

Security

Self Document

Online Manual

PLUG-IN Application

Others

Device Template

Utility Database Maintenance Tool Message Acquisition Setup Tool PRM Setup Tool Device Path Configuration Definision File PRM System Backup Script
020201E.EPS

Figure Configuration of PRM Client

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-5

Device Navigator
Device Navigator displays devices in a hierarchical structure just like the tree format used by Windows Explorer. Device Navigator is made up of three views: Plant View, Network View and Class View. These three views can be switched to view how devices are placed in the plant, the physical network structure of devices and devices by type, respectively. It is also possible to select individual devices in these views and manipulate these devices.

Plant View
Plant View displays devices in a hierarchical structure according to the plant hierarchy of the facilities and equipment comprising the plant, using a tree format just like in Windows Explorer. The unused spare devices can be put into Spare folder and the repaired or malfunctioned devices can be put into Out Of Service folder, therefore, users can also manage the devices not used on the plant. On the left-hand side of the device icon, a flag indicating the device status using different colors and a flag indicating the maintenance alarm status are displayed. Moreover, the device and alarm statuses of all the devices in a hierarchy (except the top hierarchy) of the plant are comprehensively indicated by the flags on the left-hand side of the hierarchy icon.
Plant Resource Manager File Edit View Register Option Window Help

User ID: ADMINISTRATOR Plant Network Class

History Details Memo Parts Schedule Doc Parameter Tool PLUG-IN Cal.Data

PLANT S SITE02 S SITE01 A AREA01 C CELL01 E MODULE1 Y1001 U UNIT01 E MODULE FI0017 E MODULE2 TT1001 Spare 44564400010000DC33(FVP0001) Out of Service 5945430002F0000059(FI017)

Device Tag Device ID Device Tag Comment Communication Type Common Detail Block

TT1001 594543000500030033 TT1001 Foundation Fieldbus

Vendor Category Model Sub Model Revision Device Path Equipment Module Address User Defined Category Loop Name Delivery Date Operation Start Date Priority Serial Number Update Date Update User Registered By

Yokogawa Electric

YTA320

R2.01 MYPJT-0104-10121 MODULE2 243(0XF3)

11/20/00 13:08:29 ADMINISTRATOR ADMINISTRATOR

Ready

Rows 1of 5

12/07/2004

Plant View
020202E.EPS

Figure Device Navigator (Plant View)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-6

Network View
Network View displays devices in a hierarchical structure according to the physical field network structure, using a tree format just like in Windows Explorer. On the left-hand side of the device icon, a flag indicating the device status using different colors and a flag indicating the meintenance alarm status are displayed. Moreover, the device and alarm statuses of all the devices in a hierarchy (except the top hierarchy) of the plant are comprehensively indicated by the flags on the left-hand side of the hierarchy icon.
Plant Resource Manager File Edit View Register Option Window Help

User Id: ADMINISTRATOR Plant Network Class History Details Memo Parts Schedule Doc Parameter Tool PLUG-IN Cal.data

PLANT Foundation Fieldbus MYPJT-0104-10121 FI1004 (Spare) HART MODBUS PROFIBUS Other

Device Tag Name Device ID Device Tag Comment Communication Type Common Detail Block

TT1001 594543000500030033 Device description for TT1001 Foundation Fieldbus

Block Tag Name _FB10 _FB2 _FB3 _FB4 _FB5 _FB6 _FB7 _FB8 _FB9 AI_4000-8 TB_2000-8 YTA320

Block Type PID Control Analog Input Analog Input Analog Input Discrete Input Discrete Input Discrete Input Discrete Input PID Control Analog Input unknown block Resource Block

Ready

Rows 1of 4

12/07/2004

Network View
020203E.EPS

Figure Device Navigator (Network View)

Moreover, multiple device paths can be selected on Network View so as to run the Plug&Play. (The device information can also be manually entered.)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

Plant Resource Manager File Edit View Register Option Window Help

2-7

User Id: ADMINISTRATOR Plant Network Class History Device Tag EJA-0002 EJAHART9 KUJ01MA TMPTAG01 TMPTAG02 TMPTAG04 TMPTAG05 TMPTAG06 TMPTAG07 TMPTAG08 TMPTAG09 TMPTAG10 TMPTAG11 TMPTAG12 TMPTAG14 TMPTAG15 WAH01 YF000001 YF000003 YF000008 YFLW0135 Device List Device ID 370489567D 37041E9235 37098995A6 3704200135 370420012F 3704200133 3704200138 3704200123 3704200131 370420013C 3704200120 370420012E 370420012C 370420012A 3704200122 3704200134 370489567C 37014C7C4E 37014C7C3F 37014C7C42 37014C7C3E Serial Number Device Tag Comment EJA-0002 EJAHART9 KUMA TMPTAG01 TMPTAG02 TMPTAG04 TMPTAG05 TMPTAG06 TMPTAG07 TMPTAG08 TMPTAG09 TMPTAG10 TMPTAG11 TMPTAG12 TMPTAG14 TMPTAG15 WAHAHA YF000001 YF000003 YF000008 YFLW0135 Common.Type HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART HART Vendor YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA

PLANT Foundation Fieldbus HART HART MYPJT-01-0000 (MUX:KFD2) MYPJT-01-0001 (MUX:KFD2) MYPJT-01-9999 (MODEM) MYPJT-0108-10111-1 MYPJT-0108-10111-10 MYPJT-0108-10111-11 MYPJT-0108-10111-12 MYPJT-0108-10111-13 MYPJT-0108-10111-14 MYPJT-0108-10111-15 MYPJT-0108-10111-16 MYPJT-0108-10111-2 MYPJT-0108-10111-3 MYPJT-0108-10111-4 MYPJT-0108-10111-5 MYPJT-0108-10111-6 MYPJT-0108-10111-7 MYPJT-0108-10111-8 MYPJT-0108-10111-9 MYPJT-0108-10115-1 MYPJT-0108-10115-2 MYPJT-0108-10115-3 MYPJT-0108-10115-4 MYPJT-0108-10116-1 MYPJT-0108-10116-2 MYPJT-0108-10116-3 MYPJT-0108-10116-4 MYPJT-0108-10116-5 MYPJT-0108-10116-6 MYPJT-0108-10116-7 MYPJT-0108-10116-8 Ready

12/07/2004
020204E.EPS

Figure Network View (HART)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-8

Class View
Class View displays devices in a hierarchical structure; the devices are classified by device vendor, model and revision, and then displayed by the classified device type using a tree format just like in Windows Explorer. With this view the user can check the usage conditions of devices of the same type and the status of spare parts at the time of device failure or inspection.
Plant Resource Manager File Edit View Register Option Window Help

User Id: ADMINISTRATOR Plant Network Class History Details Memo Parts Schedule Doc Parameter Tool PLUG-IN Cal.data

PLANT Foundation Fieldbus Yokogawa Electric M EJA100A R R2.01 On-Service Spare 5945430003J0000369 (PT1004) Out of Service Conventional Device Yokogawa Electric

Device Tag Name Device ID Device Tag Comment Communication Type Common Detail Block

TT1001 594543000500030033 Device description for TT1001 Foundation Fieldbus

Vendor Category Model Name Sub Model Name Revision Device Path Plant Hierarchy Address User Defined Category Loop Name Delivery Date Operation Start Date Priority Serial Number Update Date Update User

Yokogawa Electric

YTA320

R2.02 MYPJT-0104-10121 MODULE2 0xf3

11/20/00 16:52:13 ADMINISTRATOR

Ready

12/07/2004

Class View
020205E.EPS

Figure Device Navigator (Class View)

Customized View Options

The device icons displayed in the Device Navigator are customizable according to the device types. The font and the icon size are also customizable according to the working environment.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

Plant Resource Manager File Edit View Register Option Window Help

2-9

User Id: ADMINISTRATOR Plant Network Class History Device Tag EJA-0002 KUJ01MA WAH01 YF000003 YYPLC1_0Z02 Device List Device ID Serial Number 370489567D 37098995A6 370489567C 37014C7C3F 5945430001J0000191 Device Tag Comment EJA-0002 KUMA WAHAHA YF000003 YYPLC1_0Z02 Common.Type HART HART HART HART Foundation Fieldbus Vendor YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric

PLANT Foundation Fieldbus Yokogawa Electric M YYP R R1.05 On-Service 5945430001J0000191 [YVPLC1] Spare Off-Service
HART

HART YOKOGAWA M EJA R 01 On-Service 370489567C [WAH01] 370489567D [EJA-0002] Spare Out of Service
M M

YEWFLO YTA

Ready

12/07/2004
020206E.EPS

Figure Class View (HART)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-10

Maintenance Information Management

This function uniformly manages device information. Device information is managed using the device ID as a key.

Device Master
This function uniformly manages information about all devices. The user can view a list of registered devices and detailed information of each device. Moreover, the alarm priority and alarm display ON/OFF for each device can be configured.

Inspection Memo
This function provides an audit trail of records of inspection tasks performed on devices and records of device failures. It can also be used to describe actions to be taken in the event of failure, as well as precautions and memos for the workers during inspection. Furthermore, this function also makes it possible to manage not only records of online tasks but also records of offline tasks performed on devices.

Inspection Schedule
This function allows the management of maintenance task schedules, such as inspection and calibration schedules, for each device.

Parts List
This function allows the management of parts comprising devices as well as information about attributes and inventory of the parts. By utilizing Parts List, the user can improve the efficiency of tasks to be performed in the event of failure or part replacement.

Link to Document
This function allows the user to freely link documents related to each device, and to uniformly manage such linked information. Examples of linked documents include plant structural diagrams related to devices (P&ID and control drawings), exploded-view diagrams, online manuals and images.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-11

Management of Calibration Data

The calibration information such as calibration data settings, the parameters for calibrating the devices and the calibration status can be indicated in a list. With an optional package, the data of devices can be downloaded / uploaded between the devices and the documenting calibrators. The documenting calibrator stands for the calibrator that reads the parameters from PRM, and uses the parameters to carry out compensation calculation for the measured values of instrumentation devices and out the compensated values. With a documenting calibrator connected as a PRM client and then download the related parameters from PRM server. An inspector can hand carry this calibrator to the field for calibrating the field devices, and then upload the calibrated data to the PRM server. Download and upload can be performed comprehensively for the data of multiple instrumentation devices. The calibration data in the PRM database can also be printed to the documents such as Calibration Instruction, Calibration Certificate and Data Report. When using the legacy measuring instruments with the calibrator, the calibration data are entered by hand on a PRM client window to the PRM database based on the printed documents resulted from the calibration carried out in accordance with the Calibration Instruction. In addition, the calibration data in the PRM database can be exported to a CSV file. For reutilizing the calibration data to another instrumentation device the third party applications other than PRM, such as Microsoft Excel, can be used.

Settings Documents Documenting Calibrator (Option)

Management of Calibration Data Export/Import

PRM Client

Download/ Upload

CSV File

Put and get the calibration data

PRM Database

PRM Server
020207E.EPS

Figure Overview of Calibration Data management

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-12

Audit Trail
This function displays all the logs of operations performed on PRM Client (parameter settings, saving of parameter data, calibrating logging of calibrations, and creating/correcting inspection logs) and event messages from devices as history messages. These history messages can be viewed as a list arranged in a time series or classified by message type. Also, since the history messages can be filtered by using the device ID or device tag name, it is easy to view the operation logs of specific devices. Moreover, on Maintenance tab, the diagnostic results and error causes of the field device will be displayed. Therefore, the audit trail messages kept in PRM server database can be simply obtained as references for device maintenance. When connecting with CS 1000/CS 3000 or STARDOM, it can choose and collects not only the messages from devices but also the alarms from the CS 1000/CS 3000 or STARDOM. Moreover, detailed information about a displayed log can be called up easily. TIP
The STARDOM related messages collected through OPC server are the FF-H1 messages numbered in 4000 zone.

Links Between HART Message and Device Master

Same as for FF-H1, by linking the HART related messages in CS 3000 to the HART devices in Device Master, the HART related messages are all indicated with the tag number of the corresponding HART devices. However, the tag number of a HART device needs to be defined on the [HART Variable] of CS 3000 IOM builder.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<2. User Interface of PRM>

2-13

Adjustment and Diagnosis

Adjustment and diagnosis can be performed on devices connected via a network.

Parameter Comparison
The parameters loaded from an FF-H1 device or a HART device can be compared with the parameters stored in PRM Server. The device parameters can be adjusted by comparing the current parameters and the parameters in the log. Furthermore, if discrepancies between the current parameter and the logged parameter are found, the display color of the parameter will be changed. If parameters are modified on the window, the modified parameters will be put into the device. And both the modified parameters and the previous parameters are saved as audit trails.

Save All Parameters

The parameters of all the specified devices ,either by communication type or device path can be obtained together and saved into the PRM server. The saved parameters can be compared with the previously saved parameters on the comparing window, so as to be applied to the FF-H1 field devices.

Tool
The methods in the DD files of FF-H1 devices have the built-in functions (such as selfdiagnosis and calibration), the results of running these functions can be displayed.

HART Maintenance Tool

Using HART Maintenance Tool, the HART device parameters can be tuned, the device diagnosis can be performed. The following two windows can be called out from the [Tool] menu of PRM Client. Menu Window On this window, the Menu items described in the HART DD file are explained. Changing parameters and running methods can be performed on this window. Offline Parameters Window On this window the Upload Variables described in HART DD file are displayed. The parameters can be changed on this window. The parameters of each device can be saved into a designated file, and the parameters saved in the file can be called out.

Comparing HART Device Range Settings

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-1

Engineering Procedure
This chapter describes the standard PRM engineering procedure.

Flow of Engineering
The engineering of PRM is performed in the following sequence:
Start PRM engineering

Setup task

Startup task

Adjustment and diagnostic task

Maintenance task Routine maintenances during operation such as inspection settings, registrations and records as well as inspection result printout.

End PRM engineering

030001E.EPS

Figure PRM Engineering Procedure

The following explains each of the engineering steps: 1. Setup task: This task sets up hardware and software (including the installation of PLUG-IN Application). Startup task: This task registers devices. Adjustment and diagnostic task: This task adjusts the device parameters. Maintenance task: This task is performed during daily operation, such as setting, registering and recording inspection information and printing inspection results.

2. 3. 4.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-2

3.1

Setup Task
The setup task includes the setup of both hardware and software for running PRM. Setup preparation Hardware setup Software installation Apart from the above explanations, the systems connected to PRM will be explained separately.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-3

3.1.1

Setup Preparations for Connecting CS 1000/CS 3000

Setup preparations for connecting CS 1000/CS 3000 to PRM are explained in this section.

Setup Preparation
Prepare the PC, other related hardware and software in order to run PRM.

Hardware Preparation
Prepare the PC on which you want to run PRM. A control bus interface card is also required if you are connecting PC with a CS 1000/CS 3000 system. SEE ALSO
For more information about the PCs environment conditions, see the following: 2.2, Preparing for Installation of the Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

Package Preparation
In order to run PRM on a PC, the required software package and PRM license are necessary. SEE ALSO
For more information about the required software package and license, see the following: 2.3, Installing PRM of the Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-4

Hardware Setup
To set up hardware, perform the following operation: Setting the control bus interface card

Setting the Control Bus Interface Card

In the case of the CS 1000/CS 3000, it is necessary to install a control bus interface card to the PC on which Field Communication Server will be installed. SEE ALSO
For more information about the setup procedure, refer to Chapter 2, Hardware Setup of the CS 1000 Installation (IM 33S01C10-01E), or Chapter 2, Hardware Setup of the CS 3000 Installation (IM 33Q01C10-01E).

Vnet/IP
V net and Vnet/IP can be applied to the control bus. SEE ALSO
For more information about Vnet/IP, see Part D, Hardware in Vnet/IP (IM 33Q06H90-31E).

Software Installation
To install software, perform the following operations: Installing and setting up the control bus driver Installing and setting up Oracle 8i or later version Installing and setting up the PRM package

Installing and Setting Up the Control Bus Driver

Install a control bus driver to the PC to be used as Field Communication Server. SEE ALSO
For more information about the installation and setup of the control bus driver, see the following: 2.2.2, Installing Control Bus Driver of the Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-5

Installing and Setting Up Oracle 8i/9i/10g

Install Oracle 8i or later version to the PC to be used as PRM Server. SEE ALSO
For more information about versions of Oracle that support PRM, see the following: 1.1, Operating Environments in Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E) For more information about the installation and setup of Oracle 8i/9i/10g, refer to the installation manual that comes with Oracle 8i/9i.

Installing and Setting Up the PRM Package

Install PRM according to your system configuration. SEE ALSO
For more information on how to install PRM, see the following: Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

Verifying Operation After Installation

After installing the required PRM software, verify the following:

Verifying Oracle 8i/9i Client Setting

Before testing, it is necessary to make sure that the PRM server is running properly. Then start testing the Oracle 8i/9i/10g client. This test is not needed if single client is configured. SEE ALSO
For more information about the test procedure, see the following: 3, How to Set Up Oracle Servers/Clients of the Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q1201E)

Verifying the Startup of PRM Client

Start PRM Client. If the main window appears, it indicates that PRM Client and the Oracle database are operating normally. If the main window does not appear, verify whether Oracle 8i/9i/10g Client is running. SEE ALSO
For more information about verifying PRM client startup, see the following: A2.3, Starting and Shutting Down PRM Client of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-6

Verifying the Message Acquisition Function

Verify that the message acquisition function tool of PRM Server works properly. Generate a Fieldbus message, and check whether the message acquisition function is working normally if a device event is displayed in the Audit Trail window of PRM Client. SEE ALSO
For more information about message acquisition, see the following: A5, Message Management of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

Confirm Device Patrol Settings

Device Patrol settings can be confirmed. On the System tab of Audit Trail window, the running status of the Device panel will be displayed. The error messages regarding the Device Patrol can be found here.

Verifying the Device Path Configuration Definition

Verify the contents of the device path configuration definition set for Field Communication Server. The device path configuration definition can be changed, added or deleted using the device path configuration definition tool. SEE ALSO
For more information about device path configuration definition, see the following: A11, Device Path Configuration Definition of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q1001E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-7

3.1.2

Setup Preparations for Connecting STARDOM

Setup preparations for connecting STARDOM to PRM are explained in this section.

Setup Preparation
Prepare the PC, other related hardware and software in order to connect PRM with STARDOM.

Hardware Preparation
Prepare the PC on which you want to run PRM. An additional network adapter is required when connecting PC with STARDOM. A PC with OPC server should be available for collecting data from STARDOM. SEE ALSO
For more information about the PCs environment conditions, see the following: 2.2, Preparing for Installation of the Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

Hardware Setup
To set up hardware, perform the following operation: Setting the network adapter card

Setting the Network Adapter Card

For connecting with STARDOM, it is necessary to install a network adapter card to the PC on which Field Communication Server is installed. SEE ALSO
For more information about the setup procedure, see the installation manual for STARDOM.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-8

Software Installation
To install software, perform the following operations: Installing and setting up the network adapter Installing and setting up OPC server Installing and setting up Oracle 8i/9i/10g Installing and setting up the PRM package

Installing and Setting Up the Network Adapter

Install a network adapter to the PC to be used as Field Communication Server. SEE ALSO
For more information about the installation and setup of the control bus driver, see the following: 2.2.2, "Installing Control Bus Driver" of the Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

Installing and Setting Up OPC Server

When connecting STARDOM to PRM, OPC server programs need to be installed to OPC server PC. SEE ALSO
For more information about installing STARDOM, refer to the installation manual for STARDOM.

Installing and Setting Up Oracle 8i/9i/10g

Install Oracle 8i/9i/10g to the PC to be used as PRM Server. SEE ALSO
For more information about versions of Oracle that support PRM, see the following: 1.1, "Operating Environments" in "Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)" For more information about the installation and setup of Oracle 8i/9i/10g, refer to the installation manual that comes with Oracle 8i/9i/10g.

Installing and Setting Up the PRM Package

Install PRM according to your system configuration. SEE ALSO
For more information on how to install PRM, see the following: Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q12-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-9

Verifying Operation After Installation

After installing the required PRM software, verify the following:

Verifying Oracle 8i/9i/10g Client Setting

Before testing, it is necessary to make sure that the PRM server is running properly. Then start testing the Oracle 8i/9i/10g client. SEE ALSO
For more information about the test procedure, see the following: 3. "How to Set Up Oracle Servers/Clients" of the Plant Resource Manager Installation (IM 33Y05Q1201E)

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-13

3.2.2

Registration of New Devices

This section describes how to register FF-H1 devices, HART devices or other devices. SEE ALSO
For more information about the registration of new devices, see the following: A3, Registration and Deletion of Control Modules of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

How to Register FF-H1 Devices

If the device you are registering is an FF-H1 device, you can select the registration method from the following three methods: Registration by plug & play Registration by reading the host file set Registration by manual entry TIP
If CS 1000/CS 3000 or STARDOM is connected, registration of new devices should be performed after the engineering of the CS 1000/CS 3000 or STARDOM is complete. However, a new device can be registered by manual entry before the engineering is complete.

Registration by Plug & Play

When Plug & Play is executed in Network View, devices are automatically detected. The unregistered devices that have been detected can be registered in Device Master. SEE ALSO
For more information about the registration by plug & play, see the following: A3.1, Registration by Plug & Play of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-14

Registration by Reading the Host File Set

When the reading of the host file set is executed, the definition information of the field communication devices is loaded from the host file set to PRM. By this process, manual entry items when registering devices in PRM can be omitted. However, it is still necessary to manually enter the information that cannot be registered by reading the host file set, such as the device ID. SEE ALSO
For more information about the registration by reading the host file set, see the following: A3.2, Registration by Reading the Host File Set of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

Registration by Manual Entry

The user can enter necessary data from a window and register devices. If the devices having a communication function are registered by manual entry, it is necessary to read the device information after the registration so that the information necessary for communication can be loaded. SEE ALSO
For more information about the registration by manual entry, see the following: A3.3, Registration by Manual Entry of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

TIP
If an amplifier is expected to be replaced for revision work or maintenance, such as in the case of FF-H1 devices, be sure to register both the amplifier and case as control modules. Furthermore, by registering both of them as equipment modules, they can be managed easily.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

5th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-15

How to Register HART Devices

3.2.5

Service Code
Define the service code to prepare for the setup of the inspection schedule. Define the inspection task type and the time of inspection in the service code. SEE ALSO
For more information about the setting items of the service code, see the following: A4.3, Inspection Schedule of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

6th Edition : Dec.07,2004-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-20

3.2.6

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-24

3.2.10 Settings of Interface for CMMS (Option)

When Interface for CMMS such as or MAXIMO is applied, the settings should be performed accordingly. SEE ALSO
For more information about Interface for CMMS, see the following: PART D, Interface for CMMS in Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-25

3.3

Adjustment and Diagnostic Task

You can adjust or diagnose device parameters.

Adjusting Device Parameters

In the Parameter Comparison window, you can adjust the devices by comparing the parameters that are managed by Audit Trail, in addition to viewing and setting the parameters. When the parameters are changed at this time, this change operation is saved as an operation log and the parameter saving operation is stored as an audit in the database. SEE ALSO
For more information about parameter comparison, see the following: A6, Adjustment and Diagnosis of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM33Y05Q10-01E)

TIP
For release number R2.02, the HART device parameters should be tuned on HART Maintenance Tool.

Device Diagnosis (Option)

When using the optional package PRM Advanced Diagnosis, the diagnostic tools, diagnosis jobs can be displayed in a list by Diagnosis Navigator. SEE ALSO
For more information about advanced diagnosis, see the following: A7, PRM Advanced Diagnosis in Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<3. Engineering Procedure>

3-26

Executing the DD Menu (FF-H1 Devices Only)

Execute the DD menu from PRM Client. By using methods in the DD file provided by the device vendor, you can execute adjustment and diagnosis on devices in the tool window of the utility. However, the contents of adjustment and diagnosis vary with the type of the field device. The following shows an example of a DD menu: Resetting field devices Zero-point adjustment Span adjustment Calibration SEE ALSO
For more information about the DD menu, refer to the field device manual provided by the device vendor. For more information about the execution of the DD menu, see the following: A6.2, DD Menu Execution (only for FF-H1 Devices) of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

HART Maintenance Tool

Using HART Menu Window (Only for HART Devices)
Using HART Menu Window: HART Maintenance Tool is provided for tuning the HART device parameters and running HART device diagnosis. HART Maintenance Tool consists of the following two functions: HART Menu With this menu, changing and tuning parameters and running DD methods can be performed. HART Offline Parameters The parameters described in HART DD file can be displayed.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<4. Maintenance Task>

4-1

Maintenance Task
The basic task during the maintenance operation includes the following: Utilizing Maintenance Alarms Viewing device information Setting maintenance information Recording maintenance information Printing maintenance information

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<4. Maintenance Task>

4-2

4.1

Utilizing Maintenance Alarms

With maintenance alarms, the alarms generated from the field devices can be promptly collected and clearly displayed. Therefore, the maintenance engineer can promptly handle the problems. The maintenance alarms are displayed on Network View or Plant View with Occurrence, Acknowledged and Unacknowledged flags. The audit trails of an alarm and the added information will be displayed on Maintenance tab of Audit Trail window.

Alarm Message Type

A field device contains various types of information. PRN can collect the required type of diagnostic messages. Moreover, the additional descriptions can be attached to the diagnostic messages received from the field devices if the messages are not clearly explaining the diagnosed problems.

Alarm Message Display

Maintenance Alarm Function will attach the priority marks to the alarm messages and classify the field deives that generated the alarms into various priorities, therefore, users can take the proper actions at the proper timings based on the alarm messages.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<4. Maintenance Task>

4-3

4.2

Viewing Device Information

Device information can be viewed in the following formats: Viewing in plant hierarchy Viewing in network structure Viewing in device class structure

Uniformed Indication on Plant Hierarchy and Network View

On Plant View and network View of Device Navigator, the flags are used to indicate the statuses of each device. The flags are the flag for indicating the device status by changing colors and the flag for indicating the maintenance alarm status (unacknowledged maintenance alarm). These flags jointly displaying the above statuses are referred to status icons.

Viewing in Plant Hierarchy

Using Plant View, you can view the logical placement of devices within the plant in a tree format just like in Windows Explorer. SEE ALSO
For more information about viewing in plant hierarchy, see the following: A2.4.1, Plant View of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

Viewing in Network Structure

Using Network View, you can view the placement of devices based on the field network structure within the plant in a tree format just like in Windows Explorer. SEE ALSO
For more information about viewing in network structure, see the following: A2.4.2, Network View of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

Viewing in Device Class Structure

Using Class View, you can view devices by model in a tree format just like in Windows Explorer. SEE ALSO
For more information about viewing in device class structure, see the following: A2.4.3, Class View of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

<4. Maintenance Task>

4-4

4.3

Setting Maintenance Information

You can set the following maintenance information items as necessary: Parts List Link to Document Inspection Schedule

Parts List
You can define the parts that constitute a device. Since you can manage the usage status of the parts, the efficiency of tasks related to ordering parts and managing spare parts can be improved. Define parts code before setting a parts list. A description of a part, the number of parts in stock, and a unit price can be defined for each part code. SEE ALSO
For more information about the parts code and the setting items of the Parts List, see the following: A4.5, Parts List of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

Link to Document
You can register electronic document files and URLs related to control modules. By registering operation manuals of devices and vendors' Web sites, you can improve the efficiency of managing the device maintenance information. SEE ALSO
For more information about viewing related documents, see the following: A4.6, Link to Document of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM33 Y05Q10-01E)

Inspection Schedule
You can schedule the inspection of devices. By setting the types of services and inspection cycle, you can improve the efficiency of the inspection schedule management task. After the inspection schedule is made out completely, the authorized person (approver) must approve the inspection schedule. SEE ALSO
For more information about the setting items of the service code, see the following: A4.3, Inspection Schedule of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-01

<4. Maintenance Task>

4-5

4.4

Recording Maintenance Information

The result of the inspection performed according to the inspection schedule can be recorded as an inspection memo.

Inspection Memo
You can record the result of the inspection performed according to the inspection schedule as an inspection memo. All revisions to inspection memos are kept in the record. Additionally, if the approval function is enabled, the user can freely change the inspection memo for a certain period of time. But once that period ends and the inspection memo is approved, only the authorized person (approver) can change the inspection memo. You can enter general information such as the date and time of the inspection, the identity of the inspector, and the task type, as well as a summary of the inspection, special notes, and inspection items in an inspection memo. Moreover, if you select to update the inspection schedule, the previous inspection date and the next inspection date will be updated automatically when the inspection memo is approved.

IMPORTANT
The inspection schedule automatic update function can be executed when the inspection schedule approver and the inspection memo approver are the same person.

SEE ALSO
For more information about setting the inspection memo, see the following: A4.4, Inspection Memo of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01E)

Management of Calibration Data

The parameters for calibrating the devices and the calibration status can be indicated in a list. The calibration data are stored in the database of PRM. And the calibration data can be printed in a document and can be exported to a CSV file. With an optional functionality, the data of multiple instrumentation devices can be downloaded/uploaded between the devices and the documenting calibrators. SEE ALSO
For more information about management of calibration data, see the following: A12, Calibration Management of the Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-01)

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-01

<4. Maintenance Task>

4-6

4.5

Printing Maintenance Information

Device information and maintenance information can be printed in the following two methods: Printing the information in the window (individual printing of device information/maintenance information) Printing in document format (printing self document)

Individual Printing of Device Information/Maintenance Information

You can print the device information and maintenance information displayed in the window. The contents set for each item are all printed.

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

For Questions and More Information If you have any questions, you can send an E-mail to the following address. E-mail: [email protected] If you want have more information about Yokogawa products, you can visit Yokogawa's homepage at the following web site. Homepage: http://www.yokogawa.com/ Written by Product Marketing Dept. Systems Business Div. Yokogawa Electric Corporation Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN Printed by KOHOKU PUBLISHING & PRINTING INC.

IM 33Y05Q11-01E

7th Edition : June 07,2005-00

-1-

Introduction.................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overview................................................................................................................ 7 PRM System Configuration.................................................................................. 8 PRM Components ................................................................................................. 9 Starting and shutting down of PRM components.............................................. 11 Starting and shutting down of PRM server................................................ 11 Starting and shutting down of Field Communication server .................... 12 Starting and shutting down of PRM Client................................................ 12

1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.5 2 2.1

PRM Functional Overview ................................................................................. 13 PRM System Configuration................................................................................ 18 Connection with CS-3000 ............................................................................ 18 Connection with Prosafe-RS........................................................................ 20 Connection with Stardom ............................................................................ 21 Connection with HART Multiplexer ........................................................... 22

Installation .................................................................................................................15 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2

PRM Package ...................................................................................................... 23 Plant View ........................................................................................................... 26 Network View...................................................................................................... 30 Class View ........................................................................................................... 36 Custom View ....................................................................................................... 42 Control Module Status........................................................................................ 45 PRM Security Functions..................................................................................... 47 Permissions ......................................................................................................... 48 Device Security ................................................................................................... 48 Detail ................................................................................................................... 54 Tool ...................................................................................................................... 55 DTM Works ......................................................................................................... 56 Memo ................................................................................................................... 59 Parts .................................................................................................................... 64 Schedule .............................................................................................................. 66 Doc ....................................................................................................................... 69 Parameter............................................................................................................ 75

Device Master............................................................................................................. 24 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

Security....................................................................................................................... 47 4.1 4.2 4.3

Other Functions ......................................................................................................... 54 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8

5.3.1 Installation and setup of Yokogawa supplied DTM ......................................... 58

-2-

Message Management................................................................................................ 81 6.1 6.2 Audit Trial Message Window ............................................................................. 84 Alarm Filter configurator ................................................................................... 88 Data Acquisition ................................................................................................. 94 Diagnostic Data Historian.................................................................................. 95 Acquisition Navigator ......................................................................................... 99 Diagnosis Navigator ......................................................................................... 101 Setting up of Self Documentation ........................................................................... 111 Valve Navi ......................................................................................................... 112 Backup/Restore..................................................................................................... 114 PRM Simple Backup tool.................................................................................. 114 PRM System Backup script .............................................................................. 116 Database maintenance tool.................................................................................. 119

PRM Advanced Diagnosis.......................................................................................... 93 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4

8 9 10

Self Documentation.................................................................................................. 111 8.1 9.1 10.1 10.2 Plug in Applications ................................................................................................. 112

-3-

This list shows the target user and device type for each item.
System Enginee r 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction Overview PRM System Configuration PRM Components Starting and Shutting down of PRM components PRM Functional Overview Installation PRM System Configuration X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Start up Enginee r Plant System Engineer Maintenanc e Engineer

Operato r

F F

HAR T

1.4

1.4 2 2.1 2.1. 1 2.1. 2 2.1. 3 2.1. 4 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 5 5.1

Connection with CS-3000

Connection with Prosafe-RS

Connection with Stardom

Connection with HART Multiplexer

Preparation for installation Device Master Plant View Network View Class View Custom View Control Module Status Security PRM Security Functions Permissions Device Security Other Functions Detail

X X X X X

X X X

-4-

5.2 5.3 5.3. 1 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 6 6.1 6.2 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 8 8.1 9 9.1 10 10.1 10.2 11

Tool DTM Works Installation and setup of Yokogawa supplied DTM Memo Parts Schedule Document Linking Parameter Message Management Audit Trial Message Window Alarm Filter configurator PRM Advanced Diagnosis Data Acquisition Diagnostic Data Historian Acquisition Navigator Diagnosis Navigator Self Documentation Setting up of Self Documentation Plug in Applications Valve Navi Backup/Restore PRM Simple Backup tool PRM System Backup script Database maintenance tool

X X

X X X X X X

X X X X X

X X

X X X X

X X X X X

X X X X

X X X

-5-

Introduction

PRM Advanced Work flow of Maintenance Engineer

Customization of Database Database Generation Troubleshooting Replacement

Start up Asset Maintenance

DD Menu Doc. Link PAA Alarm Filter Parameter

FDT/DTM View

Device Viewer Plug & Play Device Template

PRM Basic

Device Patrol

Aim: At the end of the training, customer will have a good knowledge about the PRM. The Customer will come to know about the various functions of the PRM and how to use to them to get maximum benefits from the PRM system. Various functions of the PRM like Device Viewer, Doc Linking, Alarm Filter, FDT/DTM, Device template, Device Patrol, etc., will be introduced in this training to the customer

-6-

1.1 Overview

Plant Resource Manager (PRM) is designed to improve the management and maintenance of field devices. These devices will be created in a plant hierarchy. PRM can access devices with field communication such as Foundation Fieldbus and HART. PRM implements the management of equipment and control modules (your plants hierarchy) by creating an audit trail of operations performed on these modules. You can also do on-line adjustment and diagnostics of the control module hardware.

-7-

1.2 PRM System Configuration

Positioning of PRM

PRM is positioned in a higher level of a field network. It also works together with the plant operation functions.
With CS 1000 / 3000

When PRM is connected to a CS 1000/3000 system each management unit in PRM basically corresponds to an individual plant operation range of a CS 1000/3000 project. PRM handles the management of control modules and equipment modules for the CS 1000/3000 project.

Benefits of PRM

Status monitoring and parameter tuning from the central control room. Execution of device diagnosis (DD). Improvement of maintenance work using the maintenance information in PRM database.

-8-

1.3

PRM Components

PRM Server

The PRM Server saves information generated by field devices in databases collected via Field Communication Server and PRM Client. Information saved by PRM Server includes items like messages, device parameters, and inspection information.

PRM Client

The PRM Client has human interface functionality for all of PRM. Usually, users of PRM perform various their tasks on the PRM Client.

Field Communication Server

The Field Communication Server collects information generated from field devices and transmits it to PRM Client. The transmitted information is managed by the PRM Server.

-9-

Extended Software Configuration of PRM

The following option packages are provided to expand the functions of PRM. PRM Advanced Diagnostic (Server) PLUG-IN ValveNavi PAA Development Kit (PAA: PRM Advanced diagnostic Application Development kit) Documenting Calibrator Interface Plant Resource Manager (PRM) is a MS Windows based package that allows you to manage your plant through an MS explorer type of layout. This screen is called the Device Master.

Control modules

The number of control modules that can be managed by PRM is determined by the type of option attached to the basic license of PRM Server. Option 1 25 control modules Option 2 300 control modules Option 3 1000 control modules Option 4 3000 control modules

You cant register more control modules than the number of control modules in the option that was purchased.

PRM can be used to manage: Field communication devices (FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices, HART devices) Conventional devices Static devices

- 10 -

1.4

Starting and shutting down of PRM components.

1.4.1

Starting and shutting down of PRM server

PRM Server automatically starts when a PC on which PRM Server is installed is restarted. When PRM Server starts, the message acquisition starts as well. The PC on which PRM Server is shut down then PRM Server is shut down. Starting and Quitting Message Acquisition When PRM Server is installed, the message acquisition of PRM Server is registered as a service calledPRM Message Acquisition.After the installation, the message acquisition automatically starts when the PC on which it is installed is started up. The message acquisition automatically shuts down when the PC is shut down.

- 11 -

1.4.2

Starting and shutting down of Field Communication server

Field Communication Server is registered as a service on the PC, on which it is installed, and starts and shuts down automatically when the PC is started and shut down. Install Field Communication Server and define the host name of Field Communication Server on PRM Client in order to allow communication between Field Communication Server and PRM Client. Field Communication Server automatically synchronizes the time of the local PC with the time of the master station on the V net or Vnet/IP. Starting and Shutting Down Field Communication Server Field Communication Server is registered as a windows service when it is installed. Field Communication Server automatically starts when the PC on which it is installed is started up. Under normal circumstances, Field Communication Server is stopped at the same time as the PC. Definition for Communicating with PRM Client For communication between the field communication server and PRM client, it is necessary to define the host name of the field communication server on the PC of the PRM client. This setting will enable the PRM client to communicate with the field communication server. PRM Client performs communication with Field Communication Server based on this definition. 1.4.3 Starting and shutting down of PRM Client

Log on to the PRM Client using any account like Administrator, Centum etc.

Starting PRM Client On the PC on which PRM Client has been installed, select [Yokogawa PRM] and then [Plant Resource Manager] from the [Start] menu of Windows. The Login dialog box appears.

- 12 -

Enter the User ID and Password. Select the Server Set if you are using Multiple PRM servers. Closing PRM Client Perform one of the following operations in order to close PRM Client: Click the [x] button at the right upper corner of the PRM main window. Select [File], and then [Exit] from the menu bar. PRM Client is closed.

1.5 PRM Functional Overview PRM FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

Maintenance information management Inspection schedule allows the management of maintenance task schedules, such as inspection and calibration, for each device. Inspection memo gives you an audit trail of records of the inspection tasks performed. Parts list allows you to create a list of hardware available for a specific device Related documents allow you to link to related paperwork. This can be instruction manuals, P&ID drawings, or images. Audit trail

- 13 -

This displays all of the operations performed on the PRM client. This can be parameter setting or saving, logging of calibrations and creating/correcting inspection logs. Historical messages can be filtered to make viewing of specific device information easier.

Tuning and diagnostics Parameters loaded from a FF or HART device can be compared with data that had been saved earlier. Difference between current and saved data are highlighted for quick reference. There is also a Device Viewer that allows you to see the results of a FF-H1 devices self-diagnostics. A HART device can be tuned and diagnostics performed using a maintenance tool in PRM. Utilities You can search for specific devices using items like a device ID, tag name, or tag comment. PRM users are given specific functions, within the package, that they are allowed to do. This is on a user name basis. The self-document function allows you to select what information you wish to print. This can be for specific hardware and date period. There is an electronic manual that can be viewed and printed as you need. Calibration or self-diagnostic tools can be started from PRM. This is can be used to help set up, calibrate, and adjust a device like a YVP110 using a PLUG-IN.

- 14 -

Installation

Structure of PRM Standard System

- 15 -

The PRM standard system largely consists of the following three software programs. To use PRM, these three software programs must be already installed. Field Communication Server Field Communication Server acquires field device information according to the requests from PRM Client and PRM Server. Acquired information is displayed in PRM Client and stored in PRM Server. PRM Server PRM Server saves maintenance information and audit trail entered in PRM Client, maintenance Alarms, and other data, in a database. PRM Client PRM Client functions as a human interface for the PRM system. It is used to display and enter maintenance information and audit trail, and also to display and set device parameters for field devices. The optional packages for the PRM are PRM Advanced Diagnosis PRM Plug-in Documenting Calibrator Interface PRM Advanced diagnosis consists of PRM Advanced Diagnosis Server PRM Advanced Diagnosis Client PRM Advanced Diagnostic Application Development Kit

- 16 -

- 17 -

2.1 PRM System Configuration

2.1.1 Connection with CS-3000

If a PRM system is connected to a CS 1000/CS 3000 system, the PC in which Field communication server is installed must be connected to a control bus. Thus, a control bus interface card must be set and control bus driver should be installed in the PC before Field Communication Server is installed. PRM Client and PRM Server can reside in the same PC with Field Communication Server, or they can be operated on a different PC. The Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS) must be installed in one HIS. When connected to a CS 1000/CS 3000 system, the PRM system acquires and sets device parameters via a control bus interface card, control bus and FCS (Field Control Station). Acquisition of alarm messages and notification of operator guide messages are implemented via the Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS), which is an optional software for HIS (Human Interface Station). NOTE: PRM Client can reside in the HIS, but PRM Server and Field Communication Server cannot reside in the HIS.

- 18 -

It is also possible to adopt a multiple server configuration where all PRM systems used in multiple plants are displayed on and operated from a single PRM Client PC.

- 19 -

2.1.2

Connection with Prosafe-RS

When connecting a PRM system to a ProSafe-RS system, PRM must connect to an integrated system comprised of the ProSafe-RS system and a CS 3000 system. PRM cannot be connected to a ProSafe-RS system that is not a ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 integration structure. When connected to an integrated ProSafe-RS/CS 3000 system, the PRM system acquires and sets device parameters via control bus interface card, control bus and FCS/SCS. Acquisition of alarm messages and notification of operator guide messages are implemented via the Exaopc OPC interface package (for HIS), which is an optional software for HIS.

- 20 -

2.1.3

Connection with Stardom

When connected to a STARDOM system, the PRM system acquires and sets device parameters via an Ethernet port, control network and FCN/FCJ. Acquisition of alarm messages is implemented via FCN/FCJ OPC Server for Windows,which is a software program for FCN/FCJ. If a PRM system is connected to a STARDOM system, the PC in which Field Communication Server is installed must be connected to a control network. PRM Client and PRM Server can reside in the same PC with Field Communication Server or they can be operated on a different PC. FCN/FCJ OPC Server for Windows must be already installed in a PC connected to the control network. FCN/FCJ OPC Server for Windows can reside in the same PC with Field Communication Server, or in a different PC. NOTE: HMI Client and PRM Client can reside together. However, Data Server and HMI Server cannot reside with PRM Server and Field Communication Server.

- 21 -

2.1.4

Connection with HART Multiplexer

When connected to a HART multiplexer, the PRM system connects to HART devices via a COM port, RS-232C/RS-485 converter, and the HART multiplexer, to acquire and set device parameters. To distribute communication loads, it is also possible to connect PRM to the HART multiplexer through multiple COM ports. PRM supports HART multiplexers offered by several manufacturers, but the PRM system is configured in the same manner regardless of which multiplexer is connected. Note, however, that device path settings are different from one manufacturer to another. If a PRM system is to be connected to a HART multiplexer, the HART multiplexer must be connected, via RS-232C/RS-485 converter, to a COM port on the PC in which Field Communication Server is installed. PRM Client and PRM Server can reside in the same PC with Field Communication Server, or they can be operated on a different PC. Since the HART multiplexer is connected via a COM port, there is no need to install a driver for field device communication.

- 22 -

2.2 PRM Package

All the softwares in the PRM can be installed in the same PC or different PCS based on the configuration required. We can get a brief idea from the table below.

- 23 -

Device Master

DEVICE MASTER This is the main screen when PRM is displayed; it is opened through the standard windows program menu. Displayed in the Device Master are:

- 24 -

A collection of data related to equipment and control modules handled by PRM. Information saved in a device master that can be displayed as a list. Detailed information of each equipment module or control module.

Login to PRM When you select Plant Resource Manager you will be prompted with a login window. Users who have accessed PRM are shown on the drop-down menu. Each user will have their own password. Depending upon the number of PRM servers on the system one of these login windows will appear. One PRM Server

Multi Server Set

DEVICE NAVIGATOR This is the main display for PRM and is broken down into different views depending on how you wish to display the process devices. These 4 different views are used for managing the plant and each view has a unique icon corresponding to the category or layer of each control module to be displayed.

- 25 -

If you change views while displaying a control module the same module will still be displayed in the new view.

Plant View This displays the equipment that makes up the plant and shows its place in the plant hierarchy in an Explorer-like view. The user creates the plant hierarchy for the related equipment.

Network View Displays devices related to a specific field network physical configuration such as Foundation Fieldbus and HART, also in an Explorer-like hierarchical view. Class View The supplier (or vendor), model name, and revision number of the devices are displayed here. These devices are also shown in an Explorer-like hierarchy

3.1

Plant View

A logical layout within a plant referred as Plant Hierarchy and can have up to six layers based on ISA S88.01. The user creates the hierarchy based upon the hardware relationship in the plant/process.

- 26 -

Site, Area, Process Cell, Unit A convenient way for user to group all the control modules used in the process. The names can be used to reflect the logical layout in the plant. Example: Refinery Area1 Utility Unit10.

Equipment Module Represents a logical device that comprises one or more control modules. An equipment module is managed by a device tag name. Example: Control valve.

Control Module The smallest functional unit in a given plant. This can be an individual valve, valve positioner, or transmitter.

Site:

Refinery
Area:

Area1
Process Cells: Unit:

Utility Unit10
Equipment Module: Control Module:

Temp YTA_01

- 27 -

- 28 -

MANUAL REGISTRATION Control modules without communication functions, such as analog devices, conventional devices and static devices must be registered by manual entry in the Plant View. Before registering the control module in the PRM database you have to enter all the necessary information for registration. However, Fieldbus devices can also be registered manually. But after the registration of the fieldbus devices you have to perform READ DEVICE DETAILS to read the device information.

DELETION OF DEVICES Deleting the assets of the plant is possible in Plant view only. Select the device which has to be deleted in the plant view and delete the device. Device will get deleted. However the alarms of that device will still be present in the database. EXERCISE : Creating Plant hierarchy. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Plant View, create a site as ISSAE with two area named as Area1 & Area2. In Area1, create a process cell named Utility. In Area2, create a process cell named Process-A. In Utility, create an Equipment Module named Pressure. In Utility, create an Equipment Module named Temperature. In Process-A, create an Equipment Module named Valve-Positioner.

- 29 -

3.2

Network View

Network View provides a folder for each field network type. Field communication devices contained in a field network are automatically assigned to its communication type folder. The communication path of a network to which a field communication device is connected, is referred to as a device path. Notice that the device path shows the CS3000 projects name, FCS domain and station number. Also shown are the node, unit and port number. More detail will be shown in an upcoming page. You can use the Plug & Play function in Network View so PRM will find all of the control modules attached to each hardware device path. Network View displays field communication devices using their device tag names based on the registration in the device master. You can also display the current status of a control module on this screen. PRM supports the following Fieldbus communication types: FOUNDATION Fieldbus HART

On network View, an Other folder is available under the various communication types. Under this Other device path, the undefined devices will be displayed. The legacy field devices or static field devices, which cannot be communicated, will be put under the Other device path. User cannot delete the device path of Other.

- 30 -

- 31 -

EXERCISE : Copying the DD files and Device path registration tool. Procedure: 1. Start DD Copy Tool from the Start Program and Yokogawa PRM. The instructor will give you a CD-ROM that consists of all the necessary DD Files. 2. Select the Copy folders button and select PRM/DD from the CD-ROM. Make sure the destination is drive:/PRM/DD then click OK to start the DD Files Copy.

3. 4. 5.

Use the Window Explorer to make sure all the DD Files are copied. Start Device Path Configuration Tool from the Start Program. Select New from the Edit menu and create the following device path. Communication Way: FF-H1 IOM Type: ALF111 Project Name: ISSAE Add Domain: 1, Station: 1, Node: 1, Slot: 1, Port:1.

6. 7.

Press Apply to confirm the configuration. You should see a new entry is created. Select New again from the Edit menu and create another device path from a different port. Communication Way: FF-H1 IOM Type: ALF111
- 32 -

Project Name: ISSAE Add Domain: 1, Station: 1, Node: 1, Slot: 1, Port:2. 8. 9. Press Apply to confirm the configuration. You should see another new entry is created. Select Save from the File menu to save the configuration.

10. Select Exit from the File menu to complete the configuration. In the Confirm Ending window, confirm Restart Communication Server is checked, select OK. 11. Start Plant Resource Manager and login as Administrator. The instructor will give you the login password for the account Administrator. The Device Navigator displays. 12. Check all the Plant View, Network View and Class View to see if any control modules are defined. You should only see all the default folders in each view. 13. Go to Network View and perform registration of Device path.

Exercise : Registration of device paths and registration of devices using Plug and play Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Network View and from the Register menu, select Read Device Path. Select the Foundation Fieldbus shown in the Network View. From the Registration menu, select Plug & Play to perform an automatic detection of the control modules defined in HIS. It will take sometime to complete the detection. After the completion of Plug & Play detection, you should see few control modules have been defined on each device path. Expand the folders of each device path to see what kinds of control modules are detected. You should see the added control modules are displayed with the status (Spare).

Exercise : Save all Parameters

- 33 -

Procedure: 1. Go to Network View

2. Click on save all Parameters.

3. When a new window pops up click on read device details.

- 34 -

- 35 -

3.3

Class View

In Class View folders are classified first by the type of communication (example: FF or HART). The layers for vendor, category, model, sub model, and revision are placed under each of the communication type folders. The device templates for each type of field devices are provided with the default settings.

Control modules are placed in the Spare folder when they are registered, and moved automatically to the On-Service folder when they are assigned to plant layers in Plant View. Devices out of service are placed in Off-Service folder DEVICE TEMPLATE Making a device template for a particular type of device helps us in maintaining the uniformity in database for that particular type of device. For e.g.: In a plant if there are many EJA transmitters. Linking the Instruction Manual to the EJA will be very big job and there is every possibility of maintenance engineer missing the document for some devices. So it is recommended to make an ideal device template which had all the documents linked, the entire plug in attached etc. Then on applying the device template, the same properties will be copied to the devices of the same class. If you are registering a new device for which the device template exists, the same properties like Document linking, Plug in (if available), etc. will be attached to the device as per the device template.

- 36 -

- 37 -

Exercise : Creation of Device Template

1. Go to class view.

2. Select Show Device template from View from the top menu bar

- 38 -

3. Select a device for which device template has to be generated.

- 39 -

4. Apply the saved device template so that same properties have been acquired by all the devices.

- 40 -

5. Try creating a new device of the same Class. Device template automatically gets applied to the device being newly generated.

- 41 -

3.4

Custom View

In the Custom view maintenance engineer can create a explorer like view and place the assets of the plant to his convenience. It can be used for the following purposes: Grouping control modules Devices can be grouped by maintenance range, person in charge of maintenance, inspection/ replacement schedule, operation status/failure status, and so forth. Managing logical communication path when connecting with a system made by another company If field devices are connected to a host system made by another company, Custom View allows managing acquired device information and device parameters according to the network configuration of that host system made by another company. It is also possible to combine the device security settings with grouped folders so as to identify the security of the specific folders when using the folders. Custom View consists of device shortcuts that are associated with devices and folders.The Custom View consists of Device Shortcuts and the associated Folders. The device shortcut is similar to the shortcut on Windows but referents a device on Custom View. Using the device shortcuts and folders in Custom View, user can organize the devices in a desired hierarchical structure. The users can configure a desired hierarchical structure using device shortcuts and folders in Custom View.

- 42 -

Exercise: Create different folders in custom view for keeping the devices which should undergo maintenance activity on 15th Feb and by the end of Feb. Procedure: 1. Go to Custom view.

2. Create folder as HCU Maintennace

- 43 -

3. Under that folder create two folders to keep the devices which have to undergo maintenance on 15th Feb and by the end of Feb.

Advantage: It gives one brief idea to the maintenance engineer about the Scheduled maintenance.

- 44 -

3.5 Control Module Status

A control module can be in either one of the following three states:

On-Service:

The status where a control module is installed in the plant and operating is

referred to as On-Service. In Plant View these control modules are shown in the plant hierarchy they have been assigned to. In Class View the control modules are found in the On-Service folder under the specific vendor.

Spare: The control modules are placed in this status immediately after the Plug & Play function has been used. This is the status where a control module is not installed in the plant and kept as a spare. When a control module is registered for the first time it is placed in the Spare folder in both Plant View and Class View.

Off-Service: used.

This is used when the control module is being serviced or otherwise not being

Modules, in this state, are placed in the Off-Service folder in both Plant View and Class View.

Work: Registration is being performed using the host file set. When registering a control module using the host file set, the control module is displayed in each view, but it is not registered in PRM Server. This status is referred to as Work. In the case of devices in the Not Registered status explained above, all the data necessary for registration has been read from the control modules by the Plug & Play function. In the case of devices where manual entry was required for the registration because not all the data necessary for the registration has been gathered.

- 45 -

Color Indication: The tables in the figure shown below gives a brief Idea of the colour indication in the PRM.

Exercise: Moving the Control Modules in the Plant folder 1. Notice that new modules are placed in the Spare folder. Generally, any new control module added is placed in this folder immediately after the Plug & Play function has been used. 2. Move the 2 control modules added. One to Area1-Utilit, Pressure and the other to Area2-Process-A, Valve Positioner. 3. Change to Network View and expand the Device Paths to check the control modules again. Click on the new module and select the right-hand mouse button. Select Refresh and you should see the status of control modules change to (Ready). 4. Change to Class View and expand each folder. Now you should see few control modules are created according to Communication Type, Vendors Name, Model, and Revision, and in the On-Service folder.

- 46 -

4
4.1

Security
PRM Security Functions

Security In order to use the functions provided by PRM you must enter a user name and password already defined in PRM. The user group to which you belong and the roles you have been given restricts the operations you can perform in PRM.

Role List A role refers to a group of operations that can be performed in PRM. Each role is assigned to a descriptive name. The role list displays all of the roles that have been created. You can make or delete roles from this window. Item name Role Role Description Description Displays the entire user roles registered in PRM. Displays a list of roles assigned to the user role selected in the list of user roles. The display is updated if another user role is selected.

- 47 -

4.2 Permissions
A user role refers to a group of one or more permissions. When the security administrator assigns a user role to you, you are permitted to perform only the operations of the given role. Your security administrator can add permissions as necessary. The table below lists the types of role permissions available in PRM and the operations allowed.

4.3 Device Security

USER GROUP User groups are set in order to restrict operations that can be performed in each of the windows of PRM. By setting user groups, it is possible to limit the operations that the user can perform in each of the operation target windows. A user must belong to one user group. The following restrictions can be applied for each of the windows that can be displayed. Update: Allowed to display the window and change the data View: Allowed to display the window, but cannot change the data Hide: Not allowed to display the window

- 48 -

Five default user groups, Administrators (system management group: cannot be changed), Guests (guest group), Users (general group), Maintenance Group 1 and\Maintenance Group 2, are provided in PRM. The security administrator can create new user groups as necessary. The table below lists the default user groups and the restrictions applied to them in the different PRM windows.

- 49 -

USER REGISTRATION User registration refers to granting the roles to operate PRM to users of PRM. In order to register a PRM operator as a user, it is necessary to register a user ID. Moreover, the user role and user group should be set in order to restrict the operations performed by the user. The following items must be set for a user in order to register the user.

When a new user is registered, the user ID is automatically set as the password. The new user should change the password when starting PRM Client for the first time. The following three users are set as default users in PRM.

- 50 -

The following user groups and user roles are assigned to the default users.

DEVICE SECURUTY Device security can restrict each users access to devices. Security can be set for each of Device Navigators hierarchies and user groups. The following security levels are provided as device security. Full Control All operations can be performed for devices. Read-Only Devices are displayed in each view of Device Navigator, but no update operation can be performed for them. Hidden Devices are not displayed in each view of Device Navigator. The security levels listed above have the following relationships. independently

- 51 -

The following table lists views in which device security settings are applicable.

The default device security level when a hierarchy or device has been added is Full Control. When the revision update of PRM has been performed, the device security level of all hierarchies and devices becomes Full Control. Privilege for Allowing to Perform Device Security Settings If the user permission [Set Device Security (DSSET)] has been set, and Plant View, Network View, Class View or Custom View has been set to [Update] for the user group, all hierarchies and devices and displayed, and Full Control is then set. For example, a user of a user group, for which Plant View has been set to [Update] and [Set Device Security (DSSET)] has also been set, can set device security in Plant View. At this time, all hierarchies are displayed in Plant View, regardless of the device security settings.

Relationship Between Device Security and User Group For example, when the device master has been set to [Update] in the user group setting, if device security is [Read-Only], the device master can be displayed but no update operation can be performed.

- 52 -

Exercise: Assigning Device Security Procedure: 1. Open the User management Window from Register in the Menu Bar. 2. Register Different User groups as Group1 and Group2, assign the permissions required for each user group. 3. Register all the users under the each user group and assign permissions for them 4. Go to each folder in the Plant view and assign the device security so that devices are used by the concerned area people only.

- 53 -

Other Functions

5.1 Detail
In the Detail Tab we can input the device details like Loop name Delivery date of the Control Module, Operation start date of the control module Priority of the control module Criticality of the control module Setting of Device Patrol When Device Patrol scans a control module, the status of the control module will be indicated by a device status icon. The icon can also indicate the control module when it recovers from error. The device status icons are displayed in the Device List windows of Network View, Plant View and other tools. Only the control modules registered in the PRM are displayed with the device status icons. The control modules not registered in the PRM are not displayed with the device status icons. The device status update time depends on the criticality of the device; you can set different times of device status update for the Devices having different criticalities like HIGH, MEDIUM, and LOW. Maintenance engineer can switch off the Alarm Display for a particular device which is down for maintenance for preventing more alarms getting logged in the History of the PRM. By entering all the device information it will be easy for the maintenance engineer to know the history of the device like when it was commissioned and for which loop it is being used.

- 54 -

Procedure for Device Patrol 1. From the Windows [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], point to [YOKOGAWA PRM], point to [Tool], and then select [Device Patrol Setup].The Device Patrol Setup dialog box will appear. 2. In the [Field Communication Server Name] field, enter the computer name of the PC in which Field Communication Server has been installed. 3. Set the patrol period for each object criticality level. 4. Select the [Ok] button.

5.2 Tool
Device Viewer Device Viewer will be helpful in troubleshooting the alarm. It gives you the hardware status of the device along with the alarms being displayed on the LED of the device in the field. The maintenance operator need not go to the field to see what alarm is being displayed on the LED of the device. He can check it from the device viewer For e.g.: If the LED display in the device is showing AL041 then the maintenance engineer can refer the User Manual linked with device and find out that Transducer block is in Out of Service mode.

- 55 -

5.3

DTM Works
FDT (Field Device Tool) is an open technology to maximize the value of information contained in field devices. The standard allows device specific engineering, maintenance and diagnostic software to be simply plugged in and become operable in a system. A key component of FDT is DTM (Device Type Manager) which is an application software with human interface displayed in the engineering tool. DTMs enhance users interaction with the field devices by enabling greater access to useful information beyond the raw data. The open FDT standard ultimately provides an opportunity to offer more value to the users through full maintenance and advanced diagnostic capabilities.

- 56 -

EXERCISE :

Launch the DTM window and calibrate one FF device and one HART device.

DTM Browser is a tool for assigning the classes for the installed FF-H1 and HART devices. This tool is used when switching multiple types of DTMs after installing the device DTM that is not included in the PRM software CD-ROM. To open DTM Browser, choose [Programs] - [YOKOGAWA PRM] - [Tools] - [DTM Browser] from the [Start] menu of Windows. Then DTM Browser will be displayed.

- 57 -

5.3.1 Installation and setup of Yokogawa supplied DTM DTM (Device Type Manager) is a tool that enables reading and wiring of HART device parameters. DTMs for Yokogawas HART devices are installed automatically when PRM Client is installed. If you are using HART devices from other companies, you must install DTMs for these HART devices in addition to the default DTMs. How to install DTMs for HART devices is explained below. Procedure: 1. Launch FMDeviceFileInstaller.exe in the DeviceFiles folder found in the PRM Software Medium 1 CD-ROM.

2. Device File Installer is launched and a list of DTMs for HART devices that are bundled in the PRM CD-ROM is displayed. Check the DTMs you want to install, and then click the [Install] button. Using this procedure we can install the DTMs supplied by Yokogawa.

- 58 -

5.4 Memo
This section covers: Role of Inspection Memo creators and approvers Setting Frozen Limits Creating Inspection Memos Approval of Inspection Memos Audit Trail of Inspection Memos Printing an Inspection Report Deletion of Inspection Memos

INSPECTION MEMO ROLES AND FROZEN LIMITS You can enter and save maintenance information, like records of inspections, on equipment and control modules. You can only approve inspection memos if you are given that authority. Opening the Inspection Memo: Select a device and then click on the Memo tab. Use the right-hand mouse button and click on Insert.

Role of Inspection Memo Creator Creates the inspection memo, enter the data and readies it for approval. Changes can only be made to inspection memos that havent been approved by an approver.

Role of Inspection Memo Approver After a new inspection memo is created must be approved. Only a User who has the rights can approve Inspection memo. If the user has approver privileges then the approval task is omitted. Frozen limits can be used to define who and when the changes can be made.

- 59 -

Frozen Limits After an Inspection Memo has been created and saved then it goes into Frozen Limits. At that time, depending upon if the approval state is enables or disabled, only the approver can make changes. Approval function Enabled: An approver can make changes and they are not recorded to the audit trail. Approval function Disabled: An approver can make changes and they are recorded to the audit trail. INSPECTION MEMO DETAILS Main window When the inspection took place, who did the inspection and who is the approver. The work type, complaint and status are defined here also. Summary tab Enter codes from the dropdown menus that describes the condition, diagnostic and action required. Detail information can be entered in the Summary box.

Highlight tab Service and diagnostic codes are selected here from their drop-down menus.

Recommendation tab Define items like work type, priority, problem description and the plan/target dates. APPROVING INSPECTION MEMOS To see any inspection memo that hasnt been approved click on Option and Approve Inspection memo. The approval window appears. Click on the Approve box on the appropriate memos that will be confirmed for approval. You will then save when you leave this window. Note: You must have approver authority to open this window.

AUDIT TRAIL
- 60 -

The inspection memo details are logged and can be viewed by opening the History tab for a specific device. Note: If an inspection memo was modified it is shown here also. PRINTING THE INSPECTION MEMO After the Inspection Memo has been created and saved it can be printed out. With an inspection schedule open select the right mouse button and click on print from the menu that appears.

Pre-viewing the printout: If you want to see the printout data first, open the File, on the menu across the top of the page, and select Print Preview.

DELETING AN INSPECTION MEMO You easily can delete an inspection memo. Selecting the right-hand mouse and click on delete. A confirmation window appears. Note: The creation and deletion of the inspection memo is recorded on the History tab for that device.

EXERCISE In this exercise, you will create an Inspection Memo with a normal user account.
You will then login as Administrator to approve the memo made.
You will also examine the privilege for both User and Administrator here.

Here is an instruction on how you can achieve that. 1. Start Plant Resource Manager and login as Administrator. The instructor will give you the login password for the account Administrator. 2. From the menu bar on the Device Master, select [Option] Configuration]. 3. Make sure the item Inspection Memo Approval Required is checked. [Inspection Memo

- 61 -

4. Close the window and select Yes when prompted with message. 5. Exit from Plant Resource Manager. 6. Start Plant Resource Manager again and this time login as User. The instructor will give you the login password for the account User. 7. In the Plant View, select one of the devices created in Session 1. 8. You will see the Details Window for that device displayed on the right side. 9. Select Memo. 10. An Inspection Memo screen is displayed. 11. Insert a new Inspection Memo. 12. Fill in the mandatory column with appropriate value. 13. You may want to fill in some of the optional column to make it complete. 14. In the Summary tab, right click to insert a summary. 15. Fill in the mandatory column with appropriate value. 16. In the Highlight tab, right click to insert a highlight. 17. Fill in the mandatory column with appropriate value. 18. In the Recommendation tab, right click to insert a recommendation. 19. Fill in the mandatory column with appropriate value. 20. Close the window after completed filling above column. 21. A window will be prompted whether to save the record. Select Yes. 22. You will now see a new entry created in the Inspection Memo screen. 23. Check the Approve Flag to confirm that this memo has not yet being approved. 24. From the menu bar on the Device Master, select Option to see what is the available option to select. 25. You should notice that group User has no privilege to perform Approve Inspection Memo as shown as below.

- 62 -

26. From the menu bar on the Device Master, select [File]

[Exit] to quit PRM.

27. Start Plant Resource Manager again and this time, login as Administrator. The instructor will give you the login password for the account User 28. In the Plant View, select the device that you have made the Inspection Memo. 29. Select Memo. 30. Confirm the last memo that you have made is still Not Approved. 31. From the menu bar on the Device Master, select Option to see what is the available option to select. 32. You should be able to choose Approve Inspection Memo now. Choose that. 33. Approve the memo and close the window. 34. Check the Details Window to confirm the memo is approved.

- 63 -

5.5

Parts

This section covers: Displaying the Parts List window Registering a Parts Code Adding, Updating, Deleting, and Defining Hierarchy of Part Codes Registering a part code.

DISPLAYING THE PARTS LIST WINDOW With PRM you can define a list of spare parts for a control module and show the parts status. Select a device from the Device Navigator then click on the Parts tab. The parts list appears. Note: At this point you can add to the parts list for this device type by using the right-hand mouse button and clicking on Insert. You can also define a list of parts comprising a given control module, and register/display the status of spare parts. Note: If this device type has been created before you will see it when the select button is opened in the Parts Code column, opening the Help Parts Code window. Searching for control modules that use the target parts can be done by using the browse function. Selecting the button in the Parts Code column opens the Help Parts Code window.

This displays all of the devices and parts that have been registered. From here you can select the device type and it will then display in the Parts tab. If sub-assemblies or spare parts have been registered under that device they will also show in the Parts window when the device is selected.

Find: You can also use the Find function to search of specific parts codes. As you enter the part code the window automatically highlights the line the data is found on.

- 64 -

REGISTERING A PART CODE Using the right-hand mouse and opening the Register Parts Code window allows you to add or delete a part code. When you open up the registration window you can also create a parts hierarchy at the right-hand side of the window. Click the right-hand mouse button and select Insert Part Code to add to the hierarchy. At this point you will enter the part number, part group, unit of measurement. Note: the reserved stock plus the available stock make up your total stock for the specific part. EXERCISE Create a parts list.

1. Start the Plant Resource Manager and login as Administrator. 2. In the Plant View, select one of the devices created in Session 1. You will see the Details Window for that device displayed on the right side. 3. Select Parts and a Parts List screen is displayed. Register the following Parts Code. Part Code EJA110 F9341JP F9341RA Parts Group DP_EJA DP_EJA DP_EJA UOM Pieces Pieces Pieces Parts Description Pressure Transmitter O-Ring Cast aluminium alloy Reserved 3 1 1 4 2 2 Available

4. Close the window and Save the above definition. 5. On the Parts List screen, right click to insert a parts list, a new entry appears on the screen. 6. Click the combo button on Parts Code to see the Parts Code window. 7. Select the EJA110 and click OK to close the window. 8. The new entry is filled with the information for the EJA110. 9. On the PRM Device Master window, select [File] and then [Save] to save the definition.

- 65 -

5.6

Schedule

In this section we will cover the following: Viewing the reference codes. Adding a new reference code. Registering and inserting a new service code Creating a new Inspection Schedule. Approving the schedule and viewing the flag status.

REGISTERING AND INSERTING A SERVICE CODE PRM provides the function to define and maintain schedules for inspection, adjustment and diagnosis of equipment modules or control modules. A service code is a template used to define an inspection schedule by the type and frequency of the tasks. An inspection schedule can be defined for each type of control module. Note: Several Inspection Schedules can be assigned to one equipment or control module. Inspection schedules of all the equipment and control modules registered in the device master must be approved by Schedule Approvers. One or more schedule approvers must be defined before the inspection schedules take place. If a Schedule Approver creates an inspection schedule then the approval task can be omitted. The creation and approval of inspection schedules are shown on the Historical Messages. CREATING A NEW SCHEDULE New schedules are created on the Schedule tab by using the insert function to open the Register Inspection Schedule window. Required fields in this window: Service Code Priority

- 66 -

Approved By Data Editor

Approving and viewing the flag status After the inspection is approved and saved you can open the Schedule tab and see the Approved status.

Deleting the Inspection schedule On the Schedule tab you can select an inspection and, using the right-hand mouse, select Delete. After confirming the inspection will be removed. EXERCISE

In this exercise, you will create an Inspection Schedule with a normal user account. Then login as Administrator to approve the schedule made and examine the privilege for both User and Administrator.

1. Start Plant Resource Manager and login as User. The instructor will give you the login password for the account User. 2. In the Plant View, select one of the devices created previously. 3. You will see the Details Window for that device displayed on the right side. Select Schedule, an Inspection Schedule screen is displayed. 4. Use the right-hand mouse button and select Insert to create a new Inspection Schedule. 5. Fill in the mandatory column (Service Code, Priority, Approved by and Data Editor) with appropriate value. Make Approved by and Data Editor, ADMIN. 6. You may want to fill in some of the optional column to make it complete. Close the window after completed filling necessary column. 7. A window will be prompted whether to save the record. Select Yes. 8. You will now see a new entry created in the Inspection Schedule screen. 9. Check the Approve Flag to confirm that this schedule has not yet being approved. 10. From the menu bar on the Device Master window, select Option to see what is the available option to select.

- 67 -

11. You should notice that group User has no privilege to perform Approve Inspection Schedule as shown as below.

12. From the menu bar on the Device Master, select File then Exit to quit PRM. 13. Start Plant Resource Manager again and this time, login as Administrator. The instructor will give you the login password for the account. 14. In the Plant View, select the device that you have made the Inspection Schedule ands select Schedule. 15. Confirm the last schedule that you have made is still Not Approved. 16. From the menu bar on the Device Master, select Option to see what is the available option to select. 17. You should be able to choose Approve Inspection Schedule now. Now, Approve the schedule and close the window. 18. Refresh the window (F5) and check the Details Window to confirm the schedule is approved. 19. Close down PRM.

- 68 -

5.7

Doc

This section covers: Registering Documents Managing document links Browsing for a documents path Registering a documents format Associating Documents with specific devices

DOCUMENTS PRM allows you to link to documents related to the device type you are viewing. This allows you to manage and display the information on documents related to equipment modules or control modules. Documents have to be registered in advance before they can be used. Registering or deleting a record is logged as an operation record message. Only documents in file formats handled by Windows can be used.

Links to documents can be managed in the following three ways: Managing copies of documents Documents are managed by creating copies and then associating them with equipment or control modules. You can specify the copy destination folder of the documents. Managing document directly Only the path information of the documents is managed. This means that if the same document is specified for different control modules, the same file will be referenced. Managing URLs Only the information of specified URLs is managed.

REGISTERING DOCUMENTS The following table lists the items displayed in the Document List window.

- 69 -

BROWSING FOR A DOCUMENT PATH This allows you to find a specific document on your HDD or in your network neighborhood. The table below lists the items that should be set in the Register Document dialog box.

REGISTERING A DOCUMENT FORMAT If Windows does not recognize the documents format then it must be registered. Selecting the button in the Format entry area opens up the registration template. The items to enter are described below.

ASSOCIATING DOCUMENTS Registered documents can now be associated with a specific device. 1. Click the [DOC] button on a device, then click the right-hand mouse button. 2. Click [Add link] on the window that appears. The Add/Link Document window appears. 3. Find Document Number and click on the button at the right side. The Help Document Number window appears. 4. Double-click on the document you want and it now appears under the device. 5. Double click on the document to open it.

Note: If a document link is deleted, the link information is deleted from this window. You can restore the link by re-doing the steps above.

Exercise: Register all the documents to be linked and link the documents to the devices as required.
- 70 -

Procedure: 1. Register the instruction manuals of EJA, YTA, YVP and EJX in the Master Data., given by the instructor.

- 71 -

- 72 -

2. Select a device for which document has to be linked

- 73 -

3. Go to the document tab and link the Instruction manual of the EJA, P and ID of the loop, picture which identifies the location of the instrument.

4. Repeat this procedure to complete the document link for all the documents

- 74 -

5.8

Parameter

It is possible to display both the parameter data read from an FF-H1 device and the parameter data stored by PRM. It is also possible to compare data saved in the audit trail, as well as to compare data of different control modules of the same type. Moreover, it is possible to set parameters for FF-H1 devices, and save parameters read from FF-H1 devices. Mainly this tab can be used to set the TB parameters of FF devices. There are the following three parameter value comparison patterns: Comparison between current data and data logged in the past Comparison of parameter values logged in the past Comparison of (logged) parameter values of FF-H1 devices of the same device type

Comparison between Current Data and Data Logged in the Past The flow of comparison between current data and data logged in the past is shown below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The current parameter values of the FF-H1 device are read. Historical parameter values saved in the server are read. The parameter values read are compared. It is possible to copy the historical parameter values as necessary. The copied parameter values are set in the FF-H1 device. The parameter values set are saved in PRM Server as historical parameters. The parameter value comparison operation is saved in PRM Server as an operation log entry.

- 75 -

Comparison between Current Data and Data Logged in the Past The flow of comparison between different parameter values logged in the past is shown below. 1. 2. 3. Historical parameter values are read from PRM Server. The parameter values read are compared. The parameter value comparison operation is saved as an operation log entry.

- 76 -

Comparison of (logged) parameter values of FF-H1 devices of the same device type The flow of comparison between (logged) parameter values of different FF-H1 devices of the same device type is shown below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The current parameter values of FF-H1 device A are read. The historical parameter values of FF-H1 device B are read. The parameter values read are compared. It is possible to copy the parameter values as necessary. The copied parameter values are set in FF-H1 device A. The parameter values set are saved in PRM Server as historical parameters. The parameter value comparison operation is saved in PRM Server as an operation log entry.

- 77 -

Display colors of parameters The display color of parameter values changes depending on the status of the parameter. When the parameter values displayed in the left and right fields are different The parameter values in the left and right fields are displayed in yellow. When a parameter cannot be set The parameter value is displayed in gray. When a parameter value is set The parameter value is displayed in magenta. Exercise: Change the Mode of transducer block to O/s from Auto and change it back to Auto.

Exercise: Change the parameters of the TB for a FF device.

- 78 -

Exercise: Save all the parameters of the device after reading the device details of all the devices. Procedure: 1. Go to Network View

2. Click on save all Parameters.

3. When a new window pops up click on read device details.

- 79 -

- 80 -

Message Management

PRM can be used to save various messages in PRM Server as logs. These logs can be utilized with the audit trail function. Messages are displayed in the Audit Trail Message window. It is possible to classify messages into the following categories and display them in the Audit Trail Message window The historical messages to be displayed can be selected in Device Navigator if it is desired only to display messages in a certain range. All the messages can be displayed by selecting Plant at the top of the hierarchy. Message Acquisition (PRM Server Start-up) Only messages generated after the most recent message in the previous operation are acquired at startup. Message Acquisition (PRM Server Running) A message is acquired by PRM every time the HIS receives a message.

- 81 -

Flow of Message Acquisition (PRM Collects HIS Messages) Events generated by devices on the field network and the events generated by PRM advanced diagnostic applications in PRM advanced diagnoses server are collected as messages related to equipment modules and control modules. The collected messages will be stored in PRM Server as audit trails of PRM. When PRM is connected to CS 1000/CS 3000 systems (PAS: Plant Automation System), PRM can selectively gather only the required messages from the messages collected in HIS. Using the message acquisition setup tool, the categories of the messages to be collected by PRM can be specified. The maximum number of event message categories for PRM to collect is 200. If required, the specified message categories can be deleted later. Messages Collected from Field Communication Server The messages received from the Device Patrol and advanced diagnostic applications will be saved in the PRM server after filtering (if alarm filtering is required).
PRM SERVER

PRM DB

PRM Message Acquisition Service

Device Patrol

FIELD COMMUNICATION SERVER

FCS HART COMMUNICATION MODULE Device Patrol Periodically Checks the status of the HART devices

- 82 -

Procedure for Message Acquisition Setup 1. From the Windows [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], and point to [YOKOGAWA PRM], point to [Tool], and then select [Message Acquisition Setup Tool]. The Message Acquisition Setup dialog box opens and shows the current settings, if a PC is already set. 2. Select the system connected to PRM. 3. Enter the computer name of the OPC Server PC used to send and receive messages. To select messages to be acquired by PRM Server, click the [Message Selection] button. If you do not want to select messages to be acquired, click the [OK] button to close the Message Acquisition Setup dialog box. If the message acquisition service is already running, restart the PC.

- 83 -

6.1

Audit Trial Message Window

Messages acquired with PRM can be displayed in the Audit Trail Information Window. Click one of the display group tabs in the Audit Trail Message window to display the list of historical messages in that group. When the Audit Trail Message window is called up, the [Maintenance] display group tab is displayed by default. The following tabs are provided in the Audit Trail Message window, each corresponding to a particular message type Maintenance Device configuration Device event User event Operation PAS event Diagnosis System

Classification of Historical Messages Historical messages are classified into the following types. A tab for displaying messages is provided for each of the types. Maintenance User Events Operation The messages initiated by Device Patrol, Advanced Diagnostic Applications, CS 1000/CS 3000 and STARDOM. Login and logout Setting operations such as registration of control modules (addition and deletion of devices, changes of device names), creation of plant layers, assignment of devices to plant layers, Saving all parameter user registration, and user group registration, Import/Export master data Device Configuration Parameter setting, parameter saving, calibration record, operation in PLUG-IN applications, recording inspection operations, registration of parts, and setting inspection schedules, software download Device Events Events related to devices

- 84 -

PAS Events Diagnosis

Message from CS 1000/CS 3000 or STARDOM, When a device tag is not specified) Startup and closing of Diagnostic/Acquisition Navigator, install and uninstall of the PRM Advanced Diagnostic application, startup, closing, restart and deletion of diagnosis, startup of diagnosis tools, error detection

System

Displays the events of the resident programs that constructed PRM system.

Display of Historical Messages The following information is displayed for each historical message. Each item is displayed for view purposes only and cannot be changed. Event Type: Operation Date and Time: Date and Time Device Tag: Device Tag Message: Acknowledge Alarm Reason: The comment text entered on [Acknowledge Alarms] dialog box Device ID: Device ID User ID: User ID Effects on PRM: When a Device Tag Name is changed When a device tag name is changed, the corresponding device tag name held in the audit trail is not changed. When a Device Tag Name is deleted When a device tag is deleted, the corresponding device tag recorded in the audit trail is not deleted; the audit trail is kept as is. If the related detail information has been deleted, it is not possible to read the details from that audit trail. When a User is deleted When a user is deleted, the audit trail related to that user is not deleted.

- 85 -

Audit Trails The audit trails managed by PRM can be viewed and printed in PRM Client. Operation Logs It is possible to view and/or print operation logs that were recorded in the past with the historical message function. These logs are stored in a database with date and time generated, name of the user who performed the operation, event type, and description of change. PRM manages the following operation logs. User registration, deletion, and modification User group registration, deletion, and modification Control module registration and deletion Plant layer creation and deletion Device assignment and movement to plant layers Inspection memo creation, deletion, modification, and approval Inspection schedule creation and approval Parts list registration and modification Related document registration and deletion Master data import/export Device parameter setting and saving All parameters saving DD menu execution PLUG-IN application execution Download or Upload the calibration data to the calibrator and input the calibration result. Maintenance alarm occurrence and acknowledgement operations Advanced Diagnosis execution Device Template operation Event Logs The errors of the devices and systems are kept as audit trails so that the previously occurred errors can be viewed and printed out. For conveniently viewing the audit trails, the trails are categorized into the following different tabs: Maintenance Event Device Event PAS Event User Event Operation log

- 86 -

Device Configuration Moreover, the internal errors of the PRM system are categorized into the System tab on the window. Maintenance/Inspection Logs PRM performs audit trail of the information in inspection memos. When either of the following operations is performed, the information in the inspection memos is registered in PRM Server as logs. Moreover, each operation is saved as an operation record message. Creation of an inspection memo Modification an inspection memo This allows viewing and printing inspection logs that were recorded in the past. Device Parameter Logs PRM saves parameters of control modules in PRM Server and manages the logs. When either of the following operations is performed on Parameter comparison window, the parameters at the operation are registered in PRM Server as logs. Moreover, each operation is saved as an operation record message. Parameter setting Parameter saving Moreover, with the parameter comparison function, it is possible to view and/or print device parameter logs that were recorded in the past, as well as compare them with the current values. Acknowledging Maintenance Alarms The occurred maintenance alarms will be kept in the PRM server (database). These alarms can be displayed in the Maintenance tab of Audit Trail Message window. In the Maintenance tab, the newly occurred maintenance alarms are displayed with icons that indicating the alarms are unacknowledged alarms. User can acknowledge the alarms on the tab. The icons that indicating the unacknowledged alarms will disappear after the alarms are acknowledged. Exercise: Acknowledge the Alarms generated in the PRM Exercise: Filter all the messages in Audit trail window which shows Device tag not found

- 87 -

6.2

Alarm Filter configurator

Maintenance alarm filter settings have two types, maintenance-oriented type and operatororiented type. Maintenance alarm filter can be used to customize the messages of certain maintenance alarms or to stop sending alarm messages that need not be displayed in the Audit Trail Message window of PRM client. This filter setting item is optional. Filtering simulation can be conducted to test the defined filtering conditions. By using the filtering simulation, how the filtered maintenance alarm messages are displayed can be checked at the destination terminals. The operator-oriented filtering is used when displaying the maintenance alarm messages on the operator guide message window of HIS. By default, the setting is [Delivery Stop]. However, this filter setting can be changed accordingly. There are two types of definition contents; Delivery Stop and customizing.If a maintenance alarm does not match any of the defined conditions, it will be notified to all destinations in its default form. If you want to receive alarm messages as is, there is no need to define filter conditions. Mechanics of Filtering is shown as below

- 88 -

The actions will be executed only when all the conditions are satisfied. For maintenance alarm that satisfies the conditions, the actions towards the occurred alarms could be two types, stop delivering the alarm message or modify the alarm message. For the stopped alarm message, the maintenance alarm requires to satisfy only one of the conditions. If a maintenance alarm does not satisfy any of the delivery stop conditions but satisfies the customized conditions, the actions of modifying the message corresponding to the conditions of the maintenance alarm will be executed. However, if a customized condition is defined with the alarm priority, this condition will have the highest filtering priority. If a maintenance alarm does not satisfy any condition, the alarm message will be passed intact.

Alarm filtering files consists of two types, master file and work file. Master File Master file is used for filtering alarms in PRM server. The default file name is Common.csv. The maintenance alarm-filtering program (a server program) always references this master file. When this file is changed, the filtering actions will be changed accordingly. When editing the master file, it is necessary to copy the file into a temporary folder as a work file. The modification should be performed to the work file. Working File When editing the master file, the master file needs to be copied into a file for editing. This temporary file is referred to as working file.

- 89 -

Exercise: Mask the Device recovery alarm for all the EJA devices present in the database Procedure: 1. Open the Alarm Filter Configurator for maintenance from the Start Menu

2. Copy the Master file as the Working file.

- 90 -

3. Enter Object Model Name as EJA(Software Download) and the Message number as 3182

4. Select Delivery stop in Customizing.

- 91 -

5. Save the Working file and register it as Master File.

Advantage: It reduces the generation of unwanted alarms in the PRM database and henceforth increases the performance of the system.

- 92 -

PRM Advanced Diagnosis

PRM Advanced Diagnosis is a function to predict failures in devices that support field communication, as well as in accompanying equipment, based on the parameters collected from these field devices, and thereby increase the efficiency of maintenance work. It is also possible to link multiple diagnostic software programs to perform higher-level diagnosis jobs. Specifically, the following functions can be performed: Acquire desired parameter values of field devices, save them in the PRM database, and utilize the saved parameter values. Data can be acquired not only from the Field Communications Server PC, but also from the OPC server.(DCS Data) Perform diagnosis jobs based on acquired data to predict failures, etc. Create onscreen flowcharts so that diagnostic applications can be created and tested visually. Create a loop diagnosis job involving multiple devices. Multiple loop diagnosis jobs can be linked to create a different diagnosis job.

- 93 -

7.1 Data Acquisition

In Advanced Diagnosis, parameters used for diagnosis jobs are acquired periodically from field devices and the acquired data is fed to the diagnosis procedure running modules, with the modules also given triggers to start diagnosis jobs. The acquired data can also be saved in Diagnosis Historian Server. In Advanced Diagnosis, data is acquired based on the address and data type of target data, acquisition period, and other conditions. A sampling item is a set of conditions applicable to a single data point. The condition set associated with sampling items includes the following. Acquisition period Number of samples Sampling period OPC item ID In Advanced Diagnosis, data is acquired at the specified period. This period is called the acquisition period (hereinafter referred to as acquisition period).During acquisition, multiple sets of data can be acquired at a period shorter than the acquisition period. This shorter period is called the sampling period, while the number of data sets acquired at the sampling period is called the number of samples. The relationship of acquisition period, sampling period and number of samples is shown below.

- 94 -

7.2 Diagnostic Data Historian

Diagnostic Data Historian is a function to acquire data obtained through Device Diagnosis and save the data chronologically in a dedicated database (Historian database).The data saved in the Historian database also includes diagnosis results, interim values used in diagnosis jobs, and calculation results. This Data can be used for investigation when a problem occurs with a device. Running Diagnostic Data Historian for Devices in Device Master Periodically acquire parameters from the devices managed in PRMs Device Master, and save the parameters in the Diagnosis Historian Server. The acquired parameters are predefined for each device model. The user cannot specify desired parameters. Setting the Acquisition Period Set the period (acquisition period) at which data will be acquired and saved in the Diagnosis Historian Server. Choose [Options] - [Customize] from PRM client menu so as to display a dialog box, and then open the [Diagnosis] tab and do the settings. The default acquisition period is 24 Hours. Select a setting from 1 Minute, 10 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 6 Hours and 24 Hours. The acquisition period you set will apply to all devices in Device Master. You cannot set a different acquisition period for each device model or parameter. The acquisition period can be changed after you have enabled Diagnostic Data Historian for individual devices. In this case, the acquisition job schedule will be automatically adjusted and data acquisition will continue based on the adjusted scheduled. Starting Diagnostic Data Historian Immediately after a device has been added to Device Master, Diagnostic Data Historian is disabled (OFF) for the device by default. To start running Diagnostic Data Historian for a device in Device Master, select the device and enable (ON) Diagnostic Data Historian. Data Historian can be used for Yokogawa devices only and only data of some fixed parameters will be acquired.

- 95 -

Exercise : Activate the Data Historian for one Device 1. Set the Diagnosis Historian setting to ON in the Details Tab of the device.

- 96 -

- 97 -

2. Set the Acquisition period in the PRM client.

- 98 -

7.3 Acquisition Navigator

Acquisition Navigator is a tool for displaying the status of data acquisition. The data acquisition function supplies data to diagnosis modules and Diagnostic Data Historian. If the operation of any diagnosis module or Diagnostic Data Historian is unstable, you must check the status of data acquisition. When doing this, you can use Acquisition Navigator to detect and analyze communication errors and other system problems affecting data acquisition. You can also check the number of sampling items currently registered in the PRM database as well as when data will be acquired for these sampling items. In addition, Acquisition Navigator is also used to register, as a target of Diagnostic Data Historian, any data acquired from devices not managed in Device Master or from other systems. In the main window of Acquisition Navigator, you can display the status of data acquisition. Acquisition Navigator is for Yokogawa and other Vendor devices also. There are 3 tabs in the Acquisition Navigator window Other Systems Use the Other Systems tab when you want to chronologically save as Historian data any data acquired from devices not managed in PRMs Device Master or from other systems. Unlike other tabs, the Other Systems tab lets you configure, change and delete sampling items. You can configure up to 1,000 sampling items.

- 99 -

Historian This tab shows the sampling items specified in the acquisition configuration file. In the Historian tab, sampling items are displayed in the read-only mode. One sheet can show up to 3,000 sampling items, and a maximum of 10 sheets can be displayed. In other words, you can display up to 30,000 sampling items in the Historian tab. Diagnosis This tab shows the sampling items de.ned automatically through Device Diagnosis. In the Diagnosis tab, sampling items are displayed in the read-only mode. One sheet can show up to 3,000 sampling items, and a maximum of 10 sheets can be displayed. In other words, you can display up to 30,000 sampling items in the Diagnosis tab.

- 100 -

7.4 Diagnosis Navigator

Diagnosis Navigator is a main window for operating and displaying diagnosis-related items used in Device Diagnosis. It can be used to set up PAAs, control the running of diagnosis modules and display a diagnosis module list, and start diagnostic tools, among others. From the main window of Diagnosis Navigator, you can access dialog boxes where various settings can be performed.

In addition to the functions available in the above windows and dialog boxes, Diagnosis Navigator also lets you start, restart and delete diagnosis modules using menu items, and start diagnostic tools.

- 101 -

Exercise: Configure the PAA template (PRMUSER DIAG2099) for monitoring a parameter Procedure: 1. Open the Diagnosis Navigator.

2. Install the PAA required (PRMUSER DIAG2099 which will be given by the Instructor)

- 102 -

3. Configure the PAA template and enter the threshold limits.

- 103 -

- 104 -

- 105 -

- 106 -

- 107 -

4. You can add other parameters to the trend for which data acquisition is taking place

- 108 -

5. Whenever threshold value is crossed it generates a maintenance alarm.

- 109 -

- 110 -

Self Documentation

With the self document function, it is possible to print information concerning control modules based on the user settings. The self document function allows printing information of control modules based on user settings. The user can select the printing range and format. 8.1 Setting up of Self Documentation

The following settings can be performed when using the self document function to print out a document: Selection of equipment modules and control modules for which information should be printed Selection of information to be printed Editing header/footer Editing cover page Editing table of contents Select equipment modules and control modules whose information you want to print using the self document function. From the second time the self document function is used, it is possible to use the print target range set at the previous printing, which is saved for each user. Moreover, it is possible to print only the information of equipment modules and control modules that have been recorded within a specified time range. Equipment modules and control modules can be selected for printing targets in the [Device Selection] tab of the Self Document window. It is possible to select information to be printed for the equipment modules and control modules selected as printing targets. The information to be printed can be selected in the [Report Selection] tab of the Self Document window.

- 111 -

Plug in Applications

9.1 Valve Navi

ValveNavi is a Windows software tool that makes it easy to configure, calibrate, and operate Foundation fieldbus pneumatic control valve positioners YVP110 with internal process control and limit switches. It fully supports the Foundation fieldbus specifications.

ValveNavi uses an integrated valve interface, (IVI), to display all valve and positioner variables and to provide access to services, such as configuration and calibration tools. The information and controls for services are arranged in frames within IVI. From the IVI the user has single click access to the PID Controller interface. IVI displays and updates real time values for valve position, valve setpoint and actuator pressure numerically and graphically. Data objects are grouped in frames within the IVI display as described below.

- 112 -

- 113 -

10 Backup/Restore
10.1 PRM Simple Backup tool
The PRM database and the Historian database is backed up/restored using the PRM Simple Backup Tool. Backup When backing up the databases using the PRM Simple Backup Tool, the following two files in the (PRM installation folder)/TOOL folder are used. PRMBackup.bat: Backup command file PRMBackup.par: Backup parameter file Procedure 1. Confirm that SQL Server is running. 2. Check if the drive in which PRM is installed has enough free disk space. At least several hundred megabytes will be needed to back up the databases. By default, backup files will be

- 114 -

created in the PRM installation directory. If the PRM installation directory does not have enough free disk space, change the backup file path or log file path specified in the backup parameter file. 3. Run (PRM installation folder)ToolPRMBackup.bat. The backup program will run and backup files will be created in accordance with the specifications in the backup parameter file. Default settings in the backup parameter file are shown below.

Restore When restoring the databases using the PRM Simple Backup Tool, the following two files in the (PRM installation folder)/TOOL folder are used. PRMRestore.bat: Restore command file PRMRestore.par: Restore parameter file

- 115 -

Procedure 1. Log on to the OS as a user with the Administrator privilege. 2. Close PRM Client. 3. Confirm that backup files are saved to the path specified in the restore parameter file. 4. Run (PRM installation folder)ToolPRMRestore.bat. 5. Restart the PC. Default settings in the restore parameter file are shown below.

10.2 PRM System Backup script

The PRM System Backup Script (PRMSAVE.bat) provides a tool for saving/restoring the conditions of the PRM system. Use this tool when replacing the PC in which PRM is installed, or reinstalling the OS. The PRM system components to be saved/ restored are as follows. PRM database Historian database Parameter file of the PRM Simple Backup Tool

- 116 -

Device template files Master data export files Device Viewer configuration files Device path configuration files Files managed by PLUG-IN applications Files managed by advanced diagnostic applications An overview of steps to operate the PRM System Backup Script is shown below. 1. 2. Open (PRM installation folder)TOOLPRMSAVE.bat, and modify the customizable items in accordance with the installation condition of the PC where PRMSAVE.bat will be run. Run (PRM installation folder)TOOLPRMSAVE.bat. Among the customizable items, you will find the setting for specifying the output drive. A folder of the same name as the computer will be created directly below the specified drive, and backup files will be created in this folder. 3. 4. 5. 6. On the PC where the system is to be restored, create a folder configuration of the same structure as those effective when the system was backed up. On the PC where you restore the backed-up data, double-click Computer name.reg. Registry information will be restored. On that same PC, double-click the backed-up Computer name.exe. Other files will be restored. To restore the database, double-click PRMRestore.bat at (PRM installation folder)TOOL on the PC where the database is to be restored. The following table explains folders and files when PRMSAVE.bat is executed

- 117 -

EXERCISE: Backup the PRM database and restore the backup database as per the instructions shown above.

- 118 -

11 Database maintenance tool

The quantity increment of the messages stored in the PRM server and the diagnostic results stored in the diagnosis historian server may degrade the performance for displaying or searching the messages. Using the Database maintenance Tools we can optimize the PRM database and improve the performance. The package of Database Maintenance Tools consists of the tools for database archiving, retrieving and cleaning up as well as the tool of Tag Editor. Archive Retrieve Unretrieve Delete Archives the data in the PRM database into an archive file, and remove the Archived data from the PRM database. Retrieves the data from an archive .le to the PRM database. Undo previous retrieve so as to remove the retrieved data from the PRM database. Deletes the data from the PRM database instead of achieving the data.

Auto Archive/ Delete The Auto Archive Function helps to automatically Archive the Maintenance info. The engineers can Auto Archive the data reducing the load on the PRM, thereby improving the performance of the system. Maintenance engineer can either Auto Archive the Data or Auto delete the data.

Cleanup When devices are removed from the PRM database, the related data such as the operations

- 119 -

records regarding the devices will become obsolete, therefore, cleanup of the PRM database may be required. However, cleanup can only be performed on PRM database, not on Historian database. Tag Editor When devices are removed, the Tag Editor can be used to remove the obsolete data related to the deleted devices in the Historian database. The Tag Editor can only be used for editing the tags in the Historian database.
Exercise: Auto Archiving Function 1. Open the Database maintenance tool

2. Set the destination for the Archive files, set the periodic Archive and enable the Auto Data

processing. Select the Auto Archive Radio button and enter the retention period time.

- 120 -

Exercise: Archiving Manually 1. Open the Database maintenance tool

- 121 -

2. Set the destination for the Archive files in the window

3. Select a ready to archive file and Press the Archive button.

- 122 -

FIELDBUS ENGINEERING

o FIELDBUS OVERVIEW o FIELDBUS TECHNOLOGY OF YOKOGAWA o PRM OVERVIEW o PRM TECHNOLOGY o PRM INSTRUCTION MANUAL 01 o PRM INSTRUCTION MANUAL 02 o PRM INSTRUCTION MANUAL - 03

MFUN
No ratings yet
MFUN
22 pages
Fuchs-Terex MHL 320-0965-1141-5-14.08.12-2
100% (14)
Fuchs-Terex MHL 320-0965-1141-5-14.08.12-2
944 pages
Fundamentals of Instrumentation and More by NJATC PDF
100% (12)
Fundamentals of Instrumentation and More by NJATC PDF
195 pages
Control System Engineering Reference Manual
96% (28)
Control System Engineering Reference Manual
144 pages
Ipedex Instrumentation Training Modules PDF
67% (3)
Ipedex Instrumentation Training Modules PDF
921 pages
Maintenance of Instruments Systems
100% (4)
Maintenance of Instruments Systems
459 pages
KSRTC BUS TICKET
100% (3)
KSRTC BUS TICKET
2 pages
Fundamentals of Instrumentation and Measurement
94% (36)
Fundamentals of Instrumentation and Measurement
555 pages
Instrumentation and Control
100% (4)
Instrumentation and Control
261 pages
Chap 1a - Instrumentation and PID Diagram
100% (3)
Chap 1a - Instrumentation and PID Diagram
20 pages
Industrial Instrumentation
100% (6)
Industrial Instrumentation
74 pages
Instrumentation Overview
100% (3)
Instrumentation Overview
70 pages
Foundation Fieldbus, Fourth Edition
From Everand
Foundation Fieldbus, Fourth Edition
Ian Verhappen
5/5 (1)
Instrumentation & Process Control
100% (7)
Instrumentation & Process Control
27 pages
Baofeng Uv5r Chirp Programming Guide
100% (1)
Baofeng Uv5r Chirp Programming Guide
3 pages
New NDA Template-2018
0% (1)
New NDA Template-2018
8 pages
Instrumentation and Control
100% (9)
Instrumentation and Control
273 pages
Instrumentation and Valves PDF
100% (2)
Instrumentation and Valves PDF
132 pages
Instrumentation Course 1
100% (5)
Instrumentation Course 1
130 pages
Instrument & Control
No ratings yet
Instrument & Control
100 pages
Instrumentation
100% (5)
Instrumentation
49 pages
Control & Instrumentation-1
100% (12)
Control & Instrumentation-1
123 pages
Instrumentation Course
100% (5)
Instrumentation Course
116 pages
Instrumentation Positioner Presentation
100% (2)
Instrumentation Positioner Presentation
43 pages
Loop Checking Technicians Guide
90% (21)
Loop Checking Technicians Guide
151 pages
Field Instrumentation
100% (10)
Field Instrumentation
89 pages
Instrumentation and Process Control PDF
83% (6)
Instrumentation and Process Control PDF
161 pages
Basic Instrumentation & Process Control
100% (5)
Basic Instrumentation & Process Control
294 pages
Handbook On Process Instrumentation
88% (8)
Handbook On Process Instrumentation
21 pages
Basic Instrumentation: Instrument Unit
100% (1)
Basic Instrumentation: Instrument Unit
53 pages
Industrial Process Control For Operators
100% (11)
Industrial Process Control For Operators
294 pages
Instrument Control Technician
No ratings yet
Instrument Control Technician
133 pages
Instrumentation
100% (2)
Instrumentation
56 pages
Field Instruments Ebook
100% (2)
Field Instruments Ebook
294 pages
FG05W1 - Introduction To Process Control PDF
100% (1)
FG05W1 - Introduction To Process Control PDF
28 pages
I&c Fundamentals
100% (2)
I&c Fundamentals
232 pages
DCS Fundamentals
100% (8)
DCS Fundamentals
64 pages
Instrumentation
100% (4)
Instrumentation
83 pages
Instrumentation and Control Valves 1
100% (7)
Instrumentation and Control Valves 1
31 pages
Specifications For DCS, ESD and Instrumentation
100% (11)
Specifications For DCS, ESD and Instrumentation
219 pages
(Resources For Measurement and Control Series) Hughes, Thomas A - Programmable Controllers, Fourth Edition-IsA (2005)
No ratings yet
(Resources For Measurement and Control Series) Hughes, Thomas A - Programmable Controllers, Fourth Edition-IsA (2005)
384 pages
Instrumentation Presentation (23!12!2010)
100% (2)
Instrumentation Presentation (23!12!2010)
183 pages
Instrumentation Engineering Design
100% (4)
Instrumentation Engineering Design
9 pages
Instrumentation System Fundamentals
100% (11)
Instrumentation System Fundamentals
805 pages
Flow Measurement: Mark Murphy, PE Technical Director, Fluor Corp
100% (1)
Flow Measurement: Mark Murphy, PE Technical Director, Fluor Corp
62 pages
Presntation (Installing Instrumentation and Control Devices)
100% (2)
Presntation (Installing Instrumentation and Control Devices)
35 pages
PLC and Scada 1682332492 PDF
No ratings yet
PLC and Scada 1682332492 PDF
19 pages
Introduction Lec 03 & 04
No ratings yet
Introduction Lec 03 & 04
49 pages
What Is Measurement and Control?: Ntroduction
No ratings yet
What Is Measurement and Control?: Ntroduction
10 pages
Instrumentation: Figure 3: A Display Showing How Measurements Have Changed Over Time
No ratings yet
Instrumentation: Figure 3: A Display Showing How Measurements Have Changed Over Time
3 pages
Instrumentation Design and Control
No ratings yet
Instrumentation Design and Control
10 pages
Instrumentation and Control Systems
No ratings yet
Instrumentation and Control Systems
30 pages
SMR1302
No ratings yet
SMR1302
286 pages
Basic of Instrumentaion (181534)
No ratings yet
Basic of Instrumentaion (181534)
81 pages
Process Control & Automation Notes
No ratings yet
Process Control & Automation Notes
46 pages
PCM 219 Process Control and Instrumentation
No ratings yet
PCM 219 Process Control and Instrumentation
122 pages
Lecture 1 Precision Engineering
No ratings yet
Lecture 1 Precision Engineering
23 pages
Presentation - Instrumentation
No ratings yet
Presentation - Instrumentation
57 pages
Introduction To Instrumentation PDF
No ratings yet
Introduction To Instrumentation PDF
34 pages
CLB 21303 Process Instrumentation and Control
No ratings yet
CLB 21303 Process Instrumentation and Control
48 pages
Book of Sir Naveed Ramzan
100% (1)
Book of Sir Naveed Ramzan
175 pages
Intru Mentation
No ratings yet
Intru Mentation
180 pages
Intrumentastion and Control For HND I
No ratings yet
Intrumentastion and Control For HND I
43 pages
Handout Part 2b Lecture 10 to 14
No ratings yet
Handout Part 2b Lecture 10 to 14
39 pages
Module-I
No ratings yet
Module-I
48 pages
Basics of Cavitation in Pumps
No ratings yet
Basics of Cavitation in Pumps
23 pages
B40 6
100% (1)
B40 6
18 pages
Ballvalve Isa
No ratings yet
Ballvalve Isa
1 page
Epc Introduction
100% (1)
Epc Introduction
28 pages
B40 1
100% (1)
B40 1
41 pages
Ultra Sonic Flow Meter
No ratings yet
Ultra Sonic Flow Meter
5 pages
Catalogue
No ratings yet
Catalogue
38 pages
Weld Flange To Pipe
No ratings yet
Weld Flange To Pipe
1 page
Approved List of Vendors
No ratings yet
Approved List of Vendors
35 pages
NEMA Ratings PDF
No ratings yet
NEMA Ratings PDF
2 pages
Intools Users Manual
No ratings yet
Intools Users Manual
75 pages
Call Centre
No ratings yet
Call Centre
5 pages
Sola Transformer Selection
No ratings yet
Sola Transformer Selection
6 pages
Depreciation: Part - A: Theory Section
0% (1)
Depreciation: Part - A: Theory Section
19 pages
Valves
No ratings yet
Valves
456 pages
OCNHS Research Proposal Format
No ratings yet
OCNHS Research Proposal Format
18 pages
Sailor 6300 MF/HF: More Than GMDSS New Connections
No ratings yet
Sailor 6300 MF/HF: More Than GMDSS New Connections
4 pages
Muslim Henna Party - Google Search
No ratings yet
Muslim Henna Party - Google Search
1 page
Trading List PDF
No ratings yet
Trading List PDF
113 pages
Initiating Coverage - Unichem Labs
No ratings yet
Initiating Coverage - Unichem Labs
12 pages
Panduit Contractor Catalog
No ratings yet
Panduit Contractor Catalog
231 pages
Employee Satisfaction
100% (3)
Employee Satisfaction
106 pages
Distributed and Cloud Computing 1st Edition Hwang Solutions Manual 2024 scribd download full chapters
100% (3)
Distributed and Cloud Computing 1st Edition Hwang Solutions Manual 2024 scribd download full chapters
60 pages
LBS312XX GSM GPRS Remote Controller User Manual PDF
100% (1)
LBS312XX GSM GPRS Remote Controller User Manual PDF
55 pages
Modo Servicio Bizhub C250 y C252
No ratings yet
Modo Servicio Bizhub C250 y C252
5 pages
Quotation
No ratings yet
Quotation
2 pages
Astm b117 1973 PDF
No ratings yet
Astm b117 1973 PDF
10 pages
Household Water Quality Water Hardness
No ratings yet
Household Water Quality Water Hardness
4 pages
Team RVE Merger Analysis Final
No ratings yet
Team RVE Merger Analysis Final
21 pages
[FREE PDF sample] (Ebook) Medical Student Survival Skills: History Taking and Communication Skills by Philip Jevon; Manoj Samaranayake; Steve Odogwu ISBN 9781118862681, 1118862686 ebooks
100% (10)
[FREE PDF sample] (Ebook) Medical Student Survival Skills: History Taking and Communication Skills by Philip Jevon; Manoj Samaranayake; Steve Odogwu ISBN 9781118862681, 1118862686 ebooks
65 pages
UNIT 2 PPT 2
No ratings yet
UNIT 2 PPT 2
21 pages
Section 291 Recapture: Taxes: T NSA T Onsinp Operty
No ratings yet
Section 291 Recapture: Taxes: T NSA T Onsinp Operty
1 page
Gaming Earbuds - E65
No ratings yet
Gaming Earbuds - E65
1 page
Sapphire HD 7770 GHZ Edition Specs - TechPowerUp GPU Database
No ratings yet
Sapphire HD 7770 GHZ Edition Specs - TechPowerUp GPU Database
4 pages
Exponential Growth and Decay Word Problems
No ratings yet
Exponential Growth and Decay Word Problems
2 pages
IB Biology Topic 5.1 Evidence For Evolution Flashcards - Quizlet
No ratings yet
IB Biology Topic 5.1 Evidence For Evolution Flashcards - Quizlet
6 pages
The Partnership For Market Readiness: Shaping The Next Generation of Carbon Markets
No ratings yet
The Partnership For Market Readiness: Shaping The Next Generation of Carbon Markets
4 pages
MarcoCerri FloodsimulationusingHEC-RASmodel
No ratings yet
MarcoCerri FloodsimulationusingHEC-RASmodel
72 pages